---
title: "Long Discourses · Dīgha Nikāya"
author: "The Buddha"
translator: "Bhikkhu Sujato"
languages: [pi, en]
shelf: "Pali Canon"
url: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/
cite: "The Buddha, tr. Bhikkhu Sujato, Long Discourses · Dīgha Nikāya. Scriptura (scriptura.si), https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/"
---
# Long Discourses · Dīgha Nikāya
*The Buddha, tr. Bhikkhu Sujato*
The thirty-four long discourses of the Buddha: the Divine Net of views, the fruits of the ascetic life, the Great Discourse on Mindfulness, and the last days and passing of the Buddha.
> Pali: the Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka (Buddha Jayanti edition, 2500), from SuttaCentral’s bilara-data, dedicated to the public domain (CC0).
> English: Bhikkhu Sujato, from SuttaCentral’s bilara-data, dedicated to the public domain (CC0). Notes are not included.
> Rows follow the segment numbers the two texts share, gathered into paragraphs; verse keeps its lines.
## Contents
1. [DN 1 · The Divine Net · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/1.md)
2. [DN 1 · The Divine Net · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/2.md)
3. [DN 1 · The Divine Net · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/3.md)
4. [DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/4.md)
5. [DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/5.md)
6. [DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/6.md)
7. [DN 3 · With Ambaṭṭha · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/7.md)
8. [DN 3 · With Ambaṭṭha · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/8.md)
9. [DN 4 · With Soṇadaṇḍa · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/9.md)
10. [DN 4 · With Soṇadaṇḍa · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/10.md)
11. [DN 5 · With Kūṭadanta · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/11.md)
12. [DN 5 · With Kūṭadanta · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/12.md)
13. [DN 6 · With Mahāli](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/13.md)
14. [DN 7 · With Jāliya](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/14.md)
15. [DN 8 · The Lion’s Roar to the Naked Ascetic Kassapa](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/15.md)
16. [DN 9 · With Poṭṭhapāda · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/16.md)
17. [DN 9 · With Poṭṭhapāda · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/17.md)
18. [DN 10 · With Subha · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/18.md)
19. [DN 10 · With Subha · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/19.md)
20. [DN 11 · With Kevaḍḍha](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/20.md)
21. [DN 12 · With Lohicca](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/21.md)
22. [DN 13 · Experts in the Three Vedas](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/22.md)
23. [DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/23.md)
24. [DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/24.md)
25. [DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/25.md)
26. [DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 4](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/26.md)
27. [DN 15 · The Great Discourse on Causation](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/27.md)
28. [DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/28.md)
29. [DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/29.md)
30. [DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/30.md)
31. [DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 4](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/31.md)
32. [DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 5](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/32.md)
33. [DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 6](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/33.md)
34. [DN 17 · King Mahāsudassana · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/34.md)
35. [DN 17 · King Mahāsudassana · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/35.md)
36. [DN 18 · With Janavasabha · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/36.md)
37. [DN 18 · With Janavasabha · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/37.md)
38. [DN 19 · The Great Steward · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/38.md)
39. [DN 19 · The Great Steward · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/39.md)
40. [DN 20 · The Great Congregation](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/40.md)
41. [DN 21 · Sakka’s Questions · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/41.md)
42. [DN 21 · Sakka’s Questions · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/42.md)
43. [DN 22 · The Longer Discourse on Mindfulness Meditation · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/43.md)
44. [DN 22 · The Longer Discourse on Mindfulness Meditation · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/44.md)
45. [DN 23 · With Pāyāsi · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/45.md)
46. [DN 23 · With Pāyāsi · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/46.md)
47. [DN 23 · With Pāyāsi · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/47.md)
48. [DN 24 · About Pāṭikaputta · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/48.md)
49. [DN 24 · About Pāṭikaputta · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/49.md)
50. [DN 25 · The Lion’s Roar at the Monastery of Lady Udumbarikā · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/50.md)
51. [DN 25 · The Lion’s Roar at the Monastery of Lady Udumbarikā · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/51.md)
52. [DN 26 · The Wheel-Turning Monarch · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/52.md)
53. [DN 26 · The Wheel-Turning Monarch · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/53.md)
54. [DN 27 · What Came First · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/54.md)
55. [DN 27 · What Came First · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/55.md)
56. [DN 28 · Inspiring Confidence · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/56.md)
57. [DN 28 · Inspiring Confidence · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/57.md)
58. [DN 29 · An Impressive Discourse · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/58.md)
59. [DN 29 · An Impressive Discourse · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/59.md)
60. [DN 30 · The Marks of a Great Man · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/60.md)
61. [DN 30 · The Marks of a Great Man · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/61.md)
62. [DN 31 · Advice to Sigālaka](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/62.md)
63. [DN 32 · The Āṭānāṭiya Protection](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/63.md)
64. [DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/64.md)
65. [DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/65.md)
66. [DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/66.md)
67. [DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 4](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/67.md)
68. [DN 34 · Up to Ten · part 1](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/68.md)
69. [DN 34 · Up to Ten · part 2](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/69.md)
70. [DN 34 · Up to Ten · part 3](https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/70.md)
## 1. DN 1 · The Divine Net · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/1/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/1/#p-N
[¶0] DN 1 · The Divine Net
> Pali: DN 1 · Brahmajālasutta
[¶1] 1. Talk on Wanderers
> Pali: 1. Paribbājakakathā
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was traveling along the road between Rājagaha and Nāḷandā together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants. The wanderer Suppiya was also traveling along the same road, together with his resident pupil, the student Brahmadatta. Meanwhile, Suppiya criticized the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in many ways, but his pupil Brahmadatta praised them in many ways. And so both tutor and pupil followed behind the Buddha and the Saṅgha of mendicants directly contradicting each other.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā antarā ca rājagahaṁ antarā ca nāḷandaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Suppiyopi kho paribbājako antarā ca rājagahaṁ antarā ca nāḷandaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti saddhiṁ antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavena. Tatra sudaṁ suppiyo paribbājako anekapariyāyena buddhassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati; suppiyassa pana paribbājakassa antevāsī brahmadatto māṇavo anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati. Itiha te ubho ācariyantevāsī aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañca.
[¶3] Then the Buddha took up residence for the night in the royal rest-house in Ambalaṭṭhikā together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. And Suppiya and Brahmadatta did likewise. There too, Suppiya criticized the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in many ways, but his pupil Brahmadatta praised them in many ways. And so both tutor and pupil kept on directly contradicting each other.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ rājāgārake ekarattivāsaṁ upagacchi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena. Suppiyopi kho paribbājako ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ rājāgārake ekarattivāsaṁ upagacchi antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavena. Tatrapi sudaṁ suppiyo paribbājako anekapariyāyena buddhassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati; suppiyassa pana paribbājakassa antevāsī brahmadatto māṇavo anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati. Itiha te ubho ācariyantevāsī aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā viharanti.
[¶4] Then several mendicants rose at the crack of dawn and sat together in the pavilion, where the topic of judgmentalism came up:
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhitānaṁ maṇḍalamāḷe sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayaṁ saṅkhiyadhammo udapādi:
[¶5] “It’s incredible, reverends, it’s amazing how the diverse convictions of sentient beings have been well deciphered by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. For this Suppiya criticizes the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha in many ways, while his pupil Brahmadatta praises them in many ways. And so both tutor and pupil followed behind the Buddha and the Saṅgha of mendicants directly contradicting each other.”
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso, yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sattānaṁ nānādhimuttikatā suppaṭividitā. Ayañhi suppiyo paribbājako anekapariyāyena buddhassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati; suppiyassa pana paribbājakassa antevāsī brahmadatto māṇavo anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati. Itihame ubho ācariyantevāsī aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañcā”ti.
[¶6] When the Buddha found out about this discussion on judgmentalism among the mendicants, he went to the pavilion, where he sat on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ imaṁ saṅkhiyadhammaṁ viditvā yena maṇḍalamāḷo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā sannipatitā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶7] The mendicants told him what had happened, adding, “This was our conversation that was unfinished when the Buddha arrived.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idha, bhante, amhākaṁ rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhitānaṁ maṇḍalamāḷe sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ ayaṁ saṅkhiyadhammo udapādi: ‘acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso, yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sattānaṁ nānādhimuttikatā suppaṭividitā. Ayañhi suppiyo paribbājako anekapariyāyena buddhassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati; suppiyassa pana paribbājakassa antevāsī brahmadatto māṇavo anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati. Itihame ubho ācariyantevāsī aññamaññassa ujuvipaccanīkavādā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañcā’ti. Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā, atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶8] “Mendicants, if others criticize me, the teaching, or the Saṅgha, don’t make yourselves resentful, bitter, and exasperated. You’ll get angry and upset, which would be an obstacle for you alone. If others were to criticize me, the teaching, or the Saṅgha, and you got angry and upset, would you be able to understand whether they spoke well or poorly?”
> Pali: “Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra tumhehi na āghāto na appaccayo na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā. Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā vā anattamanā vā, tumhaṁ yevassa tena antarāyo. Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā vā anattamanā vā, api nu tumhe paresaṁ subhāsitaṁ dubbhāsitaṁ ājāneyyāthā”ti?
[¶9] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶10] “If others criticize me, the teaching, or the Saṅgha, you should explain that what is untrue is in fact untrue: ‘This is why that’s untrue, this is why that’s false. There’s no such thing in us, it’s not found among us.’
> Pali: “Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra tumhehi abhūtaṁ abhūtato nibbeṭhetabbaṁ: ‘itipetaṁ abhūtaṁ, itipetaṁ atacchaṁ, natthi cetaṁ amhesu, na ca panetaṁ amhesu saṁvijjatī’ti.
[¶11] If others praise me, the teaching, or the Saṅgha, don’t make yourselves thrilled, elated, and excited. You’ll get thrilled, elated, and excited, which would be an obstacle for you alone. If others praise me, the teaching, or the Saṅgha, you should admit that what is true is in fact true: ‘This is why that’s true, this is why that’s correct. There is such a thing in us, it is found among us.’
> Pali: Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra tumhehi na ānando na somanassaṁ na cetaso uppilāvitattaṁ karaṇīyaṁ. Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra ce tumhe assatha ānandino sumanā uppilāvitā tumhaṁ yevassa tena antarāyo. Mamaṁ vā, bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, dhammassa vā vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, saṅghassa vā vaṇṇaṁ bhāseyyuṁ, tatra tumhehi bhūtaṁ bhūtato paṭijānitabbaṁ: ‘itipetaṁ bhūtaṁ, itipetaṁ tacchaṁ, atthi cetaṁ amhesu, saṁvijjati ca panetaṁ amhesū’ti.
[¶12] 2. Ethics
> Pali: 2. Sīla
[¶13] 2.1. The Shorter Section on Ethics
> Pali: 2.1. Cūḷasīla
[¶14] When an ordinary person speaks praise of the Realized One, they speak only of trivial, trifling details of mere ethics. And what are the trivial, trifling details of mere ethics that an ordinary person speaks of?
> Pali: Appamattakaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, oramattakaṁ sīlamattakaṁ, yena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya. Katamañca taṁ, bhikkhave, appamattakaṁ oramattakaṁ sīlamattakaṁ, yena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya?
[¶15] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up killing living creatures. He has renounced the rod and the sword. He’s scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo nihitadaṇḍo, nihitasattho, lajjī, dayāpanno, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharatī’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶16] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up stealing. He takes only what’s given, and expects only what’s given. He keeps himself clean by not thieving.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharatī’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶17] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up unchastity. He is chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī samaṇo gotamo ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶18] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up lying. He speaks the truth and sticks to the truth. He’s honest and dependable, and doesn’t trick the world with his words.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassā’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶19] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up backbiting. He doesn’t repeat in one place what he heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, he reconciles those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo, ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶20] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up harsh speech. He speaks in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo, yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶21] ‘The ascetic Gotama has given up talking nonsense. His words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. He says things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitan’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶22] ‘The ascetic Gotama refrains from injuring plants and seeds.’
> Pali: ‘Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave …pe….
[¶23] ‘He eats in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time.’
> Pali: ‘Ekabhattiko samaṇo gotamo rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā ….
[¶24] ‘He refrains from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music.’
> Pali: Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo ….
[¶25] ‘He refrains from attiring and adorning himself with garlands, fragrance, and makeup.’
> Pali: Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo ….
[¶26] ‘He refrains from high and luxurious beds.’
> Pali: Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo ….
[¶27] ‘He refrains from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land.’
> Pali: Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo ….
[¶28] ‘He refrains from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Kayavikkayā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo …. Chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶29] The shorter section on ethics is complete.
> Pali: Cūḷasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶30] 2.2. The Middle Section on Ethics
> Pali: 2.2. Majjhimasīla
[¶31] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in injuring plants and seeds. These include plants propagated from roots, trunks, cuttings, or joints; and those from regular seeds as the fifth. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such injury to plants and seeds.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—mūlabījaṁ khandhabījaṁ phaḷubījaṁ aggabījaṁ bījabījameva pañcamaṁ; iti evarūpā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶32] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in storing up goods for their own use. This includes such things as food, drink, clothes, vehicles, bedding, fragrance, and things of the flesh. The ascetic Gotama refrains from storing up such goods.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ sannidhikāraparibhogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—annasannidhiṁ pānasannidhiṁ vatthasannidhiṁ yānasannidhiṁ sayanasannidhiṁ gandhasannidhiṁ āmisasannidhiṁ iti vā iti evarūpā sannidhikāraparibhogā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶33] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in seeing shows. This includes such things as dancing, singing, music, performances, and storytelling; clapping, gongs, and kettledrums; beauty pageants; pole-acrobatics and bone-washing displays of the corpse-workers; battles of elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, goats, rams, chickens, and quails; staff-fights, boxing, and wrestling; combat, roll calls of the armed forces, battle-formations, and regimental reviews. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such shows.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ visūkadassanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—naccaṁ gītaṁ vāditaṁ pekkhaṁ akkhānaṁ pāṇissaraṁ vetāḷaṁ kumbhathūṇaṁ sobhanakaṁ caṇḍālaṁ vaṁsaṁ dhovanaṁ hatthiyuddhaṁ assayuddhaṁ mahiṁsayuddhaṁ usabhayuddhaṁ ajayuddhaṁ meṇḍayuddhaṁ kukkuṭayuddhaṁ vaṭṭakayuddhaṁ daṇḍayuddhaṁ muṭṭhiyuddhaṁ nibbuddhaṁ uyyodhikaṁ balaggaṁ senābyūhaṁ anīkadassanaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶34] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in gambling that causes negligence. This includes such things as checkers with eight or ten rows, checkers in the air, hopscotch, spillikins, board-games, tip-cat, drawing straws, dice, leaf-flutes, toy plows, somersaults, pinwheels, toy measures, toy carts, toy bows, guessing words from syllables, guessing another’s thoughts, and imitating musical instruments. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such gambling.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhapadaṁ dasapadaṁ ākāsaṁ parihārapathaṁ santikaṁ khalikaṁ ghaṭikaṁ salākahatthaṁ akkhaṁ paṅgacīraṁ vaṅkakaṁ mokkhacikaṁ ciṅgulikaṁ pattāḷhakaṁ rathakaṁ dhanukaṁ akkharikaṁ manesikaṁ yathāvajjaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶35] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still make use of high and luxurious bedding. This includes such things as sofas, couches, woolen covers—shag-piled, colorful, white, embroidered with flowers, quilted, embroidered with animals, double or single fringed—and silk covers studded with gems, as well as silken sheets, woollen carpets, rugs for elephants, horses, or chariots, black antelope hides and woven rugs, and spreads of fine deer hide, with a canopy above and red cushions at both ends. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such bedding.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ uccāsayanamahāsayanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—āsandiṁ pallaṅkaṁ gonakaṁ cittakaṁ paṭikaṁ paṭalikaṁ tūlikaṁ vikatikaṁ uddalomiṁ ekantalomiṁ kaṭṭissaṁ koseyyaṁ kuttakaṁ hatthattharaṁ assattharaṁ rathattharaṁ ajinappaveṇiṁ kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇaṁ sauttaracchadaṁ ubhatolohitakūpadhānaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶36] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. This includes such things as applying beauty products by anointing, massaging, bathing, and rubbing; mirrors, ointments, garlands, fragrances, and makeup; face-powder, foundation, bracelets, headbands, fancy walking-sticks or containers, rapiers, parasols, fancy sandals, turbans, jewelry, chowries, and long-fringed white robes. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such beautification and adornment.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ— ucchādanaṁ parimaddanaṁ nhāpanaṁ sambāhanaṁ ādāsaṁ añjanaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ mukhacuṇṇaṁ mukhalepanaṁ hatthabandhaṁ sikhābandhaṁ daṇḍaṁ nāḷikaṁ asiṁ chattaṁ citrupāhanaṁ uṇhīsaṁ maṇiṁ vālabījaniṁ odātāni vatthāni dīghadasāni iti vā iti evarūpā maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶37] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in low talk. This includes such topics as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low talk.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānakathāya paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶38] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in arguments. They say such things as: “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!” The ascetic Gotama refrains from such argumentative talk.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ viggāhikakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi, micchā paṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammā paṭipanno, sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te, purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca, adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti iti vā iti evarūpāya viggāhikakathāya paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶39] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in running errands and messages. This includes running errands for rulers, ministers, aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or princes who say: “Go here, go there. Take this, bring that from there.” The ascetic Gotama refrains from such errands.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti, seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ, rājamahāmattānaṁ, khattiyānaṁ, brāhmaṇānaṁ, gahapatikānaṁ, kumārānaṁ “idha gaccha, amutrāgaccha, idaṁ hara, amutra idaṁ āharā”ti iti vā iti evarūpā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶40] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in deceit, flattery, hinting, and belittling, and using material things to chase after other material things. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such fawning and flattery.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te kuhakā ca honti, lapakā ca nemittikā ca nippesikā ca, lābhena lābhaṁ nijigīsitāro ca iti evarūpā kuhanalapanā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶41] The middle section on ethics is complete.
> Pali: Majjhimasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶42] 2.3. The Large Section on Ethics
> Pali: 2.3. Mahāsīla
[¶43] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes such fields as augury, omenology, divining portents, interpreting dreams, divining features of men and women, divining holes in cloth gnawed by mice, fire offerings, ladle offerings, offerings of husks, rice powder, rice, ghee, or oil; offerings from the mouth, blood sacrifices, limb-reading; geomancy for building sites, fields, and cemeteries; exorcisms, earth magic, snake charming, poisons; the lore of the scorpion, the rat, the bird, and the crow; prophesying lifespan, chanting for protection, and divining omens from wild animals. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṅgaṁ nimittaṁ uppātaṁ supinaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ mūsikacchinnaṁ aggihomaṁ dabbihomaṁ thusahomaṁ kaṇahomaṁ taṇḍulahomaṁ sappihomaṁ telahomaṁ mukhahomaṁ lohitahomaṁ aṅgavijjā vatthuvijjā khattavijjā sivavijjā bhūtavijjā bhūrivijjā ahivijjā visavijjā vicchikavijjā mūsikavijjā sakuṇavijjā vāyasavijjā pakkajjhānaṁ saraparittāṇaṁ migacakkaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶44] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes reading the marks of gems, cloth, clubs, swords, spears, arrows, bows, weapons, women, men, boys, girls, male and female bondservants, elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, cows, goats, rams, chickens, quails, monitor lizards, rabbits, tortoises, or deer. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—maṇilakkhaṇaṁ vatthalakkhaṇaṁ daṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ satthalakkhaṇaṁ asilakkhaṇaṁ usulakkhaṇaṁ dhanulakkhaṇaṁ āvudhalakkhaṇaṁ itthilakkhaṇaṁ purisalakkhaṇaṁ kumāralakkhaṇaṁ kumārilakkhaṇaṁ dāsalakkhaṇaṁ dāsilakkhaṇaṁ hatthilakkhaṇaṁ assalakkhaṇaṁ mahiṁsalakkhaṇaṁ usabhalakkhaṇaṁ golakkhaṇaṁ ajalakkhaṇaṁ meṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ kukkuṭalakkhaṇaṁ vaṭṭakalakkhaṇaṁ godhālakkhaṇaṁ kaṇṇikālakkhaṇaṁ kacchapalakkhaṇaṁ migalakkhaṇaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶45] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes making predictions that the king will march forth or march back; or that our king will attack and the enemy king will retreat, or vice versa; or that our king will triumph and the enemy king will be defeated, or vice versa; and so there will be victory for one and defeat for the other. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ niyyānaṁ bhavissati, raññaṁ aniyyānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, iti imassa jayo bhavissati, imassa parājayo bhavissati iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶46] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes making predictions that there will be an eclipse of the moon, or sun, or stars; that the sun, moon, and stars will be in conjunction or in opposition; that there will be a meteor shower, a fiery horizon, an earthquake, or thunder in the heavens; that there will be a rising, a setting, a darkening, a brightening of the moon, sun, and stars. And it also includes making predictions about the results of all such phenomena. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—candaggāho bhavissati, sūriyaggāho bhavissati, nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, ukkāpāto bhavissati, disāḍāho bhavissati, bhūmicālo bhavissati, devadudrabhi bhavissati, candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko candaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko sūriyaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko ukkāpāto bhavissati, evaṁvipāko disāḍāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko bhūmicālo bhavissati, evaṁvipāko devadudrabhi bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶47] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes predicting whether there will be plenty of rain or drought; plenty to eat or famine; an abundant harvest or a bad harvest; security or peril; sickness or health. It also includes such occupations as arithmetic, accounting, calculating, poetry, and cosmology. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—suvuṭṭhikā bhavissati, dubbuṭṭhikā bhavissati, subhikkhaṁ bhavissati, dubbhikkhaṁ bhavissati, khemaṁ bhavissati, bhayaṁ bhavissati, rogo bhavissati, ārogyaṁ bhavissati, muddā, gaṇanā, saṅkhānaṁ, kāveyyaṁ, lokāyataṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶48] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes making arrangements for giving and taking in marriage; for engagement and divorce; and for scattering rice inwards or outwards at the wedding ceremony. It also includes casting spells for good or bad luck, treating impacted fetuses, binding the tongue, or locking the jaws; charms for the hands and ears; questioning a mirror, a girl, or a god as an oracle; worshiping the sun, worshiping the Great One, breathing fire, and invoking Siri, the goddess of luck. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—āvāhanaṁ vivāhanaṁ saṁvaraṇaṁ vivaraṇaṁ saṅkiraṇaṁ vikiraṇaṁ subhagakaraṇaṁ dubbhagakaraṇaṁ viruddhagabbhakaraṇaṁ jivhānibandhanaṁ hanusaṁhananaṁ hatthābhijappanaṁ hanujappanaṁ kaṇṇajappanaṁ ādāsapañhaṁ kumārikapañhaṁ devapañhaṁ ādiccupaṭṭhānaṁ mahatupaṭṭhānaṁ abbhujjalanaṁ sirivhāyanaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶49] ‘There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes rites for propitiation, for granting wishes, for ghosts, for the earth, for rain, for property settlement, and for preparing and consecrating house sites, and rites involving sipping water and bathing, and oblations. It also includes administering emetics, purgatives, expectorants, and phlegmagogues; administering ear-oils, eye restoratives, nasal medicine, ointments, and counter-ointments; surgery with needle and scalpel, treating children, prescribing root medicines, and herbal bandages. The ascetic Gotama refrains from such low lore, such wrong livelihood.’ Such is an ordinary person’s praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: ‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ bhūtakammaṁ bhūrikammaṁ vassakammaṁ vossakammaṁ vatthukammaṁ vatthuparikammaṁ ācamanaṁ nhāpanaṁ juhanaṁ vamanaṁ virecanaṁ uddhaṁvirecanaṁ adhovirecanaṁ sīsavirecanaṁ kaṇṇatelaṁ nettatappanaṁ natthukammaṁ añjanaṁ paccañjanaṁ sālākiyaṁ sallakattiyaṁ dārakatikicchā mūlabhesajjānaṁ anuppadānaṁ osadhīnaṁ paṭimokkho iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamo’ti— iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶50] These are the trivial, trifling details of mere ethics that an ordinary person speaks of when they speak praise of the Realized One.
> Pali: Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, appamattakaṁ oramattakaṁ sīlamattakaṁ, yena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṁ vadamāno vadeyya.
[¶51] The longer section on ethics is complete.
> Pali: Mahāsīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶52] 3. Views
> Pali: 3. Diṭṭhi
[¶53] 3.1. Theories About the First Beginning
> Pali: 3.1. Pubbantakappika
[¶54] There are other principles—deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute—which the Realized One makes known after realizing them with his own insight. Those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things. And what are these principles?
> Pali: Atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ. Katame ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ?
[¶55] There are some ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning, and propose various hypotheses concerning the first beginning on eighteen grounds. And what are the eighteen grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino, pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi?
[¶56] 3.1.1. Eternalism
> Pali: 3.1.1. Sassatavāda
[¶57] There are some ascetics and brahmins who are eternalists, who assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal on four grounds. And what are the four grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā, sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi?
[¶58] It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect their many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte (…) anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekānipi jātisatāni anekānipi jātisahassāni anekānipi jātisatasahassāni: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶59] They say: ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise. Why is that? Because by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind I experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that I recollect my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito; te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisamaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusāmi, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekānipi jātisatāni anekānipi jātisahassāni anekānipi jātisatasahassāni: “amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno”ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶60] Because of this I know:
> Pali: Imināmahaṁ etaṁ jānāmi:
[¶61] “The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.”’ This is the first ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal.
> Pali: “yathā sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito; te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman”’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶62] And what is the second ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect their many kinds of past lives. That is: one eon of the cosmos contracting and expanding; two, three, four, five, or ten eons of the cosmos contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Dutiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭaṁ dvepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni tīṇipi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni cattāripi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni pañcapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni dasapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶63] They say: ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise. Why is that? Because by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind I experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that I recollect my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito; te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisamaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusāmi yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭaṁ dvepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni tīṇipi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni cattāripi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni pañcapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni dasapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni: “amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno”ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
[¶64] Because of this I know:
> Pali: Imināmahaṁ etaṁ jānāmi:
[¶65] “The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.”’ This is the second ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal.
> Pali: “yathā sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito, te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman”’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶66] And what is the third ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect their many kinds of past lives. That is: ten eons of the cosmos contracting and expanding; twenty, thirty, or forty eons of the cosmos contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: Tatiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—dasapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni vīsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni tiṁsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni cattālīsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶67] They say: ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise. Why is that? Because by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind I experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that I recollect my many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito; te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisamaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusāmi, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi. Seyyathidaṁ—dasapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni vīsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni tiṁsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni cattālīsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni: “amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno”ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarāmi.
## 2. DN 1 · The Divine Net · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/2/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/2/#p-N
[¶0] Because of this I know:
> Pali: Imināmahaṁ etaṁ jānāmi:
[¶1] “The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.”’ This is the third ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal.
> Pali: “yathā sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito, te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman”’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶2] And what is the fourth ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin relies on logic and inquiry. They speak of what they have worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing their own perspective: ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.’ This is the fourth ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal.
> Pali: Catutthe ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā takkī hoti vīmaṁsī, so takkapariyāhataṁ vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayaṁ paṭibhānaṁ evamāha: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito; te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, catutthaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶3] These are the four grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal do so on one or other of these four grounds. Outside of this there is none.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva catūhi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena; natthi ito bahiddhā.
[¶4] The Realized One understands this: ‘If you hold on to and attach to these grounds for views it leads to such a destiny in the next life.’ He understands this, and what goes beyond this. And since he does not misapprehend that understanding, he has realized quenching within himself. Having truly understood the origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape from feelings, the Realized One is freed by not grasping.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānāti: ‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṅgahitā evaṁparāmaṭṭhā evaṅgatikā bhavanti evaṁabhisamparāyā’ti, tañca tathāgato pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāti; tañca pajānanaṁ na parāmasati, aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Vedanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato.
[¶5] These are the principles—deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute—which the Realized One makes known after realizing them with his own insight. And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶6] The first recitation section.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro.
[¶7] 3.1.2. Partial Eternalism
> Pali: 3.1.2. Ekaccasassatavāda
[¶8] There are some ascetics and brahmins who are partial eternalists, who assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal and partially not eternal on four grounds. And what are the four grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi?
[¶9] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, this cosmos contracts. As the cosmos contracts, sentient beings are mostly headed for the realm of sublime luminosity. There they are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, bhikkhave, samayo, yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena ayaṁ loko saṁvaṭṭati. Saṁvaṭṭamāne loke yebhuyyena sattā ābhassarasaṁvattanikā honti. Te tattha honti manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino, ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti.
[¶10] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, this cosmos expands. As it expands an empty mansion of divinity appears. Then a certain sentient being—due to the running out of their life-span or merit—passes away from that host of luminous deities and is reborn in that empty mansion of divinity. There they are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, bhikkhave, samayo, yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena ayaṁ loko vivaṭṭati. Vivaṭṭamāne loke suññaṁ brahmavimānaṁ pātubhavati. Atha kho aññataro satto āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā ābhassarakāyā cavitvā suññaṁ brahmavimānaṁ upapajjati. So tattha hoti manomayo pītibhakkho sayampabho antalikkhacaro subhaṭṭhāyī, ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhati.
[¶11] But after staying there all alone for a long time, they become dissatisfied and anxious: ‘Oh, if only other beings would come to this place.’ Then other sentient beings—due to the running out of their life-span or merit—pass away from that host of luminous deities and are reborn in that mansion of divinity in company with that being. There they too are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Tassa tattha ekakassa dīgharattaṁ nivusitattā anabhirati paritassanā uppajjati: ‘aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṁ āgaccheyyun’ti. Atha aññepi sattā āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā ābhassarakāyā cavitvā brahmavimānaṁ upapajjanti tassa sattassa sahabyataṁ. Tepi tattha honti manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino, ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti.
[¶12] Now, the being who was reborn there first thinks: ‘I am the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. These beings were created by me! Why is that? Because first I thought:
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yo so satto paṭhamaṁ upapanno tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahamasmi brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ. Mayā ime sattā nimmitā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mamañhi pubbe etadahosi:
[¶13] “Oh, if only other beings would come to this place.” Such was my heart’s wish, and then these creatures came to this place.’
> Pali: “aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṁ āgaccheyyun”ti. Iti mama ca manopaṇidhi, ime ca sattā itthattaṁ āgatā’ti.
[¶14] And the beings who were reborn there later also think: ‘This must be the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. And we were created by him. Why is that? Because we see that he was reborn here first, and we arrived later.’
> Pali: Yepi te sattā pacchā upapannā, tesampi evaṁ hoti: ‘ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ. Iminā mayaṁ bhotā brahmunā nimmitā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imañhi mayaṁ addasāma idha paṭhamaṁ upapannaṁ, mayaṁ panamha pacchā upapannā’ti.
[¶15] And the being who was reborn first is more long-lived, beautiful, and illustrious than those who arrived later.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, yo so satto paṭhamaṁ upapanno, so dīghāyukataro ca hoti vaṇṇavantataro ca mahesakkhataro ca. Ye pana te sattā pacchā upapannā, te appāyukatarā ca honti dubbaṇṇatarā ca appesakkhatarā ca.
[¶16] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect that past life, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati, yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, tato paraṁ nānussarati.
[¶17] They say: ‘He who is the Divinity—the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born—by he we were created. He is permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity. We who were created by that divinity are impermanent, not lasting, short-lived, liable to pass away, and have come to this place.’ This is the first ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal.
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘yo kho so bhavaṁ brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ, yena mayaṁ bhotā brahmunā nimmitā, so nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassati. Ye pana mayaṁ ahumhā tena bhotā brahmunā nimmitā, te mayaṁ aniccā addhuvā appāyukā cavanadhammā itthattaṁ āgatā’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶18] And what is the second ground on which they rely? There are gods named ‘depraved by play.’ They spend too much time laughing, playing, and making merry. And in doing so, they lose their mindfulness, and they pass away from that host of gods.
> Pali: Dutiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Santi, bhikkhave, khiḍḍāpadosikā nāma devā, te ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannā viharanti. Tesaṁ ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannānaṁ viharataṁ sati sammussati. Satiyā sammosā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti.
[¶19] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect that past life, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, tato paraṁ nānussarati.
[¶20] They say: ‘The gods not depraved by play don’t spend too much time laughing, playing, and making merry. So they don’t lose their mindfulness, and don’t pass away from that host of gods. They are permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity. But we who were depraved by play spent too much time laughing, playing, and making merry. In doing so, we lost our mindfulness, and passed away from that host of gods. We are impermanent, not lasting, short-lived, liable to pass away, and have come to this place.’ This is the second ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal.
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘ye kho te bhonto devā na khiḍḍāpadosikā, te na ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannā viharanti. Tesaṁ na ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannānaṁ viharataṁ sati na sammussati. Satiyā asammosā te devā tamhā kāyā na cavanti; niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassanti. Ye pana mayaṁ ahumhā khiḍḍāpadosikā, te mayaṁ ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannā viharimhā. Tesaṁ no ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannānaṁ viharataṁ sati sammussati. Satiyā sammosā evaṁ mayaṁ tamhā kāyā cutā aniccā addhuvā appāyukā cavanadhammā itthattaṁ āgatā’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶21] And what is the third ground on which they rely? There are gods named ‘malevolent’. They spend too much time gazing at each other, so they grow angry with each other, and their bodies and minds get tired. They pass away from that host of gods.
> Pali: Tatiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Santi, bhikkhave, manopadosikā nāma devā, te ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyanti. Te ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyantā aññamaññamhi cittāni padūsenti. Te aññamaññaṁ paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā kilantacittā. Te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti.
[¶22] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect that past life, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, tato paraṁ nānussarati.
[¶23] They say: ‘The gods who are not malevolent don’t spend too much time gazing at each other, so they don’t grow angry with each other, their bodies and minds don’t get tired, and they don’t pass away from that host of gods. They are permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity. But we who were malevolent spent too much time gazing at each other, we grew angry with each other, our bodies and minds got tired, and we passed away from that host of gods. We are impermanent, not lasting, short-lived, liable to pass away, and have come to this place.’ This is the third ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal.
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘ye kho te bhonto devā na manopadosikā, te nātivelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyanti. Te nātivelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyantā aññamaññamhi cittāni nappadūsenti. Te aññamaññaṁ appaduṭṭhacittā akilantakāyā akilantacittā. Te devā tamhā kāyā na cavanti, niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassanti. Ye pana mayaṁ ahumhā manopadosikā, te mayaṁ ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyimhā. Te mayaṁ ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyantā aññamaññamhi cittāni padūsimhā, te mayaṁ aññamaññaṁ paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā kilantacittā. Evaṁ mayaṁ tamhā kāyā cutā aniccā addhuvā appāyukā cavanadhammā itthattaṁ āgatā’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶24] And what is the fourth ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin relies on logic and inquiry. They speak of what they have worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing their own perspective: ‘That which is called “the eye”, “the ear”, “the nose”, “the tongue”, and also “the body”: that self is impermanent, not lasting, transient, perishable. That which is called “mind” or “sentience” or “consciousness”: that self is permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity.’ This is the fourth ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal.
> Pali: Catutthe ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā takkī hoti vīmaṁsī. So takkapariyāhataṁ vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ evamāha: ‘yaṁ kho idaṁ vuccati cakkhuṁ itipi sotaṁ itipi ghānaṁ itipi jivhā itipi kāyo itipi, ayaṁ attā anicco addhuvo asassato vipariṇāmadhammo. Yañca kho idaṁ vuccati cittanti vā manoti vā viññāṇanti vā ayaṁ attā nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassatī’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, catutthaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶25] These are the four grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal and partially not eternal. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert that the self and the cosmos are partially eternal and partially not eternal do so on one or other of these four grounds. Outside of this there is none.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva catūhi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena; natthi ito bahiddhā.
[¶26] The Realized One understands this: ‘If you hold on to and attach to these grounds for views it leads to such a destiny in the next life.’ He understands this, and what goes beyond this. And since he does not misapprehend that understanding, he has realized quenching within himself. Having truly understood the origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape from feelings, the Realized One is freed by not grasping.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānāti: ‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṅgahitā evaṁparāmaṭṭhā evaṅgatikā bhavanti evaṁabhisamparāyā’ti. Tañca tathāgato pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṁ na parāmasati, aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Vedanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato.
[¶27] These are the principles—deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute—which the Realized One makes known after realizing them with his own insight. And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶28] 3.1.3. The Cosmos is Finite or Infinite
> Pali: 3.1.3. Antānantavāda
[¶29] There are some ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about size, and assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite on four grounds. And what are the four grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi?
[¶30] It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they meditate perceiving the cosmos as finite.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte antasaññī lokasmiṁ viharati.
[¶31] They say: ‘The cosmos is finite and restricted. Why is that? Because by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind I experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that I meditate perceiving the cosmos as finite. Because of this I know:
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘antavā ayaṁ loko parivaṭumo. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusāmi, yathāsamāhite citte antasaññī lokasmiṁ viharāmi. Imināmahaṁ etaṁ jānāmi:
[¶32] “The cosmos is finite and restricted.”’ This is the first ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite.
> Pali: “yathā antavā ayaṁ loko parivaṭumo”’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti.
[¶33] And what is the second ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they meditate perceiving the cosmos as infinite.
> Pali: Dutiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anantasaññī lokasmiṁ viharati.
[¶34] They say: ‘The cosmos is infinite and unbounded. The ascetics and brahmins who say that the cosmos is finite are wrong. The cosmos is infinite and unbounded. Why is that? Because by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind I experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that I meditate perceiving the cosmos as infinite. Because of this I know:
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘ananto ayaṁ loko apariyanto. Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: “antavā ayaṁ loko parivaṭumo”ti, tesaṁ musā. Ananto ayaṁ loko apariyanto. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusāmi, yathāsamāhite citte anantasaññī lokasmiṁ viharāmi. Imināmahaṁ etaṁ jānāmi:
[¶35] “The cosmos is infinite and unbounded.”’ This is the second ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite.
> Pali: “yathā ananto ayaṁ loko apariyanto”’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti.
[¶36] And what is the third ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they meditate perceiving the cosmos as finite vertically but infinite horizontally.
> Pali: Tatiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte uddhamadho antasaññī lokasmiṁ viharati, tiriyaṁ anantasaññī.
[¶37] They say: ‘The cosmos is both finite and infinite. The ascetics and brahmins who say that the cosmos is finite are wrong, and so are those who say that the cosmos is infinite. The cosmos is both finite and infinite. Why is that? Because by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind I experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that I meditate perceiving the cosmos as finite vertically but infinite horizontally. Because of this I know:
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘antavā ca ayaṁ loko ananto ca. Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: “antavā ayaṁ loko parivaṭumo”ti, tesaṁ musā. Yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: “ananto ayaṁ loko apariyanto”ti, tesampi musā. Antavā ca ayaṁ loko ananto ca. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusāmi, yathāsamāhite citte uddhamadho antasaññī lokasmiṁ viharāmi, tiriyaṁ anantasaññī. Imināmahaṁ etaṁ jānāmi:
[¶38] “The cosmos is both finite and infinite.”’ This is the third ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite.
> Pali: “yathā antavā ca ayaṁ loko ananto cā”’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti.
[¶39] And what is the fourth ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin relies on logic and inquiry. They speak of what they have worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing their own perspective: ‘The cosmos is neither finite nor infinite. The ascetics and brahmins who say that the cosmos is finite are wrong, as are those who say that the cosmos is infinite, and also those who say that the cosmos is both finite and infinite. The cosmos is neither finite nor infinite.’ This is the fourth ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite.
> Pali: Catutthe ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā takkī hoti vīmaṁsī. So takkapariyāhataṁ vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ evamāha: ‘nevāyaṁ loko antavā, na panānanto. Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: “antavā ayaṁ loko parivaṭumo”ti, tesaṁ musā. Yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: “ananto ayaṁ loko apariyanto”ti, tesampi musā. Yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: “antavā ca ayaṁ loko ananto cā”ti, tesampi musā. Nevāyaṁ loko antavā, na panānanto’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, catutthaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti.
[¶40] These are the four grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert that the cosmos is finite or infinite do so on one or other of these four grounds. Outside of this there is none.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva catūhi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena; natthi ito bahiddhā.
[¶41] The Realized One understands this: ‘If you hold on to and attach to these grounds for views it leads to such a destiny in the next life.’ He understands this, and what goes beyond this. And since he does not misapprehend that understanding, he has realized quenching within himself. Having truly understood the origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape from feelings, the Realized One is freed by not grasping.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānāti: ‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṅgahitā evaṁparāmaṭṭhā evaṅgatikā bhavanti evaṁabhisamparāyā’ti. Tañca tathāgato pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṁ na parāmasati, aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Vedanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato.
[¶42] These are the principles—deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute—which the Realized One makes known after realizing them with his own insight. And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶43] 3.1.4. Endless Flip-floppers
> Pali: 3.1.4. Amarāvikkhepavāda
[¶44] There are some ascetics and brahmins who are endless flip-floppers. Whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops on four grounds. And what are the four grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā, tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ catūhi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ catūhi vatthūhi?
[¶45] It’s when some ascetic or brahmin doesn’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful. They think: ‘I don’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful. If I were to declare that something was skillful or unskillful I might be wrong. That would be stressful for me, and that stress would be an obstacle.’ So from fear and disgust with false speech they avoid stating whether something is skillful or unskillful. Whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops: ‘I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.’ This is the first ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely when resorting to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ‘idaṁ kusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, ‘idaṁ akusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho “idaṁ kusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāmi, “idaṁ akusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāmi. Ahañce kho pana “idaṁ kusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto, “idaṁ akusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto, “idaṁ kusalan”ti vā byākareyyaṁ, “idaṁ akusalan”ti vā byākareyyaṁ, taṁ mamassa musā. Yaṁ mamassa musā, so mamassa vighāto. Yo mamassa vighāto so mamassa antarāyo’ti. Iti so musāvādabhayā musāvādaparijegucchā nevidaṁ kusalanti byākaroti, na panidaṁ akusalanti byākaroti, tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjati amarāvikkhepaṁ: ‘evantipi me no; tathātipi me no; aññathātipi me no; notipi me no; no notipi me no’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ.
[¶46] And what is the second ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin doesn’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful. They think: ‘I don’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful. If I were to declare that something was skillful or unskillful I might feel desire or greed or hate or aversion. That would be grasping on my part. That would be stressful for me, and that stress would be an obstacle.’ So from fear and disgust with grasping they avoid stating whether something is skillful or unskillful. Whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops: ‘I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.’ This is the second ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely when resorting to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops.
> Pali: Dutiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ‘idaṁ kusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, ‘idaṁ akusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho “idaṁ kusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāmi, “idaṁ akusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāmi. Ahañce kho pana “idaṁ kusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto, “idaṁ akusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto, “idaṁ kusalan”ti vā byākareyyaṁ, “idaṁ akusalan”ti vā byākareyyaṁ, tattha me assa chando vā rāgo vā doso vā paṭigho vā. Yattha me assa chando vā rāgo vā doso vā paṭigho vā, taṁ mamassa upādānaṁ. Yaṁ mamassa upādānaṁ, so mamassa vighāto. Yo mamassa vighāto, so mamassa antarāyo’ti. Iti so upādānabhayā upādānaparijegucchā nevidaṁ kusalanti byākaroti, na panidaṁ akusalanti byākaroti, tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjati amarāvikkhepaṁ: ‘evantipi me no; tathātipi me no; aññathātipi me no; notipi me no; no notipi me no’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ.
[¶47] And what is the third ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin doesn’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful. They think: ‘I don’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful. Suppose I were to declare that something was skillful or unskillful. There are astute ascetics and brahmins who are subtle, accomplished in the doctrines of others, hair-splitters. You’d think they live to demolish convictions with their intellect. They might pursue, press, and grill me about that. I’d be stumped by such a grilling. That would be stressful for me, and that stress would be an obstacle.’ So from fear and disgust with examination they avoid stating whether something is skillful or unskillful. Whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops: ‘I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.’ This is the third ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely when resorting to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops.
> Pali: Tatiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ‘idaṁ kusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, ‘idaṁ akusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho “idaṁ kusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāmi, “idaṁ akusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāmi. Ahañce kho pana “idaṁ kusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto “idaṁ akusalan”ti yathābhūtaṁ appajānanto “idaṁ kusalan”ti vā byākareyyaṁ, “idaṁ akusalan”ti vā byākareyyaṁ; santi hi kho samaṇabrāhmaṇā paṇḍitā nipuṇā kataparappavādā vālavedhirūpā, te bhindantā maññe caranti paññāgatena diṭṭhigatāni, te maṁ tattha samanuyuñjeyyuṁ samanugāheyyuṁ samanubhāseyyuṁ. Ye maṁ tattha samanuyuñjeyyuṁ samanugāheyyuṁ samanubhāseyyuṁ, tesāhaṁ na sampāyeyyaṁ. Yesāhaṁ na sampāyeyyaṁ, so mamassa vighāto. Yo mamassa vighāto, so mamassa antarāyo’ti. Iti so anuyogabhayā anuyogaparijegucchā nevidaṁ kusalanti byākaroti, na panidaṁ akusalanti byākaroti, tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjati amarāvikkhepaṁ: ‘evantipi me no; tathātipi me no; aññathātipi me no; notipi me no; no notipi me no’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ.
[¶48] And what is the fourth ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin is dull and stupid. Because of that, whenever they’re asked a question, they resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops: ‘Suppose you were to ask me whether there is another world. If I believed that to be the case, I would say so. But I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so. Suppose you were to ask me whether there is no other world … whether there both is and is not another world … whether there neither is nor is not another world … whether there are beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there are not beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there both are and are not beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there neither are nor are not beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there is fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether there is no fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether there both is and is not fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether there neither is nor is not fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether a realized one still exists after death … whether a realized one no longer exists after death … whether a realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death … whether a realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death. If I believed that to be the case, I would say so. But I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.’ This is the fourth ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely when resorting to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops.
> Pali: Catutthe ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā mando hoti momūho. So mandattā momūhattā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭho samāno vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjati amarāvikkhepaṁ: ‘atthi paro loko’ti iti ce maṁ pucchasi, ‘atthi paro loko’ti iti ce me assa, ‘atthi paro loko’ti iti te naṁ byākareyyaṁ, ‘evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’ti. ‘Natthi paro loko …pe… ‘atthi ca natthi ca paro loko …pe… ‘nevatthi na natthi paro loko …pe… ‘atthi sattā opapātikā …pe… ‘natthi sattā opapātikā …pe… ‘atthi ca natthi ca sattā opapātikā …pe… ‘nevatthi na natthi sattā opapātikā …pe… ‘atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… ‘natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… ‘atthi ca natthi ca sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… ‘nevatthi na natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā …pe… ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā …pe… ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti iti ce maṁ pucchasi, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti iti ce me assa, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti iti te naṁ byākareyyaṁ, ‘evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, catutthaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ.
[¶49] These are the four grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins who are flip-floppers resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops whenever they’re asked a question. Any ascetics and brahmins who resort to verbal flip-flops and endless flip-flops do so on one or other of these four grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ catūhi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ, sabbe te imeheva catūhi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶50] 3.1.5. Doctrines of Anomalous Origination
> Pali: 3.1.5. Adhiccasamuppannavāda
[¶51] There are some ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about anomalous origination. They assert that the self and the cosmos arose anomalously on two grounds. And what are the two grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti dvīhi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti dvīhi vatthūhi?
[¶52] There are gods named ‘non-percipient beings’. When perception arises they pass away from that host of gods. It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect the arising of perception, but no further. They say: ‘The self and the cosmos arose anomalously. Why is that? Because formerly I didn’t exist, whereas now, having not existed, I’ve transformed into the state of existing.’ This is the first ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos arose anomalously.
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, asaññasattā nāma devā. Saññuppādā ca pana te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhikkhave, vijjati, yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte saññuppādaṁ anussarati, tato paraṁ nānussarati. So evamāha: ‘adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko ca. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi pubbe nāhosiṁ, somhi etarahi ahutvā santatāya pariṇato’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶53] And what is the second ground on which they rely? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin relies on logic and inquiry. They speak of what they have worked out by logic, following a line of inquiry, expressing their own perspective: ‘The self and the cosmos arose anomalously.’ This is the second ground on which some ascetics and brahmins rely to assert that the self and the cosmos arose anomalously.
> Pali: Dutiye ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā takkī hoti vīmaṁsī. So takkapariyāhataṁ vīmaṁsānucaritaṁ sayampaṭibhānaṁ evamāha: ‘adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko cā’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ ṭhānaṁ, yaṁ āgamma yaṁ ārabbha eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti.
[¶54] These are the two grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about anomalous origination assert that the self and the cosmos arose anomalously. Any ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about anomalous origination do so on one or other of these two grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti dvīhi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva dvīhi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶55] These are the eighteen grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning propose various hypotheses concerning the first beginning. Any ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning do so on one or other of these eighteen grounds. Outside of this there is none.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantamārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti, sabbe te imeheva aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā.
[¶56] The Realized One understands this: ‘If you hold on to and attach to these grounds for views it leads to such a destiny in the next life.’ He understands this, and what goes beyond this. And since he does not misapprehend that understanding, he has realized quenching within himself. Having truly understood the origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape from feelings, the Realized One is freed by not grasping.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānāti: ‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṅgahitā evaṁparāmaṭṭhā evaṅgatikā bhavanti evaṁabhisamparāyā’ti. Tañca tathāgato pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṁ na parāmasati, aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Vedanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato.
[¶57] These are the principles—deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute—which the Realized One makes known after realizing them with his own insight. And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶58] The second recitation section.
> Pali: Dutiyabhāṇavāro.
[¶59] 3.2. Theories About the Final End
> Pali: 3.2. Aparantakappika
[¶60] There are some ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the final end, and propose various hypotheses concerning the final end on forty-four grounds. And what are the forty-four grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino, aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti catucattārīsāya vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti catucattārīsāya vatthūhi?
## 3. DN 1 · The Divine Net · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/3/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/3/#p-N
[¶0] 3.2.1. Percipient Life After Death
> Pali: 3.2.1. Saññīvāda
[¶1] There are some ascetics and brahmins who say there is life after death, and assert that the self lives on after death in a percipient form on sixteen grounds. And what are the sixteen grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti soḷasahi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti soḷasahi vatthūhi?
[¶2] They assert: ‘The self is healthy and percipient after death, and it is formed …
> Pali: ‘Rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā saññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶3] formless …
> Pali: ‘Arūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā saññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶4] both formed and formless …
> Pali: ‘Rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti …pe….
[¶5] neither formed nor formless …
> Pali: ‘Nevarūpī nārūpī attā hoti ….
[¶6] finite …
> Pali: ‘Antavā attā hoti ….
[¶7] infinite …
> Pali: ‘Anantavā attā hoti ….
[¶8] both finite and infinite …
> Pali: ‘Antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti ….
[¶9] neither finite nor infinite …
> Pali: ‘Nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti ….
[¶10] of unified perception …
> Pali: ‘Ekattasaññī attā hoti ….
[¶11] of diverse perception …
> Pali: ‘Nānattasaññī attā hoti ….
[¶12] of limited perception …
> Pali: ‘Parittasaññī attā hoti ….
[¶13] of limitless perception …
> Pali: ‘Appamāṇasaññī attā hoti ….
[¶14] experiences nothing but happiness …
> Pali: ‘Ekantasukhī attā hoti ….
[¶15] experiences absolute suffering …
> Pali: ‘Ekantadukkhī attā hoti ….
[¶16] experiences both happiness and suffering …
> Pali: ‘Sukhadukkhī attā hoti ….
[¶17] experiences neither happiness nor suffering.’
> Pali: ‘Adukkhamasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā saññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶18] These are the sixteen grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self lives on after death in a percipient form. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert that the self lives on after death in a percipient form do so on one or other of these sixteen grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti soḷasahi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva soḷasahi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶19] 3.2.2. Non-Percipient Life After Death
> Pali: 3.2.2. Asaññīvāda
[¶20] There are some ascetics and brahmins who say there is life after death, and assert that the self lives on after death in a non-percipient form on eight grounds. And what are the eight grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi?
[¶21] They assert: ‘The self is healthy and non-percipient after death, and it is formed …
> Pali: ‘Rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā asaññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶22] formless …
> Pali: ‘Arūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā asaññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶23] both formed and formless …
> Pali: ‘Rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti …pe….
[¶24] neither formed nor formless …
> Pali: ‘Nevarūpī nārūpī attā hoti ….
[¶25] finite …
> Pali: ‘Antavā attā hoti ….
[¶26] infinite …
> Pali: ‘Anantavā attā hoti ….
[¶27] both finite and infinite …
> Pali: ‘Antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti ….
[¶28] neither finite nor infinite.’
> Pali: ‘Nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā asaññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶29] These are the eight grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self lives on after death in a non-percipient form. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert that the self lives on after death in a non-percipient form do so on one or other of these eight grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶30] 3.2.3. Neither Percipient Nor Non-Percipient Life After Death
> Pali: 3.2.3. Nevasaññīnāsaññīvāda
[¶31] There are some ascetics and brahmins who say there is life after death, and assert that the self lives on after death in a neither percipient nor non-percipient form on eight grounds. And what are the eight grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi?
[¶32] They assert: ‘The self is healthy and neither percipient nor non-percipient after death, and it is formed …
> Pali: ‘Rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā nevasaññīnāsaññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶33] formless …
> Pali: ‘Arūpī attā hoti …pe….
[¶34] both formed and formless …
> Pali: ‘Rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti ….
[¶35] neither formed nor formless …
> Pali: ‘Nevarūpī nārūpī attā hoti ….
[¶36] finite …
> Pali: ‘Antavā attā hoti ….
[¶37] infinite …
> Pali: ‘Anantavā attā hoti ….
[¶38] both finite and infinite …
> Pali: ‘Antavā ca anantavā ca attā hoti ….
[¶39] neither finite nor infinite.’
> Pali: ‘Nevantavā nānantavā attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā nevasaññīnāsaññī’ti naṁ paññapenti.
[¶40] These are the eight grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self lives on after death in a neither percipient nor non-percipient form. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert that the self lives on after death in a neither percipient nor non-percipient form do so on one or other of these eight grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva aṭṭhahi vatthūhi … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶41] 3.2.4. Annihilationism
> Pali: 3.2.4. Ucchedavāda
[¶42] There are some ascetics and brahmins who are annihilationists. They assert the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being on seven grounds. And what are the seven grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti sattahi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti sattahi vatthūhi?
[¶43] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘This self is formed, made up of the four principal states, and produced by mother and father. Since it’s annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī hoti evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘yato kho, bho, ayaṁ attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶44] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self becomes rightly annihilated. There is another self that is heavenly, formed, sensual, consuming edible food. You don’t know or see that. But I know it and see it. Since this self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hoti. Atthi kho, bho, añño attā dibbo rūpī kāmāvacaro kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkho. Taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi. Tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. So kho, bho, attā yato kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶45] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self becomes rightly annihilated. There is another self that is heavenly, formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. You don’t know or see that. But I know it and see it. Since this self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hoti. Atthi kho, bho, añño attā dibbo rūpī manomayo sabbaṅgapaccaṅgī ahīnindriyo. Taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi. Tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. So kho, bho, attā yato kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶46] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self becomes rightly annihilated. There is another self which has gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that “space is infinite”, it’s reborn in the dimension of infinite space. You don’t know or see that. But I know it and see it. Since this self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hoti. Atthi kho, bho, añño attā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā “ananto ākāso”ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpago. Taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi. Tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. So kho, bho, attā yato kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶47] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self becomes rightly annihilated. There is another self which has gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that “consciousness is infinite”, it’s reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness. You don’t know or see that. But I know it and see it. Since this self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hoti. Atthi kho, bho, añño attā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma “anantaṁ viññāṇan”ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpago. Taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi. Tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. So kho, bho, attā yato kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶48] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self becomes rightly annihilated. There is another self that has gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that “there is nothing at all”, it’s been reborn in the dimension of nothingness. You don’t know or see that. But I know it and see it. Since this self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, so attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hoti. Atthi kho, bho, añño attā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma “natthi kiñcī”ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpago. Taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi. Tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. So kho, bho, attā yato kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶49] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self becomes rightly annihilated. There is another self that has gone totally beyond the dimension of nothingness. Aware that “this is peaceful, this is sublime”, it passes on to the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. You don’t know or see that. But I know it and see it. Since this self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death, that’s how this self becomes rightly annihilated.’ That is how some assert the annihilation of an existing being.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hoti. Atthi kho, bho, añño attā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma “santametaṁ paṇītametan”ti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpago. Taṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi. Tamahaṁ jānāmi passāmi. So kho, bho, attā yato kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sammā samucchinno hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti.
[¶50] These are the seven grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert the annihilation, eradication, and nonexistence of an existing being do so on one or other of these seven grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti sattahi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva sattahi vatthūhi … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶51] 3.2.5. Extinguishment of Suffering in This Life
> Pali: 3.2.5. Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavāda
[¶52] There are some ascetics and brahmins who speak of extinguishment in this life. They assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life on five grounds. And what are the five grounds on which they rely?
> Pali: Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti pañcahi vatthūhi. Te ca bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā kimāgamma kimārabbha diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti pañcahi vatthūhi?
[¶53] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘When this self amuses itself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation, that’s how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life.’ That is how some assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṁvādī hoti evaṁdiṭṭhi: ‘yato kho, bho, ayaṁ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti.
[¶54] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life. Why is that? Because sensual pleasures are impermanent, suffering, and perishable. Their decay and perishing give rise to sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, this self enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. That’s how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life.’ That is how some assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hoti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Kāmā hi, bho, aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā, tesaṁ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā. Yato kho, bho, ayaṁ attā vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti.
[¶55] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life. Why is that? Because the placing of the mind and the keeping it connected there are coarse. But when the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, this self enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. That’s how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life.’ That is how some assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hoti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yadeva tattha vitakkitaṁ vicāritaṁ, etenetaṁ oḷārikaṁ akkhāyati. Yato kho, bho, ayaṁ attā vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti.
[¶56] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life. Why is that? Because the rapture and emotional elation there are coarse. But with the fading away of rapture, this self enters and remains in the third absorption, where it meditates with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, “Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss”. That’s how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life.’ That is how some assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hoti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yadeva tattha pītigataṁ cetaso uppilāvitattaṁ, etenetaṁ oḷārikaṁ akkhāyati. Yato kho, bho, ayaṁ attā pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti “upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī”ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti.
[¶57] But someone else says to them: ‘That self of which you speak does exist, I don’t deny it. But that’s not how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life. Why is that? Because mentally partaking in that as ‘blissful’ is said to be coarse. But with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, this self enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. That’s how this self attains ultimate extinguishment in this life.’ That is how some assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘atthi kho, bho, eso attā, yaṁ tvaṁ vadesi, neso natthīti vadāmi; no ca kho, bho, ayaṁ attā ettāvatā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hoti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Yadeva tattha sukhamiti cetaso ābhogo, etenetaṁ oḷārikaṁ akkhāyati. Yato kho, bho, ayaṁ attā sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati, ettāvatā kho, bho, ayaṁ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ patto hotī’ti. Ittheke sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti.
[¶58] These are the five grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life. Any ascetics and brahmins who assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life do so on one or other of these five grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti pañcahi vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti, sabbe te imeheva pañcahi vatthūhi … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶59] These are the forty-four grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the final end propose various hypotheses concerning the final end. Any ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the final end do so on one or other of these forty-four grounds. Outside of this there is none. The Realized One understands this … And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti catucattārīsāya vatthūhi. Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti, sabbe te imeheva catucattārīsāya vatthūhi … pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶60] These are the sixty-two grounds on which those ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning and the final end propose various hypotheses concerning the first beginning and the final end.
> Pali: Imehi kho te, bhikkhave, samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā ca aparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi.
[¶61] Any ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning or the final end do so on one or other of these sixty-two grounds. Outside of this there is none.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā pubbantakappikā vā aparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti, sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, etesaṁ vā aññatarena; natthi ito bahiddhā.
[¶62] The Realized One understands this: ‘If you hold on to and attach to these grounds for views it leads to such a destiny in the next life.’ He understands this, and what goes beyond this. And since he does not misapprehend that understanding, he has realized quenching within himself. Having truly understood the origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape from feelings, the Realized One is freed by not grasping.
> Pali: Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānāti: ‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṅgahitā evaṁparāmaṭṭhā evaṅgatikā bhavanti evaṁabhisamparāyā’ti. Tañca tathāgato pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṁ na parāmasati, aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Vedanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato.
[¶63] These are the principles—deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute—which the Realized One makes known after realizing them with his own insight. And those who genuinely praise the Realized One would rightly speak of these things.
> Pali: Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyā, ye tathāgato sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti, yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṁ vaṇṇaṁ sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ.
[¶64] 4. The Grounds For Assertions About the Self and the Cosmos
> Pali: 4. Attālokapaññattivatthu
[¶65] 4.1. Anxiety and Evasiveness
> Pali: 4.1. Paritassitavipphanditavāra
[¶66] Now, these things are only the feeling of those who do not know or see, the anxiety and evasiveness of those under the sway of craving. Namely, when those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶67] partially eternal on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶68] finite or infinite on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶69] or they resort to flip-flops on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶70] or they assert that the self and the cosmos arose anomalously on two grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti dvīhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶71] they speculate and theorize about the first beginning on these eighteen grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶72] or they assert that the self lives on after death in a percipient form on sixteen grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti soḷasahi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶73] or that the self lives on after death in a non-percipient form on eight grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶74] or that the self lives on after death in a neither percipient nor non-percipient form on eight grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶75] or they assert the annihilation of an existing being on seven grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti sattahi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶76] or they assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life on five grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti pañcahi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶77] they speculate and theorize about the final end on these forty-four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti catucattārīsāya vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶78] When those ascetics and brahmins speculate and theorize about the first beginning and the final end on these sixty-two grounds, these things are only the feeling of those who do not know or see, the anxiety and evasiveness of those under the sway of craving.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā ca aparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ ajānataṁ apassataṁ vedayitaṁ taṇhāgatānaṁ paritassitavipphanditameva.
[¶79] 4.2. Dependent On contact
> Pali: 4.2. Phassapaccayāvāra
[¶80] Now, these things are dependent on contact. Namely, when those ascetics and brahmins assert that the self and the cosmos are eternal on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶81] partially eternal on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶82] finite or infinite on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶83] or they resort to flip-flops on four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶84] or they assert that the self and the cosmos arose anomalously on two grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti dvīhi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶85] they speculate and theorize about the first beginning on these eighteen grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶86] or they assert that the self lives on after death in a percipient form on sixteen grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti soḷasahi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶87] or that the self lives on after death in a non-percipient form on eight grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶88] or that the self lives on after death in a neither percipient nor non-percipient form on eight grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶89] or they assert the annihilation of an existing being on seven grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti sattahi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶90] or they assert ultimate extinguishment for an existing being in this life on five grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti pañcahi vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶91] they speculate and theorize about the final end on these forty-four grounds …
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti catucattārīsāya vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶92] When those ascetics and brahmins speculate and theorize about the first beginning and the final end on these sixty-two grounds, that too is dependent on contact.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā ca aparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, tadapi phassapaccayā.
[¶93] 4.3. Not Possible
> Pali: 4.3. Netaṁṭhānaṁvijjativāra
[¶94] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶95] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā ekaccaṁ sassataṁ ekaccaṁ asassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶96] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā antānantaṁ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶97] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā tattha tattha pañhaṁ puṭṭhā samānā vācāvikkhepaṁ āpajjanti amarāvikkhepaṁ catūhi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶98] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā adhiccasamuppannaṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti dvīhi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶99] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā pubbantānudiṭṭhino pubbantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶100] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ saññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti soḷasahi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶101] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā, uddhamāghātanaṁ asaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶102] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā uddhamāghātanaṁ nevasaññīnāsaññiṁ attānaṁ paññapenti aṭṭhahi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶103] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ucchedavādā sato sattassa ucchedaṁ vināsaṁ vibhavaṁ paññapenti sattahi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶104] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā sato sattassa paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṁ paññapenti pañcahi vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶105] > Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā aparantānudiṭṭhino aparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti catucattārīsāya vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶106] Now, when those ascetics and brahmins speculate and theorize about the first beginning and the final end on these sixty-two grounds, it is not possible that they should experience these things without contact.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā ca aparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, te vata aññatra phassā paṭisaṁvedissantīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶107] 4.4. Dependent Origination
> Pali: 4.4. Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānavaṭṭakathā
[¶108] Now, when those ascetics and brahmins speculate and theorize about the first beginning and the final end on these sixty-two grounds, all of them experience this by repeated contact through the six fields of contact. Their feeling is a condition for craving. Craving is a condition for grasping. Grasping is a condition for continued existence. Continued existence is a condition for rebirth. Rebirth is a condition for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be.
> Pali: Tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṁ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikā ekaccaasassatikā …pe… yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā antānantikā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā amarāvikkhepikā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannikā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā saññīvādā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā asaññīvādā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā uddhamāghātanikā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ucchedavādā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā … yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā ca aparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, sabbe te chahi phassāyatanehi phussa phussa paṭisaṁvedenti tesaṁ vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti.
[¶109] 5. The End of the Round
> Pali: 5. Vivaṭṭakathādi
[¶110] When a mendicant truly understands the six fields of contact’s origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape, they understand what lies beyond all these things.
> Pali: Yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu channaṁ phassāyatanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ imehi sabbeheva uttaritaraṁ pajānāti.
[¶111] All of these ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning or the final end are trapped in the net of these sixty-two grounds, so that wherever they emerge they are caught and trapped in this very net.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā pubbantakappikā vā aparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti, sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā, ettha sitāva ummujjamānā ummujjanti, ettha pariyāpannā antojālīkatāva ummujjamānā ummujjanti.
[¶112] Suppose a deft fisherman or his apprentice were to cast a fine-meshed net over a small pond. They’d think: ‘Any sizable creatures in this pond will be trapped in the net. Wherever they emerge they are caught and trapped in this very net.’ In the same way, all of these ascetics and brahmins who speculate and theorize about the first beginning or the final end are trapped in the net of these sixty-two grounds, so that wherever they emerge they are caught and trapped in this very net.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho kevaṭṭo vā kevaṭṭantevāsī vā sukhumacchikena jālena parittaṁ udakadahaṁ otthareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ye kho keci imasmiṁ udakadahe oḷārikā pāṇā, sabbe te antojālīkatā. Ettha sitāva ummujjamānā ummujjanti; ettha pariyāpannā antojālīkatāva ummujjamānā ummujjantī’ti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye hi keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā pubbantakappikā vā aparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino pubbantāparantaṁ ārabbha anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti, sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā ettha sitāva ummujjamānā ummujjanti, ettha pariyāpannā antojālīkatāva ummujjamānā ummujjanti.
[¶113] The Realized One’s body remains, but his leash to existence has been cut off. As long as his body remains he will be seen by gods and humans. But when his body breaks up, after life has ended, gods and humans will see him no more.
> Pali: Ucchinnabhavanettiko, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa kāyo tiṭṭhati. Yāvassa kāyo ṭhassati, tāva naṁ dakkhanti devamanussā. Kāyassa bhedā uddhaṁ jīvitapariyādānā na naṁ dakkhanti devamanussā.
[¶114] When the stalk of a bunch of mangoes is cut, all the mangoes attached to the stalk will follow along. In the same way, the Realized One’s body remains, but his leash to existence has been cut off. As long as his body remains he will be seen by gods and humans. But when his body breaks up, after life has ended, gods and humans will see him no more.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ambapiṇḍiyā vaṇṭacchinnāya yāni kānici ambāni vaṇṭapaṭibandhāni, sabbāni tāni tadanvayāni bhavanti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyo tiṭṭhati, yāvassa kāyo ṭhassati, tāva naṁ dakkhanti devamanussā, kāyassa bhedā uddhaṁ jīvitapariyādānā na naṁ dakkhanti devamanussā”ti.
[¶115] When he had spoken, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! What is the name of this exposition of the teaching?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, ko nāmo ayaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo”ti?
[¶116] “Well then, Ānanda, you may remember this exposition of the teaching as ‘The Net of Meaning’, or else ‘The Net of the Teaching’, or else ‘The Divine Net’, or else ‘The Net of Views’, or else ‘The Supreme Victory in Battle’.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, ānanda, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ atthajālantipi naṁ dhārehi, dhammajālantipi naṁ dhārehi, brahmajālantipi naṁ dhārehi, diṭṭhijālantipi naṁ dhārehi, anuttaro saṅgāmavijayotipi naṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶117] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said. And while this discourse was being spoken, the ten-thousandfold galaxy shook.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti. Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmiṁ bhaññamāne dasasahassī lokadhātu akampitthāti.
[¶118] > Pali: Brahmajālasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 4. DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/4/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/4/#p-N
[¶0] DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life
> Pali: DN 2 · Sāmaññaphalasutta
[¶1] 1. A Discussion With the King’s Ministers
> Pali: 1. Rājāmaccakathā
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Mango Grove of Jīvaka Komārabhacca, together with a large Saṅgha of 1,250 mendicants.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavane mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi.
[¶3] Now, at that time it was the sabbath—the Komudī full moon on the fifteenth day of the fourth month—and King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, was sitting upstairs in the royal longhouse surrounded by his ministers.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tadahuposathe pannarase komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā rājāmaccaparivuto uparipāsādavaragato nisinno hoti.
[¶4] Then Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, expressed this heartfelt sentiment, “Oh, sirs, this moonlit night is so very delightful, so beautiful, so glorious, so lovely, so striking. Now, what ascetic or brahmin might I pay homage to today, paying homage to whom my mind might find peace?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tadahuposathe udānaṁ udānesi: “ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti, abhirūpā vata bho dosinā ratti, dassanīyā vata bho dosinā ratti, pāsādikā vata bho dosinā ratti, lakkhaññā vata bho dosinā ratti. Kaṁ nu khvajja samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā payirupāseyyāma, yaṁ no payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti?
[¶5] When he had spoken, one of the king’s ministers said to him, “Your Majesty, this Pūraṇa Kassapa leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He is of long standing, long gone forth; he is advanced in years and has reached the final stage of life. Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.” But when he had spoken, the king kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, aññataro rājāmacco rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ ajātasattuṁ vedehiputtaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, deva, pūraṇo kassapo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Taṁ devo pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶6] Another of the king’s ministers said to him, “Your Majesty, this bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He is of long standing, long gone forth; he is advanced in years and has reached the final stage of life. Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.” But when he had spoken, the king kept silent.
> Pali: Aññataropi kho rājāmacco rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ ajātasattuṁ vedehiputtaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, deva, makkhali gosālo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Taṁ devo makkhaliṁ gosālaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa makkhaliṁ gosālaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶7] Another of the king’s ministers said to him, “Your Majesty, this Ajita of the hair blanket leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He is of long standing, long gone forth; he is advanced in years and has reached the final stage of life. Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.” But when he had spoken, the king kept silent.
> Pali: Aññataropi kho rājāmacco rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ ajātasattuṁ vedehiputtaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, deva, ajito kesakambalo saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Taṁ devo ajitaṁ kesakambalaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa ajitaṁ kesakambalaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶8] Another of the king’s ministers said to him, “Your Majesty, this Pakudha Kaccāyana leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He is of long standing, long gone forth; he is advanced in years and has reached the final stage of life. Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.” But when he had spoken, the king kept silent.
> Pali: Aññataropi kho rājāmacco rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ ajātasattuṁ vedehiputtaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, deva, pakudho kaccāyano saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Taṁ devo pakudhaṁ kaccāyanaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa pakudhaṁ kaccāyanaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶9] Another of the king’s ministers said to him, “Your Majesty, this Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He is of long standing, long gone forth; he is advanced in years and has reached the final stage of life. Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.” But when he had spoken, the king kept silent.
> Pali: Aññataropi kho rājāmacco rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ ajātasattuṁ vedehiputtaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, deva, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Taṁ devo sañcayaṁ belaṭṭhaputtaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa sañcayaṁ belaṭṭhaputtaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶10] Another of the king’s ministers said to him, “Your Majesty, this Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan leads an order and a community, and tutors a community. He’s a well-known and famous religious founder, deemed holy by many people. He is of long standing, long gone forth; he is advanced in years and has reached the final stage of life. Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.” But when he had spoken, the king kept silent.
> Pali: Aññataropi kho rājāmacco rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ ajātasattuṁ vedehiputtaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, deva, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto saṅghī ceva gaṇī ca gaṇācariyo ca ñāto yasassī titthakaro sādhusammato bahujanassa rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Taṁ devo nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶11] 2. A Discussion With Jīvaka Komārabhacca
> Pali: 2. Komārabhaccajīvakakathā
[¶12] Now at that time Jīvaka Komārabhacca was sitting silently not far from the king. Then the king said to him, “But my dear Jīvaka, why are you silent?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa avidūre tuṇhībhūto nisinno hoti. Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca: “tvaṁ pana, samma jīvaka, kiṁ tuṇhī”ti?
[¶13] “Your Majesty, this Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha is staying in my mango grove together with a large Saṅgha of 1,250 mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ Let Your Majesty pay homage to him. Hopefully in so doing your mind will find peace.”
> Pali: “Ayaṁ, deva, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho amhākaṁ ambavane viharati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi. Taṁ kho pana bhagavantaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Taṁ devo bhagavantaṁ payirupāsatu. Appeva nāma devassa bhagavantaṁ payirupāsato cittaṁ pasīdeyyā”ti.
[¶14] “Well then, my dear Jīvaka, have the elephants readied.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, samma jīvaka, hatthiyānāni kappāpehī”ti.
[¶15] “Yes, Your Majesty,” replied Jīvaka. He had around five hundred female elephants readied, in addition to the king’s bull elephant for riding. Then he informed the king, “The elephants are ready, Your Majesty. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa paṭissuṇitvā pañcamattāni hatthinikāsatāni kappāpetvā rañño ca ārohaṇīyaṁ nāgaṁ, rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa paṭivedesi: “kappitāni kho te, deva, hatthiyānāni, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶16] Then King Ajātasattu had women mounted on each of the five hundred female elephants, while he mounted his bull elephant. With attendants carrying torches, he set out in full royal pomp from Rājagaha to Jīvaka’s Mango Grove.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto pañcasu hatthinikāsatesu paccekā itthiyo āropetvā ārohaṇīyaṁ nāgaṁ abhiruhitvā ukkāsu dhāriyamānāsu rājagahamhā niyyāsi mahaccarājānubhāvena, yena jīvakassa komārabhaccassa ambavanaṁ tena pāyāsi.
[¶17] But as he drew near the mango grove, the king became frightened, scared, his hair standing on end. He said to Jīvaka, “My dear Jīvaka, I hope you’re not deceiving me! I hope you’re not betraying me! I hope you’re not turning me over to my enemies! For how on earth can there be no sound of coughing or clearing throats or any noise in such a large Saṅgha of 1,250 mendicants?”
> Pali: Atha kho rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa avidūre ambavanassa ahudeva bhayaṁ, ahu chambhitattaṁ, ahu lomahaṁso. Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca: “kacci maṁ, samma jīvaka, na vañcesi? Kacci maṁ, samma jīvaka, na palambhesi? Kacci maṁ, samma jīvaka, na paccatthikānaṁ desi? Kathañhi nāma tāva mahato bhikkhusaṅghassa aḍḍhateḷasānaṁ bhikkhusatānaṁ neva khipitasaddo bhavissati, na ukkāsitasaddo na nigghoso”ti.
[¶18] “Do not fear, Great King, do not fear! I am not deceiving you, or betraying you, or turning you over to your enemies. Go forward, Great King, go forward! Those are lamps shining in the pavilion.”
> Pali: “Mā bhāyi, mahārāja, mā bhāyi, mahārāja. Na taṁ, deva, vañcemi; na taṁ, deva, palambhāmi; na taṁ, deva, paccatthikānaṁ demi. Abhikkama, mahārāja, abhikkama, mahārāja, ete maṇḍalamāḷe dīpā jhāyantī”ti.
[¶19] 3. The Question About the Fruits of the Ascetic Life
> Pali: 3. Sāmaññaphalapucchā
[¶20] Then King Ajātasattu rode on the elephant as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the pavilion door on foot, where he asked Jīvaka, “But my dear Jīvaka, where is the Buddha?”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto yāvatikā nāgassa bhūmi nāgena gantvā, nāgā paccorohitvā, pattikova yena maṇḍalamāḷassa dvāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca: “kahaṁ pana, samma jīvaka, bhagavā”ti?
[¶21] “That is the Buddha, Great King, that is the Buddha! He’s sitting against the central column facing east, in front of the Saṅgha of mendicants.”
> Pali: “Eso, mahārāja, bhagavā; eso, mahārāja, bhagavā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisinno purakkhato bhikkhusaṅghassā”ti.
[¶22] Then the king went up to the Buddha and stood to one side. He looked around the Saṅgha of mendicants, who were so very silent, like a still, clear lake, and expressed this heartfelt sentiment, “May my son, Prince Udāyibhadda, be blessed with such peace as the Saṅgha of mendicants now enjoys!”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā rahadamiva vippasannaṁ udānaṁ udānesi: “iminā me upasamena udayabhaddo kumāro samannāgato hotu, yenetarahi upasamena bhikkhusaṅgho samannāgato”ti.
[¶23] “Has your mind gone to one you love, Great King?”
> Pali: “Agamā kho tvaṁ, mahārāja, yathāpeman”ti.
[¶24] “I love my son, sir, Prince Udāyibhadda. May he be blessed with such peace as the Saṅgha of mendicants now enjoys!”
> Pali: “Piyo me, bhante, udayabhaddo kumāro. Iminā me, bhante, upasamena udayabhaddo kumāro samannāgato hotu yenetarahi upasamena bhikkhusaṅgho samannāgato”ti.
[¶25] Then the king bowed to the Buddha, raised his cupped palms toward the Saṅgha, and sat down to one side. He said to the Buddha, “Sir, I’d like to ask you about a certain point, if you’d take the time to answer.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā, bhikkhusaṅghassa añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā, ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “puccheyyāmahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ kañcideva desaṁ; sace me bhagavā okāsaṁ karoti pañhassa veyyākaraṇāyā”ti.
[¶26] “Ask what you wish, Great King.”
> Pali: “Puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī”ti.
[¶27] “Sir, there are many different professional fields. These include elephant marshals, cavalry, charioteers, archers, bannermen, adjutants, food servers, warrior-chiefs, princes, chargers, great warriors, heroes, leather-clad soldiers, and sons of bondservants. They also include bakers, barbers, bathroom attendants, cooks, garland-makers, dyers, embroiderers, basket-makers, potters, accountants, finger-talliers, or those following any similar professions. All these live off the fruits of their profession which are apparent in this very life. With that they make themselves happy and pleased. They make their parents, their children and partners, and their friends and colleagues happy and pleased. And they establish an uplifting religious donation for ascetics and brahmins that’s conducive to heaven, ripens in happiness, and leads to heaven. Sir, can you point out a fruit of the ascetic life that’s likewise apparent in this very life?”
> Pali: “Yathā nu kho imāni, bhante, puthusippāyatanāni, seyyathidaṁ—hatthārohā assārohā rathikā dhanuggahā celakā calakā piṇḍadāyakā uggā rājaputtā pakkhandino mahānāgā sūrā cammayodhino dāsikaputtā āḷārikā kappakā nhāpakā sūdā mālakārā rajakā pesakārā naḷakārā kumbhakārā gaṇakā muddikā, yāni vā panaññānipi evaṅgatāni puthusippāyatanāni, te diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sippaphalaṁ upajīvanti; te tena attānaṁ sukhenti pīṇenti, mātāpitaro sukhenti pīṇenti, puttadāraṁ sukhenti pīṇenti, mittāmacce sukhenti pīṇenti, samaṇabrāhmaṇesu uddhaggikaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ patiṭṭhapenti sovaggikaṁ sukhavipākaṁ saggasaṁvattanikaṁ. Sakkā nu kho, bhante, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun”ti?
[¶28] “Great king, do you recall having asked this question of other ascetics and brahmins?”
> Pali: “Abhijānāsi no tvaṁ, mahārāja, imaṁ pañhaṁ aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā”ti?
[¶29] “I do, sir.”
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, bhante, imaṁ pañhaṁ aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā”ti.
[¶30] “If you wouldn’t mind, Great King, tell me how they answered.”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana te, mahārāja, byākariṁsu, sace te agaru bhāsassū”ti.
[¶31] “It’s no trouble when someone such as the Blessed One is sitting here.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, garu, yatthassa bhagavā nisinno, bhagavantarūpo vā”ti.
[¶32] “Well, speak then, Great King.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, mahārāja, bhāsassū”ti.
[¶33] 3.1. The Doctrine of Pūraṇa Kassapa
> Pali: 3.1. Pūraṇakassapavāda
[¶34] “This one time, sir, I approached Pūraṇa Kassapa and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, I sat down to one side, and asked him the same question.
> Pali: “Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ yena pūraṇo kassapo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā pūraṇena kassapena saddhiṁ sammodiṁ. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ahaṁ, bhante, pūraṇaṁ kassapaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bho kassapa, puthusippāyatanāni, seyyathidaṁ—hatthārohā assārohā rathikā dhanuggahā celakā calakā piṇḍadāyakā uggā rājaputtā pakkhandino mahānāgā sūrā cammayodhino dāsikaputtā āḷārikā kappakā nhāpakā sūdā mālakārā rajakā pesakārā naḷakārā kumbhakārā gaṇakā muddikā, yāni vā panaññānipi evaṅgatāni puthusippāyatanāni, te diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sippaphalaṁ upajīvanti; te tena attānaṁ sukhenti pīṇenti, mātāpitaro sukhenti pīṇenti, puttadāraṁ sukhenti pīṇenti, mittāmacce sukhenti pīṇenti, samaṇabrāhmaṇesu uddhaggikaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ patiṭṭhapenti sovaggikaṁ sukhavipākaṁ saggasaṁvattanikaṁ. Sakkā nu kho, bho kassapa, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’ti?
[¶35] He said to me: ‘Great king, the one who acts does nothing wrong when they punish, mutilate, torture, aggrieve, oppress, intimidate, or when they encourage others to do the same. They do nothing wrong when they kill, steal, break into houses, plunder wealth, steal from isolated buildings, commit highway robbery, commit adultery, and lie. If you were to reduce all the living creatures of this earth to one heap and mass of flesh with a razor-edged chakram, no evil comes of that, and no outcome of evil. If you were to go along the south bank of the Ganges killing, mutilating, and torturing, and encouraging others to do the same, no evil comes of that, and no outcome of evil. If you were to go along the north bank of the Ganges giving and sacrificing and encouraging others to do the same, no merit comes of that, and no outcome of merit. In giving, self-control, restraint, and truthfulness there is no merit or outcome of merit.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, pūraṇo kassapo maṁ etadavoca: ‘karoto kho, mahārāja, kārayato, chindato chedāpayato, pacato pācāpayato socayato, socāpayato, kilamato kilamāpayato, phandato phandāpayato, pāṇamatipātāpayato, adinnaṁ ādiyato, sandhiṁ chindato, nillopaṁ harato, ekāgārikaṁ karoto, paripanthe tiṭṭhato, paradāraṁ gacchato, musā bhaṇato, karoto na karīyati pāpaṁ. Khurapariyantena cepi cakkena yo imissā pathaviyā pāṇe ekaṁ maṁsakhalaṁ ekaṁ maṁsapuñjaṁ kareyya, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Dakkhiṇañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya hananto ghātento chindanto chedāpento pacanto pācāpento, natthi tatonidānaṁ pāpaṁ, natthi pāpassa āgamo. Uttarañcepi gaṅgāya tīraṁ gaccheyya dadanto dāpento yajanto yajāpento, natthi tatonidānaṁ puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo. Dānena damena saṁyamena saccavajjena natthi puññaṁ, natthi puññassa āgamo’ti.
[¶36] And so, when I asked Pūraṇa Kassapa about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life, he answered with the doctrine of inaction. It was like someone who, when asked about a mango, answered with a breadfruit, or when asked about a breadfruit, answered with a mango. I thought: ‘How on earth could one such as I presume to rebuke an ascetic or brahmin living in my realm?’ So I neither approved nor rejected that statement of Pūraṇa Kassapa. I was displeased, but did not express my displeasure. Neither accepting what he said nor contradicting it, I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: Itthaṁ kho me, bhante, pūraṇo kassapo sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno akiriyaṁ byākāsi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, ambaṁ vā puṭṭho labujaṁ byākareyya, labujaṁ vā puṭṭho ambaṁ byākareyya; evameva kho me, bhante, pūraṇo kassapo sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno akiriyaṁ byākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘kathañhi nāma mādiso samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā vijite vasantaṁ apasādetabbaṁ maññeyyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, pūraṇassa kassapassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁ nappaṭikkosiṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā anattamano, anattamanavācaṁ anicchāretvā, tameva vācaṁ anuggaṇhanto anikkujjanto uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶37] 3.2. The Doctrine of the Bamboo-staffed Ascetic Gosāla
> Pali: 3.2. Makkhaligosālavāda
[¶38] This one time, sir, I approached the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, I sat down to one side, and asked him the same question.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ yena makkhali gosālo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā makkhalinā gosālena saddhiṁ sammodiṁ. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ahaṁ, bhante, makkhaliṁ gosālaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bho gosāla, puthusippāyatanāni …pe… sakkā nu kho, bho gosāla, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’ti?
[¶39] He said: ‘Great king, there is no cause or reason for the corruption of sentient beings. Sentient beings are corrupted without cause or reason. There’s no cause or reason for the purification of sentient beings. Sentient beings are purified without cause or reason. One does not act of one’s own volition, one does not act of another’s volition, one does not act from a person’s volition. There is no power, no energy, no human strength or vigor. All sentient beings, all living creatures, all beings, all souls lack control, power, and energy. Molded by destiny, circumstance, and nature, they experience pleasure and pain in the six classes of rebirth. There are 1.4 million main wombs, and 6,000, and 600; 500 deeds, and five, and three; deeds and half-deeds; 62 paths of practice, 62 sub-eons, six classes of rebirth, and eight stages in a person’s life; 4,900 Ājīvaka ascetics, 4,900 wanderers, and 4,900 dragon abodes; 2,000 lordships, 3,000 hells, and 36 realms of dusky sky; seven percipient embryos, seven non-percipient embryos, seven knotless embryos, seven gods, seven mental heavens, seven goblins, seven streams, seven castoff incarnations and 700 castoff incarnations, seven downfalls and 700 downfalls, seven dreams and 700 dreams, and 8.4 million great eons—through all of which the foolish and the astute transmigrate before making an end of suffering. And here there is no such thing as this: “By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice I shall force unripened deeds to bear their fruit, or eliminate old deeds by experiencing their results little by little,” for that cannot be. Pleasure and pain are allotted. Transmigration lasts only for a limited period, so there’s no increase or decrease, no getting better or worse. It’s like how, when you toss a ball of string, it rolls away unraveling. In the same way, after transmigrating the foolish and the astute will make an end of suffering.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, makkhali gosālo maṁ etadavoca: ‘natthi, mahārāja, hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya, ahetū apaccayā sattā saṅkilissanti. Natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā, ahetū apaccayā sattā visujjhanti. Natthi attakāre, natthi parakāre, natthi purisakāre, natthi balaṁ, natthi vīriyaṁ, natthi purisathāmo, natthi purisaparakkamo. Sabbe sattā sabbe pāṇā sabbe bhūtā sabbe jīvā avasā abalā avīriyā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā chasvevābhijātīsu sukhadukkhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti. Cuddasa kho panimāni yonipamukhasatasahassāni saṭṭhi ca satāni cha ca satāni pañca ca kammuno satāni pañca ca kammāni tīṇi ca kammāni kamme ca aḍḍhakamme ca dvaṭṭhipaṭipadā dvaṭṭhantarakappā chaḷābhijātiyo aṭṭha purisabhūmiyo ekūnapaññāsa ājīvakasate ekūnapaññāsa paribbājakasate ekūnapaññāsa nāgāvāsasate vīse indriyasate tiṁse nirayasate chattiṁsa rajodhātuyo satta saññīgabbhā satta asaññīgabbhā satta nigaṇṭhigabbhā satta devā satta mānusā satta pisācā satta sarā satta pavuṭā satta pavuṭasatāni satta papātā satta papātasatāni satta supinā satta supinasatāni cullāsīti mahākappino satasahassāni, yāni bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti. Tattha natthi “imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā aparipakkaṁ vā kammaṁ paripācessāmi, paripakkaṁ vā kammaṁ phussa phussa byantiṁ karissāmī”ti hevaṁ natthi. Doṇamite sukhadukkhe pariyantakate saṁsāre, natthi hāyanavaḍḍhane, natthi ukkaṁsāvakaṁse. Seyyathāpi nāma suttaguḷe khitte nibbeṭhiyamānameva paleti; evameva bāle ca paṇḍite ca sandhāvitvā saṁsaritvā dukkhassantaṁ karissantī’ti.
[¶40] And so, when I asked the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life, he answered with the doctrine of purification through transmigration. It was like someone who, when asked about a mango, answered with a breadfruit, or when asked about a breadfruit, answered with a mango. I thought: ‘How on earth could one such as I presume to rebuke an ascetic or brahmin living in my realm?’ So I neither approved nor rejected that statement of the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla. I was displeased, but did not express my displeasure. Neither accepting what he said nor contradicting it, I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: Itthaṁ kho me, bhante, makkhali gosālo sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno saṁsārasuddhiṁ byākāsi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, ambaṁ vā puṭṭho labujaṁ byākareyya, labujaṁ vā puṭṭho ambaṁ byākareyya; evameva kho me, bhante, makkhali gosālo sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno saṁsārasuddhiṁ byākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘kathañhi nāma mādiso samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā vijite vasantaṁ apasādetabbaṁ maññeyyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, makkhalissa gosālassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁ nappaṭikkosiṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā anattamano, anattamanavācaṁ anicchāretvā, tameva vācaṁ anuggaṇhanto anikkujjanto uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶41] 3.3. The Doctrine of Ajita of the Hair Blanket
> Pali: 3.3. Ajitakesakambalavāda
[¶42] This one time, sir, I approached Ajita of the hair blanket and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, I sat down to one side, and asked him the same question.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ yena ajito kesakambalo tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā ajitena kesakambalena saddhiṁ sammodiṁ. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ahaṁ, bhante, ajitaṁ kesakambalaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bho ajita, puthusippāyatanāni …pe… sakkā nu kho, bho ajita, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’ti?
[¶43] He said: ‘Great king, there is no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight. This person is made up of the four principal states. When they die, the earth in their body merges and coalesces with the substance of earth. The water in their body merges and coalesces with the substance of water. The fire in their body merges and coalesces with the substance of fire. The air in their body merges and coalesces with the substance of air. The faculties are transferred to space. Four men with a bier carry away the corpse. Their footprints show the way to the cremation ground. The bones become bleached. Offerings dedicated to the gods end in ashes. Giving is a doctrine of morons. When anyone affirms a positive teaching it’s just hollow, false nonsense. Both the foolish and the astute are annihilated and destroyed when their body breaks up, and don’t exist after death.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, ajito kesakambalo maṁ etadavoca: ‘natthi, mahārāja, dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā, ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedenti. Cātumahābhūtiko ayaṁ puriso, yadā kālaṁ karoti, pathavī pathavikāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, āpo āpokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, tejo tejokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, vāyo vāyokāyaṁ anupeti anupagacchati, ākāsaṁ indriyāni saṅkamanti. Āsandipañcamā purisā mataṁ ādāya gacchanti. Yāvāḷāhanā padāni paññāyanti. Kāpotakāni aṭṭhīni bhavanti, bhassantā āhutiyo. Dattupaññattaṁ yadidaṁ dānaṁ. Tesaṁ tucchaṁ musā vilāpo ye keci atthikavādaṁ vadanti. Bāle ca paṇḍite ca kāyassa bhedā ucchijjanti vinassanti, na honti paraṁ maraṇā’ti.
[¶44] And so, when I asked Ajita of the hair blanket about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life, he answered with the doctrine of annihilationism. It was like someone who, when asked about a mango, answered with a breadfruit, or when asked about a breadfruit, answered with a mango. I thought: ‘How on earth could one such as I presume to rebuke an ascetic or brahmin living in my realm?’ So I neither approved nor rejected that statement of Ajita of the hair blanket. I was displeased, but did not express my displeasure. Neither accepting what he said nor contradicting it, I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: Itthaṁ kho me, bhante, ajito kesakambalo sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno ucchedaṁ byākāsi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, ambaṁ vā puṭṭho labujaṁ byākareyya, labujaṁ vā puṭṭho ambaṁ byākareyya; evameva kho me, bhante, ajito kesakambalo sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno ucchedaṁ byākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘kathañhi nāma mādiso samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā vijite vasantaṁ apasādetabbaṁ maññeyyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, ajitassa kesakambalassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁ nappaṭikkosiṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā anattamano anattamanavācaṁ anicchāretvā tameva vācaṁ anuggaṇhanto anikkujjanto uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶45] 3.4. The Doctrine of Pakudha Kaccāyana
> Pali: 3.4. Pakudhakaccāyanavāda
[¶46] This one time, sir, I approached Pakudha Kaccāyana and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, I sat down to one side, and asked him the same question.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ yena pakudho kaccāyano tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā pakudhena kaccāyanena saddhiṁ sammodiṁ. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ahaṁ, bhante, pakudhaṁ kaccāyanaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bho kaccāyana, puthusippāyatanāni …pe… sakkā nu kho, bho kaccāyana, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’ti?
[¶47] He said: ‘Great king, these seven substances are not made, not derived, not created, without a creator, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They don’t move or deteriorate or obstruct each other. They’re unable to cause pleasure, pain, or both pleasure and pain to each other. What seven? The substances of earth, water, fire, air; pleasure, pain, and the soul is the seventh. These seven substances are not made, not derived, not created, without a creator, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They don’t move or deteriorate or obstruct each other. They’re unable to cause pleasure, pain, or both pleasure and pain to each other. And here there is no one who kills or who makes others kill; no one who learns or who educates others; no one who understands or who helps others understand. If you chop off someone’s head with a sharp sword, you don’t take anyone’s life. The sword simply passes through the gap between the seven substances.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, pakudho kaccāyano maṁ etadavoca: ‘sattime, mahārāja, kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā animmitā animmātā vañjhā kūṭaṭṭhā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitā. Te na iñjanti, na vipariṇamanti, na aññamaññaṁ byābādhenti, nālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā. Katame satta? Pathavikāyo, āpokāyo, tejokāyo, vāyokāyo, sukhe, dukkhe, jīve sattame— ime satta kāyā akaṭā akaṭavidhā animmitā animmātā vañjhā kūṭaṭṭhā esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitā. Te na iñjanti, na vipariṇamanti, na aññamaññaṁ byābādhenti, nālaṁ aññamaññassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā. Tattha natthi hantā vā ghātetā vā, sotā vā sāvetā vā, viññātā vā viññāpetā vā. Yopi tiṇhena satthena sīsaṁ chindati, na koci kiñci jīvitā voropeti; sattannaṁ tveva kāyānamantarena satthaṁ vivaramanupatatī’ti.
[¶48] And so, when I asked Pakudha Kaccāyana about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life, he answered with something else entirely. It was like someone who, when asked about a mango, answered with a breadfruit, or when asked about a breadfruit, answered with a mango. I thought: ‘How on earth could one such as I presume to rebuke an ascetic or brahmin living in my realm?’ So I neither approved nor rejected that statement of Pakudha Kaccāyana. I was displeased, but did not express my displeasure. Neither accepting what he said nor contradicting it, I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: Itthaṁ kho me, bhante, pakudho kaccāyano sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno aññena aññaṁ byākāsi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, ambaṁ vā puṭṭho labujaṁ byākareyya, labujaṁ vā puṭṭho ambaṁ byākareyya; evameva kho me, bhante, pakudho kaccāyano sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno aññena aññaṁ byākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘kathañhi nāma mādiso samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā vijite vasantaṁ apasādetabbaṁ maññeyyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, pakudhassa kaccāyanassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁ nappaṭikkosiṁ, anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā anattamano, anattamanavācaṁ anicchāretvā tameva vācaṁ anuggaṇhanto anikkujjanto uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶49] 3.5. The Doctrine of the Jain Ascetic of the Ñātika Clan
> Pali: 3.5. Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtavāda
[¶50] This one time, sir, I approached the Jain Ñātika and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, I sat down to one side, and asked him the same question.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ yena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā nigaṇṭhena nāṭaputtena saddhiṁ sammodiṁ. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ahaṁ, bhante, nigaṇṭhaṁ nāṭaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bho aggivessana, puthusippāyatanāni …pe… sakkā nu kho, bho aggivessana, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’ti?
[¶51] He said: ‘Great king, consider a Jain ascetic who is restrained in the fourfold constraint. And how is a Jain ascetic restrained in the fourfold constraint? It’s when a Jain ascetic is restrained in all that is to be restrained, is bridled in all that is to be restrained, has shaken off evil in all that is to be restrained, and is curbed in all that is to be restrained. That’s how a Jain ascetic is restrained in the fourfold constraint. When a Jain ascetic is restrained in the fourfold constraint, they’re called a knotless one who is self-realized, self-controlled, and steadfast.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘idha, mahārāja, nigaṇṭho cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti. Kathañca, mahārāja, nigaṇṭho cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti? Idha, mahārāja, nigaṇṭho sabbavārivārito ca hoti, sabbavāriyutto ca, sabbavāridhuto ca, sabbavāriphuṭo ca. Evaṁ kho, mahārāja, nigaṇṭho cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti. Yato kho, mahārāja, nigaṇṭho evaṁ cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti; ayaṁ vuccati, mahārāja, nigaṇṭho gatatto ca yatatto ca ṭhitatto cā’ti.
[¶52] And so, when I asked the Jain Ñātika about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life, he answered with the fourfold constraint. It was like someone who, when asked about a mango, answered with a breadfruit, or when asked about a breadfruit, answered with a mango. I thought: ‘How on earth could one such as I presume to rebuke an ascetic or brahmin living in my realm?’ So I neither approved nor rejected that statement of the Jain Ñātika. I was displeased, but did not express my displeasure. Neither accepting what he said nor contradicting it, I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: Itthaṁ kho me, bhante, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno cātuyāmasaṁvaraṁ byākāsi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, ambaṁ vā puṭṭho labujaṁ byākareyya, labujaṁ vā puṭṭho ambaṁ byākareyya; evameva kho me, bhante, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno cātuyāmasaṁvaraṁ byākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘kathañhi nāma mādiso samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā vijite vasantaṁ apasādetabbaṁ maññeyyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁ nappaṭikkosiṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā anattamano anattamanavācaṁ anicchāretvā tameva vācaṁ anuggaṇhanto anikkujjanto uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶53] 3.6. The Doctrine of Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta
> Pali: 3.6. Sañcayabelaṭṭhaputtavāda
[¶54] This one time, sir, I approached Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, I sat down to one side, and asked him the same question.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ yena sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā sañcayena belaṭṭhaputtena saddhiṁ sammodiṁ. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁ. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho ahaṁ, bhante, sañcayaṁ belaṭṭhaputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bho sañcaya, puthusippāyatanāni …pe… sakkā nu kho, bho sañcaya, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’ti?
[¶55] He said: ‘Suppose you were to ask me whether there is another world. If I believed that to be the case, I would say so. But I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so. Suppose you were to ask me whether there is no other world … whether there both is and is not another world … whether there neither is nor is not another world … whether there are beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there are no beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there both are and are not beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there neither are nor are not beings who are reborn spontaneously … whether there is fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether there is no fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether there both is and is not fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether there neither is nor is not fruit and result of good and bad deeds … whether a realized one still exists after death … whether a realized one no longer exists after death … whether a realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death … whether a realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death. If I believed that to be the case, I would say so. But I don’t say it’s like this. I don’t say it’s like that. I don’t say it’s otherwise. I don’t say it’s not so. And I don’t deny it’s not so.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘atthi paro lokoti iti ce maṁ pucchasi, atthi paro lokoti iti ce me assa, atthi paro lokoti iti te naṁ byākareyyaṁ. Evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no. Natthi paro loko …pe… atthi ca natthi ca paro loko …pe… nevatthi na natthi paro loko …pe… atthi sattā opapātikā …pe… natthi sattā opapātikā …pe… atthi ca natthi ca sattā opapātikā …pe… nevatthi na natthi sattā opapātikā …pe… atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… atthi ca natthi ca sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… nevatthi na natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko …pe… hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā …pe… na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā …pe… hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā …pe… neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇāti iti ce maṁ pucchasi, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇāti iti ce me assa, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇāti iti te naṁ byākareyyaṁ. Evantipi me no, tathātipi me no, aññathātipi me no, notipi me no, no notipi me no’ti.
[¶56] And so, when I asked Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life, he answered with flip-flopping. It was like someone who, when asked about a mango, answered with a breadfruit, or when asked about a breadfruit, answered with a mango. I thought: ‘This is the most foolish and stupid of all these ascetics and brahmins! How on earth can he answer with flip-flopping when asked about the fruits of the ascetic life apparent in the present life?’ I thought: ‘How on earth could one such as I presume to rebuke an ascetic or brahmin living in my realm?’ So I neither approved nor rejected that statement of Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta. I was displeased, but did not express my displeasure. Neither accepting what he said nor contradicting it, I rose from my seat and left.
> Pali: Itthaṁ kho me, bhante, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno vikkhepaṁ byākāsi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, ambaṁ vā puṭṭho labujaṁ byākareyya, labujaṁ vā puṭṭho ambaṁ byākareyya; evameva kho me, bhante, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno vikkhepaṁ byākāsi. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘ayañca imesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho. Kathañhi nāma sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ puṭṭho samāno vikkhepaṁ byākarissatī’ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘kathañhi nāma mādiso samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā vijite vasantaṁ apasādetabbaṁ maññeyyā’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, sañcayassa belaṭṭhaputtassa bhāsitaṁ neva abhinandiṁ nappaṭikkosiṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā anattamano anattamanavācaṁ anicchāretvā tameva vācaṁ anuggaṇhanto anikkujjanto uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkamiṁ.
[¶57] 4. The Fruits of the Ascetic Life
> Pali: 4. Sāmaññaphala
[¶58] 4.1. The First Fruit of the Ascetic Life
> Pali: 4.1. Paṭhamasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphala
[¶59] And so I ask the Buddha: Sir, there are many different professional fields. These include elephant marshals, cavalry, charioteers, archers, bannermen, adjutants, food servers, warrior-chiefs, princes, chargers, great warriors, heroes, leather-clad soldiers, and sons of bondservants. They also include bakers, barbers, bathroom attendants, cooks, garland-makers, dyers, embroiderers, basket-makers, potters, accountants, finger-talliers, or those following any similar professions. All these live off the fruits of their profession which are apparent in this very life. With that they make themselves happy and pleased. They make their parents, their children and partners, and their friends and colleagues happy and pleased. And they establish an uplifting religious donation for ascetics and brahmins that’s conducive to heaven, ripens in happiness, and leads to heaven. Sir, can you point out a fruit of the ascetic life that’s likewise apparent in this very life?”
> Pali: Sohaṁ, bhante, bhagavantampi pucchāmi: ‘yathā nu kho imāni, bhante, puthusippāyatanāni seyyathidaṁ—hatthārohā assārohā rathikā dhanuggahā celakā calakā piṇḍadāyakā uggā rājaputtā pakkhandino mahānāgā sūrā cammayodhino dāsikaputtā āḷārikā kappakā nhāpakā sūdā mālakārā rajakā pesakārā naḷakārā kumbhakārā gaṇakā muddikā, yāni vā panaññānipi evaṅgatāni puthusippāyatanāni, te diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sippaphalaṁ upajīvanti, te tena attānaṁ sukhenti pīṇenti, mātāpitaro sukhenti pīṇenti, puttadāraṁ sukhenti pīṇenti, mittāmacce sukhenti pīṇenti, samaṇabrāhmaṇesu uddhaggikaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ patiṭṭhapenti sovaggikaṁ sukhavipākaṁ saggasaṁvattanikaṁ. Sakkā nu kho, bhante, evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun’”ti?
[¶60] “I can, Great King. Well then, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, Great King? Suppose you had a person who was a bondservant, a worker. They get up before you and go to bed after you, and are obliging, behaving nicely and speaking politely, and gazing up at your face. They’d think: ‘The outcome and result of good deeds is just so incredible, so amazing! For this King Ajātasattu is a human being, and so am I. Yet he amuses himself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation as if he were a god. Whereas I’m his bondservant, his worker. I get up before him and go to bed after him, and am obliging, behaving nicely and speaking politely, and gazing up at his face. I really should do good deeds. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’
> Pali: “Sakkā, mahārāja. Tena hi, mahārāja, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha te assa puriso dāso kammakāro pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī mukhullokako. Tassa evamassa: ‘acchariyaṁ, vata bho, abbhutaṁ, vata bho, puññānaṁ gati, puññānaṁ vipāko. Ayañhi rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto manusso; ahampi manusso. Ayañhi rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, devo maññe. Ahaṁ panamhissa dāso kammakāro pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī mukhullokako. So vatassāhaṁ puññāni kareyyaṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.
## 5. DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/5/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/5/#p-N
[¶0] After some time, that is what they do. Having gone forth they’d live restrained in body, speech, and mind, living content with nothing more than food and clothes, delighting in seclusion. And suppose your men were to report all this to you. Would you say to them: ‘Bring that person to me! Let them once more be my bondservant, my worker’?”
> Pali: So aparena samayena kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyya. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kāyena saṁvuto vihareyya, vācāya saṁvuto vihareyya, manasā saṁvuto vihareyya, ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭho, abhirato paviveke. Tañce te purisā evamāroceyyuṁ: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, yo te so puriso dāso kammakāro pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī mukhullokako; so, deva, kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kāyena saṁvuto viharati, vācāya saṁvuto viharati, manasā saṁvuto viharati, ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭho, abhirato paviveke’ti. Api nu tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘etu me, bho, so puriso, punadeva hotu dāso kammakāro pubbuṭṭhāyī pacchānipātī kiṅkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī piyavādī mukhullokako’”ti?
[¶1] “No, sir. Rather, I would bow to them, rise in their presence, and offer them a seat. I’d invite them to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. And I’d organize their lawful guarding and protection.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Atha kho naṁ mayameva abhivādeyyāmapi, paccuṭṭheyyāmapi, āsanenapi nimanteyyāma, abhinimanteyyāmapi naṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi, dhammikampissa rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāmā”ti.
[¶2] “What do you think, Great King? If this is so, is there a fruit of the ascetic life apparent in the present life or not?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, yadi evaṁ sante hoti vā sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ no vā”ti?
[¶3] “Clearly, sir, there is.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante hoti sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalan”ti.
[¶4] “This is the first fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in this very life, which I point out to you.”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho te, mahārāja, mayā paṭhamaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññattan”ti.
[¶5] 4.2. The Second Fruit of the Ascetic Life
> Pali: 4.2. Dutiyasandiṭṭhikasāmaññaphala
[¶6] “But sir, can you point out another fruit of the ascetic life that’s likewise apparent in this very life?”
> Pali: “Sakkā pana, bhante, aññampi evameva diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetun”ti?
[¶7] “I can, Great King. Well then, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, Great King? Suppose you had a person who was a farmer, a householder, a hard worker, someone who builds up their capital. They’d think: ‘The outcome and result of good deeds is just so incredible, so amazing! For this King Ajātasattu is a human being, and so am I. Yet he amuses himself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation as if he were a god. Whereas I’m a farmer, a householder, a hard worker, someone who builds up their capital. I really should do good deeds. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’
> Pali: “Sakkā, mahārāja. Tena hi, mahārāja, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja, idha te assa puriso kassako gahapatiko karakārako rāsivaḍḍhako. Tassa evamassa: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, puññānaṁ gati, puññānaṁ vipāko. Ayañhi rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto manusso, ahampi manusso. Ayañhi rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, devo maññe. Ahaṁ panamhissa kassako gahapatiko karakārako rāsivaḍḍhako. So vatassāhaṁ puññāni kareyyaṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.
[¶8] After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They’d shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Having gone forth they’d live restrained in body, speech, and mind, living content with nothing more than food and clothes, delighting in seclusion. And suppose your men were to report all this to you. Would you say to them: ‘Bring that person to me! Let them once more be a farmer, a householder, a hard worker, someone who builds up their capital’?”
> Pali: So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya, appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyya. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kāyena saṁvuto vihareyya, vācāya saṁvuto vihareyya, manasā saṁvuto vihareyya, ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭho, abhirato paviveke. Tañce te purisā evamāroceyyuṁ: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, yo te so puriso kassako gahapatiko karakārako rāsivaḍḍhako; so deva kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno kāyena saṁvuto viharati, vācāya saṁvuto viharati, manasā saṁvuto viharati, ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭho, abhirato paviveke’ti. Api nu tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘etu me, bho, so puriso, punadeva hotu kassako gahapatiko karakārako rāsivaḍḍhako’”ti?
[¶9] “No, sir. Rather, I would bow to them, rise in their presence, and offer them a seat. I’d invite them to accept robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. And I’d organize their lawful guarding and protection.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Atha kho naṁ mayameva abhivādeyyāmapi, paccuṭṭheyyāmapi, āsanenapi nimanteyyāma, abhinimanteyyāmapi naṁ cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi, dhammikampissa rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidaheyyāmā”ti.
[¶10] “What do you think, Great King? If this is so, is there a fruit of the ascetic life apparent in the present life or not?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, mahārāja? Yadi evaṁ sante hoti vā sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ no vā”ti?
[¶11] “Clearly, sir, there is.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante hoti sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalan”ti.
[¶12] “This is the second fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in this very life, which I point out to you.”
> Pali: “Idaṁ kho te, mahārāja, mayā dutiyaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññattan”ti.
[¶13] 4.3. The Finer Fruits of the Ascetic Life
> Pali: 4.3. Paṇītatarasāmaññaphala
[¶14] “But sir, can you point out a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in this very life which is better and finer than these?”
> Pali: “Sakkā pana, bhante, aññampi diṭṭheva dhamme sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ paññapetuṁ imehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañcā”ti?
[¶15] “I can, Great King. Well then, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Sakkā, mahārāja. Tena hi, mahārāja, suṇohi, sādhukaṁ manasi karohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶16] “Yes, sir,” replied the king.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶17] The Buddha said this:
> Pali: Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶18] “Consider when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure.
> Pali: “idha, mahārāja, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti.
[¶19] A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’
> Pali: Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā. Nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti.
[¶20] After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati.
[¶21] Once they’ve gone forth, they live restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. They act skillfully by body and speech. They’re purified in livelihood and accomplished in ethical conduct. They guard the sense doors, have mindfulness and situational awareness, and are content.
> Pali: So evaṁ pabbajito samāno pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena, parisuddhājīvo sīlasampanno, indriyesu guttadvāro, satisampajaññena samannāgato, santuṭṭho.
[¶22] 4.3.1. Ethics
> Pali: 4.3.1. Sīla
[¶23] 4.3.1.1. The Shorter Section on Ethics
> Pali: 4.3.1.1. Cūḷasīla
[¶24] And how, Great King, is a mendicant accomplished in ethics? It’s when a mendicant gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti? Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti. Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶25] They give up stealing. They take only what’s given, and expect only what’s given. They keep themselves clean by not thieving. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Adinnādānaṁ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti dinnādāyī dinnapāṭikaṅkhī, athenena sucibhūtena attanā viharati. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶26] They give up unchastity. They are chaste, set apart, refraining from the vulgar act of sex. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Abrahmacariyaṁ pahāya brahmacārī hoti ārācārī virato methunā gāmadhammā. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶27] They give up lying. They speak the truth and stick to the truth. They’re honest and dependable, and don’t trick the world with their words. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato hoti saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶28] They give up backbiting. They don’t repeat in one place what they heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, they reconcile those who are divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya; amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā, amūsaṁ bhedāya. Iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶29] They give up harsh speech. They speak in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti; yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶30] They give up talking nonsense. Their words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. They say things at the right time which are valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā hoti kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶31] They refrain from injuring plants and seeds. They eat in one part of the day, abstaining from eating at night and food at the wrong time. They refrain from seeing shows of dancing, singing, and music. They refrain from attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. They refrain from high and luxurious beds. They refrain from receiving gold and currency, raw grains, raw meat, women and girls, male and female bondservants, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, elephants, cows, horses, and mares, and fields and land. They refrain from running errands and messages; buying and selling; falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti …pe… ekabhattiko hoti rattūparato virato vikālabhojanā. Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Āmakamaṁsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Ajeḷakapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Kukkuṭasūkarapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Hatthigavassavaḷavapaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Khettavatthupaṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato hoti. Dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. Kayavikkayā paṭivirato hoti. Tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭā paṭivirato hoti. Ukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogā paṭivirato hoti. Chedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶32] The shorter section on ethics is complete.
> Pali: Cūḷasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶33] 4.3.1.2. The Middle Section on Ethics
> Pali: 4.3.1.2. Majjhimasīla
[¶34] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in injuring plants and seeds. These include plants propagated from roots, trunks, cuttings, or joints; and those from regular seeds as the fifth. They refrain from such injury to plants and seeds. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—mūlabījaṁ khandhabījaṁ phaḷubījaṁ aggabījaṁ bījabījameva pañcamaṁ, iti evarūpā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶35] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in storing up goods for their own use. This includes such things as food, drink, clothes, vehicles, bedding, fragrance, and things of the flesh. They refrain from storing up such goods. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ sannidhikāraparibhogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—annasannidhiṁ pānasannidhiṁ vatthasannidhiṁ yānasannidhiṁ sayanasannidhiṁ gandhasannidhiṁ āmisasannidhiṁ, iti vā iti evarūpā sannidhikāraparibhogā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶36] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in seeing shows. This includes such things as dancing, singing, music, performances, and storytelling; clapping, gongs, and kettledrums; beauty pageants; pole-acrobatics and bone-washing displays of the corpse-workers; battles of elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, goats, rams, chickens, and quails; staff-fights, boxing, and wrestling; combat, roll calls of the armed forces, battle-formations, and regimental reviews. They refrain from such shows. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ visūkadassanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—naccaṁ gītaṁ vāditaṁ pekkhaṁ akkhānaṁ pāṇissaraṁ vetāḷaṁ kumbhathūṇaṁ sobhanakaṁ caṇḍālaṁ vaṁsaṁ dhovanaṁ hatthiyuddhaṁ assayuddhaṁ mahiṁsayuddhaṁ usabhayuddhaṁ ajayuddhaṁ meṇḍayuddhaṁ kukkuṭayuddhaṁ vaṭṭakayuddhaṁ daṇḍayuddhaṁ muṭṭhiyuddhaṁ nibbuddhaṁ uyyodhikaṁ balaggaṁ senābyūhaṁ anīkadassanaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā visūkadassanā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶37] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in gambling that causes negligence. This includes such things as checkers with eight or ten rows, checkers in the air, hopscotch, spillikins, board-games, tip-cat, drawing straws, dice, leaf-flutes, toy plows, somersaults, pinwheels, toy measures, toy carts, toy bows, guessing words from syllables, guessing another’s thoughts, and imitating musical instruments. They refrain from such gambling. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhapadaṁ dasapadaṁ ākāsaṁ parihārapathaṁ santikaṁ khalikaṁ ghaṭikaṁ salākahatthaṁ akkhaṁ paṅgacīraṁ vaṅkakaṁ mokkhacikaṁ ciṅgulikaṁ pattāḷhakaṁ rathakaṁ dhanukaṁ akkharikaṁ manesikaṁ yathāvajjaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶38] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still make use of high and luxurious bedding. This includes such things as sofas, couches, woolen covers—shag-piled, colorful, white, embroidered with flowers, quilted, embroidered with animals, double or single fringed—and silk covers studded with gems, as well as silken sheets, wollen carpets, rugs for elephants, horses, or chariots, black antelope hides and woven rugs, and spreads of fine deer hide, with a canopy above and red cushions at both ends. They refrain from such bedding. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ uccāsayanamahāsayanaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—āsandiṁ pallaṅkaṁ gonakaṁ cittakaṁ paṭikaṁ paṭalikaṁ tūlikaṁ vikatikaṁ uddalomiṁ ekantalomiṁ kaṭṭissaṁ koseyyaṁ kuttakaṁ hatthattharaṁ assattharaṁ rathattharaṁ ajinappaveṇiṁ kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇaṁ sauttaracchadaṁ ubhatolohitakūpadhānaṁ iti vā iti evarūpā uccāsayanamahāsayanā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶39] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in attiring and adorning themselves with garlands, fragrance, and makeup. This includes such things as applying beauty products by anointing, massaging, bathing, and rubbing; mirrors, ointments, garlands, fragrances, and makeup; face-powder, foundation, bracelets, headbands, fancy walking-sticks or containers, rapiers, parasols, fancy sandals, turbans, jewelry, chowries, and long-fringed white robes. They refrain from such attirement and adornment. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—ucchādanaṁ parimaddanaṁ nhāpanaṁ sambāhanaṁ ādāsaṁ añjanaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ mukhacuṇṇaṁ mukhalepanaṁ hatthabandhaṁ sikhābandhaṁ daṇḍaṁ nāḷikaṁ asiṁ chattaṁ citrupāhanaṁ uṇhīsaṁ maṇiṁ vālabījaniṁ odātāni vatthāni dīghadasāni iti vā iti evarūpā maṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶40] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in low talk. This includes such topics as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place. They refrain from such low talk. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānakathāya paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶41] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in arguments. They say such things as: ‘You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!’ They refrain from such argumentative talk. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ viggāhikakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi, micchā paṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammā paṭipanno, sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te, pure vacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchā vacanīyaṁ pure avaca, adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti iti vā iti evarūpāya viggāhikakathāya paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶42] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in running errands and messages. This includes running errands for rulers, ministers, aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or princes who say: ‘Go here, go there. Take this, bring that from there.’ They refrain from such errands. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpaṁ dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ, rājamahāmattānaṁ, khattiyānaṁ, brāhmaṇānaṁ, gahapatikānaṁ, kumārānaṁ—idha gaccha, amutrāgaccha, idaṁ hara, amutra idaṁ āharā’ti iti vā iti evarūpā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānuyogā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶43] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still engage in fawning, flattery, hinting, and belittling, and using material things to chase after other material things. They refrain from such fraud and flattery. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te kuhakā ca honti lapakā ca nemittikā ca nippesikā ca lābhena lābhaṁ nijigīsitāro ca. Iti evarūpā kuhanalapanā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶44] The middle section on ethics is complete.
> Pali: Majjhimasīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶45] 4.3.1.3. The Long Section on Ethics
> Pali: 4.3.1.3. Mahāsīla
[¶46] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes such fields as augury, omenology, divining portents, interpreting dreams, divining features of men and women, divining holes in cloth gnawed by mice, fire offerings, ladle offerings, offerings of husks, rice powder, rice, ghee, or oil; offerings from the mouth, blood sacrifices, limb-reading; geomancy for building sites, fields, and cemeteries; exorcisms, earth magic, snake charming, poisons; the lore of the scorpion, the rat, the bird, and the crow; prophesying lifespan, chanting for protection, and divining omens from wild animals. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—aṅgaṁ nimittaṁ uppātaṁ supinaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ mūsikacchinnaṁ aggihomaṁ dabbihomaṁ thusahomaṁ kaṇahomaṁ taṇḍulahomaṁ sappihomaṁ telahomaṁ mukhahomaṁ lohitahomaṁ aṅgavijjā vatthuvijjā khattavijjā sivavijjā bhūtavijjā bhūrivijjā ahivijjā visavijjā vicchikavijjā mūsikavijjā sakuṇavijjā vāyasavijjā pakkajjhānaṁ saraparittāṇaṁ migacakkaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶47] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes reading the marks of gems, cloth, clubs, swords, spears, arrows, bows, weapons, women, men, boys, girls, male and female bondservants, elephants, horses, buffaloes, bulls, cows, goats, rams, chickens, quails, monitor lizards, rabbits, tortoises, or deer. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—maṇilakkhaṇaṁ vatthalakkhaṇaṁ daṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ satthalakkhaṇaṁ asilakkhaṇaṁ usulakkhaṇaṁ dhanulakkhaṇaṁ āvudhalakkhaṇaṁ itthilakkhaṇaṁ purisalakkhaṇaṁ kumāralakkhaṇaṁ kumārilakkhaṇaṁ dāsalakkhaṇaṁ dāsilakkhaṇaṁ hatthilakkhaṇaṁ assalakkhaṇaṁ mahiṁsalakkhaṇaṁ usabhalakkhaṇaṁ golakkhaṇaṁ ajalakkhaṇaṁ meṇḍalakkhaṇaṁ kukkuṭalakkhaṇaṁ vaṭṭakalakkhaṇaṁ godhālakkhaṇaṁ kaṇṇikalakkhaṇaṁ kacchapalakkhaṇaṁ migalakkhaṇaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶48] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes making predictions that the king will march forth or march back; or that our king will attack and the enemy king will retreat, or vice versa; or that our king will triumph and the enemy king will be defeated, or vice versa; and so there will be victory for one and defeat for the other. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—raññaṁ niyyānaṁ bhavissati, raññaṁ aniyyānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ upayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ apayānaṁ bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, bāhirānaṁ raññaṁ jayo bhavissati, abbhantarānaṁ raññaṁ parājayo bhavissati, iti imassa jayo bhavissati, imassa parājayo bhavissati iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶49] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes making predictions that there will be an eclipse of the moon, or sun, or stars; that the sun, moon, and stars will be in conjunction or in opposition; that there will be a meteor shower, a fiery horizon, an earthquake, or thunder in the heavens; that there will be a rising, a setting, a darkening, a brightening of the moon, sun, and stars. And it also includes making predictions about the results of all such phenomena. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—candaggāho bhavissati, sūriyaggāho bhavissati, nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, ukkāpāto bhavissati, disāḍāho bhavissati, bhūmicālo bhavissati, devadudrabhi bhavissati, candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko candaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko sūriyaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko nakkhattaggāho bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ pathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ nakkhattānaṁ uppathagamanaṁ bhavissati, evaṁvipāko ukkāpāto bhavissati, evaṁvipāko disāḍāho bhavissati, evaṁvipāko bhūmicālo bhavissati, evaṁvipāko devadudrabhi bhavissati, evaṁvipākaṁ candimasūriyanakkhattānaṁ uggamanaṁ ogamanaṁ saṅkilesaṁ vodānaṁ bhavissati iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶50] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes predicting whether there will be plenty of rain or drought; plenty to eat or famine; an abundant harvest or a bad harvest; security or peril; sickness or health. It also includes such occupations as arithmetic, accounting, calculating, poetry, and cosmology. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—suvuṭṭhikā bhavissati, dubbuṭṭhikā bhavissati, subhikkhaṁ bhavissati, dubbhikkhaṁ bhavissati, khemaṁ bhavissati, bhayaṁ bhavissati, rogo bhavissati, ārogyaṁ bhavissati, muddā, gaṇanā, saṅkhānaṁ, kāveyyaṁ, lokāyataṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶51] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes making arrangements for giving and taking in marriage; for engagement and divorce; and for scattering rice inwards or outwards at the wedding ceremony. It also includes casting spells for good or bad luck, treating impacted fetuses, binding the tongue, or locking the jaws; charms for the hands and ears; questioning a mirror, a girl, or a god as an oracle; worshiping the sun, worshiping the Great One, breathing fire, and invoking Siri, the goddess of luck. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—āvāhanaṁ vivāhanaṁ saṁvaraṇaṁ vivaraṇaṁ saṅkiraṇaṁ vikiraṇaṁ subhagakaraṇaṁ dubbhagakaraṇaṁ viruddhagabbhakaraṇaṁ jivhānibandhanaṁ hanusaṁhananaṁ hatthābhijappanaṁ hanujappanaṁ kaṇṇajappanaṁ ādāsapañhaṁ kumārikapañhaṁ devapañhaṁ ādiccupaṭṭhānaṁ mahatupaṭṭhānaṁ abbhujjalanaṁ sirivhāyanaṁ iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶52] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes rites for propitiation, for granting wishes, for ghosts, for the earth, for rain, for property settlement, and for preparing and consecrating house sites, and rites involving sipping water and bathing, and oblations. It also includes administering emetics, purgatives, expectorants, and phlegmagogues; administering ear-oils, eye restoratives, nasal medicine, ointments, and counter-ointments; surgery with needle and scalpel, treating children, prescribing root medicines, and herbal bandages. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ bhūtakammaṁ bhūrikammaṁ vassakammaṁ vossakammaṁ vatthukammaṁ vatthuparikammaṁ ācamanaṁ nhāpanaṁ juhanaṁ vamanaṁ virecanaṁ uddhaṁvirecanaṁ adhovirecanaṁ sīsavirecanaṁ kaṇṇatelaṁ nettatappanaṁ natthukammaṁ añjanaṁ paccañjanaṁ sālākiyaṁ sallakattiyaṁ dārakatikicchā, mūlabhesajjānaṁ anuppadānaṁ, osadhīnaṁ paṭimokkho iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶53] A mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. It’s like a king who has defeated his enemies. He sees no danger from his foes in any quarter. In the same way, a mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves. That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics.
> Pali: Sa kho so, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto nihatapaccāmitto na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ paccatthikato; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Evaṁ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti.
[¶54] The longer section on ethics is complete.
> Pali: Mahāsīlaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶55] 4.3.2. Immersion
> Pali: 4.3.2. Samādhi
[¶56] 4.3.2.1. Sense Restraint
> Pali: 4.3.2.1. Indriyasaṁvara
[¶57] And how does a mendicant guard the sense doors? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves. That’s how a mendicant guards the sense doors.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti? Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhā domanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā …pe… jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …pe… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhā domanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Evaṁ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti.
[¶58] 4.3.2.2. Mindfulness and Situational Awareness
> Pali: 4.3.2.2. Satisampajañña
[¶59] And how does a mendicant have mindfulness and situational awareness? It’s when a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent. That’s how a mendicant has mindfulness and situational awareness.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti? Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti. Evaṁ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti.
[¶60] 4.3.2.3. Contentment
> Pali: 4.3.2.3. Santosa
[¶61] And how is a mendicant content? It’s when a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. That’s how a mendicant is content.
> Pali: Kathañca, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti? Idha, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena, kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti, sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. Evaṁ kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti.
[¶62] 4.3.2.4. Giving Up the Hindrances
> Pali: 4.3.2.4. Nīvaraṇappahāna
[¶63] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble sense restraint, this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, and this noble contentment, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato, vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.
[¶64] Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī, sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati, ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati, akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶65] Suppose a man who has gotten into debt were to apply himself to work, and his efforts proved successful. He would pay off the original loan and have enough left over to support his partner. Thinking about this, he’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojeyya. Tassa te kammantā samijjheyyuṁ. So yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni, tāni ca byantiṁ kareyya, siyā cassa uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojesiṁ. Tassa me te kammantā samijjhiṁsu. Sohaṁ yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni, tāni ca byantiṁ akāsiṁ, atthi ca me uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāyā’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶66] Suppose there was a person who was sick, suffering, gravely ill. They’d lose their appetite and get physically weak. But after some time they’d recover from that illness, and regain their appetite and their strength. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso ābādhiko assa dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; bhattañcassa nacchādeyya, na cassa kāye balamattā. So aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā mucceyya; bhattaṁ cassa chādeyya, siyā cassa kāye balamattā. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe ābādhiko ahosiṁ dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; bhattañca me nacchādesi, na ca me āsi kāye balamattā. Somhi etarahi tamhā ābādhā mutto; bhattañca me chādeti, atthi ca me kāye balamattā’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶67] Suppose a person was imprisoned in a jail. But after some time they were released from jail, safe and sound, with no loss of wealth. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso bandhanāgāre baddho assa. So aparena samayena tamhā bandhanāgārā mucceyya sotthinā abbhayena, na cassa kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe bandhanāgāre baddho ahosiṁ, somhi etarahi tamhā bandhanāgārā mutto sotthinā abbhayena. Natthi ca me kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶68] Suppose a person was a bondservant. They would not be their own master, but indentured to another, unable to go where they wish. But after some time they’d be freed from servitude. They would be their own master, not indentured to another, a freeman able to go where they wish. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso dāso assa anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. So aparena samayena tamhā dāsabyā mucceyya attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe dāso ahosiṁ anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. Somhi etarahi tamhā dāsabyā mutto attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
## 6. DN 2 · The Fruits of the Ascetic Life · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/6/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/6/#p-N
[¶0] Suppose there was a person with wealth and property who was traveling along a desert road, which was perilous, with nothing to eat. But after some time they crossed over the desert safely, arriving within a village, a sanctuary free of peril. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjeyya dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. So aparena samayena taṁ kantāraṁ nitthareyya sotthinā, gāmantaṁ anupāpuṇeyya khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjiṁ dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. Somhi etarahi taṁ kantāraṁ nitthiṇṇo sotthinā, gāmantaṁ anuppatto khemaṁ appaṭibhayan’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶1] In the same way, as long as these five hindrances are not given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards them as a debt, a disease, a prison, slavery, and a desert crossing.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu yathā iṇaṁ yathā rogaṁ yathā bandhanāgāraṁ yathā dāsabyaṁ yathā kantāraddhānamaggaṁ, evaṁ ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīne attani samanupassati.
[¶2] But when these five hindrances are given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards this as freedom from debt, good health, release from prison, emancipation, and a place of sanctuary at last.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, yathā āṇaṇyaṁ yathā ārogyaṁ yathā bandhanāmokkhaṁ yathā bhujissaṁ yathā khemantabhūmiṁ; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassati.
[¶3] Seeing that the hindrances have been given up in them, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed.
> Pali: Tassime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassato pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.
[¶4] 4.3.2.5. First Absorption
> Pali: 4.3.2.5. Paṭhamajhāna
[¶5] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion.
> Pali: So vivicceva kāmehi, vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶6] It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. This, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya, sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā phuṭā snehena, na ca paggharaṇī; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶7] 4.3.2.6. Second Absorption
> Pali: 4.3.2.6. Dutiyajhāna
[¶8] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahārāja, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶9] It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, udakarahado gambhīro ubbhidodako tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya. Atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶10] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶11] 4.3.2.7. Third Absorption
> Pali: 4.3.2.7. Tatiyajhāna
[¶12] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahārāja, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶13] It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water. In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶14] 4.3.2.8. Fourth Absorption
> Pali: 4.3.2.8. Catutthajhāna
[¶15] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahārāja, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶16] It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth. In the same way, they sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶17] 4.3.3. The Eight Knowledges
> Pali: 4.3.3. Aṭṭhañāṇa
[¶18] 4.3.3.1. Knowledge and Vision
> Pali: 4.3.3.1. Vipassanāñāṇa
[¶19] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. They understand: ‘This body of mine is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. And this consciousness of mine is attached to it, tied to it.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti.
[¶20] Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and examine it: ‘This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. Tatrāssa suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno; tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā’ti.
[¶21] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶22] 4.3.3.2. Mind-Made Body
> Pali: 4.3.3.2. Manomayiddhiñāṇa
[¶23] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ.
[¶24] Suppose a person was to draw a reed out from its sheath. They’d think: ‘This is the reed, this is the sheath. The reed and the sheath are different things. The reed has been drawn out from the sheath.’ Or suppose a person was to draw a sword out from its scabbard. They’d think: ‘This is the sword, this is the scabbard. The sword and the scabbard are different things. The sword has been drawn out from the scabbard.’ Or suppose a person was to draw a snake out from its slough. They’d think: ‘This is the snake, this is the slough. The snake and the slough are different things. The snake has been drawn out from the slough.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso muñjamhā īsikaṁ pavāheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ muñjo, ayaṁ īsikā, añño muñjo, aññā īsikā, muñjamhā tveva īsikā pavāḷhā’ti. Seyyathā vā pana, mahārāja, puriso asiṁ kosiyā pavāheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ asi, ayaṁ kosi, añño asi, aññā kosi, kosiyā tveva asi pavāḷho’ti. Seyyathā vā pana, mahārāja, puriso ahiṁ karaṇḍā uddhareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ ahi, ayaṁ karaṇḍo. Añño ahi, añño karaṇḍo, karaṇḍā tveva ahi ubbhato’ti.
[¶25] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶26] 4.3.3.3. Psychic Powers
> Pali: 4.3.3.3. Iddhividhañāṇa
[¶27] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. They wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyā; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.
[¶28] Suppose a deft potter or their apprentice had some well-prepared clay. They could produce any kind of pot that they like. Or suppose a deft ivory-carver or their apprentice had some well-prepared ivory. They could produce any kind of ivory item that they like. Or suppose a deft goldsmith or their apprentice had some well-prepared gold. They could produce any kind of gold item that they like.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, dakkho kumbhakāro vā kumbhakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatāya mattikāya yaṁ yadeva bhājanavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. Seyyathā vā pana, mahārāja, dakkho dantakāro vā dantakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ dantasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva dantavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. Seyyathā vā pana, mahārāja, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ suvaṇṇasmiṁ yaṁ yadeva suvaṇṇavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya.
[¶29] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyā; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶30] 4.3.3.4. Clairaudience
> Pali: 4.3.3.4. Dibbasotañāṇa
[¶31] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca.
[¶32] Suppose there was a person traveling along the road. They’d hear the sound of drums, clay drums, horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms. They’d think: ‘That’s the sound of drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of clay drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso addhānamaggappaṭipanno. So suṇeyya bherisaddampi mudiṅgasaddampi saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘bherisaddo’ itipi, ‘mudiṅgasaddo’ itipi, ‘saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddo’ itipi.
[¶33] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶34] 4.3.3.5. Encompassing the Minds of Others
> Pali: 4.3.3.5. Cetopariyañāṇa
[¶35] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. They understand mind with greed as ‘mind with greed’, and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed’. They understand mind with hate … mind without hate … mind with delusion … mind without delusion … constricted mind … scattered mind … expansive mind … unexpansive mind … mind that is not supreme … mind that is supreme … immersed mind … unimmersed mind … freed mind … They understand unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.
[¶36] Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments, and they check their own reflection in a clean bright mirror or a clear bowl of water. If they had a spot they’d know ‘I have a spot,’ and if they had no spots they’d know ‘I have no spots.’ In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanajātiko ādāse vā parisuddhe pariyodāte acche vā udakapatte sakaṁ mukhanimittaṁ paccavekkhamāno sakaṇikaṁ vā ‘sakaṇikan’ti jāneyya, akaṇikaṁ vā ‘akaṇikan’ti jāneyya; evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti— sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶37] 4.3.3.6. Recollection of Past Lives
> Pali: 4.3.3.6. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇa
[¶38] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶39] Suppose a person was to leave their home village and go to another village. From that village they’d go to yet another village. And from that village they’d return to their home village. They’d think: ‘I went from my home village to another village. There I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. From that village I went to yet another village. There too I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. And from that village I returned to my home village.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya, tamhāpi gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya. So tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho sakamhā gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatra evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ, evaṁ nisīdiṁ, evaṁ abhāsiṁ, evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, tamhāpi gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatrāpi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ, evaṁ nisīdiṁ, evaṁ abhāsiṁ, evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ, somhi tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgato’ti.
[¶40] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶41] 4.3.3.7. Clairvoyance
> Pali: 4.3.3.7. Dibbacakkhuñāṇa
[¶42] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶43] Suppose there was a stilt longhouse at the central square. A person with clear eyes standing there might see humans entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square. They’d think: ‘These are people entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, majjhe siṅghāṭake pāsādo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi rathikāyapi vīthiṁ sañcarante majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnepi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ete manussā gehaṁ pavisanti, ete nikkhamanti, ete rathikāya vīthiṁ sañcaranti, ete majjhe siṅghāṭake nisinnā’ti.
[¶44] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones.
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate; yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Idampi kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca.
[¶45] 4.3.3.8. Ending of Defilements
> Pali: 4.3.3.8. Āsavakkhayañāṇa
[¶46] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed. They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So idaṁ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Ime āsavāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, vimuttasmiṁ ‘vimuttam’iti ñāṇaṁ hoti, ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶47] Suppose that in a mountain glen there was a lake that was transparent, clear, and unclouded. A person with clear eyes standing on the bank would see the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still. They’d think: ‘This lake is transparent, clear, and unclouded. And here are the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, mahārāja, pabbatasaṅkhepe udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso tīre ṭhito passeyya sippisambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tatrime sippisambukāpi sakkharakathalāpi macchagumbāpi carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’ti.
[¶48] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. This too, Great King, is a fruit of the ascetic life that’s apparent in the present life which is better and finer than the former ones. And, Great King, there is no other fruit of the ascetic life apparent in the present life which is better and finer than this.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, mahārāja, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. ‘So idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Ime āsavā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, vimuttasmiṁ ‘vimuttam’iti ñāṇaṁ hoti, ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Idaṁ kho, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ purimehi sandiṭṭhikehi sāmaññaphalehi abhikkantatarañca paṇītatarañca. Imasmā ca pana, mahārāja, sandiṭṭhikā sāmaññaphalā aññaṁ sandiṭṭhikaṁ sāmaññaphalaṁ uttaritaraṁ vā paṇītataraṁ vā natthī”ti.
[¶49] 5. Ajātasattu Declares Himself a Lay Follower
> Pali: 5. Ajātasattuupāsakattapaṭivedanā
[¶50] When the Buddha had spoken, King Ajātasattu said to him, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.
[¶51] I made a mistake, sir. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of me to take the life of my father, a just and principled king, for the sake of authority. Please, sir, accept my mistake for what it is, so I will restrain myself in future.”
> Pali: Accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yohaṁ pitaraṁ dhammikaṁ dhammarājānaṁ issariyakāraṇā jīvitā voropesiṁ. Tassa me, bhante bhagavā, accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.
[¶52] “Indeed, Great King, you made a mistake. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of you to take the life of your father, a just and principled king, for the sake of sovereignty. But since you have recognized your mistake for what it is, and have dealt with it properly, I accept it. For it is growth in the training of the Noble One to recognize a mistake for what it is, deal with it properly, and commit to restraint in the future.”
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, mahārāja, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ pitaraṁ dhammikaṁ dhammarājānaṁ jīvitā voropesi. Yato ca kho tvaṁ, mahārāja, accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikarosi, taṁ te mayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāma. Vuddhihesā, mahārāja, ariyassa vinaye, yo accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikaroti, āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjatī”ti.
[¶53] When the Buddha had spoken, King Ajātasattu said to him, “Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bhante, gacchāma bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶54] “Please, Great King, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, mahārāja, kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶55] Then the king, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled him, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶56] Soon after the king had left, the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “The king is broken, mendicants, he is ruined. If he had not taken the life of his father, a just and principled king, the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma would have arisen in him in that very seat.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantassa rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa bhikkhū āmantesi: “khatāyaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā. Upahatāyaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā. Sacāyaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā pitaraṁ dhammikaṁ dhammarājānaṁ jīvitā na voropessatha, imasmiññeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ uppajjissathā”ti.
[¶57] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶58] > Pali: Sāmaññaphalasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 7. DN 3 · With Ambaṭṭha · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/7/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/7/#p-N
[¶0] DN 3 · With Ambaṭṭha
> Pali: DN 3 · Ambaṭṭhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Kosalan brahmins named Icchānaṅgala. He stayed in a forest near Icchānaṅgala.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena icchānaṅgalaṁ nāma kosalānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā icchānaṅgale viharati icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe.
[¶2] 1. The Section on Pokkharasāti
> Pali: 1. Pokkharasātivatthu
[¶3] Now at that time the brahmin Pokkharasāti was living in Ukkaṭṭhā. It was a crown property given by King Pasenadi of Kosala, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. Pokkharasāti heard:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti ukkaṭṭhaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. Assosi kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti:
[¶4] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Icchānaṅgala and is staying in a forest nearby. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi icchānaṅgalaṁ anuppatto icchānaṅgale viharati icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato— ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā.’ So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ, sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ, kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶5] 2. The Student Ambaṭṭha
> Pali: 2. Ambaṭṭhamāṇava
[¶6] Now at that time Pokkharasāti had a student named Ambaṭṭha as his resident pupil. He was one who recited and remembered the hymns, and had mastered in the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. He had been authorized as a master in his own tutor’s scriptural heritage of the three Vedas with the words: “What I know, you know. And what you know, I know.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa ambaṭṭho nāma māṇavo antevāsī hoti ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo anuññātapaṭiññāto sake ācariyake tevijjake pāvacane: “yamahaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ jānāsi; yaṁ tvaṁ jānāsi tamahaṁ jānāmī”ti.
[¶7] Then Pokkharasāti addressed Ambaṭṭha, “Dear Ambaṭṭha, the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Icchānaṅgala and is staying in a forest nearby. He has this good reputation … It’s good to see such perfected ones. Please, dear Ambaṭṭha, go to the ascetic Gotama and find out whether or not he lives up to his reputation. Through you I shall learn about the worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “ayaṁ, tāta ambaṭṭha, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi icchānaṅgalaṁ anuppatto icchānaṅgale viharati icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā, arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ, sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī’ti. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta ambaṭṭha, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ jānāhi, yadi vā taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ tathāsantaṁyeva saddo abbhuggato, yadi vā no tathā. Yadi vā so bhavaṁ gotamo tādiso, yadi vā na tādiso, tathā mayaṁ taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ vedissāmā”ti.
[¶8] “But sir, how shall I find out whether or not the ascetic Gotama lives up to his reputation?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ panāhaṁ, bho, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ jānissāmi: ‘yadi vā taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ tathāsantaṁyeva saddo abbhuggato, yadi vā no tathā. Yadi vā so bhavaṁ gotamo tādiso, yadi vā na tādiso’”ti?
[¶9] “Dear Ambaṭṭha, the thirty-two marks of a great man have been handed down in our hymns. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other. If he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extends to all four sides, he achieves stability in the country, and he possesses the seven treasures. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the world’s veil. But, dear Ambaṭṭha, I am the one who gives the hymns, and you are the one who receives them.”
> Pali: “Āgatāni kho, tāta ambaṭṭha, amhākaṁ mantesu dvattiṁsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveyeva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti. Seyyathidaṁ—cakkaratanaṁ, hatthiratanaṁ, assaratanaṁ, maṇiratanaṁ, itthiratanaṁ, gahapatiratanaṁ, pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado. Ahaṁ kho pana, tāta ambaṭṭha, mantānaṁ dātā; tvaṁ mantānaṁ paṭiggahetā”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Ambaṭṭha. He got up from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled Pokkharasāti, keeping him on his right. He mounted a chariot drawn by mares and, together with several young students, set out for the forest near Icchānaṅgala. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and entered the monastery on foot.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā brāhmaṇaṁ pokkharasātiṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā vaḷavārathamāruyha sambahulehi māṇavakehi saddhiṁ yena icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍo tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova ārāmaṁ pāvisi.
[¶11] At that time several mendicants were walking mindfully in the open air. Then the student Ambaṭṭha went up to those mendicants and said, “Good fellows, where is the worthy Gotama at present? For we have come here to see him.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū abbhokāse caṅkamanti. Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca: “kahaṁ nu kho, bho, etarahi so bhavaṁ gotamo viharati? Tañhi mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya idhūpasaṅkantā”ti.
[¶12] Then those mendicants thought, “This Ambaṭṭha is from a well-known family, and he is the pupil of the well-known brahmin Pokkharasāti. The Buddha won’t mind having a discussion together with such gentlemen.”
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo abhiññātakolañño ceva abhiññātassa ca brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa antevāsī. Agaru kho pana bhagavato evarūpehi kulaputtehi saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo hotī”ti.
[¶13] They said to Ambaṭṭha, “Ambaṭṭha, that’s his dwelling, with the door closed. Approach it quietly, without hurrying; go onto the porch, clear your throat, and knock on the door-panel. The Buddha will open the door.”
> Pali: Te ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavocuṁ: “eso, ambaṭṭha, vihāro saṁvutadvāro, tena appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā ataramāno āḷindaṁ pavisitvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭehi, vivarissati te bhagavā dvāran”ti.
[¶14] So he approached the Buddha’s dwelling, cleared his throat and knocked on the door-panel, and the Buddha opened the door. Ambaṭṭha and the young students entered the dwelling. The young students exchanged greetings with the Buddha, and when the greetings and polite conversation were over, sat down to one side. But while the Buddha was sitting, Ambaṭṭha spoke some polite words or other while walking around or standing.
> Pali: Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo yena so vihāro saṁvutadvāro, tena appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā ataramāno āḷindaṁ pavisitvā ukkāsitvā aggaḷaṁ ākoṭesi. Vivari bhagavā dvāraṁ. Pāvisi ambaṭṭho māṇavo. Māṇavakāpi pavisitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ambaṭṭho pana māṇavo caṅkamantopi nisinnena bhagavatā kañci kañci kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāreti, ṭhitopi nisinnena bhagavatā kañci kañci kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāreti.
[¶15] So the Buddha said to him, “Ambaṭṭha, is this how you hold a discussion with elderly and senior brahmins, the tutors of tutors: walking around or standing while I’m sitting, speaking some polite words or other?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “evaṁ nu te, ambaṭṭha, brāhmaṇehi vuddhehi mahallakehi ācariyapācariyehi saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo hoti, yathayidaṁ caraṁ tiṭṭhaṁ nisinnena mayā kiñci kiñci kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretī”ti?
[¶16] 2.1. The First Use of the Word “Primitives”
> Pali: 2.1. Paṭhamaibbhavāda
[¶17] “No, worthy Gotama. For it is proper for one brahmin to converse with another while both are walking, standing, sitting, or lying down. But as to these shavelings, fake ascetics, primitives, black spawn from the feet of our kinsman, I converse with them as I do with the worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Gacchanto vā hi, bho gotama, gacchantena brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ sallapitumarahati, ṭhito vā hi, bho gotama, ṭhitena brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ sallapitumarahati, nisinno vā hi, bho gotama, nisinnena brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ sallapitumarahati, sayāno vā hi, bho gotama, sayānena brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇena saddhiṁ sallapitumarahati. Ye ca kho te, bho gotama, muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā bandhupādāpaccā, tehipi me saddhiṁ evaṁ kathāsallāpo hoti, yathariva bhotā gotamenā”ti.
[¶18] “But Ambaṭṭha, you must have come here for some purpose. You should focus on that. Though this Ambaṭṭha is unqualified, he thinks he’s qualified. What is that but lack of qualifications?”
> Pali: “Atthikavato kho pana te, ambaṭṭha, idhāgamanaṁ ahosi, yāyeva kho panatthāya āgaccheyyātha, tameva atthaṁ sādhukaṁ manasi kareyyātha. Avusitavāyeva kho pana, bho, ayaṁ ambaṭṭho māṇavo vusitamānī kimaññatra avusitattā”ti.
[¶19] When he said this, Ambaṭṭha became angry and upset with the Buddha because of being described as unqualified. He even attacked and badmouthed the Buddha himself, saying, “The ascetic Gotama will be worsted!” He said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, the Sakyans are rude, harsh, touchy, and argumentative. Primitive they are, and primitive they remain! They don’t honor, respect, revere, worship, or venerate brahmins. It is neither proper nor appropriate that the Sakyans—primitives that they are—don’t honor, respect, revere, worship, or venerate brahmins.”
> Pali: Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhagavatā avusitavādena vuccamāno kupito anattamano bhagavantaṁyeva khuṁsento bhagavantaṁyeva vambhento bhagavantaṁyeva upavadamāno: “samaṇo ca me bho gotamo pāpito bhavissatī”ti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “caṇḍā, bho gotama, sakyajāti; pharusā, bho gotama, sakyajāti; lahusā, bho gotama, sakyajāti; bhassā, bho gotama, sakyajāti; ibbhā santā ibbhā samānā na brāhmaṇe sakkaronti, na brāhmaṇe garuṁ karonti, na brāhmaṇe mānenti, na brāhmaṇe pūjenti, na brāhmaṇe apacāyanti. Tayidaṁ, bho gotama, nacchannaṁ, tayidaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yadime sakyā ibbhā santā ibbhā samānā na brāhmaṇe sakkaronti, na brāhmaṇe garuṁ karonti, na brāhmaṇe mānenti, na brāhmaṇe pūjenti, na brāhmaṇe apacāyantī”ti.
[¶20] And that’s how Ambaṭṭha denigrated the Sakyans with the word “primitives” for the first time.
> Pali: Itiha ambaṭṭho māṇavo idaṁ paṭhamaṁ sakyesu ibbhavādaṁ nipātesi.
[¶21] 2.2. The Second Use of the Word “Primitives”
> Pali: 2.2. Dutiyaibbhavāda
[¶22] “But Ambaṭṭha, how have the Sakyans wronged you?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, ambaṭṭha, sakyā aparaddhun”ti?
[¶23] “This one time, worthy Gotama, I went to Kapilavatthu on some business for my tutor, the brahmin Pokkharasāti. I approached the Sakyans in their town hall. Now at that time several Sakyans and Sakyan princes were sitting on high seats, poking each other with their fingers, giggling and playing together. In fact, they even presumed to giggle at me, and didn’t invite me to a seat. It is neither proper nor appropriate that the Sakyans—primitives that they are—don’t honor, respect, revere, worship, or venerate brahmins.”
> Pali: “Ekamidāhaṁ, bho gotama, samayaṁ ācariyassa brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa kenacideva karaṇīyena kapilavatthuṁ agamāsiṁ. Yena sakyānaṁ sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā sakyā ceva sakyakumārā ca sandhāgāre uccesu āsanesu nisinnā honti aññamaññaṁ aṅgulipatodakehi sañjagghantā saṅkīḷantā, aññadatthu mamaññeva maññe anujagghantā, na maṁ koci āsanenapi nimantesi. Tayidaṁ, bho gotama, nacchannaṁ, tayidaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yadime sakyā ibbhā santā ibbhā samānā na brāhmaṇe sakkaronti, na brāhmaṇe garuṁ karonti, na brāhmaṇe mānenti, na brāhmaṇe pūjenti, na brāhmaṇe apacāyantī”ti.
[¶24] And that’s how Ambaṭṭha denigrated the Sakyans with the word “primitives” for the second time.
> Pali: Itiha ambaṭṭho māṇavo idaṁ dutiyaṁ sakyesu ibbhavādaṁ nipātesi.
[¶25] 2.3. The Third Use of the Word “Primitives”
> Pali: 2.3. Tatiyaibbhavāda
[¶26] “Even a little quail, Ambaṭṭha, speaks as she likes in her own nest. Kapilavatthu is the Sakyans’ own place, Ambaṭṭha. It’s not worthy of the Venerable Ambaṭṭha to lose his temper over such a small thing.”
> Pali: “Laṭukikāpi kho, ambaṭṭha, sakuṇikā sake kulāvake kāmalāpinī hoti. Sakaṁ kho panetaṁ, ambaṭṭha, sakyānaṁ yadidaṁ kapilavatthuṁ, nārahatāyasmā ambaṭṭho imāya appamattāya abhisajjitun”ti.
[¶27] “Worthy Gotama, there are these four classes: aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials. Three of these classes— aristocrats, peasants, and menials— in fact succeed only when serving the brahmins. It is neither proper nor appropriate that the Sakyans—primitives that they are—don’t honor, respect, revere, worship, or venerate brahmins.”
> Pali: “Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā— khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā. Imesañhi, bho gotama, catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ tayo vaṇṇā— khattiyā ca vessā ca suddā ca— aññadatthu brāhmaṇasseva paricārakā sampajjanti. Tayidaṁ, bho gotama, nacchannaṁ, tayidaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yadime sakyā ibbhā santā ibbhā samānā na brāhmaṇe sakkaronti, na brāhmaṇe garuṁ karonti, na brāhmaṇe mānenti, na brāhmaṇe pūjenti, na brāhmaṇe apacāyantī”ti.
[¶28] And that’s how Ambaṭṭha denigrated the Sakyans with the word “primitives” for the third time.
> Pali: Itiha ambaṭṭho māṇavo idaṁ tatiyaṁ sakyesu ibbhavādaṁ nipātesi.
[¶29] 2.4. The Word “Son of a Slavegirl” is Used
> Pali: 2.4. Dāsiputtavāda
[¶30] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “This Ambaṭṭha puts the Sakyans down way too much by calling them primitives. Why don’t I ask him about his own clan?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atibāḷhaṁ kho ayaṁ ambaṭṭho māṇavo sakyesu ibbhavādena nimmādeti, yannūnāhaṁ gottaṁ puccheyyan”ti.
[¶31] So the Buddha said to him, “What is your clan, Ambaṭṭha?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “kathaṁ gottosi, ambaṭṭhā”ti?
[¶32] “I am a Kaṇhāyana, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Kaṇhāyanohamasmi, bho gotamā”ti.
[¶33] “But, recollecting the ancient name and clan of your mother and father, the Sakyans were the children of the masters, while you’re descended from the son of a slavegirl of the Sakyans. But the Sakyans regard King Okkāka as their grandfather.
> Pali: “Porāṇaṁ kho pana te, ambaṭṭha, mātāpettikaṁ nāmagottaṁ anussarato ayyaputtā sakyā bhavanti; dāsiputto tvamasi sakyānaṁ. Sakyā kho pana, ambaṭṭha, rājānaṁ okkākaṁ pitāmahaṁ dahanti.
[¶34] Once upon a time, King Okkāka, wishing to divert the royal succession to the son of his most beloved queen, banished the elder princes from the realm— Okkāmukha, Karakaṇḍa, Hatthinika, and Sinisūra. They made their home beside a lotus pond on the slopes of the Himalayas, where there was a large grove of sakhua trees. For fear of breaking their line of birth, they slept with their own (saka) sisters.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ambaṭṭha, rājā okkāko yā sā mahesī piyā manāpā, tassā puttassa rajjaṁ pariṇāmetukāmo jeṭṭhakumāre raṭṭhasmā pabbājesi— okkāmukhaṁ karakaṇḍaṁ hatthinikaṁ sinisūraṁ. Te raṭṭhasmā pabbājitā himavantapasse pokkharaṇiyā tīre mahāsākasaṇḍo, tattha vāsaṁ kappesuṁ. Te jātisambhedabhayā sakāhi bhaginīhi saddhiṁ saṁvāsaṁ kappesuṁ.
[¶35] Then King Okkāka addressed his ministers and councillors, ‘Where, sirs, have the princes settled now?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ambaṭṭha, rājā okkāko amacce pārisajje āmantesi: ‘kahaṁ nu kho, bho, etarahi kumārā sammantī’ti?
[¶36] ‘Your Majesty, there is a lotus pond on the slopes of the Himalayas, by a large grove of sakhua trees. They’ve settled there. For fear of breaking their line of birth, they are sleeping with their own sisters.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi, deva, himavantapasse pokkharaṇiyā tīre mahāsākasaṇḍo, tatthetarahi kumārā sammanti. Te jātisambhedabhayā sakāhi bhaginīhi saddhiṁ saṁvāsaṁ kappentī’ti.
[¶37] Then, Ambaṭṭha, King Okkāka expressed this heartfelt sentiment: ‘The princes are indeed Sakyans! The princes are indeed the best Sakyans!’ From that day on the Sakyans were recognized and he was their founder.
> Pali: Atha kho, ambaṭṭha, rājā okkāko udānaṁ udānesi: ‘sakyā vata, bho, kumārā, paramasakyā vata, bho, kumārā’ti. Tadagge kho pana, ambaṭṭha, sakyā paññāyanti; so ca nesaṁ pubbapuriso.
[¶38] Now, King Okkāka had a slavegirl named Disā. She gave birth to a boy named Black. When he was born, Black Boy said: ‘Wash me, mum, bathe me! Get this filth off of me! I will be useful for you!’ Whereas these days when people see goblins they recognize them as goblins, in those days they recognized goblins as ‘blackboys’.
> Pali: Rañño kho pana, ambaṭṭha, okkākassa disā nāma dāsī ahosi. Sā kaṇhaṁ nāma janesi. Jāto kaṇho pabyāhāsi: ‘dhovatha maṁ, amma, nahāpetha maṁ amma, imasmā maṁ asucismā parimocetha, atthāya vo bhavissāmī’ti. Yathā kho pana, ambaṭṭha, etarahi manussā pisāce disvā ‘pisācā’ti sañjānanti; evameva kho, ambaṭṭha, tena kho pana samayena manussā pisāce ‘kaṇhā’ti sañjānanti.
[¶39] They said: ‘He spoke as soon as he was born—a blackboy is born! A goblin is born!’ From that day on the Kaṇhāyanas were proclaimed, and he was their founder. That’s how, recollecting the ancient name and clan of your mother and father, the Sakyans were the children of the masters, while you’re descended from the son of a slavegirl of the Sakyans.”
> Pali: Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘ayaṁ jāto pabyāhāsi, kaṇho jāto, pisāco jāto’ti. Tadagge kho pana, ambaṭṭha, kaṇhāyanā paññāyanti, so ca kaṇhāyanānaṁ pubbapuriso. Iti kho te, ambaṭṭha, porāṇaṁ mātāpettikaṁ nāmagottaṁ anussarato ayyaputtā sakyā bhavanti, dāsiputto tvamasi sakyānan”ti.
[¶40] When he said this, those young students said to him, “Worthy Gotama, please don’t put Ambaṭṭha down too much by calling him the son of a slavegirl. He’s well-born, a gentleman, learned, who enunciates well, and is astute. He is capable of debating with the worthy Gotama about this.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te māṇavakā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “mā bhavaṁ gotamo ambaṭṭhaṁ atibāḷhaṁ dāsiputtavādena nimmādesi. Sujāto ca, bho gotama, ambaṭṭho māṇavo, kulaputto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, bahussuto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, kalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, paṇḍito ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, pahoti ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun”ti.
[¶41] So the Buddha said to them, “Well, young students, if you think that Ambaṭṭha is ill-born, not a gentleman, unlearned, a poor speaker, witless, and not capable of debating with me about this, then leave him aside and you can debate with me. But if you think that he’s well-born, a gentleman, learned, who enunciates well, is astute, and is capable of debating with me about this, then you should stand aside and let him debate with me.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā te māṇavake etadavoca: “sace kho tumhākaṁ māṇavakānaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘dujjāto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, akulaputto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, appassuto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, akalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, duppañño ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, na ca pahoti ambaṭṭho māṇavo samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun’ti, tiṭṭhatu ambaṭṭho māṇavo, tumhe mayā saddhiṁ mantavho asmiṁ vacane. Sace pana tumhākaṁ māṇavakānaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘sujāto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, kulaputto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, bahussuto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, kalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, paṇḍito ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, pahoti ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun’ti, tiṭṭhatha tumhe; ambaṭṭho māṇavo mayā saddhiṁ paṭimantetū”ti.
[¶42] “He is capable of debating you. We will be silent, and let Ambaṭṭha debate with the worthy Gotama about this.”
> Pali: “Sujāto ca, bho gotama, ambaṭṭho māṇavo, kulaputto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, bahussuto ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, kalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, paṇḍito ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo, pahoti ca ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetuṁ, tuṇhī mayaṁ bhavissāma, ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhotā gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetū”ti.
[¶43] So the Buddha said to Ambaṭṭha, “Well, Ambaṭṭha, there’s a legitimate question that comes up. You won’t like it, but you ought to answer anyway. If you fail to answer—by dodging the issue, remaining silent, or leaving—your head will explode into seven pieces right here. What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? According to what you have heard from elderly and senior brahmins, the tutors of tutors, what is the origin of the Kaṇhāyanas, and who is their founder?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ kho pana te, ambaṭṭha, sahadhammiko pañho āgacchati, akāmā byākātabbo. Sace tvaṁ na byākarissasi, aññena vā aññaṁ paṭicarissasi, tuṇhī vā bhavissasi, pakkamissasi vā ettheva te sattadhā muddhā phalissati. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, kinti te sutaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ kutopabhutikā kaṇhāyanā, ko ca kaṇhāyanānaṁ pubbapuriso”ti?
[¶44] When he said this, Ambaṭṭha kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ambaṭṭho māṇavo tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶45] For a second time, the Buddha put the question, and for a second time Ambaṭṭha kept silent.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, kinti te sutaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ kutopabhutikā kaṇhāyanā, ko ca kaṇhāyanānaṁ pubbapuriso”ti? Dutiyampi kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo tuṇhī ahosi.
[¶46] So the Buddha said to him, “Answer now, Ambaṭṭha. Now is not the time for silence. If someone fails to answer a legitimate question when asked three times by the Buddha, their head explodes into seven pieces there and then.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “byākarohi dāni, ambaṭṭha, na dāni, te tuṇhībhāvassa kālo. Yo kho, ambaṭṭha, tathāgatena yāvatatiyakaṁ sahadhammikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho na byākaroti, etthevassa sattadhā muddhā phalissatī”ti.
[¶47] Now at that time the spirit Vajirapāṇī, holding a massive iron spear, burning, blazing, and glowing, stood in the air above Ambaṭṭha, thinking, “If this Ambaṭṭha doesn’t answer when asked a third time, I’ll blow his head into seven pieces there and then!” And both the Buddha and Ambaṭṭha could see Vajirapāṇī.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena vajirapāṇī yakkho mahantaṁ ayokūṭaṁ ādāya ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ ambaṭṭhassa māṇavassa upari vehāsaṁ ṭhito hoti: “sacāyaṁ ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhagavatā yāvatatiyakaṁ sahadhammikaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho na byākarissati, etthevassa sattadhā muddhaṁ phālessāmī”ti. Taṁ kho pana vajirapāṇiṁ yakkhaṁ bhagavā ceva passati ambaṭṭho ca māṇavo.
[¶48] Ambaṭṭha was terrified, shocked, and awestruck. Looking to the Buddha for shelter, asylum, and refuge, he sat down close by the Buddha and said, “What did you say? Please repeat the question.”
> Pali: Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto bhagavantaṁyeva tāṇaṁ gavesī bhagavantaṁyeva leṇaṁ gavesī bhagavantaṁyeva saraṇaṁ gavesī upanisīditvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “kimetaṁ bhavaṁ gotamo āha? Punabhavaṁ gotamo bravitū”ti.
[¶49] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? According to what you have heard from elderly and senior brahmins, the tutors of tutors, what is the origin of the Kaṇhāyanas, and who is their founder?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, kinti te sutaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ kutopabhutikā kaṇhāyanā, ko ca kaṇhāyanānaṁ pubbapuriso”ti?
[¶50] “I have heard, worthy Gotama, that it is just as you say. That’s the origin of the Kaṇhāyanas, and that’s who their founder is.”
> Pali: “Evameva me, bho gotama, sutaṁ yatheva bhavaṁ gotamo āha. Tatopabhutikā kaṇhāyanā; so ca kaṇhāyanānaṁ pubbapuriso”ti.
[¶51] 2.5. The Discussion of Ambaṭṭha’s Heritage
> Pali: 2.5. Ambaṭṭhavaṁsakathā
[¶52] When he said this, those young students made an uproar, “It turns out Ambaṭṭha is ill-born, not a gentleman, son of a Sakyan slavegirl, and that the Sakyans are sons of his masters! And it seems that the ascetic Gotama spoke only the truth, though we presumed to rebuke him!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te māṇavakā unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṁ: “dujjāto kira, bho, ambaṭṭho māṇavo; akulaputto kira, bho, ambaṭṭho māṇavo; dāsiputto kira, bho, ambaṭṭho māṇavo sakyānaṁ. Ayyaputtā kira, bho, ambaṭṭhassa māṇavassa sakyā bhavanti. Dhammavādiṁyeva kira mayaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ apasādetabbaṁ amaññimhā”ti.
[¶53] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “These young students put Ambaṭṭha down too much by calling him the son of a slavegirl. Why don’t I get him out of this?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atibāḷhaṁ kho ime māṇavakā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ dāsiputtavādena nimmādenti, yannūnāhaṁ parimoceyyan”ti.
[¶54] So the Buddha said to the young students, “Young students, please don’t put Ambaṭṭha down too much by calling him the son of a slavegirl. That Black Boy was an eminent seer. He went to a southern country and memorized the Divine Spell. Then he approached King Okkāka and asked for the hand of his daughter Maddarūpī.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā te māṇavake etadavoca: “mā kho tumhe, māṇavakā, ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ atibāḷhaṁ dāsiputtavādena nimmādetha. Uḷāro so kaṇho isi ahosi. So dakkhiṇajanapadaṁ gantvā brahmamante adhīyitvā rājānaṁ okkākaṁ upasaṅkamitvā maddarūpiṁ dhītaraṁ yāci.
[¶55] The king said to him, ‘Who the hell is this son of a slavegirl to ask for the hand of my daughter!’ Angry and upset he fastened a razor-tipped arrow. But he wasn’t able to either shoot it or to relax it.
> Pali: Tassa rājā okkāko: ‘ko nevaṁ re ayaṁ mayhaṁ dāsiputto samāno maddarūpiṁ dhītaraṁ yācatī’ti, kupito anattamano khurappaṁ sannayhi. So taṁ khurappaṁ neva asakkhi muñcituṁ, no paṭisaṁharituṁ.
[¶56] Then the ministers and councillors approached the seer Black Boy and said: ‘Spare the king, sir, spare him!’
> Pali: Atha kho, māṇavakā, amaccā pārisajjā kaṇhaṁ isiṁ upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘sotthi, bhaddante, hotu rañño; sotthi, bhaddante, hotu rañño’ti.
[¶57] ‘The king will be safe. But if he shoots the arrow downwards, there will be an earthquake across the entire realm.’
> Pali: ‘Sotthi bhavissati rañño, api ca rājā yadi adho khurappaṁ muñcissati, yāvatā rañño vijitaṁ, ettāvatā pathavī undriyissatī’ti.
[¶58] ‘Spare the king, sir, and spare the country!’
> Pali: ‘Sotthi, bhaddante, hotu rañño, sotthi janapadassā’ti.
[¶59] ‘Both king and country will be safe. But if he shoots the arrow upwards, the heavens will not rain in the entire realm for seven years.’
> Pali: ‘Sotthi bhavissati rañño, sotthi janapadassa, api ca rājā yadi uddhaṁ khurappaṁ muñcissati, yāvatā rañño vijitaṁ, ettāvatā satta vassāni devo na vassissatī’ti.
[¶60] ‘Spare the king, sir, spare the country, and let the heavens rain!’
> Pali: ‘Sotthi, bhaddante, hotu rañño sotthi janapadassa devo ca vassatū’ti.
[¶61] ‘Both king and country will be safe, and the heavens rain will rain. And if the king shoots the crown prince with an arrow, he will be safe and unruffled.’
> Pali: ‘Sotthi bhavissati rañño sotthi janapadassa devo ca vassissati, api ca rājā jeṭṭhakumāre khurappaṁ patiṭṭhāpetu, sotthi kumāro pallomo bhavissatī’ti.
[¶62] So the ministers said to Okkāka: ‘Okkāka must shoot the crown prince with an arrow. He will be safe and unruffled.’
> Pali: Atha kho, māṇavakā, amaccā okkākassa ārocesuṁ: ‘okkāko jeṭṭhakumāre khurappaṁ patiṭṭhāpetu. Sotthi kumāro pallomo bhavissatī’ti.
[¶63] So King Okkāka shot the crown prince with an arrow. And he was safe and unruffled. Then the king was terrified, shocked, and awestruck. Scared by the divine punishment, he gave the hand of his daughter Maddarūpī.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā okkāko jeṭṭhakumāre khurappaṁ patiṭṭhapesi, sotthi kumāro pallomo samabhavi. Atha kho tassa rājā okkāko bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto brahmadaṇḍena tajjito maddarūpiṁ dhītaraṁ adāsi.
[¶64] Young students, please don’t put Ambaṭṭha down too much by calling him the son of a slavegirl. That Black Boy was an eminent seer.”
> Pali: Mā kho tumhe, māṇavakā, ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ atibāḷhaṁ dāsiputtavādena nimmādetha, uḷāro so kaṇho isi ahosī”ti.
[¶65] 3. The Supremacy of the Aristocrats
> Pali: 3. Khattiyaseṭṭhabhāva
[¶66] Then the Buddha addressed Ambaṭṭha, “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Suppose an aristocrat boy was to sleep with a brahmin girl, and they had a son. Would he receive a seat and water from the brahmins?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, idha khattiyakumāro brāhmaṇakaññāya saddhiṁ saṁvāsaṁ kappeyya, tesaṁ saṁvāsamanvāya putto jāyetha. Yo so khattiyakumārena brāhmaṇakaññāya putto uppanno, api nu so labhetha brāhmaṇesu āsanaṁ vā udakaṁ vā”ti?
[¶67] “He would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Labhetha, bho gotama”.
[¶68] “And would the brahmins feed him at an offering of food for ancestors, an offering of a dish of milk-rice, a sacrifice, or a feast for guests?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā”ti?
[¶69] “They would.”
> Pali: “Bhojeyyuṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶70] “And would the brahmins teach him the hymns or not?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā mante vāceyyuṁ vā no vā”ti?
[¶71] “They would.”
> Pali: “Vāceyyuṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶72] “And would he be kept from the women or not?”
> Pali: “Api nussa itthīsu āvaṭaṁ vā assa anāvaṭaṁ vā”ti?
[¶73] “He would not.”
> Pali: “Anāvaṭaṁ hissa, bho gotama”.
[¶74] “And would the aristocrats anoint him as king?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ khattiyā khattiyābhisekena abhisiñceyyun”ti?
[¶75] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because his maternity is unsuitable.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Mātito hi, bho gotama, anupapanno”ti.
[¶76] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Suppose a brahmin boy was to sleep with an aristocrat girl, and they had a son. Would he receive a seat and water from the brahmins?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, idha brāhmaṇakumāro khattiyakaññāya saddhiṁ saṁvāsaṁ kappeyya, tesaṁ saṁvāsamanvāya putto jāyetha. Yo so brāhmaṇakumārena khattiyakaññāya putto uppanno, api nu so labhetha brāhmaṇesu āsanaṁ vā udakaṁ vā”ti?
[¶77] “He would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Labhetha, bho gotama”.
[¶78] “And would the brahmins feed him at an offering of food for ancestors, an offering of a dish of milk-rice, a sacrifice, or a feast for guests?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā”ti?
[¶79] “They would.”
> Pali: “Bhojeyyuṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶80] “And would the brahmins teach him the hymns or not?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā mante vāceyyuṁ vā no vā”ti?
[¶81] “They would.”
> Pali: “Vāceyyuṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶82] “And would he be kept from the women or not?”
> Pali: “Api nussa itthīsu āvaṭaṁ vā assa anāvaṭaṁ vā”ti?
[¶83] “He would not.”
> Pali: “Anāvaṭaṁ hissa, bho gotama”.
[¶84] “And would the aristocrats anoint him as king?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ khattiyā khattiyābhisekena abhisiñceyyun”ti?
[¶85] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because his paternity is unsuitable.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Pitito hi, bho gotama, anupapanno”ti.
[¶86] “And so, Ambaṭṭha, the aristocrats are superior and the brahmins inferior, whether comparing women with women or men with men. What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Suppose the brahmins for some reason were to shave a brahmin’s head, inflict him with a sack of ashes, and banish him from the nation or the city. Would he receive a seat and water from the brahmins?”
> Pali: “Iti kho, ambaṭṭha, itthiyā vā itthiṁ karitvā purisena vā purisaṁ karitvā khattiyāva seṭṭhā, hīnā brāhmaṇā. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, idha brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ kismiñcideva pakaraṇe khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā bhassapuṭena vadhitvā raṭṭhā vā nagarā vā pabbājeyyuṁ. Api nu so labhetha brāhmaṇesu āsanaṁ vā udakaṁ vā”ti?
[¶87] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶88] “And would the brahmins feed him at an offering of food for ancestors, an offering of a dish of milk-rice, a sacrifice, or a feast for guests?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā”ti?
[¶89] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶90] “And would the brahmins teach him the hymns or not?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā mante vāceyyuṁ vā no vā”ti?
[¶91] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶92] “And would he be kept from the women or not?”
> Pali: “Api nussa itthīsu āvaṭaṁ vā assa anāvaṭaṁ vā”ti?
[¶93] “He would be.”
> Pali: “Āvaṭaṁ hissa, bho gotama”.
[¶94] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Suppose the aristocrats for some reason were to shave an aristocrat’s head, inflict him with a sack of ashes, and banish him from the nation or the city. Would he receive a seat and water from the brahmins?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, idha khattiyā khattiyaṁ kismiñcideva pakaraṇe khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā bhassapuṭena vadhitvā raṭṭhā vā nagarā vā pabbājeyyuṁ. Api nu so labhetha brāhmaṇesu āsanaṁ vā udakaṁ vā”ti?
[¶95] “He would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Labhetha, bho gotama”.
[¶96] “And would the brahmins feed him at an offering of food for ancestors, an offering of a dish of milk-rice, a sacrifice, or a feast for guests?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā bhojeyyuṁ saddhe vā thālipāke vā yaññe vā pāhune vā”ti?
[¶97] “They would.”
> Pali: “Bhojeyyuṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶98] “And would the brahmins teach him the hymns or not?”
> Pali: “Api nu naṁ brāhmaṇā mante vāceyyuṁ vā no vā”ti?
[¶99] “They would.”
> Pali: “Vāceyyuṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶100] “And would he be kept from the women or not?”
> Pali: “Api nussa itthīsu āvaṭaṁ vā assa anāvaṭaṁ vā”ti?
[¶101] “He would not.”
> Pali: “Anāvaṭaṁ hissa, bho gotama”.
[¶102] “At this point, Ambaṭṭha, that aristocrat has reached rock bottom, with head shaven, inflicted with a sack of ashes, and banished from city or nation. Yet still the aristocrats are superior and the brahmins inferior. The divinity Sanaṅkumāra also spoke this verse:
> Pali: “Ettāvatā kho, ambaṭṭha, khattiyo paramanihīnataṁ patto hoti, yadeva naṁ khattiyā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā bhassapuṭena vadhitvā raṭṭhā vā nagarā vā pabbājenti. Iti kho, ambaṭṭha, yadā khattiyo paramanihīnataṁ patto hoti, tadāpi khattiyāva seṭṭhā, hīnā brāhmaṇā. Brahmunā pesā, ambaṭṭha, sanaṅkumārena gāthā bhāsitā:
## 8. DN 3 · With Ambaṭṭha · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/8/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/8/#p-N
[¶0] ‘The aristocrat is best among people
who take clan as the standard.
But one accomplished in knowledge and conduct
is first among gods and humans.’
> Pali: ‘Khattiyo seṭṭho janetasmiṁ,
ye gottapaṭisārino;
Vijjācaraṇasampanno,
so seṭṭho devamānuse’ti.
[¶1] That verse was well sung by the Divinity Sanaṅkumāra, not poorly sung; well spoken, not poorly spoken, beneficial, not harmful, and it was approved by me. For I also say this:
> Pali: Sā kho panesā, ambaṭṭha, brahmunā sanaṅkumārena gāthā sugītā no duggītā, subhāsitā no dubbhāsitā, atthasaṁhitā no anatthasaṁhitā, anumatā mayā. Ahampi hi, ambaṭṭha, evaṁ vadāmi—
[¶2] The aristocrat is best among people
who take clan as the standard.
But one accomplished in knowledge and conduct
is first among gods and humans.”
> Pali: Khattiyo seṭṭho janetasmiṁ,
ye gottapaṭisārino;
Vijjācaraṇasampanno,
so seṭṭho devamānuse”ti.
[¶3] The first recitation section.
> Pali: Bhāṇavāro paṭhamo.
[¶4] 4. Knowledge and Conduct
> Pali: 4. Vijjācaraṇakathā
[¶5] “But what, worthy Gotama, is that conduct, and what is that knowledge?”
> Pali: “Katamaṁ pana taṁ, bho gotama, caraṇaṁ, katamā ca pana sā vijjā”ti?
[¶6] “Ambaṭṭha, in the supreme knowledge and conduct there is no discussion of genealogy or clan or pride— ‘You deserve me’ or ‘You don’t deserve me.’ Wherever there is giving and taking in marriage there is such discussion. Whoever is shackled to questions of genealogy or clan or pride, or to giving and taking in marriage, is far from the supreme knowledge and conduct. The realization of supreme knowledge and conduct occurs when you’ve given up such things.”
> Pali: “Na kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya jātivādo vā vuccati, gottavādo vā vuccati, mānavādo vā vuccati: ‘arahasi vā maṁ tvaṁ, na vā maṁ tvaṁ arahasī’ti. Yattha kho, ambaṭṭha, āvāho vā hoti, vivāho vā hoti, āvāhavivāho vā hoti, etthetaṁ vuccati jātivādo vā itipi gottavādo vā itipi mānavādo vā itipi: ‘arahasi vā maṁ tvaṁ, na vā maṁ tvaṁ arahasī’ti. Ye hi keci, ambaṭṭha, jātivādavinibaddhā vā gottavādavinibaddhā vā mānavādavinibaddhā vā āvāhavivāhavinibaddhā vā, ārakā te anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya. Pahāya kho, ambaṭṭha, jātivādavinibaddhañca gottavādavinibaddhañca mānavādavinibaddhañca āvāhavivāhavinibaddhañca anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sacchikiriyā hotī”ti.
[¶7] “But what, worthy Gotama, is that conduct, and what is that knowledge?”
> Pali: “Katamaṁ pana taṁ, bho gotama, caraṇaṁ, katamā ca sā vijjā”ti?
[¶8] “Ambaṭṭha, it’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One and reflect …
> Pali: “Idha, ambaṭṭha, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati …pe…
[¶9] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption … This pertains to their conduct.
> Pali: So vivicceva kāmehi, vivicca akusalehi dhammehi, savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ.
[¶10] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption … This pertains to their conduct.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ambaṭṭha, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ.
[¶11] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption … This pertains to their conduct.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ambaṭṭha, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ.
[¶12] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption … This pertains to their conduct. This is that conduct.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ambaṭṭha, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… idampissa hoti caraṇasmiṁ. Idaṁ kho taṁ, ambaṭṭha, caraṇaṁ.
[¶13] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. This pertains to their knowledge. … They understand: ‘There is nothing further for this place.’ This pertains to their knowledge. This is that knowledge.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti …pe… idampissa hoti vijjāya …pe… nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti, idampissa hoti vijjāya. Ayaṁ kho sā, ambaṭṭha, vijjā.
[¶14] This mendicant is said to be ‘accomplished in knowledge’, and also ‘accomplished in conduct’, and also ‘accomplished in knowledge and conduct’. And, Ambaṭṭha, there is no accomplishment in knowledge and conduct that is better or finer than this.
> Pali: Ayaṁ vuccati, ambaṭṭha, bhikkhu ‘vijjāsampanno’ itipi, ‘caraṇasampanno’ itipi, ‘vijjācaraṇasampanno’ itipi. Imāya ca, ambaṭṭha, vijjāsampadāya caraṇasampadāya ca aññā vijjāsampadā ca caraṇasampadā ca uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthi.
[¶15] 5. Four Causes of Quitting
> Pali: 5. Catuapāyamukha
[¶16] There are these four causes of quitting this supreme knowledge and conduct. What four? Firstly, take some ascetic or brahmin who, not managing to obtain this supreme knowledge and conduct, plunges into a wilderness region carrying their pack with a shoulder-pole, thinking they will get by eating fallen fruit. In fact they succeed only in serving someone accomplished in knowledge and conduct. This is the first cause of quitting this supreme knowledge and conduct.
> Pali: Imāya kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya cattāri apāyamukhāni bhavanti. Katamāni cattāri? Idha, ambaṭṭha, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā imaññeva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno khārividhamādāya araññāyatanaṁ ajjhogāhati: ‘pavattaphalabhojano bhavissāmī’ti. So aññadatthu vijjācaraṇasampannasseva paricārako sampajjati. Imāya kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya idaṁ paṭhamaṁ apāyamukhaṁ bhavati.
[¶17] Furthermore, take some ascetic or brahmin who, not managing to obtain this supreme knowledge and conduct or to get by eating fallen fruit, plunges into a wilderness region carrying a spade and basket, thinking they will get by eating tubers and fruit. In fact they succeed only in serving someone accomplished in knowledge and conduct. This is the second cause of quitting this supreme knowledge and conduct.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ambaṭṭha, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā imañceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno pavattaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno kudālapiṭakaṁ ādāya araññavanaṁ ajjhogāhati: ‘kandamūlaphalabhojano bhavissāmī’ti. So aññadatthu vijjācaraṇasampannasseva paricārako sampajjati. Imāya kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya idaṁ dutiyaṁ apāyamukhaṁ bhavati.
[¶18] Furthermore, take some ascetic or brahmin who, not managing to obtain this supreme knowledge and conduct, or to get by eating fallen fruit, or to get by eating tubers and fruit, sets up a fire chamber in the neighborhood of a village or town and dwells there serving the sacred flame. In fact they succeed only in serving someone accomplished in knowledge and conduct. This is the third cause of quitting this supreme knowledge and conduct.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ambaṭṭha, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā imañceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno pavattaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno kandamūlaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno gāmasāmantaṁ vā nigamasāmantaṁ vā agyāgāraṁ karitvā aggiṁ paricaranto acchati. So aññadatthu vijjācaraṇasampannasseva paricārako sampajjati. Imāya kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya idaṁ tatiyaṁ apāyamukhaṁ bhavati.
[¶19] Furthermore, take some ascetic or brahmin who, not managing to obtain this supreme knowledge and conduct, or to get by eating fallen fruit, or to get by eating tubers and fruit, or to serve the sacred flame, sets up a four-doored fire chamber at the crossroads and dwells there, thinking: ‘When an ascetic or brahmin comes from the four quarters, I will honor them as best I can.’ In fact they succeed only in serving someone accomplished in knowledge and conduct. This is the fourth cause of quitting this supreme knowledge and conduct. These are the four causes of quitting this supreme knowledge and conduct.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ambaṭṭha, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā imaṁ ceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno pavattaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno kandamūlaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno aggipāricariyañca anabhisambhuṇamāno cātumahāpathe catudvāraṁ agāraṁ karitvā acchati: ‘yo imāhi catūhi disāhi āgamissati samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā, tamahaṁ yathāsatti yathābalaṁ paṭipūjessāmī’ti. So aññadatthu vijjācaraṇasampannasseva paricārako sampajjati. Imāya kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya idaṁ catutthaṁ apāyamukhaṁ bhavati. Imāya kho, ambaṭṭha, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya imāni cattāri apāyamukhāni bhavanti.
[¶20] What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Is this supreme knowledge and conduct seen in your own denomination?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, api nu tvaṁ imāya anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissasi sācariyako”ti?
[¶21] “No, worthy Gotama. Who am I and my denomination compared with the supreme knowledge and conduct? We are far from that.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Kocāhaṁ, bho gotama, sācariyako, kā ca anuttarā vijjācaraṇasampadā? Ārakāhaṁ, bho gotama, anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sācariyako”ti.
[¶22] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Since you’re not managing to obtain this supreme knowledge and conduct, have you with your denomination plunged into a wilderness region carrying your pack with a shoulder-pole, thinking you will get by eating fallen fruit?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, api nu tvaṁ imañceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno khārividhamādāya araññavanamajjhogāhasi sācariyako: ‘pavattaphalabhojano bhavissāmī’”ti?
[¶23] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶24] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Have you with your denomination … plunged into a wilderness region carrying a spade and basket, thinking you will get by eating tubers and fruit?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, api nu tvaṁ imañceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno pavattaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno kudālapiṭakaṁ ādāya araññavanamajjhogāhasi sācariyako: ‘kandamūlaphalabhojano bhavissāmī’”ti?
[¶25] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶26] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Have you with your denomination … set up a fire chamber in the neighborhood of a village or town and dwelt there serving the sacred flame?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, api nu tvaṁ imañceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno pavattaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno kandamūlaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno gāmasāmantaṁ vā nigamasāmantaṁ vā agyāgāraṁ karitvā aggiṁ paricaranto acchasi sācariyako”ti?
[¶27] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶28] “What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Have you with your denomination … set up a four-doored fire chamber at the crossroads and dwelt there, thinking: ‘When an ascetic or brahmin comes from the four quarters, I will honor them as best I can’?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, api nu tvaṁ imañceva anuttaraṁ vijjācaraṇasampadaṁ anabhisambhuṇamāno pavattaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno kandamūlaphalabhojanatañca anabhisambhuṇamāno aggipāricariyañca anabhisambhuṇamāno cātumahāpathe catudvāraṁ agāraṁ karitvā acchasi sācariyako: ‘yo imāhi catūhi disāhi āgamissati samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā, taṁ mayaṁ yathāsatti yathābalaṁ paṭipūjessāmā’”ti?
[¶29] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶30] “So you with your denomination are not only inferior to the supreme knowledge and conduct, you are even inferior to the four causes of quitting the supreme knowledge and conduct. But you have been told this by your tutor, the brahmin Pokkharasāti: ‘Who are these shavelings, fake ascetics, primitives, black spawn from the feet of our kinsman compared with conversation with the brahmins of the three knowledges?’ Yet he himself has not even fulfilled one of the quittings! See, Ambaṭṭha, how your tutor Pokkharasāti has wronged you.
> Pali: “Iti kho, ambaṭṭha, imāya ceva tvaṁ anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya parihīno sācariyako. Ye cime anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya cattāri apāyamukhāni bhavanti, tato ca tvaṁ parihīno sācariyako. Bhāsitā kho pana te esā, ambaṭṭha, ācariyena brāhmaṇena pokkharasātinā vācā: ‘ke ca muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā bandhupādāpaccā, kā ca tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ sākacchā’ti attanā āpāyikopi aparipūramāno. Passa, ambaṭṭha, yāva aparaddhañca te idaṁ ācariyassa brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa.
[¶31] 6. Being Like the Seers of the Past
> Pali: 6. Pubbakaisibhāvānuyoga
[¶32] Pokkharasāti lives off an endowment provided by King Pasenadi of Kosala. But the king won’t even grant him an audience face to face. When he consults, he does so behind a curtain. Why wouldn’t the king grant a face to face audience with someone who’d receive his legitimate presentation of food? See, Ambaṭṭha, how your tutor Pokkharasāti has wronged you.
> Pali: Brāhmaṇo kho pana, ambaṭṭha, pokkharasāti rañño pasenadissa kosalassa dattikaṁ bhuñjati. Tassa rājā pasenadi kosalo sammukhībhāvampi na dadāti. Yadāpi tena manteti, tirodussantena manteti. Yassa kho pana, ambaṭṭha, dhammikaṁ payātaṁ bhikkhaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya, kathaṁ tassa rājā pasenadi kosalo sammukhībhāvampi na dadeyya. Passa, ambaṭṭha, yāva aparaddhañca te idaṁ ācariyassa brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa.
[¶33] What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? Suppose King Pasenadi was holding consultations with warrior-chiefs or chieftains while sitting on an elephant’s neck or on horseback, or while standing on the mat in a chariot. And suppose he’d get down from that place and stand aside. Then along would come a worker or their bondservant, who’d stand in the same place and continue the consultation: ‘This is what King Pasenadi says, and this too is what the king says.’ Though he spoke the king’s words and gave the king’s advice, does that qualify him to be the king or the king’s minister?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, idha rājā pasenadi kosalo hatthigīvāya vā nisinno assapiṭṭhe vā nisinno rathūpatthare vā ṭhito uggehi vā rājaññehi vā kiñcideva mantanaṁ manteyya. So tamhā padesā apakkamma ekamantaṁ tiṭṭheyya. Atha āgaccheyya suddo vā suddadāso vā, tasmiṁ padese ṭhito tadeva mantanaṁ manteyya: ‘evampi rājā pasenadi kosalo āha, evampi rājā pasenadi kosalo āhā’ti. Api nu so rājabhaṇitaṁ vā bhaṇati rājamantanaṁ vā manteti? Ettāvatā so assa rājā vā rājamatto vā”ti?
[¶34] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶35] “In the same way, Ambaṭṭha, the ancient seers of the brahmins were Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamadaggi, Aṅgīrasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, and Bhagu. They were the authors and propagators of the hymns. Their hymnal was sung and propagated and compiled in ancient times; and these days, brahmins continue to sing and chant it, chanting what was chanted and teaching what was taught. You might imagine that, since you’ve learned their hymns by heart in your own denomination, that makes you a seer or someone on the path to becoming a seer. But that is not possible.
> Pali: “Evameva kho tvaṁ, ambaṭṭha, ye te ahesuṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu: ‘tyāhaṁ mante adhiyāmi sācariyako’ti, tāvatā tvaṁ bhavissasi isi vā isitthāya vā paṭipannoti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶36] What do you think, Ambaṭṭha? According to what you have heard from elderly and senior brahmins, the tutors of tutors, did those ancient brahmin seers— nicely bathed and anointed, with hair and beard dressed, bedecked with jewels, earrings, and bracelets, dressed in white—amuse themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation, like you do today in your denomination?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, ambaṭṭha, kinti te sutaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ— ye te ahesuṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, evaṁ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṁ etarahi sācariyako”ti?
[¶37] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶38] “Did they eat boiled fine rice, garnished with clean meat, with the dark grains picked out, served with many soups and sauces, like you do today in your denomination?”
> Pali: “ …pe… Evaṁ su te sālīnaṁ odanaṁ sucimaṁsūpasecanaṁ vicitakāḷakaṁ anekasūpaṁ anekabyañjanaṁ paribhuñjanti, seyyathāpi tvaṁ etarahi sācariyako”ti?
[¶39] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶40] “Did they amuse themselves with girls wearing thongs that show off their curves, like you do today in your denomination?”
> Pali: “ …pe… Evaṁ su te veṭhakanatapassāhi nārīhi paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṁ etarahi sācariyako”ti?
[¶41] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶42] “Did they drive about in chariots drawn by mares with plaited manes, whipping and lashing them onward with long goads, like you do today in your denomination?”
> Pali: “ …pe… Evaṁ su te kuttavālehi vaḷavārathehi dīghāhi patodalaṭṭhīhi vāhane vitudentā vipariyāyanti, seyyathāpi tvaṁ etarahi sācariyako”ti?
[¶43] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶44] “Did they get men with long swords to guard them in fortresses with moats dug and barriers in place, like you do today in your denomination?”
> Pali: “ …pe… Evaṁ su te ukkiṇṇaparikhāsu okkhittapalighāsu nagarūpakārikāsu dīghāsivudhehi purisehi rakkhāpenti, seyyathāpi tvaṁ etarahi sācariyako”ti?
[¶45] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶46] “So, Ambaṭṭha, in your own denomination you are neither a seer nor someone on the path to becoming a seer. Whoever has any doubt or uncertainty about me, let them ask me and I will clear up their doubts with my answer.”
> Pali: “Iti kho, ambaṭṭha, neva tvaṁ isi na isitthāya paṭipanno sācariyako. Yassa kho pana, ambaṭṭha, mayi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā so maṁ pañhena, ahaṁ veyyākaraṇena sodhissāmī”ti.
[¶47] 7. Seeing the Two Marks
> Pali: 7. Dvelakkhaṇādassana
[¶48] Then the Buddha left his dwelling and proceeded to begin walking mindfully, and Ambaṭṭha did likewise. Then while walking beside the Buddha, Ambaṭṭha scrutinized his body for the thirty-two marks of a great man. He saw all of them except two, which he had doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā vihārā nikkhamma caṅkamaṁ abbhuṭṭhāsi. Ambaṭṭhopi māṇavo vihārā nikkhamma caṅkamaṁ abbhuṭṭhāsi. Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhagavantaṁ caṅkamantaṁ anucaṅkamamāno bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesi. Addasā kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya ca.
[¶49] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “This student Ambaṭṭha sees all the marks except two, which he has doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.” Then the Buddha used his psychic power to will that Ambaṭṭha would see his private parts sheathed in a foreskin. And he stuck out his tongue and stroked back and forth on his ear holes and nostrils, and covered his entire forehead with his tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “passati kho me ayaṁ ambaṭṭho māṇavo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya cā”ti. Atha kho bhagavā tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi. Yathā addasa ambaṭṭho māṇavo bhagavato kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā jivhaṁ ninnāmetvā ubhopi kaṇṇasotāni anumasi paṭimasi, ubhopi nāsikasotāni anumasi paṭimasi, kevalampi nalāṭamaṇḍalaṁ jivhāya chādesi.
[¶50] Then Ambaṭṭha thought, “The ascetic Gotama possesses the thirty-two marks completely, lacking none.”
> Pali: Atha kho ambaṭṭhassa māṇavassa etadahosi: “samannāgato kho samaṇo gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇehi, no aparipuṇṇehī”ti.
[¶51] He said to the Buddha, “Well, now, sir, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bho gotama, gacchāma, bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶52] “Please, Ambaṭṭha, go at your convenience.” Then Ambaṭṭha mounted his chariot drawn by mares and left.
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, ambaṭṭha, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo vaḷavārathamāruyha pakkāmi.
[¶53] Now at that time the brahmin Pokkharasāti had come out from Ukkaṭṭhā together with a large group of brahmins and was sitting in his own park just waiting for Ambaṭṭha. Then Ambaṭṭha entered the park. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the brahmin Pokkharasāti on foot. He bowed and sat down to one side, and Pokkharasāti said to him:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti ukkaṭṭhāya nikkhamitvā mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ sake ārāme nisinno hoti ambaṭṭhaṁyeva māṇavaṁ paṭimānento. Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo yena sako ārāmo tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā brāhmaṇaṁ pokkharasātiṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti etadavoca:
[¶54] “I hope, dear Ambaṭṭha, you saw the worthy Gotama?”
> Pali: “kacci, tāta ambaṭṭha, addasa taṁ bhavantaṁ gotaman”ti?
[¶55] “I saw him, sir.”
> Pali: “Addasāma kho mayaṁ, bho, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotaman”ti.
[¶56] “Well, does he live up to his reputation or not?”
> Pali: “Kacci, tāta ambaṭṭha, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ tathā santaṁyeva saddo abbhuggato no aññathā; kacci pana so bhavaṁ gotamo tādiso no aññādiso”ti?
[¶57] “He does, sir. The worthy Gotama possesses the thirty-two marks completely, lacking none.”
> Pali: “Tathā santaṁyeva, bho, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saddo abbhuggato no aññathā, tādisova so bhavaṁ gotamo no aññādiso. Samannāgato ca so bhavaṁ gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇehi no aparipuṇṇehī”ti.
[¶58] “And did you have some discussion with him?”
> Pali: “Ahu pana te, tāta ambaṭṭha, samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶59] “I did.”
> Pali: “Ahu kho me, bho, samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶60] “And what kind of discussion did you have with him?” Then Ambaṭṭha informed Pokkharasāti of all they had discussed.
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana te, tāta ambaṭṭha, ahu samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti? Atha kho ambaṭṭho māṇavo yāvatako ahosi bhagavatā saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo, taṁ sabbaṁ brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa ārocesi.
[¶61] Then Pokkharasāti said to Ambaṭṭha, “Oh, our bloody fake scholar, our fake learned man, who pretends to be proficient in the three Vedas! A man who behaves like this ought, when their body breaks up, after death, to be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. It’s only because you repeatedly attacked the worthy Gotama like that that he kept bringing up charges against us!” Angry and upset, he kicked Ambaṭṭha over, and wanted to go and see the Buddha right away.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “aho vata re amhākaṁ, paṇḍitaka, aho vata re amhākaṁ, bahussutaka, aho vata re amhākaṁ, tevijjaka, evarūpena kira, bho, puriso atthacarakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyya. Yadeva kho tvaṁ, ambaṭṭha, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ āsajja āsajja avacāsi, atha kho so bhavaṁ gotamo amhepi evaṁ upaneyya upaneyya avaca. Aho vata re amhākaṁ, paṇḍitaka, aho vata re amhākaṁ, bahussutaka, aho vata re amhākaṁ, tevijjaka, evarūpena kira, bho, puriso atthacarakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyyā”ti, kupito anattamano ambaṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ padasāyeva pavattesi. Icchati ca tāvadeva bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶62] 8. Pokkharasāti Visits the Buddha
> Pali: 8. Pokkharasātibuddhūpasaṅkamana
[¶63] Then those brahmins said to Pokkharasāti, “It’s much too late to visit the ascetic Gotama today. You can visit him tomorrow.”
> Pali: Atha kho te brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ pokkharasātiṁ etadavocuṁ: “ativikālo kho, bho, ajja samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Svedāni bhavaṁ pokkharasāti samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti.
[¶64] So Pokkharasāti had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home. Then he mounted a carriage and, with attendants carrying torches, set out from Ukkaṭṭhā for the forest near Icchānaṅgala. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and entered the monastery on foot. He went up to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha, “Master Gotama, has my resident pupil, the student Ambaṭṭha, come here?”
> Pali: Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā yāne āropetvā ukkāsu dhāriyamānāsu ukkaṭṭhāya niyyāsi, yena icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍo tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “āgamā nu khvidha, bho gotama, amhākaṁ antevāsī ambaṭṭho māṇavo”ti?
[¶65] “Yes he has, brahmin.”
> Pali: “Āgamā kho te, brāhmaṇa, antevāsī ambaṭṭho māṇavo”ti.
[¶66] “And did you have some discussion with him?”
> Pali: “Ahu pana te, bho gotama, ambaṭṭhena māṇavena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti?
[¶67] “I did.”
> Pali: “Ahu kho me, brāhmaṇa, ambaṭṭhena māṇavena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti.
[¶68] “And what kind of discussion did you have with him?” Then the Buddha informed Pokkharasāti of all they had discussed.
> Pali: “Yathākathaṁ pana te, bho gotama, ahu ambaṭṭhena māṇavena saddhiṁ kocideva kathāsallāpo”ti? Atha kho bhagavā yāvatako ahosi ambaṭṭhena māṇavena saddhiṁ kathāsallāpo, taṁ sabbaṁ brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa ārocesi.
[¶69] Then Pokkharasāti said to the Buddha, “Ambaṭṭha is a fool, worthy Gotama. Please forgive him.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “bālo, bho gotama, ambaṭṭho māṇavo, khamatu bhavaṁ gotamo ambaṭṭhassa māṇavassā”ti.
[¶70] “May the student Ambaṭṭha be happy, brahmin.”
> Pali: “Sukhī hotu, brāhmaṇa, ambaṭṭho māṇavo”ti.
[¶71] Then Pokkharasāti scrutinized the Buddha’s body for the thirty-two marks of a great man. He saw all of them except two, which he had doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni samannesi. Addasā kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya ca.
[¶72] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “Pokkharasāti sees all the marks except two, which he has doubts about: whether the private parts are sheathed in a foreskin, and the largeness of the tongue.” Then the Buddha used his psychic power to will that Pokkharasāti would see his private parts sheathed in a foreskin. And he stuck out his tongue and stroked back and forth on his ear holes and nostrils, and covered his entire forehead with his tongue.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “passati kho me ayaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni yebhuyyena ṭhapetvā dve. Dvīsu mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati— kosohite ca vatthaguyhe pahūtajivhatāya cā”ti. Atha kho bhagavā tathārūpaṁ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṁ abhisaṅkhāsi yathā addasa brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavato kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā jivhaṁ ninnāmetvā ubhopi kaṇṇasotāni anumasi paṭimasi, ubhopi nāsikasotāni anumasi paṭimasi, kevalampi nalāṭamaṇḍalaṁ jivhāya chādesi.
[¶73] Pokkharasāti thought, “The ascetic Gotama possesses the thirty-two marks completely, lacking none.”
> Pali: Atha kho brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa etadahosi: “samannāgato kho samaṇo gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇehi no aparipuṇṇehī”ti.
[¶74] He said to the Buddha, “Would the worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept today’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo ajjatanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶75] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Pokkharasāti announced the time to him, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.” Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of Pokkharasāti together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Pokkharasāti served and satisfied the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods, while his young students served the Saṅgha. When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Pokkharasāti took a low seat and sat to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocesi: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavantaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi, māṇavakāpi bhikkhusaṅghaṁ. Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶76] Then the Buddha taught him step by step, with a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He revealed the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. And when the Buddha knew that Pokkharasāti’s mind was ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he revealed the special teaching of the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the brahmin Pokkharasāti: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnassa kho brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa bhagavā anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ— dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ; kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ, nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā bhagavā aññāsi brāhmaṇaṁ pokkharasātiṁ kallacittaṁ muducittaṁ vinīvaraṇacittaṁ udaggacittaṁ pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa tasmiññeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.
[¶77] 9. Pokkharasāti Declares Himself a Lay Follower
> Pali: 9. Pokkharasātiupāsakattapaṭivedanā
[¶78] Then Pokkharasāti saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. He said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, just so has the worthy Gotama made the Teaching clear in many ways. Together with my children, wives, retinue, and ministers, I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.
> Pali: Atha kho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bho gotama, saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.
[¶79] Just as the worthy Gotama visits other devoted families in Ukkaṭṭhā, may he visit mine. The brahmin boys and girls there will bow to you, rise in your presence, give you a seat and water, and gain confidence in their hearts. That will be for their lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: Yathā ca bhavaṁ gotamo ukkaṭṭhāya aññāni upāsakakulāni upasaṅkamati, evameva bhavaṁ gotamo pokkharasātikulaṁ upasaṅkamatu. Tattha ye te māṇavakā vā māṇavikā vā bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ abhivādessanti vā paccuṭṭhissanti vā āsanaṁ vā udakaṁ vā dassanti cittaṁ vā pasādessanti, tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶80] “That’s nice of you to say, householder.”
> Pali: “Kalyāṇaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇā”ti.
[¶81] > Pali: Ambaṭṭhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 9. DN 4 · With Soṇadaṇḍa · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/9/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/9/#p-N
[¶0] DN 4 · With Soṇadaṇḍa
> Pali: DN 4 · Soṇadaṇḍasutta
[¶1] 1. The Brahmins and Householders of Campā
> Pali: 1. Campeyyakabrāhmaṇagahapatikā
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Aṅgas together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at Campā, where he stayed by the banks of the Gaggarā Lotus Pond.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā aṅgesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena campā tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre.
[¶3] Now at that time the brahmin Soṇadaṇḍa was living in Campā. It was a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo campaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ.
[¶4] The brahmins and householders of Campā heard:
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho campeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:
[¶5] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Campā and is staying on the banks of the Gaggarā Lotus Pond. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.” Then, exiting Campā, they formed into companies and headed to the Gaggarā Lotus Pond.
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito aṅgesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi campaṁ anuppatto campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti. Atha kho campeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā campāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena gaggarā pokkharaṇī tenupasaṅkamanti.
[¶6] Now at that time the brahmin Soṇadaṇḍa had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap. He saw the brahmins and householders heading for the lotus pond, and addressed his butler, “My butler, why are the brahmins and householders headed for the Gaggarā Lotus Pond?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato hoti. Addasā kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo campeyyake brāhmaṇagahapatike campāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte yena gaggarā pokkharaṇī tenupasaṅkamante. Disvā khattaṁ āmantesi: “kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, campeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā campāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena gaggarā pokkharaṇī tenupasaṅkamantī”ti?
[¶7] “The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Campā and is staying on the banks of the Gaggarā Lotus Pond. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They’re going to see that worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, bho, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito aṅgesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi campaṁ anuppatto campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Tamete bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī”ti.
[¶8] “Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them: ‘Sirs, the brahmin Soṇadaṇḍa asks you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Gotama.’”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho khatte, yena campeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā campeyyake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi: ‘soṇadaṇḍo, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha— āgamentu kira bhavanto, soṇadaṇḍopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khattā soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena campeyyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā campeyyake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca: “soṇadaṇḍo bho brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘āgamentu kira bhavanto, soṇadaṇḍopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶10] 2. The Qualities of Soṇadaṇḍa
> Pali: 2. Soṇadaṇḍaguṇakathā
[¶11] Now at that time around five hundred brahmins from abroad were residing in Campā on some business. They heard that the brahmin Soṇadaṇḍa was going to see the ascetic Gotama. They approached Soṇadaṇḍa and said to him, “Is it really true that you are going to see the ascetic Gotama?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nānāverajjakānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pañcamattāni brāhmaṇasatāni campāyaṁ paṭivasanti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Assosuṁ kho te brāhmaṇā: “soṇadaṇḍo kira brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti. Atha kho te brāhmaṇā yena soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā soṇadaṇḍaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “saccaṁ kira bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti?
[¶12] “Yes, gentlemen, it is true.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho me, bho, hoti: ‘ahampi samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmī’”ti.
[¶13] “Please don’t, worthy Soṇadaṇḍa! It’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama. For if you do so, your reputation will diminish and his will increase. For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.
> Pali: “Mā bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkami. Na arahati bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Sace bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissati, bhoto soṇadaṇḍassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati. Yampi bhoto soṇadaṇḍassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ soṇadaṇḍaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶14] You are well born on both your mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a pure vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca, saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Yampi bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca, saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ soṇadaṇḍaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶15] You’re rich, affluent, and wealthy. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo …pe…
[¶16] You recite and remember the hymns, and have mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. You know them word-by-word, and their grammar. You are well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe…
[¶17] You are attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. You have divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…
[¶18] You are ethical, mature in ethical conduct. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe…
[¶19] You’re a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…
[¶20] You’re the tutor of tutors for many, and teach three hundred young students to recite the hymns. Many students come from various districts and countries for the sake of the hymns, wishing to learn the hymns. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo tīṇi māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti. Bahū kho pana nānādisā nānājanapadā māṇavakā āgacchanti bhoto soṇadaṇḍassa santike mantatthikā mante adhiyitukāmā …pe…
[¶21] You’re old, elderly and senior, advanced in years, and have reached the final stage of life. The ascetic Gotama is young, and has newly gone forth. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto; samaṇo gotamo taruṇo ceva taruṇapabbajito ca …pe…
[¶22] You’re honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶23] and the brahmin Pokkharasāti. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶24] You live in Campā, a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. For this reason, too, it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.”
> Pali: Bhavañhi soṇadaṇḍo campaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ, raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ, rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. Yampi bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo campaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ, raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ, rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. Imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ soṇadaṇḍaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.
[¶25] 3. The Qualities of the Buddha
> Pali: 3. Buddhaguṇakathā
[¶26] When they had spoken, Soṇadaṇḍa said to those brahmins:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca:
[¶27] “Well then, gentlemen, listen to why it’s appropriate for me to go to see the ascetic Gotama, and it’s not appropriate for him to come to see me. He is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. For this reason it’s not appropriate for the ascetic Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him.
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho, mamapi suṇātha, yathā mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; na tveva arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca, saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ; atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶28] When he went forth he abandoned a large family circle. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo mahantaṁ ñātisaṅghaṁ ohāya pabbajito …pe…
[¶29] When he went forth he abandoned abundant gold, both coined and uncoined, stored above and below ground. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo pahūtaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ ohāya pabbajito bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhaṁ ca …pe…
[¶30] He went forth from the lay life to homelessness while still a youth, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo daharova samāno yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…
[¶31] Though his mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces, he shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…
[¶32] He is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato, brahmavaṇṇī, brahmavacchasī, akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…
[¶33] He is ethical, possessing ethical conduct that is noble and skillful. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sīlavā ariyasīlī kusalasīlī kusalasīlena samannāgato …pe…
[¶34] He’s a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…
[¶35] He’s a tutor of tutors. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo …pe…
[¶36] He has ended sensual desire, and is rid of caprice. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khīṇakāmarāgo vigatacāpallo …pe…
[¶37] He teaches the efficacy of deeds and action. He doesn’t wish any harm upon the community of brahmins. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kammavādī kiriyavādī apāpapurekkhāro brahmaññāya pajāya …pe…
[¶38] He went forth from an eminent family of unbroken aristocratic lineage. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo uccā kulā pabbajito asambhinnakhattiyakulā …pe…
[¶39] He went forth from a rich, affluent, and wealthy family. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo aḍḍhā kulā pabbajito mahaddhanā mahābhogā …pe…
[¶40] People come from distant lands and distant countries to question him. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā pañhaṁ pucchituṁ āgacchanti …pe…
[¶41] Many thousands of deities have gone for refuge for life to him. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ anekāni devatāsahassāni pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gatāni …pe…
[¶42] He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti …pe…
[¶43] He has the thirty-two marks of a great man. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato …pe…
[¶44] He is welcoming, congenial, polite, smiling, open, the first to speak. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ehisvāgatavādī sakhilo sammodako abbhākuṭiko uttānamukho pubbabhāsī …pe…
[¶45] He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by the four assemblies. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo catunnaṁ parisānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶46] Many gods and humans are devoted to him. …
> Pali: Samaṇe khalu, bho, gotame bahū devā ca manussā ca abhippasannā …pe…
[¶47] While he is residing in a village or town, non-human entities do not harass them. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo yasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā paṭivasati, na tasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā amanussā manusse viheṭhenti …pe…
[¶48] He leads an order and a community, and tutors a community, and is said to be the best of the various religious founders. He didn’t come by his fame in the same ways as those other ascetics and brahmins. Rather, he came by his fame due to his supreme knowledge and conduct. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo saṅghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo puthutitthakarānaṁ aggamakkhāyati. Yathā kho pana, bho, etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ yathā vā tathā vā yaso samudāgacchati, na hevaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato. Atha kho anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato …pe…
[¶49] King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶50] King Pasenadi of Kosala and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶51] The brahmin Pokkharasāti and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶52] He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶53] King Pasenadi of Kosala …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño pasenadissa kosalassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶54] and the brahmin Pokkharasāti.
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶55] The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Campā and is staying at the Gaggarā Lotus Pond. Any ascetic or brahmin who comes to stay in our village district is our guest, and should be honored and respected as such. For this reason, too, it’s not appropriate for the worthy Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him. This is the extent of the worthy Gotama’s praise that I have memorized. But his praises are not confined to this, for the praise of the worthy Gotama is limitless.”
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo campaṁ anuppatto, campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre. Ye kho pana, bho, keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā amhākaṁ gāmakhettaṁ āgacchanti atithī no te honti. Atithī kho panamhehi sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā apacetabbā. Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo campaṁ anuppatto campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre, atithimhākaṁ samaṇo gotamo; atithi kho panamhehi sakkātabbo garukātabbo mānetabbo pūjetabbo apacetabbo. Imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Ettake kho ahaṁ, bho, tassa bhoto gotamassa vaṇṇe pariyāpuṇāmi, no ca kho so bhavaṁ gotamo ettakavaṇṇo. Aparimāṇavaṇṇo hi so bhavaṁ gotamo”ti.
[¶56] When he had spoken, those brahmins said to him, “According to Soṇadaṇḍa’s praises, if the worthy Gotama were staying within a hundred leagues, it’d be worthwhile for a faithful gentleman to go to see him, even if he had to carry his own provisions in a knapsack.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā soṇadaṇḍaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yathā kho bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇe bhāsati ito cepi so bhavaṁ gotamo yojanasate viharati, alameva saddhena kulaputtena dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ api puṭosenā”ti.
[¶57] “Well then, gentlemen, let’s all go to see the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho, sabbeva mayaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶58] 4. Soṇadaṇḍa Has Second Thoughts
> Pali: 4. Soṇadaṇḍaparivitakka
[¶59] Then Soṇadaṇḍa together with a large group of brahmins approached the Gaggarā Lotus Pond.
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ yena gaggarā pokkharaṇī tenupasaṅkami.
[¶60] But as he reached the far side of the forest, this thought came to mind, “Suppose I was to ask the ascetic Gotama a question. He might say to me: ‘Brahmin, you shouldn’t ask your question like that. This is how you should ask it.’ And the assembly might disparage me for that: ‘Soṇadaṇḍa is foolish and incompetent. He’s not able to ask the ascetic Gotama a rational question.’ And when you’re disparaged by the assembly, your reputation diminishes. When your reputation diminishes, your wealth also diminishes. But my wealth relies on my reputation.
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa tirovanasaṇḍagatassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: “ahañceva kho pana samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pañhaṁ puccheyyaṁ; tatra ce maṁ samaṇo gotamo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na kho esa, brāhmaṇa, pañho evaṁ pucchitabbo, evaṁ nāmesa, brāhmaṇa, pañho pucchitabbo’ti, tena maṁ ayaṁ parisā paribhaveyya: ‘bālo soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo abyatto, nāsakkhi samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ yoniso pañhaṁ pucchitun’ti. Yaṁ kho panāyaṁ parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha. Yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ. Yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā.
[¶61] Or if the ascetic Gotama asks me a question, I might not satisfy him with my answer. He might say to me: ‘Brahmin, you shouldn’t answer the question like that. This is how you should answer it.’ And the assembly might disparage me for that: ‘Soṇadaṇḍa is foolish and incompetent. He’s not able to satisfy the ascetic Gotama’s mind with his answer.’ And when you’re disparaged by the assembly, your reputation diminishes. When your reputation diminishes, your wealth also diminishes. But my wealth relies on my reputation.
> Pali: Mamañceva kho pana samaṇo gotamo pañhaṁ puccheyya, tassa cāhaṁ pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ na ārādheyyaṁ; tatra ce maṁ samaṇo gotamo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na kho esa, brāhmaṇa, pañho evaṁ byākātabbo, evaṁ nāmesa, brāhmaṇa, pañho byākātabbo’ti, tena maṁ ayaṁ parisā paribhaveyya: ‘bālo soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo abyatto, nāsakkhi samaṇassa gotamassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādhetun’ti. Yaṁ kho panāyaṁ parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha. Yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ. Yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā.
[¶62] On the other hand, if I were to turn back after having come so far without having seen the ascetic Gotama, the assembly might disparage me for that: ‘Soṇadaṇḍa is foolish and incompetent. He’s stuck-up and scared. He doesn’t dare to go and see the ascetic Gotama. For how on earth can he turn back after having come so far without having seen the ascetic Gotama!’ And when you’re disparaged by the assembly, your reputation diminishes. When your reputation diminishes, your wealth also diminishes. But my wealth relies on my reputation.”
> Pali: Ahañceva kho pana evaṁ samīpagato samāno adisvāva samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ nivatteyyaṁ, tena maṁ ayaṁ parisā paribhaveyya: ‘bālo soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo abyatto mānathaddho bhīto ca, no visahati samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ, kathañhi nāma evaṁ samīpagato samāno adisvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ nivattissatī’ti. Yaṁ kho panāyaṁ parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha. Yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ, yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā”ti.
[¶63] Then Soṇadaṇḍa went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Before sitting down to one side, some of the brahmins and householders of Campā bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Campeyyakāpi kho brāhmaṇagahapatikā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu; sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
## 10. DN 4 · With Soṇadaṇḍa · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/10/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/10/#p-N
[¶0] But while sitting there, Soṇadaṇḍa continued to be plagued by many second thoughts. He thought, “If only the ascetic Gotama would ask me about my own tutor’s scriptural heritage of the three Vedas! Then I could definitely satisfy his mind with my answer.”
> Pali: Tatrapi sudaṁ soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo etadeva bahulamanuvitakkento nisinno hoti: “ahañceva kho pana samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pañhaṁ puccheyyaṁ; tatra ce maṁ samaṇo gotamo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na kho esa, brāhmaṇa, pañho evaṁ pucchitabbo, evaṁ nāmesa, brāhmaṇa, pañho pucchitabbo’ti, tena maṁ ayaṁ parisā paribhaveyya: ‘bālo soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo abyatto, nāsakkhi samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ yoniso pañhaṁ pucchitun’ti. Yaṁ kho panāyaṁ parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha. Yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ. Yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā. Mamañceva kho pana samaṇo gotamo pañhaṁ puccheyya, tassa cāhaṁ pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ na ārādheyyaṁ; tatra ce maṁ samaṇo gotamo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘na kho esa, brāhmaṇa, pañho evaṁ byākātabbo, evaṁ nāmesa, brāhmaṇa, pañho byākātabbo’ti, tena maṁ ayaṁ parisā paribhaveyya: ‘bālo soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo abyatto, nāsakkhi samaṇassa gotamassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādhetun’ti. Yaṁ kho panāyaṁ parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha. Yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ. Yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā. Aho vata maṁ samaṇo gotamo sake ācariyake tevijjake pañhaṁ puccheyya, addhā vatassāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādheyyaṁ pañhassa veyyākaraṇenā”ti.
[¶1] 5. What Makes a Brahmin
> Pali: 5. Brāhmaṇapaññatti
[¶2] Then, knowing Soṇadaṇḍa’s train of thought, it occurred to the Buddha, “This brahmin Soṇadaṇḍa is troubled by his own thoughts. Why don’t I ask him about his own tutor’s scriptural heritage of the three Vedas?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya etadahosi: “vihaññati kho ayaṁ soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo sakena cittena. Yannūnāhaṁ soṇadaṇḍaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ sake ācariyake tevijjake pañhaṁ puccheyyan”ti.
[¶3] So he said to Soṇadaṇḍa, “Brahmin, how many factors must a brahmin possess for the brahmins to describe him as a brahmin; and so that when he says ‘I am a brahmin’ he speaks rightly, without falling into falsehood?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā soṇadaṇḍaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “katihi pana, brāhmaṇa, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti?
[¶4] Then Soṇadaṇḍa thought, “The ascetic Gotama has asked me about exactly what I wanted, what I wished for, what I desired, what I yearned for; that is, my own scriptural heritage. I can definitely satisfy his mind with my answer.”
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “yaṁ vata no ahosi icchitaṁ, yaṁ ākaṅkhitaṁ, yaṁ adhippetaṁ, yaṁ abhipatthitaṁ: ‘aho vata maṁ samaṇo gotamo sake ācariyake tevijjake pañhaṁ puccheyya, addhā vatassāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādheyyaṁ pañhassa veyyākaraṇenā’ti, tatra maṁ samaṇo gotamo sake ācariyake tevijjake pañhaṁ pucchati. Addhā vatassāhaṁ cittaṁ ārādhessāmi pañhassa veyyākaraṇenā”ti.
[¶5] Then Soṇadaṇḍa straightened his back, looked around the assembly, and said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, a brahmin must possess five factors for the brahmins to describe him as a brahmin; and so that when he says ‘I am a brahmin’ he speaks rightly, without falling into falsehood. What five? It’s when a brahmin is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. He recites and remembers the hymns, and has mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knows them word-by-word, and their grammar. He is well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. He is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. He is ethical, mature in ethical conduct. He’s astute and intelligent, being the first or second to hold the sacrificial ladle. These are the five factors which a brahmin must possess for the brahmins to describe him as a brahmin; and so that when he says ‘I am a brahmin’ he speaks rightly, without falling into falsehood.”
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo abbhunnāmetvā kāyaṁ anuviloketvā parisaṁ bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “pañcahi, bho gotama, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyya. Katamehi pañcahi? Idha, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto hoti mātito ca pitito ca, saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena; ajjhāyako hoti mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo; abhirūpo hoti dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya; sīlavā hoti vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato; paṇḍito ca hoti medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. Imehi kho, bho gotama, pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti.
[¶6] “But brahmin, is it possible to set aside one of these five factors and still rightly describe someone as a brahmin?”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ pana, brāhmaṇa, pañcannaṁ aṅgānaṁ sakkā ekaṁ aṅgaṁ ṭhapayitvā catūhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapetuṁ; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti?
[¶7] “It is possible, worthy Gotama. We could leave appearance out of the five factors. For what does appearance matter? A brahmin must possess the remaining four factors for the brahmins to rightly describe him as a brahmin.”
> Pali: “Sakkā, bho gotama. Imesañhi, bho gotama, pañcannaṁ aṅgānaṁ vaṇṇaṁ ṭhapayāma. Kiñhi vaṇṇo karissati? Yato kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto hoti mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena; ajjhāyako ca hoti mantadharo ca tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo; sīlavā ca hoti vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato; paṇḍito ca hoti medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. Imehi kho, bho gotama, catūhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti.
[¶8] “But brahmin, is it possible to set aside one of these four factors and still rightly describe someone as a brahmin?”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ pana, brāhmaṇa, catunnaṁ aṅgānaṁ sakkā ekaṁ aṅgaṁ ṭhapayitvā tīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapetuṁ; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti?
[¶9] “It is possible, worthy Gotama. We could leave the hymns out of the four factors. For what do the hymns matter? A brahmin must possess the remaining three factors for the brahmins to rightly describe him as a brahmin.”
> Pali: “Sakkā, bho gotama. Imesañhi, bho gotama, catunnaṁ aṅgānaṁ mante ṭhapayāma. Kiñhi mantā karissanti? Yato kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto hoti mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena; sīlavā ca hoti vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato; paṇḍito ca hoti medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. Imehi kho, bho gotama, tīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti.
[¶10] “But brahmin, is it possible to set aside one of these three factors and still rightly describe someone as a brahmin?”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ pana, brāhmaṇa, tiṇṇaṁ aṅgānaṁ sakkā ekaṁ aṅgaṁ ṭhapayitvā dvīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapetuṁ; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti?
[¶11] “It is possible, worthy Gotama. We could leave birth out of the three factors. For what does birth matter? It’s when a brahmin is ethical, mature in ethical conduct; and he’s astute and intelligent, being the first or second to hold the sacrificial ladle. A brahmin must possess these two factors for the brahmins to rightly describe him as a brahmin.”
> Pali: “Sakkā, bho gotama. Imesañhi, bho gotama, tiṇṇaṁ aṅgānaṁ jātiṁ ṭhapayāma. Kiñhi jāti karissati? Yato kho, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo sīlavā hoti vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato; paṇḍito ca hoti medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. Imehi kho, bho gotama, dvīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti.
[¶12] When he had spoken, those brahmins said to him, “Please don’t say that, worthy Soṇadaṇḍa, please don’t say that! You’re just condemning appearance, the hymns, and birth! You’re totally going over to the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā soṇadaṇḍaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “mā bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo evaṁ avaca, mā bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo evaṁ avaca. Apavadateva bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo vaṇṇaṁ, apavadati mante, apavadati jātiṁ, ekaṁsena bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇasseva gotamassa vādaṁ anupakkhandatī”ti.
[¶13] So the Buddha said to them, “Well, brahmins, if you think that Soṇadaṇḍa is unlearned, a poor speaker, witless, and not capable of debating with me about this, then leave him aside and you can debate with me. But if you think that he’s learned, a good speaker who enunciates well, astute, and capable of debating with me about this, then you should stand aside and let him debate with me.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā te brāhmaṇe etadavoca: “sace kho tumhākaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘appassuto ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, akalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, duppañño ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, na ca pahoti soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun’ti, tiṭṭhatu soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, tumhe mayā saddhiṁ mantavho asmiṁ vacane. Sace pana tumhākaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ evaṁ hoti: ‘bahussuto ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, kalyāṇavākkaraṇo ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, paṇḍito ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo, pahoti ca soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo samaṇena gotamena saddhiṁ asmiṁ vacane paṭimantetun’ti, tiṭṭhatha tumhe, soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo mayā saddhiṁ paṭimantetū”ti.
[¶14] When he said this, Soṇadaṇḍa said to the Buddha, “Let it be, worthy Gotama, be silent. I myself will respond to them in a legitimate manner.” Then he said to those brahmins, “Don’t say this, good fellows, don’t say this: ‘You’re just condemning appearance, the hymns, and birth! You’re totally going over to the ascetic Gotama’s doctrine!’ I’m not condemning appearance, hymns, or birth.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭhatu bhavaṁ gotamo, tuṇhī bhavaṁ gotamo hotu, ahameva tesaṁ sahadhammena paṭivacanaṁ karissāmī”ti. Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca: “mā bhavanto evaṁ avacuttha, mā bhavanto evaṁ avacuttha: ‘apavadateva bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo vaṇṇaṁ, apavadati mante, apavadati jātiṁ, ekaṁsena bhavaṁ soṇadaṇḍo samaṇasseva gotamassa vādaṁ anupakkhandatī’ti. Nāhaṁ, bho, apavadāmi vaṇṇaṁ vā mante vā jātiṁ vā”ti.
[¶15] Now at that time Soṇadaṇḍa’s nephew, the young student Aṅgaka was sitting in that assembly. Then Soṇadaṇḍa said to those brahmins, “Gentlemen, do you see my nephew, the young student Aṅgaka?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa bhāgineyyo aṅgako nāma māṇavako tassaṁ parisāyaṁ nisinno hoti. Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca: “passanti no bhonto imaṁ aṅgakaṁ māṇavakaṁ amhākaṁ bhāgineyyan”ti?
[¶16] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”.
[¶17] “Aṅgaka is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. There’s no one in this assembly so good-looking, apart from the ascetic Gotama. Aṅgaka recites and remembers the hymns, and has mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knows them word-by-word, and their grammar. He is well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. And I am the one who teaches him the hymns. Aṅgaka is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. And I know his mother and father. But if Aṅgaka were to kill living creatures, steal, commit adultery, lie, and drink liquor, then what’s the use of his appearance, his hymns, or his birth? It’s when a brahmin is ethical, mature in ethical conduct; and he’s astute and intelligent, being the first or second to hold the sacrificial ladle. A brahmin must possess these two factors for the brahmins to rightly describe him as a brahmin.”
> Pali: “Aṅgako kho, bho, māṇavako abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya, nāssa imissaṁ parisāyaṁ samasamo atthi vaṇṇena ṭhapetvā samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ. Aṅgako kho māṇavako ajjhāyako mantadharo, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo. Ahamassa mante vācetā. Aṅgako kho māṇavako ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Ahamassa mātāpitaro jānāmi. Aṅgako kho māṇavako pāṇampi haneyya, adinnampi ādiyeyya, paradārampi gaccheyya, musāvādampi bhaṇeyya, majjampi piveyya, ettha dāni, bho, kiṁ vaṇṇo karissati, kiṁ mantā, kiṁ jāti? Yato kho, bho, brāhmaṇo sīlavā ca hoti vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato, paṇḍito ca hoti medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. Imehi kho, bho, dvīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapenti; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti.
[¶18] 6. The Discussion of Ethics and Wisdom
> Pali: 6. Sīlapaññākathā
[¶19] “But brahmin, is it possible to set aside one of these two factors and still rightly describe someone as a brahmin?”
> Pali: “Imesaṁ pana, brāhmaṇa, dvinnaṁ aṅgānaṁ sakkā ekaṁ aṅgaṁ ṭhapayitvā ekena aṅgena samannāgataṁ brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ paññapetuṁ; ‘brāhmaṇosmī’ti ca vadamāno sammā vadeyya, na ca pana musāvādaṁ āpajjeyyā”ti?
[¶20] “No, worthy Gotama. For wisdom is cleansed by ethics, and ethics are cleansed by wisdom. Ethics and wisdom always go together. An ethical person is wise, and a wise person ethical. And ethics and wisdom are said to be the best things in the world. It’s just like when you clean one hand with the other, or clean one foot with the other. In the same way, wisdom is cleansed by ethics, and ethics are cleansed by wisdom. Ethics and wisdom always go together. An ethical person is wise, and a wise person ethical. And ethics and wisdom are said to be the best things in the world.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama. Sīlaparidhotā hi, bho gotama, paññā; paññāparidhotaṁ sīlaṁ. Yattha sīlaṁ tattha paññā, yattha paññā tattha sīlaṁ. Sīlavato paññā, paññavato sīlaṁ. Sīlapaññāṇañca pana lokasmiṁ aggamakkhāyati. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, hatthena vā hatthaṁ dhoveyya, pādena vā pādaṁ dhoveyya; evameva kho, bho gotama, sīlaparidhotā paññā, paññāparidhotaṁ sīlaṁ. Yattha sīlaṁ tattha paññā, yattha paññā tattha sīlaṁ. Sīlavato paññā, paññavato sīlaṁ. Sīlapaññāṇañca pana lokasmiṁ aggamakkhāyatī”ti.
[¶21] “That’s so true, brahmin, that’s so true! For wisdom is cleansed by ethics, and ethics are cleansed by wisdom. Ethics and wisdom always go together. An ethical person is wise, and a wise person ethical. And ethics and wisdom are said to be the best things in the world. It’s just like when you clean one hand with the other, or clean one foot with the other. In the same way, wisdom is cleansed by ethics, and ethics are cleansed by wisdom. Ethics and wisdom always go together. An ethical person is wise, and a wise person ethical. And ethics and wisdom are said to be the best things in the world.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evametaṁ, brāhmaṇa, sīlaparidhotā hi, brāhmaṇa, paññā, paññāparidhotaṁ sīlaṁ. Yattha sīlaṁ tattha paññā, yattha paññā tattha sīlaṁ. Sīlavato paññā, paññavato sīlaṁ. Sīlapaññāṇañca pana lokasmiṁ aggamakkhāyati. Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, hatthena vā hatthaṁ dhoveyya, pādena vā pādaṁ dhoveyya; evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, sīlaparidhotā paññā, paññāparidhotaṁ sīlaṁ. Yattha sīlaṁ tattha paññā, yattha paññā tattha sīlaṁ. Sīlavato paññā, paññavato sīlaṁ. Sīlapaññāṇañca pana lokasmiṁ aggamakkhāyati.
[¶22] But what, brahmin, is that ethical conduct? And what is that wisdom?”
> Pali: Katamaṁ pana taṁ, brāhmaṇa, sīlaṁ? Katamā sā paññā”ti?
[¶23] “That’s all I know about this matter, worthy Gotama. May the worthy Gotama himself please clarify the meaning of this.”
> Pali: “Ettakaparamāva mayaṁ, bho gotama, etasmiṁ atthe. Sādhu vata bhavantaṁyeva gotamaṁ paṭibhātu etassa bhāsitassa attho”ti.
[¶24] “Well then, brahmin, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇohi, sādhukaṁ manasikarohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶25] “Yes, worthy sir,” Soṇadaṇḍa replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶26] “It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. This, brahmin, is that ethical conduct. … They enter and remain in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption … They project and extend the mind toward knowledge and vision … This pertains to their wisdom. … They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’ This pertains to their wisdom. This, brahmin, is that wisdom.”
> Pali: “idha, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti. Idaṁ kho taṁ, brāhmaṇa, sīlaṁ …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati … dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati …pe… ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati, abhininnāmeti …pe… Idampissa hoti paññāya …pe… nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti. Idampissa hoti paññāya ayaṁ kho sā, brāhmaṇa, paññā”ti.
[¶27] 7. Soṇadaṇḍa Declares Himself a Lay Follower
> Pali: 7. Soṇadaṇḍaupāsakattapaṭivedanā
[¶28] When he had spoken, Soṇadaṇḍa said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life. Would you and the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca, bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ. Adhivāsetu ca me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶29] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Soṇadaṇḍa rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving. And when the night had passed Soṇadaṇḍa had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.” Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of Soṇadaṇḍa together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Soṇadaṇḍa served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi. Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena soṇadaṇḍassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶30] When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Soṇadaṇḍa took a low seat and sat to one side. Seated to one side he said to the Buddha: “Worthy Gotama, if, when I have gone to an assembly, I rise from my seat and bow to the worthy Gotama, that assembly might disparage me for that. And when you’re disparaged by the assembly, your reputation diminishes. When your reputation diminishes, your wealth also diminishes. But my wealth relies on my reputation. If, when I have gone to an assembly, I raise my cupped palms, please take it that I have risen from my seat. And if I undo my turban, please take it that I have bowed. And the worthy Gotama, if, when I am in a carriage, I get down from my carriage and bow to the worthy Gotama, that assembly might disparage me for that. If, when I am in a carriage, I hold up my goad, please take it that I have got down from my carriage. And if I lower my parasol, please take it that I have bowed.”
> Pali: Atha kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho soṇadaṇḍo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ahañceva kho pana, bho gotama, parisagato samāno āsanā vuṭṭhahitvā bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ abhivādeyyaṁ, tena maṁ sā parisā paribhaveyya. Yaṁ kho pana sā parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha. Yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ. Yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā. Ahañceva kho pana, bho gotama, parisagato samāno añjaliṁ paggaṇheyyaṁ, āsanā me taṁ bhavaṁ gotamo paccuṭṭhānaṁ dhāretu. Ahañceva kho pana, bho gotama, parisagato samāno veṭhanaṁ omuñceyyaṁ, sirasā me taṁ bhavaṁ gotamo abhivādanaṁ dhāretu. Ahañceva kho pana, bho gotama, yānagato samāno yānā paccorohitvā bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ abhivādeyyaṁ, tena maṁ sā parisā paribhaveyya. Yaṁ kho pana sā parisā paribhaveyya, yasopi tassa hāyetha, yassa kho pana yaso hāyetha, bhogāpi tassa hāyeyyuṁ. Yasoladdhā kho panamhākaṁ bhogā. Ahañceva kho pana, bho gotama, yānagato samāno patodalaṭṭhiṁ abbhunnāmeyyaṁ, yānā me taṁ bhavaṁ gotamo paccorohanaṁ dhāretu. Ahañceva kho pana, bho gotama, yānagato samāno chattaṁ apanāmeyyaṁ, sirasā me taṁ bhavaṁ gotamo abhivādanaṁ dhāretū”ti.
[¶31] Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the brahmin Soṇadaṇḍa with a Dhamma talk, after which he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā soṇadaṇḍaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmīti.
[¶32] > Pali: Soṇadaṇḍasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 11. DN 5 · With Kūṭadanta · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/11/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/11/#p-N
[¶0] DN 5 · With Kūṭadanta
> Pali: DN 5 · Kūṭadantasutta
[¶1] 1. The Brahmins and Householders of Khāṇumata
> Pali: 1. Khāṇumatakabrāhmaṇagahapatikā
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Magadhans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Magadhan brahmins named Khāṇumata. There he stayed nearby at Ambalaṭṭhikā.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena khāṇumataṁ nāma magadhānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ.
[¶3] Now at that time the brahmin Kūṭadanta was living in Khāṇumata. It was a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. Now at that time Kūṭadanta had prepared a great sacrifice. Bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats and rams—seven hundred of each—had been led to the post for the sacrifice.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyañño upakkhaṭo hoti. Satta ca usabhasatāni satta ca vacchatarasatāni satta ca vacchatarīsatāni satta ca ajasatāni satta ca urabbhasatāni thūṇūpanītāni honti yaññatthāya.
[¶4] The brahmins and householders of Khāṇumata heard:
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:
[¶5] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶6] Then, exiting Khāṇumata, they formed into companies and headed to Ambalaṭṭhikā.
> Pali: Atha kho khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamanti.
[¶7] Now at that time the brahmin Kūṭadanta had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap. He saw the brahmins and householders heading for Ambalaṭṭhikā, and addressed his butler, “My butler, why are the brahmins and householders headed for Ambalaṭṭhikā?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato hoti. Addasā kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamante. Disvā khattaṁ āmantesi: “kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā khāṇumatā nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamantī”ti?
[¶8] “The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They’re going to see that worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, bho, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito magadhesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi khāṇumataṁ anuppatto, khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Tamete bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī”ti.
[¶9] Then Kūṭadanta thought, “I’ve heard that the ascetic Gotama knows how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories. I don’t know about that, but I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Why don’t I ask him how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories?”
> Pali: Atha kho kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ: ‘samaṇo gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ jānātī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ. Icchāmi cāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ upasaṅkamitvā tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ puccheyyan”ti.
[¶10] Then Kūṭadanta addressed his butler, “Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them: ‘Sirs, the brahmin Kūṭadanta asks you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Gotama.’”
> Pali: Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo khattaṁ āmantesi: “tena hi, bho khatte, yena khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama. upasaṅkamitvā khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi: ‘kūṭadanto, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha— āgamentu kira bhavanto, kūṭadantopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶11] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khattā kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena khāṇumatakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā khāṇumatake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca: “kūṭadanto, bho, brāhmaṇo evamāha: ‘āgamentu kira bhonto, kūṭadantopi brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’”ti.
[¶12] 2. The Qualities of Kūṭadanta
> Pali: 2. Kūṭadantaguṇakathā
[¶13] Now at that time several hundred brahmins were residing in Khāṇumata thinking to participate in Kūṭadanta’s sacrifice. They heard that Kūṭadanta was going to see the ascetic Gotama. They approached Kūṭadanta and said to him:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena anekāni brāhmaṇasatāni khāṇumate paṭivasanti: “kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa mahāyaññaṁ anubhavissāmā”ti. Assosuṁ kho te brāhmaṇā: “kūṭadanto kira brāhmaṇo samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti. Atha kho te brāhmaṇā yena kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. upasaṅkamitvā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ:
[¶14] “Is it really true that you are going to see the ascetic Gotama?”
> Pali: “saccaṁ kira bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti?
[¶15] “Yes, worthy sir, it is true.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ kho me, bho, hoti: ‘ahampi samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmī’”ti.
[¶16] “Please don’t! It’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama. For if you do so, your reputation will diminish and his will increase. For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.
> Pali: “Mā bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkami. Na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Sace bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissati, bhoto kūṭadantassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati. Yampi bhoto kūṭadantassa yaso hāyissati, samaṇassa gotamassa yaso abhivaḍḍhissati, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶17] You are well born on both your mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Yampi bhavaṁ kūṭadanto ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶18] You’re rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of property and assets, and lots of money and grain …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtajātarūparajato …pe…
[¶19] You recite and remember the hymns, and have mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. You know them word-by-word, and their grammar. You are well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe…
[¶20] You are attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. You have divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…
[¶21] You are ethical, mature in ethical conduct. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe…
[¶22] You’re a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…
[¶23] You’re the tutor of tutors for many, and teach three hundred young students to recite the hymns. Many students come from various districts and countries for the sake of the hymns, wishing to learn the hymns. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo tīṇi māṇavakasatāni mante vāceti, bahū kho pana nānādisā nānājanapadā māṇavakā āgacchanti bhoto kūṭadantassa santike mantatthikā mante adhiyitukāmā …pe…
[¶24] You’re old, elderly and senior, advanced in years, and have reached the final stage of life. The ascetic Gotama is young, and has newly gone forth. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto. Samaṇo gotamo taruṇo ceva taruṇapabbajito ca …pe…
[¶25] You’re honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶26] and the brahmin Pokkharasāti. …
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶27] You live in Khāṇumata, a crown property given by King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin. For this reason it’s not appropriate for you to go to see the ascetic Gotama; it’s appropriate that he comes to see you.”
> Pali: Bhavañhi kūṭadanto khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ. Yampi bhavaṁ kūṭadanto khāṇumataṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ, raññā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ, imināpaṅgena na arahati bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Samaṇo tveva gotamo arahati bhavantaṁ kūṭadantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitun”ti.
[¶28] 3. The Qualities of the Buddha
> Pali: 3. Buddhaguṇakathā
[¶29] When they had spoken, Kūṭadanta said to those brahmins:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo te brāhmaṇe etadavoca:
[¶30] “Well then, gentlemen, listen to why it’s appropriate for me to go to see the ascetic Gotama, and it’s not appropriate for him to come to see me. He is well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation. For this reason it’s not appropriate for the ascetic Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him.
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho, mamapi suṇātha, yathā mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ, na tveva arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, imināpaṅgena na arahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶31] When he went forth he abandoned a large family circle. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo mahantaṁ ñātisaṅghaṁ ohāya pabbajito …pe…
[¶32] When he went forth he abandoned abundant gold, both coined and uncoined, stored above and below ground. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo pahūtaṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṁ ohāya pabbajito bhūmigatañca vehāsaṭṭhaṁ ca …pe…
[¶33] He went forth from the lay life to homelessness while still a youth, young, with pristine black hair, blessed with youth, in the prime of life. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo daharova samāno yuvā susukāḷakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato paṭhamena vayasā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…
[¶34] Though his mother and father wished otherwise, weeping with tearful faces, he shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo akāmakānaṁ mātāpitūnaṁ assumukhānaṁ rudantānaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito …pe…
[¶35] He is attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He has divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe…
[¶36] He is ethical, possessing ethical conduct that is noble and skillful. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sīlavā ariyasīlī kusalasīlī kusalasīlena samannāgato …pe…
[¶37] He’s a good speaker who enunciates well, with a polished, clear, and articulate voice that expresses the meaning. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kalyāṇavāco kalyāṇavākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato vissaṭṭhāya anelagalāya atthassa viññāpaniyā …pe…
[¶38] He’s a tutor of tutors. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo bahūnaṁ ācariyapācariyo …pe…
[¶39] He has ended sensual desire, and is rid of caprice. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khīṇakāmarāgo vigatacāpallo …pe…
[¶40] He teaches the efficacy of deeds and action. He doesn’t wish any harm upon the community of brahmins. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo kammavādī kiriyavādī apāpapurekkhāro brahmaññāya pajāya …pe…
[¶41] He went forth from an eminent family of unbroken aristocratic lineage. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo uccā kulā pabbajito asambhinnakhattiyakulā …pe…
[¶42] He went forth from a rich, affluent, and wealthy family. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo aḍḍhā kulā pabbajito mahaddhanā mahābhogā …pe…
[¶43] People come from distant lands and distant countries to question him. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā pañhaṁ pucchituṁ āgacchanti …pe…
[¶44] Many thousands of deities have gone for refuge for life to him. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ anekāni devatāsahassāni pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gatāni …pe…
[¶45] He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti …pe…
[¶46] He has the thirty-two marks of a great man. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato …pe…
[¶47] He is welcoming, congenial, polite, smiling, open, the first to speak. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo ehisvāgatavādī sakhilo sammodako abbhākuṭiko uttānamukho pubbabhāsī …pe…
[¶48] He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by the four assemblies. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo catunnaṁ parisānaṁ sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶49] Many gods and humans are devoted to him. …
> Pali: Samaṇe khalu, bho, gotame bahū devā ca manussā ca abhippasannā …pe…
[¶50] While he is residing in a village or town, non-human entities do not harass them. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo yasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā paṭivasati na tasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā amanussā manusse viheṭhenti …pe…
[¶51] He leads an order and a community, and tutors a community, and is said to be the best of the various religious founders. He didn’t come by his fame in the same ways as those other ascetics and brahmins. Rather, he came by his fame due to his supreme knowledge and conduct. …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo saṅghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo puthutitthakarānaṁ aggamakkhāyati, yathā kho pana, bho, etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ yathā vā tathā vā yaso samudāgacchati, na hevaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato. Atha kho anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya samaṇassa gotamassa yaso samudāgato …pe…
[¶52] King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶53] King Pasenadi of Kosala and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶54] The brahmin Pokkharasāti and his wives and children have gone for refuge for life to the ascetic Gotama. …
> Pali: Samaṇaṁ khalu, bho, gotamaṁ brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco pāṇehi saraṇaṁ gato …pe…
[¶55] He’s honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed by King Bimbisāra of Magadha …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶56] King Pasenadi of Kosala …
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo rañño pasenadissa kosalassa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶57] and the brahmin Pokkharasāti.
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa sakkato garukato mānito pūjito apacito …pe…
[¶58] The ascetic Gotama has arrived at Khāṇumata and is staying at Ambalaṭṭhikā. Any ascetic or brahmin who comes to stay in our village district is our guest, and should be honored and respected as such. For this reason, too, it’s not appropriate for Worthy Gotama to come to see me; rather, it’s appropriate for me to go to see him. This is the extent of the worthy Gotama’s praise that I have memorized. But his praises are not confined to this, for the praise of the worthy Gotama is limitless.”
> Pali: Samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ. Ye kho pana, bho, keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā amhākaṁ gāmakhettaṁ āgacchanti, atithī no te honti. Atithī kho panamhehi sakkātabbā garukātabbā mānetabbā pūjetabbā apacetabbā. Yampi, bho, samaṇo gotamo khāṇumataṁ anuppatto khāṇumate viharati ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ, atithimhākaṁ samaṇo gotamo. Atithi kho panamhehi sakkātabbo garukātabbo mānetabbo pūjetabbo apacetabbo. Imināpaṅgena nārahati so bhavaṁ gotamo amhākaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Atha kho mayameva arahāma taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Ettake kho ahaṁ, bho, tassa bhoto gotamassa vaṇṇe pariyāpuṇāmi, no ca kho so bhavaṁ gotamo ettakavaṇṇo. Aparimāṇavaṇṇo hi so bhavaṁ gotamo”ti.
[¶59] When he had spoken, those brahmins said to him, “According to Kūṭadanta’s praises, if the worthy Gotama were staying within a hundred leagues, it’d be worthwhile for a faithful gentleman to go to see him, even if he had to carry his own provisions in a knapsack.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yathā kho bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇe bhāsati, ito cepi so bhavaṁ gotamo yojanasate viharati, alameva saddhena kulaputtena dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ api puṭosenā”ti.
[¶60] “Well then, gentlemen, let’s all go to see the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho, sabbeva mayaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶61] 4. The Story of King Mahāvijita’s Sacrifice
> Pali: 4. Mahāvijitarājayaññakathā
[¶62] Then Kūṭadanta together with a large group of brahmins went to Ambalaṭṭhikā, approached the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Before sitting down to one side, some of the brahmins and householders of Khāṇumata bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo mahatā brāhmaṇagaṇena saddhiṁ yena ambalaṭṭhikā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Khāṇumatakāpi kho brāhmaṇagahapatikā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶63] Kūṭadanta said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, I’ve heard that you know how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories. I don’t know about that, but I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please teach me how to accomplish the sacrifice with three modes and sixteen accessories.”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama: ‘samaṇo gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ jānātī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ jānāmi tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ. Icchāmi cāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Sādhu me bhavaṁ gotamo tividhaṁ yaññasampadaṁ soḷasaparikkhāraṁ desetū”ti.
[¶64] “Well then, brahmin, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, suṇāhi sādhukaṁ manasikarohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶65] “Yes, worthy sir,” Kūṭadanta replied. The Buddha said this: “Once upon a time, brahmin, there was a king named Mahāvijita. He was rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses. Then as King Mahāvijita was in private retreat this thought came to his mind: ‘I have achieved human wealth, and reign after conquering this vast territory. Why don’t I hold a large sacrifice? That will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca: “bhūtapubbaṁ, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito nāma ahosi aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rañño mahāvijitassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘adhigatā kho me vipulā mānusakā bhogā, mahantaṁ pathavimaṇḍalaṁ abhivijiya ajjhāvasāmi, yannūnāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajeyyaṁ, yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.
[¶66] Then he summoned the brahmin high priest and said to him: ‘Just now, brahmin, as I was in private retreat this thought came to mind, “I have achieved human wealth, and reign after conquering this vast territory. Why don’t I perform a great sacrifice? That will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.” Brahmin, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please instruct me. It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantetvā etadavoca: ‘idha mayhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: “adhigatā kho me vipulā mānusakā bhogā, mahantaṁ pathavimaṇḍalaṁ abhivijiya ajjhāvasāmi. Yannūnāhaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajeyyaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti. Icchāmahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.
[¶67] When he had spoken, the brahmin high priest said to him: ‘Sir, the king’s realm is harried and oppressed. Raiding of villages, towns, and cities has been seen, and infesting of highways. But if the king were to extract more taxes while his realm is thus harried and oppressed, he would not be doing his duty.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rājānaṁ mahāvijitaṁ etadavoca: ‘bhoto kho rañño janapado sakaṇṭako sauppīḷo, gāmaghātāpi dissanti, nigamaghātāpi dissanti, nagaraghātāpi dissanti, panthaduhanāpi dissanti. Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā evaṁ sakaṇṭake janapade sauppīḷe balimuddhareyya, akiccakārī assa tena bhavaṁ rājā.
[¶68] Now the king might think, “I’ll eradicate this plague of savages by execution or imprisonment or confiscation or condemnation or banishment!” But that’s not the right way to eradicate this plague of savages. Those who remain after the killing will return to harass the king’s realm.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño evamassa: “ahametaṁ dassukhīlaṁ vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā garahāya vā pabbājanāya vā samūhanissāmī”ti, na kho panetassa dassukhīlassa evaṁ sammā samugghāto hoti. Ye te hatāvasesakā bhavissanti, te pacchā rañño janapadaṁ viheṭhessanti.
[¶69] Rather, here is a plan, relying on which the plague of savages will be properly uprooted. So let the king provide seed and fodder for those in the realm who work in growing crops and raising cattle. Let the king provide funding for those who work in trade. Let the king guarantee food and wages for those in government service. Then the people, occupied with their own work, will not harass the realm. The king’s revenues will be great. When the country is secured as a sanctuary, free of being harried and oppressed, the happy people, with joy in their hearts, dancing with children at their breast, will dwell as if their houses were wide open.’
> Pali: Api ca kho idaṁ saṁvidhānaṁ āgamma evametassa dassukhīlassa sammā samugghāto hoti. Tena hi bhavaṁ rājā ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti kasigorakkhe, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā bījabhattaṁ anuppadetu. Ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti vāṇijjāya, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā pābhataṁ anuppadetu. Ye bhoto rañño janapade ussahanti rājaporise, tesaṁ bhavaṁ rājā bhattavetanaṁ pakappetu. Te ca manussā sakammapasutā rañño janapadaṁ na viheṭhessanti; mahā ca rañño rāsiko bhavissati. Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe viharissantī’ti.
[¶70] The king agreed with the high priest’s advice and followed his recommendation.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā ye rañño janapade ussahiṁsu kasigorakkhe, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito bījabhattaṁ anuppadāsi. Ye ca rañño janapade ussahiṁsu vāṇijjāya, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito pābhataṁ anuppadāsi. Ye ca rañño janapade ussahiṁsu rājaporise, tesaṁ rājā mahāvijito bhattavetanaṁ pakappesi. Te ca manussā sakammapasutā rañño janapadaṁ na viheṭhiṁsu, mahā ca rañño rāsiko ahosi. Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe vihariṁsu.
[¶71] Then the king summoned the brahmin high priest and said to him: ‘I have eradicated the plague of savages. And relying on your plan my revenue is now great. Since the country is secured as a sanctuary, free of being harried and oppressed, the happy people, with joy in their hearts, dancing with children at their breast, dwell as if their houses were wide open. Brahmin, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please instruct me. It will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.’
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ āmantetvā etadavoca: ‘samūhato kho me bhoto dassukhīlo, bhoto saṁvidhānaṁ āgamma mahā ca me rāsiko. Khemaṭṭhitā janapadā akaṇṭakā anuppīḷā manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharā maññe viharanti. Icchāmahaṁ brāhmaṇa mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.
[¶72] 4.1. The Four Accessories
> Pali: 4.1. Catuparikkhāra
[¶73] ‘In that case, let the king announce this throughout the realm to the aristocrat vassals of both town and country; the ministers and councillors of both town and country; the well-to-do brahmins of both town and country; and the well-off householders of both town and country. “I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please grant your approval, worthy sirs; it will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.”’
> Pali: Tena hi bhavaṁ rājā ye bhoto rañño janapade khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca te bhavaṁ rājā āmantayataṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. Ye bhoto rañño janapade amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te bhavaṁ rājā āmantayataṁ: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti.
[¶74] The king agreed with the high priest’s advice and followed his recommendation. And all of the people who were thus informed responded by saying: ‘May the king perform a sacrifice! It is time for a sacrifice, Great King.’ And so these four consenting factions became accessories to the sacrifice.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, brāhmaṇa, rājā mahāvijito purohitassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā ye rañño janapade khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te rājā mahāvijito āmantesi: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. ‘Yajataṁ bhavaṁ rājā yaññaṁ, yaññakālo, mahārājā’ti. Ye rañño janapade amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, te rājā mahāvijito āmantesi: ‘icchāmahaṁ, bho, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ. Anujānantu me bhavanto yaṁ mama assa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā’ti. ‘Yajataṁ bhavaṁ rājā yaññaṁ, yaññakālo, mahārājā’ti. Itime cattāro anumatipakkhā tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.
[¶75] 4.2. The Eight Accessories
> Pali: 4.2. Aṭṭhaparikkhāra
[¶76] King Mahāvijita possessed eight factors.
> Pali: Rājā mahāvijito aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato—
[¶77] He was well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation.
> Pali: ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena;
[¶78] He was attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. He had divine looks and lustre, remarkable to behold.
> Pali: abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya;
[¶79] He was rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses.
> Pali: aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro;
[¶80] He was powerful, having an army of four divisions that was obedient and carried out instructions. He’d probably prevail over his enemies just with his reputation.
> Pali: balavā caturaṅginiyā senāya samannāgato assavāya ovādapaṭikarāya sahati maññe paccatthike yasasā;
[¶81] He was faithful, generous, a donor, his door always open. He was a well-spring of support, making merit with ascetics and brahmins, for paupers, vagrants, supplicants, and beggars.
> Pali: saddho dāyako dānapati anāvaṭadvāro samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ opānabhūto puññāni karoti;
[¶82] He was very learned in diverse fields of learning. He understood the meaning of diverse statements, saying: ‘This is what that statement means; that is what this statement means.’
> Pali: bahussuto tassa tassa sutajātassa, tassa tasseva kho pana bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānāti: ‘ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho’ti;
[¶83] He was astute, competent, and intelligent, able to think issues through as they bear upon the past, future, and present.
> Pali: paṇḍito, viyatto, medhāvī, paṭibalo, atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ.
[¶84] These are the eight factors that King Mahāvijita possessed. And so these eight factors also became accessories to the sacrifice.
> Pali: Rājā mahāvijito imehi aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato. Iti imānipi aṭṭhaṅgāni tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.
[¶85] 4.3. Four More Accessories
> Pali: 4.3. Catuparikkhāra
[¶86] And the brahmin high priest had four factors.
> Pali: Purohito brāhmaṇo catūhaṅgehi samannāgato,
[¶87] He was well born on both his mother’s and father’s side, stemming from a clean vessel, with irrefutable and impeccable genealogy back to the seventh paternal generation.
> Pali: ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena;
[¶88] He recited and remembered the hymns, and had mastered the three Vedas, together with their vocabularies and ritual performance, their phonology and word classification, and the testaments as fifth. He knew them word-by-word, and their grammar. He was well versed in cosmology and the marks of a great man.
> Pali: ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo;
[¶89] He was ethical, mature in ethical conduct.
> Pali: sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato;
[¶90] He was astute, competent, and intelligent, being the first or second to hold the sacrificial ladle.
> Pali: paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ.
[¶91] These are the four factors that the brahmin high priest possessed. And so these four factors also became accessories to the sacrifice.
> Pali: Purohito brāhmaṇo imehi catūhaṅgehi samannāgato. Iti imānipi cattāri aṅgāni tasseva yaññassa parikkhārā bhavanti.
[¶92] 4.4. The Three Modes
> Pali: 4.4. Tissovidhā
[¶93] Next, before the sacrifice, the brahmin high priest taught the three modes to the king. ‘Now, though the king wants to perform a great sacrifice, he might have certain regrets, thinking: “I shall lose a great fortune,” or “I am losing a great fortune,” or “I have lost a great fortune.” But the king should not harbor such regrets.’
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā tisso vidhā desesi. Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yiṭṭhukāmassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: ‘“mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigacchissatī”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo. Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: “mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigacchatī”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo. Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yiṭṭhassa kocideva vippaṭisāro: “mahā vata me bhogakkhandho vigato”ti, so bhotā raññā vippaṭisāro na karaṇīyo’ti.
## 12. DN 5 · With Kūṭadanta · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/12/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/12/#p-N
[¶0] These are the three modes that the brahmin high priest taught to the king before the sacrifice.
> Pali: Imā kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā tisso vidhā desesi.
[¶1] 4.5. The Ten Respects
> Pali: 4.5. Dasaākāra
[¶2] Next, before the sacrifice, the brahmin high priest dispelled the king’s regret regarding the recipients in ten respects:
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā dasahākārehi paṭiggāhakesu vippaṭisāraṁ paṭivinesi.
[¶3] ‘There will come to the sacrifice those who kill living creatures and those who refrain from killing living creatures. As to those who kill living creatures, the outcome of that is theirs alone. But as to those who refrain from killing living creatures, it is for their sakes that the king should sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.
> Pali: ‘Āgamissanti kho bhoto yaññaṁ pāṇātipātinopi pāṇātipātā paṭiviratāpi. Ye tattha pāṇātipātino, tesaññeva tena. Ye tattha pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā, te ārabbha yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.
[¶4] There will come to the sacrifice those who steal … commit sexual misconduct … lie … use backbiting … use harsh speech … talk nonsense … are covetous … have ill will … have wrong view and those who have right view. As to those who have wrong view, the outcome of that is theirs alone. But as to those who have right view, it is for their sakes that the king should sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.’
> Pali: Āgamissanti kho bhoto yaññaṁ adinnādāyinopi adinnādānā paṭiviratāpi …pe… kāmesu micchācārinopi kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratāpi … musāvādinopi musāvādā paṭiviratāpi … pisuṇavācinopi pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratāpi … pharusavācinopi pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratāpi … samphappalāpinopi samphappalāpā paṭiviratāpi … abhijjhālunopi anabhijjhālunopi … byāpannacittāpi abyāpannacittāpi … micchādiṭṭhikāpi sammādiṭṭhikāpi …. Ye tattha micchādiṭṭhikā, tesaññeva tena. Ye tattha sammādiṭṭhikā, te ārabbha yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetū’ti.
[¶5] These are the ten respects in which the high priest dispelled the king’s regret regarding the recipients before the sacrifice.
> Pali: Imehi kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa pubbeva yaññā dasahākārehi paṭiggāhakesu vippaṭisāraṁ paṭivinesi.
[¶6] 4.6. The Sixteen Respects
> Pali: 4.6. Soḷasākāra
[¶7] Next, while the king was performing the great sacrifice, the brahmin high priest educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the king’s mind in sixteen respects:
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa soḷasahākārehi cittaṁ sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi
[¶8] ‘Now, while the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say, “King Mahāvijita performs a great sacrifice, but he did not announce it to the aristocrat vassals of town and country. That’s the kind of great sacrifice that this king performs.” Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. For the king did indeed announce it to the aristocrat vassals of town and country. Let the king know this as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.
> Pali: siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: ‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho tassa āmantitā khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca; atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. Bhotā kho pana raññā āmantitā khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.
[¶9] While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say, “King Mahāvijita performs a great sacrifice, but he did not announce it to the aristocrat vassals; the ministers and councillors; the well-to-do brahmins; and the well-off householders. That’s the kind of great sacrifice that this king performs.” Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. For the king did indeed announce it to all these people. Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: ‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho tassa āmantitā amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca …pe… gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. Bhotā kho pana raññā āmantitā gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca. Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.
[¶10] While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say that he does not possess the eight factors. Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. For the king does indeed possess the eight factors. Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: ‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, no ca kho ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu. Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: ‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati no ca kho abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato brahmavaṇṇī brahmavacchasī akhuddāvakāso dassanāya …pe… no ca kho aḍḍho mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro …pe… no ca kho balavā caturaṅginiyā senāya samannāgato assavāya ovādapaṭikarāya sahati maññe paccatthike yasasā …pe… no ca kho saddho dāyako dānapati anāvaṭadvāro samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ opānabhūto puññāni karoti …pe… no ca kho bahussuto tassa tassa sutajātassa …pe… no ca kho tassa tasseva kho pana bhāsitassa atthaṁ jānāti: “ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho, ayaṁ imassa bhāsitassa attho”ti …pe… no ca kho paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. Bhavaṁ kho pana rājā paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo atītānāgatapaccuppanne atthe cintetuṁ. Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu.
[¶11] While the king is performing the great sacrifice, someone might say that the high priest does not possess the four factors. Those who speak against the king in this way have no legitimacy. For the high priest does indeed possess the four factors. Let the king know this too as a reason to sacrifice, relinquish, rejoice, and gain confidence in his heart.’
> Pali: Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: ‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati. No ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena; atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. Bhoto kho pana rañño purohito brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena. Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetu. Siyā kho pana bhoto rañño mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa kocideva vattā: ‘rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati. No ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo ajjhāyako mantadharo tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo …pe… no ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo sīlavā vuddhasīlī vuddhasīlena samannāgato …pe… no ca khvassa purohito brāhmaṇo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ, atha ca pana bhavaṁ rājā evarūpaṁ mahāyaññaṁ yajatī’ti. Evampi bhoto rañño vattā dhammato natthi. Bhoto kho pana rañño purohito brāhmaṇo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṁ paggaṇhantānaṁ. Imināpetaṁ bhavaṁ rājā jānātu, yajataṁ bhavaṁ, sajjataṁ bhavaṁ, modataṁ bhavaṁ, cittameva bhavaṁ antaraṁ pasādetūti.
[¶12] These are the sixteen respects in which the high priest educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired the king’s mind while he was performing the sacrifice.
> Pali: Imehi kho, brāhmaṇa, purohito brāhmaṇo rañño mahāvijitassa mahāyaññaṁ yajamānassa soḷasahi ākārehi cittaṁ sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.
[¶13] And brahmin, in that sacrifice no cattle were killed, no goats or sheep were killed, and no chickens or pigs were killed. There was no slaughter of various kinds of creatures. No trees were felled for the sacrificial post. No grass was reaped to strew over the place of sacrifice. No bondservants, servants, or workers did their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. Those who wished to work did so, while those who did not wish to did not. They did the work they wanted to, and did not do what they didn’t want to. The sacrifice was completed with just ghee, oil, butter, curds, honey, and molasses.
> Pali: Tasmiṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññe neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na ajeḷakā haññiṁsu, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññiṁsu, na vividhā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. Yepissa ahesuṁ dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā, tepi na daṇḍatajjitā na bhayatajjitā na assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni akaṁsu. Atha kho ye icchiṁsu, te akaṁsu, ye na icchiṁsu, na te akaṁsu; yaṁ icchiṁsu, taṁ akaṁsu, yaṁ na icchiṁsu, na taṁ akaṁsu. Sappitelanavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitena ceva so yañño niṭṭhānamagamāsi.
[¶14] Then the aristocrat vassals, ministers and councillors, well-to-do brahmins, and well-off householders came to the king bringing abundant wealth and said, ‘Your Majesty, this abundant wealth is specially for you alone; may Your Majesty accept it!’
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca, gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ ādāya rājānaṁ mahāvijitaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘idaṁ, deva, pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ devaññeva uddissābhataṁ, taṁ devo paṭiggaṇhātū’ti.
[¶15] ‘There’s enough raised for me through regular taxes. Let this be for you; and here, take even more!’
> Pali: ‘Alaṁ, bho, mamāpidaṁ pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ dhammikena balinā abhisaṅkhataṁ; tañca vo hotu, ito ca bhiyyo harathā’ti.
[¶16] When the king turned them down, they withdrew to one side to think up a plan, ‘It wouldn’t be proper for us to take this abundant wealth back to our own homes. King Mahāvijita is performing a great sacrifice. Let us make an offering as an auxiliary sacrifice.’
> Pali: Te raññā paṭikkhittā ekamantaṁ apakkamma evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘na kho etaṁ amhākaṁ patirūpaṁ, yaṁ mayaṁ imāni sāpateyyāni punadeva sakāni gharāni paṭihareyyāma. Rājā kho mahāvijito mahāyaññaṁ yajati, handassa mayaṁ anuyāgino homā’ti.
[¶17] Then the aristocrat vassals of town and country set up gifts to the east of the sacrificial enclosure. The ministers and councillors of town and country set up gifts to the south of the sacrificial enclosure. The well-to-do brahmins of town and country set up gifts to the west of the sacrificial enclosure. The well-off householders of town and country set up gifts to the north of the sacrificial enclosure.
> Pali: Atha kho, brāhmaṇa, puratthimena yaññavāṭassa khattiyā ānuyantā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. Dakkhiṇena yaññavāṭassa amaccā pārisajjā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. Pacchimena yaññavāṭassa brāhmaṇamahāsālā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ. Uttarena yaññavāṭassa gahapatinecayikā negamā ceva jānapadā ca dānāni paṭṭhapesuṁ.
[¶18] And brahmin, in that sacrifice too no cattle were killed, no goats were killed, and no chickens or pigs were killed. There was no slaughter of various kinds of creatures. No trees were felled for the sacrificial post. No grass was reaped to strew over the place of sacrifice. No bondservants, servants, or workers did their jobs under threat of punishment and danger, weeping with tearful faces. Those who wished to work did so, while those who did not wish to did not. They did the work they wanted to, and did not do what they didn’t want to. The sacrifice was completed with just ghee, oil, butter, curds, honey, and molasses.
> Pali: Tesupi kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññesu neva gāvo haññiṁsu, na ajeḷakā haññiṁsu, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññiṁsu, na vividhā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjiṁsu, na rukkhā chijjiṁsu yūpatthāya, na dabbhā lūyiṁsu barihisatthāya. Yepi nesaṁ ahesuṁ dāsāti vā pessāti vā kammakarāti vā, tepi na daṇḍatajjitā na bhayatajjitā na assumukhā rudamānā parikammāni akaṁsu. Atha kho ye icchiṁsu, te akaṁsu, ye na icchiṁsu, na te akaṁsu; yaṁ icchiṁsu, taṁ akaṁsu, yaṁ na icchiṁsu na taṁ akaṁsu. Sappitelanavanītadadhimadhuphāṇitena ceva te yaññā niṭṭhānamagamaṁsu.
[¶19] And so there were four consenting factions, eight factors possessed by King Mahāvijita, four factors possessed by the high priest, and three modes. Brahmin, this is called the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories.”
> Pali: Iti cattāro ca anumatipakkhā, rājā mahāvijito aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato, purohito brāhmaṇo catūhaṅgehi samannāgato; tisso ca vidhā. Ayaṁ vuccati, brāhmaṇa, tividhā yaññasampadā soḷasaparikkhārā”ti.
[¶20] When he said this, those brahmins made an uproar, “Hooray for such sacrifice! Hooray for the accomplishment of such sacrifice!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te brāhmaṇā unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṁ: “aho yañño, aho yaññasampadā”ti.
[¶21] But the brahmin Kūṭadanta sat in silence. So those brahmins said to him, “How can you not applaud the ascetic Gotama’s fine words?”
> Pali: Kūṭadanto pana brāhmaṇo tūṇhībhūtova nisinno hoti. Atha kho te brāhmaṇā kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kasmā pana bhavaṁ kūṭadanto samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodatī”ti?
[¶22] “It’s not that I don’t applaud what he said. If anyone didn’t applaud such fine words, their head would explode!
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, bho, samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodāmi. Muddhāpi tassa vipateyya, yo samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodeyya.
[¶23] But, gentlemen, it occurs to me that the ascetic Gotama does not say: ‘So I have heard’ or ‘It ought to be like this.’ Rather, he just says: ‘So it was then, this is how it was then.’
> Pali: Api ca me, bho, evaṁ hoti— samaṇo gotamo na evamāha: ‘evaṁ me sutan’ti vā ‘evaṁ arahati bhavitun’ti vā; api ca samaṇo gotamo: ‘evaṁ tadā āsi, itthaṁ tadā āsi’ tveva bhāsati.
[¶24] It occurs to me that the ascetic Gotama at that time must have been King Mahāvijita, the owner of the sacrifice, or else the brahmin high priest who facilitated the sacrifice for him.
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ bho evaṁ hoti: ‘addhā samaṇo gotamo tena samayena rājā vā ahosi mahāvijito yaññassāmi purohito vā brāhmaṇo tassa yaññassa yājetā’ti.
[¶25] Does the worthy Gotama recall having performed such a sacrifice, or having facilitated it, and then, when his body broke up, after death, being reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm?”
> Pali: Abhijānāti pana bhavaṁ gotamo evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ yajitvā vā yājetvā vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjitā”ti?
[¶26] “I do recall that, brahmin. For I myself was the brahmin high priest at that time who facilitated the sacrifice.”
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, brāhmaṇa, evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ yajitvā vā yājetvā vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjitā, ahaṁ tena samayena purohito brāhmaṇo ahosiṁ tassa yaññassa yājetā”ti.
[¶27] 5. A Regular Gift as a Propitious Sacrifice.
> Pali: 5. Niccadānaanukulayañña
[¶28] “But Worthy Gotama, apart from that sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories, is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶29] “There is, brahmin.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶30] “But what is it?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶31] “The regular gifts as propitious sacrifice given specially to ethical renunciates; this sacrifice, brahmin, has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.”
> Pali: “Yāni kho pana tāni, brāhmaṇa, niccadānāni anukulayaññāni sīlavante pabbajite uddissa diyyanti; ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶32] “What is the cause, Worthy Gotama, what is the reason why those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice have fewer obligations and undertakings, yet are more fruitful and beneficial, compared with the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo, yena taṁ niccadānaṁ anukulayaññaṁ imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhatarañca appasamārambhatarañca mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṁsatarañcā”ti?
[¶33] “Because neither perfected ones nor those who are on the path to perfection will attend such a sacrifice. Why is that? Because beatings and throttlings are seen there.
> Pali: “Na kho, brāhmaṇa, evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Dissanti hettha, brāhmaṇa, daṇḍappahārāpi galaggahāpi, tasmā evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ na upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā.
[¶34] But the regular gifts as propitious sacrifice given specially to ethical renunciates; perfected ones and those who are on the path to perfection will attend such a sacrifice. Why is that? Because no beatings and throttlings are seen there.
> Pali: Yāni kho pana tāni, brāhmaṇa, niccadānāni anukulayaññāni sīlavante pabbajite uddissa diyyanti; evarūpaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Na hettha, brāhmaṇa, dissanti daṇḍappahārāpi galaggahāpi, tasmā evarūpaṁ yaññaṁ upasaṅkamanti arahanto vā arahattamaggaṁ vā samāpannā.
[¶35] This is the cause, brahmin, this is the reason why those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice have fewer obligations and undertakings, yet are more fruitful and beneficial, compared with the sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, hetu ayaṁ paccayo, yena taṁ niccadānaṁ anukulayaññaṁ imāya tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya appaṭṭhatarañca appasamārambhatarañca mahapphalatarañca mahānisaṁsatarañcā”ti.
[¶36] “But Worthy Gotama, apart from that sacrifice accomplished with three modes and sixteen accessories and those regular gifts as propitious sacrifice, is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶37] “There is, brahmin.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶38] “But what is it?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶39] “When someone gives a dwelling specially for the Saṅgha of the four quarters.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, cātuddisaṁ saṅghaṁ uddissa vihāraṁ karoti, ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶40] “But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶41] > Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶42] > Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶43] “When someone with confident heart goes for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, pasannacitto buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati, dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati, saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchati; ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶44] “But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶45] > Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶46] > Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶47] “When someone with a confident heart undertakes the training rules to refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, brāhmaṇa, pasannacitto sikkhāpadāni samādiyati— pāṇātipātā veramaṇiṁ, adinnādānā veramaṇiṁ, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇiṁ, musāvādā veramaṇiṁ, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiṁ. Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶48] “But is there any other sacrifice that has fewer obligations and undertakings, yet is more fruitful and beneficial?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bho gotama, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶49] “There is, brahmin.
> Pali: “Atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, añño yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti.
[¶50] > Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho gotama, yañño imāya ca tividhāya yaññasampadāya soḷasaparikkhārāya iminā ca niccadānena anukulayaññena iminā ca vihāradānena imehi ca saraṇagamanehi imehi ca sikkhāpadehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cā”ti?
[¶51] It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. … They enter and remain in the first absorption … This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. …
> Pali: “Idha, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…
[¶52] They enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. …
> Pali: Dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro cāti. …pe…
[¶53] They project and extend the mind toward knowledge and vision … This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial.
> Pali: Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti … ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca …pe…
[¶54] They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’ This sacrifice has fewer obligations and undertakings than the former, yet is more fruitful and beneficial. And, brahmin, there is no other accomplishment of sacrifice which is better and finer than this.”
> Pali: nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti. Ayampi kho, brāhmaṇa, yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṁsataro ca. Imāya ca, brāhmaṇa, yaññasampadāya aññā yaññasampadā uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthī”ti.
[¶55] 6. Kūṭadanta Declares Himself a Lay Follower
> Pali: 6. Kūṭadantaupāsakattapaṭivedanā
[¶56] When he had spoken, Kūṭadanta said to the Buddha, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.
[¶57] And these bulls, bullocks, heifers, goats, and rams—seven hundred of each—I release them, I grant them life! Let them eat green grass and drink cool water, and may a cool breeze blow upon them!”
> Pali: Esāhaṁ, bho gotama, satta ca usabhasatāni satta ca vacchatarasatāni satta ca vacchatarīsatāni satta ca ajasatāni satta ca urabbhasatāni muñcāmi, jīvitaṁ demi, haritāni ceva tiṇāni khādantu, sītāni ca pānīyāni pivantu, sīto ca nesaṁ vāto upavāyatū”ti.
[¶58] 7. The Realization of the Fruit of Stream-Entry
> Pali: 7. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyā
[¶59] Then the Buddha taught Kūṭadanta step by step, with a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He revealed the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. And when he knew that Kūṭadanta’s mind was ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he revealed the special teaching of the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the brahmin Kūṭadanta: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ— dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ; kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā bhagavā aññāsi kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ kallacittaṁ muducittaṁ vinīvaraṇacittaṁ udaggacittaṁ pasannacittaṁ, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa tasmiññeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti.
[¶60] Then Kūṭadanta saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. He went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. He said to the Buddha, “Would the worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo tiṇṇavicikiccho vigatakathaṅkatho vesārajjappatto aparappaccayo satthusāsane bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me bhavaṁ gotamo svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶61] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Kūṭadanta rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving. And when the night had passed Kūṭadanta had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own sacrificial enclosure. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi. Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake yaññavāṭe paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bho gotama; niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶62] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the sacrificial enclosure of Kūṭadanta together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat down on the seat spread out.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena kūṭadantassa brāhmaṇassa yaññavāṭo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi.
[¶63] Then Kūṭadanta served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Kūṭadanta took a low seat and sat to one side. Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk, after which he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi. Atha kho kūṭadanto brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho kūṭadantaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmīti.
[¶64] > Pali: Kūṭadantasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 13. DN 6 · With Mahāli
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/13/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/13/#p-N
[¶0] DN 6 · With Mahāli
> Pali: DN 6 · Mahālisutta
[¶1] 1. On the Brahmin Emissaries
> Pali: 1. Brāhmaṇadūtavatthu
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof. Now at that time several brahmin emissaries from Kosala and Magadha were residing in Vesālī on some business. They heard:
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ. Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā vesāliyaṁ paṭivasanti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Assosuṁ kho te kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā:
[¶3] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—is staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito vesāliyaṁ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶4] Then they went to the hall with the peaked roof in the Great Wood to see the Buddha.
> Pali: Atha kho te kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.
[¶5] Now, at that time Venerable Nāgita was the Buddha’s attendant. The brahmin emissaries went up to him and said, “Worthy Nāgita, where is the worthy Gotama at present? For we want to see him.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā nāgito bhagavato upaṭṭhāko hoti. Atha kho te kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā yenāyasmā nāgito tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ nāgitaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kahaṁ nu kho, bho nāgita, etarahi so bhavaṁ gotamo viharati? Dassanakāmā hi mayaṁ taṁ bhavantaṁ gotaman”ti.
[¶6] “It’s the wrong time to see the Buddha; he is on retreat.”
> Pali: “Akālo kho, āvuso, bhagavantaṁ dassanāya, paṭisallīno bhagavā”ti.
[¶7] So right there the brahmin emissaries sat down to one side, thinking, “We’ll go only after we’ve seen the worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: Atha kho te kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā tattheva ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu: “disvāva mayaṁ taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ gamissāmā”ti.
[¶8] 2. On Oṭṭhaddha the Licchavi
> Pali: 2. Oṭṭhaddhalicchavīvatthu
[¶9] Oṭṭhaddha the Licchavi together with a large assembly of Licchavis also approached Nāgita at the hall with the peaked roof. He bowed, stood to one side, and said to Nāgita, “Honorable Nāgita, where is the Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha? For we want to see him.”
> Pali: Oṭṭhaddhopi licchavī mahatiyā licchavīparisāya saddhiṁ yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā yenāyasmā nāgito tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ nāgitaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho oṭṭhaddhopi licchavī āyasmantaṁ nāgitaṁ etadavoca: “kahaṁ nu kho, bhante nāgita, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dassanakāmā hi mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.
[¶10] “It’s the wrong time to see the Buddha; he is on retreat.”
> Pali: “Akālo kho, mahāli, bhagavantaṁ dassanāya, paṭisallīno bhagavā”ti.
[¶11] So right there Oṭṭhaddha also sat down to one side, thinking, “I’ll go only after I’ve seen the Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha.”
> Pali: Oṭṭhaddhopi licchavī tattheva ekamantaṁ nisīdi: “disvāva ahaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ gamissāmi arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.
[¶12] Then the novice Sīha approached Nāgita. He bowed, stood to one side, and said to Nāgita, “Honorable Kassapa, these several brahmin emissaries from Kosala and Magadha, and also Oṭṭhaddha the Licchavi together with a large assembly of Licchavis, have come here to see the Buddha. It’d be good if these people got to see the Buddha.”
> Pali: Atha kho sīho samaṇuddeso yenāyasmā nāgito tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ nāgitaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho sīho samaṇuddeso āyasmantaṁ nāgitaṁ etadavoca: “ete, bhante kassapa, sambahulā kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā idhūpasaṅkantā bhagavantaṁ dassanāya; oṭṭhaddhopi licchavī mahatiyā licchavīparisāya saddhiṁ idhūpasaṅkanto bhagavantaṁ dassanāya, sādhu, bhante kassapa, labhataṁ esā janatā bhagavantaṁ dassanāyā”ti.
[¶13] “Well then, Sīha, tell the Buddha yourself.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, sīha, tvaññeva bhagavato ārocehī”ti.
[¶14] “Yes, sir,” replied Sīha. He went to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and told him of the people waiting to see him, adding: “Sir, it’d be good if these people got to see the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho sīho samaṇuddeso āyasmato nāgitassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho sīho samaṇuddeso bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ete, bhante, sambahulā kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā idhūpasaṅkantā bhagavantaṁ dassanāya, oṭṭhaddhopi licchavī mahatiyā licchavīparisāya saddhiṁ idhūpasaṅkanto bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Sādhu, bhante, labhataṁ esā janatā bhagavantaṁ dassanāyā”ti.
[¶15] “Well then, Sīha, spread out a seat in the shade of the dwelling.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, sīha, vihārapacchāyāyaṁ āsanaṁ paññapehī”ti.
[¶16] “Yes, sir,” replied Sīha, and he did so.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho sīho samaṇuddeso bhagavato paṭissutvā vihārapacchāyāyaṁ āsanaṁ paññapesi.
[¶17] Then the Buddha left his dwelling and sat in the shade of the dwelling on the seat spread out. Then the brahmin emissaries went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā vihārā nikkhamma vihārapacchāyāyaṁ paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho te kosalakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā māgadhakā ca brāhmaṇadūtā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶18] Oṭṭhaddha the Licchavi together with a large assembly of Licchavis also went up to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. Oṭṭhaddha said to the Buddha, “Sir, a few days ago Sunakkhatta the Licchavi came to me and said: ‘Mahāli, soon I will have been living in dependence on the Buddha for three years. I see heavenly sights that are pleasant, sensual, and arousing, but I don’t hear heavenly sounds that are pleasant, sensual, and arousing.’ The heavenly sounds that Sunakkhatta cannot hear: do such sounds really exist or not?”
> Pali: Oṭṭhaddhopi licchavī mahatiyā licchavīparisāya saddhiṁ yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho oṭṭhaddho licchavī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘yadagge ahaṁ, mahāli, bhagavantaṁ upanissāya viharāmi, na ciraṁ tīṇi vassāni, dibbāni hi kho rūpāni passāmi piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no ca kho dibbāni saddāni suṇāmi piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyānī’ti. Santāneva nu kho, bhante, sunakkhatto licchaviputto dibbāni saddāni nāssosi piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, udāhu asantānī”ti?
[¶19] 2.1. One-Sided Immersion
> Pali: 2.1. Ekaṁsabhāvitasamādhi
[¶20] “Such sounds really do exist, but Sunakkhatta cannot hear them.”
> Pali: “Santāneva kho, mahāli, sunakkhatto licchaviputto dibbāni saddāni nāssosi piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no asantānī”ti.
[¶21] “What is the cause, sir, what is the reason why Sunakkhatta cannot hear them, even though they really do exist?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yena santāneva sunakkhatto licchaviputto dibbāni saddāni nāssosi piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no asantānī”ti?
[¶22] “Mahāli, take a mendicant who has developed immersion to the eastern quarter in one aspect: so as to see heavenly sights but not to hear heavenly sounds. When they have developed immersion for that purpose, they see heavenly sights but don’t hear heavenly sounds. Why is that? Because that is how it is for a mendicant who develops immersion in that way.
> Pali: “Idha, mahāli, bhikkhuno puratthimāya disāya ekaṁsabhāvito samādhi hoti dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. So puratthimāya disāya ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Puratthimāya disāya dibbāni rūpāni passati piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no ca kho dibbāni saddāni suṇāti piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, mahāli, hoti bhikkhuno puratthimāya disāya ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ.
[¶23] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has developed immersion to the southern quarter in one aspect … western quarter … northern quarter … above, below, across … That is how it is for a mendicant who develops immersion in that way.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahāli, bhikkhuno dakkhiṇāya disāya …pe… pacchimāya disāya … uttarāya disāya … uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ekaṁsabhāvito samādhi hoti dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. So uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Uddhamadho tiriyaṁ dibbāni rūpāni passati piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no ca kho dibbāni saddāni suṇāti piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, mahāli, hoti bhikkhuno uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ.
[¶24] Take a mendicant who has developed immersion to the eastern quarter in one aspect: so as to hear heavenly sounds but not to see heavenly sights. When they have developed immersion for that purpose, they hear heavenly sounds but don’t see heavenly sights. Why is that? Because that is how it is for a mendicant who develops immersion in that way.
> Pali: Idha, mahāli, bhikkhuno puratthimāya disāya ekaṁsabhāvito samādhi hoti dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. So puratthimāya disāya ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Puratthimāya disāya dibbāni saddāni suṇāti piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no ca kho dibbāni rūpāni passati piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, mahāli, hoti bhikkhuno puratthimāya disāya ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ.
[¶25] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has developed immersion to the southern quarter in one aspect … western quarter … northern quarter … above, below, across … That is how it is for a mendicant who develops immersion in that way.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahāli, bhikkhuno dakkhiṇāya disāya …pe… pacchimāya disāya … uttarāya disāya … uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ekaṁsabhāvito samādhi hoti dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. So uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Uddhamadho tiriyaṁ dibbāni saddāni suṇāti piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no ca kho dibbāni rūpāni passati piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, mahāli, hoti bhikkhuno uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ekaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānaṁ saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, no ca kho dibbānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ.
[¶26] Take a mendicant who has developed immersion to the eastern quarter in both aspects: so as to hear heavenly sounds and see heavenly sights. When they have developed immersion for that purpose, they see heavenly sights and hear heavenly sounds. Why is that? Because that is how it is for a mendicant who develops immersion in that way.
> Pali: Idha, mahāli, bhikkhuno puratthimāya disāya ubhayaṁsabhāvito samādhi hoti dibbānañca rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ dibbānañca saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. So puratthimāya disāya ubhayaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānañca rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, dibbānañca saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Puratthimāya disāya dibbāni ca rūpāni passati piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, dibbāni ca saddāni suṇāti piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, mahāli, hoti bhikkhuno puratthimāya disāya ubhayaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānañca rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ dibbānañca saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ.
[¶27] Furthermore, take a mendicant who has developed immersion to the southern quarter in both aspects … western quarter … northern quarter … above, below, across … That is how it is for a mendicant who develops immersion in that way. This is the cause, Mahāli, this is the reason why Sunakkhatta cannot hear heavenly sounds that are pleasant, sensual, and arousing, even though they really do exist.”
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahāli, bhikkhuno dakkhiṇāya disāya …pe… pacchimāya disāya … uttarāya disāya … uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ubhayaṁsabhāvito samādhi hoti dibbānañca rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, dibbānañca saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. So uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ubhayaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānañca rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ dibbānañca saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Uddhamadho tiriyaṁ dibbāni ca rūpāni passati piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, dibbāni ca saddāni suṇāti piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, mahāli, hoti bhikkhuno uddhamadho tiriyaṁ ubhayaṁsabhāvite samādhimhi dibbānañca rūpānaṁ dassanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ, dibbānañca saddānaṁ savanāya piyarūpānaṁ kāmūpasaṁhitānaṁ rajanīyānaṁ. Ayaṁ kho, mahāli, hetu ayaṁ paccayo, yena santāneva sunakkhatto licchaviputto dibbāni saddāni nāssosi piyarūpāni kāmūpasaṁhitāni rajanīyāni, no asantānī”ti.
[¶28] “Surely the mendicants must lead the spiritual life under the Buddha for the sake of realizing such a development of immersion?”
> Pali: “Etāsaṁ nūna, bhante, samādhibhāvanānaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti.
[¶29] “No, Mahāli, the mendicants don’t lead the spiritual life under me for the sake of realizing such a development of immersion. There are other things that are finer, for the sake of which the mendicants lead the spiritual life under me.”
> Pali: “Na kho, mahāli, etāsaṁ samādhibhāvanānaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti. Atthi kho, mahāli, aññeva dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca, yesaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti.
[¶30] 2.2. The Four Noble Fruits
> Pali: 2.2. Catuariyaphala
[¶31] “But sir, what are those finer things?”
> Pali: “Katame pana te, bhante, dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca, yesaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti?
[¶32] “Firstly, Mahāli, with the ending of three fetters a mendicant is a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening. This is one of the finer things for the sake of which the mendicants lead the spiritual life under me.
> Pali: “Idha, mahāli, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo. Ayampi kho, mahāli, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca, yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶33] Furthermore, a mendicant—with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion—is a once-returner. They come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering. This too is one of the finer things.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahāli, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karoti. Ayampi kho, mahāli, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca, yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶34] Furthermore, with the ending of the five lower fetters, a mendicant is reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world. This too is one of the finer things.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahāli, bhikkhu pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti, tattha parinibbāyī, anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Ayampi kho, mahāli, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca, yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶35] Furthermore, a mendicant has realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and lives having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. This too is one of the finer things.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, mahāli, bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayampi kho, mahāli, dhammo uttaritaro ca paṇītataro ca, yassa sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ caranti.
[¶36] These are the finer things, for the sake of which the mendicants lead the spiritual life under me.”
> Pali: Ime kho te, mahāli, dhammā uttaritarā ca paṇītatarā ca, yesaṁ sacchikiriyāhetu bhikkhū mayi brahmacariyaṁ carantī”ti.
[¶37] 2.3. The Noble Eightfold Path
> Pali: 2.3. Ariyaaṭṭhaṅgikamagga
[¶38] “But, sir, is there a path and a practice for realizing these things?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, bhante, maggo atthi paṭipadā etesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāyā”ti?
[¶39] “There is, Mahāli.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, mahāli, maggo atthi paṭipadā etesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāyā”ti.
[¶40] “Well, what is it?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, maggo katamā paṭipadā etesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāyā”ti?
[¶41] “It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. This is the path and the practice for realizing these things.
> Pali: “Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi. Ayaṁ kho, mahāli, maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā etesaṁ dhammānaṁ sacchikiriyāya.
[¶42] 2.4. On the Two Renunciates
> Pali: 2.4. Dvepabbajitavatthu
[¶43] This one time, Mahāli, I was staying near Kosambī in Ghosita’s monastery. Then two renunciates— the wanderer Muṇḍiya and Jāliya, the pupil of the wood-bowl ascetic—came and exchanged greetings with me. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they stood to one side and said to me: ‘Reverend Gotama, are the soul and the body one and the same, or is the soul one thing, the body another?’
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, mahāli, samayaṁ kosambiyaṁ viharāmi ghositārāme. Atha kho dve pabbajitā— muṇḍiyo ca paribbājako jāliyo ca dārupattikantevāsī yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. upasaṅkamitvā mayā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho te dve pabbajitā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘kiṁ nu kho, āvuso gotama, taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ, udāhu aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti?
[¶44] ‘Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hāvuso, suṇātha sādhukaṁ manasi karotha bhāsissāmī’ti.
[¶45] ‘Yes, reverend,’ they replied.
> Pali: ‘Evamāvuso’ti kho te dve pabbajitā mama paccassosuṁ.
[¶46] I said this: ‘Take the case when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘idhāvuso tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti.
[¶47] They enter and remain in the first absorption. When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”?’
> Pali: …pe… Paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti?
[¶48] ‘It would, reverend.’
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶49] ‘But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul and the body are different things”. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā …pe…
[¶50] They enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”?’
> Pali: dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti?
[¶51] ‘It would, reverend.’
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶52] ‘But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā …pe…
[¶53] They project and extend the mind toward knowledge and vision … When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”?’
> Pali: ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti … yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti? …pe…
[¶54] ‘It would, reverend.’
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶55] ‘But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā. …pe…
[¶56] They understand: “… there is nothing further for this place.” When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”?’
> Pali: Nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti. Yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti?
[¶57] ‘It would not, reverend.’
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati na kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶58] ‘But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: “The soul and the body are one and the same” or “The soul is one thing, the body another”.’”
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā”ti.
[¶59] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Oṭṭhaddha the Licchavi approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano oṭṭhaddho licchavī bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶60] > Pali: Mahālisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 14. DN 7 · With Jāliya
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/14/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/14/#p-N
[¶0] DN 7 · With Jāliya
> Pali: DN 7 · Jāliyasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Kosambī in Ghosita’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosambiyaṁ viharati ghositārāme.
[¶2] Now at that time two renunciates— the wanderer Muṇḍiya and Jāliya, the pupil of the wood-bowl ascetic—came to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they stood to one side and said to the Buddha, “Reverend Gotama, are the soul and the body one and the same, or is the soul one thing, the body another?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena dve pabbajitā— muṇḍiyo ca paribbājako jāliyo ca dārupattikantevāsī yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho te dve pabbajitā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kiṁ nu kho, āvuso gotama, taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ, udāhu aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran”ti?
[¶3] “Well then, reverends, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hāvuso, suṇātha sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, reverend,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho te dve pabbajitā bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶5] “Take the case when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. …
> Pali: “idhāvuso, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ, sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti.
[¶6] They enter and remain in the first absorption … When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’?”
> Pali: …pe… Paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶7] “It would, reverend.”
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶8] “But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā …pe…
[¶9] They enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’?”
> Pali: dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti?
[¶10] “It would, reverend.”
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati kallaṁ, tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶11] “But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā …pe…
[¶12] They project and extend the mind toward knowledge and vision … When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’?”
> Pali: ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti … yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶13] “It would, reverend.”
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶14] “But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’. …
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā …pe….
[¶15] They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’ When a mendicant knows and sees like this, would it be appropriate to say of them: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’?”
> Pali: …pe… Nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti. Yo kho, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, kallaṁ nu kho tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti?
[¶16] “It would not, reverend.”
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ jānāti evaṁ passati, na kallaṁ tassetaṁ vacanāya: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vāti.
[¶17] “But reverends, I know and see like this. Nevertheless, I do not say: ‘The soul and the body are one and the same’ or ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’.”
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, evaṁ jānāmi evaṁ passāmi. Atha ca panāhaṁ na vadāmi: ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā”ti.
[¶18] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the two renunciates approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te dve pabbajitā bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶19] > Pali: Jāliyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 15. DN 8 · The Lion’s Roar to the Naked Ascetic Kassapa
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/15/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/15/#p-N
[¶0] DN 8 · The Lion’s Roar to the Naked Ascetic Kassapa
> Pali: DN 8 · Mahāsīhanādasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Ujuññā in the deer park at Kaṇṇakatthala.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā uruññāyaṁ viharati kaṇṇakatthale migadāye.
[¶2] Then the naked ascetic Kassapa went up to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he stood to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho acelo kassapo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho acelo kassapo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Worthy Gotama, I have heard the following: ‘The ascetic Gotama criticizes all fervent mortification. He categorically condemns and denounces all fervent mortifiers who live rough.’ I trust those who say this repeat what the worthy Gotama has said, and do not misrepresent him with an untruth? Is their explanation in line with the teaching? Are there any legitimate grounds for rebuttal and criticism? For we don’t want to misrepresent the worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama: ‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaṁ tapaṁ garahati, sabbaṁ tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ ekaṁsena upakkosati upavadatī’ti. Ye te, bho gotama, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaṁ tapaṁ garahati, sabbaṁ tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ ekaṁsena upakkosati upavadatī’ti, kacci te bhoto gotamassa vuttavādino, na ca bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhanti, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaronti, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchati? Anabbhakkhātukāmā hi mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotaman”ti.
[¶4] “Kassapa, those who say this do not repeat what I have said. They misrepresent me with what is false, baseless, and untrue. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I see some fervent mortifier who lives rough reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. But I see another fervent mortifier who lives rough reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: “Ye te, kassapa, evamāhaṁsu: ‘samaṇo gotamo sabbaṁ tapaṁ garahati, sabbaṁ tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ ekaṁsena upakkosati upavadatī’ti, na me te vuttavādino, abbhācikkhanti ca pana maṁ te asatā abhūtena. Idhāhaṁ, kassapa, ekaccaṁ tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ passāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannaṁ. Idha panāhaṁ, kassapa, ekaccaṁ tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ passāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ.
[¶5] I see some fervent mortifier who takes it easy reborn in a place of loss. But I see another fervent mortifier who takes it easy reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. Since I truly understand the coming and going, passing away and rebirth of these fervent mortifiers in this way, how could I criticize all forms of mortification, or categorically condemn and denounce those fervent mortifiers who live rough?
> Pali: Idhāhaṁ, kassapa, ekaccaṁ tapassiṁ appadukkhavihāriṁ passāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannaṁ. Idha panāhaṁ, kassapa, ekaccaṁ tapassiṁ appadukkhavihāriṁ passāmi dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannaṁ. Yohaṁ, kassapa, imesaṁ tapassīnaṁ evaṁ āgatiñca gatiñca cutiñca upapattiñca yathābhūtaṁ pajānāmi, sohaṁ kiṁ sabbaṁ tapaṁ garahissāmi, sabbaṁ vā tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ ekaṁsena upakkosissāmi upavadissāmi?
[¶6] There are some astute ascetics and brahmins who are subtle, accomplished in the doctrines of others, hair-splitters. You’d think they live to demolish convictions with their intellect. They agree with me in some matters and disagree in others. Some of the things that they applaud, I also applaud. Some of the things that they don’t applaud, I also don’t applaud. But some of the things that they applaud, I don’t applaud. And some of the things that they don’t applaud, I do applaud.
> Pali: Santi, kassapa, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā paṇḍitā nipuṇā kataparappavādā vālavedhirūpā. Te bhindantā maññe caranti paññāgatena diṭṭhigatāni. Tehipi me saddhiṁ ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti, ekaccesu ṭhānesu na sameti. Yaṁ te ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘sādhū’ti, mayampi taṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘sādhū’ti. Yaṁ te ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘na sādhū’ti, mayampi taṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘na sādhū’ti. Yaṁ te ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘sādhū’ti, mayaṁ taṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘na sādhū’ti. Yaṁ te ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘na sādhū’ti, mayaṁ taṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘sādhū’ti.
[¶7] Some of the things that I applaud, others also applaud. Some of the things that I don’t applaud, they also don’t applaud. But some of the things that I don’t applaud, others do applaud. And some of the things that I do applaud, others don’t applaud.
> Pali: Yaṁ mayaṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘sādhū’ti, parepi taṁ ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘sādhū’ti. Yaṁ mayaṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘na sādhū’ti, parepi taṁ ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘na sādhū’ti. Yaṁ mayaṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘na sādhū’ti, pare taṁ ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘sādhū’ti. Yaṁ mayaṁ ekaccaṁ vadema ‘sādhū’ti, pare taṁ ekaccaṁ vadanti ‘na sādhū’ti.
[¶8] 1. Examination
> Pali: 1. Samanuyuñjāpanakathā
[¶9] I go up to them and say: ‘Let us leave aside those matters on which we disagree. But there are some matters on which we agree. Regarding these, sensible people, pursuing, pressing, and grilling, would compare teacher with teacher or community with community:
> Pali: Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘yesu no, āvuso, ṭhānesu na sameti, tiṭṭhantu tāni ṭhānāni. Yesu ṭhānesu sameti, tattha viññū samanuyuñjantaṁ samanugāhantaṁ samanubhāsantaṁ satthārā vā satthāraṁ saṅghena vā saṅghaṁ:
[¶10] “There are things that are unskillful, blameworthy, not to be cultivated, unworthy of the noble ones, and dark—and are reckoned as such. Who proceeds having totally given these things up: the ascetic Gotama, or the tutors of other communities?”’
> Pali: “ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā, sāvajjā sāvajjasaṅkhātā, asevitabbā asevitabbasaṅkhātā, na alamariyā na alamariyasaṅkhātā, kaṇhā kaṇhasaṅkhātā. Ko ime dhamme anavasesaṁ pahāya vattati, samaṇo vā gotamo, pare vā pana bhonto gaṇācariyā”ti?
[¶11] It’s possible that they might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama proceeds having totally given those unskillful things up, compared with the tutors of other communities.’ And that’s how, when sensible people pursue the matter, they will mostly praise us.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā, sāvajjā sāvajjasaṅkhātā, asevitabbā asevitabbasaṅkhātā, na alamariyā na alamariyasaṅkhātā, kaṇhā kaṇhasaṅkhātā. Samaṇo gotamo ime dhamme anavasesaṁ pahāya vattati, yaṁ vā pana bhonto pare gaṇācariyā’ti. Itiha, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā amheva tattha yebhuyyena pasaṁseyyuṁ.
[¶12] In addition, sensible people, pursuing, pressing, and grilling, would compare teacher with teacher or community with community: ‘There are things that are skillful, blameless, worth cultivating, worthy of the noble ones, and bright—and are reckoned as such. Who proceeds having totally undertaken these things: the ascetic Gotama, or the tutors of other communities?’
> Pali: Aparampi no, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantaṁ samanugāhantaṁ samanubhāsantaṁ satthārā vā satthāraṁ saṅghena vā saṅghaṁ: ‘ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā, anavajjā anavajjasaṅkhātā, sevitabbā sevitabbasaṅkhātā, alamariyā alamariyasaṅkhātā, sukkā sukkasaṅkhātā. Ko ime dhamme anavasesaṁ samādāya vattati, samaṇo vā gotamo, pare vā pana bhonto gaṇācariyā’ti?
[¶13] It’s possible that they might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama proceeds having totally undertaken these things, compared with the tutors of other communities.’ And that’s how, when sensible people pursue the matter, they will mostly praise us.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā, anavajjā anavajjasaṅkhātā, sevitabbā sevitabbasaṅkhātā, alamariyā alamariyasaṅkhātā, sukkā sukkasaṅkhātā. Samaṇo gotamo ime dhamme anavasesaṁ samādāya vattati, yaṁ vā pana bhonto pare gaṇācariyā’ti. Itiha, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā amheva tattha yebhuyyena pasaṁseyyuṁ.
[¶14] In addition, sensible people, pursuing, pressing, and grilling, would compare teacher with teacher or community with community: ‘There are things that are unskillful, blameworthy, not to be cultivated, unworthy of the noble ones, and dark—and are reckoned as such. Who proceeds having totally given these things up: the ascetic Gotama’s disciples, or the disciples of other tutors?’
> Pali: Aparampi no, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantaṁ samanugāhantaṁ samanubhāsantaṁ satthārā vā satthāraṁ saṅghena vā saṅghaṁ: ‘ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā, sāvajjā sāvajjasaṅkhātā, asevitabbā asevitabbasaṅkhātā, na alamariyā na alamariyasaṅkhātā, kaṇhā kaṇhasaṅkhātā. Ko ime dhamme anavasesaṁ pahāya vattati, gotamasāvakasaṅgho vā, pare vā pana bhonto gaṇācariyasāvakasaṅghā’ti?
[¶15] It’s possible that they might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama’s disciples proceed having totally given those unskillful things up, compared with the disciples of other tutors.’ And that’s how, when sensible people pursue the matter, they will mostly praise us.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā, sāvajjā sāvajjasaṅkhātā, asevitabbā asevitabbasaṅkhātā, na alamariyā na alamariyasaṅkhātā, kaṇhā kaṇhasaṅkhātā. Gotamasāvakasaṅgho ime dhamme anavasesaṁ pahāya vattati, yaṁ vā pana bhonto pare gaṇācariyasāvakasaṅghā’ti. Itiha, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā amheva tattha yebhuyyena pasaṁseyyuṁ.
[¶16] In addition, sensible people, pursuing, pressing, and grilling, would compare teacher with teacher or community with community: ‘There are things that are skillful, blameless, worth cultivating, worthy of the noble ones, and bright—and are reckoned as such. Who proceeds having totally undertaken these things: the ascetic Gotama’s disciples, or the disciples of other tutors?’
> Pali: Aparampi no, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantaṁ samanugāhantaṁ samanubhāsantaṁ satthārā vā satthāraṁ saṅghena vā saṅghaṁ. ‘Ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā, anavajjā anavajjasaṅkhātā, sevitabbā sevitabbasaṅkhātā, alamariyā alamariyasaṅkhātā, sukkā sukkasaṅkhātā. Ko ime dhamme anavasesaṁ samādāya vattati, gotamasāvakasaṅgho vā, pare vā pana bhonto gaṇācariyasāvakasaṅghā’ti?
[¶17] It’s possible that they might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama’s disciples proceed having totally undertaken those skillful things, compared with the disciples of other tutors.’ And that’s how, when sensible people pursue the matter, they will mostly praise us.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ye imesaṁ bhavataṁ dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā, anavajjā anavajjasaṅkhātā, sevitabbā sevitabbasaṅkhātā, alamariyā alamariyasaṅkhātā, sukkā sukkasaṅkhātā. Gotamasāvakasaṅgho ime dhamme anavasesaṁ samādāya vattati, yaṁ vā pana bhonto pare gaṇācariyasāvakasaṅghā’ti. Itiha, kassapa, viññū samanuyuñjantā samanugāhantā samanubhāsantā amheva tattha yebhuyyena pasaṁseyyuṁ.
[¶18] 2. The Noble Eightfold Path
> Pali: 2. Ariyaaṭṭhaṅgikamagga
[¶19] There is, Kassapa, a path, there is a practice, practicing in accordance with which you will know and see for yourself: ‘Only the ascetic Gotama’s words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training.’ And what is that path? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. This is the path, this is the practice, practicing in accordance with which you will know and see for yourself: ‘Only the ascetic Gotama’s words are timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training.’”
> Pali: Atthi, kassapa, maggo atthi paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipanno sāmaññeva ñassati sāmaṁ dakkhati: ‘samaṇova gotamo kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī’ti. Katamo ca, kassapa, maggo, katamā ca paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipanno sāmaññeva ñassati sāmaṁ dakkhati: ‘samaṇova gotamo kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī’ti? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi. Ayaṁ kho, kassapa, maggo, ayaṁ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipanno sāmaññeva ñassati sāmaṁ dakkhati ‘samaṇova gotamo kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī’”ti.
[¶20] 3. The Courses of Fervent Mortification
> Pali: 3. Tapopakkamakathā
[¶21] When he had spoken, Kassapa said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, acelo kassapo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶22] “Reverend Gotama, those ascetics and brahmins consider these courses of fervent mortification to be what makes someone a true ascetic or brahmin. They go naked, ignoring conventions. They lick their hands, and don’t come or wait when called. They don’t consent to food brought to them, or food prepared on their behalf, or an invitation for a meal. They don’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breastfeeding, or who lives with a man; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. They accept no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drink no fermented gruel. They go to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. They feed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. They eat once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. They live committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals.
> Pali: “imepi kho, āvuso gotama, tapopakkamā etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sāmaññasaṅkhātā ca brahmaññasaṅkhātā ca. Acelako hoti, muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano, naehibhaddantiko, natiṭṭhabhaddantiko, nābhihaṭaṁ, na uddissakataṁ, na nimantanaṁ sādiyati. So na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na eḷakamantaraṁ, na daṇḍamantaraṁ, na musalamantaraṁ, na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ, na gabbhiniyā, na pāyamānāya, na purisantaragatāya, na saṅkittīsu, na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti, na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī, na macchaṁ, na maṁsaṁ, na suraṁ, na merayaṁ, na thusodakaṁ pivati. So ekāgāriko vā hoti ekālopiko, dvāgāriko vā hoti dvālopiko … sattāgāriko vā hoti sattālopiko; ekissāpi dattiyā yāpeti, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpeti … sattahipi dattīhi yāpeti; ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti … sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti. Iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati.
[¶23] Those ascetics and brahmins also consider these courses of fervent mortification to be what makes someone a true ascetic or brahmin. They eat herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. They survive on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit.
> Pali: Imepi kho, āvuso gotama, tapopakkamā etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sāmaññasaṅkhātā ca brahmaññasaṅkhātā ca. Sākabhakkho vā hoti, sāmākabhakkho vā hoti, nīvārabhakkho vā hoti, daddulabhakkho vā hoti, haṭabhakkho vā hoti, kaṇabhakkho vā hoti, ācāmabhakkho vā hoti, piññākabhakkho vā hoti, tiṇabhakkho vā hoti, gomayabhakkho vā hoti, vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī.
[¶24] Those ascetics and brahmins also consider these courses of fervent mortification to be what makes someone a true ascetic or brahmin. They wear robes of sunn hemp, mixed hemp, corpse-wrapping cloth, rags, lodh tree bark, antelope hide (whole or in strips), kusa grass, bark, wood-chips, human hair, horse-tail hair, or owls’ wings. They tear out hair and beard, committed to this practice. They constantly stand, turning down seats. They squat, committed to the endeavor of squatting. They lie on a mat of thorns, making a mat of thorns their bed. They make their bed on a plank, or the bare ground. They lie only on one side. They wear dust and dirt. They stay in the open air. They sleep wherever they lay their mat. They eat unnatural things, committed to the practice of eating unnatural foods. They don’t drink, committed to the practice of not drinking liquids. They’re devoted to ritual bathing three times a day, including at dusk.”
> Pali: Imepi kho, āvuso gotama, tapopakkamā etesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sāmaññasaṅkhātā ca brahmaññasaṅkhātā ca. Sāṇānipi dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti, chavadussānipi dhāreti, paṁsukūlānipi dhāreti, tirīṭānipi dhāreti, ajinampi dhāreti, ajinakkhipampi dhāreti, kusacīrampi dhāreti, vākacīrampi dhāreti, phalakacīrampi dhāreti, kesakambalampi dhāreti, vāḷakambalampi dhāreti, ulūkapakkhikampi dhāreti, kesamassulocakopi hoti kesamassulocanānuyogamanuyutto, ubbhaṭṭhakopi hoti āsanapaṭikkhitto, ukkuṭikopi hoti ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto, kaṇṭakāpassayikopi hoti kaṇṭakāpassaye seyyaṁ kappeti, phalakaseyyampi kappeti, thaṇḍilaseyyampi kappeti, ekapassayikopi hoti rajojalladharo, abbhokāsikopi hoti yathāsanthatiko, vekaṭikopi hoti vikaṭabhojanānuyogamanuyutto, apānakopi hoti apānakattamanuyutto, sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharatī”ti.
[¶25] 4. The Uselessness of Fervent Mortification
> Pali: 4. Tapopakkamaniratthakathā
[¶26] “Kassapa, someone may practice all those forms of mortification, but if they haven’t developed and realized any accomplishment in ethics, mind, and wisdom, they are far from being a true ascetic or brahmin. But take a mendicant who develops a heart of love, free of enmity and ill will. And they realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. When they achieve this, they’re a mendicant who is called a ‘true ascetic’ and also ‘a true brahmin’. …”
> Pali: “Acelako cepi, kassapa, hoti, muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano …pe… iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Tassa cāyaṁ sīlasampadā cittasampadā paññāsampadā abhāvitā hoti asacchikatā. Atha kho so ārakāva sāmaññā ārakāva brahmaññā. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipi.
[¶27] > Pali: Sākabhakkho cepi, kassapa, hoti, sāmākabhakkho …pe… vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī. Tassa cāyaṁ sīlasampadā cittasampadā paññāsampadā abhāvitā hoti asacchikatā. Atha kho so ārakāva sāmaññā ārakāva brahmaññā. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipi.
[¶28] > Pali: Sāṇāni cepi, kassapa, dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti …pe… sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Tassa cāyaṁ sīlasampadā cittasampadā paññāsampadā abhāvitā hoti asacchikatā. Atha kho so ārakāva sāmaññā ārakāva brahmaññā. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipī”ti.
[¶29] When he had spoken, Kassapa said to the Buddha, “It’s hard, worthy Gotama, to be a true ascetic or a true brahmin.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, acelo kassapo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “dukkaraṁ, bho gotama, sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan”ti.
[¶30] “It’s typical, Kassapa, in this world to think that it’s hard to be a true ascetic or brahmin. But someone might practice all those forms of mortification. And if it was only because of just that much, only because of that course of fervent mortification that it was so very hard to be a true ascetic or brahmin, it wouldn’t be appropriate to say that it’s hard to be a true ascetic or brahmin.
> Pali: “Pakati kho esā, kassapa, lokasmiṁ ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti. Acelako cepi, kassapa, hoti, muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano …pe… iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Imāya ca, kassapa, mattāya iminā tapopakkamena sāmaññaṁ vā abhavissa brahmaññaṁ vā dukkaraṁ sudukkaraṁ, netaṁ abhavissa kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti.
[¶31] For it would be quite possible for a householder or a householder’s child—or even the bonded maid who carries the water-jar— to practice all those forms of mortification.
> Pali: Sakkā ca panetaṁ abhavissa kātuṁ gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā antamaso kumbhadāsiyāpi: ‘handāhaṁ acelako homi, muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano …pe… iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharāmī’ti.
[¶32] It’s because there’s something other than just that much, something other than that course of fervent mortification that it’s so very hard to be a true ascetic or brahmin. And that’s why it is appropriate to say that it’s hard to be a true ascetic or brahmin. Take a mendicant who develops a heart of love, free of enmity and ill will. And they realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. When they achieve this, they’re a mendicant who is called a ‘true ascetic’ and also ‘a true brahmin’. …”
> Pali: Yasmā ca kho, kassapa, aññatreva imāya mattāya aññatra iminā tapopakkamena sāmaññaṁ vā hoti brahmaññaṁ vā dukkaraṁ sudukkaraṁ, tasmā etaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipi.
[¶33] > Pali: Sākabhakkho cepi, kassapa, hoti, sāmākabhakkho …pe… vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī. Imāya ca, kassapa, mattāya iminā tapopakkamena sāmaññaṁ vā abhavissa brahmaññaṁ vā dukkaraṁ sudukkaraṁ, netaṁ abhavissa kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti.
[¶34] > Pali: Sakkā ca panetaṁ abhavissa kātuṁ gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā antamaso kumbhadāsiyāpi: ‘handāhaṁ sākabhakkho vā homi, sāmākabhakkho vā …pe… vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpemi pavattaphalabhojī’ti.
[¶35] > Pali: Yasmā ca kho, kassapa, aññatreva imāya mattāya aññatra iminā tapopakkamena sāmaññaṁ vā hoti brahmaññaṁ vā dukkaraṁ sudukkaraṁ, tasmā etaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipi.
[¶36] > Pali: Sāṇāni cepi, kassapa, dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti …pe… sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Imāya ca, kassapa, mattāya iminā tapopakkamena sāmaññaṁ vā abhavissa brahmaññaṁ vā dukkaraṁ sudukkaraṁ, netaṁ abhavissa kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti.
[¶37] > Pali: Sakkā ca panetaṁ abhavissa kātuṁ gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā antamaso kumbhadāsiyāpi: ‘handāhaṁ sāṇānipi dhāremi, masāṇānipi dhāremi …pe… sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharāmī’ti.
[¶38] > Pali: Yasmā ca kho, kassapa, aññatreva imāya mattāya aññatra iminā tapopakkamena sāmaññaṁ vā hoti brahmaññaṁ vā dukkaraṁ sudukkaraṁ, tasmā etaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dukkaraṁ sāmaññaṁ dukkaraṁ brahmaññan’ti. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipī”ti.
[¶39] When he had spoken, Kassapa said to the Buddha, “It’s hard, worthy Gotama, to know a true ascetic or a true brahmin.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, acelo kassapo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “dujjāno, bho gotama, samaṇo, dujjāno brāhmaṇo”ti.
[¶40] “It’s typical in this world to think that it’s hard to know a true ascetic or brahmin. But someone might practice all those forms of mortification. And if it was only by just that much, only by that course of fervent mortification that it was so very hard to know a true ascetic or brahmin, it wouldn’t be appropriate to say that it’s hard to know a true ascetic or brahmin.
> Pali: “Pakati kho esā, kassapa, lokasmiṁ ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti. Acelako cepi, kassapa, hoti, muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano …pe… iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Imāya ca, kassapa, mattāya iminā tapopakkamena samaṇo vā abhavissa brāhmaṇo vā dujjāno sudujjāno, netaṁ abhavissa kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti.
[¶41] For it would be quite possible for a householder or a householder’s child—or even the bonded maid who carries the water-jar— to know that someone is practicing all those forms of mortification.
> Pali: Sakkā ca paneso abhavissa ñātuṁ gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā antamaso kumbhadāsiyāpi: ‘ayaṁ acelako hoti, muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano …pe… iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharatī’ti.
[¶42] It’s because there’s something other than just that much, something other than that course of fervent mortification that it’s so very hard to know a true ascetic or brahmin. And that’s why it is appropriate to say that it’s hard to know a true ascetic or brahmin. Take a mendicant who develops a heart of love, free of enmity and ill will. And they realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. When they achieve this, they’re a mendicant who is called a ‘true ascetic’ and also ‘a true brahmin’.”
> Pali: Yasmā ca kho, kassapa, aññatreva imāya mattāya aññatra iminā tapopakkamena samaṇo vā hoti brāhmaṇo vā dujjāno sudujjāno, tasmā etaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipi.
[¶43] > Pali: Sākabhakkho cepi, kassapa, hoti sāmākabhakkho …pe… vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī. Imāya ca, kassapa, mattāya iminā tapopakkamena samaṇo vā abhavissa brāhmaṇo vā dujjāno sudujjāno, netaṁ abhavissa kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti.
[¶44] > Pali: Sakkā ca paneso abhavissa ñātuṁ gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā antamaso kumbhadāsiyāpi: ‘ayaṁ sākabhakkho vā hoti sāmākabhakkho …pe… vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī’ti.
[¶45] > Pali: Yasmā ca kho, kassapa, aññatreva imāya mattāya aññatra iminā tapopakkamena samaṇo vā hoti brāhmaṇo vā dujjāno sudujjāno, tasmā etaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipi.
[¶46] > Pali: Sāṇāni cepi, kassapa, dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti …pe… sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. Imāya ca, kassapa, mattāya iminā tapopakkamena samaṇo vā abhavissa brāhmaṇo vā dujjāno sudujjāno, netaṁ abhavissa kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti.
[¶47] > Pali: Sakkā ca paneso abhavissa ñātuṁ gahapatinā vā gahapatiputtena vā antamaso kumbhadāsiyāpi: ‘ayaṁ sāṇānipi dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti …pe… sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharatī’ti.
[¶48] > Pali: Yasmā ca kho, kassapa, aññatreva imāya mattāya aññatra iminā tapopakkamena samaṇo vā hoti brāhmaṇo vā dujjāno sudujjāno, tasmā etaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘dujjāno samaṇo dujjāno brāhmaṇo’ti. Yato kho, kassapa, bhikkhu averaṁ abyāpajjaṁ mettacittaṁ bhāveti, āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, kassapa, bhikkhu samaṇo itipi brāhmaṇo itipī”ti.
[¶49] 5. The Accomplishment of Ethics, Mind, and Wisdom
> Pali: 5. Sīlasamādhipaññāsampadā
[¶50] When he had spoken, Kassapa said to the Buddha, “But worthy Gotama, what is that accomplishment in ethics, in mind, and in wisdom?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, acelo kassapo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “katamā pana sā, bho gotama, sīlasampadā, katamā cittasampadā, katamā paññāsampadā”ti?
[¶51] “It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … Seeing danger in the slightest fault, a mendicant keeps the rules they’ve undertaken. They act skillfully by body and speech. They’re purified in livelihood and accomplished in ethical conduct. They guard the sense doors, have mindfulness and situational awareness, and are content.
> Pali: “Idha, kassapa, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ, sammāsambuddho …pe… bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena parisuddhājīvo sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro satisampajaññena samannāgato santuṭṭho.
[¶52] And how is a mendicant accomplished in ethics? It’s when a mendicant gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. This pertains to their accomplishment in ethics. …
> Pali: Kathañca, kassapa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti? Idha, kassapa, bhikkhu pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. Idampissa hoti sīlasampadāya …pe…
[¶53] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. … They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. This pertains to their accomplishment in ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti. Seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ …pe… osadhīnaṁ patimokkho iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasampadāya.
[¶54] A mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. It’s like a king who has defeated his enemies. He sees no danger from his foes in any quarter. In the same way, a mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves. That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. This, Kassapa, is that accomplishment in ethics. … They enter and remain in the first absorption … This pertains to their accomplishment in mind. … They enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. This pertains to their accomplishment in mind. This, Kassapa, is that accomplishment in mind.
> Pali: Sa kho so, kassapa, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. Seyyathāpi, kassapa, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto nihatapaccāmitto na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ paccatthikato; evameva kho, kassapa, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Evaṁ kho, kassapa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti. Ayaṁ kho, kassapa, sīlasampadā …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampissa hoti cittasampadāya …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampissa hoti cittasampadāya. Ayaṁ kho, kassapa, cittasampadā.
[¶55] When their mind is immersed like this, they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision … This pertains to their accomplishment in wisdom. … They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’ This pertains to their accomplishment in wisdom. This, Kassapa, is that accomplishment in wisdom.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti … idampissa hoti paññāsampadāya …pe… nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti. Idampissa hoti paññāsampadāya. Ayaṁ kho, kassapa, paññāsampadā.
[¶56] And, Kassapa, there is no accomplishment in ethics, mind, and wisdom that is better or finer than this.
> Pali: Imāya ca, kassapa, sīlasampadāya cittasampadāya paññāsampadāya aññā sīlasampadā cittasampadā paññāsampadā uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthi.
[¶57] 6. The Lion’s Roar
> Pali: 6. Sīhanādakathā
[¶58] There are, Kassapa, some ascetics and brahmins who teach ethics. They praise ethical conduct in many ways. But as far as the highest noble ethics goes, I don’t see anyone who’s my equal, still less my superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher ethics.
> Pali: Santi, kassapa, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavādā. Te anekapariyāyena sīlassa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti. Yāvatā, kassapa, ariyaṁ paramaṁ sīlaṁ, nāhaṁ tattha attano samasamaṁ samanupassāmi, kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo, yadidaṁ adhisīlaṁ.
[¶59] There are, Kassapa, some ascetics and brahmins who teach mortification in disgust of sin. They praise fervent mortification in disgust of sin in many ways. But as far as the highest noble fervent mortification in disgust of sin goes, I don’t see anyone who’s my equal, still less my superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher disgust of sin.
> Pali: Santi, kassapa, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā tapojigucchāvādā. Te anekapariyāyena tapojigucchāya vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti. Yāvatā, kassapa, ariyā paramā tapojigucchā, nāhaṁ tattha attano samasamaṁ samanupassāmi, kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo, yadidaṁ adhijegucchaṁ.
[¶60] There are, Kassapa, some ascetics and brahmins who teach wisdom. They praise wisdom in many ways. But as far as the highest noble wisdom goes, I don’t see anyone who’s my equal, still less my superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher wisdom.
> Pali: Santi, kassapa, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā paññāvādā. Te anekapariyāyena paññāya vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti. Yāvatā, kassapa, ariyā paramā paññā, nāhaṁ tattha attano samasamaṁ samanupassāmi, kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo, yadidaṁ adhipaññaṁ.
[¶61] There are, Kassapa, some ascetics and brahmins who teach freedom. They praise freedom in many ways. But as far as the highest noble freedom goes, I don’t see anyone who’s my equal, still less my superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher freedom.
> Pali: Santi, kassapa, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā vimuttivādā. Te anekapariyāyena vimuttiyā vaṇṇaṁ bhāsanti. Yāvatā, kassapa, ariyā paramā vimutti, nāhaṁ tattha attano samasamaṁ samanupassāmi, kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo, yadidaṁ adhivimutti.
[¶62] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama only roars his lion’s roar in an empty hut, not in an assembly.’ They should be told, ‘Not so!’ What should be said is this: ‘The ascetic Gotama roars his lion’s roar, and he roars it in the assemblies.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘sīhanādaṁ kho samaṇo gotamo nadati, tañca kho suññāgāre nadati, no parisāsū’ti. Te: ‘mā hevan’tissu vacanīyā. ‘Sīhanādañca samaṇo gotamo nadati, parisāsu ca nadatī’ti evamassu, kassapa, vacanīyā.
[¶63] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama roars his lion’s roar, and he roars it in the assemblies. But he doesn’t roar it boldly.’ They should be told, ‘Not so!’ What should be said is this: ‘The ascetic Gotama roars his lion’s roar, he roars it in the assemblies, and he roars it boldly.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘sīhanādañca samaṇo gotamo nadati, parisāsu ca nadati, no ca kho visārado nadatī’ti. Te: ‘mā hevan’tissu vacanīyā. ‘Sīhanādañca samaṇo gotamo nadati, parisāsu ca nadati, visārado ca nadatī’ti evamassu, kassapa, vacanīyā.
[¶64] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say: ‘The ascetic Gotama roars his lion’s roar, he roars it in the assemblies, and he roars it boldly. But they don’t question him. … Or he doesn’t answer their questions. … Or his answers are not satisfactory. … Or they don’t think him worth listening to. … Or they’re not confident after listening. … Or they don’t demonstrate their confidence. … Or they don’t practice accordingly. … Or they don’t succeed in their practice.’ They should be told, ‘Not so!’ What should be said is this: ‘The ascetic Gotama roars his lion’s roar; he roars it in the assemblies; he roars it boldly; they question him; he answers their questions; his answers are satisfactory; they think him worth listening to; they’re confident after listening; they demonstrate their confidence; they practice accordingly; and they succeed in their practice.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, kassapa, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘sīhanādañca samaṇo gotamo nadati, parisāsu ca nadati, visārado ca nadati, no ca kho naṁ pañhaṁ pucchanti …pe… pañhañca naṁ pucchanti; no ca kho nesaṁ pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākaroti …pe… pañhañca nesaṁ puṭṭho byākaroti; no ca kho pañhassa veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheti …pe… pañhassa ca veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheti; no ca kho sotabbaṁ maññanti …pe… sotabbañcassa maññanti; no ca kho sutvā pasīdanti …pe… sutvā cassa pasīdanti; no ca kho pasannākāraṁ karonti …pe… pasannākārañca karonti; no ca kho tathattāya paṭipajjanti …pe… tathattāya ca paṭipajjanti; no ca kho paṭipannā ārādhentī’ti. Te: ‘mā hevan’tissu vacanīyā. ‘Sīhanādañca samaṇo gotamo nadati, parisāsu ca nadati, visārado ca nadati, pañhañca naṁ pucchanti, pañhañca nesaṁ puṭṭho byākaroti, pañhassa ca veyyākaraṇena cittaṁ ārādheti, sotabbañcassa maññanti, sutvā cassa pasīdanti, pasannākārañca karonti, tathattāya ca paṭipajjanti, paṭipannā ca ārādhentī’ti evamassu, kassapa, vacanīyā.
[¶65] 7. The Probation For One Previously Ordained
> Pali: 7. Titthiyaparivāsakathā
[¶66] Kassapa, this one time I was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain. There a certain fervent celibate named Nigrodha asked me about the higher disgust of sin. I answered his question. He was extremely happy with my answer.”
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, kassapa, samayaṁ rājagahe viharāmi gijjhakūṭe pabbate. Tatra maṁ aññataro tapabrahmacārī nigrodho nāma adhijegucche pañhaṁ apucchi. Tassāhaṁ adhijegucche pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākāsiṁ. Byākate ca pana me attamano ahosi paraṁ viya mattāyā”ti.
[¶67] “Sir, who wouldn’t be extremely happy after hearing the Buddha’s teaching? For I too am extremely happy after hearing the Buddha’s teaching! Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, so too the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence?”
> Pali: “Ko hi, bhante, bhagavato dhammaṁ sutvā na attamano assa paraṁ viya mattāya? Ahampi hi, bhante, bhagavato dhammaṁ sutvā attamano paraṁ viya mattāya. Abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶68] “Kassapa, if someone formerly ordained in another sect wishes to take the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training, they must spend four months on probation. When four months have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, they’ll give the going forth, the ordination into monkhood. However, I have recognized individual differences in this matter.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, kassapa, aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṁ, so cattāro māse parivasati, catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti, upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya. Api ca mettha puggalavemattatā viditā”ti.
[¶69] “Sir, if four months probation are required in such a case, I’ll spend four years on probation. When four years have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, let them give me the going forth, the ordination into monkhood.”
> Pali: “Sace, bhante, aññatitthiyapubbā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhanti pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhanti upasampadaṁ, cattāro māse parivasanti, catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti, upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya. Ahaṁ cattāri vassāni parivasissāmi, catunnaṁ vassānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājentu, upasampādentu bhikkhubhāvāyā”ti.
[¶70] And the naked ascetic Kassapa received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after his ordination, Venerable Kassapa, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Alattha kho acelo kassapo bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā kassapo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto na cirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶71] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Kassapa became one of the perfected.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā kassapo arahataṁ ahosīti.
[¶72] > Pali: Mahāsīhanādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 16. DN 9 · With Poṭṭhapāda · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/16/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/16/#p-N
[¶0] DN 9 · With Poṭṭhapāda
> Pali: DN 9 · Poṭṭhapādasutta
[¶1] 1. On the Wanderer Poṭṭhapāda
> Pali: 1. Poṭṭhapādaparibbājakavatthu
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
[¶3] Now at that time the wanderer Poṭṭhapāda was residing together with three hundred wanderers in Mallikā’s single-halled monastery for philosophical debates, hedged by pale-moon ebony trees. Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Sāvatthī for alms.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena poṭṭhapādo paribbājako samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ tiṁsamattehi paribbājakasatehi. Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.
[¶4] Then it occurred to him, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Sāvatthī. Why don’t I go to Mallikā’s monastery to visit the wanderer Poṭṭhapāda?” So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva sāvatthiyaṁ piṇḍāya carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ yena samayappavādako tindukācīro ekasālako mallikāya ārāmo, yena poṭṭhapādo paribbājako tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā yena samayappavādako tindukācīro ekasālako mallikāya ārāmo tenupasaṅkami.
[¶5] Now at that time, Poṭṭhapāda was sitting together with a large assembly of wanderers making an uproar, a colossal racket. They engaged in all kinds of low talk, such as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena poṭṭhapādo paribbājako mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti unnādiniyā uccāsaddamahāsaddāya anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentiyā. Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā.
[¶6] Poṭṭhapāda saw the Buddha coming off in the distance, and hushed his own assembly, “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. Here comes the ascetic Gotama. The venerable likes quiet and praises quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach.” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho poṭṭhapādo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ; disvāna sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhapesi: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha. Ayaṁ samaṇo gotamo āgacchati. Appasaddakāmo kho so āyasmā appasaddassa vaṇṇavādī. Appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶7] Then the Buddha approached Poṭṭhapāda, who said to him, “Let the Blessed One come, sir! Welcome to the Blessed One, sir! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, here, a seat is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena poṭṭhapādo paribbājako tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho poṭṭhapādo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho, bhante, bhagavā. Svāgataṁ, bhante, bhagavato. Cirassaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi, yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu, bhante, bhagavā, idaṁ āsanaṁ paññattan”ti.
[¶8] The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, while Poṭṭhapāda took a low seat and sat to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Poṭṭhapāda, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Poṭṭhapādopi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho poṭṭhapādaṁ paribbājakaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kāya nuttha, poṭṭhapāda, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶9] 1.1. On the Cessation of Perception
> Pali: 1.1. Abhisaññānirodhakathā
[¶10] When he said this, the wanderer Poṭṭhapāda said to the Buddha, “Sir, leave aside what we were sitting talking about just now. It won’t be hard for you to hear about that later.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, poṭṭhapādo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭhatesā, bhante, kathā, yāya mayaṁ etarahi kathāya sannisinnā. Nesā, bhante, kathā bhagavato dullabhā bhavissati pacchāpi savanāya.
[¶11] Sir, a few days ago several ascetics and brahmins who follow various other religions were sitting together at the debating hall, and a discussion about the cessation of perception came up among them: ‘How does the cessation of perception happen?’
> Pali: Purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni, nānātitthiyānaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ kotūhalasālāya sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ abhisaññānirodhe kathā udapādi: ‘kathaṁ nu kho, bho, abhisaññānirodho hotī’ti?
[¶12] Some of them said: ‘A person’s perceptions arise and cease without cause or reason. When they arise, you become percipient. When they cease, you become non-percipient.’ That’s how some describe the cessation of perception.
> Pali: Tatrekacce evamāhaṁsu: ‘ahetū appaccayā purisassa saññā uppajjantipi nirujjhantipi. Yasmiṁ samaye uppajjanti, saññī tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Yasmiṁ samaye nirujjhanti, asaññī tasmiṁ samaye hotī’ti. Ittheke abhisaññānirodhaṁ paññapenti.
[¶13] But someone else says: ‘That’s not how it is, good fellows! Perception is a person’s self, which enters and departs. When it enters, you become percipient. When it departs, you become non-percipient.’ That’s how some describe the cessation of perception.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘na kho pana metaṁ, bho, evaṁ bhavissati. Saññā hi, bho, purisassa attā. Sā ca kho upetipi apetipi. Yasmiṁ samaye upeti, saññī tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Yasmiṁ samaye apeti, asaññī tasmiṁ samaye hotī’ti. Ittheke abhisaññānirodhaṁ paññapenti.
[¶14] But someone else says: ‘That’s not how it is, good fellows! There are ascetics and brahmins of great power and might. They insert and extract a person’s perception. When they insert it, you become percipient. When they extract it, you become non-percipient.’ That’s how some describe the cessation of perception.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘na kho pana metaṁ, bho, evaṁ bhavissati. Santi hi, bho, samaṇabrāhmaṇā mahiddhikā mahānubhāvā. Te imassa purisassa saññaṁ upakaḍḍhantipi apakaḍḍhantipi. Yasmiṁ samaye upakaḍḍhanti, saññī tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Yasmiṁ samaye apakaḍḍhanti, asaññī tasmiṁ samaye hotī’ti. Ittheke abhisaññānirodhaṁ paññapenti.
[¶15] But someone else says: ‘That’s not how it is, good fellows! There are deities of great power and might. They insert and extract a person’s perception. When they insert it, you become percipient. When they extract it, you become non-percipient.’ That’s how some describe the cessation of perception.
> Pali: Tamañño evamāha: ‘na kho pana metaṁ, bho, evaṁ bhavissati. Santi hi, bho, devatā mahiddhikā mahānubhāvā. Tā imassa purisassa saññaṁ upakaḍḍhantipi apakaḍḍhantipi. Yasmiṁ samaye upakaḍḍhanti, saññī tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Yasmiṁ samaye apakaḍḍhanti, asaññī tasmiṁ samaye hotī’ti. Ittheke abhisaññānirodhaṁ paññapenti.
[¶16] That reminded me of the Buddha: ‘Surely it must be the Blessed One, the Holy One who is so very skilled in such matters.’ The Buddha is skilled and well-versed concerning the cessation of perception. How does the cessation of perception happen?”
> Pali: Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁyeva ārabbha sati udapādi: ‘aho nūna bhagavā, aho nūna sugato, yo imesaṁ dhammānaṁ sukusalo’ti. Bhagavā, bhante, kusalo, bhagavā pakataññū abhisaññānirodhassa. Kathaṁ nu kho, bhante, abhisaññānirodho hotī”ti?
[¶17] 1.2. Perception Arises With a Cause
> Pali: 1.2. Sahetukasaññuppādanirodhakathā
[¶18] “Regarding this, Poṭṭhapāda, those ascetics and brahmins who say that a person’s perceptions arise and cease without cause or reason are wrong from the start. Why is that? Because a person’s perceptions arise and cease with cause and reason. With training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease.
> Pali: “Tatra, poṭṭhapāda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ahetū appaccayā purisassa saññā uppajjantipi nirujjhantipī’ti, āditova tesaṁ aparaddhaṁ. Taṁ kissa hetu? Sahetū hi, poṭṭhapāda, sappaccayā purisassa saññā uppajjantipi nirujjhantipi. Sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati.
[¶19] And what is that training?” said the Buddha.
> Pali: Kā ca sikkhā”ti? Bhagavā avoca.
[¶20] “It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. …
> Pali: “Idha, poṭṭhapāda, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ, sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti …pe…
[¶21] Seeing that the hindrances have been given up in them, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed.
> Pali: tassime pañcanīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassato pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.
[¶22] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. The sensual perception that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of the rapture and bliss born of seclusion. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: So vivicceva kāmehi, vivicca akusalehi dhammehi, savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā kāmasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Vivekajapītisukhasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, vivekajapītisukhasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayaṁ sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶23] “Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. The subtle and true perception of the rapture and bliss born of seclusion that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of the rapture and bliss born of immersion. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā vivekajapītisukhasukhumasaccasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Samādhijapītisukhasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, samādhijapītisukhasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayampi sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶24] “Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ The subtle and true perception of the rapture and bliss born of immersion that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of bliss with equanimity. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā samādhijapītisukhasukhumasaccasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Upekkhāsukhasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, upekkhāsukhasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayampi sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶25] “Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. The subtle and true perception of bliss with equanimity that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of neutral feeling. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā upekkhāsukhasukhumasaccasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Adukkhamasukhasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, adukkhamasukhasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayampi sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶26] “Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. The perception of luminous form that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of the dimension of infinite space. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā rūpasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Ākāsānañcāyatanasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, ākāsānañcāyatanasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayampi sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶27] “Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite consciousness. The subtle and true perception of the dimension of infinite space that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā ākāsānañcāyatanasukhumasaccasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Viññāṇañcāyatanasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, viññāṇañcāyatanasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayampi sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶28] “Furthermore, a mendicant, going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, enters and remains in the dimension of nothingness. The subtle and true perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness that they had previously ceases. At that time they have a subtle and true perception of the dimension of nothingness. That’s how, with training, certain perceptions arise and certain perceptions cease. And this is that training,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Puna caparaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Tassa yā purimā viññāṇañcāyatanasukhumasaccasaññā, sā nirujjhati. Ākiñcaññāyatanasukhumasaccasaññā tasmiṁ samaye hoti, ākiñcaññāyatanasukhumasaccasaññīyeva tasmiṁ samaye hoti. Evampi sikkhā ekā saññā uppajjati, sikkhā ekā saññā nirujjhati. Ayampi sikkhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶29] “Poṭṭhapāda, from the time a mendicant here takes charge of their own perception, they proceed from one stage to the next, progressively reaching the peak of perception. Standing on the peak of perception they think, ‘Intentionality is bad for me, it’s better to be free of it. For if I were to intend and choose, these perceptions would cease in me, and other coarser perceptions would arise. Why don’t I neither make a choice nor form an intention?’ They neither make a choice nor form an intention. Those perceptions cease in them, and other coarser perceptions don’t arise. They touch cessation. And that, Poṭṭhapāda, is how the progressive cessation of perception is attained with awareness.
> Pali: “Yato kho, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu idha sakasaññī hoti, so tato amutra tato amutra anupubbena saññaggaṁ phusati. Tassa saññagge ṭhitassa evaṁ hoti: ‘cetayamānassa me pāpiyo, acetayamānassa me seyyo. Ahañceva kho pana ceteyyaṁ, abhisaṅkhareyyaṁ, imā ca me saññā nirujjheyyuṁ, aññā ca oḷārikā saññā uppajjeyyuṁ; yannūnāhaṁ na ceva ceteyyaṁ na ca abhisaṅkhareyyan’ti. So na ceva ceteti, na ca abhisaṅkharoti. Tassa acetayato anabhisaṅkharoto tā ceva saññā nirujjhanti, aññā ca oḷārikā saññā na uppajjanti. So nirodhaṁ phusati. Evaṁ kho, poṭṭhapāda, anupubbābhisaññānirodhasampajānasamāpatti hoti.
[¶30] What do you think, Poṭṭhapāda? Have you ever heard of this before?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, api nu te ito pubbe evarūpā anupubbābhisaññānirodhasampajānasamāpatti sutapubbā”ti?
[¶31] “No, sir. This is how I understand what the Buddha said: ‘From the time a mendicant here takes charge of their own perception, they proceed from one stage to the next, progressively reaching the peak of perception. Standing on the peak of perception they think, “Intentionality is bad for me, it’s better to be free of it. For if I were to intend and choose, these perceptions would cease in me, and other coarser perceptions would arise. Why don’t I neither make a choice nor form an intention?” Those perceptions cease in them, and other coarser perceptions don’t arise. They touch cessation. And that is how the progressive cessation of perception is attained with awareness.’”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante. Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavato bhāsitaṁ ājānāmi: ‘yato kho, poṭṭhapāda, bhikkhu idha sakasaññī hoti, so tato amutra tato amutra anupubbena saññaggaṁ phusati, tassa saññagge ṭhitassa evaṁ hoti: “cetayamānassa me pāpiyo, acetayamānassa me seyyo. Ahañceva kho pana ceteyyaṁ abhisaṅkhareyyaṁ, imā ca me saññā nirujjheyyuṁ, aññā ca oḷārikā saññā uppajjeyyuṁ; yannūnāhaṁ na ceva ceteyyaṁ, na ca abhisaṅkhareyyan”ti. So na ceva ceteti, na cābhisaṅkharoti, tassa acetayato anabhisaṅkharoto tā ceva saññā nirujjhanti, aññā ca oḷārikā saññā na uppajjanti. So nirodhaṁ phusati. Evaṁ kho, poṭṭhapāda, anupubbābhisaññānirodhasampajānasamāpatti hotī’”ti.
[¶32] “That’s right, Poṭṭhapāda.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, poṭṭhapādā”ti.
[¶33] “Does the Buddha describe just one peak of perception, or many?”
> Pali: “Ekaññeva nu kho, bhante, bhagavā saññaggaṁ paññapeti, udāhu puthūpi saññagge paññapetī”ti?
[¶34] “I describe the peak of perception as both one and many.”
> Pali: “Ekampi kho ahaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, saññaggaṁ paññapemi, puthūpi saññagge paññapemī”ti.
[¶35] “But sir, how do you describe it as one peak and as many?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana, bhante, bhagavā ekampi saññaggaṁ paññapeti, puthūpi saññagge paññapetī”ti?
[¶36] “I describe the peak of perception according to the specific manner in which one touches cessation. That’s how I describe the peak of perception as both one and many.”
> Pali: “Yathā yathā kho, poṭṭhapāda, nirodhaṁ phusati tathā tathāhaṁ saññaggaṁ paññapemi. Evaṁ kho ahaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, ekampi saññaggaṁ paññapemi, puthūpi saññagge paññapemī”ti.
[¶37] “But sir, does perception arise first and knowledge afterwards? Or does knowledge arise first and perception afterwards? Or do they both arise at the same time?”
> Pali: “Saññā nu kho, bhante, paṭhamaṁ uppajjati, pacchā ñāṇaṁ, udāhu ñāṇaṁ paṭhamaṁ uppajjati, pacchā saññā, udāhu saññā ca ñāṇañca apubbaṁ acarimaṁ uppajjantī”ti?
[¶38] “Perception arises first and knowledge afterwards. The arising of perception leads to the arising of knowledge. They understand, ‘My knowledge arose from a specific condition.’ That is a way to understand how perception arises first and knowledge afterwards; that the arising of perception leads to the arising of knowledge.”
> Pali: “Saññā kho, poṭṭhapāda, paṭhamaṁ uppajjati, pacchā ñāṇaṁ, saññuppādā ca pana ñāṇuppādo hoti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘idappaccayā kira me ñāṇaṁ udapādī’ti. Iminā kho etaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ— yathā saññā paṭhamaṁ uppajjati, pacchā ñāṇaṁ, saññuppādā ca pana ñāṇuppādo hotī”ti.
[¶39] 1.3. Perception and the Self
> Pali: 1.3. Saññāattakathā
[¶40] “Sir, is perception a person’s self, or are perception and self different things?”
> Pali: “Saññā nu kho, bhante, purisassa attā, udāhu aññā saññā añño attā”ti?
[¶41] “But Poṭṭhapāda, do you believe in a self?”
> Pali: “Kaṁ pana tvaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, attānaṁ paccesī”ti?
[¶42] “I believe in a solid self, sir, which is formed, made up of the four principal states, and consumes edible food.”
> Pali: “Oḷārikaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, attānaṁ paccemi rūpiṁ cātumahābhūtikaṁ kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhan”ti.
[¶43] “Suppose there was such a solid self, Poṭṭhapāda. In that case, perception would be one thing, the self another. Here is another way to understand how perception and self are different things. So long as that solid self remains, still some perceptions arise in a person and others cease. That is a way to understand how perception and self are different things.”
> Pali: “Oḷāriko ca hi te, poṭṭhapāda, attā abhavissa rūpī cātumahābhūtiko kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkho. Evaṁ santaṁ kho te, poṭṭhapāda, aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā. Tadamināpetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā. Tiṭṭhateva sāyaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, oḷāriko attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkho, atha imassa purisassa aññā ca saññā uppajjanti, aññā ca saññā nirujjhanti. Iminā kho etaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā”ti.
[¶44] “Sir, I believe in a mind-made self which is whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty.”
> Pali: “Manomayaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, attānaṁ paccemi sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyan”ti.
[¶45] “Suppose there was such a mind-made self, Poṭṭhapāda. In that case, perception would be one thing, the self another. Here is another way to understand how perception and self are different things. So long as that mind-made self remains, still some perceptions arise in a person and others cease. That too is a way to understand how perception and self are different things.”
> Pali: “Manomayo ca hi te, poṭṭhapāda, attā abhavissa sabbaṅgapaccaṅgī ahīnindriyo, evaṁ santampi kho te, poṭṭhapāda, aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā. Tadamināpetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā. Tiṭṭhateva sāyaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, manomayo attā sabbaṅgapaccaṅgī ahīnindriyo, atha imassa purisassa aññā ca saññā uppajjanti, aññā ca saññā nirujjhanti. Imināpi kho etaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā”ti.
[¶46] “Sir, I believe in a formless self which is made of perception.”
> Pali: “Arūpiṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, attānaṁ paccemi saññāmayan”ti.
[¶47] “Suppose there was such a formless self, Poṭṭhapāda. In that case, perception would be one thing, the self another. Here is another way to understand how perception and self are different things. So long as that formless self remains, still some perceptions arise in a person and others cease. That too is a way to understand how perception and self are different things.”
> Pali: “Arūpī ca hi te, poṭṭhapāda, attā abhavissa saññāmayo, evaṁ santampi kho te, poṭṭhapāda, aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā. Tadamināpetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā. Tiṭṭhateva sāyaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, arūpī attā saññāmayo, atha imassa purisassa aññā ca saññā uppajjanti, aññā ca saññā nirujjhanti. Imināpi kho etaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ yathā aññāva saññā bhavissati añño attā”ti.
[¶48] “But, sir, am I able to know whether perception is a person’s self, or whether perception and self are different things?”
> Pali: “Sakkā panetaṁ, bhante, mayā ñātuṁ: ‘saññā purisassa attā’ti vā ‘aññāva saññā añño attā’ti vā”ti?
[¶49] “It’s hard for you to understand this, since you have a different view, creed, and belief, and another discipline and denomination.”
> Pali: “Dujjānaṁ kho etaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, tayā aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrāyogena aññatrācariyakena: ‘saññā purisassa attā’ti vā, ‘aññāva saññā añño attāti’ vā”ti.
[¶50] “Well, if that’s the case, sir, then what do you make of this: ‘The cosmos is eternal. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Sacetaṁ, bhante, mayā dujjānaṁ aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrāyogena aññatrācariyakena: ‘saññā purisassa attā’ti vā, ‘aññāva saññā añño attā’ti vā; kiṁ pana, bhante, ‘sassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti?
[¶51] “This has not been declared by me, Poṭṭhapāda.”
> Pali: “Abyākataṁ kho etaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, mayā: ‘sassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶52] “Then what do you make of this: ‘The cosmos is not eternal. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhante, ‘asassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti?
[¶53] “This too has not been declared by me.”
> Pali: “Etampi kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā abyākataṁ: ‘asassato loko, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶54] “Then what do you make of this: ‘The cosmos is finite …’ … ‘The cosmos is infinite …’ … ‘The soul and the body are one and the same …’ … ‘The soul is one thing, the body another …’ … ‘A realized one still exists after death …’ … ‘A realized one no longer exists after death …’ … ‘A realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death …’ … ‘A realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhante, ‘antavā loko …pe… ‘anantavā loko … ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ … ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīraṁ … ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā … ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā … ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā … ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti?
[¶55] “This too has not been declared by me.”
> Pali: “Etampi kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā abyākataṁ: ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’”ti.
[¶56] “Why haven’t these things been declared by the Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kasmā panetaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā abyākatan”ti?
[¶57] “Because they’re not beneficial or relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. They don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why I haven’t declared them.”
> Pali: “Na hetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, atthasaṁhitaṁ na dhammasaṁhitaṁ nādibrahmacariyakaṁ, na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, tasmā etaṁ mayā abyākatan”ti.
[¶58] “Then what has been declared by the Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, bhante, bhagavatā byākatan”ti?
[¶59] “I have declared this: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’.”
> Pali: “Idaṁ dukkhanti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā byākataṁ. Ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā byākataṁ. Ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā byākataṁ. Ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā byākatan”ti.
[¶60] “Why have these things been declared by the Buddha?”
> Pali: “Kasmā panetaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā byākatan”ti?
[¶61] “Because they are beneficial and relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. They lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why I have declared them.”
> Pali: “Etañhi, poṭṭhapāda, atthasaṁhitaṁ, etaṁ dhammasaṁhitaṁ, etaṁ ādibrahmacariyakaṁ, etaṁ nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati; tasmā etaṁ mayā byākatan”ti.
[¶62] “That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One! Please, sir, go at your convenience.” Then the Buddha rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti. Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶63] Soon after the Buddha left, those wanderers beset Poṭṭhapāda on all sides with sneering and jeering. “No matter what the ascetic Gotama says, Poṭṭhapāda agrees with him: ‘That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One!’ We understand that the ascetic Gotama didn’t give any categorical teaching at all regarding whether the cosmos is eternal and so on.”
> Pali: Atha kho te paribbājakā acirapakkantassa bhagavato poṭṭhapādaṁ paribbājakaṁ samantato vācā sannitodakena sañjhabbharimakaṁsu: “evameva panāyaṁ bhavaṁ poṭṭhapādo yaññadeva samaṇo gotamo bhāsati, taṁ tadevassa abbhanumodati: ‘evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugatā’ti. Na kho pana mayaṁ kiñci samaṇassa gotamassa ekaṁsikaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāma: ‘sassato loko’ti vā, ‘asassato loko’ti vā, ‘antavā loko’ti vā, ‘anantavā loko’ti vā, ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti vā, ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti vā, ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ‘na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā, ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā”ti.
[¶64] When they said this, Poṭṭhapāda said to them, “I too understand that the ascetic Gotama didn’t give any categorical teaching at all regarding whether the cosmos is eternal and so on. Nevertheless, the practice that he describes is true, real, and accurate. It is the regularity of natural principles, the surety of natural principles. So how on earth could a sensible person such as I not agree that what was well spoken by the ascetic Gotama was in fact well spoken?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, poṭṭhapādo paribbājako te paribbājake etadavoca: “ahampi kho, bho, na kiñci samaṇassa gotamassa ekaṁsikaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi: ‘sassato loko’ti vā, ‘asassato loko’ti vā …pe… ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti vā; api ca samaṇo gotamo bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ tathaṁ paṭipadaṁ paññapeti dhammaṭṭhitataṁ dhammaniyāmataṁ. Bhūtaṁ kho pana tacchaṁ tathaṁ paṭipadaṁ paññapentassa dhammaṭṭhitataṁ dhammaniyāmataṁ, kathañhi nāma mādiso viññū samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodeyyā”ti?
[¶65] 2. On Citta Hatthisāriputta
> Pali: 2. Cittahatthisāriputtapoṭṭhapādavatthu
[¶66] Then after two or three days had passed, Citta Hatthisāriputta and Poṭṭhapāda went to the Buddha. Citta Hatthisāriputta bowed and sat down to one side. But the wanderer Poṭṭhapāda exchanged greetings with the Buddha, and when the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Poṭṭhapāda told the Buddha what had happened after he left. The Buddha said:
> Pali: Atha kho dvīhatīhassa accayena citto ca hatthisāriputto poṭṭhapādo ca paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā citto hatthisāriputto bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Poṭṭhapādo pana paribbājako bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho poṭṭhapādo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tadā maṁ, bhante, te paribbājakā acirapakkantassa bhagavato samantato vācāsannitodakena sañjhabbharimakaṁsu: ‘evameva panāyaṁ bhavaṁ poṭṭhapādo yaññadeva samaṇo gotamo bhāsati, taṁ tadevassa abbhanumodati: “evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugatā”ti. Na kho pana mayaṁ kiñci samaṇassa gotamassa ekaṁsikaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāma: “sassato loko”ti vā, “asassato loko”ti vā, “antavā loko”ti vā, “anantavā loko”ti vā, “taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran”ti vā, “aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran”ti vā, “hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā, “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā’ti. Evaṁ vuttāhaṁ, bhante, te paribbājake etadavocaṁ: ‘ahampi kho, bho, na kiñci samaṇassa gotamassa ekaṁsikaṁ dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāmi: “sassato loko”ti vā, “asassato loko”ti vā …pe… “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā”ti vā; api ca samaṇo gotamo bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ tathaṁ paṭipadaṁ paññapeti dhammaṭṭhitataṁ dhammaniyāmataṁ. Bhūtaṁ kho pana tacchaṁ tathaṁ paṭipadaṁ paññapentassa dhammaṭṭhitataṁ dhammaniyāmataṁ, kathañhi nāma mādiso viññū samaṇassa gotamassa subhāsitaṁ subhāsitato nābbhanumodeyyā’”ti?
[¶67] “All those wanderers, Poṭṭhapāda, are blind and sightless. You are the only one whose eyes are clear. For I have taught and pointed out teachings that are categorical and also teachings that are not categorical.
> Pali: “Sabbeva kho ete, poṭṭhapāda, paribbājakā andhā acakkhukā; tvaṁyeva nesaṁ eko cakkhumā. Ekaṁsikāpi hi kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā dhammā desitā paññattā; anekaṁsikāpi hi kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā dhammā desitā paññattā.
[¶68] And what teachings have I taught and pointed out as not categorical? ‘The cosmos is eternal’ … ‘The cosmos is not eternal’ … ‘The cosmos is finite’ … ‘The cosmos is infinite’ … ‘The soul is the same thing as the body’ … ‘The soul is one thing, the body another’ … ‘A realized one still exists after death’ … ‘A realized one no longer exists after death’ … ‘A realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death’ … ‘A realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death.’
> Pali: Katame ca te, poṭṭhapāda, mayā anekaṁsikā dhammā desitā paññattā? ‘Sassato loko’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā anekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto; ‘asassato loko’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā anekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto; ‘antavā loko’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda …pe… ‘anantavā loko’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda … ‘taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīran’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda … ‘aññaṁ jīvaṁ aññaṁ sarīran’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda … ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda … na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda … ‘hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda … ‘neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā’ti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā anekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto.
[¶69] And why have I taught and pointed out such teachings as not categorical? Because those things aren’t beneficial or relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. They don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why I have taught and pointed out such teachings as not categorical.
> Pali: Kasmā ca te, poṭṭhapāda, mayā anekaṁsikā dhammā desitā paññattā? Na hete, poṭṭhapāda, atthasaṁhitā na dhammasaṁhitā na ādibrahmacariyakā na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattanti. Tasmā te mayā anekaṁsikā dhammā desitā paññattā.
[¶70] 2.1. Teachings That Are Categorical
> Pali: 2.1. Ekaṁsikadhammā
[¶71] And what teachings have I taught and pointed out as categorical? ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’.
> Pali: Katame ca te, poṭṭhapāda, mayā ekaṁsikā dhammā desitā paññattā? Idaṁ dukkhanti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā ekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto. Ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā ekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto. Ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā ekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto. Ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti kho, poṭṭhapāda, mayā ekaṁsiko dhammo desito paññatto.
## 17. DN 9 · With Poṭṭhapāda · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/17/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/17/#p-N
[¶0] And why have I taught and pointed out such teachings as categorical? Because they are beneficial and relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. They lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why I have taught and pointed out such teachings as categorical.
> Pali: Kasmā ca te, poṭṭhapāda, mayā ekaṁsikā dhammā desitā paññattā? Ete hi, poṭṭhapāda, atthasaṁhitā, ete dhammasaṁhitā, ete ādibrahmacariyakā ete nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattanti. Tasmā te mayā ekaṁsikā dhammā desitā paññattā.
[¶1] There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘The self is absolutely happy and free of disease after death.’ I go up to them and say, ‘Is it really true that this is the venerables’ view?’ And they answer, ‘Yes’. I say to them, ‘But do you meditate knowing and seeing an absolutely happy world?’ Asked this, they say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Santi, poṭṭhapāda, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: “ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā”’ti? Te ce me evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmā’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharathā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶2] I say to them, ‘But have you perceived an absolutely happy self for a single day or night, or even half a day or night?’ Asked this, they say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto ekaṁ vā rattiṁ ekaṁ vā divasaṁ upaḍḍhaṁ vā rattiṁ upaḍḍhaṁ vā divasaṁ ekantasukhiṁ attānaṁ sañjānāthā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶3] I say to them, ‘But do you know a path and a practice to realize an absolutely happy world?’ Asked this, they say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto jānātha: “ayaṁ maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶4] I say to them, ‘But have you ever heard the voice of the deities reborn in an absolutely happy world saying, “Practice well, good fellows, practice directly so as to realize an absolutely happy world. For this is how we practiced, and we were reborn in an absolutely happy world”?’ Asked this, they say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto yā tā devatā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā, tāsaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ saddaṁ suṇātha: “suppaṭipannāttha, mārisā, ujuppaṭipannāttha, mārisā, ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāya; mayampi hi, mārisā, evaṁpaṭipannā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā”’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶5] What do you think, Poṭṭhapāda? This being so, doesn’t what they say turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶6] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶7] “Suppose, Poṭṭhapāda, a man were to say: ‘Whoever the finest lady in the land is, it is her that I want, her that I desire!’ They’d say to him, ‘My man, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know whether she’s an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’ They’d say to him, ‘My friend, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know her name or clan? Whether she’s tall or short or medium? Whether her skin is black, brown, or dingy? Whether she comes from such-and-such village, town, or city?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’ They’d say to him, ‘My man, do you desire someone who you’ve never even known or seen?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘Yes.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, poṭṭhapāda, puriso evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ yā imasmiṁ janapade janapadakalyāṇī, taṁ icchāmi taṁ kāmemī’ti. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ khattiyī vā brāhmaṇī vā vessī vā suddī vā’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ evaṁnāmā evaṅgottāti vā, dīghā vā rassā vā majjhimā vā kāḷī vā sāmā vā maṅguracchavī vāti, amukasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā nagare vā’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi, taṁ tvaṁ icchasi kāmesī’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘āmā’ti vadeyya.
[¶8] What do you think, Poṭṭhapāda? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶9] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶10] “In the same way, the ascetics and brahmins who have that doctrine and view …
> Pali: “Evameva kho, poṭṭhapāda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: “ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā”’ti? Te ce me evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmā’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharathā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶11] > Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto ekaṁ vā rattiṁ ekaṁ vā divasaṁ upaḍḍhaṁ vā rattiṁ upaḍḍhaṁ vā divasaṁ ekantasukhiṁ attānaṁ sañjānāthā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶12] > Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto jānātha: “ayaṁ maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā”’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶13] > Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto yā tā devatā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā, tāsaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ saddaṁ suṇātha: “suppaṭipannāttha, mārisā, ujuppaṭipannāttha, mārisā, ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāya; mayampi hi, mārisā, evaṁpaṭipannā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā”’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶14] Doesn’t what they say turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶15] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶16] “Suppose a man was to build a ladder at the crossroads for climbing up to a stilt longhouse. They’d say to him, My friend, that stilt longhouse for which you’re building a ladder—do you know whether it’s to the north, south, east, or west? Or whether it’s tall or short or medium?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’ They’d say to him, ‘My man, are you building a ladder for a longhouse that you’ve never even known or seen?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘Yes.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, poṭṭhapāda, puriso cātumahāpathe nisseṇiṁ kareyya pāsādassa ārohaṇāya. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yassa tvaṁ pāsādassa ārohaṇāya nisseṇiṁ karosi, jānāsi taṁ pāsādaṁ puratthimāya vā disāya dakkhiṇāya vā disāya pacchimāya vā disāya uttarāya vā disāya ucco vā nīco vā majjhimo vā’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi, tassa tvaṁ pāsādassa ārohaṇāya nisseṇiṁ karosī’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘āmā’ti vadeyya.
[¶17] What do you think, Poṭṭhapāda? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶18] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶19] “In the same way, the ascetics and brahmins who have those various doctrines and views …
> Pali: “Evameva kho, poṭṭhapāda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: “ekantasukhī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā”’ti? Te ce me evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmā’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ viharathā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶20] > Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto ekaṁ vā rattiṁ ekaṁ vā divasaṁ upaḍḍhaṁ vā rattiṁ upaḍḍhaṁ vā divasaṁ ekantasukhiṁ attānaṁ sañjānāthā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶21] > Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto jānātha ayaṁ maggo ayaṁ paṭipadā ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶22] > Pali: Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘api pana tumhe āyasmanto yā tā devatā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā tāsaṁ devatānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ saddaṁ suṇātha: “suppaṭipannāttha, mārisā, ujuppaṭipannāttha, mārisā, ekantasukhassa lokassa sacchikiriyāya; mayampi hi, mārisā, evaṁ paṭipannā ekantasukhaṁ lokaṁ upapannā”’ti? Iti puṭṭhā ‘no’ti vadanti.
[¶23] Doesn’t what they say turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶24] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tesaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶25] 2.2. Three Kinds of Incarnation
> Pali: 2.2. Tayoattapaṭilābha
[¶26] “Poṭṭhapāda, there are these three kinds of incarnation: a solid incarnation, a mind-made incarnation, and a formless incarnation. And what is a solid incarnation? It is formed, made up of the four principal states, and consumes edible food. What is a mind-made incarnation? It is formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. What is a formless incarnation? It is formless, made of perception.
> Pali: “Tayo kho me, poṭṭhapāda, attapaṭilābhā— oḷāriko attapaṭilābho, manomayo attapaṭilābho, arūpo attapaṭilābho. Katamo ca, poṭṭhapāda, oḷāriko attapaṭilābho? Rūpī cātumahābhūtiko kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkho, ayaṁ oḷāriko attapaṭilābho. Katamo manomayo attapaṭilābho? Rūpī manomayo sabbaṅgapaccaṅgī ahīnindriyo, ayaṁ manomayo attapaṭilābho. Katamo arūpo attapaṭilābho? Arūpī saññāmayo, ayaṁ arūpo attapaṭilābho.
[¶27] I teach the Dhamma for the giving up of reincarnation in these three kinds of incarnation. ‘When you practice accordingly, corrupting qualities will be given up in you and cleansing qualities will grow. You’ll enter and remain in the fullness and abundance of wisdom, having realized it with your own insight in this very life.’ Poṭṭhapāda, you might think: ‘Corrupting qualities will be given up and cleansing qualities will grow. One will enter and remain in the fullness and abundance of wisdom, having realized it with one’s own insight in this very life. But such a life is suffering.’ But you should not see it like this. Corrupting qualities will be given up and cleansing qualities will grow. One will enter and remain in the fullness and abundance of wisdom, having realized it with one’s own insight in this very life. And there will be only joy and happiness, tranquility, mindfulness and awareness. Such a life is blissful.
> Pali: Oḷārikassapi kho ahaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, attapaṭilābhassa pahānāya dhammaṁ desemi: ‘yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti. Siyā kho pana te, poṭṭhapāda, evamassa: ‘saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati, dukkho ca kho vihāro’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Saṅkilesikā ceva dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā ca dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati, pāmujjañceva bhavissati pīti ca passaddhi ca sati ca sampajaññañca sukho ca vihāro.
[¶28] > Pali: Manomayassapi kho ahaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, attapaṭilābhassa pahānāya dhammaṁ desemi: ‘yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti. Siyā kho pana te, poṭṭhapāda, evamassa: ‘saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati, dukkho ca kho vihāro’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Saṅkilesikā ceva dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā ca dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati, pāmujjañceva bhavissati pīti ca passaddhi ca sati ca sampajaññañca sukho ca vihāro.
[¶29] > Pali: Arūpassapi kho ahaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, attapaṭilābhassa pahānāya dhammaṁ desemi: ‘yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti. Siyā kho pana te, poṭṭhapāda, evamassa: ‘saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati, dukkho ca kho vihāro’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, poṭṭhapāda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Saṅkilesikā ceva dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā ca dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati, pāmujjañceva bhavissati pīti ca passaddhi ca sati ca sampajaññañca sukho ca vihāro.
[¶30] Poṭṭhapāda, if others should ask us, ‘But reverends, what is that solid incarnation for the giving up of which you teach?’ We’d answer like this, ‘This is that solid incarnation.’
> Pali: Pare ce, poṭṭhapāda, amhe evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘katamo pana so, āvuso, oḷāriko attapaṭilābho, yassa tumhe pahānāya dhammaṁ desetha, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti, tesaṁ mayaṁ evaṁ puṭṭhā evaṁ byākareyyāma: ‘ayaṁ vā so, āvuso, oḷāriko attapaṭilābho, yassa mayaṁ pahānāya dhammaṁ desema, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶31] If others should ask us, ‘But reverends, what is that mind-made incarnation?’ We’d answer like this, ‘This is that mind-made incarnation.’
> Pali: Pare ce, poṭṭhapāda, amhe evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘katamo pana so, āvuso, manomayo attapaṭilābho, yassa tumhe pahānāya dhammaṁ desetha, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti? Tesaṁ mayaṁ evaṁ puṭṭhā evaṁ byākareyyāma: ‘ayaṁ vā so, āvuso, manomayo attapaṭilābho yassa mayaṁ pahānāya dhammaṁ desema, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶32] If others should ask us, ‘But reverends, what is that formless incarnation?’ We’d answer like this, ‘This is that formless incarnation.’
> Pali: Pare ce, poṭṭhapāda, amhe evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘katamo pana so, āvuso, arūpo attapaṭilābho, yassa tumhe pahānāya dhammaṁ desetha, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti? Tesaṁ mayaṁ evaṁ puṭṭhā evaṁ byākareyyāma: ‘ayaṁ vā so, āvuso, arūpo attapaṭilābho yassa mayaṁ pahānāya dhammaṁ desema, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶33] What do you think, Poṭṭhapāda? This being so, doesn’t that statement turn out to have a demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante sappāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶34] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante sappāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶35] “Suppose a man were to build a ladder for climbing up to a stilt longhouse right underneath that longhouse. They’d say to him, ‘My man, that stilt longhouse for which you’re building a ladder—do you know whether it’s to the north, south, east, or west? Or whether it’s tall or short or medium?’ He’d say, ‘This is that stilt longhouse for which I’m building a ladder, right underneath it.’
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, poṭṭhapāda, puriso nisseṇiṁ kareyya pāsādassa ārohaṇāya tasseva pāsādassa heṭṭhā. Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yassa tvaṁ pāsādassa ārohaṇāya nisseṇiṁ karosi, jānāsi taṁ pāsādaṁ, puratthimāya vā disāya dakkhiṇāya vā disāya pacchimāya vā disāya uttarāya vā disāya ucco vā nīco vā majjhimo vā’ti? So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ayaṁ vā so, āvuso, pāsādo, yassāhaṁ ārohaṇāya nisseṇiṁ karomi, tasseva pāsādassa heṭṭhā’ti.
[¶36] What do you think, Poṭṭhapāda? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have a demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante tassa purisassa sappāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶37] “Clearly that’s the case, sir.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa sappāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶38] > Pali: “Evameva kho, poṭṭhapāda, pare ce amhe evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘katamo pana so, āvuso, oḷāriko attapaṭilābho …pe… katamo pana so, āvuso, manomayo attapaṭilābho …pe… katamo pana so, āvuso, arūpo attapaṭilābho, yassa tumhe pahānāya dhammaṁ desetha, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti? Tesaṁ mayaṁ evaṁ puṭṭhā evaṁ byākareyyāma: ‘ayaṁ vā so, āvuso, arūpo attapaṭilābho, yassa mayaṁ pahānāya dhammaṁ desema, yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodāniyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’ti.
[¶39] > Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, poṭṭhapāda, nanu evaṁ sante sappāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti? “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante sappāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶40] When the Buddha had spoken, Citta Hatthisāriputta said, “Sir, when reincarnated in a solid incarnation, are the mind-made and formless incarnations fictitious, and only the solid incarnation real? When reincarnated in a mind-made incarnation, are the solid and formless incarnations fictitious, and only the mind-made incarnation real? When reincarnated in a formless incarnation, are the solid and mind-made incarnations fictitious, and only the formless incarnation real?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, citto hatthisāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yasmiṁ, bhante, samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābho hoti, moghassa tasmiṁ samaye manomayo attapaṭilābho hoti, mogho arūpo attapaṭilābho hoti; oḷāriko vāssa attapaṭilābho tasmiṁ samaye sacco hoti. Yasmiṁ, bhante, samaye manomayo attapaṭilābho hoti, moghassa tasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābho hoti, mogho arūpo attapaṭilābho hoti; manomayo vāssa attapaṭilābho tasmiṁ samaye sacco hoti. Yasmiṁ, bhante, samaye arūpo attapaṭilābho hoti, moghassa tasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābho hoti, mogho manomayo attapaṭilābho hoti; arūpo vāssa attapaṭilābho tasmiṁ samaye sacco hotī”ti.
[¶41] “When reincarnated in a solid incarnation, it’s not referred to as a mind-made or formless incarnation, only as a solid incarnation. When reincarnated in a mind-made incarnation, it’s not referred to as a solid or formless incarnation, only as a mind-made incarnation. When reincarnated in a formless incarnation, it’s not referred to as a solid or mind-made incarnation, only as a formless incarnation.
> Pali: “Yasmiṁ, citta, samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābho hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye manomayo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na arūpo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; oḷāriko attapaṭilābhotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Yasmiṁ, citta, samaye manomayo attapaṭilābho hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na arūpo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; manomayo attapaṭilābhotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Yasmiṁ, citta, samaye arūpo attapaṭilābho hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na manomayo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; arūpo attapaṭilābhotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati.
[¶42] Citta, suppose they were to ask you, ‘Did you exist in the past? Will you exist in the future? Do you exist now?’ How would you answer?”
> Pali: Sace taṁ, citta, evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘ahosi tvaṁ atītamaddhānaṁ, na tvaṁ nāhosi; bhavissasi tvaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, na tvaṁ na bhavissasi; atthi tvaṁ etarahi, na tvaṁ natthī’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭho tvaṁ, citta, kinti byākareyyāsī”ti?
[¶43] “Sir, if they were to ask me this, I’d answer like this, ‘I did exist in the past. I will exist in the future. I do exist now.’ That’s how I’d answer.”
> Pali: “Sace maṁ, bhante, evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘ahosi tvaṁ atītamaddhānaṁ, na tvaṁ na ahosi; bhavissasi tvaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, na tvaṁ na bhavissasi; atthi tvaṁ etarahi, na tvaṁ natthī’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, evaṁ byākareyyaṁ: ‘ahosāhaṁ atītamaddhānaṁ, nāhaṁ na ahosiṁ; bhavissāmahaṁ anāgatamaddhānaṁ, nāhaṁ na bhavissāmi; atthāhaṁ etarahi, nāhaṁ natthī’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, evaṁ byākareyyan”ti.
[¶44] “But Citta, suppose they were to ask you, ‘Is the reincarnation you had in the past your only real one, and those of the future and present fictitious? Is the reincarnation you will have in the future your only real one, and those of the past and present fictitious? Is the reincarnation you have now your only real one, and those of the past and future fictitious?’ How would you answer?”
> Pali: “Sace pana taṁ, citta, evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘yo te ahosi atīto attapaṭilābho, sova te attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho anāgato, mogho paccuppanno? Yo te bhavissati anāgato attapaṭilābho, sova te attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho atīto, mogho paccuppanno? Yo te etarahi paccuppanno attapaṭilābho, sova te attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho atīto, mogho anāgato’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭho tvaṁ, citta, kinti byākareyyāsī”ti?
[¶45] “Sir, if they were to ask me this, I’d answer like this, ‘The reincarnation I had in the past was real at that time, and those of the future and present fictitious. The reincarnation I will have in the future will be real at the time, and those of the past and present fictitious. The reincarnation I have now is real at this time, and those of the past and future fictitious.’ That’s how I’d answer.”
> Pali: “Sace pana maṁ, bhante, evaṁ puccheyyuṁ: ‘yo te ahosi atīto attapaṭilābho, sova te attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho anāgato, mogho paccuppanno. Yo te bhavissati anāgato attapaṭilābho, sova te attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho atīto, mogho paccuppanno. Yo te etarahi paccuppanno attapaṭilābho, sova te attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho atīto, mogho anāgato’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, evaṁ byākareyyaṁ: ‘yo me ahosi atīto attapaṭilābho, sova me attapaṭilābho tasmiṁ samaye sacco ahosi, mogho anāgato, mogho paccuppanno. Yo me bhavissati anāgato attapaṭilābho, sova me attapaṭilābho tasmiṁ samaye sacco bhavissati, mogho atīto, mogho paccuppanno. Yo me etarahi paccuppanno attapaṭilābho, sova me attapaṭilābho sacco, mogho atīto, mogho anāgato’ti. Evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, evaṁ byākareyyan”ti.
[¶46] “In the same way, while in any one of the three reincarnations, it’s not referred to as the other two, only under its own name.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, citta, yasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābho hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye manomayo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na arūpo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Oḷāriko attapaṭilābhotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Yasmiṁ, citta, samaye manomayo attapaṭilābho hoti …pe… yasmiṁ, citta, samaye arūpo attapaṭilābho hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na manomayo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; arūpo attapaṭilābhotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati.
[¶47] From a cow comes milk, from milk comes curds, from curds come butter, from butter comes ghee, and from ghee comes cream of ghee. And the cream of ghee is said to be the best of these. While it’s milk, it’s not referred to as curds, butter, ghee, or cream of ghee. It’s only referred to as milk. While it’s curd or butter or ghee or cream of ghee, it’s not referred to as anything else, only under its own name. In the same way, while in any one of the three incarnations, it’s not referred to as the other two, only under its own name. These are the world’s common usages, definitions, expressions, and descriptions, which the Realized One uses to communicate without getting stuck on them.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, citta, gavā khīraṁ, khīramhā dadhi, dadhimhā navanītaṁ, navanītamhā sappi, sappimhā sappimaṇḍo. Yasmiṁ samaye khīraṁ hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye dadhīti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na navanītanti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na sappīti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na sappimaṇḍoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; khīrantveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Yasmiṁ samaye dadhi hoti …pe… navanītaṁ hoti … sappi hoti … sappimaṇḍo hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye khīranti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na dadhīti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na navanītanti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na sappīti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; sappimaṇḍotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Evameva kho, citta, yasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābho hoti …pe… yasmiṁ, citta, samaye manomayo attapaṭilābho hoti …pe… yasmiṁ, citta, samaye arūpo attapaṭilābho hoti, neva tasmiṁ samaye oḷāriko attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati, na manomayo attapaṭilābhoti saṅkhaṁ gacchati; arūpo attapaṭilābhotveva tasmiṁ samaye saṅkhaṁ gacchati. Imā kho, citta, lokasamaññā lokaniruttiyo lokavohārā lokapaññattiyo, yāhi tathāgato voharati aparāmasan”ti.
[¶48] When he had spoken, the wanderer Poṭṭhapāda said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, so too the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, poṭṭhapādo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶49] 2.3. The Ordination of Citta Hatthisāriputta
> Pali: 2.3. Cittahatthisāriputtaupasampadā
[¶50] But Citta Hatthisāriputta said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, so too the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence?”
> Pali: Citto pana hatthisāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶51] And Citta Hatthisāriputta received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after his ordination, Venerable Citta Hatthisāriputta, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness. He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Citta Hatthisāriputta became one of the perfected.
> Pali: Alattha kho citto hatthisāriputto bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā citto hatthisāriputto eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto na cirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi. “khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthAttāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā citto hatthisāriputto arahataṁ ahosīti.
[¶52] > Pali: Poṭṭhapādasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 18. DN 10 · With Subha · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/18/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/18/#p-N
[¶0] DN 10 · With Subha
> Pali: DN 10 · Subhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Ānanda was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. It was not long after the Buddha had become fully quenched.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā ānando sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme aciraparinibbute bhagavati.
[¶2] Now at that time the student Subha, Todeyya’s son, was residing in Sāvatthī on some business. Then he addressed a certain young student, “Here, young student, go to the ascetic Ānanda and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then say: ‘Sir, please visit the student Subha, Todeyya’s son, at his home out of sympathy.’”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena subho māṇavo todeyyaputto sāvatthiyaṁ paṭivasati kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto aññataraṁ māṇavakaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṁ ānandaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṁ ānandaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi: ‘sādhu kira bhavaṁ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti.
[¶3] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the young student, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so māṇavako subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa paṭissutvā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho so māṇavako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṁ ānandaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati; evañca vadeti: ‘sādhu kira bhavaṁ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā’”ti.
[¶4] When he had spoken, Venerable Ānanda said to him, “It’s not the right time, young student. I have drunk a dose of medicine today. But hopefully tomorrow I’ll get a chance to visit him.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando taṁ māṇavakaṁ etadavoca: “akālo kho, māṇavaka. Atthi me ajja bhesajjamattā pītā. Appevanāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the young student. He went back to Subha, and told him what had happened, adding, “This much, sir, I managed to do. At least the worthy Ānanda will take the opportunity to visit tomorrow.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so māṇavako āyasmato ānandassa paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena subho māṇavo todeyyaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā subhaṁ māṇavaṁ todeyyaputtaṁ etadavoca: “avocumhā kho mayaṁ bhoto vacanena taṁ bhavantaṁ ānandaṁ: ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṁ ānandaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati, evañca vadeti: “sādhu kira bhavaṁ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṁ upādāyā”’ti. Evaṁ vutte, bho, samaṇo ānando maṁ etadavoca: ‘akālo kho, māṇavaka. Atthi me ajja bhesajjamattā pītā. Appevanāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’ti. Ettāvatāpi kho, bho, katameva etaṁ, yato kho so bhavaṁ ānando okāsamakāsi svātanāyapi upasaṅkamanāyā”ti.
[¶6] Then when the night had passed, Ānanda robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went with Venerable Cetaka as his second monk to Subha’s home, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Subha went up to Ānanda, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Ānanda:
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando tassā rattiyā accayena pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya cetakena bhikkhunā pacchāsamaṇena yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca:
[¶7] “Worthy Ānanda, you were the worthy Gotama’s attendant. You were close to him, living in his presence. You ought to know what things the worthy Gotama praised, and in which he encouraged, settled, and grounded all these people. What were those things?”
> Pali: “bhavañhi ānando tassa bhoto gotamassa dīgharattaṁ upaṭṭhāko santikāvacaro samīpacārī. Bhavametaṁ ānando jāneyya, yesaṁ so bhavaṁ gotamo dhammānaṁ vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi. Katamesānaṁ kho, bho ānanda, dhammānaṁ so bhavaṁ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosi; kattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesī”ti?
[¶8] “Student, the Buddha praised three spectrums of practice, and that’s what he encouraged, settled, and grounded all these people in. What three? The spectrums of noble ethics, noble immersion, and noble wisdom. These are the three spectrums of practice that the Buddha praised.”
> Pali: “Tiṇṇaṁ kho, māṇava, khandhānaṁ so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī ahosi; ettha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi. Katamesaṁ tiṇṇaṁ? Ariyassa sīlakkhandhassa, ariyassa samādhikkhandhassa, ariyassa paññākkhandhassa. Imesaṁ kho, māṇava, tiṇṇaṁ khandhānaṁ so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī ahosi; ettha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesī”ti.
[¶9] 1. The Entire Spectrum of Ethics
> Pali: 1. Sīlakkhandha
[¶10] “But what was that spectrum of noble ethics that the Buddha praised?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho ānanda, ariyo sīlakkhandho, yassa so bhavaṁ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesī”ti?
[¶11] “Student, it’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed. He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. A householder hears that teaching, or a householder’s child, or someone reborn in a good family. They gain faith in the Realized One and reflect: ‘Life at home is cramped and dirty, life gone forth is wide open. It’s not easy for someone living at home to lead the spiritual life utterly full and pure, like a polished shell. Why don’t I shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness?’ After some time they give up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Once they’ve gone forth, they live restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. They act skillfully by body and speech. They’re purified in livelihood and accomplished in ethical conduct. They guard the sense doors, have mindfulness and situational awareness, and are content.
> Pali: “Idha, māṇava, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Taṁ dhammaṁ suṇāti gahapati vā gahapatiputto vā aññatarasmiṁ vā kule paccājāto. So taṁ dhammaṁ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṁ paṭilabhati. So tena saddhāpaṭilābhena samannāgato iti paṭisañcikkhati: ‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho, abbhokāso pabbajjā, nayidaṁ sukaraṁ agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā ekantaparipuṇṇaṁ ekantaparisuddhaṁ saṅkhalikhitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyyan’ti. So aparena samayena appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati, ācāragocarasampanno, anumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, kāyakammavacīkammena samannāgato kusalena, parisuddhājīvo, sīlasampanno, indriyesu guttadvāro, satisampajaññena samannāgato, santuṭṭho.
[¶12] And how is a mendicant accomplished in ethics? It’s when a mendicant gives up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. They’re scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. …
> Pali: Kathañca, māṇava, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti? Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. Yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati;
[¶13] This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶14] There are some ascetics and brahmins who, while enjoying food given in faith, still earn a living by low lore, by wrong livelihood. This includes rites for propitiation, for granting wishes, for ghosts, for the earth, for rain, for property settlement, and for preparing and consecrating house sites, and rites involving sipping water and bathing, and oblations. It also includes administering emetics, purgatives, expectorants, and phlegmagogues; administering ear-oils, eye restoratives, nasal medicine, ointments, and counter-ointments; surgery with needle and scalpel, treating children, prescribing root medicines, and herbal bandages. They refrain from such low lore, such wrong livelihood. … This pertains to their ethics.
> Pali: Yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ bhūtakammaṁ bhūrikammaṁ vassakammaṁ vossakammaṁ vatthukammaṁ vatthuparikammaṁ ācamanaṁ nhāpanaṁ juhanaṁ vamanaṁ virecanaṁ uddhaṁvirecanaṁ adhovirecanaṁ sīsavirecanaṁ kaṇṇatelaṁ nettatappanaṁ natthukammaṁ añjanaṁ paccañjanaṁ sālākiyaṁ sallakattiyaṁ dārakatikicchā mūlabhesajjānaṁ anuppadānaṁ osadhīnaṁ paṭimokkho iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu yathā vā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā te evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvena jīvitaṁ kappenti, seyyathidaṁ—santikammaṁ paṇidhikammaṁ …pe… osadhīnaṁ paṭimokkho iti vā iti evarūpāya tiracchānavijjāya micchājīvā paṭivirato hoti. Idampissa hoti sīlasmiṁ.
[¶15] A mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. It’s like a king who has defeated his enemies. He sees no danger from his foes in any quarter. A mendicant thus accomplished in ethics sees no danger in any quarter in regards to their ethical restraint. When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, they experience a blameless happiness inside themselves. That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics.
> Pali: Sa kho so, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto nihatapaccāmitto na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ paccatthikato; evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ sīlasampanno na kutoci bhayaṁ samanupassati, yadidaṁ sīlasaṁvarato. So iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ anavajjasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Evaṁ kho, māṇava, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti.
[¶16] This is that spectrum of noble ethics that the Buddha praised. But there is still more to be done.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho so, māṇava, ariyo sīlakkhandho yassa so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi. Atthi cevettha uttarikaraṇīyan”ti.
[¶17] “It’s incredible, worthy Ānanda, it’s amazing, This spectrum of noble ethics is complete, not lacking anything! Such a complete spectrum of ethics cannot be seen among the other ascetics and brahmins. Were other ascetics and brahmins to see such a spectrum of noble ethics in themselves, they’d be delighted with just that much: ‘This is sufficient; enough has been done. We’ve reached the goal of our ascetic life. There is nothing more to be done.’ And yet you say: ‘But there is still more to be done.’
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho ānanda, abbhutaṁ, bho ānanda. So cāyaṁ, bho ānanda, ariyo sīlakkhandho paripuṇṇo, no aparipuṇṇo. Evaṁ paripuṇṇañcāhaṁ, bho ānanda, ariyaṁ sīlakkhandhaṁ ito bahiddhā aññesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu na samanupassāmi. Evaṁ paripuṇṇañca, bho ānanda, ariyaṁ sīlakkhandhaṁ ito bahiddhā aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇā attani samanupasseyyuṁ, te tāvatakeneva attamanā assu: ‘alamettāvatā, katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttarikaraṇīyan’ti. Atha ca pana bhavaṁ ānando evamāha: ‘atthi cevettha uttarikaraṇīyan’”ti.
[¶18] 2. The Spectrum of Immersion
> Pali: 2. Samādhikkhandha
[¶19] But what, Worthy Ānanda, was that spectrum of noble immersion that the Buddha praised?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho ānanda, ariyo samādhikkhandho, yassa so bhavaṁ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesī”ti?
[¶20] “And how, student, does a mendicant guard the sense doors? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. When they have this noble sense restraint, they experience an unsullied bliss inside themselves. That’s how a mendicant guards the sense doors.
> Pali: “Kathañca, māṇava, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti? Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī; yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ; tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī; yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ; tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. So iminā ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato ajjhattaṁ abyāsekasukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedeti. Evaṁ kho, māṇava, bhikkhu indriyesu guttadvāro hoti.
[¶21] And how does a mendicant have mindfulness and situational awareness? It’s when a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent. That’s how a mendicant has mindfulness and situational awareness.
> Pali: Kathañca, māṇava, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti? Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti. Evaṁ kho, māṇava, bhikkhu satisampajaññena samannāgato hoti.
[¶22] And how is a mendicant content? It’s when a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. They’re like a bird: wherever it flies, wings are its only burden. In the same way, a mendicant is content with robes to look after the body and almsfood to look after the belly. Wherever they go, they set out taking only these things. That’s how a mendicant is content.
> Pali: Kathañca, māṇava, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti? Idha, māṇava, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, pakkhī sakuṇo yena yeneva ḍeti, sapattabhārova ḍeti; evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena piṇḍapātena. So yena yeneva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati. Evaṁ kho, māṇava, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti.
[¶23] When they have this spectrum of noble ethics, this noble sense restraint, this noble mindfulness and situational awareness, and this noble contentment, they frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present.
> Pali: So iminā ca ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena indriyasaṁvarena samannāgato, iminā ca ariyena satisampajaññena samannāgato, imāya ca ariyāya santuṭṭhiyā samannāgato vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā, ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.
[¶24] Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. Byāpādapadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī byāpādapadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶25] Suppose a man who has gotten into debt were to apply himself to work, and his efforts proved successful. He would pay off the original loan and have enough left over to support his partner. Thinking about this, he’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojeyya. Tassa te kammantā samijjheyyuṁ. So yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni tāni ca byantiṁ kareyya, siyā cassa uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe iṇaṁ ādāya kammante payojesiṁ. Tassa me te kammantā samijjhiṁsu. Sohaṁ yāni ca porāṇāni iṇamūlāni tāni ca byantiṁ akāsiṁ, atthi ca me uttariṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ dārabharaṇāyā’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶26] Suppose there was a person who was sick, suffering, gravely ill. They’d lose their appetite and get physically weak. But after some time they’d recover from that illness, and regain their appetite and their strength. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso ābādhiko assa dukkhito bāḷhagilāno; bhattañcassa nacchādeyya, na cassa kāye balamattā. So aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā mucceyya, bhattañcassa chādeyya, siyā cassa kāye balamattā. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe ābādhiko ahosiṁ dukkhito bāḷhagilāno, bhattañca me nacchādesi, na ca me āsi kāye balamattā. Somhi etarahi tamhā ābādhā mutto bhattañca me chādeti, atthi ca me kāye balamattā’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶27] Suppose a person was imprisoned in a jail. But after some time they were released from jail, safe and sound, with no loss of wealth. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso bandhanāgāre baddho assa. So aparena samayena tamhā bandhanāgārā mucceyya sotthinā abbhayena, na cassa kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe bandhanāgāre baddho ahosiṁ. Somhi etarahi tamhā bandhanāgārā mutto sotthinā abbhayena, natthi ca me kiñci bhogānaṁ vayo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶28] Suppose a person was a bondservant. They would not be their own master, but indentured to another, unable to go where they wish. But after some time they’d be freed from servitude. They would be their own master, not indentured to another, a freeman able to go where they wish. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso dāso assa anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. So aparena samayena tamhā dāsabyā mucceyya, attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe dāso ahosiṁ anattādhīno parādhīno na yenakāmaṅgamo. Somhi etarahi tamhā dāsabyā mutto attādhīno aparādhīno bhujisso yenakāmaṅgamo’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶29] Suppose there was a person with wealth and property who was traveling along a desert road, which was perilous, with nothing to eat. But after some time they crossed over the desert safely, arriving within a village, a sanctuary free of peril. Thinking about this, they’d be filled with joy and happiness.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjeyya dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. So aparena samayena taṁ kantāraṁ nitthareyya, sotthinā gāmantaṁ anupāpuṇeyya khemaṁ appaṭibhayaṁ. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho pubbe sadhano sabhogo kantāraddhānamaggaṁ paṭipajjiṁ dubbhikkhaṁ sappaṭibhayaṁ. Somhi etarahi taṁ kantāraṁ nitthiṇṇo, sotthinā gāmantaṁ anuppatto khemaṁ appaṭibhayan’ti. So tatonidānaṁ labhetha pāmojjaṁ, adhigaccheyya somanassaṁ.
[¶30] In the same way, as long as these five hindrances are not given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards them as a debt, a disease, a prison, slavery, and a desert crossing.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu yathā iṇaṁ yathā rogaṁ yathā bandhanāgāraṁ yathā dāsabyaṁ yathā kantāraddhānamaggaṁ, evaṁ ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīne attani samanupassati.
[¶31] But when these five hindrances are given up inside themselves, a mendicant regards this as freedom from debt, good health, release from prison, emancipation, and a place of sanctuary at last.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, yathā āṇaṇyaṁ yathā ārogyaṁ yathā bandhanāmokkhaṁ yathā bhujissaṁ yathā khemantabhūmiṁ. Evameva kho bhikkhu ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassati.
[¶32] Seeing that the hindrances have been given up in them, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed.
> Pali: Tassime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassato pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.
[¶33] Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, they enter and remain in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion.
> Pali: So vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶34] It’s like when a deft bathroom attendant or their apprentice pours bath powder into a bronze dish, sprinkling it little by little with water. They knead it until the ball of bath powder is soaked and saturated with moisture, spread through inside and out; yet no moisture oozes out.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, dakkho nhāpako vā nhāpakantevāsī vā kaṁsathāle nhānīyacuṇṇāni ākiritvā udakena paripphosakaṁ paripphosakaṁ sanneyya. Sāyaṁ nhānīyapiṇḍi snehānugatā snehaparetā santarabāhirā phuṭā snehena, na ca paggharaṇī.
[¶35] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of seclusion. This pertains to their immersion.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampissa hoti samādhismiṁ.
[¶36] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, māṇava, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶37] It’s like a deep lake fed by spring water. There’s no inlet to the east, west, north, or south, and the heavens would not properly bestow showers from time to time. But the stream of cool water welling up in the lake drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads throughout the lake. There’s no part of the lake that’s not spread through with cool water.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, udakarahado gambhīro ubbhidodako. Tassa nevassa puratthimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na dakkhiṇāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na pacchimāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, na uttarāya disāya udakassa āyamukhaṁ, devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammā dhāraṁ anupaveccheyya. Atha kho tamhāva udakarahadā sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvā tameva udakarahadaṁ sītena vārinā abhisandeyya parisandeyya paripūreyya paripphareyya, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato udakarahadassa sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶38] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with rapture and bliss born of immersion. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with rapture and bliss born of immersion. This pertains to their immersion.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ samādhijena pītisukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa samādhijena pītisukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampissa hoti samādhismiṁ.
## 19. DN 10 · With Subha · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/19/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/19/#p-N
[¶0] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ They drench, steep, fill, and spread themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, māṇava, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶1] It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. From the tip to the root they’re drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with cool water. There’s no part of them that’s not soaked with cool water.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni yāva caggā yāva ca mūlā sītena vārinā abhisannāni parisannāni paripūrāni paripphuṭāni, nāssa kiñci sabbāvataṁ uppalānaṁ vā padumānaṁ vā puṇḍarīkānaṁ vā sītena vārinā apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶2] In the same way, a mendicant drenches, steeps, fills, and spreads themselves with bliss free of rapture. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with bliss free of rapture. This pertains to their immersion.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ nippītikena sukhena abhisandeti parisandeti paripūreti parippharati, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa nippītikena sukhena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampissa hoti samādhismiṁ.
[¶3] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. They sit spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread with pure bright mind.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, māṇava, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti; nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti.
[¶4] It’s like someone sitting wrapped from head to foot with white cloth. There’s no part of the body that’s not spread over with white cloth.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso odātena vatthena sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nisinno assa, nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa odātena vatthena apphuṭaṁ assa.
[¶5] In the same way, a mendicant sits spreading their body through with pure bright mind. There’s no part of their body that’s not spread with pure bright mind. This pertains to their immersion.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. So imameva kāyaṁ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena pharitvā nisinno hoti; nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātena apphuṭaṁ hoti. Idampissa hoti samādhismiṁ.
[¶6] This is that spectrum of noble immersion that the Buddha praised. But there is still more to be done.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho so, māṇava, ariyo samādhikkhandho yassa so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi. Atthi cevettha uttarikaraṇīyan”ti.
[¶7] “It’s incredible, worthy Ānanda, it’s amazing! This spectrum of noble immersion is complete, not lacking anything! Such a complete spectrum of noble immersion cannot be seen among the other ascetics and brahmins. Were other ascetics and brahmins to see such a complete spectrum of noble immersion in themselves, they’d be delighted with just that much: ‘This is sufficient; enough has been done. We’ve reached the goal of our ascetic life. There is nothing more to be done.’ And yet you say: ‘But there is still more to be done.’
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho ānanda, abbhutaṁ, bho ānanda. So cāyaṁ, bho ānanda, ariyo samādhikkhandho paripuṇṇo, no aparipuṇṇo. Evaṁ paripuṇṇañcāhaṁ, bho ānanda, ariyaṁ samādhikkhandhaṁ ito bahiddhā aññesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu na samanupassāmi. Evaṁ paripuṇṇañca, bho ānanda, ariyaṁ samādhikkhandhaṁ ito bahiddhā aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇā attani samanupasseyyuṁ, te tāvatakeneva attamanā assu: ‘alamettāvatā, katamettāvatā, anuppatto no sāmaññattho, natthi no kiñci uttarikaraṇīyan’ti. Atha ca pana bhavaṁ ānando evamāha: ‘atthi cevettha uttarikaraṇīyan’ti.
[¶8] 3. The Spectrum of Wisdom
> Pali: 3. Paññākkhandha
[¶9] But what, worthy Ānanda, was that spectrum of noble wisdom that the Buddha praised?”
> Pali: Katamo pana so, bho ānanda, ariyo paññākkhandho, yassa bho bhavaṁ gotamo vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesī”ti?
[¶10] “When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. They understand: ‘This body of mine is formed. It’s made up of the four principal states, produced by mother and father, built up from rice and porridge, liable to impermanence, to wearing away and erosion, to breaking up and destruction. And this consciousness of mine is attached to it, tied to it.’
> Pali: “So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo; idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti.
[¶11] Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and examine it: ‘This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. Tatrāssa suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. Tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā’ti.
[¶12] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge and vision. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So evaṁ pajānāti: ‘ayaṁ kho me kāyo rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo odanakummāsūpacayo aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṁsanadhammo. Idañca pana me viññāṇaṁ ettha sitaṁ ettha paṭibaddhan’ti. Yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So evaṁ pajānāti …pe… ettha paṭibaddhanti. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶13] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. From this body they create another body—formed, mind-made, whole in its major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So imamhā kāyā aññaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināti rūpiṁ manomayaṁ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ.
[¶14] Suppose a person was to draw a reed out from its sheath. They’d think: ‘This is the reed, this is the sheath. The reed and the sheath are different things. The reed has been drawn out from the sheath.’ Or suppose a person was to draw a sword out from its scabbard. They’d think: ‘This is the sword, this is the scabbard. The sword and the scabbard are different things. The sword has been drawn out from the scabbard.’ Or suppose a person was to draw a snake out from its slough. They’d think: ‘This is the snake, this is the slough. The snake and the slough are different things. The snake has been drawn out from the slough.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso muñjamhā īsikaṁ pavāheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ muñjo ayaṁ īsikā; añño muñjo aññā īsikā; muñjamhā tveva īsikā pavāḷhā’ti. Seyyathā vā pana, māṇava, puriso asiṁ kosiyā pavāheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ asi, ayaṁ kosi; añño asi, aññā kosi; kosiyā tveva asi pavāḷho’ti. Seyyathā vā pana, māṇava, puriso ahiṁ karaṇḍā uddhareyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ ahi, ayaṁ karaṇḍo; añño ahi, añño karaṇḍo; karaṇḍā tveva ahi ubbhato’ti.
[¶15] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward the creation of a mind-made body. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmānāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti …pe…. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶16] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. They wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁ mahiddhike evaṁ mahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.
[¶17] Suppose a deft potter or their apprentice had some well-prepared clay. They could produce any kind of pot that they like. Or suppose a deft ivory-carver or their apprentice had some well-prepared ivory. They could produce any kind of ivory item that they like. Or suppose a deft goldsmith or their apprentice had some well-prepared gold. They could produce any kind of gold item that they like.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, dakkho kumbhakāro vā kumbhakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatāya mattikāya yaññadeva bhājanavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. Seyyathā vā pana, māṇava, dakkho dantakāro vā dantakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ dantasmiṁ yaññadeva dantavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya. Seyyathā vā pana, māṇava, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā suparikammakatasmiṁ suvaṇṇasmiṁ yaññadeva suvaṇṇavikatiṁ ākaṅkheyya, taṁ tadeva kareyya abhinipphādeyya.
[¶18] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward psychic power. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi māṇava bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte iddhividhāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti …pe… yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶19] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far. Suppose there was a person traveling along the road. They’d hear the sound of drums, clay drums, horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms. They’d think: ‘That’s the sound of drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of clay drums,’ and ‘that’s the sound of horns, kettledrums, and tom-toms.’
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso addhānamaggappaṭipanno. So suṇeyya bherisaddampi mudiṅgasaddampi saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddampi. Tassa evamassa—bherisaddo itipi mudiṅgasaddo itipi saṅkhapaṇavadindimasaddo itipi.
[¶20] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward clairaudience. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte dibbāya sotadhātuyā cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca ye dūre santike ca. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶21] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. They understand mind with greed as ‘mind with greed’, and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed’. They understand mind with hate … mind without hate … mind with delusion … mind without delusion … constricted mind … scattered mind … expansive mind … unexpansive mind … mind that is not supreme … mind that is supreme … immersed mind … unimmersed mind … freed mind … They understand unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind’.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti, sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti, avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.
[¶22] Suppose there was a woman or man who was young, youthful, and fond of adornments, and they check their own reflection in a clean bright mirror or a clear bowl of water. If they had a spot they’d know ‘I have a spot,’ and if they had no spots they’d know ‘I have no spots.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, itthī vā puriso vā daharo yuvā maṇḍanajātiko ādāse vā parisuddhe pariyodāte acche vā udakapatte sakaṁ mukhanimittaṁ paccavekkhamāno sakaṇikaṁ vā sakaṇikanti jāneyya, akaṇikaṁ vā akaṇikanti jāneyya.
[¶23] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward encompassing the minds of others. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite …pe… āneñjappatte cetopariyañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti, sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ sarāgaṁ cittanti pajānāti …pe… avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ avimuttaṁ cittanti pajānāti. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶24] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto. So tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto; so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶25] Suppose a person was to leave their home village and go to another village. From that village they’d go to yet another village. And from that village they’d return to their home village. They’d think: ‘I went from my home village to another village. There I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. From that village I went to yet another village. There too I stood like this, sat like that, spoke like this, or kept silent like that. And from that village I returned to my home village.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya; tamhāpi gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ gaccheyya; so tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgaccheyya. Tassa evamassa: ‘ahaṁ kho sakamhā gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ agacchiṁ, tatra evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ evaṁ nisīdiṁ evaṁ abhāsiṁ evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ. So tamhāpi gāmā amuṁ gāmaṁ gacchiṁ, tatrāpi evaṁ aṭṭhāsiṁ evaṁ nisīdiṁ evaṁ abhāsiṁ evaṁ tuṇhī ahosiṁ. Somhi tamhā gāmā sakaṁyeva gāmaṁ paccāgato’ti.
[¶26] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward recollection of past lives. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶27] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶28] Suppose there was a stilt longhouse at the central square. A person with clear eyes standing there might see humans entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square. They’d think: ‘These are people entering and leaving a house, walking along the streets and paths, and sitting at the central square.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, majjhesiṅghāṭake pāsādo, tattha cakkhumā puriso ṭhito passeyya manusse gehaṁ pavisantepi nikkhamantepi rathikāyapi vīthiṁ sañcarante majjhesiṅghāṭake nisinnepi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ete manussā gehaṁ pavisanti, ete nikkhamanti, ete rathikāya vīthiṁ sañcaranti, ete majjhesiṅghāṭake nisinnā’ti.
[¶29] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project and extend it toward knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶30] When their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. They truly understand: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering’. They truly understand: ‘These are defilements’ … ‘This is the origin of defilements’ … ‘This is the cessation of defilements’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of defilements’. Knowing and seeing like this, their mind is freed from the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance. When they’re freed, they know they’re freed.
> Pali: So evaṁ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammaniye ṭhite āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So idaṁ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti; ime āsavāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavasamudayoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhoti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ayaṁ āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti.
[¶31] They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶32] Suppose that in a mountain glen there was a lake that was transparent, clear, and unclouded. A person with clear eyes standing on the bank would see the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still. They’d think: ‘This lake is transparent, clear, and unclouded. And here are the clams and mussels, pebbles and gravel, and schools of fish swimming about or staying still.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, māṇava, pabbatasaṅkhepe udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tattha cakkhumā puriso tīre ṭhito passeyya sippisambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho udakarahado accho vippasanno anāvilo. Tatrime sippisambukāpi sakkharakathalāpi macchagumbāpi carantipi tiṭṭhantipī’ti.
[¶33] In the same way, when their mind has become immersed in samādhi like this—purified, bright, flawless, rid of corruptions, pliable, workable, steady, and imperturbable—they project it and extend it toward knowledge of the ending of defilements. This pertains to their wisdom.
> Pali: Evameva kho, māṇava, bhikkhu …pe… yampi, māṇava, bhikkhu evaṁ samāhite citte …pe… āneñjappatte āsavānaṁ khayañāṇāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti. So idaṁ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti …pe… āsavanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato kāmāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, bhavāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, avijjāsavāpi cittaṁ vimuccati, vimuttasmiṁ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṁ hoti, ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti. Idampissa hoti paññāya.
[¶34] This is that spectrum of noble wisdom that the Buddha praised. And there is nothing more to be done.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho so, māṇava, ariyo paññākkhandho yassa so bhagavā vaṇṇavādī ahosi, yattha ca imaṁ janataṁ samādapesi nivesesi patiṭṭhāpesi. Natthi cevettha uttarikaraṇīyan”ti.
[¶35] “It’s incredible, worthy Ānanda, it’s amazing! This spectrum of noble wisdom is complete, not lacking anything! Such a complete spectrum of wisdom cannot be seen among the other ascetics and brahmins. And there is nothing more to be done. Excellent, worthy Ānanda! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the worthy Ānanda has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Ānanda remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: “Acchariyaṁ, bho ānanda, abbhutaṁ, bho ānanda. So cāyaṁ, bho ānanda, ariyo paññākkhandho paripuṇṇo, no aparipuṇṇo. Evaṁ paripuṇṇañcāhaṁ, bho ānanda, ariyaṁ paññākkhandhaṁ ito bahiddhā aññesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu na samanupassāmi. Natthi cevettha uttarikaraṇīyaṁ. Abhikkantaṁ, bho ānanda, abhikkantaṁ, bho ānanda. Seyyathāpi, bho ānanda, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā ānandena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bho ānanda, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ ānando dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶36] > Pali: Subhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
## 20. DN 11 · With Kevaḍḍha
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/20/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/20/#p-N
[¶0] DN 11 · With Kevaḍḍha
> Pali: DN 11 · Kevaṭṭasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Nāḷandā in Pāvārika’s Mango Grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharati pāvārikambavane.
[¶2] Then the householder Kevaḍḍha went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, this Nāḷandā is successful and prosperous, populous and full of people. Please direct a mendicant to perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power. Then Nāḷandā will become even more devoted to the Buddha!”
> Pali: Atha kho kevaṭṭo gahapatiputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho kevaṭṭo gahapatiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, nāḷandā iddhā ceva phītā ca bahujanā ākiṇṇamanussā bhagavati abhippasannā. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā ekaṁ bhikkhuṁ samādisatu, yo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati; evāyaṁ nāḷandā bhiyyoso mattāya bhagavati abhippasīdissatī”ti.
[¶3] When he said this, the Buddha said, “Kevaḍḍha, I do not teach Dhamma to the mendicants like this: ‘Come now, mendicants, perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power for the white-clothed laypeople.’”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā kevaṭṭaṁ gahapatiputtaṁ etadavoca: “na kho ahaṁ, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ dhammaṁ desemi: ‘etha tumhe, bhikkhave, gihīnaṁ odātavasanānaṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karothā’”ti.
[¶4] For a second time, Kevaḍḍha made the same request, “Sir, I am not teaching you the Dhamma, but nonetheless I say: ‘Sir, this Nāḷandā is successful and prosperous, populous and full of people. Please direct a mendicant to perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power. Then Nāḷandā will become even more devoted to the Buddha!’” But for a second time, the Buddha gave the same answer.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho kevaṭṭo gahapatiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “nāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ dhaṁsemi; api ca evaṁ vadāmi: ‘ayaṁ, bhante, nāḷandā iddhā ceva phītā ca bahujanā ākiṇṇamanussā bhagavati abhippasannā. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā ekaṁ bhikkhuṁ samādisatu, yo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati; evāyaṁ nāḷandā bhiyyoso mattāya bhagavati abhippasīdissatī’”ti. Dutiyampi kho bhagavā kevaṭṭaṁ gahapatiputtaṁ etadavoca: “na kho ahaṁ, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ dhammaṁ desemi: ‘etha tumhe, bhikkhave, gihīnaṁ odātavasanānaṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karothā’”ti.
[¶5] For a third time, Kevaḍḍha made the same request, at which the Buddha said the following.
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho kevaṭṭo gahapatiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “nāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ dhaṁsemi; api ca evaṁ vadāmi: ‘ayaṁ, bhante, nāḷandā iddhā ceva phītā ca bahujanā ākiṇṇamanussā bhagavati abhippasannā. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā ekaṁ bhikkhuṁ samādisatu, yo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati. Evāyaṁ nāḷandā bhiyyoso mattāya bhagavati abhippasīdissatī’”ti.
[¶6] 1. The Demonstration of Psychic Power
> Pali: 1. Iddhipāṭihāriya
[¶7] “Kevaḍḍha, there are three kinds of demonstration, which I declare having realized them with my own insight. What three? The demonstration of psychic power, the demonstration of revealing, and the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: “Tīṇi kho imāni, kevaṭṭa, pāṭihāriyāni mayā sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṁ, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ.
[¶8] And what is the demonstration of psychic power? It’s a mendicant who wields the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: Katamañca, kevaṭṭa, iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ? Idha, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁ mahiddhike evaṁ mahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.
[¶9] Someone with faith and confidence sees that mendicant performing those superhuman feats.
> Pali: Tamenaṁ aññataro saddho pasanno passati taṁ bhikkhuṁ anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhontaṁ—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hontaṁ, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hontaṁ; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamānaṁ gacchantaṁ seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karontaṁ seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchantaṁ seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamantaṁ seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁ mahiddhike evaṁ mahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasantaṁ parimajjantaṁ yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vattentaṁ.
[¶10] They tell someone else who lacks faith and confidence: ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! The ascetic has such psychic power and might! I saw him myself, performing all these superhuman feats!’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ so saddho pasanno aññatarassa assaddhassa appasannassa āroceti: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, samaṇassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. Amāhaṁ bhikkhuṁ addasaṁ anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhontaṁ—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hontaṁ, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hontaṁ …pe… yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vattentan’ti.
[¶11] But the one lacking faith and confidence would say to them: ‘There’s a spell named Gandhārī. Using that a mendicant can perform such superhuman feats.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ so assaddho appasanno taṁ saddhaṁ pasannaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘atthi kho, bho, gandhārī nāma vijjā. Tāya so bhikkhu anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti …pe… yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vattetī’ti.
[¶12] What do you think, Kevaḍḍha? Wouldn’t someone lacking faith speak like that?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kevaṭṭa, api nu so assaddho appasanno taṁ saddhaṁ pasannaṁ evaṁ vadeyyā”ti?
[¶13] “They would, sir.”
> Pali: “Vadeyya, bhante”ti.
[¶14] “Seeing this drawback in psychic power, I’m horrified, repelled, and disgusted by demonstrations of psychic power.
> Pali: “Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, kevaṭṭa, iddhipāṭihāriye ādīnavaṁ sampassamāno iddhipāṭihāriyena aṭṭīyāmi harāyāmi jigucchāmi.
[¶15] 2. The Demonstration of Revealing
> Pali: 2. Ādesanāpāṭihāriya
[¶16] And what is the demonstration of revealing? It’s when a mendicant reveals the mind, mentality, thoughts, and reflections of other beings and individuals: ‘This is what you’re thinking, such is your thought, and thus is your state of mind.’
> Pali: Katamañca, kevaṭṭa, ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṁ? Idha, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cittampi ādisati, cetasikampi ādisati, vitakkitampi ādisati, vicāritampi ādisati: ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan’ti.
[¶17] Someone with faith and confidence sees that mendicant revealing another individual’s thoughts. They tell someone else who lacks faith and confidence: ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! The ascetic has such psychic power and might! I saw him myself, revealing the thoughts of another individual!’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ aññataro saddho pasanno passati taṁ bhikkhuṁ parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cittampi ādisantaṁ, cetasikampi ādisantaṁ, vitakkitampi ādisantaṁ, vicāritampi ādisantaṁ: ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan’ti. Tamenaṁ so saddho pasanno aññatarassa assaddhassa appasannassa āroceti: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, samaṇassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. Amāhaṁ bhikkhuṁ addasaṁ parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cittampi ādisantaṁ, cetasikampi ādisantaṁ, vitakkitampi ādisantaṁ, vicāritampi ādisantaṁ: “evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan”’ti.
[¶18] But the one lacking faith and confidence would say to them: ‘There’s a spell named Māṇikā. Using that a mendicant can reveal another individual’s thoughts.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ so assaddho appasanno taṁ saddhaṁ pasannaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘atthi kho, bho, maṇikā nāma vijjā; tāya so bhikkhu parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cittampi ādisati, cetasikampi ādisati, vitakkitampi ādisati, vicāritampi ādisati: “evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan”’ti.
[¶19] What do you think, Kevaḍḍha? Wouldn’t someone lacking faith speak like that?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, kevaṭṭa, api nu so assaddho appasanno taṁ saddhaṁ pasannaṁ evaṁ vadeyyā”ti?
[¶20] “They would, sir.”
> Pali: “Vadeyya, bhante”ti.
[¶21] “Seeing this drawback in revealing, I’m horrified, repelled, and disgusted by demonstrations of revealing.
> Pali: “Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, kevaṭṭa, ādesanāpāṭihāriye ādīnavaṁ sampassamāno ādesanāpāṭihāriyena aṭṭīyāmi harāyāmi jigucchāmi.
[¶22] 3. The Demonstration of Instruction
> Pali: 3. Anusāsanīpāṭihāriya
[¶23] And what is the demonstration of instruction? It’s when a mendicant instructs others like this: ‘Think like this, not like that. Focus your mind like this, not like that. Give up this, and live having achieved that.’ This is called the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: Katamañca, kevaṭṭa, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ? Idha, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu evamanusāsati: ‘evaṁ vitakketha, mā evaṁ vitakkayittha, evaṁ manasikarotha, mā evaṁ manasākattha, idaṁ pajahatha, idaṁ upasampajja viharathā’ti. Idaṁ vuccati, kevaṭṭa, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ.
[¶24] Furthermore, a Realized One arises in the world … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. … They enter and remain in the first absorption … This is called the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, kevaṭṭa, idha tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampi vuccati, kevaṭṭa, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ …pe…
[¶25] They enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. This too is called the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idampi vuccati, kevaṭṭa, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ …pe…
[¶26] They project and extend the mind toward knowledge and vision … This too is called the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti …pe… idampi vuccati, kevaṭṭa, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ …pe…
[¶27] They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’ This too is called the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti …pe… idampi vuccati, kevaṭṭa, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ.
[¶28] These, Kevaḍḍha, are the three kinds of demonstration, which I declare having realized them with my own insight.
> Pali: Imāni kho, kevaṭṭa, tīṇi pāṭihāriyāni mayā sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditāni.
[¶29] 4. On the Mendicant in Search of the Cessation of Being
> Pali: 4. Bhūtanirodhesakabhikkhuvatthu
[¶30] Once upon a time, Kevaḍḍha, a mendicant in this very Saṅgha had the following thought, ‘Where do these four principal states cease without remainder, namely, the elements of earth, water, fire, and air?’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, kevaṭṭa, imasmiññeva bhikkhusaṅghe aññatarassa bhikkhuno evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘kattha nu kho ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti?
[¶31] Then that mendicant attained a state of immersion such that a path to the gods appeared. Then he approached the gods of the four great kings and said, ‘Respectable sirs, where do these four principal states cease without remainder, namely, the elements of earth, water, fire, and air?’
> Pali: Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu tathārūpaṁ samādhiṁ samāpajji, yathāsamāhite citte devayāniyo maggo pāturahosi. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena cātumahārājikā devā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā cātumahārājike deve etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti?
[¶32] When he said this, those gods said to him, ‘Mendicant, we too do not know this. But the four great kings are our superiors. They might know.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, cātumahārājikā devā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘mayampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāma: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”ti. Atthi kho, bhikkhu, cattāro mahārājāno amhehi abhikkantatarā ca paṇītatarā ca. Te kho etaṁ jāneyyuṁ: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti.
[¶33] Then he approached the four great kings and asked the same question. But they also said to him, ‘Mendicant, we too do not know this. But the gods of the thirty-three … Sakka, lord of gods … the gods of Yama … the godling named Suyāma … the Joyful gods … the godling named Santussita … the gods who love to create … the godling named Sunimmita … the gods who control the creation of others … the godling named Vasavattī … the gods of the Divinity’s host are our superiors. They might know.’
> Pali: Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena cattāro mahārājāno tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā cattāro mahārāje etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti? Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, cattāro mahārājāno taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘mayampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāma: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”ti. Atthi kho, bhikkhu, tāvatiṁsā nāma devā amhehi abhikkantatarā ca paṇītatarā ca. Te kho etaṁ jāneyyuṁ: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena tāvatiṁsā devā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā tāvatiṁse deve etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti? Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, tāvatiṁsā devā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘mayampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāma: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”ti. Atthi kho, bhikkhu, sakko nāma devānamindo amhehi abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro ca. So kho etaṁ jāneyya: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena sakko devānamindo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti? Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, sakko devānamindo taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca: ‘ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāmi: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”ti. Atthi kho, bhikkhu, yāmā nāma devā …pe… suyāmo nāma devaputto … tusitā nāma devā … santussito nāma devaputto … nimmānaratī nāma devā … sunimmito nāma devaputto … paranimmitavasavattī nāma devā … vasavattī nāma devaputto amhehi abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro ca. So kho etaṁ jāneyya: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena vasavattī devaputto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā vasavattiṁ devaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti? Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, vasavattī devaputto taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca: ‘ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāmi: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”ti. Atthi kho, bhikkhu, brahmakāyikā nāma devā amhehi abhikkantatarā ca paṇītatarā ca. Te kho etaṁ jāneyyuṁ: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti.
[¶34] Then that mendicant attained a state of immersion such that a path to divinity appeared. Then he approached the gods of the Divinity’s host and said, ‘Respectable sirs, where do these four principal states cease without remainder, namely, the elements of earth, water, fire, and air?’ But they also said to him, ‘Mendicant, we too do not know this. But there is the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. He is our superior. He might know.’
> Pali: Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu tathārūpaṁ samādhiṁ samāpajji, yathāsamāhite citte brahmayāniyo maggo pāturahosi. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena brahmakāyikā devā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā brahmakāyike deve etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti? Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, brahmakāyikā devā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘mayampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāma: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”ti. Atthi kho, bhikkhu, brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ amhehi abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro ca. So kho etaṁ jāneyya: “yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti.
[¶35] ‘But respectable sirs, where is that divinity now?’ ‘We also don’t know where he is or what way he lies. But by the signs that are seen—light arising and radiance appearing—we know that divinity will appear. For this is the harbinger for the appearance of the Divinity, namely light arising and radiance appearing.’ Not long afterwards, the Great Divinity appeared.
> Pali: ‘Kahaṁ panāvuso, etarahi so mahābrahmā’ti? ‘Mayampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāma, yattha vā brahmā yena vā brahmā yahiṁ vā brahmā; api ca, bhikkhu, yathā nimittā dissanti, āloko sañjāyati, obhāso pātubhavati, brahmā pātubhavissati, brahmuno hetaṁ pubbanimittaṁ pātubhāvāya, yadidaṁ āloko sañjāyati, obhāso pātubhavatī’ti. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, mahābrahmā nacirasseva pāturahosi.
[¶36] Then that mendicant approached the Great Divinity and said to him, ‘Respectable sir, where do these four principal states cease without remainder, namely, the elements of earth, water, fire, and air?’ The Great Divinity said to him, ‘I am the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born.’
> Pali: Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu yena so mahābrahmā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ mahābrahmānaṁ etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti? Evaṁ vutte, kevaṭṭa, so mahābrahmā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca: ‘ahamasmi, bhikkhu, brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānan’ti.
[¶37] For a second time, that mendicant said to the Great Divinity, ‘Respectable sir, I am not asking you whether you are the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. I am asking where these four principal states cease without remainder.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu taṁ mahābrahmānaṁ etadavoca: ‘na khohaṁ taṁ, āvuso, evaṁ pucchāmi: “tvamasi brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānan”ti. Evañca kho ahaṁ taṁ, āvuso, pucchāmi: “kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti?
[¶38] For a second time, the Great Divinity said to him, ‘I am the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born.’ For a third time, that mendicant said to the Great Divinity, ‘Respectable sir, I am not asking you whether you are the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. I am asking where these four principal states cease without remainder.’
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho so, kevaṭṭa, mahābrahmā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca: ‘ahamasmi, bhikkhu, brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānan’ti. Tatiyampi kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu taṁ mahābrahmānaṁ etadavoca: ‘na khohaṁ taṁ, āvuso, evaṁ pucchāmi: “tvamasi brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānan”ti. Evañca kho ahaṁ taṁ, āvuso, pucchāmi: “kattha nu kho, āvuso, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū”’ti?
[¶39] Then the Great Divinity took that mendicant by the arm, led him off to one side, and said to him, ‘Mendicant, these gods think that there is nothing at all that I don’t know and see and understand and realize. That’s why I didn’t answer in front of them. But I too do not know where these four principal states cease with no residue left behind. Therefore, mendicant, the misdeed is yours alone, the mistake is yours alone, in that you passed over the Buddha and searched elsewhere for an answer to this question. Mendicant, go to the Buddha and ask him this question. You should remember it in line with his answer.’
> Pali: Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, mahābrahmā taṁ bhikkhuṁ bāhāyaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ apanetvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca: ‘ime kho maṁ, bhikkhu, brahmakāyikā devā evaṁ jānanti, “natthi kiñci brahmuno aññātaṁ, natthi kiñci brahmuno adiṭṭhaṁ, natthi kiñci brahmuno aviditaṁ, natthi kiñci brahmuno asacchikatan”ti. Tasmāhaṁ tesaṁ sammukhā na byākāsiṁ. Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na jānāmi yatthime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātūti. Tasmātiha, bhikkhu, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ atidhāvitvā bahiddhā pariyeṭṭhiṁ āpajjasi imassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇāya. Gaccha tvaṁ, bhikkhu, tameva bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamitvā imaṁ pañhaṁ puccha, yathā ca te bhagavā byākaroti, tathā naṁ dhāreyyāsī’ti.
[¶40] Then that mendicant, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in front of me. Then he bowed, sat down to one side, and said to me, ‘Sir, where do these four principal states cease without remainder, namely, the elements of earth, water, fire, and air?’
> Pali: Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva brahmaloke antarahito mama purato pāturahosi. Atha kho so, kevaṭṭa, bhikkhu maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi, ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, kevaṭṭa, so bhikkhu maṁ etadavoca: ‘kattha nu kho, bhante, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti?
[¶41] 4.1. The Simile of the Land-Spotting Bird
> Pali: 4.1. Tīradassisakuṇupamā
[¶42] When he said this, I said to him:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, kevaṭṭa, taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavocaṁ—
[¶43] ‘Once upon a time, mendicant, some sea-merchants set sail for the ocean deeps, taking with them a land-spotting bird. When their ship was out of sight of land, they released the bird. It flew right away to the east, the west, the north, the south, upwards, and in-between. If it saw land on any side, it went there and stayed. But if it saw no land on any side it returned to the ship.
> Pali: bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhu, sāmuddikā vāṇijā tīradassiṁ sakuṇaṁ gahetvā nāvāya samuddaṁ ajjhogāhanti. Te atīradakkhiniyā nāvāya tīradassiṁ sakuṇaṁ muñcanti. So gacchateva puratthimaṁ disaṁ, gacchati dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ, gacchati pacchimaṁ disaṁ, gacchati uttaraṁ disaṁ, gacchati uddhaṁ disaṁ, gacchati anudisaṁ. Sace so samantā tīraṁ passati, tathāgatakova hoti. Sace pana so samantā tīraṁ na passati, tameva nāvaṁ paccāgacchati.
[¶44] In the same way, after failing to get an answer to this question even after searching as far as the realm of divinity, you’ve returned to me. Mendicant, this is not how the question should be asked: “Sir, where do these four principal states cease without remainder, namely, the elements of earth, water, fire, and air?”
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, bhikkhu, yato yāva brahmalokā pariyesamāno imassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇaṁ nājjhagā, atha mamaññeva santike paccāgato. Na kho eso, bhikkhu, pañho evaṁ pucchitabbo: ‘kattha nu kho, bhante, ime cattāro mahābhūtā aparisesā nirujjhanti, seyyathidaṁ—pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti?
[¶45] This is how the question should be asked:
> Pali: Evañca kho eso, bhikkhu, pañho pucchitabbo:
[¶46] “Where do water and earth,
fire and air have no footing;
where long and short,
tiny and huge, beautiful and ugly?
Where do name and form
cease no residue left behind?”
> Pali: ‘Kattha āpo ca pathavī,
tejo vāyo na gādhati;
Kattha dīghañca rassañca,
aṇuṁ thūlaṁ subhāsubhaṁ;
Kattha nāmañca rūpañca,
asesaṁ uparujjhatī’ti.
[¶47] And the answer to that is:
> Pali: Tatra veyyākaraṇaṁ bhavati:
[¶48] “‘Consciousness where no form appears,
infinite, radiant all-round.’
> Pali: ‘Viññāṇaṁ anidassanaṁ,
anantaṁ sabbatopabhaṁ;
[¶49] Here water and earth,
fire and air have no footing;
here long and short,
tiny and huge, beautiful and ugly.
> Pali: Ettha āpo ca pathavī,
tejo vāyo na gādhati.
Ettha dīghañca rassañca,
aṇuṁ thūlaṁ subhāsubhaṁ;
[¶50] Here name and form
cease with no residue left behind—
with the cessation of consciousness,
here they cease.”’”
> Pali: Ettha nāmañca rūpañca,
asesaṁ uparujjhati;
Viññāṇassa nirodhena,
etthetaṁ uparujjhatī’”ti.
[¶51] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the householder Kevaḍḍha approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano kevaṭṭo gahapatiputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶52] > Pali: Kevaṭṭasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ ekādasamaṁ.
## 21. DN 12 · With Lohicca
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/21/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/21/#p-N
[¶0] DN 12 · With Lohicca
> Pali: DN 12 · Lohiccasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at Sālavatikā.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena sālavatikā tadavasari.
[¶2] Now at that time the brahmin Lohicca was living in Sālavatikā. It was a crown property given by King Pasenadi of Kosala, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena lohicco brāhmaṇo sālavatikaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ.
[¶3] Now at that time Lohicca had the following harmful misconception: “Should an ascetic or brahmin achieve some skillful quality, they ought not inform anyone else. For what can one person do for another? Suppose someone cut off an old bond, only to create another new bond. That’s the consequence of such a wicked, greedy deed, I say. For what can one person do for another?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti: “idha samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigaccheyya, kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigantvā na parassa āroceyya, kiñhi paro parassa karissati. Seyyathāpi nāma purāṇaṁ bandhanaṁ chinditvā aññaṁ navaṁ bandhanaṁ kareyya; evaṁ sampadamidaṁ pāpakaṁ lobhadhammaṁ vadāmi, kiñhi paro parassa karissatī”ti.
[¶4] Lohicca heard:
> Pali: Assosi kho lohicco brāhmaṇo:
[¶5] “It seems the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—has arrived at Sālavatikā, together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ He has realized with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and he makes it known to others. He teaches Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he reveals a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. It’s good to see such perfected ones.”
> Pali: “samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sālavatikaṁ anuppatto. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti. So dhammaṁ deseti ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāseti. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī”ti.
[¶6] Then Lohicca addressed his barber Rosika, “Here, dear Rosika, go to the ascetic Gotama and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then ask him whether he, together with the mendicant Saṅgha, would please accept tomorrow’s meal from the brahmin Lohicca.”
> Pali: Atha kho lohicco brāhmaṇo rosikaṁ nhāpitaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, samma rosike, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘lohicco, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti; evañca vadehi— adhivāsetu kira bhavaṁ gotamo lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, worthy sir,” Rosika replied. He did as he was asked, and the Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho rosikā nhāpito lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho rosikā nhāpito bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “lohicco, bhante, brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati; evañca vadeti— adhivāsetu kira, bhante, bhagavā lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶8] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Rosika rose from his seat, went to Lohicca, and said to him, “I gave the Buddha your message, and he accepted.”
> Pali: Atha kho rosikā nhāpito bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena lohicco brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā lohiccaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “avocumhā kho mayaṁ bhoto vacanena taṁ bhagavantaṁ: ‘lohicco, bhante, brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati; evañca vadeti— adhivāsetu kira, bhante, bhagavā lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā’ti. Adhivutthañca pana tena bhagavatā”ti.
[¶9] And when the night had passed Lohicca had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “Here, dear Rosika, go to the ascetic Gotama and announce the time, saying: ‘It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.’”
> Pali: Atha kho lohicco brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā rosikaṁ nhāpitaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, samma rosike, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā samaṇassa gotamassa kālaṁ ārocehi— kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, worthy sir,” Rosika replied. He did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho rosikā nhāpito lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho rosikā nhāpito bhagavato kālaṁ ārocesi: “kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶11] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to Sālavatikā together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Now, Rosika was following behind the Buddha, and told him of Lohicca’s views, adding, “Sir, please dissuade him from that harmful misconception.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena sālavatikā tenupasaṅkami. Tena kho pana samayena rosikā nhāpito bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho hoti. Atha kho rosikā nhāpito bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “lohiccassa, bhante, brāhmaṇassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘idha samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigaccheyya, kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigantvā na parassa āroceyya— kiñhi paro parassa karissati. Seyyathāpi nāma purāṇaṁ bandhanaṁ chinditvā aññaṁ navaṁ bandhanaṁ kareyya; evaṁ sampadamidaṁ pāpakaṁ lobhadhammaṁ vadāmi— kiñhi paro parassa karissatī’ti. Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā lohiccaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecetū”ti.
[¶12] “Hopefully that’ll happen, Rosika, hopefully that’ll happen.”
> Pali: “Appeva nāma siyā, rosike, appeva nāma siyā, rosike”ti.
[¶13] Then the Buddha approached Lohicca’s home, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Lohicca served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with his own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena lohiccassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho lohicco brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶14] 1. Questioning Lohicca
> Pali: 1. Lohiccabrāhmaṇānuyoga
[¶15] When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Lohicca took a low seat and sat to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho lohicco brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶16] The Buddha said to him, “Is it really true, Lohicca, that you have such a harmful misconception: ‘Should an ascetic or brahmin achieve some skillful quality, they ought not inform anyone else. For what can one person do for another? Suppose someone cut off an old bond, only to create another new bond. That’s the consequence of such a wicked, greedy deed, I say. For what can one person do for another?’”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho lohiccaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “saccaṁ kira te, lohicca, evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ: ‘idha samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigaccheyya, kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigantvā na parassa āroceyya, kiñhi paro parassa karissati. Seyyathāpi nāma purāṇaṁ bandhanaṁ chinditvā aññaṁ navaṁ bandhanaṁ kareyya; evaṁ sampadamidaṁ pāpakaṁ lobhadhammaṁ vadāmi, kiñhi paro parassa karissatī’”ti?
[¶17] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶18] “What do you think, Lohicca? Do you reside in Sālavatikā?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, lohicca, nanu tvaṁ sālavatikaṁ ajjhāvasasī”ti?
[¶19] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶20] “Lohicca, suppose someone were to say: ‘The brahmin Lohicca resides in Sālavatikā. He alone should enjoy the revenues produced in Sālavatikā and not share them with anyone else.’ Would the one who spoke like that make it difficult for those whose living depends on you or not?”
> Pali: “Yo nu kho, lohicca, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘lohicco brāhmaṇo sālavatikaṁ ajjhāvasati. Yā sālavatikāya samudayasañjāti lohiccova taṁ brāhmaṇo ekako paribhuñjeyya, na aññesaṁ dadeyyā’ti. Evaṁ vādī so ye taṁ upajīvanti, tesaṁ antarāyakaro vā hoti, no vā”ti?
[¶21] “They would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Antarāyakaro, bho gotama”.
[¶22] “But is someone who creates difficulties for others acting kindly or unkindly?”
> Pali: “Antarāyakaro samāno hitānukampī vā tesaṁ hoti ahitānukampī vā”ti?
[¶23] “Unkindly, sir.”
> Pali: “Ahitānukampī, bho gotama”.
[¶24] “But does an unkind person have love in their heart or hostility?”
> Pali: “Ahitānukampissa mettaṁ vā tesu cittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sapattakaṁ vā”ti?
[¶25] “Hostility, sir.”
> Pali: “Sapattakaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶26] “And when the heart is full of hostility, is there right view or wrong view?”
> Pali: “Sapattake citte paccupaṭṭhite micchādiṭṭhi vā hoti sammādiṭṭhi vā”ti?
[¶27] “Wrong view, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Micchādiṭṭhi, bho gotama”.
[¶28] “An individual with wrong view is reborn in one of two places, I say: hell or the animal realm.
> Pali: “Micchādiṭṭhissa kho ahaṁ, lohicca, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aññataraṁ gatiṁ vadāmi— nirayaṁ vā tiracchānayoniṁ vā.
[¶29] What do you think, Lohicca? Does King Pasenadi reign over Kāsi and Kosala?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, lohicca, nanu rājā pasenadi kosalo kāsikosalaṁ ajjhāvasatī”ti?
[¶30] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶31] “Lohicca, suppose someone were to say: ‘King Pasenadi reigns over Kāsi and Kosala. He alone should enjoy the revenues produced in Kāsi and Kosala and not share them with anyone else.’ Would the one who spoke like that make it difficult for yourself and others whose living depends on King Pasenadi or not?”
> Pali: “Yo nu kho, lohicca, evaṁ vadeyya: ‘rājā pasenadi kosalo kāsikosalaṁ ajjhāvasati; yā kāsikosale samudayasañjāti, rājāva taṁ pasenadi kosalo ekako paribhuñjeyya, na aññesaṁ dadeyyā’ti. Evaṁ vādī so ye rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ upajīvanti tumhe ceva aññe ca, tesaṁ antarāyakaro vā hoti, no vā”ti?
[¶32] “They would, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Antarāyakaro, bho gotama”.
[¶33] “But is someone who creates difficulties for others acting kindly or unkindly?”
> Pali: “Antarāyakaro samāno hitānukampī vā tesaṁ hoti ahitānukampī vā”ti?
[¶34] “Unkindly, sir.”
> Pali: “Ahitānukampī, bho gotama”.
[¶35] “But does an unkind person have love in their heart or hostility?”
> Pali: “Ahitānukampissa mettaṁ vā tesu cittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sapattakaṁ vā”ti?
[¶36] “Hostility, sir.”
> Pali: “Sapattakaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶37] “And when the heart is full of hostility, is there right view or wrong view?”
> Pali: “Sapattake citte paccupaṭṭhite micchādiṭṭhi vā hoti sammādiṭṭhi vā”ti?
[¶38] “Wrong view, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Micchādiṭṭhi, bho gotama”.
[¶39] “An individual with wrong view is reborn in one of two places, I say: hell or the animal realm.
> Pali: “Micchādiṭṭhissa kho ahaṁ, lohicca, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aññataraṁ gatiṁ vadāmi— nirayaṁ vā tiracchānayoniṁ vā.
[¶40] So it seems, Lohicca, that should someone say such a thing either of Lohicca or of King Pasenadi, that is wrong view.
> Pali: Iti kira, lohicca, yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘lohicco brāhmaṇo sālavatikaṁ ajjhāvasati; yā sālavatikāya samudayasañjāti, lohiccova taṁ brāhmaṇo ekako paribhuñjeyya, na aññesaṁ dadeyyā’ti. Evaṁvādī so ye taṁ upajīvanti, tesaṁ antarāyakaro hoti. Antarāyakaro samāno ahitānukampī hoti, ahitānukampissa sapattakaṁ cittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, sapattake citte paccupaṭṭhite micchādiṭṭhi hoti.
[¶41] In the same way, suppose someone were to say: ‘Should an ascetic or brahmin achieve some skillful quality, they ought not inform anyone else. For what can one person do for another? Suppose someone cut off an old bond, only to create another new bond. That’s the consequence of such a wicked, greedy deed, I say. For what can one person do for another?’
> Pali: Evameva kho, lohicca, yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘idha samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigaccheyya, kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigantvā na parassa āroceyya, kiñhi paro parassa karissati. Seyyathāpi nāma purāṇaṁ bandhanaṁ chinditvā aññaṁ navaṁ bandhanaṁ kareyya …pe… karissatī’ti.
[¶42] Now, there are gentlemen who, relying on the teaching and training proclaimed by the Realized One, achieve a high distinction such as the following: they realize the fruit of stream-entry, the fruit of once-return, the fruit of non-return, or perfection. And in addition, there are those who ripen the seeds for rebirth in a heavenly state. The person who spoke like that makes it difficult for them. They’re acting unkindly, their heart is full of hostility, and they have wrong view. An individual with wrong view is reborn in one of two places, I say: hell or the animal realm.
> Pali: Evaṁvādī so ye te kulaputtā tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesaṁ adhigacchanti, sotāpattiphalampi sacchikaronti, sakadāgāmiphalampi sacchikaronti, anāgāmiphalampi sacchikaronti, arahattampi sacchikaronti, ye cime dibbā gabbhā paripācenti dibbānaṁ bhavānaṁ abhinibbattiyā, tesaṁ antarāyakaro hoti, antarāyakaro samāno ahitānukampī hoti, ahitānukampissa sapattakaṁ cittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, sapattake citte paccupaṭṭhite micchādiṭṭhi hoti. Micchādiṭṭhissa kho ahaṁ, lohicca, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aññataraṁ gatiṁ vadāmi— nirayaṁ vā tiracchānayoniṁ vā.
[¶43] > Pali: Iti kira, lohicca, yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘rājā pasenadi kosalo kāsikosalaṁ ajjhāvasati; yā kāsikosale samudayasañjāti, rājāva taṁ pasenadi kosalo ekako paribhuñjeyya, na aññesaṁ dadeyyā’ti. Evaṁvādī so ye rājānaṁ pasenadiṁ kosalaṁ upajīvanti tumhe ceva aññe ca, tesaṁ antarāyakaro hoti. Antarāyakaro samāno ahitānukampī hoti, ahitānukampissa sapattakaṁ cittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, sapattake citte paccupaṭṭhite micchādiṭṭhi hoti.
[¶44] > Pali: Evameva kho, lohicca, yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘idha samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigaccheyya, kusalaṁ dhammaṁ adhigantvā na parassa āroceyya, kiñhi paro parassa karissati. Seyyathāpi nāma …pe… kiñhi paro parassa karissatī’ti. Evaṁvādī so ye te kulaputtā tathāgatappaveditaṁ dhammavinayaṁ āgamma evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesaṁ adhigacchanti, sotāpattiphalampi sacchikaronti, sakadāgāmiphalampi sacchikaronti, anāgāmiphalampi sacchikaronti, arahattampi sacchikaronti. Ye cime dibbā gabbhā paripācenti dibbānaṁ bhavānaṁ abhinibbattiyā, tesaṁ antarāyakaro hoti, antarāyakaro samāno ahitānukampī hoti, ahitānukampissa sapattakaṁ cittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, sapattake citte paccupaṭṭhite micchādiṭṭhi hoti. Micchādiṭṭhissa kho ahaṁ, lohicca, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aññataraṁ gatiṁ vadāmi— nirayaṁ vā tiracchānayoniṁ vā.
[¶45] 2. Three Teachers Who Deserve to Be Reprimanded
> Pali: 2. Tayocodanārahā
[¶46] Lohicca, there are three kinds of teachers in the world who deserve to be reprimanded. When someone reprimands such teachers, the reprimand is true, correct, legitimate, and blameless. What three?
> Pali: Tayo khome, lohicca, satthāro, ye loke codanārahā; yo ca panevarūpe satthāro codeti, sā codanā bhūtā tacchā dhammikā anavajjā. Katame tayo?
[¶47] Firstly, take a teacher who has not reached the goal of the ascetic life for which they went forth from the lay life to homelessness. They teach their disciples: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ But their disciples don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They proceed having turned away from the teacher’s instruction. That teacher deserves to be reprimanded: ‘Venerable, you haven’t reached the goal of the ascetic life; and when you teach disciples they proceed having turned away from the teacher’s instruction. It’s like a man who makes advances on a woman though she pulls away, or embraces her though she turns her back. That’s the consequence of such a wicked, greedy deed, I say. For what can one do for another?’ This is the first kind of teacher who deserves to be reprimanded.
> Pali: Idha, lohicca, ekacco satthā yassatthāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, svāssa sāmaññattho ananuppatto hoti. So taṁ sāmaññatthaṁ ananupāpuṇitvā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. So evamassa codetabbo: ‘āyasmā kho yassatthāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, so te sāmaññattho ananuppatto, taṁ tvaṁ sāmaññatthaṁ ananupāpuṇitvā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desesi: “idaṁ vo hitāya idaṁ vo sukhāyā”ti. Tassa te sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Seyyathāpi nāma osakkantiyā vā ussakkeyya, parammukhiṁ vā āliṅgeyya; evaṁ sampadamidaṁ pāpakaṁ lobhadhammaṁ vadāmi— kiñhi paro parassa karissatī’ti. Ayaṁ kho, lohicca, paṭhamo satthā, yo loke codanāraho; yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā bhūtā tacchā dhammikā anavajjā.
[¶48] Furthermore, take a teacher who has not reached the goal of the ascetic life for which they went forth from the lay life to homelessness. They teach their disciples: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ Their disciples do want to listen. They actively listen and try to understand. They don’t proceed having turned away from the teacher’s instruction. That teacher deserves to be reprimanded: ‘Venerable, you haven’t reached the goal of the ascetic life; and when you teach disciples they don’t proceed having turned away from the teacher’s instruction. It’s like someone who abandons their own field and presumes to weed someone else’s field. That’s the consequence of such a wicked, greedy deed, I say. For what can one do for another?’ This is the second kind of teacher who deserves to be reprimanded.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, lohicca, idhekacco satthā yassatthāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, svāssa sāmaññattho ananuppatto hoti. So taṁ sāmaññatthaṁ ananupāpuṇitvā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṁ odahanti, aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. So evamassa codetabbo: ‘āyasmā kho yassatthāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, so te sāmaññattho ananuppatto. Taṁ tvaṁ sāmaññatthaṁ ananupāpuṇitvā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desesi: “idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā”ti. Tassa te sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṁ odahanti, aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Seyyathāpi nāma sakaṁ khettaṁ ohāya paraṁ khettaṁ niddāyitabbaṁ maññeyya, evaṁ sampadamidaṁ pāpakaṁ lobhadhammaṁ vadāmi—kiñhi paro parassa karissatī’ti. Ayaṁ kho, lohicca, dutiyo satthā, yo, loke codanāraho; yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā bhūtā tacchā dhammikā anavajjā.
[¶49] Furthermore, take a teacher who has reached the goal of the ascetic life for which they went forth from the lay life to homelessness. They teach their disciples: ‘This is for your welfare. This is for your happiness.’ But their disciples don’t want to listen. They don’t actively listen or try to understand. They proceed having turned away from the teacher’s instruction. That teacher deserves to be reprimanded: ‘Venerable, you have reached the goal of the ascetic life; yet when you teach disciples they proceed having turned away from the teacher’s instruction. Suppose someone cut off an old bond, only to create another new bond. That’s the consequence of such a wicked, greedy deed, I say. For what can one person do for another?’ This is the third kind of teacher who deserves to be reprimanded.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, lohicca, idhekacco satthā yassatthāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito hoti, svāssa sāmaññattho anuppatto hoti. So taṁ sāmaññatthaṁ anupāpuṇitvā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ deseti: ‘idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. So evamassa codetabbo: ‘āyasmā kho yassatthāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito, so te sāmaññattho anuppatto. Taṁ tvaṁ sāmaññatthaṁ anupāpuṇitvā sāvakānaṁ dhammaṁ desesi: “idaṁ vo hitāya, idaṁ vo sukhāyā”ti. Tassa te sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṁ odahanti, na aññā cittaṁ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Seyyathāpi nāma purāṇaṁ bandhanaṁ chinditvā aññaṁ navaṁ bandhanaṁ kareyya; evaṁ sampadamidaṁ pāpakaṁ lobhadhammaṁ vadāmi, kiñhi paro parassa karissatī’ti. Ayaṁ kho, lohicca, tatiyo satthā, yo loke codanāraho; yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā bhūtā tacchā dhammikā anavajjā.
[¶50] These are the three kinds of teachers in the world who deserve to be reprimanded. When someone reprimands such teachers, the reprimand is true, correct, legitimate, and blameless.”
> Pali: Ime kho, lohicca, tayo satthāro, ye loke codanārahā, yo ca panevarūpe satthāro codeti, sā codanā bhūtā tacchā dhammikā anavajjā”ti.
[¶51] 3. A Teacher Who Does Not Deserve to Be Reprimanded
> Pali: 3. Nacodanārahasatthu
[¶52] When he had spoken, Lohicca said to the Buddha, “But worthy Gotama, is there a teacher in the world who does not deserve to be reprimanded?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, lohicco brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “atthi pana, bho gotama, koci satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho”ti?
[¶53] “There is, Lohicca.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, lohicca, satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho”ti.
[¶54] “But who is that teacher?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana so, bho gotama, satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho”ti?
[¶55] “It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. … They enter and remain in the first absorption … A teacher under whom a disciple achieves such a high distinction is one who does not deserve to be reprimanded. When someone reprimands such a teacher, the reprimand is false, baseless, illegitimate, and blameworthy.
> Pali: “Idha, lohicca, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ, sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, lohicca, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti …pe… paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati … yasmiṁ kho, lohicca, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesaṁ adhigacchati, ayampi kho, lohicca, satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho. Yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā abhūtā atacchā adhammikā sāvajjā.
[¶56] They enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. A teacher under whom a disciple achieves such a high distinction is one who does not deserve to be reprimanded. …
> Pali: …pe… Dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Yasmiṁ kho, lohicca, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesaṁ adhigacchati, ayampi kho, lohicca, satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho, yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā abhūtā atacchā adhammikā sāvajjā.
[¶57] They project and extend the mind toward knowledge and vision … A teacher under whom a disciple achieves such a high distinction is one who does not deserve to be reprimanded. …
> Pali: …pe… Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṁ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti … yasmiṁ kho, lohicca, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesaṁ adhigacchati, ayampi kho, lohicca, satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho, yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā abhūtā atacchā adhammikā sāvajjā.
[¶58] They understand: ‘… there is nothing further for this place.’ A teacher under whom a disciple achieves such a high distinction is one who does not deserve to be reprimanded. When someone reprimands such a teacher, the reprimand is false, baseless, illegitimate, and blameworthy.”
> Pali: …pe… Nāparaṁ itthattāyāti pajānāti. Yasmiṁ kho, lohicca, satthari sāvako evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesaṁ adhigacchati, ayampi kho, lohicca, satthā, yo loke nacodanāraho, yo ca panevarūpaṁ satthāraṁ codeti, sā codanā abhūtā atacchā adhammikā sāvajjā”ti.
[¶59] When he had spoken, Lohicca said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, lohicco brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶60] “Suppose, Worthy Gotama, a person was falling over a cliff, and another person were to grab them by the hair, pull them up, and place them on solid ground. In the same way, when I was falling off a cliff Worthy Gotama pulled me up and placed me on solid ground.
> Pali: “seyyathāpi, bho gotama, puriso purisaṁ narakapapātaṁ patantaṁ kesesu gahetvā uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhapeyya; evamevāhaṁ bhotā gotamena narakapapātaṁ papatanto uddharitvā thale patiṭṭhāpito.
[¶61] Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the Teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶62] > Pali: Lohiccasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dvādasamaṁ.
## 22. DN 13 · Experts in the Three Vedas
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/22/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/22/#p-N
[¶0] DN 13 · Experts in the Three Vedas
> Pali: DN 13 · Tevijjasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a village of the Kosalan brahmins named Manasākaṭa. He stayed in a mango grove on a bank of the Aciravatī River to the north of Manasākaṭa.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena manasākaṭaṁ nāma kosalānaṁ brāhmaṇagāmo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā manasākaṭe viharati uttarena manasākaṭassa aciravatiyā nadiyā tīre ambavane.
[¶2] Now at that time several very well-known well-to-do brahmins were residing in Manasākaṭa. They included the brahmins Caṅkī, Tārukkha, Pokkharasāti, Jānussoṇi, Todeyya, and others.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā abhiññātā abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā manasākaṭe paṭivasanti, seyyathidaṁ— caṅkī brāhmaṇo tārukkho brāhmaṇo pokkharasāti brāhmaṇo jāṇusoṇi brāhmaṇo todeyyo brāhmaṇo aññe ca abhiññātā abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā.
[¶3] Then as the students Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja were going for a walk they began a discussion regarding what is the path and what is not the path.
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭhabhāradvājānaṁ māṇavānaṁ jaṅghavihāraṁ anucaṅkamantānaṁ anuvicarantānaṁ maggāmagge kathā udapādi.
[¶4] Vāseṭṭha said this: “This is the only straight path, the direct route that delivers one who applies it to the company of Divinity; namely, that explained by the brahmin Pokkharasāti.”
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭho māṇavo evamāha: “ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya, yvāyaṁ akkhāto brāhmaṇena pokkharasātinā”ti.
[¶5] Bhāradvāja said this: “This is the only straight path, the direct route that delivers one who applies it to the company of Divinity; namely, that explained by the brahmin Tārukkha.”
> Pali: Bhāradvājopi māṇavo evamāha: “ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko, niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya, yvāyaṁ akkhāto brāhmaṇena tārukkhenā”ti.
[¶6] But neither was able to persuade the other. So Vāseṭṭha said to Bhāradvāja, “Bhāradvāja, the ascetic Gotama—a Sakyan, gone forth from a Sakyan family—is staying in a mango grove on a bank of the Aciravatī River to the north of Manasākaṭa. He has this good reputation: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ Come, let’s go to see him and ask him about this matter. As he answers, so we’ll remember it.”
> Pali: Neva kho asakkhi vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhāradvājaṁ māṇavaṁ saññāpetuṁ, na pana asakkhi bhāradvājo māṇavo vāseṭṭhaṁ māṇavaṁ saññāpetuṁ. Atha kho vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhāradvājaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantesi: “ayaṁ kho, bhāradvāja, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito manasākaṭe viharati uttarena manasākaṭassa aciravatiyā nadiyā tīre ambavane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Āyāma, bho bhāradvāja, yena samaṇo gotamo tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ pucchissāma. Yathā no samaṇo gotamo byākarissati, tathā naṁ dhāressāmā”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Bhāradvāja.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho bhāradvājo māṇavo vāseṭṭhassa māṇavassa paccassosi.
[¶8] 1. What is the Path and What is Not the Path
> Pali: 1. Maggāmaggakathā
[¶9] So they went to the Buddha and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they sat down to one side and Vāseṭṭha told him of their conversation, adding: “In this matter we have a dispute, a disagreement, a difference of opinion.”
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā māṇavā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idha, bho gotama, amhākaṁ jaṅghavihāraṁ anucaṅkamantānaṁ anuvicarantānaṁ maggāmagge kathā udapādi. Ahaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya, yvāyaṁ akkhāto brāhmaṇena pokkharasātinā’ti. Bhāradvājo māṇavo evamāha: ‘ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya, yvāyaṁ akkhāto brāhmaṇena tārukkhenā’ti. Ettha, bho gotama, attheva viggaho, atthi vivādo, atthi nānāvādo”ti.
[¶10] “So, Vāseṭṭha, it seems that you say that the straight path is that explained by Pokkharasāti, while Bhāradvāja says that the straight path is that explained by Tārukkha. But what exactly is your disagreement about?”
> Pali: “Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi: ‘ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya, yvāyaṁ akkhāto brāhmaṇena pokkharasātinā’ti. Bhāradvājo māṇavo evamāha: ‘ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya, yvāyaṁ akkhāto brāhmaṇena tārukkhenā’ti. Atha kismiṁ pana vo, vāseṭṭha, viggaho, kismiṁ vivādo, kismiṁ nānāvādo”ti?
[¶11] “About what is the path and what is not the path, worthy Gotama. Even though brahmins describe different paths—the Adhvaryu brahmins, the Taittirīya brahmins, the Chāndogya brahmins, the Cāndrāyaṇa brahmins, and the Bahvṛca brahmins—all of them still lead someone who practices them to the company of Divinity.
> Pali: “Maggāmagge, bho gotama. Kiñcāpi, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā nānāmagge paññāpenti, addhariyā brāhmaṇā tittiriyā brāhmaṇā chandokā brāhmaṇā bavhārijjhā brāhmaṇā, atha kho sabbāni tāni niyyānikā niyyanti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāya.
[¶12] It’s like a village or town that has many different roads nearby, yet all of them meet at that village. In the same way, even though brahmins describe different paths—the Adhvaryu brahmins, the Taittirīya brahmins, the Chāndogya brahmins, the Cāndrāyaṇa brahmins, and the Bahvṛca brahmins—all of them still lead someone who practices them to the company of Divinity.”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre bahūni cepi nānāmaggāni bhavanti, atha kho sabbāni tāni gāmasamosaraṇāni bhavanti; evameva kho, bho gotama, kiñcāpi brāhmaṇā nānāmagge paññāpenti, addhariyā brāhmaṇā tittiriyā brāhmaṇā chandokā brāhmaṇā bavhārijjhā brāhmaṇā, atha kho sabbāni tāni niyyānikā niyyanti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā”ti.
[¶13] 2. Questioning Vāseṭṭha
> Pali: 2. Vāseṭṭhamāṇavānuyoga
[¶14] “Do you say, ‘they lead someone’, Vāseṭṭha?”
> Pali: “Niyyantīti, vāseṭṭha vadesi”?
[¶15] “I do, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Niyyantīti, bho gotama, vadāmi”.
[¶16] “Do you say, ‘they lead someone’, Vāseṭṭha?”
> Pali: “Niyyantīti, vāseṭṭha, vadesi”?
[¶17] “I do, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Niyyantīti, bho gotama, vadāmi”.
[¶18] “Do you say, ‘they lead someone’, Vāseṭṭha?”
> Pali: “Niyyantīti, vāseṭṭha, vadesi”?
[¶19] “I do, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Niyyantīti, bho gotama, vadāmi”.
[¶20] “Well, of the brahmins who are proficient in the three Vedas, Vāseṭṭha, is there even a single one who has seen the Divinity with their own eyes?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, vāseṭṭha, atthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ekabrāhmaṇopi, yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho”ti?
[¶21] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶22] “Well, has even a single one of their tutors seen the Divinity with their own eyes?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, vāseṭṭha, atthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyopi, yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho”ti?
[¶23] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶24] “Well, has even a single one of their tutors’ tutors seen the Divinity with their own eyes?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, vāseṭṭha, atthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyapācariyopi, yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho”ti?
[¶25] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶26] “Well, has anyone back to the seventh generation of tutors seen the Divinity with their own eyes?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, vāseṭṭha, atthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ yāva sattamā ācariyāmahayugā yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho”ti?
[¶27] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶28] “Well, what of the ancient seers of the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas, namely Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamadaggi, Aṅgīrasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, and Bhagu? They were the authors and propagators of the hymns. Their hymnal was sung and propagated and compiled in ancient times; and these days, brahmins continue to sing and chant it, chanting what was chanted and teaching what was taught. Did they say: ‘We know and see where the Divinity is or what way he lies’?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana, vāseṭṭha, yepi tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi tevijjā brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti, tadanubhāsanti, bhāsitamanubhāsanti, vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu. Tepi evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma, yattha vā brahmā, yena vā brahmā, yahiṁ vā brahmā’”ti?
[¶29] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶30] “So it seems that none of those brahmins have seen the Divinity with their own eyes, and not even the ancient seers claimed to know where he is. Yet the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas say: ‘We teach the path to the company of that which we neither know nor see. This is the only straight path, the direct route that delivers one who applies it to the company of Divinity.’
> Pali: “Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, natthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ekabrāhmaṇopi, yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Natthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyopi, yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Natthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ekācariyapācariyopi, yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Natthi koci tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ yāva sattamā ācariyāmahayugā yena brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Yepi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi tevijjā brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti, tadanubhāsanti, bhāsitamanubhāsanti, vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi na evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma, yattha vā brahmā, yena vā brahmā, yahiṁ vā brahmā’ti. Teva tevijjā brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘yaṁ na jānāma, yaṁ na passāma, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desema. Ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko, niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā’ti.
[¶31] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? This being so, doesn’t their statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, nanu evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶32] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶33] “Good, Vāseṭṭha. For it is impossible that they should teach the path to that which they neither know nor see.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā yaṁ na jānanti, yaṁ na passanti, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desessanti. ‘Ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko, niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā’ti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶34] Suppose there was a queue of blind men, each holding the one in front: the first one does not see, the middle one does not see, and the last one does not see. In the same way, it seems to me that the brahmins’ statement turns out to be comparable to a queue of blind men: the first one does not see, the middle one does not see, and the last one does not see. Their statement turns out to be a joke—mere words, vacuous and hollow.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, andhaveṇi paramparasaṁsattā purimopi na passati, majjhimopi na passati, pacchimopi na passati; evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, andhaveṇūpamaṁ maññe tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ bhāsitaṁ, purimopi na passati, majjhimopi na passati, pacchimopi na passati. Tesamidaṁ tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ bhāsitaṁ hassakaññeva sampajjati, nāmakaññeva sampajjati, rittakaññeva sampajjati, tucchakaññeva sampajjati.
[¶35] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Do the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas see the sun and moon just as other folk do? And do they supplicate and entreat them, following their course from where they rise to where they set with cupped palms held in worship?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, passanti tevijjā brāhmaṇā candimasūriye, aññe cāpi bahujanā, yato ca candimasūriyā uggacchanti, yattha ca ogacchanti, āyācanti thomayanti pañjalikā namassamānā anuparivattantī”ti?
[¶36] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama, passanti tevijjā brāhmaṇā candimasūriye, aññe cāpi bahujanā, yato ca candimasūriyā uggacchanti, yattha ca ogacchanti, āyācanti thomayanti pañjalikā namassamānā anuparivattantī”ti.
[¶37] “What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Though this is so, are the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas able to teach the path to the company of the sun and moon, saying: ‘This is the only straight path, the direct route that delivers one who applies it to the company of the sun and moon’?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, yaṁ passanti tevijjā brāhmaṇā candimasūriye, aññe cāpi bahujanā, yato ca candimasūriyā uggacchanti, yattha ca ogacchanti, āyācanti thomayanti pañjalikā namassamānā anuparivattanti, pahonti tevijjā brāhmaṇā candimasūriyānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ desetuṁ: ‘ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko, niyyāti takkarassa candimasūriyānaṁ sahabyatāyā’”ti?
[¶38] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶39] “So it seems that even though the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas see the sun and moon, they are not able to teach the path to the company of the sun and moon.
> Pali: “Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, yaṁ passanti tevijjā brāhmaṇā candimasūriye, aññe cāpi bahujanā, yato ca candimasūriyā uggacchanti, yattha ca ogacchanti, āyācanti thomayanti pañjalikā namassamānā anuparivattanti, tesampi nappahonti candimasūriyānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ desetuṁ: ‘ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko, niyyāti takkarassa candimasūriyānaṁ sahabyatāyā’ti.
[¶40] But it seems that even though they have not seen the Divinity with their own eyes, they still claim to teach the path to the company of that which they neither know nor see.
> Pali: Iti pana na kira tevijjehi brāhmaṇehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ācariyehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ācariyapācariyehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ yāva sattamā ācariyāmahayugehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Yepi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi tevijjā brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti, tadanubhāsanti, bhāsitamanubhāsanti, vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi na evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma, yattha vā brahmā, yena vā brahmā, yahiṁ vā brahmā’ti. Teva tevijjā brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘yaṁ na jānāma, yaṁ na passāma, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desema—ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā’ti.
[¶41] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? This being so, doesn’t their statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, nanu evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶42] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶43] “Good, Vāseṭṭha. For it is impossible that they should teach the path to that which they neither know nor see.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā yaṁ na jānanti, yaṁ na passanti, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desessanti: ‘ayameva ujumaggo, ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko, niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā’ti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶44] 2.1. The Simile of the Finest Lady in the Land
> Pali: 2.1. Janapadakalyāṇīupamā
[¶45] Suppose a man were to say, ‘Whoever the finest lady in the land is, it is her that I want, her that I desire!’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, puriso evaṁ vadeyya: ‘ahaṁ yā imasmiṁ janapade janapadakalyāṇī, taṁ icchāmi, taṁ kāmemī’ti.
[¶46] They’d say to him, ‘My man, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know whether she’s an aristocrat, a brahmin, a peasant, or a menial?’ Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ— khattiyī vā brāhmaṇī vā vessī vā suddī vā’ti? Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya.
[¶47] They’d say to him, ‘My friend, that finest lady in the land who you desire—do you know her name or clan? Whether she’s tall or short or medium? Whether her skin is black, brown, or dingy? Whether she comes from such-and-such village, town, or city?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ icchasi kāmesi, jānāsi taṁ janapadakalyāṇiṁ—evaṁnāmā evaṅgottāti vā, dīghā vā rassā vā majjhimā vā kāḷī vā sāmā vā maṅguracchavī vāti, amukasmiṁ gāme vā nigame vā nagare vā’ti?
[¶48] Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya.
[¶49] They’d say to him, ‘My man, do you desire someone who you’ve never even known or seen?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi, taṁ tvaṁ icchasi kāmesī’ti?
[¶50] Asked this, he’d say, ‘Yes.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘āmā’ti vadeyya.
[¶51] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, nanu evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶52] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶53] “In the same way, doesn’t the statement of those brahmins turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, na kira tevijjehi brāhmaṇehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho, napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ācariyehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho, napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ācariyapācariyehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ yāva sattamā ācariyāmahayugehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Yepi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi tevijjā brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti, tadanubhāsanti, bhāsitamanubhāsanti, vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi na evamāhaṁsu: ‘mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma, yattha vā brahmā, yena vā brahmā, yahiṁ vā brahmā’ti. Teva tevijjā brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘yaṁ na jānāma, yaṁ na passāma, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desema—ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, nanu evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶54] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶55] “Good, Vāseṭṭha. For it is impossible that they should teach the path to that which they neither know nor see.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā yaṁ na jānanti, yaṁ na passanti, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desessanti—ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyāti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶56] 2.2. The Simile of the Ladder
> Pali: 2.2. Nisseṇīupamā
[¶57] Suppose a man was to build a ladder at the crossroads for climbing up to a stilt longhouse.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, puriso cātumahāpathe nisseṇiṁ kareyya pāsādassa ārohaṇāya.
[¶58] They’d say to him, ‘My man, that stilt longhouse for which you’re building a ladder—do you know whether it’s to the north, south, east, or west? Or whether it’s tall or short or medium?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yassa tvaṁ pāsādassa ārohaṇāya nisseṇiṁ karosi, jānāsi taṁ pāsādaṁ—puratthimāya vā disāya dakkhiṇāya vā disāya pacchimāya vā disāya uttarāya vā disāya ucco vā nīco vā majjhimo vā’ti?
[¶59] Asked this, he’d say, ‘No.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘no’ti vadeyya.
[¶60] They’d say to him, ‘My man, are you building a ladder for a longhouse that you’ve never even known or seen?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ambho purisa, yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi, na passasi, tassa tvaṁ pāsādassa ārohaṇāya nisseṇiṁ karosī’ti?
[¶61] Asked this, he’d say, ‘Yes.’
> Pali: Iti puṭṭho ‘āmā’ti vadeyya.
[¶62] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? This being so, doesn’t that man’s statement turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, nanu evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶63] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tassa purisassa appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶64] “In the same way, doesn’t the statement of those brahmins turn out to have no demonstrable basis?”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, na kira tevijjehi brāhmaṇehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho, napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ācariyehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho, napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ ācariyapācariyehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho, napi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ yāva sattamā ācariyāmahayugehi brahmā sakkhidiṭṭho. Yepi kira tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi tevijjā brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti, tadanubhāsanti, bhāsitamanubhāsanti, vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ—aṭṭhako vāmako vāmadevo vessāmitto yamataggi aṅgīraso bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho kassapo bhagu, tepi na evamāhaṁsu— mayametaṁ jānāma, mayametaṁ passāma, yattha vā brahmā, yena vā brahmā, yahiṁ vā brahmāti. Teva tevijjā brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘yaṁ na jānāma, yaṁ na passāma, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desema, ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyā’ti. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, nanu evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti?
[¶65] “Clearly that’s the case, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bho gotama, evaṁ sante tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ appāṭihīrakataṁ bhāsitaṁ sampajjatī”ti.
[¶66] “Good, Vāseṭṭha. For it is impossible that they should teach the path to that which they neither know nor see.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā yaṁ na jānanti, yaṁ na passanti, tassa sahabyatāya maggaṁ desessanti. Ayameva ujumaggo ayamañjasāyano niyyāniko niyyāti takkarassa brahmasahabyatāyāti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶67] 2.3. The Simile of the Aciravatī River
> Pali: 2.3. Aciravatīnadīupamā
[¶68] Suppose the Aciravatī River was full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Then along comes a person who wants to cross over to the far shore. Standing on the near shore, they’d call out to the far shore, ‘Come here, far shore! Come here, far shore!’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, ayaṁ aciravatī nadī pūrā udakassa samatittikā kākapeyyā. Atha puriso āgaccheyya pāratthiko pāragavesī pāragāmī pāraṁ taritukāmo. So orime tīre ṭhito pārimaṁ tīraṁ avheyya: ‘ehi pārāpāraṁ, ehi pārāpāran’ti.
[¶69] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Would the far shore of the Aciravatī River come over to the near shore because of that man’s call, request, desire, or expectation?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, api nu tassa purisassa avhāyanahetu vā āyācanahetu vā patthanahetu vā abhinandanahetu vā aciravatiyā nadiyā pārimaṁ tīraṁ orimaṁ tīraṁ āgaccheyyā”ti?
[¶70] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶71] “In the same way, Vāseṭṭha, the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas proceed having given up those things that make one a true brahmin, and having undertaken those things that make one not a true brahmin. Yet they say: ‘We call upon Indra! We call upon Soma! We call upon Varuṇa! We call upon Īsāna! We call upon the Progenitor! We call upon the Divinity! We call upon Mahiddhi! We call upon Yama!’
> Pali: “Evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā ye dhammā brāhmaṇakārakā te dhamme pahāya vattamānā, ye dhammā abrāhmaṇakārakā te dhamme samādāya vattamānā evamāhaṁsu: ‘indamavhayāma, somamavhayāma, varuṇamavhayāma, īsānamavhayāma, pajāpatimavhayāma, brahmamavhayāma, mahiddhimavhayāma, yamamavhayāmā’ti.
[¶72] So long as they proceed in this way it’s impossible that they will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity.
> Pali: Te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā ye dhammā brāhmaṇakārakā te dhamme pahāya vattamānā, ye dhammā abrāhmaṇakārakā te dhamme samādāya vattamānā avhāyanahetu vā āyācanahetu vā patthanahetu vā abhinandanahetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmānaṁ sahabyūpagā bhavissantīti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶73] Suppose the Aciravatī River was full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Then along comes a person who wants to cross over to the far shore. But while still on the near shore, their arms are tied tightly behind their back with a strong chain.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, ayaṁ aciravatī nadī pūrā udakassa samatittikā kākapeyyā. Atha puriso āgaccheyya pāratthiko pāragavesī pāragāmī pāraṁ taritukāmo. So orime tīre daḷhāya anduyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ baddho.
[¶74] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Could that person cross over to the far shore?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, api nu so puriso aciravatiyā nadiyā orimā tīrā pārimaṁ tīraṁ gaccheyyā”ti?
[¶75] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶76] “In the same way, the five kinds of sensual stimulation are called ‘chains’ and ‘fetters’ in the training of the Noble One. What five? Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, pañcime kāmaguṇā ariyassa vinaye andūtipi vuccanti, bandhanantipi vuccanti. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā.
[¶77] These are the five kinds of sensual stimulation that are called ‘chains’ and ‘fetters’ in the training of the Noble One. The brahmins proficient in the three Vedas enjoy these five kinds of sensual stimulation tied, infatuated, attached, blind to the drawbacks, and not understanding the escape. So long as they enjoy them it’s impossible that they will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity.
> Pali: Ime kho, vāseṭṭha, pañca kāmaguṇā ariyassa vinaye andūtipi vuccanti, bandhanantipi vuccanti. Ime kho, vāseṭṭha, pañca kāmaguṇe tevijjā brāhmaṇā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhopannā anādīnavadassāvino anissaraṇapaññā paribhuñjanti. Te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā ye dhammā brāhmaṇakārakā, te dhamme pahāya vattamānā, ye dhammā abrāhmaṇakārakā, te dhamme samādāya vattamānā pañca kāmaguṇe gadhitā mucchitā ajjhopannā anādīnavadassāvino anissaraṇapaññā paribhuñjantā kāmandubandhanabaddhā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmānaṁ sahabyūpagā bhavissantīti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶78] Suppose the Aciravatī River was full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Then along comes a person who wants to cross over to the far shore. But they’d lie down wrapped in cloth from head to foot.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, ayaṁ aciravatī nadī pūrā udakassa samatittikā kākapeyyā. Atha puriso āgaccheyya pāratthiko pāragavesī pāragāmī pāraṁ taritukāmo. So orime tīre sasīsaṁ pārupitvā nipajjeyya.
[¶79] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Could that person cross over to the far shore?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, api nu so puriso aciravatiyā nadiyā orimā tīrā pārimaṁ tīraṁ gaccheyyā”ti?
[¶80] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶81] “In the same way, the five hindrances are called ‘obstacles’ and ‘hindrances’ and ‘encasings’ and ‘shrouds’ in the training of the Noble One. What five? The hindrances of sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt. These five hindrances are called ‘obstacles’ and ‘hindrances’ and ‘encasings’ and ‘shrouds’ in the training of the Noble One.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, pañcime nīvaraṇā ariyassa vinaye āvaraṇātipi vuccanti, nīvaraṇātipi vuccanti, onāhanātipi vuccanti, pariyonāhanātipi vuccanti. Katame pañca? Kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ, byāpādanīvaraṇaṁ, thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṁ, uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṁ, vicikicchānīvaraṇaṁ. Ime kho, vāseṭṭha, pañca nīvaraṇā ariyassa vinaye āvaraṇātipi vuccanti, nīvaraṇātipi vuccanti, onāhanātipi vuccanti, pariyonāhanātipi vuccanti.
[¶82] The brahmins proficient in the three Vedas are obstructed, hindered, swathed, and enveloped by these five hindrances. So long as they are so obstructed it’s impossible that they will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity.
> Pali: Imehi kho, vāseṭṭha, pañcahi nīvaraṇehi tevijjā brāhmaṇā āvuṭā nivutā onaddhā pariyonaddhā. Te vata, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā ye dhammā brāhmaṇakārakā te dhamme pahāya vattamānā, ye dhammā abrāhmaṇakārakā te dhamme samādāya vattamānā pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvuṭā nivutā onaddhā pariyonaddhā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmānaṁ sahabyūpagā bhavissantīti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶83] 3. Converging
> Pali: 3. Saṁsandanakathā
[¶84] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Have you heard that the brahmins who are elderly and senior, the tutors of tutors, say whether the Divinity is encumbered with possessions or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, kinti te sutaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ, sapariggaho vā brahmā apariggaho vā”ti?
[¶85] “That he is not, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Apariggaho, bho gotama”.
[¶86] “Is his heart full of enmity or not?”
> Pali: “Saveracitto vā averacitto vā”ti?
[¶87] “It is not.”
> Pali: “Averacitto, bho gotama”.
[¶88] “Is his heart full of ill will or not?”
> Pali: “Sabyāpajjacitto vā abyāpajjacitto vā”ti?
[¶89] “It is not.”
> Pali: “Abyāpajjacitto, bho gotama”.
[¶90] “Is his heart corrupted or not?”
> Pali: “Saṅkiliṭṭhacitto vā asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto vā”ti?
[¶91] “It is not.”
> Pali: “Asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto, bho gotama”.
[¶92] “Does he wield power or not?”
> Pali: “Vasavattī vā avasavattī vā”ti?
[¶93] “He does.”
> Pali: “Vasavattī, bho gotama”.
[¶94] “What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Are the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas encumbered with possessions or not?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, sapariggahā vā tevijjā brāhmaṇā apariggahā vā”ti?
[¶95] “They are.”
> Pali: “Sapariggahā, bho gotama”.
[¶96] “Are their hearts full of enmity or not?”
> Pali: “Saveracittā vā averacittā vā”ti?
[¶97] “They are.”
> Pali: “Saveracittā, bho gotama”.
[¶98] “Are their hearts full of ill will or not?”
> Pali: “Sabyāpajjacittā vā abyāpajjacittā vā”ti?
[¶99] “They are.”
> Pali: “Sabyāpajjacittā, bho gotama”.
[¶100] “Are their hearts corrupted or not?”
> Pali: “Saṅkiliṭṭhacittā vā asaṅkiliṭṭhacittā vā”ti?
[¶101] “They are.”
> Pali: “Saṅkiliṭṭhacittā, bho gotama”.
[¶102] “Do they wield power or not?”
> Pali: “Vasavattī vā avasavattī vā”ti?
[¶103] “They do not.”
> Pali: “Avasavattī, bho gotama”.
[¶104] “So it seems that the brahmins proficient in the three Vedas are encumbered with possessions, but the Divinity is not. But would brahmins who are encumbered with possessions join together and converge with the Divinity, who isn’t encumbered with possessions?”
> Pali: “Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, sapariggahā tevijjā brāhmaṇā apariggaho brahmā. Api nu kho sapariggahānaṁ tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ apariggahena brahmunā saddhiṁ saṁsandati sametī”ti?
[¶105] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶106] “Good, Vāseṭṭha! It’s impossible that the brahmins who are encumbered with possessions will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity, who isn’t encumbered with possessions.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, te vata, vāseṭṭha, sapariggahā tevijjā brāhmaṇā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apariggahassa brahmuno sahabyūpagā bhavissantīti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶107] And it seems that the brahmins have enmity, ill will, corruption, and do not wield power, while the Divinity has no enmity, ill will, or corruption, and who does wield power. But would brahmins who are opposite to the Divinity in all these things join together and converge with him?”
> Pali: Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, saveracittā tevijjā brāhmaṇā, averacitto brahmā …pe… sabyāpajjacittā tevijjā brāhmaṇā abyāpajjacitto brahmā … saṅkiliṭṭhacittā tevijjā brāhmaṇā asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto brahmā … avasavattī tevijjā brāhmaṇā vasavattī brahmā, api nu kho avasavattīnaṁ tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vasavattinā brahmunā saddhiṁ saṁsandati sametī”ti?
[¶108] “No, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶109] “Good, Vāseṭṭha! It’s impossible that brahmins who are opposite to the Divinity in all these things will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, te vata, vāseṭṭha, avasavattī tevijjā brāhmaṇā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā vasavattissa brahmuno sahabyūpagā bhavissantīti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶110] Now in this regard, Vāseṭṭha, those brahmins proficient in the three Vedas, having dived in, sink down. Having sunk down, they undergo drowning, imagining they are crossing to the dry shore. That’s why the three Vedas of the brahmins are called a ‘salted land’ and a ‘barren land’ and a ‘disaster’.”
> Pali: Idha kho pana te, vāseṭṭha, tevijjā brāhmaṇā āsīditvā saṁsīdanti, saṁsīditvā visāraṁ pāpuṇanti, sukkhataraṁ maññe taranti. Tasmā idaṁ tevijjānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ tevijjāiriṇantipi vuccati, tevijjāvivanantipi vuccati, tevijjābyasanantipi vuccatī”ti.
[¶111] When he said this, Vāseṭṭha said to the Buddha, “I have heard, worthy Gotama, that you know the path to company with Divinity.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama, samaṇo gotamo brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ jānātī”ti.
[¶112] “What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Is the village of Manasākaṭa nearby?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha. Āsanne ito manasākaṭaṁ, na ito dūre manasākaṭan”ti?
[¶113] “Yes it is.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama, āsanne ito manasākaṭaṁ, na ito dūre manasākaṭan”ti.
[¶114] “What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? Suppose a person was born and raised in Manasākaṭa. And as soon as they left the town some people asked them for the road to Manasākaṭa. Would they be slow or hesitant to answer?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, idhassa puriso manasākaṭe jātasaṁvaddho. Tamenaṁ manasākaṭato tāvadeva avasaṭaṁ manasākaṭassa maggaṁ puccheyyuṁ. Siyā nu kho, vāseṭṭha, tassa purisassa manasākaṭe jātasaṁvaddhassa manasākaṭassa maggaṁ puṭṭhassa dandhāyitattaṁ vā vitthāyitattaṁ vā”ti?
[¶115] “No, worthy Gotama. Why is that? Because they were born and raised in Manasākaṭa. They’re well acquainted with all the roads to the village.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho gotama”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Amu hi, bho gotama, puriso manasākaṭe jātasaṁvaddho, tassa sabbāneva manasākaṭassa maggāni suviditānī”ti.
[¶116] “Still, it’s possible they might be slow or hesitant to answer. But the Realized One is never slow or hesitant when questioned about the realm of divinity or the practice that leads to the realm of divinity. I understand the Divinity, the realm of divinity, and the practice that leads to the realm of divinity, practicing in accordance with which one is reborn in the realm of divinity.”
> Pali: “Siyā kho, vāseṭṭha, tassa purisassa manasākaṭe jātasaṁvaddhassa manasākaṭassa maggaṁ puṭṭhassa dandhāyitattaṁ vā vitthāyitattaṁ vā, na tveva tathāgatassa brahmaloke vā brahmalokagāminiyā vā paṭipadāya puṭṭhassa dandhāyitattaṁ vā vitthāyitattaṁ vā. Brahmānañcāhaṁ, vāseṭṭha, pajānāmi brahmalokañca brahmalokagāminiñca paṭipadaṁ, yathā paṭipanno ca brahmalokaṁ upapanno, tañca pajānāmī”ti.
[¶117] When he said this, Vāseṭṭha said to the Buddha, “I have heard, worthy Gotama, that you teach the path to company with Divinity. Please teach us that path and elevate this generation of brahmins.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho gotama, samaṇo gotamo brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ desetī”ti. “Sādhu no bhavaṁ gotamo brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggaṁ desetu ullumpatu bhavaṁ gotamo brāhmaṇiṁ pajan”ti.
[¶118] “Well then, Vāseṭṭha, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, vāseṭṭha, suṇāhi; sādhukaṁ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶119] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Vāseṭṭha.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho vāseṭṭho māṇavo bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶120] 4. Teaching the Path to the Divinity
> Pali: 4. Brahmalokamaggadesanā
[¶121] The Buddha said this:
> Pali: Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶122] “It’s when a Realized One arises in the world, perfected, a fully awakened Buddha … That’s how a mendicant is accomplished in ethics. … Seeing that the hindrances have been given up in them, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, they feel bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed.
> Pali: “idha, vāseṭṭha, tathāgato loke uppajjati arahaṁ, sammāsambuddho …pe… Evaṁ kho, vāseṭṭha, bhikkhu sīlasampanno hoti …pe… tassime pañca nīvaraṇe pahīne attani samanupassato pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati.
[¶123] They meditate spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: So mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.
[¶124] Suppose there was a powerful horn blower. They’d easily make themselves heard in the four quarters. In the same way, when the heart’s release by love has been developed like this, any limited deeds they’ve done don’t remain or persist there. This is a path to company with Divinity.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, balavā saṅkhadhamo appakasireneva catuddisā viññāpeyya; evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, evaṁ bhāvitāya mettāya cetovimuttiyā yaṁ pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrāvasissati, na taṁ tatrāvatiṭṭhati. Ayampi kho, vāseṭṭha, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo.
[¶125] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of compassion …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, vāseṭṭha, bhikkhu karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶126] They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing …
> Pali: muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe…
[¶127] They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.
[¶128] Suppose there was a powerful horn blower. They’d easily make themselves heard in the four quarters. In the same way, when the heart’s release by equanimity has been developed and cultivated like this, any limited deeds they’ve done don’t remain or persist there. This too is a path to company with Divinity.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, vāseṭṭha, balavā saṅkhadhamo appakasireneva catuddisā viññāpeyya; evameva kho, vāseṭṭha, evaṁ bhāvitāya upekkhāya cetovimuttiyā yaṁ pamāṇakataṁ kammaṁ na taṁ tatrāvasissati, na taṁ tatrāvatiṭṭhati. Ayampi kho, vāseṭṭha, brahmānaṁ sahabyatāya maggo.
[¶129] What do you think, Vāseṭṭha? When a mendicant meditates like this, are they encumbered with possessions or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, vāseṭṭha, evaṁvihārī bhikkhu sapariggaho vā apariggaho vā”ti?
[¶130] “They are not.”
> Pali: “Apariggaho, bho gotama”.
[¶131] “Is their heart full of enmity or not?”
> Pali: “Saveracitto vā averacitto vā”ti?
[¶132] “It is not.”
> Pali: “Averacitto, bho gotama”.
[¶133] “Is their heart full of ill will or not?”
> Pali: “Sabyāpajjacitto vā abyāpajjacitto vā”ti?
[¶134] “It is not.”
> Pali: “Abyāpajjacitto, bho gotama”.
[¶135] “Is their heart corrupted or not?”
> Pali: “Saṅkiliṭṭhacitto vā asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto vā”ti?
[¶136] “It is not.”
> Pali: “Asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto, bho gotama”.
[¶137] “Do they wield power or not?”
> Pali: “Vasavattī vā avasavattī vā”ti?
[¶138] “They do.”
> Pali: “Vasavattī, bho gotama”.
[¶139] “So it seems that that mendicant is not encumbered with possessions, and neither is the Divinity. Would a mendicant who is not encumbered with possessions join together and converge with the Divinity, who isn’t encumbered with possessions?”
> Pali: “Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, apariggaho bhikkhu, apariggaho brahmā. Api nu kho apariggahassa bhikkhuno apariggahena brahmunā saddhiṁ saṁsandati sametī”ti?
[¶140] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶141] “Good, Vāseṭṭha! It’s quite possible that a mendicant who is not encumbered with possessions will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity, who isn’t encumbered with possessions.
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, so vata vāseṭṭha apariggaho bhikkhu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apariggahassa brahmuno sahabyūpago bhavissatīti, ṭhānametaṁ vijjati.
[¶142] And it seems that that mendicant has no enmity, ill will, corruption, and does wield power, while the Divinity is the same in all these things. Would a mendicant who is the same as the Divinity in all things join together and converge with him?”
> Pali: Iti kira, vāseṭṭha, averacitto bhikkhu, averacitto brahmā …pe… abyāpajjacitto bhikkhu, abyāpajjacitto brahmā … asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto bhikkhu, asaṅkiliṭṭhacitto brahmā … vasavattī bhikkhu, vasavattī brahmā, api nu kho vasavattissa bhikkhuno vasavattinā brahmunā saddhiṁ saṁsandati sametī”ti?
[¶143] “Yes, worthy Gotama.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho gotama”.
[¶144] “Good, Vāseṭṭha! It’s quite possible that that mendicant will, when the body breaks up, after death, be reborn in the company of Divinity.”
> Pali: “Sādhu, vāseṭṭha, so vata, vāseṭṭha, vasavattī bhikkhu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā vasavattissa brahmuno sahabyūpago bhavissatīti, ṭhānametaṁ vijjatī”ti.
[¶145] When he had spoken, Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja said to him, “Excellent, worthy Gotama! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, worthy Gotama has made the teaching clear in many ways. We go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Gotama remember us as lay followers who have gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā māṇavā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṁ, bho gotama. Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma, dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsake no bhavaṁ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupete saraṇaṁ gate”ti.
[¶146] > Pali: Tevijjasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ terasamaṁ.
[¶147] > Pali: Sīlakkhandhavaggo niṭṭhito.
[¶148] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶149] > Pali: Brahmāsāmaññaambaṭṭha,
Soṇakūṭamahālijālinī;
Sīhapoṭṭhapādasubho kevaṭṭo,
Lohiccatevijjā terasāti.
[¶150] > Pali: Sīlakkhandhavaggapāḷi niṭṭhitā.
## 23. DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/23/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/23/#p-N
[¶0] DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind
> Pali: DN 14 · Mahāpadānasutta
[¶1] 1. On Past Lives
> Pali: 1. Pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttakathā
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery, in the hut by the kareri tree.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme karerikuṭikāyaṁ.
[¶3] Then after the meal, on return from almsround, several mendicants sat together in the pavilion by the kareri tree and this Dhamma talk on the subject of past lives came up among them, “So it was in a past life; such it was in a past life.”
> Pali: Atha kho sambahulānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantānaṁ karerimaṇḍalamāḷe sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttā dhammī kathā udapādi: “itipi pubbenivāso, itipi pubbenivāso”ti.
[¶4] With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, the Buddha heard that discussion among the mendicants. So he got up from his seat and went to the pavilion, where he sat on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Assosi kho bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ imaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena karerimaṇḍalamāḷo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi, nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā; kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶5] The mendicants told him what had happened, adding, “This is the conversation that was unfinished when the Buddha arrived.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idha, bhante, amhākaṁ pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantānaṁ karerimaṇḍalamāḷe sannisinnānaṁ sannipatitānaṁ pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttā dhammī kathā udapādi: ‘itipi pubbenivāso itipi pubbenivāso’ti. Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā. Atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶6] “Would you like to hear a Dhamma talk on the subject of past lives?”
> Pali: “Iccheyyātha no tumhe, bhikkhave, pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ sotun”ti?
[¶7] “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One! Let the Buddha give a Dhamma talk on the subject of past lives. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Etassa, bhagavā, kālo; etassa, sugata, kālo; yaṁ bhagavā pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ kareyya, bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶8] “Well then, mendicants, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhikkhave, suṇātha sādhukaṁ manasi karotha bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶10] “Ninety-one eons ago, the Buddha Vipassī arose in the world, perfected and fully awakened. Thirty-one eons ago, the Buddha Sikhī arose in the world, perfected and fully awakened. In the same thirty-first eon, the Buddha Vessabhū arose in the world, perfected and fully awakened. In the present fortunate eon, the Buddhas Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana, and Kassapa arose in the world, perfected and fully awakened. And in the present fortunate eon, I have arisen in the world, perfected and fully awakened.
> Pali: “Ito so, bhikkhave, ekanavutikappe yaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Ito so, bhikkhave, ekatiṁse kappe yaṁ sikhī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Tasmiññeva kho, bhikkhave, ekatiṁse kappe vessabhū bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Imasmiññeva kho, bhikkhave, bhaddakappe kakusandho bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Imasmiññeva kho, bhikkhave, bhaddakappe koṇāgamano bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Imasmiññeva kho, bhikkhave, bhaddakappe kassapo bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Imasmiññeva kho, bhikkhave, bhaddakappe ahaṁ etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke uppanno.
[¶11] The Buddhas Vipassī, Sikhī, and Vessabhū were born as aristocrats into aristocrat families. The Buddhas Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana, and Kassapa were born as brahmins into brahmin families. I was born as an aristocrat into an aristocrat family.
> Pali: Vipassī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosi, khattiyakule udapādi. Sikhī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosi, khattiyakule udapādi. Vessabhū, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosi, khattiyakule udapādi. Kakusandho, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho brāhmaṇo jātiyā ahosi, brāhmaṇakule udapādi. Koṇāgamano, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho brāhmaṇo jātiyā ahosi, brāhmaṇakule udapādi. Kassapo, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho brāhmaṇo jātiyā ahosi, brāhmaṇakule udapādi. Ahaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosiṁ, khattiyakule uppanno.
[¶12] Koṇḍañña was the clan of Vipassī, Sikhī, and Vessabhū. Kassapa was the clan of Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana, and Kassapa. Gotama is my clan.
> Pali: Vipassī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho koṇḍañño gottena ahosi. Sikhī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho koṇḍañño gottena ahosi. Vessabhū, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho koṇḍañño gottena ahosi. Kakusandho, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho kassapo gottena ahosi. Koṇāgamano, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho kassapo gottena ahosi. Kassapo, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho kassapo gottena ahosi. Ahaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho gotamo gottena ahosiṁ.
[¶13] For Vipassī, the lifespan was 80,000 years. For Sikhī, the lifespan was 70,000 years. For Vessabhū, the lifespan was 60,000 years. For Kakusandha, the lifespan was 40,000 years. For Koṇāgamana, the lifespan was 30,000 years. For Kassapa, the lifespan was 20,000 years. For me at this time the lifespan is short, brief, and fleeting. A long life is a hundred years or a little more.
> Pali: Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asītivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Sikhissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa sattativassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Vessabhussa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa saṭṭhivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Kakusandhassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa cattālīsavassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Koṇāgamanassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tiṁsavassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Kassapassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa vīsativassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi appakaṁ āyuppamāṇaṁ parittaṁ lahukaṁ; yo ciraṁ jīvati, so vassasataṁ appaṁ vā bhiyyo.
[¶14] Vipassī was awakened at the root of a patala tree. Sikhī was awakened at the root of a white-mango tree. Vessabhū was awakened at the root of a sal tree. Kakusandha was awakened at the root of a lebbeck tree. Koṇāgamana was awakened at the root of a cluster fig tree. Kassapa was awakened at the root of a banyan tree. I was awakened at the root of a peepal tree.
> Pali: Vipassī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho. Sikhī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho. Vessabhū, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho sālassa mūle abhisambuddho. Kakusandho, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho sirīsassa mūle abhisambuddho. Koṇāgamano, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho udumbarassa mūle abhisambuddho. Kassapo, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho nigrodhassa mūle abhisambuddho. Ahaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho.
[¶15] Vipassī had a fine pair of chief disciples named Khaṇḍa and Tissa. Sikhī had a fine pair of chief disciples named Abhibhū and Sambhava. Vessabhū had a fine pair of chief disciples named Soṇa and Uttara. Kakusandha had a fine pair of chief disciples named Vidhura and Sañjīva. Koṇāgamana had a fine pair of chief disciples named Bhiyyosa and Uttara. Kassapa had a fine pair of chief disciples named Tissa and Bhāradvāja. I have a fine pair of chief disciples named Sāriputta and Moggallāna.
> Pali: Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa khaṇḍatissaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Sikhissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa abhibhūsambhavaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Vessabhussa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa soṇuttaraṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Kakusandhassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa vidhurasañjīvaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Koṇāgamanassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa bhiyyosuttaraṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Kassapassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tissabhāradvājaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi sāriputtamoggallānaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ.
[¶16] Vipassī had three gatherings of disciples—one of 6,800,000, one of 100,000, and one of 80,000—all of them mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi bhikkhusatasahassaṁ, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi asītibhikkhusahassāni. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ime tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶17] Sikhī had three gatherings of disciples—one of 100,000, one of 80,000, and one of 70,000—all of them mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Sikhissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi bhikkhusatasahassaṁ, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi asītibhikkhusahassāni, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sattatibhikkhusahassāni. Sikhissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ime tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶18] Vessabhū had three gatherings of disciples—one of 80,000, one of 70,000, and one of 60,000—all of them mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Vessabhussa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi asītibhikkhusahassāni, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sattatibhikkhusahassāni, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi saṭṭhibhikkhusahassāni. Vessabhussa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ime tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶19] Kakusandha had one gathering of disciples—40,000 mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Kakusandhassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi cattālīsabhikkhusahassāni. Kakusandhassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ayaṁ eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶20] Koṇāgamana had one gathering of disciples—30,000 mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Koṇāgamanassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi tiṁsabhikkhusahassāni. Koṇāgamanassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ayaṁ eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶21] Kassapa had one gathering of disciples—20,000 mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Kassapassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi vīsatibhikkhusahassāni. Kassapassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ayaṁ eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶22] I have had one gathering of disciples—1,250 mendicants who had ended their defilements.
> Pali: Mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni. Mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, ayaṁ eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ.
[¶23] Vipassī had as chief attendant a mendicant named Asoka. Sikhī had as chief attendant a mendicant named Khemaṅkara. Vessabhū had as chief attendant a mendicant named Upasanta. Kakusandha had as chief attendant a mendicant named Buddhija. Koṇāgamana had as chief attendant a mendicant named Sotthija. Kassapa had as chief attendant a mendicant named Sabbamitta. I have as chief attendant a mendicant named Ānanda.
> Pali: Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asoko nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Sikhissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa khemaṅkaro nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Vessabhussa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa upasanto nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Kakusandhassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa buddhijo nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Koṇāgamanassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa sotthijo nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Kassapassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa sabbamitto nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi ānando nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko.
[¶24] Vipassī’s father was King Bandhumā, his birth mother was Queen Bandhumatī, and their capital city was named Bandhumatī.
> Pali: Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa bandhumā nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Bandhumatī nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Bandhumassa rañño bandhumatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶25] Sikhī’s father was King Aruṇa, his birth mother was Queen Pabhāvatī, and their capital city was named Aruṇavatī.
> Pali: Sikhissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa aruṇo nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Pabhāvatī nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Aruṇassa rañño aruṇavatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶26] Vessabhū’s father was King Suppatita, his birth mother was Queen Vassavatī, and their capital city was named Anoma.
> Pali: Vessabhussa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa suppatito nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Vassavatī nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Suppatitassa rañño anomaṁ nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶27] Kakusandha’s father was the brahmin Aggidatta, and his birth mother was the brahmin lady Visākhā. At that time the king was Khema, whose capital city was named Khemavatī.
> Pali: Kakusandhassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa aggidatto nāma brāhmaṇo pitā ahosi. Visākhā nāma brāhmaṇī mātā ahosi janetti. Tena kho pana, bhikkhave, samayena khemo nāma rājā ahosi. Khemassa rañño khemavatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶28] Koṇāgamana’s father was the brahmin Yaññadatta, and his birth mother was the brahmin lady Uttarā. At that time the king was Sobha, whose capital city was named Sobhavatī.
> Pali: Koṇāgamanassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa yaññadatto nāma brāhmaṇo pitā ahosi. Uttarā nāma brāhmaṇī mātā ahosi janetti. Tena kho pana, bhikkhave, samayena sobho nāma rājā ahosi. Sobhassa rañño sobhavatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶29] Kassapa’s father was the brahmin Brahmadatta, and his birth mother was the brahmin lady Dhanavatī. At that time the king was Kikī, whose capital city was named Varanasi.
> Pali: Kassapassa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa brahmadatto nāma brāhmaṇo pitā ahosi. Dhanavatī nāma brāhmaṇī mātā ahosi janetti. Tena kho pana, bhikkhave, samayena kikī nāma rājā ahosi. Kikissa rañño bārāṇasī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶30] In this life, my father was King Suddhodana, my birth mother was Queen Māyā, and our capital city was Kapilavatthu.”
> Pali: Mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etarahi suddhodano nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Māyā nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Kapilavatthu nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosī”ti.
[¶31] That is what the Buddha said. When he had spoken, the Holy One rose from his seat and entered his dwelling.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶32] Soon after the Buddha left, those mendicants discussed among themselves:
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ acirapakkantassa bhagavato ayamantarākathā udapādi:
[¶33] “It’s incredible, reverends, it’s amazing! The Realized One has such psychic power and might! For he is able to recollect the birth, names, clans, lifespan, chief disciples, and gatherings of disciples of the Buddhas of the past who have become fully quenched, cut off proliferation, cut off the course, finished off the cycle, and passed beyond all suffering: ‘Such is the birth, names, clans, conduct, teachings, wisdom, meditation, and freedom of those Blessed Ones.’
> Pali: “acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. Yatra hi nāma tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarissati, nāmatopi anussarissati, gottatopi anussarissati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarissati, sāvakayugatopi anussarissati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarissati: ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’”ti.
[¶34] Is it because the Realized One has clearly penetrated the principle of the teachings that he can recollect all these things? Or did deities tell him?” But this conversation among those mendicants was left unfinished.
> Pali: “Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, tathāgatasseva nu kho esā dhammadhātu suppaṭividdhā, yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati: ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’ti, udāhu devatā tathāgatassa etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ, yena tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati: ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’”ti. Ayañca hidaṁ tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ antarākathā vippakatā hoti.
[¶35] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat and went to the pavilion by the kareri tree, where he sat down on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena karerimaṇḍalamāḷo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā; kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶36] The mendicants told him what had happened, adding, “This was our conversation that was unfinished when the Buddha arrived.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idha, bhante, amhākaṁ acirapakkantassa bhagavato ayaṁ antarākathā udapādi: ‘acchariyaṁ, āvuso, abbhutaṁ, āvuso, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. Yatra hi nāma tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarissati, nāmatopi anussarissati, gottatopi anussarissati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarissati, sāvakayugatopi anussarissati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarissati: “evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī”ti. Kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, tathāgatasseva nu kho esā dhammadhātu suppaṭividdhā, yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati: “evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī”ti. Udāhu devatā tathāgatassa etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ, yena tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati: “evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī”’ti? Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā, atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶37] “It is because the Realized One has clearly penetrated the principle of the teachings that he can recollect all these things. And the deities also told me.
> Pali: “Tathāgatassevesā, bhikkhave, dhammadhātu suppaṭividdhā, yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati: ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’ti. Devatāpi tathāgatassa etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ, yena tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati: ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’ti.
[¶38] Would you like to hear a further Dhamma talk on the subject of past lives?”
> Pali: Iccheyyātha no tumhe, bhikkhave, bhiyyoso mattāya pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ sotun”ti?
[¶39] “Now is the time, Blessed One! Now is the time, Holy One! Let the Buddha give a further Dhamma talk on the subject of past lives. The mendicants will listen and remember it.”
> Pali: “Etassa, bhagavā, kālo; etassa, sugata, kālo; yaṁ bhagavā bhiyyoso mattāya pubbenivāsapaṭisaṁyuttaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ kareyya, bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī”ti.
[¶40] “Well then, mendicants, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bhikkhave, suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasi karotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶41] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶42] “Ninety-one eons ago, the Buddha Vipassī arose in the world, perfected and fully awakened. He was born as an aristocrat into an aristocrat family. His clan was Koṇḍañña. He lived for 80,000 years. He was awakened at the root of a patala tree. He had a fine pair of chief disciples named Khaṇḍa and Tissa. He had three gatherings of disciples— one of 6,800,000, one of 100,000, and one of 80,000— all of them mendicants who had ended their defilements. He had as chief attendant a mendicant named Asoka. His father was King Bandhumā, his birth mother was Queen Bandhumatī, and their capital city was named Bandhumatī.
> Pali: “Ito so, bhikkhave, ekanavutikappe yaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Vipassī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosi, khattiyakule udapādi. Vipassī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho koṇḍañño gottena ahosi. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asītivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Vipassī, bhikkhave, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa khaṇḍatissaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi bhikkhusatasahassaṁ, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi asītibhikkhusahassāni. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ime tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asoko nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Vipassissa, bhikkhave, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa bandhumā nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Bandhumatī nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Bandhumassa rañño bandhumatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi.
[¶43] 2. What’s Normal For One Intent on Awakening
> Pali: 2. Bodhisattadhammatā
[¶44] When Vipassī, the being intent on awakening, passed away from the host of joyful gods, he was conceived in his mother’s womb, mindful and aware. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā sato sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkami. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶45] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening passes away from the host of joyful gods, he is conceived in his mother’s womb. And then—in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. Even in the boundless gloom of interstellar space—so utterly dark that even the luminosity of the moon and the sun, so mighty and powerful, makes no impression—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. And the sentient beings reborn there recognize each other by that light: ‘So, it seems other sentient beings have been reborn here!’ And this ten-thousandfold galaxy shakes and rocks and trembles. And an immeasurable, magnificent light appears in the world, surpassing the glory of the gods. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṁ okkamati. Atha sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yāpi tā lokantarikā aghā asaṁvutā andhakārā andhakāratimisā, yatthapime candimasūriyā evaṁmahiddhikā evaṁmahānubhāvā ābhāya nānubhonti, tatthapi appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā, tepi tenobhāsena aññamaññaṁ sañjānanti: ‘aññepi kira, bho, santi sattā idhūpapannā’ti. Ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Appamāṇo ca uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶46] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, four godlings approach to guard the four quarters, so that no human or non-human or anyone at all shall harm the being intent on awakening or his mother. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, cattāro naṁ devaputtā catuddisaṁ rakkhāya upagacchanti: ‘mā naṁ bodhisattaṁ vā bodhisattamātaraṁ vā manusso vā amanusso vā koci vā viheṭhesī’ti. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶47] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, she becomes naturally ethical. She refrains from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and beer, wine, and liquor intoxicants. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, pakatiyā sīlavatī bodhisattamātā hoti, viratā pāṇātipātā, viratā adinnādānā, viratā kāmesumicchācārā, viratā musāvādā, viratā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶48] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, she no longer thinks of men in a sexual way, and she cannot be violated by a man of lustful intent. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, na bodhisattamātu purisesu mānasaṁ uppajjati kāmaguṇūpasaṁhitaṁ, anatikkamanīyā ca bodhisattamātā hoti kenaci purisena rattacittena. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶49] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, she obtains the five kinds of sensual stimulation and amuses herself, supplied and provided with them. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, lābhinī bodhisattamātā hoti pañcannaṁ kāmaguṇānaṁ. Sā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricāreti. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶50] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, no afflictions beset her. She’s happy and free of bodily fatigue. And she sees the being intent on awakening in her womb, whole in his major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. Suppose there was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And it was strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown. And a person with clear eyes were to take it in their hand and examine it: ‘This beryl gem is naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And it’s strung with a thread of blue, yellow, red, white, or golden brown.’
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, na bodhisattamātu kocideva ābādho uppajjati. Sukhinī bodhisattamātā hoti akilantakāyā, bodhisattañca bodhisattamātā tirokucchigataṁ passati sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. Tatrāssa suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso hatthe karitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ayaṁ kho maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. Tatridaṁ suttaṁ āvutaṁ nīlaṁ vā pītaṁ vā lohitaṁ vā odātaṁ vā paṇḍusuttaṁ vā’ti.
[¶51] In the same way, when the being intent on awakening is conceived in his mother’s womb, no afflictions beset her. She’s happy and free of bodily fatigue. And she sees the being intent on awakening in her womb, whole in his major and minor limbs, not deficient in any faculty. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchiṁ okkanto hoti, na bodhisattamātu kocideva ābādho uppajjati, sukhinī bodhisattamātā hoti akilantakāyā, bodhisattañca bodhisattamātā tirokucchigataṁ passati sabbaṅgapaccaṅgiṁ ahīnindriyaṁ. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶52] It’s normal that, seven days after the being intent on awakening is born, his mother passes away and is reborn in the host of joyful gods. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, sattāhajāte bodhisatte bodhisattamātā kālaṁ karoti tusitaṁ kāyaṁ upapajjati. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶53] It’s normal that, while other women carry the infant in the womb for nine or ten months before giving birth, not so the mother of the being intent on awakening. She gives birth after exactly ten months. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yathā aññā itthikā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṁ kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyanti, na hevaṁ bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā vijāyati. Daseva māsāni bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyati. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶54] It’s normal that, while other women give birth while sitting or lying down, not so the mother of the being intent on awakening. She only gives birth standing up. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yathā aññā itthikā nisinnā vā nipannā vā vijāyanti, na hevaṁ bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā vijāyati. Ṭhitāva bodhisattaṁ bodhisattamātā vijāyati. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶55] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, gods receive him first, then humans. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, devā paṭhamaṁ paṭiggaṇhanti, pacchā manussā. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶56] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, before he reaches the ground, four godlings receive him and place him before his mother, saying: ‘Rejoice, O Queen! An illustrious son is born to you.’ This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, appattova bodhisatto pathaviṁ hoti, cattāro naṁ devaputtā paṭiggahetvā mātu purato ṭhapenti: ‘attamanā, devi, hohi; mahesakkho te putto uppanno’ti. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶57] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, he emerges already clean, unsoiled by waters, mucus, blood, or any other kind of impurity, pure and clean. Suppose a jewel-treasure was placed on a cloth from Kāsi. The jewel would not soil the cloth, nor would the cloth soil the jewel. Why is that? Because of the cleanliness of them both.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, visadova nikkhamati amakkhito udena amakkhito semhena amakkhito ruhirena amakkhito kenaci asucinā suddho visado. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, maṇiratanaṁ kāsike vatthe nikkhittaṁ neva maṇiratanaṁ kāsikaṁ vatthaṁ makkheti, nāpi kāsikaṁ vatthaṁ maṇiratanaṁ makkheti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ubhinnaṁ suddhattā.
## 24. DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/24/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/24/#p-N
[¶0] In the same way, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, he emerges already clean, unsoiled by waters, mucus, blood, or any other kind of impurity, pure and clean. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, visadova nikkhamati amakkhito, udena amakkhito semhena amakkhito ruhirena amakkhito kenaci asucinā suddho visado. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶1] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, two showers of water appear from the sky, one cool, one warm, for bathing the being intent on awakening and his mother. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, dve udakassa dhārā antalikkhā pātubhavanti—ekā sītassa ekā uṇhassa yena bodhisattassa udakakiccaṁ karonti mātu ca. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶2] It’s normal that, as soon as he’s born, the being intent on awakening stands firm with his own feet on the ground. Facing north, he takes seven strides with a white parasol held above him, surveys all quarters, and makes this dramatic proclamation: ‘I am the foremost in the world! I am the eldest in the world! I am the first in the world! This is my last rebirth; now there’ll be no more future lives.’ This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, sampatijāto bodhisatto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne, sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiṁ vācaṁ bhāsati ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’ti. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶3] It’s normal that, when the being intent on awakening emerges from his mother’s womb, then—in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. Even in the boundless gloom of interstellar space—so utterly dark that even the luminosity of the moon and the sun, so mighty and powerful, makes no impression—an immeasurable, magnificent light appears, surpassing the glory of the gods. And the sentient beings reborn there recognize each other by that light: ‘So, it seems other sentient beings have been reborn here!’ And this ten-thousandfold galaxy shakes and rocks and trembles. And an immeasurable, magnificent light appears in the world, surpassing the glory of the gods. This is normal in such a case.
> Pali: Dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, atha sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso pātubhavati, atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yāpi tā lokantarikā aghā asaṁvutā andhakārā andhakāratimisā, yatthapime candimasūriyā evaṁmahiddhikā evaṁmahānubhāvā ābhāya nānubhonti, tatthapi appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Yepi tattha sattā upapannā, tepi tenobhāsena aññamaññaṁ sañjānanti: ‘aññepi kira, bho, santi sattā idhūpapannā’ti. Ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati appamāṇo ca uḷāro obhāso loke pātubhavati atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Ayamettha dhammatā.
[¶4] 3. The Thirty-Two Marks of a Great Man
> Pali: 3. Dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇā
[¶5] When Prince Vipassī was born, they announced it to King Bandhumā, ‘Your Majesty, your son is born! Let Your Majesty examine him!’ When the king had examined the prince, he had the brahmin soothsayers summoned and said to them, ‘Gentlemen, please examine the prince.’ When they had examined him they said to the king, ‘Rejoice, O King! An illustrious son is born to you. You are fortunate, so very fortunate, to have a son such as this born in this family! For the prince possesses the thirty-two marks of a great man. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other. If he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extends to all four sides, he achieves stability in the country, and he possesses the seven treasures. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the veil from the world.
> Pali: Jāte kho pana, bhikkhave, vipassimhi kumāre bandhumato rañño paṭivedesuṁ: ‘putto te, deva, jāto, taṁ devo passatū’ti. Addasā kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā vipassiṁ kumāraṁ, disvā nemitte brāhmaṇe āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘passantu bhonto nemittā brāhmaṇā kumāran’ti. Addasaṁsu kho, bhikkhave, nemittā brāhmaṇā vipassiṁ kumāraṁ, disvā bandhumantaṁ rājānaṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘attamano, deva, hohi, mahesakkho te putto uppanno, lābhā te, mahārāja, suladdhaṁ te, mahārāja, yassa te kule evarūpo putto uppanno. Ayañhi, deva, kumāro dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni sattaratanāni bhavanti. Seyyathidaṁ—cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭacchado.
[¶6] And what are the marks which he possesses?
> Pali: Katamehi cāyaṁ, deva, kumāro dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni sattaratanāni bhavanti. Seyyathidaṁ—cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati.
[¶7] He has well-planted feet.
> Pali: Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭacchado. Ayañhi, deva, kumāro suppatiṭṭhitapādo. Yaṁ pāyaṁ, deva, kumāro suppatiṭṭhitapādo. Idampissa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶8] On the soles of his feet there are thousand-spoked wheels, with rims and hubs, complete in every detail.
> Pali: Imassa, deva, kumārassa heṭṭhā pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni. Yampi imassa, deva, kumārassa heṭṭhā pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni, idampissa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶9] He has stretched heels.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro āyatapaṇhī …pe…
[¶10] He has long fingers.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro dīghaṅgulī …pe…
[¶11] His hands and feet are soft and tender.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro mudutalunahatthapādo …pe…
[¶12] He has serried hands and feet.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva kumāro jālahatthapādo …pe…
[¶13] The tops of his feet are arched.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro ussaṅkhapādo …pe…
[¶14] His calves are like those of an antelope.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro eṇijaṅgho …pe…
[¶15] When standing upright and not bending over, the palms of both hands touch the knees.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro ṭhitakova anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jaṇṇukāni parimasati parimajjati …pe…
[¶16] His private parts are sheathed in a foreskin.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro kosohitavatthaguyho …pe…
[¶17] He is golden colored; his skin shines like lustrous gold.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro suvaṇṇavaṇṇo kañcanasannibhattaco …pe…
[¶18] He has delicate skin, so delicate that dust and dirt don’t stick to his body.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro sukhumacchavī; sukhumattā chaviyā rajojallaṁ kāye na upalimpati …pe…
[¶19] His hairs grow one per pore.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro ekekalomo; ekekāni lomāni lomakūpesu jātāni …pe…
[¶20] His hairs stand up; they’re blue-black and curl clockwise.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro uddhaggalomo; uddhaggāni lomāni jātāni nīlāni añjanavaṇṇāni kuṇḍalāvaṭṭāni dakkhiṇāvaṭṭakajātāni …pe…
[¶21] His body is tall and straight-limbed.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro brahmujugatto …pe…
[¶22] He has bulging muscles in seven places.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro sattussado …pe…
[¶23] His chest is like that of a lion.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro sīhapubbaddhakāyo …pe…
[¶24] He is filled out between the shoulders.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro citantaraṁso …pe…
[¶25] He has the proportional circumference of a banyan tree: the span of his arms equals the height of his body.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo yāvatakvassa kāyo tāvatakvassa byāmo, yāvatakvassa byāmo, tāvatakvassa kāyo …pe…
[¶26] His torso is cylindrical.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro samavaṭṭakkhandho …pe…
[¶27] He has ridged taste buds.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro rasaggasaggī …pe…
[¶28] His jaw is like that of a lion.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro sīhahanu …pe…
[¶29] He has forty teeth.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro cattālīsadanto …pe…
[¶30] His teeth are even.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro samadanto …pe…
[¶31] His teeth have no gaps.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro aviraḷadanto …pe…
[¶32] His teeth are perfectly white.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro susukkadāṭho …pe…
[¶33] He has a large tongue.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro pahūtajivho …pe…
[¶34] He has the voice of the Divinity, like a cuckoo’s call.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro brahmassaro karavīkabhāṇī …pe…
[¶35] His eyes are indigo.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro abhinīlanetto …pe…
[¶36] He has eyelashes like a cow’s.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro gopakhumo …pe…
[¶37] Between his eyebrows there grows a tuft, soft and white like cotton-wool.
> Pali: Imassa, deva, kumārassa uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā odātā mudutūlasannibhā. Yampi imassa, deva, kumārassa uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā odātā mudutūlasannibhā, idampimassa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶38] The crown of his head is like a turban.
> Pali: Ayañhi, deva, kumāro uṇhīsasīso. Yaṁ pāyaṁ, deva, kumāro uṇhīsasīso, idampissa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶39] These are the thirty-two marks of a great man that the prince has. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other. If he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the veil from the world.’
> Pali: Imehi kho ayaṁ, deva, kumāro dvattiṁsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi samannāgato, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni sattaratanāni bhavanti. Seyyathidaṁ—cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭacchado’ti.
[¶40] 4. How He Came to be Known as Vipassī
> Pali: 4. Vipassīsamaññā
[¶41] Then King Bandhumā had the brahmin soothsayers dressed in unworn clothes and satisfied all their needs. Then the king appointed nursemaids for Prince Vipassī. Some suckled him, some bathed him, some held him, and some carried him on their hip. From when he was born, a white parasol was held over him night and day, with the thought, ‘Don’t let cold, heat, grass, dust, or damp bother him.’ He was dear and beloved by many people, like a blue water lily, or a pink or white lotus. He was always passed from hip to hip.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā nemitte brāhmaṇe ahatehi vatthehi acchādāpetvā sabbakāmehi santappesi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā vipassissa kumārassa dhātiyo upaṭṭhāpesi. Aññā khīraṁ pāyenti, aññā nhāpenti, aññā dhārenti, aññā aṅkena pariharanti. Jātassa kho pana, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa setacchattaṁ dhārayittha divā ceva rattiñca: ‘mā naṁ sītaṁ vā uṇhaṁ vā tiṇaṁ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā bādhayitthā’ti. Jāto kho pana, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bahuno janassa piyo ahosi manāpo. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, uppalaṁ vā padumaṁ vā puṇḍarīkaṁ vā bahuno janassa piyaṁ manāpaṁ; evameva kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bahuno janassa piyo ahosi manāpo. Svāssudaṁ aṅkeneva aṅkaṁ parihariyati.
[¶42] From when he was born, his voice was charming, graceful, sweet, and endearing. It was as sweet as the song of a cuckoo-bird found in the Himalayas.
> Pali: Jāto kho pana, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro mañjussaro ca ahosi vaggussaro ca madhurassaro ca pemaniyassaro ca. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, himavante pabbate karavīkā nāma sakuṇajāti mañjussarā ca vaggussarā ca madhurassarā ca pemaniyassarā ca; evameva kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro mañjussaro ca ahosi vaggussaro ca madhurassaro ca pemaniyassaro ca.
[¶43] From when he was born, Prince Vipassī had the power of clairvoyance which manifested as a result of past deeds, by which he could see for a league all around both by day and by night.
> Pali: Jātassa kho pana, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa kammavipākajaṁ dibbacakkhu pāturahosi yena sudaṁ samantā yojanaṁ passati divā ceva rattiñca.
[¶44] And he was unblinkingly watchful, like the gods of the thirty-three. And because it was said that he was unblinkingly watchful, he came to be known as ‘Vipassī’.
> Pali: Jāto kho pana, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro animisanto pekkhati seyyathāpi devā tāvatiṁsā. ‘Animisanto kumāro pekkhatī’ti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa ‘vipassī vipassī’ tveva samaññā udapādi.
[¶45] Then while King Bandhumā was sitting in court, he’d sit Prince Vipassī in his lap and explain the case to him. And sitting there in his father’s lap, Vipassī would thoroughly consider the case and draw a conclusion using a logical system. So this was all the more reason for him to be known as ‘Vipassī’.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā atthakaraṇe nisinno vipassiṁ kumāraṁ aṅke nisīdāpetvā atthe anusāsati. Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro pituaṅke nisinno viceyya viceyya atthe panāyati ñāyena. Viceyya viceyya kumāro atthe panāyati ñāyenāti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa bhiyyoso mattāya ‘vipassī vipassī’ tveva samaññā udapādi.
[¶46] Then King Bandhumā had three stilt longhouses built for him—one for the winter, one for the summer, and one for the rainy season, and provided him with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. Prince Vipassī stayed in a stilt longhouse without coming downstairs for the four months of the rainy season, where he was entertained by musicians—none of them men.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā vipassissa kumārassa tayo pāsāde kārāpesi, ekaṁ vassikaṁ ekaṁ hemantikaṁ ekaṁ gimhikaṁ; pañca kāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpesi. Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro vassike pāsāde cattāro māse nippurisehi tūriyehi paricārayamāno na heṭṭhāpāsādaṁ orohatīti.
[¶47] The first recitation section.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro.
[¶48] 5. The Old Man
> Pali: 5. Jiṇṇapurisa
[¶49] Then, after many years, many hundred years, many thousand years had passed, Prince Vipassī addressed his charioteer, ‘My dear charioteer, harness the finest chariots. We will go to a park and see the scenery.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘yojehi, samma sārathi, bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni uyyānabhūmiṁ gacchāma subhūmidassanāyā’ti.
[¶50] ‘Yes, sir,’ replied the charioteer. He harnessed the chariots and informed the prince, ‘Your Majesty, the finest chariots are harnessed. Please go at your convenience.’ Then Prince Vipassī mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out for the park.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojetvā vipassissa kumārassa paṭivedesi: ‘yuttāni kho te, deva, bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyāsi.
[¶51] Along the way he saw an elderly man, bent double, crooked, leaning on a staff, trembling as he walked, ailing, past his prime. He addressed his charioteer, ‘My dear charioteer, what has that man done? For his hair and his body are unlike those of other men.’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto purisaṁ jiṇṇaṁ gopānasivaṅkaṁ bhoggaṁ daṇḍaparāyanaṁ pavedhamānaṁ gacchantaṁ āturaṁ gatayobbanaṁ. Disvā sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ pana, samma sārathi, puriso kiṅkato? Kesāpissa na yathā aññesaṁ, kāyopissa na yathā aññesan’ti.
[¶52] ‘That, Your Majesty, is called an old man.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, jiṇṇo nāmā’ti.
[¶53] ‘But why is he called an old man?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ paneso, samma sārathi, jiṇṇo nāmā’ti?
[¶54] ‘He’s called an old man because now he has not long to live.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, jiṇṇo nāma. Na dāni tena ciraṁ jīvitabbaṁ bhavissatī’ti.
[¶55] ‘But my dear charioteer, am I liable to grow old? Am I not exempt from old age?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, ahampi jarādhammo, jaraṁ anatīto’ti?
[¶56] ‘Everyone is liable to grow old, Your Majesty, including you. No one is exempt from old age.’
> Pali: ‘Tvañca, deva, mayañcamha sabbe jarādhammā, jaraṁ anatītā’ti.
[¶57] ‘Well then, my dear charioteer, that’s enough of the park for today. Let’s return to the royal compound.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma sārathi, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā. Itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhī’ti.
[¶58] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the charioteer and did so.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsi.
[¶59] Back at the royal compound, the prince brooded, miserable and sad: ‘Curse this thing called rebirth, since old age will come to anyone who’s born.’
> Pali: Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro antepuraṁ gato dukkhī dummano pajjhāyati: ‘dhiratthu kira, bho, jāti nāma, yatra hi nāma jātassa jarā paññāyissatī’ti.
[¶60] Then King Bandhumā summoned the charioteer and said, ‘My dear charioteer, I hope the prince enjoyed himself at the park? I hope he was happy there?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā sārathiṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘kacci, samma sārathi, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā abhiramittha? Kacci, samma sārathi, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā attamano ahosī’ti?
[¶61] ‘No, Your Majesty, the prince didn’t enjoy himself at the park.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā abhiramittha, na kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā attamano ahosī’ti.
[¶62] ‘But what did he see on the way to the park?’ And the charioteer told the king about seeing the old man and the prince’s reaction.
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, addasa kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto’ti? ‘Addasā kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto purisaṁ jiṇṇaṁ gopānasivaṅkaṁ bhoggaṁ daṇḍaparāyanaṁ pavedhamānaṁ gacchantaṁ āturaṁ gatayobbanaṁ. Disvā maṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ pana, samma sārathi, puriso kiṅkato, kesāpissa na yathā aññesaṁ, kāyopissa na yathā aññesan”ti? “Eso kho, deva, jiṇṇo nāmā”ti. “Kiṁ paneso, samma sārathi, jiṇṇo nāmā”ti? “Eso kho, deva, jiṇṇo nāma na dāni tena ciraṁ jīvitabbaṁ bhavissatī”ti. “Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, ahampi jarādhammo, jaraṁ anatīto”ti? “Tvañca, deva, mayañcamha sabbe jarādhammā, jaraṁ anatītā”ti.
[¶63] > Pali: “Tena hi, samma sārathi, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā, itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhī”ti. “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho ahaṁ, deva, vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsiṁ. So kho, deva, kumāro antepuraṁ gato dukkhī dummano pajjhāyati: “dhiratthu kira, bho, jāti nāma, yatra hi nāma jātassa jarā paññāyissatī”’ti.
[¶64] 6. The Sick Man
> Pali: 6. Byādhitapurisa
[¶65] Then King Bandhumā thought, ‘Prince Vipassī must not renounce the throne. He must not go forth from the lay life to homelessness. And the words of the brahmin soothsayers must not come true.’ To this end he provided the prince with even more of the five kinds of sensual stimulation, with which the prince amused himself.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumassa rañño etadahosi: ‘Mā heva kho vipassī kumāro na rajjaṁ kāresi, mā heva vipassī kumāro agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji, mā heva nemittānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ assa vacanan’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā vipassissa kumārassa bhiyyoso mattāya pañca kāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpesi: ‘yathā vipassī kumāro rajjaṁ kareyya, yathā vipassī kumāro na agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyya, yathā nemittānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ micchā assa vacanan’ti. Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti.
[¶66] Then, after many thousand years had passed, Prince Vipassī had his charioteer drive him to the park once more.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ …pe…
[¶67] Along the way he saw a man who was sick, suffering, gravely ill, collapsed in his own urine and feces, being picked up by some and put down by others. He addressed his charioteer, ‘My dear charioteer, what has that man done? For his eyes and his voice are unlike those of other men.’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto purisaṁ ābādhikaṁ dukkhitaṁ bāḷhagilānaṁ sake muttakarīse palipannaṁ semānaṁ aññehi vuṭṭhāpiyamānaṁ aññehi saṁvesiyamānaṁ. Disvā sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ pana, samma sārathi, puriso kiṅkato? Akkhīnipissa na yathā aññesaṁ, saropissa na yathā aññesan’ti?
[¶68] ‘That, Your Majesty, is called a sick man.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, byādhito nāmā’ti.
[¶69] ‘But why is he called a sick man?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ paneso, samma sārathi, byādhito nāmā’ti?
[¶70] ‘He’s called a sick man; hopefully he will recover from that illness.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, byādhito nāma appeva nāma tamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhaheyyā’ti.
[¶71] ‘But my dear charioteer, am I liable to fall sick? Am I not exempt from sickness?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, ahampi byādhidhammo, byādhiṁ anatīto’ti?
[¶72] ‘Everyone is liable to fall sick, Your Majesty, including you. No one is exempt from sickness.’
> Pali: ‘Tvañca, deva, mayañcamha sabbe byādhidhammā, byādhiṁ anatītā’ti.
[¶73] ‘Well then, my dear charioteer, that’s enough of the park for today. Let’s return to the royal compound.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma sārathi, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā, itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhī’ti.
[¶74] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the charioteer and did so.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsi.
[¶75] Back at the royal compound, the prince brooded, miserable and sad: ‘Curse this thing called rebirth, since old age and sickness will come to anyone who’s born.’
> Pali: Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro antepuraṁ gato dukkhī dummano pajjhāyati: ‘dhiratthu kira, bho, jāti nāma, yatra hi nāma jātassa jarā paññāyissati, byādhi paññāyissatī’ti.
[¶76] Then King Bandhumā summoned the charioteer and said, ‘My dear charioteer, I hope the prince enjoyed himself at the park? I hope he was happy there?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā sārathiṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘kacci, samma sārathi, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā abhiramittha, kacci, samma sārathi, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā attamano ahosī’ti?
[¶77] ‘No, Your Majesty, the prince didn’t enjoy himself at the park.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā abhiramittha, na kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā attamano ahosī’ti.
[¶78] ‘But what did he see on the way to the park?’ And the charioteer told the king about seeing the sick man and the prince’s reaction.
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, addasa kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto’ti? ‘Addasā kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto purisaṁ ābādhikaṁ dukkhitaṁ bāḷhagilānaṁ sake muttakarīse palipannaṁ semānaṁ aññehi vuṭṭhāpiyamānaṁ aññehi saṁvesiyamānaṁ. Disvā maṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ pana, samma sārathi, puriso kiṅkato, akkhīnipissa na yathā aññesaṁ, saropissa na yathā aññesan”ti? “Eso kho, deva, byādhito nāmā”ti. “Kiṁ paneso, samma sārathi, byādhito nāmā”ti? “Eso kho, deva, byādhito nāma appeva nāma tamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhaheyyā”ti. “Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, ahampi byādhidhammo, byādhiṁ anatīto”ti? “Tvañca, deva, mayañcamha sabbe byādhidhammā, byādhiṁ anatītā”ti. “Tena hi, samma sārathi, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā, itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhī”ti. “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho ahaṁ, deva, vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsiṁ. So kho, deva, kumāro antepuraṁ gato dukkhī dummano pajjhāyati: “dhiratthu kira, bho, jāti nāma, yatra hi nāma jātassa jarā paññāyissati, byādhi paññāyissatī”’ti.
[¶79] 7. The Dead Man
> Pali: 7. Kālaṅkatapurisa
[¶80] Then King Bandhumā thought, ‘Prince Vipassī must not renounce the throne. He must not go forth from the lay life to homelessness. And the words of the brahmin soothsayers must not come true.’ To this end he provided the prince with even more of the five kinds of sensual stimulation, with which the prince amused himself.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumassa rañño etadahosi: ‘mā heva kho vipassī kumāro na rajjaṁ kāresi, mā heva vipassī kumāro agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji, mā heva nemittānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ assa vacanan’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā vipassissa kumārassa bhiyyoso mattāya pañca kāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpesi: ‘yathā vipassī kumāro rajjaṁ kareyya, yathā vipassī kumāro na agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyya, yathā nemittānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ micchā assa vacanan’ti. Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti.
[¶81] Then, after many thousand years had passed, Prince Vipassī had his charioteer drive him to the park once more.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ …pe…
[¶82] Along the way he saw a large crowd gathered making a bier out of garments of different colors. He addressed his charioteer, ‘My dear charioteer, why is that crowd making a bier?’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto mahājanakāyaṁ sannipatitaṁ nānārattānañca dussānaṁ vilātaṁ kayiramānaṁ. Disvā sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘kiṁ nu kho so, samma sārathi, mahājanakāyo sannipatito nānārattānañca dussānaṁ vilātaṁ kayiratī’ti?
[¶83] ‘That, Your Majesty, is for someone who’s departed.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, kālaṅkato nāmā’ti.
[¶84] ‘Well then, drive the chariot up to the departed.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma sārathi, yena so kālaṅkato tena rathaṁ pesehī’ti.
[¶85] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the charioteer, and did so.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā yena so kālaṅkato tena rathaṁ pesesi.
[¶86] When the prince saw the corpse of the departed, he addressed the charioteer, ‘But why is he called departed?’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro petaṁ kālaṅkataṁ, disvā sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘kiṁ panāyaṁ, samma sārathi, kālaṅkato nāmā’ti?
[¶87] ‘He’s called departed because now his mother and father, his relatives and kin shall see him no more, and he shall never again see them.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, kālaṅkato nāma. Na dāni taṁ dakkhanti mātā vā pitā vā aññe vā ñātisālohitā, sopi na dakkhissati mātaraṁ vā pitaraṁ vā aññe vā ñātisālohite’ti.
[¶88] ‘But my dear charioteer, am I liable to die? Am I not exempt from death? Will the king and queen and my other relatives and kin see me no more? And shall I never again see them?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, ahampi maraṇadhammo maraṇaṁ anatīto; mampi na dakkhanti devo vā devī vā aññe vā ñātisālohitā; ahampi na dakkhissāmi devaṁ vā deviṁ vā aññe vā ñātisālohite’ti?
[¶89] ‘Everyone is liable to die, Your Majesty, including you. No one is exempt from death. The king and queen and your other relatives and kin shall see you no more, and you shall never again see them.’
> Pali: ‘Tvañca, deva, mayañcamha sabbe maraṇadhammā maraṇaṁ anatītā; tampi na dakkhanti devo vā devī vā aññe vā ñātisālohitā; tvampi na dakkhissasi devaṁ vā deviṁ vā aññe vā ñātisālohite’ti.
[¶90] ‘Well then, my dear charioteer, that’s enough of the park for today. Let’s return to the royal compound.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, samma sārathi, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā, itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhī’ti.
[¶91] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the charioteer and did so.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsi.
[¶92] Back at the royal compound, the prince brooded, miserable and sad: ‘Curse this thing called rebirth, since old age, sickness, and death will come to anyone who’s born.’
> Pali: Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro antepuraṁ gato dukkhī dummano pajjhāyati: ‘dhiratthu kira, bho, jāti nāma, yatra hi nāma jātassa jarā paññāyissati, byādhi paññāyissati, maraṇaṁ paññāyissatī’ti.
[¶93] Then King Bandhumā summoned the charioteer and said, ‘My dear charioteer, I hope the prince enjoyed himself at the park? I hope he was happy there?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā sārathiṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘kacci, samma sārathi, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā abhiramittha, kacci, samma sārathi, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā attamano ahosī’ti?
[¶94] ‘No, Your Majesty, the prince didn’t enjoy himself at the park.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā abhiramittha, na kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiyā attamano ahosī’ti.
[¶95] ‘But what did he see on the way to the park?’ And the charioteer told the king about seeing the dead man and the prince’s reaction.
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, addasa kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto’ti? ‘Addasā kho, deva, kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto mahājanakāyaṁ sannipatitaṁ nānārattānañca dussānaṁ vilātaṁ kayiramānaṁ. Disvā maṁ etadavoca: “kiṁ nu kho so, samma sārathi, mahājanakāyo sannipatito nānārattānañca dussānaṁ vilātaṁ kayiratī”ti? “Eso kho, deva, kālaṅkato nāmā”ti. “Tena hi, samma sārathi, yena so kālaṅkato tena rathaṁ pesehī”ti. “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho ahaṁ, deva, vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā yena so kālaṅkato tena rathaṁ pesesiṁ. Addasā kho, deva, kumāro petaṁ kālaṅkataṁ, disvā maṁ etadavoca: “kiṁ panāyaṁ, samma sārathi, kālaṅkato nāmā”ti? “Eso kho, deva, kālaṅkato nāma. Na dāni taṁ dakkhanti mātā vā pitā vā aññe vā ñātisālohitā, sopi na dakkhissati mātaraṁ vā pitaraṁ vā aññe vā ñātisālohite”ti. “Kiṁ pana, samma sārathi, ahampi maraṇadhammo maraṇaṁ anatīto; mampi na dakkhanti devo vā devī vā aññe vā ñātisālohitā; ahampi na dakkhissāmi devaṁ vā deviṁ vā aññe vā ñātisālohite”ti? “Tvañca, deva, mayañcamha sabbe maraṇadhammā maraṇaṁ anatītā; tampi na dakkhanti devo vā devī vā aññe vā ñātisālohitā, tvampi na dakkhissasi devaṁ vā deviṁ vā aññe vā ñātisālohite”ti. “Tena hi, samma sārathi, alaṁ dānajja uyyānabhūmiyā, itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhī”ti. “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho ahaṁ, deva, vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsiṁ. So kho, deva, kumāro antepuraṁ gato dukkhī dummano pajjhāyati: “dhiratthu kira, bho, jāti nāma, yatra hi nāma jātassa jarā paññāyissati, byādhi paññāyissati, maraṇaṁ paññāyissatī”’ti.
[¶96] 8. The Renunciate
> Pali: 8. Pabbajita
[¶97] Then King Bandhumā thought, ‘Prince Vipassī must not renounce the throne. He must not go forth from the lay life to homelessness. And the words of the brahmin soothsayers must not come true.’ To this end he provided the prince with even more of the five kinds of sensual stimulation, with which the prince amused himself.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumassa rañño etadahosi: ‘mā heva kho vipassī kumāro na rajjaṁ kāresi, mā heva vipassī kumāro agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji, mā heva nemittānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ assa vacanan’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, bandhumā rājā vipassissa kumārassa bhiyyoso mattāya pañca kāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpesi: ‘yathā vipassī kumāro rajjaṁ kareyya, yathā vipassī kumāro na agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajeyya, yathā nemittānaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ micchā assa vacanan’ti. Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti.
[¶98] Then, after many thousand years had passed, Prince Vipassī had his charioteer drive him to the park once more.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bahūnaṁ vassānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘yojehi, samma sārathi, bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni, uyyānabhūmiṁ gacchāma subhūmidassanāyā’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojetvā vipassissa kumārassa paṭivedesi: ‘yuttāni kho te, deva, bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyāsi.
[¶99] Along the way he saw a man, a renunciate with shaven head, wearing an ocher robe. He addressed his charioteer, ‘My dear charioteer, what has that man done? For his head and his clothes are unlike those of other men.’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyanto purisaṁ bhaṇḍuṁ pabbajitaṁ kāsāyavasanaṁ. Disvā sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ pana, samma sārathi, puriso kiṅkato? Sīsampissa na yathā aññesaṁ, vatthānipissa na yathā aññesan’ti?
[¶100] ‘That, Your Majesty, is called a renunciate.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, pabbajito nāmā’ti.
[¶101] ‘But why is he called a renunciate?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ paneso, samma sārathi, pabbajito nāmā’ti?
[¶102] ‘He is called a renunciate because he celebrates principled and fair conduct, skillful actions, good deeds, harmlessness, and sympathy for living creatures.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, deva, pabbajito nāma sādhu dhammacariyā sādhu samacariyā sādhu kusalakiriyā sādhu puññakiriyā sādhu avihiṁsā sādhu bhūtānukampā’ti.
## 25. DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/25/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/25/#p-N
[¶0] ‘Then I celebrate the one called a renunciate, who celebrates principled and fair conduct, skillful actions, good deeds, harmlessness, and sympathy for living creatures! Well then, drive the chariot up to that renunciate.’
> Pali: ‘Sādhu kho so, samma sārathi, pabbajito nāma, sādhu dhammacariyā sādhu samacariyā sādhu kusalakiriyā sādhu puññakiriyā sādhu avihiṁsā sādhu bhūtānukampā. Tena hi, samma sārathi, yena so pabbajito tena rathaṁ pesehī’ti.
[¶1] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the charioteer, and did so.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā yena so pabbajito tena rathaṁ pesesi.
[¶2] Then Prince Vipassī said to that renunciate, ‘My dear, what have you done? For your head and your clothes are unlike those of other men.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro taṁ pabbajitaṁ etadavoca: ‘tvaṁ pana, samma, kiṅkato, sīsampi te na yathā aññesaṁ, vatthānipi te na yathā aññesan’ti?
[¶3] ‘Your Majesty, I am what is called a renunciate.’
> Pali: ‘Ahaṁ kho, deva, pabbajito nāmā’ti.
[¶4] ‘But why are you called a renunciate?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, samma, pabbajito nāmā’ti?
[¶5] ‘I am called a renunciate because I celebrate principled and fair conduct, skillful actions, good deeds, harmlessness, and sympathy for living creatures.’
> Pali: ‘Ahaṁ kho, deva, pabbajito nāma, sādhu dhammacariyā sādhu samacariyā sādhu kusalakiriyā sādhu puññakiriyā sādhu avihiṁsā sādhu bhūtānukampā’ti.
[¶6] ‘Then I celebrate the one called a renunciate, who celebrates principled and fair conduct, skillful actions, good deeds, harmlessness, and sympathy for living creatures!’
> Pali: ‘Sādhu kho tvaṁ, samma, pabbajito nāma sādhu dhammacariyā sādhu samacariyā sādhu kusalakiriyā sādhu puññakiriyā sādhu avihiṁsā sādhu bhūtānukampā’ti.
[¶7] 9. The Going Forth
> Pali: 9. Bodhisattapabbajjā
[¶8] Then the prince addressed the charioteer, ‘Well then, my dear charioteer, take the chariot and return to the royal compound. I shall shave off my hair and beard right here, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī kumāro sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘tena hi, samma sārathi, rathaṁ ādāya itova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāhi. Ahaṁ pana idheva kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmī’ti.
[¶9] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the charioteer and did so.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, sārathi vipassissa kumārassa paṭissutvā rathaṁ ādāya tatova antepuraṁ paccaniyyāsi.
[¶10] Then Prince Vipassī shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Vipassī pana kumāro tattheva kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji.
[¶11] 10. A Great Crowd Goes Forth
> Pali: 10. Mahājanakāyaanupabbajjā
[¶12] A large crowd of 84,000 people in the capital of Bandhumatī heard that Vipassī had gone forth. It occurred to them, ‘This must be no ordinary teaching and training, no ordinary going forth in which Prince Vipassī has gone forth. If even the prince goes forth, why don’t we do the same?’
> Pali: Assosi kho, bhikkhave, bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā mahājanakāyo caturāsītipāṇasahassāni: ‘vipassī kira kumāro kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito’ti. Sutvāna tesaṁ etadahosi: ‘na hi nūna so orako dhammavinayo, na sā orakā pabbajjā, yattha vipassī kumāro kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito. Vipassīpi nāma kumāro kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissati, kimaṅgaṁ pana mayan’ti.
[¶13] Then that great crowd of 84,000 people shaved off their hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and followed the one intent on awakening, Vipassī, by going forth from the lay life to homelessness. Escorted by that assembly, Vipassī wandered on tour among the villages, towns, and capital cities.
> Pali: Atha kho, so bhikkhave, mahājanakāyo caturāsītipāṇasahassāni kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā vipassiṁ bodhisattaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitaṁ anupabbajiṁsu. Tāya sudaṁ, bhikkhave, parisāya parivuto vipassī bodhisatto gāmanigamajanapadarājadhānīsu cārikaṁ carati.
[¶14] Then as he was in private retreat this thought came to his mind, ‘It’s not appropriate for me to live in a crowd. Why don’t I live alone, withdrawn from the group?’ After some time he withdrew from the group to live alone. The 84,000 went one way, but Vipassī went another.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ yohaṁ ākiṇṇo viharāmi, yannūnāhaṁ eko gaṇamhā vūpakaṭṭho vihareyyan’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bodhisatto aparena samayena eko gaṇamhā vūpakaṭṭho vihāsi, aññeneva tāni caturāsītipabbajitasahassāni agamaṁsu, aññena maggena vipassī bodhisatto.
[¶15] 11. Vipassī’s Reflections
> Pali: 11. Bodhisattaabhinivesa
[¶16] Then as Vipassī, the one intent on awakening, was in private retreat in his dwelling, this thought came to his mind, ‘Alas, this world has fallen into trouble. It’s born, grows old, dies, passes away, and is reborn, yet it doesn’t understand how to escape from this suffering, from old age and death. Oh, when will an escape be found from this suffering, from old age and death?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa vāsūpagatassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘kicchaṁ vatāyaṁ loko āpanno, jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca upapajjati ca, atha ca panimassa dukkhassa nissaraṇaṁ nappajānāti jarāmaraṇassa, kudāssu nāma imassa dukkhassa nissaraṇaṁ paññāyissati jarāmaraṇassā’ti?
[¶17] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there old age and death? What is a requirement for old age and death?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When rebirth exists there’s old age and death. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati jarāmaraṇaṁ hoti, kiṁpaccayā jarāmaraṇan’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇaṁ hoti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan’ti.
[¶18] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there rebirth? What is a requirement for rebirth?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When continued existence exists there’s rebirth. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati jāti hoti, kiṁpaccayā jātī’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘bhave kho sati jāti hoti, bhavapaccayā jātī’ti.
[¶19] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there continued existence? What is a requirement for continued existence?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When grasping exists there’s continued existence. Grasping is a requirement for continued existence.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati bhavo hoti, kiṁpaccayā bhavo’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘upādāne kho sati bhavo hoti, upādānapaccayā bhavo’ti.
[¶20] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there grasping? What is a requirement for grasping?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When craving exists there’s grasping. Craving is a requirement for grasping.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati upādānaṁ hoti, kiṁpaccayā upādānan’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘taṇhāya kho sati upādānaṁ hoti, taṇhāpaccayā upādānan’ti.
[¶21] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there craving? What is a requirement for craving?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When feeling exists there’s craving. Feeling is a requirement for craving.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati taṇhā hoti, kiṁpaccayā taṇhā’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘vedanāya kho sati taṇhā hoti, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’ti.
[¶22] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there feeling? What is a requirement for feeling?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When contact exists there’s feeling. Contact is a requirement for feeling.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati vedanā hoti, kiṁpaccayā vedanā’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘phasse kho sati vedanā hoti, phassapaccayā vedanā’ti.
[¶23] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there contact? What is a requirement for contact?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When the six sense fields exist there’s contact. The six sense fields are requirements for contact.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati phasso hoti, kiṁpaccayā phasso’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘saḷāyatane kho sati phasso hoti, saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’ti.
[¶24] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists are there the six sense fields? What is a requirement for the six sense fields?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When name and form exist there are the six sense fields. Name and form are requirements for the six sense fields.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati saḷāyatanaṁ hoti, kiṁpaccayā saḷāyatanan’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘nāmarūpe kho sati saḷāyatanaṁ hoti, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanan’ti.
[¶25] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists are there name and form? What is a requirement for name and form?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When consciousness exists there are name and form. Consciousness is a requirement for name and form.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati nāmarūpaṁ hoti, kiṁpaccayā nāmarūpan’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘viññāṇe kho sati nāmarūpaṁ hoti, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpan’ti.
[¶26] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what exists is there consciousness? What is a requirement for consciousness?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When name and form exist there’s consciousness. Name and form are requirements for consciousness.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho sati viññāṇaṁ hoti, kiṁpaccayā viññāṇan’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇaṁ hoti, nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇan’ti.
[¶27] Then Vipassī thought, ‘This consciousness turns back from name and form, and doesn’t go beyond that.’ This is the extent to which one may be reborn, grow old, die, pass away, or reappear. That is: Name and form are requirements for consciousness. Consciousness is a requirement for name and form. Name and form are requirements for the six sense fields. The six sense fields are requirements for contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. Craving is a requirement for grasping. Grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘paccudāvattati kho idaṁ viññāṇaṁ nāmarūpamhā, nāparaṁ gacchati. Ettāvatā jāyetha vā jiyyetha vā miyyetha vā cavetha vā upapajjetha vā, yadidaṁ nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṁ, saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti’.
[¶28] ‘Origination, origination.’ Such was the vision, knowledge, wisdom, realization, and light that arose in Vipassī, the one intent on awakening, regarding teachings not learned before from another.
> Pali: ‘Samudayo samudayo’ti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṁ udapādi, ñāṇaṁ udapādi, paññā udapādi, vijjā udapādi, āloko udapādi.
[¶29] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no old age and death? When what ceases do old age and death cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When rebirth doesn’t exist there’s no old age and death. When rebirth ceases, old age and death cease.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati jarāmaraṇaṁ na hoti, kissa nirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘jātiyā kho asati jarāmaraṇaṁ na hoti, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇanirodho’ti.
[¶30] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no rebirth? When what ceases does rebirth cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When continued existence doesn’t exist there’s no rebirth. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati jāti na hoti, kissa nirodhā jātinirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘bhave kho asati jāti na hoti, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho’ti.
[¶31] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no continued existence? When what ceases does continued existence cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When grasping doesn’t exist there’s no continued existence. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati bhavo na hoti, kissa nirodhā bhavanirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘upādāne kho asati bhavo na hoti, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho’ti.
[¶32] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no grasping? When what ceases does grasping cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When craving doesn’t exist there’s no grasping. When craving ceases, grasping ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati upādānaṁ na hoti, kissa nirodhā upādānanirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘taṇhāya kho asati upādānaṁ na hoti, taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho’ti.
[¶33] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no craving? When what ceases does craving cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When feeling doesn’t exist there’s no craving. When feeling ceases, craving ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati taṇhā na hoti, kissa nirodhā taṇhānirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘vedanāya kho asati taṇhā na hoti, vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho’ti.
[¶34] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no feeling? When what ceases does feeling cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When contact doesn’t exist there’s no feeling. When contact ceases, feeling ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati vedanā na hoti, kissa nirodhā vedanānirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘phasse kho asati vedanā na hoti, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho’ti.
[¶35] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no contact? When what ceases does contact cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When the six sense fields don’t exist there’s no contact. When the six sense fields cease, contact ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati phasso na hoti, kissa nirodhā phassanirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘saḷāyatane kho asati phasso na hoti, saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho’ti.
[¶36] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist are there no six sense fields? When what ceases do the six sense fields cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When name and form don’t exist there are no six sense fields. When name and form cease, the six sense fields cease.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati saḷāyatanaṁ na hoti, kissa nirodhā saḷāyatananirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘nāmarūpe kho asati saḷāyatanaṁ na hoti, nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho’ti.
[¶37] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist are there no name and form? When what ceases do name and form cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When consciousness doesn’t exist there are no name and form. When consciousness ceases, name and form cease.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati nāmarūpaṁ na hoti, kissa nirodhā nāmarūpanirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘viññāṇe kho asati nāmarūpaṁ na hoti, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho’ti.
[¶38] Then Vipassī thought, ‘When what doesn’t exist is there no consciousness? When what ceases does consciousness cease?’ Then, through rational application of mind, Vipassī penetrated with wisdom, ‘When name and form don’t exist there’s no consciousness. When name and form cease, consciousness ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘kimhi nu kho asati viññāṇaṁ na hoti, kissa nirodhā viññāṇanirodho’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo: ‘nāmarūpe kho asati viññāṇaṁ na hoti, nāmarūpanirodhā viññāṇanirodho’ti.
[¶39] Then Vipassī thought, ‘I have discovered the path to awakening. That is: When name and form cease, consciousness ceases. When consciousness ceases, name and form cease. When name and form cease, the six sense fields cease. When the six sense fields cease, contact ceases. When contact ceases, feeling ceases. When feeling ceases, craving ceases. When craving ceases, grasping ceases. When grasping ceases, continued existence ceases. When continued existence ceases, rebirth ceases. When rebirth ceases, old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress cease. That is how this entire mass of suffering ceases.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa etadahosi: ‘adhigato kho myāyaṁ maggo sambodhāya yadidaṁ— nāmarūpanirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho, nāmarūpanirodhā saḷāyatananirodho, saḷāyatananirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho, vedanānirodhā taṇhānirodho, taṇhānirodhā upādānanirodho, upādānanirodhā bhavanirodho, bhavanirodhā jātinirodho, jātinirodhā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā nirujjhanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti’.
[¶40] ‘Cessation, cessation.’ Such was the vision, knowledge, wisdom, realization, and light that arose in Vipassī, the one intent on awakening, regarding teachings not learned before from another.
> Pali: ‘Nirodho nirodho’ti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bodhisattassa pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṁ udapādi, ñāṇaṁ udapādi, paññā udapādi, vijjā udapādi, āloko udapādi.
[¶41] After some time he meditated observing rise and fall in the five grasping aggregates. ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such is feeling, such is the origin of feeling, such is the disappearance of feeling. Such is perception, such is the origin of perception, such is the disappearance of perception. Such are choices, such is the origin of choices, such is the disappearance of choices. Such is consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’ Meditating like this his mind was soon freed from defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bodhisatto aparena samayena pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu udayabbayānupassī vihāsi: ‘iti rūpaṁ, iti rūpassa samudayo, iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo; iti vedanā, iti vedanāya samudayo, iti vedanāya atthaṅgamo; iti saññā, iti saññāya samudayo, iti saññāya atthaṅgamo; iti saṅkhārā, iti saṅkhārānaṁ samudayo, iti saṅkhārānaṁ atthaṅgamo; iti viññāṇaṁ, iti viññāṇassa samudayo, iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo’ti, tassa pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu udayabbayānupassino viharato na cirasseva anupādāya āsavehi cittaṁ vimuccīti.
[¶42] The second recitation section.
> Pali: Dutiyabhāṇavāro.
[¶43] 12. The Appeal of the Divinity
> Pali: 12. Brahmayācanakathā
[¶44] Then it occurred to the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, ‘Why don’t I teach the Dhamma?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyan’ti.
[¶45] Then he thought, ‘This principle I have discovered is deep, hard to see, hard to understand, peaceful, sublime, beyond the scope of logic, subtle, comprehensible to the astute. But people like clinging, they love it and enjoy it. It’s hard for them to see this topic; that is, specific conditionality, dependent origination. It’s also hard for them to see this topic; that is, the stilling of all activities, the letting go of all attachments, the ending of craving, fading away, cessation, extinguishment. And if I were to teach this principle, others might not understand me, which would be wearying and troublesome for me.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa etadahosi: ‘adhigato kho myāyaṁ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālayarāmā kho panāyaṁ pajā ālayaratā ālayasammuditā. Ālayarāmāya kho pana pajāya ālayaratāya ālayasammuditāya duddasaṁ idaṁ ṭhānaṁ yadidaṁ idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. Idampi kho ṭhānaṁ duddasaṁ yadidaṁ sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ. Ahañceva kho pana dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, pare ca me na ājāneyyuṁ; so mamassa kilamatho, sā mamassa vihesā’ti.
[¶46] And then these verses, which were neither supernaturally inspired, nor learned before in the past, occurred to him:
> Pali: Apissu, bhikkhave, vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṁsu pubbe assutapubbā:
[¶47] ‘I’ve struggled hard to realize this,
there’s no need to reveal it now!
Those mired in greed and hate
can’t really understand this teaching.
> Pali: ‘Kicchena me adhigataṁ,
halaṁ dāni pakāsituṁ;
Rāgadosaparetehi,
nāyaṁ dhammo susambudho.
[¶48] It goes against the stream, subtle,
deep, obscure, and very fine.
Those besotted by greed cannot see,
for they’re cloaked in a mass of darkness.’
> Pali: Paṭisotagāmiṁ nipuṇaṁ,
gambhīraṁ duddasaṁ aṇuṁ;
Rāgarattā na dakkhanti,
tamokhandhena āvuṭā’ti.
[¶49] So, as the Buddha Vipassī reflected like this, his mind inclined to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.
> Pali: Itiha, bhikkhave, vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa paṭisañcikkhato appossukkatāya cittaṁ nami, no dhammadesanāya.
[¶50] Then, knowing the Buddha Vipassī’s train of thought, it occurred to a certain Great Divinity, ‘Oh lord! The world will be lost, the world will perish! For the mind of the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, inclines to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.’ Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, he vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in front of the Buddha Vipassī. He arranged his robe over one shoulder, knelt on his right knee, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha Vipassī, and said, ‘Sir, let the Blessed One teach the Dhamma! Let the Holy One teach the Dhamma! There are beings with little dust in their eyes. They’re in decline because they haven’t heard the teaching. There will be those who understand the teaching!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, aññatarassa mahābrahmuno vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya etadahosi: ‘nassati vata bho loko, vinassati vata bho loko, yatra hi nāma vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa appossukkatāya cittaṁ namati, no dhammadesanāyā’ti. Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahābrahmā seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa purato pāturahosi. Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahābrahmā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā dakkhiṇaṁ jāṇumaṇḍalaṁ pathaviyaṁ nihantvā yena vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘desetu, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṁ, desetu sugato dhammaṁ, santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā; assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro’ti.
[¶51] When he said this, the Buddha Vipassī said to him, ‘I too thought this, Divinity, “Why don’t I teach the Dhamma?” Then it occurred to me, “If I were to teach this principle, others might not understand me, which would be wearying and troublesome for me.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho taṁ mahābrahmānaṁ etadavoca: ‘mayhampi kho, brahme, etadahosi: “yannūnāhaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyan”ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, brahme, etadahosi: “adhigato kho myāyaṁ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho santo paṇīto atakkāvacaro nipuṇo paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālayarāmā kho panāyaṁ pajā ālayaratā ālayasammuditā. Ālayarāmāya kho pana pajāya ālayaratāya ālayasammuditāya duddasaṁ idaṁ ṭhānaṁ yadidaṁ idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. Idampi kho ṭhānaṁ duddasaṁ yadidaṁ sabbasaṅkhārasamatho sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho nibbānaṁ. Ahañceva kho pana dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, pare ca me na ājāneyyuṁ; so mamassa kilamatho, sā mamassa vihesā”ti. Apissu maṁ, brahme, imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṁsu pubbe assutapubbā:
[¶52] > Pali: “Kicchena me adhigataṁ,
halaṁ dāni pakāsituṁ;
Rāgadosaparetehi,
nāyaṁ dhammo susambudho.
[¶53] > Pali: Paṭisotagāmiṁ nipuṇaṁ,
gambhīraṁ duddasaṁ aṇuṁ;
Rāgarattā na dakkhanti,
tamokhandhena āvuṭā”ti.
[¶54] So, as I reflected like this, my mind inclined to remaining passive, not to teaching the Dhamma.’
> Pali: Itiha me, brahme, paṭisañcikkhato appossukkatāya cittaṁ nami, no dhammadesanāyā’ti.
[¶55] For a second time … For a third time that Great Divinity begged the Buddha to teach.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho, bhikkhave, so mahābrahmā …pe… tatiyampi kho, bhikkhave, so mahābrahmā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘desetu, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṁ, desetu sugato dhammaṁ, santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro’ti.
[¶56] Then, understanding the Divinity’s invitation, the Buddha Vipassī surveyed the world with the eye of a Buddha, out of his compassion for sentient beings. And he saw sentient beings with little dust in their eyes, and some with much dust in their eyes; with keen faculties and with weak faculties, with good qualities and with bad qualities, easy to teach and hard to teach. And some of them lived seeing the danger in the fault to do with the next world, while others did not. It’s like a pool with blue water lilies, or pink or white lotuses. Some of them sprout and grow in the water without rising above it, thriving underwater. Some of them sprout and grow in the water reaching the water’s surface. And some of them sprout and grow in the water but rise up above the water and stand with no water clinging to them.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho brahmuno ca ajjhesanaṁ viditvā sattesu ca kāruññataṁ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokesi. Addasā kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante, appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante. Seyyathāpi nāma uppaliniyaṁ vā paduminiyaṁ vā puṇḍarīkiniyaṁ vā appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakānuggatāni anto nimuggaposīni. Appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni samodakaṁ ṭhitāni. Appekaccāni uppalāni vā padumāni vā puṇḍarīkāni vā udake jātāni udake saṁvaḍḍhāni udakā accuggamma ṭhitāni anupalittāni udakena.
[¶57] In the same way, the Buddha Vipassī saw sentient beings with little dust in their eyes, and some with much dust in their eyes.
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho buddhacakkhunā lokaṁ volokento addasa satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye appekacce paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante, appekacce na paralokavajjabhayadassāvine viharante.
[¶58] Then that Great Divinity, knowing the Buddha Vipassī’s train of thought, addressed him in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahābrahmā vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ gāthāhi ajjhabhāsi:
[¶59] ‘Standing high on a rocky mountain,
you can see the people all around.
In just the same way, All-seer, so intelligent,
having ascended the Temple of Truth,
rid of sorrow, look upon the people
swamped with sorrow, overcome by rebirth and old age.
> Pali: ‘Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito,
Yathāpi passe janataṁ samantato;
Tathūpamaṁ dhammamayaṁ sumedha,
Pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhu;
Sokāvatiṇṇaṁ janatamapetasoko,
Avekkhassu jātijarābhibhūtaṁ.
[¶60] Rise, hero! Victor in battle, caravan leader,
wander the world free of debt.
Let the Blessed One teach the Dhamma!
There will be those who understand!’
> Pali: Uṭṭhehi vīra vijitasaṅgāma,
Satthavāha aṇaṇa vicara loke;
Desassu bhagavā dhammaṁ,
Aññātāro bhavissantī’ti.
[¶61] Then the Buddha Vipassī addressed that Great Divinity in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho taṁ mahābrahmānaṁ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi:
[¶62] ‘Flung open are the doors to freedom from death!
Let those with ears to hear commit to faith.
Thinking it would be troublesome, Divinity, I did not teach
the sophisticated, sublime Dhamma among mankind.’
> Pali: ‘Apārutā tesaṁ amatassa dvārā,
Ye sotavanto pamuñcantu saddhaṁ;
Vihiṁsasaññī paguṇaṁ na bhāsiṁ,
Dhammaṁ paṇītaṁ manujesu brahme’ti.
[¶63] Then the Great Divinity, knowing that his request for the Buddha Vipassī to teach the Dhamma had been granted, bowed and respectfully circled him, keeping him on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahābrahmā: ‘katāvakāso khomhi vipassinā bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dhammadesanāyā’ti vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tattheva antaradhāyi.
[¶64] 13. The Chief Disciples
> Pali: 13. Aggasāvakayuga
[¶65] Then it occurred to the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, ‘Who should I teach first of all? Who will quickly understand this teaching?’ Then he thought, ‘That Khaṇḍa, the king’s son, and Tissa, the high priest’s son, are astute, competent, intelligent, and have long had little dust in their eyes. Why don’t I teach them first of all? They will quickly understand this teaching.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa etadahosi: ‘kassa nu kho ahaṁ paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, ko imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissatī’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho khaṇḍo ca rājaputto tisso ca purohitaputto bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā paṭivasanti paṇḍitā viyattā medhāvino dīgharattaṁ apparajakkhajātikā. Yannūnāhaṁ khaṇḍassa ca rājaputtassa, tissassa ca purohitaputtassa paṭhamaṁ dhammaṁ deseyyaṁ, te imaṁ dhammaṁ khippameva ājānissantī’ti.
[¶66] Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, he vanished from the tree of awakening and reappeared near the capital city of Bandhumatī, in the deer park named Sanctuary.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—bodhirukkhamūle antarahito bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā kheme migadāye pāturahosi.
[¶67] Then the Buddha Vipassī addressed the park keeper, ‘My dear park keeper, please enter the city and say this to the king’s son Khaṇḍa and the high priest’s son Tissa: “Sirs, the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, has arrived at Bandhumatī and is staying in the deer park named Sanctuary. He wishes to see you.”’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho dāyapālaṁ āmantesi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, samma dāyapāla, bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ pavisitvā khaṇḍañca rājaputtaṁ tissañca purohitaputtaṁ evaṁ vadehi— vipassī, bhante, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ anuppatto kheme migadāye viharati, so tumhākaṁ dassanakāmo’ti.
[¶68] ‘Yes, sir,’ replied the park keeper, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante’ti kho, bhikkhave, dāyapālo vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa paṭissutvā bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ pavisitvā khaṇḍañca rājaputtaṁ tissañca purohitaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘vipassī, bhante, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ anuppatto kheme migadāye viharati; so tumhākaṁ dassanakāmo’ti.
[¶69] Then the king’s son Khaṇḍa and the high priest’s son Tissa had the finest carriages harnessed. Then they mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out from Bandhumatī for the Sanctuary. They went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the Buddha Vipassī on foot. They bowed and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, khaṇḍo ca rājaputto tisso ca purohitaputto bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā niyyiṁsu. Yena khemo migadāyo tena pāyiṁsu. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā yānā paccorohitvā pattikāva yena vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. upasaṅkamitvā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶70] The Buddha Vipassī taught them step by step, with a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He revealed the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. And when he knew that their minds were ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he revealed the special teaching of the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in the king’s son Khaṇḍa and the high priest’s son Tissa: ‘Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.’
> Pali: Tesaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi, seyyathidaṁ— dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā te bhagavā aññāsi kallacitte muducitte vinīvaraṇacitte udaggacitte pasannacitte, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva khaṇḍassa ca rājaputtassa tissassa ca purohitaputtassa tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: ‘yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman’ti.
[¶71] They saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. They went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. They said to the Buddha Vipassī, ‘Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. We go for refuge to the Blessed One and to the teaching. Sir, may we receive the going forth and ordination in the Buddha’s presence?’
> Pali: Te diṭṭhadhammā pattadhammā viditadhammā pariyogāḷhadhammā tiṇṇavicikicchā vigatakathaṅkathā vesārajjappattā aparappaccayā satthusāsane vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: “cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī”ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca. Labheyyāma mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyāma upasampadan’ti.
[¶72] And they received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha Vipassī’s presence. Then the Buddha Vipassī educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired them with a Dhamma talk. He revealed the drawbacks of conditioned phenomena, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of extinguishment. Being taught like this their minds were soon freed from defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Alatthuṁ kho, bhikkhave, khaṇḍo ca rājaputto, tisso ca purohitaputto vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike pabbajjaṁ alatthuṁ upasampadaṁ. Te vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi; saṅkhārānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nibbāne ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Tesaṁ vipassinā bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dhammiyā kathāya sandassiyamānānaṁ samādapiyamānānaṁ samuttejiyamānānaṁ sampahaṁsiyamānānaṁ nacirasseva anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṁsu.
[¶73] 14. The Going Forth of the Large Crowd
> Pali: 14. Mahājanakāyapabbajjā
[¶74] A large crowd of 84,000 people in the capital of Bandhumatī heard that the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, had arrived at Bandhumatī and was staying in the deer park named Sanctuary. And they heard that the king’s son Khaṇḍa and the high priest’s son Tissa had shaved off their hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and gone forth from the lay life to homelessness in the Buddha’s presence. It occurred to them, ‘This must be no ordinary teaching and training, no ordinary going forth in which the king’s son Khaṇḍa and the high priest’s son Tissa have gone forth. If even they go forth, why don’t we do the same?’ Then those 84,000 people left Bandhumatī for the deer park named Sanctuary, where they approached the Buddha Vipassī, bowed and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Assosi kho, bhikkhave, bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā mahājanakāyo caturāsītipāṇasahassāni: ‘vipassī kira bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ anuppatto kheme migadāye viharati. Khaṇḍo ca kira rājaputto tisso ca purohitaputto vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā’ti. Sutvāna nesaṁ etadahosi: ‘na hi nūna so orako dhammavinayo, na sā orakā pabbajjā, yattha khaṇḍo ca rājaputto tisso ca purohitaputto kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā. Khaṇḍo ca rājaputto tisso ca purohitaputto kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissanti, kimaṅgaṁ pana mayan’ti. Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahājanakāyo caturāsītipāṇasahassāni bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā nikkhamitvā yena khemo migadāyo yena vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
## 26. DN 14 · The Great Discourse on Traces Left Behind · part 4
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/26/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/26/#p-N
[¶0] The Buddha Vipassī taught them step by step, with a talk on giving, ethical conduct, and heaven. He revealed the drawbacks of sensual pleasures, so sordid and corrupt, and the benefit of renunciation. And when he knew that their minds were ready, pliable, rid of hindrances, elated, and confident he revealed the special teaching of the Buddhas: suffering, its origin, its cessation, and the path. Just as a clean cloth rid of stains would properly absorb dye, in that very seat the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in those 84,000 people: ‘Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.’
> Pali: Tesaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi. Seyyathidaṁ—dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā te bhagavā aññāsi kallacitte muducitte vinīvaraṇacitte udaggacitte pasannacitte, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva tesaṁ caturāsītipāṇasahassānaṁ tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: ‘yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman’ti.
[¶1] They saw, attained, understood, and fathomed the Dhamma. They went beyond doubt, got rid of indecision, and became self-assured and independent of others regarding the Teacher’s instructions. They said to the Buddha Vipassī, ‘Excellent, sir! Excellent!’ And just like Khaṇḍa and Tissa they asked for and received ordination. Then the Buddha taught them further.
> Pali: Te diṭṭhadhammā pattadhammā viditadhammā pariyogāḷhadhammā tiṇṇavicikicchā vigatakathaṅkathā vesārajjappattā aparappaccayā satthusāsane vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: “cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī”ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāma mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ labheyyāma upasampadan’ti.
[¶2] Being taught like this their minds were soon freed from defilements by not grasping.
> Pali: Alatthuṁ kho, bhikkhave, tāni caturāsītipāṇasahassāni vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike pabbajjaṁ, alatthuṁ upasampadaṁ. Te vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi; saṅkhārānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nibbāne ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Tesaṁ vipassinā bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dhammiyā kathāya sandassiyamānānaṁ samādapiyamānānaṁ samuttejiyamānānaṁ sampahaṁsiyamānānaṁ nacirasseva anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṁsu.
[¶3] 15. The 84,000 Who Had Gone Forth Previously
> Pali: 15. Purimapabbajitānaṁ dhammābhisamaya
[¶4] The 84,000 people who had gone forth previously also heard: ‘It seems the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, has arrived at Bandhumatī and is staying in the deer park named Sanctuary. And he is teaching the Dhamma!’ Then they too went to the Buddha Vipassī, realized the Dhamma, went forth, and became freed from defilements.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho, bhikkhave, tāni purimāni caturāsītipabbajitasahassāni: ‘vipassī kira bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ anuppatto kheme migadāye viharati, dhammañca kira desetī’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, tāni caturāsītipabbajitasahassāni yena bandhumatī rājadhānī yena khemo migadāyo yena vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶5] > Pali: Tesaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho anupubbiṁ kathaṁ kathesi. Seyyathidaṁ—dānakathaṁ sīlakathaṁ saggakathaṁ kāmānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nekkhamme ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Yadā te bhagavā aññāsi kallacitte muducitte vinīvaraṇacitte udaggacitte pasannacitte, atha yā buddhānaṁ sāmukkaṁsikā dhammadesanā, taṁ pakāsesi— dukkhaṁ samudayaṁ nirodhaṁ maggaṁ. Seyyathāpi nāma suddhaṁ vatthaṁ apagatakāḷakaṁ sammadeva rajanaṁ paṭiggaṇheyya; evameva tesaṁ caturāsītipabbajitasahassānaṁ tasmiṁyeva āsane virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: ‘yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman’ti.
[¶6] > Pali: Te diṭṭhadhammā pattadhammā viditadhammā pariyogāḷhadhammā tiṇṇavicikicchā vigatakathaṅkathā vesārajjappattā aparappaccayā satthusāsane vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: “cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī”ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Ete mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāma dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāma mayaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ labheyyāma upasampadan’ti.
[¶7] > Pali: Alatthuṁ kho, bhikkhave, tāni caturāsītipabbajitasahassāni vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike pabbajjaṁ alatthuṁ upasampadaṁ. Te vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi; saṅkhārānaṁ ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṅkilesaṁ nibbāne ānisaṁsaṁ pakāsesi. Tesaṁ vipassinā bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dhammiyā kathāya sandassiyamānānaṁ samādapiyamānānaṁ samuttejiyamānānaṁ sampahaṁsiyamānānaṁ nacirasseva anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṁsu.
[¶8] 16. The Allowance to Wander
> Pali: 16. Cārikāanujānana
[¶9] Now at that time a large Saṅgha of 6,800,000 mendicants were residing at Bandhumatī. As the Buddha Vipassī was in private retreat this thought came to his mind, ‘The Saṅgha residing at Bandhumatī now is large. What if I was to urge them:
> Pali: Tena kho pana, bhikkhave, samayena bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā mahābhikkhusaṅgho paṭivasati aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘mahā kho etarahi bhikkhusaṅgho bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā paṭivasati aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ, yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhū anujāneyyaṁ:
[¶10] “Wander forth, mendicants, for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans. Let not two go by one road. Teach the Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And reveal a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. There are beings with little dust in their eyes. They’re in decline because they haven’t heard the teaching. There will be those who understand the teaching! But when six years have passed, you must all come to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code.”’
> Pali: “caratha, bhikkhave, cārikaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ; mā ekena dve agamittha; desetha, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsetha. Santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro. Api ca channaṁ channaṁ vassānaṁ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā”’ti.
[¶11] Then a certain Great Divinity, knowing the Buddha Vipassī’s train of thought, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in front of the Buddha Vipassī. He arranged his robe over one shoulder, raised his cupped palms toward the Buddha Vipassī, and said, ‘That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One! The Saṅgha residing at Bandhumatī now is large. Please urge them to wander, as you thought. And sir, I’ll make sure that when six years have passed the mendicants will return to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, aññataro mahābrahmā vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito vipassissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa purato pāturahosi. Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahābrahmā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yena vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ etadavoca: ‘evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Mahā kho, bhante, etarahi bhikkhusaṅgho bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā paṭivasati aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ, anujānātu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhū: “caratha, bhikkhave, cārikaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ; mā ekena dve agamittha; desetha, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsetha. Santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro”ti. Api ca, bhante, mayaṁ tathā karissāma yathā bhikkhū channaṁ channaṁ vassānaṁ accayena bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ upasaṅkamissanti pātimokkhuddesāyā’ti.
[¶12] That is what that Great Divinity said. Then he bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha Vipassī, keeping him on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Idamavoca, bhikkhave, so mahābrahmā. Idaṁ vatvā vipassiṁ bhagavantaṁ arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tattheva antaradhāyi.
[¶13] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha Vipassī came out of retreat and addressed the mendicants, telling them all that had happened. Then he said,
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito bhikkhū āmantesi: ‘idha mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: “mahā kho etarahi bhikkhusaṅgho bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā paṭivasati aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhū anujāneyyaṁ— caratha, bhikkhave, cārikaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ; mā ekena dve agamittha; desetha, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsetha. Santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro. Api ca channaṁ channaṁ vassānaṁ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā”’ti.
[¶14] > Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, aññataro mahābrahmā mama cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito mama purato pāturahosi. Atha kho so, bhikkhave, mahābrahmā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā yenāhaṁ tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Mahā kho, bhante, etarahi bhikkhusaṅgho bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā paṭivasati aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Anujānātu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhū— caratha, bhikkhave, cārikaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ; mā ekena dve agamittha; desetha, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ …pe… santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāroti. Api ca, bhante, mayaṁ tathā karissāma, yathā bhikkhū channaṁ channaṁ vassānaṁ accayena bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ upasaṅkamissanti pātimokkhuddesāyā’ti.
[¶15] > Pali: Idamavoca, bhikkhave, so mahābrahmā. Idaṁ vatvā maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tattheva antaradhāyi.
[¶16] ‘Wander forth, mendicants, for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans. Let not two go by one road. Teach the Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And reveal a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. There are beings with little dust in their eyes. They’re in decline because they haven’t heard the teaching. There will be those who understand the teaching! But when six years have passed, you must all come to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code.’
> Pali: ‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, caratha cārikaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ; mā ekena dve agamittha; desetha, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsetha. Santi sattā apparajakkhajātikā, assavanatā dhammassa parihāyanti, bhavissanti dhammassa aññātāro. Api ca, bhikkhave, channaṁ channaṁ vassānaṁ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’ti.
[¶17] Then most of the mendicants left to wander the country that very day.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhū yebhuyyena ekāheneva janapadacārikaṁ pakkamiṁsu.
[¶18] Now at that time there were 84,000 monasteries in the Black Plum Tree Land. And when the first year came to an end the deities raised the cry: ‘Good fellows, the first year has ended. Now five years are left. When five years have passed, you must all go to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code.’
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena jambudīpe caturāsīti āvāsasahassāni honti. Ekamhi hi vasse nikkhante devatā saddamanussāvesuṁ: ‘nikkhantaṁ kho, mārisā, ekaṁ vassaṁ; pañca dāni vassāni sesāni; pañcannaṁ vassānaṁ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’ti.
[¶19] And when the second year … the third year … the fourth year … the fifth year came to an end, the deities raised the cry: ‘Good fellows, the fifth year has ended. Now one year is left. When one year has passed, you must all go to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code.’
> Pali: Dvīsu vassesu nikkhantesu … tīsu vassesu nikkhantesu … catūsu vassesu nikkhantesu … pañcasu vassesu nikkhantesu devatā saddamanussāvesuṁ: ‘nikkhantāni kho, mārisā, pañcavassāni; ekaṁ dāni vassaṁ sesaṁ; ekassa vassassa accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’ti.
[¶20] And when the sixth year came to an end the deities raised the cry: ‘Good fellows, the sixth year has ended. Now is the time that you must go to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code.’ Then that very day the mendicants went to Bandhumatī to recite the monastic code. Some went by their own psychic power, and some by the psychic power of the deities.
> Pali: Chasu vassesu nikkhantesu devatā saddamanussāvesuṁ: ‘nikkhantāni kho, mārisā, chabbassāni, samayo dāni bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ upasaṅkamituṁ pātimokkhuddesāyā’ti. Atha kho te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū appekacce sakena iddhānubhāvena appekacce devatānaṁ iddhānubhāvena ekāheneva bandhumatiṁ rājadhāniṁ upasaṅkamiṁsu pātimokkhuddesāyāti.
[¶21] And there the Blessed One Vipassī, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, recited the monastic code thus:
> Pali: Tatra sudaṁ, bhikkhave, vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho bhikkhusaṅghe evaṁ pātimokkhaṁ uddisati:
[¶22] ‘Patient acceptance is the ultimate fervor.
Extinguishment is the ultimate, say the Buddhas.
No true renunciate injures another,
nor does an ascetic hurt another.
> Pali: ‘Khantī paramaṁ tapo titikkhā,
Nibbānaṁ paramaṁ vadanti buddhā;
Na hi pabbajito parūpaghātī,
Na samaṇo hoti paraṁ viheṭhayanto.
[¶23] Not to do any evil;
to embrace the good;
to purify one’s mind:
this is the instruction of the Buddhas.
> Pali: Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṁ,
kusalassa upasampadā;
Sacittapariyodapanaṁ,
etaṁ buddhānasāsanaṁ.
[¶24] Not speaking ill nor doing harm;
restraint in the monastic code;
moderation in eating;
staying in remote lodgings;
commitment to the higher mind—
this is the instruction of the Buddhas.’
> Pali: Anūpavādo anūpaghāto,
Pātimokkhe ca saṁvaro;
Mattaññutā ca bhattasmiṁ,
Pantañca sayanāsanaṁ;
Adhicitte ca āyogo,
Etaṁ buddhānasāsanan’ti.
[¶25] 17. Being Informed by Deities
> Pali: 17. Devatārocana
[¶26] This one time, mendicants, I was staying near Ukkaṭṭhā in the Subhaga Forest at the root of a magnificent sal tree. As I was in private retreat this thought came to mind, ‘It’s not easy to find an abode of sentient beings where I haven’t previously abided in all this long time, except the gods of the pure abodes. Why don’t I go to see them?’
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhikkhave, samayaṁ ukkaṭṭhāyaṁ viharāmi subhagavane sālarājamūle. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: ‘na kho so sattāvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvutthapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehi. Yannūnāhaṁ yena suddhāvāsā devā tenupasaṅkameyyan’ti.
[¶27] Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, I vanished from the Subhaga Forest and reappeared with the gods of Aviha.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—ukkaṭṭhāyaṁ subhagavane sālarājamūle antarahito avihesu devesu pāturahosiṁ.
[¶28] In that order of gods, many thousands, many hundreds of thousands of deities approached me, bowed, stood to one side, and said to me, ‘Ninety-one eons ago, good fellow, the Buddha Vipassī arose in the world, perfected and fully awakened. He was born as an aristocrat into an aristocrat family. Koṇḍañña was his clan. He lived for 80,000 years. He was awakened at the root of a patala tree. He had a fine pair of chief disciples named Khaṇḍa and Tissa. He had three gatherings of disciples—one of 6,800,000, one of 100,000, and one of 80,000—all of them mendicants who had ended their defilements. He had as chief attendant a mendicant named Asoka. His father was King Bandhumā, his birth mother was Queen Bandhumatī, and their capital city was named Bandhumatī. And such was his renunciation, such his going forth, such his striving, such his awakening, and such his rolling forth of the Wheel of Dhamma. And good fellow, after leading the spiritual life under that Buddha Vipassī we lost our desire for sensual pleasures and were reborn here.’
> Pali: Tasmiṁ, bhikkhave, devanikāye anekāni devatāsahassāni anekāni devatāsatasahassāni yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho, bhikkhave, tā devatā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘ito so, mārisā, ekanavutikappe yaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Vipassī, mārisā, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosi, khattiyakule udapādi. Vipassī, mārisā, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho koṇḍañño gottena ahosi. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asītivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Vipassī, mārisā, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa khaṇḍatissaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi bhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi asītibhikkhusahassāni. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ime tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asoko nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa bandhumā nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Bandhumatī nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Bandhumassa rañño bandhumatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa evaṁ abhinikkhamanaṁ ahosi evaṁ pabbajjā evaṁ padhānaṁ evaṁ abhisambodhi evaṁ dhammacakkappavattanaṁ. Te mayaṁ, mārisā, vipassimhi bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā kāmesu kāmacchandaṁ virājetvā idhūpapannā’ti …
[¶29] And other deities came and similarly recounted the details of the Buddhas Sikhī, Vessabhū, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana, and Kassapa.
> Pali: pe…
[¶30] In that order of gods, many thousands, many hundreds of thousands of deities approached me, bowed, stood to one side, and said to me, ‘In the present fortunate eon, good fellow, you have arisen in the world, perfected and fully awakened. You were born as an aristocrat into an aristocrat family. Gotama is your clan. For you the lifespan is short, brief, and fleeting. A long life is a hundred years or a little more. You were awakened at the root of a peepal tree. You have a fine pair of chief disciples named Sāriputta and Moggallāna. You have had one gathering of disciples—1,250 mendicants who had ended their defilements. You have as chief attendant a mendicant named Ānanda. Your father was King Suddhodana, your birth mother was Queen Māyā, and your capital city was Kapilavatthu. And such was your renunciation, such your going forth, such your striving, such your awakening, and such your rolling forth of the Wheel of Dhamma. And good fellow, after leading the spiritual life under you we lost our desire for sensual pleasures and were reborn here.’
> Pali: Tasmiṁyeva kho, bhikkhave, devanikāye anekāni devatāsahassāni anekāni devatāsatasahassāni yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho, bhikkhave, tā devatā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘imasmiṁyeva kho, mārisā, bhaddakappe bhagavā etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke uppanno. Bhagavā, mārisā, khattiyo jātiyā khattiyakule uppanno. Bhagavā, mārisā, gotamo gottena. Bhagavato, mārisā, appakaṁ āyuppamāṇaṁ parittaṁ lahukaṁ yo ciraṁ jīvati, so vassasataṁ appaṁ vā bhiyyo. Bhagavā, mārisā, assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho. Bhagavato, mārisā, sāriputtamoggallānaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Bhagavato, mārisā, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni. Bhagavato, mārisā, ayaṁ eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ. Bhagavato, mārisā, ānando nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Bhagavato, mārisā, suddhodano nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Māyā nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Kapilavatthu nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi. Bhagavato, mārisā, evaṁ abhinikkhamanaṁ ahosi evaṁ pabbajjā evaṁ padhānaṁ evaṁ abhisambodhi evaṁ dhammacakkappavattanaṁ. Te mayaṁ, mārisā, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā kāmesu kāmacchandaṁ virājetvā idhūpapannā’ti.
[¶31] Then together with the gods of Aviha I went to see the gods of Atappa … the gods fair to see … and the fair seeing gods. Then together with all these gods I went to see the gods of Akaniṭṭha, where we had a similar conversation.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, avihehi devehi saddhiṁ yena atappā devā tenupasaṅkamiṁ …pe… atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, avihehi ca devehi atappehi ca devehi saddhiṁ yena sudassā devā tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, avihehi ca devehi atappehi ca devehi sudassehi ca devehi saddhiṁ yena sudassī devā tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Atha khvāhaṁ, bhikkhave, avihehi ca devehi atappehi ca devehi sudassehi ca devehi sudassīhi ca devehi saddhiṁ yena akaniṭṭhā devā tenupasaṅkamiṁ. Tasmiṁ, bhikkhave, devanikāye anekāni devatāsahassāni anekāni devatāsatasahassāni yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho, bhikkhave, tā devatā maṁ etadavocuṁ:
[¶32] > Pali: ‘ito so, mārisā, ekanavutikappe yaṁ vipassī bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke udapādi. Vipassī, mārisā, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho khattiyo jātiyā ahosi. Khattiyakule udapādi. Vipassī, mārisā, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho koṇḍañño gottena ahosi. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asītivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ ahosi. Vipassī, mārisā, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa khaṇḍatissaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aṭṭhasaṭṭhibhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi bhikkhusatasahassaṁ. Eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi asītibhikkhusahassāni. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa ime tayo sāvakānaṁ sannipātā ahesuṁ sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa asoko nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko ahosi aggupaṭṭhāko. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa bandhumā nāma rājā pitā ahosi bandhumatī nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Bandhumassa rañño bandhumatī nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi. Vipassissa, mārisā, bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa evaṁ abhinikkhamanaṁ ahosi evaṁ pabbajjā evaṁ padhānaṁ evaṁ abhisambodhi, evaṁ dhammacakkappavattanaṁ. Te mayaṁ, mārisā, vipassimhi bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā kāmesu kāmacchandaṁ virājetvā idhūpapannā’ti. Tasmiṁyeva kho, bhikkhave, devanikāye anekāni devatāsahassāni anekāni devatāsatasahassāni yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho, bhikkhave, tā devatā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘ito so, mārisā, ekatiṁse kappe yaṁ sikhī bhagavā …pe… te mayaṁ, mārisā, sikhimhi bhagavati tasmiññeva kho, mārisā, ekatiṁse kappe yaṁ vessabhū bhagavā …pe… te mayaṁ, mārisā, vessabhumhi bhagavati …pe… imasmiṁyeva kho, mārisā, bhaddakappe kakusandho koṇāgamano kassapo bhagavā …pe… te mayaṁ, mārisā, kakusandhamhi koṇāgamanamhi kassapamhi bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā kāmesu kāmacchandaṁ virājetvā idhūpapannā’ti.
[¶33] > Pali: Tasmiṁyeva kho, bhikkhave, devanikāye anekāni devatāsahassāni anekāni devatāsatasahassāni yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho, bhikkhave, tā devatā maṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘imasmiṁyeva kho, mārisā, bhaddakappe bhagavā etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho loke uppanno. Bhagavā, mārisā, khattiyo jātiyā, khattiyakule uppanno. Bhagavā, mārisā, gotamo gottena. Bhagavato, mārisā, appakaṁ āyuppamāṇaṁ parittaṁ lahukaṁ yo ciraṁ jīvati, so vassasataṁ appaṁ vā bhiyyo. Bhagavā, mārisā, assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho. Bhagavato, mārisā, sāriputtamoggallānaṁ nāma sāvakayugaṁ ahosi aggaṁ bhaddayugaṁ. Bhagavato, mārisā, eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi aḍḍhateḷasāni bhikkhusatāni. Bhagavato, mārisā, ayaṁ eko sāvakānaṁ sannipāto ahosi sabbesaṁyeva khīṇāsavānaṁ. Bhagavato, mārisā, ānando nāma bhikkhu upaṭṭhāko aggupaṭṭhāko ahosi. Bhagavato, mārisā, suddhodano nāma rājā pitā ahosi. Māyā nāma devī mātā ahosi janetti. Kapilavatthu nāma nagaraṁ rājadhānī ahosi. Bhagavato, mārisā, evaṁ abhinikkhamanaṁ ahosi, evaṁ pabbajjā, evaṁ padhānaṁ, evaṁ abhisambodhi, evaṁ dhammacakkappavattanaṁ. Te mayaṁ, mārisā, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā kāmesu kāmacchandaṁ virājetvā idhūpapannā’ti.
[¶34] And that is how the Realized One is able to recollect the birth, names, clans, lifespan, chief disciples, and gatherings of disciples of the Buddhas of the past who have become fully quenched, cut off proliferation, cut off the course, finished off the cycle, and passed beyond all suffering. It is both because I have clearly penetrated the principle of the teachings, and also because the deities told me.”
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassevesā dhammadhātu suppaṭividdhā, yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi. ‘Evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipīti. Devatāpi tathāgatassa etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ, yena tathāgato atīte buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce chinnavaṭume pariyādinnavaṭṭe sabbadukkhavītivatte jātitopi anussarati, nāmatopi anussarati, gottatopi anussarati, āyuppamāṇatopi anussarati, sāvakayugatopi anussarati, sāvakasannipātatopi anussarati ‘evaṁjaccā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipi. ‘Evaṁnāmā evaṅgottā evaṁsīlā evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ’ itipī”ti.
[¶35] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶36] > Pali: Mahāpadānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 27. DN 15 · The Great Discourse on Causation
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/27/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/27/#p-N
[¶0] DN 15 · The Great Discourse on Causation
> Pali: DN 15 · Mahānidānasutta
[¶1] 1. Dependent Origination
> Pali: 1. Paṭiccasamuppāda
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Kurus, near the Kuru town named Kammāsadamma.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṁ nāma kurūnaṁ nigamo.
[¶3] Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing, in that this dependent origination is deep and appears deep, yet to me it seems as plain as can be.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Yāva gambhīro cāyaṁ, bhante, paṭiccasamuppādo gambhīrāvabhāso ca, atha ca pana me uttānakuttānako viya khāyatī”ti.
[¶4] “Don’t say that, Ānanda, don’t say that! This dependent origination is deep and appears deep. It is because of not understanding and not penetrating this teaching that this population has become tangled like string, knotted like a ball of thread, and matted like rushes and reeds, and it doesn’t escape the places of loss, the bad places, the underworld, transmigration.
> Pali: “Mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca, mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca. Gambhīro cāyaṁ, ānanda, paṭiccasamuppādo gambhīrāvabhāso ca. Etassa, ānanda, dhammassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamayaṁ pajā tantākulakajātā kulagaṇṭhikajātā muñjapabbajabhūtā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ saṁsāraṁ nātivattati.
[¶5] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for old age and death?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for old age and death?’ you should answer, ‘Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇan’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā jarāmaraṇan’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶6] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for rebirth?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for rebirth?’ you should answer, ‘Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā jātī’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā jātī’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘bhavapaccayā jātī’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶7] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for continued existence?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for continued existence?’ you should answer, ‘Grasping is a requirement for continued existence.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā bhavo’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā bhavo’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘upādānapaccayā bhavo’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶8] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for grasping?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for grasping?’ you should answer, ‘Craving is a requirement for grasping.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā upādānan’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā upādānan’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘taṇhāpaccayā upādānan’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶9] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for craving?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for craving?’ you should answer, ‘Feeling is a requirement for craving.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā taṇhā’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā taṇhā’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶10] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for feeling?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for feeling?’ you should answer, ‘Contact is a requirement for feeling.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā vedanā’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā vedanā’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘phassapaccayā vedanā’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶11] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for contact?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for contact?’ you should answer, ‘Name and form are requirements for contact.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā phasso’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā phasso’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘nāmarūpapaccayā phasso’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶12] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for name and form?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for name and form?’ you should answer, ‘Consciousness is a requirement for name and form.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā nāmarūpan’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā nāmarūpan’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpan’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶13] When asked, ‘Is there a specific condition for consciousness?’ you should answer, ‘There is.’ If they say, ‘What is a requirement for consciousness?’ you should answer, ‘Name and form are requirements for consciousness.’
> Pali: ‘Atthi idappaccayā viññāṇan’ti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṁ. ‘Kiṁpaccayā viññāṇan’ti iti ce vadeyya, ‘nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇan’ti iccassa vacanīyaṁ.
[¶14] So: name and form are requirements for consciousness. Consciousness is a requirement for name and form. Name and form are requirements for contact. Contact is a requirement for feeling. Feeling is a requirement for craving. Craving is a requirement for grasping. Grasping is a requirement for continued existence. Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth. Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress to come to be. That is how this entire mass of suffering originates.
> Pali: Iti kho, ānanda, nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇaṁ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ, nāmarūpapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
[¶15] ‘Rebirth is a requirement for old age and death’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no rebirth for anyone anywhere. That is, there were no rebirth of sentient beings into their various realms—of gods, centaurs, spirits, creatures, humans, quadrupeds, birds, or reptiles, each into their own realm. When there’s no rebirth at all, with the cessation of rebirth, would old age and death still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ. Jāti ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— devānaṁ vā devattāya, gandhabbānaṁ vā gandhabbattāya, yakkhānaṁ vā yakkhattāya, bhūtānaṁ vā bhūtattāya, manussānaṁ vā manussattāya, catuppadānaṁ vā catuppadattāya, pakkhīnaṁ vā pakkhittāya, sarīsapānaṁ vā sarīsapattāya, tesaṁ tesañca hi, ānanda, sattānaṁ tadattāya jāti nābhavissa. Sabbaso jātiyā asati jātinirodhā api nu kho jarāmaraṇaṁ paññāyethā”ti?
[¶16] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶17] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of old age and death, namely rebirth.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo jarāmaraṇassa, yadidaṁ jāti.
[¶18] ‘Continued existence is a requirement for rebirth’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no continued existence for anyone anywhere. That is, continued existence in the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, or the formless realm. When there’s no continued existence at all, with the cessation of continued existence, would rebirth still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Bhavapaccayā jātī’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā bhavapaccayā jāti. Bhavo ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— kāmabhavo vā rūpabhavo vā arūpabhavo vā, sabbaso bhave asati bhavanirodhā api nu kho jāti paññāyethā”ti?
[¶19] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶20] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of rebirth, namely continued existence.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo jātiyā, yadidaṁ bhavo.
[¶21] ‘Grasping is a requirement for continued existence’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no grasping for anyone anywhere. That is, grasping at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self. When there’s no grasping at all, with the cessation of grasping, would continued existence still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Upādānapaccayā bhavo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā upādānapaccayā bhavo. Upādānañca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— kāmupādānaṁ vā diṭṭhupādānaṁ vā sīlabbatupādānaṁ vā attavādupādānaṁ vā, sabbaso upādāne asati upādānanirodhā api nu kho bhavo paññāyethā”ti?
[¶22] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶23] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of continued existence, namely grasping.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo bhavassa, yadidaṁ upādānaṁ.
[¶24] ‘Craving is a requirement for grasping’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no craving for anyone anywhere. That is, craving for sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas. When there’s no craving at all, with the cessation of craving, would grasping still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Taṇhāpaccayā upādānan’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ. Taṇhā ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— rūpataṇhā saddataṇhā gandhataṇhā rasataṇhā phoṭṭhabbataṇhā dhammataṇhā, sabbaso taṇhāya asati taṇhānirodhā api nu kho upādānaṁ paññāyethā”ti?
[¶25] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶26] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of grasping, namely craving.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo upādānassa, yadidaṁ taṇhā.
[¶27] ‘Feeling is a requirement for craving’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no feeling for anyone anywhere. That is, feeling born of contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. When there’s no feeling at all, with the cessation of feeling, would craving still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā vedanāpaccayā taṇhā. Vedanā ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— cakkhusamphassajā vedanā sotasamphassajā vedanā ghānasamphassajā vedanā jivhāsamphassajā vedanā kāyasamphassajā vedanā manosamphassajā vedanā, sabbaso vedanāya asati vedanānirodhā api nu kho taṇhā paññāyethā”ti?
[¶28] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶29] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of craving, namely feeling.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo taṇhāya, yadidaṁ vedanā.
[¶30] So it is, Ānanda, that feeling gives rise to craving. Craving gives rise to searching. Searching gives rise to gaining material things. Gaining material things gives rise to evaluation. Evaluation gives rise to desire and lust. Desire and lust gives rise to attachment. Attachment gives rise to ownership. Ownership gives rise to stinginess. Stinginess gives rise to safeguarding. Owing to safeguarding, many bad, unskillful things come to be: taking up the rod and the sword, quarrels, arguments, and disputes, accusations, backbiting, and lies.
> Pali: Iti kho panetaṁ, ānanda, vedanaṁ paṭicca taṇhā, taṇhaṁ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṁ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṁ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṁ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṁ paṭicca ajjhosānaṁ, ajjhosānaṁ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṁ paṭicca macchariyaṁ, macchariyaṁ paṭicca ārakkho. Ārakkhādhikaraṇaṁ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti.
[¶31] ‘Owing to safeguarding, many bad, unskillful things come to be: taking up the rod and the sword, quarrels, arguments, and disputes, accusations, backbiting, and lies’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no safeguarding for anyone anywhere. When there’s no safeguarding at all, with the cessation of safeguarding, would those many bad, unskillful things still come to be?”
> Pali: ‘Ārakkhādhikaraṇaṁ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā ārakkhādhikaraṇaṁ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti. Ārakkho ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso ārakkhe asati ārakkhanirodhā api nu kho daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhaveyyun”ti?
[¶32] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶33] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason for the origination of those many bad, unskillful things, namely safeguarding.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādānaṁ anekesaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ sambhavāya yadidaṁ ārakkho.
[¶34] ‘Stinginess gives rise to safeguarding’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no stinginess for anyone anywhere. When there’s no stinginess at all, with the cessation of stinginess, would safeguarding still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Macchariyaṁ paṭicca ārakkho’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā macchariyaṁ paṭicca ārakkho. Macchariyañca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso macchariye asati macchariyanirodhā api nu kho ārakkho paññāyethā”ti?
[¶35] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶36] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of safeguarding, namely stinginess.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo ārakkhassa, yadidaṁ macchariyaṁ.
[¶37] ‘Ownership gives rise to stinginess’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no ownership for anyone anywhere. When there’s no ownership at all, with the cessation of ownership, would stinginess still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Pariggahaṁ paṭicca macchariyan’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā pariggahaṁ paṭicca macchariyaṁ. Pariggaho ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso pariggahe asati pariggahanirodhā api nu kho macchariyaṁ paññāyethā”ti?
[¶38] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶39] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of stinginess, namely ownership.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo macchariyassa, yadidaṁ pariggaho.
[¶40] ‘Attachment gives rise to ownership’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no attachment for anyone anywhere. When there’s no attachment at all, with the cessation of attachment, would ownership still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Ajjhosānaṁ paṭicca pariggaho’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā ajjhosānaṁ paṭicca pariggaho. Ajjhosānañca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso ajjhosāne asati ajjhosānanirodhā api nu kho pariggaho paññāyethā”ti?
[¶41] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶42] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of ownership, namely attachment.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo pariggahassa—yadidaṁ ajjhosānaṁ.
[¶43] ‘Desire and lust gives rise to attachment’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no desire and lust for anyone anywhere. When there’s no desire and lust at all, with the cessation of desire and lust, would attachment still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Chandarāgaṁ paṭicca ajjhosānan’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā chandarāgaṁ paṭicca ajjhosānaṁ. Chandarāgo ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso chandarāge asati chandarāganirodhā api nu kho ajjhosānaṁ paññāyethā”ti?
[¶44] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶45] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of attachment, namely desire and lust.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo ajjhosānassa, yadidaṁ chandarāgo.
[¶46] Evaluation gives rise to desire and lust’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no evaluation for anyone anywhere. When there’s no evaluation at all, with the cessation of evaluation, would desire and lust still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Vinicchayaṁ paṭicca chandarāgo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā vinicchayaṁ paṭicca chandarāgo. Vinicchayo ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso vinicchaye asati vinicchayanirodhā api nu kho chandarāgo paññāyethā”ti?
[¶47] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶48] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of desire and lust, namely evaluation.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo chandarāgassa, yadidaṁ vinicchayo.
[¶49] ‘Gaining material things gives rise to evaluation’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no gaining of material things for anyone anywhere. When there’s no gaining of material things at all, with the cessation of gaining material things, would evaluation still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Lābhaṁ paṭicca vinicchayo’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā lābhaṁ paṭicca vinicchayo. Lābho ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso lābhe asati lābhanirodhā api nu kho vinicchayo paññāyethā”ti?
[¶50] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶51] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of evaluation, namely the gaining of material things.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo vinicchayassa, yadidaṁ lābho.
[¶52] ‘Searching gives rise to gaining material things’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no searching for anyone anywhere. When there’s no searching at all, with the cessation of searching, would the gaining of material things still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Pariyesanaṁ paṭicca lābho’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā pariyesanaṁ paṭicca lābho. Pariyesanā ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, sabbaso pariyesanāya asati pariyesanānirodhā api nu kho lābho paññāyethā”ti?
[¶53] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶54] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of gaining material things, namely searching.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo lābhassa, yadidaṁ pariyesanā.
[¶55] ‘Craving gives rise to searching’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no craving for anyone anywhere. That is, craving for sensual pleasures, craving for continued existence, and craving for nonexistence. When there’s no craving at all, with the cessation of craving, would searching still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Taṇhaṁ paṭicca pariyesanā’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā taṇhaṁ paṭicca pariyesanā. Taṇhā ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā, sabbaso taṇhāya asati taṇhānirodhā api nu kho pariyesanā paññāyethā”ti?
[¶56] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶57] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of searching, namely craving. And so, Ānanda, these two things meet at the two aspects of feeling.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo pariyesanāya, yadidaṁ taṇhā. Iti kho, ānanda, ime dve dhammā dvayena vedanāya ekasamosaraṇā bhavanti.
[¶58] ‘Contact is a requirement for feeling’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were totally and utterly no contact for anyone anywhere. That is, contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. When there’s no contact at all, with the cessation of contact, would feeling still be found?”
> Pali: ‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā phassapaccayā vedanā. Phasso ca hi, ānanda, nābhavissa sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ kassaci kimhici, seyyathidaṁ— cakkhusamphasso sotasamphasso ghānasamphasso jivhāsamphasso kāyasamphasso manosamphasso, sabbaso phasse asati phassanirodhā api nu kho vedanā paññāyethā”ti?
[¶59] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶60] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of feeling, namely contact.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo vedanāya, yadidaṁ phasso.
[¶61] ‘Name and form are requirements for contact’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. Suppose there were none of the features, attributes, signs, and details by which the set of mental phenomena known as name is found. Would labeling contact still be found in the set of physical phenomena?”
> Pali: ‘Nāmarūpapaccayā phasso’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā nāmarūpapaccayā phasso. Yehi, ānanda, ākārehi yehi liṅgehi yehi nimittehi yehi uddesehi nāmakāyassa paññatti hoti, tesu ākāresu tesu liṅgesu tesu nimittesu tesu uddesesu asati api nu kho rūpakāye adhivacanasamphasso paññāyethā”ti?
[¶62] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶63] “Suppose there were none of the features, attributes, signs, and details by which the set of physical phenomena known as form is found. Would impingement contact still be found in the set of mental phenomena?”
> Pali: “Yehi, ānanda, ākārehi yehi liṅgehi yehi nimittehi yehi uddesehi rūpakāyassa paññatti hoti, tesu ākāresu …pe… tesu uddesesu asati api nu kho nāmakāye paṭighasamphasso paññāyethā”ti?
[¶64] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶65] “Suppose there were none of the features, attributes, signs, and details by which the set of phenomena known as name and the set of phenomena known as form are found. Would either labeling contact or impingement contact still be found?”
> Pali: “Yehi, ānanda, ākārehi …pe… yehi uddesehi nāmakāyassa ca rūpakāyassa ca paññatti hoti, tesu ākāresu …pe… tesu uddesesu asati api nu kho adhivacanasamphasso vā paṭighasamphasso vā paññāyethā”ti?
[¶66] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶67] “Suppose there were none of the features, attributes, signs, and details by which name and form are found. Would contact still be found?”
> Pali: “Yehi, ānanda, ākārehi …pe… yehi uddesehi nāmarūpassa paññatti hoti, tesu ākāresu …pe… tesu uddesesu asati api nu kho phasso paññāyethā”ti?
[¶68] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶69] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of contact, namely name and form.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo phassassa, yadidaṁ nāmarūpaṁ.
[¶70] ‘Consciousness is a requirement for name and form’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. If consciousness were not conceived in the mother’s womb, would name and form coagulate there?”
> Pali: ‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpan’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ. Viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, mātukucchismiṁ na okkamissatha, api nu kho nāmarūpaṁ mātukucchismiṁ samuccissathā”ti?
[¶71] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶72] “If consciousness, after being conceived in the mother’s womb, were to be miscarried, would name and form be born into this place?”
> Pali: “Viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, mātukucchismiṁ okkamitvā vokkamissatha, api nu kho nāmarūpaṁ itthattāya abhinibbattissathā”ti?
[¶73] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶74] “If the consciousness of a young boy or girl were to be cut off, would name and form achieve growth, increase, and maturity?”
> Pali: “Viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, daharasseva sato vocchijjissatha kumārakassa vā kumārikāya vā, api nu kho nāmarūpaṁ vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjissathā”ti?
[¶75] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶76] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of name and form, namely consciousness.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo nāmarūpassa—yadidaṁ viññāṇaṁ.
[¶77] ‘Name and form are requirements for consciousness’—that’s what I said. And this is a way to understand how this is so. If consciousness were not established in name and form, would the coming to be of the origin of suffering—of rebirth, old age, and death in the future—be found?”
> Pali: ‘Nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇan’ti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, tadānanda, imināpetaṁ pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇaṁ. Viññāṇañca hi, ānanda, nāmarūpe patiṭṭhaṁ na labhissatha, api nu kho āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇaṁ dukkhasamudayasambhavo paññāyethā”ti?
[¶78] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶79] “That’s why this is the cause, source, origin, and reason of consciousness, namely name and form. This is the extent to which one may be reborn, grow old, die, pass away, or reappear. This is how far the scope of labeling, definition, and description extends; how far the sphere of wisdom extends; how far the cycle of rebirths spins so that this state of being may be found; namely, name and form together with consciousness.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu etaṁ nidānaṁ esa samudayo esa paccayo viññāṇassa yadidaṁ nāmarūpaṁ. Ettāvatā kho, ānanda, jāyetha vā jīyetha vā mīyetha vā cavetha vā upapajjetha vā. Ettāvatā adhivacanapatho, ettāvatā niruttipatho, ettāvatā paññattipatho, ettāvatā paññāvacaraṁ, ettāvatā vaṭṭaṁ vattati itthattaṁ paññāpanāya yadidaṁ nāmarūpaṁ saha viññāṇena aññamaññapaccayatā pavattati.
[¶80] 2. Describing the Self
> Pali: 2. Attapaññatti
[¶81] How do those who describe the self describe it? They describe it as formed and limited: ‘My self is formed and limited.’ Or they describe it as formed and infinite: ‘My self is formed and infinite.’ Or they describe it as formless and limited: ‘My self is formless and limited.’ Or they describe it as formless and infinite: ‘My self is formless and infinite.’
> Pali: Kittāvatā ca, ānanda, attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti? Rūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti: ‘rūpī me paritto attā’ti. Rūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti: ‘rūpī me ananto attā’ti. Arūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti: ‘arūpī me paritto attā’ti. Arūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti: ‘arūpī me ananto attā’ti.
[¶82] Now, take those who describe the self as formed and limited. They describe the self in the present as formed and limited; or they describe it as sure to be in some other place formed and limited; or else they think: ‘Though it is not like that, I will ensure it is provided with what it needs to become like that.’ This being so, it’s appropriate to say that a theory of self as formed and limited underlies them.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo so rūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti. Etarahi vā so rūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so rūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, rūpiṁ parittattānudiṭṭhi anusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya.
[¶83] Now, take those who describe the self as formed and infinite … formless and limited … formless and infinite. They describe the self as formless and infinite in the present; or as sure to become formless and infinite in some other place; or else they think: ‘Though it is not like that, I will ensure it is provided with what it needs to become like that.’ This being so, it’s appropriate to say that a theory of self as formless and infinite underlies them. That’s how those who describe the self describe it.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo so rūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti. Etarahi vā so rūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so rūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, rūpiṁ anantattānudiṭṭhi anusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Tatrānanda, yo so arūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti. Etarahi vā so arūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so arūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, arūpiṁ parittattānudiṭṭhi anusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Tatrānanda, yo so arūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti. Etarahi vā so arūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so arūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, arūpiṁ anantattānudiṭṭhi anusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Ettāvatā kho, ānanda, attānaṁ paññapento paññapeti.
[¶84] 3. Not Describing the Self
> Pali: 3. Naattapaññatti
[¶85] How do those who don’t describe the self not describe it? They don’t describe it as formed and limited … formed and infinite … formless and limited … formless and infinite: ‘My self is formless and infinite.’
> Pali: Kittāvatā ca, ānanda, attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti? Rūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti: ‘rūpī me paritto attā’ti. Rūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti: ‘rūpī me ananto attā’ti. Arūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti: ‘arūpī me paritto attā’ti. Arūpiṁ vā hi, ānanda, anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti: ‘arūpī me ananto attā’ti.
[¶86] Now, take those who don’t describe the self as formed and limited … formed and infinite … formless and limited … formless and infinite. They don’t describe the self in the present as formless and infinite; or as sure to become in some other place formless and infinite; and they don’t think: ‘Though it is not like that, I will ensure it is provided with what it needs to become like that.’ This being so, it’s appropriate to say that a theory of self as formless and infinite doesn’t underlie them. That’s how those who don’t describe the self don’t describe it.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo so rūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti. Etarahi vā so rūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so rūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa na hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, rūpiṁ parittattānudiṭṭhi nānusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Tatrānanda, yo so rūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti. Etarahi vā so rūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so rūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa na hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, rūpiṁ anantattānudiṭṭhi nānusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Tatrānanda, yo so arūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti. Etarahi vā so arūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so arūpiṁ parittaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa na hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, arūpiṁ parittattānudiṭṭhi nānusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Tatrānanda, yo so arūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti. Etarahi vā so arūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, tattha bhāviṁ vā so arūpiṁ anantaṁ attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti, ‘atathaṁ vā pana santaṁ tathattāya upakappessāmī’ti iti vā panassa na hoti. Evaṁ santaṁ kho, ānanda, arūpiṁ anantattānudiṭṭhi nānusetīti iccālaṁ vacanāya. Ettāvatā kho, ānanda, attānaṁ na paññapento na paññapeti.
[¶87] 4. Regarding a Self
> Pali: 4. Attasamanupassanā
[¶88] How do those who regard the self regard it? They regard feeling as self: ‘Feeling is my self.’ Or they regard it like this: ‘Feeling is definitely not my self. My self does not experience feeling.’ Or they regard it like this: ‘Feeling is definitely not my self. But it’s not that my self does not experience feeling. My self feels, for my self is liable to feel.’
> Pali: Kittāvatā ca, ānanda, attānaṁ samanupassamāno samanupassati? Vedanaṁ vā hi, ānanda, attānaṁ samanupassamāno samanupassati: ‘vedanā me attā’ti. ‘Na heva kho me vedanā attā, appaṭisaṁvedano me attā’ti iti vā hi, ānanda, attānaṁ samanupassamāno samanupassati. ‘Na heva kho me vedanā attā, nopi appaṭisaṁvedano me attā, attā me vediyati, vedanādhammo hi me attā’ti iti vā hi, ānanda, attānaṁ samanupassamāno samanupassati.
[¶89] Now, as to those who say: ‘Feeling is my self.’ You should say this to them: ‘Reverend, there are three feelings: pleasant, painful, and neutral. Which one of these do you regard as self?’ Ānanda, at a time when you feel a pleasant feeling, you don’t feel a painful or neutral feeling; you only feel a pleasant feeling. At a time when you feel a painful feeling, you don’t feel a pleasant or neutral feeling; you only feel a painful feeling. At a time when you feel a neutral feeling, you don’t feel a pleasant or painful feeling; you only feel a neutral feeling.
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo so evamāha: ‘vedanā me attā’ti, so evamassa vacanīyo: ‘tisso kho imā, āvuso, vedanā— sukhā vedanā dukkhā vedanā adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Imāsaṁ kho tvaṁ tissannaṁ vedanānaṁ katamaṁ attato samanupassasī’ti? Yasmiṁ, ānanda, samaye sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, neva tasmiṁ samaye dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti; sukhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti. Yasmiṁ, ānanda, samaye dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, neva tasmiṁ samaye sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti; dukkhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti. Yasmiṁ, ānanda, samaye adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, neva tasmiṁ samaye sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti, na dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedeti; adukkhamasukhaṁyeva tasmiṁ samaye vedanaṁ vedeti.
[¶90] Pleasant feelings, painful feelings, and neutral feelings are all impermanent, conditioned, dependently originated, liable to end, vanish, fade away, and cease. When feeling a pleasant feeling they think: ‘This is my self.’ When their pleasant feeling ceases they think: ‘My self has expired.’ When feeling a painful feeling they think: ‘This is my self.’ When their painful feeling ceases they think: ‘My self has expired.’ When feeling a neutral feeling they think: ‘This is my self.’ When their neutral feeling ceases they think: ‘My self has expired.’ So those who say ‘feeling is my self’ regard as self that which is evidently impermanent, mixed with pleasure and pain, and liable to rise and fall. That’s why it’s not acceptable to regard feeling as my self.
> Pali: Sukhāpi kho, ānanda, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Dukkhāpi kho, ānanda, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Adukkhamasukhāpi kho, ānanda, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Tassa sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vediyamānassa ‘eso me attā’ti hoti. Tassāyeva sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā ‘byagā me attā’ti hoti. Dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vediyamānassa ‘eso me attā’ti hoti. Tassāyeva dukkhāya vedanāya nirodhā ‘byagā me attā’ti hoti. Adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vediyamānassa ‘eso me attā’ti hoti. Tassāyeva adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya nirodhā ‘byagā me attā’ti hoti. Iti so diṭṭheva dhamme aniccasukhadukkhavokiṇṇaṁ uppādavayadhammaṁ attānaṁ samanupassamāno samanupassati, yo so evamāha: ‘vedanā me attā’ti. Tasmātihānanda, etena petaṁ nakkhamati: ‘vedanā me attā’ti samanupassituṁ.
[¶91] Now, as to those who say: ‘Feeling is definitely not my self. My self does not experience feeling.’ You should say this to them, ‘But reverend, where there is nothing felt at all, would the thought “I am” occur there?’”
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo so evamāha: ‘na heva kho me vedanā attā, appaṭisaṁvedano me attā’ti, so evamassa vacanīyo: ‘yattha panāvuso, sabbaso vedayitaṁ natthi api nu kho, tattha “ayamahamasmī”ti siyā’”ti?
[¶92] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶93] “That’s why it’s not acceptable to regard self as that which does not experience feeling.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, etena petaṁ nakkhamati: ‘na heva kho me vedanā attā, appaṭisaṁvedano me attā’ti samanupassituṁ.
[¶94] Now, as to those who say: ‘Feeling is definitely not my self. But it’s not that my self does not experience feeling. My self feels, for my self is liable to feel.’ You should say this to them, ‘Suppose feelings were to totally and utterly cease without remainder. When there’s no feeling at all, with the cessation of feeling, would the thought “I am this” occur there?’”
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yo so evamāha: ‘na heva kho me vedanā attā, nopi appaṭisaṁvedano me attā, attā me vediyati, vedanādhammo hi me attā’ti. So evamassa vacanīyo— vedanā ca hi, āvuso, sabbena sabbaṁ sabbathā sabbaṁ aparisesā nirujjheyyuṁ. Sabbaso vedanāya asati vedanānirodhā api nu kho tattha ‘ayamahamasmī’ti siyā”ti?
[¶95] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶96] “That’s why it’s not acceptable to regard self as that which is liable to feel.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, etena petaṁ nakkhamati: ‘na heva kho me vedanā attā, nopi appaṭisaṁvedano me attā, attā me vediyati, vedanādhammo hi me attā’ti samanupassituṁ.
[¶97] When a mendicant does not regard feeling as self; does not regard self as not experiencing feeling; and does not regard it thus: ‘my self feels, for my self is liable to feel’— not regarding in this way, they don’t grasp at anything in the world. Not grasping, they’re not anxious. Not being anxious, they personally become extinguished. They understand: ‘Rebirth is ended, the spiritual journey has been completed, what had to be done has been done, there is nothing further for this place.’
> Pali: Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu neva vedanaṁ attānaṁ samanupassati, nopi appaṭisaṁvedanaṁ attānaṁ samanupassati, nopi ‘attā me vediyati, vedanādhammo hi me attā’ti samanupassati. So evaṁ na samanupassanto na ca kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṁ na paritassati, aparitassaṁ paccattaññeva parinibbāyati, ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
[¶98] It wouldn’t be appropriate to say that a mendicant whose mind is freed like this holds the following views: ‘A realized one still exists after death’; ‘A realized one no longer exists after death’; ‘A realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death’; ‘A realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death’.
> Pali: Evaṁ vimuttacittaṁ kho, ānanda, bhikkhuṁ yo evaṁ vadeyya: ‘hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itissa diṭṭhī’ti, tadakallaṁ. ‘Na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itissa diṭṭhī’ti, tadakallaṁ. ‘Hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itissa diṭṭhī’ti, tadakallaṁ. ‘Neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā itissa diṭṭhī’ti, tadakallaṁ.
[¶99] Why is that? A mendicant is freed by directly knowing this: how far labeling and the scope of labeling extend; how far definition and the scope of definition extend; how far description and the scope of description extend; how far wisdom and the sphere of wisdom extend; how far the cycle of rebirths and its continuation extend. It wouldn’t be appropriate to say that a mendicant freed by directly knowing this holds the view: ‘There is no such thing as knowing and seeing.’
> Pali: Taṁ kissa hetu? Yāvatā, ānanda, adhivacanaṁ yāvatā adhivacanapatho, yāvatā nirutti yāvatā niruttipatho, yāvatā paññatti yāvatā paññattipatho, yāvatā paññā yāvatā paññāvacaraṁ, yāvatā vaṭṭaṁ, yāvatā vaṭṭati, tadabhiññāvimutto bhikkhu, tadabhiññāvimuttaṁ bhikkhuṁ ‘na jānāti na passati itissa diṭṭhī’ti, tadakallaṁ.
[¶100] 5. Planes of Consciousness
> Pali: 5. Sattaviññāṇaṭṭhiti
[¶101] Ānanda, there are seven planes of consciousness and two dimensions. What seven?
> Pali: Satta kho, ānanda, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, dve āyatanāni. Katamā satta?
[¶102] There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is the first plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā, ekacce ca devā, ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶103] There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption. This is the second plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṁ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶104] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity. This is the third plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṁ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶105] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty. This is the fourth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṁ catutthī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶106] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fifth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶107] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the sixth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ chaṭṭhī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶108] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is the seventh plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santānanda, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶109] Then there is the dimension of non-percipient beings, and secondly, the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Asaññasattāyatanaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanameva dutiyaṁ.
[¶110] Now, regarding these seven planes of consciousness and two dimensions, is it appropriate for someone who understands them—and their origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape—to take pleasure in them?”
> Pali: Tatrānanda, yāyaṁ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā, ekacce ca devā, ekacce ca vinipātikā. Yo nu kho, ānanda, tañca pajānāti, tassā ca samudayaṁ pajānāti, tassā ca atthaṅgamaṁ pajānāti, tassā ca assādaṁ pajānāti, tassā ca ādīnavaṁ pajānāti, tassā ca nissaraṇaṁ pajānāti, kallaṁ nu tena tadabhinanditun”ti?
[¶111] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante” …pe…
[¶112] > Pali: “tatrānanda, yamidaṁ asaññasattāyatanaṁ. Yo nu kho, ānanda, tañca pajānāti, tassa ca samudayaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca atthaṅgamaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca assādaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca ādīnavaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca nissaraṇaṁ pajānāti, kallaṁ nu tena tadabhinanditun”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”. “Tatrānanda, yamidaṁ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ. Yo nu kho, ānanda, tañca pajānāti, tassa ca samudayaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca atthaṅgamaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca assādaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca ādīnavaṁ pajānāti, tassa ca nissaraṇaṁ pajānāti, kallaṁ nu tena tadabhinanditun”ti? “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶113] “When a mendicant, having truly understood the origin, disappearance, gratification, drawback, and escape regarding these seven planes of consciousness and these two dimensions, is freed by not grasping, they’re called a mendicant who is freed by wisdom.
> Pali: “Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu imāsañca sattannaṁ viññāṇaṭṭhitīnaṁ imesañca dvinnaṁ āyatanānaṁ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca assādañca ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṁ viditvā anupādā vimutto hoti, ayaṁ vuccatānanda, bhikkhu paññāvimutto.
[¶114] 6. The Eight Liberations
> Pali: 6. Aṭṭhavimokkha
[¶115] Ānanda, there are these eight liberations. What eight?
> Pali: Aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, vimokkhā. Katame aṭṭha?
[¶116] Having physical form, they see forms. This is the first liberation.
> Pali: Rūpī rūpāni passati ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶117] Not perceiving form internally, they see forms externally. This is the second liberation.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho.
[¶118] They’re focused only on beauty. This is the third liberation.
> Pali: Subhanteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho.
[¶119] Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fourth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho.
[¶120] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the fifth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho.
[¶121] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. This is the sixth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho.
[¶122] Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the seventh liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho.
[¶123] Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the eighth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶124] These are the eight liberations.
> Pali: Ime kho, ānanda, aṭṭha vimokkhā.
[¶125] When a mendicant enters into and withdraws from these eight liberations—in forward order, in reverse order, and in forward and reverse order—wherever they wish, whenever they wish, and for as long as they wish; and when they realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements, they’re called a mendicant who is freed both ways. And, Ānanda, there is no other freedom both ways that is better or finer than this.”
> Pali: Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu ime aṭṭha vimokkhe anulomampi samāpajjati, paṭilomampi samāpajjati, anulomapaṭilomampi samāpajjati, yatthicchakaṁ yadicchakaṁ yāvaticchakaṁ samāpajjatipi vuṭṭhātipi. Āsavānañca khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ vuccatānanda, bhikkhu ubhatobhāgavimutto. Imāya ca, ānanda, ubhatobhāgavimuttiyā aññā ubhatobhāgavimutti uttaritarā vā paṇītatarā vā natthī”ti.
[¶126] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Ānanda approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶127] > Pali: Mahānidānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 28. DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/28/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/28/#p-N
[¶0] DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment
> Pali: DN 16 · Mahāparinibbānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain. Now at that time King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, wanted to invade the Vajjis. He said: “I shall wipe out these Vajjis, so mighty and powerful! I shall destroy them, and lay ruin and devastation upon them!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate. Tena kho pana samayena rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vajjī abhiyātukāmo hoti. So evamāha: “ahaṁ hime vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi vajjī, vināsessāmi vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmī”ti.
[¶2] And then King Ajātasattu addressed Vassakāra the brahmin, a chief minister of Magadha, “Please, brahmin, go to the Buddha, and in my name bow with your head to his feet. Ask him if he is healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. And then say: ‘Sir, King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, wants to invade the Vajjis. He says, “I shall wipe out these Vajjis, so mighty and powerful! I shall destroy them, and lay ruin and devastation upon them!”’ Remember well how the Buddha answers and tell it to me. For Realized Ones say nothing that is not so.”
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vassakāraṁ brāhmaṇaṁ magadhamahāmattaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena bhagavato pāde sirasā vandāhi, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ puccha: ‘rājā, bhante, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhagavato pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi: ‘rājā, bhante, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vajjī abhiyātukāmo. So evamāha: “ahaṁ hime vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi vajjī, vināsessāmi vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmī”’ti. Yathā te bhagavā byākaroti, taṁ sādhukaṁ uggahetvā mama āroceyyāsi. Na hi tathāgatā vitathaṁ bhaṇantī”ti.
[¶3] 1. The Brahmin Vassakāra
> Pali: 1. Vassakārabrāhmaṇa
[¶4] “Yes, worthy sir,” Vassakāra replied. He had the finest carriages harnessed. Then he mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out from Rājagaha for the Vulture’s Peak Mountain. He went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the Buddha on foot, and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto rañño māgadhassa ajātasattussa vedehiputtassa paṭissutvā bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi rājagahamhā niyyāsi, yena gijjhakūṭo pabbato tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikova yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi.
[¶5] When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha, “Worthy Gotama, King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, bows with his head to your feet. He asks if you are healthy and well, nimble, strong, and living comfortably. Worthy Gotama, King Ajātasattu wants to invade the Vajjis. He said: ‘I shall wipe out these Vajjis, so mighty and powerful! I shall destroy them, and lay ruin and devastation upon them!’”
> Pali: Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “rājā, bho gotama, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto bhoto gotamassa pāde sirasā vandati, appābādhaṁ appātaṅkaṁ lahuṭṭhānaṁ balaṁ phāsuvihāraṁ pucchati. Rājā, bho gotama, māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto vajjī abhiyātukāmo. So evamāha: ‘ahaṁ hime vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi vajjī, vināsessāmi vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmī’”ti.
[¶6] 2. Principles That Prevent Decline
> Pali: 2. Rājaaparihāniyadhamma
[¶7] Now at that time Venerable Ānanda was standing behind the Buddha fanning him. Then the Buddha said to him, “Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis meet frequently and have many meetings?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ānando bhagavato piṭṭhito ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā’”ti?
[¶8] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā’”ti.
[¶9] “As long as the Vajjis meet frequently and have many meetings, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶10] Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis meet in harmony, leave in harmony, and carry on their business in harmony?”
> Pali: Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī samaggā sannipatanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahanti, samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karontī’”ti?
[¶11] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī samaggā sannipatanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahanti, samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karontī’”ti.
[¶12] “As long as the Vajjis meet in harmony, leave in harmony, and carry on their business in harmony, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī samaggā sannipatissanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahissanti, samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶13] Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis don’t make new decrees or abolish existing decrees, but proceed having undertaken the ancient Vajjian principles as they have been decreed?”
> Pali: Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī apaññattaṁ na paññapenti, paññattaṁ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññatte porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattantī’”ti?
[¶14] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī apaññattaṁ na paññapenti, paññattaṁ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññatte porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattantī’”ti.
[¶15] “As long as the Vajjis don’t make new decrees or abolish existing decrees, but proceed having undertaken the ancient Vajjian principles as they have been decreed, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī apaññattaṁ na paññapessanti, paññattaṁ na samucchindissanti, yathāpaññatte porāṇe vajjidhamme samādāya vattissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶16] Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis honor, respect, esteem, and venerate Vajjian elders, and think them worth listening to?”
> Pali: Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī ye te vajjīnaṁ vajjimahallakā, te sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññantī’”ti?
[¶17] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī ye te vajjīnaṁ vajjimahallakā, te sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññantī’”ti.
[¶18] “As long as the Vajjis honor, respect, esteem, and venerate Vajjian elders, and think them worth listening to, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī ye te vajjīnaṁ vajjimahallakā, te sakkarissanti garuṁ karissanti mānessanti pūjessanti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññissanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶19] Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis don’t forcibly abduct the women or girls of the clans and make them live with them?”
> Pali: Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī yā tā kulitthiyo kulakumāriyo, tā na okkassa pasayha vāsentī’”ti?
[¶20] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī yā tā kulitthiyo kulakumāriyo tā na okkassa pasayha vāsentī’”ti.
[¶21] “As long as the Vajjis don’t forcibly abduct the women or girls of the clans and make them live with them, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī yā tā kulitthiyo kulakumāriyo, tā na okkassa pasayha vāsessanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶22] Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis honor, respect, esteem, and venerate the Vajjian shrines, whether inner or outer, not neglecting the proper spirit-offerings that were given and made in the past?”
> Pali: Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjī yāni tāni vajjīnaṁ vajjicetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva bāhirāni ca, tāni sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti, tesañca dinnapubbaṁ katapubbaṁ dhammikaṁ baliṁ no parihāpentī’”ti?
[¶23] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘vajjī yāni tāni vajjīnaṁ vajjicetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva bāhirāni ca, tāni sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti tesañca dinnapubbaṁ katapubbaṁ dhammikaṁ baliṁ no parihāpentī’”ti.
[¶24] “As long as the Vajjis honor, respect, esteem, and venerate the Vajjian shrines, whether inner or outer, not neglecting the proper spirit-offerings that were given and made in the past, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjī yāni tāni vajjīnaṁ vajjicetiyāni abbhantarāni ceva bāhirāni ca, tāni sakkarissanti garuṁ karissanti mānessanti pūjessanti, tesañca dinnapubbaṁ katapubbaṁ dhammikaṁ baliṁ no parihāpessanti, vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶25] Ānanda, have you heard that the Vajjis organize proper protection, shelter, and security for perfected ones, so that more perfected ones might come to the realm and those already here may live in comfort?”
> Pali: Kinti te, ānanda, sutaṁ, ‘vajjīnaṁ arahantesu dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti susaṁvihitā, kinti anāgatā ca arahanto vijitaṁ āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca arahanto vijite phāsu vihareyyun’”ti?
[¶26] “I have heard that, sir.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante ‘vajjīnaṁ arahantesu dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti susaṁvihitā kinti anāgatā ca arahanto vijitaṁ āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca arahanto vijite phāsu vihareyyun’”ti.
[¶27] “As long as the Vajjis organize proper protection, shelter, and security for perfected ones, so that more perfected ones might come to the realm and those already here may live in comfort, they can expect growth, not decline.”
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ arahantesu dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti susaṁvihitā bhavissati, kinti anāgatā ca arahanto vijitaṁ āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca arahanto vijite phāsu vihareyyunti. Vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī”ti.
[¶28] Then the Buddha said to Vassakāra, “Brahmin, this one time I was staying near Vesālī at the Sārandada Shrine. There I taught the Vajjis these seven principles that prevent decline. As long as these seven principles that prevent decline last among the Vajjis, and as long as the Vajjis are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā vassakāraṁ brāhmaṇaṁ magadhamahāmattaṁ āmantesi: “ekamidāhaṁ, brāhmaṇa, samayaṁ vesāliyaṁ viharāmi sārandade cetiye. Tatrāhaṁ vajjīnaṁ ime satta aparihāniye dhamme desesiṁ. Yāvakīvañca, brāhmaṇa, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā vajjīsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu vajjī sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, brāhmaṇa, vajjīnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī”ti.
[¶29] When the Buddha had spoken, Vassakāra said to him, “Worthy Gotama, if the Vajjis follow even a single one of these principles they can expect growth, not decline. How much more so all seven! King Ajātasattu cannot defeat the Vajjis in war, unless by bribery or by sowing dissension. Well, now, worthy Gotama, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ekamekenapi, bho gotama, aparihāniyena dhammena samannāgatānaṁ vajjīnaṁ vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni. Ko pana vādo sattahi aparihāniyehi dhammehi. Akaraṇīyāva, bho gotama, vajjī raññā māgadhena ajātasattunā vedehiputtena yadidaṁ yuddhassa, aññatra upalāpanāya aññatra mithubhedā. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, bho gotama, gacchāma, bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶30] “Please, brahmin, go at your convenience.” Then Vassakāra the brahmin, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: “Yassadāni tvaṁ, brāhmaṇa, kālaṁ maññasī”ti. Atha kho vassakāro brāhmaṇo magadhamahāmatto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶31] 3. Principles That Prevent Decline Among the Mendicants
> Pali: 3. Bhikkhuaparihāniyadhamma
[¶32] Soon after he had left, the Buddha said to Ānanda, “Go, Ānanda, gather all the mendicants staying in the vicinity of Rājagaha together in the assembly hall.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkante vassakāre brāhmaṇe magadhamahāmatte āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, yāvatikā bhikkhū rājagahaṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātehī”ti.
[¶33] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. He did what the Buddha asked. Then he went back, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the mendicant Saṅgha has assembled. Please, sir, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā yāvatikā bhikkhū rājagahaṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sannipatito, bhante, bhikkhusaṅgho, yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶34] Then the Buddha went to the assembly hall, where he sat down on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, I will teach you these seven principles that prevent decline. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena upaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “satta vo, bhikkhave, aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶35] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶36] “As long as the mendicants meet frequently and have many meetings, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū abhiṇhaṁ sannipātā sannipātabahulā bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶37] As long as the mendicants meet in harmony, leave in harmony, and carry on their business in harmony, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū samaggā sannipatissanti, samaggā vuṭṭhahissanti, samaggā saṅghakaraṇīyāni karissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶38] As long as the mendicants don’t make new decrees or abolish existing decrees, but proceed having undertaken the training rules as they have been decreed, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū apaññattaṁ na paññapessanti, paññattaṁ na samucchindissanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶39] As long as the mendicants honor, respect, esteem, and venerate the senior mendicants—of long standing, long gone forth, fathers and leaders of the Saṅgha—and think them worth listening to, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū ye te bhikkhū therā rattaññū cirapabbajitā saṅghapitaro saṅghapariṇāyakā, te sakkarissanti garuṁ karissanti mānessanti pūjessanti, tesañca sotabbaṁ maññissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶40] As long as the mendicants don’t fall under the sway of arisen craving for future lives, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū uppannāya taṇhāya ponobbhavikāya na vasaṁ gacchissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶41] As long as the mendicants take care to live in wilderness lodgings, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū āraññakesu senāsanesu sāpekkhā bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶42] As long as the mendicants individually establish mindfulness, so that more good-hearted spiritual companions might come, and those that have already come may live comfortably, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū paccattaññeva satiṁ upaṭṭhapessanti: ‘kinti anāgatā ca pesalā sabrahmacārī āgaccheyyuṁ, āgatā ca pesalā sabrahmacārī phāsu vihareyyun’ti. Vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶43] As long as these seven principles that prevent decline last among the mendicants, and as long as the mendicants are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶44] I will teach you seven more principles that prevent decline. …
> Pali: Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti. “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶45] As long as the mendicants don’t relish work, loving it and liking to relish it, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na kammārāmā bhavissanti na kammaratā na kammārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶46] As long as they don’t relish talk …
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na bhassārāmā bhavissanti na bhassaratā na bhassārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶47] sleep …
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na niddārāmā bhavissanti na niddāratā na niddārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶48] company …
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na saṅgaṇikārāmā bhavissanti na saṅgaṇikaratā na saṅgaṇikārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶49] they don’t have corrupt wishes, falling under the sway of corrupt wishes …
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na pāpicchā bhavissanti na pāpikānaṁ icchānaṁ vasaṁ gatā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶50] they don’t have bad friends, companions, and associates …
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na pāpamittā bhavissanti na pāpasahāyā na pāpasampavaṅkā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶51] they don’t stop half-way after achieving some trifling distinction, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na oramattakena visesādhigamena antarāvosānaṁ āpajjissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶52] As long as these seven principles that prevent decline last among the mendicants, and as long as the mendicants are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶53] I will teach you seven more principles that prevent decline. … As long as the mendicants are faithful … conscientious … prudent … learned … energetic … mindful … wise, they can expect growth, not decline. As long as these seven principles that prevent decline last among the mendicants, and as long as the mendicants are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi …pe…. Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū saddhā bhavissanti …pe… hirimanā bhavissanti … ottappī bhavissanti … bahussutā bhavissanti … āraddhavīriyā bhavissanti … upaṭṭhitassatī bhavissanti … paññavanto bhavissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni. Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶54] I will teach you seven more principles that prevent decline. …
> Pali: Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti. “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶55] As long as the mendicants develop the awakening factors of mindfulness … investigation of principles … energy … rapture … tranquility … immersion … equanimity, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti …pe… dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti … vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti … upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāvessanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶56] As long as these seven principles that prevent decline last among the mendicants, and as long as the mendicants are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā no parihāni.
[¶57] I will teach you seven more principles that prevent decline. …
> Pali: Aparepi vo, bhikkhave, satta aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti. “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶58] As long as the mendicants develop the perceptions of impermanence … not-self … ugliness … drawbacks … giving up … fading away … cessation, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū aniccasaññaṁ bhāvessanti …pe… anattasaññaṁ bhāvessanti … asubhasaññaṁ bhāvessanti … ādīnavasaññaṁ bhāvessanti … pahānasaññaṁ bhāvessanti … virāgasaññaṁ bhāvessanti … nirodhasaññaṁ bhāvessanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶59] As long as these seven principles that prevent decline last among the mendicants, and as long as the mendicants are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime satta aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca sattasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶60] I will teach you six principles that prevent decline. …
> Pali: Cha vo, bhikkhave, aparihāniye dhamme desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti. “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶61] As long as the mendicants consistently treat their spiritual companions with bodily kindness … verbal kindness … and mental kindness both in public and in private, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: “Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpessanti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni. Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpessanti …pe… mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhāpessanti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶62] As long as the mendicants share without reservation any material things they have gained by legitimate means, even the food placed in the alms-bowl, using them in common with their ethical spiritual companions, they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū, ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi tathārūpehi lābhehi appaṭivibhattabhogī bhavissanti sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶63] As long as the mendicants live according to the precepts shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private—such precepts as are intact, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion—they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññūpasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagatā viharissanti sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶64] As long as the mendicants live according to the view shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private—the view that is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete end of suffering—they can expect growth, not decline.
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā, niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagatā viharissanti sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.
[¶65] As long as these six principles that prevent decline last among the mendicants, and as long as the mendicants are seen following them, they can expect growth, not decline.”
> Pali: Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, ime cha aparihāniyā dhammā bhikkhūsu ṭhassanti, imesu ca chasu aparihāniyesu dhammesu bhikkhū sandississanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī”ti.
[¶66] > Pali: (…)
[¶67] And while staying there at the Vulture’s Peak the Buddha often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharanto gijjhakūṭe pabbate etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶68] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶69] When the Buddha had stayed in Rājagaha as long as he pleased, he addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Ambalaṭṭhikā.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena ambalaṭṭhikā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶70] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Ambalaṭṭhikā, where he stayed in the royal rest-house. And while staying there, too, he often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena ambalaṭṭhikā tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ viharati rājāgārake. Tatrāpi sudaṁ bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ viharanto rājāgārake etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶71] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ iti samādhi iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶72] When the Buddha had stayed in Ambalaṭṭhikā as long as he pleased, he addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Nāḷandā.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena nāḷandā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶73] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Nāḷandā, where he stayed in Pāvārika’s Mango Grove.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena nāḷandā tadavasari, tatra sudaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharati pāvārikambavane.
[¶74] 4. Sāriputta’s Lion’s Roar
> Pali: 4. Sāriputtasīhanāda
[¶75] Then Sāriputta went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, I have such confidence in the Buddha that I believe there’s no other ascetic or brahmin—whether past, future, or present—whose direct knowledge is superior to the Buddha when it comes to awakening.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan”ti.
[¶76] “That’s a grand and bold statement, Sāriputta. You’ve roared a definitive, categorical lion’s roar, saying: ‘I have such confidence in the Buddha that I believe there’s no other ascetic or brahmin—whether past, future, or present—whose direct knowledge is superior to the Buddha when it comes to awakening.’
> Pali: “Uḷārā kho te ayaṁ, sāriputta, āsabhī vācā bhāsitā, ekaṁso gahito, sīhanādo nadito: ‘evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan’ti.
[¶77] What about all the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas who lived in the past? Have you encompassed their minds to know that those Buddhas had such ethics, or such qualities, or such wisdom, or such meditation, or such freedom?”
> Pali: Kiṁ te, sāriputta, ye te ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto cetasā ceto paricca viditā: ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’”ti?
[¶78] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶79] “And what about all the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas who will live in the future? Have you encompassed their minds to know that those Buddhas will have such ethics, or such qualities, or such wisdom, or such meditation, or such freedom?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, sāriputta, ye te bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto cetasā ceto paricca viditā: ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto bhavissanti itipi, evaṁdhammā evaṁpaññā evaṁvihārī evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto bhavissanti itipī’”ti?
[¶80] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶81] “And what about me, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha at present? Have you encompassed my mind to know that I have such ethics, or such qualities, or such wisdom, or such meditation, or such freedom?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, sāriputta, ahaṁ etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho cetasā ceto paricca vidito: ‘evaṁsīlo bhagavā itipi, evaṁdhammo evaṁpañño evaṁvihārī evaṁvimutto bhagavā itipī’”ti?
[¶82] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶83] “In that case, Sāriputta, given that you don’t encompass the minds of Buddhas past, future, or present, what then are you doing, making such a grand and bold statement, roaring such a definitive, categorical lion’s roar?”
> Pali: “Ettha ca hi te, sāriputta, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu arahantesu sammāsambuddhesu cetopariyañāṇaṁ natthi. Atha kiñcarahi te ayaṁ, sāriputta, uḷārā āsabhī vācā bhāsitā, ekaṁso gahito, sīhanādo nadito: ‘evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan’”ti?
[¶84] “Sir, though I don’t encompass the minds of Buddhas past, future, and present, still I understand this by inference from the teaching. Suppose there was a king’s frontier citadel with fortified embankments, ramparts, and arches, and a single gate. And it has a gatekeeper who is astute, competent, and intelligent. He keeps strangers out and lets known people in. As he walks around the patrol path, he doesn’t see a hole or cleft in the wall, not even one big enough for a cat to slip out. He thinks, ‘Whatever sizable creatures enter or leave the citadel, all of them do so via this gate.’
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu arahantesu sammāsambuddhesu cetopariyañāṇaṁ atthi, api ca me dhammanvayo vidito. Seyyathāpi, bhante, rañño paccantimaṁ nagaraṁ daḷhuddhāpaṁ daḷhapākāratoraṇaṁ ekadvāraṁ, tatrassa dovāriko paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī aññātānaṁ nivāretā ñātānaṁ pavesetā. So tassa nagarassa samantā anupariyāyapathaṁ anukkamamāno na passeyya pākārasandhiṁ vā pākāravivaraṁ vā, antamaso biḷāranikkhamanamattampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ye kho keci oḷārikā pāṇā imaṁ nagaraṁ pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā, sabbe te imināva dvārena pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā’ti.
[¶85] In the same way, I understand this by inference from the teaching: ‘All the perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas—whether past, future, or present—give up the five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Their mind is firmly established in the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. They correctly develop the seven awakening factors. And they awaken to the supreme perfect awakening.’”
> Pali: Evameva kho me, bhante, dhammanvayo vidito: ‘ye te, bhante, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā sattabojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhiṁsu. Yepi te, bhante, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhissanti. Bhagavāpi, bhante, etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacitto satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’”ti.
[¶86] And while staying at Nāḷandā, too, the Buddha often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharanto pāvārikambavane etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶87] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶88] 5. The Drawbacks of Unethical Conduct
> Pali: 5. Dussīlaādīnava
[¶89] When the Buddha had stayed in Nāḷandā as long as he pleased, he addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Pāṭali Village.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena pāṭaligāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶90] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Pāṭali Village.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena pāṭaligāmo tadavasari.
[¶91] The lay followers of Pāṭali Village heard that he had arrived. So they went to see him, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, please consent to come to our guest house.” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā: “bhagavā kira pāṭaligāmaṁ anuppatto”ti. Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā āvasathāgāran”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶92] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, the lay followers of Pāṭali Village rose from their seats, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right. Then they went to the guest house, where they spread carpets all over, prepared seats, set up a water jar, and placed an oil lamp. Then they went back to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and told him of their preparations, saying: “Please, sir, come at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena āvasathāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sabbasanthariṁ āvasathāgāraṁ santharitvā āsanāni paññapetvā udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhāpetvā telapadīpaṁ āropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “sabbasantharisanthataṁ, bhante, āvasathāgāraṁ, āsanāni paññattāni, udakamaṇiko patiṭṭhāpito, telapadīpo āropito; yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶93] In the morning, the Buddha robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the guest house together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Having washed his feet, he entered the guest house and sat against the central column facing east. The Saṅgha of mendicants also washed their feet, entered the guest house, and sat against the west wall facing east, with the Buddha right in front of them. The lay followers of Pāṭali Village also washed their feet, entered the guest house, and sat against the east wall facing west, with the Buddha right in front of them.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena āvasathāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi. Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā pacchimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi bhagavantameva purakkhatvā. Pāṭaligāmikāpi kho upāsakā pāde pakkhāletvā āvasathāgāraṁ pavisitvā puratthimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya pacchimābhimukhā nisīdiṁsu bhagavantameva purakkhatvā.
[¶94] > Pali: (…)
[¶95] Then the Buddha addressed them:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pāṭaligāmike upāsake āmantesi:
[¶96] “Householders, there are these five drawbacks for an unethical person because of their failure in ethics. What five?
> Pali: “pañcime, gahapatayo, ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. Katame pañca?
[¶97] Firstly, an unethical person loses great wealth on account of negligence. This is the first drawback for an unethical person because of their failure in ethics.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno pamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahatiṁ bhogajāniṁ nigacchati. Ayaṁ paṭhamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶98] Furthermore, an unethical person gets a bad reputation. This is the second drawback.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlassa sīlavipannassa pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati. Ayaṁ dutiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶99] Furthermore, an unethical person enters any kind of assembly unconfident and embarrassed, whether it’s an assembly of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics. This is the third drawback.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati—yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ—avisārado upasaṅkamati maṅkubhūto. Ayaṁ tatiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶100] Furthermore, an unethical person feels lost when they die. This is the fourth drawback.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno sammūḷho kālaṁ karoti. Ayaṁ catuttho ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶101] Furthermore, an unethical person, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is the fifth drawback.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, dussīlo sīlavipanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Ayaṁ pañcamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶102] These are the five drawbacks for an unethical person because of their failure in ethics.
> Pali: Ime kho, gahapatayo, pañca ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶103] 6. The Benefits of Ethical Conduct
> Pali: 6. Sīlavantaānisaṁsa
[¶104] There are these five benefits for an ethical person because of their accomplishment in ethics. What five?
> Pali: Pañcime, gahapatayo, ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāya. Katame pañca?
[¶105] Firstly, an ethical person gains great wealth on account of diligence. This is the first benefit.
> Pali: Idha, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigacchati. Ayaṁ paṭhamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.
[¶106] Furthermore, an ethical person gets a good reputation. This is the second benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati. Ayaṁ dutiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.
[¶107] Furthermore, an ethical person enters any kind of assembly bold and self-assured, whether it’s an assembly of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics. This is the third benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati—yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ visārado upasaṅkamati amaṅkubhūto. Ayaṁ tatiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.
[¶108] Furthermore, an ethical person dies not feeling lost. This is the fourth benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno asammūḷho kālaṁ karoti. Ayaṁ catuttho ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.
[¶109] Furthermore, when an ethical person’s body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is the fifth benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, gahapatayo, sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Ayaṁ pañcamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.
[¶110] These are the five benefits for an ethical person because of their accomplishment in ethics.”
> Pali: Ime kho, gahapatayo, pañca ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāyā”ti.
[¶111] The Buddha spent much of the night educating, encouraging, firing up, and inspiring the lay followers of Pāṭali Village with a Dhamma talk. Then he sent them off, “The night is getting late, householders. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pāṭaligāmike upāsake bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uyyojesi: “abhikkantā kho, gahapatayo, ratti, yassadāni tumhe kālaṁ maññathā”ti.
[¶112] “Yes, sir,” replied the lay followers of Pāṭali Village. They got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right, before leaving. Soon after they left the Buddha entered a private cubicle.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho pāṭaligāmikā upāsakā bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu. Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantesu pāṭaligāmikesu upāsakesu suññāgāraṁ pāvisi.
[¶113] 7. Building a Citadel
> Pali: 7. Pāṭaliputtanagaramāpana
[¶114] Now at that time the Magadhan chief ministers Sunidha and Vassakāra were building a citadel at Pāṭali Village to keep the Vajjis out. At that time thousands of deities were taking possession of building sites in Pāṭali Village. Illustrious rulers or royal ministers inclined to build houses at sites possessed by illustrious deities. Middling rulers or royal ministers inclined to build houses at sites possessed by middling deities. Lesser rulers or royal ministers inclined to build houses at sites possessed by lesser deities.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāya. Tena samayena sambahulā devatāyo sahasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhanti. Yasmiṁ padese mahesakkhā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, mahesakkhānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ. Yasmiṁ padese majjhimā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, majjhimānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ. Yasmiṁ padese nīcā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, nīcānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ.
## 29. DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/29/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/29/#p-N
[¶0] With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, the Buddha saw those deities taking possession of building sites in Pāṭali Village. The Buddha rose at the crack of dawn and addressed Ānanda, “Ānanda, who is building a citadel at Pāṭali Village?”
> Pali: Addasā kho bhagavā dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena tā devatāyo sahasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhantiyo. Atha kho bhagavā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “Ke nu kho, ānanda, pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpentī”ti?
[¶1] “Sir, the Magadhan ministers Sunidha and Vassakāra are building a citadel to keep the Vajjis out.”
> Pali: “Sunidhavassakārā, bhante, magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāyā”ti.
[¶2] “It’s as if they were building the citadel in consultation with the gods of the thirty-three. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, I saw those deities taking possession of building sites. Illustrious rulers or royal ministers inclined to build houses at sites possessed by illustrious deities. Middling rulers or royal ministers inclined to build houses at sites possessed by middling deities. Lesser rulers or royal ministers inclined to build houses at sites possessed by lesser deities. As far as the civilized region extends, as far as the trading zone extends, this will be the chief city: the Pāṭaliputta trade center. But Pāṭaliputta will face three threats: from fire, flood, and dissension.”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, ānanda, devehi tāvatiṁsehi saddhiṁ mantetvā; evameva kho, ānanda, sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā pāṭaligāme nagaraṁ māpenti vajjīnaṁ paṭibāhāya. Idhāhaṁ, ānanda, addasaṁ dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena sambahulā devatāyo sahasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni pariggaṇhantiyo. Yasmiṁ, ānanda, padese mahesakkhā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, mahesakkhānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ. Yasmiṁ padese majjhimā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, majjhimānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ. Yasmiṁ padese nīcā devatā vatthūni pariggaṇhanti, nīcānaṁ tattha raññaṁ rājamahāmattānaṁ cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetuṁ. Yāvatā, ānanda, ariyaṁ āyatanaṁ yāvatā vaṇippatho idaṁ agganagaraṁ bhavissati pāṭaliputtaṁ puṭabhedanaṁ. Pāṭaliputtassa kho, ānanda, tayo antarāyā bhavissanti— aggito vā udakato vā mithubhedā vā”ti.
[¶3] Then the Magadhan ministers Sunidha and Vassakāra approached the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, they stood to one side and said, “Would the worthy Gotama together with the mendicant Saṅgha please accept today’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu, ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “adhivāsetu no bhavaṁ gotamo ajjatanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶4] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, they went to their own guest house, where they had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared. Then they had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “It’s time, worthy Gotama, the meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā yena sako āvasatho tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sake āvasathe paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesuṁ: “kālo, bho gotama, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶5] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to their guest house together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Sunidha and Vassakāra served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with their own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods. When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hand and bowl, Sunidha and Vassakāra took a low seat and sat to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena sunidhavassakārānaṁ magadhamahāmattānaṁ āvasatho tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesuṁ sampavāresuṁ. Atha kho sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶6] The Buddha expressed his appreciation with these verses:
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho sunidhavassakāre magadhamahāmatte bhagavā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi:
[¶7] “In the place he makes his dwelling,
having fed the astute
and the virtuous here,
the restrained spiritual practitioners,
> Pali: “Yasmiṁ padese kappeti,
vāsaṁ paṇḍitajātiyo;
Sīlavantettha bhojetvā,
saññate brahmacārayo.
[¶8] he should dedicate an offering
to the deities there.
Venerated, they venerate him;
honored, they honor him.
> Pali: Yā tattha devatā āsuṁ,
tāsaṁ dakkhiṇamādise;
Tā pūjitā pūjayanti,
mānitā mānayanti naṁ.
[¶9] After that they have sympathy for him,
like a mother the child at her breast.
A man beloved of the deities
always sees nice things.”
> Pali: Tato naṁ anukampanti,
mātā puttaṁva orasaṁ;
Devatānukampito poso,
sadā bhadrāni passatī”ti.
[¶10] When the Buddha had expressed his appreciation to Sunidha and Vassakāra with these verses, he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sunidhavassakāre magadhamahāmatte imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶11] Sunidha and Vassakāra followed behind the Buddha, thinking, “The gate through which the ascetic Gotama exits today shall be named the Gotama Gate. The ford at which he crosses the Ganges River shall be named the Gotama Ford.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sunidhavassakārā magadhamahāmattā bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti: “yenajja samaṇo gotamo dvārena nikkhamissati, taṁ gotamadvāraṁ nāma bhavissati. Yena titthena gaṅgaṁ nadiṁ tarissati, taṁ gotamatitthaṁ nāma bhavissatī”ti.
[¶12] Then the gate through which the Buddha exited was named the Gotama Gate.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena dvārena nikkhami, taṁ gotamadvāraṁ nāma ahosi.
[¶13] Then the Buddha came to the Ganges River.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena gaṅgā nadī tenupasaṅkami.
[¶14] Now at that time the Ganges was full to the brim so a crow could drink from it. Wanting to cross from the near to the far shore, some people were seeking a boat, some a dinghy, while some were tying up a raft. But, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, the Buddha, together with the mendicant Saṅgha, vanished from the near shore and landed on the far shore.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena gaṅgā nadī pūrā hoti samatittikā kākapeyyā. Appekacce manussā nāvaṁ pariyesanti, appekacce uḷumpaṁ pariyesanti, appekacce kullaṁ bandhanti apārā, pāraṁ gantukāmā. Atha kho bhagavā—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—gaṅgāya nadiyā orimatīre antarahito pārimatīre paccuṭṭhāsi saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.
[¶15] He saw all those humans wanting to cross over. Knowing the meaning of this, on that occasion the Buddha expressed this heartfelt sentiment:
> Pali: Addasā kho bhagavā te manusse appekacce nāvaṁ pariyesante appekacce uḷumpaṁ pariyesante appekacce kullaṁ bandhante apārā pāraṁ gantukāme. Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶16] “Those who cross a deluge or stream
have built a bridge and left the marshes behind.
While some people are still tying a raft,
intelligent people have crossed over.”
> Pali: “Ye taranti aṇṇavaṁ saraṁ,
Setuṁ katvāna visajja pallalāni;
Kullañhi jano bandhati,
Tiṇṇā medhāvino janā”ti.
[¶17] The first recitation section.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro.
[¶18] 8. Talk on the Noble Truths
> Pali: 8. Ariyasaccakathā
[¶19] Then the Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the village of Koṭi.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena koṭigāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶20] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at the village of Koṭi, and stayed there.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena koṭigāmo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā koṭigāme viharati.
[¶21] There he addressed the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶22] “Mendicants, due to not understanding and not penetrating four noble truths, both you and I have wandered and transmigrated for such a very long time. What four? The noble truths of suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering. These noble truths of suffering, origin, cessation, and the path have been understood and comprehended. Craving for continued existence has been cut off; the leash to existence is ended; now there’ll be no more future lives.”
> Pali: “Catunnaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyasaccānaṁ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ? Dukkhassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Dukkhasamudayassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Dukkhanirodhassa, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya, bhikkhave, ariyasaccassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, ucchinnā bhavataṇhā, khīṇā bhavanetti, natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.
[¶23] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶24] “Because of not truly seeing
the four noble truths,
we have transmigrated for a long time
from one rebirth to the next.
> Pali: “Catunnaṁ ariyasaccānaṁ,
yathābhūtaṁ adassanā;
Saṁsitaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ,
tāsu tāsveva jātisu.
[¶25] But now that these truths have been seen,
the leash to existence is eradicated.
The root of suffering is cut off,
now there’ll be no more future lives.”
> Pali: Tāni etāni diṭṭhāni,
bhavanetti samūhatā;
Ucchinnaṁ mūlaṁ dukkhassa,
natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.
[¶26] And while staying at the village of Koṭi, too, the Buddha often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā koṭigāme viharanto etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶27] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶28] 9. The Deaths in Ñātika
> Pali: 9. Anāvattidhammasambodhiparāyaṇa
[¶29] When the Buddha had stayed in the village of Koṭi as long as he pleased, he said to Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the land of the Ñātikas.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā koṭigāme yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena nātikā tenupaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶30] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived in the land of the Ñātikas, where he stayed in the brick house at Ñātika.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena nātikā tadavasari. Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā nātike viharati giñjakāvasathe.
[¶31] Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the monk named Sāḷha has passed away in Ñātika. Where has he been reborn in his next life? The nun named Nandā, the layman named Sudatta, and the laywoman named Sujātā have passed away in Ñātika. Where have they been reborn in the next life? The laymen named Kakkaṭa, Kaḷibha, Nikata, Kaṭissaha, Tuṭṭha, Santuṭṭha, Bhadda, and Subhadda have passed away in Ñātika. Where have they been reborn in the next life?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sāḷho nāma, bhante, bhikkhu nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo? Nandā nāma, bhante, bhikkhunī nātike kālaṅkatā, tassā kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo? Sudatto nāma, bhante, upāsako nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo? Sujātā nāma, bhante, upāsikā nātike kālaṅkatā, tassā kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo? Kukkuṭo nāma, bhante, upāsako nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo? Kāḷimbo nāma, bhante, upāsako …pe… nikaṭo nāma, bhante, upāsako … kaṭissaho nāma, bhante, upāsako … tuṭṭho nāma, bhante, upāsako … santuṭṭho nāma, bhante, upāsako … bhaddo nāma, bhante, upāsako … subhaddo nāma, bhante, upāsako nātike kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo”ti?
[¶32] “Ānanda, the monk Sāḷha had realized the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, having realized it with his own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: “Sāḷho, ānanda, bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶33] The nun Nandā had ended the five lower fetters. She’s been reborn spontaneously, and will be extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.
> Pali: Nandā, ānanda, bhikkhunī pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyinī anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.
[¶34] The layman Sudatta had ended three fetters, and weakened greed, hate, and delusion. He’s a once-returner; he will come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.
> Pali: Sudatto, ānanda, upāsako tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissati.
[¶35] The laywoman Sujātā had ended three fetters. She’s a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.
> Pali: Sujātā, ānanda, upāsikā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā.
[¶36] The laymen Kakkaṭa, Kaḷibha, Nikata, Kaṭissaha, Tuṭṭha, Santuṭṭha, Bhadda, and Subhadda had ended the five lower fetters. They’ve been reborn spontaneously, and will be extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.
> Pali: Kukkuṭo, ānanda, upāsako pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Kāḷimbo, ānanda, upāsako …pe… nikaṭo, ānanda, upāsako … kaṭissaho, ānanda, upāsako … tuṭṭho, ānanda, upāsako … santuṭṭho, ānanda, upāsako … bhaddo, ānanda, upāsako … subhaddo, ānanda, upāsako pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā.
[¶37] Over fifty laymen in Ñātika have passed away having ended the five lower fetters. They’ve been reborn spontaneously, and will be extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.
> Pali: Paropaññāsaṁ, ānanda, nātike upāsakā kālaṅkatā, pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.
[¶38] More than ninety laymen in Ñātika have passed away having ended three fetters, and weakened greed, hate, and delusion. They’re once-returners, who will come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.
> Pali: Sādhikā navuti, ānanda, nātike upāsakā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti.
[¶39] More than five hundred laymen in Ñātika have passed away having ended three fetters. They’re stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.
> Pali: Sātirekāni, ānanda, pañcasatāni nātike upāsakā kālaṅkatā, tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā.
[¶40] 10. The Mirror of the Teaching
> Pali: 10. Dhammādāsadhammapariyāya
[¶41] It’s no wonder that a human being should pass away. But if you should come and ask me about it each and every time someone passes away, that would be a bother for me.
> Pali: Anacchariyaṁ kho panetaṁ, ānanda, yaṁ manussabhūto kālaṁ kareyya. Tasmiṁyeva kālaṅkate tathāgataṁ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ pucchissatha, vihesā hesā, ānanda, tathāgatassa.
[¶42] So Ānanda, I will teach you the explanation of the Dhamma named ‘the mirror of the teaching’. A noble disciple who has this may declare of themselves: ‘I’ve finished with rebirth in hell, the animal realm, and the ghost realm. I’ve finished with all places of loss, bad places, the underworld. I am a stream-enterer! I’m not liable to be reborn in the underworld, and am assured, destined for awakening.’
> Pali: Tasmātihānanda, dhammādāsaṁ nāma dhammapariyāyaṁ desessāmi, yena samannāgato ariyasāvako ākaṅkhamāno attanāva attānaṁ byākareyya: ‘khīṇanirayomhi khīṇatiracchānayoni khīṇapettivisayo khīṇāpāyaduggativinipāto, sotāpannohamasmi avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti.
[¶43] And what is that mirror of the teaching?
> Pali: Katamo ca so, ānanda, dhammādāso dhammapariyāyo, yena samannāgato ariyasāvako ākaṅkhamāno attanāva attānaṁ byākareyya: ‘khīṇanirayomhi khīṇatiracchānayoni khīṇapettivisayo khīṇāpāyaduggativinipāto, sotāpannohamasmi avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti?
[¶44] It’s when a noble disciple has experiential confidence in the Buddha: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’
> Pali: Idhānanda, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti.
[¶45] They have experiential confidence in the teaching: ‘The teaching is well explained by the Buddha—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves.’
> Pali: Dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhī’ti.
[¶46] They have experiential confidence in the Saṅgha: ‘The Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples is practicing the way that’s good, direct, systematic, and proper. It consists of the four pairs, the eight individual persons. This is the Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples that is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world.’
> Pali: Saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ujuppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ñāyappaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, sāmīcippaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho yadidaṁ cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassā’ti.
[¶47] And a noble disciple’s ethical conduct is loved by the noble ones, unbroken, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion.
> Pali: Ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti akhaṇḍehi acchiddehi asabalehi akammāsehi bhujissehi viññūpasatthehi aparāmaṭṭhehi samādhisaṁvattanikehi.
[¶48] This is that mirror of the teaching.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho so, ānanda, dhammādāso dhammapariyāyo, yena samannāgato ariyasāvako ākaṅkhamāno attanāva attānaṁ byākareyya: ‘khīṇanirayomhi khīṇatiracchānayoni khīṇapettivisayo khīṇāpāyaduggativinipāto, sotāpannohamasmi avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’”ti.
[¶49] And while staying there in Ñātika the Buddha often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā nātike viharanto giñjakāvasathe etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶50] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “Iti sīlaṁ iti samādhi iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶51] > Pali: (…)
[¶52] When the Buddha had stayed in Ñātika as long as he pleased, he addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Vesālī.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā nātike yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena vesālī tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶53] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Vesālī, where he stayed in Ambapālī’s Mango Grove.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena vesālī tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati ambapālivane.
[¶54] There the Buddha addressed the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶55] “Mendicants, a mendicant should live mindful and aware. This is my instruction to you.
> Pali: “Sato, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya sampajāno, ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī.
[¶56] And how is a mendicant mindful? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. That’s how a mendicant is mindful.
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sato hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe… citte cittānupassī …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sato hoti.
[¶57] And how is a mendicant aware? It’s when a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent. That’s how a mendicant is aware. A mendicant should live mindful and aware. This is my instruction to you.”
> Pali: Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sampajāno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sampajāno hoti. Sato, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya sampajāno, ayaṁ vo amhākaṁ anusāsanī”ti.
[¶58] 11. Ambapālī the Courtesan
> Pali: 11. Ambapālīgaṇikā
[¶59] Ambapālī the courtesan heard that the Buddha had arrived and was staying in her mango grove. She had the finest carriages harnessed. Then she mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out from Vesālī for her own park. She went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the Buddha on foot. She bowed and sat down to one side. The Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired her with a Dhamma talk.
> Pali: Assosi kho ambapālī gaṇikā: “bhagavā kira vesāliṁ anuppatto vesāliyaṁ viharati mayhaṁ ambavane”ti. Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi vesāliyā niyyāsi. Yena sako ārāmo tena pāyāsi. Yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikāva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.
[¶60] Then she said to the Buddha, “Sir, would the Buddha, together with the mendicant Saṅgha, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence. Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Ambapālī rose from her seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on her right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena. Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶61] The Licchavis of Vesālī also heard that the Buddha had arrived and was staying in Ambapālī’s Mango Grove. They had the finest carriages harnessed. Then they mounted a fine carriage and, along with other fine carriages, set out from Vesālī. Some of the Licchavis were in blue, of blue color, clad in blue, adorned with blue. And some were similarly colored in yellow, red, or white.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho vesālikā licchavī: “bhagavā kira vesāliṁ anuppatto vesāliyaṁ viharati ambapālivane”ti. Atha kho te licchavī bhaddāni bhaddāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhaddaṁ bhaddaṁ yānaṁ abhiruhitvā bhaddehi bhaddehi yānehi vesāliyā niyyiṁsu. Tatra ekacce licchavī nīlā honti nīlavaṇṇā nīlavatthā nīlālaṅkārā, ekacce licchavī pītā honti pītavaṇṇā pītavatthā pītālaṅkārā, ekacce licchavī lohitā honti lohitavaṇṇā lohitavatthā lohitālaṅkārā, ekacce licchavī odātā honti odātavaṇṇā odātavatthā odātālaṅkārā.
[¶62] Then Ambapālī the courtesan collided with those Licchavi youths, axle to axle, wheel to wheel, yoke to yoke. The Licchavis said to her, “What, you wench Ambapālī, are you doing colliding with us axle to axle, wheel to wheel, yoke to yoke?”
> Pali: Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā daharānaṁ daharānaṁ licchavīnaṁ akkhena akkhaṁ cakkena cakkaṁ yugena yugaṁ paṭivaṭṭesi. Atha kho te licchavī ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kiṁ, je ambapāli, daharānaṁ daharānaṁ licchavīnaṁ akkhena akkhaṁ cakkena cakkaṁ yugena yugaṁ paṭivaṭṭesī”ti?
[¶63] “Well, masters, it’s because I’ve invited the Buddha for tomorrow’s meal together with the mendicant Saṅgha.”
> Pali: “Tathā hi pana me, ayyaputtā, bhagavā nimantito svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.
[¶64] “Wench, give us that meal for a hundred thousand!”
> Pali: “Dehi, je ambapāli, etaṁ bhattaṁ satasahassenā”ti.
[¶65] “Masters, even if you were to give me Vesālī with her provinces, I still wouldn’t give that meal to you.”
> Pali: “Sacepi me, ayyaputtā, vesāliṁ sāhāraṁ dassatha, evamahaṁ taṁ bhattaṁ na dassāmī”ti.
[¶66] Then the Licchavis snapped their fingers, saying, “We’ve been beaten by the aunty! We’ve been beaten by the aunty!” Then they continued on to Ambapālī’s Mango Grove.
> Pali: Atha kho te licchavī aṅguliṁ phoṭesuṁ: “jitamha vata bho ambakāya, jitamha vata bho ambakāyā”ti. Atha kho te licchavī yena ambapālivanaṁ tena pāyiṁsu.
[¶67] The Buddha saw them coming off in the distance, and addressed the mendicants: “Any of the mendicants who’ve never seen the gods of the thirty-three before, just have a look at the assembly of Licchavis. See the assembly of Licchavis, check them out: they’re just like the thirty-three!”
> Pali: Addasā kho bhagavā te licchavī dūratova āgacchante. Disvāna bhikkhū āmantesi: “yesaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ devā tāvatiṁsā adiṭṭhapubbā, oloketha, bhikkhave, licchaviparisaṁ; apaloketha, bhikkhave, licchaviparisaṁ; upasaṁharatha, bhikkhave, licchaviparisaṁ— tāvatiṁsasadisan”ti.
[¶68] The Licchavis went by carriage as far as the terrain allowed, then descended and approached the Buddha on foot. They bowed to the Buddha, sat down to one side, and the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired them with a Dhamma talk.
> Pali: Atha kho te licchavī yāvatikā yānassa bhūmi, yānena gantvā, yānā paccorohitvā pattikāva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinne kho te licchavī bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.
[¶69] Then they said to the Buddha, “Sir, would the Buddha, together with the mendicant Saṅgha, please accept tomorrow’s meal from us?”
> Pali: Atha kho te licchavī bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “adhivāsetu no, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.
[¶70] Then the Buddha said to the Licchavis, “I have already accepted tomorrow’s meal from Ambapālī the courtesan.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā te licchavī etadavoca: “adhivutthaṁ kho me, licchavī, svātanāya ambapāliyā gaṇikāya bhattan”ti.
[¶71] Then the Licchavis snapped their fingers, saying, “We’ve been beaten by the aunty! We’ve been beaten by the aunty!”
> Pali: Atha kho te licchavī aṅguliṁ phoṭesuṁ: “jitamha vata bho ambakāya, jitamha vata bho ambakāyā”ti.
[¶72] And then those Licchavis approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. They got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho te licchavī bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶73] And when the night had passed Ambapālī had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in her own park. Then she had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “Sir, it’s time. The meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā tassā rattiyā accayena sake ārāme paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶74] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of Ambapālī together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Then Ambapālī served and satisfied the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha with her own hands with delicious fresh and cooked foods.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena ambapāliyā gaṇikāya nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappesi sampavāresi.
[¶75] When the Buddha had eaten and washed his hands and bowl, Ambapālī took a low seat, sat to one side, and said to the Buddha, “Sir, I present this park to the mendicant Saṅgha headed by the Buddha.”
> Pali: Atha kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho ambapālī gaṇikā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “imāhaṁ, bhante, ārāmaṁ buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dammī”ti.
[¶76] The Buddha accepted the park.
> Pali: Paṭiggahesi bhagavā ārāmaṁ.
[¶77] Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired her with a Dhamma talk, after which he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambapāliṁ gaṇikaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶78] And while staying at Vesālī, too, the Buddha often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharanto ambapālivane etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶79] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶80] 12. Commencing the Rains at Beluva
> Pali: 12. Veḷuvagāmavassūpagamana
[¶81] When the Buddha had stayed in Ambapālī’s Mango Grove as long as he pleased, he addressed Venerable Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the little village of Beluva.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā ambapālivane yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena veḷuvagāmako tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶82] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at the little village of Beluva, and stayed there.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena veḷuvagāmako tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā veḷuvagāmake viharati.
[¶83] There the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, please enter the rainy season residence with whatever friends or acquaintances you have around Vesālī. I’ll commence the rainy season residence right here in the little village of Beluva.”
> Pali: Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “etha tumhe, bhikkhave, samantā vesāliṁ yathāmittaṁ yathāsandiṭṭhaṁ yathāsambhattaṁ vassaṁ upetha. Ahaṁ pana idheva veḷuvagāmake vassaṁ upagacchāmī”ti.
[¶84] “Yes, sir,” those mendicants replied. They did as the Buddha said, while the Buddha commenced the rainy season residence right there in the little village of Beluva.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paṭissutvā samantā vesāliṁ yathāmittaṁ yathāsandiṭṭhaṁ yathāsambhattaṁ vassaṁ upagacchiṁsu. Bhagavā pana tattheva veḷuvagāmake vassaṁ upagacchi.
[¶85] After the Buddha had commenced the rainy season residence, he fell severely ill, struck by dreadful pains, close to death. But he endured unbothered, with mindfulness and situational awareness. Then it occurred to the Buddha, “It would not be appropriate for me to be fully extinguished before informing my supporters and taking leave of the mendicant Saṅgha. Why don’t I forcefully suppress this illness, stabilize the life force, and live on?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato vassūpagatassa kharo ābādho uppajji, bāḷhā vedanā vattanti māraṇantikā. Tā sudaṁ bhagavā sato sampajāno adhivāsesi avihaññamāno. Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ, yvāhaṁ anāmantetvā upaṭṭhāke anapaloketvā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parinibbāyeyyaṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ ābādhaṁ vīriyena paṭipaṇāmetvā jīvitasaṅkhāraṁ adhiṭṭhāya vihareyyan”ti.
[¶86] So that is what he did. Then the Buddha’s illness died down.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā taṁ ābādhaṁ vīriyena paṭipaṇāmetvā jīvitasaṅkhāraṁ adhiṭṭhāya vihāsi. Atha kho bhagavato so ābādho paṭippassambhi.
[¶87] Soon after the Buddha had recovered from that sickness, he left his dwelling and sat in the shade of the porch on the seat spread out. Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, it’s fantastic that the Buddha is comfortable and well. Because when the Buddha was sick, my body felt like it was drugged. I was disorientated, and the teachings didn’t spring to mind. Still, at least I was consoled by the thought that the Buddha won’t be fully extinguished without bringing something up regarding the Saṅgha of mendicants.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā vihārā nikkhamma vihārapacchāyāyaṁ paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “diṭṭho me, bhante, bhagavato phāsu; diṭṭhaṁ me, bhante, bhagavato khamanīyaṁ, api ca me, bhante, madhurakajāto viya kāyo, disāpi me na pakkhāyanti, dhammāpi maṁ na paṭibhanti bhagavato gelaññena. Api ca me, bhante, ahosi kācideva assāsamattā: ‘na tāva bhagavā parinibbāyissati, na yāva bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ārabbha kiñcideva udāharatī’”ti.
[¶88] “But what could the mendicant Saṅgha expect from me, Ānanda? I’ve taught the Dhamma without making any distinction between secret and public teachings. The Realized One doesn’t have the closed fist of a tutor when it comes to the teachings. If there’s anyone who thinks: ‘I shall lead the mendicant Saṅgha,’ or ‘the Saṅgha of mendicants is meant for me,’ let them bring something up regarding the Saṅgha. But the Realized One doesn’t think like this, so why should he bring something up regarding the Saṅgha?
> Pali: “Kiṁ panānanda, bhikkhusaṅgho mayi paccāsīsati? Desito, ānanda, mayā dhammo anantaraṁ abāhiraṁ karitvā. Natthānanda, tathāgatassa dhammesu ācariyamuṭṭhi. Yassa nūna, ānanda, evamassa: ‘ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī’ti vā ‘mamuddesiko bhikkhusaṅgho’ti vā, so nūna, ānanda, bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ārabbha kiñcideva udāhareyya. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, na evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissāmī’ti vā ‘mamuddesiko bhikkhusaṅgho’ti vā. Sakiṁ, ānanda, tathāgato bhikkhusaṅghaṁ ārabbha kiñcideva udāharissati.
[¶89] I’m now old, elderly and senior. I’m advanced in years and have reached the final stage of life. I’m currently eighty years old. Just as a decrepit old cart is kept going by a rope, in the same way, the Realized One’s body is kept going as if by a rope. Sometimes the Realized One, not focusing on any signs, and with the cessation of certain feelings, enters and remains in the signless immersion of the heart. Only then does the Realized One’s body become more comfortable.
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho panānanda, etarahi jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayo anuppatto. Āsītiko me vayo vattati. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, jajjarasakaṭaṁ veṭhamissakena yāpeti; evameva kho, ānanda, veṭhamissakena maññe tathāgatassa kāyo yāpeti. Yasmiṁ, ānanda, samaye tathāgato sabbanimittānaṁ amanasikārā ekaccānaṁ vedanānaṁ nirodhā animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ upasampajja viharati, phāsutaro, ānanda, tasmiṁ samaye tathāgatassa kāyo hoti.
[¶90] So Ānanda, live as your own island, your own refuge, with no other refuge. Let the teaching be your island and your refuge, with no other refuge. And how does a mendicant do this? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. That’s how a mendicant lives with themselves as island and refuge, without other refuge; with the teachings as island and refuge, without other refuge.
> Pali: Tasmātihānanda, attadīpā viharatha attasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā. Kathañcānanda, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo, dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo? Idhānanda, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati atāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu …pe… citte …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo, dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo.
[¶91] Whether now or after I have passed, any who shall live as their own island, their own refuge, with no other refuge; with the teaching as their island and their refuge, with no other refuge—those mendicants of mine eager to train shall be among the best of the best.”
> Pali: Ye hi keci, ānanda, etarahi vā mama vā accayena attadīpā viharissanti attasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, tamatagge me te, ānanda, bhikkhū bhavissanti ye keci sikkhākāmā”ti.
[¶92] The second recitation section.
> Pali: Dutiyabhāṇavāro.
[¶93] 13. An Obvious Hint
> Pali: 13. Nimittobhāsakathā
[¶94] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Vesālī for alms. Then, after the meal, on his return from almsround, he addressed Venerable Ānanda: “Ānanda, get your sitting cloth. Let’s go to the Cāpāla Shrine for the day’s meditation.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaṇhāhi, ānanda, nisīdanaṁ, yena cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ tenupasaṅkamissāma divā vihārāyā”ti.
[¶95] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. Taking his sitting cloth he followed behind the Buddha.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā nisīdanaṁ ādāya bhagavantaṁ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhi.
[¶96] Then the Buddha went up to the Cāpāla Shrine, where he sat down on the seat spread out. Ānanda bowed to the Buddha and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Āyasmāpi kho ānando bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶97] The Buddha said to him: “Ānanda, Vesālī is lovely. And the Udena, Gotamaka, Seven Maidens, Many Sons, Sārandada, and Cāpāla Shrines are all lovely.
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ gotamakaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sattambaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ bahuputtaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sārandadaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ.
[¶98] Whoever has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power—made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them—may, if they wish, live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it. The Realized One has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power, made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them. If he wished, the Realized One could live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it.”
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā”ti.
[¶99] But Ānanda didn’t get it, even though the Buddha dropped such an obvious hint, such a clear sign. He didn’t beg the Buddha: “Sir, may the Blessed One please remain for the proper lifespan! May the Holy One please remain for the proper lifespan! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.” For his mind was as if possessed by Māra.
> Pali: Evampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ; na bhagavantaṁ yāci: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti, yathā taṁ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto.
[¶100] For a second time … And for a third time, the Buddha said to Ānanda: “Ānanda, Vesālī is lovely. And the Udena, Gotamaka, Seven Maidens, Many Sons, Sārandada, and Cāpāla Shrines are all lovely. Whoever has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power—made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them—may, if they wish, live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it. The Realized One has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power, made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them. If he wished, the Realized One could live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā …pe… tatiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ gotamakaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sattambaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ bahuputtaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sārandadaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ. Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā”ti.
[¶101] But Ānanda didn’t get it, even though the Buddha dropped such an obvious hint, such a clear sign. He didn’t beg the Buddha: “Sir, may the Blessed One please remain for the proper lifespan! May the Holy One please remain for the proper lifespan! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.” For his mind was as if possessed by Māra.
> Pali: Evampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavatā oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ; na bhagavantaṁ yāci: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti, yathā taṁ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto.
## 30. DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/30/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/30/#p-N
[¶0] Then the Buddha got up and said to Venerable Ānanda, “Go now, Ānanda, at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.
[¶1] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. He rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before sitting at the root of a tree close by.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā avidūre aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisīdi.
[¶2] 14. The Appeal of Māra
> Pali: 14. Mārayācanakathā
[¶3] And then, not long after Ānanda had left, Māra the Wicked went up to the Buddha, stood to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Atha kho māro pāpimā acirapakkante āyasmante ānande yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho māro pāpimā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶4] “Sir, may the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha. Sir, you once made this statement: ‘Wicked One, I shall not be fully extinguished until I have monk disciples who are competent, educated, assured, learned, have memorized the teachings, and practice in line with the principle of the teaching. Not until they practice properly, living in line with the teaching. Not until they’ve learned their denomination, and explain, teach, assert, establish, disclose, analyze, and make it clear. Not until they can legitimately and completely refute the doctrines of others that come up, and teach with a demonstrable basis.’
> Pali: “parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato. Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.
[¶5] Today you do have such monk disciples. May the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha.
> Pali: Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhikkhū bhagavato sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti. Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.
[¶6] Sir, you once made this statement: ‘Wicked One, I shall not be fully extinguished until I have nun disciples who are competent, educated, self-assured, learned …’
> Pali: Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhuniyo na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.
[¶7] Today you do have such nun disciples. May the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha.
> Pali: Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhikkhuniyo bhagavato sāvikā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti. Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.
[¶8] Sir, you once made this statement: ‘Wicked One, I shall not be fully extinguished until I have layman disciples who are competent, educated, self-assured, learned …’
> Pali: Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsakā na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.
[¶9] Today you do have such layman disciples. May the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha.
> Pali: Etarahi kho pana, bhante, upāsakā bhagavato sāvakā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti. Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.
[¶10] Sir, you once made this statement: ‘Wicked One, I shall not be fully extinguished until I have laywoman disciples who are competent, educated, self-assured, learned …’
> Pali: Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsikā na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessantī’ti.
[¶11] Today you do have such laywoman disciples. May the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha.
> Pali: Etarahi kho pana, bhante, upāsikā bhagavato sāvikā viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desenti. Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato.
[¶12] Sir, you once made this statement: ‘Wicked One, I will not be fully extinguished until my spiritual path is successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans.’
> Pali: Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: ‘na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitan’ti.
[¶13] Today your spiritual path is successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans. May the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha.”
> Pali: Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhagavato brahmacariyaṁ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ, yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato”ti.
[¶14] When this was said, the Buddha said to Māra, “Relax, Wicked One. The full extinguishment of the Realized One will be soon. Three months from now the Realized One will be fully extinguished.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavoca: “appossukko tvaṁ, pāpima, hohi, na ciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī”ti.
[¶15] 15. Surrendering the Life Force
> Pali: 15. Āyusaṅkhāraossajjana
[¶16] So at the Cāpāla Shrine the Buddha, mindful and aware, surrendered the life force. When he did so there was a great earthquake, awe-inspiring and hair-raising, and thunder cracked the sky. Then, understanding this matter, on that occasion the Buddha expressed this heartfelt sentiment:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā cāpāle cetiye sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṁ ossaji. Ossaṭṭhe ca bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāre mahābhūmicālo ahosi bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso, devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu. Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶17] “Comparing the incomparable with the creation of prolonged life,
the sage surrendered the life force.
Happy inside, serene,
he shattered self-creation like a suit of armor.”
> Pali: “Tulamatulañca sambhavaṁ,
Bhavasaṅkhāramavassaji muni;
Ajjhattarato samāhito,
Abhindi kavacamivattasambhavan”ti.
[¶18] 16. The Causes of Earthquakes
> Pali: 16. Mahābhūmicālahetu
[¶19] Then Venerable Ānanda thought, “How incredible, how amazing! That was a really big earthquake! That was really a very big earthquake; awe-inspiring and hair-raising, and thunder cracked the sky! What’s the cause, what’s the reason for a great earthquake?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, mahā vatāyaṁ bhūmicālo; sumahā vatāyaṁ bhūmicālo bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso; devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu. Ko nu kho hetu ko paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāyā”ti?
[¶20] Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “How incredible, sir, how amazing! That was a really big earthquake! That was really a very big earthquake; awe-inspiring and hair-raising, and thunder cracked the sky! What’s the cause, what’s the reason for a great earthquake?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi, ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Mahā vatāyaṁ, bhante, bhūmicālo; sumahā vatāyaṁ, bhante, bhūmicālo bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso; devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu. Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu ko paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāyā”ti?
[¶21] “Ānanda, there are these eight causes and reasons for a great earthquake. What eight?
> Pali: “Aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, hetū, aṭṭha paccayā mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya. Katame aṭṭha?
[¶22] This great earth is established on water, the water is established on air, and the air stands in space. At a time when a great wind blows, it stirs the water, and the water stirs the earth. This is the first cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Ayaṁ, ānanda, mahāpathavī udake patiṭṭhitā, udakaṁ vāte patiṭṭhitaṁ, vāto ākāsaṭṭho. Hoti kho so, ānanda, samayo, yaṁ mahāvātā vāyanti. Mahāvātā vāyantā udakaṁ kampenti. Udakaṁ kampitaṁ pathaviṁ kampeti. Ayaṁ paṭhamo hetu paṭhamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶23] Furthermore, there is an ascetic or brahmin with psychic power who has achieved mastery of the mind, or a god who is mighty and powerful. They’ve developed a limited perception of earth and a limitless perception of water. They make the earth shake and rock and tremble. This is the second cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, samaṇo vā hoti brāhmaṇo vā iddhimā cetovasippatto, devo vā mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo, tassa parittā pathavīsaññā bhāvitā hoti, appamāṇā āposaññā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ kampeti saṅkampeti sampakampeti sampavedheti. Ayaṁ dutiyo hetu dutiyo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶24] Furthermore, when the being intent on awakening passes away from the host of joyful gods, he’s conceived in his mother’s womb, mindful and aware. Then the earth shakes and rocks and trembles. This is the third cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā bodhisatto tusitakāyā cavitvā sato sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Ayaṁ tatiyo hetu tatiyo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶25] Furthermore, when the being intent on awakening comes out of his mother’s womb mindful and aware, the earth shakes and rocks and trembles. This is the fourth cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā bodhisatto sato sampajāno mātukucchismā nikkhamati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Ayaṁ catuttho hetu catuttho paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶26] Furthermore, when the Realized One awakens to the supreme perfect awakening, the earth shakes and rocks and trembles. This is the fifth cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Ayaṁ pañcamo hetu pañcamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶27] Furthermore, when the Realized One rolls forth the supreme Wheel of Dhamma, the earth shakes and rocks and trembles. This is the sixth cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavatteti, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho hetu chaṭṭho paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶28] Furthermore, when the Realized One, mindful and aware, surrenders the life force, the earth shakes and rocks and trembles. This is the seventh cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṁ ossajjati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Ayaṁ sattamo hetu sattamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶29] Furthermore, when the Realized One becomes fully extinguished in the element of extinguishment with no residue, the earth shakes and rocks and trembles. This is the eighth cause and reason for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, yadā tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, tadāyaṁ pathavī kampati saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo hetu aṭṭhamo paccayo mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶30] These are the eight causes and reasons for a great earthquake.
> Pali: Ime kho, ānanda, aṭṭha hetū, aṭṭha paccayā mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāya.
[¶31] 17. Eight Assemblies
> Pali: 17. Aṭṭhaparisā
[¶32] There are, Ānanda, these eight assemblies. What eight? The assemblies of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and ascetics. An assembly of the gods of the four great kings. An assembly of the gods of the thirty-three. An assembly of Māras. An assembly of divinities.
> Pali: Aṭṭha kho imā, ānanda, parisā. Katamā aṭṭha? Khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇaparisā, gahapatiparisā, samaṇaparisā, cātumahārājikaparisā, tāvatiṁsaparisā, māraparisā, brahmaparisā.
[¶33] I recall having approached an assembly of hundreds of aristocrats. There I used to sit with them, converse, and engage in discussion. And my appearance and voice became just like theirs. I educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired them with a Dhamma talk. But when I spoke they didn’t know: ‘Who is this that speaks? Is it a god or a human?’ And when my Dhamma talk was finished I vanished. But when I vanished they didn’t know: ‘Who was that who vanished? Was it a god or a human?’
> Pali: Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, ānanda, anekasataṁ khattiyaparisaṁ upasaṅkamitā. Tatrapi mayā sannisinnapubbañceva sallapitapubbañca sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā. Tattha yādisako tesaṁ vaṇṇo hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ vaṇṇo hoti. Yādisako tesaṁ saro hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ saro hoti. Dhammiyā kathāya sandassemi samādapemi samuttejemi sampahaṁsemi. Bhāsamānañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ bhāsati devo vā manusso vā’ti? Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā antaradhāyāmi. Antarahitañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ antarahito devo vā manusso vā’ti?
[¶34] I recall having approached an assembly of hundreds of brahmins … householders … ascetics … the gods of the four great kings … the gods of the thirty-three … Māras … divinities. There too I used to sit with them, converse, and engage in discussion. And my appearance and voice became just like theirs. I educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired them with a Dhamma talk. But when I spoke they didn’t know: ‘Who is this that speaks? Is it a god or a human?’ And when my Dhamma talk was finished I vanished. But when I vanished they didn’t know: ‘Who was that who vanished? Was it a god or a human?’
> Pali: Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṁ, ānanda, anekasataṁ brāhmaṇaparisaṁ …pe… gahapatiparisaṁ … samaṇaparisaṁ … cātumahārājikaparisaṁ … tāvatiṁsaparisaṁ … māraparisaṁ … brahmaparisaṁ upasaṅkamitā. Tatrapi mayā sannisinnapubbañceva sallapitapubbañca sākacchā ca samāpajjitapubbā. Tattha yādisako tesaṁ vaṇṇo hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ vaṇṇo hoti. Yādisako tesaṁ saro hoti, tādisako mayhaṁ saro hoti. Dhammiyā kathāya sandassemi samādapemi samuttejemi sampahaṁsemi. Bhāsamānañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ bhāsati devo vā manusso vā’ti? Dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā antaradhāyāmi. Antarahitañca maṁ na jānanti: ‘ko nu kho ayaṁ antarahito devo vā manusso vā’ti?
[¶35] These are the eight assemblies.
> Pali: Imā kho, ānanda, aṭṭha parisā.
[¶36] 18. Eight Dimensions of Mastery
> Pali: 18. Aṭṭhaabhibhāyatana
[¶37] Ānanda, there are these eight dimensions of mastery. What eight?
> Pali: Aṭṭha kho imāni, ānanda, abhibhāyatanāni. Katamāni aṭṭha?
[¶38] Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the first dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶39] Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the second dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶40] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the third dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶41] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fourth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ catutthaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶42] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are blue, with blue color and blue appearance. They’re like a flax flower that’s blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fifth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶43] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. They’re like a champak flower that’s yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the sixth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶44] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance. They’re like a scarlet mallow flower that’s red, with red color and red appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, red, with red color and red appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the seventh dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ sattamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶45] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance. They’re like the morning star that’s white, with white color and white appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, white, with white color and white appearance. In the same way, not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the eighth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā. Seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ odātaṁ odātavaṇṇaṁ odātanidassanaṁ odātanibhāsaṁ. Evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. ‘Tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶46] These are the eight dimensions of mastery.
> Pali: Imāni kho, ānanda, aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni.
[¶47] 19. The Eight Liberations
> Pali: 19. Aṭṭhavimokkha
[¶48] Ānanda, there are these eight liberations. What eight?
> Pali: Aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, vimokkhā. Katame aṭṭha?
[¶49] Having physical form, they see forms. This is the first liberation.
> Pali: Rūpī rūpāni passati, ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶50] Not perceiving form internally, they see forms externally. This is the second liberation.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho.
[¶51] They’re focused only on beauty. This is the third liberation.
> Pali: Subhanteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho.
[¶52] Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fourth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho.
[¶53] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the fifth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho.
[¶54] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. This is the sixth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho.
[¶55] Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the seventh liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho.
[¶56] Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the eighth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati, ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶57] These are the eight liberations.
> Pali: Ime kho, ānanda, aṭṭha vimokkhā.
[¶58] > Pali: (…)
[¶59] Ānanda, this one time, when I was first awakened, I was staying in Uruvelā at the goatherd’s banyan tree on the bank of the Nerañjarā River. Then Māra the wicked approached me, stood to one side, and said: ‘Sir, may the Blessed One now be fully extinguished! May the Holy One now be fully extinguished! Now is the time for the full extinguishment of the Buddha.’ When he had spoken, I said to Māra:
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ uruvelāyaṁ viharāmi najjā nerañjarāya tīre ajapālanigrodhe paṭhamābhisambuddho. Atha kho, ānanda, māro pāpimā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, ānanda, māro pāpimā maṁ etadavoca: ‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā; parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato’ti. Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, ānanda, māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavocaṁ:
[¶60] ‘Wicked One, I shall not be fully extinguished until I have monk disciples … nun disciples … layman disciples … laywoman disciples who are competent, educated, self-assured, learned.
> Pali: ‘Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti. Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhuniyo na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti. Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsakā na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārino, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti. Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me upāsikā na sāvikā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā dhammānudhammappaṭipannā sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacāriniyo, sakaṁ ācariyakaṁ uggahetvā ācikkhissanti desessanti paññapessanti paṭṭhapessanti vivarissanti vibhajissanti uttānīkarissanti, uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammena suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desessanti.
[¶61] I shall not be fully extinguished until my spiritual path is successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans.’
> Pali: Na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitan’ti.
[¶62] Today, just now at the Cāpāla Shrine Māra the Wicked approached me once more with the same request, reminding me of my former statement, and saying that those conditions had been fulfilled.
> Pali: Idāneva kho, ānanda, ajja cāpāle cetiye māro pāpimā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho, ānanda, māro pāpimā maṁ etadavoca: ‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato. Bhāsitā kho panesā, bhante, bhagavatā vācā: “na tāvāhaṁ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti …pe… yāva me bhikkhuniyo na sāvikā bhavissanti …pe… yāva me upāsakā na sāvakā bhavissanti …pe… yāva me upāsikā na sāvikā bhavissanti …pe… yāva me idaṁ brahmacariyaṁ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ, yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitan”ti. Etarahi kho pana, bhante, bhagavato brahmacariyaṁ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ, yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā, parinibbātu sugato, parinibbānakālo dāni, bhante, bhagavato’ti.
[¶63] When he had spoken, I said to Māra: ‘Relax, Wicked One. The full extinguishment of the Realized One will be soon. Three months from now the Realized One will be fully extinguished.’ So today, just now at the Cāpāla Shrine, mindful and aware, I surrendered the life force.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, ānanda, māraṁ pāpimantaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘appossukko tvaṁ, pāpima, hohi, na ciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī’ti. Idāneva kho, ānanda, ajja cāpāle cetiye tathāgatena satena sampajānena āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭho”ti.
[¶64] 20. The Appeal of Ānanda
> Pali: 20. Ānandayācanakathā
[¶65] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, may the Blessed One please remain for the proper lifespan! May the Holy One please remain for the proper lifespan! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.
[¶66] “Enough now, Ānanda. Do not beg the Realized One. Now is not the time to beg the Realized One.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ dāni, ānanda. Mā tathāgataṁ yāci, akālo dāni, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yācanāyā”ti.
[¶67] For a second time … For a third time, Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, may the Blessed One please remain for the proper lifespan! May the Holy One please remain for the proper lifespan! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho āyasmā ānando …pe… tatiyampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.
[¶68] “Ānanda, do you have faith in the Realized One’s awakening?”
> Pali: “Saddahasi tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatassa bodhin”ti?
[¶69] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶70] “So why then do you keep pressing me up to the third time?”
> Pali: “Atha kiñcarahi tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāvatatiyakaṁ abhinippīḷesī”ti?
[¶71] “Sir, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: ‘Whoever has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power—made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them—may, if they wish, live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it. The Realized One has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power, made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them. If he wished, the Realized One could live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it.’”
> Pali: “Sammukhā metaṁ, bhante, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā. So ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’”ti.
[¶72] “Do you have faith, Ānanda?”
> Pali: “Saddahasi tvaṁ, ānandā”ti?
[¶73] “Yes, sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”.
[¶74] “Therefore, Ānanda, the misdeed is yours alone, the mistake is yours alone. For even though the Realized One dropped such an obvious hint, such a clear sign, you didn’t beg me to remain for the proper lifespan, or what’s left of it. If you had begged me, I would have turned you down twice, but consented on the third time. Therefore, Ānanda, the misdeed is yours alone, the mistake is yours alone.
> Pali: “Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ, yaṁ tvaṁ tathāgatena evaṁ oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti. Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya. Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.
[¶75] Ānanda, this one time I was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain. There I said to you: ‘Ānanda, Rājagaha is lovely, and so is the Vulture’s Peak. Whoever has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power—made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them—may, if they wish, live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it. The Realized One has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power, made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them. If he wished, the Realized One could live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it.’ But you didn’t get it, even though I dropped such an obvious hint, such a clear sign. You didn’t beg me to remain for the proper lifespan, or what’s left of it. If you had begged me, I would have turned you down twice, but consented on the third time. Therefore, Ānanda, the misdeed is yours alone, the mistake is yours alone.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ rājagahe viharāmi gijjhakūṭe pabbate. Tatrāpi kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, ānanda, rājagahaṁ, ramaṇīyo, ānanda, gijjhakūṭo pabbato. Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti. Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti. Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya. Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.
[¶76] Ānanda, this one time I was staying right there near Rājagaha, at the Gotama banyan tree … at Bandit’s Cliff … in the Sattapaṇṇi cave on the slopes of Vebhāra … at the Black Rock on the slopes of Isigili … in the Cool Grove, under the Cobra’s Hood Grotto … in the Hot Springs Monastery … in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground … in Jīvaka’s Mango Grove … in the Maddakucchi deer park …
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ tattheva rājagahe viharāmi gotamanigrodhe …pe… tattheva rājagahe viharāmi corapapāte … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi vebhārapasse sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṁ … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi isigilipasse kāḷasilāyaṁ … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi sītavane sappasoṇḍikapabbhāre … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi tapodārāme … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi jīvakambavane … tattheva rājagahe viharāmi maddakucchismiṁ migadāye.
[¶77] And in each place I said to you: ‘Ānanda, Rājagaha is lovely, and so are all these places. … If he wished, the Realized One could live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it.’ But you didn’t get it, even though I dropped such an obvious hint, such a clear sign. You didn’t beg me to remain for the proper lifespan, or what’s left of it.
> Pali: Tatrāpi kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyaṁ, ānanda, rājagahaṁ, ramaṇīyo gijjhakūṭo pabbato, ramaṇīyo gotamanigrodho, ramaṇīyo corapapāto, ramaṇīyā vebhārapasse sattapaṇṇiguhā, ramaṇīyā isigilipasse kāḷasilā, ramaṇīyo sītavane sappasoṇḍikapabbhāro, ramaṇīyo tapodārāmo, ramaṇīyo veḷuvane kalandakanivāpo, ramaṇīyaṁ jīvakambavanaṁ, ramaṇīyo maddakucchismiṁ migadāyo. Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā …pe… ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti. Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti. Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya. Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.
[¶78] Ānanda, this one time I was staying right here near Vesālī, at the Udena Shrine … at the Gotamaka Shrine … at the Seven Maidens Shrine … at the Many Sons Shrine … at the Sārandada Shrine … and just now, today at the Cāpāla Shrine. There I said to you: ‘Ānanda, Vesālī is lovely. And the Udena, Gotamaka, Seven Maidens, Many Sons, Sārandada, and Cāpāla Shrines are all lovely. Whoever has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power—made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them—may, if they wish, live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it. The Realized One has developed and cultivated the four bases of psychic power, made them a vehicle and a basis, kept them up, consolidated them, and properly implemented them. If he wished, the Realized One could live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it.’ But you didn’t get it, even though I dropped such an obvious hint, such a clear sign. You didn’t beg me to remain for the proper lifespan, or what’s left of it, saying: ‘Sir, may the Blessed One please remain for the proper lifespan! May the Holy One please remain for the proper lifespan! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.’
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi udene cetiye. Tatrāpi kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ. Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti. Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti. Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya, tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ. Ekamidāhaṁ, ānanda, samayaṁ idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi gotamake cetiye …pe… idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi sattambe cetiye … idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi bahuputte cetiye … idheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi sārandade cetiye … idāneva kho tāhaṁ, ānanda, ajja cāpāle cetiye āmantesiṁ: ‘ramaṇīyā, ānanda, vesālī, ramaṇīyaṁ udenaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ gotamakaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sattambaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ bahuputtaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ sārandadaṁ cetiyaṁ, ramaṇīyaṁ cāpālaṁ cetiyaṁ. Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Tathāgatassa kho, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, tathāgato kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā’ti. Evampi kho tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena oḷārike nimitte kayiramāne oḷārike obhāse kayiramāne nāsakkhi paṭivijjhituṁ, na tathāgataṁ yāci: ‘tiṭṭhatu bhagavā kappaṁ, tiṭṭhatu sugato kappaṁ bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.
[¶79] If you had begged me, I would have turned you down twice, but consented on the third time. Therefore, Ānanda, the misdeed is yours alone, the mistake is yours alone.
> Pali: Sace tvaṁ, ānanda, tathāgataṁ yāceyyāsi, dveva te vācā tathāgato paṭikkhipeyya, atha tatiyakaṁ adhivāseyya. Tasmātihānanda, tuyhevetaṁ dukkaṭaṁ, tuyhevetaṁ aparaddhaṁ.
## 31. DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 4
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/31/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/31/#p-N
[¶0] Did I not prepare for this when I explained that we must be parted and separated from all we hold dear and beloved? How could it possibly be so that what is born, created, conditioned, and liable to wear out should not wear out? The Realized One has discarded, eliminated, released, given up, relinquished, and surrendered the life force. He has categorically stated: ‘The full extinguishment of the Realized One will be soon. Three months from now the Realized One will be fully extinguished.’ It’s not possible for the Realized One, for the sake of life, to take back the life force once it has been given up like that.
> Pali: Nanu etaṁ, ānanda, mayā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo. Taṁ kutettha, ānanda, labbhā, yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, taṁ vata mā palujjīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati’. Yaṁ kho panetaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatena cattaṁ vantaṁ muttaṁ pahīnaṁ paṭinissaṭṭhaṁ ossaṭṭho āyusaṅkhāro, ekaṁsena vācā bhāsitā: ‘na ciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī’ti. Tañca tathāgato jīvitahetu puna paccāvamissatīti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati.
[¶1] Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the Great Wood, the hall with the peaked roof.”
> Pali: Āyāmānanda, yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶2] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶3] So the Buddha went with Ānanda to the hall with the peaked roof, and said to him, “Go, Ānanda, gather all the mendicants staying in the vicinity of Vesālī together in the assembly hall.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṁ yena mahāvanaṁ kūṭāgārasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, yāvatikā bhikkhū vesāliṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātehī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. He did what the Buddha asked, went up to him, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, “Sir, the mendicant Saṅgha has assembled. Please, sir, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā yāvatikā bhikkhū vesāliṁ upanissāya viharanti, te sabbe upaṭṭhānasālāyaṁ sannipātetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sannipatito, bhante, bhikkhusaṅgho, yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶5] > Pali: (…)
[¶6] Then the Buddha went to the assembly hall, where he sat down on the seat spread out and addressed the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yenupaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶7] “So, mendicants, having carefully memorized those things I have taught you from my direct knowledge, you should cultivate, develop, and make much of them so that this spiritual practice may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans. And what are those things I have taught from my direct knowledge? They are: the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, the four right efforts, the four bases of psychic power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven awakening factors, and the noble eightfold path.
> Pali: “tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ye te mayā dhammā abhiññā desitā, te vo sādhukaṁ uggahetvā āsevitabbā bhāvetabbā bahulīkātabbā, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā mayā abhiññā desitā, ye vo sādhukaṁ uggahetvā āsevitabbā bhāvetabbā bahulīkātabbā, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Seyyathidaṁ—cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo.
[¶8] These are the things I have taught from my direct knowledge. Having carefully memorized them, you should cultivate, develop, and make much of them so that this spiritual practice may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.”
> Pali: Ime kho te, bhikkhave, dhammā mayā abhiññā desitā, ye vo sādhukaṁ uggahetvā āsevitabbā bhāvetabbā bahulīkātabbā, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.
[¶9] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶10] “Come now, mendicants, I say to you all: ‘Conditions fall apart. Persist with diligence.’ The full extinguishment of the Realized One will be soon. Three months from now the Realized One will be fully extinguished.”
> Pali: “handa dāni, bhikkhave, āmantayāmi vo, vayadhammā saṅkhārā, appamādena sampādetha. Naciraṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Ito tiṇṇaṁ māsānaṁ accayena tathāgato parinibbāyissatī”ti.
[¶11] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶12] “I’ve reached a ripe old age,
and little of my life is left.
Having given it up, I’ll depart;
I’ve made a refuge for myself.
> Pali: “Paripakko vayo mayhaṁ,
parittaṁ mama jīvitaṁ;
Pahāya vo gamissāmi,
kataṁ me saraṇamattano.
[¶13] Diligent and mindful,
be of good virtues, mendicants!
With well-settled thoughts,
take good care of your minds.
> Pali: Appamattā satīmanto,
susīlā hotha bhikkhavo;
Susamāhitasaṅkappā,
sacittamanurakkhatha.
[¶14] Whoever meditates diligently
in this teaching and training,
giving up transmigration through rebirths,
will make an end to suffering.”
> Pali: Yo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye,
appamatto vihassati;
Pahāya jātisaṁsāraṁ,
dukkhassantaṁ karissatī”ti.
[¶15] The third recitation section.
> Pali: Tatiyo bhāṇavāro.
[¶16] 21. The Elephant Look
> Pali: 21. Nāgāpalokita
[¶17] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Vesālī for alms. Then, after the meal, on his return from almsround, he turned to gaze back at Vesālī, the way that elephants do. He said to Venerable Ānanda: “Ānanda, this will be the last time the Realized One sees Vesālī. Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Wares Village.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nāgāpalokitaṁ vesāliṁ apaloketvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “idaṁ pacchimakaṁ, ānanda, tathāgatassa vesāliyā dassanaṁ bhavissati. Āyāmānanda, yena bhaṇḍagāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶18] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶19] Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Wares Village, and stayed there. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena bhaṇḍagāmo tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bhaṇḍagāme viharati. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶20] “Mendicants, due to not understanding and not penetrating four things, both you and I have wandered and transmigrated for such a very long time. What four? Noble ethics, immersion, wisdom, and freedom. These noble ethics, immersion, wisdom, and freedom have been understood and comprehended. Craving for continued existence has been cut off; the leash to existence is ended; now there’ll be no more future lives.”
> Pali: “catunnaṁ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Katamesaṁ catunnaṁ? Ariyassa, bhikkhave, sīlassa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Ariyassa, bhikkhave, samādhissa ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Ariyāya, bhikkhave, paññāya ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Ariyāya, bhikkhave, vimuttiyā ananubodhā appaṭivedhā evamidaṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ sandhāvitaṁ saṁsaritaṁ mamañceva tumhākañca. Tayidaṁ, bhikkhave, ariyaṁ sīlaṁ anubuddhaṁ paṭividdhaṁ, ariyo samādhi anubuddho paṭividdho, ariyā paññā anubuddhā paṭividdhā, ariyā vimutti anubuddhā paṭividdhā, ucchinnā bhavataṇhā, khīṇā bhavanetti, natthi dāni punabbhavo”ti.
[¶21] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶22] “Ethics, immersion, and wisdom,
and the supreme freedom:
these things have been understood
by Gotama the renowned.
> Pali: “Sīlaṁ samādhi paññā ca,
vimutti ca anuttarā;
Anubuddhā ime dhammā,
gotamena yasassinā.
[¶23] And so the Buddha, having insight,
explained this teaching to the mendicants.
The teacher made an end of suffering,
seeing clearly, he is fully quenched.”
> Pali: Iti buddho abhiññāya,
dhammamakkhāsi bhikkhunaṁ;
Dukkhassantakaro satthā,
cakkhumā parinibbuto”ti.
[¶24] And while staying there, too, he often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatrāpi sudaṁ bhagavā bhaṇḍagāme viharanto etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶25] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶26] 22. The Four Great References
> Pali: 22. Catumahāpadesakathā
[¶27] When the Buddha had stayed in Wares Village as long as he pleased, he addressed Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Elephant Village.” …
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhaṇḍagāme yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena hatthigāmo,
[¶28] “Let’s go to Mango Village.” …
> Pali: yena ambagāmo,
[¶29] “Let’s go to Black Plum Village.” …
> Pali: yena jambugāmo,
[¶30] “Let’s go to Bhoga City.”
> Pali: yena bhoganagaraṁ tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶31] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Bhoga City, where he stayed at the Ānanda Shrine.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena bhoganagaraṁ tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bhoganagare viharati ānande cetiye.
[¶32] There the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Mendicants, I will teach you the four great references. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “cattārome, bhikkhave, mahāpadese desessāmi, taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶33] “Yes, sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶34] “Take a mendicant who says: ‘Reverend, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: this is the teaching, this is the training, this is the Teacher’s instruction.’ You should neither approve nor reject that mendicant’s statement. Instead, having carefully memorized those words and phrases, you should make sure they fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training. If they do not fit in the discourse and are not exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is not the word of the Buddha. It has been incorrectly memorized by that mendicant.’ And so you should discard it. If they do fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is the word of the Buddha. It has been correctly memorized by that mendicant.’ You should remember it. This is the first great reference.
> Pali: “Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ, ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti. Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tāni padabyañjanāni sādhukaṁ uggahetvā sutte osāretabbāni, vinaye sandassetabbāni. Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; imassa ca bhikkhuno duggahitan’ti. Iti hetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha. Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni sutte ceva osaranti, vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; imassa ca bhikkhuno suggahitan’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.
[¶35] Take another mendicant who says: ‘In such-and-such monastery lives a Saṅgha with seniors and leaders. I’ve heard and learned this in the presence of that Saṅgha: this is the teaching, this is the training, this is the Teacher’s instruction.’ You should neither approve nor reject that mendicant’s statement. Instead, having carefully memorized those words and phrases, you should make sure they fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training. If they do not fit in the discourse and are not exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is not the word of the Buddha. It has been incorrectly memorized by that Saṅgha.’ And so you should discard it. If they do fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is the word of the Buddha. It has been correctly memorized by that Saṅgha.’ You should remember it. This is the second great reference.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amukasmiṁ nāma āvāse saṅgho viharati sathero sapāmokkho. Tassa me saṅghassa sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ, ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti. Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tāni padabyañjanāni sādhukaṁ uggahetvā sutte osāretabbāni, vinaye sandassetabbāni. Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca saṅghassa duggahitan’ti. Itihetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha. Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni sutte ceva osaranti, vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca saṅghassa suggahitan’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, dutiyaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.
[¶36] Take another mendicant who says: ‘In such-and-such monastery there are several senior mendicants who are very learned, inheritors of the heritage, who have memorized the teachings, the monastic law, and the outlines. I’ve heard and learned this in the presence of those senior mendicants: this is the teaching, this is the training, this is the Teacher’s instruction.’ You should neither approve nor reject that mendicant’s statement. Instead, having carefully memorized those words and phrases, you should make sure they fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training. If they do not fit in the discourse and are not exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is not the word of the Buddha. It has not been correctly memorized by those senior mendicants.’ And so you should discard it. If they do fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is the word of the Buddha. It has been correctly memorized by those senior mendicants.’ You should remember it. This is the third great reference.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amukasmiṁ nāma āvāse sambahulā therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā. Tesaṁ me therānaṁ sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ— ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti. Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ … pe… na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tesañca therānaṁ duggahitan’ti. Itihetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha. Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni …pe… vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tesañca therānaṁ suggahitan’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, tatiyaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.
[¶37] Take another mendicant who says: ‘In such-and-such monastery there is a single senior mendicant who is very learned, an inheritor of the heritage, who has memorized the teachings, the monastic law, and the outlines. I’ve heard and learned this in the presence of that senior mendicant: this is the teaching, this is the training, this is the Teacher’s instruction.’ You should neither approve nor reject that mendicant’s statement. Instead, having carefully memorized those words and phrases, you should make sure they fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training. If they do not fit in the discourse and are not exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is not the word of the Buddha. It has been incorrectly memorized by that senior mendicant.’ And so you should discard it. If they do fit in the discourse and are exhibited in the training, you should draw the conclusion: ‘Clearly this is the word of the Buddha. It has been correctly memorized by that senior mendicant.’ You should remember it. This is the fourth great reference.
> Pali: Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘amukasmiṁ nāma āvāse eko thero bhikkhu viharati bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo. Tassa me therassa sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ— ayaṁ dhammo ayaṁ vinayo idaṁ satthusāsanan’ti. Tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhāsitaṁ neva abhinanditabbaṁ nappaṭikkositabbaṁ. Anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tāni padabyañjanāni sādhukaṁ uggahetvā sutte osāretabbāni, vinaye sandassetabbāni. Tāni ce sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ na ceva tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca therassa duggahitan’ti. Itihetaṁ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyātha. Tāni ca sutte osāriyamānāni vinaye sandassiyamānāni sutte ceva osaranti, vinaye ca sandissanti, niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṁ: ‘addhā idaṁ tassa bhagavato vacanaṁ; tassa ca therassa suggahitan’ti. Idaṁ, bhikkhave, catutthaṁ mahāpadesaṁ dhāreyyātha.
[¶38] These are the four great references.”
> Pali: Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro mahāpadese dhāreyyāthā”ti.
[¶39] And while staying at the Ānanda Shrine, too, the Buddha often gave this Dhamma talk to the mendicants:
> Pali: Tatrapi sudaṁ bhagavā bhoganagare viharanto ānande cetiye etadeva bahulaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ dhammiṁ kathaṁ karoti:
[¶40] “Such is ethics, such is immersion, such is wisdom. When immersion is imbued with ethics it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When wisdom is imbued with immersion it’s very fruitful and beneficial. When the mind is imbued with wisdom it is rightly freed from the defilements, namely, the defilements of sensuality, desire to be reborn, and ignorance.”
> Pali: “iti sīlaṁ, iti samādhi, iti paññā. Sīlaparibhāvito samādhi mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso. Samādhiparibhāvitā paññā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṁsā. Paññāparibhāvitaṁ cittaṁ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati, seyyathidaṁ— kāmāsavā, bhavāsavā, avijjāsavā”ti.
[¶41] 23. On Cunda the Smith
> Pali: 23. Kammāraputtacundavatthu
[¶42] When the Buddha had stayed in Bhoga City as long as he pleased, he addressed Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Pāvā.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhoganagare yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena pāvā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶43] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants arrived at Pāvā, where he stayed in Cunda the smith’s mango grove.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena pāvā tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā pāvāyaṁ viharati cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane.
[¶44] Cunda heard that the Buddha had arrived and was staying in his mango grove. Then he went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk. Then Cunda said to the Buddha, “Sir, would the Buddha, together with the mendicant Saṅgha, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me?” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Assosi kho cundo kammāraputto: “bhagavā kira pāvaṁ anuppatto, pāvāyaṁ viharati mayhaṁ ambavane”ti. Atha kho cundo kammāraputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi. Atha kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶45] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, Cunda rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶46] And when the night had passed Cunda had delicious fresh and cooked foods prepared in his own home, and plenty of pork on the turn. Then he had the Buddha informed of the time, saying, “Sir, it’s time. The meal is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho cundo kammāraputto tassā rattiyā accayena sake nivesane paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā pahūtañca sūkaramaddavaṁ bhagavato kālaṁ ārocāpesi: “kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.
[¶47] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the home of Cunda together with the mendicant Saṅgha, where he sat down on the seat spread out and addressed Cunda, “Cunda, please serve me with the pork on the turn that you’ve prepared. And serve the mendicant Saṅgha with the other foods.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena cundassa kammāraputtassa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ āmantesi: “yaṁ te, cunda, sūkaramaddavaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena maṁ parivisa. Yaṁ panaññaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parivisā”ti.
[¶48] “Yes, sir,” replied Cunda, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavato paṭissutvā yaṁ ahosi sūkaramaddavaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena bhagavantaṁ parivisi. Yaṁ panaññaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyattaṁ, tena bhikkhusaṅghaṁ parivisi.
[¶49] Then the Buddha addressed Cunda, “Cunda, any pork on the turn that’s left over, you should bury it in a pit. I don’t see anyone in this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans—who could properly digest it except the Realized One.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ āmantesi: “yaṁ te, cunda, sūkaramaddavaṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ, taṁ sobbhe nikhaṇāhi. Nāhaṁ taṁ, cunda, passāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya, yassa taṁ paribhuttaṁ sammā pariṇāmaṁ gaccheyya aññatra tathāgatassā”ti.
[¶50] “Yes, sir,” replied Cunda. He did as he was asked, then came back to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired him with a Dhamma talk, after which he rose from his seat and left.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho cundo kammāraputto bhagavato paṭissutvā yaṁ ahosi sūkaramaddavaṁ avasiṭṭhaṁ, taṁ sobbhe nikhaṇitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho cundaṁ kammāraputtaṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
[¶51] > Pali: (…)
[¶52] After the Buddha had eaten Cunda’s meal, he fell severely ill with bloody dysentery, struck by dreadful pains, close to death. But he endured unbothered, with mindfulness and situational awareness. Then he addressed Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to Kusinārā.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato cundassa kammāraputtassa bhattaṁ bhuttāvissa kharo ābādho uppajji, lohitapakkhandikā pabāḷhā vedanā vattanti māraṇantikā. Tā sudaṁ bhagavā sato sampajāno adhivāsesi avihaññamāno. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena kusinārā tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶53] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶54] I’ve heard that after eating
the meal of Cunda the smith,
the attentive one fell severely ill,
with pains, close to death.
> Pali: Cundassa bhattaṁ bhuñjitvā,
kammārassāti me sutaṁ;
Ābādhaṁ samphusī dhīro,
pabāḷhaṁ māraṇantikaṁ.
[¶55] A severe sickness struck the Teacher
who had eaten the pork on the turn.
While still purging the Buddha said:
“I’ll go to the citadel of Kusinārā.”
> Pali: Bhuttassa ca sūkaramaddavena,
Byādhippabāḷho udapādi satthuno;
Virecamāno bhagavā avoca,
“Gacchāmahaṁ kusināraṁ nagaran”ti.
[¶56] 24. Bringing a Drink
> Pali: 24. Pānīyāharaṇa
[¶57] Then the Buddha left the road and went to the root of a certain tree, where he addressed Ānanda, “Go on then, Ānanda, fold my outer robe in four and spread it out for me. I am tired and will sit down.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā maggā okkamma yena aññataraṁ rukkhamūlaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapehi, kilantosmi, ānanda, nisīdissāmī”ti.
[¶58] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda, and did as he was asked. The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapesi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane.
[¶59] When he was seated he said to Venerable Ānanda, “Go on then, Ānanda, fetch me some water. I am thirsty and will drink.”
> Pali: Nisajja kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, pānīyaṁ āhara, pipāsitosmi, ānanda, pivissāmī”ti.
[¶60] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “Sir, just now around five hundred carts have passed by. The shallow water has been churned up by their wheels, and it flows cloudy and murky. The Kakudhā River is not far away, with clear, sweet, cool water, clean, with smooth banks, delightful. There the Buddha can drink and cool his limbs.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idāni, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni atikkantāni, taṁ cakkacchinnaṁ udakaṁ parittaṁ luḷitaṁ āvilaṁ sandati. Ayaṁ, bhante, kakudhā nadī avidūre acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setodakā suppatitthā ramaṇīyā. Ettha bhagavā pānīyañca pivissati, gattāni ca sītī karissatī”ti.
[¶61] For a second time, the Buddha asked Ānanda for a drink, and for a second time Ānanda suggested going to the Kakudhā River.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, pānīyaṁ āhara, pipāsitosmi, ānanda, pivissāmī”ti. Dutiyampi kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idāni, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni atikkantāni, taṁ cakkacchinnaṁ udakaṁ parittaṁ luḷitaṁ āvilaṁ sandati. Ayaṁ, bhante, kakudhā nadī avidūre acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setodakā suppatitthā ramaṇīyā. Ettha bhagavā pānīyañca pivissati, gattāni ca sītīkarissatī”ti.
[¶62] And for a third time, the Buddha said to Ānanda, “Go on then, Ānanda, fetch me some water. I am thirsty and will drink.”
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, pānīyaṁ āhara, pipāsitosmi, ānanda, pivissāmī”ti.
[¶63] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. Taking his bowl he went to the river. Now, though the shallow water in that creek had been churned up by wheels, and flowed cloudy and murky, when Ānanda approached it flowed transparent, clear, and unclouded.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā pattaṁ gahetvā yena sā nadikā tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho sā nadikā cakkacchinnā parittā luḷitā āvilā sandamānā, āyasmante ānande upasaṅkamante acchā vippasannā anāvilā sandittha.
[¶64] Then Ānanda thought, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! The Realized One has such psychic power and might! For though the shallow water in that creek had been churned up by wheels, and flowed cloudy and murky, when I approached it flowed transparent, clear, and unclouded.” Gathering a bowl of drinking water he went back to the Buddha, and said to him, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! The Realized One has such psychic power and might! Just now, though the shallow water in that creek had been churned up by wheels, and flowed cloudy and murky, when I approached it flowed transparent, clear, and unclouded. Drink the water, Blessed One! Drink the water, Holy One!” So the Buddha drank the water.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. Ayañhi sā nadikā cakkacchinnā parittā luḷitā āvilā sandamānā mayi upasaṅkamante acchā vippasannā anāvilā sandatī”ti. Pattena pānīyaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā. Idāni sā bhante nadikā cakkacchinnā parittā luḷitā āvilā sandamānā mayi upasaṅkamante acchā vippasannā anāvilā sandittha. Pivatu bhagavā pānīyaṁ pivatu sugato pānīyan”ti. Atha kho bhagavā pānīyaṁ apāyi.
[¶65] 25. On Pukkusa the Malla
> Pali: 25. Pukkusamallaputtavatthu
[¶66] Now at that time Pukkusa the Mallian, a disciple of Āḷāra Kālāma, was traveling along the road from Kusinārā to Pāvā. He saw the Buddha sitting at the root of a certain tree. He went up to him, bowed, sat down to one side, and said, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! Those who have gone forth remain in such peaceful meditations.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pukkuso mallaputto āḷārassa kālāmassa sāvako kusinārāya pāvaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti. Addasā kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavantaṁ aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisinnaṁ. Disvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, santena vata, bhante, pabbajitā vihārena viharanti.
[¶67] Once it so happened that Āḷāra Kālāma, while traveling along a road, left the road and sat at the root of a nearby tree for the day’s meditation. Then around five hundred carts passed by right beside Āḷāra Kālāma. Then a certain person coming behind those carts went up to Āḷāra Kālāma and said to him: ‘Sir, didn’t you see the five hundred carts pass by?’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, āḷāro kālāmo addhānamaggappaṭipanno maggā okkamma avidūre aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṁ nisīdi. Atha kho, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ nissāya nissāya atikkamiṁsu. Atha kho, bhante, aññataro puriso tassa sakaṭasatthassa piṭṭhito piṭṭhito āgacchanto yena āḷāro kālāmo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āḷāraṁ kālāmaṁ etadavoca: ‘api, bhante, pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni atikkantāni addasā’ti?
[¶68] ‘No, respectable sir, I didn’t see them.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, addasan’ti.
[¶69] ‘But sir, didn’t you hear a sound?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saddaṁ assosī’ti?
[¶70] ‘No, respectable sir, I didn’t hear a sound.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, saddaṁ assosin’ti.
[¶71] ‘But sir, were you asleep?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, sutto ahosī’ti?
[¶72] ‘No, respectable sir, I wasn’t asleep.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sutto ahosin’ti.
[¶73] ‘But sir, were you conscious?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saññī ahosī’ti?
[¶74] ‘Yes, respectable sir.’ ‘So, sir, while conscious and awake you neither saw nor heard a sound as five hundred carts passed by right beside you? Why sir, even your outer robe is covered with dust!’
> Pali: ‘Evamāvuso’ti. ‘So tvaṁ, bhante, saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva addasa, na pana saddaṁ assosi; apisu te, bhante, saṅghāṭi rajena okiṇṇā’ti?
[¶75] ‘Yes, respectable sir.’
> Pali: ‘Evamāvuso’ti.
[¶76] Then that person thought: ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! Those who have gone forth remain in such peaceful meditations, in that, while conscious and awake he neither saw nor heard a sound as five hundred carts passed by right next to him.’ And after declaring his lofty confidence in Āḷāra Kālāma, he left.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, tassa purisassa etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, santena vata bho pabbajitā vihārena viharanti. Yatra hi nāma saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva dakkhati, na pana saddaṁ sossatī’ti. Āḷāre kālāme uḷāraṁ pasādaṁ pavedetvā pakkāmī”ti.
[¶77] “What do you think, Pukkusa? Which is harder and more challenging to do while conscious and awake: to neither see nor hear a sound as five hundred carts pass by right next to you? Or to neither see nor hear a sound as the heavens are raining and pouring, lightning’s flashing, and thunder’s cracking?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, pukkusa, katamaṁ nu kho dukkarataraṁ vā durabhisambhavataraṁ vā— yo vā saññī samāno jāgaro pañcamattāni sakaṭasatāni nissāya nissāya atikkantāni neva passeyya, na pana saddaṁ suṇeyya; yo vā saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva passeyya, na pana saddaṁ suṇeyyā”ti?
[¶78] “What do five hundred carts matter, or six hundred, or seven hundred, or eight hundred, or nine hundred, or a thousand, or even a hundred thousand carts? It’s far harder and more challenging to neither see nor hear a sound as the heavens are raining and pouring, lightning’s flashing, and thunder’s cracking!”
> Pali: “Kiñhi, bhante, karissanti pañca vā sakaṭasatāni cha vā sakaṭasatāni satta vā sakaṭasatāni aṭṭha vā sakaṭasatāni nava vā sakaṭasatāni, sakaṭasahassaṁ vā sakaṭasatasahassaṁ vā. Atha kho etadeva dukkaratarañceva durabhisambhavatarañca yo saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva passeyya, na pana saddaṁ suṇeyyā”ti.
[¶79] “This one time, Pukkusa, I was staying near Ātumā in a threshing-hut. At that time the heavens were raining and pouring, lightning was flashing, and thunder was cracking. And not far from the threshing-hut two farmers who were brothers were killed, as well as four oxen. Then a large crowd came from Ātumā to the place where that happened.
> Pali: “Ekamidāhaṁ, pukkusa, samayaṁ ātumāyaṁ viharāmi bhusāgāre. Tena kho pana samayena deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā avidūre bhusāgārassa dve kassakā bhātaro hatā cattāro ca balibaddā. Atha kho, pukkusa, ātumāya mahājanakāyo nikkhamitvā yena te dve kassakā bhātaro hatā cattāro ca balibaddā tenupasaṅkami.
[¶80] Now at that time I came out of the threshing-hut and was walking mindfully in the open near the door of the hut. Then having left that crowd, a certain person approached me, bowed, and stood to one side. I said to them, ‘Why, respectable sir, has this crowd gathered?’
> Pali: Tena kho panāhaṁ, pukkusa, samayena bhusāgārā nikkhamitvā bhusāgāradvāre abbhokāse caṅkamāmi. Atha kho, pukkusa, aññataro puriso tamhā mahājanakāyā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho ahaṁ, pukkusa, taṁ purisaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘kiṁ nu kho eso, āvuso, mahājanakāyo sannipatito’ti?
[¶81] ‘Just now, sir, the heavens were raining and pouring, lightning was flashing, and thunder was cracking. And two farmers who were brothers were killed, as well as four oxen. Then this crowd gathered here. But sir, where were you?’
> Pali: ‘Idāni, bhante, deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā dve kassakā bhātaro hatā cattāro ca balibaddā. Ettheso mahājanakāyo sannipatito. Tvaṁ pana, bhante, kva ahosī’ti?
[¶82] ‘I was right here, respectable sir.’
> Pali: ‘Idheva kho ahaṁ, āvuso, ahosin’ti.
[¶83] ‘But sir, did you see?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, addasā’ti?
[¶84] ‘No, respectable sir, I didn’t see anything.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, addasan’ti.
[¶85] ‘But sir, didn’t you hear a sound?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saddaṁ assosī’ti?
[¶86] ‘No, respectable sir, I didn’t hear a sound.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, saddaṁ assosin’ti.
[¶87] ‘But sir, were you asleep?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, sutto ahosī’ti?
[¶88] ‘No, respectable sir, I wasn’t asleep.’
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sutto ahosin’ti.
[¶89] ‘But sir, were you conscious?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, saññī ahosī’ti?
[¶90] ‘Yes, respectable sir.’
> Pali: ‘Evamāvuso’ti.
[¶91] ‘So, sir, while conscious and awake you neither saw nor heard a sound as the heavens were raining and pouring, lightning was flashing, and thunder was cracking?’
> Pali: ‘So tvaṁ, bhante, saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva addasa, na pana saddaṁ assosī’ti?
[¶92] ‘Yes, respectable sir.’
> Pali: ‘Evamāvuso’ti.
[¶93] Then that person thought: ‘Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! Those who have gone forth remain in such peaceful meditations, in that, while conscious and awake he neither saw nor heard a sound as the heavens were raining and pouring, lightning was flashing, and thunder was cracking.’ And after declaring their lofty confidence in me, they bowed and respectfully circled me, keeping me on their right, before leaving.”
> Pali: Atha kho, pukkusa, tassa purisassa etadahosi: ‘acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, santena vata bho pabbajitā vihārena viharanti. Yatra hi nāma saññī samāno jāgaro deve vassante deve gaḷagaḷāyante vijjullatāsu niccharantīsu asaniyā phalantiyā neva dakkhati, na pana saddaṁ sossatī’ti. Mayi uḷāraṁ pasādaṁ pavedetvā maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmī”ti.
[¶94] When he said this, Pukkusa said to him, “Any confidence I had in Āḷāra Kālāma I whisk away as in a strong wind, or glide away as down a swift stream. Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, pukkuso mallaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “esāhaṁ, bhante, yo me āḷāre kālāme pasādo taṁ mahāvāte vā ophuṇāmi sīghasotāya vā nadiyā pavāhemi. Abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶95] Then Pukkusa addressed a certain man, “Go on then, lad, fetch me a pair of ready to wear garments the color of mountain gold.”
> Pali: Atha kho pukkuso mallaputto aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, bhaṇe, siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ āharā”ti.
[¶96] “Yes, sir,” replied that man, and did as he was asked. Then Pukkusa brought the garments to the Buddha, “Sir, please accept this pair of ready to wear garments the color of mountain gold from me out of sympathy.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so puriso pukkusassa mallaputtassa paṭissutvā taṁ siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ āhari. Atha kho pukkuso mallaputto taṁ siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ bhagavato upanāmesi: “idaṁ, bhante, siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ, taṁ me bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṁ upādāyā”ti.
[¶97] “Well then, Pukkusa, clothe me in one, and Ānanda in the other.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, pukkusa, ekena maṁ acchādehi, ekena ānandan”ti.
[¶98] “Yes, sir,” replied Pukkusa, and did so.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavato paṭissutvā ekena bhagavantaṁ acchādeti, ekena āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ.
[¶99] Then the Buddha educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired Pukkusa the Malla with a Dhamma talk, after which he got up from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pukkusaṁ mallaputtaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi. Atha kho pukkuso mallaputto bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶100] Then, not long after Pukkusa had left, Ānanda placed the pair of garments the color of mountain gold by the Buddha’s body. But when placed by the Buddha’s body they seemed to lose their sheen. Then Ānanda said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing, how pure and bright is the color of the Realized One’s skin. When this pair of ready to wear garments the color of mountain gold is placed by the Buddha’s body they seem to lose their sheen.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando acirapakkante pukkuse mallaputte taṁ siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ bhagavato kāyaṁ upanāmesi. Taṁ bhagavato kāyaṁ upanāmitaṁ hataccikaṁ viya khāyati. Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, yāva parisuddho, bhante, tathāgatassa chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto. Idaṁ, bhante, siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ dhāraṇīyaṁ bhagavato kāyaṁ upanāmitaṁ hataccikaṁ viya khāyatī”ti.
[¶101] “That’s so true, Ānanda, that’s so true! There are two times when the color of the Realized One’s skin becomes extra pure and bright. What two? The night when a Realized One awakens to the supreme perfect awakening; and the night he becomes fully extinguished in the element of extinguishment with no residue. These are the are two times when the color of the Realized One’s skin becomes extra pure and bright.
> Pali: “Evametaṁ, ānanda, evametaṁ, ānanda, dvīsu kālesu ativiya tathāgatassa kāyo parisuddho hoti chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto. Katamesu dvīsu? Yañca, ānanda, rattiṁ tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṁ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati. Imesu kho, ānanda, dvīsu kālesu ativiya tathāgatassa kāyo parisuddho hoti chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto.
[¶102] Today, Ānanda, in the last watch of the night, between a pair of sal trees in the sal forest of the Mallas at Upavattana near Kusinārā, shall be the Realized One’s full extinguishment. Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the Kakudhā River.”
> Pali: Ajja kho panānanda, rattiyā pacchime yāme kusinārāyaṁ upavattane mallānaṁ sālavane antarena yamakasālānaṁ tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Āyāmānanda, yena kakudhā nadī tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶103] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶104] A pair of garments the color of mountain gold
was presented by Pukkusa;
when the Teacher was clothed with them,
his snow gold skin glowed bright.
> Pali: Siṅgīvaṇṇaṁ yugamaṭṭhaṁ,
pukkuso abhihārayi;
Tena acchādito satthā,
hemavaṇṇo asobhathāti.
[¶105] > Pali: (…)
[¶106] Then the Buddha together with a large Saṅgha of mendicants went to the Kakudhā River. He plunged into the river and bathed and drank. And when he had emerged, he went to the mango grove, where he addressed Venerable Cundaka, “Go on then, Cundaka, fold my outer robe in four and spread it out for me. I am tired and will lie down.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena kakudhā nadī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kakudhaṁ nadiṁ ajjhogāhetvā nhatvā ca pivitvā ca paccuttaritvā yena ambavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. Upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ cundakaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, cundaka, catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapehi, kilantosmi, cundaka, nipajjissāmī”ti.
[¶107] “Yes, sir,” replied Cundaka, and did as he was asked. And then the Buddha laid down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up. But Cundaka sat down right there in front of the Buddha.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā cundako bhagavato paṭissutvā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññapesi. Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya sato sampajāno uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasikaritvā. Āyasmā pana cundako tattheva bhagavato purato nisīdi.
[¶108] Having gone to Kakudhā Creek,
whose water was transparent, sweet, and clear,
the Teacher, being tired, plunged in,
the Realized One, without compare in the world.
> Pali: Gantvāna buddho nadikaṁ kakudhaṁ,
Acchodakaṁ sātudakaṁ vippasannaṁ;
Ogāhi satthā akilantarūpo,
Tathāgato appaṭimo ca loke.
[¶109] And after bathing and drinking the Teacher emerged.
Before the group of mendicants, in the middle, the Buddha,
the Teacher who rolled forth the present dispensation,
the great seer went to the mango grove.
> Pali: Nhatvā ca pivitvā cudatāri satthā,
Purakkhato bhikkhugaṇassa majjhe;
Vattā pavattā bhagavā idha dhamme,
Upāgami ambavanaṁ mahesi.
[¶110] He addressed the mendicant named Cundaka:
“Spread out my folded robe so I can lie down.”
The evolved one urged Cunda,
who quickly spread the folded robe.
The Teacher lay down so tired,
while Cunda sat there before him.
> Pali: Āmantayi cundakaṁ nāma bhikkhuṁ,
Catugguṇaṁ santhara me nipajjaṁ;
So codito bhāvitattena cundo,
Catugguṇaṁ santhari khippameva;
Nipajji satthā akilantarūpo,
Cundopi tattha pamukhe nisīdīti.
[¶111] Then the Buddha said to Venerable Ānanda:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi:
[¶112] “Now it may happen, Ānanda, that someone may give rise to regret in Cunda the smith: ‘It’s your loss, respected Cunda, it’s your misfortune, in that the Realized One was fully quenched after eating his last almsmeal from you.’ You should dispel remorse in Cunda the smith like this: ‘You’re fortunate, respected Cunda, you’re so very fortunate, in that the Realized One was fully quenched after eating his last almsmeal from you. I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha.
> Pali: “siyā kho panānanda, cundassa kammāraputtassa koci vippaṭisāraṁ uppādeyya: ‘tassa te, āvuso cunda, alābhā tassa te dulladdhaṁ, yassa te tathāgato pacchimaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā parinibbuto’ti. Cundassa, ānanda, kammāraputtassa evaṁ vippaṭisāro paṭivinetabbo: ‘tassa te, āvuso cunda, lābhā tassa te suladdhaṁ, yassa te tathāgato pacchimaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā parinibbuto. Sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso cunda, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ:
## 32. DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 5
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/32/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/32/#p-N
[¶0] There are two almsmeal offerings that have identical fruit and result, and are more fruitful and beneficial than other almsmeal offerings. What two? The almsmeal after eating which a Realized One awakens to the supreme perfect awakening; and the almsmeal after eating which he becomes fully extinguished in the element of extinguishment with no residue. These two almsmeal offerings have identical fruit and result, and are more fruitful and beneficial than other almsmeal offerings.
> Pali: dveme piṇḍapātā samasamaphalā samavipākā, ativiya aññehi piṇḍapātehi mahapphalatarā ca mahānisaṁsatarā ca. Katame dve? Yañca piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, yañca piṇḍapātaṁ paribhuñjitvā tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati. Ime dve piṇḍapātā samasamaphalā samavipākā, ativiya aññehi piṇḍapātehi mahapphalatarā ca mahānisaṁsatarā ca.
[¶1] You’ve accumulated a deed that leads to long life, beauty, happiness, fame, heaven, and sovereignty.’ That’s how you should dispel remorse in Cunda the smith.”
> Pali: Āyusaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, vaṇṇasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, sukhasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, yasasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, saggasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitaṁ, ādhipateyyasaṁvattanikaṁ āyasmatā cundena kammāraputtena kammaṁ upacitan’ti. Cundassa, ānanda, kammāraputtassa evaṁ vippaṭisāro paṭivinetabbo”ti.
[¶2] Then, understanding this matter, on that occasion the Buddha expressed this heartfelt sentiment:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā etamatthaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶3] “A giver’s merit grows;
enmity doesn’t build up when you have self-control.
A skillful person gives up bad things—
with the end of greed, hate, and delusion, they’re quenched.”
> Pali: “Dadato puññaṁ pavaḍḍhati,
Saṁyamato veraṁ na cīyati;
Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṁ,
Rāgadosamohakkhayā sanibbuto”ti.
[¶4] The fourth recitation section.
> Pali: Catuttho bhāṇavāro.
[¶5] 26. The Pair of Sal Trees
> Pali: 26. Yamakasālā
[¶6] Then the Buddha said to Ānanda, “Come, Ānanda, let’s go to the far shore of the Golden River, and on to the sal forest of the Mallas at Upavattana near Kusinārā.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “āyāmānanda, yena hiraññavatiyā nadiyā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, yena kusinārā upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ tenupasaṅkamissāmā”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied. And that’s where they went. Then the Buddha addressed Ānanda, “Go on then, Ānanda, set up a cot for me between the twin sal trees, with my head to the north. I am tired and will lie down.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Atha kho bhagavā mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ yena hiraññavatiyā nadiyā pārimaṁ tīraṁ, yena kusinārā upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “iṅgha me tvaṁ, ānanda, antarena yamakasālānaṁ uttarasīsakaṁ mañcakaṁ paññapehi, kilantosmi, ānanda, nipajjissāmī”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda, and did as he was asked. And then the Buddha laid down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā antarena yamakasālānaṁ uttarasīsakaṁ mañcakaṁ paññapesi. Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya sato sampajāno.
[¶9] Now at that time the twin sal trees were in full blossom with flowers out of season. They sprinkled and bestrewed the Realized One’s body in honor of the Realized One. And the flowers of the heavenly Flame Tree fell from the sky, and they too sprinkled and bestrewed the Realized One’s body in honor of the Realized One. And heavenly sandalwood powder fell from the sky, and it too sprinkled and bestrewed the Realized One’s body in honor of the Realized One. And heavenly music played in midair in honor of the Realized One. And heavenly choirs sang in midair in honor of the Realized One.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena yamakasālā sabbaphāliphullā honti akālapupphehi. Te tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi mandāravapupphāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi candanacuṇṇāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi tūriyāni antalikkhe vajjanti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi saṅgītāni antalikkhe vattanti tathāgatassa pūjāya.
[¶10] Then the Buddha pointed out to Ānanda what was happening, adding: “That’s not the full extent of how the Realized One is honored, respected, revered, venerated, and esteemed. Any monk or nun or male or female lay follower who practices in line with the teaching, practicing properly, living in line with the teaching—they honor, respect, revere, venerate, and esteem the Realized One with the highest honor. So Ānanda, you should train like this: ‘We shall practice in line with the teaching, practicing properly, living in line with the teaching.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “sabbaphāliphullā kho, ānanda, yamakasālā akālapupphehi. Te tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi mandāravapupphāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi candanacuṇṇāni antalikkhā papatanti, tāni tathāgatassa sarīraṁ okiranti ajjhokiranti abhippakiranti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi tūriyāni antalikkhe vajjanti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Dibbānipi saṅgītāni antalikkhe vattanti tathāgatassa pūjāya. Na kho, ānanda, ettāvatā tathāgato sakkato vā hoti garukato vā mānito vā pūjito vā apacito vā. Yo kho, ānanda, bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharati sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tathāgataṁ sakkaroti garuṁ karoti māneti pūjeti apaciyati, paramāya pūjāya. Tasmātihānanda, dhammānudhammappaṭipannā viharissāma sāmīcippaṭipannā anudhammacārinoti. Evañhi vo, ānanda, sikkhitabban”ti.
[¶11] 27. The Monk Upavāṇa
> Pali: 27. Upavāṇatthera
[¶12] Now at that time Venerable Upavāṇa was standing in front of the Buddha fanning him. Then the Buddha made him move, “Move over, mendicant, don’t stand in front of me.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upavāṇo bhagavato purato ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāresi: “apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī”ti.
[¶13] Ānanda thought, “This Venerable Upavāṇa has been the Buddha’s attendant for a long time, close to him, living in his presence. Yet in his final hour the Buddha makes him move, saying: ‘Move over, mendicant, don’t stand in front of me.’ What is the cause, what is the reason for this?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho āyasmā upavāṇo dīgharattaṁ bhagavato upaṭṭhāko santikāvacaro samīpacārī. Atha ca pana bhagavā pacchime kāle āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’ti. Ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yaṁ bhagavā āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’”ti?
[¶14] Then Ānanda said to the Buddha, “This Venerable Upavāṇa has been the Buddha’s attendant for a long time, close to him, living in his presence. Yet in his final hour the Buddha makes him move, saying: ‘Move over, mendicant, don’t stand in front of me.’ What is the cause, sir, what is the reason for this?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, āyasmā upavāṇo dīgharattaṁ bhagavato upaṭṭhāko santikāvacaro samīpacārī. Atha ca pana bhagavā pacchime kāle āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’ti. Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yaṁ bhagavā āyasmantaṁ upavāṇaṁ apasāreti: ‘apehi, bhikkhu, mā me purato aṭṭhāsī’”ti?
[¶15] “Most of the deities from ten solar systems have gathered to see the Realized One. For twelve leagues all around this sal grove there’s no spot, not even a fraction of a hair’s tip, that’s not crowded full of illustrious deities. The deities are complaining: ‘We’ve come such a long way to see the Realized One! Only rarely do Realized Ones arise in the world, perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas. This very day, in the last watch of the night, the Realized One will be fully extinguished. And this illustrious mendicant is standing in front of the Buddha blocking the view. We won’t get to see the Realized One in his final hour!’”
> Pali: “Yebhuyyena, ānanda, dasasu lokadhātūsu devatā sannipatitā tathāgataṁ dassanāya. Yāvatā, ānanda, kusinārā upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ samantato dvādasa yojanāni, natthi so padeso vālaggakoṭinittudanamattopi mahesakkhāhi devatāhi apphuṭo. Devatā, ānanda, ujjhāyanti: ‘dūrā ca vatamha āgatā tathāgataṁ dassanāya. Kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā. Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Ayañca mahesakkho bhikkhu bhagavato purato ṭhito ovārento, na mayaṁ labhāma pacchime kāle tathāgataṁ dassanāyā’”ti.
[¶16] “But sir, what kind of deities are you thinking of?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁbhūtā pana, bhante, bhagavā devatā manasikarotī”ti?
[¶17] “There are, Ānanda, deities—both in space and on the earth—who are aware of the earth. With hair disheveled and arms raised, they fall down like their feet were chopped off, rolling back and forth, lamenting: ‘Too soon the Blessed One will be fully extinguished! Too soon the Holy One will be fully extinguished! Too soon the Eye of the World will vanish!’
> Pali: “Santānanda, devatā ākāse pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antaradhāyissatī’ti.
[¶18] > Pali: Santānanda, devatā pathaviyaṁ pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antaradhāyissatī’ti.
[¶19] But the deities who are free of desire endure, mindful and aware, thinking: ‘Conditions are impermanent. How could it possibly be otherwise?’”
> Pali: Yā pana tā devatā vītarāgā, tā satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: ‘aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā’”ti.
[¶20] 28. The Four Inspiring Places
> Pali: 28. Catusaṁvejanīyaṭhāna
[¶21] “Previously, sir, when mendicants had completed the rainy season residence in various districts they came to see the Realized One. We got to see the esteemed mendicants, and to pay homage to them. But when the Buddha has passed, we won’t get to see the esteemed mendicants or to pay homage to them.”
> Pali: “Pubbe, bhante, disāsu vassaṁvuṭṭhā bhikkhū āgacchanti tathāgataṁ dassanāya. Te mayaṁ labhāma manobhāvanīye bhikkhū dassanāya, labhāma payirupāsanāya. Bhagavato pana mayaṁ, bhante, accayena na labhissāma manobhāvanīye bhikkhū dassanāya, na labhissāma payirupāsanāyā”ti.
[¶22] “Ānanda, a faithful gentleman should go to see these four inspiring places. What four? Thinking: ‘Here the Realized One was born!’—that is an inspiring place. Thinking: ‘Here the Realized One became awakened as a supreme fully awakened Buddha!’—that is an inspiring place. Thinking: ‘Here the supreme Wheel of Dhamma was rolled forth by the Realized One!’—that is an inspiring place. Thinking: ‘Here the Realized One was fully quenched in the element of extinguishment with no residue!’—that is an inspiring place. These are the four inspiring places that a faithful gentleman should go to see.
> Pali: “Cattārimāni, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyāni saṁvejanīyāni ṭhānāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idha tathāgato jāto’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ. ‘Idha tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ. ‘Idha tathāgatena anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitan’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ. ‘Idha tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbuto’ti, ānanda, saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyaṁ saṁvejanīyaṁ ṭhānaṁ. Imāni kho, ānanda, cattāri saddhassa kulaputtassa dassanīyāni saṁvejanīyāni ṭhānāni.
[¶23] Faithful monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen will come, and think: ‘Here the Realized One was born!’ and ‘Here the Realized One became awakened as a supreme fully awakened Buddha!’ and ‘Here the supreme Wheel of Dhamma was rolled forth by the Realized One!’ and ‘Here the Realized One was fully quenched in the element of extinguishment with no residue!’ Anyone who passes away while on pilgrimage to these shrines will, when their body breaks up, after death, be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.”
> Pali: Āgamissanti kho, ānanda, saddhā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo: ‘idha tathāgato jāto’tipi, ‘idha tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho’tipi, ‘idha tathāgatena anuttaraṁ dhammacakkaṁ pavattitan’tipi, ‘idha tathāgato anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbuto’tipi. Ye hi keci, ānanda, cetiyacārikaṁ āhiṇḍantā pasannacittā kālaṁ karissanti, sabbe te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissantī”ti.
[¶24] 29. Ānanda’s Questions
> Pali: 29. Ānandapucchākathā
[¶25] “Sir, how do we proceed when it comes to ladies?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ mayaṁ, bhante, mātugāme paṭipajjāmā”ti?
[¶26] “Without looking, Ānanda.”
> Pali: “Adassanaṁ, ānandā”ti.
[¶27] “But when looking, how to proceed?”
> Pali: “Dassane, bhagavā, sati kathaṁ paṭipajjitabban”ti?
[¶28] “Without chatting, Ānanda.”
> Pali: “Anālāpo, ānandā”ti.
[¶29] “But when chatting, how to proceed?”
> Pali: “Ālapantena pana, bhante, kathaṁ paṭipajjitabban”ti?
[¶30] “Be mindful, Ānanda.”
> Pali: “Sati, ānanda, upaṭṭhāpetabbā”ti.
[¶31] “Sir, how do we proceed when it comes to the Realized One’s corpse?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ mayaṁ, bhante, tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjāmā”ti?
[¶32] “Don’t get involved in the rites for venerating the Realized One’s corpse, Ānanda. Please, Ānanda, you must all strive and practice for your heart’s goal! Meditate diligent, keen, and resolute for your heart’s goal! There are astute aristocrats, brahmins, and householders who are devoted to the Realized One. They will perform the rites for venerating the Realized One’s corpse.”
> Pali: “Abyāvaṭā tumhe, ānanda, hotha tathāgatassa sarīrapūjāya. Iṅgha tumhe, ānanda, sāratthe ghaṭatha anuyuñjatha, sāratthe appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharatha. Santānanda, khattiyapaṇḍitāpi brāhmaṇapaṇḍitāpi gahapatipaṇḍitāpi tathāgate abhippasannā, te tathāgatassa sarīrapūjaṁ karissantī”ti.
[¶33] “But sir, how to proceed when it comes to the Realized One’s corpse?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabban”ti?
[¶34] “Proceed in the same way as they do for the corpse of a wheel-turning monarch.”
> Pali: “Yathā kho, ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabban”ti.
[¶35] “But how do they proceed with a wheel-turning monarch’s corpse?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjantī”ti?
[¶36] “They wrap a wheel-turning monarch’s corpse with unworn cloth, then with uncarded cotton, then again with unworn cloth. In this way they wrap the corpse with five hundred double-layers. Then they place it in an iron casket filled with oil and close it up with another casket. Then, having built a funeral pyre out of all kinds of aromatics, they cremate the corpse. They build a monument for the wheel-turning monarch at the crossroads. That’s how they proceed with a wheel-turning monarch’s corpse. Proceed in the same way with the Realized One’s corpse. A monument for the Realized One is to be built at the crossroads. When someone there lifts up garlands or fragrance or powder, or bows, or inspires confidence in their heart, that will be for their lasting welfare and happiness.
> Pali: “Rañño, ānanda, cakkavattissa sarīraṁ ahatena vatthena veṭhenti, ahatena vatthena veṭhetvā vihatena kappāsena veṭhenti, vihatena kappāsena veṭhetvā ahatena vatthena veṭhenti. Etenupāyena pañcahi yugasatehi rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ veṭhetvā āyasāya teladoṇiyā pakkhipitvā aññissā āyasāya doṇiyā paṭikujjitvā sabbagandhānaṁ citakaṁ karitvā rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ jhāpenti. Cātumahāpathe rañño cakkavattissa thūpaṁ karonti. Evaṁ kho, ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti. Yathā kho, ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabbaṁ. Cātumahāpathe tathāgatassa thūpo kātabbo. Tattha ye mālaṁ vā gandhaṁ vā cuṇṇakaṁ vā āropessanti vā abhivādessanti vā cittaṁ vā pasādessanti tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya.
[¶37] 30. Individuals Worthy of a Monument
> Pali: 30. Thūpārahapuggala
[¶38] Ānanda, these four are worthy of a monument. What four? A Realized One, a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha; an independent Buddha; a disciple of a Realized One; and a wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Cattārome, ānanda, thūpārahā. Katame cattāro? Tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho thūpāraho, paccekasambuddho thūpāraho, tathāgatassa sāvako thūpāraho, rājā cakkavattī thūpārahoti.
[¶39] And for what reason is a Realized One worthy of a monument? So that many people will inspire confidence in their hearts, thinking: ‘This is the monument for that Blessed One, perfected and fully awakened!’ And having done so, when their body breaks up, after death, they are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. It is for this reason that a Realized One is worthy of a monument.
> Pali: Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho thūpāraho? ‘Ayaṁ tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti. Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho thūpāraho.
[¶40] And for what reason is an independent Buddha worthy of a monument? So that many people will inspire confidence in their hearts, thinking: ‘This is the monument for that independent Buddha!’ And having done so, when their body breaks up, after death, they are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. It is for this reason that an independent Buddha is worthy of a monument.
> Pali: Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca paccekasambuddho thūpāraho? ‘Ayaṁ tassa bhagavato paccekasambuddhassa thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti. Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca paccekasambuddho thūpāraho.
[¶41] And for what reason is a Realized One’s disciple worthy of a monument? So that many people will inspire confidence in their hearts, thinking: ‘This is the monument for that Blessed One’s disciple!’ And having done so, when their body breaks up, after death, they are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. It is for this reason that a Realized One’s disciple is worthy of a monument.
> Pali: Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgatassa sāvako thūpāraho? ‘Ayaṁ tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa sāvakassa thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti. Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca tathāgatassa sāvako thūpāraho.
[¶42] And for what reason is a wheel-turning monarch worthy of a monument? So that many people will inspire confidence in their hearts, thinking: ‘This is the monument for that just and principled king!’ And having done so, when their body breaks up, after death, they are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. It is for this reason that a wheel-turning monarch is worthy of a monument.
> Pali: Kiñcānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca rājā cakkavattī thūpāraho? ‘Ayaṁ tassa dhammikassa dhammarañño thūpo’ti, ānanda, bahujanā cittaṁ pasādenti. Te tattha cittaṁ pasādetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti. Idaṁ kho, ānanda, atthavasaṁ paṭicca rājā cakkavattī thūpāraho.
[¶43] These four are worthy of a monument.”
> Pali: Ime kho, ānanda, cattāro thūpārahā”ti.
[¶44] 31. Ānanda’s Incredible Qualities
> Pali: 31. Ānandaacchariyadhamma
[¶45] Then Venerable Ānanda entered a building, and stood there leaning against the door-jamb and crying, “Oh! I’m still only a trainee with work left to do; and my Teacher is about to be fully extinguished, he who is so kind to me!”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando vihāraṁ pavisitvā kapisīsaṁ ālambitvā rodamāno aṭṭhāsi: “ahañca vatamhi sekho sakaraṇīyo, satthu ca me parinibbānaṁ bhavissati, yo mama anukampako”ti.
[¶46] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “Mendicants, where is Ānanda?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “kahaṁ nu kho, bhikkhave, ānando”ti?
[¶47] “Sir, Ānanda has entered a dwelling, and stands there leaning against the door-jamb and crying: ‘Oh! I’m still only a trainee with work left to do; and my Teacher is about to be fully extinguished, he who is so kind to me!’”
> Pali: “Eso, bhante, āyasmā ānando vihāraṁ pavisitvā kapisīsaṁ ālambitvā rodamāno ṭhito: ‘ahañca vatamhi sekho sakaraṇīyo, satthu ca me parinibbānaṁ bhavissati, yo mama anukampako’”ti.
[¶48] So the Buddha addressed one of the monks, “Please, monk, in my name tell Ānanda that the Teacher summons him.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā aññataraṁ bhikkhuṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena ānandaṁ āmantehi: ‘satthā taṁ, āvuso ānanda, āmantetī’”ti.
[¶49] “Yes, sir,” that monk replied. He went to Ānanda and said to him, “Reverend Ānanda, the Teacher summons you.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato paṭissutvā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “satthā taṁ, āvuso ānanda, āmantetī”ti.
[¶50] “Yes, reverend,” Ānanda replied. He went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. The Buddha said to him:
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho āyasmā ānando tassa bhikkhuno paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶51] “Enough, Ānanda! Do not grieve, do not lament. Did I not prepare for this when I explained that we must be parted and separated from all we hold dear and beloved? How could it possibly be so that what is born, created, conditioned, and liable to wear out should not wear out, even the Realized One’s body? For a long time, Ānanda, you’ve treated the Realized One with deeds of body, speech, and mind that are loving, beneficial, pleasant, undivided, and limitless. You have done good deeds, Ānanda. Devote yourself to meditation, and you will soon be free of defilements.”
> Pali: “alaṁ, ānanda, mā soci mā paridevi, nanu etaṁ, ānanda, mayā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo’; taṁ kutettha, ānanda, labbhā. Yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, ‘taṁ vata tathāgatassāpi sarīraṁ mā palujjī’ti netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Dīgharattaṁ kho te, ānanda, tathāgato paccupaṭṭhito mettena kāyakammena hitena sukhena advayena appamāṇena, mettena vacīkammena hitena sukhena advayena appamāṇena, mettena manokammena hitena sukhena advayena appamāṇena. Katapuññosi tvaṁ, ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṁ hohisi anāsavo”ti.
[¶52] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶53] “Those who were perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas in the past also had attendants, who at best were like Ānanda is for me. Those who will be perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas in the future will also have attendants, who at best will be like Ānanda is for me. Ānanda is astute, he is intelligent. He knows the time for monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, royal ministers, monastics of other religions and their disciples to visit the Realized One.
> Pali: “yepi te, bhikkhave, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṁ etapparamāyeva upaṭṭhākā ahesuṁ, seyyathāpi mayhaṁ ānando. Yepi te, bhikkhave, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṁ etapparamāyeva upaṭṭhākā bhavissanti, seyyathāpi mayhaṁ ānando. Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, ānando; medhāvī, bhikkhave, ānando. Jānāti ‘ayaṁ kālo tathāgataṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ bhikkhūnaṁ, ayaṁ kālo bhikkhunīnaṁ, ayaṁ kālo upāsakānaṁ, ayaṁ kālo upāsikānaṁ, ayaṁ kālo rañño rājamahāmattānaṁ titthiyānaṁ titthiyasāvakānan’ti.
[¶54] There are these four incredible and amazing things about Ānanda. What four? If an assembly of monks goes to see Ānanda, they’re uplifted by seeing him and uplifted by hearing him speak. And when he falls silent, they’ve never had enough. If an assembly of nuns … laymen … or laywomen goes to see Ānanda, they’re uplifted by seeing him and uplifted by hearing him speak. And when he falls silent, they’ve never had enough. These are the four incredible and amazing things about Ānanda.
> Pali: Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande. Katame cattāro? Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, upāsakaparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsakaparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti. Sace, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā hoti, atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande.
[¶55] There are these four incredible and amazing things about a wheel-turning monarch. What four? If an assembly of aristocrats goes to see a wheel-turning monarch, they’re uplifted by seeing him and uplifted by hearing him speak. And when he falls silent, they’ve never had enough. If an assembly of brahmins … householders … or ascetics goes to see a wheel-turning monarch, they’re uplifted by seeing him and uplifted by hearing him speak. And when he falls silent, they’ve never had enough.
> Pali: Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā raññe cakkavattimhi. Katame cattāro? Sace, bhikkhave, khattiyaparisā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce rājā cakkavattī bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, khattiyaparisā hoti. Atha kho rājā cakkavattī tuṇhī hoti. Sace bhikkhave, brāhmaṇaparisā …pe… gahapatiparisā …pe… samaṇaparisā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce rājā cakkavattī bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, samaṇaparisā hoti. Atha kho rājā cakkavattī tuṇhī hoti.
[¶56] In the same way, there are those four incredible and amazing things about Ānanda.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, cattārome acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande. Sace, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, bhikkhuparisā hoti. Atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti. Sace, bhikkhave bhikkhunīparisā …pe… upāsakaparisā …pe… upāsikāparisā ānandaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamati, dassanena sā attamanā hoti. Tatra ce ānando dhammaṁ bhāsati, bhāsitenapi sā attamanā hoti. Atittāva, bhikkhave, upāsikāparisā hoti. Atha kho ānando tuṇhī hoti. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande”ti.
[¶57] 32. Teaching the Discourse on Mahāsudassana
> Pali: 32. Mahāsudassanasuttadesanā
[¶58] When he said this, Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶59] “Sir, please don’t be fully extinguished in this little hamlet, this jungle hamlet, this branch hamlet. There are other great cities such as Campā, Rājagaha, Sāvatthī, Sāketa, Kosambī, and Varanasi. Let the Buddha be fully extinguished there. There are many well-to-do aristocrats, brahmins, and householders there who are devoted to the Buddha. They will perform the rites of venerating the Realized One’s corpse.”
> Pali: “mā, bhante, bhagavā imasmiṁ khuddakanagarake ujjaṅgalanagarake sākhānagarake parinibbāyi. Santi, bhante, aññāni mahānagarāni, seyyathidaṁ— campā rājagahaṁ sāvatthī sāketaṁ kosambī bārāṇasī; ettha bhagavā parinibbāyatu. Ettha bahū khattiyamahāsālā, brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatimahāsālā tathāgate abhippasannā. Te tathāgatassa sarīrapūjaṁ karissantī”ti
[¶60] “Don’t say that Ānanda! Don’t say that this is a little hamlet, a jungle hamlet, a branch hamlet.
> Pali: “mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca, mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca: ‘khuddakanagarakaṁ ujjaṅgalanagarakaṁ sākhānagarakan’ti.
[¶61] Once upon a time, there was a king named Mahāsudassana who was a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extended to all four sides, he achieved stability in the country, and he possessed the seven treasures. His capital was this Kusinārā, which at the time was named Kusāvatī. It stretched for twelve leagues from east to west, and seven leagues from north to south. The royal capital of Kusāvatī was successful and prosperous, populous and full of people, with plenty of food. It was just like Āḷakamandā, the royal capital of the gods, which is successful and prosperous, populous and full of spirits, with plenty of food. Kusāvatī was never free of ten sounds by day or night, namely: the sound of elephants, horses, chariots, drums, clay drums, arched harps, singing, horns, gongs, and handbells; and the cry: ‘Eat, drink, be merry!’ as the tenth.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano nāma ahosi cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa ayaṁ kusinārā kusāvatī nāma rājadhānī ahosi. puratthimena ca pacchimena ca dvādasayojanāni āyāmena; uttarena ca dakkhiṇena ca sattayojanāni vitthārena. Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī iddhā ceva ahosi phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, devānaṁ āḷakamandā nāma rājadhānī iddhā ceva hoti phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇayakkhā ca subhikkhā ca; evameva kho, ānanda, kusāvatī rājadhānī iddhā ceva ahosi phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca. Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī dasahi saddehi avivittā ahosi divā ceva rattiñca, seyyathidaṁ— hatthisaddena assasaddena rathasaddena bherisaddena mudiṅgasaddena vīṇāsaddena gītasaddena saṅkhasaddena sammasaddena pāṇitāḷasaddena ‘asnātha pivatha khādathā’ti dasamena saddena.
[¶62] Go, Ānanda, into Kusinārā and inform the Mallas: ‘This very day, Vāseṭṭhas, in the last watch of the night, the Realized One will be fully extinguished. Come forth, Vāseṭṭhas! Come forth, Vāseṭṭhas! Don’t regret it later, thinking: “The Realized One became fully extinguished in our own village district, but we didn’t get a chance to see him in his final hour.”’”
> Pali: Gaccha tvaṁ, ānanda, kusināraṁ pavisitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocehi: ‘ajja kho, vāseṭṭhā, rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā, abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā. Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha— amhākañca no gāmakkhette tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ ahosi, na mayaṁ labhimhā pacchime kāle tathāgataṁ dassanāyā’”ti.
[¶63] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. Then he robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Kusinārā with a companion.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissutvā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya attadutiyo kusināraṁ pāvisi.
[¶64] 33. The Mallas Pay Homage
> Pali: 33. Mallānaṁvandanā
[¶65] Now at that time the Mallas of Kusinārā were sitting together at the town hall on some business. Ānanda went up to them, and announced: “This very day, Vāseṭṭhas, in the last watch of the night, the Realized One will be fully extinguished. Come forth, Vāseṭṭhas! Come forth, Vāseṭṭhas! Don’t regret it later, thinking: ‘The Realized One became fully extinguished in our own village district, but we didn’t get a chance to see him in his final hour.’”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kosinārakā mallā sandhāgāre sannipatitā honti kenacideva karaṇīyena. Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocesi: “ajja kho, vāseṭṭhā, rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā, abhikkamatha, vāseṭṭhā. Mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha: ‘amhākañca no gāmakkhette tathāgatassa parinibbānaṁ ahosi, na mayaṁ labhimhā pacchime kāle tathāgataṁ dassanāyā’”ti.
[¶66] When they heard what Ānanda had to say, the Mallas, their sons, daughters-in-law, and wives became distraught, saddened, and grief-stricken. And some, with hair disheveled and arms raised, falling down like their feet were chopped off, rolling back and forth, lamented, “Too soon the Blessed One will be fully extinguished! Too soon the Holy One will be fully extinguished! Too soon the Eye of the World will vanish!”
> Pali: Idamāyasmato ānandassa vacanaṁ sutvā mallā ca mallaputtā ca mallasuṇisā ca mallapajāpatiyo ca aghāvino dummanā cetodukkhasamappitā appekacce kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭanti: “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbāyissati, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antaradhāyissatī”ti.
[¶67] Then the Mallas, their sons, daughters-in-law, and wives, distraught, saddened, and grief-stricken went to the Mallian sal grove at Upavattana and approached Ānanda.
> Pali: Atha kho mallā ca mallaputtā ca mallasuṇisā ca mallapajāpatiyo ca aghāvino dummanā cetodukkhasamappitā yena upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.
[¶68] Then Ānanda thought, “If I have the Mallas pay homage to the Buddha one by one, they won’t be finished before first light. I’d better separate them family by family and then have them pay homage, saying: ‘Sir, the Malla named so-and-so with children, wives, retinue, and ministers bows with his head to your feet.’” And so that’s what he did. So by this means Ānanda got the Mallas to finish paying homage to the Buddha in the first watch of the night.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “sace kho ahaṁ kosinārake malle ekamekaṁ bhagavantaṁ vandāpessāmi, avandito bhagavā kosinārakehi mallehi bhavissati, athāyaṁ ratti vibhāyissati. Yannūnāhaṁ kosinārake malle kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṁ vandāpeyyaṁ: ‘itthannāmo, bhante, mallo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’”ti. Atha kho āyasmā ānando kosinārake malle kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṁ vandāpesi: “itthannāmo, bhante, mallo saputto sabhariyo sapariso sāmacco bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”ti. Atha kho āyasmā ānando etena upāyena paṭhameneva yāmena kosinārake malle bhagavantaṁ vandāpesi.
[¶69] 34. On Subhadda the Wanderer
> Pali: 34. Subhaddaparibbājakavatthu
[¶70] Now at that time a wanderer named Subhadda was residing near Kusinārā. He heard that on that very day, in the last watch of the night, will be the full extinguishment of the ascetic Gotama. He thought: “I have heard that brahmins of the past who were elderly and senior, the tutors of tutors, said: ‘Only rarely do Realized Ones arise in the world, perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas.’ And this very day, in the last watch of the night, will be the full extinguishment of the ascetic Gotama. This state of uncertainty has come up in me. I am quite confident that the Buddha is capable of teaching me so that I can give up this state of uncertainty.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena subhaddo nāma paribbājako kusinārāyaṁ paṭivasati. Assosi kho subhaddo paribbājako: “ajja kira rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissatī”ti. Atha kho subhaddassa paribbājakassa etadahosi: “sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā’ti. Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Atthi ca me ayaṁ kaṅkhādhammo uppanno, evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ samaṇe gotame, ‘pahoti me samaṇo gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathāhaṁ imaṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pajaheyyan’”ti.
[¶71] Then Subhadda went to the Mallian sal grove at Upavattana, approached Ānanda, and said to him, “Worthy Ānanda, I have heard that brahmins of the past who were elderly and senior, the tutors of tutors, said: ‘Only rarely do Realized Ones arise in the world, perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas.’ And this very day, in the last watch of the night, will be the full extinguishment of the ascetic Gotama. This state of uncertainty has come up in me. I am quite confident that the Buddha is capable of teaching me so that I can give up this state of uncertainty. Worthy Ānanda, please let me see the ascetic Gotama.”
> Pali: Atha kho subhaddo paribbājako yena upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho ānanda, paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā’ti. Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Atthi ca me ayaṁ kaṅkhādhammo uppanno— evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ samaṇe gotame ‘pahoti me samaṇo gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathāhaṁ imaṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pajaheyyan’ti. Sādhāhaṁ, bho ānanda, labheyyaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāyā”ti.
[¶72] When he had spoken, Ānanda said, “Enough, Reverend Subhadda, do not trouble the Realized One. He is tired.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando subhaddaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, āvuso subhadda, mā tathāgataṁ viheṭhesi, kilanto bhagavā”ti.
[¶73] For a second time … For a third time, Subhadda asked Ānanda, and a third time Ānanda refused.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho subhaddo paribbājako …pe… tatiyampi kho subhaddo paribbājako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bho ānanda, paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā’ti. Ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbānaṁ bhavissati. Atthi ca me ayaṁ kaṅkhādhammo uppanno— evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ samaṇe gotame, ‘pahoti me samaṇo gotamo tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathāhaṁ imaṁ kaṅkhādhammaṁ pajaheyyan’ti. Sādhāhaṁ, bho ānanda, labheyyaṁ samaṇaṁ gotamaṁ dassanāyā”ti. Tatiyampi kho āyasmā ānando subhaddaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “alaṁ, āvuso subhadda, mā tathāgataṁ viheṭhesi, kilanto bhagavā”ti.
[¶74] The Buddha heard that discussion between Ānanda and Subhadda. He said to Ānanda, “Enough, Ānanda, don’t obstruct Subhadda; let him see the Realized One. For whatever he asks me, he will only be looking to understand, not to trouble me. And he will quickly understand any answer I give to his question.”
> Pali: Assosi kho bhagavā āyasmato ānandassa subhaddena paribbājakena saddhiṁ imaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “alaṁ, ānanda, mā subhaddaṁ vāresi, labhataṁ, ānanda, subhaddo tathāgataṁ dassanāya. Yaṁ kiñci maṁ subhaddo pucchissati, sabbaṁ taṁ aññāpekkhova pucchissati, no vihesāpekkho. Yañcassāhaṁ puṭṭho byākarissāmi, taṁ khippameva ājānissatī”ti.
[¶75] So Ānanda said to the wanderer Subhadda, “Go, Reverend Subhadda, the Buddha is making time for you.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando subhaddaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “gacchāvuso subhadda, karoti te bhagavā okāsan”ti.
[¶76] Then the wanderer Subhadda went up to the Buddha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho subhaddo paribbājako yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho subhaddo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶77] “Worthy Gotama, there are those ascetics and brahmins who lead an order and a community, and tutor a community. They’re well-known and famous religious founders, deemed holy by many people. Namely: Pūraṇa Kassapa, the bamboo-staffed ascetic Gosāla, Ajita of the hair blanket, Pakudha Kaccāyana, Sañjaya Belaṭṭhiputta, and the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan. According to their own claims, did all of them have direct knowledge, or none of them, or only some?”
> Pali: “yeme, bho gotama, samaṇabrāhmaṇā saṅghino gaṇino gaṇācariyā ñātā yasassino titthakarā sādhusammatā bahujanassa, seyyathidaṁ—pūraṇo kassapo, makkhali gosālo, ajito kesakambalo, pakudho kaccāyano, sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto, nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto, sabbete sakāya paṭiññāya abbhaññiṁsu, sabbeva na abbhaññiṁsu, udāhu ekacce abbhaññiṁsu, ekacce na abbhaññiṁsū”ti?
[¶78] “Enough, Subhadda, let that be. I shall teach you the Dhamma. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, subhadda, tiṭṭhatetaṁ: ‘sabbete sakāya paṭiññāya abbhaññiṁsu, sabbeva na abbhaññiṁsu, udāhu ekacce abbhaññiṁsu, ekacce na abbhaññiṁsū’ti. Dhammaṁ te, subhadda, desessāmi; taṁ suṇāhi sādhukaṁ manasikarohi, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶79] “Yes, sir,” Subhadda replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho subhaddo paribbājako bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶80] “Subhadda, in whatever teaching and training the noble eightfold path is not found, there is no ascetic found, no second ascetic, no third ascetic, and no fourth ascetic. In whatever teaching and training the noble eightfold path is found, there is an ascetic found, a second ascetic, a third ascetic, and a fourth ascetic. In this teaching and training the noble eightfold path is found. Only here is there an ascetic, here a second ascetic, here a third ascetic, and here a fourth ascetic. Other sects are empty of ascetics.
> Pali: “Yasmiṁ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo na upalabbhati, samaṇopi tattha na upalabbhati. Dutiyopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati. Tatiyopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati. Catutthopi tattha samaṇo na upalabbhati. Yasmiñca kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhati, samaṇopi tattha upalabbhati, dutiyopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati, tatiyopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati, catutthopi tattha samaṇo upalabbhati. Imasmiṁ kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo upalabbhati, idheva, subhadda, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo, idha tatiyo samaṇo, idha catuttho samaṇo, suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehi.
[¶81] Were these mendicants to practice well, the world would not be empty of perfected ones.
> Pali: Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṁ, asuñño loko arahantehi assāti.
[¶82] I was twenty-nine years of age, Subhadda,
when I went forth to discover what is skillful.
It’s been over fifty years
since I went forth.
Teacher of the references for the systematic teaching:
outside of here there is no ascetic,
> Pali: Ekūnatiṁso vayasā subhadda,
Yaṁ pabbajiṁ kiṅkusalānuesī;
Vassāni paññāsa samādhikāni,
Yato ahaṁ pabbajito subhadda;
Ñāyassa dhammassa padesavattī,
Ito bahiddhā samaṇopi natthi.
## 33. DN 16 · The Great Discourse on the Buddha’s Extinguishment · part 6
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/33/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/33/#p-N
[¶0] no second ascetic, no third ascetic, and no fourth ascetic. Other sects are empty of ascetics. Were these mendicants to practice well, the world would not be empty of perfected ones.”
> Pali: Dutiyopi samaṇo natthi. Tatiyopi samaṇo natthi. Catutthopi samaṇo natthi. Suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehi. Ime ca, subhadda, bhikkhū sammā vihareyyuṁ, asuñño loko arahantehi assā”ti.
[¶1] When he had spoken, Subhadda said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. Sir, may I receive the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, subhaddo paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Labheyyāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, labheyyaṁ upasampadan”ti.
[¶2] “Subhadda, if someone formerly ordained in another sect wishes to take the going forth, the ordination in this teaching and training, they must spend four months on probation. When four months have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, they’ll give the going forth, the ordination into monkhood. However, I have recognized individual differences in this matter.”
> Pali: “Yo kho, subhadda, aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhati pabbajjaṁ, ākaṅkhati upasampadaṁ, so cattāro māse parivasati. Catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya. Api ca mettha puggalavemattatā viditā”ti.
[¶3] “Sir, if four months probation are required in such a case, I’ll spend four years on probation. When four years have passed, if the mendicants are satisfied, let them give me the going forth, the ordination into monkhood.”
> Pali: “Sace, bhante, aññatitthiyapubbā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhantā pabbajjaṁ ākaṅkhantā upasampadaṁ cattāro māse parivasanti, catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājenti upasampādenti bhikkhubhāvāya. Ahaṁ cattāri vassāni parivasissāmi, catunnaṁ vassānaṁ accayena āraddhacittā bhikkhū pabbājentu upasampādentu bhikkhubhāvāyā”ti.
[¶4] Then the Buddha said to Ānanda, “Well then, Ānanda, give Subhadda the going forth.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “tenahānanda, subhaddaṁ pabbājehī”ti.
[¶5] “Yes, sir,” Ānanda replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶6] Then Subhadda said to Ānanda, “You’re so fortunate, Reverand Ānanda, so very fortunate, to be anointed here in the Teacher’s presence as his pupil!” And the wanderer Subhadda received the going forth, the ordination in the Buddha’s presence. Not long after his ordination, Venerable Subhadda, living alone, withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, soon realized the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He lived having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho subhaddo paribbājako āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “lābhā vo, āvuso ānanda; suladdhaṁ vo, āvuso ānanda, ye ettha satthu sammukhā antevāsikābhisekena abhisittā”ti. Alattha kho subhaddo paribbājako bhagavato santike pabbajjaṁ, alattha upasampadaṁ. Acirūpasampanno kho panāyasmā subhaddo eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti—tadanuttaraṁ brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶7] He understood: “Rebirth is ended; the spiritual journey has been completed; what had to be done has been done; there is nothing further for this place.” And Venerable Subhadda became one of the perfected. He was the last personal disciple of the Buddha.
> Pali: “Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, kataṁ karaṇīyaṁ, nāparaṁ itthattāyā”ti abbhaññāsi. Aññataro kho panāyasmā subhaddo arahataṁ ahosi. So bhagavato pacchimo sakkhisāvako ahosīti.
[¶8] The fifth recitation section.
> Pali: Pañcamo bhāṇavāro.
[¶9] 35. The Buddha’s Last Words
> Pali: 35. Tathāgatapacchimavācā
[¶10] Then the Buddha addressed Venerable Ānanda:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi:
[¶11] “Now, Ānanda, some of you might think: ‘The teacher’s dispensation has passed. Now we have no Teacher.’ But you should not see it like this. The teaching and training that I have taught and pointed out for you shall be your Teacher after my passing.
> Pali: “siyā kho panānanda, tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘atītasatthukaṁ pāvacanaṁ, natthi no satthā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā.
[¶12] After my passing, mendicants ought not address each other as ‘reverend’, as they do today. A more senior mendicant ought to address a more junior mendicant by name or clan, or by saying ‘reverend’. A more junior mendicant ought to address a more senior mendicant using ‘sir’ or ‘venerable’.
> Pali: Yathā kho panānanda, etarahi bhikkhū aññamaññaṁ āvusovādena samudācaranti, na kho mamaccayena evaṁ samudācaritabbaṁ. Theratarena, ānanda, bhikkhunā navakataro bhikkhu nāmena vā gottena vā āvusovādena vā samudācaritabbo. Navakatarena bhikkhunā therataro bhikkhu ‘bhante’ti vā ‘āyasmā’ti vā samudācaritabbo.
[¶13] If it wishes, after my passing the Saṅgha may abolish the lesser and minor training rules.
> Pali: Ākaṅkhamāno, ānanda, saṅgho mamaccayena khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samūhanatu.
[¶14] After my passing, give the divine punishment to the mendicant Channa.”
> Pali: Channassa, ānanda, bhikkhuno mamaccayena brahmadaṇḍo dātabbo”ti.
[¶15] “But sir, what is the divine punishment?”
> Pali: “Katamo pana, bhante, brahmadaṇḍo”ti?
[¶16] “Channa may say what he likes, but the mendicants should not correct, advise, or instruct him.”
> Pali: “Channo, ānanda, bhikkhu yaṁ iccheyya, taṁ vadeyya. So bhikkhūhi neva vattabbo, na ovaditabbo, na anusāsitabbo”ti.
[¶17] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants, “Perhaps even a single mendicant has doubt or uncertainty regarding the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, the path, or the practice. So ask, mendicants! Don’t regret it later, thinking: ‘We were in the Teacher’s presence and we weren’t able to ask the Buddha a question.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā, pucchatha, bhikkhave, mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha: ‘sammukhībhūto no satthā ahosi, na mayaṁ sakkhimhā bhagavantaṁ sammukhā paṭipucchitun’”ti.
[¶18] When this was said, the mendicants kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶19] For a second time … For a third time the Buddha addressed the mendicants: “Perhaps even a single mendicant has doubt or uncertainty regarding the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, the path, or the practice. So ask, mendicants! Don’t regret it later, thinking: ‘We were in the Teacher’s presence and we weren’t able to ask the Buddha a question.’”
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho bhagavā …pe… tatiyampi kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā, pucchatha, bhikkhave, mā pacchā vippaṭisārino ahuvattha: ‘sammukhībhūto no satthā ahosi, na mayaṁ sakkhimhā bhagavantaṁ sammukhā paṭipucchitun’”ti.
[¶20] For a third time, the mendicants kept silent. Then the Buddha said to the mendicants,
> Pali: Tatiyampi kho te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ. Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶21] “Mendicants, perhaps you don’t ask out of respect for the Teacher. So let a friend tell a friend.”
> Pali: “siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, satthugāravenapi na puccheyyātha. Sahāyakopi, bhikkhave, sahāyakassa ārocetū”ti.
[¶22] When this was said, the mendicants kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te bhikkhū tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶23] Then Venerable Ānanda said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! I am quite confident that there is not even a single mendicant in this Saṅgha who has doubt or uncertainty regarding the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, the path, or the practice.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, evaṁ pasanno ahaṁ, bhante, imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe, ‘natthi ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā’”ti.
[¶24] “Ānanda, you speak out of faith. But the Realized One knows that there is not even a single mendicant in this Saṅgha who has doubt or uncertainty regarding the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, the path, or the practice. Even the last of these five hundred mendicants is a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.”
> Pali: “Pasādā kho tvaṁ, ānanda, vadesi, ñāṇameva hettha, ānanda, tathāgatassa. Natthi imasmiṁ bhikkhusaṅghe ekabhikkhussāpi kaṅkhā vā vimati vā buddhe vā dhamme vā saṅghe vā magge vā paṭipadāya vā. Imesañhi, ānanda, pañcannaṁ bhikkhusatānaṁ yo pacchimako bhikkhu, so sotāpanno avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo”ti.
[¶25] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants: “Come now, mendicants, I say to you all: ‘Conditions fall apart. Persist with diligence.’”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “handa dāni, bhikkhave, āmantayāmi vo, vayadhammā saṅkhārā appamādena sampādethā”ti.
[¶26] These were the Realized One’s last words.
> Pali: Ayaṁ tathāgatassa pacchimā vācā.
[¶27] 36. Fully Quenched
> Pali: 36. Parinibbutakathā
[¶28] Then the Buddha entered the first absorption. Emerging from that, he entered the second absorption. Emerging from that, he successively entered into and emerged from the third absorption, the fourth absorption, the dimension of infinite space, the dimension of infinite consciousness, the dimension of nothingness, and the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Then he entered the cessation of perception and feeling.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, dutiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpajji.
[¶29] Then Venerable Ānanda said to Venerable Anuruddha, “Honorable Anuruddha, has the Buddha become fully quenched?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavoca: “parinibbuto, bhante anuruddha, bhagavā”ti.
[¶30] “No, Reverend Ānanda. He has entered the cessation of perception and feeling.”
> Pali: “Nāvuso ānanda, bhagavā parinibbuto, saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpanno”ti.
[¶31] Then the Buddha emerged from the cessation of perception and feeling and entered the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Emerging from that, he successively entered into and emerged from the dimension of nothingness, the dimension of infinite consciousness, the dimension of infinite space, the fourth absorption, the third absorption, the second absorption, and the first absorption. Emerging from that, he successively entered into and emerged from the second absorption and the third absorption. Then he entered the fourth absorption. Emerging from that the Buddha immediately became fully extinguished.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpajji, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, dutiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, dutiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpajji, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyi.
[¶32] When the Buddha was fully quenched, along with the full extinguishment there was a great earthquake, awe-inspiring and hair-raising, and thunder cracked the sky. When the Buddha was fully quenched, the divinity Sahampati spoke this verse:
> Pali: Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā mahābhūmicālo ahosi bhiṁsanako salomahaṁso. Devadundubhiyo ca phaliṁsu. Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā brahmāsahampati imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶33] “All creatures in this world
must lay down this bag of bones.
For even a Teacher such as this,
unrivaled in the world,
the Realized One, attained to power,
the Buddha was fully quenched.”
> Pali: “Sabbeva nikkhipissanti,
bhūtā loke samussayaṁ;
Yattha etādiso satthā,
loke appaṭipuggalo;
Tathāgato balappatto,
sambuddho parinibbuto”ti.
[¶34] When the Buddha was fully quenched, Sakka, lord of gods, spoke this verse:
> Pali: Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā sakko devānamindo imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶35] “Oh! Conditions are impermanent,
their nature is to rise and fall;
having arisen, they cease;
their settling is blissful.”
> Pali: “Aniccā vata saṅkhārā,
uppādavayadhammino;
Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti,
tesaṁ vūpasamo sukho”ti.
[¶36] When the Buddha was fully quenched, Venerable Anuruddha spoke this verse:
> Pali: Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā āyasmā anuruddho imā gāthāyo abhāsi:
[¶37] “There was no more breathing
for the unaffected one of steady heart.
Imperturbable, committed to peace,
the sage has done his time.
> Pali: “Nāhu assāsapassāso,
ṭhitacittassa tādino;
Anejo santimārabbha,
yaṁ kālamakarī muni.
[¶38] He put up with painful feelings
without flinching.
The liberation of his heart
was like the extinguishing of a lamp.”
> Pali: Asallīnena cittena,
vedanaṁ ajjhavāsayi;
Pajjotasseva nibbānaṁ,
vimokkho cetaso ahū”ti.
[¶39] When the Buddha was fully quenched, Venerable Ānanda spoke this verse:
> Pali: Parinibbute bhagavati saha parinibbānā āyasmā ānando imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶40] “Then there was terror!
Then they had goosebumps!
When the Buddha, endowed with all fine qualities,
became fully quenched.”
> Pali: “Tadāsi yaṁ bhiṁsanakaṁ,
tadāsi lomahaṁsanaṁ;
Sabbākāravarūpete,
sambuddhe parinibbute”ti.
[¶41] When the Buddha was fully quenched, some of the mendicants there who were not free of desire, with arms raised, falling down like their feet were chopped off, rolling back and forth, lamented: “Too soon the Blessed One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Holy One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Eye of the World has vanished!” But the mendicants who were free of desire endured, mindful and aware, thinking, “Conditions are impermanent. How could it possibly be otherwise?”
> Pali: Parinibbute bhagavati ye te tattha bhikkhū avītarāgā appekacce bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭanti, “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito”ti. Ye pana te bhikkhū vītarāgā, te satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: “aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā”ti.
[¶42] Then Anuruddha addressed the mendicants: “Enough, reverends, do not grieve or lament. Did the Buddha not prepare us for this when he explained that we must be parted and separated from all we hold dear and beloved? How could it possibly be so that what is born, created, conditioned, and liable to wear out should not wear out? The deities are complaining.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho bhikkhū āmantesi: “alaṁ, āvuso, mā socittha mā paridevittha. Nanu etaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo’. Taṁ kutettha, āvuso, labbhā. ‘Yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, taṁ vata mā palujjī’ti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Devatā, āvuso, ujjhāyantī”ti.
[¶43] “But sir, what kind of deities are you thinking of?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁbhūtā pana, bhante, āyasmā anuruddho devatā manasi karotī”ti?
[¶44] “There are, Ānanda, deities—both in space and on the earth—who are aware of the earth. With hair disheveled and arms raised, they fall down like their feet were chopped off, rolling back and forth, lamenting: ‘Too soon the Blessed One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Holy One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Eye of the World has vanished!’ But the deities who are free of desire endure, mindful and aware, thinking: ‘Conditions are impermanent. How could it possibly be otherwise?’”
> Pali: “Santāvuso ānanda, devatā ākāse pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito’ti. Santāvuso ānanda, devatā pathaviyā pathavīsaññiniyo kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: ‘atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito’ti. Yā pana tā devatā vītarāgā, tā satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: ‘aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā’”ti.
[¶45] Ānanda and Anuruddha spent the rest of the night talking about Dhamma.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca anuruddho āyasmā ca ānando taṁ rattāvasesaṁ dhammiyā kathāya vītināmesuṁ.
[¶46] Then Anuruddha said to Ānanda, “Go, Ānanda, into Kusinārā and inform the Mallas: ‘Vāseṭṭhas, the Buddha has become fully quenched. Please come at your convenience.’”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā anuruddho āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi: “gacchāvuso ānanda, kusināraṁ pavisitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocehi: ‘parinibbuto, vāseṭṭhā, bhagavā, yassadāni kālaṁ maññathā’”ti.
[¶47] “Yes, sir,” replied Ānanda. Then, in the morning, he robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Kusinārā with a companion.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando āyasmato anuruddhassa paṭissutvā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya attadutiyo kusināraṁ pāvisi.
[¶48] Now at that time the Mallas of Kusinārā were sitting together at the town hall still on the same business. Ānanda went up to them, and announced, “Vāseṭṭhas, the Buddha has become fully quenched. Please come at your convenience.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kosinārakā mallā sandhāgāre sannipatitā honti teneva karaṇīyena. Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ ārocesi: “parinibbuto, vāseṭṭhā, bhagavā, yassadāni kālaṁ maññathā”ti.
[¶49] When they heard what Ānanda had to say, the Mallas, their sons, daughters-in-law, and wives became distraught, saddened, and grief-stricken. And some, with hair disheveled and arms raised, falling down like their feet were chopped off, rolling back and forth, lamented, “Too soon the Blessed One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Holy One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Eye of the World has vanished!”
> Pali: Idamāyasmato ānandassa vacanaṁ sutvā mallā ca mallaputtā ca mallasuṇisā ca mallapajāpatiyo ca aghāvino dummanā cetodukkhasamappitā appekacce kese pakiriya kandanti, bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito”ti.
[¶50] 37. The Rites of Venerating the Buddha’s Corpse
> Pali: 37. Buddhasarīrapūjā
[¶51] Then the Mallas ordered their men, “So then, lads, collect fragrances and garlands, and all the musical instruments in Kusinārā.”
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā purise āṇāpesuṁ: “tena hi, bhaṇe, kusinārāyaṁ gandhamālañca sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṁ sannipātethā”ti.
[¶52] Then—taking those fragrances and garlands, all the musical instruments, and five hundred pairs of garments—they went to the Mallian sal grove at Upavattana and approached the Buddha’s corpse. They spent the day honoring, respecting, revering, and venerating the Buddha’s corpse with dance and song and music and garlands and fragrances, and making awnings and setting up pavilions.
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā gandhamālañca sabbañca tāḷāvacaraṁ pañca ca dussayugasatāni ādāya yena upavattanaṁ mallānaṁ sālavanaṁ, yena bhagavato sarīraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā celavitānāni karontā maṇḍalamāḷe paṭiyādentā ekadivasaṁ vītināmesuṁ.
[¶53] Then they thought, “It’s too late to cremate the Buddha’s corpse today. Let’s do it tomorrow.” But they spent the next day the same way, and so too the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth days.
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ etadahosi: “ativikālo kho ajja bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpetuṁ, sve dāni mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā”ti. Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā celavitānāni karontā maṇḍalamāḷe paṭiyādentā dutiyampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, tatiyampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, catutthampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, pañcamampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ, chaṭṭhampi divasaṁ vītināmesuṁ.
[¶54] Then on the seventh day they thought, “Honoring, respecting, revering, and venerating the Buddha’s corpse with dance and song and music and garlands and fragrances, let us carry it to the south of the town, and cremate it there outside the town.”
> Pali: Atha kho sattamaṁ divasaṁ kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ etadahosi: “mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā dakkhiṇena dakkhiṇaṁ nagarassa haritvā bāhirena bāhiraṁ dakkhiṇato nagarassa bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā”ti.
[¶55] Now at that time eight of the leading Mallas, having bathed their heads and dressed in unworn clothes, said, “We shall lift the Buddha’s corpse.” But they were unable to do so.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena aṭṭha mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: “mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ uccāressāmā”ti na sakkonti uccāretuṁ.
[¶56] The Mallas said to Anuruddha, “What is the cause, Honorable Anuruddha, what is the reason why these eight Mallian chiefs are unable to lift the Buddha’s corpse?”
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ko nu kho, bhante anuruddha, hetu ko paccayo, yenime aṭṭha mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ uccāressāmā’ti na sakkonti uccāretun”ti?
[¶57] “Vāseṭṭhas, you have one plan, but the deities have a different one.”
> Pali: “Aññathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, tumhākaṁ adhippāyo, aññathā devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti.
[¶58] “But sir, what is the deities’ plan?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti?
[¶59] “You plan to carry the Buddha’s corpse to the south of the town while venerating it with dance and song and music and garlands and fragrances, and cremate it there outside the town. The deities plan to carry the Buddha’s corpse to the north of the town while venerating it with heavenly dance and song and music and garlands and fragrances. Then they plan to enter the town by the northern gate, carry it through the center of the town, leave by the eastern gate, and cremate it there at the Mallian shrine named Coronation.”
> Pali: “Tumhākaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, adhippāyo: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā dakkhiṇena dakkhiṇaṁ nagarassa haritvā bāhirena bāhiraṁ dakkhiṇato nagarassa bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā’ti; devatānaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, adhippāyo: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato sarīraṁ dibbehi naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā uttarena uttaraṁ nagarassa haritvā uttarena dvārena nagaraṁ pavesetvā majjhena majjhaṁ nagarassa haritvā puratthimena dvārena nikkhamitvā puratthimato nagarassa makuṭabandhanaṁ nāma mallānaṁ cetiyaṁ ettha bhagavato sarīraṁ jhāpessāmā’”ti.
[¶60] “Sir, let it be as the deities plan.”
> Pali: “Yathā, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo, tathā hotū”ti.
[¶61] Now at that time the whole of Kusinārā was covered knee-deep with the flowers of the Flame Tree, without gaps even on the filth and rubbish heaps. Then the deities and the Mallas of Kusinārā carried the Buddha’s corpse to the north of the town while venerating it with heavenly and human dance and song and music and garlands and fragrances. Then they entered the town by the northern gate, carried it through the center of the town, left by the eastern gate, and deposited the corpse there at the Mallian shrine named Coronation.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena kusinārā yāva sandhisamalasaṅkaṭīrā jaṇṇumattena odhinā mandāravapupphehi santhatā hoti. Atha kho devatā ca kosinārakā ca mallā bhagavato sarīraṁ dibbehi ca mānusakehi ca naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkarontā garuṁ karontā mānentā pūjentā uttarena uttaraṁ nagarassa haritvā uttarena dvārena nagaraṁ pavesetvā majjhena majjhaṁ nagarassa haritvā puratthimena dvārena nikkhamitvā puratthimato nagarassa makuṭabandhanaṁ nāma mallānaṁ cetiyaṁ ettha ca bhagavato sarīraṁ nikkhipiṁsu.
[¶62] Then the Mallas said to Ānanda, “Honorable Ānanda, how do we proceed when it comes to the Realized One’s corpse?”
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavocuṁ: “kathaṁ mayaṁ, bhante ānanda, tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjāmā”ti?
[¶63] “Proceed in the same way as they do for the corpse of a wheel-turning monarch.”
> Pali: “Yathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabban”ti.
[¶64] “But how do they proceed with a wheel-turning monarch’s corpse?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante ānanda, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjantī”ti?
[¶65] “They wrap a wheel-turning monarch’s corpse with unworn cloth, then with uncarded cotton, then again with unworn cloth. In this way they wrap the corpse with five hundred double-layers. Then they place it in an iron casket filled with oil and close it up with another casket. Then, having built a funeral pyre out of all kinds of aromatics, they cremate the corpse. They build a monument for the wheel-turning monarch at the crossroads. That’s how they proceed with a wheel-turning monarch’s corpse. Proceed in the same way with the Realized One’s corpse. A monument for the Realized One is to be built at the crossroads. When someone there lifts up garlands or fragrance or powder, or bows, or inspires confidence in their heart, that will be for their lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: “Rañño, vāseṭṭhā, cakkavattissa sarīraṁ ahatena vatthena veṭhenti, ahatena vatthena veṭhetvā vihatena kappāsena veṭhenti, vihatena kappāsena veṭhetvā ahatena vatthena veṭhenti. Etena upāyena pañcahi yugasatehi rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ veṭhetvā āyasāya teladoṇiyā pakkhipitvā aññissā āyasāya doṇiyā paṭikujjitvā sabbagandhānaṁ citakaṁ karitvā rañño cakkavattissa sarīraṁ jhāpenti. Cātumahāpathe rañño cakkavattissa thūpaṁ karonti. Evaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti. Yathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, rañño cakkavattissa sarīre paṭipajjanti, evaṁ tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabbaṁ. Cātumahāpathe tathāgatassa thūpo kātabbo. Tattha ye mālaṁ vā gandhaṁ vā cuṇṇakaṁ vā āropessanti vā abhivādessanti vā cittaṁ vā pasādessanti, tesaṁ taṁ bhavissati dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶66] Then the Mallas ordered their men, “So then, lads, collect uncarded cotton.”
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā purise āṇāpesuṁ: “tena hi, bhaṇe, mallānaṁ vihataṁ kappāsaṁ sannipātethā”ti.
[¶67] So the Mallas wrapped the Buddha’s corpse, and placed it in an iron casket filled with oil. Then, having built a funeral pyre out of all kinds of aromatics, they lifted the corpse on to the pyre.
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīraṁ ahatena vatthena veṭhetvā vihatena kappāsena veṭhesuṁ, vihatena kappāsena veṭhetvā ahatena vatthena veṭhesuṁ. Etena upāyena pañcahi yugasatehi bhagavato sarīraṁ veṭhetvā āyasāya teladoṇiyā pakkhipitvā aññissā āyasāya doṇiyā paṭikujjitvā sabbagandhānaṁ citakaṁ karitvā bhagavato sarīraṁ citakaṁ āropesuṁ.
[¶68] 38. Mahākassapa’s Arrival
> Pali: 38. Mahākassapattheravatthu
[¶69] Now at that time Venerable Mahākassapa was traveling along the road from Pāvā to Kusinārā together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants. Then he left the road and sat at the root of a tree.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā mahākassapo pāvāya kusināraṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṁ rukkhamūle nisīdi.
[¶70] Now at that time a certain Ājīvaka ascetic had picked up a Flame Tree flower in Kusinārā and was traveling along the road to Pāvā. Mahākassapa saw him coming off in the distance and said to him, “Reverend, might you know about our Teacher?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena aññataro ājīvako kusinārāya mandāravapupphaṁ gahetvā pāvaṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti. Addasā kho āyasmā mahākassapo taṁ ājīvakaṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ, disvā taṁ ājīvakaṁ etadavoca: “apāvuso, amhākaṁ satthāraṁ jānāsī”ti?
[¶71] “Yes, reverend. Seven days ago the ascetic Gotama was fully quenched. From there I picked up this Flame Tree flower.” Some of the mendicants there who were not free of desire, with arms raised, falling down like their feet were chopped off, rolling back and forth, lamented, “Too soon the Blessed One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Holy One has become fully quenched! Too soon the Eye of the World has vanished!” But the mendicants who were free of desire endured, mindful and aware, thinking, “Conditions are impermanent. How could it possibly be otherwise?”
> Pali: “Āmāvuso, jānāmi, ajja sattāhaparinibbuto samaṇo gotamo. Tato me idaṁ mandāravapupphaṁ gahitan”ti. Tattha ye te bhikkhū avītarāgā appekacce bāhā paggayha kandanti, chinnapātaṁ papatanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti: “atikhippaṁ bhagavā parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ sugato parinibbuto, atikhippaṁ cakkhuṁ loke antarahito”ti. Ye pana te bhikkhū vītarāgā, te satā sampajānā adhivāsenti: “aniccā saṅkhārā, taṁ kutettha labbhā”ti.
[¶72] Now at that time a monk named Subhadda, who had gone forth when old, was sitting in that assembly. He said to those mendicants, “Enough, reverends, do not grieve or lament. We’re well rid of that Great Ascetic. And we are harried: ‘This is allowable for you; this is not allowable for you.’ Well, now we shall do what we want and not do what we don’t want.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena subhaddo nāma vuddhapabbajito tassaṁ parisāyaṁ nisinno hoti. Atha kho subhaddo vuddhapabbajito te bhikkhū etadavoca: “alaṁ, āvuso, mā socittha, mā paridevittha, sumuttā mayaṁ tena mahāsamaṇena. Upaddutā ca homa: ‘idaṁ vo kappati, idaṁ vo na kappatī’ti. Idāni pana mayaṁ yaṁ icchissāma, taṁ karissāma, yaṁ na icchissāma, na taṁ karissāmā”ti.
[¶73] Then Venerable Mahākassapa addressed the mendicants, “Enough, reverends, do not grieve or lament. Did the Buddha not prepare us for this when he explained that we must be parted and separated from all we hold dear and beloved? How could it possibly be so that what is born, created, conditioned, and liable to wear out should not wear out, even the Realized One’s body?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū āmantesi: “alaṁ, āvuso, mā socittha, mā paridevittha. Nanu etaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṁ: ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo’. Taṁ kutettha, āvuso, labbhā. ‘Yaṁ taṁ jātaṁ bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ palokadhammaṁ, taṁ tathāgatassāpi sarīraṁ mā palujjī’ti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī”ti.
[¶74] Now at that time four of the leading Mallas, having bathed their heads and dressed in unworn clothes, said, “We shall light the Buddha’s funeral pyre.” But they were unable to do so.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena cattāro mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: “mayaṁ bhagavato citakaṁ āḷimpessāmā”ti na sakkonti āḷimpetuṁ.
[¶75] The Mallas said to Anuruddha, “What is the cause, Venerable Anuruddha, what is the reason why these four Mallian chiefs are unable to light the Buddha’s funeral pyre?”
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā āyasmantaṁ anuruddhaṁ etadavocuṁ: “ko nu kho, bhante anuruddha, hetu ko paccayo, yenime cattāro mallapāmokkhā sīsaṁnhātā ahatāni vatthāni nivatthā: ‘mayaṁ bhagavato citakaṁ āḷimpessāmā’ti na sakkonti āḷimpetun”ti?
[¶76] “Vāseṭṭhas, the deities have a different plan.”
> Pali: “Aññathā kho, vāseṭṭhā, devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti.
[¶77] “But sir, what is the deities’ plan?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ pana, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo”ti?
[¶78] “The deities’ plan is this: Venerable Mahākassapa is traveling along the road from Pāvā to Kusinārā together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants. The Buddha’s funeral pyre shall not burn until he bows with his head to the Buddha’s feet.”
> Pali: “Devatānaṁ kho, vāseṭṭhā, adhippāyo: ‘ayaṁ āyasmā mahākassapo pāvāya kusināraṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Na tāva bhagavato citako pajjalissati, yāvāyasmā mahākassapo bhagavato pāde sirasā na vandissatī’”ti.
[¶79] “Sir, let it be as the deities plan.”
> Pali: “Yathā, bhante, devatānaṁ adhippāyo, tathā hotū”ti.
[¶80] Then Venerable Mahākassapa arrived at the Mallian shrine named Coronation at Kusinārā and approached the Buddha’s funeral pyre. Arranging his robe over one shoulder and raising his joined palms, he respectfully circled the Buddha three times, keeping him on his right, and bowed with his head to the Buddha’s feet. And the five hundred mendicants did likewise. And when Mahākassapa and the five hundred mendicants bowed the Buddha’s funeral pyre burst into flames all by itself.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo yena kusinārā makuṭabandhanaṁ nāma mallānaṁ cetiyaṁ, yena bhagavato citako tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ citakaṁ padakkhiṇaṁ katvā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandi. Tānipi kho pañcabhikkhusatāni ekaṁsaṁ cīvaraṁ katvā añjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tikkhattuṁ citakaṁ padakkhiṇaṁ katvā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandiṁsu. Vandite ca panāyasmatā mahākassapena tehi ca pañcahi bhikkhusatehi sayameva bhagavato citako pajjali.
[¶81] And when the Buddha’s corpse was cremated no ash or soot was found from outer or inner skin, flesh, sinews, or synovial fluid. Only the relics remained. It’s like when ghee or oil blaze and burn, and neither ashes nor soot are found. In the same way, when the Buddha’s corpse was cremated no ash or soot was found from outer or inner skin, flesh, sinews, or synovial fluid. Only the relics remained. And of those five hundred pairs of garments only two were not burnt: the innermost and the outermost. But when the Buddha’s corpse was consumed the funeral pyre was extinguished by a stream of water that appeared in the sky, by water dripping from the sal trees, and by the Mallas’ fragrant water.
> Pali: Jhāyamānassa kho pana bhagavato sarīrassa yaṁ ahosi chavīti vā cammanti vā maṁsanti vā nhārūti vā lasikāti vā, tassa neva chārikā paññāyittha, na masi; sarīrāneva avasissiṁsu. Seyyathāpi nāma sappissa vā telassa vā jhāyamānassa neva chārikā paññāyati, na masi; evameva bhagavato sarīrassa jhāyamānassa yaṁ ahosi chavīti vā cammanti vā maṁsanti vā nhārūti vā lasikāti vā, tassa neva chārikā paññāyittha, na masi; sarīrāneva avasissiṁsu. Tesañca pañcannaṁ dussayugasatānaṁ dveva dussāni na ḍayhiṁsu yañca sabbaabbhantarimaṁ yañca bāhiraṁ. Daḍḍhe ca kho pana bhagavato sarīre antalikkhā udakadhārā pātubhavitvā bhagavato citakaṁ nibbāpesi. Udakasālatopi abbhunnamitvā bhagavato citakaṁ nibbāpesi. Kosinārakāpi mallā sabbagandhodakena bhagavato citakaṁ nibbāpesuṁ.
[¶82] Then the Mallas made a cage of spears for the Buddha’s relics in the town hall and surrounded it with a buttress of bows. For seven days they honored, respected, revered, and venerated them with dance and song and music and garlands and fragrances.
> Pali: Atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīrāni sattāhaṁ sandhāgāre sattipañjaraṁ karitvā dhanupākāraṁ parikkhipāpetvā naccehi gītehi vāditehi mālehi gandhehi sakkariṁsu garuṁ kariṁsu mānesuṁ pūjesuṁ.
[¶83] 39. Distributing the Relics
> Pali: 39. Sarīradhātuvibhajana
[¶84] King Ajātasattu of Magadha, son of the princess of Videha, heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. He sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat and so am I. I too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. I will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosi kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesi: “bhagavāpi khattiyo ahampi khattiyo, ahampi arahāmi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, ahampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmī”ti.
[¶85] The Licchavis of Vesālī also heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. They sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat and so are we. We too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. We will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho vesālikā licchavī: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho vesālikā licchavī kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.
[¶86] The Sakyans of Kapilavatthu also heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. They sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was our foremost relative. We too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. We will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho kapilavatthuvāsī sakyā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho kapilavatthuvāsī sakyā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavā amhākaṁ ñātiseṭṭho, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.
[¶87] The Bulis of Allakappa also heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. They sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat and so are we. We too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. We will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho allakappakā bulayo: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho allakappakā bulayo kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.
[¶88] The Koliyans of Rāmagāma also heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. They sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat and so are we. We too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. We will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho rāmagāmakā koḷiyā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho rāmagāmakā koḷiyā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.
[¶89] The brahmin of Veṭhadīpa also heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. He sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat and I am a brahmin. I too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. I will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosi kho veṭṭhadīpako brāhmaṇo: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho veṭṭhadīpako brāhmaṇo kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesi: “bhagavāpi khattiyo ahampismi brāhmaṇo, ahampi arahāmi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, ahampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmī”ti.
[¶90] The Mallas of Pāvā also heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. They sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat and so are we. We too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. We will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho pāveyyakā mallā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho pāveyyakā mallā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.
[¶91] When they had spoken, the Mallas of Kusinārā said to those various groups: “The Buddha was fully quenched in our village district. We will not give away a share of his relics.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, kosinārakā mallā te saṅghe gaṇe etadavocuṁ: “bhagavā amhākaṁ gāmakkhette parinibbuto, na mayaṁ dassāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgan”ti.
[¶92] Then Doṇa the brahmin said to those various groups:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, doṇo brāhmaṇo te saṅghe gaṇe etadavoca:
[¶93] “Hear, worthy sirs, a single word from me.
Our Buddha’s teaching was acceptance.
It would not be good to fight over
a share of the supreme individual’s relics.
> Pali: “Suṇantu bhonto mama ekavācaṁ,
Amhāka buddho ahu khantivādo;
Na hi sādhu yaṁ uttamapuggalassa,
Sarīrabhāge siyā sampahāro.
[¶94] Let us make eight portions, worthy sirs,
rejoicing in unity and harmony.
Let there be monuments far and wide,
so many folk may gain faith in the Clear-eyed One!”
> Pali: Sabbeva bhonto sahitā samaggā,
Sammodamānā karomaṭṭhabhāge;
Vitthārikā hontu disāsu thūpā,
Bahū janā cakkhumato pasannā”ti.
[¶95] “Well then, brahmin, you yourself should fairly divide the Buddha’s relics in eight portions.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, tvaññeva bhagavato sarīrāni aṭṭhadhā samaṁ savibhattaṁ vibhajāhī”ti.
[¶96] “Yes, worthy sirs,” replied Doṇa to those various groups. He divided the relics as asked and said to them, “Worthy sirs, please give me the urn, and I shall build a monument for it and conduct a memorial service.” So they gave Doṇa the urn.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho doṇo brāhmaṇo tesaṁ saṅghānaṁ gaṇānaṁ paṭissutvā bhagavato sarīrāni aṭṭhadhā samaṁ suvibhattaṁ vibhajitvā te saṅghe gaṇe etadavoca: “imaṁ me bhonto tumbaṁ dadantu ahampi tumbassa thūpañca mahañca karissāmī”ti. Adaṁsu kho te doṇassa brāhmaṇassa tumbaṁ.
[¶97] The Moriyas of Pippalivana heard that the Buddha had become fully quenched at Kusinārā. They sent an envoy to the Mallas of Kusinārā: “The Buddha was an aristocrat, and so are we. We too deserve a share of the Buddha’s relics. We will build a monument for them and conduct a memorial service.”
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho pippalivaniyā moriyā: “bhagavā kira kusinārāyaṁ parinibbuto”ti. Atha kho pippalivaniyā moriyā kosinārakānaṁ mallānaṁ dūtaṁ pāhesuṁ: “bhagavāpi khattiyo mayampi khattiyā, mayampi arahāma bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgaṁ, mayampi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca karissāmā”ti.
[¶98] “There is no portion of the Buddha’s relics left, they have already been portioned out. Here, take the embers.” So they took the embers.
> Pali: “Natthi bhagavato sarīrānaṁ bhāgo, vibhattāni bhagavato sarīrāni. Ito aṅgāraṁ harathā”ti. Te tato aṅgāraṁ hariṁsu.
[¶99] 40. Venerating the Relics
> Pali: 40. Dhātuthūpapūjā
[¶100] Then King Ajātasattu of Magadha, the Licchavis of Vesālī, the Sakyans of Kapilavatthu, the Bulis of Allakappa, the Koliyans of Rāmagāma, the brahmin of Veṭhadīpa, the Mallas of Pāvā, the Mallas of Kusinārā, the brahmin Doṇa, and the Moriyas of Pippalivana built monuments for them and conducted memorial services. Thus there were eight monuments for the relics, a ninth for the urn, and a tenth for the embers. That is how it was in the old days.
> Pali: Atha kho rājā māgadho ajātasattu vedehiputto rājagahe bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akāsi. Vesālikāpi licchavī vesāliyaṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Kapilavatthuvāsīpi sakyā kapilavatthusmiṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Allakappakāpi bulayo allakappe bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Rāmagāmakāpi koḷiyā rāmagāme bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Veṭṭhadīpakopi brāhmaṇo veṭṭhadīpe bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akāsi. Pāveyyakāpi mallā pāvāyaṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Kosinārakāpi mallā kusinārāyaṁ bhagavato sarīrānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Doṇopi brāhmaṇo tumbassa thūpañca mahañca akāsi. Pippalivaniyāpi moriyā pippalivane aṅgārānaṁ thūpañca mahañca akaṁsu. Iti aṭṭha sarīrathūpā navamo tumbathūpo dasamo aṅgārathūpo. Evametaṁ bhūtapubbanti.
[¶101] There were eight shares of the Clear-eyed One’s relics.
Seven were worshiped in the Black Plum Tree Land.
But one share of the most excellent of men
was worshiped in Rāmagāma by a dragon king.
> Pali: Aṭṭhadoṇaṁ cakkhumato sarīraṁ,
Sattadoṇaṁ jambudīpe mahenti;
Ekañca doṇaṁ purisavaruttamassa,
Rāmagāme nāgarājā maheti.
[¶102] One tooth is venerated by the gods of the Third Heaven,
and one is worshiped in the city of Gandhāra;
another one in the realm of the Kaliṅga King,
and one is worshiped by a dragon king.
> Pali: Ekāhi dāṭhā tidivehi pūjitā,
Ekā pana gandhārapure mahīyati;
Kāliṅgarañño vijite punekaṁ,
Ekaṁ pana nāgarājā maheti.
[¶103] Through their glory this rich earth
is adorned with the best of offerings.
Thus the Clear-eyed One’s corpse
is well honored by the honorable.
> Pali: Tasseva tejena ayaṁ vasundharā,
Āyāgaseṭṭhehi mahī alaṅkatā;
Evaṁ imaṁ cakkhumato sarīraṁ,
Susakkataṁ sakkatasakkatehi.
[¶104] It’s venerated by lords of gods, dragons, and fairies;
and likewise venerated by the finest lords of men.
Honor it with cupped palms when you get the chance,
for a Buddha is rare even in a hundred eons.
> Pali: Devindanāgindanarindapūjito,
Manussindaseṭṭhehi tatheva pūjito;
Taṁ vandatha pañjalikā labhitvā,
Buddho have kappasatehi dullabhoti.
[¶105] Altogether forty even teeth,
and the body hair and head hair,
were carried off individually by gods
across the universe.
> Pali: Cattālīsa samā dantā,
kesā lomā ca sabbaso;
Devā hariṁsu ekekaṁ,
cakkavāḷaparamparāti.
[¶106] > Pali: Mahāparinibbānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 34. DN 17 · King Mahāsudassana · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/34/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/34/#p-N
[¶0] DN 17 · King Mahāsudassana
> Pali: DN 17 · Mahāsudassanasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying between a pair of sal trees in the sal forest of the Mallas at Upavattana near Kusinārā at the time of his full extinguishment.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kusinārāyaṁ viharati upavattane mallānaṁ sālavane antarena yamakasālānaṁ parinibbānasamaye.
[¶2] Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, please don’t be fully extinguished in this little hamlet, this jungle hamlet, this branch hamlet. There are other great cities such as Campā, Rājagaha, Sāvatthī, Sāketa, Kosambī, and Varanasi. Let the Buddha be fully extinguished there. There are many well-to-do aristocrats, brahmins, and householders there who are devoted to the Buddha. They will perform the rites of venerating the Realized One’s corpse.”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mā, bhante, bhagavā imasmiṁ khuddakanagarake ujjaṅgalanagarake sākhānagarake parinibbāyi. Santi, bhante, aññāni mahānagarāni. Seyyathidaṁ—campā, rājagahaṁ, sāvatthi, sāketaṁ, kosambī, bārāṇasī; ettha bhagavā parinibbāyatu. Ettha bahū khattiyamahāsālā brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatimahāsālā tathāgate abhippasannā, te tathāgatassa sarīrapūjaṁ karissantī”ti.
[¶3] “Don’t say that, Ānanda! Don’t say that this is a little hamlet, a jungle hamlet, a branch hamlet.
> Pali: “Mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca; mā hevaṁ, ānanda, avaca: ‘khuddakanagarakaṁ ujjaṅgalanagarakaṁ sākhānagarakan’ti.
[¶4] 1. The Capital City of Kusāvatī
> Pali: 1. Kusāvatīrājadhānī
[¶5] Once upon a time, there was a king named Mahāsudassana whose dominion extended to all four sides, and who achieved stability in the country. His capital was this Kusinārā, which at the time was named Kusāvatī. It stretched for twelve leagues from east to west, and seven leagues from north to south. The royal capital of Kusāvatī was successful and prosperous, populous and full of people, with plenty of food. It was just like Āḷakamandā, the royal capital of the gods, which is successful and prosperous, populous and full of spirits, with plenty of food.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano nāma ahosi khattiyo muddhāvasitto cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa ayaṁ kusinārā kusāvatī nāma rājadhānī ahosi. Puratthimena ca pacchimena ca dvādasayojanāni āyāmena, uttarena ca dakkhiṇena ca sattayojanāni vitthārena. Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī iddhā ceva ahosi phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, devānaṁ āḷakamandā nāma rājadhānī iddhā ceva hoti phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇayakkhā ca subhikkhā ca; evameva kho, ānanda, kusāvatī rājadhānī iddhā ceva ahosi phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca.
[¶6] Kusāvatī was never free of ten sounds by day or night, namely: the sound of elephants, horses, chariots, drums, clay drums, arched harps, singing, horns, gongs, and handbells; and the cry, ‘Eat, drink, be merry!’ as the tenth.
> Pali: Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī dasahi saddehi avivittā ahosi divā ceva rattiñca, seyyathidaṁ— hatthisaddena assasaddena rathasaddena bherisaddena mudiṅgasaddena vīṇāsaddena gītasaddena saṅkhasaddena sammasaddena pāṇitāḷasaddena ‘asnātha pivatha khādathā’ti dasamena saddena.
[¶7] Kusāvatī was encircled by seven ramparts: one made of gold, one made of silver, one made of beryl, one made of crystal, one made of ruby, one made of emerald, and one made of all precious things.
> Pali: Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī sattahi pākārehi parikkhittā ahosi. Eko pākāro sovaṇṇamayo, eko rūpiyamayo, eko veḷuriyamayo, eko phalikamayo, eko lohitaṅkamayo, eko masāragallamayo, eko sabbaratanamayo.
[¶8] It had four gates, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal. At each gate there were seven pillars, three fathoms deep and four fathoms high, made of gold, silver, beryl, crystal, ruby, emerald, and all precious things.
> Pali: Kusāvatiyā, ānanda, rājadhāniyā catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ dvārāni ahesuṁ. Ekaṁ dvāraṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ, ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ, ekaṁ veḷuriyamayaṁ, ekaṁ phalikamayaṁ. Ekekasmiṁ dvāre satta satta esikā nikhātā ahesuṁ tiporisaṅgā tiporisanikhātā dvādasaporisā ubbedhena. Ekā esikā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā, ekā veḷuriyamayā, ekā phalikamayā, ekā lohitaṅkamayā, ekā masāragallamayā, ekā sabbaratanamayā.
[¶9] It was surrounded by seven rows of palm trees, made of gold, silver, beryl, crystal, ruby, emerald, and all precious things. The golden palms had trunks of gold, and leaves and fruits of silver. The silver palms had trunks of silver, and leaves and fruits of gold. The beryl palms had trunks of beryl, and leaves and fruits of crystal. The crystal palms had trunks of crystal, and leaves and fruits of beryl. The ruby palms had trunks of ruby, and leaves and fruits of emerald. The emerald palms had trunks of emerald, and leaves and fruits of ruby. The palms of all precious things had trunks of all precious things, and leaves and fruits of all precious things. When those rows of palm trees were blown by the wind they sounded graceful, tantalizing, sensuous, lovely, and intoxicating, like a quintet made up of skilled musicians who had practiced well and kept excellent rhythm. And any addicts, carousers, or drunkards in Kusāvatī at that time were entertained by that sound.
> Pali: Kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī sattahi tālapantīhi parikkhittā ahosi. Ekā tālapanti sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā, ekā veḷuriyamayā, ekā phalikamayā, ekā lohitaṅkamayā, ekā masāragallamayā, ekā sabbaratanamayā. Sovaṇṇamayassa tālassa sovaṇṇamayo khandho ahosi, rūpiyamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Rūpiyamayassa tālassa rūpiyamayo khandho ahosi, sovaṇṇamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Veḷuriyamayassa tālassa veḷuriyamayo khandho ahosi, phalikamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Phalikamayassa tālassa phalikamayo khandho ahosi, veḷuriyamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Lohitaṅkamayassa tālassa lohitaṅkamayo khandho ahosi, masāragallamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Masāragallamayassa tālassa masāragallamayo khandho ahosi, lohitaṅkamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Sabbaratanamayassa tālassa sabbaratanamayo khandho ahosi, sabbaratanamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Tāsaṁ kho panānanda, tālapantīnaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddo ahosi vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, pañcaṅgikassa tūriyassa suvinītassa suppaṭitāḷitassa sukusalehi samannāhatassa saddo hoti vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca; evameva kho, ānanda, tāsaṁ tālapantīnaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddo ahosi vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca. Ye kho panānanda, tena samayena kusāvatiyā rājadhāniyā dhuttā ahesuṁ soṇḍā pipāsā, te tāsaṁ tālapantīnaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddena paricāresuṁ.
[¶10] 2. The Seven Treasures
> Pali: 2. Sattaratanasamannāgata
[¶11] 2.1. The Wheel-Treasure
> Pali: 2.1. Cakkaratana
[¶12] King Mahāsudassana possessed seven treasures and four blessings. What seven?
> Pali: Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano sattahi ratanehi samannāgato ahosi catūhi ca iddhīhi. Katamehi sattahi?
[¶13] On a fifteenth day sabbath, King Mahāsudassana had bathed his head and gone upstairs in the royal longhouse to observe the sabbath. And the heavenly wheel-treasure appeared to him, with a thousand spokes, with rim and hub, complete in every detail. Seeing this, the king thought, ‘I have heard that when the heavenly wheel-treasure appears to a king in this way, he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. Am I then a wheel-turning monarch?’
> Pali: Idhānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pāturahosi sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ. Disvā rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ: “yassa rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pātubhavati sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ, so hoti rājā cakkavattī”ti. Assaṁ nu kho ahaṁ rājā cakkavattī’ti.
[¶14] Then King Mahāsudassana, rising from his seat and arranging his robe over one shoulder, took a ceremonial vase in his left hand and besprinkled the wheel-treasure with his right hand, saying: ‘Roll forth, O wheel-treasure! Triumph, O wheel-treasure!’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā vāmena hatthena suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṁ gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena cakkaratanaṁ abbhukkiri: ‘pavattatu bhavaṁ cakkaratanaṁ, abhivijinātu bhavaṁ cakkaratanan’ti.
[¶15] Then the wheel-treasure rolled toward the east. And the king followed it together with his army of four divisions. In whatever place the wheel-treasure stood still, there the king came to stay together with his army.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, ānanda, cakkaratanaṁ puratthimaṁ disaṁ pavatti, anvadeva rājā mahāsudassano saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya, yasmiṁ kho panānanda, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā mahāsudassano vāsaṁ upagacchi saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya.
[¶16] And any opposing rulers of the eastern quarter came to him and said, ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! We are yours, Great King, instruct us.’
> Pali: Ye kho panānanda, puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja, svāgataṁ te, mahārāja, sakaṁ te, mahārāja, anusāsa, mahārājā’ti.
[¶17] The king said, ‘Do not kill living creatures. Do not steal. Do not commit sexual misconduct. Do not lie. Do not drink liquor. Maintain the current level of taxation.’ And so the opposing rulers of the eastern quarter became his vassals.
> Pali: Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ na ādātabbaṁ, kāmesu micchā na caritabbā, musā na bhaṇitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho panānanda, puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesuṁ.
[¶18] Then the wheel-treasure, having plunged into the eastern ocean and emerged again, rolled toward the south. …
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, ānanda, cakkaratanaṁ puratthimaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pavatti …pe…
[¶19] Having plunged into the southern ocean and emerged again, it rolled toward the west. …
> Pali: dakkhiṇaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā pacchimaṁ disaṁ pavatti …pe…
[¶20] Having plunged into the western ocean and emerged again, it rolled toward the north, followed by the king together with his army of four divisions. In whatever place the wheel-treasure stood still, there the king came to stay together with his army.
> Pali: pacchimaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā uttaraṁ disaṁ pavatti, anvadeva rājā mahāsudassano saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṁ kho panānanda, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā mahāsudassano vāsaṁ upagacchi saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya.
[¶21] And any opposing rulers of the northern quarter came to him and said, ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! We are yours, Great King, instruct us.’
> Pali: Ye kho panānanda, uttarāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja, svāgataṁ te, mahārāja, sakaṁ te, mahārāja, anusāsa, mahārājā’ti.
[¶22] The king said, ‘Do not kill living creatures. Do not steal. Do not commit sexual misconduct. Do not lie. Do not drink liquor. Maintain the current level of taxation.’ And so the opposing rulers of the northern quarter became his vassals.
> Pali: Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ na ādātabbaṁ, kāmesu micchā na caritabbā, musā na bhaṇitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho panānanda, uttarāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesuṁ.
[¶23] And then the wheel-treasure, having triumphed over this land surrounded by ocean, returned to the royal capital. There it stood still by the gate to the royal compound at the High Court as if fixed to an axle, illuminating the royal compound. Such is the wheel-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, ānanda, cakkaratanaṁ samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ abhivijinitvā kusāvatiṁ rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā rañño mahāsudassanassa antepuradvāre atthakaraṇapamukhe akkhāhataṁ maññe aṭṭhāsi rañño mahāsudassanassa antepuraṁ upasobhayamānaṁ. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶24] 2.2. The Elephant-Treasure
> Pali: 2.2. Hatthiratana
[¶25] Next, the elephant-treasure appeared to King Mahāsudassana. It was an all-white sky-walker with psychic power, touching the ground in seven places, a king of elephants named Sabbath. Seeing him, the king was impressed, ‘This would truly be a fine elephant vehicle, if he would submit to taming.’ Then the elephant-treasure submitted to taming, as if he was a fine thoroughbred elephant that had been tamed for a long time.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa hatthiratanaṁ pāturahosi sabbaseto sattappatiṭṭho iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo uposatho nāma nāgarājā. Taṁ disvā rañño mahāsudassanassa cittaṁ pasīdi: ‘bhaddakaṁ vata bho hatthiyānaṁ, sace damathaṁ upeyyā’ti. Atha kho taṁ, ānanda, hatthiratanaṁ—seyyathāpi nāma gandhahatthājāniyo dīgharattaṁ suparidanto; evameva damathaṁ upagacchi.
[¶26] Once it so happened that King Mahāsudassana, testing that same elephant-treasure, mounted him in the morning and traversed the land surrounded by ocean before returning to the royal capital in time for breakfast. Such is the elephant-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tameva hatthiratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ abhiruhitvā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ anuyāyitvā kusāvatiṁ rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā pātarāsamakāsi. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ hatthiratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶27] 2.3. The Horse-Treasure
> Pali: 2.3. Assaratana
[¶28] Next, the horse-treasure appeared to King Mahāsudassana. It was an all-white sky-walker with psychic power, with head of black and mane like woven reeds, a royal steed named Thundercloud. Seeing him, the king was impressed, ‘This would truly be a fine horse vehicle, if he would submit to taming.’ Then the horse-treasure submitted to taming, as if he was a fine thoroughbred horse that had been tamed for a long time.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa assaratanaṁ pāturahosi sabbaseto kāḷasīso muñjakeso iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo valāhako nāma assarājā. Taṁ disvā rañño mahāsudassanassa cittaṁ pasīdi: ‘bhaddakaṁ vata bho assayānaṁ sace damathaṁ upeyyā’ti. Atha kho taṁ, ānanda, assaratanaṁ seyyathāpi nāma bhaddo assājāniyo dīgharattaṁ suparidanto; evameva damathaṁ upagacchi.
[¶29] Once it so happened that King Mahāsudassana, testing that same horse-treasure, mounted him in the morning and traversed the land surrounded by ocean before returning to the royal capital in time for breakfast. Such is the horse-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tameva assaratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno pubbaṇhasamayaṁ abhiruhitvā samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ anuyāyitvā kusāvatiṁ rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā pātarāsamakāsi. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ assaratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶30] 2.4. The Jewel-Treasure
> Pali: 2.4. Maṇiratana
[¶31] Next, the jewel-treasure appeared to King Mahāsudassana. It was a beryl gem that was naturally lustrous, eight-faceted, well-worked, transparent, clear, and unclouded, endowed with all good qualities. And the radiance of that jewel spread all-round for a league.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa maṇiratanaṁ pāturahosi. So ahosi maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṁso suparikammakato accho vippasanno anāvilo sabbākārasampanno. Tassa kho panānanda, maṇiratanassa ābhā samantā yojanaṁ phuṭā ahosi.
[¶32] Once it so happened that King Mahāsudassana, testing that same jewel-treasure, mobilized his army of four divisions and, with the jewel hoisted on his banner, set out in the dark of the night. Then the villagers around them set off to work, thinking that it was day. Such is the jewel-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tameva maṇiratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ sannayhitvā maṇiṁ dhajaggaṁ āropetvā rattandhakāratimisāya pāyāsi. Ye kho panānanda, samantā gāmā ahesuṁ, te tenobhāsena kammante payojesuṁ divāti maññamānā. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ maṇiratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶33] 2.5. The Woman-Treasure
> Pali: 2.5. Itthiratana
[¶34] Next, the woman-treasure appeared to King Mahāsudassana. She was attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty. She was neither too tall nor too short; neither too thin nor too fat; neither too dark nor too light. She outdid human beauty without reaching heavenly beauty. And her touch was like a tuft of cotton-wool or kapok. When it was cool her limbs were warm, and when it was warm her limbs were cool. The fragrance of sandal floated from her body, and lotus from her mouth. She got up before the king and went to bed after him, and was obliging, behaving nicely and speaking politely. The woman-treasure did not betray the wheel-turning monarch even in thought, still less in deed. Such is the woman-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa itthiratanaṁ pāturahosi abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷikā nāccodātā atikkantā mānusivaṇṇaṁ appattā dibbavaṇṇaṁ. Tassa kho panānanda, itthiratanassa evarūpo kāyasamphasso hoti, seyyathāpi nāma tūlapicuno vā kappāsapicuno vā. Tassa kho panānanda, itthiratanassa sīte uṇhāni gattāni honti, uṇhe sītāni. Tassa kho panānanda, itthiratanassa kāyato candanagandho vāyati, mukhato uppalagandho. Taṁ kho panānanda, itthiratanaṁ rañño mahāsudassanassa pubbuṭṭhāyinī ahosi pacchānipātinī kiṅkārapaṭissāvinī manāpacārinī piyavādinī. Taṁ kho panānanda, itthiratanaṁ rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ manasāpi no aticari, kuto pana kāyena. Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ itthiratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶35] 2.6. The Householder-Treasure
> Pali: 2.6. Gahapatiratana
[¶36] Next, the householder-treasure appeared to King Mahāsudassana. The power of clairvoyance manifested in him as a result of past deeds, by which he sees treasure troves, both owned and ownerless.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa gahapatiratanaṁ pāturahosi. Tassa kammavipākajaṁ dibbacakkhu pāturahosi yena nidhiṁ passati sassāmikampi assāmikampi.
[¶37] He approached the king and said, ‘Relax, Your Majesty. I will take care of the treasury.’
> Pali: So rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘appossukko tvaṁ, deva, hohi, ahaṁ te dhanena dhanakaraṇīyaṁ karissāmī’ti.
[¶38] Once it so happened that the wheel-turning monarch, testing that same householder-treasure, boarded a boat and sailed to the middle of the Ganges River. Then he said to the householder-treasure, ‘Householder, I need gold, both coined and uncoined.’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tameva gahapatiratanaṁ vīmaṁsamāno nāvaṁ abhiruhitvā majjhe gaṅgāya nadiyā sotaṁ ogāhitvā gahapatiratanaṁ etadavoca: ‘attho me, gahapati, hiraññasuvaṇṇenā’ti.
[¶39] ‘Well then, Great King, draw the boat up to one shore.’
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, mahārāja, ekaṁ tīraṁ nāvā upetū’ti.
[¶40] ‘It’s right here, householder, that I need gold, both coined and uncoined.’
> Pali: ‘Idheva me, gahapati, attho hiraññasuvaṇṇenā’ti.
[¶41] Then that householder-treasure, immersing both hands in the water, pulled up a pot full of gold, both coined and uncoined, and said to the king, ‘Is this sufficient, Great King? Has enough been done, Great King, enough offered?’
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, ānanda, gahapatiratanaṁ ubhohi hatthehi udakaṁ omasitvā pūraṁ hiraññasuvaṇṇassa kumbhiṁ uddharitvā rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ etadavoca: ‘alamettāvatā, mahārāja, katamettāvatā, mahārāja, pūjitamettāvatā, mahārājā’ti?
[¶42] The king said, ‘That is sufficient, householder. Enough has been done, enough offered.’
> Pali: Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha: ‘alamettāvatā, gahapati, katamettāvatā, gahapati, pūjitamettāvatā, gahapatī’ti.
[¶43] Such is the householder-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶44] 2.7. The Commander-Treasure
> Pali: 2.7. Pariṇāyakaratana
[¶45] Next, the commander-treasure appeared to King Mahāsudassana. He is astute, competent, intelligent, and capable regarding who should be ushered in to the king’s presence, who should be ushered out, and who should be kept by his side.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa pariṇāyakaratanaṁ pāturahosi paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī paṭibalo rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upayāpetabbaṁ upayāpetuṁ, apayāpetabbaṁ apayāpetuṁ, ṭhapetabbaṁ ṭhapetuṁ.
[¶46] He approached the king and said, ‘Relax, Your Majesty. I shall issue instructions.’
> Pali: So rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha: ‘appossukko tvaṁ, deva, hohi, ahamanusāsissāmī’ti.
[¶47] Such is the commander-treasure that appeared to King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa evarūpaṁ pariṇāyakaratanaṁ pāturahosi.
[¶48] These are the seven treasures possessed by King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano imehi sattahi ratanehi samannāgato ahosi.
[¶49] 3. The Four Blessings
> Pali: 3. Catuiddhisamannāgata
[¶50] King Mahāsudassana possessed four blessings. And what are the four blessings?
> Pali: Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano catūhi iddhīhi samannāgato ahosi. Katamāhi catūhi iddhīhi?
[¶51] He was attractive, good-looking, lovely, of surpassing beauty, more so than other humans. This is the first blessing.
> Pali: Idhānanda, rājā mahāsudassano abhirūpo ahosi dassanīyo pāsādiko paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato ativiya aññehi manussehi. Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano imāya paṭhamāya iddhiyā samannāgato ahosi.
[¶52] Furthermore, he was long-lived, more so than other humans. This is the second blessing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano dīghāyuko ahosi ciraṭṭhitiko ativiya aññehi manussehi. Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano imāya dutiyāya iddhiyā samannāgato ahosi.
[¶53] Furthermore, he was rarely ill or unwell, and his stomach digested well, being neither too hot nor too cold, more so than other humans. This is the third blessing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano appābādho ahosi appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya ativiya aññehi manussehi. Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano imāya tatiyāya iddhiyā samannāgato ahosi.
[¶54] Furthermore, he was as dear and beloved to the brahmins and householders as a father is to his children. And the brahmins and householders were as dear to the king as children are to their father.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ piyo ahosi manāpo. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, pitā puttānaṁ piyo hoti manāpo; evameva kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ piyo ahosi manāpo. Raññopi, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa brāhmaṇagahapatikā piyā ahesuṁ manāpā. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, pitu puttā piyā honti manāpā; evameva kho, ānanda, raññopi mahāsudassanassa brāhmaṇagahapatikā piyā ahesuṁ manāpā.
[¶55] Once it so happened that King Mahāsudassana went with his army of four divisions to visit a park. Then the brahmins and householders went up to him and said, ‘Slow down, Your Majesty, so we may see you longer!’ And the king addressed his charioteer, ‘Drive slowly, charioteer, so I can see the brahmins and householders longer!’ This is the fourth blessing.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano caturaṅginiyā senāya uyyānabhūmiṁ niyyāsi. Atha kho, ānanda, brāhmaṇagahapatikā rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ataramāno, deva, yāhi, yathā taṁ mayaṁ cirataraṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Rājāpi, ānanda, mahāsudassano sārathiṁ āmantesi: ‘ataramāno, sārathi, rathaṁ pesehi, yathā ahaṁ brāhmaṇagahapatike cirataraṁ passeyyan’ti. Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano imāya catutthiyā iddhiyā samannāgato ahosi.
[¶56] These are the four blessings possessed by King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano imāhi catūhi iddhīhi samannāgato ahosi.
[¶57] 4. Lotus Ponds in the Palace of Principle
> Pali: 4. Dhammapāsādapokkharaṇī
[¶58] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Why don’t I have lotus ponds built between the palms, at intervals of a hundred bow lengths?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ imāsu tālantarikāsu dhanusate dhanusate pokkharaṇiyo māpeyyan’ti.
[¶59] So that’s what he did. The lotus ponds were lined with tiles of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal.
> Pali: Māpesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tāsu tālantarikāsu dhanusate dhanusate pokkharaṇiyo. Tā kho panānanda, pokkharaṇiyo catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ iṭṭhakāhi citā ahesuṁ— ekā iṭṭhakā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā, ekā veḷuriyamayā, ekā phalikamayā.
[¶60] And four flights of stairs of four colors descended into each lotus pond, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal. The golden stairs had posts of gold, and banisters and finials of silver. The silver stairs had posts of silver, and banisters and finials of gold. The beryl stairs had posts of beryl, and banisters and finials of crystal. The crystal stairs had posts of crystal, and banisters and finials of beryl. Those lotus ponds were surrounded by two balustrades, made of gold and silver. The golden balustrades had posts of gold, and banisters and finials of silver. The silver balustrades had posts of silver, and banisters and finials of gold.
> Pali: Tāsu kho panānanda, pokkharaṇīsu cattāri cattāri sopānāni ahesuṁ catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ, ekaṁ sopānaṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ ekaṁ veḷuriyamayaṁ ekaṁ phalikamayaṁ. Sovaṇṇamayassa sopānassa sovaṇṇamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, rūpiyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Rūpiyamayassa sopānassa rūpiyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, sovaṇṇamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Veḷuriyamayassa sopānassa veḷuriyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, phalikamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Phalikamayassa sopānassa phalikamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, veḷuriyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Tā kho panānanda, pokkharaṇiyo dvīhi vedikāhi parikkhittā ahesuṁ ekā vedikā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā. Sovaṇṇamayāya vedikāya sovaṇṇamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, rūpiyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Rūpiyamayāya vedikāya rūpiyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, sovaṇṇamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca.
[¶61] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Why don’t I plant flowers in the lotus ponds such as blue water lilies, and lotuses of pink, yellow, and white, blooming all year round, and accessible to the public?’ So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ imāsu pokkharaṇīsu evarūpaṁ mālaṁ ropāpeyyaṁ uppalaṁ padumaṁ kumudaṁ puṇḍarīkaṁ sabbotukaṁ sabbajanassa anāvaṭan’ti. Ropāpesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tāsu pokkharaṇīsu evarūpaṁ mālaṁ uppalaṁ padumaṁ kumudaṁ puṇḍarīkaṁ sabbotukaṁ sabbajanassa anāvaṭaṁ.
[¶62] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Why don’t I appoint bath attendants to help bathe the people who come to bathe in the lotus ponds?’ So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ imāsaṁ pokkharaṇīnaṁ tīre nhāpake purise ṭhapeyyaṁ, ye āgatāgataṁ janaṁ nhāpessantī’ti. Ṭhapesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tāsaṁ pokkharaṇīnaṁ tīre nhāpake purise, ye āgatāgataṁ janaṁ nhāpesuṁ.
[¶63] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Why don’t I set up charities on the banks of the lotus ponds, so that those in need of food, drink, clothes, vehicles, beds, women, coined gold, or uncoined gold can get what they need?’ So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ imāsaṁ pokkharaṇīnaṁ tīre evarūpaṁ dānaṁ paṭṭhapeyyaṁ— annaṁ annaṭṭhikassa, pānaṁ pānaṭṭhikassa, vatthaṁ vatthaṭṭhikassa, yānaṁ yānaṭṭhikassa, sayanaṁ sayanaṭṭhikassa, itthiṁ itthiṭṭhikassa, hiraññaṁ hiraññaṭṭhikassa, suvaṇṇaṁ suvaṇṇaṭṭhikassā’ti. Paṭṭhapesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tāsaṁ pokkharaṇīnaṁ tīre evarūpaṁ dānaṁ— annaṁ annaṭṭhikassa, pānaṁ pānaṭṭhikassa, vatthaṁ vatthaṭṭhikassa, yānaṁ yānaṭṭhikassa, sayanaṁ sayanaṭṭhikassa, itthiṁ itthiṭṭhikassa, hiraññaṁ hiraññaṭṭhikassa, suvaṇṇaṁ suvaṇṇaṭṭhikassa.
[¶64] Then the brahmins and householders came to the king bringing abundant wealth and said, ‘Your Majesty, this abundant wealth is specially for you alone; may Your Majesty accept it!’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, brāhmaṇagahapatikā pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ ādāya rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘idaṁ, deva, pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ devaññeva uddissa ābhataṁ, taṁ devo paṭiggaṇhatū’ti.
[¶65] ‘There’s enough raised for me through regular taxes. Let this be for you; and here, take even more!’
> Pali: ‘Alaṁ, bho, mamapidaṁ pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ dhammikena balinā abhisaṅkhataṁ, tañca vo hotu, ito ca bhiyyo harathā’ti.
[¶66] When the king turned them down, they withdrew to one side to think up a plan, ‘It wouldn’t be proper for us to take this abundant wealth back to our own homes. Why don’t we build a home for King Mahāsudassana?’
> Pali: Te raññā paṭikkhittā ekamantaṁ apakkamma evaṁ samacintesuṁ: ‘na kho etaṁ amhākaṁ patirūpaṁ, yaṁ mayaṁ imāni sāpateyyāni punadeva sakāni gharāni paṭihareyyāma. Yannūna mayaṁ rañño mahāsudassanassa nivesanaṁ māpeyyāmā’ti.
[¶67] They went up to the king and said, ‘We shall have a home built for you, Your Majesty!’ King Mahāsudassana consented with silence.
> Pali: Te rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘nivesanaṁ te, deva, māpessāmā’ti. Adhivāsesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶68] And then Sakka, lord of gods, knowing the king’s train of thought, addressed the godling Vissakamma, ‘Come, dear Vissakamma, build a palace named Principle as a home for King Mahāsudassana.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, sakko devānamindo rañño mahāsudassanassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya vissakammaṁ devaputtaṁ āmantesi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, samma vissakamma, rañño mahāsudassanassa nivesanaṁ māpehi dhammaṁ nāma pāsādan’ti.
[¶69] ‘Yes, lord,’ replied Vissakamma. Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, he vanished from the gods of the thirty-three and appeared in front of King Mahāsudassana.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhaddantavā’ti kho, ānanda, vissakammo devaputto sakkassa devānamindassa paṭissutvā seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—devesu tāvatiṁsesu antarahito rañño mahāsudassanassa purato pāturahosi.
[¶70] Vissakamma said to the king, ‘I shall build a palace named Principle as a home for you, Your Majesty.’ King Mahāsudassana consented with silence.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, vissakammo devaputto rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ etadavoca: ‘nivesanaṁ te, deva, māpessāmi dhammaṁ nāma pāsādan’ti. Adhivāsesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶71] And so that’s what Vissakamma did.
> Pali: Māpesi kho, ānanda, vissakammo devaputto rañño mahāsudassanassa nivesanaṁ dhammaṁ nāma pāsādaṁ.
[¶72] The Palace of Principle stretched for a league from east to west, and half a league from north to south. It was lined with tiles of four colors, three fathoms high, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal.
> Pali: Dhammo, ānanda, pāsādo puratthimena pacchimena ca yojanaṁ āyāmena ahosi. Uttarena dakkhiṇena ca aḍḍhayojanaṁ vitthārena. Dhammassa, ānanda, pāsādassa tiporisaṁ uccatarena vatthu citaṁ ahosi catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ iṭṭhakāhi— ekā iṭṭhakā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā, ekā veḷuriyamayā, ekā phalikamayā.
[¶73] It had 84,000 pillars of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal. It was covered with panels of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal.
> Pali: Dhammassa, ānanda, pāsādassa caturāsītithambhasahassāni ahesuṁ catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ— eko thambho sovaṇṇamayo, eko rūpiyamayo, eko veḷuriyamayo, eko phalikamayo. Dhammo, ānanda, pāsādo catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ phalakehi santhato ahosi— ekaṁ phalakaṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ, ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ, ekaṁ veḷuriyamayaṁ, ekaṁ phalikamayaṁ.
[¶74] It had twenty-four staircases of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal. The golden stairs had posts of gold, and banisters and finials of silver. The silver stairs had posts of silver, and banisters and finials of gold. The beryl stairs had posts of beryl, and banisters and finials of crystal. The crystal stairs had posts of crystal, and banisters and finials of beryl.
> Pali: Dhammassa, ānanda, pāsādassa catuvīsati sopānāni ahesuṁ catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ— ekaṁ sopānaṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ, ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ, ekaṁ veḷuriyamayaṁ, ekaṁ phalikamayaṁ. Sovaṇṇamayassa sopānassa sovaṇṇamayā thambhā ahesuṁ rūpiyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Rūpiyamayassa sopānassa rūpiyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ sovaṇṇamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Veḷuriyamayassa sopānassa veḷuriyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ phalikamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Phalikamayassa sopānassa phalikamayā thambhā ahesuṁ veḷuriyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca.
[¶75] It had 84,000 chambers of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal. In each chamber a couch was spread: in the golden chamber a couch of silver; in the silver chamber a couch of gold; in the beryl chamber a couch of ivory; in the crystal chamber a couch of hardwood. At the door of the golden chamber stood a palm tree of silver, with trunk of silver, and leaves and fruits of gold. At the door of the silver chamber stood a palm tree of gold, with trunk of gold, and leaves and fruits of silver. At the door of the beryl chamber stood a palm tree of crystal, with trunk of crystal, and leaves and fruits of beryl. At the door of the crystal chamber stood a palm tree of beryl, with trunk of beryl, and leaves and fruits of crystal.
> Pali: Dhamme, ānanda, pāsāde caturāsītikūṭāgārasahassāni ahesuṁ catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ— ekaṁ kūṭāgāraṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ, ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ, ekaṁ veḷuriyamayaṁ, ekaṁ phalikamayaṁ. Sovaṇṇamaye kūṭāgāre rūpiyamayo pallaṅko paññatto ahosi, rūpiyamaye kūṭāgāre sovaṇṇamayo pallaṅko paññatto ahosi, veḷuriyamaye kūṭāgāre dantamayo pallaṅko paññatto ahosi, phalikamaye kūṭāgāre sāramayo pallaṅko paññatto ahosi. Sovaṇṇamayassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre rūpiyamayo tālo ṭhito ahosi, tassa rūpiyamayo khandho sovaṇṇamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Rūpiyamayassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre sovaṇṇamayo tālo ṭhito ahosi, tassa sovaṇṇamayo khandho, rūpiyamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Veḷuriyamayassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre phalikamayo tālo ṭhito ahosi, tassa phalikamayo khandho, veḷuriyamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Phalikamayassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre veḷuriyamayo tālo ṭhito ahosi, tassa veḷuriyamayo khandho, phalikamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca.
[¶76] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Why don’t I build a grove of golden palm trees at the door to the Chamber of the Grand Tower, where I can sit for the day?’ So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ mahāviyūhassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre sabbasovaṇṇamayaṁ tālavanaṁ māpeyyaṁ, yattha divāvihāraṁ nisīdissāmī’ti. Māpesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano mahāviyūhassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre sabbasovaṇṇamayaṁ tālavanaṁ, yattha divāvihāraṁ nisīdi.
[¶77] The Palace of Principle was surrounded by two balustrades, made of gold and silver. The golden balustrades had posts of gold, and banisters and finials of silver. The silver balustrades had posts of silver, and banisters and finials of gold.
> Pali: Dhammo, ānanda, pāsādo dvīhi vedikāhi parikkhitto ahosi, ekā vedikā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā. Sovaṇṇamayāya vedikāya sovaṇṇamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, rūpiyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Rūpiyamayāya vedikāya rūpiyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ, sovaṇṇamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca.
[¶78] The Palace of Principle was surrounded by two nets of bells, made of gold and silver. The golden net had bells of silver, and the silver net had bells of gold. When those nets of bells were blown by the wind they sounded graceful, tantalizing, sensuous, lovely, and intoxicating, like a quintet made up of skilled musicians who had practiced well and kept excellent rhythm. And any addicts, carousers, or drunkards in Kusāvatī at that time were entertained by that sound. When it was finished, the palace was hard to look at, dazzling to the eyes. It was like how in the last month of the rainy season, in autumn, when the heavens are sunny and cloudless, as the sun is rising to the firmament, it is hard to look at, dazzling to the eyes.
> Pali: Dhammo, ānanda, pāsādo dvīhi kiṅkiṇikajālehi parikkhitto ahosi— ekaṁ jālaṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ. Sovaṇṇamayassa jālassa rūpiyamayā kiṅkiṇikā ahesuṁ, rūpiyamayassa jālassa sovaṇṇamayā kiṅkiṇikā ahesuṁ. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, kiṅkiṇikajālānaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddo ahosi vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, pañcaṅgikassa tūriyassa suvinītassa suppaṭitāḷitassa sukusalehi samannāhatassa saddo hoti, vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca; evameva kho, ānanda, tesaṁ kiṅkiṇikajālānaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddo ahosi vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca. Ye kho panānanda, tena samayena kusāvatiyā rājadhāniyā dhuttā ahesuṁ soṇḍā pipāsā, te tesaṁ kiṅkiṇikajālānaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddena paricāresuṁ. Niṭṭhito kho panānanda, dhammo pāsādo duddikkho ahosi musati cakkhūni. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, vassānaṁ pacchime māse saradasamaye viddhe vigatavalāhake deve ādicco nabhaṁ abbhussakkamāno duddikkho hoti musati cakkhūni; evameva kho, ānanda, dhammo pāsādo duddikkho ahosi musati cakkhūni.
[¶79] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Why don’t I build a lotus pond named Principle in front of the palace?’ So that’s what he did. The Lotus Pond of Principle stretched for a league from east to west, and half a league from north to south. It was lined with tiles of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ dhammassa pāsādassa purato dhammaṁ nāma pokkharaṇiṁ māpeyyan’ti. Māpesi kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano dhammassa pāsādassa purato dhammaṁ nāma pokkharaṇiṁ. Dhammā, ānanda, pokkharaṇī puratthimena pacchimena ca yojanaṁ āyāmena ahosi, uttarena dakkhiṇena ca aḍḍhayojanaṁ vitthārena. Dhammā, ānanda, pokkharaṇī catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ iṭṭhakāhi citā ahosi— ekā iṭṭhakā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā, ekā veḷuriyamayā, ekā phalikamayā.
[¶80] It had twenty-four staircases of four colors, made of gold, silver, beryl, and crystal. The golden stairs had posts of gold, and banisters and finials of silver. The silver stairs had posts of silver, and banisters and finials of gold. The beryl stairs had posts of beryl, and banisters and finials of crystal. The crystal stairs had posts of crystal, and banisters and finials of beryl.
> Pali: Dhammāya, ānanda, pokkharaṇiyā catuvīsati sopānāni ahesuṁ catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ— ekaṁ sopānaṁ sovaṇṇamayaṁ, ekaṁ rūpiyamayaṁ, ekaṁ veḷuriyamayaṁ, ekaṁ phalikamayaṁ. Sovaṇṇamayassa sopānassa sovaṇṇamayā thambhā ahesuṁ rūpiyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Rūpiyamayassa sopānassa rūpiyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ sovaṇṇamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Veḷuriyamayassa sopānassa veḷuriyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ phalikamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Phalikamayassa sopānassa phalikamayā thambhā ahesuṁ veḷuriyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca.
## 35. DN 17 · King Mahāsudassana · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/35/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/35/#p-N
[¶0] It was surrounded by two balustrades, made of gold and silver. The golden balustrades had posts of gold, and banisters and finials of silver. The silver balustrades had posts of silver, and banisters and finials of gold.
> Pali: Dhammā, ānanda, pokkharaṇī dvīhi vedikāhi parikkhittā ahosi—ekā vedikā sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā. Sovaṇṇamayāya vedikāya sovaṇṇamayā thambhā ahesuṁ rūpiyamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca. Rūpiyamayāya vedikāya rūpiyamayā thambhā ahesuṁ sovaṇṇamayā sūciyo ca uṇhīsañca.
[¶1] It was surrounded by seven rows of palm trees, made of gold, silver, beryl, crystal, ruby, emerald, and all precious things. The golden palms had trunks of gold, and leaves and fruits of silver. The silver palms had trunks of silver, and leaves and fruits of gold. The beryl palms had trunks of beryl, and leaves and fruits of crystal. The crystal palms had trunks of crystal, and leaves and fruits of beryl. The ruby palms had trunks of ruby, and leaves and fruits of emerald. The emerald palms had trunks of emerald, and leaves and fruits of ruby. The palms of all precious things had trunks of all precious things, and leaves and fruits of all precious things. When those rows of palm trees were blown by the wind they sounded graceful, tantalizing, sensuous, lovely, and intoxicating, like a quintet made up of skilled musicians who had practiced well and kept excellent rhythm. And any addicts, carousers, or drunkards in Kusāvatī at that time were entertained by that sound.
> Pali: Dhammā, ānanda, pokkharaṇī sattahi tālapantīhi parikkhittā ahosi— ekā tālapanti sovaṇṇamayā, ekā rūpiyamayā, ekā veḷuriyamayā, ekā phalikamayā, ekā lohitaṅkamayā, ekā masāragallamayā, ekā sabbaratanamayā. Sovaṇṇamayassa tālassa sovaṇṇamayo khandho ahosi rūpiyamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Rūpiyamayassa tālassa rūpiyamayo khandho ahosi sovaṇṇamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Veḷuriyamayassa tālassa veḷuriyamayo khandho ahosi phalikamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Phalikamayassa tālassa phalikamayo khandho ahosi veḷuriyamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Lohitaṅkamayassa tālassa lohitaṅkamayo khandho ahosi masāragallamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Masāragallamayassa tālassa masāragallamayo khandho ahosi lohitaṅkamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Sabbaratanamayassa tālassa sabbaratanamayo khandho ahosi, sabbaratanamayāni pattāni ca phalāni ca. Tāsaṁ kho panānanda, tālapantīnaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddo ahosi, vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, pañcaṅgikassa tūriyassa suvinītassa suppaṭitāḷitassa sukusalehi samannāhatassa saddo hoti vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca; evameva kho, ānanda, tāsaṁ tālapantīnaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddo ahosi vaggu ca rajanīyo ca khamanīyo ca madanīyo ca. Ye kho panānanda, tena samayena kusāvatiyā rājadhāniyā dhuttā ahesuṁ soṇḍā pipāsā, te tāsaṁ tālapantīnaṁ vāteritānaṁ saddena paricāresuṁ.
[¶2] When the palace and its lotus pond were finished, King Mahāsudassana served those who were deemed true ascetics and brahmins with all they desired. Then he ascended the Palace of Principle.
> Pali: Niṭṭhite kho panānanda, dhamme pāsāde niṭṭhitāya dhammāya ca pokkharaṇiyā rājā mahāsudassano ‘ye tena samayena samaṇesu vā samaṇasammatā brāhmaṇesu vā brāhmaṇasammatā’, te sabbakāmehi santappetvā dhammaṁ pāsādaṁ abhiruhi.
[¶3] The first recitation section.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro.
[¶4] 5. Attaining Absorption
> Pali: 5. Jhānasampatti
[¶5] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘Of what deed of mine is this the fruit and result, that I am now so mighty and powerful?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘kissa nu kho me idaṁ kammassa phalaṁ kissa kammassa vipāko, yenāhaṁ etarahi evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo’ti?
[¶6] Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘It is the fruit and result of three kinds of deeds: giving, self-control, and restraint.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘tiṇṇaṁ kho me idaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ tiṇṇaṁ kammānaṁ vipāko, yenāhaṁ etarahi evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo, seyyathidaṁ— dānassa damassa saṁyamassā’ti.
[¶7] Then he went to the Chamber of the Grand Tower, stood at the door, and expressed this heartfelt sentiment: ‘Stop here, sensual, malicious, and cruel thoughts— no further!’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano yena mahāviyūhaṁ kūṭāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mahāviyūhassa kūṭāgārassa dvāre ṭhito udānaṁ udānesi: ‘tiṭṭha, kāmavitakka, tiṭṭha, byāpādavitakka, tiṭṭha, vihiṁsāvitakka. Ettāvatā, kāmavitakka, ettāvatā, byāpādavitakka, ettāvatā, vihiṁsāvitakkā’ti.
[¶8] Then he entered the Chamber of the Grand Tower and sat on the golden couch. Quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, he entered and remained in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected were stilled, he entered and remained in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, he entered and remained in the third absorption, where he meditated with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain, and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, he entered and remained in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano mahāviyūhaṁ kūṭāgāraṁ pavisitvā sovaṇṇamaye pallaṅke nisinno vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsi. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsi. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca vihāsi, sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedesi, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsi. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja vihāsi.
[¶9] Then King Mahāsudassana left the Chamber of the Grand Tower and entered the golden chamber, where he sat on the golden couch. He meditated spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way he spread a heart full of love above, below, across, everywhere, all around, to everyone in the world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. He meditated spreading a heart full of compassion … He meditated spreading a heart full of rejoicing … He meditated spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, he spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano mahāviyūhā kūṭāgārā nikkhamitvā sovaṇṇamayaṁ kūṭāgāraṁ pavisitvā rūpiyamaye pallaṅke nisinno mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi. Tathā dutiyaṁ tathā tatiyaṁ tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā vihāsi. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi. Tathā dutiyaṁ tathā tatiyaṁ tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā vihāsi.
[¶10] 6. Of All Cities
> Pali: 6. Caturāsītinagarasahassādi
[¶11] King Mahāsudassana had 84,000 cities, with the royal capital of Kusāvatī the foremost. He had 84,000 palaces, with the Palace of Principle the foremost. He had 84,000 chambers, with the Chamber of the Grand Tower the foremost. He had 84,000 couches made of gold, silver, ivory, and hardwood. They were spread with woollen covers—shag-piled, pure white, or embroidered with flowers—and spread with a fine deer hide, with a canopy above and red pillows at both ends. He had 84,000 bull elephants with gold adornments and banners, covered with snow gold netting, with the royal bull elephant named Sabbath foremost. He had 84,000 horses with gold adornments and banners, covered with snow gold netting, with the royal steed named Thundercloud foremost. He had 84,000 chariots upholstered with the hide of lions, tigers, and leopards, and cream rugs, with gold adornments and banners, covered with snow gold netting, with the chariot named Triumph foremost. He had 84,000 jewels, with the jewel-treasure foremost. He had 84,000 women, with Queen Subhaddā foremost. He had 84,000 householders, with the householder-treasure foremost. He had 84,000 aristocrat vassals, with the commander-treasure foremost. He had 84,000 milk-cows with silken halter and bronze pails. He had 8,400,000,000 cloths of delicate linen, cotton, silk, and wool. He had 84,000 servings of food, which were presented to him as offerings at daybreak and dusk.
> Pali: Rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa caturāsīti nagarasahassāni ahesuṁ kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhāni; caturāsīti pāsādasahassāni ahesuṁ dhammapāsādappamukhāni; caturāsīti kūṭāgārasahassāni ahesuṁ mahāviyūhakūṭāgārappamukhāni; caturāsīti pallaṅkasahassāni ahesuṁ sovaṇṇamayāni rūpiyamayāni dantamayāni sāramayāni gonakatthatāni paṭikatthatāni paṭalikatthatāni kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇāni sauttaracchadāni ubhatolohitakūpadhānāni; caturāsīti nāgasahassāni ahesuṁ sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni uposathanāgarājappamukhāni; caturāsīti assasahassāni ahesuṁ sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni valāhakaassarājappamukhāni; caturāsīti rathasahassāni ahesuṁ sīhacammaparivārāni byagghacammaparivārāni dīpicammaparivārāni paṇḍukambalaparivārāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni vejayantarathappamukhāni; caturāsīti maṇisahassāni ahesuṁ maṇiratanappamukhāni; caturāsīti itthisahassāni ahesuṁ subhaddādevippamukhāni; caturāsīti gahapatisahassāni ahesuṁ gahapatiratanappamukhāni; caturāsīti khattiyasahassāni ahesuṁ anuyantāni pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāni; caturāsīti dhenusahassāni ahesuṁ duhasandanāni kaṁsūpadhāraṇāni; caturāsīti vatthakoṭisahassāni ahesuṁ khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ; rañño, ānanda, mahāsudassanassa caturāsīti thālipākasahassāni ahesuṁ sāyaṁ pātaṁ bhattābhihāro abhihariyittha.
[¶12] Now at that time his 84,000 royal elephants came to attend on him at daybreak and dusk. Then King Mahāsudassana thought, ‘What if instead half of the elephants took turns to attend on me at the end of each century?’ He instructed the commander-treasure to do this, and so it was done.
> Pali: Tena kho panānanda, samayena rañño mahāsudassanassa caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgacchanti. Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa etadahosi: ‘imāni kho me caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgacchanti, yannūna vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena dvecattālīsaṁ dvecattālīsaṁ nāgasahassāni sakiṁ sakiṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgaccheyyun’ti. Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano pariṇāyakaratanaṁ āmantesi: ‘imāni kho me, samma pariṇāyakaratana, caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgacchanti, tena hi, samma pariṇāyakaratana, vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena dvecattālīsaṁ dvecattālīsaṁ nāgasahassāni sakiṁ sakiṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgacchantū’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, pariṇāyakaratanaṁ rañño mahāsudassanassa paccassosi. Atha kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa aparena samayena vassasatassa vassasatassa accayena dvecattālīsaṁ dvecattālīsaṁ nāgasahassāni sakiṁ sakiṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgamaṁsu.
[¶13] 7. The Visit of Queen Subhaddā
> Pali: 7. Subhaddādeviupasaṅkamana
[¶14] Then, after many years, many hundred years, many thousand years had passed, Queen Subhaddā thought, ‘It is long since I have seen the king. Why don’t I go to see him?’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, subhaddāya deviyā bahunnaṁ vassānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena etadahosi: ‘ciraṁ diṭṭho kho me rājā mahāsudassano. Yannūnāhaṁ rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyan’ti.
[¶15] So the queen addressed the ladies of the harem, ‘Come, bathe your heads and dress in yellow. It is long since we saw the king, and we shall go to see him.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, subhaddā devī itthāgāraṁ āmantesi: ‘etha tumhe sīsāni nhāyatha pītāni vatthāni pārupatha. Ciraṁ diṭṭho no rājā mahāsudassano, rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā’ti.
[¶16] ‘Yes, ma’am,’ replied the ladies of the harem. They did as she asked and returned to the queen.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, ayye’ti kho, ānanda, itthāgāraṁ subhaddāya deviyā paṭissutvā sīsāni nhāyitvā pītāni vatthāni pārupitvā yena subhaddā devī tenupasaṅkami.
[¶17] Then the queen addressed the commander-treasure, ‘Dear commander-treasure, please ready the army of four divisions. It is long since we saw the king, and we shall go to see him.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, subhaddā devī pariṇāyakaratanaṁ āmantesi: ‘kappehi, samma pariṇāyakaratana, caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ, ciraṁ diṭṭho no rājā mahāsudassano, rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissāmā’ti.
[¶18] ‘Yes, my queen,’ he replied, and did as he was asked. He informed the queen, ‘My queen, the army of four divisions is ready, please go at your convenience.’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devī’ti kho, ānanda, pariṇāyakaratanaṁ subhaddāya deviyā paṭissutvā caturaṅginiṁ senaṁ kappāpetvā subhaddāya deviyā paṭivedesi: ‘kappitā kho, devi, caturaṅginī senā, yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī’ti.
[¶19] Then Queen Subhaddā together with the ladies of the harem went with the army to the Palace of Principle. She ascended the palace and went to the Chamber of the Grand Tower, where she stood leaning against a door-post.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, subhaddā devī caturaṅginiyā senāya saddhiṁ itthāgārena yena dhammo pāsādo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṁ pāsādaṁ abhiruhitvā yena mahāviyūhaṁ kūṭāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami. Upasaṅkamitvā mahāviyūhassa kūṭāgārassa dvārabāhaṁ ālambitvā aṭṭhāsi.
[¶20] Hearing them, the king thought, ‘What’s that, it sounds like a big crowd!’ Coming out of the chamber he saw Queen Subhaddā leaning against a door-post and said to her, ‘Please stay there, my queen, don’t enter in here.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano saddaṁ sutvā: ‘kiṁ nu kho mahato viya janakāyassa saddo’ti mahāviyūhā kūṭāgārā nikkhamanto addasa subhaddaṁ deviṁ dvārabāhaṁ ālambitvā ṭhitaṁ, disvāna subhaddaṁ deviṁ etadavoca: ‘ettheva, devi, tiṭṭha mā pāvisī’ti.
[¶21] Then he addressed a certain man, ‘Come, my man, bring the golden couch from the Chamber of the Grand Tower and set it up in the golden palm grove.’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: ‘ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, mahāviyūhā kūṭāgārā sovaṇṇamayaṁ pallaṅkaṁ nīharitvā sabbasovaṇṇamaye tālavane paññapehī’ti.
[¶22] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ that man replied, and did as he was asked. The king laid down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, ānanda, so puriso rañño mahāsudassanassa paṭissutvā mahāviyūhā kūṭāgārā sovaṇṇamayaṁ pallaṅkaṁ nīharitvā sabbasovaṇṇamaye tālavane paññapesi. Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya sato sampajāno.
[¶23] Then Queen Subhaddā thought, ‘The king’s faculties are so very clear, and the complexion of his skin is pure and bright. Let him not pass away!’ She said to him, ‘Your Majesty, you have 84,000 cities, with the royal capital of Kusāvatī foremost. Arouse desire for these! Take an interest in life!’
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, subhaddāya deviyā etadahosi: ‘vippasannāni kho rañño mahāsudassanassa indriyāni, parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto, mā heva kho rājā mahāsudassano kālamakāsī’ti rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ etadavoca: ‘Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti nagarasahassāni kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi.
[¶24] And she likewise urged the king to live on by taking an interest in all his possessions as described above.
> Pali: Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti pāsādasahassāni dhammapāsādappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti kūṭāgārasahassāni mahāviyūhakūṭāgārappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti pallaṅkasahassāni sovaṇṇamayāni rūpiyamayāni dantamayāni sāramayāni gonakatthatāni paṭikatthatāni paṭalikatthatāni kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇāni sauttaracchadāni ubhatolohitakūpadhānāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi, jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni uposathanāgarājappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti assasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni valāhakaassarājappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti rathasahassāni sīhacammaparivārāni byagghacammaparivārāni dīpicammaparivārāni paṇḍukambalaparivārāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni vejayantarathappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti maṇisahassāni maṇiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti itthisahassāni itthiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti gahapatisahassāni gahapatiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti khattiyasahassāni anuyantāni pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti dhenusahassāni duhasandanāni kaṁsūpadhāraṇāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti vatthakoṭisahassāni khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi, jīvite apekkhaṁ karohi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti thālipākasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ bhattābhihāro abhihariyati. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ janehi jīvite apekkhaṁ karohī’ti.
[¶25] When the queen had spoken, the king said to her, ‘For a long time, my queen, you have spoken to me with words that are welcome, desirable, agreeable, and pleasant. And yet in my final hour, your words are unwelcome, undesirable, disagreeable, and unpleasant!’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano subhaddaṁ deviṁ etadavoca: ‘Dīgharattaṁ kho maṁ tvaṁ, devi, iṭṭhehi kantehi piyehi manāpehi samudācarittha; atha ca pana maṁ tvaṁ pacchime kāle aniṭṭhehi akantehi appiyehi amanāpehi samudācarasī’ti.
[¶26] ‘So how then, Your Majesty, am I to speak to you?’
> Pali: ‘Kathaṁ carahi taṁ, deva, samudācarāmī’ti?
[¶27] ‘Like this, my queen: “Your Majesty, we must be parted and separated from all we hold dear and beloved. Don’t pass away with concerns. Such concern is suffering, and it’s criticized. Your Majesty, you have 84,000 cities, with the royal capital of Kusāvatī foremost. Give up desire for these! Take no interest in life!”’ And so on for all the king’s possessions.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ kho maṁ tvaṁ, devi, samudācara: “sabbeheva, deva, piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo, mā kho tvaṁ, deva, sāpekkho kālamakāsi, dukkhā sāpekkhassa kālaṅkiriyā, garahitā ca sāpekkhassa kālaṅkiriyā. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti nagarasahassāni kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti pāsādasahassāni dhammapāsādappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti kūṭāgārasahassāni mahāviyūhakūṭāgārappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti pallaṅkasahassāni sovaṇṇamayāni rūpiyamayāni dantamayāni sāramayāni gonakatthatāni paṭikatthatāni paṭalikatthatāni kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇāni sauttaracchadāni ubhatolohitakūpadhānāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni uposathanāgarājappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti assasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni valāhakaassarājappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti rathasahassāni sīhacammaparivārāni byagghacammaparivārāni dīpicammaparivārāni paṇḍukambalaparivārāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni vejayantarathappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti maṇisahassāni maṇiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti itthisahassāni subhaddādevippamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti gahapatisahassāni gahapatiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti khattiyasahassāni anuyantāni pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti dhenusahassāni duhasandanāni kaṁsūpadhāraṇāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti vatthakoṭisahassāni khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti thālipākasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ bhattābhihāro abhihariyati. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsī”’ti.
[¶28] When the king had spoken, Queen Subhaddā cried and burst out in tears. Wiping away her tears, the queen said to the king: ‘Your Majesty, we must be parted and separated from all we hold dear and beloved. Don’t pass away with concerns. Such concern is suffering, and it’s criticized. Your Majesty, you have 84,000 cities, with the royal capital of Kusāvatī foremost. Give up desire for these! Take no interest in life!’ And she continued, listing all the king’s possessions.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ānanda, subhaddā devī parodi assūni pavattesi. Atha kho, ānanda, subhaddā devī assūni puñchitvā rājānaṁ mahāsudassanaṁ etadavoca: ‘Sabbeheva, deva, piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo aññathābhāvo, mā kho tvaṁ, deva, sāpekkho kālamakāsi, dukkhā sāpekkhassa kālaṅkiriyā, garahitā ca sāpekkhassa kālaṅkiriyā. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti nagarasahassāni kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti pāsādasahassāni dhammapāsādappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti kūṭāgārasahassāni mahāviyūhakūṭāgārappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti pallaṅkasahassāni sovaṇṇamayāni rūpiyamayāni dantamayāni sāramayāni gonakatthatāni paṭikatthatāni paṭalikatthatāni kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇāni sauttaracchadāni ubhatolohitakūpadhānāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni uposathanāgarājappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti assasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni valāhakaassarājappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha, jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti rathasahassāni sīhacammaparivārāni byagghacammaparivārāni dīpicammaparivārāni paṇḍukambalaparivārāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni vejayantarathappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti maṇisahassāni maṇiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti itthisahassāni itthiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha, jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti gahapatisahassāni gahapatiratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti khattiyasahassāni anuyantāni pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti dhenusahassāni duhasandanāni kaṁsūpadhāraṇāni. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti vatthakoṭisahassāni khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsi. Imāni te, deva, caturāsīti thālipākasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ bhattābhihāro abhihariyati. Ettha, deva, chandaṁ pajaha jīvite apekkhaṁ mākāsī’ti.
[¶29] 8. Rebirth in the Realm of Divinity
> Pali: 8. Brahmalokūpagama
[¶30] Not long after that, King Mahāsudassana passed away. And the feeling he had close to death was like a householder or their child falling asleep after eating a satisfying meal.
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano na cirasseva kālamakāsi. Seyyathāpi, ānanda, gahapatissa vā gahapatiputtassa vā manuññaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuttāvissa bhattasammado hoti; evameva kho, ānanda, rañño mahāsudassanassa māraṇantikā vedanā ahosi.
[¶31] When he passed away King Mahāsudassana was reborn in a good place, a realm of divinity. Ānanda, King Mahāsudassana played children’s games for 84,000 years. He ruled as viceroy for 84,000 years. He ruled as king for 84,000 years. He led the spiritual life as a layman in the Palace of Principle for 84,000 years. And having developed the four divine meditations, when his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in a good place, a realm of divinity.
> Pali: Kālaṅkato ca, ānanda, rājā mahāsudassano sugatiṁ brahmalokaṁ upapajji. Rājā, ānanda, mahāsudassano caturāsīti vassasahassāni kumārakīḷaṁ kīḷi. Caturāsīti vassasahassāni oparajjaṁ kāresi. Caturāsīti vassasahassāni rajjaṁ kāresi. Caturāsīti vassasahassāni gihibhūto dhamme pāsāde brahmacariyaṁ cari. So cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmalokūpago ahosi.
[¶32] Now, Ānanda, you might think: ‘Surely King Mahāsudassana must have been someone else at that time?’ But you should not see it like that. I myself was King Mahāsudassana at that time.
> Pali: Siyā kho panānanda, evamassa: ‘añño nūna tena samayena rājā mahāsudassano ahosī’ti, na kho panetaṁ, ānanda, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Ahaṁ tena samayena rājā mahāsudassano ahosiṁ.
[¶33] Mine were the 84,000 cities, with the royal capital of Kusāvatī foremost. And mine were all the other possessions.
> Pali: Mama tāni caturāsīti nagarasahassāni kusāvatīrājadhānippamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti pāsādasahassāni dhammapāsādappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti kūṭāgārasahassāni mahāviyūhakūṭāgārappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti pallaṅkasahassāni sovaṇṇamayāni rūpiyamayāni dantamayāni sāramayāni gonakatthatāni paṭikatthatāni paṭalikatthatāni kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇāni sauttaracchadāni ubhatolohitakūpadhānāni, mama tāni caturāsīti nāgasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni uposathanāgarājappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti assasahassāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni valāhakaassarājappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti rathasahassāni sīhacammaparivārāni byagghacammaparivārāni dīpicammaparivārāni paṇḍukambalaparivārāni sovaṇṇālaṅkārāni sovaṇṇadhajāni hemajālapaṭicchannāni vejayantarathappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti maṇisahassāni maṇiratanappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti itthisahassāni subhaddādevippamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti gahapatisahassāni gahapatiratanappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti khattiyasahassāni anuyantāni pariṇāyakaratanappamukhāni, mama tāni caturāsīti dhenusahassāni duhasandanāni kaṁsūpadhāraṇāni, mama tāni caturāsīti vatthakoṭisahassāni khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ, mama tāni caturāsīti thālipākasahassāni sāyaṁ pātaṁ bhattābhihāro abhihariyittha.
[¶34] Of those 84,000 cities, I only stayed in one, the capital Kusāvatī. Of those 84,000 palaces, I only dwelt in one, the Palace of Principle. Of those 84,000 chambers, I only dwelt in the Chamber of the Grand Tower. Of those 84,000 couches, I only used one, made of gold or silver or ivory or heartwood. Of those 84,000 bull elephants, I only rode one, the royal bull elephant named Sabbath. Of those 84,000 horses, I only rode one, the royal horse named Thundercloud. Of those 84,000 chariots, I only rode one, the chariot named Triumph. Of those 84,000 women, I was only served by one, an aristocrat maiden or a coquette. Of those 8,400,000,000 cloths, I only wore one pair, made of delicate linen, cotton, silk, or wool. Of those 84,000 servings of food, I only had one, eating at most a cup of rice with suitable sauce.
> Pali: Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsītinagarasahassānaṁ ekaññeva taṁ nagaraṁ hoti, yaṁ tena samayena ajjhāvasāmi yadidaṁ kusāvatī rājadhānī. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti pāsādasahassānaṁ ekoyeva so pāsādo hoti, yaṁ tena samayena ajjhāvasāmi yadidaṁ dhammo pāsādo. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti kūṭāgārasahassānaṁ ekaññeva taṁ kūṭāgāraṁ hoti, yaṁ tena samayena ajjhāvasāmi yadidaṁ mahāviyūhaṁ kūṭāgāraṁ. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti pallaṅkasahassānaṁ ekoyeva so pallaṅko hoti, yaṁ tena samayena paribhuñjāmi yadidaṁ sovaṇṇamayo vā rūpiyamayo vā dantamayo vā sāramayo vā. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti nāgasahassānaṁ ekoyeva so nāgo hoti, yaṁ tena samayena abhiruhāmi yadidaṁ uposatho nāgarājā. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti assasahassānaṁ ekoyeva so asso hoti, yaṁ tena samayena abhiruhāmi yadidaṁ valāhako assarājā. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti rathasahassānaṁ ekoyeva so ratho hoti, yaṁ tena samayena abhiruhāmi yadidaṁ vejayantaratho. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti itthisahassānaṁ ekāyeva sā itthī hoti, yā tena samayena paccupaṭṭhāti khattiyānī vā vessinī vā. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti vatthakoṭisahassānaṁ ekaṁyeva taṁ dussayugaṁ hoti, yaṁ tena samayena paridahāmi khomasukhumaṁ vā kappāsikasukhumaṁ vā koseyyasukhumaṁ vā kambalasukhumaṁ vā. Tesaṁ kho panānanda, caturāsīti thālipākasahassānaṁ ekoyeva so thālipāko hoti, yato nāḷikodanaparamaṁ bhuñjāmi tadupiyañca sūpeyyaṁ.
[¶35] See, Ānanda! All those conditioned phenomena have passed, ceased, and perished. So impermanent are conditions, so unstable are conditions, so unreliable are conditions. This is quite enough for you to become disillusioned, dispassionate, and freed regarding all conditions.
> Pali: Passānanda, sabbete saṅkhārā atītā niruddhā vipariṇatā. Evaṁ aniccā kho, ānanda, saṅkhārā; evaṁ addhuvā kho, ānanda, saṅkhārā; evaṁ anassāsikā kho, ānanda, saṅkhārā. Yāvañcidaṁ, ānanda, alameva sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindituṁ, alaṁ virajjituṁ, alaṁ vimuccituṁ.
[¶36] Six times, Ānanda, I recall having laid down my body at this place. And the seventh time was as a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king, at which time my dominion extended to all four sides, I achieved stability in the country, and I possessed the seven treasures. But Ānanda, I do not see any place in this world with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans where the Realized One would lay down his body for the eighth time.”
> Pali: Chakkhattuṁ kho panāhaṁ, ānanda, abhijānāmi imasmiṁ padese sarīraṁ nikkhipitaṁ, tañca kho rājāva samāno cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato, ayaṁ sattamo sarīranikkhepo. Na kho panāhaṁ, ānanda, taṁ padesaṁ samanupassāmi sadevake loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya yattha tathāgato aṭṭhamaṁ sarīraṁ nikkhipeyyā”ti.
[¶37] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶38] “Oh! Conditions are impermanent,
their nature is to rise and fall;
having arisen, they cease;
their settling is such bliss.”
> Pali: “Aniccā vata saṅkhārā,
uppādavayadhammino;
Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti,
tesaṁ vūpasamo sukho”ti.
[¶39] > Pali: Mahāsudassanasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 36. DN 18 · With Janavasabha · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/36/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/36/#p-N
[¶0] DN 18 · With Janavasabha
> Pali: DN 18 · Janavasabhasutta
[¶1] 1. Declaring the Rebirths of People From Ñātika and Elsewhere
> Pali: 1. Nātikiyādibyākaraṇa
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying at Ñātika in the brick house.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā nātike viharati giñjakāvasathe.
[¶3] Now at that time the Buddha was explaining the rebirths of devotees all over the nations; the Kāsis and Kosalans, Vajjis and Mallas, Cetīs and Vacchas, Kurus and Pañcālas, Macchas and Sūrasenas:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā parito parito janapadesu paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti kāsikosalesu vajjimallesu cetivaṁsesu kurupañcālesu majjhasūrasenesu:
[¶4] “This one was reborn here, while that one was reborn there.
> Pali: “asu amutra upapanno, asu amutra upapanno.
[¶5] Over fifty devotees in Ñātika have passed away having ended the five lower fetters. They’ve been reborn spontaneously, and will be extinguished there, not liable to return from that world.
> Pali: Paropaññāsa nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.
[¶6] More than ninety devotees in Ñātika have passed away having ended three fetters, and weakened greed, hate, and delusion. They’re once-returners, who will come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.
> Pali: Sādhikā navuti nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti.
[¶7] More than five hundred devotees in Ñātika have passed away having ended three fetters. They’re stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.”
> Pali: Sātirekāni pañcasatāni nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā”ti.
[¶8] When the devotees of Ñātika heard about the Buddha’s answers to those questions, they became uplifted and overjoyed, full of rapture and happiness.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho nātikiyā paricārakā: “bhagavā kira parito parito janapadesu paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti kāsikosalesu vajjimallesu cetivaṁsesu kurupañcālesu majjhasūrasenesu: ‘asu amutra upapanno, asu amutra upapanno. Paropaññāsa nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā. Sādhikā navuti nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti. Sātirekāni pañcasatāni nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā’”ti. Tena ca nātikiyā paricārakā attamanā ahesuṁ pamuditā pītisomanassajātā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā.
[¶9] Venerable Ānanda heard of the Buddha’s statements and the Ñātikans’ happiness.
> Pali: Assosi kho āyasmā ānando: “bhagavā kira parito parito janapadesu paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti kāsikosalesu vajjimallesu cetivaṁsesu kurupañcālesu majjhasūrasenesu: ‘asu amutra upapanno, asu amutra upapanno. Paropaññāsa nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā. Sādhikā navuti nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti. Sātirekāni pañcasatāni nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā’ti. Tena ca nātikiyā paricārakā attamanā ahesuṁ pamuditā pītisomanassajātā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”ti.
[¶10] 2. Ānanda’s Suggestion
> Pali: 2. Ānandaparikathā
[¶11] Then Venerable Ānanda thought, “But there were also Magadhan devotees—many, and of long standing too—who have passed away. You’d think that Aṅga and Magadha were empty of devotees who have passed away! But they too had confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and had fulfilled their ethics. The Buddha hasn’t declared their passing. It would be good to do so, for many people would gain confidence, and so be reborn in a good place.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi: “ime kho panāpi ahesuṁ māgadhakā paricārakā bahū ceva rattaññū ca abbhatītā kālaṅkatā. Suññā maññe aṅgamagadhā aṅgamāgadhakehi paricārakehi abbhatītehi kālaṅkatehi. Te kho panāpi ahesuṁ buddhe pasannā dhamme pasannā saṅghe pasannā sīlesu paripūrakārino. Te abbhatītā kālaṅkatā bhagavatā abyākatā; tesampissa sādhu veyyākaraṇaṁ, bahujano pasīdeyya, tato gaccheyya sugatiṁ.
[¶12] That King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha was a just and principled king who benefited the brahmins and householders, and people of town and country. People still sing his praises: ‘That just and principled king, who made us so happy, has passed away. Life was good under his dominion.’ He too had confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and had fulfilled his ethics. People say: ‘Until his dying day, King Bimbisāra sang the Buddha’s praises!’ The Buddha hasn’t declared his passing. It would be good to do so, for many people would gain confidence, and so be reborn in a good place.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho panāpi ahosi rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro dhammiko dhammarājā hito brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ negamānañceva jānapadānañca. Apissudaṁ manussā kittayamānarūpā viharanti: ‘evaṁ no so dhammiko dhammarājā sukhāpetvā kālaṅkato, evaṁ mayaṁ tassa dhammikassa dhammarañño vijite phāsu viharimhā’ti. So kho panāpi ahosi buddhe pasanno dhamme pasanno saṅghe pasanno sīlesu paripūrakārī. Apissudaṁ manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘yāva maraṇakālāpi rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro bhagavantaṁ kittayamānarūpo kālaṅkato’ti. So abbhatīto kālaṅkato bhagavatā abyākato. Tassapissa sādhu veyyākaraṇaṁ bahujano pasīdeyya, tato gaccheyya sugatiṁ.
[¶13] Besides, the Buddha was awakened in Magadha; so why hasn’t he declared the rebirth of the Magadhan devotees? If he fails to do so, they will be disheartened.”
> Pali: Bhagavato kho pana sambodhi magadhesu. Yattha kho pana bhagavato sambodhi magadhesu, kathaṁ tatra bhagavā māgadhake paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu na byākareyya. Bhagavā ce kho pana māgadhake paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu na byākareyya, dīnamanā tenassu māgadhakā paricārakā; yena kho panassu dīnamanā māgadhakā paricārakā kathaṁ te bhagavā na byākareyyā”ti?
[¶14] After pondering the fate of the Magadhan devotees alone in private, Ānanda rose at the crack of dawn and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down to one side, and told the Buddha of his concerns, finishing by saying, “Why hasn’t the Buddha declared the rebirth of the Magadhan devotees? If he fails to do so, they will be disheartened.” Then Ānanda, after making this suggestion regarding the Magadhan devotees, rose from his seat, bowed, and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before leaving.
> Pali: Idamāyasmā ānando māgadhake paricārake ārabbha eko raho anuvicintetvā rattiyā paccūsasamayaṁ paccuṭṭhāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante: ‘bhagavā kira parito parito janapadesu paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu byākaroti kāsikosalesu vajjimallesu cetivaṁsesu kurupañcālesu majjhasūrasenesu: “asu amutra upapanno, asu amutra upapanno. Paropaññāsa nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā. Sādhikā navuti nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti. Sātirekāni pañcasatāni nātikiyā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇāti. Tena ca nātikiyā paricārakā attamanā ahesuṁ pamuditā pītisomanassajātā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”’ti. Ime kho panāpi, bhante, ahesuṁ māgadhakā paricārakā bahū ceva rattaññū ca abbhatītā kālaṅkatā. Suññā maññe aṅgamagadhā aṅgamāgadhakehi paricārakehi abbhatītehi kālaṅkatehi. Te kho panāpi, bhante, ahesuṁ buddhe pasannā dhamme pasannā saṅghe pasannā sīlesu paripūrakārino, te abbhatītā kālaṅkatā bhagavatā abyākatā. Tesampissa sādhu veyyākaraṇaṁ, bahujano pasīdeyya, tato gaccheyya sugatiṁ. Ayaṁ kho panāpi, bhante, ahosi rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro dhammiko dhammarājā hito brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ negamānañceva jānapadānañca. Apissudaṁ manussā kittayamānarūpā viharanti: ‘evaṁ no so dhammiko dhammarājā sukhāpetvā kālaṅkato. Evaṁ mayaṁ tassa dhammikassa dhammarañño vijite phāsu viharimhā’ti. So kho panāpi, bhante, ahosi buddhe pasanno dhamme pasanno saṅghe pasanno sīlesu paripūrakārī. Apissudaṁ manussā evamāhaṁsu: ‘yāva maraṇakālāpi rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro bhagavantaṁ kittayamānarūpo kālaṅkato’ti. So abbhatīto kālaṅkato bhagavatā abyākato; tassapissa sādhu veyyākaraṇaṁ, bahujano pasīdeyya, tato gaccheyya sugatiṁ. Bhagavato kho pana, bhante, sambodhi magadhesu. Yattha kho pana, bhante, bhagavato sambodhi magadhesu, kathaṁ tatra bhagavā māgadhake paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu na byākareyya? Bhagavā ce kho pana, bhante, māgadhake paricārake abbhatīte kālaṅkate upapattīsu na byākareyya, dīnamanā tenassu māgadhakā paricārakā; yena kho panassu dīnamanā māgadhakā paricārakā kathaṁ te bhagavā na byākareyyā”ti. Idamāyasmā ānando māgadhake paricārake ārabbha bhagavato sammukhā parikathaṁ katvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.
[¶15] Soon after Ānanda had left, the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Ñātika for alms. He wandered for alms in Ñātika. After the meal, on his return from almsround, he washed his feet and entered the brick house. He paid attention, applied the mind, and concentrated wholeheartedly on the fate of Magadhan devotees, and sat down on the seat spread out, thinking, “I shall know their destiny, where they are reborn in the next life.” And he saw where they had been reborn.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkante āyasmante ānande pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya nātikaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Nātike piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto pāde pakkhāletvā giñjakāvasathaṁ pavisitvā māgadhake paricārake ārabbha aṭṭhiṁ katvā manasikatvā sabbaṁ cetasā samannāharitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi: “gatiṁ nesaṁ jānissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ, yaṅgatikā te bhavanto yaṁabhisamparāyā”ti. Addasā kho bhagavā māgadhake paricārake: “yaṅgatikā te bhavanto yaṁabhisamparāyā”ti.
[¶16] Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came out of retreat. Emerging from the brick house, he sat down on the seat spread out in the shade of the porch.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito giñjakāvasathā nikkhamitvā vihārapacchāyāyaṁ paññatte āsane nisīdi.
[¶17] Then Venerable Ānanda went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, you look so serene; your face seems to shine owing to the clarity of your faculties. Have you been abiding in a peaceful meditation today, sir?”
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “upasantapadisso, bhante, bhagavā bhātiriva bhagavato mukhavaṇṇo vippasannattā indriyānaṁ. Santena nūnajja, bhante, bhagavā vihārena vihāsī”ti?
[¶18] The Buddha then recounted what had happened since speaking to Ānanda, revealing that he had seen the destiny of the Magadhan devotees. He continued:
> Pali: “Yadeva kho me tvaṁ, ānanda, māgadhake paricārake ārabbha sammukhā parikathaṁ katvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkanto, tadevāhaṁ nātike piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto pāde pakkhāletvā giñjakāvasathaṁ pavisitvā māgadhake paricārake ārabbha aṭṭhiṁ katvā manasikatvā sabbaṁ cetasā samannāharitvā paññatte āsane nisīdiṁ: ‘gatiṁ nesaṁ jānissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ, yaṅgatikā te bhavanto yaṁabhisamparāyā’ti. Addasaṁ kho ahaṁ, ānanda, māgadhake paricārake ‘yaṅgatikā te bhavanto yaṁabhisamparāyā’ti.
[¶19] 3. Janavasabha the Spirit
> Pali: 3. Janavasabhayakkha
[¶20] “Then, Ānanda, an invisible spirit called out: ‘I am Janavasabha, Blessed One! I am Janavasabha, Holy One!’ Ānanda, do you recall having previously heard such a name as Janavasabha?”
> Pali: Atha kho, ānanda, antarahito yakkho saddamanussāvesi: ‘janavasabho ahaṁ, bhagavā; janavasabho ahaṁ, sugatā’ti. Abhijānāsi no tvaṁ, ānanda, ito pubbe evarūpaṁ nāmadheyyaṁ sutaṁ yadidaṁ janavasabho”ti?
[¶21] “No, worthy sir. But when I heard the word, I got goosebumps! I thought, ‘This must be no ordinary spirit to bear such an exalted name as Janavasabha.’”
> Pali: “Na kho ahaṁ, bhante, abhijānāmi ito pubbe evarūpaṁ nāmadheyyaṁ sutaṁ yadidaṁ janavasabhoti, api ca me, bhante, lomāni haṭṭhāni ‘janavasabho’ti nāmadheyyaṁ sutvā. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: ‘na hi nūna so orako yakkho bhavissati yadidaṁ evarūpaṁ nāmadheyyaṁ supaññattaṁ yadidaṁ janavasabho’”ti.
[¶22] “After making himself heard while invisible, Ānanda, an exceptionally beautiful spirit appeared in front of me. And for a second time he called out: ‘I am Bimbisāra, Blessed One! I am Bimbisāra, Holy One! This is the seventh time I am reborn in the company of the Great King Vessavaṇa. When I pass away from here, I can become a king of men.
> Pali: “Anantarā kho, ānanda, saddapātubhāvā uḷāravaṇṇo me yakkho sammukhe pāturahosi. Dutiyakampi saddamanussāvesi: ‘bimbisāro ahaṁ, bhagavā; bimbisāro ahaṁ, sugatāti. Idaṁ sattamaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, vessavaṇassa mahārājassa sahabyataṁ upapajjāmi, so tato cuto manussarājā bhavituṁ pahomi.
[¶23] Seven from here, seven from there—
fourteen transmigrations in all.
I remember these lives
where I lived before.
> Pali: Ito satta tato satta,
saṁsārāni catuddasa;
Nivāsamabhijānāmi,
yattha me vusitaṁ pure.
[¶24] For a long time I’ve known that I won’t be reborn in the underworld, but that I still hope to become a once-returner.’
> Pali: Dīgharattaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, avinipāto avinipātaṁ sañjānāmi, āsā ca pana me santiṭṭhati sakadāgāmitāyā’”ti.
[¶25] ‘It’s incredible and amazing that you, the venerable spirit Janavasabha, should say:
> Pali: “Acchariyamidaṁ āyasmato janavasabhassa yakkhassa, abbhutamidaṁ āyasmato janavasabhassa yakkhassa.
[¶26] “For a long time I’ve been aware that I won’t be reborn in the underworld” and also “But I still hope to become a once-returner.” But from what source do you know that you’ve achieved such a high distinction?’
> Pali: ‘Dīgharattaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, avinipāto avinipātaṁ sañjānāmī’ti ca vadesi, ‘āsā ca pana me santiṭṭhati sakadāgāmitāyā’ti ca vadesi, kutonidānaṁ panāyasmā janavasabho yakkho evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ visesādhigamaṁ sañjānātī”ti?
[¶27] ‘None other than the Blessed One’s instruction! None other than the Holy One’s instruction! From the day I had absolute devotion to the Buddha I have known that I won’t be reborn in the underworld, but that I still hope to become a once-returner. Just now, sir, I had been sent out by the great king Vessavaṇa to the great king Virūḷhaka’s presence on some business, and on the way I saw the Buddha giving his attention to the fate of the Magadhan devotees. But it comes as no surprise that I have heard and learned the fate of the Magadhan devotees in the presence of the great king Vessavaṇa as he was speaking to his assembly. It occurred to me, “I shall see the Buddha and inform him of this.” These are the two reasons I’ve come to see the Buddha.
> Pali: “‘Na aññatra, bhagavā, tava sāsanā, na aññatra, sugata, tava sāsanā; yadagge ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati ekantikato abhippasanno, tadagge ahaṁ, bhante, dīgharattaṁ avinipāto avinipātaṁ sañjānāmi, āsā ca pana me santiṭṭhati sakadāgāmitāya. Idhāhaṁ, bhante, vessavaṇena mahārājena pesito virūḷhakassa mahārājassa santike kenacideva karaṇīyena addasaṁ bhagavantaṁ antarāmagge giñjakāvasathaṁ pavisitvā māgadhake paricārake ārabbha aṭṭhiṁ katvā manasikatvā sabbaṁ cetasā samannāharitvā nisinnaṁ: “gatiṁ nesaṁ jānissāmi abhisamparāyaṁ, yaṅgatikā te bhavanto yaṁabhisamparāyā”ti. Anacchariyaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhante, yaṁ vessavaṇassa mahārājassa tassaṁ parisāyaṁ bhāsato sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: “yaṅgatikā te bhavanto yaṁabhisamparāyā”ti. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi: “bhagavantañca dakkhāmi, idañca bhagavato ārocessāmī”ti. Ime kho me, bhante, dvepaccayā bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ.
[¶28] 4. The Council of the Gods
> Pali: 4. Devasabhā
[¶29] Sir, it was more than a few days ago—on the fifteenth day sabbath on the full moon day at the entry to the rainy season—when all the gods of the thirty-three were sitting together in the Hall of Clear Right. A large assembly of gods was sitting all around, and the four great kings were seated at the four quarters.
> Pali: Purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni tadahuposathe pannarase vassūpanāyikāya puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā kevalakappā ca devā tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnā honti sannipatitā. Mahatī ca dibbaparisā samantato nisinnā honti, cattāro ca mahārājāno catuddisā nisinnā honti.
[¶30] The Great King Dhataraṭṭha was seated to the east, facing west, in front of his gods. The Great King Virūḷhaka was seated to the south, facing north, in front of his gods. The Great King Virūpakkha was seated to the west, facing east, in front of his gods. The Great King Vessavaṇa was seated to the north, facing south, in front of his gods. When the gods of the thirty-three have a gathering like this, that is how they are seated. After that come our seats.
> Pali: Puratthimāya disāya dhataraṭṭho mahārājā pacchimābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā; dakkhiṇāya disāya virūḷhako mahārājā uttarābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā; pacchimāya disāya virūpakkho mahārājā puratthābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā; uttarāya disāya vessavaṇo mahārājā dakkhiṇābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā. Yadā, bhante, kevalakappā ca devā tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnā honti sannipatitā, mahatī ca dibbaparisā samantato nisinnā honti, cattāro ca mahārājāno catuddisā nisinnā honti. Idaṁ nesaṁ hoti āsanasmiṁ; atha pacchā amhākaṁ āsanaṁ hoti.
[¶31] Sir, those gods who had been recently reborn in the company of the thirty-three after leading the spiritual life under the Buddha outshone the other gods in beauty and glory. The gods of the thirty-three became uplifted and overjoyed at that, full of rapture and happiness, saying, “The heavenly hosts swell, while the titan hosts dwindle!”
> Pali: Ye te, bhante, devā bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā adhunūpapannā tāvatiṁsakāyaṁ, te aññe deve atirocanti vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca. Tena sudaṁ, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā attamanā honti pamuditā pītisomanassajātā: “dibbā vata bho kāyā paripūrenti, hāyanti asurakāyā”ti.
[¶32] Seeing the joy of those gods, Sakka, lord of gods, celebrated with these verses:
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sampasādaṁ viditvā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi:
[¶33] “The gods rejoice—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching;
> Pali: “Modanti vata bho devā,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammataṁ.
[¶34] and seeing the new gods,
so beautiful and glorious,
who have come here after leading
the spiritual life under the Buddha!
> Pali: Nave deve ca passantā,
vaṇṇavante yasassine;
Sugatasmiṁ brahmacariyaṁ,
caritvāna idhāgate.
[¶35] They outshine the others
in beauty, glory, and lifespan.
Here are the distinguished disciples
of he whose wisdom is vast.
> Pali: Te aññe atirocanti,
vaṇṇena yasasāyunā;
Sāvakā bhūripaññassa,
visesūpagatā idha.
[¶36] Seeing this, they delight—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching.”
> Pali: Idaṁ disvāna nandanti,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammatan”ti.
[¶37] The gods of the thirty-three became even more uplifted and overjoyed at that, saying: “The heavenly hosts swell, while the titan hosts dwindle!”
> Pali: Tena sudaṁ, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā bhiyyoso mattāya attamanā honti pamuditā pītisomanassajātā “dibbā vata, bho, kāyā paripūrenti, hāyanti asurakāyā”ti.
[¶38] Then the gods of the thirty-three, having considered and deliberated on the matter for which they were seated together in the Hall of Clear Right, advised and instructed the four great kings on the subject. Each one, having been advised, stood at his own seat without leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, yenatthena devā tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnā honti sannipatitā, taṁ atthaṁ cintayitvā taṁ atthaṁ mantayitvā vuttavacanāpi taṁ cattāro mahārājāno tasmiṁ atthe honti. Paccānusiṭṭhavacanāpi taṁ cattāro mahārājāno tasmiṁ atthe honti, sakesu sakesu āsanesu ṭhitā avipakkantā.
[¶39] The Kings were instructed,
and heeded good advice.
With clear and peaceful minds,
they stood by their own seats.
> Pali: Te vuttavākyā rājāno,
paṭiggayhānusāsaniṁ;
Vippasannamanā santā,
aṭṭhaṁsu samhi āsaneti.
[¶40] Then in the northern quarter a magnificent light arose and radiance appeared, surpassing the glory of the gods. Then Sakka, lord of gods, addressed the gods of the thirty-three, “As indicated by the signs—light arising and radiance appearing—The Divinity will appear. For this is the harbinger for the appearance of the Divinity, namely light arising and radiance appearing.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, uttarāya disāya uḷāro āloko sañjāyi, obhāso pāturahosi atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Atha kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi: “yathā kho, mārisā, nimittāni dissanti, uḷāro āloko sañjāyati, obhāso pātubhavati, brahmā pātubhavissati. Brahmuno hetaṁ pubbanimittaṁ pātubhāvāya yadidaṁ āloko sañjāyati obhāso pātubhavatī”ti.
[¶41] As indicated by the signs,
The Divinity will appear.
For this is the sign of the Divinity:
a light vast and great.
> Pali: Yathā nimittā dissanti,
brahmā pātubhavissati;
Brahmuno hetaṁ nimittaṁ,
obhāso vipulo mahāti.
[¶42] 5. On Sanaṅkumāra
> Pali: 5. Sanaṅkumārakathā
[¶43] Then the gods of the thirty-three sat in their own seats, saying, “We shall find out what has caused that light, and only when we have realized it shall we go to it.” And the four great kings did likewise.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā yathāsakesu āsanesu nisīdiṁsu: “obhāsametaṁ ñassāma, yaṁvipāko bhavissati, sacchikatvāva naṁ gamissāmā”ti. Cattāropi mahārājāno yathāsakesu āsanesu nisīdiṁsu: “obhāsametaṁ ñassāma yaṁvipāko bhavissati, sacchikatvāva naṁ gamissāmā”ti.
## 37. DN 18 · With Janavasabha · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/37/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/37/#p-N
[¶0] Hearing that, the gods of the thirty-three agreed in unison, “We shall find out what has caused that light, and only when we have realized it shall we go to it.”
> Pali: Idaṁ sutvā devā tāvatiṁsā ekaggā samāpajjiṁsu: “obhāsametaṁ ñassāma, yaṁvipāko bhavissati, sacchikatvāva naṁ gamissāmā”ti.
[¶1] When the divinity Sanaṅkumāra appears to the gods of the thirty-three, he does so after manifesting a solid incarnation. For a Divinity’s normal appearance is imperceptible in the visual range of the gods of the thirty-three. When the divinity Sanaṅkumāra appears to the gods of the thirty-three, he outshines the other gods in beauty and glory, as a golden statue outshines the human form.
> Pali: Yadā, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, oḷārikaṁ attabhāvaṁ abhinimminitvā pātubhavati. Yo kho pana, bhante, brahmuno pakativaṇṇo anabhisambhavanīyo so devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ cakkhupathasmiṁ. Yadā, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, so aññe deve atirocati vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca. Seyyathāpi, bhante, sovaṇṇo viggaho mānusaṁ viggahaṁ atirocati; evameva kho, bhante, yadā brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, so aññe deve atirocati vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca.
[¶2] When the divinity Sanaṅkumāra appears to the gods of the thirty-three, not a single god in that assembly greets him by bowing down or rising up or inviting him to a seat. They all sit silently on their couches with their cupped palms raised, thinking, “Now the divinity Sanaṅkumāra will sit on the couch of whatever god he chooses.” And the god on whose couch the Divinity sits is overjoyed and brimming with happiness, like a king on the day of his coronation.
> Pali: Yadā, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, na tassaṁ parisāyaṁ koci devo abhivādeti vā paccuṭṭheti vā āsanena vā nimanteti. Sabbeva tuṇhībhūtā pañjalikā pallaṅkena nisīdanti: “yassadāni devassa pallaṅkaṁ icchissati brahmā sanaṅkumāro, tassa devassa pallaṅke nisīdissatī”ti. Yassa kho pana, bhante, devassa brahmā sanaṅkumāro pallaṅke nisīdati, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo vedapaṭilābhaṁ; uḷāraṁ so labhati devo somanassapaṭilābhaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhante, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto adhunābhisitto rajjena, uḷāraṁ so labhati vedapaṭilābhaṁ, uḷāraṁ so labhati somanassapaṭilābhaṁ; evameva kho, bhante, yassa devassa brahmā sanaṅkumāro pallaṅke nisīdati, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo vedapaṭilābhaṁ, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo somanassapaṭilābhaṁ.
[¶3] Then the divinity Sanaṅkumāra manifested a solid incarnation, taking on the appearance of the youth Pañcasikha, and appeared to the gods of the thirty-three. Rising into the air, he sat cross-legged in the sky, like a strong man might sit cross-legged on a well-appointed couch or on level ground. Seeing the joy of those gods, the divinity Sanaṅkumāra celebrated with these verses:
> Pali: Atha, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro oḷārikaṁ attabhāvaṁ abhinimminitvā kumāravaṇṇī hutvā pañcasikho devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pāturahosi. So vehāsaṁ abbhuggantvā ākāse antalikkhe pallaṅkena nisīdi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, balavā puriso supaccatthate vā pallaṅke same vā bhūmibhāge pallaṅkena nisīdeyya; evameva kho, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro vehāsaṁ abbhuggantvā ākāse antalikkhe pallaṅkena nisīditvā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sampasādaṁ viditvā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi:
[¶4] “The gods rejoice—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching;
> Pali: “Modanti vata bho devā,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammataṁ.
[¶5] and seeing the new gods,
so beautiful and glorious,
who have come here after leading
the spiritual life under the Buddha!
> Pali: Nave deve ca passantā,
vaṇṇavante yasassine;
Sugatasmiṁ brahmacariyaṁ,
caritvāna idhāgate.
[¶6] They outshine the others
in beauty, glory, and lifespan.
Here are the distinguished disciples
of he whose wisdom is vast.
> Pali: Te aññe atirocanti,
vaṇṇena yasasāyunā;
Sāvakā bhūripaññassa,
visesūpagatā idha.
[¶7] Seeing this, they delight—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching!”
> Pali: Idaṁ disvāna nandanti,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammatan”ti.
[¶8] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And while he was speaking on that topic, his voice had eight qualities: it was clear, comprehensible, charming, audible, lucid, undistorted, deep, and resonant. He makes sure his voice is intelligible as far as the assembly goes, but the sound doesn’t extend outside the assembly. When someone has a voice like this, they’re said to have the voice of the Divinity.
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsittha; imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa bhāsato aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato saro hoti vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañju ca savanīyo ca bindu ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. Yathāparisaṁ kho pana, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro sarena viññāpeti; na cassa bahiddhā parisāya ghoso niccharati. Yassa kho pana, bhante, evaṁ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato saro hoti, so vuccati “brahmassaro”ti.
[¶9] Then the divinity Sanaṅkumāra, having manifested thirty-three life-forms, sat down on the couches of each of the gods of the thirty-three and addressed them, “What do the good gods of the thirty-three think? How the Buddha has acted for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans! For consider those who have gone for refuge to the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and have fulfilled their ethics. When their bodies break up, after death, some are reborn in the company of the gods who control what is created by others, some with the gods who love to create, some with the joyful gods, some with the gods of Yama, some with the gods of the thirty-three, and some with the gods of the four great kings. And at the very least they swell the hosts of the centaurs.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro tettiṁse attabhāve abhinimminitvā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ paccekapallaṅkesu pallaṅkena nisīditvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi: “taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, yāvañca so bhagavā bahujanahitāya paṭipanno bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Ye hi keci, bho, buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gatā dhammaṁ saraṇaṁ gatā saṅghaṁ saraṇaṁ gatā sīlesu paripūrakārino te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā appekacce paranimmitavasavattīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjanti, appekacce nimmānaratīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjanti, appekacce tusitānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjanti, appekacce yāmānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjanti, appekacce tāvatiṁsānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjanti, appekacce cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjanti. Ye sabbanihīnaṁ kāyaṁ paripūrenti, te gandhabbakāyaṁ paripūrentī”ti.
[¶10] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And hearing the sound of the Divinity speaking on that topic, the gods fancied, “The one sitting on my couch is the only one speaking.”
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsittha; imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa bhāsato ghosoyeva devā maññanti: “yvāyaṁ mama pallaṅke svāyaṁ ekova bhāsatī”ti.
[¶11] When one is speaking,
all the forms speak.
When one sits in silence,
they all remain silent.
> Pali: Ekasmiṁ bhāsamānasmiṁ,
sabbe bhāsanti nimmitā;
Ekasmiṁ tuṇhimāsīne,
sabbe tuṇhī bhavanti te.
[¶12] But those gods imagine—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
that the one on their seat
is the only one to speak.
> Pali: Tadāsu devā maññanti,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Yvāyaṁ mama pallaṅkasmiṁ,
svāyaṁ ekova bhāsatīti.
[¶13] Next the divinity Sanaṅkumāra merged into one corporeal form. Then he sat on the couch of Sakka, lord of gods, and addressed the gods of the thirty-three:
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro ekattena attānaṁ upasaṁharati, ekattena attānaṁ upasaṁharitvā sakkassa devānamindassa pallaṅke pallaṅkena nisīditvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi:
[¶14] 6. Developing the Bases of Psychic Power
> Pali: 6. Bhāvitaiddhipāda
[¶15] “What do the good gods of the thirty-three think? How well described by the Blessed One—who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha—are the four bases of psychic power! They are taught for the amplification, burgeoning, and transformation of psychic power. What four? It’s when a mendicant develops the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to enthusiasm, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to energy, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to mental development, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to inquiry, and active effort. These are the four bases of psychic power taught by the Buddha for the amplification, burgeoning, and transformation of psychic power.
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, yāva supaññattā cime tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro iddhipādā paññattā iddhipahutāya iddhivisavitāya iddhivikubbanatāya. Katame cattāro? Idha bho bhikkhu chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Cittasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Vīmaṁsāsamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Ime kho, bho, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro iddhipādā paññattā iddhipahutāya iddhivisavitāya iddhivikubbanatāya.
[¶16] All the ascetics and brahmins in the past, future, or present who wield the many kinds of psychic power do so by developing and cultivating these four bases of psychic power. Gentlemen, do you see such psychic might and power in me?”
> Pali: Ye hi keci bho atītamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhosuṁ, sabbe te imesaṁyeva catunnaṁ iddhipādānaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā. Yepi hi keci bho anāgatamaddhānaṁ samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhossanti, sabbe te imesaṁyeva catunnaṁ iddhipādānaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā. Yepi hi keci bho etarahi samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhonti, sabbe te imesaṁyeva catunnaṁ iddhipādānaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā. Passanti no, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, mamapimaṁ evarūpaṁ iddhānubhāvan”ti?
[¶17] “Yes, Great Divinity.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, mahābrahme”ti.
[¶18] “I too became so mighty and powerful by developing and cultivating these four bases of psychic power.”
> Pali: “Ahampi kho bho imesaṁyeva catunnañca iddhipādānaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā evaṁ mahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo”ti.
[¶19] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And having spoken about that, he addressed the gods of the thirty-three:
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsittha. Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsitvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi:
[¶20] 7. The Three Openings
> Pali: 7. Tividhaokāsādhigama
[¶21] “What do the good gods of the thirty-three think? How well understood by the Buddha are the three opportunities for achieving happiness! What three?
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, yāvañcidaṁ tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tayo okāsādhigamā anubuddhā sukhassādhigamāya. Katame tayo?
[¶22] First, take someone who lives mixed up with sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities. After some time they hear the teaching of the noble ones, rationally apply the mind to how it applies to them, and practice in line with the teaching. They live aloof from sensual pleasures and unskillful qualities. That gives rise to pleasure, and more than pleasure, happiness, like the joy that’s born from gladness. This is the first opportunity for achieving happiness.
> Pali: Idha bho ekacco saṁsaṭṭho viharati kāmehi saṁsaṭṭho akusalehi dhammehi. So aparena samayena ariyadhammaṁ suṇāti, yoniso manasi karoti, dhammānudhammaṁ paṭipajjati. So ariyadhammassavanaṁ āgamma yonisomanasikāraṁ dhammānudhammappaṭipattiṁ asaṁsaṭṭho viharati kāmehi asaṁsaṭṭho akusalehi dhammehi. Tassa asaṁsaṭṭhassa kāmehi asaṁsaṭṭhassa akusalehi dhammehi uppajjati sukhaṁ, sukhā bhiyyo somanassaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bho, pamudā pāmojjaṁ jāyetha; evameva kho, bho, asaṁsaṭṭhassa kāmehi asaṁsaṭṭhassa akusalehi dhammehi uppajjati sukhaṁ, sukhā bhiyyo somanassaṁ. Ayaṁ kho, bho, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena paṭhamo okāsādhigamo anubuddho sukhassādhigamāya.
[¶23] Next, take someone whose coarse physical, verbal, and mental processes have not died down. After some time they hear the teaching of the noble ones, rationally apply the mind to how it applies to them, and practice in line with the teaching. Their coarse physical, verbal, and mental processes die down. That gives rise to pleasure, and more than pleasure, happiness, like the joy that’s born from gladness. This is the second opportunity for achieving happiness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bho, idhekaccassa oḷārikā kāyasaṅkhārā appaṭippassaddhā honti, oḷārikā vacīsaṅkhārā appaṭippassaddhā honti, oḷārikā cittasaṅkhārā appaṭippassaddhā honti. So aparena samayena ariyadhammaṁ suṇāti, yoniso manasi karoti, dhammānudhammaṁ paṭipajjati. Tassa ariyadhammassavanaṁ āgamma yonisomanasikāraṁ dhammānudhammappaṭipattiṁ oḷārikā kāyasaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti, oḷārikā vacīsaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti, oḷārikā cittasaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti. Tassa oḷārikānaṁ kāyasaṅkhārānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā oḷārikānaṁ vacīsaṅkhārānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā oḷārikānaṁ cittasaṅkhārānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā uppajjati sukhaṁ, sukhā bhiyyo somanassaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bho, pamudā pāmojjaṁ jāyetha; evameva kho bho oḷārikānaṁ kāyasaṅkhārānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā oḷārikānaṁ vacīsaṅkhārānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā oḷārikānaṁ cittasaṅkhārānaṁ paṭippassaddhiyā uppajjati sukhaṁ, sukhā bhiyyo somanassaṁ. Ayaṁ kho, bho, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dutiyo okāsādhigamo anubuddho sukhassādhigamāya.
[¶24] Next, take someone who doesn’t truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful, what is blameworthy and what is blameless, what should be cultivated and what should not be cultivated, what is inferior and what is superior, and what has a portion of dark or bright. After some time they hear the teaching of the noble ones, rationally apply the mind to how it applies to them, and practice in line with the teaching. They truly understand what is skillful and what is unskillful, and so on. Knowing and seeing like this, ignorance is given up and knowledge arises. That gives rise to pleasure, and more than pleasure, happiness, like the joy that’s born from gladness. This is the third opportunity for achieving happiness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bho, idhekacco ‘idaṁ kusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti, ‘idaṁ akusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. ‘Idaṁ sāvajjaṁ idaṁ anavajjaṁ, idaṁ sevitabbaṁ idaṁ na sevitabbaṁ, idaṁ hīnaṁ idaṁ paṇītaṁ, idaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgan’ti yathābhūtaṁ nappajānāti. So aparena samayena ariyadhammaṁ suṇāti, yoniso manasi karoti, dhammānudhammaṁ paṭipajjati. So ariyadhammassavanaṁ āgamma yonisomanasikāraṁ dhammānudhammappaṭipattiṁ, ‘idaṁ kusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘idaṁ akusalan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. ‘Idaṁ sāvajjaṁ idaṁ anavajjaṁ, idaṁ sevitabbaṁ idaṁ na sevitabbaṁ, idaṁ hīnaṁ idaṁ paṇītaṁ, idaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti. Tassa evaṁ jānato evaṁ passato avijjā pahīyati, vijjā uppajjati. Tassa avijjāvirāgā vijjuppādā uppajjati sukhaṁ, sukhā bhiyyo somanassaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bho, pamudā pāmojjaṁ jāyetha; evameva kho, bho, avijjāvirāgā vijjuppādā uppajjati sukhaṁ, sukhā bhiyyo somanassaṁ. Ayaṁ kho, bho, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tatiyo okāsādhigamo anubuddho sukhassādhigamāya.
[¶25] These are the three opportunities for achieving happiness that have been understood by the Buddha.”
> Pali: Ime kho, bho, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tayo okāsādhigamā anubuddhā sukhassādhigamāyā”ti.
[¶26] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And having spoken about that, he addressed the gods of the thirty-three:
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsittha, imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsitvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi:
[¶27] 8. Mindfulness Meditation
> Pali: 8. Catusatipaṭṭhāna
[¶28] “What do the good gods of the thirty-three think? How well described by the Buddha are the four kinds of mindfulness meditation! They are taught for achieving what is skillful. What four?
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, yāva supaññattā cime tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā paññattā kusalassādhigamāya. Katame cattāro?
[¶29] It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body internally—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. As they meditate in this way, they become rightly immersed in that, and rightly serene. Then they give rise to knowledge and vision of other people’s bodies externally.
> Pali: Idha, bho, bhikkhu ajjhattaṁ kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Ajjhattaṁ kāye kāyānupassī viharanto tattha sammā samādhiyati, sammā vippasīdati. So tattha sammā samāhito sammā vippasanno bahiddhā parakāye ñāṇadassanaṁ abhinibbatteti.
[¶30] They meditate observing an aspect of feelings internally … Then they give rise to knowledge and vision of other people’s feelings externally.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati …pe… bahiddhā paravedanāsu ñāṇadassanaṁ abhinibbatteti.
[¶31] They meditate observing an aspect of the mind internally … Then they give rise to knowledge and vision of other people’s minds externally.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ citte cittānupassī viharati …pe… bahiddhā paracitte ñāṇadassanaṁ abhinibbatteti.
[¶32] They meditate observing an aspect of principles internally—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. As they meditate in this way, they become rightly immersed in that, and rightly serene. Then they give rise to knowledge and vision of other people’s principles externally.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Ajjhattaṁ dhammesu dhammānupassī viharanto tattha sammā samādhiyati, sammā vippasīdati. So tattha sammā samāhito sammā vippasanno bahiddhā paradhammesu ñāṇadassanaṁ abhinibbatteti.
[¶33] These are the four kinds of mindfulness meditation taught by the Buddha for achieving what is skillful.”
> Pali: Ime kho, bho, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro satipaṭṭhānā paññattā kusalassādhigamāyā”ti.
[¶34] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And having spoken about that, he addressed the gods of the thirty-three:
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsittha. Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsitvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi:
[¶35] 9. Seven Prerequisites of Immersion
> Pali: 9. Sattasamādhiparikkhāra
[¶36] “What do the good gods of the thirty-three think? How well described by the Buddha are the seven prerequisites of immersion for the development and fulfillment of right immersion! What seven? Right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, and right mindfulness. Unification of mind with these seven factors as prerequisites is called noble right immersion ‘with its vital conditions’ and also ‘with its prerequisites’.
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, yāva supaññattā cime tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena satta samādhiparikkhārā sammāsamādhissa paribhāvanāya sammāsamādhissa pāripūriyā. Katame satta? Sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati. Yā kho, bho, imehi sattahaṅgehi cittassa ekaggatā parikkhatā, ayaṁ vuccati, bho, ariyo sammāsamādhi saupaniso itipi saparikkhāro itipi.
[¶37] Right view produces right purpose. Right purpose produces right speech. Right speech produces right action. Right action produces right livelihood. Right livelihood produces right effort. Right effort produces right mindfulness. Right mindfulness produces right immersion. Right immersion produces right knowledge. Right knowledge produces right freedom.
> Pali: Sammādiṭṭhissa, bho, sammāsaṅkappo pahoti, sammāsaṅkappassa sammāvācā pahoti, sammāvācassa sammākammanto pahoti. Sammākammantassa sammāājīvo pahoti, sammāājīvassa sammāvāyāmo pahoti, sammāvāyāmassa sammāsati pahoti, sammāsatissa sammāsamādhi pahoti, sammāsamādhissa sammāñāṇaṁ pahoti, sammāñāṇassa sammāvimutti pahoti.
[¶38] If anything should be rightly described as ‘a teaching that’s well explained by the Buddha, apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves; and the doors to freedom from death are flung open,’ it’s this. For the teaching is well explained by the Buddha—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves—and the doors to freedom from death are flung open.
> Pali: Yañhi taṁ, bho, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhi apārutā amatassa dvārā’ti idameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya. Svākkhāto hi, bho, bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko, akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhi apārutā amatassa dvārā.
[¶39] Whoever has experiential confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and has the ethical conduct loved by the noble ones; and whoever is spontaneously reborn, and is trained in the teaching; more than 2,400,000 such Magadhan devotees have passed away having ended three fetters. They’re stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening. And there are once-returners here, too.
> Pali: Ye hi keci, bho, buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatā, dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgatā, saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgatā, ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgatā, ye cime opapātikā dhammavinītā sātirekāni catuvīsatisatasahassāni māgadhakā paricārakā abbhatītā kālaṅkatā tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā. Atthi cevettha sakadāgāmino.
[¶40] And as for the rest of folk,
who I think have shared in merit—
I couldn’t even number them,
for fear of speaking falsely.”
> Pali: Atthāyaṁ itarā pajā,
puññābhāgāti me mano;
Saṅkhātuṁ nopi sakkomi,
musāvādassa ottappan”ti.
[¶41] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And while he was speaking on that topic, this thought came to the great king Vessavaṇa, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! That there should be such a magnificent Teacher, and such a magnificent exposition of the teaching! And that such achievements of high distinction should be made known!”
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro bhāsittha, imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa bhāsato vessavaṇassa mahārājassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, evarūpopi nāma uḷāro satthā bhavissati, evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ dhammakkhānaṁ, evarūpā uḷārā visesādhigamā paññāyissantī”ti.
[¶42] And then the divinity Sanaṅkumāra, knowing the great king Vessavaṇa’s train of thought, said to him, “What does Great King Vessavaṇa think? In the past, too, there was such a magnificent Teacher, and such a magnificent exposition of the teaching! And such achievements of high distinction were made known! In the future, too, there will be such a magnificent Teacher, and such a magnificent exposition of the teaching! And such achievements of high distinction will be made known!”
> Pali: Atha, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro vessavaṇassa mahārājassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya vessavaṇaṁ mahārājānaṁ etadavoca: “taṁ kiṁ maññati bhavaṁ vessavaṇo mahārājā atītampi addhānaṁ evarūpo uḷāro satthā ahosi, evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ dhammakkhānaṁ, evarūpā uḷārā visesādhigamā paññāyiṁsu. Anāgatampi addhānaṁ evarūpo uḷāro satthā bhavissati, evarūpaṁ uḷāraṁ dhammakkhānaṁ, evarūpā uḷārā visesādhigamā paññāyissantī”ti.
[¶43] That, sir, is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke to the gods of the thirty-three. And the great king Vessavaṇa, having heard and learned it in the presence of the Divinity as he was speaking on that topic, informed his own assembly.’”
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ abhāsi, imamatthaṁ vessavaṇo mahārājā brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ bhāsato sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ sayaṁ parisāyaṁ ārocesi’”.
[¶44] And the spirit Janavasabha, having heard and learned it in the presence of the great king Vessavaṇa as he was speaking on that topic to his own assembly, informed the Buddha. And the Buddha, having heard and learned it in the presence of the spirit Janavasabha, and also from his own direct knowledge, informed Venerable Ānanda. And Venerable Ānanda, having heard and learned it in the presence of the Buddha, informed the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. And that’s how this spiritual life has become successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans.
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ janavasabho yakkho vessavaṇassa mahārājassa sayaṁ parisāyaṁ bhāsato sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ bhagavato ārocesi. Imamatthaṁ bhagavā janavasabhassa yakkhassa sammukhā sutvā sammukhā paṭiggahetvā sāmañca abhiññāya āyasmato ānandassa ārocesi, imamatthamāyasmā ānando bhagavato sammukhā sutvā sammukhā paṭiggahetvā ārocesi bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Tayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitanti.
[¶45] > Pali: Janavasabhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 38. DN 19 · The Great Steward · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/38/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/38/#p-N
[¶0] DN 19 · The Great Steward
> Pali: DN 19 · Mahāgovindasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate.
[¶2] Then, late at night, the centaur Pañcasikha, lighting up the entire Vulture’s Peak, went up to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and said to him, “Sir, I would tell you of what I heard and learned directly from the gods of the thirty-three.”
> Pali: Atha kho pañcasikho gandhabbaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṁ gijjhakūṭaṁ pabbataṁ obhāsetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho pañcasikho gandhabbaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “yaṁ kho me, bhante, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ, ārocemi taṁ bhagavato”ti.
[¶3] “Tell me, Pañcasikha,” said the Buddha.
> Pali: “Ārocehi me tvaṁ, pañcasikhā”ti bhagavā avoca.
[¶4] 1. The Council of the Gods
> Pali: 1. Devasabhā
[¶5] “Sir, it was more than a few days ago—on the fifteenth day sabbath on the full moon day at the invitation to admonish held at the end of the rainy season—when all the gods of the thirty-three were sitting together in the Hall of Clear Right. A large assembly of gods was sitting all around, and the four great kings were seated at the four quarters.
> Pali: “Purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni tadahuposathe pannarase pavāraṇāya puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā kevalakappā ca devā tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnā honti sannipatitā; mahatī ca dibbaparisā samantato nisinnā honti, cattāro ca mahārājāno catuddisā nisinnā honti;
[¶6] The Great King Dhataraṭṭha was seated to the east, facing west, in front of his gods. The Great King Virūḷhaka was seated to the south, facing north, in front of his gods. The Great King Virūpakkha was seated to the west, facing east, in front of his gods. The Great King Vessavaṇa was seated to the north, facing south, in front of his gods.
> Pali: puratthimāya disāya dhataraṭṭho mahārājā pacchimābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā; dakkhiṇāya disāya virūḷhako mahārājā uttarābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā; pacchimāya disāya virūpakkho mahārājā puratthābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā; uttarāya disāya vessavaṇo mahārājā dakkhiṇābhimukho nisinno hoti deve purakkhatvā.
[¶7] When the gods of the thirty-three have a gathering like this, that is how they are seated. After that come our seats.
> Pali: Yadā, bhante, kevalakappā ca devā tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnā honti sannipatitā, mahatī ca dibbaparisā samantato nisinnā honti, cattāro ca mahārājāno catuddisā nisinnā honti, idaṁ nesaṁ hoti āsanasmiṁ; atha pacchā amhākaṁ āsanaṁ hoti.
[¶8] Sir, those gods who had been recently reborn in the company of the thirty-three after leading the spiritual life under the Buddha outshine the other gods in beauty and glory. The gods of the thirty-three became uplifted and overjoyed at that, full of rapture and happiness, saying, ‘The heavenly hosts swell, while the titan hosts dwindle!’
> Pali: Ye te, bhante, devā bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā adhunūpapannā tāvatiṁsakāyaṁ, te aññe deve atirocanti vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca. Tena sudaṁ, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā attamanā honti pamuditā pītisomanassajātā; ‘dibbā vata bho kāyā paripūrenti, hāyanti asurakāyā’ti.
[¶9] Seeing the joy of those gods, Sakka, lord of gods, celebrated with these verses:
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sampasādaṁ viditvā imāhi gāthāhi anumodi:
[¶10] ‘The gods rejoice—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching;
> Pali: ‘Modanti vata bho devā,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammataṁ.
[¶11] and seeing the new gods,
so beautiful and glorious,
who have come here after leading
the spiritual life under the Buddha!
> Pali: Nave deve ca passantā,
vaṇṇavante yasassine;
Sugatasmiṁ brahmacariyaṁ,
caritvāna idhāgate.
[¶12] They outshine the others
in beauty, glory, and lifespan.
Here are the distinguished disciples
of he whose wisdom is vast.
> Pali: Te aññe atirocanti,
vaṇṇena yasasāyunā;
Sāvakā bhūripaññassa,
visesūpagatā idha.
[¶13] Seeing this, they delight—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching!’
> Pali: Idaṁ disvāna nandanti,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammatan’ti.
[¶14] The gods of the thirty-three became even more uplifted and overjoyed at that, full of rapture and happiness, saying, ‘The heavenly hosts swell, while the titan hosts dwindle!’
> Pali: Tena sudaṁ, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā bhiyyoso mattāya attamanā honti pamuditā pītisomanassajātā; ‘dibbā vata bho, kāyā paripūrenti, hāyanti asurakāyā’ti.
[¶15] 2. Eight Genuine Praises
> Pali: 2. Aṭṭhayathābhuccavaṇṇa
[¶16] Seeing the joy of those gods, Sakka, lord of gods, addressed them, ‘Gentlemen, would you like to hear eight genuine praises of the Buddha?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sampasādaṁ viditvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi: ‘iccheyyātha no tumhe, mārisā, tassa bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe sotun’ti?
[¶17] ‘Indeed we would, sir.’
> Pali: ‘Icchāma mayaṁ, mārisa, tassa bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe sotun’ti.
[¶18] Then Sakka proffered these eight genuine praises of the Buddha:
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe payirudāhāsi:
[¶19] ‘What do the good gods of the thirty-three think? How the Buddha has acted for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans! I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who has such sympathy for the world, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā? Yāvañca so bhagavā bahujanahitāya paṭipanno bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Evaṁ bahujanahitāya paṭipannaṁ bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶20] Also, the Buddha has explained the teaching well—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who explains such a relevant teaching, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: Svākkhāto kho pana tena bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhi. Evaṁ opaneyyikassa dhammassa desetāraṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶21] Also, the Buddha has well described what is skillful and what is unskillful, what is blameworthy and what is blameless, what should be cultivated and what should not be cultivated, what is inferior and what is superior, and what has a portion of dark or bright. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who so clearly describes all these things, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: “Idaṁ kusalan”ti kho pana tena bhagavatā supaññattaṁ, “idaṁ akusalan”ti supaññattaṁ. “Idaṁ sāvajjaṁ idaṁ anavajjaṁ, idaṁ sevitabbaṁ idaṁ na sevitabbaṁ, idaṁ hīnaṁ idaṁ paṇītaṁ, idaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgan”ti supaññattaṁ. Evaṁ kusalākusalasāvajjānavajjasevitabbāsevitabbahīnapaṇītakaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgānaṁ dhammānaṁ paññāpetāraṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶22] Also, the Buddha has well described the practice that leads to extinguishment for his disciples. And extinguishment converges with the practice, as the waters of the Ganges join together and converge with the waters of the Yamunā. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who so clearly describes the practice that leads to extinguishment for his disciples, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: Supaññattā kho pana tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṁ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā, saṁsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā ca. Seyyathāpi nāma gaṅgodakaṁ yamunodakena saṁsandati sameti; evameva supaññattā tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṁ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā, saṁsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā ca. Evaṁ nibbānagāminiyā paṭipadāya paññāpetāraṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶23] Also, possessions and popularity have accrued to the Buddha, so much that you’d think it would thrill even the aristocrats. But he takes his food free of vanity. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who takes their food so free of vanity, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: Abhinipphanno kho pana tassa bhagavato lābho abhinipphanno siloko, yāva maññe khattiyā sampiyāyamānarūpā viharanti, vigatamado kho pana so bhagavā āhāraṁ āhāreti. Evaṁ vigatamadaṁ āhāraṁ āharayamānaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶24] Also, the Buddha has gained companions, both trainees who are practicing, and those with defilements ended who have completed their journey. The Buddha is committed to the joy of solitude, but doesn’t send them away. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, so committed to the joy of solitude, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: Laddhasahāyo kho pana so bhagavā sekhānañceva paṭipannānaṁ khīṇāsavānañca vusitavataṁ. Te bhagavā apanujja ekārāmataṁ anuyutto viharati. Evaṁ ekārāmataṁ anuyuttaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶25] Also, the Buddha does as he says, and says as he does, thus: he does as he says, and says as he does. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who so practices in line with the teaching, apart from the Buddha.
> Pali: Yathāvādī kho pana so bhagavā tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī, iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Evaṁ dhammānudhammappaṭipannaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶26] Also, the Buddha has gone beyond doubt and got rid of indecision. He has achieved all he wished for regarding the fundamental goal of the spiritual life. I don’t see any Teacher, past or present, who has achieved these things, apart from the Buddha.’
> Pali: Tiṇṇavicikiccho kho pana so bhagavā vigatakathaṅkatho pariyositasaṅkappo ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyaṁ. Evaṁ tiṇṇavicikicchaṁ vigatakathaṅkathaṁ pariyositasaṅkappaṁ ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā’ti.
[¶27] These are the eight genuine praises of the Buddha proffered by Sakka. Hearing them, the gods of the thirty-three became even more uplifted and overjoyed.
> Pali: Ime kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe payirudāhāsi. Tena sudaṁ, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā bhiyyoso mattāya attamanā honti pamuditā pītisomanassajātā bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe sutvā.
[¶28] Then some gods thought, ‘If only four fully awakened Buddhas might arise in the world and teach the Dhamma, just like the Blessed One! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans!’
> Pali: Tatra, bhante, ekacce devā evamāhaṁsu: ‘aho vata, mārisā, cattāro sammāsambuddhā loke uppajjeyyuṁ dhammañca deseyyuṁ yathariva bhagavā. Tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.
[¶29] Other gods thought, ‘Let alone four fully awakened Buddhas; if only three fully awakened Buddhas, or two fully awakened Buddhas might arise in the world and teach the Dhamma, just like the Blessed One! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans!’
> Pali: Ekacce devā evamāhaṁsu: ‘tiṭṭhantu, mārisā, cattāro sammāsambuddhā, aho vata, mārisā, tayo sammāsambuddhā loke uppajjeyyuṁ dhammañca deseyyuṁ yathariva bhagavā. Tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti. Ekacce devā evamāhaṁsu: ‘tiṭṭhantu, mārisā, tayo sammāsambuddhā, aho vata, mārisā, dve sammāsambuddhā loke uppajjeyyuṁ dhammañca deseyyuṁ yathariva bhagavā. Tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.
[¶30] When they said this, Sakka said, ‘It is impossible, gentlemen, for two perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas to arise in the same solar system at the same time. May that Blessed One be healthy and well, and remain with us for a long time! That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans!’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, sakko devānamindo deve tāvatiṁse etadavoca: ‘aṭṭhānaṁ kho etaṁ, mārisā, anavakāso, yaṁ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṁ acarimaṁ uppajjeyyuṁ, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Aho vata, mārisā, so bhagavā appābādho appātaṅko ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭheyya. Tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan’ti.
[¶31] Then the gods of the thirty-three, having considered and deliberated on the matter for which they were seated together in the Hall of Clear Right, advised and instructed the four great kings on the subject. Each one, having been advised, stood at his own seat without leaving.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, yenatthena devā tāvatiṁsā sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ sannisinnā honti sannipatitā, taṁ atthaṁ cintayitvā taṁ atthaṁ mantayitvā vuttavacanāpi taṁ cattāro mahārājāno tasmiṁ atthe honti. Paccānusiṭṭhavacanāpi taṁ cattāro mahārājāno tasmiṁ atthe honti, sakesu sakesu āsanesu ṭhitā avipakkantā.
[¶32] The Kings were instructed,
and heeded good advice.
With clear and peaceful minds,
they stood by their own seats.
> Pali: Te vuttavākyā rājāno,
paṭiggayhānusāsaniṁ;
Vippasannamanā santā,
aṭṭhaṁsu samhi āsaneti.
[¶33] Then in the northern quarter a magnificent light arose and radiance appeared, surpassing the glory of the gods. Then Sakka, lord of gods, addressed the gods of the thirty-three, ‘As indicated by the signs—light arising and radiance appearing—the Divinity will appear. For this is the harbinger for the appearance of the Divinity, namely light arising and radiance appearing.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, uttarāya disāya uḷāro āloko sañjāyi, obhāso pāturahosi atikkammeva devānaṁ devānubhāvaṁ. Atha kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi: ‘yathā kho, mārisā, nimittāni dissanti, uḷāro āloko sañjāyati, obhāso pātubhavati, brahmā pātubhavissati; brahmuno hetaṁ pubbanimittaṁ pātubhāvāya, yadidaṁ āloko sañjāyati obhāso pātubhavatīti.
[¶34] As indicated by the signs,
the Divinity will appear.
For this is the sign of the Divinity:
a light vast and great.
> Pali: Yathā nimittā dissanti,
brahmā pātubhavissati;
Brahmuno hetaṁ nimittaṁ,
obhāso vipulo mahā’ti.
[¶35] 3. On Sanaṅkumāra
> Pali: 3. Sanaṅkumārakathā
[¶36] Then the gods of the thirty-three sat in their own seats, saying, ‘We shall find out what has caused that light, and only when we have realized it shall we go to it.’ And the four great kings did likewise. Hearing that, the gods of the thirty-three agreed in unison, ‘We shall find out what has caused that light, and only when we have realized it shall we go to it.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā yathāsakesu āsanesu nisīdiṁsu: ‘obhāsametaṁ ñassāma, yaṁvipāko bhavissati, sacchikatvāva naṁ gamissāmā’ti. Cattāropi mahārājāno yathāsakesu āsanesu nisīdiṁsu: ‘obhāsametaṁ ñassāma, yaṁvipāko bhavissati, sacchikatvāva naṁ gamissāmā’ti. Idaṁ sutvā devā tāvatiṁsā ekaggā samāpajjiṁsu: ‘obhāsametaṁ ñassāma, yaṁvipāko bhavissati, sacchikatvāva naṁ gamissāmā’ti.
[¶37] When the divinity Sanaṅkumāra appears to the gods of the thirty-three, he does so after manifesting in a solid life-form. For a Divinity’s normal appearance is imperceptible in the visual range of the gods of the thirty-three. When the divinity Sanaṅkumāra appears to the gods of the thirty-three, he outshines the other gods in beauty and glory, as a golden statue outshines the human form. When the divinity Sanaṅkumāra appears to the gods of the thirty-three, not a single god in that assembly greets him by bowing down or rising up or inviting him to a seat. They all sit silently on their couches with their cupped palms raised, thinking, ‘Now the divinity Sanaṅkumāra will sit on the couch of whatever god he chooses.’ And the god on whose couch the Divinity sits is overjoyed and brimming with happiness, like a king on the day of his coronation.
> Pali: Yadā, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, oḷārikaṁ attabhāvaṁ abhinimminitvā pātubhavati. Yo kho pana, bhante, brahmuno pakativaṇṇo, anabhisambhavanīyo so devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ cakkhupathasmiṁ. Yadā, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, so aññe deve atirocati vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca. Seyyathāpi, bhante, so vaṇṇo viggaho mānusaṁ viggahaṁ atirocati; evameva kho, bhante, yadā brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, so aññe deve atirocati vaṇṇena ceva yasasā ca. Yadā, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pātubhavati, na tassaṁ parisāyaṁ koci devo abhivādeti vā paccuṭṭheti vā āsanena vā nimanteti. Sabbeva tuṇhībhūtā pañjalikā pallaṅkena nisīdanti: ‘yassadāni devassa pallaṅkaṁ icchissati brahmā sanaṅkumāro, tassa devassa pallaṅke nisīdissatī’ti. Yassa kho pana, bhante, devassa brahmā sanaṅkumāro pallaṅke nisīdati, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo vedapaṭilābhaṁ, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo somanassapaṭilābhaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhante, rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto adhunābhisitto rajjena, uḷāraṁ so labhati vedapaṭilābhaṁ, uḷāraṁ so labhati somanassapaṭilābhaṁ; evameva kho, bhante, yassa devassa brahmā sanaṅkumāro pallaṅke nisīdati, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo vedapaṭilābhaṁ, uḷāraṁ so labhati devo somanassapaṭilābhaṁ.
[¶38] Seeing the joy of those gods, the divinity Sanaṅkumāra celebrated with these verses:
> Pali: Atha, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sampasādaṁ viditvā antarahito imāhi gāthāhi anumodi:
[¶39] ‘The gods rejoice—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching;
> Pali: ‘Modanti vata bho devā,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammataṁ.
[¶40] and seeing the new gods,
so beautiful and glorious,
who have come here after leading
the spiritual life under the Buddha!
> Pali: Nave deve ca passantā,
vaṇṇavante yasassine;
Sugatasmiṁ brahmacariyaṁ,
caritvāna idhāgate.
[¶41] They outshine the others
in beauty, glory, and lifespan.
Here are the distinguished disciples
of he whose wisdom is vast.
> Pali: Te aññe atirocanti,
vaṇṇena yasasāyunā;
Sāvakā bhūripaññassa,
visesūpagatā idha.
[¶42] Seeing this, they delight—
the thirty-three with their Lord—
revering the Realized One,
and the clear rightness of the teaching!’
> Pali: Idaṁ disvāna nandanti,
tāvatiṁsā sahindakā;
Tathāgataṁ namassantā,
dhammassa ca sudhammatan’ti.
[¶43] That is the topic on which the divinity Sanaṅkumāra spoke. And while he was speaking on that topic, his voice had eight qualities: it was clear, comprehensible, charming, audible, lucid, undistorted, deep, and resonant. He makes sure his voice is intelligible as far as the assembly goes, but the sound doesn’t extend outside the assembly. When someone has a voice like this, they’re said to have the voice of the Divinity.
> Pali: Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro abhāsittha. Imamatthaṁ, bhante, brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa bhāsato aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato saro hoti vissaṭṭho ca viññeyyo ca mañju ca savanīyo ca bindu ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. Yathāparisaṁ kho pana, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro sarena viññāpeti, na cassa bahiddhā parisāya ghoso niccharati. Yassa kho pana, bhante, evaṁ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato saro hoti, so vuccati ‘brahmassaro’ti.
[¶44] Then the gods of the thirty-three said to the divinity Sanaṅkumāra, ‘Good, Great Divinity! Having appraised this, we rejoice. And there are the eight genuine praises of the Buddha spoken by Sakka— having appraised them, too, we rejoice.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhante, devā tāvatiṁsā brahmānaṁ sanaṅkumāraṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘sādhu, mahābrahme, etadeva mayaṁ saṅkhāya modāma; atthi ca sakkena devānamindena tassa bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhuccā vaṇṇā bhāsitā; te ca mayaṁ saṅkhāya modāmā’ti.
[¶45] 4. Eight Genuine Praises
> Pali: 4. Aṭṭhayathābhuccavaṇṇa
[¶46] Then the Divinity said to Sakka, ‘It would be good, lord of gods, if I could also hear the eight genuine praises of the Buddha.’
> Pali: Atha, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ etadavoca: ‘sādhu, devānaminda, mayampi tassa bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe suṇeyyāmā’ti.
[¶47] Saying, ‘Yes, Great Divinity,’ Sakka repeated the eight genuine praises for him.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, mahābrahme’ti kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe payirudāhāsi.
[¶48] > Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññati, bhavaṁ mahābrahmā? Yāvañca so bhagavā bahujanahitāya paṭipanno bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Evaṁ bahujanahitāya paṭipannaṁ bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶49] > Pali: Svākkhāto kho pana tena bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhi. Evaṁ opaneyyikassa dhammassa desetāraṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶50] > Pali: “Idaṁ kusalan”ti kho pana tena bhagavatā supaññattaṁ, “idaṁ akusalan”ti supaññattaṁ, “idaṁ sāvajjaṁ idaṁ anavajjaṁ, idaṁ sevitabbaṁ idaṁ na sevitabbaṁ, idaṁ hīnaṁ idaṁ paṇītaṁ, idaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgan”ti supaññattaṁ. Evaṁ kusalākusalasāvajjānavajjasevitabbāsevitabbahīnapaṇītakaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgānaṁ dhammānaṁ paññāpetāraṁ. Imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶51] > Pali: Supaññattā kho pana tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṁ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṁsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā ca. Seyyathāpi nāma gaṅgodakaṁ yamunodakena saṁsandati sameti; evameva supaññattā tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṁ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṁsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā ca. Evaṁ nibbānagāminiyā paṭipadāya paññāpetāraṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶52] > Pali: Abhinipphanno kho pana tassa bhagavato lābho abhinipphanno siloko, yāva maññe khattiyā sampiyāyamānarūpā viharanti. Vigatamado kho pana so bhagavā āhāraṁ āhāreti. Evaṁ vigatamadaṁ āhāraṁ āharayamānaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶53] > Pali: Laddhasahāyo kho pana so bhagavā sekhānañceva paṭipannānaṁ khīṇāsavānañca vusitavataṁ, te bhagavā apanujja ekārāmataṁ anuyutto viharati. Evaṁ ekārāmataṁ anuyuttaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶54] > Pali: Yathāvādī kho pana so bhagavā tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī; iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Evaṁ dhammānudhammappaṭippannaṁ imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā.
[¶55] > Pali: Tiṇṇavicikiccho kho pana so bhagavā vigatakathaṅkatho pariyositasaṅkappo ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyaṁ. Evaṁ tiṇṇavicikicchaṁ vigatakathaṅkathaṁ pariyositasaṅkappaṁ ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyaṁ. Imināpaṅgena samannāgataṁ satthāraṁ neva atītaṁse samanupassāma, na panetarahi, aññatra tena bhagavatā’ti.
[¶56] Hearing them, the divinity Sanaṅkumāra was uplifted and overjoyed, full of rapture and happiness. Then the divinity Sanaṅkumāra manifested in a solid life-form, taking on the appearance of the youth Pañcasikha, and appeared to the gods of the thirty-three. Rising into the air, he sat cross-legged in the sky, like a strong man might sit cross-legged on a well-appointed couch or on level ground. There he addressed the gods of the thirty-three:
> Pali: Ime kho, bhante, sakko devānamindo brahmuno sanaṅkumārassa bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe payirudāhāsi. Tena sudaṁ, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro attamano hoti pamudito pītisomanassajāto bhagavato aṭṭha yathābhucce vaṇṇe sutvā. Atha, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro oḷārikaṁ attabhāvaṁ abhinimminitvā kumāravaṇṇī hutvā pañcasikho devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ pāturahosi. So vehāsaṁ abbhuggantvā ākāse antalikkhe pallaṅkena nisīdi. Seyyathāpi, bhante, balavā puriso supaccatthate vā pallaṅke same vā bhūmibhāge pallaṅkena nisīdeyya; evameva kho, bhante, brahmā sanaṅkumāro vehāsaṁ abbhuggantvā ākāse antalikkhe pallaṅkena nisīditvā deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi:
[¶57] 5. The Story of the Steward
> Pali: 5. Govindabrāhmaṇavatthu
[¶58] ‘What do the gods of the thirty-three think about the extent of the Buddha’s great wisdom?
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññanti, bhonto devā tāvatiṁsā, yāva dīgharattaṁ mahāpaññova so bhagavā ahosi.
[¶59] Once upon a time, there was a king named Disampati. He had a brahmin high priest named the Steward. Disampati’s son was the prince named Reṇu, while the Steward’s son was the student named Jotipāla. There were Reṇu the prince, Jotipāla the student, and six other aristocrats; these eight became friends.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bho, rājā disampati nāma ahosi. Disampatissa rañño govindo nāma brāhmaṇo purohito ahosi. Disampatissa rañño reṇu nāma kumāro putto ahosi. Govindassa brāhmaṇassa jotipālo nāma māṇavo putto ahosi. Iti reṇu ca rājaputto jotipālo ca māṇavo aññe ca cha khattiyā iccete aṭṭha sahāyā ahesuṁ.
[¶60] In due course the brahmin Steward passed away. At his passing, King Disampati lamented, “At a time when I have relinquished all my duties to the brahmin Steward and amuse myself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation, he passes away!”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, ahorattānaṁ accayena govindo brāhmaṇo kālamakāsi. Govinde brāhmaṇe kālaṅkate rājā disampati paridevesi: “yasmiṁ vata, bho, mayaṁ samaye govinde brāhmaṇe sabbakiccāni sammā vossajjitvā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārema, tasmiṁ no samaye govindo brāhmaṇo kālaṅkato”ti.
[¶61] When he said this, Prince Reṇu said to him, “Your Majesty, don’t lament too much at the Steward’s passing. He has a son named Jotipāla, who is even more astute and expert than his father. He should manage the affairs that were managed by his father.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bho, reṇu rājaputto rājānaṁ disampatiṁ etadavoca: “mā kho tvaṁ, deva, govinde brāhmaṇe kālaṅkate atibāḷhaṁ paridevesi. Atthi, deva, govindassa brāhmaṇassa jotipālo nāma māṇavo putto paṇḍitataro ceva pitarā, alamatthadasataro ceva pitarā; yepissa pitā atthe anusāsi, tepi jotipālasseva māṇavassa anusāsaniyā”ti.
[¶62] “Is that so, my prince?”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, kumārā”ti?
[¶63] “That is so, Your Majesty.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti.
[¶64] 6. The Story of the Great Steward
> Pali: 6. Mahāgovindavatthu
[¶65] So King Disampati addressed one of his men, “Please, my man, go to the student Jotipāla, and say to him, ‘Best wishes, Jotipāla! You are summoned by King Disampati; he wants to see you.’”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, rājā disampati aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yena jotipālo māṇavo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ evaṁ vadehi: ‘bhavamatthu bhavantaṁ jotipālaṁ, rājā disampati bhavantaṁ jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantayati, rājā disampati bhoto jotipālassa māṇavassa dassanakāmo’”ti.
[¶66] “Yes, Your Majesty,” replied that man, and did as he was asked. Then Jotipāla went to the king and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho, bho, so puriso disampatissa rañño paṭissutvā yena jotipālo māṇavo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ etadavoca: “bhavamatthu bhavantaṁ jotipālaṁ, rājā disampati bhavantaṁ jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ āmantayati, rājā disampati bhoto jotipālassa māṇavassa dassanakāmo”ti. “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho, bho, jotipālo māṇavo tassa purisassa paṭissutvā yena rājā disampati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā disampatinā raññā saddhiṁ sammodi;
[¶67] When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and the king said to him, “May you, Jotipāla, manage my affairs—please don’t turn me down! I shall appoint you to your father’s position, and anoint you as Steward.”
> Pali: sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho, bho, jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ rājā disampati etadavoca: “anusāsatu no bhavaṁ jotipālo, mā no bhavaṁ jotipālo anusāsaniyā paccabyāhāsi. Pettike taṁ ṭhāne ṭhapessāmi, govindiye abhisiñcissāmī”ti.
[¶68] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Jotipāla.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho, bho, so jotipālo māṇavo disampatissa rañño paccassosi.
[¶69] So the king anointed him as Steward and appointed him to his father’s position. After his appointment, the Steward Jotipāla managed both the affairs that his father had managed, and other affairs that his father had not managed. He organized both the works that his father had organized, and other works that his father had not organized. When people noticed this they said, “The brahmin is indeed a Steward, a Great Steward!” And that’s how the student Jotipāla came to be known as the Great Steward.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, rājā disampati jotipālaṁ māṇavaṁ govindiye abhisiñci, taṁ pettike ṭhāne ṭhapesi. Abhisitto jotipālo māṇavo govindiye pettike ṭhāne ṭhapito yepissa pitā atthe anusāsi tepi atthe anusāsati, yepissa pitā atthe nānusāsi tepi atthe anusāsati; yepissa pitā kammante abhisambhosi tepi kammante abhisambhoti, yepissa pitā kammante nābhisambhosi tepi kammante abhisambhoti. Tamenaṁ manussā evamāhaṁsu: “govindo vata, bho, brāhmaṇo, mahāgovindo vata, bho, brāhmaṇo”ti. Iminā kho evaṁ, bho, pariyāyena jotipālassa māṇavassa govindo mahāgovindotveva samaññā udapādi.
[¶70] 6.1. Dividing the Realm
> Pali: 6.1. Rajjasaṁvibhajana
[¶71] Then the Great Steward went to the six aristocrats and said, “King Disampati is old, elderly and senior, advanced in years, and has reached the final stage of life. Who knows how long he has to live? It’s likely that when he passes away the king-makers will anoint Prince Reṇu as king. Come, sirs, go to Prince Reṇu and say, ‘Prince Reṇu, we are your friends, dear, beloved, and cherished. We have shared your joys and sorrows. King Disampati is old, elderly and senior, advanced in years, and has reached the final stage of life. Who knows how long he has to live? It’s likely that when he passes away the king-makers will anoint you as king. If you should gain kingship, share it with us.’”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena te cha khattiyā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te cha khattiye etadavoca: “disampati kho, bho, rājā jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti jīvitaṁ? Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ disampatimhi raññe kālaṅkate rājakattāro reṇuṁ rājaputtaṁ rajje abhisiñceyyuṁ. Āyantu, bhonto, yena reṇu rājaputto tenupasaṅkamatha; upasaṅkamitvā reṇuṁ rājaputtaṁ evaṁ vadetha: ‘mayaṁ kho bhoto reṇussa sahāyā piyā manāpā appaṭikūlā, yaṁsukho bhavaṁ taṁsukhā mayaṁ, yaṁdukkho bhavaṁ taṁdukkhā mayaṁ. Disampati kho, bho, rājā jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti jīvitaṁ? Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ disampatimhi raññe kālaṅkate rājakattāro bhavantaṁ reṇuṁ rajje abhisiñceyyuṁ. Sace bhavaṁ reṇu rajjaṁ labhetha, saṁvibhajetha no rajjenā’”ti.
[¶72] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the six aristocrats. They went to Prince Reṇu and put the proposal to him.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho, bho, te cha khattiyā mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena reṇu rājaputto tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā reṇuṁ rājaputtaṁ etadavocuṁ: “mayaṁ kho bhoto reṇussa sahāyā piyā manāpā appaṭikūlā; yaṁsukho bhavaṁ taṁsukhā mayaṁ, yaṁdukkho bhavaṁ taṁdukkhā mayaṁ. Disampati kho, bho, rājā jiṇṇo vuddho mahallako addhagato vayoanuppatto, ko nu kho pana bho jānāti jīvitaṁ? Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ disampatimhi raññe kālaṅkate rājakattāro bhavantaṁ reṇuṁ rajje abhisiñceyyuṁ. Sace bhavaṁ reṇu rajjaṁ labhetha, saṁvibhajetha no rajjenā”ti.
[¶73] The prince replied, “Who else, sirs, in my realm ought to prosper if not you? If I gain kingship, I will share it with you all.”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bho, añño mama vijite sukho bhavetha, aññatra bhavantebhi? Sacāhaṁ, bho, rajjaṁ labhissāmi, saṁvibhajissāmi vo rajjenā”ti.
[¶74] In due course King Disampati passed away. At his passing, the king-makers anointed Prince Reṇu as king. But after being anointed, King Reṇu amused himself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, ahorattānaṁ accayena rājā disampati kālamakāsi. Disampatimhi raññe kālaṅkate rājakattāro reṇuṁ rājaputtaṁ rajje abhisiñciṁsu. Abhisitto reṇu rajjena pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti.
[¶75] Then the Great Steward went to the six aristocrats and said, “King Disampati has passed away. But after being anointed, King Reṇu amused himself, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. Who knows the intoxicating power of sensual pleasures? Come, sirs, go to King Reṇu and say, ‘Worthy sir, King Disampati has passed away, and you have been anointed as king. Do you remember what you said?’”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena te cha khattiyā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te cha khattiye etadavoca: “disampati kho, bho, rājā kālaṅkato. Abhisitto reṇu rajjena pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti. Ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti, madanīyā kāmā? Āyantu, bhonto, yena reṇu rājā tenupasaṅkamatha; upasaṅkamitvā reṇuṁ rājānaṁ evaṁ vadetha: ‘disampati kho, bho, rājā kālaṅkato, abhisitto bhavaṁ reṇu rajjena, sarati bhavaṁ taṁ vacanan’”ti?
[¶76] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the six aristocrats. They went to King Reṇu and said, “Worthy sir, King Disampati has passed away, and you have been anointed as king. Do you remember what you said?”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho, bho, te cha khattiyā mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa paṭissutvā yena reṇu rājā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā reṇuṁ rājānaṁ etadavocuṁ: “disampati kho, bho, rājā kālaṅkato, abhisitto bhavaṁ reṇu rajjena, sarati bhavaṁ taṁ vacanan”ti?
[¶77] “I remember, sirs. Who is able to neatly divide into seven equal parts this great land, so broad in the north and narrow as the front of a cart in the south?”
> Pali: “Sarāmahaṁ, bho, taṁ vacanaṁ. Ko nu kho, bho, pahoti imaṁ mahāpathaviṁ uttarena āyataṁ dakkhiṇena sakaṭamukhaṁ sattadhā samaṁ suvibhattaṁ vibhajitun”ti?
[¶78] “Who else, sir, if not the Great Steward?”
> Pali: “Ko nu kho, bho, añño pahoti, aññatra mahāgovindena brāhmaṇenā”ti?
[¶79] So King Reṇu addressed one of his men, “Please, my man, go to the brahmin Great Steward and say that King Reṇu summons him.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, reṇu rājā aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: “ehi tvaṁ, ambho purisa, yena mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ evaṁ vadehi: ‘rājā taṁ, bhante, reṇu āmantetī’”ti.
[¶80] “Yes, Your Majesty,” replied that man, and did as he was asked. Then the Great Steward went to the king and exchanged greetings with him.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho, bho, so puriso reṇussa rañño paṭissutvā yena mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavoca: “rājā taṁ, bhante, reṇu āmantetī”ti. “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo tassa purisassa paṭissutvā yena reṇu rājā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā reṇunā raññā saddhiṁ sammodi.
[¶81] When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side, and the king said to him, “Come, let the good Steward neatly divide into seven equal parts this great land, so broad in the north and narrow as the front of a cart in the south.”
> Pali: Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho, bho, mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ reṇu rājā etadavoca: “etu, bhavaṁ govindo imaṁ mahāpathaviṁ uttarena āyataṁ dakkhiṇena sakaṭamukhaṁ sattadhā samaṁ suvibhattaṁ vibhajatū”ti.
[¶82] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the Great Steward, and did as he was asked. All were arranged like the fronts of carts, and right in the middle was King Reṇu’s nation.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho bho mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo reṇussa rañño paṭissutvā imaṁ mahāpathaviṁ uttarena āyataṁ dakkhiṇena sakaṭamukhaṁ sattadhā samaṁ suvibhattaṁ vibhaji. Sabbāni sakaṭamukhāni paṭṭhapesi. Tatra sudaṁ majjhe reṇussa rañño janapado hoti.
[¶83] Dantapura for the Kaliṅgas;
Potana for the Assakas;
Māhissatī for the Avantis;
Roruka for the Sovīras;
> Pali: Dantapuraṁ kaliṅgānaṁ,
assakānañca potanaṁ;
Mahesayaṁ avantīnaṁ,
sovīrānañca rorukaṁ.
[¶84] Mithilā for the Videhas;
Campā was laid out for the Aṅgas;
and Varanasi for the Kāsis:
these were laid out by the Steward.
> Pali: Mithilā ca videhānaṁ,
campā aṅgesu māpitā;
Bārāṇasī ca kāsīnaṁ,
ete govindamāpitāti.
[¶85] Then those six aristocrats were delighted with their respective gains, having achieved all they wished for, “We have received exactly what we wanted, what we wished for, what we desired, what we yearned for.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, te cha khattiyā yathāsakena lābhena attamanā ahesuṁ paripuṇṇasaṅkappā: “yaṁ vata no ahosi icchitaṁ, yaṁ ākaṅkhitaṁ, yaṁ adhippetaṁ, yaṁ abhipatthitaṁ, taṁ no laddhan”ti.
## 39. DN 19 · The Great Steward · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/39/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/39/#p-N
[¶0] Sattabhū and Brahmadatta,
Vessabhū and Bharata,
Reṇu and the two Dhataraṭṭhas:
these were the seven Bhāratas.
> Pali: Sattabhū brahmadatto ca,
vessabhū bharato saha;
Reṇu dve dhataraṭṭhā ca,
tadāsuṁ satta bhāradhāti.
[¶1] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶2] 6.2. A Good Reputation
> Pali: 6.2. Kittisaddaabbhuggamana
[¶3] Then the six aristocrats approached the Great Steward and said, “Steward, just as you are King Reṇu’s friend, dear, beloved, and cherished, you are also our friend. Would you manage our affairs? Please don’t turn us down!”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, te cha khattiyā yena mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ etadavocuṁ: “yathā kho bhavaṁ govindo reṇussa rañño sahāyo piyo manāpo appaṭikūlo. Evameva kho bhavaṁ govindo amhākampi sahāyo piyo manāpo appaṭikūlo, anusāsatu no bhavaṁ govindo; mā no bhavaṁ govindo anusāsaniyā paccabyāhāsī”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, worthy sirs,” replied the Great Steward. Then the Great Steward managed the realms of the seven kings. And he taught seven well-to-do brahmins, and seven hundred bathed initiates to recite the hymns.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo tesaṁ channaṁ khattiyānaṁ paccassosi. Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo satta ca rājāno khattiye muddhāvasitte rajje anusāsi, satta ca brāhmaṇamahāsāle satta ca nhātakasatāni mante vācesi.
[¶5] After some time he got this good reputation, “The Great Steward sees the Divinity in person! The Great Steward discusses, converses, and consults with the Divinity in person!”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa aparena samayena evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchi: “sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ passati, sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmunā sākaccheti sallapati mantetī”ti.
[¶6] The Great Steward thought, “I have the reputation of seeing the Divinity in person, and discussing with him in person. But I don’t. I have heard that brahmins of the past who were elderly and senior, the tutors of tutors, said: ‘Whoever goes on retreat for the four months of the rainy season and practices the absorption on compassion sees the Divinity and discusses with him.’ Why don’t I do that?”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “mayhaṁ kho evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ passati, sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmunā sākaccheti sallapati mantetī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ brahmānaṁ passāmi, na brahmunā sākacchemi, na brahmunā sallapāmi, na brahmunā mantemi. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘yo vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyati, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyati, so brahmānaṁ passati brahmunā sākaccheti brahmunā sallapati brahmunā mantetī’ti. Yannūnāhaṁ vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyeyyaṁ, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyeyyan”ti.
[¶7] So the Great Steward went to King Reṇu and told him of the situation, saying, “Sir, I wish to go on retreat for the four months of the rainy season and practice the absorption on compassion. No one should approach me, except the one who serves my meal.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena reṇu rājā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā reṇuṁ rājānaṁ etadavoca: “mayhaṁ kho, bho, evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ passati, sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmunā sākaccheti sallapati mantetī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ, bho, brahmānaṁ passāmi, na brahmunā sākacchemi, na brahmunā sallapāmi, na brahmunā mantemi. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘yo vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyati, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyati, so brahmānaṁ passati, brahmunā sākaccheti brahmunā sallapati brahmunā mantetī’ti. Icchāmahaṁ, bho, vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyituṁ, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyituṁ; namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena bhattābhihārenā”ti.
[¶8] “Please do so, Steward, at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni bhavaṁ govindo kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶9] Then the Great Steward went to the six aristocrats to put the same proposal, and received the same reply.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena te cha khattiyā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te cha khattiye etadavoca: “mayhaṁ kho, bho, evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ passati, sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmunā sākaccheti sallapati mantetī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ, bho, brahmānaṁ passāmi, na brahmunā sākacchemi, na brahmunā sallapāmi, na brahmunā mantemi. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ, ‘yo vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyati, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyati, so brahmānaṁ passati brahmunā sākaccheti brahmunā sallapati brahmunā mantetī’ti. Icchāmahaṁ, bho, vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyituṁ, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyituṁ; namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena bhattābhihārenā”ti. “Yassadāni bhavaṁ govindo kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶10] He also went to the seven well-to-do brahmins and seven hundred bathed initiates and put to them the same proposal, adding, “Sirs, rehearse the hymns in detail as you have learned and memorized them, and teach each other how to recite.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena te satta ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā satta ca nhātakasatāni tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te satta ca brāhmaṇamahāsāle satta ca nhātakasatāni etadavoca: “mayhaṁ kho, bho, evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ passati, sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmunā sākaccheti sallapati mantetī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ, bho, brahmānaṁ passāmi, na brahmunā sākacchemi, na brahmunā sallapāmi, na brahmunā mantemi. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘yo vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyati, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyati, so brahmānaṁ passati, brahmunā sākaccheti, brahmunā sallapati, brahmunā mantetī’ti. Tena hi, bho, yathāsute yathāpariyatte mante vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karotha, aññamaññañca mante vācetha; icchāmahaṁ, bho, vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyituṁ, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyituṁ;
[¶11] And they too said, “Please do so, Steward, at your convenience.”
> Pali: namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena bhattābhihārenā”ti. “Yassadāni bhavaṁ govindo kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶12] Then the Great Steward went to his forty equal wives to put the same proposal to them, and received the same reply.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena cattārīsā bhariyā sādisiyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā cattārīsā bhariyā sādisiyo etadavoca: “mayhaṁ kho, bhotī, evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ passati, sakkhi mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmunā sākaccheti sallapati mantetī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ, bhotī, brahmānaṁ passāmi, na brahmunā sākacchemi, na brahmunā sallapāmi, na brahmunā mantemi. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ ‘yo vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyati, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyati, so brahmānaṁ passati, brahmunā sākaccheti, brahmunā sallapati, brahmunā mantetī’ti, icchāmahaṁ, bhotī, vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyituṁ, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyituṁ; namhi kenaci upasaṅkamitabbo aññatra ekena bhattābhihārenā”ti. “Yassadāni bhavaṁ govindo kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶13] Then the Great Steward had a new ceremonial hall built to the east of his citadel, where he went on retreat for the four months of the rainy season and practiced the absorption on compassion. And no one approached him except the one who served his meals.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo puratthimena nagarassa navaṁ sandhāgāraṁ kārāpetvā vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyi, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyi; nāssudha koci upasaṅkamati aññatra ekena bhattābhihārena.
[¶14] But then, when the four months had passed, the Great Steward became dissatisfied and anxious, “I have heard that brahmins of the past said that whoever goes on retreat for the four months of the rainy season and practices the absorption on compassion sees the Divinity and discusses with him. But I neither see the Divinity nor discuss with him.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa catunnaṁ māsānaṁ accayena ahudeva ukkaṇṭhanā ahu paritassanā: “sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ vuddhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘yo vassike cattāro māse paṭisallīyati, karuṇaṁ jhānaṁ jhāyati, so brahmānaṁ passati, brahmunā sākaccheti brahmunā sallapati brahmunā mantetī’ti. Na kho panāhaṁ brahmānaṁ passāmi, na brahmunā sākacchemi na brahmunā sallapāmi na brahmunā mantemī”ti.
[¶15] 6.3. A Discussion With the Divinity
> Pali: 6.3. Brahmunāsākacchā
[¶16] And then the divinity Sanaṅkumāra, knowing the Great Steward’s train of thought, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, vanished from the realm of divinity and reappeared in the Great Steward’s presence. At that, the Great Steward became frightened, scared, his hair standing on end, as he had never seen such a sight before. So he addressed the divinity Sanaṅkumāra in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, brahmā sanaṅkumāro mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya—seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—brahmaloke antarahito mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa sammukhe pāturahosi. Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa ahudeva bhayaṁ ahu chambhitattaṁ ahu lomahaṁso yathā taṁ adiṭṭhapubbaṁ rūpaṁ disvā. Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto brahmānaṁ sanaṅkumāraṁ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi:
[¶17] “Who might you be, sir,
so beautiful, glorious, majestic?
Not knowing, I ask—
how am I to know who you are?”
> Pali: “Vaṇṇavā yasavā sirimā,
ko nu tvamasi mārisa;
Ajānantā taṁ pucchāma,
kathaṁ jānemu taṁ mayan”ti.
[¶18] “In the realm of divinity they know me
as ‘The Eternal Youth’.
All the gods know me thus,
and so you should know me, Steward.”
> Pali: “Maṁ ve kumāraṁ jānanti,
brahmaloke sanantanaṁ;
Sabbe jānanti maṁ devā,
evaṁ govinda jānahi”.
[¶19] “A Divinity deserves a seat and water,
foot-salve, and sweet cakes.
Sir, I ask you to please accept
these gifts of hospitality.”
> Pali: “Āsanaṁ udakaṁ pajjaṁ,
madhusākañca brahmuno;
Agghe bhavantaṁ pucchāma,
agghaṁ kurutu no bhavaṁ”.
[¶20] “I accept the gifts of hospitality
of which you speak.
I grant you the opportunity
to ask whatever you desire—
about welfare and benefit in this life,
or happiness in lives to come.”
> Pali: “Paṭiggaṇhāma te agghaṁ,
yaṁ tvaṁ govinda bhāsasi;
Diṭṭhadhammahitatthāya,
samparāya sukhāya ca;
Katāvakāso pucchassu,
yaṁ kiñci abhipatthitan”ti.
[¶21] Then the Great Steward thought, “the divinity Sanaṅkumāra has granted me an opportunity. Should I ask him about what is beneficial for this life or lives to come?”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “katāvakāso khomhi brahmunā sanaṅkumārena. Kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ brahmānaṁ sanaṅkumāraṁ puccheyyaṁ diṭṭhadhammikaṁ vā atthaṁ samparāyikaṁ vā”ti?
[¶22] Then he thought, “I’m skilled in what is beneficial for this life, and others even ask me about it. Why don’t I ask the Divinity about the benefit that specifically applies to lives to come?” So he addressed the divinity Sanaṅkumāra in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa etadahosi: “kusalo kho ahaṁ diṭṭhadhammikānaṁ atthānaṁ, aññepi maṁ diṭṭhadhammikaṁ atthaṁ pucchanti. Yannūnāhaṁ brahmānaṁ sanaṅkumāraṁ samparāyikaññeva atthaṁ puccheyyan”ti. Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo brahmānaṁ sanaṅkumāraṁ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi:
[¶23] “I’m in doubt, so I ask the Divinity—who is free of doubt—
about things one may learn from another.
Standing on what, training in what
may a mortal reach the deathless realm of divinity?”
> Pali: “Pucchāmi brahmānaṁ sanaṅkumāraṁ,
Kaṅkhī akaṅkhiṁ paravediyesu;
Katthaṭṭhito kimhi ca sikkhamāno,
Pappoti macco amataṁ brahmalokan”ti.
[¶24] “He among mankind, O brahmin, has given up possessiveness,
at one, compassionate,
free of putrefaction, and refraining from sex.
Standing on that, training in that
a mortal may reach the deathless realm of divinity.”
> Pali: “Hitvā mamattaṁ manujesu brahme,
Ekodibhūto karuṇedhimutto;
Nirāmagandho virato methunasmā,
Etthaṭṭhito ettha ca sikkhamāno;
Pappoti macco amataṁ brahmalokan”ti.
[¶25] “Sir, I understand what ‘giving up possessiveness’ means. It’s when someone gives up a large or small fortune, and a large or small family circle. They shave off hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness. That’s how I understand ‘giving up possessiveness’.
> Pali: “‘Hitvā mamattan’ti ahaṁ, bhoto, ājānāmi. Idhekacco appaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā bhogakkhandhaṁ pahāya appaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya mahantaṁ vā ñātiparivaṭṭaṁ pahāya kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, iti ‘hitvā mamattan’ti ahaṁ, bhoto, ājānāmi.
[¶26] Sir, I understand what ‘at one’ means. It’s when someone frequents a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. That’s how I understand ‘at one’.
> Pali: ‘Ekodibhūto’ti ahaṁ, bhoto, ājānāmi. Idhekacco vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ, iti ‘ekodibhūto’ti ahaṁ, bhoto, ājānāmi.
[¶27] Sir, I understand what ‘compassionate’ means. It’s when someone meditates spreading a heart full of compassion to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of compassion to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. That’s how I understand ‘compassionate’.
> Pali: ‘Karuṇedhimutto’ti ahaṁ, bhoto, ājānāmi. Idhekacco karuṇāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadhotiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ karuṇāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati. Iti ‘karuṇedhimutto’ti ahaṁ, bhoto, ājānāmi.
[¶28] But I don’t understand what you say about putrefaction.
> Pali: Āmagandhe ca kho ahaṁ, bhoto, bhāsamānassa na ājānāmi.
[¶29] What among mankind, O the Divinity, is putrefaction?
I don’t understand, so tell me, attentive one:
wrapped in what do people stink,
headed for hell, shut out of the realm of divinity?”
> Pali: Ke āmagandhā manujesu brahme,
Ete avidvā idha brūhi dhīra;
Kenāvaṭā vāti pajā kurutu,
Āpāyikā nivutabrahmalokā”ti.
[¶30] “Anger, lies, cheating, and treachery,
miserliness, vanity, jealousy,
desire, stinginess, harassing others,
greed, hate, vanity, and delusion—
those bound to such things are not devoid of putrefaction;
they’re headed for hell, shut out of the realm of divinity.”
> Pali: “Kodho mosavajjaṁ nikati ca dubbho,
Kadariyatā atimāno usūyā;
Icchā vivicchā paraheṭhanā ca,
Lobho ca doso ca mado ca moho;
Etesu yuttā anirāmagandhā,
Āpāyikā nivutabrahmalokā”ti.
[¶31] “As I understand what you say about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness!”
> Pali: “Yathā kho ahaṁ, bhoto, āmagandhe bhāsamānassa ājānāmi. Te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā. Pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶32] “Please do so, Steward, at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni bhavaṁ govindo kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶33] 6.4. Informing King Reṇu
> Pali: 6.4. Reṇurājaāmantanā
[¶34] So the Great Steward went to King Reṇu and said, “Worthy sir, please now find another high priest to manage the affairs of state for you. I wish to go forth from the lay life to homelessness. As I understand what the Divinity says about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena reṇu rājā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā reṇuṁ rājānaṁ etadavoca: “aññaṁ dāni bhavaṁ purohitaṁ pariyesatu, yo bhoto rajjaṁ anusāsissati. Icchāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā. Pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶35] I announce to King Reṇu,
the lord of the land:
you must learn how to rule,
for I no longer care for my ministry.”
> Pali: “Āmantayāmi rājānaṁ,
reṇuṁ bhūmipatiṁ ahaṁ;
Tvaṁ pajānassu rajjena,
nāhaṁ porohicce rame”.
[¶36] “If you’re lacking any pleasures,
I’ll supply them for you.
I’ll protect you from any harm,
for I command the nation’s army.
You are my father, I am your son!
O Steward, please don’t leave!”
> Pali: “Sace te ūnaṁ kāmehi,
ahaṁ paripūrayāmi te;
Yo taṁ hiṁsati vāremi,
bhūmisenāpati ahaṁ;
Tuvaṁ pitā ahaṁ putto,
mā no govinda pājahi”.
[¶37] “I’m lacking no pleasures,
and no one is harming me.
I’ve heard a non-human voice,
so I no longer care for lay life.”
> Pali: “Namatthi ūnaṁ kāmehi,
hiṁsitā me na vijjati;
Amanussavaco sutvā,
tasmāhaṁ na gahe rame”.
[¶38] “What was that non-human like?
What did he say to you,
hearing which you would abandon
our house and all our people?”
> Pali: “Amanusso kathaṁvaṇṇo,
kiṁ te atthaṁ abhāsatha;
Yañca sutvā jahāsi no,
gehe amhe ca kevalī”.
[¶39] “Before entering this retreat,
I only liked to sacrifice.
I kindled the sacred flame,
strewn about with kusa grass.
> Pali: “Upavutthassa me pubbe,
yiṭṭhukāmassa me sato;
Aggi pajjalito āsi,
kusapattaparitthato.
[¶40] But then the Divinity the Eternal Youth
appeared to me from the realm of divinity.
He answered my question,
hearing which I no longer care for lay life.”
> Pali: Tato me brahmā pāturahu,
brahmalokā sanantano;
So me pañhaṁ viyākāsi,
taṁ sutvā na gahe rame”.
[¶41] “I have faith, O Steward,
in that of which you speak.
Having heard a non-human voice,
what else could you do?
> Pali: “Saddahāmi ahaṁ bhoto,
yaṁ tvaṁ govinda bhāsasi;
Amanussavaco sutvā,
kathaṁ vattetha aññathā.
[¶42] We will follow your example,
Steward, be my Teacher!
Like a gem of beryl—
flawless, immaculate, beautiful—
that’s how pure we shall live,
in the Steward’s dispensation.
> Pali: Te taṁ anuvattissāma,
satthā govinda no bhavaṁ;
Maṇi yathā veḷuriyo,
akāco vimalo subho;
Evaṁ suddhā carissāma,
govindassānusāsaneti.
[¶43] If the Steward is going forth from the lay life to homelessness, we shall do so too. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: Sace bhavaṁ govindo agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissati, mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma. Atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶44] 6.5. Informing the Six Aristocrats
> Pali: 6.5. Chakhattiyaāmantanā
[¶45] Then the Great Steward went to the six aristocrats and said, “Good fellows, please now find another high priest to manage the affairs of state for you. I wish to go forth from the lay life to homelessness. As I understand what the Divinity says about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness!”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena te cha khattiyā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te cha khattiye etadavoca: “aññaṁ dāni bhavanto purohitaṁ pariyesantu, yo bhavantānaṁ rajje anusāsissati. Icchāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā. Pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶46] Then the six aristocrats withdrew to one side and thought up a plan, “These brahmins are greedy for wealth. Why don’t we bestow him with wealth?”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, te cha khattiyā ekamantaṁ apakkamma evaṁ samacintesuṁ: “ime kho brāhmaṇā nāma dhanaluddhā; yannūna mayaṁ mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ dhanena sikkheyyāmā”ti.
[¶47] They returned to the Great Steward and said, “In these seven kingdoms there is abundant wealth. We’ll get you as much as you want.”
> Pali: Te mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: “saṁvijjati kho, bho, imesu sattasu rajjesu pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ, tato bhoto yāvatakena attho, tāvatakaṁ āharīyatan”ti.
[¶48] “Enough, sirs. I already have abundant wealth, owing to my lords. Giving up all that, I shall go forth.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, bho, mamapidaṁ pahūtaṁ sāpateyyaṁ bhavantānaṁyeva vāhasā. Tamahaṁ sabbaṁ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmi. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶49] Then the six aristocrats withdrew to one side and thought up a plan, “These brahmins are greedy for women. Why don’t we bestow him with women?”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, te cha khattiyā ekamantaṁ apakkamma evaṁ samacintesuṁ: “ime kho brāhmaṇā nāma itthiluddhā; yannūna mayaṁ mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ itthīhi sikkheyyāmā”ti.
[¶50] They returned to the Great Steward and said, “In these seven kingdoms there are many women. We’ll get you as many as you want.”
> Pali: Te mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: “saṁvijjanti kho, bho, imesu sattasu rajjesu pahūtā itthiyo, tato bhoto yāvatikāhi attho, tāvatikā ānīyatan”ti.
[¶51] “Enough, sirs. I already have forty equal wives. Giving up all them, I shall go forth.”
> Pali: “Alaṁ, bho, mamapimā cattārīsā bhariyā sādisiyo. Tāpāhaṁ sabbā pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmi. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyanti”.
[¶52] “If the Steward is going forth from the lay life to homelessness, we shall do so too. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: “Sace bhavaṁ govindo agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissati, mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶53] “If you all give up sensual pleasures,
to which ordinary people are attached,
exert yourselves, being strong,
and possessing the power of patience.
> Pali: “Sace jahatha kāmāni,
yattha satto puthujjano;
Ārambhavho daḷhā hotha,
khantībalasamāhitā.
[¶54] This path is the straight path,
this path is supreme.
Guarded by the good, the true teaching
leads to rebirth in the realm of divinity.”
> Pali: Esa maggo ujumaggo,
esa maggo anuttaro;
Saddhammo sabbhi rakkhito,
brahmalokūpapattiyā”ti.
[¶55] “Well then, sir, please wait for seven years. When seven years have passed, we shall go forth with you. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: “Tena hi bhavaṁ govindo satta vassāni āgametu. Sattannaṁ vassānaṁ accayena mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶56] “Seven years is too long, sirs. I cannot wait that long. Who knows what will happen to the living? We are headed for lives to come. We must be thoughtful and wake up! We must do what’s good and lead the spiritual life, for no one born can escape death. I shall go forth.”
> Pali: “Aticiraṁ kho, bho, satta vassāni, nāhaṁ sakkomi, bhavante, satta vassāni āgametuṁ. Ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti jīvitānaṁ. Gamanīyo samparāyo, mantāyaṁ boddhabbaṁ, kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ, caritabbaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶57] “Well then, sir, please wait for six years, five years, four years, three years, two years, one year, seven months, six months, five months, four months, three months, two months, one month, or even a fortnight. When a fortnight has passed, we shall go forth. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: “Tena hi bhavaṁ govindo chabbassāni āgametu …pe… pañca vassāni āgametu … cattāri vassāni āgametu … tīṇi vassāni āgametu … dve vassāni āgametu … ekaṁ vassaṁ āgametu, ekassa vassassa accayena mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti. “Aticiraṁ kho, bho, ekaṁ vassaṁ, nāhaṁ sakkomi bhavante ekaṁ vassaṁ āgametuṁ. Ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti jīvitānaṁ. Gamanīyo samparāyo, mantāyaṁ boddhabbaṁ, kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ, caritabbaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti. “Tena hi bhavaṁ govindo satta māsāni āgametu, sattannaṁ māsānaṁ accayena mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti. “Aticiraṁ kho, bho, satta māsāni, nāhaṁ sakkomi bhavante satta māsāni āgametuṁ. Ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti jīvitānaṁ. Gamanīyo samparāyo, mantāyaṁ boddhabbaṁ, kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ, caritabbaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti. “Tena hi bhavaṁ govindo cha māsāni āgametu …pe… pañca māsāni āgametu … cattāri māsāni āgametu … tīṇi māsāni āgametu … dve māsāni āgametu … ekaṁ māsaṁ āgametu … addhamāsaṁ āgametu, addhamāsassa accayena mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶58] “A fortnight is too long, sirs. I cannot wait that long. Who knows what will happen to the living? We are headed for lives to come. We must be thoughtful and wake up! We must do what’s good and lead the spiritual life, for no one born can escape death. As I understand what the Divinity says about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: “Aticiraṁ kho, bho, addhamāso, nāhaṁ sakkomi bhavante addhamāsaṁ āgametuṁ. Ko nu kho pana, bho, jānāti jīvitānaṁ. Gamanīyo samparāyo, mantāyaṁ boddhabbaṁ, kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ, caritabbaṁ brahmacariyaṁ, natthi jātassa amaraṇaṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶59] “Well then, sir, please wait for a week, so that we can instruct our sons and brothers in kingship. When a week has passed, we shall go forth. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: “Tena hi bhavaṁ govindo sattāhaṁ āgametu, yāva mayaṁ sake puttabhātaro rajjena anusāsissāma, sattāhassa accayena mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶60] “A week is not too long, sirs. I will wait that long.”
> Pali: “Na ciraṁ kho, bho, sattāhaṁ, āgamessāmahaṁ bhavante sattāhan”ti.
[¶61] 6.6. Informing the Brahmins
> Pali: 6.6. Brāhmaṇamahāsālādīnaṁāmantanā
[¶62] Then the Great Steward also went to the seven well-to-do brahmins and seven hundred bathed initiates and said, “Good fellows, please now find another tutor to teach you to recite the hymns. I wish to go forth from the lay life to homelessness. As I understand what the Divinity says about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena te satta ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā satta ca nhātakasatāni tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā te satta ca brāhmaṇamahāsāle satta ca nhātakasatāni etadavoca: “aññaṁ dāni bhavanto ācariyaṁ pariyesantu, yo bhavantānaṁ mante vācessati. Icchāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa. Te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā, pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶63] “Please don’t go forth from the lay life to homelessness! The life of one gone forth is of little influence or profit, whereas the life of a brahmin is of great influence and profit.”
> Pali: “Mā bhavaṁ govindo agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. Pabbajjā, bho, appesakkhā ca appalābhā ca; brahmaññaṁ mahesakkhañca mahālābhañcā”ti.
[¶64] “Please, good fellows, don’t say that. Who has greater influence and profit than myself? For now I am like a king to kings, like the Divinity to brahmins, like a deity to householders. Giving up all that, I shall go forth. As I understand what the Divinity says about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: “Mā bhavanto evaṁ avacuttha: ‘pabbajjā appesakkhā ca appalābhā ca, brahmaññaṁ mahesakkhañca mahālābhañcā’ti. Ko nu kho, bho, aññatra mayā mahesakkhataro vā mahālābhataro vā. Ahañhi, bho, etarahi rājāva raññaṁ brahmāva brāhmaṇānaṁ devatāva gahapatikānaṁ. Tamahaṁ sabbaṁ pahāya agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmi. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā. Pabbajissāmahaṁ, bho, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶65] “If the Steward is going forth from the lay life to homelessness, we shall do so too. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: “Sace bhavaṁ govindo agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissati, mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶66] 6.7. Informing the Wives
> Pali: 6.7. Bhariyānaṁāmantanā
[¶67] Then the Great Steward went to his forty equal wives and said, “Ladies, please do whatever you wish, whether returning to your own families, or finding another husband. I wish to go forth from the lay life to homelessness. As I understand what the Divinity says about putrefaction, it’s not easy to quell while living at home. I shall go forth from the lay life to homelessness.”
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo yena cattārīsā bhariyā sādisiyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā cattārīsā bhariyā sādisiyo etadavoca: “yā bhotīnaṁ icchati, sakāni vā ñātikulāni gacchatu aññaṁ vā bhattāraṁ pariyesatu. Icchāmahaṁ, bhotī, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajituṁ. Yathā kho pana me sutaṁ brahmuno āmagandhe bhāsamānassa, te na sunimmadayā agāraṁ ajjhāvasatā. Pabbajissāmahaṁ, bhotī, agārasmā anagāriyan”ti.
[¶68] “You are the only family we want! You are the only husband we want! If you are going forth from the lay life to homelessness, we shall do so too. Your destiny shall be ours.”
> Pali: “Tvaññeva no ñāti ñātikāmānaṁ, tvaṁ pana bhattā bhattukāmānaṁ. Sace bhavaṁ govindo agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissati, mayampi agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāma, atha yā te gati, sā no gati bhavissatī”ti.
[¶69] 6.8. The Great Steward Goes Forth
> Pali: 6.8. Mahāgovindapabbajjā
[¶70] When a week had passed, the Great Steward shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. And when he had gone forth, the seven anointed aristocrat kings, the seven brahmins with seven hundred initiates, the forty equal wives, and many thousands of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and many harem women shaved off their hair and beards, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho, bho, mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo tassa sattāhassa accayena kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. Pabbajitaṁ pana mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ satta ca rājāno khattiyā muddhāvasittā satta ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā satta ca nhātakasatāni cattārīsā ca bhariyā sādisiyo anekāni ca khattiyasahassāni anekāni ca brāhmaṇasahassāni anekāni ca gahapatisahassāni anekehi ca itthāgārehi itthiyo kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā mahāgovindaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitaṁ anupabbajiṁsu.
[¶71] Escorted by that assembly, the Great Steward wandered on tour among the villages, towns, and capital cities. And at that time, whenever he arrived at a village or town, he was like a king to kings, like the Divinity to brahmins, like a deity to householders. And whenever people sneezed or tripped over they’d say: “Homage to the Great Steward! Homage to the high priest for the seven!”
> Pali: Tāya sudaṁ, bho, parisāya parivuto mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo gāmanigamarājadhānīsu cārikaṁ carati. Yaṁ kho pana, bho, tena samayena mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā upasaṅkamati, tattha rājāva hoti raññaṁ, brahmāva brāhmaṇānaṁ, devatāva gahapatikānaṁ. Tena kho pana samayena manussā khipanti vā upakkhalanti vā. Te evamāhaṁsu: “namatthu mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa, namatthu satta purohitassā”ti.
[¶72] And the Great Steward meditated spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, he spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. He meditated spreading a heart full of compassion … rejoicing … equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, he spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. And he taught his disciples the path to rebirth in the company of Divinity.
> Pali: Mahāgovindo, bho, brāhmaṇo mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā vihāsi, tathā dutiyaṁ, tathā tatiyaṁ, tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā vihāsi. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā …pe… abyāpajjena pharitvā vihāsi. Sāvakānañca brahmalokasahabyatāya maggaṁ desesi.
[¶73] Those of his disciples who completely understood the Great Steward’s instructions, at the breaking up of the body, after death, were reborn in the realm of divinity. Of those disciples who only partly understood the Great Steward’s instructions, some were reborn in the company of the gods who control what is created by others, while some were reborn in the company of the gods who love to create, or the joyful gods, or the gods of Yama, or the gods of the thirty-three, or the gods of the four great kings. And at the very least they swelled the hosts of the centaurs.
> Pali: Ye kho pana, bho, tena samayena mahāgovindassa brāhmaṇassa sāvakā sabbenasabbaṁ sāsanaṁ ājāniṁsu. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ brahmalokaṁ upapajjiṁsu. Ye na sabbenasabbaṁ sāsanaṁ ājāniṁsu, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā appekacce paranimmitavasavattīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjiṁsu; appekacce nimmānaratīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjiṁsu; appekacce tusitānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjiṁsu; appekacce yāmānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjiṁsu; appekacce tāvatiṁsānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjiṁsu; appekacce cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjiṁsu; ye sabbanihīnaṁ kāyaṁ paripūresuṁ te gandhabbakāyaṁ paripūresuṁ.
[¶74] And so the going forth of all those gentlemen was not in vain, was not barren, but was fruitful and fertile.’
> Pali: Iti kho, bho, sabbesaṁyeva tesaṁ kulaputtānaṁ amoghā pabbajjā ahosi avañjhā saphalā saudrayā’ti.
[¶75] Do you remember this, Blessed One?”
> Pali: Sarati taṁ bhagavā”ti?
[¶76] “I remember, Pañcasikha. I myself was the brahmin Great Steward at that time. And I taught those disciples the path to rebirth in the company of Divinity. But that spiritual path of mine doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. It only leads as far as rebirth in the realm of divinity.
> Pali: “Sarāmahaṁ, pañcasikha. Ahaṁ tena samayena mahāgovindo brāhmaṇo ahosiṁ. Ahaṁ tesaṁ sāvakānaṁ brahmalokasahabyatāya maggaṁ desesiṁ. Taṁ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṁ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā.
[¶77] But this spiritual path does lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. And what is the spiritual path that leads to extinguishment? It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. This is the spiritual path that leads to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment.
> Pali: Idaṁ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati. Katamañca taṁ, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṁ—sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi. Idaṁ kho taṁ, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati.
[¶78] Those of my disciples who completely understand my instructions realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Ye kho pana me, pañcasikha, sāvakā sabbenasabbaṁ sāsanaṁ ājānanti, te āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharanti;
[¶79] Of those disciples who only partly understand my instructions, some, with the ending of the five lower fetters, become reborn spontaneously. They are extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world.
> Pali: ye na sabbenasabbaṁ sāsanaṁ ājānanti, te pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātikā honti tattha parinibbāyino anāvattidhammā tasmā lokā.
[¶80] Some, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, become once-returners. They come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.
> Pali: Ye na sabbenasabbaṁ sāsanaṁ ājānanti, appekacce tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmino honti sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissanti.
[¶81] And some, with the ending of three fetters, become stream-enterers, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.
> Pali: Ye na sabbenasabbaṁ sāsanaṁ ājānanti, appekacce tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpannā honti avinipātadhammā niyatā sambodhiparāyaṇā.
[¶82] And so the going forth of all those gentlemen was not in vain, was not barren, but was fruitful and fertile.”
> Pali: Iti kho, pañcasikha, sabbesaṁyeva imesaṁ kulaputtānaṁ amoghā pabbajjā avañjhā saphalā saudrayā”ti.
[¶83] That is what the Buddha said. Delighted, the centaur Pañcasikha approved and agreed with what the Buddha said. He bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on his right, before vanishing right there.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano pañcasikho gandhabbaputto bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyīti.
[¶84] > Pali: Mahāgovindasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 40. DN 20 · The Great Congregation
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/40/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/40/#p-N
[¶0] DN 20 · The Great Congregation
> Pali: DN 20 · Mahāsamayasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans, in the Great Wood near Kapilavatthu, together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants, all of whom were perfected ones. And most of the deities from ten solar systems had gathered to see the Buddha and the Saṅgha of mendicants.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ mahāvane mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehi; dasahi ca lokadhātūhi devatā yebhuyyena sannipatitā honti bhagavantaṁ dassanāya bhikkhusaṅghañca.
[¶2] Then four deities of the pure abodes, aware of what was happening, thought: “Why don’t we go to the Buddha and each recite a verse in his presence?”
> Pali: Atha kho catunnaṁ suddhāvāsakāyikānaṁ devatānaṁ etadahosi: “ayaṁ kho bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṁ mahāvane mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehi; dasahi ca lokadhātūhi devatā yebhuyyena sannipatitā honti bhagavantaṁ dassanāya bhikkhusaṅghañca. Yannūna mayampi yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato santike paccekaṁ gāthaṁ bhāseyyāmā”ti.
[¶3] Then, as easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, they vanished from the Pure Abodes and reappeared in front of the Buddha. They bowed to the Buddha and stood to one side. Standing to one side, one deity spoke this verse in the Buddha’s presence:
> Pali: Atha kho tā devatā seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—suddhāvāsesu devesu antarahitā bhagavato purato pāturahesuṁ. Atha kho tā devatā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho ekā devatā bhagavato santike imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶4] “There’s a great congregation in the woods,
where heavenly hosts have assembled.
We’ve come to this righteous congregation
to see the invincible Saṅgha!”
> Pali: “Mahāsamayo pavanasmiṁ,
Devakāyā samāgatā;
Āgatamha imaṁ dhammasamayaṁ,
Dakkhitāye aparājitasaṅghan”ti.
[¶5] Then another deity spoke this verse in the Buddha’s presence:
> Pali: Atha kho aparā devatā bhagavato santike imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶6] “The mendicants there are immersed in samādhi,
they’ve straightened their own minds.
Like a charioteer holding the reins,
the astute ones protect their senses.”
> Pali: “Tatra bhikkhavo samādahaṁsu,
Cittamattano ujukaṁ akaṁsu;
Sārathīva nettāni gahetvā,
Indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā”ti.
[¶7] Then another deity spoke this verse in the Buddha’s presence:
> Pali: Atha kho aparā devatā bhagavato santike imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶8] “They snapped the post and snapped the cross-bar,
unstirred, they tore out Indra’s pillar.
They live pure and immaculate,
the young giants tamed by the Clear-eyed One.”
> Pali: “Chetvā khīlaṁ chetvā palighaṁ,
Indakhīlaṁ ūhacca manejā;
Te caranti suddhā vimalā,
Cakkhumatā sudantā susunāgā”ti.
[¶9] Then another deity spoke this verse in the Buddha’s presence:
> Pali: Atha kho aparā devatā bhagavato santike imaṁ gāthaṁ abhāsi:
[¶10] “Anyone who has gone to the Buddha for refuge
won’t go to a plane of loss.
After giving up this human body,
they swell the heavenly host.”
> Pali: “Ye keci buddhaṁ saraṇaṁ gatāse,
Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṁ;
Pahāya mānusaṁ dehaṁ,
Devakāyaṁ paripūressantī”ti.
[¶11] 1. The Gathering of Deities
> Pali: 1. Devatāsannipāta
[¶12] Then the Buddha said to the mendicants:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi:
[¶13] “Mendicants, most of the deities from ten solar systems have gathered to see the Realized One and the mendicant Saṅgha. Those who were perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas in the past also had gatherings of deities that were at best like the gathering for me now. Those who will be perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas in the future will also have gatherings of deities that will be at best like the gathering for me now. I shall declare the names of the heavenly hosts; I shall extol the names of the heavenly hosts; I shall teach the names of the heavenly hosts. Listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhātūsu devatā sannipatitā honti, tathāgataṁ dassanāya bhikkhusaṅghañca. Yepi te, bhikkhave, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṁ etapparamāyeva devatā sannipatitā ahesuṁ seyyathāpi mayhaṁ etarahi. Yepi te, bhikkhave, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṁ etapparamāyeva devatā sannipatitā bhavissanti seyyathāpi mayhaṁ etarahi. Ācikkhissāmi, bhikkhave, devakāyānaṁ nāmāni; kittayissāmi, bhikkhave, devakāyānaṁ nāmāni; desessāmi, bhikkhave, devakāyānaṁ nāmāni. Taṁ suṇātha, sādhukaṁ manasikarotha, bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶14] “Yes, sir,” they replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.
[¶15] The Buddha said this:
> Pali: Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶16] “I invoke a paean of praise!
Where the earth-gods dwell,
there, in mountain caves,
resolute and composed,
> Pali: “Silokamanukassāmi,
yattha bhummā tadassitā;
Ye sitā girigabbharaṁ,
pahitattā samāhitā.
[¶17] dwell many like lonely lions,
who have mastered their fears.
Their minds are bright and pure,
clear and unclouded.”
> Pali: Puthūsīhāva sallīnā,
lomahaṁsābhisambhuno;
Odātamanasā suddhā,
vippasannamanāvilā.
[¶18] Over five hundred were known
in the wood at Kapilavatthu.
Consequently, the Teacher addressed
the disciples who love the teaching:
> Pali: Bhiyyo pañcasate ñatvā,
vane kāpilavatthave;
Tato āmantayī satthā,
sāvake sāsane rate.
[¶19] “The heavenly hosts have come forth;
mendicants, you should be aware of them.”
Those monks grew keen,
hearing the Buddha’s instruction.
> Pali: ‘Devakāyā abhikkantā,
te vijānātha bhikkhavo’;
Te ca ātappamakaruṁ,
sutvā buddhassa sāsanaṁ.
[¶20] Knowledge manifested in them,
seeing those non-human beings.
Some saw a hundred,
a thousand, even seventy thousand,
> Pali: Tesaṁ pāturahu ñāṇaṁ,
amanussānadassanaṁ;
Appeke satamaddakkhuṁ,
sahassaṁ atha sattariṁ.
[¶21] while some saw a hundred thousand
non-human beings.
But some saw an endless number
spread out in every direction.
> Pali: Sataṁ eke sahassānaṁ,
amanussānamaddasuṁ;
Appekenantamaddakkhuṁ,
disā sabbā phuṭā ahuṁ.
[¶22] And all that was known
and distinguished by the Clear-eyed One.
Consequently, the Teacher addressed
the disciples who love the teaching:
> Pali: Tañca sabbaṁ abhiññāya,
vavatthitvāna cakkhumā;
Tato āmantayī satthā,
sāvake sāsane rate.
[¶23] “The heavenly hosts have come forth;
mendicants, you should be aware of them.
I shall extol them for you,
with lyrics in proper order.
> Pali: ‘Devakāyā abhikkantā,
te vijānātha bhikkhavo;
Ye vohaṁ kittayissāmi,
girāhi anupubbaso’.
[¶24] There are seven thousand spirits,
earth-gods of Kapilavatthu.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Sattasahassā te yakkhā,
bhummā kāpilavatthavā;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶25] From the Himalayas there are six thousand
spirits of different colors.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Chasahassā hemavatā,
yakkhā nānattavaṇṇino;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶26] From Mount Sātā there are three thousand
spirits of different colors.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Sātāgirā tisahassā,
yakkhā nānattavaṇṇino;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶27] And thus there are sixteen thousand
spirits of different colors.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Iccete soḷasasahassā,
yakkhā nānattavaṇṇino;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶28] From Vessāmitta’s mountain there are five hundred
spirits of different colors.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Vessāmittā pañcasatā,
yakkhā nānattavaṇṇino;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶29] And there’s Kumbhīra of Rājagaha,
whose home is on Mount Vepulla.
Attended by more than
a hundred thousand spirits,
Kumbhīra of Rājagaha
also came to the meeting in the wood.
> Pali: Kumbhīro rājagahiko,
vepullassa nivesanaṁ;
Bhiyyo naṁ satasahassaṁ,
yakkhānaṁ payirupāsati;
Kumbhīro rājagahiko,
sopāgā samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶30] King Dhataraṭṭha rules
the eastern quarter.
Lord of the centaurs,
he’s a great king, glorious.
> Pali: Purimañca disaṁ rājā,
dhataraṭṭho pasāsati;
Gandhabbānaṁ adhipati,
mahārājā yasassiso.
[¶31] And he has many mighty sons
all of them named Indra.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
indanāmā mahabbalā;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶32] King Virūḷhaka rules
the southern quarter.
Lord of the gnomes,
he’s a great king, glorious.
> Pali: Dakkhiṇañca disaṁ rājā,
virūḷho taṁ pasāsati;
Kumbhaṇḍānaṁ adhipati,
mahārājā yasassiso.
[¶33] And he has many mighty sons
all of them named Indra.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
indanāmā mahabbalā;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶34] King Virūpakkha rules
the western quarter.
Lord of the dragons,
he’s a great king, glorious.
> Pali: Pacchimañca disaṁ rājā,
virūpakkho pasāsati;
Nāgānañca adhipati,
mahārājā yasassiso.
[¶35] And he has many mighty sons
all of them named Indra.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
indanāmā mahabbalā;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶36] King Kuvera rules
the northern quarter.
Lord of spirits,
he’s a great king, glorious.
> Pali: Uttarañca disaṁ rājā,
kuvero taṁ pasāsati;
Yakkhānañca adhipati,
mahārājā yasassiso.
[¶37] And he has many mighty sons
all of them named Indra.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
indanāmā mahabbalā;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶38] Dhataraṭṭha in the east,
Virūḷhaka to the south,
Virūpakkha to the west,
and Kuvera in the north.
> Pali: Purimaṁ disaṁ dhataraṭṭho,
dakkhiṇena virūḷhako;
Pacchimena virūpakkho,
kuvero uttaraṁ disaṁ.
[¶39] These four great kings,
all around in the four quarters,
stood there dazzling
in the wood at Kapilavatthu.
> Pali: Cattāro te mahārājā,
samantā caturo disā;
Daddallamānā aṭṭhaṁsu,
vane kāpilavatthave.
[¶40] Their deceitful heathens came,
so treacherous and crafty—
the deceivers Kuṭeṇḍu, Viṭeṇḍu,
with Viṭucca and Viṭuṭa.
> Pali: Tesaṁ māyāvino dāsā,
āguṁ vañcanikā saṭhā;
Māyā kuṭeṇḍu viṭeṇḍu,
viṭucca viṭuṭo saha.
[¶41] And Candana and Kāmaseṭṭha,
Kinnughaṇḍu and Nighaṇḍu,
Panāda and Opamañña,
and Mātali, the god’s equerry.
> Pali: Candano kāmaseṭṭho ca,
kinnighaṇḍu nighaṇḍu ca;
Panādo opamañño ca,
devasūto ca mātali.
[¶42] Cittasena the centaur came too,
and the kings Nala and Janesabha.
Pañcasikha came too, with
Timbaru and Suriyavaccasā.
> Pali: Cittaseno ca gandhabbo,
naḷorājā janesabho;
Āgā pañcasikho ceva,
timbarū sūriyavacchasā.
[¶43] These and other kings there were,
the centaurs with their kings.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Ete caññe ca rājāno,
gandhabbā saha rājubhi;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶44] Then came the dragons of Nābhasa lake,
and those from Vesālī with those from Takkasilā.
The Kambalas and Assataras came
and those from Payāga with their kin.
> Pali: Athāguṁ nāgasā nāgā,
vesālā sahatacchakā;
Kambalassatarā āguṁ,
pāyāgā saha ñātibhi.
[¶45] Those from Yamunā, and the Dhataraṭṭha
dragons came, so glorious.
And Erāvaṇa the great dragon
also came to the meeting in the wood.
> Pali: Yāmunā dhataraṭṭhā ca,
āgū nāgā yasassino;
Erāvaṇo mahānāgo,
sopāgā samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶46] Those who seize the dragon kings by force—
Heavenly, twice-born birds with piercing vision—
swoop down to the wood from the sky;
their name is ‘Rainbow Phoenix’.
> Pali: Ye nāgarāje sahasā haranti,
Dibbā dijā pakkhi visuddhacakkhū;
Vehāyasā te vanamajjhapattā,
Citrā supaṇṇā iti tesa nāmaṁ.
[¶47] But the dragon kings remained fearless,
for the Buddha kept them safe from the phoenixes.
Wooing each other with gentle words,
the dragons and phoenixes took the Buddha as refuge.
> Pali: Abhayaṁ tadā nāgarājānamāsi,
Supaṇṇato khemamakāsi buddho;
Saṇhāhi vācāhi upavhayantā,
Nāgā supaṇṇā saraṇamakaṁsu buddhaṁ.
[¶48] Defeated by Vajirahattha,
the titans live in the ocean.
They’re brothers of Vāsava,
powerful and glorious.
> Pali: Jitā vajirahatthena,
samuddaṁ asurāsitā;
Bhātaro vāsavassete,
iddhimanto yasassino.
[¶49] There’s the terrifying Kālakañjas,
the Dānava and Ghasa titans,
Vepacitti and Sucitti,
Pahārāda with Namuci,
> Pali: Kālakañcā mahābhismā,
asurā dānaveghasā;
Vepacitti sucitti ca,
pahārādo namucī saha.
[¶50] and Bali’s hundred sons,
all named after Virocana.
Bali’s army armed themselves
and went to the auspicious Rāhu, saying:
‘Now is the time, sir,
for the meeting of mendicants in the wood.’
> Pali: Satañca baliputtānaṁ,
sabbe verocanāmakā;
Sannayhitvā balisenaṁ,
rāhubhaddamupāgamuṁ;
‘Samayo dāni bhaddante,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ’.
[¶51] The gods of water and earth,
and fire and wind came there.
The gods of Varuṇa and Varuṇa’s offsping,
and Soma together with Yasa.
> Pali: Āpo ca devā pathavī,
tejo vāyo tadāgamuṁ;
Varuṇā vāraṇā devā,
somo ca yasasā saha.
[¶52] A host of the gods of love
and compassion came, so glorious.
These ten hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
> Pali: Mettā karuṇā kāyikā,
āguṁ devā yasassino;
Dasete dasadhā kāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino.
[¶53] They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶54] The Vishnu and Sahalī gods,
and the unequaled pair of twins.
The gods living on the moon came,
with the Moon before them.
> Pali: Veṇḍudevā sahali ca,
asamā ca duve yamā;
Candassūpanisā devā,
candamāguṁ purakkhatvā.
[¶55] The gods living on the sun came,
with the Sun before them.
And with the stars before them
came the languid gods of clouds.
> Pali: Sūriyassūpanisā devā,
sūriyamāguṁ purakkhatvā;
Nakkhattāni purakkhatvā,
āguṁ mandavalāhakā.
[¶56] And Vāsava came, the greatest of the Vasus,
who is Sakka the Able, Purindada the Firstgiver:
These ten hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
> Pali: Vasūnaṁ vāsavo seṭṭho,
sakkopāgā purindado;
Dasete dasadhā kāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino.
[¶57] They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶58] Then came the Sahabhū gods,
blazing like a crested flame;
and the Ariṭṭhakas and Rojas too,
and the gods hued blue as flax.
> Pali: Athāguṁ sahabhū devā,
jalamaggi sikhāriva;
Ariṭṭhakā ca rojā ca,
umāpupphanibhāsino.
[¶59] The Varuṇas and Sahadhammas,
the Accutas and Anejakas,
the Sūleyyas and Ruciras all came,
as did the Vāsavanesi gods.
These ten hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
> Pali: Varuṇā sahadhammā ca,
accutā ca anejakā;
Sūleyyarucirā āguṁ,
āguṁ vāsavanesino;
Dasete dasadhā kāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino.
[¶60] They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶61] The Samānas, Mahāsamānas,
Mānusas, and Mānusuttamas all came,
and the gods depraved by play,
and those who are malevolent.
> Pali: Samānā mahāsamanā,
mānusā mānusuttamā;
Khiḍḍāpadosikā āguṁ,
āguṁ manopadosikā.
[¶62] Then came the gods of Mercury,
and those who live on Mars.
The Pāragas and Mahāpāragas came,
such glorious gods.
These ten hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
> Pali: Athāguṁ harayo devā,
ye ca lohitavāsino;
Pāragā mahāpāragā,
āguṁ devā yasassino;
Dasete dasadhā kāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino.
[¶63] They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶64] The gods of Venus, the newborn Sun, and the Dawn
came along with those from Saturn.
And the gods of the white globe came
leading the brilliant gods.
> Pali: Sukkā karambhā aruṇā,
āguṁ veghanasā saha;
Odātagayhā pāmokkhā,
āguṁ devā vicakkhaṇā.
[¶65] The Sadāmattas and Hāragajas,
and assorted glorious ones;
Pajjuna came thundering,
he who rains on all quarters.
> Pali: Sadāmattā hāragajā,
missakā ca yasassino;
Thanayaṁ āga pajjunno,
yo disā abhivassati.
[¶66] These ten hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Dasete dasadhā kāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶67] The Khemiyas from the realms of Tusita and Yama,
and the glorious Kaṭṭhakas came;
the Lambītakas, Lāmaseṭṭhas,
those called the Shining, and those Yonder.
The gods who love to create came too,
and those who control what is created by others.
> Pali: Khemiyā tusitā yāmā,
kaṭṭhakā ca yasassino;
Lambītakā lāmaseṭṭhā,
jotināmā ca āsavā;
Nimmānaratino āguṁ,
athāguṁ paranimmitā.
[¶68] These ten hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
They’re powerful and brilliant,
so beautiful and glorious.
Rejoicing, they’ve come forth
to the meeting of mendicants in the wood.
> Pali: Dasete dasadhā kāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino;
Iddhimanto jutimanto,
vaṇṇavanto yasassino;
Modamānā abhikkāmuṁ,
bhikkhūnaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶69] These sixty hosts of gods
shone in all different colors.
They came organized by name,
these and others likewise, thinking:
> Pali: Saṭṭhete devanikāyā,
sabbe nānattavaṇṇino;
Nāmanvayena āgacchuṁ,
ye caññe sadisā saha.
[¶70] ‘They who have shed rebirth, the kindly ones,
the undefiled ones who have crossed the flood—
let us see them, with the dragon who brought them across,
who like the Moon has overcome darkness.’
> Pali: ‘Pavuṭṭhajātimakhilaṁ,
oghatiṇṇamanāsavaṁ;
Dakkhemoghataraṁ nāgaṁ,
candaṁva asitātigaṁ’.
[¶71] Subrahmā and Paramatta came,
with sons of those powerful ones.
Sanaṅkumāra and Tissa
also came to the meeting in the wood.
> Pali: Subrahmā paramatto ca,
puttā iddhimato saha;
Sanaṅkumāro tisso ca,
sopāga samitiṁ vanaṁ.
[¶72] Of a thousand realms of divinity,
the Great Divinity stands forth.
He has arisen, brilliant,
his formidable body so glorious.
> Pali: Sahassaṁ brahmalokānaṁ,
mahābrahmābhitiṭṭhati;
Upapanno jutimanto,
bhismākāyo yasassiso.
[¶73] Ten Gods Almighty came there,
each one of them wielding power,
and in the middle of them came
Hārita with his following.”
> Pali: Dasettha issarā āguṁ,
paccekavasavattino;
Tesañca majjhato āga,
hārito parivārito.
[¶74] When they had all come forth—
the gods with their Lord, and the divinities—
Māra’s army came forth too:
see the stupidity of the Dark Lord!
> Pali: Te ca sabbe abhikkante,
sainde deve sabrahmake;
Mārasenā abhikkāmi,
passa kaṇhassa mandiyaṁ.
[¶75] “Come, seize them and bind them,” he said,
“let them be bound by desire!
Surround them on all sides,
don’t let any escape!”
> Pali: ‘Etha gaṇhatha bandhatha,
rāgena baddhamatthu vo;
Samantā parivāretha,
mā vo muñcittha koci naṁ’.
[¶76] And so there the great general,
the Dark Lord sent forth his army.
He struck the ground with his fist
to make a horrifying sound
> Pali: Iti tattha mahāseno,
kaṇho senaṁ apesayi;
Pāṇinā talamāhacca,
saraṁ katvāna bheravaṁ.
[¶77] like a monsoon cloud,
thundering and flashing.
But then turned back,
furious, out of control.
> Pali: Yathā pāvussako megho,
thanayanto savijjuko;
Tadā so paccudāvatti,
saṅkuddho asayaṁvase.
[¶78] And all that was known
and distinguished by the Clear-eyed One.
Consequently, the Teacher addressed
the disciples who love the teaching:
> Pali: Tañca sabbaṁ abhiññāya,
vavatthitvāna cakkhumā;
Tato āmantayī satthā,
sāvake sāsane rate.
[¶79] “Māra’s army has arrived;
mendicants, you should be aware of them.”
Those monks grew keen,
hearing the Buddha’s instruction.
The army fled from those free of passion,
and not a single hair was stirred!
> Pali: ‘Mārasenā abhikkantā,
te vijānātha bhikkhavo’;
Te ca ātappamakaruṁ,
sutvā buddhassa sāsanaṁ;
Vītarāgehi pakkāmuṁ,
nesaṁ lomāpi iñjayuṁ.
[¶80] “All triumphant in battle,
so fearless and glorious.
They rejoice with all the spirits,
the disciples renowned among men.”
> Pali: ‘Sabbe vijitasaṅgāmā,
bhayātītā yasassino;
Modanti saha bhūtehi,
sāvakā te janesutā’”ti.
[¶81] > Pali: Mahāsamayasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 41. DN 21 · Sakka’s Questions · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/41/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/41/#p-N
[¶0] DN 21 · Sakka’s Questions
> Pali: DN 21 · Sakkapañhasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Magadhans, where east of Rājagaha there is a brahmin village named Ambasaṇḍā, north of which, on Mount Vediyaka, is Indra’s hill cave.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā magadhesu viharati, pācīnato rājagahassa ambasaṇḍā nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tassuttarato vediyake pabbate indasālaguhāyaṁ.
[¶2] Now at that time Sakka, the lord of gods, grew eager to see the Buddha. He thought, “Where is the Blessed One at present, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena sakkassa devānamindassa ussukkaṁ udapādi bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Atha kho sakkassa devānamindassa etadahosi: “kahaṁ nu kho bhagavā etarahi viharati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho”ti?
[¶3] Seeing that the Buddha was at Indra’s hill cave, he addressed the gods of the thirty-three, “Good fellows, the Buddha is staying in the land of the Magadhans at Indra’s hill cave. What if we were to go and see that Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: Addasā kho sakko devānamindo bhagavantaṁ magadhesu viharantaṁ pācīnato rājagahassa ambasaṇḍā nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tassuttarato vediyake pabbate indasālaguhāyaṁ. Disvāna deve tāvatiṁse āmantesi: “ayaṁ, mārisā, bhagavā magadhesu viharati, pācīnato rājagahassa ambasaṇḍā nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tassuttarato vediyake pabbate indasālaguhāyaṁ. Yadi pana, mārisā, mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyāma arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti?
[¶4] “Yes, lord,” replied the gods.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhaddantavā”ti kho devā tāvatiṁsā sakkassa devānamindassa paccassosuṁ.
[¶5] Then Sakka addressed the centaur Pañcasikha, “Dear Pañcasikha, the Buddha is staying in the land of the Magadhans at Indra’s hill cave. What if we were to go and see that Blessed One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha?”
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo pañcasikhaṁ gandhabbadevaputtaṁ āmantesi: “ayaṁ, tāta pañcasikha, bhagavā magadhesu viharati pācīnato rājagahassa ambasaṇḍā nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tassuttarato vediyake pabbate indasālaguhāyaṁ. Yadi pana, tāta pañcasikha, mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyāma arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti?
[¶6] “Yes, lord,” replied the centaur Pañcasikha. Taking his arched harp made from the pale timber of wood-apple, he went as Sakka’s attendant.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhaddantavā”ti kho pañcasikho gandhabbadevaputto sakkassa devānamindassa paṭissutvā beluvapaṇḍuvīṇaṁ ādāya sakkassa devānamindassa anucariyaṁ upāgami.
[¶7] Then Sakka went at the head of a retinue consisting of the gods of the thirty-three and the godling centaur Pañcasikha. As easily as a strong person would extend or contract their arm, he vanished from the heaven of the gods of the thirty-three and landed on Mount Vediyaka north of Ambasaṇḍā.
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo devehi tāvatiṁsehi parivuto pañcasikhena gandhabbadevaputtena purakkhato— seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—devesu tāvatiṁsesu antarahito magadhesu pācīnato rājagahassa ambasaṇḍā nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tassuttarato vediyake pabbate paccuṭṭhāsi.
[¶8] Now at that time a dazzling light appeared over Mount Vediyaka and Ambasaṇḍā, as happens through the glory of the gods. People in the villages round about, terrified, shocked, and awestruck, said, “Mount Vediyaka must be on fire today, blazing and burning! Oh why has such a dazzling light appeared over Mount Vediyaka and Ambasaṇḍā?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena vediyako pabbato atiriva obhāsajāto hoti ambasaṇḍā ca brāhmaṇagāmo yathā taṁ devānaṁ devānubhāvena. Apissudaṁ parito gāmesu manussā evamāhaṁsu: “ādittassu nāmajja vediyako pabbato jhāyatisu nāmajja vediyako pabbato jalatisu. Nāmajja vediyako pabbato. Kiṁsu nāmajja vediyako pabbato atiriva obhāsajāto ambasaṇḍā ca brāhmaṇagāmo”ti; saṁviggā lomahaṭṭhajātā ahesuṁ.
[¶9] Then Sakka addressed the centaur Pañcasikha, “My dear Pañcasikha, it is hard for one like me to get near the Realized Ones while they are on retreat practicing absorption, enjoying absorption. But if you were to charm the Buddha first, then I could go to see him.”
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo pañcasikhaṁ gandhabbadevaputtaṁ āmantesi: “durupasaṅkamā kho, tāta pañcasikha, tathāgatā mādisena, jhāyī jhānaratā, tadantaraṁ paṭisallīnā. Yadi pana tvaṁ, tāta pañcasikha, bhagavantaṁ paṭhamaṁ pasādeyyāsi, tayā, tāta, paṭhamaṁ pasāditaṁ pacchā mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkameyyāma arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhan”ti.
[¶10] “Yes, lord,” replied the centaur Pañcasikha. Taking his arched harp made from the pale timber of wood-apple, he went to Indra’s hill cave. When he had drawn near, he stood to one side, thinking, “This is neither too far nor too near; and he’ll hear my voice.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhaddantavā”ti kho pañcasikho gandhabbadevaputto sakkassa devānamindassa paṭissutvā beluvapaṇḍuvīṇaṁ ādāya yena indasālaguhā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā: “ettāvatā me bhagavā neva atidūre bhavissati nāccāsanne, saddañca me sossatī”ti— ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.
[¶11] 1. Pañcasikha’s Song
> Pali: 1. Pañcasikhagītagāthā
[¶12] Standing to one side, Pañcasikha played his arched harp, and sang these verses on the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, the perfected ones, and sensual love.
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ ṭhito kho pañcasikho gandhabbadevaputto beluvapaṇḍuvīṇaṁ assāvesi, imā ca gāthā abhāsi buddhūpasañhitā dhammūpasañhitā saṅghūpasañhitā arahantūpasañhitā kāmūpasañhitā:
[¶13] “O Bhaddā Suriyavaccasā, my Darling Sunshine,
I pay homage to your father Timbaru,
through whom was born a lady so fine,
to fill me with a joy I never knew.
> Pali: “Vande te pitaraṁ bhadde,
timbaruṁ sūriyavacchase;
Yena jātāsi kalyāṇī,
ānandajananī mama.
[¶14] As sweet as a breeze to one who’s sweating,
or when thirsty, a sweet and cooling drink,
so dear are you, Aṅgīrasi, to me—
just like the teaching is to all the saints!
> Pali: Vātova sedataṁ kanto,
pānīyaṁva pipāsato;
Aṅgīrasi piyāmesi,
dhammo arahatāmiva.
[¶15] Like a cure when you’re struck by fever dire,
or food to ease the hunger pain,
come on, Bhaddā, please put out my fire,
quench me like water on a flame.
> Pali: Āturasseva bhesajjaṁ,
bhojanaṁva jighacchato;
Parinibbāpaya maṁ bhadde,
jalantamiva vārinā.
[¶16] As elephants burning in the heat of summer,
sink down in a lotus pond to rest,
so cool, full of petals and of pollen—
that’s how I would plunge into your breast.
> Pali: Sītodakaṁ pokkharaṇiṁ,
yuttaṁ kiñjakkhareṇunā;
Nāgo ghammābhitattova,
ogāhe te thanūdaraṁ.
[¶17] Like elephants bursting bonds in rutting season,
beating off the pricks of lance and pikes—
I just don’t understand what is the reason
I’m so crazy for your shapely thighs!
> Pali: Accaṅkusova nāgova,
jitaṁ me tuttatomaraṁ;
Kāraṇaṁ nappajānāmi,
sammatto lakkhaṇūruyā.
[¶18] For you, my heart is full of passion,
I’m in a besotted state of mind.
There is no going back, I’m just not able,
I’m like a fish that’s hooked up on the line.
> Pali: Tayi gedhitacittosmi,
cittaṁ vipariṇāmitaṁ;
Paṭigantuṁ na sakkomi,
vaṅkaghastova ambujo.
[¶19] Come on, my Bhaddā, hold me, fair of thighs!
Embrace me, maid of captivating eyes!
Take me in your arms, my lovely lady,
that’s all I’d ever want or could desire.
> Pali: Vāmūru saja maṁ bhadde,
saja maṁ mandalocane;
Palissaja maṁ kalyāṇi,
etaṁ me abhipatthitaṁ.
[¶20] Ah, then my desire was such a small thing,
my sweet, with your curling wavy hair;
now, like to arahants an offering,
it’s grown so very much from there.
> Pali: Appako vata me santo,
kāmo vellitakesiyā;
Anekabhāvo samuppādi,
arahanteva dakkhiṇā.
[¶21] Whatever the merit I have forged
by giving to such perfected beings—
may that, my altogether gorgeous,
ripen in togetherness with you.
> Pali: Yaṁ me atthi kataṁ puññaṁ,
arahantesu tādisu;
Taṁ me sabbaṅgakalyāṇi,
tayā saddhiṁ vipaccataṁ.
[¶22] Whatever the merit I have forged
in this vast territory,
may that, my altogether gorgeous,
ripen in togetherness with you.
> Pali: Yaṁ me atthi kataṁ puññaṁ,
asmiṁ pathavimaṇḍale;
Taṁ me sabbaṅgakalyāṇi,
tayā saddhiṁ vipaccataṁ.
[¶23] As the Sakyan, absorbed, did meditate
at one, alert, and mindful too,
the sage seeking the state free of death—
so I, oh my Sunshine, seek for you!
> Pali: Sakyaputtova jhānena,
ekodi nipako sato;
Amataṁ muni jigīsāno,
tamahaṁ sūriyavacchase.
[¶24] And just like the sage would delight,
once he had awakened to the truth,
so I would delight, my fine lady,
were I to become one with you.
> Pali: Yathāpi muni nandeyya,
patvā sambodhimuttamaṁ;
Evaṁ nandeyyaṁ kalyāṇi,
missībhāvaṁ gato tayā.
[¶25] If Sakka were to grant me one wish,
as Lord of the Thirty and Three,
my Bhaddā, you’re all I would wish for,
so strong is the love in me.
> Pali: Sakko ce me varaṁ dajjā,
tāvatiṁsānamissaro;
Tāhaṁ bhadde vareyyāhe,
evaṁ kāmo daḷho mama.
[¶26] Like a freshly blossoming sal tree
is your father, my lady so wise.
I pay homage to he, bowing humbly,
whose daughter is of such a kind.”
> Pali: Sālaṁva na ciraṁ phullaṁ,
pitaraṁ te sumedhase;
Vandamāno namassāmi,
yassāsetādisī pajā”ti.
[¶27] When Pañcasikha had spoken, the Buddha said to him, “Pañcasikha, the sound of your strings blends well with the sound of your singing, so that neither overpowers the other. But when did you compose these verses on the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, the perfected ones, and sensual love?”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhagavā pañcasikhaṁ gandhabbadevaputtaṁ etadavoca: “saṁsandati kho te, pañcasikha, tantissaro gītassarena, gītassaro ca tantissarena; na ca pana te, pañcasikha, tantissaro gītassaraṁ ativattati, gītassaro ca tantissaraṁ. Kadā saṁyūḷhā pana te, pañcasikha, imā gāthā buddhūpasañhitā dhammūpasañhitā saṅghūpasañhitā arahantūpasañhitā kāmūpasañhitā”ti?
[¶28] “This one time, sir, when you were first awakened, you were staying in Uruvelā at the goatherd’s banyan tree on the bank of the Nerañjarā River. And at that time I was in love with Bhaddā Suriyavaccasā, who they call ‘Darling Sunshine’, the daughter of the centaur king Timbaru. But the sister desired another. It was the one named Sikhaṇḍī, the son of Mātali the chariot handler, who she loved. Since I couldn’t win that sister by any means, I took my arched harp to Timbaru’s home, where I played those verses.
> Pali: “Ekamidaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ bhagavā uruvelāyaṁ viharati najjā nerañjarāya tīre ajapālanigrodhe paṭhamābhisambuddho. Tena kho panāhaṁ, bhante, samayena bhaddā nāma sūriyavacchasā timbaruno gandhabbarañño dhītā, tamabhikaṅkhāmi. Sā kho pana, bhante, bhaginī parakāminī hoti; sikhaṇḍī nāma mātalissa saṅgāhakassa putto, tamabhikaṅkhati. Yato kho ahaṁ, bhante, taṁ bhaginiṁ nālatthaṁ kenaci pariyāyena. Athāhaṁ beluvapaṇḍuvīṇaṁ ādāya yena timbaruno gandhabbarañño nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁ; upasaṅkamitvā beluvapaṇḍuvīṇaṁ assāvesiṁ, imā ca gāthā abhāsiṁ buddhūpasañhitā dhammūpasañhitā saṅghūpasañhitā arahantūpasañhitā kāmūpasañhitā—
[¶29] > Pali: Vande te pitaraṁ bhadde,
timbaruṁ sūriyavacchase;
Yena jātāsi kalyāṇī,
ānandajananī mama.
[¶30] > Pali: …pe…
[¶31] > Pali: Sālaṁva na ciraṁ phullaṁ,
pitaraṁ te sumedhase;
Vandamāno namassāmi,
yassāsetādisī pajāti.
[¶32] When I finished, Suriyavaccasā said to me, ‘Good fellow, I have not personally seen the Buddha. But I did hear about him when I went to dance for the gods of the thirty-three in the Hall of Clear Right. Since you extol the Buddha, let us meet up today.’ And that’s when I met up with that sister. But we have not met since.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, bhaddā sūriyavacchasā maṁ etadavoca: ‘na kho me, mārisa, so bhagavā sammukhā diṭṭho, api ca sutoyeva me so bhagavā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sudhammāyaṁ sabhāyaṁ upanaccantiyā. Yato kho tvaṁ, mārisa, taṁ bhagavantaṁ kittesi, hotu no ajja samāgamo’ti. Soyeva no, bhante, tassā bhaginiyā saddhiṁ samāgamo ahosi. Na ca dāni tato pacchā”ti.
[¶33] 2. The Approach of Sakka
> Pali: 2. Sakkūpasaṅkama
[¶34] Then Sakka, lord of gods, thought, “Pañcasikha is exchanging pleasantries with the Buddha.”
> Pali: Atha kho sakkassa devānamindassa etadahosi: “paṭisammodati pañcasikho gandhabbadevaputto bhagavatā, bhagavā ca pañcasikhenā”ti.
[¶35] So he addressed Pañcasikha, “My dear Pañcasikha, please bow to the Buddha for me, saying: ‘Sir, Sakka, lord of gods, with his ministers and retinue, bows with his head at your feet.’”
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo pañcasikhaṁ gandhabbadevaputtaṁ āmantesi: “abhivādehi me tvaṁ, tāta pañcasikha, bhagavantaṁ: ‘sakko, bhante, devānamindo sāmacco saparijano bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī’”ti.
[¶36] “Yes, lord,” replied Pañcasikha. He bowed to the Buddha and said, “Sir, Sakka, lord of gods, with his ministers and retinue, bows with his head at your feet.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhaddantavā”ti kho pañcasikho gandhabbadevaputto sakkassa devānamindassa paṭissutvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādeti: “sakko, bhante, devānamindo sāmacco saparijano bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”ti.
[¶37] “So may Sakka with his ministers and retinue be happy, Pañcasikha,” said the Buddha, “for all want to be happy—whether gods, humans, titans, dragons, centaurs, or any of the other diverse creatures there may be.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ sukhī hotu, pañcasikha, sakko devānamindo sāmacco saparijano; sukhakāmā hi devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā ye caññe santi puthukāyā”ti.
[¶38] For that is how the Realized Ones salute such illustrious spirits. And being saluted by the Buddha, Sakka entered Indra’s hill cave, bowed to the Buddha, and stood to one side. And the gods of the thirty-three did likewise, as did Pañcasikha.
> Pali: Evañca pana tathāgatā evarūpe mahesakkhe yakkhe abhivadanti. Abhivadito sakko devānamindo bhagavato indasālaguhaṁ pavisitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Devāpi tāvatiṁsā indasālaguhaṁ pavisitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Pañcasikhopi gandhabbadevaputto indasālaguhaṁ pavisitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.
[¶39] And at that time the uneven places were evened out, the cramped places were opened up, the darkness vanished in the cave and light appeared, as happens through the glory of the gods.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena indasālaguhā visamā santī samā samapādi, sambādhā santī urundā samapādi, andhakāro guhāyaṁ antaradhāyi, āloko udapādi yathā taṁ devānaṁ devānubhāvena.
[¶40] Then the Buddha said to Sakka, “It’s incredible and amazing that you, the venerable Kosiya, who has so many duties and so much to do, should come here.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyamidaṁ āyasmato kosiyassa, abbhutamidaṁ āyasmato kosiyassa tāva bahukiccassa bahukaraṇīyassa yadidaṁ idhāgamanan”ti.
[¶41] “For a long time I’ve wanted to come and see the Buddha, but I wasn’t able, being prevented by my many duties and responsibilities for the gods of the thirty-three. This one time, sir, the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the salaḷa tree hut. Then I went to Sāvatthī to see the Buddha. But at that time the Buddha was sitting immersed in some kind of meditation. And a divine maiden of Great King Vessavaṇa named Bhūjati was attending on the Buddha, standing there paying homage to him with cupped palms.
> Pali: “Cirapaṭikāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamitukāmo; api ca devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ kehici kehici kiccakaraṇīyehi byāvaṭo; evāhaṁ nāsakkhiṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamituṁ. Ekamidaṁ, bhante, samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati salaḷāgārake. Atha khvāhaṁ, bhante, sāvatthiṁ agamāsiṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Tena kho pana, bhante, samayena bhagavā aññatarena samādhinā nisinno hoti, bhūjati ca nāma vessavaṇassa mahārājassa paricārikā bhagavantaṁ paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, pañjalikā namassamānā tiṭṭhati.
[¶42] So I said to her, ‘Sister, please bow to the Buddha for me, saying: “Sir, Sakka, lord of gods, with his ministers and retinue, bows with his head at your feet.”’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhante, bhūjatiṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘abhivādehi me tvaṁ, bhagini, bhagavantaṁ: “sakko, bhante, devānamindo sāmacco saparijano bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”’ti.
[¶43] When I said this, she said to me, ‘It’s the wrong time to see the Buddha, as he’s in retreat.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhante, sā bhūjati maṁ etadavoca: ‘akālo kho, mārisa, bhagavantaṁ dassanāya; paṭisallīno bhagavā’ti.
[¶44] ‘Well then, sister, please convey my message when the Buddha emerges from that immersion.’ I hope that sister bowed to you? Do you remember what she said?”
> Pali: ‘Tena hi, bhagini, yadā bhagavā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhito hoti, atha mama vacanena bhagavantaṁ abhivādehi: “sakko, bhante, devānamindo sāmacco saparijano bhagavato pāde sirasā vandatī”’ti. Kacci me sā, bhante, bhaginī bhagavantaṁ abhivādesi? Sarati bhagavā tassā bhaginiyā vacanan”ti?
[¶45] “She did bow, lord of gods, and I remember what she said. I also remember that it was the sound of your chariot wheels that pulled me out of that immersion.”
> Pali: “Abhivādesi maṁ sā, devānaminda, bhaginī, sarāmahaṁ tassā bhaginiyā vacanaṁ. Api cāhaṁ āyasmato nemisaddena tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhito”ti.
[¶46] “Sir, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the gods who were reborn in the host of the thirty-three before me: ‘When a Realized One arises in the world, perfected and fully awakened, the heavenly hosts swell, while the titan hosts dwindle.’ And I have seen this with my own eyes.
> Pali: “Ye te, bhante, devā amhehi paṭhamataraṁ tāvatiṁsakāyaṁ upapannā, tesaṁ me sammukhā sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: ‘yadā tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā, dibbā kāyā paripūrenti, hāyanti asurakāyā’ti. Taṁ me idaṁ, bhante, sakkhidiṭṭhaṁ yato tathāgato loke uppanno arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dibbā kāyā paripūrenti, hāyanti asurakāyāti.
[¶47] 2.1. The Story of Gopikā
> Pali: 2.1. Gopakavatthu
[¶48] Right here in Kapilavatthu there was a Sakyan lady named Gopikā who had confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and had fulfilled her ethics. Losing her attachment to femininity, she developed masculinity. When her body broke up, after death, she was reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. In the company of the gods of the thirty-three she became one of my sons. There they knew him as the godling Gopaka.
> Pali: Idheva, bhante, kapilavatthusmiṁ gopikā nāma sakyadhītā ahosi buddhe pasannā dhamme pasannā saṅghe pasannā sīlesu paripūrakārinī. Sā itthittaṁ virājetvā purisattaṁ bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā. Devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ amhākaṁ puttattaṁ ajjhupagatā. Tatrapi naṁ evaṁ jānanti: ‘gopako devaputto, gopako devaputto’ti.
[¶49] Meanwhile three others, mendicants who had led the spiritual life under the Buddha, were reborn in the inferior centaur realm. There they amused themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation, and became my servants and attendants.
> Pali: Aññepi, bhante, tayo bhikkhū bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā hīnaṁ gandhabbakāyaṁ upapannā. Te pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārayamānā amhākaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgacchanti amhākaṁ pāricariyaṁ.
[¶50] At that, Gopaka scolded them, ‘Where on earth were you at, good fellows, when you heard the Buddha’s teaching! For while I was still a woman I had confidence in the Buddha, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and had fulfilled my ethics. I lost my attachment to femininity and developed masculinity. When my body broke up, after death, I was reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. In the company of the gods of the thirty-three I became one of Sakka’s sons. Here they know me as the godling Gopaka. But you, having led the spiritual life under the Buddha, were reborn in the inferior centaur realm. It is a sad sight indeed to see fellow practitioners reborn in the inferior centaur realm.’
> Pali: Te amhākaṁ upaṭṭhānaṁ āgate amhākaṁ pāricariyaṁ gopako devaputto paṭicodesi: ‘kutomukhā nāma tumhe, mārisā, tassa bhagavato dhammaṁ assuttha— ahañhi nāma itthikā samānā buddhe pasannā dhamme pasannā saṅghe pasannā sīlesu paripūrakārinī itthittaṁ virājetvā purisattaṁ bhāvetvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ sakkassa devānamindassa puttattaṁ ajjhupagatā. Idhāpi maṁ evaṁ jānanti: “gopako devaputto gopako devaputto”ti. Tumhe pana, mārisā, bhagavati brahmacariyaṁ caritvā hīnaṁ gandhabbakāyaṁ upapannā. Duddiṭṭharūpaṁ vata bho addasāma, ye mayaṁ addasāma sahadhammike hīnaṁ gandhabbakāyaṁ upapanne’ti.
[¶51] When scolded by Gopaka, two of those gods regained their memory right away. They went to the host of the priests of Divinity, but one god remained attached to sensual pleasures.
> Pali: Tesaṁ, bhante, gopakena devaputtena paṭicoditānaṁ dve devā diṭṭheva dhamme satiṁ paṭilabhiṁsu kāyaṁ brahmapurohitaṁ, eko pana devo kāme ajjhāvasi.
[¶52] ‘“I was a laywoman disciple of the Clear-eyed One,
and my name was Gopikā.
I was devoted to the Buddha and the teaching,
and I faithfully served the Saṅgha.
> Pali: ‘Upāsikā cakkhumato ahosiṁ,
Nāmampi mayhaṁ ahu “gopikā”ti;
Buddhe ca dhamme ca abhippasannā,
Saṅghañcupaṭṭhāsiṁ pasannacittā.
[¶53] Because of the clear rightness of the Buddha’s teaching,
I’m now a mighty, dazzling son of Sakka,
reborn in the Third Heaven.
And here they know me as Gopaka.
> Pali: Tasseva buddhassa sudhammatāya,
Sakkassa puttomhi mahānubhāvo;
Mahājutīko tidivūpapanno,
Jānanti maṁ idhāpi “gopako”ti.
[¶54] Then I saw some mendicants who I’d seen before,
dwelling in the host of centaurs.
They were disciples of Gotama
when I used to be a human.
> Pali: Athaddasaṁ bhikkhavo diṭṭhapubbe,
Gandhabbakāyūpagate vasīne;
Imehi te gotamasāvakāse,
Ye ca mayaṁ pubbe manussabhūtā.
[¶55] I served them with food and drink,
and clasped their feet in my own home.
Where on earth were these good fellows at
when they learned the Buddha’s teachings?
> Pali: Annena pānena upaṭṭhahimhā,
Pādūpasaṅgayha sake nivesane;
Kutomukhā nāma ime bhavanto,
Buddhassa dhammāni paṭiggahesuṁ.
[¶56] For each must know for themselves the teaching
so well-taught, realized by the Clear-eyed One.
I was one who followed you,
having heard the fine words of the noble ones.
> Pali: Paccattaṁ veditabbo hi dhammo,
Sudesito cakkhumatānubuddho;
Ahañhi tumheva upāsamāno,
Sutvāna ariyāna subhāsitāni.
[¶57] I’m now a mighty, dazzling son of Sakka,
reborn in the Third Heaven.
But you followed the best of men,
and led the supreme spiritual life,
> Pali: Sakkassa puttomhi mahānubhāvo,
Mahājutīko tidivūpapanno;
Tumhe pana seṭṭhamupāsamānā,
Anuttaraṁ brahmacariyaṁ caritvā.
[¶58] but still you’re born in this lesser realm,
a rebirth unbefitting.
It’s a sad sight I see, good fellows,
fellow practitioners in a lesser realm.
> Pali: Hīnaṁ kāyaṁ upapannā bhavanto,
Anānulomā bhavatūpapatti;
Duddiṭṭharūpaṁ vata addasāma,
Sahadhammike hīnakāyūpapanne.
[¶59] Reborn in the host of centaurs,
only to wait upon the gods.
Meanwhile, I dwelt in a house—
but see my distinction now!
> Pali: Gandhabbakāyūpagatā bhavanto,
Devānamāgacchatha pāricariyaṁ;
Agāre vasato mayhaṁ,
Imaṁ passa visesataṁ.
[¶60] Having been a woman now I’m a male god,
blessed with heavenly sensual pleasures.”
Scolded by that disciple of Gotama,
comprehending Gopaka, they were struck with urgency.
> Pali: Itthī hutvā svajja pumomhi devo,
Dibbehi kāmehi samaṅgibhūto’;
Te coditā gotamasāvakena,
Saṁvegamāpādu samecca gopakaṁ.
[¶61] “Let’s strive, let’s try hard—
we won’t serve others any more!”
Two of them roused up energy,
recalling the Buddha’s instructions.
> Pali: ‘Handa viyāyāma byāyāma,
Mā no mayaṁ parapessā ahumhā’;
Tesaṁ duve vīriyamārabhiṁsu,
Anussaraṁ gotamasāsanāni.
[¶62] Right away they became dispassionate,
seeing the drawbacks in sensual pleasures.
The fetters and bonds of sensual pleasures—
the ties of the Wicked One so hard to break—
> Pali: Idheva cittāni virājayitvā,
Kāmesu ādīnavamaddasaṁsu;
Te kāmasaṁyojanabandhanāni,
Pāpimayogāni duraccayāni.
[¶63] they burst them like a bull elephant his ropes,
and passed right over the thirty-three.
The gods with Indra and the Progenitor
were all gathered in the Hall of Clear Right.
> Pali: Nāgova sannāni guṇāni chetvā,
Deve tāvatiṁse atikkamiṁsu;
Saindā devā sapajāpatikā,
Sabbe sudhammāya sabhāyupaviṭṭhā.
[¶64] As they sat there, they passed over them,
the heroes desireless, practicing purity.
Seeing them, Vāsava was struck with urgency;
the master of gods in the midst of the group said,
> Pali: Tesaṁ nisinnānaṁ abhikkamiṁsu,
Vīrā virāgā virajaṁ karontā;
Te disvā saṁvegamakāsi vāsavo,
Devābhibhū devagaṇassa majjhe.
[¶65] “These were born in the lesser centaur realm,
but now they pass us by!”
Heeding the speech of one so moved,
Gopaka addressed Vāsava,
> Pali: ‘Imehi te hīnakāyūpapannā,
Deve tāvatiṁse abhikkamanti’;
Saṁvegajātassa vaco nisamma,
So gopako vāsavamajjhabhāsi.
[¶66] “There is a Buddha, a lord of men, in the world.
Known as the Sakyan Sage, he’s mastered the senses.
Those sons of his lost their memory;
but when scolded by me they gained it back.
> Pali: ‘Buddho janindatthi manussaloke,
Kāmābhibhū sakyamunīti ñāyati;
Tasseva te puttā satiyā vihīnā,
Coditā mayā te satimajjhalatthuṁ’.
[¶67] Of the three, there is one who remains
dwelling in the host of centaurs.
But two, recollecting the path to awakening,
serene, spurn even the gods.
> Pali: Tiṇṇaṁ tesaṁ āvasinettha eko,
Gandhabbakāyūpagato vasīno;
Dve ca sambodhipathānusārino,
Devepi hīḷenti samāhitattā.
[¶68] Such is the explanation of the teaching here:
not a single disciple doubts that.
We venerate the Buddha, the victor, lord of men,
who has crossed the flood and cut off doubt.
> Pali: Etādisī dhammappakāsanettha,
Na tattha kiṅkaṅkhati koci sāvako;
Nitiṇṇaoghaṁ vicikicchachinnaṁ,
Buddhaṁ namassāma jinaṁ janindaṁ.
[¶69] They attained distinction to the extent
they understood the teaching here;
two of them distinguished
in the host of the priests of Divinity.”’
> Pali: Yaṁ te dhammaṁ idhaññāya,
visesaṁ ajjhagaṁsu te;
Kāyaṁ brahmapurohitaṁ,
duve tesaṁ visesagū.
[¶70] We have come here, dear sir,
to realize this same teaching.
If the Buddha would give me a chance,
I would ask a question, dear sir.”
> Pali: Tassa dhammassa pattiyā,
āgatamhāsi mārisa;
Katāvakāsā bhagavatā,
pañhaṁ pucchemu mārisā”ti.
[¶71] Then it occurred to the Buddha, “For a long time now this spirit has led a pure life. Any question he asks me will be beneficial, not unbeneficial. And he will quickly understand any answer I give to his question.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “dīgharattaṁ visuddho kho ayaṁ yakkho, yaṁ kiñci maṁ pañhaṁ pucchissati, sabbaṁ taṁ atthasañhitaṁyeva pucchissati, no anatthasañhitaṁ. Yañcassāhaṁ puṭṭho byākarissāmi, taṁ khippameva ājānissatī”ti.
[¶72] So the Buddha addressed Sakka in verse:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā sakkaṁ devānamindaṁ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi:
[¶73] “Ask me your question, Vāsava,
whatever you want.
I’ll solve each and every
question you have.”
> Pali: “Puccha vāsava maṁ pañhaṁ,
yaṁ kiñci manasicchasi;
Tassa tasseva pañhassa,
ahaṁ antaṁ karomi te”ti.
[¶74] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶75] Having been granted an opportunity by the Buddha, Sakka asked the first question.
> Pali: Katāvakāso sakko devānamindo bhagavatā imaṁ bhagavantaṁ paṭhamaṁ pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶76] “Good fellow, what fetters bind the gods, humans, titans, dragons, centaurs—and any of the other diverse creatures— so that, though they wish to be free of enmity, violence, hostility, and hate, they still have enmity, violence, hostility, and hate?”
> Pali: “Kiṁsaṁyojanā nu kho, mārisa, devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā ye caññe santi puthukāyā, te: ‘averā adaṇḍā asapattā abyāpajjā viharemu averino’ti iti ca nesaṁ hoti, atha ca pana saverā sadaṇḍā sasapattā sabyāpajjā viharanti saverino”ti?
[¶77] Such was Sakka’s question to the Buddha. And the Buddha answered him:
> Pali: Itthaṁ sakko devānamindo bhagavantaṁ pañhaṁ apucchi. Tassa bhagavā pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākāsi:
[¶78] “Lord of gods, the fetters of jealousy and stinginess bind the gods, humans, titans, dragons, centaurs—and any of the other diverse creatures— so that, though they wish to be free of enmity, violence, hostility, and hate, they still have enmity, violence, hostility, and hate.”
> Pali: “Issāmacchariyasaṁyojanā kho, devānaminda, devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā ye caññe santi puthukāyā, te: ‘averā adaṇḍā asapattā abyāpajjā viharemu averino’ti iti ca nesaṁ hoti, atha ca pana saverā sadaṇḍā sasapattā sabyāpajjā viharanti saverino”ti.
[¶79] Such was the Buddha’s answer to Sakka. Delighted, Sakka approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, saying, “That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One! Hearing the Buddha’s answer, I’ve gone beyond doubt and got rid of indecision.”
> Pali: Itthaṁ bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākāsi. Attamano sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandi anumodi: “evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Tiṇṇā mettha kaṅkhā vigatā kathaṅkathā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”ti.
[¶80] And then, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, Sakka asked another question:
> Pali: Itiha sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶81] “But good fellow, what is the source, origin, birthplace, and inception of jealousy and stinginess? When what exists is there jealousy and stinginess? When what doesn’t exist is there no jealousy and stinginess?”
> Pali: “Issāmacchariyaṁ pana, mārisa, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ; kismiṁ sati issāmacchariyaṁ hoti; kismiṁ asati issāmacchariyaṁ na hotī”ti?
[¶82] “The liked and the disliked, lord of gods, are the source of jealousy and stinginess. When the liked and the disliked exist there is jealousy and stinginess. When the liked and the disliked don’t exist there is no jealousy and stinginess.”
> Pali: “Issāmacchariyaṁ kho, devānaminda, piyāppiyanidānaṁ piyāppiyasamudayaṁ piyāppiyajātikaṁ piyāppiyapabhavaṁ; piyāppiye sati issāmacchariyaṁ hoti, piyāppiye asati issāmacchariyaṁ na hotī”ti.
[¶83] “But good fellow, what is the source of what is liked and disliked?”
> Pali: “Piyāppiyaṁ pana, mārisa, kiṁnidānaṁ kiṁsamudayaṁ kiṁjātikaṁ kiṁpabhavaṁ; kismiṁ sati piyāppiyaṁ hoti; kismiṁ asati piyāppiyaṁ na hotī”ti?
[¶84] “Desire is the source of what is liked and disliked.”
> Pali: “Piyāppiyaṁ kho, devānaminda, chandanidānaṁ chandasamudayaṁ chandajātikaṁ chandapabhavaṁ; chande sati piyāppiyaṁ hoti; chande asati piyāppiyaṁ na hotī”ti.
[¶85] “But what is the source of desire?”
> Pali: “Chando pana, mārisa, kiṁnidāno kiṁsamudayo kiṁjātiko kiṁpabhavo; kismiṁ sati chando hoti; kismiṁ asati chando na hotī”ti?
[¶86] “Thought is the source of desire.”
> Pali: “Chando kho, devānaminda, vitakkanidāno vitakkasamudayo vitakkajātiko vitakkapabhavo; vitakke sati chando hoti; vitakke asati chando na hotī”ti.
## 42. DN 21 · Sakka’s Questions · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/42/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/42/#p-N
[¶0] “But what is the source of thought?”
> Pali: “Vitakko pana, mārisa, kiṁnidāno kiṁsamudayo kiṁjātiko kiṁpabhavo; kismiṁ sati vitakko hoti; kismiṁ asati vitakko na hotī”ti?
[¶1] “Judgments driven by the proliferation of perceptions are the source of thoughts.”
> Pali: “Vitakko kho, devānaminda, papañcasaññāsaṅkhānidāno papañcasaññāsaṅkhāsamudayo papañcasaññāsaṅkhājātiko papañcasaññāsaṅkhāpabhavo; papañcasaññāsaṅkhāya sati vitakko hoti; papañcasaññāsaṅkhāya asati vitakko na hotī”ti.
[¶2] “But how does a mendicant fittingly practice for the cessation of judgments driven by the proliferation of perceptions?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ paṭipanno pana, mārisa, bhikkhu papañcasaññāsaṅkhānirodhasāruppagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ paṭipanno hotī”ti?
[¶3] 2.2. Meditation on Feelings
> Pali: 2.2. Vedanākammaṭṭhāna
[¶4] “Lord of gods, there are two kinds of happiness, I say: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. There are two kinds of sadness, I say: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. There are two kinds of equanimity, I say: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.
> Pali: “Somanassampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Domanassampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Upekkhampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi.
[¶5] Why did I say that there are two kinds of happiness? Well, should you know of a happiness: ‘When I cultivate this kind of happiness, unskillful qualities grow, and skillful qualities decline.’ You should not cultivate that kind of happiness. Whereas, should you know of a happiness: ‘When I cultivate this kind of happiness, unskillful qualities decline, and skillful qualities grow.’ You should cultivate that kind of happiness. And that which is free of placing the mind and keeping it connected is better than that which still involves placing the mind and keeping it connected. That’s why I said there are two kinds of happiness.
> Pali: Somanassampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tattha yaṁ jaññā somanassaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me somanassaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evarūpaṁ somanassaṁ na sevitabbaṁ. Tattha yaṁ jaññā somanassaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me somanassaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evarūpaṁ somanassaṁ sevitabbaṁ. Tattha yañce savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ, yañce avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ, ye avitakke avicāre, te paṇītatare. Somanassampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti. Iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶6] Why did I say that there are two kinds of sadness? Well, should you know of a sadness: ‘When I cultivate this kind of sadness, unskillful qualities grow, and skillful qualities decline.’ You should not cultivate that kind of sadness. Whereas, should you know of a sadness: ‘When I cultivate this kind of sadness, unskillful qualities decline, and skillful qualities grow.’ You should cultivate that kind of sadness. And that which is free of placing the mind and keeping it connected is better than that which still involves placing the mind and keeping it connected. That’s why I said there are two kinds of sadness.
> Pali: Domanassampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tattha yaṁ jaññā domanassaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me domanassaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evarūpaṁ domanassaṁ na sevitabbaṁ. Tattha yaṁ jaññā domanassaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me domanassaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evarūpaṁ domanassaṁ sevitabbaṁ. Tattha yañce savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ, yañce avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ, ye avitakke avicāre, te paṇītatare. Domanassampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶7] Why did I say that there are two kinds of equanimity? Well, should you know of an equanimity: ‘When I cultivate this kind of equanimity, unskillful qualities grow, and skillful qualities decline.’ You should not cultivate that kind of equanimity. Whereas, should you know of an equanimity: ‘When I cultivate this kind of equanimity, unskillful qualities decline, and skillful qualities grow.’ You should cultivate that kind of equanimity. And that which is free of placing the mind and keeping it connected is better than that which still involves placing the mind and keeping it connected. That’s why I said there are two kinds of equanimity.
> Pali: Upekkhampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tattha yaṁ jaññā upekkhaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me upekkhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evarūpā upekkhā na sevitabbā. Tattha yaṁ jaññā upekkhaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me upekkhaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evarūpā upekkhā sevitabbā. Tattha yañce savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ, yañce avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ, ye avitakke avicāre, te paṇītatare. Upekkhampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶8] That’s how a mendicant fittingly practices for the cessation of judgments driven by the proliferation of perceptions.”
> Pali: Evaṁ paṭipanno kho, devānaminda, bhikkhu papañcasaññāsaṅkhānirodhasāruppagāminiṁ paṭipadaṁ paṭipanno hotī”ti.
[¶9] Such was the Buddha’s answer to Sakka. Delighted, Sakka approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, saying, “That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One! Hearing the Buddha’s answer, I’ve gone beyond doubt and got rid of indecision.”
> Pali: Itthaṁ bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākāsi. Attamano sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandi anumodi: “evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Tiṇṇā mettha kaṅkhā vigatā kathaṅkathā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”ti.
[¶10] 2.3. Restraint in the Monastic Code
> Pali: 2.3. Pātimokkhasaṁvara
[¶11] And then Sakka asked another question:
> Pali: Itiha sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶12] “But good fellow, how does a mendicant practice for restraint in the monastic code?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ paṭipanno pana, mārisa, bhikkhu pātimokkhasaṁvarāya paṭipanno hotī”ti?
[¶13] “Lord of gods, I say that there are two kinds of bodily behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. I say that there are two kinds of verbal behavior: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. There are two kinds of search, I say: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.
> Pali: “Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Pariyesanaṁpāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi.
[¶14] Why did I say that there are two kinds of bodily behavior? Well, should you know of a bodily behavior: ‘When I cultivate this kind of bodily behavior, unskillful qualities grow, and skillful qualities decline.’ You should not cultivate that kind of bodily conduct. Whereas, should you know of a bodily behavior: ‘When I cultivate this kind of bodily behavior, unskillful qualities decline, and skillful qualities grow.’ You should cultivate that kind of bodily conduct. That’s why I said there are two kinds of bodily behavior.
> Pali: Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tattha yaṁ jaññā kāyasamācāraṁ ‘imaṁ kho me kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evarūpo kāyasamācāro na sevitabbo. Tattha yaṁ jaññā kāyasamācāraṁ ‘imaṁ kho me kāyasamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evarūpo kāyasamācāro sevitabbo. Kāyasamācārampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶15] Why did I say that there are two kinds of verbal behavior? Well, should you know of a kind of verbal behavior that it causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline, you should not cultivate it. Whereas, should you know of a kind of verbal behavior that it causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow, you should cultivate it. That’s why I said there are two kinds of verbal behavior.
> Pali: Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tattha yaṁ jaññā vacīsamācāraṁ ‘imaṁ kho me vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evarūpo vacīsamācāro na sevitabbo. Tattha yaṁ jaññā vacīsamācāraṁ ‘imaṁ kho me vacīsamācāraṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evarūpo vacīsamācāro sevitabbo. Vacīsamācārampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶16] Why did I say that there are two kinds of search? Well, should you know of a kind of search that it causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline, you should not cultivate it. Whereas, should you know of a kind of search that it causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow, you should cultivate it. That’s why I said there are two kinds of search.
> Pali: Pariyesanaṁpāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti kho panetaṁ vuttaṁ, kiñcetaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ? Tattha yaṁ jaññā pariyesanaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me pariyesanaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyantī’ti, evarūpā pariyesanā na sevitabbā. Tattha yaṁ jaññā pariyesanaṁ ‘imaṁ kho me pariyesanaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’ti, evarūpā pariyesanā sevitabbā. Pariyesanaṁpāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampīti iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttaṁ.
[¶17] That’s how a mendicant practices for restraint in the monastic code.”
> Pali: Evaṁ paṭipanno kho, devānaminda, bhikkhu pātimokkhasaṁvarāya paṭipanno hotī”ti.
[¶18] Such was the Buddha’s answer to Sakka. Delighted, Sakka approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, saying, “That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One! Hearing the Buddha’s answer, I’ve gone beyond doubt and got rid of indecision.”
> Pali: Itthaṁ bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākāsi. Attamano sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandi anumodi: “evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Tiṇṇā mettha kaṅkhā vigatā kathaṅkathā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”ti.
[¶19] 2.4. Sense Restraint
> Pali: 2.4. Indriyasaṁvara
[¶20] And then Sakka asked another question:
> Pali: Itiha sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶21] “But good fellow, how does a mendicant practice for restraint of the sense faculties?”
> Pali: “Kathaṁ paṭipanno pana, mārisa, bhikkhu indriyasaṁvarāya paṭipanno hotī”ti?
[¶22] “Lord of gods, I say that there are two kinds of sight known by the eye: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate. There are two kinds of sound known by the ear … smells known by the nose … tastes known by the tongue … touches known by the body … ideas known by the mind: that which you should cultivate, and that which you should not cultivate.”
> Pali: “Cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Sotaviññeyyaṁ saddampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Ghānaviññeyyaṁ gandhampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Jivhāviññeyyaṁ rasampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Kāyaviññeyyaṁ phoṭṭhabbampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampi. Manoviññeyyaṁ dhammampāhaṁ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi— sevitabbampi, asevitabbampī”ti.
[¶23] When the Buddha said this, Sakka said to him:
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sakko devānamindo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶24] “Sir, this is how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement: You should not cultivate the kind of sight known by the eye which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of sight known by the eye which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow. You should not cultivate the kind of sound, smell, taste, touch, or idea known by the mind which causes unskillful qualities to grow while skillful qualities decline. And you should cultivate the kind of idea known by the mind which causes unskillful qualities to decline while skillful qualities grow.
> Pali: “Imassa kho ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānāmi. Yathārūpaṁ, bhante, cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, evarūpaṁ cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ na sevitabbaṁ. Yathārūpañca kho, bhante, cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, evarūpaṁ cakkhuviññeyyaṁ rūpaṁ sevitabbaṁ. Yathārūpañca kho, bhante, sotaviññeyyaṁ saddaṁ sevato …pe… ghānaviññeyyaṁ gandhaṁ sevato … jivhāviññeyyaṁ rasaṁ sevato … kāyaviññeyyaṁ phoṭṭhabbaṁ sevato … manoviññeyyaṁ dhammaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, kusalā dhammā parihāyanti, evarūpo manoviññeyyo dhammo na sevitabbo. Yathārūpañca kho, bhante, manoviññeyyaṁ dhammaṁ sevato akusalā dhammā parihāyanti, kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhanti, evarūpo manoviññeyyo dhammo sevitabbo.
[¶25] Sir, that’s how I understand the detailed meaning of the Buddha’s brief statement. Hearing the Buddha’s answer, I’ve gone beyond doubt and got rid of indecision.”
> Pali: Imassa kho me, bhante, bhagavatā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa evaṁ vitthārena atthaṁ ājānato tiṇṇā mettha kaṅkhā vigatā kathaṅkathā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”ti.
[¶26] And then Sakka asked another question:
> Pali: Itiha sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ uttari pañhaṁ apucchi:
[¶27] “Good fellow, do all ascetics and brahmins have a single doctrine, ethics, desire, and attachment?”
> Pali: “Sabbeva nu kho, mārisa, samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekantavādā ekantasīlā ekantachandā ekantaajjhosānā”ti?
[¶28] “No, lord of gods, they do not.”
> Pali: “Na kho, devānaminda, sabbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekantavādā ekantasīlā ekantachandā ekantaajjhosānā”ti.
[¶29] “Why not?”
> Pali: “Kasmā pana, mārisa, na sabbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekantavādā ekantasīlā ekantachandā ekantaajjhosānā”ti?
[¶30] “The world has many and diverse elements. Whatever element sentient beings insist on in this world of many and diverse elements, they obstinately stick to it, insisting that: ‘This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ That’s why not all ascetics and brahmins have a single doctrine, ethics, desire, and attachment.”
> Pali: “Anekadhātu nānādhātu kho, devānaminda, loko. Tasmiṁ anekadhātunānādhātusmiṁ loke yaṁ yadeva sattā dhātuṁ abhinivisanti, taṁ tadeva thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharanti: ‘idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Tasmā na sabbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekantavādā ekantasīlā ekantachandā ekantaajjhosānā”ti.
[¶31] “Good fellow, have all ascetics and brahmins reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal?”
> Pali: “Sabbeva nu kho, mārisa, samaṇabrāhmaṇā accantaniṭṭhā accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosānā”ti?
[¶32] “No, lord of gods, they have not.”
> Pali: “Na kho, devānaminda, sabbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā accantaniṭṭhā accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosānā”ti.
[¶33] “Why not?”
> Pali: “Kasmā pana, mārisa, na sabbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā accantaniṭṭhā accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosānā”ti?
[¶34] “Those mendicants who are freed through the ending of craving have reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal. That’s why not all ascetics and brahmins have reached the ultimate end, the ultimate sanctuary from the yoke, the ultimate spiritual life, the ultimate goal.”
> Pali: “Ye kho, devānaminda, bhikkhū taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttā te accantaniṭṭhā accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosānā. Tasmā na sabbe samaṇabrāhmaṇā accantaniṭṭhā accantayogakkhemī accantabrahmacārī accantapariyosānā”ti.
[¶35] Such was the Buddha’s answer to Sakka. Delighted, Sakka approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, saying, “That’s so true, Blessed One! That’s so true, Holy One! Hearing the Buddha’s answer, I’ve gone beyond doubt and got rid of indecision.”
> Pali: Itthaṁ bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa pañhaṁ puṭṭho byākāsi. Attamano sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandi anumodi: “evametaṁ, bhagavā, evametaṁ, sugata. Tiṇṇā mettha kaṅkhā vigatā kathaṅkathā bhagavato pañhaveyyākaraṇaṁ sutvā”ti.
[¶36] And then Sakka, having approved and agreed with what the Buddha said, said to him,
> Pali: Itiha sakko devānamindo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶37] “Turbulence, sir, is a disease, a boil, a dart. Turbulence drags a person to be regenerated in one state of existence or another. That’s why a person finds themselves in states high and low. Elsewhere, among other ascetics and brahmins, I wasn’t even given a chance to ask these questions that the Buddha has answered. The dart of doubt and indecision has lain within me for a long time, but the Buddha has plucked it out.”
> Pali: “Ejā, bhante, rogo, ejā gaṇḍo, ejā sallaṁ, ejā imaṁ purisaṁ parikaḍḍhati tassa tasseva bhavassa abhinibbattiyā. Tasmā ayaṁ puriso uccāvacamāpajjati. Yesāhaṁ, bhante, pañhānaṁ ito bahiddhā aññesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu okāsakammampi nālatthaṁ, te me bhagavatā byākatā. Dīgharattānusayitañca pana me vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ, tañca bhagavatā abbuḷhan”ti.
[¶38] “Lord of gods, do you recall having asked this question of other ascetics and brahmins?”
> Pali: “Abhijānāsi no tvaṁ, devānaminda, ime pañhe aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā”ti?
[¶39] “I do, sir.”
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, bhante, ime pañhe aññe samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchitā”ti.
[¶40] “If you wouldn’t mind, lord of gods, tell me how they answered.”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana te, devānaminda, byākaṁsu? Sace te agaru bhāsassū”ti.
[¶41] “It’s no trouble when someone such as the Blessed One is sitting here.”
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, garu yatthassa bhagavā nisinno bhagavantarūpo vā”ti.
[¶42] “Well, speak then, lord of gods.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, devānaminda, bhāsassū”ti.
[¶43] “Sir, I approached those who I imagined were ascetics and brahmins living in the wilderness, in remote lodgings. But they were stumped by my question, and they even questioned me in return: ‘What is the venerable’s name?’ So I answered them: ‘Good fellow, I am Sakka, lord of gods.’ So they asked me another question: ‘But lord of gods, what deed brought you to this position?’ So I taught them the Dhamma as I had learned and memorized it. And they were pleased with just that much: ‘We have seen Sakka, lord of gods! And he answered our questions!’ Invariably, they become my disciples, I don’t become theirs. But sir, I am the Buddha’s disciple, a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.”
> Pali: “Yesvāhaṁ, bhante, maññāmi samaṇabrāhmaṇā āraññikā pantasenāsanāti, tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā ime pañhe pucchāmi, te mayā puṭṭhā na sampāyanti, asampāyantā mamaṁyeva paṭipucchanti: ‘ko nāmo āyasmā’ti? Tesāhaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi: ‘ahaṁ kho, mārisa, sakko devānamindo’ti. Te mamaṁyeva uttari paṭipucchanti: ‘kiṁ panāyasmā, devānaminda, kammaṁ katvā imaṁ ṭhānaṁ patto’ti? Tesāhaṁ yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Te tāvatakeneva attamanā honti: ‘sakko ca no devānamindo diṭṭho, yañca no apucchimhā, tañca no byākāsī’ti. Te aññadatthu mamaṁyeva sāvakā sampajjanti, na cāhaṁ tesaṁ. Ahaṁ kho pana, bhante, bhagavato sāvako sotāpanno avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo”ti.
[¶44] 2.5. On Feeling Happy
> Pali: 2.5. Somanassapaṭilābhakathā
[¶45] “Lord of gods, do you recall ever feeling such joy and happiness before?”
> Pali: “Abhijānāsi no tvaṁ, devānaminda, ito pubbe evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhan”ti?
[¶46] “I do, sir.”
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, bhante, ito pubbe evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhan”ti.
[¶47] “But how?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana tvaṁ, devānaminda, abhijānāsi ito pubbe evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhan”ti?
[¶48] “Once upon a time, sir, a battle was fought between the gods and the titans. In that battle the gods won and the titans lost. It occurred to me as victor, ‘Now the gods shall enjoy both the nectar of the gods and the nectar of the titans.’ But sir, that joy and happiness is in the sphere of the rod and the sword. It doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. But the joy and happiness I feel listening to the Buddha’s teaching is not in the sphere of the rod and the sword. It does lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment.”
> Pali: “Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhante, devāsurasaṅgāmo samupabyūḷho ahosi. Tasmiṁ kho pana, bhante, saṅgāme devā jiniṁsu, asurā parājayiṁsu. Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, taṁ saṅgāmaṁ abhivijinitvā vijitasaṅgāmassa etadahosi: ‘yā ceva dāni dibbā ojā yā ca asurā ojā, ubhayametaṁ devā paribhuñjissantī’ti. So kho pana me, bhante, vedapaṭilābho somanassapaṭilābho sadaṇḍāvacaro sasatthāvacaro na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati. Yo kho pana me ayaṁ, bhante, bhagavato dhammaṁ sutvā vedapaṭilābho somanassapaṭilābho, so adaṇḍāvacaro asatthāvacaro ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattatī”ti.
[¶49] “But lord of gods, what reason do you see for speaking of such joy and happiness?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, devānaminda, atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedesī”ti?
[¶50] “I see six reasons to speak of such joy and happiness, sir.
> Pali: “Cha kho ahaṁ, bhante, atthavase sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶51] While staying right here,
remaining in the godly form,
I have gained an extended life:
know this, dear sir.
> Pali: Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa,
devabhūtassa me sato;
Punarāyu ca me laddho,
evaṁ jānāhi mārisa.
[¶52] This is the first reason.
> Pali: Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, paṭhamaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶53] When I fall from the heavenly host,
leaving behind the non-human life,
I shall consciously go to a new womb,
wherever my mind delights.
> Pali: Cutāhaṁ diviyā kāyā,
āyuṁ hitvā amānusaṁ;
Amūḷho gabbhamessāmi,
yattha me ramatī mano.
[¶54] This is the second reason.
> Pali: Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, dutiyaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶55] Living happily under the guidance
of the one of unclouded wisdom,
I shall practice systematically,
aware and mindful.
> Pali: Svāhaṁ amūḷhapaññassa,
viharaṁ sāsane rato;
Ñāyena viharissāmi,
sampajāno paṭissato.
[¶56] This is the third reason.
> Pali: Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, tatiyaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶57] And if awakening should arise
as I practice systematically,
I shall live as one who understands,
and my end shall come right there.
> Pali: Ñāyena me carato ca,
sambodhi ce bhavissati;
Aññātā viharissāmi,
sveva anto bhavissati.
[¶58] This is the fourth reason.
> Pali: Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, catutthaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶59] When I fall from the human realm,
leaving behind the human life,
I shall become a god again,
supreme in the heaven realm.
> Pali: Cutāhaṁ mānusā kāyā,
āyuṁ hitvāna mānusaṁ;
Puna devo bhavissāmi,
devalokamhi uttamo.
[¶60] This is the fifth reason.
> Pali: Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, pañcamaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶61] They are the finest of gods,
the glorious Akaniṭṭhas.
So long as my final life goes on,
there my home will be.
> Pali: Te paṇītatarā devā,
akaniṭṭhā yasassino;
Antime vattamānamhi,
so nivāso bhavissati.
[¶62] This is the sixth reason.
> Pali: Imaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhante, chaṭṭhaṁ atthavasaṁ sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶63] Seeing these six reasons I speak of such joy and happiness.
> Pali: Ime kho ahaṁ, bhante, cha atthavase sampassamāno evarūpaṁ vedapaṭilābhaṁ somanassapaṭilābhaṁ pavedemi.
[¶64] My wishes unfulfilled,
doubting and indecisive,
I wandered for such a long time,
in search of the Realized One.
> Pali: Apariyositasaṅkappo,
vicikiccho kathaṅkathī;
Vicariṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ,
anvesanto tathāgataṁ.
[¶65] I imagined that ascetics
living in seclusion
must surely be awakened,
so I went to sit near them.
> Pali: Yassu maññāmi samaṇe,
pavivittavihārino;
Sambuddhā iti maññāno,
gacchāmi te upāsituṁ.
[¶66] ‘How is there success?
How is there failure?’
But they were stumped by such questions
about the path and practice.
> Pali: ‘Kathaṁ ārādhanā hoti,
kathaṁ hoti virādhanā’;
Iti puṭṭhā na sampāyanti,
magge paṭipadāsu ca.
[¶67] And when they found out that I
was Sakka, come from the gods,
they questioned me instead about
the deed that brought me to this state.
> Pali: Tyassu yadā maṁ jānanti,
sakko devānamāgato;
Tyassu mameva pucchanti,
‘kiṁ katvā pāpuṇī idaṁ’.
[¶68] I taught them the Dhamma
as I had learned it among men.
They were delighted with that, saying:
‘We’ve seen Vāsava!’
> Pali: Tesaṁ yathāsutaṁ dhammaṁ,
desayāmi jane sutaṁ;
Tena attamanā honti,
‘diṭṭho no vāsavoti ca’.
[¶69] Now since I’ve seen the Buddha,
who helps us overcome doubt,
today, free of fear,
I pay homage to the awakened one.
> Pali: Yadā ca buddhamaddakkhiṁ,
vicikicchāvitāraṇaṁ;
Somhi vītabhayo ajja,
sambuddhaṁ payirupāsiya.
[¶70] Destroyer of the dart of craving,
the Buddha is unrivaled.
I bow to the great hero,
the Buddha, Kinsman of the Sun.
> Pali: Taṇhāsallassa hantāraṁ,
buddhaṁ appaṭipuggalaṁ;
Ahaṁ vande mahāvīraṁ,
buddhamādiccabandhunaṁ.
[¶71] In the same way that divinity ought be revered
by we gods, dear sir,
today we shall revere you—
come, let us revere you ourselves!
> Pali: Yaṁ karomasi brahmuno,
samaṁ devehi mārisa;
Tadajja tuyhaṁ kassāma,
handa sāmaṁ karoma te.
[¶72] You alone are the Awakened!
You are the Teacher supreme!
In the world with its gods,
you have no rival.”
> Pali: Tvameva asi sambuddho,
tuvaṁ satthā anuttaro;
Sadevakasmiṁ lokasmiṁ,
natthi te paṭipuggalo”ti.
[¶73] Then Sakka addressed the centaur Pañcasikha, “Dear Pañcasikha, you were very helpful to me, since you first charmed the Buddha, after which I went to see him. I shall appoint you to your father’s position—you shall be king of the centaurs. And I give you Bhaddā Suriyavaccasā, for she loves you very much.”
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo pañcasikhaṁ gandhabbaputtaṁ āmantesi: “bahūpakāro kho mesi tvaṁ, tāta pañcasikha, yaṁ tvaṁ bhagavantaṁ paṭhamaṁ pasādesi. Tayā, tāta, paṭhamaṁ pasāditaṁ pacchā mayaṁ taṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamimhā arahantaṁ sammāsambuddhaṁ. Pettike vā ṭhāne ṭhapayissāmi, gandhabbarājā bhavissasi, bhaddañca te sūriyavacchasaṁ dammi, sā hi te abhipatthitā”ti.
[¶74] Then Sakka, touching the ground with his hand, expressed this heartfelt sentiment three times:
> Pali: Atha kho sakko devānamindo pāṇinā pathaviṁ parāmasitvā tikkhattuṁ udānaṁ udānesi:
[¶75] “Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: “Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶76] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.
[¶77] Homage to him, the blessed one, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha!”
> Pali: Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassā”ti.
[¶78] And while this discourse was being spoken, the stainless, immaculate vision of the Dhamma arose in Sakka, lord of gods: “Everything that is liable to arise is liable to cease.” And also for another 80,000 deities.
> Pali: Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasmiṁ bhaññamāne sakkassa devānamindassa virajaṁ vītamalaṁ dhammacakkhuṁ udapādi: “yaṁ kiñci samudayadhammaṁ sabbaṁ taṁ nirodhadhamman”ti. Aññesañca asītiyā devatāsahassānaṁ;
[¶79] Such were the questions Sakka was invited to ask, and which were answered by the Buddha. And that’s why the name of this discussion is “Sakka’s Questions”.
> Pali: iti ye sakkena devānamindena ajjhiṭṭhapañhā puṭṭhā, te bhagavatā byākatā. Tasmā imassa veyyākaraṇassa sakkapañhātveva adhivacananti.
[¶80] > Pali: Sakkapañhasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 43. DN 22 · The Longer Discourse on Mindfulness Meditation · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/43/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/43/#p-N
[¶0] DN 22 · The Longer Discourse on Mindfulness Meditation
> Pali: DN 22 · Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Kurus, near the Kuru town named Kammāsadamma. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā kurūsu viharati kammāsadhammaṁ nāma kurūnaṁ nigamo. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhaddante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “Mendicants, the four kinds of mindfulness meditation are the path to convergence. They are in order to purify sentient beings, to get past sorrow and crying, to make an end of pain and sadness, to discover the system, and to realize extinguishment.
> Pali: “Ekāyano ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā, sokaparidevānaṁ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṁ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā.
[¶4] What four? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of the mind—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ, vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ, citte cittānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ, dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶5] > Pali: Uddeso niṭṭhito.
[¶6] 1. Observing the Body
> Pali: 1. Kāyānupassanā
[¶7] 1.1. Mindfulness of Breathing
> Pali: 1.1. Kāyānupassanāānāpānapabba
[¶8] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of the body?
> Pali: Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati?
[¶9] It’s when a mendicant—gone to a wilderness, or to the root of a tree, or to an empty hut—sits down cross-legged, sets their body straight, and brings mindfulness to the present. Just mindful, they breathe in. Mindful, they breathe out.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā suññāgāragato vā nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So satova assasati, satova passasati.
[¶10] Breathing in heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing in heavily.’ Breathing out heavily they know: ‘I’m breathing out heavily.’
> Pali: Dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶11] Breathing in lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing in lightly.’ Breathing out lightly they know: ‘I’m breathing out lightly.’
> Pali: Rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶12] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in experiencing the whole body.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out experiencing the whole body.’
> Pali: ‘Sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶13] They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe in stilling the physical process.’ They practice like this: ‘I’ll breathe out stilling the physical process.’
> Pali: ‘Passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶14] It’s like a deft lathe-turner or lathe-turner’s apprentice. When drawing a long pull they know: ‘I’m drawing a long pull,’ and when drawing a short pull they know: ‘I’m drawing a short pull.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho bhamakāro vā bhamakārantevāsī vā dīghaṁ vā añchanto ‘dīghaṁ añchāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā añchanto ‘rassaṁ añchāmī’ti pajānāti; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dīghaṁ vā assasanto ‘dīghaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, dīghaṁ vā passasanto ‘dīghaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā assasanto ‘rassaṁ assasāmī’ti pajānāti, rassaṁ vā passasanto ‘rassaṁ passasāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī passasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ assasissāmī’ti sikkhati, ‘passambhayaṁ kāyasaṅkhāraṁ passasissāmī’ti sikkhati.
[¶15] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to the body, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the body exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi kāyo’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶16] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶17] > Pali: Ānāpānapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶18] 1.2. The Postures
> Pali: 1.2. Kāyānupassanāiriyāpathapabba
[¶19] Furthermore, when a mendicant is walking they know: ‘I am walking.’ When standing they know: ‘I am standing.’ When sitting they know: ‘I am sitting.’ And when lying down they know: ‘I am lying down.’ Whatever posture their body is in, they know it.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gacchanto vā ‘gacchāmī’ti pajānāti, ṭhito vā ‘ṭhitomhī’ti pajānāti, nisinno vā ‘nisinnomhī’ti pajānāti, sayāno vā ‘sayānomhī’ti pajānāti, yathā yathā vā panassa kāyo paṇihito hoti tathā tathā naṁ pajānāti.
[¶20] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the body, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the body exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi kāyo’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶21] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶22] > Pali: Iriyāpathapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶23] 1.3. Situational Awareness
> Pali: 1.3. Kāyānupassanāsampajānapabba
[¶24] Furthermore, a mendicant acts with situational awareness when going out and coming back; when looking ahead and aside; when bending and extending the limbs; when bearing the outer robe, bowl, and robes; when eating, drinking, chewing, and tasting; when urinating and defecating; when walking, standing, sitting, sleeping, waking, speaking, and keeping silent.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu abhikkante paṭikkante sampajānakārī hoti, ālokite vilokite sampajānakārī hoti, samiñjite pasārite sampajānakārī hoti, saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇe sampajānakārī hoti, asite pīte khāyite sāyite sampajānakārī hoti, uccārapassāvakamme sampajānakārī hoti, gate ṭhite nisinne sutte jāgarite bhāsite tuṇhībhāve sampajānakārī hoti.
[¶25] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā …pe…
[¶26] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶27] > Pali: Sampajānapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶28] 1.4. Focusing on the Repulsive
> Pali: 1.4. Kāyānupassanāpaṭikūlamanasikārapabba
[¶29] Furthermore, a mendicant examines their own body, up from the soles of the feet and down from the tips of the hairs, wrapped in skin and full of many kinds of filth. ‘In this body there is head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces, bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco, maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ, hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ, antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ, pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo, assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttan’ti.
[¶30] It’s as if there were a bag with openings at both ends, filled with various kinds of grains, such as fine rice, wheat, mung beans, peas, sesame, and ordinary rice. And a person with clear eyes were to open it and examine the contents: ‘These grains are fine rice, these are wheat, these are mung beans, these are peas, these are sesame, and these are ordinary rice.’
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ubhatomukhā putoḷi pūrā nānāvihitassa dhaññassa, seyyathidaṁ—sālīnaṁ vīhīnaṁ muggānaṁ māsānaṁ tilānaṁ taṇḍulānaṁ. Tamenaṁ cakkhumā puriso muñcitvā paccavekkheyya: ‘ime sālī, ime vīhī ime muggā ime māsā ime tilā ime taṇḍulā’ti.
[¶31] > Pali: Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā …pe… muttan’ti.
[¶32] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā …pe…
[¶33] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶34] > Pali: Paṭikūlamanasikārapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶35] 1.5. Focusing on the Elements
> Pali: 1.5. Kāyānupassanādhātumanasikārapabba
[¶36] Furthermore, a mendicant examines their own body, whatever its placement or posture, according to the elements: ‘In this body there is the earth element, the water element, the fire element, and the air element.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ yathāṭhitaṁ yathāpaṇihitaṁ dhātuso paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti.
[¶37] It’s as if a deft butcher or butcher’s apprentice were to kill a cow and sit down at the crossroads with the meat cut into chops.
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, dakkho goghātako vā goghātakantevāsī vā gāviṁ vadhitvā catumahāpathe bilaso vibhajitvā nisinno assa; evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imameva kāyaṁ yathāṭhitaṁ yathāpaṇihitaṁ dhātuso paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātū’ti.
[¶38] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati …pe…
[¶39] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶40] > Pali: Dhātumanasikārapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶41] 1.6. The Charnel Ground Contemplations
> Pali: 1.6. Kāyānupassanānavasivathikapabba
[¶42] Furthermore, suppose a mendicant were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground. And it had been dead for one, two, or three days, bloated, livid, and festering. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ ekāhamataṁ vā dvīhamataṁ vā tīhamataṁ vā uddhumātakaṁ vinīlakaṁ vipubbakajātaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā …pe…
[¶43] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶44] Furthermore, suppose they were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground being devoured by crows, hawks, vultures, herons, hounds, tigers, leopards, jackals, and many kinds of little creatures. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ kākehi vā khajjamānaṁ kulalehi vā khajjamānaṁ gijjhehi vā khajjamānaṁ kaṅkehi vā khajjamānaṁ sunakhehi vā khajjamānaṁ byagghehi vā khajjamānaṁ dīpīhi vā khajjamānaṁ siṅgālehi vā khajjamānaṁ vividhehi vā pāṇakajātehi khajjamānaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā …pe…
[¶45] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶46] Furthermore, suppose they were to see a corpse discarded in a charnel ground, a skeleton with flesh and blood, held together by sinews …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ samaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe…
[¶47] A skeleton without flesh but smeared with blood, and held together by sinews …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ nimaṁsalohitamakkhitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe…
[¶48] A skeleton rid of flesh and blood, held together by sinews …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikaṁ apagatamaṁsalohitaṁ nhārusambandhaṁ …pe…
[¶49] Bones rid of sinews scattered in every direction. Here a hand-bone, there a foot-bone, here an ankle bone, there a shin-bone, here a thigh-bone, there a hip-bone, here a rib-bone, there a back-bone, here an arm-bone, there a neck-bone, here a jaw-bone, there a tooth, here the skull. …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikāni apagatasambandhāni disā vidisā vikkhittāni, aññena hatthaṭṭhikaṁ aññena pādaṭṭhikaṁ aññena gopphakaṭṭhikaṁ aññena jaṅghaṭṭhikaṁ aññena ūruṭṭhikaṁ aññena kaṭiṭṭhikaṁ aññena phāsukaṭṭhikaṁ aññena piṭṭhiṭṭhikaṁ aññena khandhaṭṭhikaṁ aññena gīvaṭṭhikaṁ aññena hanukaṭṭhikaṁ aññena dantaṭṭhikaṁ aññena sīsakaṭāhaṁ. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā …pe… viharati.
[¶50] White bones, the color of shells …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṁ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṁ aṭṭhikāni setāni saṅkhavaṇṇapaṭibhāgāni …pe…
[¶51] Decrepit bones, heaped in a pile …
> Pali: Aṭṭhikāni puñjakitāni terovassikāni …pe…
[¶52] Bones rotted and crumbled to powder. They’d compare it with their own body: ‘This body is also of that same nature, that same kind, and cannot go beyond that.’ And so they meditate observing an aspect of the body internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to the body, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the body exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Aṭṭhikāni pūtīni cuṇṇakajātāni. So imameva kāyaṁ upasaṁharati: ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṁdhammo evaṁbhāvī evaṁanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṁ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā kāyasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi kāyo’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶53] That too is how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati.
[¶54] > Pali: Navasivathikapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶55] > Pali: Cuddasa kāyānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶56] 2. Observing the Feelings
> Pali: 2. Vedanānupassanā
[¶57] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of feelings?
> Pali: Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati?
[¶58] It’s when a mendicant who feels a pleasant feeling knows: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling.’
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhaṁ vā vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶59] When they feel a painful feeling, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling.’
> Pali: Dukkhaṁ vā vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶60] When they feel a neutral feeling, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling.’
> Pali: Adukkhamasukhaṁ vā vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶61] When they feel a pleasant feeling of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling of the flesh.’
> Pali: Sāmisaṁ vā sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sāmisaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶62] When they feel a pleasant feeling not of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a pleasant feeling not of the flesh.’
> Pali: Nirāmisaṁ vā sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṁ sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶63] When they feel a painful feeling of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling of the flesh.’
> Pali: Sāmisaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sāmisaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶64] When they feel a painful feeling not of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a painful feeling not of the flesh.’
> Pali: Nirāmisaṁ vā dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṁ dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶65] When they feel a neutral feeling of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling of the flesh.’
> Pali: Sāmisaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sāmisaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶66] When they feel a neutral feeling not of the flesh, they know: ‘I feel a neutral feeling not of the flesh.’
> Pali: Nirāmisaṁ vā adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṁ adukkhamasukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.
[¶67] And so they meditate observing an aspect of feelings internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to feelings, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that feelings exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā vedanāsu viharati. ‘Atthi vedanā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶68] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of feelings.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati.
[¶69] > Pali: Vedanānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶70] 3. Observing the Mind
> Pali: 3. Cittānupassanā
[¶71] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of the mind?
> Pali: Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu citte cittānupassī viharati?
[¶72] It’s when a mendicant understands mind with greed as ‘mind with greed,’ and mind without greed as ‘mind without greed.’ They understand mind with hate as ‘mind with hate,’ and mind without hate as ‘mind without hate.’ They understand mind with delusion as ‘mind with delusion,’ and mind without delusion as ‘mind without delusion.’ They know constricted mind as ‘constricted mind,’ and scattered mind as ‘scattered mind.’ They know expansive mind as ‘expansive mind,’ and unexpansive mind as ‘unexpansive mind.’ They know mind that is not supreme as ‘mind that is not supreme,’ and mind that is supreme as ‘mind that is supreme.’ They know mind immersed in samādhi as ‘mind immersed in samādhi,’ and mind not immersed in samādhi as ‘mind not immersed in samādhi.’ They know freed mind as ‘freed mind,’ and unfreed mind as ‘unfreed mind.’
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vītarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītarāgaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Sadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vītadosaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītadosaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Samohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vītamohaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vītamohaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Saṅkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘saṅkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vikkhittaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vikkhittaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Mahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘mahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Amahaggataṁ vā cittaṁ ‘amahaggataṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Sauttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘sauttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Anuttaraṁ vā cittaṁ ‘anuttaraṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Samāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘samāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Asamāhitaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘asamāhitaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Vimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘vimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti. Avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ ‘avimuttaṁ cittan’ti pajānāti.
[¶73] And so they meditate observing an aspect of the mind internally, externally, and both internally and externally. With respect to the mind, they meditate observing the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that the mind exists, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā citte cittānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā citte cittānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā citte cittānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā cittasmiṁ viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā cittasmiṁ viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā cittasmiṁ viharati. ‘Atthi cittan’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶74] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the mind.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu citte cittānupassī viharati.
[¶75] > Pali: Cittānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶76] 4. Observing Principles
> Pali: 4. Dhammānupassanā
[¶77] 4.1. The Hindrances
> Pali: 4.1. Dhammānupassanānīvaraṇapabba
[¶78] And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles?
> Pali: Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati?
[¶79] It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five hindrances. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five hindrances?
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu nīvaraṇesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu nīvaraṇesu?
[¶80] It’s when a mendicant who has sensual desire in them understands: ‘I have sensual desire in me.’ When they don’t have sensual desire in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have sensual desire in me.’ They understand how sensual desire arises; how, when it’s already arisen, it’s given up; and how, once it’s given up, it doesn’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ kāmacchandaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ kāmacchando’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ kāmacchandaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ kāmacchando’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa kāmacchandassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa kāmacchandassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶81] When they have ill will in them, they understand: ‘I have ill will in me.’ When they don’t have ill will in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have ill will in me.’ They understand how ill will arises; how, when it’s already arisen, it’s given up; and how, once it’s given up, it doesn’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ byāpādaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ byāpādo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ byāpādaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ byāpādo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa byāpādassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa byāpādassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa byāpādassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶82] When they have dullness and drowsiness in them, they understand: ‘I have dullness and drowsiness in me.’ When they don’t have dullness and drowsiness in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have dullness and drowsiness in me.’ They understand how dullness and drowsiness arise; how, when they’ve already arisen, they’re given up; and how, once they’re given up, they don’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhan’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ thinamiddhan’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa thinamiddhassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa thinamiddhassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶83] When they have restlessness and remorse in them, they understand: ‘I have restlessness and remorse in me.’ When they don’t have restlessness and remorse in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have restlessness and remorse in me.’ They understand how restlessness and remorse arise; how, when they’ve already arisen, they’re given up; and how, once they’re given up, they don’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccan’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ uddhaccakukkuccan’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa uddhaccakukkuccassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶84] When they have doubt in them, they understand: ‘I have doubt in me.’ When they don’t have doubt in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have doubt in me.’ They understand how doubt arises; how, when it’s already arisen, it’s given up; and how, once it’s given up, it doesn’t arise again in the future.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vicikicchaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ vicikicchā’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vicikicchaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ vicikicchā’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannāya vicikicchāya uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannāya vicikicchāya pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnāya vicikicchāya āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶85] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing the principles as liable to originate, as liable to fall, and as liable to both originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that principles exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya, anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶86] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five hindrances.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu nīvaraṇesu.
[¶87] > Pali: Nīvaraṇapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶88] 4.2. The Aggregates
> Pali: 4.2. Dhammānupassanākhandhapabba
[¶89] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five grasping aggregates. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five grasping aggregates?
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu?
[¶90] It’s when a mendicant contemplates: ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such is feeling, such is the origin of feeling, such is the disappearance of feeling. Such is perception, such is the origin of perception, such is the disappearance of perception. Such are choices, such is the origin of choices, such is the disappearance of choices. Such is consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’ And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally …
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu: ‘iti rūpaṁ, iti rūpassa samudayo, iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo; iti vedanā, iti vedanāya samudayo, iti vedanāya atthaṅgamo; iti saññā, iti saññāya samudayo, iti saññāya atthaṅgamo; iti saṅkhārā, iti saṅkhārānaṁ samudayo, iti saṅkhārānaṁ atthaṅgamo, iti viññāṇaṁ, iti viññāṇassa samudayo, iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo’ti, iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya, anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶91] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the five grasping aggregates.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu.
[¶92] > Pali: Khandhapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶93] 4.3. The Sense Fields
> Pali: 4.3. Dhammānupassanāāyatanapabba
[¶94] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the six interior and exterior sense fields. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the six interior and exterior sense fields?
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu?
[¶95] It’s when a mendicant understands the eye, sights, and the fetter that arises dependent on both of these. They understand how the fetter that has not arisen comes to arise; how the arisen fetter comes to be abandoned; and how the abandoned fetter comes to not rise again in the future.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhuñca pajānāti, rūpe ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶96] They understand the ear, sounds, and the fetter …
> Pali: Sotañca pajānāti, sadde ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶97] They understand the nose, smells, and the fetter …
> Pali: Ghānañca pajānāti, gandhe ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶98] They understand the tongue, tastes, and the fetter …
> Pali: Jivhañca pajānāti, rase ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶99] They understand the body, touches, and the fetter …
> Pali: Kāyañca pajānāti, phoṭṭhabbe ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶100] They understand the mind, ideas, and the fetter that arises dependent on both of these. They understand how the fetter that has not arisen comes to arise; how the arisen fetter comes to be abandoned; and how the abandoned fetter comes to not rise again in the future.
> Pali: Manañca pajānāti, dhamme ca pajānāti, yañca tadubhayaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṁyojanaṁ tañca pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa saṁyojanassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa saṁyojanassa pahānaṁ hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca pahīnassa saṁyojanassa āyatiṁ anuppādo hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶101] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally …
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya, anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶102] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the six interior and exterior sense fields.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati chasu ajjhattikabāhiresu āyatanesu.
[¶103] > Pali: Āyatanapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶104] 4.4. The Awakening Factors
> Pali: 4.4. Dhammānupassanābojjhaṅgapabba
[¶105] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the seven awakening factors. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the seven awakening factors?
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati sattasu bojjhaṅgesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati sattasu bojjhaṅgesu?
[¶106] It’s when a mendicant who has the awakening factor of mindfulness in them understands: ‘I have the awakening factor of mindfulness in me.’ When they don’t have the awakening factor of mindfulness in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have the awakening factor of mindfulness in me.’ They understand how the awakening factor of mindfulness that has not arisen comes to arise; and how the awakening factor of mindfulness that has arisen becomes fully developed.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ satisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa satisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti.
## 44. DN 22 · The Longer Discourse on Mindfulness Meditation · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/44/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/44/#p-N
[¶0] When they have the awakening factor of investigation of principles … energy … rapture … tranquility … immersion … equanimity in them, they understand: ‘I have the awakening factor of equanimity in me.’ When they don’t have the awakening factor of equanimity in them, they understand: ‘I don’t have the awakening factor of equanimity in me.’ They understand how the awakening factor of equanimity that has not arisen comes to arise; and how the awakening factor of equanimity that has arisen becomes fully developed.
> Pali: Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ vīriyasambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ pītisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ passaddhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ samādhisambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti. Santaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, asantaṁ vā ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ ‘natthi me ajjhattaṁ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo’ti pajānāti, yathā ca anuppannassa upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādo hoti tañca pajānāti, yathā ca uppannassa upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya pāripūrī hoti tañca pajānāti.
[¶1] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the principles, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that principles exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya, anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶2] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the seven awakening factors.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati sattasu bojjhaṅgesu.
[¶3] > Pali: Bojjhaṅgapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶4] 4.5. The Truths
> Pali: 4.5. Dhammānupassanāsaccapabba
[¶5] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the four noble truths. And how does a mendicant meditate observing an aspect of principles with respect to the four noble truths?
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati catūsu ariyasaccesu. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati catūsu ariyasaccesu?
[¶6] It’s when a mendicant truly understands: ‘This is suffering’ … ‘This is the origin of suffering’ … ‘This is the cessation of suffering’ … ‘This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.’
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘idaṁ dukkhan’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhasamudayo’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodho’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti, ‘ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṁ pajānāti.
[¶7] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶8] 4.5.1. The Truth of Suffering
> Pali: 4.5.1. Dukkhasaccaniddesa
[¶9] And what is the noble truth of suffering?
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ?
[¶10] Rebirth is suffering; old age is suffering; death is suffering; sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress are suffering; being coupled with the disliked is suffering; separation from the liked is suffering; not getting what you wish for is suffering. In brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering.
> Pali: Jātipi dukkhā, jarāpi dukkhā, maraṇampi dukkhaṁ, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā, appiyehi sampayogopi dukkho, piyehi vippayogopi dukkho, yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ, saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā.
[¶11] And what is rebirth? The rebirth, inception, conception, regeneration, manifestation of the aggregates, and acquisition of the sense fields of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called rebirth.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, jāti? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṁ paṭilābho, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, jāti.
[¶12] And what is old age? The old age, decrepitude, broken teeth, grey hair, wrinkly skin, diminished vitality, and failing faculties of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called old age.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, jarā? Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṁ pāliccaṁ valittacatā āyuno saṁhāni indriyānaṁ paripāko, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, jarā.
[¶13] And what is death? The passing away, passing on, disintegration, demise, mortality, death, decease, breaking up of the aggregates, laying to rest of the corpse, and cutting off of the life faculty of the various sentient beings in the various orders of sentient beings. This is called death.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, maraṇaṁ? Yaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhā tamhā sattanikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṁ maccu maraṇaṁ kālakiriyā khandhānaṁ bhedo kaḷevarassa nikkhepo jīvitindriyassupacchedo, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, maraṇaṁ.
[¶14] And what is sorrow? The sorrow, sorrowing, state of sorrow, inner sorrow, inner deep sorrow in someone who has undergone misfortune, who has experienced suffering. This is called sorrow.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, soko? Yo kho, bhikkhave, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa soko socanā socitattaṁ antosoko antoparisoko, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, soko.
[¶15] And what is lamentation? The wail, lament, wailing, lamenting, state of wailing and lamentation in someone who has undergone misfortune, who has experienced suffering. This is called lamentation.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, paridevo? Yo kho, bhikkhave, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa ādevo paridevo ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṁ paridevitattaṁ, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, paridevo.
[¶16] And what is pain? Physical pain, physical unpleasantness, the painful, unpleasant feeling that’s born from physical contact. This is called pain.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ? Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, kāyikaṁ dukkhaṁ kāyikaṁ asātaṁ kāyasamphassajaṁ dukkhaṁ asātaṁ vedayitaṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ.
[¶17] And what is sadness? Mental pain, mental displeasure, the painful, unpleasant feeling that’s born from mind contact. This is called sadness.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, domanassaṁ? Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, cetasikaṁ dukkhaṁ cetasikaṁ asātaṁ manosamphassajaṁ dukkhaṁ asātaṁ vedayitaṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, domanassaṁ.
[¶18] And what is distress? The stress, distress, state of stress and distress in someone who has undergone misfortune, who has experienced suffering. This is called distress.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, upāyāso? Yo kho, bhikkhave, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa āyāso upāyāso āyāsitattaṁ upāyāsitattaṁ, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, upāyāso.
[¶19] And what is meant by ‘being coupled with the disliked is suffering’? There are sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas, which are unlikable, undesirable, and disagreeable. And there are those who want to harm, injure, disturb, and threaten you. The coming together with these, the joining, inclusion, mixing with them: this is what is meant by ‘being coupled with the disliked is suffering’.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho? Idha yassa te honti aniṭṭhā akantā amanāpā rūpā saddā gandhā rasā phoṭṭhabbā dhammā, ye vā panassa te honti anatthakāmā ahitakāmā aphāsukakāmā ayogakkhemakāmā, yā tehi saddhiṁ saṅgati samāgamo samodhānaṁ missībhāvo, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho.
[¶20] And what is meant by ‘separation from the liked is suffering’? There are sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas, which are likable, desirable, and agreeable. And there are those who want to help, benefit, comfort, and protect you: mother and father, brother and sister, friends and colleagues, relatives and kin. The division from these, the disconnection, segregation, and parting from them: this is what is meant by ‘separation from the liked is suffering’.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, piyehi vippayogo dukkho? Idha yassa te honti iṭṭhā kantā manāpā rūpā saddā gandhā rasā phoṭṭhabbā dhammā, ye vā panassa te honti atthakāmā hitakāmā phāsukakāmā yogakkhemakāmā mātā vā pitā vā bhātā vā bhaginī vā mittā vā amaccā vā ñātisālohitā vā, yā tehi saddhiṁ asaṅgati asamāgamo asamodhānaṁ amissībhāvo, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, piyehi vippayogo dukkho.
[¶21] And what is meant by ‘not getting what you wish for is suffering’? In sentient beings who are liable to be reborn, such a wish arises: ‘Oh, if only we were not liable to be reborn! If only rebirth would not come to us!’ But you can’t get that by wishing. This is what is meant by ‘not getting what you wish for is suffering’. In sentient beings who are liable to grow old … fall ill … die … experience sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress, such a wish arises: ‘Oh, if only we were not liable to experience sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress! If only sorrow, lamentation, pain, sadness, and distress would not come to us!’ But you can’t get that by wishing. This is what is meant by ‘not getting what you wish for is suffering’.
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ? Jātidhammānaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati: ‘aho vata mayaṁ na jātidhammā assāma, na ca vata no jāti āgaccheyyā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ, idampi yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ. Jarādhammānaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati: ‘aho vata mayaṁ na jarādhammā assāma, na ca vata no jarā āgaccheyyā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ, idampi yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ. Byādhidhammānaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati ‘aho vata mayaṁ na byādhidhammā assāma, na ca vata no byādhi āgaccheyyā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ, idampi yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ. Maraṇadhammānaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati ‘aho vata mayaṁ na maraṇadhammā assāma, na ca vata no maraṇaṁ āgaccheyyā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ, idampi yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ. Sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammānaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ icchā uppajjati ‘aho vata mayaṁ na sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammā assāma, na ca vata no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammā āgaccheyyun’ti. Na kho panetaṁ icchāya pattabbaṁ, idampi yampicchaṁ na labhati tampi dukkhaṁ.
[¶22] And what is meant by ‘in brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering’? They are the grasping aggregates that consist of form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness. This is what is meant by ‘in brief, the five grasping aggregates are suffering’.
> Pali: Katame ca, bhikkhave, saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā? Seyyathidaṁ—rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime vuccanti, bhikkhave, saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā.
[¶23] This is called the noble truth of suffering.
> Pali: Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ.
[¶24] 4.5.2. The Origin of Suffering
> Pali: 4.5.2. Samudayasaccaniddesa
[¶25] And what is the noble truth of the origin of suffering?
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ?
[¶26] It’s the craving that leads to future lives, mixed up with relishing and greed, taking pleasure there wherever it alights. That is, craving for sensual pleasures, craving for continued existence, and craving for nonexistence.
> Pali: Yāyaṁ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, seyyathidaṁ— kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā.
[¶27] But where does that craving arise and where does it settle? Whatever in the world seems nice and pleasant, it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Sā kho panesā, bhikkhave, taṇhā kattha uppajjamānā uppajjati, kattha nivisamānā nivisati? Yaṁ loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶28] And what in the world seems nice and pleasant? The eye in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles. The ear … nose … tongue … body … mind in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Kiñca loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ? Cakkhu loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati. Sotaṁ loke …pe… ghānaṁ loke … jivhā loke … kāyo loke … mano loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶29] Sights … sounds … smells … tastes … touches … ideas in the world seem nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Rūpā loke … saddā loke … gandhā loke … rasā loke … phoṭṭhabbā loke … dhammā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶30] Eye consciousness … ear consciousness … nose consciousness … tongue consciousness … body consciousness … mind consciousness in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Cakkhuviññāṇaṁ loke … sotaviññāṇaṁ loke … ghānaviññāṇaṁ loke … jivhāviññāṇaṁ loke … kāyaviññāṇaṁ loke … manoviññāṇaṁ loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶31] Eye contact … ear contact … nose contact … tongue contact … body contact … mind contact in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Cakkhusamphasso loke … sotasamphasso loke … ghānasamphasso loke … jivhāsamphasso loke … kāyasamphasso loke … manosamphasso loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶32] Feeling born of eye contact … feeling born of ear contact … feeling born of nose contact … feeling born of tongue contact … feeling born of body contact … feeling born of mind contact in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Cakkhusamphassajā vedanā loke … sotasamphassajā vedanā loke … ghānasamphassajā vedanā loke … jivhāsamphassajā vedanā loke … kāyasamphassajā vedanā loke … manosamphassajā vedanā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶33] Perception of sights … perception of sounds … perception of smells … perception of tastes … perception of touches … perception of ideas in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Rūpasaññā loke … saddasaññā loke … gandhasaññā loke … rasasaññā loke … phoṭṭhabbasaññā loke … dhammasaññā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶34] Intention regarding sights … intention regarding sounds … intention regarding smells … intention regarding tastes … intention regarding touches … intention regarding ideas in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Rūpasañcetanā loke … saddasañcetanā loke … gandhasañcetanā loke … rasasañcetanā loke … phoṭṭhabbasañcetanā loke … dhammasañcetanā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶35] Craving for sights … craving for sounds … craving for smells … craving for tastes … craving for touches … craving for ideas in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Rūpataṇhā loke … saddataṇhā loke … gandhataṇhā loke … rasataṇhā loke … phoṭṭhabbataṇhā loke … dhammataṇhā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶36] Thoughts about sights … thoughts about sounds … thoughts about smells … thoughts about tastes … thoughts about touches … thoughts about ideas in the world seem nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Rūpavitakko loke … saddavitakko loke … gandhavitakko loke … rasavitakko loke … phoṭṭhabbavitakko loke … dhammavitakko loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶37] Considerations regarding sights … considerations regarding sounds … considerations regarding smells … considerations regarding tastes … considerations regarding touches … considerations regarding ideas in the world seem nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving arises and settles.
> Pali: Rūpavicāro loke … saddavicāro loke … gandhavicāro loke … rasavicāro loke … phoṭṭhabbavicāro loke … dhammavicāro loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.
[¶38] This is called the noble truth of the origin of suffering.
> Pali: Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ.
[¶39] 4.5.3. The Cessation of Suffering
> Pali: 4.5.3. Nirodhasaccaniddesa
[¶40] And what is the noble truth of the cessation of suffering?
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ?
[¶41] It’s the fading away and cessation of that very same craving with no residue left behind; giving it away, letting it go, releasing it, and not clinging to it.
> Pali: Yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo.
[¶42] Whatever in the world seems nice and pleasant, it is there that craving is given up and ceases.
> Pali: Sā kho panesā, bhikkhave, taṇhā kattha pahīyamānā pahīyati, kattha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati? Yaṁ loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶43] And what in the world seems nice and pleasant? The eye in the world seems nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving is given up and ceases. …
> Pali: Kiñca loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ? Cakkhu loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati. Sotaṁ loke …pe… ghānaṁ loke … jivhā loke … kāyo loke … mano loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶44] > Pali: Rūpā loke … saddā loke … gandhā loke … rasā loke … phoṭṭhabbā loke … dhammā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶45] > Pali: Cakkhuviññāṇaṁ loke … sotaviññāṇaṁ loke … ghānaviññāṇaṁ loke … jivhāviññāṇaṁ loke … kāyaviññāṇaṁ loke … manoviññāṇaṁ loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶46] > Pali: Cakkhusamphasso loke … sotasamphasso loke … ghānasamphasso loke … jivhāsamphasso loke … kāyasamphasso loke … manosamphasso loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶47] > Pali: Cakkhusamphassajā vedanā loke … sotasamphassajā vedanā loke … ghānasamphassajā vedanā loke … jivhāsamphassajā vedanā loke … kāyasamphassajā vedanā loke … manosamphassajā vedanā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶48] > Pali: Rūpasaññā loke … saddasaññā loke … gandhasaññā loke … rasasaññā loke … phoṭṭhabbasaññā loke … dhammasaññā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶49] > Pali: Rūpasañcetanā loke … saddasañcetanā loke … gandhasañcetanā loke … rasasañcetanā loke … phoṭṭhabbasañcetanā loke … dhammasañcetanā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶50] > Pali: Rūpataṇhā loke … saddataṇhā loke … gandhataṇhā loke … rasataṇhā loke … phoṭṭhabbataṇhā loke … dhammataṇhā loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶51] > Pali: Rūpavitakko loke … saddavitakko loke … gandhavitakko loke … rasavitakko loke … phoṭṭhabbavitakko loke … dhammavitakko loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶52] Considerations regarding ideas in the world seem nice and pleasant, and it is there that craving is given up and ceases.
> Pali: Rūpavicāro loke … saddavicāro loke … gandhavicāro loke … rasavicāro loke … phoṭṭhabbavicāro loke … dhammavicāro loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhati.
[¶53] This is called the noble truth of the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ.
[¶54] 4.5.4. The Path
> Pali: 4.5.4. Maggasaccaniddesa
[¶55] And what is the noble truth of the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering?
> Pali: Katamañca, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ?
[¶56] It is simply this noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi sammāsaṅkappo sammāvācā sammākammanto sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmo sammāsati sammāsamādhi.
[¶57] And what is right view? Knowing about suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering. This is called right view.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi? Yaṁ kho, bhikkhave, dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇaṁ. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶58] And what is right purpose? Purposes of renunciation, good will, and harmlessness. This is called right purpose.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo? Nekkhammasaṅkappo abyāpādasaṅkappo avihiṁsāsaṅkappo. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāsaṅkappo.
[¶59] And what is right speech? Refraining from lying, backbiting, harsh speech, and talking nonsense. This is called right speech.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammāvācā? Musāvādā veramaṇī pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī samphappalāpā veramaṇī. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāvācā.
[¶60] And what is right action? Refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. This is called right action.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammākammanto? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī adinnādānā veramaṇī kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammākammanto.
[¶61] And what is right livelihood? It’s when a noble disciple gives up wrong livelihood and earns a living by right livelihood. This is called right livelihood.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo? Idha, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako micchāājīvaṁ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvitaṁ kappeti. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāājīvo.
[¶62] And what is right effort? It’s when a mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen are given up. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed. This is called right effort.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāvāyāmo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati; uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāvāyāmo.
[¶63] And what is right mindfulness? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of the mind—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. This is called right mindfulness.
> Pali: Katamā ca, bhikkhave, sammāsati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; citte cittānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ; dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāsati.
[¶64] And what is right immersion? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This is called right immersion.
> Pali: Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sammāsamādhi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati, sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāsamādhi.
[¶65] This is called the noble truth of the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ.
[¶66] And so they meditate observing an aspect of principles internally, externally, and both internally and externally. They meditate observing, with respect to the principles, the liability to originate, to vanish, and to originate and vanish. Or mindfulness is established that principles exist, to the extent necessary for knowledge and mindfulness. They meditate independent, not grasping at anything in the world.
> Pali: Iti ajjhattaṁ vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, bahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati, ajjhattabahiddhā vā dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati. Samudayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, vayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammānupassī vā dhammesu viharati. ‘Atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati.
[¶67] That’s how a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of principles with respect to the four noble truths.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati catūsu ariyasaccesu.
[¶68] > Pali: Saccapabbaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.
[¶69] > Pali: Dhammānupassanā niṭṭhitā.
[¶70] Anyone who develops these four kinds of mindfulness meditation in this way for seven years can expect one of two results: enlightenment in this very life, or if there’s residue left behind, non-return.
> Pali: Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya sattavassāni, tassa dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme aññā; sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā.
[¶71] Let alone seven years, anyone who develops these four kinds of mindfulness meditation in this way for six years … five years … four years … three years … two years … one year … seven months … six months … five months … four months … three months … two months … one month … a fortnight … Let alone a fortnight, anyone who develops these four kinds of mindfulness meditation in this way for seven days can expect one of two results: enlightenment in this very life, or if there’s residue left behind, non-return.
> Pali: Tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhave, sattavassāni. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya cha vassāni …pe… pañca vassāni … cattāri vassāni … tīṇi vassāni … dve vassāni … ekaṁ vassaṁ … tiṭṭhatu, bhikkhave, ekaṁ vassaṁ. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya sattamāsāni, tassa dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme aññā; sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā. Tiṭṭhantu, bhikkhave, satta māsāni. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya cha māsāni …pe… pañca māsāni … cattāri māsāni … tīṇi māsāni … dve māsāni … ekaṁ māsaṁ … aḍḍhamāsaṁ … tiṭṭhatu, bhikkhave, aḍḍhamāso. Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṁ bhāveyya sattāhaṁ, tassa dvinnaṁ phalānaṁ aññataraṁ phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme aññā; sati vā upādisese anāgāmitāti.
[¶72] ‘The four kinds of mindfulness meditation are the path to convergence. They are in order to purify sentient beings, to get past sorrow and crying, to make an end of pain and sadness, to discover the system, and to realize extinguishment.’ That’s what I said, and this is why I said it.”
> Pali: Ekāyano ayaṁ, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā sokaparidevānaṁ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya yadidaṁ cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti. Iti yaṁ taṁ vuttaṁ, idametaṁ paṭicca vuttan”ti.
[¶73] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶74] > Pali: Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 45. DN 23 · With Pāyāsi · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/45/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/45/#p-N
[¶0] DN 23 · With Pāyāsi
> Pali: DN 23 · Pāyāsisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time Venerable Kassapa the Prince was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a Kosalan citadel named Setavyā. He stayed in the rosewood grove to the north of Setavyā.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā kumārakassapo kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena setabyā nāma kosalānaṁ nagaraṁ tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ āyasmā kumārakassapo setabyāyaṁ viharati uttarena setabyaṁ siṁsapāvane.
[¶2] Now at that time the chieftain Pāyāsi was living in Setavyā. It was a crown property given by King Pasenadi of Kosala, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pāyāsi rājañño setabyaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ.
[¶3] 1. On Pāyāsi
> Pali: 1. Pāyāsirājaññavatthu
[¶4] Now at that time Pāyāsi had the following harmful misconception: “There is no afterlife. No beings are reborn spontaneously. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pāyāsissa rājaññassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti: “itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.
[¶5] The brahmins and householders of Setavyā heard, “It seems the ascetic Kassapa the Prince—a disciple of the ascetic Gotama—is staying in the rosewood grove to the north of Setavyā. He has this good reputation: ‘He is astute, competent, intelligent, learned, a brilliant speaker, eloquent, mature, a perfected one.’ It’s good to see such perfected ones.” Then, exiting Setavyā, they formed into companies and headed north to the grove.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā: “samaṇo khalu bho kumārakassapo samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi setabyaṁ anuppatto setabyāyaṁ viharati uttarena setabyaṁ siṁsapāvane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘paṇḍito byatto medhāvī bahussuto cittakathī kalyāṇapaṭibhāno vuddho ceva arahā ca. Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī’”ti. Atha kho setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā setabyāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā uttarenamukhā gacchanti yena siṁsapāvanaṁ.
[¶6] Now at that time the chieftain Pāyāsi had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap. He saw the brahmins and householders heading north toward the grove, and addressed his butler, “My butler, why are the brahmins and householders heading north toward the grove?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pāyāsi rājañño uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato hoti. Addasā kho pāyāsi rājañño setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike setabyāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte uttarenamukhe gacchante yena siṁsapāvanaṁ, disvā khattaṁ āmantesi: “kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā setabyāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā uttarenamukhā gacchanti yena siṁsapāvanan”ti?
[¶7] “The ascetic Kassapa the Prince—a disciple of the ascetic Gotama—is staying in the rosewood grove to the north of Setavyā. He has this good reputation: ‘He is astute, competent, intelligent, learned, a brilliant speaker, eloquent, mature, a perfected one.’ They’re going to see that Kassapa the Prince.”
> Pali: “Atthi kho, bho, samaṇo kumārakassapo, samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi setabyaṁ anuppatto setabyāyaṁ viharati uttarena setabyaṁ siṁsapāvane. Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato: ‘paṇḍito byatto medhāvī bahussuto cittakathī kalyāṇapaṭibhāno vuddho ceva arahā cā’ti. Tamete bhavantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī”ti.
[¶8] “Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them: ‘Worthy sir, the chieftain Pāyāsi asks you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Kassapa the Prince.’ Before Kassapa the Prince persuades those foolish and incompetent brahmins and householders that there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds— for none of these things are true!”
> Pali: “Tena hi, bho khatte, yena setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi: ‘pāyāsi, bho, rājañño evamāha— āgamentu kira bhavanto, pāyāsipi rājañño samaṇaṁ kumārakassapaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’ti. Purā samaṇo kumārakassapo setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike bāle abyatte saññāpeti: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti. Natthi hi, bho khatte, paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.
[¶9] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khattā pāyāsissa rājaññassa paṭissutvā yena setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca: “pāyāsi, bho, rājañño evamāha, āgamentu kira bhavanto, pāyāsipi rājañño samaṇaṁ kumārakassapaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti.
[¶10] Then Pāyāsi escorted by the brahmins and householders, went up to Kassapa the Prince, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side. Before sitting down to one side, some of the brahmins and householders of Setavyā bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward Kassapa the Prince, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño setabyakehi brāhmaṇagahapatikehi parivuto yena siṁsapāvanaṁ yenāyasmā kumārakassapo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā kumārakassapena saddhiṁ sammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Setabyakāpi kho brāhmaṇagahapatikā appekacce āyasmantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu; appekacce āyasmatā kumārakassapena saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu; sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce yenāyasmā kumārakassapo tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶11] 2. Nihilism
> Pali: 2. Natthikavāda
[¶12] Seated to one side, the chieftain Pāyāsi said to Venerable Kassapa the Prince, “Worthy Kassapa, this is my doctrine and view: ‘There is no afterlife. No beings are reborn spontaneously. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.’”
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pāyāsi rājañño āyasmantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ etadavoca: “ahañhi, bho kassapa, evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶13] “Chieftain, may I never see or hear of anyone holding such a doctrine or view! For how on earth can anyone say such a thing?
> Pali: “Nāhaṁ, rājañña, evaṁvādiṁ evaṁdiṭṭhiṁ addasaṁ vā assosiṁ vā. Kathañhi nāma evaṁ vadeyya: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti?
[¶14] 2.1. The Simile of the Moon and Sun
> Pali: 2.1. Candimasūriyaupamā
[¶15] Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, chieftain? Are the moon and sun in this world or the other world? Are they gods or humans?”
> Pali: Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājañña, ime candimasūriyā imasmiṁ vā loke parasmiṁ vā, devā vā te manussā vā”ti?
[¶16] “They are in the other world, worthy Kassapa, and they are gods, not humans.”
> Pali: “Ime, bho kassapa, candimasūriyā parasmiṁ loke, na imasmiṁ; devā te na manussā”ti.
[¶17] “By this method it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”
> Pali: “Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu— itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.
[¶18] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife, no beings are reborn spontaneously, and there’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶19] “Is there a method by which you can prove what you say?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo, yena te pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?
[¶20] “There is, worthy Kassapa.”
> Pali: “Atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶21] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶22] “Well, I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, with wrong view. Some time later they become sick, suffering, gravely ill. When I know that they will not recover from their illness, I go to them and say, ‘Worthy sir, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: “Those who kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct; use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and are covetous, malicious, and have wrong view—when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.” You do all these things. If what those ascetics and brahmins say is true, when your body breaks up, after death, you’ll be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. If that happens, worthy sir, come and tell me that there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds. I trust you and believe you. Anything you see will be just as if I’ve seen it for myself.’ They agree to this. But they don’t come back to tell me, nor do they send a messenger. This is the method by which I prove that there is no afterlife, no beings are reborn spontaneously, and there’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī. Te aparena samayena ābādhikā honti dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā. Yadāhaṁ jānāmi: ‘na dānime imamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhahissantī’ti tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘santi kho, bho, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: “ye te pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjantī”ti. Bhavanto kho pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī. Sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, bhavanto kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissanti. Sace, bho, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyyātha, yena me āgantvā āroceyyātha: “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti. Bhavanto kho pana me saddhāyikā paccayikā, yaṁ bhavantehi diṭṭhaṁ, yathā sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ evametaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā neva āgantvā ārocenti, na pana dūtaṁ pahiṇanti. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶23] 2.2. The Simile of the Bandit
> Pali: 2.2. Coraupamā
[¶24] “Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. What do you think, chieftain? Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to you, saying, ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ Then you’d say to them, ‘Well then, my men, tie this man’s arms tightly behind his back with a strong rope. Shave his head and march him from street to street and square to square to the beating of a harsh drum. Then take him out the south gate and there, at the place of execution to the south of the city, chop off his head.’ Saying, ‘Good,’ they’d do as they were told, sitting him down at the place of execution. Could that bandit get the executioners to wait, saying, ‘Please, good executioners! I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin in such-and-such village or town. Wait until I’ve visited them, then I’ll come back’? Or would they just chop off his head as he prattled on?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājañña, idha te purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dasseyyuṁ: ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī; imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhamitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa āghātane sīsaṁ chindathā’ti. Te ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhamitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa āghātane nisīdāpeyyuṁ. Labheyya nu kho so coro coraghātesu: ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto coraghātā, amukasmiṁ me gāme vā nigame vā mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, yāvāhaṁ tesaṁ uddisitvā āgacchāmī’ti, udāhu vippalapantasseva coraghātā sīsaṁ chindeyyun”ti?
[¶25] > Pali: “Na hi so, bho kassapa, coro labheyya coraghātesu: ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto coraghātā amukasmiṁ me gāme vā nigame vā mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, yāvāhaṁ tesaṁ uddisitvā āgacchāmī’ti.
[¶26] “They’d just chop off his head.”
> Pali: Atha kho naṁ vippalapantasseva coraghātā sīsaṁ chindeyyun”ti.
[¶27] “So even a human bandit couldn’t get his human executioners to stay his execution. What then of your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who are reborn in a lower realm after doing bad things? Could they get the wardens of hell to wait, saying, ‘Please, good wardens of hell! Wait until I’ve gone to the chieftain Pāyāsi to tell him that there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds’? By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”
> Pali: “So hi nāma, rājañña, coro manusso manussabhūtesu coraghātesu na labhissati: ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto coraghātā, amukasmiṁ me gāme vā nigame vā mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, yāvāhaṁ tesaṁ uddisitvā āgacchāmī’ti. Kiṁ pana te mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā labhissanti nirayapālesu: ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto nirayapālā, yāva mayaṁ pāyāsissa rājaññassa gantvā ārocema: “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”’ti? Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶28] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶29] “Is there a method by which you can prove what you say?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo yena te pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?
[¶30] “There is, worthy Kassapa.”
> Pali: “Atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶31] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶32] “Well, I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. They refrain from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re content, kind-hearted, with right view. Some time later they become sick, suffering, gravely ill. When I know that they will not recover from their illness, I go to them and say, ‘Worthy sir, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: “Those who refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; who refrain from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and are content, kind-hearted, with right view—when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.” You do all these things. If what those ascetics and brahmins say is true, when your body breaks up, after death, you’ll be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. If that happens, worthy sir, come and tell me that there is an afterlife. I trust you and believe you. Anything you see will be just as if I’ve seen it for myself.’ They agree to this. But they don’t come back to tell me, nor do they send a messenger. This is the method by which I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī. Te aparena samayena ābādhikā honti dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā. Yadāhaṁ jānāmi: ‘na dānime imamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhahissantī’ti tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘santi kho, bho, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: “ye te pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjantī”ti. Bhavanto kho pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī. Sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, bhavanto kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissanti. Sace, bho, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyyātha, yena me āgantvā āroceyyātha: “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti. Bhavanto kho pana me saddhāyikā paccayikā, yaṁ bhavantehi diṭṭhaṁ, yathā sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ evametaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā neva āgantvā ārocenti, na pana dūtaṁ pahiṇanti. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶33] 2.3. The Simile of the Sewer
> Pali: 2.3. Gūthakūpapurisaupamā
[¶34] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said. Suppose there were a man sunk over his head in a sewer. Then you were to order someone to pull him out of the sewer, and they’d agree to do so. Then you’d tell them to carefully scrape the dung off that man’s body with bamboo scrapers, and they’d agree to do so. Then you’d tell them to carefully scrub that man’s body down with pale clay three times, and they’d do so. Then you’d tell them to smear that man’s body with oil, and carefully wash him down with fine paste three times, and they’d do so. Then you’d tell them to dress that man’s hair and beard, and they’d do so. Then you’d tell them to provide that man with costly garlands, makeup, and clothes, and they’d do so. Then you’d tell them to bring that man up to the stilt longhouse and set him up with the five kinds of sensual stimulation, and they’d do so.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti. Seyyathāpi, rājañña, puriso gūthakūpe sasīsakaṁ nimuggo assa. Atha tvaṁ purise āṇāpeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, taṁ purisaṁ tamhā gūthakūpā uddharathā’ti. Te ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ tamhā gūthakūpā uddhareyyuṁ. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa kāyā veḷupesikāhi gūthaṁ sunimmajjitaṁ nimmajjathā’ti. Te ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā tassa purisassa kāyā veḷupesikāhi gūthaṁ sunimmajjitaṁ nimmajjeyyuṁ. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa kāyaṁ paṇḍumattikāya tikkhattuṁ subbaṭṭitaṁ ubbaṭṭethā’ti. Te tassa purisassa kāyaṁ paṇḍumattikāya tikkhattuṁ subbaṭṭitaṁ ubbaṭṭeyyuṁ. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, taṁ purisaṁ telena abbhañjitvā sukhumena cuṇṇena tikkhattuṁ suppadhotaṁ karothā’ti. Te taṁ purisaṁ telena abbhañjitvā sukhumena cuṇṇena tikkhattuṁ suppadhotaṁ kareyyuṁ. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa kesamassuṁ kappethā’ti. Te tassa purisassa kesamassuṁ kappeyyuṁ. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa mahagghañca mālaṁ mahagghañca vilepanaṁ mahagghāni ca vatthāni upaharathā’ti. Te tassa purisassa mahagghañca mālaṁ mahagghañca vilepanaṁ mahagghāni ca vatthāni upahareyyuṁ. Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi: ‘tena hi, bho, taṁ purisaṁ pāsādaṁ āropetvā pañcakāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpethā’ti. Te taṁ purisaṁ pāsādaṁ āropetvā pañcakāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ.
[¶35] What do you think, chieftain? Now that man is nicely bathed and anointed, with hair and beard dressed, bedecked with garlands and bracelets, dressed in white, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation upstairs in the royal longhouse. Would he want to plunge back into that sewer again?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājañña, api nu tassa purisassa sunhātassa suvilittassa sukappitakesamassussa āmukkamālābharaṇassa odātavatthavasanassa uparipāsādavaragatassa pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitassa samaṅgībhūtassa paricārayamānassa punadeva tasmiṁ gūthakūpe nimujjitukāmatā assā”ti?
[¶36] “No, worthy Kassapa. Why is that? Because that sewer is filthy, stinking, disgusting, and repulsive, and it’s regarded as such.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa”. “Taṁ kissa hetu”? “Asuci, bho kassapa, gūthakūpo asuci ceva asucisaṅkhāto ca duggandho ca duggandhasaṅkhāto ca jeguccho ca jegucchasaṅkhāto ca paṭikūlo ca paṭikūlasaṅkhāto cā”ti.
[¶37] “In the same way, chieftain, to the gods, human beings are filthy, stinking, disgusting, and repulsive, and are regarded as such. The smell of humans reaches the gods even a hundred leagues away. What then of your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who are reborn in a higher realm after doing good things? Will they come back to tell you that there is an afterlife? By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājañña, manussā devānaṁ asucī ceva asucisaṅkhātā ca, duggandhā ca duggandhasaṅkhātā ca, jegucchā ca jegucchasaṅkhātā ca, paṭikūlā ca paṭikūlasaṅkhātā ca. Yojanasataṁ kho, rājañña, manussagandho deve ubbādhati. Kiṁ pana te mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā te āgantvā ārocessanti: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti? Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶38] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶39] “Can you prove it?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶40] “I can.”
> Pali: “atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶41] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññāti?
[¶42] “Well, I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who refrain from killing living creatures and so on. Some time later they become sick, suffering, gravely ill. When I know that they will not recover from their illness, I go to them and say, ‘Worthy sir, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: “Those who refrain from killing living creatures and so on are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm, in the company of the gods of the thirty-three.” You do all these things. If what those ascetics and brahmins say is true, when your body breaks up, after death, you’ll be reborn in the company of the gods of the thirty-three. If that happens, worthy sir, come and tell me that there is an afterlife. I trust you and believe you. Anything you see will be just as if I’ve seen it for myself.’ They agree to this. But they don’t come back to tell me, nor do they send a messenger. This is how I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā, te aparena samayena ābādhikā honti dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā. Yadāhaṁ jānāmi: ‘na dānime imamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhahissantī’ti tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘santi kho, bho, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: “ye te pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyatan”ti. Bhavanto kho pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā. Sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, bhavanto kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissanti, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ. Sace, bho, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyyātha devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ, yena me āgantvā āroceyyātha: “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti. Bhavanto kho pana me saddhāyikā paccayikā, yaṁ bhavantehi diṭṭhaṁ, yathā sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ evametaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā neva āgantvā ārocenti, na pana dūtaṁ pahiṇanti. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶43] 2.4. The Simile of the gods of the thirty-three
> Pali: 2.4. Tāvatiṁsadevaupamā
[¶44] “Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. A hundred human years are equivalent to one day and night for the gods of the thirty-three. Thirty such days make a month, and twelve months make a year. The gods of the thirty-three have a lifespan of a thousand such years. Now, as to your friends who are reborn in the company of the gods of the thirty-three after doing good things. If they think, ‘First I’ll amuse myself for two or three days, supplied and provided with the five kinds of heavenly sensual stimulation. Then I’ll go back to Pāyāsi and tell him that there is an afterlife.’ Would they come back to tell you that there is an afterlife?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi; yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Yaṁ kho pana, rājañña, mānussakaṁ vassasataṁ, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ eso eko rattindivo, tāya rattiyā tiṁsarattiyo māso, tena māsena dvādasamāsiyo saṁvaccharo, tena saṁvaccharena dibbaṁ vassasahassaṁ devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ āyuppamāṇaṁ. Ye te mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ. Sace pana tesaṁ evaṁ bhavissati: ‘yāva mayaṁ dve vā tīṇi vā rattindivā dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārema, atha mayaṁ pāyāsissa rājaññassa gantvā āroceyyāma: “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti. Api nu te āgantvā āroceyyuṁ— itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?
[¶45] “No, worthy Kassapa. For I would be long dead by then. But worthy Kassapa, who has told you that the gods of the thirty-three exist, or that they have such a long lifespan? I don’t believe you.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa. Api hi mayaṁ, bho kassapa, ciraṁ kālaṅkatāpi bhaveyyāma. Ko panetaṁ bhoto kassapassa āroceti: ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā. Na mayaṁ bhoto kassapassa saddahāma: ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā”ti.
[¶46] 2.5. Blind From Birth
> Pali: 2.5. Jaccandhaupamā
[¶47] “Chieftain, suppose there was a person blind from birth. They couldn’t see sights that are dark or bright, or blue, yellow, red, or magenta. They couldn’t see even and uneven ground, or the stars, or the moon and sun. They’d say, ‘There’s no such thing as dark and bright sights, and no one who sees them. There’s no such thing as blue, yellow, red, magenta, even and uneven ground, stars, moon and sun, and no one who sees these things. I don’t know it or see it, therefore it doesn’t exist.’ Would they be speaking rightly?”
> Pali: “Seyyathāpi, rājañña, jaccandho puriso na passeyya kaṇha—sukkāni rūpāni, na passeyya nīlakāni rūpāni, na passeyya pītakāni rūpāni, na passeyya lohitakāni rūpāni, na passeyya mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, na passeyya samavisamaṁ, na passeyya tārakāni rūpāni, na passeyya candimasūriye. So evaṁ vadeyya: ‘natthi kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, natthi kaṇhasukkānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Natthi nīlakāni rūpāni, natthi nīlakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Natthi pītakāni rūpāni, natthi pītakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Natthi lohitakāni rūpāni, natthi lohitakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Natthi mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, natthi mañjiṭṭhakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Natthi samavisamaṁ, natthi samavisamassa dassāvī. Natthi tārakāni rūpāni, natthi tārakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Natthi candimasūriyā, natthi candimasūriyānaṁ dassāvī. Ahametaṁ na jānāmi, ahametaṁ na passāmi, tasmā taṁ natthī’ti. Sammā nu kho so, rājañña, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?
[¶48] “No, worthy Kassapa. There are such things as dark and bright sights, and one who sees them. And those other things are real, too, as is the one who sees them. So it’s not right to say this: ‘I don’t know it or see it, therefore it doesn’t exist.’”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa. Atthi kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, atthi kaṇhasukkānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Atthi nīlakāni rūpāni, atthi nīlakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī …pe… atthi samavisamaṁ, atthi samavisamassa dassāvī. Atthi tārakāni rūpāni, atthi tārakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī. Atthi candimasūriyā, atthi candimasūriyānaṁ dassāvī. ‘Ahametaṁ na jānāmi, ahametaṁ na passāmi, tasmā taṁ natthī’ti. Na hi so, bho kassapa, sammā vadamāno vadeyyā”ti.
[¶49] “In the same way, chieftain, when you tell me you don’t believe me you seem like the blind man in the simile. You can’t see the other world the way you think, with the eye of the flesh. There are ascetics and brahmins who live in the wilderness, frequenting remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. Meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, they purify the heavenly eye, the power of clairvoyance. With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see this world and the other world, and sentient beings who are spontaneously reborn. That’s how to see the other world, not how you think, with the eye of the flesh. By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, jaccandhūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi yaṁ maṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi. Ko panetaṁ bhoto kassapassa āroceti: ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā, ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā? Na mayaṁ bhoto kassapassa saddahāma: ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā”ti. “Na kho, rājañña, evaṁ paro loko daṭṭhabbo, yathā tvaṁ maññasi iminā maṁsacakkhunā. Ye kho te, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, te tattha appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharantā dibbacakkhuṁ visodhenti. Te dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena imañceva lokaṁ passanti parañca satte ca opapātike. Evañca kho, rājañña, paro loko daṭṭhabbo; na tveva yathā tvaṁ maññasi iminā maṁsacakkhunā. Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
## 46. DN 23 · With Pāyāsi · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/46/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/46/#p-N
[¶0] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶1] “Can you prove it?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶2] “I can.”
> Pali: atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶3] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶4] “Well, I see ascetics and brahmins who are ethical, of good character, who want to live and don’t want to die, who want to be happy and recoil from pain. I think to myself, ‘If those ascetics and brahmins knew that things were going to be better for them after death, they’d drink poison, take their lives, hang themselves, or throw themselves off a cliff. They mustn’t know that things are going to be better for them after death. That’s why they are ethical, of good character, wanting to live and not wanting to die, wanting to be happy and recoiling from pain.’ This is the method by which I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idhāhaṁ, bho kassapa, passāmi samaṇabrāhmaṇe sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme jīvitukāme amaritukāme sukhakāme dukkhapaṭikūle. Tassa mayhaṁ, bho kassapa, evaṁ hoti— sace kho ime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā evaṁ jāneyyuṁ: ‘ito no matānaṁ seyyo bhavissatī’ti. Idānime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā visaṁ vā khādeyyuṁ, satthaṁ vā āhareyyuṁ, ubbandhitvā vā kālaṁ kareyyuṁ, papāte vā papateyyuṁ. Yasmā ca kho ime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā na evaṁ jānanti: ‘ito no matānaṁ seyyo bhavissatī’ti, tasmā ime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā jīvitukāmā amaritukāmā sukhakāmā dukkhapaṭikūlā attānaṁ na mārenti. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶5] 2.6. The Simile of the Pregnant Woman
> Pali: 2.6. Gabbhinīupamā
[¶6] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶7] Once upon a time, a certain brahmin had two wives. One had a son ten or twelve years of age, while the other was pregnant and about to give birth. Then the brahmin passed away.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa dve pajāpatiyo ahesuṁ. Ekissā putto ahosi dasavassuddesiko vā dvādasavassuddesiko vā, ekā gabbhinī upavijaññā. Atha kho so brāhmaṇo kālamakāsi.
[¶8] So the youth said to his mother’s co-wife, ‘Madam, all the money, grain, silver, and gold is mine, and you get nothing. Transfer to me my father’s inheritance.’
> Pali: Atha kho so māṇavako mātusapattiṁ etadavoca: ‘yamidaṁ, bhoti, dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ mayhaṁ; natthi tuyhettha kiñci. Pitu me, bhoti, dāyajjaṁ niyyādehī’ti.
[¶9] But the brahmin lady said, ‘Wait, my dear, until I give birth. If it’s a boy, one portion shall be his. If it’s a girl, she will be your reward.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, sā brāhmaṇī taṁ māṇavakaṁ etadavoca: ‘āgamehi tāva, tāta, yāva vijāyāmi. Sace kumārako bhavissati, tassapi ekadeso bhavissati; sace kumārikā bhavissati, sāpi te opabhoggā bhavissatī’ti.
[¶10] But for a second time, and a third time, the youth insisted that the entire inheritance must be his.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho so māṇavako mātusapattiṁ etadavoca: ‘yamidaṁ, bhoti, dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ mayhaṁ; natthi tuyhettha kiñci. Pitu me, bhoti, dāyajjaṁ niyyādehī’ti. Dutiyampi kho sā brāhmaṇī taṁ māṇavakaṁ etadavoca: ‘āgamehi tāva, tāta, yāva vijāyāmi. Sace kumārako bhavissati, tassapi ekadeso bhavissati; sace kumārikā bhavissati sāpi te opabhoggā bhavissatī’ti. Tatiyampi kho so māṇavako mātusapattiṁ etadavoca: ‘yamidaṁ, bhoti, dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ mayhaṁ; natthi tuyhettha kiñci. Pitu me, bhoti, dāyajjaṁ niyyādehī’ti.
[¶11] So the brahmin lady took a knife, went to her bedroom, and sliced open her belly, thinking, ‘Until I give birth—whether it’s a boy or a girl!’ She destroyed her own life and that of the fetus, as well as any wealth.
> Pali: Atha kho sā brāhmaṇī satthaṁ gahetvā ovarakaṁ pavisitvā udaraṁ opādesi: ‘yāva vijāyāmi yadi vā kumārako yadi vā kumārikā’ti. Sā attānañceva jīvitañca gabbhañca sāpateyyañca vināsesi.
[¶12] Being foolish and incompetent, she sought an inheritance irrationally and fell to ruin and disaster. In the same way, chieftain, being foolish and incompetent, you’re seeking the other world irrationally and will fall to ruin and disaster, just like that brahmin lady. Good ascetics and brahmins don’t force what is unripe to ripen; rather, they wait for it to ripen. For the life of astute ascetics and brahmins is beneficial. So long as they remain, good ascetics and brahmins brim with merit, and act for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans. By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife.”
> Pali: Yathā taṁ bālā abyattā anayabyasanaṁ āpannā ayoniso dāyajjaṁ gavesantī, evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, bālo abyatto anayabyasanaṁ āpajjissasi ayoniso paralokaṁ gavesanto; seyyathāpi sā brāhmaṇī bālā abyattā anayabyasanaṁ āpannā ayoniso dāyajjaṁ gavesantī. Na kho, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā apakkaṁ paripācenti; api ca paripākaṁ āgamenti. Paṇḍitānaṁ attho hi, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sīlavantānaṁ kalyāṇadhammānaṁ jīvitena. Yathā yathā kho, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti tathā tathā bahuṁ puññaṁ pasavanti, bahujanahitāya ca paṭipajjanti bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶13] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶14] “Can you prove it?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶15] “I can.”
> Pali: atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶16] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶17] “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying, ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ I say to them, ‘Well then, worthy sir, place this man in a pot while he’s still alive. Close up the mouth, bind it up with damp leather, and seal it with a thick coat of damp clay. Then lift it up on a stove and light the fire.’ They agree, and do what I ask. When we know that that man has passed away, we lift down the pot and break it open, uncover the mouth, and slowly peek inside, thinking, ‘Hopefully we’ll see his soul escaping.’ But we don’t see his soul escaping. This is how I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti: ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī; imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva kumbhiyā pakkhipitvā mukhaṁ pidahitvā allena cammena onandhitvā allāya mattikāya bahalāvalepanaṁ karitvā uddhanaṁ āropetvā aggiṁ dethā’ti. Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva kumbhiyā pakkhipitvā mukhaṁ pidahitvā allena cammena onandhitvā allāya mattikāya bahalāvalepanaṁ karitvā uddhanaṁ āropetvā aggiṁ denti. Yadā mayaṁ jānāma ‘kālaṅkato so puriso’ti, atha naṁ kumbhiṁ oropetvā ubbhinditvā mukhaṁ vivaritvā saṇikaṁ nillokema: ‘appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passāma. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶18] 2.7. The Simile of the Dream
> Pali: 2.7. Supinakaupamā
[¶19] “Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like. Do you recall ever having a midday nap and seeing delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds in a dream?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi. Abhijānāsi no tvaṁ, rājañña, divā seyyaṁ upagato supinakaṁ passitā ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan”ti?
[¶20] “I do, worthy Kassapa.”
> Pali: “Abhijānāmahaṁ, bho kassapa, divāseyyaṁ upagato supinakaṁ passitā ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan”ti.
[¶21] “At that time were you guarded by hunchbacks, dwarves, coquettes, and maidens?”
> Pali: “Rakkhanti taṁ tamhi samaye khujjāpi vāmanakāpi velāsikāpi komārikāpī”ti?
[¶22] “I was.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho kassapa, rakkhanti maṁ tamhi samaye khujjāpi vāmanakāpi velāsikāpi komārikāpī”ti.
[¶23] “But did they see your soul entering or leaving?”
> Pali: “Api nu tā tuyhaṁ jīvaṁ passanti pavisantaṁ vā nikkhamantaṁ vā”ti?
[¶24] “No they did not.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa”.
[¶25] “So if they couldn’t even see your soul entering or leaving while you were still alive, how could you see the soul of a dead man? By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”
> Pali: “Tā hi nāma, rājañña, tuyhaṁ jīvantassa jīvantiyo jīvaṁ na passissanti pavisantaṁ vā nikkhamantaṁ vā. Kiṁ pana tvaṁ kālaṅkatassa jīvaṁ passissasi pavisantaṁ vā nikkhamantaṁ vā. Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶26] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶27] “Can you prove it?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶28] “I can.”
> Pali: “atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶29] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶30] “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying, ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ I say to them, ‘Well then, worthy sir, weigh this man with scales while he’s still alive. Then strangle him with a bowstring, and when he’s dead, weigh him again.’ They agree, and do what I ask. So long as they are alive, they’re lighter, softer, more flexible. But when they die they become heavier, stiffer, less flexible. This is how I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti: ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī; imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva tulāya tuletvā jiyāya anassāsakaṁ māretvā punadeva tulāya tulethā’ti. Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva tulāya tuletvā jiyāya anassāsakaṁ māretvā punadeva tulāya tulenti. Yadā so jīvati, tadā lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca kammaññataro ca. Yadā pana so kālaṅkato hoti tadā garutaro ca hoti patthinnataro ca akammaññataro ca. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶31] 2.8. The Simile of the Hot Iron Ball
> Pali: 2.8. Santattaayoguḷaupamā
[¶32] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said. Suppose a person was to heat an iron ball all day until it was burning, blazing, and glowing, and then they weigh it with scales. After some time, when it had cooled and become quenched, they’d weigh it again. When would that iron ball be lighter, softer, and more workable—when it’s burning or when it’s cool?”
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti. Seyyathāpi, rājañña, puriso divasaṁ santattaṁ ayoguḷaṁ ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ tulāya tuleyya. Tamenaṁ aparena samayena sītaṁ nibbutaṁ tulāya tuleyya. Kadā nu kho so ayoguḷo lahutaro vā hoti mudutaro vā kammaññataro vā, yadā vā āditto sampajjalito sajotibhūto, yadā vā sīto nibbuto”ti?
[¶33] “So long as the iron ball is full of heat and air—burning, blazing, and glowing—it’s lighter, softer, and more workable. But when it lacks heat and air—cooled and quenched—it’s heavier, stiffer, and less workable.”
> Pali: “Yadā so, bho kassapa, ayoguḷo tejosahagato ca hoti vāyosahagato ca āditto sampajjalito sajotibhūto, tadā lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca kammaññataro ca. Yadā pana so ayoguḷo neva tejosahagato hoti na vāyosahagato sīto nibbuto, tadā garutaro ca hoti patthinnataro ca akammaññataro cā”ti.
[¶34] “In the same way, so long as this body is full of life and warmth and consciousness it’s lighter, softer, and more flexible. But when it lacks life and warmth and consciousness it’s heavier, stiffer, and less flexible. By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājañña, yadāyaṁ kāyo āyusahagato ca hoti usmāsahagato ca viññāṇasahagato ca, tadā lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca kammaññataro ca. Yadā panāyaṁ kāyo neva āyusahagato hoti na usmāsahagato na viññāṇasahagato tadā garutaro ca hoti patthinnataro ca akammaññataro ca. Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶35] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶36] “Can you prove it?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶37] “I can.”
> Pali: atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶38] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶39] “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying, ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ I say to them, ‘Well then, worthy sir, take this man’s life without damaging his outer skin, inner skin, flesh, sinews, bones, or marrow. Hopefully we’ll see his soul escaping.’ They agree, and do what I ask. When he’s nearly dead, I tell them to lay him on his back in hope of seeing his soul escape. They do so. But we don’t see his soul escaping. I tell them to lay him bent over, to lay him on his side, to lay him on the other side; to stand him upright, to stand him upside down; to strike him with fists, stones, rods, and swords; and to give him a good shaking in hope of seeing his soul escape. They do all these things. But we don’t see his soul escaping. For him the eye itself is present, and so are those sights. Yet he does not experience that sense-field. The ear itself is present, and so are those sounds. Yet he does not experience that sense-field. The nose itself is present, and so are those smells. Yet he does not experience that sense-field. The tongue itself is present, and so are those tastes. Yet he does not experience that sense-field. The body itself is present, and so are those touches. Yet he does not experience that sense-field. This is how I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti: ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī; imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ anupahacca chaviñca cammañca maṁsañca nhāruñca aṭṭhiñca aṭṭhimiñjañca jīvitā voropetha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ anupahacca chaviñca …pe… jīvitā voropenti. Yadā so āmato hoti, tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ uttānaṁ nipātetha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Te taṁ purisaṁ uttānaṁ nipātenti. Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passāma. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ avakujjaṁ nipātetha … passena nipātetha … dutiyena passena nipātetha … uddhaṁ ṭhapetha … omuddhakaṁ ṭhapetha … pāṇinā ākoṭetha … leḍḍunā ākoṭetha … daṇḍena ākoṭetha … satthena ākoṭetha … odhunātha sandhunātha niddhunātha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Te taṁ purisaṁ odhunanti sandhunanti niddhunanti. Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passāma. Tassa tadeva cakkhu hoti te rūpā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti. Tadeva sotaṁ hoti te saddā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti. Tadeva ghānaṁ hoti te gandhā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti. Sāva jivhā hoti te rasā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti. Sveva kāyo hoti te phoṭṭhabbā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶40] 2.9. The Simile of the Horn Blower
> Pali: 2.9. Saṅkhadhamaupamā
[¶41] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶42] Once upon a time, a certain horn blower took his horn and traveled to a borderland, where he went to a certain village. Standing in the middle of the village, he sounded his horn three times, then placed it on the ground and sat down to one side.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro saṅkhadhamo saṅkhaṁ ādāya paccantimaṁ janapadaṁ agamāsi. So yena aññataro gāmo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā majjhe gāmassa ṭhito tikkhattuṁ saṅkhaṁ upalāpetvā saṅkhaṁ bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipitvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.
[¶43] Then the people of the borderland thought, ‘Oh my, what is making this sound, so arousing, sensuous, intoxicating, infatuating, and captivating?’ They gathered around the horn blower and said, ‘Oh my, what is making this sound, so arousing, sensuous, intoxicating, infatuating, and captivating?’
> Pali: Atha kho, rājañña, tesaṁ paccantajanapadānaṁ manussānaṁ etadahosi: ‘ambho kassa nu kho eso saddo evaṁrajanīyo evaṅkamanīyo evaṁmadanīyo evambandhanīyo evaṁmucchanīyo’ti. Sannipatitvā taṁ saṅkhadhamaṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘ambho, kassa nu kho eso saddo evaṁrajanīyo evaṅkamanīyo evaṁmadanīyo evambandhanīyo evaṁmucchanīyo’ti.
[¶44] ‘The sound is made by this, which is called a horn.’
> Pali: ‘Eso kho, bho, saṅkho nāma yasseso saddo evaṁrajanīyo evaṅkamanīyo evaṁmadanīyo evambandhanīyo evaṁmucchanīyo’ti.
[¶45] They laid that horn on its back, saying, ‘Speak, good horn! Speak, good horn!’ But still the horn made no sound.
> Pali: Te taṁ saṅkhaṁ uttānaṁ nipātesuṁ: ‘vadehi, bho saṅkha, vadehi, bho saṅkhā’ti. Neva so saṅkho saddamakāsi.
[¶46] Then they lay the horn bent over, they lay it on its side, they lay it on its other side; they stood it upright, they stood it upside down; they struck it with fists, stones, rods, and swords; and they gave it a good shake, saying, ‘Speak, good horn! Speak, good horn!’ But still the horn made no sound.
> Pali: Te taṁ saṅkhaṁ avakujjaṁ nipātesuṁ, passena nipātesuṁ, dutiyena passena nipātesuṁ, uddhaṁ ṭhapesuṁ, omuddhakaṁ ṭhapesuṁ, pāṇinā ākoṭesuṁ, leḍḍunā ākoṭesuṁ, daṇḍena ākoṭesuṁ, satthena ākoṭesuṁ, odhuniṁsu sandhuniṁsu niddhuniṁsu: ‘vadehi, bho saṅkha, vadehi, bho saṅkhā’ti. Neva so saṅkho saddamakāsi.
[¶47] So the horn blower thought, ‘How foolish are these borderland folk! For how on earth can they seek the sound of a horn so irrationally?’ And as they looked on, he picked up the horn, sounded it three times, and took it away with him.
> Pali: Atha kho, rājañña, tassa saṅkhadhamassa etadahosi: ‘yāva bālā ime paccantajanapadā manussā, kathañhi nāma ayoniso saṅkhasaddaṁ gavesissantī’ti. Tesaṁ pekkhamānānaṁ saṅkhaṁ gahetvā tikkhattuṁ saṅkhaṁ upalāpetvā saṅkhaṁ ādāya pakkāmi.
[¶48] Then the people of the borderland thought, ‘So, it seems, when what is called a horn is accompanied by a person, effort, and wind, it makes a sound. But when these things are absent it makes no sound.’
> Pali: Atha kho, rājañña, tesaṁ paccantajanapadānaṁ manussānaṁ etadahosi: ‘yadā kira, bho, ayaṁ saṅkho nāma purisasahagato ca hoti vāyāmasahagato ca vāyusahagato ca, tadāyaṁ saṅkho saddaṁ karoti, yadā panāyaṁ saṅkho neva purisasahagato hoti na vāyāmasahagato na vāyusahagato, nāyaṁ saṅkho saddaṁ karotī’ti.
[¶49] In the same way, so long as this body is full of life and warmth and consciousness it walks back and forth, stands, sits, and lies down. It sees sights with the eye, hears sounds with the ear, smells odors with the nose, tastes flavors with the tongue, encounters touches with the body, and knows ideas with the mind. But when it lacks life and warmth and consciousness it does none of these things. By this method, too, it ought to be proven that there is an afterlife.”
> Pali: Evameva kho, rājañña, yadāyaṁ kāyo āyusahagato ca hoti usmāsahagato ca viññāṇasahagato ca, tadā abhikkamatipi paṭikkamatipi tiṭṭhatipi nisīdatipi seyyampi kappeti, cakkhunāpi rūpaṁ passati, sotenapi saddaṁ suṇāti, ghānenapi gandhaṁ ghāyati, jivhāyapi rasaṁ sāyati, kāyenapi phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusati, manasāpi dhammaṁ vijānāti. Yadā panāyaṁ kāyo neva āyusahagato hoti, na usmāsahagato, na viññāṇasahagato, tadā neva abhikkamati na paṭikkamati na tiṭṭhati na nisīdati na seyyaṁ kappeti, cakkhunāpi rūpaṁ na passati, sotenapi saddaṁ na suṇāti, ghānenapi gandhaṁ na ghāyati, jivhāyapi rasaṁ na sāyati, kāyenapi phoṭṭhabbaṁ na phusati, manasāpi dhammaṁ na vijānāti. Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu: ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶50] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶51] “Can you prove it?”
> Pali: “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶52] “I can.”
> Pali: atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…
[¶53] “How, exactly, chieftain?”
> Pali: yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?
[¶54] “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying, ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal. Punish him as you will.’ I say to them, ‘Well then, worthy sir, cut open this man’s outer skin. Hopefully we might see his soul.’ They cut open his outer skin, but we see no soul. I say to them, ‘Well then, worthy sir, cut open his inner skin, flesh, sinews, bones, or marrow. Hopefully we’ll see his soul.’ They do so, but we see no soul. This is how I prove that there is no afterlife.”
> Pali: “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti: ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī, imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imassa purisassa chaviṁ chindatha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Te tassa purisassa chaviṁ chindanti. Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ passāma. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘tena hi, bho, imassa purisassa cammaṁ chindatha, maṁsaṁ chindatha, nhāruṁ chindatha, aṭṭhiṁ chindatha, aṭṭhimiñjaṁ chindatha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ passeyyāmā’ti. Te tassa purisassa aṭṭhimiñjaṁ chindanti, nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ passeyyāma. Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.
[¶55] 2.10. The Simile of the Fire-Worshiping Matted-Hair Ascetic
> Pali: 2.10. Aggikajaṭilaupamā
[¶56] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶57] Once upon a time, a certain fire-worshiping matted-hair ascetic settled in a leaf hut in a wilderness region. Then a caravan came out from a certain country. It stayed for one night not far from that ascetic’s hermitage, and then moved on. The ascetic thought, ‘Why don’t I go to that caravan’s campsite? Hopefully I’ll find something useful there.’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro aggiko jaṭilo araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭiyā sammati. Atha kho, rājañña, aññataro janapade sattho vuṭṭhāsi. Atha kho so sattho tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa assamassa sāmantā ekarattiṁ vasitvā pakkāmi. Atha kho, rājañña, tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ yena so satthavāso tenupasaṅkameyyaṁ, appeva nāmettha kiñci upakaraṇaṁ adhigaccheyyan’ti.
[¶58] So he went, and he saw a little baby boy abandoned there. When he saw this he thought, ‘It’s not proper for me to look on while a human being dies. Why don’t I bring this boy back to my hermitage, nurse him, provide for him, and raise him?’ So that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo kālasseva vuṭṭhāya yena so satthavāso tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā addasa tasmiṁ satthavāse daharaṁ kumāraṁ mandaṁ uttānaseyyakaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ. Disvānassa etadahosi: ‘na kho me taṁ patirūpaṁ yaṁ me pekkhamānassa manussabhūto kālaṅkareyya; yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ dārakaṁ assamaṁ netvā āpādeyyaṁ poseyyaṁ vaḍḍheyyan’ti. Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo taṁ dārakaṁ assamaṁ netvā āpādesi posesi vaḍḍhesi.
[¶59] When the boy was ten or twelve years old, the ascetic had some business come up in the country. So he said to the boy, ‘My dear, I wish to go to the country. Serve the sacred flame. Do not extinguish it. But if you should extinguish it, here is the hatchet, the firewood, and the bundle of drill-sticks. Light the fire and serve it.’ And having instructed the boy, the ascetic went to the country.
> Pali: Yadā so dārako dasavassuddesiko vā hoti dvādasavassuddesiko vā, atha kho tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa janapade kañcideva karaṇīyaṁ uppajji. Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo taṁ dārakaṁ etadavoca: ‘icchāmahaṁ, tāta, janapadaṁ gantuṁ; aggiṁ, tāta, paricareyyāsi. Mā ca te aggi nibbāyi. Sace ca te aggi nibbāyeyya, ayaṁ vāsī imāni kaṭṭhāni idaṁ araṇisahitaṁ, aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyāsī’ti. Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo taṁ dārakaṁ evaṁ anusāsitvā janapadaṁ agamāsi.
[¶60] But the boy was so engrossed in his play, the fire went out. He thought, ‘My father told me to serve the sacred flame. Why don’t I light it again and serve it?’
> Pali: Tassa khiḍḍāpasutassa aggi nibbāyi. Atha kho tassa dārakassa etadahosi: ‘pitā kho maṁ evaṁ avaca: “aggiṁ, tāta, paricareyyāsi. Mā ca te aggi nibbāyi. Sace ca te aggi nibbāyeyya, ayaṁ vāsī imāni kaṭṭhāni idaṁ araṇisahitaṁ, aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyāsī”ti. Yannūnāhaṁ aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyan’ti.
[¶61] So he chopped the bundle of drill-sticks with the hatchet, thinking, ‘Hopefully I’ll get a fire!’ But he still got no fire.
> Pali: Atha kho so dārako araṇisahitaṁ vāsiyā tacchi: ‘appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan’ti. Neva so aggiṁ adhigacchi.
[¶62] He split the bundle of drill-sticks into two, three, four, five, ten, or a hundred parts. He chopped them into splinters, pounded them in a mortar, and swept them away in a strong wind, thinking, ‘Hopefully I’ll get a fire!’ But he still got no fire.
> Pali: Araṇisahitaṁ dvidhā phālesi, tidhā phālesi, catudhā phālesi, pañcadhā phālesi, dasadhā phālesi, satadhā phālesi, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ akāsi, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ karitvā udukkhale koṭṭesi, udukkhale koṭṭetvā mahāvāte opuni: ‘appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan’ti. Neva so aggiṁ adhigacchi.
[¶63] Then the matted-hair ascetic, having concluded his business in the country, returned to his own hermitage, and said to the boy, ‘I trust, my dear, that the fire didn’t go out?’ And the boy told him what had happened. Then the ascetic thought, ‘How foolish is this boy, how incompetent! For how on earth can he seek a fire so irrationally?’
> Pali: Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo janapade taṁ karaṇīyaṁ tīretvā yena sako assamo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ dārakaṁ etadavoca: ‘kacci te, tāta, aggi na nibbuto’ti? ‘Idha me, tāta, khiḍḍāpasutassa aggi nibbāyi. Tassa me etadahosi: “pitā kho maṁ evaṁ avaca aggiṁ, tāta, paricareyyāsi. Mā ca te, tāta, aggi nibbāyi. Sace ca te aggi nibbāyeyya, ayaṁ vāsī imāni kaṭṭhāni idaṁ araṇisahitaṁ, aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyāsīti. Yannūnāhaṁ aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyan”ti. Atha khvāhaṁ, tāta, araṇisahitaṁ vāsiyā tacchiṁ: “appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan”ti. Nevāhaṁ aggiṁ adhigacchiṁ. Araṇisahitaṁ dvidhā phālesiṁ, tidhā phālesiṁ, catudhā phālesiṁ, pañcadhā phālesiṁ, dasadhā phālesiṁ, satadhā phālesiṁ, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ akāsiṁ, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ karitvā udukkhale koṭṭesiṁ, udukkhale koṭṭetvā mahāvāte opuniṁ: “appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan”ti. Nevāhaṁ aggiṁ adhigacchin’ti. Atha kho tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa etadahosi: ‘yāva bālo ayaṁ dārako abyatto, kathañhi nāma ayoniso aggiṁ gavesissatī’ti.
[¶64] So while the boy looked on, he took a bundle of fire-sticks, lit the fire, and said, ‘Dear boy, this is how to light a fire. Not the foolish and incompetent way you sought it so irrationally.’ In the same way, chieftain, being foolish and incompetent, you seek the other world irrationally. Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it! Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”
> Pali: Tassa pekkhamānassa araṇisahitaṁ gahetvā aggiṁ nibbattetvā taṁ dārakaṁ etadavoca: ‘evaṁ kho, tāta, aggi nibbattetabbo. Na tveva yathā tvaṁ bālo abyatto ayoniso aggiṁ gavesī’ti. Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, bālo abyatto ayoniso paralokaṁ gavesissasi. Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶65] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception. King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings. If I let go of this harmful misconception, there will be some who say to me, ‘How foolish is the chieftain Pāyāsi, how incompetent, that he should hold on to a mistake!’ I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ. Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi: ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī: “itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”’ti. Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro: ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti. Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.
[¶66] 2.11. The Simile of the Two Caravan Leaders
> Pali: 2.11. Dvesatthavāhaupamā
[¶67] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶68] Once upon a time, a large caravan of a thousand wagons traveled from a country in the east to the west. Wherever they went they quickly used up the grass, wood, water, and the green foliage. Now, that caravan had two leaders, each in charge of five hundred wagons. They thought, ‘This is a large caravan of a thousand wagons. Wherever we go we quickly use up the grass, wood, water, and the green foliage. Why don’t we split the caravan in two halves?’ So that’s what they did.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, mahāsakaṭasattho sakaṭasahassaṁ puratthimā janapadā pacchimaṁ janapadaṁ agamāsi. So yena yena gacchi, khippaṁyeva pariyādiyati tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ haritakapaṇṇaṁ. Tasmiṁ kho pana satthe dve satthavāhā ahesuṁ eko pañcannaṁ sakaṭasatānaṁ, eko pañcannaṁ sakaṭasatānaṁ. Atha kho tesaṁ satthavāhānaṁ etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho mahāsakaṭasattho sakaṭasahassaṁ; te mayaṁ yena yena gacchāma, khippameva pariyādiyati tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ haritakapaṇṇaṁ. Yannūna mayaṁ imaṁ satthaṁ dvidhā vibhajeyyāma— ekato pañca sakaṭasatāni ekato pañca sakaṭasatānī’ti. Te taṁ satthaṁ dvidhā vibhajiṁsu ekato pañca sakaṭasatāni, ekato pañca sakaṭasatāni.
[¶69] One caravan leader, having prepared much grass, wood, and water, started the caravan. After two or three days’ journey he saw a dark man with red eyes coming the other way in a donkey cart with muddy wheels. He was armored with a quiver and wreathed with yellow lotus, his clothes and hair all wet. Seeing him, he said, ‘Worthy sir, where do you come from?’
> Pali: Eko satthavāho bahuṁ tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca āropetvā satthaṁ payāpesi. Dvīhatīhapayāto kho pana so sattho addasa purisaṁ kāḷaṁ lohitakkhaṁ sannaddhakalāpaṁ kumudamāliṁ allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ kaddamamakkhitehi cakkehi bhadrena rathena paṭipathaṁ āgacchantaṁ, disvā etadavoca: ‘kuto, bho, āgacchasī’ti?
[¶70] ‘From such-and-such a country.’
> Pali: ‘Amukamhā janapadā’ti.
[¶71] ‘And where are you going?’
> Pali: ‘Kuhiṁ gamissasī’ti?
[¶72] ‘To the country named such-and-such.’
> Pali: ‘Amukaṁ nāma janapadan’ti.
[¶73] ‘But has there been much rain in the desert up ahead?’
> Pali: ‘Kacci, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho’ti?
[¶74] ‘Indeed there has, worthy sir. The tracks are sprinkled with water, and there is much grass, wood, and water. Discard your grass, wood, and water. Your wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, so don’t tire your draught teams.’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho, āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca. Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha, mā yoggāni kilamitthā’ti.
## 47. DN 23 · With Pāyāsi · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/47/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/47/#p-N
[¶0] So the caravan leader addressed his drivers, ‘This man says that there has been much rain in the desert up ahead. He advises us to discard the grass, wood, and water. The wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, and won’t tire our draught teams. So let’s discard the grass, wood, and water and restart the caravan with lightly-laden wagons.’
> Pali: Atha kho so satthavāho satthike āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ, bho, puriso evamāha: “purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho, āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca. Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha, mā yoggāni kilamitthā”ti. Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi satthaṁ payāpethā’ti.
[¶1] ‘Yes, worthy sir,’ the drivers replied, and that’s what they did.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho te satthikā tassa satthavāhassa paṭissutvā chaḍḍetvā purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni lahubhārehi sakaṭehi satthaṁ payāpesuṁ.
[¶2] But in the caravan’s first campsite they saw no grass, wood, or water. And in the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh campsites they saw no grass, wood, or water. And all fell to ruin and disaster. And the men and beasts in that caravan were all devoured by that non-human spirit. Only their bones were left over.
> Pali: Te paṭhamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā. Dutiyepi satthavāse … tatiyepi satthavāse … catutthepi satthavāse … pañcamepi satthavāse … chaṭṭhepi satthavāse … sattamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā. Sabbeva anayabyasanaṁ āpajjiṁsu. Ye ca tasmiṁ satthe ahesuṁ manussā vā pasū vā, sabbe so yakkho amanusso bhakkhesi. Aṭṭhikāneva sesāni.
[¶3] Now, when the second caravan leader knew that the first caravan was well underway, he prepared much grass, wood, and water and started the caravan. After two or three days’ journey he saw a dark man with red eyes coming the other way in a donkey cart with muddy wheels. He was armored with a quiver and wreathed with yellow lotus, his clothes and hair all wet. Seeing him, he said, ‘Worthy sir, where do you come from?’
> Pali: Yadā aññāsi dutiyo satthavāho: ‘bahunikkhanto kho, bho, dāni so sattho’ti bahuṁ tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca āropetvā satthaṁ payāpesi. Dvīhatīhapayāto kho pana so sattho addasa purisaṁ kāḷaṁ lohitakkhaṁ sannaddhakalāpaṁ kumudamāliṁ allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ kaddamamakkhitehi cakkehi bhadrena rathena paṭipathaṁ āgacchantaṁ, disvā etadavoca: ‘kuto, bho, āgacchasī’ti?
[¶4] ‘From such-and-such a country.’
> Pali: ‘Amukamhā janapadā’ti.
[¶5] ‘And where are you going?’
> Pali: ‘Kuhiṁ gamissasī’ti?
[¶6] ‘To the country named such-and-such.’
> Pali: ‘Amukaṁ nāma janapadan’ti.
[¶7] ‘But has there been much rain in the desert up ahead?’
> Pali: ‘Kacci, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho’ti?
[¶8] ‘Indeed there has, worthy sir. The tracks are sprinkled with water, and there is much grass, wood, and water. Discard your grass, wood, and water. Your wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, so don’t tire your draught teams.’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho. Āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca. Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha, mā yoggāni kilamitthā’ti.
[¶9] So the caravan leader addressed his drivers, ‘This man says that there has been much rain in the desert up ahead. He advises us to discard the grass, wood, and water. The wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, and won’t tire our draught teams. But this person is neither our friend nor relative. How can we proceed out of trust in him? We shouldn’t discard any grass, wood, or water, but continue with our goods as laden. We shall not discard any old stock.’
> Pali: Atha kho so satthavāho satthike āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ, bho, puriso evamāha: “purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho, āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca. Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha; mā yoggāni kilamitthā”ti. Ayaṁ bho puriso neva amhākaṁ mitto, na ñātisālohito, kathaṁ mayaṁ imassa saddhāya gamissāma. Na vo chaḍḍetabbāni purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, yathābhatena bhaṇḍena satthaṁ payāpetha. Na no purāṇaṁ chaḍḍessāmā’ti.
[¶10] ‘Yes, worthy sir,’ the drivers replied, and they restarted the caravan with the goods as laden.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho te satthikā tassa satthavāhassa paṭissutvā yathābhatena bhaṇḍena satthaṁ payāpesuṁ.
[¶11] And in the caravan’s first campsite they saw no grass, wood, or water. And in the second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh campsites they saw no grass, wood, or water. And they saw the other caravan that had come to ruin. And they saw the bones of the men and beasts who had been devoured by that non-human spirit.
> Pali: Te paṭhamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā. Dutiyepi satthavāse … tatiyepi satthavāse … catutthepi satthavāse … pañcamepi satthavāse … chaṭṭhepi satthavāse … sattamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā. Tañca satthaṁ addasaṁsu anayabyasanaṁ āpannaṁ. Ye ca tasmiṁ satthepi ahesuṁ manussā vā pasū vā, tesañca aṭṭhikāneva addasaṁsu tena yakkhena amanussena bhakkhitānaṁ.
[¶12] So the caravan leader addressed his drivers, ‘This caravan came to ruin, as happens when guided by a foolish caravan leader. Well then, worthy sir, discard any of our merchandise that’s of little value, and take what’s valuable from this caravan.’
> Pali: Atha kho so satthavāho satthike āmantesi: ‘ayaṁ kho, bho, sattho anayabyasanaṁ āpanno, yathā taṁ tena bālena satthavāhena pariṇāyakena. Tena hi, bho, yānamhākaṁ satthe appasārāni paṇiyāni, tāni chaḍḍetvā, yāni imasmiṁ satthe mahāsārāni paṇiyāni, tāni ādiyathā’ti.
[¶13] ‘Yes, worthy sir’ replied the drivers, and that’s what they did. They crossed over the desert safely, as happens when guided by an astute caravan leader.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho te satthikā tassa satthavāhassa paṭissutvā yāni sakasmiṁ satthe appasārāni paṇiyāni, tāni chaḍḍetvā yāni tasmiṁ satthe mahāsārāni paṇiyāni, tāni ādiyitvā sotthinā taṁ kantāraṁ nitthariṁsu, yathā taṁ paṇḍitena satthavāhena pariṇāyakena.
[¶14] In the same way, chieftain, being foolish and incompetent, you will come to ruin seeking the other world irrationally, like the first caravan leader. And those who think you’re worth listening to and trusting will also come to ruin, like the drivers. Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it! Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, bālo abyatto anayabyasanaṁ āpajjissasi ayoniso paralokaṁ gavesanto, seyyathāpi so purimo satthavāho. Yepi tava sotabbaṁ saddhātabbaṁ maññissanti, tepi anayabyasanaṁ āpajjissanti, seyyathāpi te satthikā. Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶15] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception. King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings. I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ. Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi: ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī: “itipi natthi paro loko …pe… vipāko”’ti. Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro: ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño, abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti. Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.
[¶16] 2.12. The Simile of the Dung-Carrier
> Pali: 2.12. Gūthabhārikaupamā
[¶17] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi. Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶18] Once upon a time, a certain swineherd went from his own village to another village. There he saw a large pile of dry dung abandoned. He thought, ‘This pile of dry dung can serve as food for my pigs. Why don’t I carry it off?’ So he spread out his upper robe, shoveled the dry dung onto it, tied it up into a parcel, lifted it on to his head, and went on his way. While on his way a large storm out of season poured down. Smeared with leaking, oozing dung down to his fingernails, he kept on carrying the load of dung.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro sūkaraposako puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ agamāsi. Tattha addasa pahūtaṁ sukkhagūthaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ. Disvānassa etadahosi: ‘ayaṁ kho pahūto sukkhagūtho chaḍḍito, mama ca sūkarabhattaṁ; yannūnāhaṁ ito sukkhagūthaṁ hareyyan’ti. So uttarāsaṅgaṁ pattharitvā pahūtaṁ sukkhagūthaṁ ākiritvā bhaṇḍikaṁ bandhitvā sīse ubbāhetvā agamāsi. Tassa antarāmagge mahāakālamegho pāvassi. So uggharantaṁ paggharantaṁ yāva agganakhā gūthena makkhito gūthabhāraṁ ādāya agamāsi.
[¶19] When people saw him they said, ‘Have you gone mad, lad? Have you lost your mind? For how on earth can you, smeared with leaking, oozing dung down to your fingernails, keep on carrying that load of dung?’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘kacci no tvaṁ, bhaṇe, ummatto, kacci viceto, kathañhi nāma uggharantaṁ paggharantaṁ yāva agganakhā gūthena makkhito gūthabhāraṁ harissasī’ti.
[¶20] ‘You’re the mad ones, lads! You’re the ones who’ve lost your minds! For this will serve as food for my pigs.’
> Pali: ‘Tumhe khvettha, bhaṇe, ummattā, tumhe vicetā, tathā hi pana me sūkarabhattan’ti.
[¶21] In the same way, chieftain, you seem like the dung carrier in the simile. Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it! Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, gūthabhārikūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi. Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶22] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception. King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings. I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ. Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi: ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī: “itipi natthi paro loko …pe… vipāko”’ti. Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro: ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti. Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.
[¶23] 2.13. The Simile of the Gamblers
> Pali: 2.13. Akkhadhuttakaupamā
[¶24] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi, upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶25] Once upon a time, two gamblers were playing with seed dice. One gambler, every time they took a bad hand, swallowed the losing seed.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, dve akkhadhuttā akkhehi dibbiṁsu. Eko akkhadhutto āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilati.
[¶26] The second gambler saw him, and said, ‘Well, dear, you’ve won it all! Give me the seed dice, I will roll them.’
> Pali: Addasā kho dutiyo akkhadhutto taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilantaṁ, disvā taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ etadavoca: ‘tvaṁ kho, samma, ekantikena jināsi, dehi me, samma, akkhe pajohissāmī’ti.
[¶27] ‘Yes, dear,’ the gambler replied, and gave them.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho so akkhadhutto tassa akkhadhuttassa akkhe pādāsi.
[¶28] Then the gambler soaked the seed dice in poison and said to the other, ‘Come, dear, let’s play seed dice.’
> Pali: Atha kho so akkhadhutto akkhe visena paribhāvetvā taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ etadavoca: ‘ehi kho, samma, akkhehi dibbissāmā’ti.
[¶29] ‘Yes, dear,’ the other gambler replied.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho so akkhadhutto tassa akkhadhuttassa paccassosi.
[¶30] And for a second time the gamblers played with seed dice. And for the second time, every time they took a bad hand, that gambler swallowed the losing seed.
> Pali: Dutiyampi kho te akkhadhuttā akkhehi dibbiṁsu. Dutiyampi kho so akkhadhutto āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilati.
[¶31] The second gambler saw him, and said,
> Pali: Addasā kho dutiyo akkhadhutto taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ dutiyampi āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilantaṁ, disvā taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ etadavoca:
[¶32] ‘The man swallows the dice without realizing
they’re smeared with most terrible venom.
Swallow, you damn cheat, swallow!
Soon you’ll know the bitter fruit!’
> Pali: ‘Littaṁ paramena tejasā,
Gilamakkhaṁ puriso na bujjhati;
Gila re gila pāpadhuttaka,
Pacchā te kaṭukaṁ bhavissatī’ti.
[¶33] In the same way, chieftain, you seem like the gambler in the simile. Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it! Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, akkhadhuttakūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi. Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶34] “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception. King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings. I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”
> Pali: “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ. Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi: ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī: “itipi natthi paro loko …pe… vipāko”’ti. Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro: ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti. Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.
[¶35] 2.14. The Simile of the Man Who Carried Hemp
> Pali: 2.14. Sāṇabhārikaupamā
[¶36] “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile. For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.
> Pali: “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi, upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶37] Once upon a time, the inhabitants of a certain country emigrated. Then one friend said to another, ‘Come, dear, let’s go to that country. Hopefully we’ll get some riches there!’
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro janapado vuṭṭhāsi. Atha kho sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi: ‘āyāma, samma, yena so janapado tenupasaṅkamissāma, appeva nāmettha kiñci dhanaṁ adhigaccheyyāmā’ti.
[¶38] ‘Yes, dear,’ the other replied.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho sahāyako sahāyakassa paccassosi.
[¶39] They went to that country, and to a certain deserted village. There they saw a pile of abandoned sunn hemp. Seeing it, one friend said to the other, ‘This is a pile of abandoned sunn hemp. Well then, dear, you make up a load of hemp, and I’ll make one too. Let’s both take a load of hemp and go on.’
> Pali: Te yena so janapado, yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, tattha addasaṁsu pahūtaṁ sāṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi: ‘idaṁ kho, samma, pahūtaṁ sāṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ bandha, ahañca sāṇabhāraṁ bandhissāmi, ubho sāṇabhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.
[¶40] ‘Yes, dear,’ he said. Carrying their loads of hemp they went to another deserted village.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho sahāyako sahāyakassa paṭissutvā sāṇabhāraṁ bandhitvā te ubho sāṇabhāraṁ ādāya yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.
[¶41] There they saw much sunn hemp thread abandoned. Seeing it, one friend said to the other, ‘This pile of abandoned sunn hemp thread is just what we wanted the hemp for! Well then, dear, let’s abandon our loads of hemp, and both take a load of hemp thread and go on.’
> Pali: Tattha addasaṁsu pahūtaṁ sāṇasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi: ‘yassa kho, samma, atthāya iccheyyāma sāṇaṁ, idaṁ pahūtaṁ sāṇasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ. Tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍehi, ahañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍessāmi, ubho sāṇasuttabhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.
[¶42] ‘I’ve already carried this load of hemp a long way, and it’s well tied up. It’s good enough for me, you understand.’ So one friend abandoned their load of hemp and picked up a load of hemp thread.
> Pali: ‘Ayaṁ kho me, samma, sāṇabhāro dūrābhato ca susannaddho ca, alaṁ me, tvaṁ pajānāhī’ti. Atha kho so sahāyako sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍetvā sāṇasuttabhāraṁ ādiyi.
[¶43] They went to another deserted village. There they saw much sunn hemp cloth abandoned. Seeing it, one friend said to the other, ‘This pile of abandoned sunn hemp cloth is just what we wanted the hemp and hemp thread for! Well then, dear, let’s abandon our loads, and both take a load of hemp cloth and go on.’
> Pali: Te yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. Tattha addasaṁsu pahūtā sāṇiyo chaḍḍitā, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi: ‘yassa kho, samma, atthāya iccheyyāma sāṇaṁ vā sāṇasuttaṁ vā, imā pahūtā sāṇiyo chaḍḍitā. Tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍehi, ahañca sāṇasuttabhāraṁ chaḍḍessāmi, ubho sāṇibhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.
[¶44] ‘I’ve already carried this load of hemp a long way, and it’s well tied up. It’s good enough for me, you understand.’ So one friend abandoned their load of hemp thread and picked up a load of hemp cloth.
> Pali: ‘Ayaṁ kho me, samma, sāṇabhāro dūrābhato ca susannaddho ca, alaṁ me, tvaṁ pajānāhī’ti. Atha kho so sahāyako sāṇasuttabhāraṁ chaḍḍetvā sāṇibhāraṁ ādiyi.
[¶45] They went to another deserted village. There they saw a pile of flax, and by turn, linen thread, linen cloth, cotton, cotton thread, cotton cloth, iron, copper, tin, lead, silver, and gold abandoned. Seeing it, one friend said to the other, ‘This pile of gold is just what we wanted all those other things for! Well then, dear, let’s abandon our loads, and both take a load of gold and go on.’
> Pali: Te yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. Tattha addasaṁsu pahūtaṁ khomaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …pe… pahūtaṁ khomasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ khomadussaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ kappāsaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ kappāsikasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ kappāsikadussaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ ayaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ lohaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ tipuṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ sīsaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ sajjhaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā … pahūtaṁ suvaṇṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi: ‘yassa kho, samma, atthāya iccheyyāma sāṇaṁ vā sāṇasuttaṁ vā sāṇiyo vā khomaṁ vā khomasuttaṁ vā khomadussaṁ vā kappāsaṁ vā kappāsikasuttaṁ vā kappāsikadussaṁ vā ayaṁ vā lohaṁ vā tipuṁ vā sīsaṁ vā sajjhaṁ vā, idaṁ pahūtaṁ suvaṇṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ. Tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍehi, ahañca sajjhabhāraṁ chaḍḍessāmi, ubho suvaṇṇabhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.
[¶46] ‘I’ve already carried this load of hemp a long way, and it’s well tied up. It’s good enough for me, you understand.’ So one friend abandoned their load of silver and picked up a load of gold.
> Pali: ‘Ayaṁ kho me, samma, sāṇabhāro dūrābhato ca susannaddho ca, alaṁ me tvaṁ pajānāhī’ti. Atha kho so sahāyako sajjhabhāraṁ chaḍḍetvā suvaṇṇabhāraṁ ādiyi.
[¶47] Then they returned to their own village. When one friend returned with a load of sunn hemp, they didn’t please their parents, their partners and children, or their friends and colleagues. And they got no pleasure and happiness on that account. But when the other friend returned with a load of gold, they pleased their parents, their partners and children, and their friends and colleagues. And they got much pleasure and happiness on that account.
> Pali: Te yena sako gāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. Tattha yo so sahāyako sāṇabhāraṁ ādāya agamāsi, tassa neva mātāpitaro abhinandiṁsu, na puttadārā abhinandiṁsu, na mittāmaccā abhinandiṁsu, na ca tatonidānaṁ sukhaṁ somanassaṁ adhigacchi. Yo pana so sahāyako suvaṇṇabhāraṁ ādāya agamāsi, tassa mātāpitaropi abhinandiṁsu, puttadārāpi abhinandiṁsu, mittāmaccāpi abhinandiṁsu, tatonidānañca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ adhigacchi.
[¶48] In the same way, chieftain, you seem like the hemp-carrier in the simile. Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it! Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, sāṇabhārikūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi. Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.
[¶49] 3. Going for Refuge
> Pali: 3. Saraṇagamana
[¶50] “I was delighted and satisfied with your very first simile, worthy Kassapa! Nevertheless, I wanted to hear your various solutions to the problem, so I thought I’d oppose you in this way. Excellent, worthy Kassapa! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the worthy Kassapa has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the worthy Kassapa remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.
> Pali: “Purimeneva ahaṁ opammena bhoto kassapassa attamano abhiraddho. Api cāhaṁ imāni vicitrāni pañhāpaṭibhānāni sotukāmo evāhaṁ bhavantaṁ kassapaṁ paccanīkaṁ kātabbaṁ amaññissaṁ. Abhikkantaṁ, bho kassapa, abhikkantaṁ, bho kassapa. Seyyathāpi, bho kassapa, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā kassapena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bho kassapa, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca, bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ kassapo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.
[¶51] Worthy Kassapa, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please instruct me so it will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.”
> Pali: Icchāmi cāhaṁ, bho kassapa, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ kassapo, yaṁ mamassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.
[¶52] 4. On Sacrifice
> Pali: 4. Yaññakathā
[¶53] “Chieftain, take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are slaughtered. And the recipients have wrong view, wrong thought, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. That kind of sacrifice is not very fruitful or beneficial or brilliant or bountiful.
> Pali: “Yathārūpe kho, rājañña, yaññe gāvo vā haññanti ajeḷakā vā haññanti, kukkuṭasūkarā vā haññanti, vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti micchādiṭṭhī micchāsaṅkappā micchāvācā micchākammantā micchāājīvā micchāvāyāmā micchāsatī micchāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño na mahapphalo hoti na mahānisaṁso na mahājutiko na mahāvipphāro.
[¶54] Suppose a farmer was to enter a wood taking seed and plough. And on that barren field, that barren ground, with uncleared stumps he sowed seeds that were broken, spoiled, weather-damaged, infertile, and ill kept. And the heavens don’t provide enough rain when needed. Would those seeds grow, increase, and mature, and would the farmer get abundant fruit?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, rājañña, kassako bījanaṅgalaṁ ādāya vanaṁ paviseyya. So tattha dukkhette dubbhūme avihatakhāṇukaṇṭake bījāni patiṭṭhāpeyya khaṇḍāni pūtīni vātātapahatāni asāradāni asukhasayitāni. Devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya. Api nu tāni bījāni vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjeyyuṁ, kassako vā vipulaṁ phalaṁ adhigaccheyyā”ti?
[¶55] “No, worthy Kassapa.”
> Pali: “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa”.
[¶56] “In the same way, chieftain, take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are slaughtered. And the recipients have wrong view, wrong thought, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. That kind of sacrifice is not very fruitful or beneficial or brilliant or bountiful.
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājañña, yathārūpe yaññe gāvo vā haññanti, ajeḷakā vā haññanti, kukkuṭasūkarā vā haññanti, vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti micchādiṭṭhī micchāsaṅkappā micchāvācā micchākammantā micchāājīvā micchāvāyāmā micchāsatī micchāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño na mahapphalo hoti na mahānisaṁso na mahājutiko na mahāvipphāro.
[¶57] But take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are not slaughtered. And the recipients have right view, right thought, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. That kind of sacrifice is very fruitful and beneficial and brilliant and bountiful.
> Pali: Yathārūpe ca kho, rājañña, yaññe neva gāvo haññanti, na ajeḷakā haññanti, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññanti, na vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti sammādiṭṭhī sammāsaṅkappā sammāvācā sammākammantā sammāājīvā sammāvāyāmā sammāsatī sammāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso mahājutiko mahāvipphāro.
[¶58] Suppose a farmer was to enter a wood taking seed and plough. And on that fertile field, that fertile ground, with well-cleared stumps he sowed seeds that were intact, unspoiled, not weather-damaged, fertile, and well kept. And the heavens provide plenty of rain when needed. Would those seeds grow, increase, and mature, and would the farmer get abundant fruit?”
> Pali: Seyyathāpi, rājañña, kassako bījanaṅgalaṁ ādāya vanaṁ paviseyya. So tattha sukhette subhūme suvihatakhāṇukaṇṭake bījāni patiṭṭhapeyya akhaṇḍāni apūtīni avātātapahatāni sāradāni sukhasayitāni. Devo ca kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya. Api nu tāni bījāni vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjeyyuṁ, kassako vā vipulaṁ phalaṁ adhigaccheyyā”ti?
[¶59] “Yes, worthy Kassapa.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho kassapa”.
[¶60] “In the same way, chieftain, take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are not slaughtered. And the recipients have right view, right thought, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. That kind of sacrifice is very fruitful and beneficial and brilliant and bountiful.”
> Pali: “Evameva kho, rājañña, yathārūpe yaññe neva gāvo haññanti, na ajeḷakā haññanti, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññanti, na vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti sammādiṭṭhī sammāsaṅkappā sammāvācā sammākammantā sammāājīvā sammāvāyāmā sammāsatī sammāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso mahājutiko mahāvipphāro”ti.
[¶61] 5. On the Student Uttara
> Pali: 5. Uttaramāṇavavatthu
[¶62] Then the chieftain Pāyāsi set up an offering for ascetics and brahmins, for paupers, vagrants, supplicants, and beggars. At that offering such food as sour gruel with false black pepper was given, and rough clothes with knotted fringes. Now, it was a student named Uttara who organized that offering.
> Pali: Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño dānaṁ paṭṭhapesi samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ. Tasmiṁ kho pana dāne evarūpaṁ bhojanaṁ dīyati kaṇājakaṁ bilaṅgadutiyaṁ, dhorakāni ca vatthāni guḷavālakāni. Tasmiṁ kho pana dāne uttaro nāma māṇavo vāvaṭo ahosi.
[¶63] When the offering was over he referred to it like this, “Through this offering may I be together with the chieftain Pāyāsi in this world, but not in the next.”
> Pali: So dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisati: “imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin”ti.
[¶64] Pāyāsi heard of this, so he summoned Uttara and said, “Is it really true, dear Uttara, that you referred to the offering in this way?”
> Pali: Assosi kho pāyāsi rājañño: “uttaro kira māṇavo dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisati: ‘imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin’”ti. Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño uttaraṁ māṇavaṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, tāta uttara, dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisasi: ‘imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin’”ti?
[¶65] “Yes, worthy sir.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”.
[¶66] “But why? Don’t we who seek merit expect some result from the offering?”
> Pali: “Kissa pana tvaṁ, tāta uttara, dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisasi: ‘imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin’ti? Nanu mayaṁ, tāta uttara, puññatthikā dānasseva phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhino”ti?
[¶67] “At your offering such food as sour gruel with false black pepper was given, which you wouldn’t even want to touch with your foot, much less eat. And also rough clothes with knotted fringes, which you also wouldn’t want to touch with your foot, much less wear. Worthy sir, you’re dear and beloved to me. But how can I reconcile one so dear with something so disagreeable?”
> Pali: “Bhoto kho dāne evarūpaṁ bhojanaṁ dīyati kaṇājakaṁ bilaṅgadutiyaṁ, yaṁ bhavaṁ pādāpi na iccheyya samphusituṁ, kuto bhuñjituṁ, dhorakāni ca vatthāni guḷavālakāni, yāni bhavaṁ pādāpi na iccheyya samphusituṁ, kuto paridahituṁ. Bhavaṁ kho panamhākaṁ piyo manāpo, kathaṁ mayaṁ manāpaṁ amanāpena saṁyojemā”ti?
[¶68] “Well then, dear Uttara, set up an offering with the same kind of food that I eat, and the same kind of clothes that I wear.”
> Pali: “Tena hi tvaṁ, tāta uttara, yādisāhaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuñjāmi, tādisaṁ bhojanaṁ paṭṭhapehi. Yādisāni cāhaṁ vatthāni paridahāmi, tādisāni ca vatthāni paṭṭhapehī”ti.
[¶69] “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Uttara, and did so.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho uttaro māṇavo pāyāsissa rājaññassa paṭissutvā yādisaṁ bhojanaṁ pāyāsi rājañño bhuñjati, tādisaṁ bhojanaṁ paṭṭhapesi. Yādisāni ca vatthāni pāyāsi rājañño paridahati, tādisāni ca vatthāni paṭṭhapesi.
[¶70] So the chieftain Pāyāsi gave gifts carelessly, thoughtlessly, not with his own hands, giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the four great kings, in an empty palace of sirisa wood. But the student Uttara who organized the offering gave gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with his own hands, not giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the thirty-three.
> Pali: Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajji suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ. Yo pana tassa dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo. So sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajji devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ.
[¶71] 6. The Godling Pāyāsi
> Pali: 6. Pāyāsidevaputta
[¶72] Now at that time Venerable Gavampati would often go to that empty sirisa palace for the day’s meditation. Then the godling Pāyāsi went up to him, bowed, and stood to one side. Gavampati said to him, “Who are you, reverend?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā gavampati abhikkhaṇaṁ suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ divāvihāraṁ gacchati. Atha kho pāyāsi devaputto yenāyasmā gavampati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ gavampatiṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho pāyāsiṁ devaputtaṁ āyasmā gavampati etadavoca: “kosi tvaṁ, āvuso”ti?
[¶73] “Sir, I am the chieftain Pāyāsi.”
> Pali: “Ahaṁ, bhante, pāyāsi rājañño”ti.
[¶74] “Didn’t you have the view that there is no afterlife, no beings are reborn spontaneously, and there’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds?”
> Pali: “Nanu tvaṁ, āvuso, evaṁdiṭṭhiko ahosi: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?
[¶75] “It’s true, sir, I did have such a view. But Master Kassapa the Prince dissuaded me from that harmful misconception.”
> Pali: “Saccāhaṁ, bhante, evaṁdiṭṭhiko ahosiṁ: ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti. Api cāhaṁ ayyena kumārakassapena etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecito”ti.
[¶76] “But the student named Uttara who organized that offering for you—where has he been reborn?”
> Pali: “Yo pana te, āvuso, dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so kuhiṁ upapanno”ti?
[¶77] “Sir, Uttara gave gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with his own hands, not giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the thirty-three. But I gave gifts carelessly, thoughtlessly, not with my own hands, giving the dregs. When my body broke up, after death, I was reborn in company with the gods of the four great kings, in an empty sirisa palace.
> Pali: “Yo me, bhante, dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapanno devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ. Ahaṁ pana, bhante, asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapanno suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ.
[¶78] So, sir, when you’ve returned to the human realm, please announce this: ‘Give gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with your own hands, not giving the dregs. The chieftain Pāyāsi gave gifts carelessly, thoughtlessly, not with his own hands, giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the four great kings, in an empty palace of sirisa. But the student Uttara who organized the offering gave gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with his own hands, not giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the thirty-three.’”
> Pali: Tena hi, bhante gavampati, manussalokaṁ gantvā evamārocehi: ‘sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ detha, sahatthā dānaṁ detha, cittīkataṁ dānaṁ detha, anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ detha. Pāyāsi rājañño asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapanno suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ. Yo pana tassa dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapanno devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyatan’”ti.
[¶79] So when Venerable Gavampati returned to the human realm he made that announcement.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā gavampati manussalokaṁ āgantvā evamārocesi: “sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ detha, sahatthā dānaṁ detha, cittīkataṁ dānaṁ detha, anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ detha. Pāyāsi rājañño asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapanno suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ. Yo pana tassa dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapanno devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyatan”ti.
[¶80] > Pali: Pāyāsisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
[¶81] > Pali: Mahāvaggo niṭṭhito.
[¶82] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶83] > Pali: Mahāpadāna nidānaṁ,
nibbānañca sudassanaṁ;
Janavasabha govindaṁ,
samayaṁ sakkapañhakaṁ;
Mahāsatipaṭṭhānañca,
pāyāsi dasamaṁ bhave.
[¶84] > Pali: Mahāvaggapāḷi niṭṭhitā.
## 48. DN 24 · About Pāṭikaputta · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/48/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/48/#p-N
[¶0] DN 24 · About Pāṭikaputta
> Pali: DN 24 · Pāthikasutta
[¶1] 1. The Story of Sunakkhatta
> Pali: 1. Sunakkhattavatthu
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Mallas, near the Mallian town named Anupiya. Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Anupiya for alms. Then it occurred to him, “It’s too early to wander for alms in Anupiya. Why don’t I go to visit the wanderer of the Bhaggava clan in his monastery?”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā mallesu viharati anupiyaṁ nāma mallānaṁ nigamo. Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya anupiyaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “atippago kho tāva anupiyāyaṁ piṇḍāya carituṁ. Yannūnāhaṁ yena bhaggavagottassa paribbājakassa ārāmo, yena bhaggavagotto paribbājako tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti.
[¶3] So that’s what he did. Then the wanderer of the Bhaggava clan said to the Buddha, “Let the Blessed One come, sir! Welcome to the Blessed One, sir! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, here, a seat is ready.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena bhaggavagottassa paribbājakassa ārāmo, yena bhaggavagotto paribbājako tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho bhaggavagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho, bhante, bhagavā. Svāgataṁ, bhante, bhagavato. Cirassaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu, bhante, bhagavā, idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti.
[¶4] The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, while the wanderer of the Bhaggava clan took a low seat, sat to one side, and said to the Buddha, “Sir, a few days ago Sunakkhatta the Licchavi came to me and said: ‘Now, Bhaggava, I have disavowed the Buddha. Now I no longer live dedicated to him.’ Sir, is what Sunakkhatta said true?”
> Pali: Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Bhaggavagottopi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcaṁ āsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho bhaggavagotto paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “purimāni, bhante, divasāni purimatarāni sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ etadavoca: ‘paccakkhāto dāni mayā, bhaggava, bhagavā. Na dānāhaṁ bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharāmī’ti. Kaccetaṁ, bhante, tatheva, yathā sunakkhatto licchaviputto avacā”ti?
[¶5] “Indeed it is, Bhaggava.
> Pali: “Tatheva kho etaṁ, bhaggava, yathā sunakkhatto licchaviputto avaca.
[¶6] A few days ago Sunakkhatta the Licchavi came to me, bowed, sat down to one side, and said: ‘Now I disavow the Buddha! Now I shall no longer live dedicated to you.’
> Pali: Purimāni, bhaggava, divasāni purimatarāni sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘paccakkhāmi dānāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ. Na dānāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmī’ti.
[¶7] When Sunakkhatta said this, I said to him, ‘But Sunakkhatta, did I ever say to you: “Come, live dedicated to me”?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘api nu tāhaṁ, sunakkhatta, evaṁ avacaṁ, ehi tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, mamaṁ uddissa viharāhī’ti?
[¶8] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶9] ‘Or did you ever say to me: “Sir, I shall live dedicated to the Buddha”?’
> Pali: ‘Tvaṁ vā pana maṁ evaṁ avaca— ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmī’ti?
[¶10] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶11] ‘So it seems that I did not ask you to live dedicated to me, nor did you say you would live dedicated to me. In that case, you futile man, who are you and what do you disavow? See how far you have strayed!’
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, sunakkhatta, nevāhaṁ taṁ vadāmi— ehi tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, mamaṁ uddissa viharāhīti. Napi kira maṁ tvaṁ vadesi— ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmīti. Evaṁ sante, moghapurisa, ko santo kaṁ paccācikkhasi? Passa, moghapurisa, yāvañca te idaṁ aparaddhan’ti.
[¶12] ‘But sir, the Buddha never performs any superhuman demonstrations of psychic power for me.’
> Pali: ‘Na hi pana me, bhante, bhagavā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karotī’ti.
[¶13] ‘But Sunakkhatta, did I ever say to you: “Come, live dedicated to me and I will perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power for you”?’
> Pali: ‘Api nu tāhaṁ, sunakkhatta, evaṁ avacaṁ— ehi tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, mamaṁ uddissa viharāhi, ahaṁ te uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissāmī’ti?
[¶14] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶15] ‘Or did you ever say to me: “Sir, I shall live dedicated to the Buddha, and the Buddha will perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power for me”?’
> Pali: ‘Tvaṁ vā pana maṁ evaṁ avaca— ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmi, bhagavā me uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissatī’ti?
[¶16] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶17] ‘So it seems that I did not ask this of you, and you did not require it of me. In that case, you futile man, who are you and what do you disavow? What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Whether or not there is a demonstration of psychic power, and regardless of the goal for which I taught the Dhamma, does it deliver one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering?’
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, sunakkhatta, nevāhaṁ taṁ vadāmi— ehi tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, mamaṁ uddissa viharāhi, ahaṁ te uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissāmīti; napi kira maṁ tvaṁ vadesi— ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmi, bhagavā me uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissatīti. Evaṁ sante, moghapurisa, ko santo kaṁ paccācikkhasi? Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, kate vā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriye akate vā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriye yassatthāya mayā dhammo desito so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti?
[¶18] ‘It does, sir.’
> Pali: ‘Kate vā, bhante, uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriye akate vā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriye yassatthāya bhagavatā dhammo desito so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti.
[¶19] ‘So it seems that whether or not there is a demonstration of psychic power, and regardless of the goal for which I taught the Dhamma, it delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. In that case, what is the point of superhuman demonstrations of psychic power? See how far you have strayed, you silly man!’
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, sunakkhatta, kate vā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriye, akate vā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriye, yassatthāya mayā dhammo desito, so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya. Tatra, sunakkhatta, kiṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ kataṁ karissati? Passa, moghapurisa, yāvañca te idaṁ aparaddhan’ti.
[¶20] ‘But sir, the Buddha never describes the origin of the world to me.’
> Pali: ‘Na hi pana me, bhante, bhagavā aggaññaṁ paññapetī’ti?
[¶21] ‘But Sunakkhatta, did I ever say to you: “Come, live dedicated to me and I will describe the origin of the world to you”?’
> Pali: ‘Api nu tāhaṁ, sunakkhatta, evaṁ avacaṁ— ehi tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, mamaṁ uddissa viharāhi, ahaṁ te aggaññaṁ paññapessāmī’ti?
[¶22] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶23] ‘Or did you ever say to me: “Sir, I shall live dedicated to the Buddha, and the Buddha will describe the origin of the world to me”?’
> Pali: ‘Tvaṁ vā pana maṁ evaṁ avaca— ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmi, bhagavā me aggaññaṁ paññapessatī’ti?
[¶24] ‘No, sir.’
> Pali: ‘No hetaṁ, bhante’.
[¶25] ‘So it seems that I did not ask this of you, and you did not require it of me. In that case, you futile man, who are you and what do you disavow? What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Whether or not the origin of the world is described, and regardless of the goal for which I taught the Dhamma, does it deliver one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering?’
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, sunakkhatta, nevāhaṁ taṁ vadāmi— ehi tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, mamaṁ uddissa viharāhi, ahaṁ te aggaññaṁ paññapessāmīti. Napi kira maṁ tvaṁ vadesi— ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ uddissa viharissāmi, bhagavā me aggaññaṁ paññapessatīti. Evaṁ sante, moghapurisa, ko santo kaṁ paccācikkhasi? Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, paññatte vā aggaññe, apaññatte vā aggaññe, yassatthāya mayā dhammo desito, so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti?
[¶26] ‘It does, sir.’
> Pali: ‘Paññatte vā, bhante, aggaññe, apaññatte vā aggaññe, yassatthāya bhagavatā dhammo desito, so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti.
[¶27] ‘So it seems that whether or not the origin of the world is described, and regardless of the goal for which I taught the Dhamma, it delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. In that case, what is the point of describing the origin of the world? See how far you have strayed, you silly man!
> Pali: ‘Iti kira, sunakkhatta, paññatte vā aggaññe, apaññatte vā aggaññe, yassatthāya mayā dhammo desito, so niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya. Tatra, sunakkhatta, kiṁ aggaññaṁ paññattaṁ karissati? Passa, moghapurisa, yāvañca te idaṁ aparaddhaṁ.
[¶28] In many ways, Sunakkhatta, you have praised me like this in the Vajjian capital: “That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.”
> Pali: Anekapariyāyena kho te, sunakkhatta, mama vaṇṇo bhāsito vajjigāme— itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavāti. Iti kho te, sunakkhatta, anekapariyāyena mama vaṇṇo bhāsito vajjigāme.
[¶29] In many ways you have praised the teaching like this in the Vajjian capital: “The teaching is well explained by the Buddha—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves.”
> Pali: Anekapariyāyena kho te, sunakkhatta, dhammassa vaṇṇo bhāsito vajjigāme— svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhīti. Iti kho te, sunakkhatta, anekapariyāyena dhammassa vaṇṇo bhāsito vajjigāme.
[¶30] In many ways you have praised the Saṅgha like this in the Vajjian capital: “The Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples is practicing the way that’s good, direct, systematic, and proper. It consists of the four pairs, the eight individual persons. This is the Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples that is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world.”
> Pali: Anekapariyāyena kho te, sunakkhatta, saṅghassa vaṇṇo bhāsito vajjigāme— suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ujuppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, ñāyappaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, sāmīcippaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, yadidaṁ cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho, āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassāti. Iti kho te, sunakkhatta, anekapariyāyena saṅghassa vaṇṇo bhāsito vajjigāme.
[¶31] I declare this to you, Sunakkhatta, I announce this to you! There will be some who say to you that Sunakkhatta was unable to lead the spiritual life under the ascetic Gotama. That’s why he resigned the training and returned to a lesser life. That’s what they’ll say.’
> Pali: Ārocayāmi kho te, sunakkhatta, paṭivedayāmi kho te, sunakkhatta. Bhavissanti kho te, sunakkhatta, vattāro, no visahi sunakkhatto licchaviputto samaṇe gotame brahmacariyaṁ carituṁ, so avisahanto sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattoti. Iti kho te, sunakkhatta, bhavissanti vattāro’ti.
[¶32] Though I spoke to Sunakkhatta like this, he still left this teaching and training, like someone on the highway to hell.
> Pali: Evaṁ kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto mayā vuccamāno apakkameva imasmā dhammavinayā, yathā taṁ āpāyiko nerayiko.
[¶33] 2. On the Aristocrat of Kuru
> Pali: 2. Korakkhattiyavatthu
[¶34] Bhaggava, this one time I was staying in the land of the Kurus where they have a town named Uttarakā. Then I robed up in the morning and, taking my bowl and robe, entered Uttarakā for alms with Sunakkhatta the Licchavi as my second monk. Now at that time a naked ascetic who was an aristocrat of Kuru had taken a vow to behave like a dog. When food is tossed on the ground, he gets down on all fours, eating and devouring it just with his mouth.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhaggava, samayaṁ thūlūsu viharāmi uttarakā nāma thūlūnaṁ nigamo. Atha khvāhaṁ, bhaggava, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya sunakkhattena licchaviputtena pacchāsamaṇena uttarakaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ. Tena kho pana samayena acelo korakkhattiyo kukkuravatiko catukkuṇḍiko chamānikiṇṇaṁ bhakkhasaṁ mukheneva khādati, mukheneva bhuñjati.
[¶35] Sunakkhatta saw him doing this and thought, ‘That ascetic is a holy man!’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ kukkuravatikaṁ catukkuṇḍikaṁ chamānikiṇṇaṁ bhakkhasaṁ mukheneva khādantaṁ mukheneva bhuñjantaṁ. Disvānassa etadahosi: ‘sādhurūpo vata bho ayaṁ samaṇo catukkuṇḍiko chamānikiṇṇaṁ bhakkhasaṁ mukheneva khādati, mukheneva bhuñjatī’ti.
[¶36] Then, knowing Sunakkhatta’s train of thought, I said to him, ‘Don’t you claim to be an ascetic who follows the Sakyan, you silly man?’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattassa licchaviputtassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘tvampi nāma, moghapurisa, samaṇo sakyaputtiyo paṭijānissasī’ti.
[¶37] ‘But why does the Buddha say this to me?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana maṁ, bhante, bhagavā evamāha: “tvampi nāma, moghapurisa, samaṇo sakyaputtiyo paṭijānissasī”’ti?
[¶38] ‘When you saw that naked ascetic of Kuru, didn’t you think, “That ascetic is a holy man!”?’
> Pali: ‘Nanu te, sunakkhatta, imaṁ acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ kukkuravatikaṁ catukkuṇḍikaṁ chamānikiṇṇaṁ bhakkhasaṁ mukheneva khādantaṁ mukheneva bhuñjantaṁ disvāna etadahosi— sādhurūpo vata bho ayaṁ samaṇo catukkuṇḍiko chamānikiṇṇaṁ bhakkhasaṁ mukheneva khādati, mukheneva bhuñjatī’ti?
[¶39] ‘Yes, sir. But sir, are you jealous of the perfected ones?’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante. Kiṁ pana, bhante, bhagavā arahattassa maccharāyatī’ti?
[¶40] ‘I’m not jealous of the perfected ones, you silly man. Rather, you should give up this harmful misconception that has arisen in you. Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, moghapurisa, arahattassa maccharāyāmi. Api ca tuyhevetaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ, taṁ pajaha. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya.
[¶41] That naked ascetic the aristocrat of Kuru, who you imagine to be a holy man, will die of flatulence in seven days. And when he dies, he’ll be reborn in the very lowest rank of titans, named the Kālakañjas. And they’ll throw him in the charnel ground on a clump of vetiver. If you wish, Sunakkhatta, go to the aristocrat of Kuru and ask him whether he knows his own destiny. It’s possible that he will answer: “Reverend Sunakkhatta, I know my own destiny. I’ve been reborn in the very lowest rank of titans, named the Kālakañjas.”’
> Pali: Yaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, maññasi acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ—sādhurūpo ayaṁ samaṇoti. So sattamaṁ divasaṁ alasakena kālaṁ karissati. Kālaṅkato ca kālakañcikā nāma asurā sabbanihīno asurakāyo, tatra upapajjissati. Kālaṅkatañca naṁ bīraṇatthambake susāne chaḍḍessanti. Ākaṅkhamāno ca tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ upasaṅkamitvā puccheyyāsi— jānāsi, āvuso korakkhattiya, attano gatinti? Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, vijjati yaṁ te acelo korakkhattiyo byākarissati— jānāmi, āvuso sunakkhatta, attano gatiṁ; kālakañcikā nāma asurā sabbanihīno asurakāyo, tatrāmhi upapanno’ti.
[¶42] So, Bhaggava, Sunakkhatta went to see the aristocrat of Kuru and said to him, ‘Reverend aristocrat of Kuru, the ascetic Gotama has declared that you will die of flatulence in seven days. And when you die, you’ll be reborn in the very lowest rank of titans, named the Kālakañjas. And when you die, they’ll throw you in the charnel ground on a clump of vetiver. But by eating just a little food and drinking just a little water, you’ll prove what the ascetic Gotama says to be false.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yena acelo korakkhattiyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ etadavoca: ‘byākato khosi, āvuso korakkhattiya, samaṇena gotamena— acelo korakkhattiyo sattamaṁ divasaṁ alasakena kālaṁ karissati. Kālaṅkato ca kālakañcikā nāma asurā sabbanihīno asurakāyo, tatra upapajjissati. Kālaṅkatañca naṁ bīraṇatthambake susāne chaḍḍessantīti. Yena tvaṁ, āvuso korakkhattiya, mattaṁ mattañca bhattaṁ bhuñjeyyāsi, mattaṁ mattañca pānīyaṁ piveyyāsi. Yathā samaṇassa gotamassa micchā assa vacanan’ti.
[¶43] Then Sunakkhatta counted up the days until the seventh day, as happens when you have no faith in the Realized One. But on the seventh day, the naked ascetic who was an aristocrat of Kuru died of flatulence. And when he passed away, he was reborn in the very lowest rank of titans, named the Kālakañjas. And when he passed away, they threw him in the charnel ground on a clump of vetiver.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto ekadvīhikāya sattarattindivāni gaṇesi, yathā taṁ tathāgatassa asaddahamāno. Atha kho, bhaggava, acelo korakkhattiyo sattamaṁ divasaṁ alasakena kālamakāsi. kālaṅkato ca kālakañcikā nāma asurā sabbanihīno asurakāyo, tatra upapajji. kālaṅkatañca naṁ bīraṇatthambake susāne chaḍḍesuṁ.
[¶44] Sunakkhatta the Licchavi heard about this. So he went to see the aristocrat of Kuru in the charnel ground on the clump of vetiver. There he struck him with his fist three times, ‘Reverend aristocrat of Kuru, do you know your destiny?’
> Pali: Assosi kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto: ‘acelo kira korakkhattiyo alasakena kālaṅkato bīraṇatthambake susāne chaḍḍito’ti. Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yena bīraṇatthambakaṁ susānaṁ, yena acelo korakkhattiyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ tikkhattuṁ pāṇinā ākoṭesi: ‘jānāsi, āvuso korakkhattiya, attano gatin’ti?
[¶45] Then the aristocrat of Kuru got up, rubbing his back with his hands, and said, ‘Reverend Sunakkhatta, I know my own destiny. I’ve been reborn in the very lowest rank of titans, named the Kālakañjas.’ After speaking, he fell flat right there.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, acelo korakkhattiyo pāṇinā piṭṭhiṁ paripuñchanto vuṭṭhāsi. ‘Jānāmi, āvuso sunakkhatta, attano gatiṁ. Kālakañcikā nāma asurā sabbanihīno asurakāyo, tatrāmhi upapanno’ti vatvā tattheva uttāno papati.
[¶46] Then Sunakkhatta came to me, bowed, and sat down to one side. I said to him, ‘What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Did the prediction I made about the aristocrat of Kuru turn out to be correct, or not?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, yatheva te ahaṁ acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ ārabbha byākāsiṁ, tatheva taṁ vipākaṁ, aññathā vā’ti?
[¶47] ‘It turned out to be correct.’
> Pali: ‘Yatheva me, bhante, bhagavā acelaṁ korakkhattiyaṁ ārabbha byākāsi, tatheva taṁ vipākaṁ, no aññathā’ti.
[¶48] ‘What do you think, Sunakkhatta? If that is so, has a superhuman demonstration of psychic power been performed or not?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, yadi evaṁ sante kataṁ vā hoti uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, akataṁ vā’ti?
[¶49] ‘Clearly, sir, a superhuman demonstration of psychic power has been performed.’
> Pali: ‘Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante kataṁ hoti uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, no akatan’ti.
[¶50] ‘Though I performed such a superhuman demonstration of psychic power you say this: “But sir, the Buddha never performs any superhuman demonstrations of psychic power for me.” See how far you have strayed!’ Though I spoke to Sunakkhatta like this, he still left this teaching and training, like someone on the highway to hell.
> Pali: ‘Evampi kho maṁ tvaṁ, moghapurisa, uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karontaṁ evaṁ vadesi— na hi pana me, bhante, bhagavā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karotīti. Passa, moghapurisa, yāvañca te idaṁ aparaddhan’ti. Evampi kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto mayā vuccamāno apakkameva imasmā dhammavinayā, yathā taṁ āpāyiko nerayiko.
[¶51] 3. On the Naked Ascetic Kaḷāramaṭṭaka
> Pali: 3. Acelakaḷāramaṭṭakavatthu
[¶52] This one time, Bhaggava, I was staying near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof. Now at that time the naked ascetic Kaḷāramaṭṭaka was residing in Vesālī. And in the Vajjian capital he had reached the peak of material things and fame. He had undertaken these seven vows. ‘As long as I live, I will be a naked ascetic, not wearing clothes. As long as I live, I will be chaste, not having sex. As long as I live, I will consume only meat and beer, not eating rice and porridge. And I will not go past the following shrines near Vesālī: the Udena Shrine to the east, the Gotamaka to the south, the Seven Maidens to the west, and the Many Sons to the north.’ And it was due to undertaking these seven vows that he had reached the peak of material things and fame.
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhaggava, samayaṁ vesāliyaṁ viharāmi mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ. Tena kho pana samayena acelo kaḷāramaṭṭako vesāliyaṁ paṭivasati lābhaggappatto ceva yasaggappatto ca vajjigāme. Tassa sattavatapadāni samattāni samādinnāni honti: ‘yāvajīvaṁ acelako assaṁ, na vatthaṁ paridaheyyaṁ, yāvajīvaṁ brahmacārī assaṁ, na methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseveyyaṁ, yāvajīvaṁ surāmaṁseneva yāpeyyaṁ, na odanakummāsaṁ bhuñjeyyaṁ. Puratthimena vesāliṁ udenaṁ nāma cetiyaṁ, taṁ nātikkameyyaṁ, dakkhiṇena vesāliṁ gotamakaṁ nāma cetiyaṁ, taṁ nātikkameyyaṁ, pacchimena vesāliṁ sattambaṁ nāma cetiyaṁ, taṁ nātikkameyyaṁ, uttarena vesāliṁ bahuputtaṁ nāma cetiyaṁ taṁ nātikkameyyan’ti. So imesaṁ sattannaṁ vatapadānaṁ samādānahetu lābhaggappatto ceva yasaggappatto ca vajjigāme.
[¶53] So, Bhaggava, Sunakkhatta went to see Kaḷāramaṭṭaka and asked him a question. But when it stumped him, he displayed annoyance, hate, and bitterness. So Sunakkhatta thought, ‘I’ve offended the holy man, the perfected one, the ascetic. I mustn’t create lasting harm and suffering for myself!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yena acelo kaḷāramaṭṭako tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ kaḷāramaṭṭakaṁ pañhaṁ apucchi. Tassa acelo kaḷāramaṭṭako pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyāsi. Asampāyanto kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsi. Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhattassa licchaviputtassa etadahosi: ‘sādhurūpaṁ vata bho arahantaṁ samaṇaṁ āsādimhase. Mā vata no ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā’ti.
[¶54] Then Sunakkhatta came to me, bowed, and sat down to one side. I said to him, ‘Don’t you claim to be an ascetic who follows the Sakyan, you silly man?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘tvampi nāma, moghapurisa, samaṇo sakyaputtiyo paṭijānissasī’ti.
[¶55] ‘But why does the Buddha say this to me?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana maṁ, bhante, bhagavā evamāha— tvampi nāma, moghapurisa, samaṇo sakyaputtiyo paṭijānissasī’ti?
[¶56] ‘Didn’t you go to see the naked ascetic Kaḷāramaṭṭaka and ask him a question? But when it stumped him, he displayed annoyance, hate, and bitterness. Then you thought, “I’ve offended the holy man, the perfected one, the ascetic. I mustn’t create lasting harm and suffering for myself!”’
> Pali: ‘Nanu tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, acelaṁ kaḷāramaṭṭakaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṁ apucchi. Tassa te acelo kaḷāramaṭṭako pañhaṁ puṭṭho na sampāyāsi. Asampāyanto kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsi. Tassa te etadahosi: “sādhurūpaṁ vata bho arahantaṁ samaṇaṁ āsādimhase. Mā vata no ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”’ti.
[¶57] ‘Yes, sir. But sir, are you jealous of perfected ones?’
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bhante. Kiṁ pana, bhante, bhagavā arahattassa maccharāyatī’ti?
[¶58] ‘I’m not jealous of the perfected ones, you silly man. Rather, you should give up this harmful misconception that has arisen in you. Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!
> Pali: ‘Na kho ahaṁ, moghapurisa, arahattassa maccharāyāmi, api ca tuyhevetaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ, taṁ pajaha. Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya.
[¶59] That naked ascetic Kaḷāramaṭṭaka, who you imagine to be a true holy man, will shortly be clothed, living with a partner, eating rice and porridge, having gone past all the shrines near Vesālī. And he will die after losing all his fame.’
> Pali: Yaṁ kho panetaṁ, sunakkhatta, maññasi acelaṁ kaḷāramaṭṭakaṁ— sādhurūpo ayaṁ samaṇoti, so nacirasseva parihito sānucāriko vicaranto odanakummāsaṁ bhuñjamāno sabbāneva vesāliyāni cetiyāni samatikkamitvā yasā nihīno kālaṁ karissatī’ti.
[¶60] And that’s exactly what happened.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, acelo kaḷāramaṭṭako nacirasseva parihito sānucāriko vicaranto odanakummāsaṁ bhuñjamāno sabbāneva vesāliyāni cetiyāni samatikkamitvā yasā nihīno kālamakāsi.
[¶61] Sunakkhatta heard about this. He came to me, bowed, and sat down to one side. I said to him, ‘What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Did the declaration I made about Kaḷāramaṭṭaka turn out to be correct, or not?’
> Pali: Assosi kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto: ‘acelo kira kaḷāramaṭṭako parihito sānucāriko vicaranto odanakummāsaṁ bhuñjamāno sabbāneva vesāliyāni cetiyāni samatikkamitvā yasā nihīno kālaṅkato’ti. Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, yatheva te ahaṁ acelaṁ kaḷāramaṭṭakaṁ ārabbha byākāsiṁ, tatheva taṁ vipākaṁ, aññathā vā’ti?
[¶62] ‘It turned out to be correct.’
> Pali: ‘Yatheva me, bhante, bhagavā acelaṁ kaḷāramaṭṭakaṁ ārabbha byākāsi, tatheva taṁ vipākaṁ, no aññathā’ti.
[¶63] ‘What do you think, Sunakkhatta? If that is so, has a superhuman demonstration of psychic power been performed or not?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, yadi evaṁ sante kataṁ vā hoti uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ akataṁ vā’ti?
[¶64] ‘Clearly, sir, a superhuman demonstration of psychic power has been performed.’
> Pali: ‘Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante kataṁ hoti uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, no akatan’ti.
[¶65] ‘Though I perform such a superhuman demonstration of psychic power you say this: “But sir, the Buddha never performs any superhuman demonstrations of psychic power for me.” See how far you have strayed!’ Though I spoke to Sunakkhatta like this, he still left this teaching and training, like someone on the highway to hell.
> Pali: ‘Evampi kho maṁ tvaṁ, moghapurisa, uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karontaṁ evaṁ vadesi: “na hi pana me, bhante, bhagavā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karotī”ti. Passa, moghapurisa, yāvañca te idaṁ aparaddhan’ti. Evampi kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto mayā vuccamāno apakkameva imasmā dhammavinayā, yathā taṁ āpāyiko nerayiko.
[¶66] 4. On the Naked Ascetic Pāṭikaputta
> Pali: 4. Acelapāthikaputtavatthu
[¶67] This one time, Bhaggava, I was staying right there near Vesālī, at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof. Now at that time the naked ascetic Pāṭikaputta was residing in Vesālī. And in the Vajjian capital he had reached the peak of material things and fame. He was telling a crowd in Vesālī: ‘Both the ascetic Gotama and I speak from knowledge. One who speaks from knowledge ought to display a superhuman demonstration of psychic power to another who speaks from knowledge. If the ascetic Gotama meets me half-way, there we should both perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power. If he performs one demonstration of psychic power, I’ll perform two. If he performs two, I’ll perform four. If he performs four, I’ll perform eight. However many demonstrations of psychic power the ascetic Gotama performs, I’ll perform double.’
> Pali: Ekamidāhaṁ, bhaggava, samayaṁ tattheva vesāliyaṁ viharāmi mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ. Tena kho pana samayena acelo pāthikaputto vesāliyaṁ paṭivasati lābhaggappatto ceva yasaggappatto ca vajjigāme. So vesāliyaṁ parisati evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati: ‘samaṇopi gotamo ñāṇavādo, ahampi ñāṇavādo. Ñāṇavādo kho pana ñāṇavādena arahati uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ dassetuṁ. Samaṇo gotamo upaḍḍhapathaṁ āgaccheyya, ahampi upaḍḍhapathaṁ gaccheyyaṁ. Te tattha ubhopi uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ kareyyāma. Ekañce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati, dvāhaṁ karissāmi. Dve ce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyāni karissati, cattārāhaṁ karissāmi. Cattāri ce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyāni karissati, aṭṭhāhaṁ karissāmi. Iti yāvatakaṁ yāvatakaṁ samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati, taddiguṇaṁ taddiguṇāhaṁ karissāmī’ti.
[¶68] Then Sunakkhatta came to me, bowed, sat down to one side, and told me of all this.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto maṁ etadavoca: ‘acelo, bhante, pāthikaputto vesāliyaṁ paṭivasati lābhaggappatto ceva yasaggappatto ca vajjigāme. So vesāliyaṁ parisati evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati: “samaṇopi gotamo ñāṇavādo, ahampi ñāṇavādo. Ñāṇavādo kho pana ñāṇavādena arahati uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ dassetuṁ. Samaṇo gotamo upaḍḍhapathaṁ āgaccheyya, ahampi upaḍḍhapathaṁ gaccheyyaṁ. Te tattha ubhopi uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ kareyyāma. Ekañce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati, dvāhaṁ karissāmi. Dve ce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyāni karissati, cattārāhaṁ karissāmi. Cattāri ce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyāni karissati, aṭṭhāhaṁ karissāmi. Iti yāvatakaṁ yāvatakaṁ samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati, taddiguṇaṁ taddiguṇāhaṁ karissāmī”’ti.
[¶69] I said to him, ‘Sunakkhatta, the naked ascetic Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting me face to face, unless he gives up that statement and that intention, and lets go of that view. If he thinks he can meet me face to face without giving up those things, his head may explode.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘abhabbo kho, sunakkhatta, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’ti.
[¶70] ‘Careful what you say, Blessed One! Careful what you say, Holy One!’
> Pali: ‘Rakkhatetaṁ, bhante, bhagavā vācaṁ, rakkhatetaṁ sugato vācan’ti.
[¶71] ‘But why do you say this to me, Sunakkhatta?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana maṁ tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, evaṁ vadesi— rakkhatetaṁ, bhante, bhagavā vācaṁ, rakkhatetaṁ sugato vācan’ti?
[¶72] ‘Sir, the Buddha has categorically asserted that Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting the Buddha face to face, otherwise his head may explode. But Pāṭikaputta might meet the Buddha face to face in disguise, proving the Buddha wrong.’
> Pali: ‘Bhagavatā cassa, bhante, esā vācā ekaṁsena odhāritā— abhabbo acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti. Acelo ca, bhante, pāthikaputto virūparūpena bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṁ āgaccheyya, tadassa bhagavato musā’ti.
[¶73] ‘Sunakkhatta, would the Realized One make an ambiguous statement?’
> Pali: ‘Api nu, sunakkhatta, tathāgato taṁ vācaṁ bhāseyya yā sā vācā dvayagāminī’ti?
[¶74] ‘But sir, did you make that statement after encompassing Pāṭikaputta’s mind with your mind? Or did deities tell you about it?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ pana, bhante, bhagavatā acelo pāthikaputto cetasā ceto paricca vidito— abhabbo acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti? Udāhu, devatā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ— abhabbo, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’ti?
[¶75] ‘Both, Sunakkhatta. For Ajita the Licchavi general has recently passed away and been reborn in the host of the thirty-three. He came and told me this, “The naked ascetic Pāṭikaputta is shameless, sir, he is a liar. For he has declared of me in the Vajjian capital: ‘Ajita the Licchavi general has been reborn in the Great Hell.’
> Pali: ‘Cetasā ceto paricca vidito ceva me, sunakkhatta, acelo pāthikaputto— abhabbo acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti. Devatāpi me etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ— abhabbo, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti. Ajitopi nāma licchavīnaṁ senāpati adhunā kālaṅkato tāvatiṁsakāyaṁ upapanno. Sopi maṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamārocesi— alajjī, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto; musāvādī, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto. Mampi, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto byākāsi vajjigāme— ajito licchavīnaṁ senāpati mahānirayaṁ upapannoti.
[¶76] But that is not true— I have been reborn in the host of the thirty-three. The naked ascetic Pāṭikaputta is shameless, sir, he is a liar. Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting the Buddha face to face, otherwise his head may explode.”
> Pali: Na kho panāhaṁ, bhante, mahānirayaṁ upapanno; tāvatiṁsakāyamhi upapanno. Alajjī, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto; musāvādī, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto; abhabbo ca, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti.
[¶77] Thus I both made that statement after encompassing Pāṭikaputta’s mind with my mind, and deities told me about it.
> Pali: Iti kho, sunakkhatta, cetasā ceto paricca vidito ceva me acelo pāthikaputto abhabbo acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti. Devatāpi me etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ— abhabbo, bhante, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā bhagavato sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti.
[¶78] So Sunakkhatta, I’ll wander for alms in Vesālī. After the meal, on my return from almsround, I’ll go to Pāṭikaputta’s monastery for the day’s meditation. Now you may tell him, if you so wish.’
> Pali: So kho panāhaṁ, sunakkhatta, vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena acelassa pāthikaputtassa ārāmo tenupasaṅkamissāmi divāvihārāya. Yassadāni tvaṁ, sunakkhatta, icchasi, tassa ārocehī’ti.
[¶79] 5. On Demonstrations of Psychic Power
> Pali: 5. Iddhipāṭihāriyakathā
[¶80] Then, Bhaggava, I robed up in the morning and, taking my bowl and robe, entered Vesālī for alms. After the meal, on my return from almsround, I went to Pāṭikaputta’s monastery for the day’s meditation. Then Sunakkhatta rushed into Vesālī to see the very well-known Licchavis and said to them, ‘Respectable sirs, after his almsround, the Buddha has gone to Pāṭikaputta’s monastery for the day’s meditation. Come forth, good sirs, come forth! There will be a superhuman demonstration of psychic power by the holy ascetics!’ So the very well-known Licchavis thought, ‘It seems there will be a superhuman demonstration of psychic power by the holy ascetics! Let’s go!’
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhaggava, pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ. Vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena acelassa pāthikaputtassa ārāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁ divāvihārāya. Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto taramānarūpo vesāliṁ pavisitvā yena abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā abhiññāte abhiññāte licchavī etadavoca: ‘esāvuso, bhagavā vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena acelassa pāthikaputtassa ārāmo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Abhikkamathāyasmanto abhikkamathāyasmanto, sādhurūpānaṁ samaṇānaṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Atha kho, bhaggava, abhiññātānaṁ abhiññātānaṁ licchavīnaṁ etadahosi: ‘sādhurūpānaṁ kira, bho, samaṇānaṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ bhavissati; handa vata, bho, gacchāmā’ti.
[¶81] Then he went to see the very well-known well-to-do brahmins, rich householders, and ascetics and brahmins who follow various other religions, and said the same thing. They all said, ‘It seems there will be a superhuman demonstration of psychic power by the holy ascetics! Let’s go!’
> Pali: Yena ca abhiññātā abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā abhiññāte abhiññāte nānātitthiye samaṇabrāhmaṇe etadavoca: ‘esāvuso, bhagavā vesāliyaṁ piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto yena acelassa pāthikaputtassa ārāmo tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāya. Abhikkamathāyasmanto abhikkamathāyasmanto, sādhurūpānaṁ samaṇānaṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ bhavissatī’ti. Atha kho, bhaggava, abhiññātānaṁ abhiññātānaṁ nānātitthiyānaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ etadahosi: ‘sādhurūpānaṁ kira, bho, samaṇānaṁ uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ bhavissati; handa vata, bho, gacchāmā’ti.
[¶82] Then all those very well-known people went to Pāṭikaputta’s monastery. That assembly was large, Bhaggava; there were many hundreds, many thousands of them.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī, abhiññātā abhiññātā ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā yena acelassa pāthikaputtassa ārāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu. Sā esā, bhaggava, parisā mahā hoti anekasatā anekasahassā.
[¶83] Pāṭikaputta heard, ‘It seems that very well-known Licchavis, well-to-do brahmins, rich householders, and ascetics and brahmins who follow various other religions have come forth. And the ascetic Gotama is sitting in my monastery for the day’s meditation.’ When he heard that, he became frightened, scared, his hair standing on end. In fear he went to the Pale-Moon Ebony Trunk monastery for the wanderers.
> Pali: Assosi kho, bhaggava, acelo pāthikaputto: ‘abhikkantā kira abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā. Samaṇopi gotamo mayhaṁ ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno’ti. Sutvānassa bhayaṁ chambhitattaṁ lomahaṁso udapādi. Atha kho, bhaggava, acelo pāthikaputto bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto yena tindukakhāṇuparibbājakārāmo tenupasaṅkami.
[¶84] The assembly heard of this, and instructed a man, ‘Come, my man, go to see Pāṭikaputta at the Pale-Moon Ebony Trunk Monastery and say to him, “Come forth, Reverend Pāṭikaputta! All these very well-known people have come forth, and the ascetic Gotama is sitting in your monastery for the day’s meditation. For you stated this in the assembly at Vesālī: ‘Both the ascetic Gotama and I speak from knowledge. One who speaks from knowledge ought to display a superhuman demonstration of psychic power to another who speaks from knowledge. If the ascetic Gotama meets me half-way, there we should both perform a superhuman demonstration of psychic power. If he performs one demonstration of psychic power, I’ll perform two. If he performs two, I’ll perform four. If he performs four, I’ll perform eight. However many demonstrations of psychic power the ascetic Gotama performs, I’ll perform double.’ Come forth, Reverend Pāṭikaputta, half-way. The ascetic Gotama has come the first half, and is sitting in your monastery.”’
> Pali: Assosi kho, bhaggava, sā parisā: ‘acelo kira pāthikaputto bhīto saṁviggo lomahaṭṭhajāto yena tindukakhāṇuparibbājakārāmo tenupasaṅkanto’ti. Atha kho, bhaggava, sā parisā aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: ‘Ehi tvaṁ, bho purisa, yena tindukakhāṇuparibbājakārāmo, yena acelo pāthikaputto tenupasaṅkama. upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ evaṁ vadehi: “abhikkamāvuso, pāthikaputta, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā, samaṇopi gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno; bhāsitā kho pana te esā, āvuso pāthikaputta, vesāliyaṁ parisati vācā samaṇopi gotamo ñāṇavādo, ahampi ñāṇavādo. Ñāṇavādo kho pana ñāṇavādena arahati uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ dassetuṁ. Samaṇo gotamo upaḍḍhapathaṁ āgaccheyya ahampi upaḍḍhapathaṁ gaccheyyaṁ. Te tattha ubhopi uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ kareyyāma. Ekañce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati, dvāhaṁ karissāmi. Dve ce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyāni karissati, cattārāhaṁ karissāmi. Cattāri ce samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyāni karissati, aṭṭhāhaṁ karissāmi. Iti yāvatakaṁ yāvatakaṁ samaṇo gotamo uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karissati, taddiguṇaṁ taddiguṇāhaṁ karissāmī”ti abhikkamasseva kho āvuso pāthikaputta, upaḍḍhapathaṁ. Sabbapaṭhamaṁyeva āgantvā samaṇo gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno’ti.
## 49. DN 24 · About Pāṭikaputta · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/49/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/49/#p-N
[¶0] ‘Yes, worthy sir,’ replied that man, and delivered the message.
> Pali: Evaṁ, bhoti kho, bhaggava, so puriso tassā parisāya paṭissutvā yena tindukakhāṇuparibbājakārāmo, yena acelo pāthikaputto tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘abhikkamāvuso pāthikaputta, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā. Samaṇopi gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno. Bhāsitā kho pana te esā, āvuso pāthikaputta, vesāliyaṁ parisati vācā— samaṇopi gotamo ñāṇavādo; ahampi ñāṇavādo. Ñāṇavādo kho pana ñāṇavādena arahati uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ dassetuṁ …pe… taddiguṇaṁ taddiguṇāhaṁ karissāmīti. Abhikkamasseva kho, āvuso pāthikaputta, upaḍḍhapathaṁ. Sabbapaṭhamaṁyeva āgantvā samaṇo gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno’ti.
[¶1] When he had spoken, Pāṭikaputta said: ‘I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!’ But wriggle as he might, he couldn’t get up from his seat. Then that man said to Pāṭikaputta, ‘What’s up, Reverend Pāṭikaputta? Is your bottom stuck to the bench, or is the bench stuck to your bottom? You say “I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!” But wriggle as you might, you can’t get up from your seat.’ And as he was speaking, Pāṭikaputta said: ‘I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!’ But wriggle as he might, he couldn’t get up from his seat.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhaggava, acelo pāthikaputto ‘āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvuso’ti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātuṁ. Atha kho so, bhaggava, puriso acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘kiṁ su nāma te, āvuso pāthikaputta, pāvaḷā su nāma te pīṭhakasmiṁ allīnā, pīṭhakaṁ su nāma te pāvaḷāsu allīnaṁ? Āyāmi āvuso, āyāmi āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappasi, na sakkosi āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Evampi kho, bhaggava, vuccamāno acelo pāthikaputto ‘āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvuso’ti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātuṁ.
[¶2] When that man knew that Pāṭikaputta had lost, he returned to the assembly and said, ‘Pāṭikaputta has lost, worthies. He says “I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!” But wriggle as he might, he can’t get up from his seat.’ When he said this, I said to the assembly, ‘The naked ascetic Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting me face to face, unless he gives up that statement and that intention, and lets go of that view. If he thinks he can meet me face to face without giving up those things, his head may explode.’
> Pali: Yadā kho so, bhaggava, puriso aññāsi: ‘parābhūtarūpo ayaṁ acelo pāthikaputto. Āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Atha taṁ parisaṁ āgantvā evamārocesi: ‘parābhūtarūpo, bho, acelo pāthikaputto. Āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhaggava, taṁ parisaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘abhabbo kho, āvuso, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’ti.
[¶3] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶4] Then, Bhaggava, a certain Licchavi minister stood up and said to the assembly, ‘Well then, worthies, wait a while, I’ll go. Hopefully I’ll be able to lead Pāṭikaputta back to the assembly.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, aññataro licchavimahāmatto uṭṭhāyāsanā taṁ parisaṁ etadavoca: ‘tena hi, bho, muhuttaṁ tāva āgametha, yāvāhaṁ gacchāmi. Appeva nāma ahampi sakkuṇeyyaṁ acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ imaṁ parisaṁ ānetun’ti.
[¶5] So that minister went to see Pāṭikaputta and said, ‘Come forth, Reverend Pāṭikaputta! It’s best for you to come forth. All these very well-known people have come forth, and the ascetic Gotama is sitting in your monastery for the day’s meditation. You said you’d meet the ascetic Gotama half-way. The ascetic Gotama has come the first half, and is sitting in your monastery. The ascetic Gotama has told the assembly that you’re not capable of meeting him face to face. Come forth, Pāṭikaputta! When you come forth we’ll make you win and the ascetic Gotama lose.’
> Pali: Atha kho so, bhaggava, licchavimahāmatto yena tindukakhāṇuparibbājakārāmo, yena acelo pāthikaputto tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘abhikkamāvuso pāthikaputta, abhikkantaṁ te seyyo, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā. Samaṇopi gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno. Bhāsitā kho pana te esā, āvuso pāthikaputta, vesāliyaṁ parisati vācā— samaṇopi gotamo ñāṇavādo …pe… taddiguṇaṁ taddiguṇāhaṁ karissāmīti. Abhikkamasseva kho, āvuso pāthikaputta, upaḍḍhapathaṁ. Sabbapaṭhamaṁyeva āgantvā samaṇo gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno. Bhāsitā kho panesā, āvuso pāthikaputta, samaṇena gotamena parisati vācā— abhabbo kho acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti. Abhikkamāvuso pāthikaputta, abhikkamaneneva te jayaṁ karissāma, samaṇassa gotamassa parājayan’ti.
[¶6] When he had spoken, Pāṭikaputta said: ‘I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!’ But wriggle as he might, he couldn’t get up from his seat. Then the minister said to Pāṭikaputta, ‘What’s up, Reverend Pāṭikaputta? Is your bottom stuck to the bench, or is the bench stuck to your bottom? You say “I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!” But wriggle as you might, you can’t get up from your seat.’ And as he was speaking, Pāṭikaputta said: ‘I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!’ But wriggle as he might, he couldn’t get up from his seat.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhaggava, acelo pāthikaputto ‘āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvuso’ti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātuṁ. Atha kho so, bhaggava, licchavimahāmatto acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘kiṁ su nāma te, āvuso pāthikaputta, pāvaḷā su nāma te pīṭhakasmiṁ allīnā, pīṭhakaṁ su nāma te pāvaḷāsu allīnaṁ? Āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappasi, na sakkosi āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Evampi kho, bhaggava, vuccamāno acelo pāthikaputto ‘āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvuso’ti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātuṁ.
[¶7] When the Licchavi minister knew that Pāṭikaputta had lost, he returned to the assembly and said, ‘Pāṭikaputta has lost, worthies.’ When he said this, I said to the assembly, ‘Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting me face to face, otherwise his head may explode. Even if the good Licchavis were to think, “Let’s bind Pāṭikaputta with straps and drag him with a pair of oxen!” But either the straps will break or Pāṭikaputta will.’
> Pali: Yadā kho so, bhaggava, licchavimahāmatto aññāsi: ‘parābhūtarūpo ayaṁ acelo pāthikaputto āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Atha taṁ parisaṁ āgantvā evamārocesi: ‘parābhūtarūpo, bho, acelo pāthikaputto āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhaggava, taṁ parisaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘abhabbo kho, āvuso, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyya. Sace pāyasmantānaṁ licchavīnaṁ evamassa— mayaṁ acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ varattāhi bandhitvā goyugehi āviñcheyyāmāti, tā varattā chijjeyyuṁ pāthikaputto vā. Abhabbo pana acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’ti.
[¶8] Then, Bhaggava, Jāliya, the pupil of the wood-bowl ascetic, stood up and said to the assembly, ‘Well then, worthies, wait a while, I’ll go. Hopefully I’ll be able to lead Pāṭikaputta back to the assembly.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī uṭṭhāyāsanā taṁ parisaṁ etadavoca: ‘tena hi, bho, muhuttaṁ tāva āgametha, yāvāhaṁ gacchāmi; appeva nāma ahampi sakkuṇeyyaṁ acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ imaṁ parisaṁ ānetun’ti.
[¶9] So Jāliya went to see Pāṭikaputta and said, ‘Come forth, Reverend Pāṭikaputta! It’s best for you to come forth. All these very well-known people have come forth, and the ascetic Gotama is sitting in your monastery for the day’s meditation. You said you’d meet the ascetic Gotama half-way. The ascetic Gotama has come the first half, and is sitting in your monastery. The ascetic Gotama has told the assembly that you’re not capable of meeting him face to face. And he said that even if the Licchavis try to bind you with straps and drag you with a pair of oxen, either the straps will break or you will. Come forth, Pāṭikaputta! When you come forth we’ll make you win and the ascetic Gotama lose.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī yena tindukakhāṇuparibbājakārāmo, yena acelo pāthikaputto tenupasaṅkami. upasaṅkamitvā acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘abhikkamāvuso pāthikaputta, abhikkantaṁ te seyyo. Abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā licchavī, abhikkantā abhiññātā abhiññātā ca brāhmaṇamahāsālā gahapatinecayikā nānātitthiyā samaṇabrāhmaṇā. Samaṇopi gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno. Bhāsitā kho pana te esā, āvuso pāthikaputta, vesāliyaṁ parisati vācā— samaṇopi gotamo ñāṇavādo …pe… taddiguṇaṁ taddiguṇāhaṁ karissāmīti. Abhikkamasseva, kho āvuso pāthikaputta, upaḍḍhapathaṁ. Sabbapaṭhamaṁyeva āgantvā samaṇo gotamo āyasmato ārāme divāvihāraṁ nisinno. Bhāsitā kho panesā, āvuso pāthikaputta, samaṇena gotamena parisati vācā— abhabbo acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyya. Sace pāyasmantānaṁ licchavīnaṁ evamassa— mayaṁ acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ varattāhi bandhitvā goyugehi āviñcheyyāmāti. Tā varattā chijjeyyuṁ pāthikaputto vā. Abhabbo pana acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ āgaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyāti. Abhikkamāvuso pāthikaputta, abhikkamaneneva te jayaṁ karissāma, samaṇassa gotamassa parājayan’ti.
[¶10] When he had spoken, Pāṭikaputta said: ‘I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!’ But wriggle as he might, he couldn’t get up from his seat. Then Jāliya said to Pāṭikaputta, ‘What’s up, Reverend Pāṭikaputta? Is your bottom stuck to the bench, or is the bench stuck to your bottom? You say “I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!” But wriggle as you might, you can’t get up from your seat.’ And as he was speaking, Pāṭikaputta said: ‘I’m coming, respectable sir, I’m coming!’ But wriggle as he might, he couldn’t get up from his seat.
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhaggava, acelo pāthikaputto ‘āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvuso’ti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātuṁ. Atha kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ etadavoca: ‘kiṁ su nāma te, āvuso pāthikaputta, pāvaḷā su nāma te pīṭhakasmiṁ allīnā, pīṭhakaṁ su nāma te pāvaḷāsu allīnaṁ? Āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappasi, na sakkosi āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti. Evampi kho, bhaggava, vuccamāno acelo pāthikaputto ‘āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvuso’ti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātunti.
[¶11] When Jāliya knew that Pāṭikaputta had lost, he said to him,
> Pali: Yadā kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī aññāsi: ‘parābhūtarūpo ayaṁ acelo pāthikaputto āyāmi, āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti, atha naṁ etadavoca—
[¶12] ‘Once upon a time, Reverend Pāṭikaputta, it occurred to a lion, king of beasts, “Why don’t I make my lair near a certain forest? Towards evening I can emerge from my den, yawn, survey the four quarters, roar my lion’s roar three times, and set out on the hunt. Having slain the very best of the deer herd, and eaten the most tender flesh, I could return to my den.”
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, āvuso pāthikaputta, sīhassa migarañño etadahosi: ‘yannūnāhaṁ aññataraṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ nissāya āsayaṁ kappeyyaṁ. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā sāyanhasamayaṁ āsayā nikkhameyyaṁ, āsayā nikkhamitvā vijambheyyaṁ, vijambhitvā samantā catuddisā anuvilokeyyaṁ, samantā catuddisā anuviloketvā tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ nadeyyaṁ, tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ naditvā gocarāya pakkameyyaṁ. So varaṁ varaṁ migasaṅghe vadhitvā mudumaṁsāni mudumaṁsāni bhakkhayitvā tameva āsayaṁ ajjhupeyyan’ti.
[¶13] And so that’s what he did.
> Pali: Atha kho, āvuso, so sīho migarājā aññataraṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ nissāya āsayaṁ kappesi. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā sāyanhasamayaṁ āsayā nikkhami, āsayā nikkhamitvā vijambhi, vijambhitvā samantā catuddisā anuvilokesi, samantā catuddisā anuviloketvā tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ nadi, tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ naditvā gocarāya pakkāmi. So varaṁ varaṁ migasaṅghe vadhitvā mudumaṁsāni mudumaṁsāni bhakkhayitvā tameva āsayaṁ ajjhupesi.
[¶14] Now, there was an old jackal who had grown fat on the lion’s leavings, becoming arrogant and strong. He thought: “What does the lion, king of beasts, have that I don’t? Why don’t I also make my lair near a certain forest? Towards evening I can emerge from my den, yawn, survey the four quarters, roar my lion’s roar three times, and set out on the hunt. Having slain the very best of the deer herd, and eaten the most tender flesh, I could return to my den.”
> Pali: Tasseva kho, āvuso pāthikaputta, sīhassa migarañño vighāsasaṁvaḍḍho jarasiṅgālo ditto ceva balavā ca. Atha kho, āvuso, tassa jarasiṅgālassa etadahosi: ‘ko cāhaṁ, ko sīho migarājā. Yannūnāhampi aññataraṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ nissāya āsayaṁ kappeyyaṁ. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā sāyanhasamayaṁ āsayā nikkhameyyaṁ, āsayā nikkhamitvā vijambheyyaṁ, vijambhitvā samantā catuddisā anuvilokeyyaṁ, samantā catuddisā anuviloketvā tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ nadeyyaṁ, tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ naditvā gocarāya pakkameyyaṁ. So varaṁ varaṁ migasaṅghe vadhitvā mudumaṁsāni mudumaṁsāni bhakkhayitvā tameva āsayaṁ ajjhupeyyan’ti.
[¶15] And so that’s what he did. But when he tried to roar a lion’s roar, he only managed to squeal and yelp like a jackal. And what is a pathetic jackal’s squeal next to the roar of a lion?
> Pali: Atha kho so, āvuso, jarasiṅgālo aññataraṁ vanasaṇḍaṁ nissāya āsayaṁ kappesi. Tatrāsayaṁ kappetvā sāyanhasamayaṁ āsayā nikkhami, āsayā nikkhamitvā vijambhi, vijambhitvā samantā catuddisā anuvilokesi, samantā catuddisā anuviloketvā tikkhattuṁ sīhanādaṁ nadissāmīti siṅgālakaṁyeva anadi bheraṇḍakaṁyeva anadi, ke ca chave siṅgāle, ke pana sīhanādeti.
[¶16] In the same way, reverend, while living off the leavings of the Holy One, enjoying the leftovers of the Holy One, you presume to attack the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha! Who are the pathetic Pāṭikaputtas to attack the Realized Ones, the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas?’
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, āvuso pāthikaputta, sugatāpadānesu jīvamāno sugatātirittāni bhuñjamāno tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe āsādetabbaṁ maññasi. Ke ca chave pāthikaputte, kā ca tathāgatānaṁ arahantānaṁ sammāsambuddhānaṁ āsādanāti.
[¶17] When Jāliya couldn’t get Pāṭikaputta to shift from his seat even with this simile, he said to him:
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī iminā opammena neva asakkhi acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ tamhā āsanā cāvetuṁ. Atha naṁ etadavoca:
[¶18] ‘Seeing himself as equal to the lion,
the jackal presumed “I’m the king of the beasts!”
But he actually only managed to yelp,
and what’s a sad jackal’s squeal to the roar of a lion?
> Pali: ‘Sīhoti attānaṁ samekkhiyāna,
Amaññi kotthu migarājāhamasmi;
Tatheva so siṅgālakaṁ anadi,
Ke ca chave siṅgāle ke pana sīhanādeti.
[¶19] In the same way, reverend, while living off the leavings of the Holy One, you presume to attack him!’
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, āvuso pāthikaputta, sugatāpadānesu jīvamāno sugatātirittāni bhuñjamāno tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe āsādetabbaṁ maññasi. Ke ca chave pāthikaputte, kā ca tathāgatānaṁ arahantānaṁ sammāsambuddhānaṁ āsādanā’ti.
[¶20] When Jāliya couldn’t get Pāṭikaputta to shift from his seat even with this simile, he said to him:
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī imināpi opammena neva asakkhi acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ tamhā āsanā cāvetuṁ. Atha naṁ etadavoca:
[¶21] ‘Following in the steps of another,
seeing himself grown fat on scraps,
until he doesn’t even see himself,
the jackal presumes he’s a tiger.
> Pali: ‘Aññaṁ anucaṅkamanaṁ,
Attānaṁ vighāse samekkhiya;
Yāva attānaṁ na passati,
Kotthu tāva byagghoti maññati.
[¶22] But he actually only managed to yelp,
and what’s a sad jackal’s squeal to the roar of a lion?
> Pali: Tatheva so siṅgālakaṁ anadi,
Ke ca chave siṅgāle ke pana sīhanādeti.
[¶23] In the same way, reverend, while living off the leavings of the Holy One, you presume to attack him!’
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, āvuso pāthikaputta, sugatāpadānesu jīvamāno sugatātirittāni bhuñjamāno tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe āsādetabbaṁ maññasi. Ke ca chave pāthikaputte, kā ca tathāgatānaṁ arahantānaṁ sammāsambuddhānaṁ āsādanā’ti.
[¶24] When Jāliya couldn’t get Pāṭikaputta to shift from his seat even with this simile, he said to him:
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī imināpi opammena neva asakkhi acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ tamhā āsanā cāvetuṁ. Atha naṁ etadavoca:
[¶25] ‘Gorged on frogs, and mice from the barn,
and carcasses tossed in the cemetery,
thriving in the great, empty wood,
the jackal presumed “I’m the king of the beasts!”
But he actually only managed to yelp,
and what’s a sad jackal’s squeal to the roar of a lion?
> Pali: ‘Bhutvāna bheke khalamūsikāyo,
Kaṭasīsu khittāni ca koṇapāni;
Mahāvane suññavane vivaḍḍho,
Amaññi kotthu migarājāhamasmi;
Tatheva so siṅgālakaṁ anadi,
Ke ca chave siṅgāle ke pana sīhanādeti.
[¶26] In the same way, reverend, while living off the leavings of the Holy One, enjoying the leftovers of the Holy One, you presume to attack the Realized One, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha! Who are the pathetic Pāṭikaputtas to attack the Realized Ones, the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas?’
> Pali: Evameva kho tvaṁ, āvuso pāthikaputta, sugatāpadānesu jīvamāno sugatātirittāni bhuñjamāno tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe āsādetabbaṁ maññasi. Ke ca chave pāthikaputte, kā ca tathāgatānaṁ arahantānaṁ sammāsambuddhānaṁ āsādanā’ti.
[¶27] When Jāliya couldn’t get Pāṭikaputta to shift from his seat even with this simile, he returned to the assembly and said, ‘Pāṭikaputta has lost, worthies. He says “I’m coming, respectable sirs, I’m coming!” But wriggle as he might, he can’t get up from his seat.’
> Pali: Yato kho, bhaggava, jāliyo dārupattikantevāsī imināpi opammena neva asakkhi acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ tamhā āsanā cāvetuṁ. Atha taṁ parisaṁ āgantvā evamārocesi: ‘parābhūtarūpo, bho, acelo pāthikaputto āyāmi āvuso, āyāmi, āvusoti vatvā tattheva saṁsappati, na sakkoti āsanāpi vuṭṭhātun’ti.
[¶28] When he said this, I said to the assembly, ‘The naked ascetic Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting me face to face, unless he gives up that statement and that intention, and lets go of that view. If he thinks he can meet me face to face without giving up those things, his head may explode. The good Licchavis might even think, “Let’s bind Pāṭikaputta with straps and drag him with a pair of oxen!” But either the straps will break or Pāṭikaputta will. Pāṭikaputta is not capable of meeting me face to face, otherwise his head may explode.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, ahaṁ, bhaggava, taṁ parisaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘abhabbo kho, āvuso, acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa— ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyya. Sacepāyasmantānaṁ licchavīnaṁ evamassa— mayaṁ acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ varattāhi bandhitvā nāgehi āviñcheyyāmāti. Tā varattā chijjeyyuṁ pāthikaputto vā. Abhabbo pana acelo pāthikaputto taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā mama sammukhībhāvaṁ āgantuṁ. Sacepissa evamassa—ahaṁ taṁ vācaṁ appahāya taṁ cittaṁ appahāya taṁ diṭṭhiṁ appaṭinissajjitvā samaṇassa gotamassa sammukhībhāvaṁ gaccheyyanti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’ti.
[¶29] Then, Bhaggava, I educated, encouraged, fired up, and inspired that assembly with a Dhamma talk. I released that assembly from the great bondage, and lifted 84,000 beings from the great swamp. Next I entered upon the fire element, rose into the air to the height of seven palm trees, and created a flame another seven palm trees high, blazing and smoking. Finally I landed at the Great Wood, in the hall with the peaked roof.
> Pali: Atha khvāhaṁ, bhaggava, taṁ parisaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesiṁ samādapesiṁ samuttejesiṁ sampahaṁsesiṁ, taṁ parisaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā mahābandhanā mokkhaṁ karitvā caturāsītipāṇasahassāni mahāviduggā uddharitvā tejodhātuṁ samāpajjitvā sattatālaṁ vehāsaṁ abbhuggantvā aññaṁ sattatālampi acciṁ abhinimminitvā pajjalitvā dhūmāyitvā mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṁ paccuṭṭhāsiṁ.
[¶30] Then Sunakkhatta came to me, bowed, and sat down to one side. I said to him, ‘What do you think, Sunakkhatta? Did the declaration I made about Pāṭikaputta turn out to be correct, or not?’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho ahaṁ, bhaggava, sunakkhattaṁ licchaviputtaṁ etadavocaṁ: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, yatheva te ahaṁ acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ ārabbha byākāsiṁ, tatheva taṁ vipākaṁ aññathā vā’ti?
[¶31] ‘It turned out to be correct.’
> Pali: ‘Yatheva me, bhante, bhagavā acelaṁ pāthikaputtaṁ ārabbha byākāsi, tatheva taṁ vipākaṁ, no aññathā’ti.
[¶32] ‘What do you think, Sunakkhatta? If that is so, has a superhuman demonstration of psychic power been performed or not?’
> Pali: ‘Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, sunakkhatta, yadi evaṁ sante kataṁ vā hoti uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, akataṁ vā’ti?
[¶33] ‘Clearly, sir, a superhuman demonstration of psychic power has been performed.’
> Pali: ‘Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante kataṁ hoti uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, no akatan’ti.
[¶34] ‘Though I perform such a superhuman demonstration of psychic power you say this: “But sir, the Buddha never performs any superhuman demonstrations of psychic power for me.” See how far you have strayed!’
> Pali: ‘Evampi kho maṁ tvaṁ, moghapurisa, uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karontaṁ evaṁ vadesi— na hi pana me, bhante, bhagavā uttari manussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ karotīti. Passa, moghapurisa, yāvañca te idaṁ aparaddhan’ti.
[¶35] Though I spoke to Sunakkhatta like this, he still left this teaching and training, like someone on the highway to hell.
> Pali: Evampi kho, bhaggava, sunakkhatto licchaviputto mayā vuccamāno apakkameva imasmā dhammavinayā, yathā taṁ āpāyiko nerayiko.
[¶36] 6. On Describing the Origin of the World
> Pali: 6. Aggaññapaññattikathā
[¶37] Bhaggava, I understand the origin of the world. I understand this, and what goes beyond it. Yet since I do not misapprehend that understanding, I have realized quenching within myself. Directly knowing this, the Realized One does not come to ruin.
> Pali: Aggaññañcāhaṁ, bhaggava, pajānāmi. Tañca pajānāmi, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāmi, tañca pajānaṁ na parāmasāmi, aparāmasato ca me paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā, yadabhijānaṁ tathāgato no anayaṁ āpajjati.
[¶38] There are some ascetics and brahmins who describe the origin of the world in their denomination as created by the God Almighty, by the Divinity. I go up to them and say, ‘Is it really true that this is the venerables’ view?’ And they answer, ‘Yes’. I say to them, ‘But how do you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about as created by the God Almighty, by the Divinity?’ But they are stumped by my question, and they even question me in return. So I answer them,
> Pali: Santi, bhaggava, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā issarakuttaṁ brahmakuttaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapenti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto issarakuttaṁ brahmakuttaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te ca me evaṁ puṭṭhā, ‘āmo’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘kathaṁvihitakaṁ pana tumhe āyasmanto issarakuttaṁ brahmakuttaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te mayā puṭṭhā na sampāyanti, asampāyantā mamaññeva paṭipucchanti. Tesāhaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi:
[¶39] ‘There comes a time when, reverends, after a very long period has passed, this cosmos contracts. As the cosmos contracts, sentient beings are mostly headed for the realm of sublime luminosity. There they are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: ‘Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena ayaṁ loko saṁvaṭṭati. Saṁvaṭṭamāne loke yebhuyyena sattā ābhassarasaṁvattanikā honti. Te tattha honti manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti.
[¶40] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, this cosmos expands. As it expands an empty mansion of divinity appears. Then a certain sentient being—due to the running out of their life-span or merit—passes away from that host of luminous deities and is reborn in that empty mansion of divinity. There they are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, āvuso, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena ayaṁ loko vivaṭṭati. Vivaṭṭamāne loke suññaṁ brahmavimānaṁ pātubhavati. Atha kho aññataro satto āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā ābhassarakāyā cavitvā suññaṁ brahmavimānaṁ upapajjati. So tattha hoti manomayo pītibhakkho sayampabho antalikkhacaro subhaṭṭhāyī, ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhati.
[¶41] But after staying there all alone for a long time, they become dissatisfied and anxious, “Oh, if only other beings would come to this place.”
> Pali: Tassa tattha ekakassa dīgharattaṁ nivusitattā anabhirati paritassanā uppajjati— aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṁ āgaccheyyunti.
[¶42] Then other sentient beings—due to the running out of their life-span or merit—pass away from that host of luminous deities and are reborn in that mansion of divinity in company with that being. There they too are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Atha aññepi sattā āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā ābhassarakāyā cavitvā suññaṁ brahmavimānaṁ upapajjanti tassa sattassa sahabyataṁ. Tepi tattha honti manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino, ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti.
[¶43] Now, the being who was reborn there first thinks, “I am the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. And these beings were created by me. Why is that? Because first I thought, ‘Oh, if only other beings would come to this place.’ Such was my heart’s wish, and then these creatures came to this place.”
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, yo so satto paṭhamaṁ upapanno, tassa evaṁ hoti— ahamasmi brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ, mayā ime sattā nimmitā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Mamañhi pubbe etadahosi— aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṁ āgaccheyyunti; iti mama ca manopaṇidhi. Ime ca sattā itthattaṁ āgatāti.
[¶44] And the beings who were reborn there later also think, “This must be the Divinity, the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born. And we were created by him. Why is that? Because we see that he was reborn here first, and we arrived later.”
> Pali: Yepi te sattā pacchā upapannā, tesampi evaṁ hoti— ayaṁ kho bhavaṁ brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ; iminā mayaṁ bhotā brahmunā nimmitā. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imañhi mayaṁ addasāma idha paṭhamaṁ upapannaṁ; mayaṁ panāmha pacchā upapannāti.
[¶45] And the being who was reborn first is more long-lived, beautiful, and illustrious than those who arrived later.
> Pali: Tatrāvuso, yo so satto paṭhamaṁ upapanno, so dīghāyukataro ca hoti vaṇṇavantataro ca mahesakkhataro ca. Ye pana te sattā pacchā upapannā, te appāyukatarā ca honti dubbaṇṇatarā ca appesakkhatarā ca.
[¶46] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect that past life, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati, yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati; tato paraṁ nānussarati.
[¶47] They say: “He who is the Divinity—the Great Divinity, the Vanquisher, the Unvanquished, the Universal Seer, the Wielder of Power, God Almighty, the Maker, the Creator, the First, the Begetter, the Controller, the Father of those who have been born and those yet to be born—by he we were created. He is permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity. We who were created by that divinity are impermanent, not lasting, short-lived, liable to pass away, and have come to this place.” Is this how you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about as created by the God Almighty, by the Divinity?’
> Pali: So evamāha: “yo kho so bhavaṁ brahmā mahābrahmā abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānaṁ, yena mayaṁ bhotā brahmunā nimmitā. So nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassati. Ye pana mayaṁ ahumhā tena bhotā brahmunā nimmitā, te mayaṁ aniccā addhuvā appāyukā cavanadhammā itthattaṁ āgatā”ti. Evaṁvihitakaṁ no tumhe āyasmanto issarakuttaṁ brahmakuttaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti.
[¶48] They say, ‘That is what we have heard, Reverend Gotama, just as you say.’
> Pali: Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘evaṁ kho no, āvuso gotama, sutaṁ, yathevāyasmā gotamo āhā’ti.
[¶49] Bhaggava, I understand the origin of the world. I understand this, and what goes beyond it. Yet since I do not misapprehend that understanding, I have realized quenching within myself. Directly knowing this, the Realized One does not come to ruin.
> Pali: Aggaññañcāhaṁ, bhaggava, pajānāmi. Tañca pajānāmi, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāmi, tañca pajānaṁ na parāmasāmi, aparāmasato ca me paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Yadabhijānaṁ tathāgato no anayaṁ āpajjati.
[¶50] There are some ascetics and brahmins who describe the origin of the world in their denomination as due to those depraved by play. I go up to them and say, ‘Is it really true that this is the venerables’ view?’ And they answer, ‘Yes’. I say to them, ‘But how do you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about due to those depraved by play?’ But they are stumped by my question, and they even question me in return. So I answer them,
> Pali: Santi, bhaggava, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā khiḍḍāpadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapenti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto khiḍḍāpadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te ca me evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmo’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘kathaṁvihitakaṁ pana tumhe āyasmanto khiḍḍāpadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te mayā puṭṭhā na sampāyanti, asampāyantā mamaññeva paṭipucchanti, tesāhaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi:
[¶51] ‘Reverends, there are gods named “depraved by play”. They spend too much time laughing, playing, and making merry. And in doing so, they lose their mindfulness, and they pass away from that host of gods.
> Pali: ‘Santāvuso, khiḍḍāpadosikā nāma devā. Te ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannā viharanti. Tesaṁ ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannānaṁ viharataṁ sati sammussati, satiyā sammosā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti.
[¶52] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect that past life, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati, yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati, itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati; tato paraṁ nānussarati.
[¶53] They say, “The gods not depraved by play don’t spend too much time laughing, playing, and making merry. So they don’t lose their mindfulness, and don’t pass away from that host of gods. They are permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity. But we who were depraved by play spent too much time laughing, playing, and making merry. In doing so, we lost our mindfulness, and passed away from that host of gods. We are impermanent, not lasting, short-lived, liable to pass away, and have come to this place.” Is this how you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about due to those depraved by play?’
> Pali: So evamāha: “ye kho te bhonto devā na khiḍḍāpadosikā te na ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannā viharanti. Tesaṁ nātivelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannānaṁ viharataṁ sati na sammussati, satiyā asammosā te devā tamhā kāyā na cavanti, niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassanti. Ye pana mayaṁ ahumhā khiḍḍāpadosikā te mayaṁ ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannā viharimhā, tesaṁ no ativelaṁ hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannānaṁ viharataṁ sati sammussati, satiyā sammosā evaṁ mayaṁ tamhā kāyā cutā, aniccā addhuvā appāyukā cavanadhammā itthattaṁ āgatā”ti. Evaṁvihitakaṁ no tumhe āyasmanto khiḍḍāpadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti.
[¶54] They say, ‘That is what we have heard, Reverend Gotama, just as you say.’
> Pali: Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘evaṁ kho no, āvuso gotama, sutaṁ, yathevāyasmā gotamo āhā’ti.
[¶55] Bhaggava, I understand the origin of the world. Directly knowing this, the Realized One does not come to ruin.
> Pali: Aggaññañcāhaṁ, bhaggava, pajānāmi …pe… yadabhijānaṁ tathāgato no anayaṁ āpajjati.
[¶56] There are some ascetics and brahmins who describe the origin of the world in their denomination as due to those who are malevolent. I go up to them and say, ‘Is it really true that this is the venerables’ view?’ And they answer, ‘Yes’. I say to them, ‘But how do you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about due to those who are malevolent?’ But they are stumped by my question, and they even question me in return. So I answer them,
> Pali: Santi, bhaggava, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā manopadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapenti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto manopadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te ca me evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmo’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘kathaṁvihitakaṁ pana tumhe āyasmanto manopadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te mayā puṭṭhā na sampāyanti, asampāyantā mamaññeva paṭipucchanti. Tesāhaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi:
[¶57] ‘Reverends, there are gods named “malevolent”. They spend too much time gazing at each other, so they grow angry with each other, and their bodies and minds get tired. They pass away from that host of gods.
> Pali: ‘Santāvuso, manopadosikā nāma devā. Te ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyanti. Te ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyantā aññamaññamhi cittāni padūsenti. Te aññamaññaṁ paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā kilantacittā. Te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti.
[¶58] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect that past life, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati, yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, tato paraṁ nānussarati.
[¶59] They say, “The gods who are not malevolent don’t spend too much time gazing at each other, so they don’t grow angry with each other, their bodies and minds don’t get tired, and they don’t pass away from that host of gods. They are permanent, everlasting, eternal, imperishable, remaining the same for all eternity. But we who were malevolent spent too much time gazing at each other, so our minds grew angry with each other, our bodies and minds got tired, and we passed away from that host of gods. We are impermanent, not lasting, short-lived, liable to pass away, and have come to this place.” Is this how you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about due to those who are malevolent?’
> Pali: So evamāha: “ye kho te bhonto devā na manopadosikā te nātivelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyanti. Te nātivelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyantā aññamaññamhi cittāni nappadūsenti. Te aññamaññaṁ appaduṭṭhacittā akilantakāyā akilantacittā. Te devā tamhā kāyā na cavanti, niccā dhuvā sassatā avipariṇāmadhammā sassatisamaṁ tatheva ṭhassanti. Ye pana mayaṁ ahumhā manopadosikā, te mayaṁ ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyimhā. Te mayaṁ ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyantā aññamaññamhi cittāni padūsimhā. Te mayaṁ aññamaññaṁ paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā kilantacittā. Evaṁ mayaṁ tamhā kāyā cutā, aniccā addhuvā appāyukā cavanadhammā itthattaṁ āgatā”ti. Evaṁvihitakaṁ no tumhe āyasmanto manopadosikaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti.
[¶60] They say, ‘That is what we have heard, Reverend Gotama, just as you say.’
> Pali: Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘evaṁ kho no, āvuso gotama, sutaṁ, yathevāyasmā gotamo āhā’ti.
[¶61] Bhaggava, I understand the origin of the world. Directly knowing this, the Realized One does not come to ruin.
> Pali: Aggaññañcāhaṁ, bhaggava, pajānāmi …pe… yadabhijānaṁ tathāgato no anayaṁ āpajjati.
[¶62] There are some ascetics and brahmins who describe the origin of the world in their denomination as having arisen as an anomaly. I go up to them and say, ‘Is it really true that this is the venerables’ view?’ And they answer, ‘Yes’. I say to them, ‘But how do you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about anomalously?’ But they are stumped by my question, and they even question me in return. So I answer them,
> Pali: Santi, bhaggava, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhiccasamuppannaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapenti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘saccaṁ kira tumhe āyasmanto adhiccasamuppannaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te ca me evaṁ puṭṭhā ‘āmo’ti paṭijānanti. Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi: ‘kathaṁvihitakaṁ pana tumhe āyasmanto adhiccasamuppannaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti? Te mayā puṭṭhā na sampāyanti, asampāyantā mamaññeva paṭipucchanti. Tesāhaṁ puṭṭho byākaromi:
[¶63] ‘Reverends, there are gods named “non-percipient beings”. When perception arises they pass away from that host of gods.
> Pali: ‘Santāvuso, asaññasattā nāma devā. Saññuppādā ca pana te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti.
[¶64] It’s possible that one of those beings passes away from that host and is reborn in this place. Having done so, they go forth from the lay life to homelessness. By dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind, they experience an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect the arising of perception, but no further.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, āvuso, vijjati yaṁ aññataro satto tamhā kāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchati. Itthattaṁ āgato samāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati. Agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajito samāno ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte taṁ saññuppādaṁ anussarati, tato paraṁ nānussarati’.
[¶65] They say, “The self and the cosmos arose anomalously. Why is that? Because formerly I didn’t exist, whereas now, having not existed, I’ve transformed into the state of existing.” Is this how you describe in your denomination that the origin of the world came about anomalously?’
> Pali: So evamāha: ‘adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko ca. Taṁ kissa hetu? Ahañhi pubbe nāhosiṁ, somhi etarahi ahutvā santatāya pariṇato’ti. ‘Evaṁvihitakaṁ no tumhe āyasmanto adhiccasamuppannaṁ ācariyakaṁ aggaññaṁ paññapethā’ti?
[¶66] They say, ‘That is what we have heard, Reverend Gotama, just as you say.’
> Pali: Te evamāhaṁsu: ‘evaṁ kho no, āvuso gotama, sutaṁ yathevāyasmā gotamo āhā’ti.
[¶67] I understand this, and what goes beyond it. Yet since I do not misapprehend that understanding, I have realized quenching within myself. Directly knowing this, the Realized One does not come to ruin.
> Pali: Aggaññañcāhaṁ, bhaggava, pajānāmi tañca pajānāmi, tato ca uttaritaraṁ pajānāmi, tañca pajānaṁ na parāmasāmi, aparāmasato ca me paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā. Yadabhijānaṁ tathāgato no anayaṁ āpajjati.
[¶68] Though I state and assert this, certain ascetics and brahmins misrepresent me with the incorrect, hollow, false, untruthful claim: ‘The ascetic Gotama has a distorted perspective, and so have his monks.
> Pali: Evaṁvādiṁ kho maṁ, bhaggava, evamakkhāyiṁ eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhanti: ‘viparīto samaṇo gotamo bhikkhavo ca.
[¶69] He says, “When one enters and remains in the liberation of the beautiful, at that time one only perceives what is ugly.”’
> Pali: Samaṇo gotamo evamāha— yasmiṁ samaye subhaṁ vimokkhaṁ upasampajja viharati, sabbaṁ tasmiṁ samaye asubhantveva pajānātī’ti.
[¶70] But I don’t say that. I say this: ‘When one enters and remains in the liberation of the beautiful, at that time one only perceives what is beautiful.’”
> Pali: Na kho panāhaṁ, bhaggava, evaṁ vadāmi: ‘yasmiṁ samaye subhaṁ vimokkhaṁ upasampajja viharati, sabbaṁ tasmiṁ samaye asubhantveva pajānātī’ti. Evañca khvāhaṁ, bhaggava, vadāmi: ‘yasmiṁ samaye subhaṁ vimokkhaṁ upasampajja viharati, subhantveva tasmiṁ samaye pajānātī’”ti.
[¶71] “They are the ones with a distorted perspective, sir, who regard the Buddha and the mendicants in this way. Sir, I am quite confident that the Buddha is capable of teaching me so that I can enter and remain in the liberation on the beautiful.”
> Pali: “Te ca, bhante, viparītā, ye bhagavantaṁ viparītato dahanti bhikkhavo ca. Evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati. Pahoti me bhagavā tathā dhammaṁ desetuṁ, yathā ahaṁ subhaṁ vimokkhaṁ upasampajja vihareyyan”ti.
[¶72] “It’s hard for you to enter and remain in the liberation on the beautiful, since you have a different view, creed, and belief, and another discipline and denomination. Come on, Bhaggava, carefully preserve the confidence that you have in me.”
> Pali: “Dukkaraṁ kho etaṁ, bhaggava, tayā aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrāyogena aññatrācariyakena subhaṁ vimokkhaṁ upasampajja viharituṁ. Iṅgha tvaṁ, bhaggava, yo ca te ayaṁ mayi pasādo, tameva tvaṁ sādhukamanurakkhā”ti.
[¶73] “If it’s hard for me to enter and remain in the liberation on the beautiful, since I have a different view, creed, and belief, and another discipline and denomination. I shall carefully preserve the confidence that I have in the Buddha.”
> Pali: “Sace taṁ, bhante, mayā dukkaraṁ aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrāyogena aññatrācariyakena subhaṁ vimokkhaṁ upasampajja viharituṁ. Yo ca me ayaṁ, bhante, bhagavati pasādo, tamevāhaṁ sādhukamanurakkhissāmī”ti.
[¶74] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the wanderer of the Bhaggava clan approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano bhaggavagotto paribbājako bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶75] > Pali: Pāthikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ paṭhamaṁ.
## 50. DN 25 · The Lion’s Roar at the Monastery of Lady Udumbarikā · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/50/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/50/#p-N
[¶0] DN 25 · The Lion’s Roar at the Monastery of Lady Udumbarikā
> Pali: DN 25 · Udumbarikasutta
[¶1] 1. The Story of the Wanderer Nigrodha
> Pali: 1. Nigrodhaparibbājakavatthu
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate.
[¶3] Now at that time the wanderer Nigrodha was residing in the lady Udumbarikā’s monastery for wanderers, together with a large assembly of three thousand wanderers. Then the householder Sandhāna left Rājagaha in the middle of the day to see the Buddha.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigrodho paribbājako udumbarikāya paribbājakārāme paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ tiṁsamattehi paribbājakasatehi. Atha kho sandhāno gahapati divā divassa rājagahā nikkhami bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.
[¶4] Then it occurred to him, “It’s the wrong time to see the Buddha, as he’s in retreat. And it’s the wrong time to see the esteemed mendicants, as they’re in retreat. Why don’t I visit the wanderer Nigrodha at the lady Udumbarikā’s monastery for wanderers?” So he went to the monastery for the wanderers.
> Pali: Atha kho sandhānassa gahapatissa etadahosi: “akālo kho bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Paṭisallīno bhagavā. Manobhāvanīyānampi bhikkhūnaṁ asamayo dassanāya. Paṭisallīnā manobhāvanīyā bhikkhū. Yannūnāhaṁ yena udumbarikāya paribbājakārāmo, yena nigrodho paribbājako tenupasaṅkameyyan”ti. Atha kho sandhāno gahapati yena udumbarikāya paribbājakārāmo, tenupasaṅkami.
[¶5] Now at that time, Nigrodha was sitting together with a large assembly of wanderers making an uproar, a colossal racket. They engaged in all kinds of low talk, such as talk about kings, bandits, and chief ministers; talk about armies, threats, and wars; talk about food, drink, clothes, and beds; talk about garlands and fragrances; talk about family, vehicles, villages, towns, cities, and countries; talk about women and heroes; talk at the street market and the place for water pots; talk about the departed; motley talk; tales of land and sea; and talk about being reborn in this or that place.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigrodho paribbājako mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṁ nisinno hoti unnādiniyā uccāsaddamahāsaddāya anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ kathentiyā. Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ mahāmattakathaṁ senākathaṁ bhayakathaṁ yuddhakathaṁ annakathaṁ pānakathaṁ vatthakathaṁ sayanakathaṁ mālākathaṁ gandhakathaṁ ñātikathaṁ yānakathaṁ gāmakathaṁ nigamakathaṁ nagarakathaṁ janapadakathaṁ itthikathaṁ sūrakathaṁ visikhākathaṁ kumbhaṭṭhānakathaṁ pubbapetakathaṁ nānattakathaṁ lokakkhāyikaṁ samuddakkhāyikaṁ itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā.
[¶6] Nigrodha saw Sandhāna coming off in the distance, and hushed his own assembly: “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. The householder Sandhāna, a disciple of the ascetic Gotama, is coming. He is included among the white-clothed lay disciples of the ascetic Gotama, who is residing near Rājagaha. Such venerables like the quiet, are educated to be quiet, and praise the quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach.” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho nigrodho paribbājako sandhānaṁ gahapatiṁ dūratova āgacchantaṁ. Disvā sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhāpesi: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha. Ayaṁ samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako āgacchati sandhāno gahapati. Yāvatā kho pana samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakā gihī odātavasanā rājagahe paṭivasanti, ayaṁ tesaṁ aññataro sandhāno gahapati. Appasaddakāmā kho panete āyasmanto appasaddavinītā, appasaddassa vaṇṇavādino. Appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyyā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶7] Then Sandhāna went up to the wanderer Nigrodha, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side and said to Nigrodha, “The way the wanderers make an uproar as they sit together and talk about all kinds of low topics is one thing. It’s quite different to the way the Buddha frequents remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest that are quiet and still, far from the madding crowd, remote from human settlements, and fit for retreat.”
> Pali: Atha kho sandhāno gahapati yena nigrodho paribbājako tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā nigrodhena paribbājakena saddhiṁ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho sandhāno gahapati nigrodhaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “aññathā kho ime bhonto aññatitthiyā paribbājakā saṅgamma samāgamma unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ …pe… itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā. Aññathā kho pana so bhagavā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevati appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppānī”ti.
[¶8] When Sandhāna said this, Nigrodha said to him, “Surely, householder, you should know better! With whom does the ascetic Gotama converse? With whom does he engage in discussion? With whom does he achieve lucidity of wisdom? Staying in empty huts has destroyed the ascetic Gotama’s wisdom. Not frequenting assemblies, he is unable to hold a discussion. He just lurks on the periphery. He’s just like a one-eyed cow, circling around and lurking on the periphery. Go on, householder! Were the ascetic Gotama to come to this assembly, I’d sink him with just one question! I’d tie him up like a hollow pot!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, nigrodho paribbājako sandhānaṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca: “yagghe, gahapati, jāneyyāsi, kena samaṇo gotamo saddhiṁ sallapati, kena sākacchaṁ samāpajjati, kena paññāveyyattiyaṁ samāpajjati? Suññāgārahatā samaṇassa gotamassa paññā aparisāvacaro samaṇo gotamo nālaṁ sallāpāya. So antamantāneva sevati. Seyyathāpi nāma gokāṇā pariyantacārinī antamantāneva sevati. Evameva suññāgārahatā samaṇassa gotamassa paññā; aparisāvacaro samaṇo gotamo; nālaṁ sallāpāya. So antamantāneva sevati. Iṅgha, gahapati, samaṇo gotamo imaṁ parisaṁ āgaccheyya, ekapañheneva naṁ saṁsādeyyāma, tucchakumbhīva naṁ maññe orodheyyāmā”ti.
[¶9] With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, the Buddha heard this discussion between the householder Sandhāna and the wanderer Nigrodha. Then the Buddha descended from Vulture’s Peak Mountain and went to the peacocks’ feeding ground on the bank of the Sumāgadhā, where he walked mindfully in the open air.
> Pali: Assosi kho bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya sandhānassa gahapatissa nigrodhena paribbājakena saddhiṁ imaṁ kathāsallāpaṁ. Atha kho bhagavā gijjhakūṭā pabbatā orohitvā yena sumāgadhāya tīre moranivāpo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā sumāgadhāya tīre moranivāpe abbhokāse caṅkami.
[¶10] Nigrodha saw him, and hushed his own assembly: “Be quiet, good fellows, don’t make a sound. Here, the ascetic Gotama is walking mindfully on the bank of the Sumāgadhā. The venerable likes quiet and praises quiet. Hopefully if he sees that our assembly is quiet he’ll see fit to approach. If he comes, I’ll ask him this question: ‘Sir, what teaching do you use to guide your disciples, through which they claim solace in the fundamental goal of the spiritual life?’” Then those wanderers fell silent.
> Pali: Addasā kho nigrodho paribbājako bhagavantaṁ sumāgadhāya tīre moranivāpe abbhokāse caṅkamantaṁ. Disvāna sakaṁ parisaṁ saṇṭhāpesi: “appasaddā bhonto hontu, mā bhonto saddamakattha, ayaṁ samaṇo gotamo sumāgadhāya tīre moranivāpe abbhokāse caṅkamati. Appasaddakāmo kho pana so āyasmā, appasaddassa vaṇṇavādī. Appeva nāma appasaddaṁ parisaṁ viditvā upasaṅkamitabbaṁ maññeyya. Sace samaṇo gotamo imaṁ parisaṁ āgaccheyya, imaṁ taṁ pañhaṁ puccheyyāma: ‘ko nāma so, bhante, bhagavato dhammo, yena bhagavā sāvake vineti, yena bhagavatā sāvakā vinītā assāsappattā paṭijānanti ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyan’”ti? Evaṁ vutte, te paribbājakā tuṇhī ahesuṁ.
[¶11] 2. Mortification in Disgust of Sin
> Pali: 2. Tapojigucchāvāda
[¶12] Then the Buddha went up to the wanderer Nigrodha, who said to him, “Let the Blessed One come, sir! Welcome to the Blessed One, sir! It’s been a long time since you took the opportunity to come here. Please, sir, sit down, here, a seat is ready.” The Buddha sat down on the seat spread out, while Nigrodha took a low seat and sat to one side. The Buddha said to him, “Nigrodha, what were you sitting talking about just now? What conversation was left unfinished?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā yena nigrodho paribbājako tenupasaṅkami. Atha kho nigrodho paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “etu kho, bhante, bhagavā, svāgataṁ, bhante, bhagavato. Cirassaṁ kho, bhante, bhagavā imaṁ pariyāyamakāsi yadidaṁ idhāgamanāya. Nisīdatu, bhante, bhagavā, idamāsanaṁ paññattan”ti. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Nigrodhopi kho paribbājako aññataraṁ nīcāsanaṁ gahetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho nigrodhaṁ paribbājakaṁ bhagavā etadavoca: “kāya nuttha, nigrodha, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā, kā ca pana vo antarākathā vippakatā”ti?
[¶13] Nigrodha said, “Well, sir, I saw you walking mindfully and said: ‘If the ascetic Gotama comes, I’ll ask him this question: “Sir, what teaching do you use to guide your disciples, through which they claim solace in the fundamental goal of the spiritual life?”’ This is the conversation that was unfinished when the Buddha arrived.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, nigrodho paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “idha mayaṁ, bhante, addasāma bhagavantaṁ sumāgadhāya tīre moranivāpe abbhokāse caṅkamantaṁ, disvāna evaṁ avocumhā: ‘sace samaṇo gotamo imaṁ parisaṁ āgaccheyya, imaṁ taṁ pañhaṁ puccheyyāma: “ko nāma so, bhante, bhagavato dhammo, yena bhagavā sāvake vineti, yena bhagavatā sāvakā vinītā assāsappattā paṭijānanti ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyan”’ti? Ayaṁ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā; atha bhagavā anuppatto”ti.
[¶14] “It’s hard for you to understand this, Nigrodha, since you have a different view, creed, and belief, and another discipline and denomination. Please ask me a question about the higher disgust of sin in your own denomination: ‘How are the conditions for the fervent mortification in disgust of sin completed, and how are they incomplete?’”
> Pali: “Dujjānaṁ kho etaṁ, nigrodha, tayā aññadiṭṭhikena aññakhantikena aññarucikena aññatrāyogena aññatrācariyakena, yenāhaṁ sāvake vinemi, yena mayā sāvakā vinītā assāsappattā paṭijānanti ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyaṁ. Iṅgha tvaṁ maṁ, nigrodha, sake ācariyake adhijegucche pañhaṁ puccha: ‘kathaṁ santā nu kho, bhante, tapojigucchā paripuṇṇā hoti, kathaṁ aparipuṇṇā’”ti?
[¶15] When he said this, those wanderers made an uproar, “Oh lord, how incredible, how amazing! The ascetic Gotama has such power and might! For he sets aside his own doctrine and invites discussion on the doctrine of others!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te paribbājakā unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṁ: “acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho, samaṇassa gotamassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, yatra hi nāma sakavādaṁ ṭhapessati, paravādena pavāressatī”ti.
[¶16] Then Nigrodha, having quieted those wanderers, said to the Buddha, “Sir, we teach fervent mortification in disgust of sin, regarding it as essential and sticking to it. How are the conditions for the fervent mortification in disgust of sin completed, and how are they incomplete?”
> Pali: Atha kho nigrodho paribbājako te paribbājake appasadde katvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “mayaṁ kho, bhante, tapojigucchāvādā tapojigucchāsārā tapojigucchāallīnā viharāma. Kathaṁ santā nu kho, bhante, tapojigucchā paripuṇṇā hoti, kathaṁ aparipuṇṇā”ti?
[¶17] “Nigrodha, it’s when a mortifier goes naked, ignoring conventions. They lick their hands, and don’t come or wait when called. They don’t consent to food brought to them, or food prepared on their behalf, or an invitation for a meal. They don’t receive anything from a pot or bowl; or from someone who keeps sheep, or who has a weapon or a shovel in their home; or where a couple is eating; or where there is a woman who is pregnant, breast-feeding, or who lives with a man; or where there’s a hound waiting or flies buzzing. They accept no fish or meat or beer or wine, and drink no fermented gruel. They go to just one house for alms, taking just one mouthful, or two houses and two mouthfuls, up to seven houses and seven mouthfuls. They feed on one saucer a day, two saucers a day, up to seven saucers a day. They eat once a day, once every second day, up to once a week, and so on, even up to once a fortnight. They live committed to the practice of eating food at set intervals. They eat herbs, millet, wild rice, poor rice, water lettuce, rice bran, scum from boiling rice, sesame flour, grass, or cow dung. They survive on forest roots and fruits, or eating fallen fruit. They wear robes of sunn hemp, mixed hemp, corpse-wrapping cloth, rags, lodh tree bark, antelope hide (whole or in strips), kusa grass, bark, wood-chips, human hair, horse-tail hair, or owls’ wings. They tear out their hair and beard, committed to this practice. They constantly stand, turning down seats. They squat, committed to the endeavor of squatting. They lie on a mat of thorns, making a mat of thorns their bed. They make their bed on a plank, or the bare ground. They lie only on one side. They wear dust and dirt. They stay in the open air. They sleep wherever they lay their mat. They eat unnatural things, committed to the practice of eating unnatural foods. They don’t drink, committed to the practice of not drinking liquids. They’re devoted to ritual bathing three times a day, including at dusk.
> Pali: “Idha, nigrodha, tapassī acelako hoti muttācāro, hatthāpalekhano, naehibhaddantiko, natiṭṭhabhaddantiko, nābhihaṭaṁ, na uddissakataṁ, na nimantanaṁ sādiyati, so na kumbhimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na kaḷopimukhā paṭiggaṇhāti, na eḷakamantaraṁ, na daṇḍamantaraṁ, na musalamantaraṁ, na dvinnaṁ bhuñjamānānaṁ, na gabbhiniyā, na pāyamānāya, na purisantaragatāya, na saṅkittīsu, na yattha sā upaṭṭhito hoti, na yattha makkhikā saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī, na macchaṁ, na maṁsaṁ, na suraṁ, na merayaṁ, na thusodakaṁ pivati, so ekāgāriko vā hoti ekālopiko, dvāgāriko vā hoti dvālopiko, sattāgāriko vā hoti sattālopiko, ekissāpi dattiyā yāpeti, dvīhipi dattīhi yāpeti, sattahipi dattīhi yāpeti; ekāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, dvīhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, sattāhikampi āhāraṁ āhāreti, iti evarūpaṁ addhamāsikampi pariyāyabhattabhojanānuyogamanuyutto viharati. So sākabhakkho vā hoti, sāmākabhakkho vā hoti, nīvārabhakkho vā hoti, daddulabhakkho vā hoti, haṭabhakkho vā hoti, kaṇabhakkho vā hoti, ācāmabhakkho vā hoti, piññākabhakkho vā hoti, tiṇabhakkho vā hoti, gomayabhakkho vā hoti; vanamūlaphalāhāro yāpeti pavattaphalabhojī. So sāṇānipi dhāreti, masāṇānipi dhāreti, chavadussānipi dhāreti, paṁsukūlānipi dhāreti, tirīṭānipi dhāreti, ajinampi dhāreti, ajinakkhipampi dhāreti, kusacīrampi dhāreti, vākacīrampi dhāreti, phalakacīrampi dhāreti, kesakambalampi dhāreti, vāḷakambalampi dhāreti, ulūkapakkhampi dhāreti, kesamassulocakopi hoti kesamassulocanānuyogamanuyutto, ubbhaṭṭhakopi hoti āsanapaṭikkhitto, ukkuṭikopi hoti ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto, kaṇṭakāpassayikopi hoti kaṇṭakāpassaye seyyaṁ kappeti, phalakaseyyampi kappeti, thaṇḍilaseyyampi kappeti, ekapassayikopi hoti rajojalladharo, abbhokāsikopi hoti yathāsanthatiko, vekaṭikopi hoti vikaṭabhojanānuyogamanuyutto, apānakopi hoti apānakattamanuyutto, sāyatatiyakampi udakorohanānuyogamanuyutto viharati.
[¶18] What do you think, Nigrodha? If this is so, is the fervent mortification in disgust of sin complete, or incomplete?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha, yadi evaṁ sante tapojigucchā paripuṇṇā vā hoti aparipuṇṇā vā”ti?
[¶19] “Clearly, sir, if that is so the fervent mortification in disgust of sin is complete, not incomplete.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tapojigucchā paripuṇṇā hoti, no aparipuṇṇā”ti.
[¶20] “But even such a completed mortification has many defects, I say.”
> Pali: “Evaṁ paripuṇṇāyapi kho ahaṁ, nigrodha, tapojigucchāya anekavihite upakkilese vadāmī”ti.
[¶21] 2.1. Defects
> Pali: 2.1. Upakkilesa
[¶22] “But how does the Buddha say that even such a completed mortification has many defects?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana, bhante, bhagavā evaṁ paripuṇṇāya tapojigucchāya anekavihite upakkilese vadatī”ti?
[¶23] “Firstly, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They’re happy with that, as they’ve got all they wished for. This is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: “Idha, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶24] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā attānukkaṁseti paraṁ vambheti. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā attānukkaṁseti paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶25] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They become indulgent and infatuated and fall into negligence on account of that. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā majjati mucchati pamādamāpajjati. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā majjati mucchati pamādamāpajjati. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶26] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They generate possessions, honor, and popularity through that mortification. They’re happy with that, as they’ve got all they wished for. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶27] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They generate possessions, honor, and popularity through that mortification. They glorify themselves and put others down on account of that. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena attānukkaṁseti paraṁ vambheti. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena attānukkaṁseti paraṁ vambheti. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶28] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They generate possessions, honor, and popularity through that mortification. They become indulgent and infatuated and fall into negligence on account of that. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena majjati mucchati pamādamāpajjati. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena majjati mucchati pamādamāpajjati. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶29] Furthermore, a mortifier becomes fussy about food, saying, ‘This is acceptable to me, this is not acceptable to me.’ What is not acceptable they give up in expectation. But what is acceptable they eat tied, infatuated, attached, blind to the drawbacks, and not understanding the escape. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī bhojanesu vodāsaṁ āpajjati: ‘idaṁ me khamati, idaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti. So yañca khvassa nakkhamati, taṁ sāpekkho pajahati. Yaṁ panassa khamati, taṁ gadhito mucchito ajjhāpanno anādīnavadassāvī anissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶30] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification out of longing for possessions, honor, and popularity, thinking, ‘Kings, royal ministers, aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and sectarians will honor me!’ This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati lābhasakkārasilokanikantihetu: ‘sakkarissanti maṁ rājāno rājamahāmattā khattiyā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā titthiyā’ti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶31] Furthermore, a mortifier rebukes a certain ascetic or brahmin, ‘What is it with this one living in abundance, devouring everything— plants propagated from roots, trunks, cuttings, or joints; and those from regular seeds as the fifth. According to this ascetic’s doctrine, the crown of the tooth is forked lightning!’ This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī aññataraṁ samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā apasādetā hoti: ‘kiṁ panāyaṁ sambahulājīvo sabbaṁ sambhakkheti. Seyyathidaṁ—mūlabījaṁ khandhabījaṁ phaḷubījaṁ aggabījaṁ bījabījameva pañcamaṁ, asanivicakkaṁ dantakūṭaṁ, samaṇappavādenā’ti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶32] Furthermore, a mortifier sees a certain ascetic or brahmin being honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated among good families. They think, ‘This one, who lives in abundance, is honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated among good families. But I, a fervent mortifier who lives rough, am not honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated among good families.’ Thus they give rise to jealousy and stinginess regarding families. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī passati aññataraṁ samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā kulesu sakkariyamānaṁ garukariyamānaṁ māniyamānaṁ pūjiyamānaṁ. Disvā tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘imañhi nāma sambahulājīvaṁ kulesu sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti. Maṁ pana tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ kulesu na sakkaronti na garuṁ karonti na mānenti na pūjentī’ti, iti so issāmacchariyaṁ kulesu uppādetā hoti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶33] Furthermore, a mortifier sits meditation only when people can see them. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī āpāthakanisādī hoti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶34] Furthermore, a mortifier sneaks about among families, thinking, ‘This is part of my mortification; this is part of my mortification.’ This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī attānaṁ adassayamāno kulesu carati: ‘idampi me tapasmiṁ idampi me tapasmin’ti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶35] Furthermore, a mortifier sometimes behaves in an underhand manner. When asked whether something is acceptable to them, they say it is, even though it isn’t. Or they say it isn’t, even though it is. Thus they tell a deliberate lie. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī kiñcideva paṭicchannaṁ sevati. So ‘khamati te idan’ti puṭṭho samāno akkhamamānaṁ āha: ‘khamatī’ti. Khamamānaṁ āha: ‘nakkhamatī’ti. Iti so sampajānamusā bhāsitā hoti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶36] Furthermore, a mortifier disagrees with the way that the Realized One or their disciple teaches Dhamma, even when they make a valid point. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammaṁ desentassa santaṁyeva pariyāyaṁ anuññeyyaṁ nānujānāti …pe… ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶37] Furthermore, a mortifier is irritable and acrimonious … offensive and contemptuous … jealous and stingy … devious and deceitful … obstinate and arrogant … they have corrupt wishes, falling under the sway of corrupt wishes … they have wrong view, being attached to an extremist view … they’re attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go. This too is a defect in that mortifier.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī kodhano hoti upanāhī. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī kodhano hoti upanāhī. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti. Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī makkhī hoti paḷāsī …pe… issukī hoti maccharī … saṭho hoti māyāvī … thaddho hoti atimānī … pāpiccho hoti pāpikānaṁ icchānaṁ vasaṁ gato … micchādiṭṭhiko hoti antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato … sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī. Ayampi kho, nigrodha, tapassino upakkileso hoti.
[¶38] What do you think, Nigrodha? Are such mortifications defective or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha, yadime tapojigucchā upakkilesā vā anupakkilesā vā”ti?
[¶39] “Clearly, sir, they’re defective. It’s possible that a mortifier might have all of these defects, let alone one or other of them.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho ime, bhante, tapojigucchā upakkilesā, no anupakkilesā. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, bhante, vijjati yaṁ idhekacco tapassī sabbeheva imehi upakkilesehi samannāgato assa; ko pana vādo aññataraññatarenā”ti.
[¶40] 2.2. On Reaching the Shoots
> Pali: 2.2. Parisuddhapapaṭikappattakathā
[¶41] “Firstly, Nigrodha, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. But they’re not happy with that, as they still haven’t got all they wished for. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: “Idha, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo. Evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶42] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They don’t glorify themselves or put others down on account of that. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā na attānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶43] They don’t become indulgent …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā na majjati na mucchati na pamādamāpajjati …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶44] Furthermore, a mortifier undertakes a practice of mortification. They generate possessions, honor, and popularity through that mortification. They’re not happy with that, as they still haven’t got all they wished for …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attamano hoti na paripuṇṇasaṅkappo …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶45] They don’t glorify themselves and put others down on account of possessions, honor, and popularity …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena na attānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶46] They don’t become indulgent because of it … So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tapaṁ samādiyati, so tena tapasā lābhasakkārasilokaṁ abhinibbatteti, so tena lābhasakkārasilokena na majjati na mucchati na pamādamāpajjati …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶47] Furthermore, a mortifier doesn’t become fussy about food, saying, ‘This is acceptable to me, this is not acceptable to me.’ What is not acceptable they give up without concern. But what is acceptable they eat without being tied, infatuated, attached, seeing the drawbacks, and understanding the escape. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī bhojanesu na vodāsaṁ āpajjati: ‘idaṁ me khamati, idaṁ me nakkhamatī’ti. So yañca khvassa nakkhamati, taṁ anapekkho pajahati. Yaṁ panassa khamati, taṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶48] Furthermore, a mortifier doesn’t undertake a practice of mortification out of longing for possessions, honor, and popularity … ‘Kings, royal ministers, aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and sectarians will honor me!’ So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī na tapaṁ samādiyati lābhasakkārasilokanikantihetu: ‘sakkarissanti maṁ rājāno rājamahāmattā khattiyā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā titthiyā’ti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶49] Furthermore, a mortifier doesn’t rebuke a certain ascetic or brahmin, ‘What is it with this one living in abundance, devouring everything— plants propagated from roots, trunks, cuttings, or joints; and those from regular seeds as the fifth. According to this ascetic’s doctrine, the crown of the tooth is like forked lightning!’ So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī aññataraṁ samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā nāpasādetā hoti: ‘kiṁ panāyaṁ sambahulājīvo sabbaṁ sambhakkheti. Seyyathidaṁ—mūlabījaṁ khandhabījaṁ phaḷubījaṁ aggabījaṁ bījabījameva pañcamaṁ, asanivicakkaṁ dantakūṭaṁ, samaṇappavādenā’ti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶50] Furthermore, a mortifier sees a certain ascetic or brahmin being honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated among good families. It never occurs to them, ‘This one, who lives in abundance, is honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated among good families. But I, a fervent mortifier who lives rough, am not honored, respected, esteemed, and venerated among good families.’ Thus they don’t give rise to jealousy and stinginess regarding families. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī passati aññataraṁ samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā kulesu sakkariyamānaṁ garu kariyamānaṁ māniyamānaṁ pūjiyamānaṁ. Disvā tassa na evaṁ hoti: ‘imañhi nāma sambahulājīvaṁ kulesu sakkaronti garuṁ karonti mānenti pūjenti. Maṁ pana tapassiṁ lūkhājīviṁ kulesu na sakkaronti na garuṁ karonti na mānenti na pūjentī’ti, iti so issāmacchariyaṁ kulesu nuppādetā hoti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶51] Furthermore, a mortifier doesn’t sit meditation only when people can see them. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī na āpāthakanisādī hoti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶52] Furthermore, a mortifier doesn’t sneak about among families, thinking, ‘This is part of my mortification; this is part of my mortification.’ So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī na attānaṁ adassayamāno kulesu carati: ‘idampi me tapasmiṁ, idampi me tapasmin’ti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
## 51. DN 25 · The Lion’s Roar at the Monastery of Lady Udumbarikā · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/51/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/51/#p-N
[¶0] Furthermore, a mortifier never behaves in an underhand manner. When asked whether something is acceptable to them, they say it isn’t when it isn’t. Or they say it is when it is. Thus they don’t tell a deliberate lie. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī na kiñcideva paṭicchannaṁ sevati, so: ‘khamati te idan’ti puṭṭho samāno akkhamamānaṁ āha: ‘nakkhamatī’ti. Khamamānaṁ āha: ‘khamatī’ti. Iti so sampajānamusā na bhāsitā hoti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶1] Furthermore, a mortifier agrees with the way that the Realized One or their disciple teaches Dhamma when they make a valid point. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammaṁ desentassa santaṁyeva pariyāyaṁ anuññeyyaṁ anujānāti …pe… evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶2] Furthermore, a mortifier is not irritable and acrimonious … offensive and contemptuous … jealous and stingy … devious and deceitful … obstinate and arrogant … they don’t have corrupt wishes … and wrong view … they’re not attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go. So they’re pure on that point.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī akkodhano hoti anupanāhī. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī akkodhano hoti anupanāhī evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti. Puna caparaṁ, nigrodha, tapassī amakkhī hoti apaḷāsī …pe… anissukī hoti amaccharī … asaṭho hoti amāyāvī … atthaddho hoti anatimānī … na pāpiccho hoti na pāpikānaṁ icchānaṁ vasaṁ gato … na micchādiṭṭhiko hoti na antaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato … na sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti na ādhānaggāhī suppaṭinissaggī. Yampi, nigrodha, tapassī na sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti na ādhānaggāhī suppaṭinissaggī. Evaṁ so tasmiṁ ṭhāne parisuddho hoti.
[¶3] What do you think, Nigrodha? If this is so, is the fervent mortification in disgust of sin purified or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha, yadi evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā vā hoti aparisuddhā vā”ti?
[¶4] “Clearly, sir, it is purified. It has reached the peak and the pith.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā hoti no aparisuddhā, aggappattā ca sārappattā cā”ti.
[¶5] “No, Nigrodha, at this point the fervent mortification in disgust of sin has not yet reached the peak and the pith. Rather, it has only reached the shoots.”
> Pali: “Na kho, nigrodha, ettāvatā tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca; api ca kho papaṭikappattā hotī”ti.
[¶6] 2.3. On Reaching the Bark
> Pali: 2.3. Parisuddhatacappattakathā
[¶7] “But at what point, sir, does the fervent mortification in disgust of sin reach the peak and the pith? Please help me reach the peak and the pith!”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca? Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā tapojigucchāya aggaññeva pāpetu, sāraññeva pāpetū”ti.
[¶8] “Nigrodha, take a mortifier who is restrained in the fourfold constraint. And how is a mortifier restrained in the fourfold constraint? It’s when a mortifier doesn’t kill living creatures, doesn’t get others to kill, and doesn’t approve of killing. They don’t steal, get others to steal, or approve of stealing. They don’t lie, get others to lie, or approve of lying. They don’t expect rewards from their practice, they don’t lead others to expect rewards, and they don’t approve of expecting rewards. That’s how a mortifier is restrained in the fourfold constraint.
> Pali: “Idha, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti. Kathañca, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti? Idha, nigrodha, tapassī na pāṇaṁ atipāteti, na pāṇaṁ atipātayati, na pāṇamatipātayato samanuñño hoti. Na adinnaṁ ādiyati, na adinnaṁ ādiyāpeti, na adinnaṁ ādiyato samanuñño hoti. Na musā bhaṇati, na musā bhaṇāpeti, na musā bhaṇato samanuñño hoti. Na bhāvitamāsīsati, na bhāvitamāsīsāpeti, na bhāvitamāsīsato samanuñño hoti. Evaṁ kho, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti.
[¶9] When a mortifier is restrained in the fourfold constraint, that is their mortification. They step forward, not falling back. They frequent a secluded lodging—a wilderness, the root of a tree, a hill, a ravine, a mountain cave, a charnel ground, a forest, the open air, a heap of straw. After the meal, they return from almsround, sit down cross-legged, set their body straight, and bring mindfulness to the present. Giving up covetousness for the world, they meditate with a heart rid of covetousness, cleansing the mind of covetousness. Giving up ill will and malevolence, they meditate with a mind rid of ill will, full of sympathy for all living beings, cleansing the mind of ill will. Giving up dullness and drowsiness, they meditate with a mind rid of dullness and drowsiness, perceiving light, mindful and aware, cleansing the mind of dullness and drowsiness. Giving up restlessness and remorse, they meditate without restlessness, their mind settled internally, cleansing the mind of restlessness and remorse. Giving up doubt, they meditate having gone beyond doubt, not undecided about skillful qualities, cleansing the mind of doubt.
> Pali: Yato kho, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti, aduṁ cassa hoti tapassitāya. So abhiharati no hīnāyāvattati. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati araññaṁ rukkhamūlaṁ pabbataṁ kandaraṁ giriguhaṁ susānaṁ vanapatthaṁ abbhokāsaṁ palālapuñjaṁ. So pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto nisīdati pallaṅkaṁ ābhujitvā ujuṁ kāyaṁ paṇidhāya parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā. So abhijjhaṁ loke pahāya vigatābhijjhena cetasā viharati, abhijjhāya cittaṁ parisodheti. Byāpādappadosaṁ pahāya abyāpannacitto viharati sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī, byāpādappadosā cittaṁ parisodheti. Thinamiddhaṁ pahāya vigatathinamiddho viharati ālokasaññī sato sampajāno, thinamiddhā cittaṁ parisodheti. Uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahāya anuddhato viharati ajjhattaṁ vūpasantacitto, uddhaccakukkuccā cittaṁ parisodheti. Vicikicchaṁ pahāya tiṇṇavicikiccho viharati akathaṅkathī kusalesu dhammesu, vicikicchāya cittaṁ parisodheti.
[¶10] They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then they meditate spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion … They meditate spreading a heart full of rejoicing … They meditate spreading a heart full of equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: So ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.
[¶11] What do you think, Nigrodha? If this is so, is the fervent mortification in disgust of sin purified or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha. Yadi evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā vā hoti aparisuddhā vā”ti?
[¶12] “Clearly, sir, it is purified. It has reached the peak and the pith.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā hoti no aparisuddhā, aggappattā ca sārappattā cā”ti.
[¶13] “No, Nigrodha, at this point the fervent mortification in disgust of sin has not yet reached the peak and the pith. Rather, it has only reached the bark.”
> Pali: “Na kho, nigrodha, ettāvatā tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca; api ca kho tacappattā hotī”ti.
[¶14] 2.4. On Reaching the Softwood
> Pali: 2.4. Parisuddhaphegguppattakathā
[¶15] “But at what point, sir, does the fervent mortification in disgust of sin reach the peak and the pith? Please help me reach the peak and the pith!”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca? Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā tapojigucchāya aggaññeva pāpetu, sāraññeva pāpetū”ti.
[¶16] “Nigrodha, take a mortifier who is restrained in the fourfold constraint. They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then they meditate spreading a heart full of love … compassion … rejoicing … equanimity.
> Pali: “Idha, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti. Kathañca, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti …pe… yato kho, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti, aduṁ cassa hoti tapassitāya. So abhiharati no hīnāyāvattati. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati …pe… so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe mettāsahagatena cetasā …pe… karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.
[¶17] They recollect many kinds of past lives, that is, one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe: ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ, tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶18] What do you think, Nigrodha? If this is so, is the fervent mortification in disgust of sin purified or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha, yadi evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā vā hoti aparisuddhā vā”ti?
[¶19] “Clearly, sir, it is purified. It has reached the peak and the pith.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā hoti, no aparisuddhā, aggappattā ca sārappattā cā”ti.
[¶20] “No, Nigrodha, at this point the fervent mortification in disgust of sin has not yet reached the peak and the pith. Rather, it has only reached the softwood.”
> Pali: “Na kho, nigrodha, ettāvatā tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca; api ca kho phegguppattā hotī”ti.
[¶21] 3. On Reaching the Heartwood
> Pali: 3. Parisuddhaaggappattasārappattakathā
[¶22] “But at what point, sir, does the fervent mortification in disgust of sin reach the peak and the pith? Please help me reach the peak and the pith!”
> Pali: “Kittāvatā pana, bhante, tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca? Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā tapojigucchāya aggaññeva pāpetu, sāraññeva pāpetū”ti.
[¶23] “Nigrodha, take a mortifier who is restrained in the fourfold constraint. They give up these five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Then they meditate spreading a heart full of love … equanimity … They recollect many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: “Idha, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti. Kathañca, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti …pe… yato kho, nigrodha, tapassī cātuyāmasaṁvarasaṁvuto hoti, aduṁ cassa hoti tapassitāya. So abhiharati no hīnāyāvattati. So vivittaṁ senāsanaṁ bhajati …pe… so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe mettāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati. So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶24] With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: So dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti.
[¶25] What do you think, Nigrodha? If this is so, is the fervent mortification in disgust of sin purified or not?”
> Pali: Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha, yadi evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā vā hoti aparisuddhā vā”ti?
[¶26] “Clearly, sir, it is purified. It has reached the peak and the pith.”
> Pali: “Addhā kho, bhante, evaṁ sante tapojigucchā parisuddhā hoti no aparisuddhā, aggappattā ca sārappattā cā”ti.
[¶27] “Nigrodha, at this point the fervent mortification in disgust of sin has reached the peak and the pith. Nigrodha, remember you said this to me: ‘Sir, what teaching do you use to guide your disciples, through which they claim solace in the fundamental goal of the spiritual life?’ Well, there is something better and finer than this. That’s what I use to guide my disciples, through which they claim solace in the fundamental goal of the spiritual life.”
> Pali: “Ettāvatā kho, nigrodha, tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā ca. Iti kho, nigrodha, yaṁ maṁ tvaṁ avacāsi: ‘ko nāma so, bhante, bhagavato dhammo, yena bhagavā sāvake vineti, yena bhagavatā sāvakā vinītā assāsappattā paṭijānanti ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyan’ti. Iti kho taṁ, nigrodha, ṭhānaṁ uttaritarañca paṇītatarañca, yenāhaṁ sāvake vinemi, yena mayā sāvakā vinītā assāsappattā paṭijānanti ajjhāsayaṁ ādibrahmacariyan”ti.
[¶28] When he said this, those wanderers made an uproar, “In that case, we’re lost, and so is our denomination! We don’t know anything better or finer than that!”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te paribbājakā unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṁ: “ettha mayaṁ anassāma sācariyakā, na mayaṁ ito bhiyyo uttaritaraṁ pajānāmā”ti.
[¶29] 4. Nigrodha Feels Depressed
> Pali: 4. Nigrodhassapajjhāyana
[¶30] Then the householder Sandhāna realized, “Obviously, now these wanderers want to listen to what the Buddha says. They’re actively listening and trying to understand!”
> Pali: Yadā aññāsi sandhāno gahapati: “aññadatthu kho dānime aññatitthiyā paribbājakā bhagavato bhāsitaṁ sussūsanti, sotaṁ odahanti, aññācittaṁ upaṭṭhāpentī”ti.
[¶31] So he said to the wanderer Nigrodha, “Honorable Nigrodha, remember you said this to me: ‘Surely, householder, you should know better! With whom does the ascetic Gotama converse? With whom does he engage in discussion? With whom does he achieve lucidity of wisdom? Staying in empty huts has destroyed the ascetic Gotama’s wisdom. Not frequenting assemblies, he is unable to hold a discussion. He just lurks on the periphery. He’s just like a one-eyed cow, circling around and lurking on the periphery. Please, householder, let the ascetic Gotama come to this assembly. I’ll sink him with just one question! I’ll roll him over and wrap him up like a hollow pot!’ Now the Blessed One, perfected and fully awakened, has arrived here. Why don’t you send him out of the assembly to the periphery like a one-eyed cow? Why don’t you sink him with just one question? Why don’t you roll him over and wrap him up like a hollow pot?” When he said this, Nigrodha sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say.
> Pali: Atha nigrodhaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “iti kho, bhante nigrodha, yaṁ maṁ tvaṁ avacāsi: ‘yagghe, gahapati, jāneyyāsi, kena samaṇo gotamo saddhiṁ sallapati, kena sākacchaṁ samāpajjati, kena paññāveyyattiyaṁ samāpajjati, suññāgārahatā samaṇassa gotamassa paññā, aparisāvacaro samaṇo gotamo nālaṁ sallāpāya, so antamantāneva sevati; seyyathāpi nāma gokāṇā pariyantacārinī antamantāneva sevati. Evameva suññāgārahatā samaṇassa gotamassa paññā, aparisāvacaro samaṇo gotamo nālaṁ sallāpāya; so antamantāneva sevati; iṅgha, gahapati, samaṇo gotamo imaṁ parisaṁ āgaccheyya, ekapañheneva naṁ saṁsādeyyāma, tucchakumbhīva naṁ maññe orodheyyāmā’ti. Ayaṁ kho so, bhante, bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho idhānuppatto, aparisāvacaraṁ pana naṁ karotha, gokāṇaṁ pariyantacāriniṁ karotha, ekapañheneva naṁ saṁsādetha, tucchakumbhīva naṁ orodhethā”ti. Evaṁ vutte, nigrodho paribbājako tuṇhībhūto maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisīdi.
[¶32] Knowing this, the Buddha said to him, “Is it really true, Nigrodha—are those your words?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā nigrodhaṁ paribbājakaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ maṅkubhūtaṁ pattakkhandhaṁ adhomukhaṁ pajjhāyantaṁ appaṭibhānaṁ viditvā nigrodhaṁ paribbājakaṁ etadavoca: “saccaṁ kira, nigrodha, bhāsitā te esā vācā”ti?
[¶33] “It’s true, sir, those are my words. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of me.”
> Pali: “Saccaṁ, bhante, bhāsitā me esā vācā, yathābālena yathāmūḷhena yathāakusalenā”ti.
[¶34] “What do you think, Nigrodha? Have you heard that wanderers of the past who were elderly and senior, the tutors of tutors, said that when the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas of the past came together, they made an uproar, a colossal racket as they sat and talked about all kinds of low topics, like you do in your denomination these days? Or did they say that the Buddhas frequented remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest that are quiet and still, far from the madding crowd, remote from human settlements, and fit for retreat, like I do these days?”
> Pali: “Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, nigrodha. Kinti te sutaṁ paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘ye te ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, evaṁ su te bhagavanto saṅgamma samāgamma unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ …pe… itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā. Seyyathāpi tvaṁ etarahi sācariyako. Udāhu, evaṁ su te bhagavanto araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni, seyyathāpāhaṁ etarahī’”ti.
[¶35] “I have heard that wanderers of the past who were elderly and senior, said that when the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas of the past came together, they didn’t make an uproar, like I do in my denomination these days. They said that the Buddhas of the past frequented remote lodgings in the wilderness, like the Buddha does these days.”
> Pali: “Sutaṁ metaṁ, bhante. Paribbājakānaṁ vuḍḍhānaṁ mahallakānaṁ ācariyapācariyānaṁ bhāsamānānaṁ: ‘ye te ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, na evaṁ su te bhagavanto saṅgamma samāgamma unnādino uccāsaddamahāsaddā anekavihitaṁ tiracchānakathaṁ anuyuttā viharanti. Seyyathidaṁ—rājakathaṁ corakathaṁ …pe… itibhavābhavakathaṁ iti vā, seyyathāpāhaṁ etarahi sācariyako. Evaṁ su te bhagavanto araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni, seyyathāpi bhagavā etarahī’”ti.
[¶36] “Nigrodha, you are a sensible and mature man. Did it not occur to you: ‘The Blessed One is awakened, tamed, serene, crossed over, and quenched. And he teaches Dhamma for awakening, taming, serenity, crossing over, and extinguishment’?”
> Pali: “Tassa te, nigrodha, viññussa sato mahallakassa na etadahosi: ‘buddho so bhagavā bodhāya dhammaṁ deseti, danto so bhagavā damathāya dhammaṁ deseti, santo so bhagavā samathāya dhammaṁ deseti, tiṇṇo so bhagavā taraṇāya dhammaṁ deseti, parinibbuto so bhagavā parinibbānāya dhammaṁ desetī’”ti?
[¶37] 5. The Culmination of the Spiritual Path
> Pali: 5. Brahmacariyapariyosānasacchikiriyā
[¶38] Nigrodha said, “I made a mistake, sir. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of me to speak in that way. Please, sir, accept my mistake for what it is, so I will restrain myself in future.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, nigrodho paribbājako bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “accayo maṁ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yvāhaṁ evaṁ bhagavantaṁ avacāsiṁ. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṁ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṁ saṁvarāyā”ti.
[¶39] “Indeed, Nigrodha, you made a mistake. It was foolish, stupid, and unskillful of you to speak in that way. But since you have recognized your mistake for what it is, and have dealt with it properly, I accept it. For it is growth in the training of the Noble One to recognize a mistake for what it is, deal with it properly, and commit to restraint in the future. Nigrodha, this is what I say:
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, nigrodha, accayo accagamā yathābālaṁ yathāmūḷhaṁ yathāakusalaṁ, yo maṁ tvaṁ evaṁ avacāsi. Yato ca kho tvaṁ, nigrodha, accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikarosi, taṁ te mayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāma. Vuddhi hesā, nigrodha, ariyassa vinaye, yo accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikaroti āyatiṁ saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Ahaṁ kho pana, nigrodha, evaṁ vadāmi:
[¶40] Let a sensible person come—neither devious nor deceitful, a person of integrity. I teach and instruct them. By practicing as instructed they will realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, in seven years. They will live having achieved with their own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness. Let alone seven years. Let a sensible person come—neither devious nor deceitful, a person of integrity. I teach and instruct them. By practicing as instructed they will realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, in six years … five years … four years … three years … two years … one year … seven months … six months … five months … four months … three months … two months … one month … a fortnight. Let alone a fortnight. Let a sensible person come—neither devious nor deceitful, a person of integrity. I teach and instruct them. By practicing as instructed they will realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life, in seven days.
> Pali: ‘Etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko, ahamanusāsāmi ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati sattavassāni. Tiṭṭhantu, nigrodha, satta vassāni. Etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko, ahamanusāsāmi ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati cha vassāni. Pañca vassāni … cattāri vassāni … tīṇi vassāni … dve vassāni … ekaṁ vassaṁ. Tiṭṭhatu, nigrodha, ekaṁ vassaṁ. Etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko ahamanusāsāmi ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati satta māsāni. Tiṭṭhantu, nigrodha, satta māsāni … cha māsāni … pañca māsāni … cattāri māsāni … tīṇi māsāni … dve māsāni … ekaṁ māsaṁ … aḍḍhamāsaṁ. Tiṭṭhatu, nigrodha, aḍḍhamāso. Etu viññū puriso asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko, ahamanusāsāmi ahaṁ dhammaṁ desemi. Yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati sattāhaṁ’.
[¶41] 6. The Wanderers Feel Depressed
> Pali: 6. Paribbājakānaṁpajjhāyana
[¶42] Nigrodha, you might think, ‘The ascetic Gotama speaks like this because he wants pupils.’ But you should not see it like this. Let your tutor remain your tutor.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, nigrodha, evamassa: ‘antevāsikamyatā no samaṇo gotamo evamāhā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, nigrodha, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Yo eva vo ācariyo, so eva vo ācariyo hotu.
[¶43] You might think, ‘The ascetic Gotama speaks like this because he wants us to give up our recitation.’ But you should not see it like this. Let your recitation remain as it is.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, nigrodha, evamassa: ‘uddesā no cāvetukāmo samaṇo gotamo evamāhā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, nigrodha, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Yo eva vo uddeso so eva vo uddeso hotu.
[¶44] You might think, ‘The ascetic Gotama speaks like this because he wants us to give up our livelihood.’ But you should not see it like this. Let your livelihood remain as it is.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, nigrodha, evamassa: ‘ājīvā no cāvetukāmo samaṇo gotamo evamāhā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, nigrodha, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Yo eva vo ājīvo, so eva vo ājīvo hotu.
[¶45] You might think, ‘The ascetic Gotama speaks like this because he wants us to start doing things that are unskillful and considered unskillful in our denomination.’ But you should not see it like this. Let those things that are unskillful and considered unskillful in your denomination remain as they are.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, nigrodha, evamassa: ‘ye no dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā sācariyakānaṁ, tesu patiṭṭhāpetukāmo samaṇo gotamo evamāhā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, nigrodha, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Akusalā ceva vo te dhammā hontu akusalasaṅkhātā ca sācariyakānaṁ.
[¶46] You might think, ‘The ascetic Gotama speaks like this because he wants us to stop doing things that are skillful and considered skillful in our denomination.’ But you should not see it like this. Let those things that are skillful and considered skillful in your denomination remain as they are.
> Pali: Siyā kho pana te, nigrodha, evamassa: ‘ye no dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā sācariyakānaṁ, tehi vivecetukāmo samaṇo gotamo evamāhā’ti. Na kho panetaṁ, nigrodha, evaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ. Kusalā ceva vo te dhammā hontu kusalasaṅkhātā ca sācariyakānaṁ.
[¶47] I do not speak for any of these reasons. Nigrodha, there are things that are unskillful, corrupting, leading to future lives, hurtful, resulting in suffering and future rebirth, old age, and death. I teach Dhamma so that those things may be given up. When you practice accordingly, corrupting qualities will be given up in you and cleansing qualities will grow. You’ll enter and remain in the fullness and abundance of wisdom, having realized it with your own insight in this very life.”
> Pali: Iti khvāhaṁ, nigrodha, neva antevāsikamyatā evaṁ vadāmi, napi uddesā cāvetukāmo evaṁ vadāmi, napi ājīvā cāvetukāmo evaṁ vadāmi, napi ye vo dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā sācariyakānaṁ, tesu patiṭṭhāpetukāmo evaṁ vadāmi, napi ye vo dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā sācariyakānaṁ, tehi vivecetukāmo evaṁ vadāmi. Santi ca kho, nigrodha, akusalā dhammā appahīnā saṅkilesikā ponobbhavikā sadarā dukkhavipākā āyatiṁ jātijarāmaraṇiyā, yesāhaṁ pahānāya dhammaṁ desemi. Yathāpaṭipannānaṁ vo saṅkilesikā dhammā pahīyissanti, vodānīyā dhammā abhivaḍḍhissanti, paññāpāripūriṁ vepullattañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā”ti.
[¶48] When this was said, those wanderers sat silent, dismayed, shoulders drooping, downcast, depressed, with nothing to say, as if their minds were possessed by Māra. Then it occurred to the Buddha, “All these silly people have been touched by the Wicked One! For not even a single one thinks, ‘Come, let us lead the spiritual life under the ascetic Gotama for the sake of enlightenment—for what do seven days matter?’”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, te paribbājakā tuṇhībhūtā maṅkubhūtā pattakkhandhā adhomukhā pajjhāyantā appaṭibhānā nisīdiṁsu yathā taṁ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittā. Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi: “sabbepime moghapurisā phuṭṭhā pāpimatā. Yatra hi nāma ekassapi na evaṁ bhavissati: ‘handa mayaṁ aññāṇatthampi samaṇe gotame brahmacariyaṁ carāma, kiṁ karissati sattāho’”ti?
[¶49] Then the Buddha, having roared his lion’s roar in the lady Udumbarikā’s monastery for wanderers, rose into the air and landed on Vulture’s Peak. Meanwhile, the householder Sandhāna went right back to Rājagaha.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā udumbarikāya paribbājakārāme sīhanādaṁ naditvā vehāsaṁ abbhuggantvā gijjhakūṭe pabbate paccupaṭṭhāsi. Sandhāno pana gahapati tāvadeva rājagahaṁ pāvisīti.
[¶50] > Pali: Udumbarikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dutiyaṁ.
## 52. DN 26 · The Wheel-Turning Monarch · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/52/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/52/#p-N
[¶0] DN 26 · The Wheel-Turning Monarch
> Pali: DN 26 · Cakkavattisutta
[¶1] 1. Taking Refuge in Oneself
> Pali: 1. Attadīpasaraṇatā
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Magadhans at Mātulā. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā magadhesu viharati mātulāyaṁ. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶3] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhaddante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶4] “Mendicants, live as your own island, your own refuge, with no other refuge. Let the teaching be your island and your refuge, with no other refuge. And how does a mendicant do this? They meditate observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. That’s how a mendicant lives with themselves as island and refuge, without other refuge; with the teachings as island and refuge, without other refuge.
> Pali: “Attadīpā, bhikkhave, viharatha attasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā. Kathañca pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo, dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe… citte cittānupassī …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo, dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo.
[¶5] You should roam inside your own territory, the domain of your fathers. If you roam inside your own territory, the domain of your fathers, Māra won’t find a vulnerability or get an opportunity. It is due to undertaking skillful qualities that merit grows.
> Pali: Gocare, bhikkhave, caratha sake pettike visaye. Gocare, bhikkhave, carataṁ sake pettike visaye na lacchati māro otāraṁ, na lacchati māro ārammaṇaṁ. Kusalānaṁ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ samādānahetu evamidaṁ puññaṁ pavaḍḍhati.
[¶6] 2. King Daḷhanemi
> Pali: 2. Daḷhanemicakkavattirājā
[¶7] Once upon a time, mendicants, there was a king named Daḷhanemi who was a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extended to all four sides, he achieved stability in the country, and he possessed the seven treasures. He had the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He had over a thousand sons who were valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he reigned by principle, without rod or sword.
> Pali: Bhūtapubbaṁ, bhikkhave, rājā daḷhanemi nāma ahosi cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni ahesuṁ seyyathidaṁ— cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā ahesuṁ sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasi.
[¶8] Then, after many years, many hundred years, many thousand years had passed, King Daḷhanemi addressed one of his men, ‘My man, when you see that the heavenly wheel-treasure has receded back from its place, please tell me.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā daḷhanemi bahunnaṁ vassānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: ‘yadā tvaṁ, ambho purisa, passeyyāsi dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutaṁ, atha me āroceyyāsī’ti.
[¶9] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied that man.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, so puriso rañño daḷhanemissa paccassosi.
[¶10] After many thousand years had passed, that man saw that the heavenly wheel-treasure had receded back from its place. So he went to King Daḷhanemi and said, ‘Please Your Majesty, you should know that your heavenly wheel-treasure has receded back from its place.’
> Pali: Addasā kho, bhikkhave, so puriso bahunnaṁ vassānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutaṁ, disvāna yena rājā daḷhanemi tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ daḷhanemiṁ etadavoca: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, dibbaṁ te cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutan’ti.
[¶11] So the king summoned the crown prince and said, ‘Dear prince, my heavenly wheel-treasure has receded back from its place. I’ve heard that when this happens to a wheel-turning monarch, he does not have long to live. I have enjoyed human pleasures. Now it is time for me to seek heavenly pleasures. Come, dear prince, rule this land surrounded by ocean! I shall shave off my hair and beard, dress in ocher robes, and go forth from the lay life to homelessness.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā daḷhanemi jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘dibbaṁ kira me, tāta kumāra, cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutaṁ. Sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ— yassa rañño cakkavattissa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ osakkati ṭhānā cavati, na dāni tena raññā ciraṁ jīvitabbaṁ hotīti. Bhuttā kho pana me mānusakā kāmā, samayo dāni me dibbe kāme pariyesituṁ. Ehi tvaṁ, tāta kumāra, imaṁ samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ paṭipajja. Ahaṁ pana kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmī’ti.
[¶12] And so, after carefully instructing the crown prince in kingship, King Daḷhanemi shaved off his hair and beard, dressed in ocher robes, and went forth from the lay life to homelessness. Seven days later the heavenly wheel-treasure vanished.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā daḷhanemi jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. Sattāhapabbajite kho pana, bhikkhave, rājisimhi dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ antaradhāyi.
[¶13] Then a certain man approached the newly anointed aristocrat king and said, ‘Please Your Majesty, you should know that the heavenly wheel-treasure has vanished.’ At that the king was unhappy and experienced unhappiness. He went to the royal seer and said, ‘Please Your Majesty, you should know that the heavenly wheel-treasure has vanished.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, aññataro puriso yena rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ khattiyaṁ muddhābhisittaṁ etadavoca: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ antarahitan’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto dibbe cakkaratane antarahite anattamano ahosi, anattamanatañca paṭisaṁvedesi. So yena rājisi tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājisiṁ etadavoca: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ antarahitan’ti.
[¶14] When he said this, the royal seer said to him, ‘Don’t be unhappy at the vanishing of the wheel-treasure. My dear, the wheel-treasure is not inherited from your father. Come now, my dear, proceed in the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch. If you do so, it’s possible that—on a fifteenth day sabbath, having bathed your head and gone upstairs in the royal longhouse to observe the sabbath—the heavenly wheel-treasure will appear to you, with a thousand spokes, with rim and hub, complete in every detail.’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, rājisi rājānaṁ khattiyaṁ muddhābhisittaṁ etadavoca: ‘mā kho tvaṁ, tāta, dibbe cakkaratane antarahite anattamano ahosi, mā anattamanatañca paṭisaṁvedesi, na hi te, tāta, dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pettikaṁ dāyajjaṁ. Iṅgha tvaṁ, tāta, ariye cakkavattivatte vattāhi. Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ te ariye cakkavattivatte vattamānassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pātubhavissati sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūran’ti.
[¶15] 2.1. The Noble Duty of a Wheel-Turning Monarch
> Pali: 2.1. Cakkavattiariyavatta
[¶16] ‘But Your Majesty, what is the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch?’
> Pali: ‘Katamaṁ pana taṁ, deva, ariyaṁ cakkavattivattan’ti?
[¶17] ‘Well then, my dear, relying only on principle—honoring, respecting, and venerating principle, having principle as your flag, banner, and authority—provide just protection and security for your court, troops, aristocrats, vassals, brahmins and householders, people of town and country, ascetics and brahmins, beasts and birds. Do not let injustice prevail in the realm. Provide money to the penniless in the realm.
> Pali: ‘Tena hi tvaṁ, tāta, dhammaṁyeva nissāya dhammaṁ sakkaronto dhammaṁ garuṁ karonto dhammaṁ mānento dhammaṁ pūjento dhammaṁ apacāyamāno dhammaddhajo dhammaketu dhammādhipateyyo dhammikaṁ rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidahassu antojanasmiṁ balakāyasmiṁ khattiyesu anuyantesu brāhmaṇagahapatikesu negamajānapadesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu migapakkhīsu. Mā ca te, tāta, vijite adhammakāro pavattittha. Ye ca te, tāta, vijite adhanā assu, tesañca dhanamanuppadeyyāsi.
[¶18] And there are ascetics and brahmins in the realm who refrain from intoxication and negligence, are settled in patience and gentleness, and who tame, calm, and extinguish themselves. From time to time you should go up to them and ask and learn: “Sirs, what is skillful? What is unskillful? What is blameworthy? What is blameless? What should be cultivated? What should not be cultivated? Doing what leads to my lasting harm and suffering? Doing what leads to my lasting welfare and happiness?” Having heard them, you should shun what is unskillful and proceed having undertaken what is skillful.
> Pali: Ye ca te, tāta, vijite samaṇabrāhmaṇā madappamādā paṭiviratā khantisoracce niviṭṭhā ekamattānaṁ damenti, ekamattānaṁ samenti, ekamattānaṁ parinibbāpenti, te kālena kālaṁ upasaṅkamitvā paripuccheyyāsi pariggaṇheyyāsi: “kiṁ, bhante, kusalaṁ, kiṁ akusalaṁ, kiṁ sāvajjaṁ, kiṁ anavajjaṁ, kiṁ sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ na sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya assa, kiṁ vā pana me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya assā”ti? Tesaṁ sutvā yaṁ akusalaṁ taṁ abhinivajjeyyāsi, yaṁ kusalaṁ taṁ samādāya vatteyyāsi.
[¶19] This is the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch.’
> Pali: Idaṁ kho, tāta, taṁ ariyaṁ cakkavattivattan’ti.
[¶20] 2.2. The Wheel-Treasure Appears
> Pali: 2.2. Cakkaratanapātubhāva
[¶21] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied the new king to the royal seer. And he proceeded in the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto rājisissa paṭissutvā ariye cakkavattivatte vatti.
[¶22] While he was proceeding in that duty, on a fifteenth day sabbath, he had bathed his head and gone upstairs in the royal longhouse to observe the sabbath. And the heavenly wheel-treasure appeared to him, with a thousand spokes, with rim and hub, complete in every detail. Seeing this, the king thought, ‘I have heard that when the heavenly wheel-treasure appears to a king in this way, he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. Am I then a wheel-turning monarch?’
> Pali: Tassa ariye cakkavattivatte vattamānassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pāturahosi sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ. Disvāna rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa etadahosi: ‘sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ—yassa rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa tadahuposathe pannarase sīsaṁnhātassa uposathikassa uparipāsādavaragatassa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ pātubhavati sahassāraṁ sanemikaṁ sanābhikaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ, so hoti rājā cakkavattīti. Assaṁ nu kho ahaṁ rājā cakkavattī’ti.
[¶23] Then the anointed king, rising from his seat and arranging his robe over one shoulder, took a ceremonial vase in his left hand and besprinkled the wheel-treasure with his right hand, saying, ‘Roll forth, O wheel-treasure! Triumph, O wheel-treasure!’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā vāmena hatthena bhiṅkāraṁ gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena cakkaratanaṁ abbhukkiri: ‘pavattatu bhavaṁ cakkaratanaṁ, abhivijinātu bhavaṁ cakkaratanan’ti.
[¶24] Then the wheel-treasure rolled toward the east. And the king followed it together with his army of four divisions. In whatever place the wheel-treasure stood still, there the king came to stay together with his army. And any opposing rulers of the eastern quarter came to the wheel-turning monarch and said, ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! We are yours, Great King, instruct us.’ The wheel-turning monarch said, ‘Do not kill living creatures. Do not steal. Do not commit sexual misconduct. Do not lie. Do not drink liquor. Maintain the current level of taxation.’ And so the opposing rulers of the eastern quarter became his vassals.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ puratthimaṁ disaṁ pavatti, anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṁ upagacchi saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja, svāgataṁ te mahārāja, sakaṁ te, mahārāja, anusāsa, mahārājā’ti. Rājā cakkavattī evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ nādātabbaṁ, kāmesumicchā na caritabbā, musā na bhāsitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño cakkavattissa anuyantā ahesuṁ.
[¶25] Then the wheel-treasure, having plunged into the eastern ocean and emerged again, rolled toward the south. … Having plunged into the southern ocean and emerged again, it rolled toward the west. …
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ puratthimaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pavatti …pe… dakkhiṇaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā pacchimaṁ disaṁ pavatti, anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṁ upagacchi saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, pacchimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja, svāgataṁ te, mahārāja, sakaṁ te, mahārāja, anusāsa, mahārājā’ti. Rājā cakkavattī evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ nādātabbaṁ, kāmesumicchā na caritabbā, musā na bhāsitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, pacchimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño cakkavattissa anuyantā ahesuṁ.
[¶26] Having plunged into the western ocean and emerged again, it rolled toward the north, followed by the king together with his army of four divisions. In whatever place the wheel-treasure stood still, there the king came to stay together with his army. And any opposing rulers of the northern quarter came to the wheel-turning monarch and said, ‘Come, Great King! Welcome, Great King! We are yours, Great King, instruct us.’ The wheel-turning monarch said, ‘Do not kill living creatures. Do not steal. Do not commit sexual misconduct. Do not lie. Do not drink liquor. Maintain the current level of taxation.’ And so the rulers of the northern quarter became his vassals.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ pacchimaṁ samuddaṁ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā uttaraṁ disaṁ pavatti, anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṁ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese cakkaratanaṁ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṁ upagacchi saddhiṁ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, uttarāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ehi kho, mahārāja, svāgataṁ te, mahārāja, sakaṁ te, mahārāja, anusāsa, mahārājā’ti. Rājā cakkavattī evamāha: ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṁ nādātabbaṁ, kāmesumicchā na caritabbā, musā na bhāsitabbā, majjaṁ na pātabbaṁ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho pana, bhikkhave, uttarāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño cakkavattissa anuyantā ahesuṁ.
[¶27] And then the wheel-treasure, having triumphed over this land surrounded by ocean, returned to the royal capital. There it stood still by the gate to the royal compound at the High Court as if fixed to an axle, illuminating the royal compound.
> Pali: Atha kho taṁ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṁ samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ abhivijinitvā tameva rājadhāniṁ paccāgantvā rañño cakkavattissa antepuradvāre atthakaraṇapamukhe akkhāhataṁ maññe aṭṭhāsi rañño cakkavattissa antepuraṁ upasobhayamānaṁ.
[¶28] 3. On Subsequent Wheel-Turning Monarchs
> Pali: 3. Dutiyādicakkavattikathā
[¶29] And for a second time, and a third, a fourth, a fifth, a sixth, and a seventh time, a wheel-turning monarch was established in exactly the same way. And after many years the seventh wheel-turning monarch went forth, handing the realm over to the crown prince.
> Pali: Dutiyopi kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī …pe… tatiyopi kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī … catutthopi kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī … pañcamopi kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī … chaṭṭhopi kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī … sattamopi kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī bahunnaṁ vassānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena aññataraṁ purisaṁ āmantesi: ‘yadā tvaṁ, ambho purisa, passeyyāsi dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutaṁ, atha me āroceyyāsī’ti. ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, so puriso rañño cakkavattissa paccassosi. Addasā kho, bhikkhave, so puriso bahunnaṁ vassānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasatānaṁ bahunnaṁ vassasahassānaṁ accayena dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutaṁ. Disvāna yena rājā cakkavattī tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ cakkavattiṁ etadavoca: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, dibbaṁ te cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ ṭhānā cutan’ti?
[¶30] > Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca: ‘dibbaṁ kira me, tāta kumāra, cakkaratanaṁ osakkitaṁ, ṭhānā cutaṁ, sutaṁ kho pana metaṁ— yassa rañño cakkavattissa dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ osakkati, ṭhānā cavati, na dāni tena raññā ciraṁ jīvitabbaṁ hotīti. Bhuttā kho pana me mānusakā kāmā, samayo dāni me dibbe kāme pariyesituṁ, ehi tvaṁ, tāta kumāra, imaṁ samuddapariyantaṁ pathaviṁ paṭipajja. Ahaṁ pana kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissāmī’ti.
[¶31] Seven days later the heavenly wheel-treasure vanished.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā cakkavattī jeṭṭhaputtaṁ kumāraṁ sādhukaṁ rajje samanusāsitvā kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbaji. Sattāhapabbajite kho pana, bhikkhave, rājisimhi dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ antaradhāyi.
[¶32] Then a certain man approached the newly anointed aristocrat king and said, ‘Please Your Majesty, you should know that the heavenly wheel-treasure has vanished.’ At that the king was unhappy and experienced unhappiness. But he didn’t go to the royal seer and ask about the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch. He just governed the country according to his own ideas. So governed, the country’s people did not prosper like before, as they had when former kings proceeded in the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, aññataro puriso yena rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ khattiyaṁ muddhābhisittaṁ etadavoca: ‘yagghe, deva, jāneyyāsi, dibbaṁ cakkaratanaṁ antarahitan’ti? Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto dibbe cakkaratane antarahite anattamano ahosi. Anattamanatañca paṭisaṁvedesi; no ca kho rājisiṁ upasaṅkamitvā ariyaṁ cakkavattivattaṁ pucchi. So samateneva sudaṁ janapadaṁ pasāsati. Tassa samatena janapadaṁ pasāsato pubbenāparaṁ janapadā na pabbanti, yathā taṁ pubbakānaṁ rājūnaṁ ariye cakkavattivatte vattamānānaṁ.
[¶33] Then the ministers and councillors, the treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, and professional advisers gathered and said to the king, ‘Your Majesty, when governed according to your own ideas, the country’s people do not prosper like before, as they did when former kings proceeded in the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch. In your realm are found ministers and councillors, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, and professional advisers—both ourselves and others—who remember the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch. Please, Your Majesty, ask us about the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch. We will answer you.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā mantassājīvino sannipatitvā rājānaṁ khattiyaṁ muddhābhisittaṁ etadavocuṁ: ‘na kho te, deva, samatena sudaṁ janapadaṁ pasāsato pubbenāparaṁ janapadā pabbanti, yathā taṁ pubbakānaṁ rājūnaṁ ariye cakkavattivatte vattamānānaṁ. Saṁvijjanti kho te, deva, vijite amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā mantassājīvino mayañceva aññe ca ye mayaṁ ariyaṁ cakkavattivattaṁ dhārema. Iṅgha tvaṁ, deva, amhe ariyaṁ cakkavattivattaṁ puccha. Tassa te mayaṁ ariyaṁ cakkavattivattaṁ puṭṭhā byākarissāmā’ti.
[¶34] 4. On the Period of Decline
> Pali: 4. Āyuvaṇṇādiparihānikathā
[¶35] So the anointed king asked the assembled ministers and councillors, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, and professional advisers about the noble duty of a wheel-turning monarch. And they answered him. After listening to them, he provided just protection and security. But he did not provide money to the penniless in the realm. And so poverty grew widespread.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto amacce pārisajje gaṇakamahāmatte anīkaṭṭhe dovārike mantassājīvino sannipātetvā ariyaṁ cakkavattivattaṁ pucchi. Tassa te ariyaṁ cakkavattivattaṁ puṭṭhā byākariṁsu. Tesaṁ sutvā dhammikañhi kho rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidahi, no ca kho adhanānaṁ dhanamanuppadāsi. Adhanānaṁ dhane ananuppadiyamāne dāliddiyaṁ vepullamagamāsi.
[¶36] When poverty was widespread, a certain person stole from others, with the intention to commit theft. They arrested him and presented him to the king, saying, ‘Your Majesty, this person stole from others with the intention to commit theft.’
> Pali: Dāliddiye vepullaṁ gate aññataro puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyi. Tamenaṁ aggahesuṁ. Gahetvā rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa dassesuṁ: ‘ayaṁ, deva, puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti.
[¶37] The king said to that person, ‘Is it really true, my man, that you stole from others with the intention to commit theft?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto taṁ purisaṁ etadavoca: ‘saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, ambho purisa, paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti?
[¶38] ‘It’s true, Your Majesty.’
> Pali: ‘Saccaṁ, devā’ti.
[¶39] ‘What was the reason?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ kāraṇā’ti?
[¶40] ‘Your Majesty, I can’t survive.’
> Pali: ‘Na hi, deva, jīvāmī’ti.
[¶41] So the king provided some money to that person, saying, ‘With this money, my man, keep yourself alive, and provide for your mother and father, partners and children. Work for a living, and establish an uplifting religious donation for ascetics and brahmins that’s conducive to heaven, ripens in happiness, and leads to heaven.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto tassa purisassa dhanamanuppadāsi: ‘iminā tvaṁ, ambho purisa, dhanena attanā ca jīvāhi, mātāpitaro ca posehi, puttadārañca posehi, kammante ca payojehi, samaṇabrāhmaṇesu uddhaggikaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ patiṭṭhāpehi sovaggikaṁ sukhavipākaṁ saggasaṁvattanikan’ti.
[¶42] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied that man.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, so puriso rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa paccassosi.
[¶43] But then another man stole something from others. They arrested him and presented him to the king, saying, ‘Your Majesty, this person stole from others.’
> Pali: Aññataropi kho, bhikkhave, puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyi. Tamenaṁ aggahesuṁ. Gahetvā rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa dassesuṁ: ‘ayaṁ, deva, puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti.
[¶44] The king said to that person, ‘Is it really true, my man, that you stole from others?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto taṁ purisaṁ etadavoca: ‘saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, ambho purisa, paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti?
[¶45] ‘It’s true, Your Majesty.’
> Pali: ‘Saccaṁ, devā’ti.
[¶46] ‘What was the reason?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ kāraṇā’ti?
[¶47] ‘Your Majesty, I can’t survive.’
> Pali: ‘Na hi, deva, jīvāmī’ti.
[¶48] So the king provided some money to that person, saying, ‘With this money, my man, keep yourself alive, and provide for your mother and father, partners and children. Work for a living, and establish an uplifting religious donation for ascetics and brahmins that’s conducive to heaven, ripens in happiness, and leads to heaven.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto tassa purisassa dhanamanuppadāsi: ‘iminā tvaṁ, ambho purisa, dhanena attanā ca jīvāhi, mātāpitaro ca posehi, puttadārañca posehi, kammante ca payojehi, samaṇabrāhmaṇesu uddhaggikaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ patiṭṭhāpehi sovaggikaṁ sukhavipākaṁ saggasaṁvattanikan’ti.
[¶49] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ replied that man.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, so puriso rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa paccassosi.
[¶50] People heard about this: ‘It seems the king is providing money to anyone who steals from others!’ It occurred to them, ‘Why don’t we steal from others?’ So then another man stole something from others.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho, bhikkhave, manussā: ‘ye kira, bho, paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyanti, tesaṁ rājā dhanamanuppadetī’ti. Sutvāna tesaṁ etadahosi: ‘yannūna mayampi paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyeyyāmā’ti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, aññataro puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyi.
[¶51] They arrested him and presented him to the king, saying, ‘Your Majesty, this person stole from others.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ aggahesuṁ. Gahetvā rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa dassesuṁ: ‘ayaṁ, deva, puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti.
[¶52] The king said to that person, ‘Is it really true, my man, that you stole from others?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto taṁ purisaṁ etadavoca: ‘saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, ambho purisa, paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti?
[¶53] ‘It’s true, Your Majesty.’
> Pali: ‘Saccaṁ, devā’ti.
[¶54] ‘What was the reason?’
> Pali: ‘Kiṁ kāraṇā’ti?
[¶55] ‘Your Majesty, I can’t survive.’
> Pali: ‘Na hi, deva, jīvāmī’ti.
[¶56] Then the king thought, ‘If I provide money to anyone who steals from others, it will only increase the stealing. I’d better make an end of this person, finish him off, and chop off his head.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa etadahosi: ‘sace kho ahaṁ yo yo paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyissati, tassa tassa dhanamanuppadassāmi, evamidaṁ adinnādānaṁ pavaḍḍhissati. Yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ purisaṁ sunisedhaṁ nisedheyyaṁ, mūlaghaccaṁ kareyyaṁ, sīsamassa chindeyyan’ti.
[¶57] Then he ordered his men, ‘Well then, lads, tie this man’s arms tightly behind his back with a strong rope. Shave his head and march him from street to street and square to square to the beating of a harsh drum. Then take him out the south gate and make an end of him, finish him off, and chop off his head.’
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto purise āṇāpesi: ‘tena hi, bhaṇe, imaṁ purisaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhamitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa sunisedhaṁ nisedhetha, mūlaghaccaṁ karotha, sīsamassa chindathā’ti.
[¶58] ‘Yes, Your Majesty,’ they replied, and did as he commanded.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, devā’ti kho, bhikkhave, te purisā rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhamitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa sunisedhaṁ nisedhesuṁ, mūlaghaccaṁ akaṁsu, sīsamassa chindiṁsu.
[¶59] People heard about this: ‘It seems the king is chopping the head off anyone who steals from others!’ It occurred to them, ‘We’d better have sharp swords made. Then when we steal from others, we’ll make an end of them, finish them off, and chop off their heads.’ They had sharp swords made. Then they started to attack villages, towns, and cities, and to infest the highways. And they chopped the heads off anyone they stole from.
> Pali: Assosuṁ kho, bhikkhave, manussā: ‘ye kira, bho, paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyanti, te rājā sunisedhaṁ nisedheti, mūlaghaccaṁ karoti, sīsāni tesaṁ chindatī’ti. Sutvāna tesaṁ etadahosi: ‘yannūna mayampi tiṇhāni satthāni kārāpessāma, tiṇhāni satthāni kārāpetvā yesaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyissāma, te sunisedhaṁ nisedhessāma, mūlaghaccaṁ karissāma, sīsāni tesaṁ chindissāmā’ti. Te tiṇhāni satthāni kārāpesuṁ, tiṇhāni satthāni kārāpetvā gāmaghātampi upakkamiṁsu kātuṁ, nigamaghātampi upakkamiṁsu kātuṁ, nagaraghātampi upakkamiṁsu kātuṁ, panthaduhanampi upakkamiṁsu kātuṁ. Yesaṁ te adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyanti, te sunisedhaṁ nisedhenti, mūlaghaccaṁ karonti, sīsāni tesaṁ chindanti.
[¶60] And so, mendicants, from not providing money to the penniless, poverty became widespread. When poverty was widespread, theft became widespread. When theft was widespread, swords became widespread. When swords were widespread, killing living creatures became widespread. And for the sentient beings among whom killing was widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people lived for 80,000 years, but their children lived for 40,000 years.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, adhanānaṁ dhane ananuppadiyamāne dāliddiyaṁ vepullamagamāsi, dāliddiye vepullaṁ gate adinnādānaṁ vepullamagamāsi, adinnādāne vepullaṁ gate satthaṁ vepullamagamāsi, satthe vepullaṁ gate pāṇātipāto vepullamagamāsi, pāṇātipāte vepullaṁ gate tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ asītivassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ cattārīsavassasahassāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶61] Among the humans who lived for 40,000 years, a certain person stole something from others. They arrested him and presented him to the king, saying, ‘Your Majesty, this person stole from others.’
> Pali: Cattārīsavassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu aññataro puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyi. Tamenaṁ aggahesuṁ. Gahetvā rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa dassesuṁ: ‘ayaṁ, deva, puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti.
## 53. DN 26 · The Wheel-Turning Monarch · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/53/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/53/#p-N
[¶0] The king said to that person, ‘Is it really true, my man, that you stole from others?’
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, bhikkhave, rājā khattiyo muddhābhisitto taṁ purisaṁ etadavoca: ‘saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, ambho purisa, paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti?
[¶1] ‘No, Your Majesty,’ he said, deliberately lying.
> Pali: ‘Na hi, devā’ti sampajānamusā abhāsi.
[¶2] And so, mendicants, from not providing money to the penniless, poverty, theft, swords, and killing became widespread. When killing was widespread, lying became widespread. And for the sentient beings among whom lying was widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for 40,000 years had children who lived for 20,000 years.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, adhanānaṁ dhane ananuppadiyamāne dāliddiyaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Dāliddiye vepullaṁ gate adinnādānaṁ vepullamagamāsi, adinnādāne vepullaṁ gate satthaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Satthe vepullaṁ gate pāṇātipāto vepullamagamāsi, pāṇātipāte vepullaṁ gate musāvādo vepullamagamāsi, musāvāde vepullaṁ gate tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ cattārīsavassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ vīsativassasahassāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶3] Among the humans who lived for 20,000 years, a certain person stole something from others. Someone else reported this to the king, ‘Your Majesty, the person named so-and-so stole from others,’ he said, going behind his back.
> Pali: Vīsativassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu aññataro puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyi. Tamenaṁ aññataro puriso rañño khattiyassa muddhābhisittassa ārocesi: ‘itthannāmo, deva, puriso paresaṁ adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyī’ti pesuññamakāsi.
[¶4] And so, mendicants, from not providing money to the penniless, poverty, theft, swords, killing, and lying became widespread. When lying was widespread, backbiting became widespread. And for the sentient beings among whom backbiting was widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for 20,000 years had children who lived for 10,000 years.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, adhanānaṁ dhane ananuppadiyamāne dāliddiyaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Dāliddiye vepullaṁ gate adinnādānaṁ vepullamagamāsi, adinnādāne vepullaṁ gate satthaṁ vepullamagamāsi, satthe vepullaṁ gate pāṇātipāto vepullamagamāsi, pāṇātipāte vepullaṁ gate musāvādo vepullamagamāsi, musāvāde vepullaṁ gate pisuṇā vācā vepullamagamāsi, pisuṇāya vācāya vepullaṁ gatāya tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ vīsativassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ dasavassasahassāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶5] Among the humans who lived for 10,000 years, some were beautiful, some were ugly. And the ugly beings, coveting the beautiful ones, had relations with the wives of others.
> Pali: Dasavassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ekidaṁ sattā vaṇṇavanto honti, ekidaṁ sattā dubbaṇṇā. Tattha ye te sattā dubbaṇṇā, te vaṇṇavante satte abhijjhāyantā paresaṁ dāresu cārittaṁ āpajjiṁsu.
[¶6] And so, mendicants, from not providing money to the penniless, poverty, theft, swords, killing, lying, and backbiting became widespread. When backbiting was widespread, sexual misconduct became widespread. And for the sentient beings among whom sexual misconduct was widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for 10,000 years had children who lived for 5,000 years.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, adhanānaṁ dhane ananuppadiyamāne dāliddiyaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Dāliddiye vepullaṁ gate …pe… kāmesumicchācāro vepullamagamāsi, kāmesumicchācāre vepullaṁ gate tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ dasavassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ pañcavassasahassāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶7] Among the humans who lived for 5,000 years, two things became widespread: harsh speech and talking nonsense. For the sentient beings among whom these two things were widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for 5,000 years had some children who lived for 2,500 years, while others lived for 2,000 years.
> Pali: Pañcavassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu dve dhammā vepullamagamaṁsu— pharusāvācā samphappalāpo ca. Dvīsu dhammesu vepullaṁ gatesu tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ pañcavassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ appekacce aḍḍhateyyavassasahassāyukā, appekacce dvevassasahassāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶8] Among the humans who lived for 2,500 years, desire and ill will became widespread. For the sentient beings among whom desire and ill will were widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for 2,500 years had children who lived for 1,000 years.
> Pali: Aḍḍhateyyavassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu abhijjhābyāpādā vepullamagamaṁsu. Abhijjhābyāpādesu vepullaṁ gatesu tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ aḍḍhateyyavassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ vassasahassāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶9] Among the humans who lived for 1,000 years, wrong view became widespread. For the sentient beings among whom wrong view was widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for 1,000 years had children who lived for five hundred years.
> Pali: Vassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu micchādiṭṭhi vepullamagamāsi. Micchādiṭṭhiyā vepullaṁ gatāya tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ vassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ pañcavassasatāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶10] Among the humans who lived for five hundred years, three things became widespread: illicit desire, immoral greed, and wrong religious teachings. For the sentient beings among whom these three things were widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for five hundred years had some children who lived for two hundred and fifty years, while others lived for two hundred years.
> Pali: Pañcavassasatāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu tayo dhammā vepullamagamaṁsu— adhammarāgo visamalobho micchādhammo. Tīsu dhammesu vepullaṁ gatesu tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ pañcavassasatāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ appekacce aḍḍhateyyavassasatāyukā, appekacce dvevassasatāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶11] Among the humans who lived for two hundred and fifty years, these things became widespread: lack of due respect for mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, and failure to honor the elders in the family.
> Pali: Aḍḍhateyyavassasatāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ime dhammā vepullamagamaṁsu. Amatteyyatā apetteyyatā asāmaññatā abrahmaññatā na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyitā.
[¶12] And so, mendicants, from not providing money to the penniless, all these things became widespread—poverty, theft, swords, killing, lying, backbiting, sexual misconduct, harsh speech and talking nonsense, desire and ill will, wrong view, illicit desire, immoral greed, and wrong religious teachings, and lack of due respect for mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, and failure to honor the elders in the family. For the sentient beings among whom these things were widespread, their lifespan and beauty declined. Those people who lived for two hundred and fifty years had children who lived for a hundred years.
> Pali: Iti kho, bhikkhave, adhanānaṁ dhane ananuppadiyamāne dāliddiyaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Dāliddiye vepullaṁ gate adinnādānaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Adinnādāne vepullaṁ gate satthaṁ vepullamagamāsi. Satthe vepullaṁ gate pāṇātipāto vepullamagamāsi. Pāṇātipāte vepullaṁ gate musāvādo vepullamagamāsi. Musāvāde vepullaṁ gate pisuṇā vācā vepullamagamāsi. Pisuṇāya vācāya vepullaṁ gatāya kāmesumicchācāro vepullamagamāsi. Kāmesumicchācāre vepullaṁ gate dve dhammā vepullamagamaṁsu, pharusā vācā samphappalāpo ca. Dvīsu dhammesu vepullaṁ gatesu abhijjhābyāpādā vepullamagamaṁsu. Abhijjhābyāpādesu vepullaṁ gatesu micchādiṭṭhi vepullamagamāsi. Micchādiṭṭhiyā vepullaṁ gatāya tayo dhammā vepullamagamaṁsu, adhammarāgo visamalobho micchādhammo. Tīsu dhammesu vepullaṁ gatesu ime dhammā vepullamagamaṁsu, amatteyyatā apetteyyatā asāmaññatā abrahmaññatā na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyitā. Imesu dhammesu vepullaṁ gatesu tesaṁ sattānaṁ āyupi parihāyi, vaṇṇopi parihāyi. Tesaṁ āyunāpi parihāyamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi parihāyamānānaṁ aḍḍhateyyavassasatāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ vassasatāyukā puttā ahesuṁ.
[¶13] 5. When People Live for Ten Years
> Pali: 5. Dasavassāyukasamaya
[¶14] There will come a time, mendicants, when these people will have children who live for ten years. Among the humans who live for ten years, girls will be marriageable at five. The following flavors will disappear: ghee, butter, oil, honey, molasses, and salt. The best kind of food will be finger millet, just as fine rice with meat is the best kind of food today.
> Pali: Bhavissati, bhikkhave, so samayo, yaṁ imesaṁ manussānaṁ dasavassāyukā puttā bhavissanti. Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu pañcavassikā kumārikā alaṁpateyyā bhavissanti. Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu imāni rasāni antaradhāyissanti, seyyathidaṁ— sappi navanītaṁ telaṁ madhu phāṇitaṁ loṇaṁ. Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu kudrūsako aggaṁ bhojanānaṁ bhavissati. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, etarahi sālimaṁsodano aggaṁ bhojanānaṁ; evameva kho, bhikkhave, dasavassāyukesu manussesu kudrūsako aggaṁ bhojanānaṁ bhavissati.
[¶15] The ten ways of doing skillful deeds will totally disappear, and the ten ways of doing unskillful deeds will explode in popularity. Those humans will not even have the word ‘skillful’, still less anyone who does what is skillful. And anyone who disrespects mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, and fails to honor the elders in the family will be venerated and praised, just as the opposite is venerated and praised today.
> Pali: Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu dasa kusalakammapathā sabbena sabbaṁ antaradhāyissanti, dasa akusalakammapathā atibyādippissanti. Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu kusalantipi na bhavissati, kuto pana kusalassa kārako. Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ye te bhavissanti amatteyyā apetteyyā asāmaññā abrahmaññā na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino, te pujjā ca bhavissanti pāsaṁsā ca. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, etarahi matteyyā petteyyā sāmaññā brahmaññā kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino pujjā ca pāsaṁsā ca; evameva kho, bhikkhave, dasavassāyukesu manussesu ye te bhavissanti amatteyyā apetteyyā asāmaññā abrahmaññā na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino, te pujjā ca bhavissanti pāsaṁsā ca.
[¶16] There’ll be no recognition of the status of mother, aunts, or wives and partners of tutors and respected people. The world will become dissolute, like goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and hounds and jackals.
> Pali: Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu na bhavissati mātāti vā mātucchāti vā mātulānīti vā ācariyabhariyāti vā garūnaṁ dārāti vā. Sambhedaṁ loko gamissati yathā ajeḷakā kukkuṭasūkarā soṇasiṅgālā.
[¶17] They’ll be full of hostility toward each other, with acute ill will, malevolence, and thoughts of murder. Even a mother will feel like this for her child, and the child for its mother, father for child, child for father, brother for sister, and sister for brother. They’ll be just like a deer hunter when he sees a deer—full of hostility, ill will, malevolence, and thoughts of killing.
> Pali: Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu tesaṁ sattānaṁ aññamaññamhi tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito bhavissati tibbo byāpādo tibbo manopadoso tibbaṁ vadhakacittaṁ. Mātupi puttamhi puttassapi mātari; pitupi puttamhi puttassapi pitari; bhātupi bhaginiyā bhaginiyāpi bhātari tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito bhavissati tibbo byāpādo tibbo manopadoso tibbaṁ vadhakacittaṁ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, māgavikassa migaṁ disvā tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito hoti tibbo byāpādo tibbo manopadoso tibbaṁ vadhakacittaṁ; evameva kho, bhikkhave, dasavassāyukesu manussesu tesaṁ sattānaṁ aññamaññamhi tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito bhavissati tibbo byāpādo tibbo manopadoso tibbaṁ vadhakacittaṁ. Mātupi puttamhi puttassapi mātari; pitupi puttamhi puttassapi pitari; bhātupi bhaginiyā bhaginiyāpi bhātari tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito bhavissati tibbo byāpādo tibbo manopadoso tibbaṁ vadhakacittaṁ.
[¶18] Among the humans who live for ten years, there will be an interregnum of swords lasting seven days. During that time they will see each other as beasts. Sharp swords will appear in their hands, with which they’ll take each other’s life, crying, ‘It’s a beast! It’s a beast!’
> Pali: Dasavassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu sattāhaṁ satthantarakappo bhavissati. Te aññamaññamhi migasaññaṁ paṭilabhissanti. Tesaṁ tiṇhāni satthāni hatthesu pātubhavissanti. Te tiṇhena satthena ‘esa migo esa migo’ti aññamaññaṁ jīvitā voropessanti.
[¶19] But then some of those beings will think, ‘Let us neither kill nor be killed! Why don’t we hide in thick grass, thick jungle, thick trees, inaccessible riverlands, or rugged mountains and survive on forest roots and fruits?’ So that’s what they do.
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ ekaccānaṁ evaṁ bhavissati: ‘mā ca mayaṁ kañci, mā ca amhe koci, yannūna mayaṁ tiṇagahanaṁ vā vanagahanaṁ vā rukkhagahanaṁ vā nadīviduggaṁ vā pabbatavisamaṁ vā pavisitvā vanamūlaphalāhārā yāpeyyāmā’ti. Te tiṇagahanaṁ vā vanagahanaṁ vā rukkhagahanaṁ vā nadīviduggaṁ vā pabbatavisamaṁ vā pavisitvā sattāhaṁ vanamūlaphalāhārā yāpessanti.
[¶20] When those seven days have passed, having emerged from their hiding places and embraced each other, they will come together and cry in one voice, ‘Fantastic, dear foe, you live! Fantastic, dear foe, you live!’
> Pali: Te tassa sattāhassa accayena tiṇagahanā vanagahanā rukkhagahanā nadīviduggā pabbatavisamā nikkhamitvā aññamaññaṁ āliṅgitvā sabhāgāyissanti samassāsissanti: ‘diṭṭhā, bho, sattā jīvasi, diṭṭhā, bho, sattā jīvasī’ti.
[¶21] 6. The Period of Growth
> Pali: 6. Āyuvaṇṇādivaḍḍhanakathā
[¶22] Then those beings will think, ‘It’s because we undertook unskillful things that we suffered such an extensive loss of our relatives. We’d better do what’s skillful. What skillful thing should we do? Why don’t we refrain from killing living creatures? Having undertaken this skillful thing we’ll live by it.’ So that’s what they do. Because of undertaking this skillful thing, their lifespan and beauty will grow. Those people who live for ten years will have children who live for twenty years.
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ bhavissati: ‘mayaṁ kho akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samādānahetu evarūpaṁ āyataṁ ñātikkhayaṁ pattā. Yannūna mayaṁ kusalaṁ kareyyāma. Kiṁ kusalaṁ kareyyāma? Yannūna mayaṁ pāṇātipātā virameyyāma, idaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ samādāya vatteyyāmā’ti. Te pāṇātipātā viramissanti, idaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ samādāya vattissanti. Te kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samādānahetu āyunāpi vaḍḍhissanti, vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhissanti. Tesaṁ āyunāpi vaḍḍhamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhamānānaṁ dasavassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ vīsativassāyukā puttā bhavissanti.
[¶23] Then those beings will think, ‘Because of undertaking this skillful thing, our lifespan and beauty are growing. Why don’t we do even more skillful things? What skillful thing should we do? Why don’t we refrain from stealing … sexual misconduct … lying … backbiting … harsh speech … and talking nonsense. Why don’t we give up covetousness … ill will … wrong view … three things: illicit desire, immoral greed, and wrong religious teachings. Why don’t we pay due respect to mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, honoring the elders in our families? Having undertaken this skillful thing we’ll live by it.’ So that’s what they do.
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ, bhikkhave, sattānaṁ evaṁ bhavissati: ‘mayaṁ kho kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samādānahetu āyunāpi vaḍḍhāma, vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhāma. Yannūna mayaṁ bhiyyoso mattāya kusalaṁ kareyyāma. Kiṁ kusalaṁ kareyyāma? Yannūna mayaṁ adinnādānā virameyyāma … kāmesumicchācārā virameyyāma … musāvādā virameyyāma … pisuṇāya vācāya virameyyāma … pharusāya vācāya virameyyāma … samphappalāpā virameyyāma … abhijjhaṁ pajaheyyāma … byāpādaṁ pajaheyyāma … micchādiṭṭhiṁ pajaheyyāma … tayo dhamme pajaheyyāma— adhammarāgaṁ visamalobhaṁ micchādhammaṁ … yannūna mayaṁ matteyyā assāma petteyyā sāmaññā brahmaññā kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino, idaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ samādāya vatteyyāmā’ti. Te matteyyā bhavissanti petteyyā sāmaññā brahmaññā kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino, idaṁ kusalaṁ dhammaṁ samādāya vattissanti.
[¶24] Because of undertaking this skillful thing, their lifespan and beauty will grow. Those people who live for twenty years will have children who live for forty years. Those people who live for forty years will have children who live for eighty years, then a hundred and sixty years, three hundred and twenty years, six hundred and forty years, 2,000 years, 4,000 years, 8,000 years, 20,000 years, 40,000 years, and finally 80,000 years. Among the humans who live for 80,000 years, girls will be marriageable at five hundred.
> Pali: Te kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ samādānahetu āyunāpi vaḍḍhissanti, vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhissanti. Tesaṁ āyunāpi vaḍḍhamānānaṁ vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhamānānaṁ vīsativassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ cattārīsavassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … cattārīsavassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ asītivassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … asītivassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ saṭṭhivassasatāyukā puttā bhavissanti … saṭṭhivassasatāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ vīsatitivassasatāyukā puttā bhavissanti … vīsatitivassasatāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ cattārīsachabbassasatāyukā puttā bhavissanti. Cattārīsachabbassasatāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ dvevassasahassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … dvevassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ cattārivassasahassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … cattārivassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ aṭṭhavassasahassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … aṭṭhavassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ vīsativassasahassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … vīsativassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ cattārīsavassasahassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … cattārīsavassasahassāyukānaṁ manussānaṁ asītivassasahassāyukā puttā bhavissanti … asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu pañcavassasatikā kumārikā alaṁpateyyā bhavissanti.
[¶25] 7. The Time of King Saṅkha
> Pali: 7. Saṅkharājauppatti
[¶26] Among the humans who live for 80,000 years, there will be just three afflictions: greed, starvation, and old age. The Black Plum Tree Land will be successful and prosperous. The villages, towns, and capital cities will be no more than a chicken’s flight apart. And the land will be so full of humans you’d think they were squashed together, like a thicket of rushes or reeds. The royal capital will be Varanasi, renamed Ketumatī. And it will be successful and prosperous, populous and full of people, with plenty of food. There will be 84,000 cities in the Black Plum Tree Land, with the royal capital of Ketumatī foremost.
> Pali: Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu tayo ābādhā bhavissanti, icchā, anasanaṁ, jarā. Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ayaṁ jambudīpo iddho ceva bhavissati phīto ca, kukkuṭasampātikā gāmanigamarājadhāniyo. Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ayaṁ jambudīpo avīci maññe phuṭo bhavissati manussehi, seyyathāpi naḷavanaṁ vā saravanaṁ vā. Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ayaṁ bārāṇasī ketumatī nāma rājadhānī bhavissati iddhā ceva phītā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca. Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu imasmiṁ jambudīpe caturāsītinagarasahassāni bhavissanti ketumatīrājadhānīpamukhāni.
[¶27] And in the royal capital of Ketumatī a king named Saṅkha will arise, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion will extend to all four sides, he will achieve stability in the country, and possess the seven treasures. He will have the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He will have over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he will reign by principle, without rod or sword.
> Pali: Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu ketumatiyā rājadhāniyā saṅkho nāma rājā uppajjissati cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavissanti, seyyathidaṁ— cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavissanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasissati.
[¶28] 8. The Arising of the Buddha Metteyya
> Pali: 8. Metteyyabuddhuppāda
[¶29] And the Blessed One named Metteyya will arise in the world—perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed— just as I have arisen today. He will realize with his own insight this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—and make it known to others, just as I do today. He will teach the Dhamma that’s good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased. And he will reveal a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure, just as I do today. He will lead a Saṅgha of many thousand mendicants, just as I lead a Saṅgha of many hundreds today.
> Pali: Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesu metteyyo nāma bhagavā loke uppajjissati arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. Seyyathāpāhametarahi loke uppanno arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā. So imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedessati, seyyathāpāhametarahi imaṁ lokaṁ sadevakaṁ samārakaṁ sabrahmakaṁ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṁ pajaṁ sadevamanussaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedemi. So dhammaṁ desessati ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsessati; seyyathāpāhametarahi dhammaṁ desemi ādikalyāṇaṁ majjhekalyāṇaṁ pariyosānakalyāṇaṁ sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ pakāsemi. So anekasahassaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharissati, seyyathāpāhametarahi anekasataṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ pariharāmi.
[¶30] Then King Saṅkha will have the sacrificial post once built by King Mahāpanāda raised up. Having reigned, he will abdicate, offering charity to ascetics and brahmins, paupers, vagrants, supplicants, and beggars. Then, having shaved off his hair and beard and dressed in ocher robes, he will go forth from the lay life to homelessness in the Buddha Metteyya’s presence. Soon after going forth, living withdrawn, diligent, keen, and resolute, he will realize the supreme culmination of the spiritual path in this very life. He will live having achieved with his own insight the goal for which gentlemen rightly go forth from the lay life to homelessness.
> Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, saṅkho nāma rājā yo so yūpo raññā mahāpanādena kārāpito. Taṁ yūpaṁ ussāpetvā ajjhāvasitvā taṁ datvā vissajjitvā samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ dānaṁ datvā metteyyassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa santike kesamassuṁ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajissati. So evaṁ pabbajito samāno eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto nacirasseva—yassatthāya kulaputtā sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajanti, tadanuttaraṁ—brahmacariyapariyosānaṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati.
[¶31] Mendicants, live as your own island, your own refuge, with no other refuge. Let the teaching be your island and your refuge, with no other refuge. And how does a mendicant do this? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. That’s how a mendicant lives with themselves as island and refuge, without other refuge; with the teachings as island and refuge, without other refuge.
> Pali: Attadīpā, bhikkhave, viharatha attasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā, dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā. Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe… citte cittānupassī …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu attadīpo viharati attasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo dhammadīpo dhammasaraṇo anaññasaraṇo.
[¶32] 9. On Long Life and Beauty for Mendicants
> Pali: 9. Bhikkhunoāyuvaṇṇādivaḍḍhanakathā
[¶33] Mendicants, you should roam inside your own territory, the domain of your fathers. Doing so, you will grow in lifespan, beauty, happiness, wealth, and power.
> Pali: Gocare, bhikkhave, caratha sake pettike visaye. Gocare, bhikkhave, carantā sake pettike visaye āyunāpi vaḍḍhissatha, vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhissatha, sukhenapi vaḍḍhissatha, bhogenapi vaḍḍhissatha, balenapi vaḍḍhissatha.
[¶34] And what is long life for a mendicant? It’s when a mendicant develops the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to enthusiasm, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to energy, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to mental development, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to inquiry, and active effort. Having developed and cultivated these four bases of psychic power they may, if they wish, live for the proper lifespan or what’s left of it. This is long life for a mendicant.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno āyusmiṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, cittasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti, vīmaṁsāsamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. So imesaṁ catunnaṁ iddhipādānaṁ bhāvitattā bahulīkatattā ākaṅkhamāno kappaṁ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṁ vā. Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno āyusmiṁ.
[¶35] And what is beauty for a mendicant? It’s when a mendicant is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. This is beauty for a mendicant.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vaṇṇasmiṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno vaṇṇasmiṁ.
[¶36] And what is happiness for a mendicant? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. This is happiness for a mendicant.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno sukhasmiṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ … tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ … catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno, sukhasmiṁ.
[¶37] And what is wealth for a mendicant? It’s when a monk meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion … rejoicing … equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. This is wealth for a mendicant.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhogasmiṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati. Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno bhogasmiṁ.
[¶38] And what is power for a mendicant? It’s when a mendicant realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. This is power for a mendicant.
> Pali: Kiñca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno balasmiṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno balasmiṁ.
[¶39] Mendicants, I do not see a single power so hard to defeat as the power of Māra. It is due to undertaking skillful qualities that merit grows.”
> Pali: Nāhaṁ, bhikkhave, aññaṁ ekabalampi samanupassāmi yaṁ evaṁ duppasahaṁ, yathayidaṁ, bhikkhave, mārabalaṁ. Kusalānaṁ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṁ samādānahetu evamidaṁ puññaṁ pavaḍḍhatī”ti.
[¶40] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶41] > Pali: Cakkavattisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ tatiyaṁ.
## 54. DN 27 · What Came First · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/54/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/54/#p-N
[¶0] DN 27 · What Came First
> Pali: DN 27 · Aggaññasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in the stilt longhouse of Migāra’s mother in the Eastern Monastery.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde.
[¶2] Now at that time Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja were living on probation among the mendicants in hopes of being ordained. Then in the late afternoon, the Buddha came downstairs from the longhouse and was walking mindfully in the open air, beneath the shade of the longhouse.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā bhikkhūsu parivasanti bhikkhubhāvaṁ ākaṅkhamānā. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito pāsādā orohitvā pāsādapacchāyāyaṁ abbhokāse caṅkamati.
[¶3] Vāseṭṭha saw him and said to Bhāradvāja, “Reverend Bhāradvāja, the Buddha is walking mindfully in the open air, beneath the shade of the longhouse. Come, reverend, let’s go to the Buddha. Hopefully we’ll get to hear a Dhamma talk from him.”
> Pali: Addasā kho vāseṭṭho bhagavantaṁ sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitaṁ pāsādā orohitvā pāsādapacchāyāyaṁ abbhokāse caṅkamantaṁ. Disvāna bhāradvājaṁ āmantesi: “ayaṁ, āvuso bhāradvāja, bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito pāsādā orohitvā pāsādapacchāyāyaṁ abbhokāse caṅkamati. Āyāmāvuso bhāradvāja, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamissāma; appeva nāma labheyyāma bhagavato santikā dhammiṁ kathaṁ savanāyā”ti.
[¶4] “Yes, reverend,” replied Bhāradvāja.
> Pali: “Evamāvuso”ti kho bhāradvājo vāseṭṭhassa paccassosi.
[¶5] So they went to the Buddha, bowed, and walked beside him.
> Pali: Atha kho vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā bhagavantaṁ caṅkamantaṁ anucaṅkamiṁsu.
[¶6] Then the Buddha said to Vāseṭṭha, “Vāseṭṭha, you are both brahmins by birth and family, and have gone forth from the lay life to homelessness from a brahmin family. I hope you don’t have to suffer abuse and insults from the brahmins.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā vāseṭṭhaṁ āmantesi: “tumhe khvattha, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇajaccā brāhmaṇakulīnā brāhmaṇakulā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā, kacci vo, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇā na akkosanti na paribhāsantī”ti?
[¶7] “Actually, sir, the brahmins do insult and abuse us with their typical insults to the fullest extent, holding nothing back.”
> Pali: “Taggha no, bhante, brāhmaṇā akkosanti paribhāsanti attarūpāya paribhāsāya paripuṇṇāya, no aparipuṇṇāyā”ti.
[¶8] “But how do the brahmins insult you?”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana vo, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇā akkosanti paribhāsanti attarūpāya paribhāsāya paripuṇṇāya, no aparipuṇṇāyā”ti?
[¶9] “Sir, the brahmins say: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity. You’ve both abandoned the best class to join an inferior class, namely these shavelings, fake ascetics, primitives, black spawn from the feet of our kinsman. This is not right, it’s not proper!’ That’s how the brahmins insult us.”
> Pali: “Brāhmaṇā, bhante, evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīnā aññe vaṇṇā. Brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇhā aññe vaṇṇā. Brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā. Brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā. Te tumhe seṭṭhaṁ vaṇṇaṁ hitvā hīnamattha vaṇṇaṁ ajjhupagatā, yadidaṁ muṇḍake samaṇake ibbhe kaṇhe bandhupādāpacce. Tayidaṁ na sādhu, tayidaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yaṁ tumhe seṭṭhaṁ vaṇṇaṁ hitvā hīnamattha vaṇṇaṁ ajjhupagatā yadidaṁ muṇḍake samaṇake ibbhe kaṇhe bandhupādāpacce’ti. Evaṁ kho no, bhante, brāhmaṇā akkosanti paribhāsanti attarūpāya paribhāsāya paripuṇṇāya, no aparipuṇṇāyā”ti.
[¶10] “Actually, Vāseṭṭha, the brahmins are forgetting their tradition when they say this to you. For brahmin women are seen menstruating, being pregnant, giving birth, and breast-feeding. Yet even though they’re born from a brahmin womb they say: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’ They misrepresent the brahmins, speak falsely, and brim with much wickedness.
> Pali: “Taggha vo, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ assarantā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīnā aññe vaṇṇā; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇhā aññe vaṇṇā; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti. Dissanti kho pana, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇānaṁ brāhmaṇiyo utuniyopi gabbhiniyopi vijāyamānāpi pāyamānāpi. Te ca brāhmaṇā yonijāva samānā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīnā aññe vaṇṇā; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇhā aññe vaṇṇā; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti. Te brahmānañceva abbhācikkhanti, musā ca bhāsanti, bahuñca apuññaṁ pasavanti.
[¶11] 1. Purification in the Four Classes
> Pali: 1. Catuvaṇṇasuddhi
[¶12] Vāseṭṭha, there are these four classes: aristocrats, brahmins, peasants, and menials. Some aristocrats kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, and nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, with wrong view. These things are unskillful, blameworthy, not to be cultivated, unworthy of the noble ones—and are reckoned as such. They are dark deeds with dark results, criticized by sensible people. Such things are exhibited in some aristocrats. And they are also seen among some brahmins, peasants, and menials.
> Pali: Cattārome, vāseṭṭha, vaṇṇā— khattiyā, brāhmaṇā, vessā, suddā. Khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭha, idhekacco pāṇātipātī hoti adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhī. Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, yeme dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā sāvajjā sāvajjasaṅkhātā asevitabbā asevitabbasaṅkhātā naalamariyā naalamariyasaṅkhātā kaṇhā kaṇhavipākā viññugarahitā, khattiyepi te idhekacce sandissanti. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha, idhekacco pāṇātipātī hoti adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavāco pharusavāco samphappalāpī abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhī. Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, yeme dhammā akusalā akusalasaṅkhātā …pe… kaṇhā kaṇhavipākā viññugarahitā; suddepi te idhekacce sandissanti.
[¶13] But some aristocrats refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. They refrain from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, and nonsensical. And they’re content, kind-hearted, with right view. These things are skillful, blameless, to be cultivated, worthy of the noble ones—and are reckoned as such. They are bright deeds with bright results, praised by sensible people. Such things are exhibited in some aristocrats. And they are also seen among some brahmins, peasants, and menials.
> Pali: Khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭha, idhekacco pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato, musāvādā paṭivirato, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato, samphappalāpā paṭivirato, anabhijjhālu abyāpannacitto, sammādiṭṭhī. Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, yeme dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā anavajjā anavajjasaṅkhātā sevitabbā sevitabbasaṅkhātā alamariyā alamariyasaṅkhātā sukkā sukkavipākā viññuppasatthā, khattiyepi te idhekacce sandissanti. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha, idhekacco pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti …pe… anabhijjhālu, abyāpannacitto, sammādiṭṭhī. Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, yeme dhammā kusalā kusalasaṅkhātā anavajjā anavajjasaṅkhātā sevitabbā sevitabbasaṅkhātā alamariyā alamariyasaṅkhātā sukkā sukkavipākā viññuppasatthā; suddepi te idhekacce sandissanti.
[¶14] Both these things occur like this, mixed up in these four classes—the dark and the bright, that which is praised and that which is criticized by sensible people. Yet of this the brahmins say: ‘Only brahmins are the best class; other classes are inferior. Only brahmins are the light class; other classes are dark. Only brahmins are purified, not others. Only brahmins are the Divinity’s bosom sons, born from his mouth, born of the Divinity, created by the Divinity, heirs of the Divinity.’
> Pali: Imesu kho, vāseṭṭha, catūsu vaṇṇesu evaṁ ubhayavokiṇṇesu vattamānesu kaṇhasukkesu dhammesu viññugarahitesu ceva viññuppasatthesu ca yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṁsu: ‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīnā aññe vaṇṇā; brāhmaṇova sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇhā aññe vaṇṇā; brāhmaṇāva sujjhanti, no abrāhmaṇā; brāhmaṇāva brahmuno puttā orasā mukhato jātā brahmajā brahmanimmitā brahmadāyādā’ti.
[¶15] Sensible people don’t grant this. Why is that? Because any mendicant from these four classes who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—is said to be foremost by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Taṁ tesaṁ viññū nānujānanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Imesañhi, vāseṭṭha, catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ yo hoti bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, so nesaṁ aggamakkhāyati dhammeneva, no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ, diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶16] And here’s a way to understand how this is so.
> Pali: Tadamināpetaṁ, vāseṭṭha, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā dhammova seṭṭho janetasmiṁ, diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶17] King Pasenadi of Kosala knows that the ascetic Gotama has gone forth from the neighboring clan of the Sakyans. And the Sakyans are his vassals. The Sakyans show deference to King Pasenadi by bowing down, rising up, greeting him with cupped palms, and observing proper etiquette for him. Now, King Pasenadi shows the same kind of deference to the Realized One. But he doesn’t think: ‘The ascetic Gotama is well-born, I am ill-born. He is powerful, I am weak. He is handsome, I am ugly. He is illustrious, I am insignificant.’ Rather, in showing such deference to the Realized One he is only honoring, respecting, and venerating principle. And here’s another way to understand how principle is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Jānāti kho, vāseṭṭha, rājā pasenadi kosalo: ‘samaṇo gotamo anantarā sakyakulā pabbajito’ti. Sakyā kho pana, vāseṭṭha, rañño pasenadissa kosalassa anuyuttā bhavanti. Karonti kho, vāseṭṭha, sakyā raññe pasenadimhi kosale nipaccakāraṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ. Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, yaṁ karonti sakyā raññe pasenadimhi kosale nipaccakāraṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ, karoti taṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo tathāgate nipaccakāraṁ abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ, na naṁ ‘sujāto samaṇo gotamo, dujjātohamasmi. Balavā samaṇo gotamo, dubbalohamasmi. Pāsādiko samaṇo gotamo, dubbaṇṇohamasmi. Mahesakkho samaṇo gotamo, appesakkhohamasmī’ti. Atha kho naṁ dhammaṁyeva sakkaronto dhammaṁ garuṁ karonto dhammaṁ mānento dhammaṁ pūjento dhammaṁ apacāyamāno evaṁ rājā pasenadi kosalo tathāgate nipaccakāraṁ karoti, abhivādanaṁ paccuṭṭhānaṁ añjalikammaṁ sāmīcikammaṁ. Imināpi kho etaṁ, vāseṭṭha, pariyāyena veditabbaṁ, yathā dhammova seṭṭho janetasmiṁ, diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶18] Vāseṭṭha, you have different births, names, clans, and families, yet have gone forth from the lay life to homelessness. When they ask you what you are, you claim to be ascetics who follow the Sakyan. But only when someone has faith in the Realized One—settled, rooted, and planted deep, strong, not to be shifted by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world—is it appropriate for them to say: ‘I am the Buddha’s bosom son, born from his mouth, born of principle, created by principle, heir to principle.’ Why is that? For these are terms for the Realized One: ‘the embodiment of principle’, and ‘the embodiment of divinity’, and ‘the manifestation of principle’, and ‘the manifestation of divinity’.
> Pali: Tumhe khvattha, vāseṭṭha, nānājaccā nānānāmā nānāgottā nānākulā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitā. ‘Ke tumhe’ti—puṭṭhā samānā ‘samaṇā sakyaputtiyāmhā’ti—paṭijānātha. Yassa kho panassa, vāseṭṭha, tathāgate saddhā niviṭṭhā mūlajātā patiṭṭhitā daḷhā asaṁhāriyā samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ, tassetaṁ kallaṁ vacanāya: ‘bhagavatomhi putto oraso mukhato jāto dhammajo dhammanimmito dhammadāyādo’ti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Tathāgatassa hetaṁ, vāseṭṭha, adhivacanaṁ ‘dhammakāyo’ itipi, ‘brahmakāyo’ itipi, ‘dhammabhūto’ itipi, ‘brahmabhūto’ itipi.
[¶19] There comes a time when, Vāseṭṭha, after a very long period has passed, this cosmos contracts. As the cosmos contracts, sentient beings are mostly headed for the realm of sublime luminosity. There they are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, vāseṭṭha, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena ayaṁ loko saṁvaṭṭati. Saṁvaṭṭamāne loke yebhuyyena sattā ābhassarasaṁvattanikā honti. Te tattha honti manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti.
[¶20] There comes a time when, after a very long period has passed, this cosmos expands. As the cosmos expands, sentient beings mostly pass away from that host of luminous deities and come back to this realm. Here they are mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and they remain like that for a very long time.
> Pali: Hoti kho so, vāseṭṭha, samayo yaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena ayaṁ loko vivaṭṭati. Vivaṭṭamāne loke yebhuyyena sattā ābhassarakāyā cavitvā itthattaṁ āgacchanti. Tedha honti manomayā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti.
[¶21] 2. The Earth’s Nectar Appears
> Pali: 2. Rasapathavipātubhāva
[¶22] But the single mass of water at that time was utterly dark. The moon and sun were not found, nor were stars and constellations, day and night, months and fortnights, years and seasons, or male and female. Beings were simply known as ‘beings’. After a very long period had passed, the earth’s nectar curdled in the water. It appeared just like the curd on top of hot milk-rice as it cools. It was beautiful, fragrant, and delicious, like ghee or butter. And it was as sweet as pure dwarf-bee honey. Now, one of those beings was reckless. Thinking, ‘Oh my, what might this be?’ they tasted the earth’s nectar with their finger. They enjoyed it, and craving was born in them. And other beings, following that being’s example, tasted the earth’s nectar with their fingers. They too enjoyed it, and craving was born in them.
> Pali: Ekodakībhūtaṁ kho pana, vāseṭṭha, tena samayena hoti andhakāro andhakāratimisā. Na candimasūriyā paññāyanti, na nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni paññāyanti, na rattindivā paññāyanti, na māsaḍḍhamāsā paññāyanti, na utusaṁvaccharā paññāyanti, na itthipumā paññāyanti, sattā sattātveva saṅkhyaṁ gacchanti. Atha kho tesaṁ, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena rasapathavī udakasmiṁ samatani; seyyathāpi nāma payaso tattassa nibbāyamānassa upari santānakaṁ hoti; evameva pāturahosi. Sā ahosi vaṇṇasampannā gandhasampannā rasasampannā, seyyathāpi nāma sampannaṁ vā sappi sampannaṁ vā navanītaṁ evaṁvaṇṇā ahosi. Seyyathāpi nāma khuddamadhuṁ aneḷakaṁ; evamassādā ahosi. Atha kho, vāseṭṭha, aññataro satto lolajātiko: ‘ambho, kimevidaṁ bhavissatī’ti rasapathaviṁ aṅguliyā sāyi. Tassa rasapathaviṁ aṅguliyā sāyato acchādesi, taṇhā cassa okkami. Aññepi kho, vāseṭṭha, sattā tassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjamānā rasapathaviṁ aṅguliyā sāyiṁsu. Tesaṁ rasapathaviṁ aṅguliyā sāyataṁ acchādesi, taṇhā ca tesaṁ okkami.
[¶23] 3. The Moon and Sun Appear
> Pali: 3. Candimasūriyādipātubhāva
[¶24] Then those beings started to eat the earth’s nectar, breaking it into lumps. But when they did this their radiance vanished. And with the vanishing of their radiance the moon and sun appeared, stars and constellations appeared, days and nights were distinguished, and so were months and fortnights, and years and seasons. So far had the world evolved once more.
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā rasapathaviṁ hatthehi āluppakārakaṁ upakkamiṁsu paribhuñjituṁ. Yato kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā rasapathaviṁ hatthehi āluppakārakaṁ upakkamiṁsu paribhuñjituṁ. Atha tesaṁ sattānaṁ sayaṁpabhā antaradhāyi. Sayaṁpabhāya antarahitāya candimasūriyā pāturahesuṁ. Candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pāturahesuṁ. Nakkhattesu tārakarūpesu pātubhūtesu rattindivā paññāyiṁsu. Rattindivesu paññāyamānesu māsaḍḍhamāsā paññāyiṁsu. Māsaḍḍhamāsesu paññāyamānesu utusaṁvaccharā paññāyiṁsu. Ettāvatā kho, vāseṭṭha, ayaṁ loko puna vivaṭṭo hoti.
[¶25] Then those beings eating the earth’s nectar, with that as their food and nourishment, remained for a very long time. But so long as they ate that earth’s nectar, their bodies became more solid and they diverged in appearance; some beautiful, some ugly. And the beautiful beings looked down on the ugly ones: ‘We’re more beautiful, they’re the ugly ones!’ And the vanity of the beautiful ones made the earth’s nectar vanish. They gathered together and bemoaned, ‘Oh, what a taste! Oh, what a taste!’ And even today when people get something tasty they say: ‘Oh, what a taste! Oh, what a taste!’ They’re just remembering an ancient primordial saying, but they don’t understand what it means.
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā rasapathaviṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Yathā yathā kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā rasapathaviṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu tathā tathā tesaṁ sattānaṁ rasapathaviṁ paribhuñjantānaṁ kharattañceva kāyasmiṁ okkami, vaṇṇavevaṇṇatā ca paññāyittha. Ekidaṁ sattā vaṇṇavanto honti, ekidaṁ sattā dubbaṇṇā. Tattha ye te sattā vaṇṇavanto, te dubbaṇṇe satte atimaññanti: ‘mayametehi vaṇṇavantatarā, amhehete dubbaṇṇatarā’ti. Tesaṁ vaṇṇātimānapaccayā mānātimānajātikānaṁ rasapathavī antaradhāyi. Rasāya pathaviyā antarahitāya sannipatiṁsu. Sannipatitvā anutthuniṁsu: ‘aho rasaṁ, aho rasan’ti. Tadetarahipi manussā kañcideva surasaṁ labhitvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘aho rasaṁ, aho rasan’ti. Tadeva porāṇaṁ aggaññaṁ akkharaṁ anusaranti, na tvevassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶26] 4. Ground-Fungus
> Pali: 4. Bhūmipappaṭakapātubhāva
[¶27] When the earth’s nectar had vanished, ground-fungus appeared to those beings. It appeared just like a mushroom. It was beautiful, fragrant, and delicious, like ghee or butter. And it was as sweet as pure dwarf-bee honey.
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁ rasāya pathaviyā antarahitāya bhūmipappaṭako pāturahosi. Seyyathāpi nāma ahicchattako; evameva pāturahosi. So ahosi vaṇṇasampanno gandhasampanno rasasampanno, seyyathāpi nāma sampannaṁ vā sappi sampannaṁ vā navanītaṁ evaṁvaṇṇo ahosi. Seyyathāpi nāma khuddamadhuṁ aneḷakaṁ; evamassādo ahosi.
[¶28] Then those beings started to eat the ground-fungus. With that as their food and nourishment, they remained for a very long time. But so long as they ate that ground-fungus, their bodies became more solid and they diverged in appearance; some beautiful, some ugly. And the beautiful beings looked down on the ugly ones: ‘We’re more beautiful, they’re the ugly ones!’ And the vanity of the beautiful ones made the ground-fungus vanish.
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā bhūmipappaṭakaṁ upakkamiṁsu paribhuñjituṁ. Te taṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Yathā yathā kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā bhūmipappaṭakaṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu tathā tathā tesaṁ sattānaṁ bhiyyoso mattāya kharattañceva kāyasmiṁ okkami, vaṇṇavevaṇṇatā ca paññāyittha. Ekidaṁ sattā vaṇṇavanto honti, ekidaṁ sattā dubbaṇṇā. Tattha ye te sattā vaṇṇavanto, te dubbaṇṇe satte atimaññanti: ‘mayametehi vaṇṇavantatarā, amhehete dubbaṇṇatarā’ti. Tesaṁ vaṇṇātimānapaccayā mānātimānajātikānaṁ bhūmipappaṭako antaradhāyi.
[¶29] 5. Bursting Pods
> Pali: 5. Padālatāpātubhāva
[¶30] When the ground-fungus had vanished, bursting pods appeared, like the fruit of the kadam tree. They were beautiful, fragrant, and delicious, like ghee or butter. And they were as sweet as pure dwarf-bee honey.
> Pali: Bhūmipappaṭake antarahite padālatā pāturahosi, seyyathāpi nāma kalambukā; evameva pāturahosi. Sā ahosi vaṇṇasampannā gandhasampannā rasasampannā, seyyathāpi nāma sampannaṁ vā sappi sampannaṁ vā navanītaṁ evaṁvaṇṇā ahosi. Seyyathāpi nāma khuddamadhuṁ aneḷakaṁ; evamassādā ahosi.
[¶31] Then those beings started to eat the bursting pods. With that as their food and nourishment, they remained for a very long time. But so long as they ate those bursting pods, their bodies became more solid and they diverged in appearance; some beautiful, some ugly. And the beautiful beings looked down on the ugly ones: ‘We’re more beautiful, they’re the ugly ones!’ And the vanity of the beautiful ones made the bursting pods vanish.
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā padālataṁ upakkamiṁsu paribhuñjituṁ. Te taṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Yathā yathā kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā padālataṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu tathā tathā tesaṁ sattānaṁ bhiyyoso mattāya kharattañceva kāyasmiṁ okkami, vaṇṇavevaṇṇatā ca paññāyittha. Ekidaṁ sattā vaṇṇavanto honti, ekidaṁ sattā dubbaṇṇā. Tattha ye te sattā vaṇṇavanto, te dubbaṇṇe satte atimaññanti: ‘mayametehi vaṇṇavantatarā, amhehete dubbaṇṇatarā’ti. Tesaṁ vaṇṇātimānapaccayā mānātimānajātikānaṁ padālatā antaradhāyi.
[¶32] They gathered together and bemoaned, ‘Oh, what we’ve lost! Oh, what we’ve lost—those bursting pods!’ And even today when people experience suffering they say: ‘Oh, what we’ve lost! Oh, what we’ve lost!’ They’re just remembering an ancient primordial saying, but they don’t understand what it means.
> Pali: Padālatāya antarahitāya sannipatiṁsu. Sannipatitvā anutthuniṁsu: ‘ahu vata no, ahāyi vata no padālatā’ti. Tadetarahipi manussā kenaci dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ahu vata no, ahāyi vata no’ti. Tadeva porāṇaṁ aggaññaṁ akkharaṁ anusaranti, na tvevassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
[¶33] 6. Ripe Untilled Rice
> Pali: 6. Akaṭṭhapākasālipātubhāva
[¶34] When the bursting pods had vanished, ripe untilled rice appeared to those beings. It had no powder or husk, pure and fragrant, with only the rice-grain. What they took for supper at dusk, by daybreak had grown back and ripened. And what they took for breakfast at daybreak had grown back and ripened by the evening, leaving no trace showing. Then those beings eating the ripe untilled rice, with that as their food and nourishment, remained for a very long time.
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁ padālatāya antarahitāya akaṭṭhapāko sāli pāturahosi akaṇo athuso suddho sugandho taṇḍulapphalo. Yaṁ taṁ sāyaṁ sāyamāsāya āharanti, pāto taṁ hoti pakkaṁ paṭivirūḷhaṁ. Yaṁ taṁ pāto pātarāsāya āharanti, sāyaṁ taṁ hoti pakkaṁ paṭivirūḷhaṁ; nāpadānaṁ paññāyati. Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā akaṭṭhapākaṁ sāliṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu.
[¶35] 7. Sex Appears
> Pali: 7. Itthipurisaliṅgapātubhāva
[¶36] But so long as they ate that ripe untilled rice, their bodies became more solid and they diverged in appearance. And female characteristics appeared on women, while male characteristics appeared on men. Women spent too much time gazing at men, and men at women. They became lustful, and their bodies burned with fever. Due to this fever they had sex with each other.
> Pali: Yathā yathā kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā akaṭṭhapākaṁ sāliṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu tathā tathā tesaṁ sattānaṁ bhiyyoso mattāya kharattañceva kāyasmiṁ okkami, vaṇṇavevaṇṇatā ca paññāyittha, itthiyā ca itthiliṅgaṁ pāturahosi purisassa ca purisaliṅgaṁ. Itthī ca purisaṁ ativelaṁ upanijjhāyati puriso ca itthiṁ. Tesaṁ ativelaṁ aññamaññaṁ upanijjhāyataṁ sārāgo udapādi, pariḷāho kāyasmiṁ okkami. Te pariḷāhapaccayā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭiseviṁsu.
[¶37] Those who saw them having sex pelted them with dirt, clods, or cow-dung, saying, ‘Get lost, filth! Get lost, filth! How on earth can one being do that to another?’ And even today people in some countries, when carrying a bride off, pelt her with dirt, clods, or cow-dung. They’re just remembering an ancient primordial saying, but they don’t understand what it means.
> Pali: Ye kho pana te, vāseṭṭha, tena samayena sattā passanti methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevante, aññe paṁsuṁ khipanti, aññe seṭṭhiṁ khipanti, aññe gomayaṁ khipanti: ‘nassa asuci, nassa asucī’ti. ‘Kathañhi nāma satto sattassa evarūpaṁ karissatī’ti. Tadetarahipi manussā ekaccesu janapadesu vadhuyā nibbuyhamānāya aññe paṁsuṁ khipanti, aññe seṭṭhiṁ khipanti, aññe gomayaṁ khipanti. Tadeva porāṇaṁ aggaññaṁ akkharaṁ anusaranti, na tvevassa atthaṁ ājānanti.
## 55. DN 27 · What Came First · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/55/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/55/#p-N
[¶0] 8. Sexual Intercourse
> Pali: 8. Methunadhammasamācāra
[¶1] What was deemed as unprincipled at that time, these days is deemed as principled. The beings who had sex together weren’t allowed to enter a village or town for one or two months. Ever since they excessively threw themselves into immorality, they started to make buildings to hide their immoral deeds. Then one of those beings of idle disposition thought, ‘Oh my, why should I be bothered to gather rice at dusk for supper, and at daybreak for breakfast? Why don’t I gather rice for supper and breakfast all at once?’
> Pali: Adhammasammataṁ kho pana, vāseṭṭha, tena samayena hoti, tadetarahi dhammasammataṁ. Ye kho pana, vāseṭṭha, tena samayena sattā methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevanti, te māsampi dvemāsampi na labhanti gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā pavisituṁ. Yato kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā tasmiṁ asaddhamme ativelaṁ pātabyataṁ āpajjiṁsu. Atha agārāni upakkamiṁsu kātuṁ tasseva asaddhammassa paṭicchādanatthaṁ. Atha kho, vāseṭṭha, aññatarassa sattassa alasajātikassa etadahosi: ‘ambho, kimevāhaṁ vihaññāmi sāliṁ āharanto sāyaṁ sāyamāsāya pāto pātarāsāya. Yannūnāhaṁ sāliṁ āhareyyaṁ sakideva sāyapātarāsāyā’ti.
[¶2] So that’s what he did. Then one of the other beings approached that being and said, ‘Come, good being, we shall go to gather rice.’ ‘There’s no need, good being! I gathered rice for supper and breakfast all at once.’ So that being, following their example, gathered rice for two days all at once, thinking: ‘This seems fine.’
> Pali: Atha kho so, vāseṭṭha, satto sāliṁ āhāsi sakideva sāyapātarāsāya. Atha kho, vāseṭṭha, aññataro satto yena so satto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ sattaṁ etadavoca: ‘ehi, bho satta, sālāhāraṁ gamissāmā’ti. ‘Alaṁ, bho satta, āhato me sāli sakideva sāyapātarāsāyā’ti. Atha kho so, vāseṭṭha, satto tassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjamāno sāliṁ āhāsi sakideva dvīhāya. ‘Evampi kira, bho, sādhū’ti.
[¶3] Then one of the other beings approached that being and said, ‘Come, good being, we shall go to gather rice.’ ‘There’s no need, good being! I gathered rice for two days all at once.’ So that being, following their example, gathered rice for four days all at once, thinking: ‘This seems fine.’
> Pali: Atha kho, vāseṭṭha, aññataro satto yena so satto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ sattaṁ etadavoca: ‘ehi, bho satta, sālāhāraṁ gamissāmā’ti. ‘Alaṁ, bho satta, āhato me sāli sakideva dvīhāyā’ti. Atha kho so, vāseṭṭha, satto tassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjamāno sāliṁ āhāsi sakideva catūhāya, ‘evampi kira, bho, sādhū’ti.
[¶4] Then one of the other beings approached that being and said, ‘Come, good being, we shall go to gather rice.’ ‘There’s no need, good being! I gathered rice for four days all at once.’ So that being, following their example, gathered rice for eight days all at once, thinking: ‘This seems fine.’
> Pali: Atha kho, vāseṭṭha, aññataro satto yena so satto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ sattaṁ etadavoca: ‘ehi, bho satta, sālāhāraṁ gamissāmā’ti. ‘Alaṁ, bho satta, āhato me sāli sakideva catūhāyā’ti. Atha kho so, vāseṭṭha, satto tassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjamāno sāliṁ āhāsi sakideva aṭṭhāhāya, ‘evampi kira, bho, sādhū’ti.
[¶5] But when they started to store up rice to eat, the rice grains became wrapped in powder and husk, it didn’t grow back after reaping, leaving a trace showing, and the rice stood in clumps.
> Pali: Yato kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā sannidhikārakaṁ sāliṁ upakkamiṁsu paribhuñjituṁ. Atha kaṇopi taṇḍulaṁ pariyonandhi, thusopi taṇḍulaṁ pariyonandhi; lūnampi nappaṭivirūḷhaṁ, apadānaṁ paññāyittha, saṇḍasaṇḍā sālayo aṭṭhaṁsu.
[¶6] 9. Dividing the Rice
> Pali: 9. Sālivibhāga
[¶7] Then those beings gathered together and bemoaned, ‘Oh, how wicked things have appeared among beings! For we used to be mind-made, feeding on rapture, self-radiant, wandering in midair, steadily glorious, and we remained like that for a very long time. After a very long period had passed, the earth’s nectar curdled in the water. But due to bad, unskillful things among us, the earth’s nectar vanished, then the ground-fungus vanished, the bursting pods vanished, and now the rice grains have become wrapped in powder and husk, it doesn’t grow back after reaping, traces are left showing, and the rice stands in clumps. We’d better divide up the rice and lay down boundaries.’ So that’s what they did.
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā sannipatiṁsu, sannipatitvā anutthuniṁsu: ‘pāpakā vata, bho, dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā. Mayañhi pubbe manomayā ahumhā pītibhakkhā sayaṁpabhā antalikkhacarā subhaṭṭhāyino, ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhamhā. Tesaṁ no amhākaṁ kadāci karahaci dīghassa addhuno accayena rasapathavī udakasmiṁ samatani. Sā ahosi vaṇṇasampannā gandhasampannā rasasampannā. Te mayaṁ rasapathaviṁ hatthehi āluppakārakaṁ upakkamimha paribhuñjituṁ, tesaṁ no rasapathaviṁ hatthehi āluppakārakaṁ upakkamataṁ paribhuñjituṁ sayaṁpabhā antaradhāyi. Sayaṁpabhāya antarahitāya candimasūriyā pāturahesuṁ, candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pāturahesuṁ, nakkhattesu tārakarūpesu pātubhūtesu rattindivā paññāyiṁsu, rattindivesu paññāyamānesu māsaḍḍhamāsā paññāyiṁsu. Māsaḍḍhamāsesu paññāyamānesu utusaṁvaccharā paññāyiṁsu. Te mayaṁ rasapathaviṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhamhā. Tesaṁ no pāpakānaṁyeva akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pātubhāvā rasapathavī antaradhāyi. Rasapathaviyā antarahitāya bhūmipappaṭako pāturahosi. So ahosi vaṇṇasampanno gandhasampanno rasasampanno. Te mayaṁ bhūmipappaṭakaṁ upakkamimha paribhuñjituṁ. Te mayaṁ taṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhamhā. Tesaṁ no pāpakānaṁyeva akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pātubhāvā bhūmipappaṭako antaradhāyi. Bhūmipappaṭake antarahite padālatā pāturahosi. Sā ahosi vaṇṇasampannā gandhasampannā rasasampannā. Te mayaṁ padālataṁ upakkamimha paribhuñjituṁ. Te mayaṁ taṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhamhā. Tesaṁ no pāpakānaṁyeva akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pātubhāvā padālatā antaradhāyi. Padālatāya antarahitāya akaṭṭhapāko sāli pāturahosi akaṇo athuso suddho sugandho taṇḍulapphalo. Yaṁ taṁ sāyaṁ sāyamāsāya āharāma, pāto taṁ hoti pakkaṁ paṭivirūḷhaṁ. Yaṁ taṁ pāto pātarāsāya āharāma, sāyaṁ taṁ hoti pakkaṁ paṭivirūḷhaṁ. Nāpadānaṁ paññāyittha. Te mayaṁ akaṭṭhapākaṁ sāliṁ paribhuñjantā tambhakkhā tadāhārā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ aṭṭhamhā. Tesaṁ no pāpakānaṁyeva akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pātubhāvā kaṇopi taṇḍulaṁ pariyonandhi, thusopi taṇḍulaṁ pariyonandhi, lūnampi nappaṭivirūḷhaṁ, apadānaṁ paññāyittha, saṇḍasaṇḍā sālayo ṭhitā. Yannūna mayaṁ sāliṁ vibhajeyyāma, mariyādaṁ ṭhapeyyāmā’ti. Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā sāliṁ vibhajiṁsu, mariyādaṁ ṭhapesuṁ.
[¶8] Now, one of those beings was reckless. While guarding their own share they took another’s share without it being given, and ate it.
> Pali: Atha kho, vāseṭṭha, aññataro satto lolajātiko sakaṁ bhāgaṁ parirakkhanto aññataraṁ bhāgaṁ adinnaṁ ādiyitvā paribhuñji.
[¶9] They grabbed the one who had done this and said, ‘You have done a bad thing, good being, in that while guarding your own share you took another’s share without it being given, and ate it. Do not do such a thing again.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ aggahesuṁ, gahetvā etadavocuṁ: ‘pāpakaṁ vata, bho satta, karosi, yatra hi nāma sakaṁ bhāgaṁ parirakkhanto aññataraṁ bhāgaṁ adinnaṁ ādiyitvā paribhuñjasi. Māssu, bho satta, punapi evarūpamakāsī’ti.
[¶10] ‘Yes, worthy sirs,’ replied that being. But for a second time … For a third time they did the same thing, and were told not to continue. And then they struck that being, some with fists, others with stones, and still others with rods. From that day on stealing was found, and blame, and lying, and the taking up of rods.
> Pali: ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, vāseṭṭha, so satto tesaṁ sattānaṁ paccassosi. Dutiyampi kho, vāseṭṭha, so satto …pe… tatiyampi kho, vāseṭṭha, so satto sakaṁ bhāgaṁ parirakkhanto aññataraṁ bhāgaṁ adinnaṁ ādiyitvā paribhuñji. Tamenaṁ aggahesuṁ, gahetvā etadavocuṁ: ‘pāpakaṁ vata, bho satta, karosi, yatra hi nāma sakaṁ bhāgaṁ parirakkhanto aññataraṁ bhāgaṁ adinnaṁ ādiyitvā paribhuñjasi. Māssu, bho satta, punapi evarūpamakāsī’ti. Aññe pāṇinā pahariṁsu, aññe leḍḍunā pahariṁsu, aññe daṇḍena pahariṁsu. Tadagge kho, vāseṭṭha, adinnādānaṁ paññāyati, garahā paññāyati, musāvādo paññāyati, daṇḍādānaṁ paññāyati.
[¶11] 10. The Elected King
> Pali: 10. Mahāsammatarājā
[¶12] Then those beings gathered together and bemoaned, ‘Oh, how wicked things have appeared among beings, in that stealing is found, and blaming and lying and the taking up of rods! Why don’t we elect one being who would rightly accuse those who deserve it, blame those who deserve it, and expel those who deserve it? We shall pay them with a share of rice.’
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā sannipatiṁsu, sannipatitvā anutthuniṁsu: ‘pāpakā vata bho dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā, yatra hi nāma adinnādānaṁ paññāyissati, garahā paññāyissati, musāvādo paññāyissati, daṇḍādānaṁ paññāyissati. Yannūna mayaṁ ekaṁ sattaṁ sammanneyyāma, yo no sammā khīyitabbaṁ khīyeyya, sammā garahitabbaṁ garaheyya, sammā pabbājetabbaṁ pabbājeyya. Mayaṁ panassa sālīnaṁ bhāgaṁ anuppadassāmā’ti.
[¶13] Then those beings approached the being among them who was most attractive, good-looking, lovely, and illustrious, and said, ‘Come, good being, rightly accuse those who deserve it, blame those who deserve it, and banish those who deserve it. We shall pay you with a share of rice.’ ‘Yes, worthy sirs,’ replied that being. They acted accordingly, and were paid with a share of rice.
> Pali: Atha kho te, vāseṭṭha, sattā yo nesaṁ satto abhirūpataro ca dassanīyataro ca pāsādikataro ca mahesakkhataro ca taṁ sattaṁ upasaṅkamitvā etadavocuṁ: ‘ehi, bho satta, sammā khīyitabbaṁ khīya, sammā garahitabbaṁ garaha, sammā pabbājetabbaṁ pabbājehi. Mayaṁ pana te sālīnaṁ bhāgaṁ anuppadassāmā’ti. ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho, vāseṭṭha, so satto tesaṁ sattānaṁ paṭissuṇitvā sammā khīyitabbaṁ khīyi, sammā garahitabbaṁ garahi, sammā pabbājetabbaṁ pabbājesi. Te panassa sālīnaṁ bhāgaṁ anuppadaṁsu.
[¶14] ‘Elected by the populace’, Vāseṭṭha, is the meaning of ‘popularly elected’, the first term applied to them.
> Pali: Mahājanasammatoti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘mahāsammato, mahāsammato’ tveva paṭhamaṁ akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶15] ‘Lord of the fields’ is the meaning of ‘aristocrat’, the second term applied to them.
> Pali: Khettānaṁ adhipatīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘khattiyo, khattiyo’ tveva dutiyaṁ akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶16] ‘They please others with principle’ is the meaning of ‘king’, the third term applied to them.
> Pali: Dhammena pare rañjetīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘rājā, rājā’ tveva tatiyaṁ akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶17] And that, Vāseṭṭha, is how the ancient primordial terms for the circle of aristocrats were created; for those very beings, not others; for those like them, not unlike; by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, evametassa khattiyamaṇḍalassa porāṇena aggaññena akkharena abhinibbatti ahosi tesaṁyeva sattānaṁ, anaññesaṁ. Sadisānaṁyeva, no asadisānaṁ. Dhammeneva, no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶18] 11. The Circle of Brahmins
> Pali: 11. Brāhmaṇamaṇḍala
[¶19] Then some of those same beings thought, ‘Oh, how wicked things have appeared among beings, in that stealing is found, and blaming and lying and the taking up of rods and banishment! Why don’t we set aside bad, unskillful things?’ So that’s what they did.
> Pali: Atha kho tesaṁ, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁyeva ekaccānaṁ etadahosi: ‘pāpakā vata, bho, dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā, yatra hi nāma adinnādānaṁ paññāyissati, garahā paññāyissati, musāvādo paññāyissati, daṇḍādānaṁ paññāyissati, pabbājanaṁ paññāyissati. Yannūna mayaṁ pāpake akusale dhamme vāheyyāmā’ti. Te pāpake akusale dhamme vāhesuṁ.
[¶20] ‘They set aside bad, unskillful things’ is the meaning of ‘brahmin’, the first term applied to them.
> Pali: Pāpake akusale dhamme vāhentīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘brāhmaṇā, brāhmaṇā’ tveva paṭhamaṁ akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶21] They built leaf huts in a wilderness region where they meditated pure and bright, without lighting cooking fires or digging the soil. They came down at daybreak for breakfast and at dusk for supper to the village, town, or royal capital seeking a meal. When they had obtained food they continued to meditate in the leaf huts.
> Pali: Te araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭiyo karitvā paṇṇakuṭīsu jhāyanti vītaṅgārā vītadhūmā pannamusalā sāyaṁ sāyamāsāya pāto pātarāsāya gāmanigamarājadhāniyo osaranti ghāsamesamānā. Te ghāsaṁ paṭilabhitvā punadeva araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu jhāyanti.
[¶22] When people noticed this they said, ‘These beings build leaf huts in a wilderness region where they meditate pure and bright, without lighting cooking fires or digging the soil. They come down at daybreak for breakfast and at dusk for supper to the village, town, or royal capital seeking a meal. When they have obtained food they continue to meditate in the leaf huts.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ime kho, bho, sattā araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭiyo karitvā paṇṇakuṭīsu jhāyanti, vītaṅgārā vītadhūmā pannamusalā sāyaṁ sāyamāsāya pāto pātarāsāya gāmanigamarājadhāniyo osaranti ghāsamesamānā. Te ghāsaṁ paṭilabhitvā punadeva araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu jhāyantī’ti,
[¶23] ‘They meditate’ is the meaning of ‘meditator’, the second term applied to them.
> Pali: jhāyantīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘jhāyakā, jhāyakā’ tveva dutiyaṁ akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶24] But some of those beings were unable to keep up with their meditation in the leaf huts in the wilderness. They came down to the neighborhood of a village or town where they dwelt compiling texts.
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁ ekacce sattā araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu taṁ jhānaṁ anabhisambhuṇamānā gāmasāmantaṁ nigamasāmantaṁ osaritvā ganthe karontā acchanti.
[¶25] When people noticed this they said, ‘These beings were unable to keep up with their meditation in the leaf huts in the wilderness. They came down to the neighborhood of a village or town where they dwelt compiling texts. Now they don’t meditate.’
> Pali: Tamenaṁ manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu: ‘ime kho, bho, sattā araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu taṁ jhānaṁ anabhisambhuṇamānā gāmasāmantaṁ nigamasāmantaṁ osaritvā ganthe karontā acchanti, na dānime jhāyantī’ti.
[¶26] ‘Now they don’t meditate’ is the meaning of ‘reciter’, the third term applied to them. What was deemed as worse at that time, these days is deemed as best.
> Pali: Na dānime jhāyantīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘ajjhāyakā, ajjhāyakā’ tveva tatiyaṁ akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ. Hīnasammataṁ kho pana, vāseṭṭha, tena samayena hoti, tadetarahi seṭṭhasammataṁ.
[¶27] And that, Vāseṭṭha, is how the ancient primordial terms for the circle of brahmins were created; for those very beings, not others; for those like them, not unlike; by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, evametassa brāhmaṇamaṇḍalassa porāṇena aggaññena akkharena abhinibbatti ahosi tesaṁyeva sattānaṁ, anaññesaṁ sadisānaṁyeva no asadisānaṁ dhammeneva, no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶28] 12. The Circle of Peasants
> Pali: 12. Vessamaṇḍala
[¶29] Some of those same beings, taking up an active sex life, applied themselves to various jobs.
> Pali: Tesaṁyeva kho, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁ ekacce sattā methunaṁ dhammaṁ samādāya visukammante payojesuṁ.
[¶30] ‘Having taken up an active sex life, they apply themselves to various jobs’ is the meaning of ‘peasant’, the term applied to them.
> Pali: Methunaṁ dhammaṁ samādāya visukammante payojentīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘vessā, vessā’ tveva akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶31] And that, Vāseṭṭha, is how the ancient primordial term for the circle of peasants was created; for those very beings, not others; for those like them, not unlike; by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, evametassa vessamaṇḍalassa porāṇena aggaññena akkharena abhinibbatti ahosi tesaññeva sattānaṁ anaññesaṁ sadisānaṁyeva, no asadisānaṁ, dhammeneva no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶32] 13. The Circle of Menials
> Pali: 13. Suddamaṇḍala
[¶33] The remaining beings lived by venal hunting and minor tasks.
> Pali: Tesaññeva kho, vāseṭṭha, sattānaṁ ye te sattā avasesā te luddācārā khuddācārā ahesuṁ.
[¶34] ‘They live by venal hunting and minor tasks’ is the meaning of ‘menial’, the term applied to them.
> Pali: Luddācārā khuddācārāti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘suddā, suddā’ tveva akkharaṁ upanibbattaṁ.
[¶35] And that, Vāseṭṭha, is how the ancient primordial term for the circle of menials was created; for those very beings, not others; for those like them, not unlike; by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Iti kho, vāseṭṭha, evametassa suddamaṇḍalassa porāṇena aggaññena akkharena abhinibbatti ahosi tesaṁyeva sattānaṁ anaññesaṁ, sadisānaṁyeva no asadisānaṁ, dhammeneva, no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶36] There came a time when an aristocrat, brahmin, peasant, or menial, deprecating their own vocation, went forth from the lay life to homelessness, thinking, ‘I will be an ascetic.’
> Pali: Ahu kho so, vāseṭṭha, samayo, yaṁ khattiyopi sakaṁ dhammaṁ garahamāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati: ‘samaṇo bhavissāmī’ti. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha, sakaṁ dhammaṁ garahamāno agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati: ‘samaṇo bhavissāmī’ti.
[¶37] From these four circles, Vāseṭṭha, the circle of ascetics was created; for those very beings, not others; for those like them, not unlike; by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Imehi kho, vāseṭṭha, catūhi maṇḍalehi samaṇamaṇḍalassa abhinibbatti ahosi, tesaṁyeva sattānaṁ anaññesaṁ, sadisānaṁyeva no asadisānaṁ, dhammeneva no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶38] 14. On Bad Conduct
> Pali: 14. Duccaritādikathā
[¶39] An aristocrat, brahmin, peasant, menial, or ascetic may do bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They have wrong view, and they act out of that wrong view. And because of that, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā micchādiṭṭhiko micchādiṭṭhikammasamādāno micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānahetu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha … suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha … samaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā micchādiṭṭhiko micchādiṭṭhikammasamādāno micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānahetu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.
[¶40] An aristocrat, brahmin, peasant, menial, or ascetic may do good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They have right view, and they act out of that right view. And because of that, when their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena sucaritaṁ caritvā vācāya sucaritaṁ caritvā manasā sucaritaṁ caritvā sammādiṭṭhiko sammādiṭṭhikammasamādāno sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānahetu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha … suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha … samaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena sucaritaṁ caritvā vācāya sucaritaṁ caritvā manasā sucaritaṁ caritvā sammādiṭṭhiko sammādiṭṭhikammasamādāno sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānahetu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.
[¶41] An aristocrat, brahmin, peasant, menial, or ascetic may do mixed things by way of body, speech, and mind. They have mixed view, and they act out of that mixed view. And because of that, when their body breaks up, after death, they experience both pleasure and pain.
> Pali: Khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena dvayakārī, vācāya dvayakārī, manasā dvayakārī, vimissadiṭṭhiko vimissadiṭṭhikammasamādāno vimissadiṭṭhikammasamādānahetu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī hoti. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha … suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha … samaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena dvayakārī, vācāya dvayakārī, manasā dvayakārī, vimissadiṭṭhiko vimissadiṭṭhikammasamādāno vimissadiṭṭhikammasamādānahetu kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī hoti.
[¶42] 15. The Qualities on the Side of Awakening
> Pali: 15. Bodhipakkhiyabhāvanā
[¶43] An aristocrat, brahmin, peasant, menial, or ascetic who is restrained in body, speech, and mind, and develops the seven qualities on the side of awakening, becomes extinguished in this very life.
> Pali: Khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena saṁvuto vācāya saṁvuto manasā saṁvuto sattannaṁ bodhipakkhiyānaṁ dhammānaṁ bhāvanamanvāya diṭṭheva dhamme parinibbāyati. Brāhmaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha …pe… vessopi kho, vāseṭṭha … suddopi kho, vāseṭṭha … samaṇopi kho, vāseṭṭha, kāyena saṁvuto vācāya saṁvuto manasā saṁvuto sattannaṁ bodhipakkhiyānaṁ dhammānaṁ bhāvanamanvāya diṭṭheva dhamme parinibbāyati.
[¶44] Any mendicant from these four classes who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—is said to be the foremost by virtue of principle, not against principle. For principle, Vāseṭṭha, is the best thing for people in both this life and the next.
> Pali: Imesañhi, vāseṭṭha, catunnaṁ vaṇṇānaṁ yo hoti bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, so nesaṁ aggamakkhāyati dhammeneva, no adhammena. Dhammo hi, vāseṭṭha, seṭṭho janetasmiṁ diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañca.
[¶45] The divinity Sanaṅkumāra also spoke this verse:
> Pali: Brahmunā pesā, vāseṭṭha, sanaṅkumārena gāthā bhāsitā:
[¶46] ‘The aristocrat is best among people
who take clan as the standard.
But one accomplished in knowledge and conduct
is first among gods and humans.’
> Pali: ‘Khattiyo seṭṭho janetasmiṁ,
ye gottapaṭisārino;
Vijjācaraṇasampanno,
so seṭṭho devamānuse’ti.
[¶47] That verse was well sung by the Divinity Sanaṅkumāra, not poorly sung; well spoken, not poorly spoken; beneficial, not harmful, and I agree with it. I also say:
> Pali: Sā kho panesā, vāseṭṭha, brahmunā sanaṅkumārena gāthā sugītā, no duggītā. Subhāsitā, no dubbhāsitā. Atthasaṁhitā, no anatthasaṁhitā. Anumatā mayā. Ahampi, vāseṭṭha, evaṁ vadāmi—
[¶48] The aristocrat is best among people
who take clan as the standard.
But one accomplished in knowledge and conduct
is first among gods and humans.”
> Pali: Khattiyo seṭṭho janetasmiṁ,
ye gottapaṭisārino;
Vijjācaraṇasampanno,
so seṭṭho devamānuse”ti.
[¶49] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶50] > Pali: Aggaññasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ catutthaṁ.
## 56. DN 28 · Inspiring Confidence · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/56/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/56/#p-N
[¶0] DN 28 · Inspiring Confidence
> Pali: DN 28 · Sampasādanīyasutta
[¶1] 1. Sāriputta’s Lion’s Roar
> Pali: 1. Sāriputtasīhanāda
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Nāḷandā in Pāvārika’s Mango Grove. Then Sāriputta went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him:
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā nāḷandāyaṁ viharati pāvārikambavane. Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca:
[¶3] “Sir, I have such confidence in the Buddha that I believe there’s no other ascetic or brahmin—whether past, future, or present—whose direct knowledge is superior to the Buddha when it comes to awakening.”
> Pali: “evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati, na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan”ti.
[¶4] “That’s a grand and bold statement, Sāriputta. You’ve roared a definitive, categorical lion’s roar, saying: ‘I have such confidence in the Buddha that I believe there’s no other ascetic or brahmin—whether past, future, or present—whose direct knowledge is superior to the Buddha when it comes to awakening.’
> Pali: “Uḷārā kho te ayaṁ, sāriputta, āsabhī vācā bhāsitā, ekaṁso gahito, sīhanādo nadito: ‘evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati; na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan’ti.
[¶5] What about all the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas who lived in the past? Have you encompassed their minds to know that those Buddhas had such ethics, or such qualities, or such wisdom, or such meditation, or such freedom?”
> Pali: Kiṁ te, sāriputta, ye te ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto cetasā ceto paricca viditā: ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁdhammā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁpaññā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁvihārī te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipi, evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto ahesuṁ itipī’”ti?
[¶6] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶7] “And what about all the perfected ones, the fully awakened Buddhas who will live in the future? Have you encompassed their minds to know that those Buddhas will have such ethics, or such qualities, or such wisdom, or such meditation, or such freedom?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, sāriputta, ye te bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto cetasā ceto paricca viditā: ‘evaṁsīlā te bhagavanto bhavissanti itipi, evaṁdhammā … evaṁpaññā … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimuttā te bhagavanto bhavissanti itipī’”ti?
[¶8] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶9] “And what about me, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha at present? Have you encompassed my mind to know that I have such ethics, or such qualities, or such wisdom, or such meditation, or such freedom?”
> Pali: “Kiṁ pana te, sāriputta, ahaṁ etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho cetasā ceto paricca vidito: ‘evaṁsīlo bhagavā itipi, evaṁdhammo … evaṁpañño … evaṁvihārī … evaṁvimutto bhagavā itipī’”ti?
[¶10] “No, sir.”
> Pali: “No hetaṁ, bhante”.
[¶11] “In that case, Sāriputta, given that you don’t encompass the minds of Buddhas past, future, or present, what then are you doing, making such a grand and bold statement, roaring such a definitive, categorical lion’s roar?”
> Pali: “Ettha ca hi te, sāriputta, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu arahantesu sammāsambuddhesu cetopariyañāṇaṁ natthi. Atha kiṁ carahi te ayaṁ, sāriputta, uḷārā āsabhī vācā bhāsitā, ekaṁso gahito, sīhanādo nadito: ‘evaṁpasanno ahaṁ, bhante, bhagavati, na cāhu na ca bhavissati na cetarahi vijjati añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṁ sambodhiyan’”ti?
[¶12] “Sir, though I don’t encompass the minds of Buddhas past, future, and present, still I understand this by inference from the teaching. Suppose there was a king’s frontier citadel with fortified embankments, ramparts, and arches, and a single gate. And it has a gatekeeper who is astute, competent, and intelligent. He keeps strangers out and lets known people in. As he walks around the patrol path, he doesn’t see a hole or cleft in the wall, not even one big enough for a cat to slip out. He thinks, ‘Whatever sizable creatures enter or leave the citadel, all of them do so via this gate.’
> Pali: “Na kho me, bhante, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu arahantesu sammāsambuddhesu cetopariyañāṇaṁ atthi. Api ca me dhammanvayo vidito. Seyyathāpi, bhante, rañño paccantimaṁ nagaraṁ daḷhuddhāpaṁ daḷhapākāratoraṇaṁ ekadvāraṁ. Tatrassa dovāriko paṇḍito byatto medhāvī aññātānaṁ nivāretā, ñātānaṁ pavesetā. So tassa nagarassa samantā anupariyāyapathaṁ anukkamamāno na passeyya pākārasandhiṁ vā pākāravivaraṁ vā antamaso biḷāranikkhamanamattampi. Tassa evamassa: ‘ye kho keci oḷārikā pāṇā imaṁ nagaraṁ pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā, sabbe te imināva dvārena pavisanti vā nikkhamanti vā’ti.
[¶13] In the same way, I understand this by inference from the teaching: ‘All the perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas—whether past, future, or present—give up the five hindrances, corruptions of the heart that weaken wisdom. Their mind is firmly established in the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. They correctly develop the seven awakening factors. And they awaken to the supreme perfect awakening.’
> Pali: Evameva kho me, bhante, dhammanvayo vidito. Ye te, bhante, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu suppatiṭṭhitacittā, satta sambojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhiṁsu. Yepi te, bhante, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, sabbe te bhagavanto pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu suppatiṭṭhitacittā, satta sambojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhissanti. Bhagavāpi, bhante, etarahi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu suppatiṭṭhitacitto satta sambojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṁ bhāvetvā anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambuddho.
[¶14] Sir, once I approached the Buddha to listen to the teaching. He explained Dhamma with its higher and higher stages, with its better and better stages, with its dark and bright sides. When I directly knew a certain principle of those teachings, in accordance with how I was taught, I came to a conclusion about the teachings. I had confidence in the Teacher: ‘The Blessed One is a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained. The Saṅgha is practicing well.’
> Pali: Idhāhaṁ, bhante, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁ dhammassavanāya. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti uttaruttaraṁ paṇītapaṇītaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaṁ. Yathā yathā me, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṁ desesi uttaruttaraṁ paṇītapaṇītaṁ kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgaṁ tathā tathāhaṁ tasmiṁ dhamme abhiññā idhekaccaṁ dhammaṁ dhammesu niṭṭhamagamaṁ; satthari pasīdiṁ: ‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno sāvakasaṅgho’ti.
[¶15] 1.1. Teaching Skillful Qualities
> Pali: 1.1. Kusaladhammadesanā
[¶16] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches skillful qualities is unsurpassable. This consists of such skillful qualities as the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, the four right efforts, the four bases of psychic power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven awakening factors, and the noble eightfold path. By these a mendicant realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. This is unsurpassable when it comes to skillful qualities. The Buddha understands this without exception. There is nothing to be understood beyond this whereby another ascetic or brahmin might be superior in direct knowledge to the Buddha when it comes to skillful qualities.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti kusalesu dhammesu. Tatrime kusalā dhammā seyyathidaṁ— cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Idha, bhante, bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, kusalesu dhammesu. Taṁ bhagavā asesamabhijānāti, taṁ bhagavato asesamabhijānato uttari abhiññeyyaṁ natthi, yadabhijānaṁ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro assa, yadidaṁ kusalesu dhammesu.
[¶17] 1.2. Describing the Sense Fields
> Pali: 1.2. Āyatanapaṇṇattidesanā
[¶18] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the description of the sense fields is unsurpassable. There are these six interior and exterior sense fields. The eye and sights, the ear and sounds, the nose and smells, the tongue and tastes, the body and touches, and the mind and ideas. This is unsurpassable when it comes to describing the sense fields. The Buddha understands this without exception. There is nothing to be understood beyond this whereby another ascetic or brahmin might be superior in direct knowledge to the Buddha when it comes to describing the sense fields.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti āyatanapaṇṇattīsu. Chayimāni, bhante, ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Cakkhuñceva rūpā ca, sotañceva saddā ca, ghānañceva gandhā ca, jivhā ceva rasā ca, kāyo ceva phoṭṭhabbā ca, mano ceva dhammā ca. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, āyatanapaṇṇattīsu. Taṁ bhagavā asesamabhijānāti, taṁ bhagavato asesamabhijānato uttari abhiññeyyaṁ natthi, yadabhijānaṁ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro assa yadidaṁ āyatanapaṇṇattīsu.
[¶19] 1.3. The Conception of the Embryo
> Pali: 1.3. Gabbhāvakkantidesanā
[¶20] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the conception of the embryo is unsurpassable. There are these four kinds of conception.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti gabbhāvakkantīsu. Catasso imā, bhante, gabbhāvakkantiyo.
[¶21] Firstly, someone is unaware when conceived in their mother’s womb, unaware as they remain there, and unaware as they emerge. This is the first kind of conception.
> Pali: Idha, bhante, ekacco asampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati; asampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti; asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati. Ayaṁ paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti.
[¶22] Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, but unaware as they remain there, and unaware as they emerge. This is the second kind of conception.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati; asampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti; asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati. Ayaṁ dutiyā gabbhāvakkanti.
[¶23] Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, aware as they remain there, but unaware as they emerge. This is the third kind of conception.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati; sampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti; asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati. Ayaṁ tatiyā gabbhāvakkanti.
[¶24] Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, aware as they remain there, and aware as they emerge. This is the fourth kind of conception.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati; sampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti; sampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati. Ayaṁ catutthā gabbhāvakkanti.
[¶25] This is unsurpassable when it comes to the conception of the embryo.
> Pali: Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, gabbhāvakkantīsu.
[¶26] 1.4. Ways of Revealing
> Pali: 1.4. Ādesanavidhādesanā
[¶27] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the different ways of revealing is unsurpassable. There are these four ways of revealing.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti ādesanavidhāsu. Catasso imā, bhante, ādesanavidhā.
[¶28] Firstly, someone reveals by means of a sign, ‘This is what you’re thinking, such is your thought, and thus is your state of mind.’ And even if they reveal this many times, it turns out exactly so, not otherwise. This is the first way of revealing.
> Pali: Idha, bhante, ekacco nimittena ādisati: ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan’ti. So bahuñcepi ādisati, tatheva taṁ hoti, no aññathā. Ayaṁ paṭhamā ādesanavidhā.
[¶29] Furthermore, someone reveals after hearing it from humans or non-humans or deities, ‘This is what you’re thinking, such is your thought, and thus is your state of mind.’ And even if they reveal this many times, it turns out exactly so, not otherwise. This is the second way of revealing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco na heva kho nimittena ādisati. Api ca kho manussānaṁ vā amanussānaṁ vā devatānaṁ vā saddaṁ sutvā ādisati: ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan’ti. So bahuñcepi ādisati, tatheva taṁ hoti, no aññathā. Ayaṁ dutiyā ādesanavidhā.
[¶30] Furthermore, someone reveals by hearing the sound of thought spreading as someone thinks and considers, ‘This is what you’re thinking, such is your thought, and thus is your state of mind.’ And even if they reveal this many times, it turns out exactly so, not otherwise. This is the third way of revealing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco na heva kho nimittena ādisati, nāpi manussānaṁ vā amanussānaṁ vā devatānaṁ vā saddaṁ sutvā ādisati. Api ca kho vitakkayato vicārayato vitakkavipphārasaddaṁ sutvā ādisati: ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano, itipi te cittan’ti. So bahuñcepi ādisati, tatheva taṁ hoti, no aññathā. Ayaṁ tatiyā ādesanavidhā.
[¶31] Furthermore, someone comprehends the mind of one who has attained the immersion that’s free of placing the mind and keeping it connected. They understand, ‘Judging by the way this worthy’s intentions are directed, immediately after this mind state, they’ll think this thought.’ And even if they reveal this many times, it turns out exactly so, not otherwise. This is the fourth way of revealing.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco na heva kho nimittena ādisati, nāpi manussānaṁ vā amanussānaṁ vā devatānaṁ vā saddaṁ sutvā ādisati, nāpi vitakkayato vicārayato vitakkavipphārasaddaṁ sutvā ādisati. Api ca kho avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhiṁ samāpannassa cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti: ‘yathā imassa bhoto manosaṅkhārā paṇihitā. Tathā imassa cittassa anantarā imaṁ nāma vitakkaṁ vitakkessatī’ti. So bahuñcepi ādisati, tatheva taṁ hoti, no aññathā. Ayaṁ catutthā ādesanavidhā.
[¶32] This is unsurpassable when it comes to the ways of revealing.
> Pali: Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, ādesanavidhāsu.
[¶33] 1.5. Attainments of Vision
> Pali: 1.5. Dassanasamāpattidesanā
[¶34] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the attainments of vision is unsurpassable. There are these four attainments of vision.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti dassanasamāpattīsu. Catasso imā, bhante, dassanasamāpattiyo.
[¶35] Firstly, some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they examine their own body up from the soles of the feet and down from the tips of the hairs, wrapped in skin and full of many kinds of filth. ‘In this body there is head hair, body hair, nails, teeth, skin, flesh, sinews, bones, bone marrow, kidneys, heart, liver, diaphragm, spleen, lungs, intestines, mesentery, undigested food, feces, bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat, tears, grease, saliva, snot, synovial fluid, urine.’ This is the first attainment of vision.
> Pali: Idha, bhante, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṁsaṁ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṁ vakkaṁ hadayaṁ yakanaṁ kilomakaṁ pihakaṁ papphāsaṁ antaṁ antaguṇaṁ udariyaṁ karīsaṁ pittaṁ semhaṁ pubbo lohitaṁ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghānikā lasikā muttan’ti. Ayaṁ paṭhamā dassanasamāpatti.
[¶36] Furthermore, some ascetic or brahmin experiences that immersion and examines their own body. ‘In this body there is head hair … urine.’ Going further, they examine a person’s bones with skin, flesh, and blood. This is the second attainment of vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā …pe… lasikā muttan’ti. Atikkamma ca purisassa chavimaṁsalohitaṁ aṭṭhiṁ paccavekkhati. Ayaṁ dutiyā dassanasamāpatti.
[¶37] Furthermore, some ascetic or brahmin experiences that immersion and examines their own body. ‘In this body there is head hair … urine.’ Going further, they examine a person’s bones with skin, flesh, and blood. And they understand of a person that their stream of consciousness is consistent on both sides: established in both this world and the next. This is the third attainment of vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā …pe… lasikā muttan’ti. Atikkamma ca purisassa chavimaṁsalohitaṁ aṭṭhiṁ paccavekkhati. Purisassa ca viññāṇasotaṁ pajānāti, ubhayato abbocchinnaṁ idha loke patiṭṭhitañca paraloke patiṭṭhitañca. Ayaṁ tatiyā dassanasamāpatti.
[¶38] Furthermore, some ascetic or brahmin experiences that immersion and examines their own body. ‘In this body there is head hair … urine.’ Going further, they examine a person’s bones with skin, flesh, and blood. They understand of a person that their stream of consciousness is consistent on both sides: not established in either this world or the next. This is the fourth attainment of vision.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte imameva kāyaṁ uddhaṁ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tacapariyantaṁ pūraṁ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: ‘atthi imasmiṁ kāye kesā lomā …pe… lasikā muttan’ti. Atikkamma ca purisassa chavimaṁsalohitaṁ aṭṭhiṁ paccavekkhati. Purisassa ca viññāṇasotaṁ pajānāti, ubhayato abbocchinnaṁ idha loke appatiṭṭhitañca paraloke appatiṭṭhitañca. Ayaṁ catutthā dassanasamāpatti.
[¶39] This is unsurpassable when it comes to attainments of vision.
> Pali: Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, dassanasamāpattīsu.
[¶40] 1.6. Description of Individuals
> Pali: 1.6. Puggalapaṇṇattidesanā
[¶41] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the description of individuals is unsurpassable. There are these seven individuals. One freed both ways, one freed by wisdom, a direct witness, one attained to view, one freed by faith, a follower of teachings, a follower by faith. This is unsurpassable when it comes to the description of individuals.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti puggalapaṇṇattīsu. Sattime, bhante, puggalā. Ubhatobhāgavimutto paññāvimutto kāyasakkhi diṭṭhippatto saddhāvimutto dhammānusārī saddhānusārī. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, puggalapaṇṇattīsu.
[¶42] 1.7. Kinds of Striving
> Pali: 1.7. Padhānadesanā
[¶43] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the kinds of striving is unsurpassable. There are these seven awakening factors: the awakening factors of mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity. This is unsurpassable when it comes to the kinds of striving.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti padhānesu. Sattime, bhante, sambojjhaṅgā satisambojjhaṅgo dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo vīriyasambojjhaṅgo pītisambojjhaṅgo passaddhisambojjhaṅgo samādhisambojjhaṅgo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, padhānesu.
[¶44] 1.8. Ways of Practice
> Pali: 1.8. Paṭipadādesanā
[¶45] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the ways of practice is unsurpassable.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti paṭipadāsu.
[¶46] Painful practice with slow insight,
> Pali: Catasso imā, bhante, paṭipadā dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā,
[¶47] painful practice with swift insight,
> Pali: dukkhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā,
[¶48] pleasant practice with slow insight, and
> Pali: sukhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā,
[¶49] pleasant practice with swift insight.
> Pali: sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññāti.
[¶50] Of these, the painful practice with slow insight is said to be inferior both ways: because it’s painful and because it’s slow. The painful practice with swift insight is said to be inferior because it’s painful. The pleasant practice with slow insight is said to be inferior because it’s slow. But the pleasant practice with swift insight is said to be superior both ways: because it’s pleasant and because it’s swift.
> Pali: Tatra, bhante, yāyaṁ paṭipadā dukkhā dandhābhiññā, ayaṁ, bhante, paṭipadā ubhayeneva hīnā akkhāyati dukkhattā ca dandhattā ca. Tatra, bhante, yāyaṁ paṭipadā dukkhā khippābhiññā, ayaṁ pana, bhante, paṭipadā dukkhattā hīnā akkhāyati. Tatra, bhante, yāyaṁ paṭipadā sukhā dandhābhiññā, ayaṁ pana, bhante, paṭipadā dandhattā hīnā akkhāyati. Tatra, bhante, yāyaṁ paṭipadā sukhā khippābhiññā, ayaṁ pana, bhante, paṭipadā ubhayeneva paṇītā akkhāyati sukhattā ca khippattā ca.
[¶51] This is unsurpassable when it comes to the ways of practice.
> Pali: Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, paṭipadāsu.
[¶52] 1.9. Behavior in Speech
> Pali: 1.9. Bhassasamācārādidesanā
[¶53] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches behavior in speech is unsurpassable. It’s when someone doesn’t use speech that’s connected with lying, or divisive, or backbiting, or aggressively trying to win. They speak only wise counsel, valuable and timely. This is unsurpassable when it comes to behavior in speech.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti bhassasamācāre. Idha, bhante, ekacco na ceva musāvādupasañhitaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati na ca vebhūtiyaṁ na ca pesuṇiyaṁ na ca sārambhajaṁ jayāpekkho; mantā mantā ca vācaṁ bhāsati nidhānavatiṁ kālena. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, bhassasamācāre.
[¶54] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches a person’s ethical behavior is unsurpassable. It’s when someone is honest and faithful. They don’t use deceit, flattery, hinting, or belittling, and they don’t use material things to chase after other material things. They guard the sense doors and eat in moderation. They’re fair, dedicated to wakefulness, tireless, energetic, and meditative. They have good memory, eloquence, rememberance, retention, and thoughtfulness. They’re not greedy for sensual pleasures. They are mindful and alert. This is unsurpassable when it comes to a person’s ethical behavior.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti purisasīlasamācāre. Idha, bhante, ekacco sacco cassa saddho ca, na ca kuhako, na ca lapako, na ca nemittiko, na ca nippesiko, na ca lābhena lābhaṁ nijigīsanako, indriyesu guttadvāro, bhojane mattaññū, samakārī, jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto, atandito, āraddhavīriyo, jhāyī, satimā, kalyāṇapaṭibhāno, gatimā, dhitimā, matimā, na ca kāmesu giddho, sato ca nipako ca. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, purisasīlasamācāre.
[¶55] 1.10. Responsiveness to Instruction
> Pali: 1.10. Anusāsanavidhādesanā
[¶56] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the different degrees of responsiveness to instruction is unsurpassable. There are these four degrees of responsiveness to instruction.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti anusāsanavidhāsu. Catasso imā, bhante, anusāsanavidhā—
[¶57] The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘By practicing as instructed this individual will, with the ending of three fetters, become a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘By practicing as instructed this individual will, with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, become a once-returner. They will come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.’ The Buddha knows by investigating inside to another individual: ‘By practicing as instructed this individual will, with the ending of the five lower fetters, be reborn spontaneously. They will be extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world.’ The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘By practicing as instructed this individual will realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’
> Pali: jānāti, bhante, bhagavā aparaṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā ‘ayaṁ puggalo yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno bhavissati avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī bhavissati, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissatī’ti. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko bhavissati tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā’ti. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo yathānusiṭṭhaṁ tathā paṭipajjamāno āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissatī’ti.
## 57. DN 28 · Inspiring Confidence · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/57/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/57/#p-N
[¶0] This is unsurpassable when it comes to the different degrees of responsiveness to instruction.
> Pali: Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, anusāsanavidhāsu.
[¶1] 1.11. The Knowledge and Freedom of Others
> Pali: 1.11. Parapuggalavimuttiñāṇadesanā
[¶2] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the knowledge and freedom of other individuals is unsurpassable. The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘With the ending of three fetters this individual will become a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening.’ The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘With the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion, this individual will become a once-returner. They will come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering.’ The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘With the ending of the five lower fetters, this individual will be reborn spontaneously. They will be extinguished there, and are not liable to return from that world.’ The Buddha knows by investigating inside another individual: ‘This individual will realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.’ This is unsurpassable when it comes to the knowledge and freedom of other individuals.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti parapuggalavimuttiñāṇe. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno bhavissati avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’ti. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī bhavissati, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karissatī’ti. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko bhavissati tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā’ti. Jānāti, bhante, bhagavā paraṁ puggalaṁ paccattaṁ yonisomanasikārā: ‘ayaṁ puggalo āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissatī’ti. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, parapuggalavimuttiñāṇe.
[¶3] 1.12. Eternalism
> Pali: 1.12. Sassatavādadesanā
[¶4] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches eternalist doctrines is unsurpassable. There are these three eternalist doctrines.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti sassatavādesu. Tayome, bhante, sassatavādā.
[¶5] Firstly, some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect many hundreds of thousands of past lives, with features and details. They say, ‘I know that in the past the cosmos expanded or contracted. I don’t know whether in the future the cosmos will expand or contract. The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.’ This is the first eternalist doctrine.
> Pali: Idha, bhante, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekānipi jātisatāni anekānipi jātisahassāni anekānipi jātisatasahassāni, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. So evamāha: ‘atītampāhaṁ addhānaṁ jānāmi—saṁvaṭṭi vā loko vivaṭṭi vāti. Anāgataṁpāhaṁ addhānaṁ jānāmi—saṁvaṭṭissati vā loko vivaṭṭissati vāti. Sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito. Te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman’ti. Ayaṁ paṭhamo sassatavādo.
[¶6] Furthermore, some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect their past lives for as many as ten eons of the expansion and contraction of the cosmos, with features and details. They say, ‘I know that in the past the cosmos expanded or contracted. I don’t know whether in the future the cosmos will expand or contract. The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.’ This is the second eternalist doctrine.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭaṁ dvepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni tīṇipi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni cattāripi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni pañcapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni dasapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. So evamāha: ‘atītampāhaṁ addhānaṁ jānāmi saṁvaṭṭi vā loko vivaṭṭi vāti. Anāgataṁpāhaṁ addhānaṁ jānāmi saṁvaṭṭissati vā loko vivaṭṭissati vāti. Sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito. Te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman’ti. Ayaṁ dutiyo sassatavādo.
[¶7] Furthermore, some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect their past lives for as many as forty eons of the expansion and contraction of the cosmos, with features and details. They say, ‘I know that in the past the cosmos expanded or contracted. I don’t know whether in the future the cosmos will expand or contract. The self and the cosmos are eternal, barren, steady as a mountain peak, standing firm like a pillar. They remain the same for all eternity, while these sentient beings wander and transmigrate and pass away and rearise.’ This is the third eternalist doctrine.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhante, idhekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—dasapi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni vīsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni tiṁsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni cattālīsampi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭāni, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. So evamāha: ‘atītampāhaṁ addhānaṁ jānāmi saṁvaṭṭipi loko vivaṭṭipīti; anāgataṁpāhaṁ addhānaṁ jānāmi saṁvaṭṭissatipi loko vivaṭṭissatipīti. Sassato attā ca loko ca vañjho kūṭaṭṭho esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito. Te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṁsaranti cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tveva sassatisaman’ti. Ayaṁ tatiyo sassatavādo,
[¶8] This is unsurpassable when it comes to eternalist doctrines.
> Pali: etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, sassatavādesu.
[¶9] 1.13. Recollecting Past Lives
> Pali: 1.13. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇadesanā
[¶10] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the knowledge of recollecting past lives is unsurpassable. It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they recollect their many kinds of past lives. That is: one, two, three, four, five, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand rebirths; many eons of the world contracting, many eons of the world expanding, many eons of the world contracting and expanding. They remember: ‘There, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn somewhere else. There, too, I was named this, my clan was that, I looked like this, and that was my food. This was how I felt pleasure and pain, and that was how my life ended. When I passed away from that place I was reborn here.’ And so they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. Sir, there are gods whose lifespan cannot be reckoned or calculated. Still, no matter what incarnation they have previously been reborn in—whether formed or formless or percipient or non-percipient or neither percipient nor non-percipient— they recollect their many kinds of past lives, with features and details. This is unsurpassable when it comes to the knowledge of recollecting past lives.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇe. Idha, bhante, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ dvepi jātiyo tissopi jātiyo catassopi jātiyo pañcapi jātiyo dasapi jātiyo vīsampi jātiyo tiṁsampi jātiyo cattālīsampi jātiyo paññāsampi jātiyo jātisatampi jātisahassampi jātisatasahassampi anekepi saṁvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṁvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe, ‘amutrāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto amutra udapādiṁ; tatrāpāsiṁ evaṁnāmo evaṅgotto evaṁvaṇṇo evamāhāro evaṁsukhadukkhappaṭisaṁvedī evamāyupariyanto, so tato cuto idhūpapanno’ti. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Santi, bhante, devā, yesaṁ na sakkā gaṇanāya vā saṅkhānena vā āyu saṅkhātuṁ. Api ca yasmiṁ yasmiṁ attabhāve abhinivuṭṭhapubbo hoti yadi vā rūpīsu yadi vā arūpīsu yadi vā saññīsu yadi vā asaññīsu yadi vā nevasaññīnāsaññīsu. Iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇe.
[¶11] 1.14. Death and Rebirth
> Pali: 1.14. Cutūpapātañāṇadesanā
[¶12] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches the knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings is unsurpassable. It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn— inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds: ‘These dear beings did bad things by way of body, speech, and mind. They denounced the noble ones; they had wrong view; and they chose to act out of that wrong view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. These dear beings, however, did good things by way of body, speech, and mind. They never denounced the noble ones; they had right view; and they chose to act out of that right view. When their body broke up, after death, they were reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.’ And so, with clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds. This is unsurpassable when it comes to the knowledge of death and rebirth.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇe. Idha, bhante, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti: ‘ime vata bhonto sattā kāyaduccaritena samannāgatā vacīduccaritena samannāgatā manoduccaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ upavādakā micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā. Ime vā pana bhonto sattā kāyasucaritena samannāgatā vacīsucaritena samannāgatā manosucaritena samannāgatā ariyānaṁ anupavādakā sammādiṭṭhikā sammādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā’ti. Iti dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, sattānaṁ cutūpapātañāṇe.
[¶13] 1.15. Psychic Powers
> Pali: 1.15. Iddhividhadesanā
[¶14] And moreover, sir, how the Buddha teaches psychic power is unsurpassable. There are these two kinds of psychic power. There are psychic powers that are accompanied by defilements and attachments, and are said to be ignoble. And there are psychic powers that are free of defilements and attachments, and are said to be noble. What are the psychic powers that are accompanied by defilements and attachments, and are said to be ignoble? It’s when some ascetic or brahmin—by dint of keen, resolute, committed, and diligent effort, and right application of mind—experiences an immersion of the heart of such a kind that they wield the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity. These are the psychic powers that are accompanied by defilements and attachments, and are said to be ignoble.
> Pali: Aparaṁ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṁ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṁ deseti iddhividhāsu. Dvemā, bhante, iddhividhāyo— atthi, bhante, iddhi sāsavā saupadhikā, ‘no ariyā’ti vuccati. Atthi, bhante, iddhi anāsavā anupadhikā ‘ariyā’ti vuccati. Katamā ca, bhante, iddhi sāsavā saupadhikā, ‘no ariyā’ti vuccati? idha, bhante, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya …pe… tathārūpaṁ cetosamādhiṁ phusati, yathāsamāhite citte anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti— ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti. Ayaṁ, bhante, iddhi sāsavā saupadhikā, ‘no ariyā’ti vuccati.
[¶15] But what are the psychic powers that are free of defilements and attachments, and are said to be noble? It’s when, if a mendicant wishes: ‘May I meditate perceiving the unrepulsive in the repulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the repulsive in the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the unrepulsive in the repulsive and the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate perceiving the repulsive in the unrepulsive and the repulsive,’ that’s what they do. If they wish: ‘May I meditate staying equanimous, mindful and aware, shunning both the repulsive and the unrepulsive,’ that’s what they do. These are the psychic powers that are free of defilements and attachments, and are said to be noble. This is unsurpassable when it comes to psychic powers. The Buddha understands this without exception. There is nothing to be understood beyond this whereby another ascetic or brahmin might be superior in direct knowledge to the Buddha when it comes to psychic powers.
> Pali: Katamā pana, bhante, iddhi anāsavā anupadhikā, ‘ariyā’ti vuccati? Idha, bhante, bhikkhu sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘appaṭikūle paṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle ca appaṭikūle ca appaṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūle ca appaṭikūle ca paṭikūlasaññī vihareyyan’ti, paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharati. Sace ākaṅkhati: ‘paṭikūlañca appaṭikūlañca tadubhayaṁ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako vihareyyaṁ sato sampajāno’ti, upekkhako tattha viharati sato sampajāno. Ayaṁ, bhante, iddhi anāsavā anupadhikā ‘ariyā’ti vuccati. Etadānuttariyaṁ, bhante, iddhividhāsu. Taṁ bhagavā asesamabhijānāti, taṁ bhagavato asesamabhijānato uttari abhiññeyyaṁ natthi, yadabhijānaṁ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro assa yadidaṁ iddhividhāsu.
[¶16] 1.16. The Four Absorptions
> Pali: 1.16. Aññathāsatthuguṇadassana
[¶17] The Buddha has achieved what should be achieved by a faithful gentleman by being energetic and strong, by human strength, energy, vigor, and exertion. The Buddha doesn’t indulge in sensual pleasures, which are low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. And he doesn’t indulge in self-mortification, which is painful, ignoble, and pointless. He gets the four absorptions—blissful meditations in this life that belong to the higher mind—when he wants, without trouble or difficulty.
> Pali: Yaṁ taṁ, bhante, saddhena kulaputtena pattabbaṁ āraddhavīriyena thāmavatā purisathāmena purisavīriyena purisaparakkamena purisadhorayhena, anuppattaṁ taṁ bhagavatā. Na ca, bhante, bhagavā kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogamanuyutto hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na ca attakilamathānuyogamanuyutto dukkhaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ. Catunnañca bhagavā jhānānaṁ ābhicetasikānaṁ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṁ nikāmalābhī akicchalābhī akasiralābhī.
[¶18] 1.17. On Being Questioned
> Pali: 1.17. Anuyogadānappakāra
[¶19] Sir, if they were to ask me, ‘Reverend Sāriputta, is there any other ascetic or brahmin—whether past, future, or present—whose direct knowledge is superior to the Buddha when it comes to awakening?’ I would tell them ‘No.’
> Pali: Sace maṁ, bhante, evaṁ puccheyya: ‘kiṁ nu kho, āvuso sāriputta, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ aññe samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññatarā sambodhiyan’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, ‘no’ti vadeyyaṁ. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso sāriputta, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ aññe samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññatarā sambodhiyan’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, ‘no’ti vadeyyaṁ. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso sāriputta, atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro sambodhiyan’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, ‘no’ti vadeyyaṁ.
[¶20] But if they were to ask me, ‘Reverend Sāriputta, is there any other ascetic or brahmin—whether past or future—whose direct knowledge is equal to the Buddha when it comes to awakening?’ I would tell them ‘Yes.’ But if they were to ask: ‘Reverend Sāriputta, is there any other ascetic or brahmin at present whose direct knowledge is equal to the Buddha when it comes to awakening?’ I would tell them ‘No.’
> Pali: Sace pana maṁ, bhante, evaṁ puccheyya: ‘kiṁ nu kho, āvuso sāriputta, ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ aññe samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā bhagavatā samasamā sambodhiyan’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, ‘evan’ti vadeyyaṁ. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso sāriputta, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ aññe samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā bhagavatā samasamā sambodhiyan’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, ‘evan’ti vadeyyaṁ. ‘Kiṁ panāvuso sāriputta, atthetarahi aññe samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā bhagavatā samasamā sambodhiyan’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, ‘no’ti vadeyyaṁ.
[¶21] But if they were to ask me, ‘But why does Venerable Sāriputta grant this in respect of some but not others?’ I would answer them like this, ‘Reverends, I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: “The perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas of the past were equal in awakening to myself.” And I have heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: “The perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas of the future will be equal in awakening to myself.” And I have also heard and learned this in the presence of the Buddha: “It’s impossible for two perfected ones, fully awakened Buddhas to arise in the same solar system at the same time.”’
> Pali: Sace pana maṁ, bhante, evaṁ puccheyya: ‘kiṁ panāyasmā sāriputto ekaccaṁ abbhanujānāti, ekaccaṁ na abbhanujānātī’ti, evaṁ puṭṭho ahaṁ, bhante, evaṁ byākareyyaṁ: ‘sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: “ahesuṁ atītamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā mayā samasamā sambodhiyan”ti. Sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso, bhagavato sutaṁ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: “bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṁ arahanto sammāsambuddhā mayā samasamā sambodhiyan”ti. Sammukhā metaṁ, āvuso, bhagavato sutaṁ sammukhā paṭiggahitaṁ: “aṭṭhānametaṁ anavakāso yaṁ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṁ acarimaṁ uppajjeyyuṁ, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjatī”’ti.
[¶22] Answering this way, I trust that I repeated what the Buddha has said, and didn’t misrepresent him with an untruth. I trust my explanation was in line with the teaching, and that there are no legitimate grounds for rebuttal or criticism.”
> Pali: Kaccāhaṁ, bhante, evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaramāno vuttavādī ceva bhagavato homi, na ca bhagavantaṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhāmi, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākaromi, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī”ti?
[¶23] “Indeed, Sāriputta, in answering this way you repeat what I’ve said, and don’t misrepresent me with an untruth. Your explanation is in line with the teaching, and there are no legitimate grounds for rebuttal or criticism.”
> Pali: “Taggha tvaṁ, sāriputta, evaṁ puṭṭho evaṁ byākaramāno vuttavādī ceva me hosi, na ca maṁ abhūtena abbhācikkhasi, dhammassa cānudhammaṁ byākarosi, na ca koci sahadhammiko vādānuvādo gārayhaṁ ṭhānaṁ āgacchatī”ti.
[¶24] 2. Incredible and Amazing
> Pali: 2. Acchariyaabbhuta
[¶25] When he had spoken, Venerable Udāyī said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! The Realized One has so few wishes, such contentment, such self-effacement! For even though the Realized One has such power and might, he will not make a display of himself. If the wanderers following other religions were to see even a single one of these qualities in themselves they’d carry around a banner to that effect. It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! The Realized One has so few wishes, such contentment, such self-effacement! For even though the Realized One has such power and might, he will not make a display of himself.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā udāyī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, tathāgatassa appicchatā santuṭṭhitā sallekhatā. Yatra hi nāma tathāgato evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo, atha ca pana nevattānaṁ pātukarissati. Ekamekañcepi ito, bhante, dhammaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā attani samanupasseyyuṁ, te tāvatakeneva paṭākaṁ parihareyyuṁ. Acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante, tathāgatassa appicchatā santuṭṭhitā sallekhatā. Yatra hi nāma tathāgato evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo. Atha ca pana nevattānaṁ pātukarissatī”ti.
[¶26] “See, Udāyī, how the Realized One has so few wishes, such contentment, such self-effacement. For even though the Realized One has such power and might, he will not make a display of himself. If the wanderers following other religions were to see even a single one of these qualities in themselves they’d carry around a banner to that effect. See, Udāyī, how the Realized One has so few wishes, such contentment, such self-effacement. For even though the Realized One has such power and might, he will not make a display of himself.”
> Pali: “Passa kho tvaṁ, udāyi, ‘tathāgatassa appicchatā santuṭṭhitā sallekhatā. Yatra hi nāma tathāgato evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo, atha ca pana nevattānaṁ pātukarissati’. Ekamekañcepi ito, udāyi, dhammaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā attani samanupasseyyuṁ, te tāvatakeneva paṭākaṁ parihareyyuṁ. Passa kho tvaṁ, udāyi, ‘tathāgatassa appicchatā santuṭṭhitā sallekhatā. Yatra hi nāma tathāgato evaṁmahiddhiko evaṁmahānubhāvo, atha ca pana nevattānaṁ pātukarissatī’”ti.
[¶27] Then the Buddha said to Venerable Sāriputta, “So Sāriputta, you should frequently speak this exposition of the teaching to the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. Though there will be some futile people who have doubt or uncertainty regarding the Realized One, when they hear this exposition of the teaching they’ll give up that doubt or uncertainty.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ āmantesi: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, sāriputta, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ abhikkhaṇaṁ bhāseyyāsi bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Yesampi hi, sāriputta, moghapurisānaṁ bhavissati tathāgate kaṅkhā vā vimati vā, tesamimaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ sutvā tathāgate kaṅkhā vā vimati vā, sā pahīyissatī”ti.
[¶28] That’s how Venerable Sāriputta declared his confidence in the Buddha’s presence. And that’s why the name of this discussion is “Inspiring Confidence”.
> Pali: Iti hidaṁ āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato sammukhā sampasādaṁ pavedesi. Tasmā imassa veyyākaraṇassa sampasādanīyantveva adhivacananti.
[¶29] > Pali: Sampasādanīyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ pañcamaṁ.
## 58. DN 29 · An Impressive Discourse · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/58/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/58/#p-N
[¶0] DN 29 · An Impressive Discourse
> Pali: DN 29 · Pāsādikasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying in the land of the Sakyans in a stilt longhouse in a mango grove belonging to those Sakyans named Vedhaññā.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sakkesu viharati vedhaññā nāma sakyā, tesaṁ ambavane pāsāde.
[¶2] Now at that time the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan had recently passed away at Pāvā. With his passing the Jain ascetics split, dividing into two factions, fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words:
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato hoti. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti:
[¶3] “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!”
> Pali: “na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi? Micchāpaṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammāpaṭipanno. Sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te. Purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca. Adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī”ti.
[¶4] You’d think there was nothing but slaughter going on among the Jain ascetics. And the Jain Ñātika’s white-clothed lay disciples were disillusioned, dismayed, and disappointed in the Jain ascetics. They were equally disappointed with a teaching and training so poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha, with broken monument and without a refuge.
> Pali: Vadhoyeva kho maññe nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu vattati. Yepi nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvakā gihī odātavasanā, tepi nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu nibbinnarūpā virattarūpā paṭivānarūpā, yathā taṁ durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe.
[¶5] And then, after completing the rainy season residence near Pāvā, the novice Cunda went to see Venerable Ānanda at Sāma village. He bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho cundo samaṇuddeso pāvāyaṁ vassaṁvuṭṭho yena sāmagāmo, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho cundo samaṇuddeso āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavoca: “nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā …pe… bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe”ti.
[¶6] Ānanda said to him, “Reverend Cunda, we should see the Buddha about this matter. Come, let’s go to the Buddha and tell him about this.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, āyasmā ānando cundaṁ samaṇuddesaṁ etadavoca: “atthi kho idaṁ, āvuso cunda, kathāpābhataṁ bhagavantaṁ dassanāya. Āyāmāvuso cunda, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṁ bhagavato ārocessāmā”ti.
[¶7] “Yes, sir,” replied Cunda.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho cundo samaṇuddeso āyasmato ānandassa paccassosi.
[¶8] Then Ānanda and Cunda went to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and told him what had happened.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā ca ānando cundo ca samaṇuddeso yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “ayaṁ, bhante, cundo samaṇuddeso evamāha, ‘nigaṇṭho, bhante, nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato, tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā …pe… bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe’”ti.
[¶9] 1. The Teaching of the Unawakened
> Pali: 1. Asammāsambuddhappaveditadhammavinaya
[¶10] “That’s what happens, Cunda, when a teaching and training is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: “Evaṁ hetaṁ, cunda, hoti durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶11] Take the case where a teacher is not awakened, and the teaching is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha. A disciple in that teaching does not practice in line with the teaching, does not practice following that procedure, does not live in line with the teaching. They proceed having turned away from that teaching. You should say this to them, ‘You’re fortunate, reverend, you’re so very fortunate! For your teacher is not awakened, and their teaching is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha. But you don’t practice in line with that teaching, you don’t practice following that procedure, you don’t live in line with the teaching. You proceed having turned away from that teaching.’ In such a case the teacher and the teaching are to blame, but the disciple deserves praise. Suppose someone was to say to such a disciple, ‘Come on, venerable, practice as taught and pointed out by your teacher.’ The one who encourages, the one who they encourage, and the one who practices accordingly all brim with much wickedness. Why is that? It’s because that teaching and training is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Idha, cunda, satthā ca hoti asammāsambuddho, dhammo ca durakkhāto duppavedito aniyyāniko anupasamasaṁvattaniko asammāsambuddhappavedito, sāvako ca tasmiṁ dhamme na dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharati na sāmīcippaṭipanno na anudhammacārī, vokkamma ca tamhā dhammā vattati. So evamassa vacanīyo: ‘tassa te, āvuso, lābhā, tassa te suladdhaṁ, satthā ca te asammāsambuddho, dhammo ca durakkhāto duppavedito aniyyāniko anupasamasaṁvattaniko asammāsambuddhappavedito. Tvañca tasmiṁ dhamme na dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharasi, na sāmīcippaṭipanno, na anudhammacārī, vokkamma ca tamhā dhammā vattasī’ti. Iti kho, cunda, satthāpi tattha gārayho, dhammopi tattha gārayho, sāvako ca tattha evaṁ pāsaṁso. Yo kho, cunda, evarūpaṁ sāvakaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘etāyasmā tathā paṭipajjatu, yathā te satthārā dhammo desito paññatto’ti. Yo ca samādapeti, yañca samādapeti, yo ca samādapito tathattāya paṭipajjati. Sabbe te bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evaṁ hetaṁ, cunda, hoti durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶12] Take the case where a teacher is not awakened, and the teaching is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha. A disciple in that teaching practices in line with the teaching, practices following that procedure, lives in line with the teaching. They proceed having undertaken that teaching. You should say this to them, ‘It’s your loss, reverend, it’s your misfortune! For your teacher is not awakened, and their teaching is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha. And you practice in line with that teaching, you practice following that procedure, you live in line with the teaching. You proceed having undertaken that teaching.’ In such a case the teacher, the teaching, and the disciple are all to blame. Suppose someone was to say to such a disciple, ‘Clearly the venerable is practicing systematically and will succeed in that system.’ The one who praises, the one who they praise, and the one who, being praised, rouses up even more energy all brim with much wickedness. Why is that? It’s because that teaching and training is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Idha pana, cunda, satthā ca hoti asammāsambuddho, dhammo ca durakkhāto duppavedito aniyyāniko anupasamasaṁvattaniko asammāsambuddhappavedito, sāvako ca tasmiṁ dhamme dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharati sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, samādāya taṁ dhammaṁ vattati. So evamassa vacanīyo: ‘tassa te, āvuso, alābhā, tassa te dulladdhaṁ, satthā ca te asammāsambuddho, dhammo ca durakkhāto duppavedito aniyyāniko anupasamasaṁvattaniko asammāsambuddhappavedito. Tvañca tasmiṁ dhamme dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharasi sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, samādāya taṁ dhammaṁ vattasī’ti. Iti kho, cunda, satthāpi tattha gārayho, dhammopi tattha gārayho, sāvakopi tattha evaṁ gārayho. Yo kho, cunda, evarūpaṁ sāvakaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘addhāyasmā ñāyappaṭipanno ñāyamārādhessatī’ti. Yo ca pasaṁsati, yañca pasaṁsati, yo ca pasaṁsito bhiyyoso mattāya vīriyaṁ ārabhati. Sabbe te bahuṁ apuññaṁ pasavanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, cunda, hoti durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶13] 2. The Teaching of the Awakened
> Pali: 2. Sammāsambuddhappaveditadhammavinaya
[¶14] Take the case where a teacher is awakened, and the teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha. A disciple in that teaching does not practice in line with the teaching, does not practice following that procedure, does not live in line with the teaching. They proceed having turned away from that teaching. You should say this to them, ‘It’s your loss, reverend, it’s your misfortune! For your teacher is awakened, and their teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha. But you don’t practice in line with that teaching, you don’t practice following that procedure, you don’t live in line with the teaching. You proceed having turned away from that teaching.’ In such a case the teacher and the teaching deserve praise, but the disciple is to blame. Suppose someone was to say to such a disciple, ‘Come on, venerable, practice as taught and pointed out by your teacher.’ The one who encourages, the one who they encourage, and the one who practices accordingly all brim with much merit. Why is that? It’s because that teaching and training is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Idha pana, cunda, satthā ca hoti sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito, sāvako ca tasmiṁ dhamme na dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharati, na sāmīcippaṭipanno, na anudhammacārī, vokkamma ca tamhā dhammā vattati. So evamassa vacanīyo: ‘tassa te, āvuso, alābhā, tassa te dulladdhaṁ, satthā ca te sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito. Tvañca tasmiṁ dhamme na dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharasi, na sāmīcippaṭipanno, na anudhammacārī, vokkamma ca tamhā dhammā vattasī’ti. Iti kho, cunda, satthāpi tattha pāsaṁso, dhammopi tattha pāsaṁso, sāvako ca tattha evaṁ gārayho. Yo kho, cunda, evarūpaṁ sāvakaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘etāyasmā tathā paṭipajjatu yathā te satthārā dhammo desito paññatto’ti. Yo ca samādapeti, yañca samādapeti, yo ca samādapito tathattāya paṭipajjati. Sabbe te bahuṁ puññaṁ pasavanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, cunda, hoti svākkhāte dhammavinaye suppavedite niyyānike upasamasaṁvattanike sammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶15] Take the case where a teacher is awakened, and the teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha. A disciple in that teaching practices in line with the teaching, practices following that procedure, lives in line with the teaching. They proceed having undertaken that teaching. You should say this to them, ‘You’re fortunate, reverend, you’re so very fortunate! For your teacher is awakened, and their teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha. And you practice in line with that teaching, you practice following that procedure, you live in line with the teaching. You proceed having undertaken that teaching.’ In such a case the teacher, the teaching, and the disciple all deserve praise. Suppose someone was to say to such a disciple, ‘Clearly the venerable is practicing systematically and will succeed in that system.’ The one who praises, the one who they praise, and the one who, being praised, rouses up even more energy all brim with much merit. Why is that? It’s because that teaching and training is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha.
> Pali: Idha pana, cunda, satthā ca hoti sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito, sāvako ca tasmiṁ dhamme dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharati sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, samādāya taṁ dhammaṁ vattati. So evamassa vacanīyo: ‘tassa te, āvuso, lābhā, tassa te suladdhaṁ, satthā ca te sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito. Tvañca tasmiṁ dhamme dhammānudhammappaṭipanno viharasi sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, samādāya taṁ dhammaṁ vattasī’ti. Iti kho, cunda, satthāpi tattha pāsaṁso, dhammopi tattha pāsaṁso, sāvakopi tattha evaṁ pāsaṁso. Yo kho, cunda, evarūpaṁ sāvakaṁ evaṁ vadeyya: ‘addhāyasmā ñāyappaṭipanno ñāyamārādhessatī’ti. Yo ca pasaṁsati, yañca pasaṁsati, yo ca pasaṁsito bhiyyoso mattāya vīriyaṁ ārabhati. Sabbe te bahuṁ puññaṁ pasavanti. Taṁ kissa hetu? Evañhetaṁ, cunda, hoti svākkhāte dhammavinaye suppavedite niyyānike upasamasaṁvattanike sammāsambuddhappavedite.
[¶16] 3. When Disciples Have Regrets
> Pali: 3. Sāvakānutappasatthu
[¶17] Take the case where a teacher arises in the world who is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is fully awakened. But the disciples have not been educated in the meaning of that good teaching. And the spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure has not been disclosed and divulged to them; its sayings have not all been collected; and it has not been fully revealed with its demonstrable basis among gods and humans. And then their teacher passes away. When such a teacher has passed away the disciples are tormented by regrets. Why is that? They think: ‘Our teacher was perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. His teaching was well explained, but we were not educated in its meaning. And the spiritual practice was not fully disclosed and divulged to us; its sayings have not all been collected; and it has not been fully revealed with its demonstrable basis among gods and humans. And then our teacher passed away.’ When such a teacher has passed away the disciples are tormented by regrets.
> Pali: Idha pana, cunda, satthā ca loke udapādi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito, aviññāpitatthā cassa honti sāvakā saddhamme, na ca tesaṁ kevalaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ āvikataṁ hoti uttānīkataṁ sabbasaṅgāhapadakataṁ sappāṭihīrakataṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Atha nesaṁ satthuno antaradhānaṁ hoti. Evarūpo kho, cunda, satthā sāvakānaṁ kālaṅkato anutappo hoti. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Satthā ca no loke udapādi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito, aviññāpitatthā camha saddhamme, na ca no kevalaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ āvikataṁ hoti uttānīkataṁ sabbasaṅgāhapadakataṁ sappāṭihīrakataṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Atha no satthuno antaradhānaṁ hotī’ti. Evarūpo kho, cunda, satthā sāvakānaṁ kālaṅkato anutappo hoti.
[¶18] 4. When Disciples Have No Regrets
> Pali: 4. Sāvakānanutappasatthu
[¶19] Take the case where a teacher arises in the world who is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. The teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is fully awakened. The disciples have been educated in the meaning of that good teaching. And the spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure has been disclosed and divulged to them; its sayings have all been collected; and it has been fully revealed with its demonstrable basis among gods and humans. And then their teacher passes away. When such a teacher has passed away the disciples are free of regrets. Why is that? They think: ‘Our teacher was perfected, a fully awakened Buddha. His teaching was well explained, we were educated in its meaning, and the spiritual practice was fully revealed to us. And then our teacher passed away.’ When such a teacher has passed away the disciples are free of regrets.
> Pali: Idha pana, cunda, satthā ca loke udapādi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. Dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito. Viññāpitatthā cassa honti sāvakā saddhamme, kevalañca tesaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ āvikataṁ hoti uttānīkataṁ sabbasaṅgāhapadakataṁ sappāṭihīrakataṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Atha nesaṁ satthuno antaradhānaṁ hoti. Evarūpo kho, cunda, satthā sāvakānaṁ kālaṅkato ananutappo hoti. Taṁ kissa hetu? ‘Satthā ca no loke udapādi arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. Dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito. Viññāpitatthā camha saddhamme, kevalañca no paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ āvikataṁ hoti uttānīkataṁ sabbasaṅgāhapadakataṁ sappāṭihīrakataṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Atha no satthuno antaradhānaṁ hotī’ti. Evarūpo kho, cunda, satthā sāvakānaṁ kālaṅkato ananutappo hoti.
[¶20] 5. On the Incomplete Spiritual Path, Etc.
> Pali: 5. Brahmacariyaaparipūrādikathā
[¶21] Now suppose, Cunda, that a spiritual path possesses those factors. But the teacher is not senior, long standing, long gone forth, advanced in years, and reached the final stage of life. Then that spiritual path is incomplete in that respect.
> Pali: Etehi cepi, cunda, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ hoti, no ca kho satthā hoti thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Evaṁ taṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ hoti tenaṅgena.
[¶22] But when a spiritual path possesses those factors and the teacher is senior, then that spiritual path is complete in that respect.
> Pali: Yato ca kho, cunda, etehi ceva aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ hoti, satthā ca hoti thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto. Evaṁ taṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ hoti tenaṅgena.
[¶23] Now suppose that a spiritual path possesses those factors and the teacher is senior. But there are no senior monk disciples who are competent, educated, self-assured, have attained sanctuary from the yoke, who can rightly explain the true teaching, and who can legitimately and completely refute the doctrines of others that come up, and teach with a demonstrable basis. Then that spiritual path is incomplete in that respect.
> Pali: Etehi cepi, cunda, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ hoti, satthā ca hoti thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto, no ca khvassa therā bhikkhū sāvakā honti viyattā vinītā visāradā pattayogakkhemā. Alaṁ samakkhātuṁ saddhammassa, alaṁ uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammehi suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desetuṁ. Evaṁ taṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ hoti tenaṅgena.
[¶24] But when a spiritual path possesses those factors and the teacher is senior and there are competent senior monks, then that spiritual path is complete in that respect.
> Pali: Yato ca kho, cunda, etehi ceva aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ hoti, satthā ca hoti thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto, therā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti viyattā vinītā visāradā pattayogakkhemā. Alaṁ samakkhātuṁ saddhammassa, alaṁ uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammehi suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desetuṁ. Evaṁ taṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ hoti tenaṅgena.
[¶25] Now suppose that a spiritual path possesses those factors and the teacher is senior and there are competent senior monks. But there are no competent middle monks, junior monks, senior nuns, middle nuns, junior nuns, chaste white-clothed laymen, white-clothed laymen enjoying sensual pleasures, chaste white-clothed laywomen, white-clothed laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures. … There are white-clothed laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures, but the spiritual path is not successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans … the spiritual path is successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans, but it has not reached the peak of material things and fame. Then that spiritual path is incomplete in that respect.
> Pali: Etehi cepi, cunda, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ hoti, satthā ca hoti thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto, therā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti viyattā vinītā visāradā pattayogakkhemā. Alaṁ samakkhātuṁ saddhammassa, alaṁ uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammehi suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desetuṁ. No ca khvassa majjhimā bhikkhū sāvakā honti …pe… majjhimā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti, no ca khvassa navā bhikkhū sāvakā honti …pe… navā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti, no ca khvassa therā bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti …pe… therā cassa bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti, no ca khvassa majjhimā bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti …pe… majjhimā cassa bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti, no ca khvassa navā bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti …pe… navā cassa bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti, no ca khvassa upāsakā sāvakā honti gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino …pe… upāsakā cassa sāvakā honti gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino, no ca khvassa upāsakā sāvakā honti gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino …pe… upāsakā cassa sāvakā honti gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino, no ca khvassa upāsikā sāvikā honti gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo …pe… upāsikā cassa sāvikā honti gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo, no ca khvassa upāsikā sāvikā honti gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo …pe… upāsikā cassa sāvikā honti gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo, no ca khvassa brahmacariyaṁ hoti iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ …pe… brahmacariyañcassa hoti iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ, no ca kho lābhaggayasaggappattaṁ. Evaṁ taṁ brahmacariyaṁ aparipūraṁ hoti tenaṅgena.
[¶26] But when a spiritual path possesses those factors and the teacher is senior and there are competent senior monks, middle monks, junior monks, senior nuns, middle nuns, junior nuns, chaste laymen, laymen enjoying sensual pleasures, chaste laywomen, laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures, and the spiritual path is successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans, and it has reached the peak of material things and fame, then that spiritual path is complete in that respect.
> Pali: Yato ca kho, cunda, etehi ceva aṅgehi samannāgataṁ brahmacariyaṁ hoti, satthā ca hoti thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto, therā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti viyattā vinītā visāradā pattayogakkhemā. Alaṁ samakkhātuṁ saddhammassa, alaṁ uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammehi suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desetuṁ. Majjhimā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti … navā cassa bhikkhū sāvakā honti … therā cassa bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti … majjhimā cassa bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti … navā cassa bhikkhuniyo sāvikā honti … upāsakā cassa sāvakā honti … gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino. Upāsakā cassa sāvakā honti gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino … upāsikā cassa sāvikā honti gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo … upāsikā cassa sāvikā honti gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo … brahmacariyañcassa hoti iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ, lābhaggappattañca yasaggappattañca. Evaṁ taṁ brahmacariyaṁ paripūraṁ hoti tenaṅgena.
[¶27] I, Cunda, am a teacher who has arisen in the world today, perfected and fully awakened. The teaching is well explained and well propounded, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is fully awakened. My disciples have been educated in the meaning of that good teaching. And the spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure has been disclosed and divulged to them with all its collected sayings, with its demonstrable basis, fully revealed among gods and humans. I am a teacher today who is senior, long standing, long gone forth, advanced in years, and have reached the final stage of life.
> Pali: Ahaṁ kho pana, cunda, etarahi satthā loke uppanno arahaṁ sammāsambuddho. Dhammo ca svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito. Viññāpitatthā ca me sāvakā saddhamme, kevalañca tesaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ āvikataṁ uttānīkataṁ sabbasaṅgāhapadakataṁ sappāṭihīrakataṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ. Ahaṁ kho pana, cunda, etarahi satthā thero rattaññū cirapabbajito addhagato vayoanuppatto.
[¶28] I have today disciples who are competent senior monks, middle monks, junior monks, senior nuns, middle nuns, junior nuns, chaste laymen, laymen enjoying sensual pleasures, chaste laywomen, and laywomen enjoying sensual pleasures. Today my spiritual path is successful and prosperous, extensive, popular, widespread, and fully revealed among gods and humans.
> Pali: Santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi therā bhikkhū sāvakā honti viyattā vinītā visāradā pattayogakkhemā. Alaṁ samakkhātuṁ saddhammassa, alaṁ uppannaṁ parappavādaṁ sahadhammehi suniggahitaṁ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṁ dhammaṁ desetuṁ. Santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi majjhimā bhikkhū sāvakā … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi navā bhikkhū sāvakā … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi therā bhikkhuniyo sāvikā … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi majjhimā bhikkhuniyo sāvikā … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi navā bhikkhuniyo sāvikā … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi upāsakā sāvakā gihī odātavasanā brahmacārino … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi upāsakā sāvakā gihī odātavasanā kāmabhogino … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi upāsikā sāvikā gihiniyo odātavasanā brahmacāriniyo … santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi upāsikā sāvikā gihiniyo odātavasanā kāmabhoginiyo … etarahi kho pana me, cunda, brahmacariyaṁ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṁ bāhujaññaṁ puthubhūtaṁ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitaṁ.
[¶29] Of all the teachers in the world today, Cunda, I don’t see even a single one who has reached the peak of material things and fame like me. Of all the spiritual communities and groups in the world today, Cunda, I don’t see even a single one who has reached the pinnacle of material things and fame like the mendicant Saṅgha. And if there’s any spiritual path of which it may be rightly said that it’s endowed with all good qualities, complete in all good qualities, neither too little nor too much, well explained, whole, complete, and fully revealed, it’s of this spiritual path that this should be said.
> Pali: Yāvatā kho, cunda, etarahi satthāro loke uppannā, nāhaṁ, cunda, aññaṁ ekasatthārampi samanupassāmi evaṁlābhaggayasaggappattaṁ yatharivāhaṁ. Yāvatā kho pana, cunda, etarahi saṅgho vā gaṇo vā loke uppanno; nāhaṁ, cunda, aññaṁ ekasaṅghampi samanupassāmi evaṁlābhaggayasaggappattaṁ yatharivāyaṁ, cunda, bhikkhusaṅgho. Yaṁ kho taṁ, cunda, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘sabbākārasampannaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ anūnamanadhikaṁ svākkhātaṁ kevalaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ suppakāsitan’ti. Idameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘sabbākārasampannaṁ …pe… suppakāsitan’ti.
[¶30] Uddaka son of Rāma used to say: ‘Seeing, one does not see.’ But seeing what does one not see? You can see the blade of a well-sharpened razor, but not the edge. Thus it is said: ‘Seeing, one does not see.’ But that saying of Uddaka’s is low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless, as it’s only about a razor. If there’s anything of which it may be rightly said: ‘Seeing, one does not see,’ it’s of this that it should be said. Seeing what does one not see? One sees this: a spiritual path endowed with all good qualities, complete in all good qualities, neither too little nor too much, well explained, whole, complete, and fully revealed. One does not see this: anything that, were it to be removed, would make it purer. One does not see this: anything that, were it to be added, would make it more complete. Thus it is rightly said: ‘Seeing, one does not see.’
> Pali: Udako sudaṁ, cunda, rāmaputto evaṁ vācaṁ bhāsati: ‘passaṁ na passatī’ti. Kiñca passaṁ na passatīti? Khurassa sādhunisitassa talamassa passati, dhārañca khvassa na passati. Idaṁ vuccati: ‘passaṁ na passatī’ti. Yaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, udakena rāmaputtena bhāsitaṁ hīnaṁ gammaṁ pothujjanikaṁ anariyaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ khurameva sandhāya. Yañca taṁ, cunda, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘passaṁ na passatī’ti, idameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘passaṁ na passatī’ti. Kiñca passaṁ na passatīti? Evaṁ sabbākārasampannaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ anūnamanadhikaṁ svākkhātaṁ kevalaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ suppakāsitanti, iti hetaṁ passati. Idamettha apakaḍḍheyya, evaṁ taṁ parisuddhataraṁ assāti, iti hetaṁ na passati. Idamettha upakaḍḍheyya, evaṁ taṁ paripūraṁ assāti, iti hetaṁ na passati. Idaṁ vuccati, cunda: ‘passaṁ na passatī’ti. Yaṁ kho taṁ, cunda, sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘sabbākārasampannaṁ …pe… brahmacariyaṁ suppakāsitan’ti. Idameva taṁ sammā vadamāno vadeyya: ‘sabbākārasampannaṁ sabbākāraparipūraṁ anūnamanadhikaṁ svākkhātaṁ kevalaṁ paripūraṁ brahmacariyaṁ suppakāsitan’ti.
[¶31] 6. Teachings Should be Recited in Concert
> Pali: 6. Saṅgāyitabbadhamma
[¶32] So, Cunda, you should all come together and recite in concert, without disputing, those things I have taught you from my direct knowledge, comparing meaning with meaning and phrasing with phrasing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans. And what are those things I have taught from my direct knowledge? They are the four kinds of mindfulness meditation, the four right efforts, the four bases of psychic power, the five faculties, the five powers, the seven awakening factors, and the noble eightfold path. These are the things I have taught from my own direct knowledge.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, cunda, ye vo mayā dhammā abhiññā desitā, tattha sabbeheva saṅgamma samāgamma atthena atthaṁ byañjanena byañjanaṁ saṅgāyitabbaṁ na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame ca te, cunda, dhammā mayā abhiññā desitā, yattha sabbeheva saṅgamma samāgamma atthena atthaṁ byañjanena byañjanaṁ saṅgāyitabbaṁ na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ? Seyyathidaṁ—cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Ime kho te, cunda, dhammā mayā abhiññā desitā. Yattha sabbeheva saṅgamma samāgamma atthena atthaṁ byañjanena byañjanaṁ saṅgāyitabbaṁ na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶33] 7. Reaching Agreement
> Pali: 7. Saññāpetabbavidhi
[¶34] Suppose one of those spiritual companions who is training in harmony and mutual appreciation, without disputing, were to recite the teaching in the Saṅgha. Now, you might think, ‘This venerable misconstrues the meaning and mistakes the phrasing.’ You should neither approve nor reject them, but say, ‘Reverend, if this is the meaning, the phrasing may either be this or that: which is more fitting? And if this is the phrasing, the meaning may be either this or that: which is more fitting?’ Suppose they reply, ‘This phrasing fits the meaning better than that. And this meaning fits the phrasing better than that.’ Without flattering or rebuking them, you should carefully persuade them by examining that meaning and that phrasing.
> Pali: Tesañca vo, cunda, samaggānaṁ sammodamānānaṁ avivadamānānaṁ sikkhataṁ aññataro sabrahmacārī saṅghe dhammaṁ bhāseyya. Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā atthañceva micchā gaṇhāti, byañjanāni ca micchā ropetī’ti. Tassa neva abhinanditabbaṁ na paṭikkositabbaṁ, anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā so evamassa vacanīyo: ‘imassa nu kho, āvuso, atthassa imāni vā byañjanāni etāni vā byañjanāni katamāni opāyikatarāni, imesañca byañjanānaṁ ayaṁ vā attho eso vā attho katamo opāyikataro’ti? So ce evaṁ vadeyya: ‘imassa kho, āvuso, atthassa imāneva byañjanāni opāyikatarāni, yā ceva etāni; imesañca byañjanānaṁ ayameva attho opāyikataro, yā ceva eso’ti. So neva ussādetabbo na apasādetabbo, anussādetvā anapasādetvā sveva sādhukaṁ saññāpetabbo tassa ca atthassa tesañca byañjanānaṁ nisantiyā.
[¶35] Suppose another spiritual companion were to recite the teaching in the Saṅgha. Now, you might think, ‘This venerable misconstrues the meaning but gets the phrasing right.’ You should neither approve nor reject them, but say, ‘Reverend, if this is the phrasing, the meaning may be either this or that: which is more fitting?’ Suppose they reply, ‘This meaning fits the phrasing better than that.’ Without flattering or rebuking, you should carefully persuade them by examining that meaning.
> Pali: Aparopi ce, cunda, sabrahmacārī saṅghe dhammaṁ bhāseyya. Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā atthañhi kho micchā gaṇhāti byañjanāni sammā ropetī’ti. Tassa neva abhinanditabbaṁ na paṭikkositabbaṁ, anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā so evamassa vacanīyo: ‘imesaṁ nu kho, āvuso, byañjanānaṁ ayaṁ vā attho eso vā attho katamo opāyikataro’ti? So ce evaṁ vadeyya: ‘imesaṁ kho, āvuso, byañjanānaṁ ayameva attho opāyikataro, yā ceva eso’ti. So neva ussādetabbo na apasādetabbo, anussādetvā anapasādetvā sveva sādhukaṁ saññāpetabbo tasseva atthassa nisantiyā.
[¶36] Suppose another spiritual companion were to recite the teaching in the Saṅgha. Now, you might think, ‘This venerable construes the meaning correctly but mistakes the phrasing.’ You should neither approve nor reject them, but say, ‘Reverend, if this is the meaning, the phrasing may be either this or that: which is more fitting?’ Suppose they reply, ‘This phrasing fits the meaning better than that.’ Without flattering or rebuking, you should carefully persuade them by examining that phrasing.
> Pali: Aparopi ce, cunda, sabrahmacārī saṅghe dhammaṁ bhāseyya. Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā atthañhi kho sammā gaṇhāti byañjanāni micchā ropetī’ti. Tassa neva abhinanditabbaṁ na paṭikkositabbaṁ; anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā so evamassa vacanīyo: ‘imassa nu kho, āvuso, atthassa imāni vā byañjanāni etāni vā byañjanāni katamāni opāyikatarānī’ti? So ce evaṁ vadeyya: ‘imassa kho, āvuso, atthassa imāneva byañjanāni opayikatarāni, yā ceva etānī’ti. So neva ussādetabbo na apasādetabbo; anussādetvā anapasādetvā sveva sādhukaṁ saññāpetabbo tesaññeva byañjanānaṁ nisantiyā.
## 59. DN 29 · An Impressive Discourse · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/59/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/59/#p-N
[¶0] Suppose another spiritual companion were to recite the teaching in the Saṅgha. Now, you might think, ‘This venerable construes the meaning correctly and gets the phrasing right.’ Saying ‘Good!’ you should express approval and appreciation of that mendicant’s statement, and then say to them, ‘We are fortunate, reverend, so very fortunate to see a venerable such as yourself, so well-versed in the meaning and the phrasing, as one of our spiritual companions!’
> Pali: Aparopi ce, cunda, sabrahmacārī saṅghe dhammaṁ bhāseyya. Tatra ce tumhākaṁ evamassa: ‘ayaṁ kho āyasmā atthañceva sammā gaṇhāti byañjanāni ca sammā ropetī’ti. Tassa ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditabbaṁ anumoditabbaṁ; tassa ‘sādhū’ti bhāsitaṁ abhinanditvā anumoditvā so evamassa vacanīyo: ‘lābhā no, āvuso, suladdhaṁ no, āvuso, ye mayaṁ āyasmantaṁ tādisaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ passāma evaṁ atthupetaṁ byañjanupetan’ti.
[¶1] 8. The Reasons for Allowing Requisites
> Pali: 8. Paccayānuññātakāraṇa
[¶2] Cunda, I do not teach you solely for restraining defilements that affect this life. Nor do I teach solely for protecting against defilements that affect lives to come. I teach both for restraining defilements that affect this life and protecting against defilements that affect lives to come.
> Pali: Na vo ahaṁ, cunda, diṭṭhadhammikānaṁyeva āsavānaṁ saṁvarāya dhammaṁ desemi. Na panāhaṁ, cunda, samparāyikānaṁyeva āsavānaṁ paṭighātāya dhammaṁ desemi. Diṭṭhadhammikānaṁ cevāhaṁ, cunda, āsavānaṁ saṁvarāya dhammaṁ desemi; samparāyikānañca āsavānaṁ paṭighātāya.
[¶3] And that’s why I have allowed robes for you that suffice only for the sake of warding off cold and heat; for warding off the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles; and for covering up the private parts. I have allowed almsfood for you that suffices only to sustain this body, avoid harm, and support spiritual practice; so that you will put an end to old discomfort and not give rise to new discomfort, and will keep on living blamelessly and at ease. I have allowed lodgings for you that suffice only for the sake of warding off cold and heat; for warding off the touch of flies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and reptiles; to shelter from harsh weather and to enjoy retreat. I have allowed medicines and supplies for the sick for you that suffice only for the sake of warding off the pains of illness and to promote good health.
> Pali: Tasmātiha, cunda, yaṁ vo mayā cīvaraṁ anuññātaṁ, alaṁ vo taṁ yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāya, uṇhassa paṭighātāya, ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ paṭighātāya, yāvadeva hirikopīnapaṭicchādanatthaṁ. Yo vo mayā piṇḍapāto anuññāto, alaṁ vo so yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya vihiṁsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāya, iti purāṇañca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāmi, navañca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro ca. Yaṁ vo mayā senāsanaṁ anuññātaṁ, alaṁ vo taṁ yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāya, uṇhassa paṭighātāya, ḍaṁsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassānaṁ paṭighātāya, yāvadeva utuparissayavinodanapaṭisallānārāmatthaṁ. Yo vo mayā gilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhāro anuññāto, alaṁ vo so yāvadeva uppannānaṁ veyyābādhikānaṁ vedanānaṁ paṭighātāya abyāpajjaparamatāya.
[¶4] 9. Indulgence in Pleasure
> Pali: 9. Sukhallikānuyoga
[¶5] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘The ascetics who follow the Sakyan live indulging in pleasure.’ You should say to them, ‘What is that indulgence in pleasure? For there are many different kinds of indulgence in pleasure.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘sukhallikānuyogamanuyuttā samaṇā sakyaputtiyā viharantī’ti. Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘katamo so, āvuso, sukhallikānuyogo? Sukhallikānuyogā hi bahū anekavihitā nānappakārakā’ti.
[¶6] These four kinds of indulgence in pleasure, Cunda, are low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. They don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. What four?
> Pali: Cattārome, cunda, sukhallikānuyogā hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasaṁhitā na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattanti. Katame cattāro?
[¶7] It’s when some fool makes themselves happy and pleased by killing living creatures. This is the first kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Idha, cunda, ekacco bālo pāṇe vadhitvā vadhitvā attānaṁ sukheti pīṇeti. Ayaṁ paṭhamo sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶8] Furthermore, someone makes themselves happy and pleased by theft. This is the second kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, cunda, idhekacco adinnaṁ ādiyitvā ādiyitvā attānaṁ sukheti pīṇeti. Ayaṁ dutiyo sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶9] Furthermore, someone makes themselves happy and pleased by lying. This is the third kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, cunda, idhekacco musā bhaṇitvā bhaṇitvā attānaṁ sukheti pīṇeti. Ayaṁ tatiyo sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶10] Furthermore, someone amuses themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. This is the fourth kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, cunda, idhekacco pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti. Ayaṁ catuttho sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶11] These are the four kinds of indulgence in pleasure that are low, crude, ordinary, ignoble, and pointless. They don’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment.
> Pali: Ime kho, cunda, cattāro sukhallikānuyogā hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasaṁhitā na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattanti.
[¶12] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘The ascetics who follow the Sakyan live indulging in pleasure in these four ways.’ They should be told, ‘Not so!’ It isn’t right to say that about you; it misrepresents you with an untruth.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ime cattāro sukhallikānuyoge anuyuttā samaṇā sakyaputtiyā viharantī’ti. Te vo ‘mā hevaṁ’ tissu vacanīyā. Na te vo sammā vadamānā vadeyyuṁ, abbhācikkheyyuṁ asatā abhūtena.
[¶13] Cunda, these four kinds of indulgence in pleasure lead solely to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. What four?
> Pali: Cattārome, cunda, sukhallikānuyogā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattanti. Katame cattāro?
[¶14] It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is the first kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Idha, cunda, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ paṭhamo sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶15] Furthermore, as the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, a mendicant enters and remains in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. This is the second kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, cunda, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ dutiyo sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶16] Furthermore, with the fading away of rapture, a mendicant enters and remains in the third absorption. They meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ This is the third kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, cunda, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ tatiyo sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶17] Furthermore, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, a mendicant enters and remains in the fourth absorption. It is without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. This is the fourth kind of indulgence in pleasure.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, cunda, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ catuttho sukhallikānuyogo.
[¶18] These are the four kinds of indulgence in pleasure which lead solely to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment.
> Pali: Ime kho, cunda, cattāro sukhallikānuyogā ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattanti.
[¶19] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘The ascetics who follow the Sakyan live indulging in pleasure in these four ways.’ They should be told, ‘Exactly so!’ It’s right to say that about you; it doesn’t misrepresent you with an untruth.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ime cattāro sukhallikānuyoge anuyuttā samaṇā sakyaputtiyā viharantī’ti. Te vo ‘evaṁ’ tissu vacanīyā. Sammā te vo vadamānā vadeyyuṁ, na te vo abbhācikkheyyuṁ asatā abhūtena.
[¶20] 10. The Benefits of Indulgence in Pleasure
> Pali: 10. Sukhallikānuyogānisaṁsa
[¶21] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘How many fruits and benefits may be expected by those who live indulging in pleasure in these four ways?’ You should say to them, ‘Four benefits may be expected by those who live indulging in pleasure in these four ways. What four?
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘ime panāvuso, cattāro sukhallikānuyoge anuyuttānaṁ viharataṁ kati phalāni katānisaṁsā pāṭikaṅkhā’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘ime kho, āvuso, cattāro sukhallikānuyoge anuyuttānaṁ viharataṁ cattāri phalāni cattāro ānisaṁsā pāṭikaṅkhā. Katame cattāro?
[¶22] Firstly, with the ending of three fetters a mendicant becomes a stream-enterer, not liable to be reborn in the underworld, assured, destined for awakening. This is the first fruit and benefit.
> Pali: Idhāvuso, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti avinipātadhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ phalaṁ, paṭhamo ānisaṁso.
[¶23] Furthermore, a mendicant—with the ending of three fetters, and the weakening of greed, hate, and delusion—becomes a once-returner. They come back to this world once only, then make an end of suffering. This is the second fruit and benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu tiṇṇaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā rāgadosamohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakideva imaṁ lokaṁ āgantvā dukkhassantaṁ karoti. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ phalaṁ, dutiyo ānisaṁso.
[¶24] Furthermore, with the ending of the five lower fetters, a mendicant is reborn spontaneously and will become extinguished there, not liable to return from that world. This is the third fruit and benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu pañcannaṁ orambhāgiyānaṁ saṁyojanānaṁ parikkhayā opapātiko hoti, tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ phalaṁ, tatiyo ānisaṁso.
[¶25] Furthermore, a mendicant realizes the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom, and lives having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements. This is the fourth fruit and benefit.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Idaṁ catutthaṁ phalaṁ catuttho ānisaṁso.
[¶26] These four benefits may be expected by those who live indulging in pleasure in these four ways.’
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, cattāro sukhallikānuyoge anuyuttānaṁ viharataṁ imāni cattāri phalāni, cattāro ānisaṁsā pāṭikaṅkhā’ti.
[¶27] 11. Things Impossible for the Perfected
> Pali: 11. Khīṇāsavaabhabbaṭhāna
[¶28] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘The ascetics who follow the Sakyan are fickle.’ You should say to them, ‘Reverends, these things have been taught and pointed out for his disciples by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, not to be transgressed so long as life lasts. Suppose there was an Indra’s pillar or an iron pillar with deep foundations, firmly embedded, imperturbable and unshakable. In the same way, these things have been taught and pointed out for his disciples by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha, not to be transgressed so long as life lasts.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘aṭṭhitadhammā samaṇā sakyaputtiyā viharantī’ti. Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sāvakānaṁ dhammā desitā paññattā yāvajīvaṁ anatikkamanīyā. Seyyathāpi, āvuso, indakhīlo vā ayokhīlo vā gambhīranemo sunikhāto acalo asampavedhī; evameva kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena sāvakānaṁ dhammā desitā paññattā yāvajīvaṁ anatikkamanīyā.
[¶29] A mendicant who is perfected—with defilements ended, who has completed the spiritual journey, done what had to be done, laid down the burden, achieved their heart’s goal, utterly ended the fetter of continued existence, and is rightly freed through enlightenment—can’t transgress in nine respects. A mendicant with defilements ended can’t deliberately take the life of a living creature, take something with the intention to steal, have sex, tell a deliberate lie, or store up goods for their own enjoyment like they used to as a layperson. And they can’t make decisions prejudiced by favoritism, hostility, stupidity, or cowardice. A mendicant who is perfected can’t transgress in these nine respects.’
> Pali: Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, abhabbo so nava ṭhānāni ajjhācarituṁ. Abhabbo, āvuso, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetuṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyituṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevituṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sampajānamusā bhāsituṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṁ kāme paribhuñjituṁ, seyyathāpi pubbe āgārikabhūto; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu chandāgatiṁ gantuṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu dosāgatiṁ gantuṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu mohāgatiṁ gantuṁ; abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu bhayāgatiṁ gantuṁ. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu arahaṁ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anuppattasadattho parikkhīṇabhavasaṁyojano sammadaññāvimutto, abhabbo so imāni nava ṭhānāni ajjhācaritun’ti.
[¶30] 12. Questions and Answers
> Pali: 12. Pañhābyākaraṇa
[¶31] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘The ascetic Gotama demonstrates boundless knowledge and vision of the past, but not of the future. What’s up with that?’ Those wanderers, like incompetent fools, seem to imagine that one kind of knowledge and vision can be demonstrated by means of another kind of knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘atītaṁ kho addhānaṁ ārabbha samaṇo gotamo atīrakaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paññapeti, no ca kho anāgataṁ addhānaṁ ārabbha atīrakaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paññapeti, tayidaṁ kiṁsu tayidaṁ kathaṁsū’ti? Te ca aññatitthiyā paribbājakā aññavihitakena ñāṇadassanena aññavihitakaṁ ñāṇadassanaṁ paññapetabbaṁ maññanti yathariva bālā abyattā.
[¶32] Regarding the past, the Realized One has knowledge stemming from memory. He recollects as far as he wants.
> Pali: Atītaṁ kho, cunda, addhānaṁ ārabbha tathāgatassa satānusāriñāṇaṁ hoti; so yāvatakaṁ ākaṅkhati tāvatakaṁ anussarati.
[¶33] Regarding the future, the Realized One has the knowledge born of awakening: ‘This is my last rebirth; now there’ll be no more future lives.’
> Pali: Anāgatañca kho addhānaṁ ārabbha tathāgatassa bodhijaṁ ñāṇaṁ uppajjati: ‘ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’ti.
[¶34] If a question about the past is untrue, false, and pointless, the Realized One does not reply. If a question about the past is true and correct, but pointless, he does not reply. If a question about the past is true, correct, and beneficial, he knows the right time to reply. And the Realized One replies to questions about the future or the present in the same way.
> Pali: Atītañcepi, cunda, hoti abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na taṁ tathāgato byākaroti. Atītañcepi, cunda, hoti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, tampi tathāgato na byākaroti. Atītañcepi, cunda, hoti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇāya. Anāgatañcepi, cunda, hoti abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na taṁ tathāgato byākaroti …pe… tassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇāya. Paccuppannañcepi, cunda, hoti abhūtaṁ atacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, na taṁ tathāgato byākaroti. Paccuppannañcepi, cunda, hoti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ anatthasaṁhitaṁ, tampi tathāgato na byākaroti. Paccuppannañcepi, cunda, hoti bhūtaṁ tacchaṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇāya.
[¶35] And so the Realized One has speech that’s well-timed, true, meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. That’s why he’s called the ‘Realized One’.
> Pali: Iti kho, cunda, atītānāgatapaccuppannesu dhammesu tathāgato kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccati.
[¶36] In this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, its gods and humans—whatever is seen, heard, thought, known, attained, sought, and explored by the mind, all that has been understood by the Realized One. That’s why he’s called the ‘Realized One’.
> Pali: Yañca kho, cunda, sadevakassa lokassa samārakassa sabrahmakassa sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṁ sutaṁ mutaṁ viññātaṁ pattaṁ pariyesitaṁ anuvicaritaṁ manasā, sabbaṁ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṁ, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccati.
[¶37] From the night when the Realized One awakens to the supreme perfect awakening until the night he becomes fully extinguished—in the element of extinguishment with no residue—everything he speaks, says, and expresses is real, not otherwise. That’s why he’s called the ‘Realized One’.
> Pali: Yañca, cunda, rattiṁ tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṁ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṁ etasmiṁ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati. Sabbaṁ taṁ tatheva hoti no aññathā, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccati.
[¶38] The Realized One does as he says, and says as he does. Since this is so, that’s why he’s called the ‘Realized One’. In this world—with its gods, Māras, and divinities, this population with its ascetics and brahmins, gods and humans—the Realized One is the vanquisher, the unvanquished, the universal seer, the wielder of power.
> Pali: Yathāvādī, cunda, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccati. Sadevake loke, cunda, samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccati.
[¶39] 13. The Undeclared Points
> Pali: 13. Abyākataṭṭhāna
[¶40] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘Is this your view: “A realized one still exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile”?’ You should say to them, ‘Reverend, this has not been declared by the Buddha.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kiṁ nu kho, āvuso, hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘abyākataṁ kho etaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā: “hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan”’ti.
[¶41] The wanderers might say, ‘Then is this your view: “A realized one no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile”?’ You should say to them, ‘This too has not been declared by the Buddha.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kiṁ panāvuso, na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘etampi kho, āvuso, bhagavatā abyākataṁ: “na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan”’ti.
[¶42] The wanderers might say, ‘Then is this your view: “A realized one both still exists and no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile”?’ You should say to them, ‘This too has not been declared by the Buddha.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kiṁ panāvuso, hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘abyākataṁ kho etaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā: “hoti ca na ca hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan”’ti.
[¶43] The wanderers might say, ‘Then is this your view: “A realized one neither still exists nor no longer exists after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile”?’ You should say to them, ‘This too has not been declared by the Buddha.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kiṁ panāvuso, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘etampi kho, āvuso, bhagavatā abyākataṁ: “neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan”’ti.
[¶44] The wanderers might say, ‘But why has this not been declared by the ascetic Gotama?’ You should say to them, ‘Because it’s not beneficial or relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. It doesn’t lead to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why it hasn’t been declared by the Buddha.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kasmā panetaṁ, āvuso, samaṇena gotamena abyākatan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘na hetaṁ, āvuso, atthasaṁhitaṁ na dhammasaṁhitaṁ na ādibrahmacariyakaṁ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṁvattati, tasmā taṁ bhagavatā abyākatan’ti.
[¶45] 14. The Declared Points
> Pali: 14. Byākataṭṭhāna
[¶46] It’s possible that wanderers of other religions might say, ‘But what has been declared by the ascetic Gotama?’ You should say to them, ‘What has been declared by the Buddha is this: “This is suffering”—“This is the origin of suffering”—“This is the cessation of suffering”—“This is the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.”’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kiṁ panāvuso, samaṇena gotamena byākatan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘idaṁ dukkhanti kho, āvuso, bhagavatā byākataṁ, ayaṁ dukkhasamudayoti kho, āvuso, bhagavatā byākataṁ, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhoti kho, āvuso, bhagavatā byākataṁ, ayaṁ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti kho, āvuso, bhagavatā byākatan’ti.
[¶47] The wanderers might say, ‘But why has this been declared by the ascetic Gotama?’ You should say to them, ‘Because it’s beneficial and relevant to the fundamentals of the spiritual life. It leads to disillusionment, dispassion, cessation, peace, insight, awakening, and extinguishment. That’s why it has been declared by the Buddha.’
> Pali: Ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ, cunda, vijjati, yaṁ aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evaṁ vadeyyuṁ: ‘kasmā panetaṁ, āvuso, samaṇena gotamena byākatan’ti? Evaṁvādino, cunda, aññatitthiyā paribbājakā evamassu vacanīyā: ‘etañhi, āvuso, atthasaṁhitaṁ, etaṁ dhammasaṁhitaṁ, etaṁ ādibrahmacariyakaṁ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati. Tasmā taṁ bhagavatā byākatan’ti.
[¶48] 15. Views of the First Beginning
> Pali: 15. Pubbantasahagatadiṭṭhinissaya
[¶49] Cunda, I have explained to you as they should be explained the views that some rely on regarding the first beginning. Shall I explain them to you in the wrong way? I have explained to you as they should be explained the views that some rely on regarding the final end. Shall I explain them to you in the wrong way?
> Pali: Yepi te, cunda, pubbantasahagatā diṭṭhinissayā, tepi vo mayā byākatā, yathā te byākātabbā. Yathā ca te na byākātabbā, kiṁ vo ahaṁ te tathā byākarissāmi? Yepi te, cunda, aparantasahagatā diṭṭhinissayā, tepi vo mayā byākatā, yathā te byākātabbā. Yathā ca te na byākātabbā, kiṁ vo ahaṁ te tathā byākarissāmi?
[¶50] What are the views that some rely on regarding the first beginning? There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘The self and the cosmos are eternal. This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’ There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘The self and the cosmos are not eternal, or both eternal and not eternal, or neither eternal nor not eternal. The self and the cosmos are made by oneself, or made by another, or made by both oneself and another, or they have arisen anomalously, not made by oneself or another. Pleasure and pain are eternal, or not eternal, or both eternal and not eternal, or neither eternal nor not eternal. Pleasure and pain are made by oneself, or made by another, or made by both oneself and another, or they have arisen anomalously, not made by oneself or another. This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: Katame ca te, cunda, pubbantasahagatā diṭṭhinissayā, ye vo mayā byākatā, yathā te byākātabbā. Yathā ca te na byākātabbā, kiṁ vo ahaṁ te tathā byākarissāmi? Santi kho, cunda, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Santi pana, cunda, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘asassato attā ca loko ca …pe… sassato ca asassato ca attā ca loko ca … neva sassato nāsassato attā ca loko ca … sayaṅkato attā ca loko ca … paraṅkato attā ca loko ca … sayaṅkato ca paraṅkato ca attā ca loko ca … asayaṅkāro aparaṅkāro adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. ‘Sassataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … asassataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … sassatañca asassatañca sukhadukkhaṁ … nevasassataṁ nāsassataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … sayaṅkataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … paraṅkataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … sayaṅkatañca paraṅkatañca sukhadukkhaṁ … asayaṅkāraṁ aparaṅkāraṁ adhiccasamuppannaṁ sukhadukkhaṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti.
[¶51] Regarding this, I go up to the ascetics and brahmins whose view is that the self and the cosmos are eternal, and say, ‘Reverends, is this what you say, “The self and the cosmos are eternal”?’ But when they say, ‘Yes! This is the only truth, anything else is futile,’ I don’t grant that. Why is that? Because there are beings who have different opinions on this topic. I don’t see any such expositions that are equal to my own, still less superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher exposition.
> Pali: Tatra, cunda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘atthi nu kho idaṁ, āvuso, vuccati: “sassato attā ca loko cā”’ti? Yañca kho te evamāhaṁsu: ‘idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Taṁ tesaṁ nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathāsaññinopi hettha, cunda, santeke sattā. Imāyapi kho ahaṁ, cunda, paññattiyā neva attanā samasamaṁ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo yadidaṁ adhipaññatti.
[¶52] Regarding this, I go up to the ascetics and brahmins who assert all the other views as described above. And in each case, I don’t grant that. Why is that? Because there are beings who have different opinions on this topic. I don’t see any such expositions that are equal to my own, still less superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher exposition.
> Pali: Tatra, cunda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘asassato attā ca loko ca … sassato ca asassato ca attā ca loko ca … nevasassato nāsassato attā ca loko ca … sayaṅkato attā ca loko ca … paraṅkato attā ca loko ca … sayaṅkato ca paraṅkato ca attā ca loko ca … asayaṅkāro aparaṅkāro adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko ca … sassataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … asassataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … sassatañca asassatañca sukhadukkhaṁ … nevasassataṁ nāsassataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … sayaṅkataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … paraṅkataṁ sukhadukkhaṁ … sayaṅkatañca paraṅkatañca sukhadukkhaṁ … asayaṅkāraṁ aparaṅkāraṁ adhiccasamuppannaṁ sukhadukkhaṁ, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘atthi nu kho idaṁ, āvuso, vuccati: “asayaṅkāraṁ aparaṅkāraṁ adhiccasamuppannaṁ sukhadukkhan”’ti? Yañca kho te evamāhaṁsu: ‘idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Taṁ tesaṁ nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathāsaññinopi hettha, cunda, santeke sattā. Imāyapi kho ahaṁ, cunda, paññattiyā neva attanā samasamaṁ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo yadidaṁ adhipaññatti.
[¶53] These are the views that some rely on regarding the first beginning.
> Pali: Ime kho te, cunda, pubbantasahagatā diṭṭhinissayā, ye vo mayā byākatā, yathā te byākātabbā. Yathā ca te na byākātabbā, kiṁ vo ahaṁ te tathā byākarissāmi?
[¶54] 16. Views of the Final End
> Pali: 16. Aparantasahagatadiṭṭhinissaya
[¶55] What are the views that some rely on regarding the final end? There are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view: ‘The self is healthy after death, and formed … or formless … or both formed and formless … or neither formed nor formless … or percipient … or non-percipient … or neither percipient nor non-percipient … or the self is annihilated and destroyed when the body breaks up, and doesn’t exist after death. This is the only truth, anything else is futile.’
> Pali: Katame ca te, cunda, aparantasahagatā diṭṭhinissayā, ye vo mayā byākatā, yathā te byākātabbā. Yathā ca te na byākātabbā, kiṁ vo ahaṁ te tathā byākarissāmi? Santi, cunda, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Santi pana, cunda, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘arūpī attā hoti … rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti … nevarūpī nārūpī attā hoti … saññī attā hoti … asaññī attā hoti … nevasaññīnāsaññī attā hoti … attā ucchijjati vinassati na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti.
[¶56] Regarding this, I go up to the ascetics and brahmins whose view is that, ‘The self is formed and healthy after death,’ and say, ‘Reverends, is this what you say, “The self is formed and healthy after death”?’ But when they say, ‘Yes! This is the only truth, anything else is futile,’ I don’t grant that. Why is that? Because there are beings who have different opinions on this topic. I don’t see any such expositions that are equal to my own, still less superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher exposition.
> Pali: Tatra, cunda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘atthi nu kho idaṁ, āvuso, vuccati: “rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṁ maraṇā”’ti? Yañca kho te evamāhaṁsu: ‘idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Taṁ tesaṁ nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathāsaññinopi hettha, cunda, santeke sattā. Imāyapi kho ahaṁ, cunda, paññattiyā neva attanā samasamaṁ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo yadidaṁ adhipaññatti.
[¶57] Regarding this, I go up to the ascetics and brahmins who assert all the other views as described above. And in each case, I don’t grant that. Why is that? Because there are beings who have different opinions on this topic. I don’t see any such expositions that are equal to my own, still less superior. Rather, I am the one who is superior when it comes to the higher exposition.
> Pali: Tatra, cunda, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino: ‘arūpī attā hoti … rūpī ca arūpī ca attā hoti … nevarūpīnārūpī attā hoti … saññī attā hoti … asaññī attā hoti … nevasaññīnāsaññī attā hoti … attā ucchijjati vinassati na hoti paraṁ maraṇā, idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi: ‘atthi nu kho idaṁ, āvuso, vuccati: “attā ucchijjati vinassati na hoti paraṁ maraṇā”’ti? Yañca kho te, cunda, evamāhaṁsu: ‘idameva saccaṁ moghamaññan’ti. Taṁ tesaṁ nānujānāmi. Taṁ kissa hetu? Aññathāsaññinopi hettha, cunda, santeke sattā. Imāyapi kho ahaṁ, cunda, paññattiyā neva attanā samasamaṁ samanupassāmi, kuto bhiyyo. Atha kho ahameva tattha bhiyyo yadidaṁ adhipaññatti.
[¶58] These are the views that some rely on regarding the final end, which I have explained to you as they should be explained. Shall I explain them to you in the wrong way?
> Pali: Ime kho te, cunda, aparantasahagatā diṭṭhinissayā, ye vo mayā byākatā, yathā te byākātabbā. Yathā ca te na byākātabbā, kiṁ vo ahaṁ te tathā byākarissāmi?
[¶59] I have taught and pointed out the four kinds of mindfulness meditation for giving up and going beyond all these views of the first beginning and the final end. What four? It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. These are the four kinds of mindfulness meditation that I have taught for giving up and going beyond all these views of the first beginning and the final end.”
> Pali: Imesañca, cunda, pubbantasahagatānaṁ diṭṭhinissayānaṁ imesañca aparantasahagatānaṁ diṭṭhinissayānaṁ pahānāya samatikkamāya evaṁ mayā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā desitā paññattā. Katame cattāro? Idha, cunda, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe… citte cittānupassī …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Imesañca, cunda, pubbantasahagatānaṁ diṭṭhinissayānaṁ imesañca aparantasahagatānaṁ diṭṭhinissayānaṁ pahānāya samatikkamāya. Evaṁ mayā ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā desitā paññattā”ti.
[¶60] Now at that time Venerable Upavāṇa was standing behind the Buddha fanning him. He said to the Buddha, “It’s incredible, sir, it’s amazing! This exposition of the teaching is impressive, sir, it is very impressive. Sir, what is the name of this exposition of the teaching?”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upavāṇo bhagavato piṭṭhito ṭhito hoti bhagavantaṁ bījayamāno. Atha kho āyasmā upavāṇo bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “acchariyaṁ, bhante, abbhutaṁ, bhante. Pāsādiko vatāyaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo; supāsādiko vatāyaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo, ko nāmāyaṁ, bhante, dhammapariyāyo”ti?
[¶61] “Well then, Upavāṇa, you may remember this exposition of the teaching as ‘The Impressive Discourse’.”
> Pali: “Tasmātiha tvaṁ, upavāṇa, imaṁ dhammapariyāyaṁ ‘pāsādiko’ tveva naṁ dhārehī”ti.
[¶62] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, Venerable Upavāṇa approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā upavāṇo bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandīti.
[¶63] > Pali: Pāsādikasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ.
## 60. DN 30 · The Marks of a Great Man · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/60/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/60/#p-N
[¶0] DN 30 · The Marks of a Great Man
> Pali: DN 30 · Lakkhaṇasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Sāvatthī in Jeta’s Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s monastery. There the Buddha addressed the mendicants, “Mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi: “bhikkhavo”ti.
[¶2] “Venerable sir,” they replied. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Bhaddante”ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶3] “There are thirty-two marks of a great man. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other. If he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extends to all four sides, he achieves stability in the country, and he possesses the seven treasures. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea, he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the world’s veil.
> Pali: “Dvattiṁsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti; Seyyathidaṁ—cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado.
[¶4] And what are the thirty-two marks?
> Pali: Katamāni ca tāni, bhikkhave, dvattiṁsa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā? Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado.
[¶5] He has well-planted feet.
> Pali: Idha, bhikkhave, mahāpuriso suppatiṭṭhitapādo hoti. Yampi, bhikkhave, mahāpuriso suppatiṭṭhitapādo hoti, idampi, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶6] On the soles of his feet there are thousand-spoked wheels, with rims and hubs, complete in every detail.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni honti sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni. Yampi, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni honti sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni, idampi, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶7] He has stretched heels.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, mahāpuriso āyatapaṇhi hoti …pe…
[¶8] He has long fingers.
> Pali: dīghaṅguli hoti …
[¶9] His hands and feet are soft and tender.
> Pali: mudutalunahatthapādo hoti …
[¶10] He has serried hands and feet.
> Pali: jālahatthapādo hoti …
[¶11] The tops of his feet are arched.
> Pali: ussaṅkhapādo hoti …
[¶12] His calves are like those of an antelope.
> Pali: eṇijaṅgho hoti …
[¶13] When standing upright and not bending over, the palms of both hands touch the knees.
> Pali: ṭhitakova anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jaṇṇukāni parimasati parimajjati …
[¶14] His private parts are sheathed in a foreskin.
> Pali: kosohitavatthaguyho hoti …
[¶15] He is golden colored; his skin shines like lustrous gold.
> Pali: suvaṇṇavaṇṇo hoti kañcanasannibhattaco …
[¶16] He has delicate skin, so delicate that dust and dirt don’t stick to his body.
> Pali: sukhumacchavi hoti, sukhumattā chaviyā rajojallaṁ kāye na upalimpati …
[¶17] His hairs grow one per pore.
> Pali: ekekalomo hoti, ekekāni lomāni lomakūpesu jātāni …
[¶18] His hairs stand up; they’re blue-black and curl clockwise.
> Pali: uddhaggalomo hoti, uddhaggāni lomāni jātāni nīlāni añjanavaṇṇāni kuṇḍalāvaṭṭāni dakkhiṇāvaṭṭakajātāni …
[¶19] His body is tall and straight-limbed.
> Pali: brahmujugatto hoti …
[¶20] He has bulging muscles in seven places.
> Pali: sattussado hoti …
[¶21] His chest is like that of a lion.
> Pali: sīhapubbaddhakāyo hoti …
[¶22] He is filled out between the shoulders.
> Pali: citantaraṁso hoti …
[¶23] He has the proportional circumference of a banyan tree: the span of his arms equals the height of his body.
> Pali: nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo hoti, yāvatakvassa kāyo tāvatakvassa byāmo yāvatakvassa byāmo tāvatakvassa kāyo …
[¶24] His torso is cylindrical.
> Pali: samavaṭṭakkhandho hoti …
[¶25] He has ridged taste buds.
> Pali: rasaggasaggī hoti …
[¶26] His jaw is like that of a lion.
> Pali: sīhahanu hoti …
[¶27] He has forty teeth.
> Pali: cattālīsadanto hoti …
[¶28] His teeth are even.
> Pali: samadanto hoti …
[¶29] His teeth have no gaps.
> Pali: aviraḷadanto hoti …
[¶30] His teeth are perfectly white.
> Pali: susukkadāṭho hoti …
[¶31] He has a large tongue.
> Pali: pahūtajivho hoti …
[¶32] He has the voice of the Divinity, like a cuckoo’s call.
> Pali: brahmassaro hoti karavīkabhāṇī …
[¶33] His eyes are indigo.
> Pali: abhinīlanetto hoti …
[¶34] He has eyelashes like a cow’s.
> Pali: gopakhumo hoti …
[¶35] Between his eyebrows there grows a tuft, soft and white like cotton-wool.
> Pali: uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā hoti, odātā mudutūlasannibhā. Yampi, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā hoti, odātā mudutūlasannibhā, idampi, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶36] The crown of his head is like a turban.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, mahāpuriso uṇhīsasīso hoti. Yampi, bhikkhave, mahāpuriso uṇhīsasīso hoti, idampi, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ bhavati.
[¶37] These are the thirty-two marks of a great man. A great man who possesses these has only two possible destinies, no other.
> Pali: Imāni kho tāni, bhikkhave, dvattiṁsa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā. Sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado.
[¶38] Seers who are outsiders remember these marks, but they do not know the specific deeds performed in the past to obtain each mark.
> Pali: Imāni kho, bhikkhave, dvattiṁsa mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni bāhirakāpi isayo dhārenti, no ca kho te jānanti: ‘imassa kammassa kaṭattā idaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhatī’ti.
[¶39] 1. Well-Planted Feet
> Pali: 1. Suppatiṭṭhitapādatālakkhaṇaṁ
[¶40] In some past lives, past existences, past abodes the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He firmly and persistently undertook skillful behaviors such as good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, giving and sharing, taking precepts, observing the sabbath, paying due respect to mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, honoring the elders in the family, and various other things pertaining to skillful behaviors. Due to performing, accumulating, heaping up, and amassing those deeds, when his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. There he surpassed the other gods in ten respects: heavenly lifespan, beauty, happiness, glory, sovereignty, sights, sounds, smells, tastes, and touches. When he passed away from there and came back to this place he obtained this mark of a great man: he has well-planted feet. He places his foot on the ground evenly, raises it evenly, and touches the ground evenly with the whole sole of his foot.
> Pali: Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno daḷhasamādāno ahosi kusalesu dhammesu, avatthitasamādāno kāyasucarite vacīsucarite manosucarite dānasaṁvibhāge sīlasamādāne uposathupavāse matteyyatāya petteyyatāya sāmaññatāya brahmaññatāya kule jeṭṭhāpacāyitāya aññataraññataresu ca adhikusalesu dhammesu. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā ussannattā vipulattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. So tattha aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhiggaṇhāti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena dibbena sukhena dibbena yasena dibbena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi dibbehi saddehi dibbehi gandhehi dibbehi rasehi dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehi. So tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati. Suppatiṭṭhitapādo hoti. Samaṁ pādaṁ bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipati, samaṁ uddharati, samaṁ sabbāvantehi pādatalehi bhūmiṁ phusati.
[¶41] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea—free of harassment by bandits, successful and prosperous, safe, blessed, free of pests—he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. And what does he obtain as king? He can’t be stopped by any human foe or enemy. That’s what he obtains as king. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the world’s veil. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He can’t be stopped by any foe or enemy whether internal or external; nor by greed, hate, or delusion; nor by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti; Seyyathidaṁ—cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ akhilamanimittamakaṇṭakaṁ iddhaṁ phītaṁ khemaṁ sivaṁ nirabbudaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Akkhambhiyo hoti kenaci manussabhūtena paccatthikena paccāmittena. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado. Buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Akkhambhiyo hoti abbhantarehi vā bāhirehi vā paccatthikehi paccāmittehi rāgena vā dosena vā mohena vā samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶42] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶43] “Truth, principle, self-control, and restraint;
purity, precepts, and observing the sabbath;
giving, harmlessness, delighting in non-violence—
firmly undertaking these things, he lived accordingly.
> Pali: “Sacce ca dhamme ca dame ca saṁyame,
Soceyyasīlālayuposathesu ca;
Dāne ahiṁsāya asāhase rato,
Daḷhaṁ samādāya samattamācari.
[¶44] By means of these deeds he went to heaven,
where he enjoyed happiness and merriment.
After passing away from there to here,
he steps evenly on this rich earth.
> Pali: So tena kammena divaṁ samakkami,
Sukhañca khiḍḍāratiyo ca anvabhi;
Tato cavitvā punarāgato idha,
Samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṁ.
[¶45] The gathered soothsayers predicted
that there is no stopping one of such even tread,
as householder or renunciate.
That’s the meaning shown by this mark.
> Pali: Byākaṁsu veyyañjanikā samāgatā,
Samappatiṭṭhassa na hoti khambhanā;
Gihissa vā pabbajitassa vā puna,
Taṁ lakkhaṇaṁ bhavati tadatthajotakaṁ.
[¶46] While living at home he cannot be stopped,
he defeats his foes, and cannot be beaten.
Due to the fruit of that deed,
he cannot be stopped by any human.
> Pali: Akkhambhiyo hoti agāramāvasaṁ,
Parābhibhū sattubhi nappamaddano;
Manussabhūtenidha hoti kenaci,
Akkhambhiyo tassa phalena kammuno.
[¶47] But if one such chooses the life gone forth,
seeing clearly, loving renunciation,
not even the best can ever stop him;
this is the nature of the supreme man.”
> Pali: Sace ca pabbajjamupeti tādiso,
Nekkhammachandābhirato vicakkhaṇo;
Aggo na so gacchati jātu khambhanaṁ,
Naruttamo esa hi tassa dhammatā”ti.
[¶48] 2. Wheels on the Feet
> Pali: 2. Pādatalacakkalakkhaṇaṁ
[¶49] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He conveyed happiness to many people, casting out threats, terror, and danger, providing just protection and security, and giving gifts with all the trimmings. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: on the soles of his feet there are thousand-spoked wheels, with rims and hubs, complete in every detail and well divided inside.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno bahujanassa sukhāvaho ahosi, ubbegauttāsabhayaṁ apanuditā, dhammikañca rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṁ saṁvidhātā, saparivārañca dānaṁ adāsi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā ussannattā vipulattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati. Heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni honti sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrāni suvibhattantarāni.
[¶50] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He has a large following of brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a fully awakened Buddha. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He has a large following of monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāparivāro hoti; mahāssa honti parivārā brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati. Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado. Buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāparivāro hoti; mahāssa honti parivārā bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶51] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶52] “In olden days, in past lives,
he brought happiness to many people,
ridding them of fear, terror, and danger,
eagerly guarding and protecting them.
> Pali: “Pure puratthā purimāsu jātisu,
Manussabhūto bahunaṁ sukhāvaho;
Ubbhegauttāsabhayāpanūdano,
Guttīsu rakkhāvaraṇesu ussuko.
[¶53] By means of these deeds he went to heaven,
where he enjoyed happiness and merriment.
After passing away from there to here,
wheels on his two feet are found,
> Pali: So tena kammena divaṁ samakkami,
Sukhañca khiḍḍāratiyo ca anvabhi;
Tato cavitvā punarāgato idha,
Cakkāni pādesu duvesu vindati.
[¶54] all rimmed around and thousand-spoked.
The gathered soothsayers predicted,
seeing the prince with the hundred-fold mark of merits,
that he’d have a following, subduing foes,
> Pali: Samantanemīni sahassarāni ca,
Byākaṁsu veyyañjanikā samāgatā;
Disvā kumāraṁ satapuññalakkhaṇaṁ,
Parivāravā hessati sattumaddano.
[¶55] which is why he has wheels all rimmed around.
If one such doesn’t choose the life gone forth,
he’ll roll the wheel and rule the land.
The aristocrats will be his vassals,
> Pali: Tathā hi cakkāni samantanemini,
Sace na pabbajjamupeti tādiso;
Vatteti cakkaṁ pathaviṁ pasāsati,
Tassānuyantādha bhavanti khattiyā.
[¶56] flocking to his glory.
But if one such chooses the life gone forth,
seeing clearly, loving renunciation,
the gods, humans, titans, Sakka, and monsters;
> Pali: Mahāyasaṁ samparivārayanti naṁ,
Sace ca pabbajjamupeti tādiso;
Nekkhammachandābhirato vicakkhaṇo,
Devā manussāsurasakkarakkhasā.
[¶57] centaurs and dragons, birds and beasts,
will flock to his glory,
the supreme, honored by gods and humans.”
> Pali: Gandhabbanāgā vihagā catuppadā,
Anuttaraṁ devamanussapūjitaṁ;
Mahāyasaṁ samparivārayanti nan”ti.
[¶58] 3–5. Stretched Heels, Etc.
> Pali: 3–5. Āyatapaṇhitāditilakkhaṇaṁ
[¶59] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He gave up killing living creatures, renouncing the rod and the sword. He was scrupulous and kind, living full of sympathy for all living beings. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these three marks: he has stretched heels, long fingers, and his body is tall and straight-limbed.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno pāṇātipātaṁ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato ahosi nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho lajjī dayāpanno, sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī vihāsi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā ussannattā vipulattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni tīṇi mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Āyatapaṇhi ca hoti, dīghaṅguli ca brahmujugatto ca.
[¶60] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He’s long-lived, preserving his life for a long time. No human foe or enemy is able to take his life before his time. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He’s long-lived, preserving his life for a long time. No foes or enemies—nor any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or anyone in the world—is able to take his life before his time. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Dīghāyuko hoti ciraṭṭhitiko, dīghamāyuṁ pāleti, na sakkā hoti antarā jīvitā voropetuṁ kenaci manussabhūtena paccatthikena paccāmittena. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Dīghāyuko hoti ciraṭṭhitiko, dīghamāyuṁ pāleti, na sakkā hoti antarā jīvitā voropetuṁ paccatthikehi paccāmittehi samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶61] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶62] “Realizing for himself the horrors of death,
he refrained from killing other creatures.
By that good conduct he went to heaven,
where he enjoyed the fruit of deeds well done.
> Pali: “Māraṇavadhabhayattano viditvā,
Paṭivirato paraṁ māraṇāyahosi;
Tena sucaritena saggamagamā,
Sukataphalavipākamanubhosi.
[¶63] Passing away, on his return to here,
he obtained these three marks:
his stretched heels are abundant and long,
and like the Divinity, he’s straight and beautiful, with well-formed limbs.
> Pali: Caviya punaridhāgato samāno,
Paṭilabhati idha tīṇi lakkhaṇāni;
Bhavati vipuladīghapāsaṇhiko,
Brahmāva suju subho sujātagatto.
[¶64] Fair of arm, youthful, of good posture and breeding,
his fingers are soft and tender and long.
By these three marks of an excellent man,
they indicated that the prince’s life would be long:
> Pali: Subhujo susu susaṇṭhito sujāto,
Mudutalunaṅguliyassa honti;
Dīghā tībhi purisavaraggalakkhaṇehi,
Cirayapanāya kumāramādisanti.
[¶65] ‘As a householder he will live long;
longer still if he goes forth, due to
mastery in the development of psychic power.
Thus this is the sign of long life.’”
> Pali: Bhavati yadi gihī ciraṁ yapeti,
Cirataraṁ pabbajati yadi tato hi;
Yāpayati ca vasiddhibhāvanāya,
Iti dīghāyukatāya taṁ nimittan”ti.
[¶66] 6. Seven Bulging Places
> Pali: 6. Sattussadatālakkhaṇaṁ
[¶67] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He was a donor of delicious and tasty cooked and fresh foods, and drinks that were sweet and succulent. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: he has bulging muscles in seven places. Both hands, both feet, both shoulders, and his chest are all bulging.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno dātā ahosi paṇītānaṁ rasitānaṁ khādanīyānaṁ bhojanīyānaṁ sāyanīyānaṁ lehanīyānaṁ pānānaṁ. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati, sattussado hoti, sattassa ussadā honti; ubhosu hatthesu ussadā honti, ubhosu pādesu ussadā honti, ubhosu aṁsakūṭesu ussadā honti, khandhe ussado hoti.
[¶68] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He gets delicious and tasty cooked and fresh foods, and drinks that are sweet and succulent. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He gets delicious and tasty cooked and fresh foods, and drinks that are sweet and succulent. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Lābhī hoti paṇītānaṁ rasitānaṁ khādanīyānaṁ bhojanīyānaṁ sāyanīyānaṁ lehanīyānaṁ pānānaṁ. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Lābhī hoti paṇītānaṁ rasitānaṁ khādanīyānaṁ bhojanīyānaṁ sāyanīyānaṁ lehanīyānaṁ pānānaṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶69] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶70] “He used to give the very best of flavors—
scrumptious foods of every kind.
Because of that good deed,
he rejoiced long in the Garden of Delight.
> Pali: “Khajjabhojjamatha leyya sāyiyaṁ,
Uttamaggarasadāyako ahu;
Tena so sucaritena kammunā,
Nandane ciramabhippamodati.
[¶71] On returning to here, he is rounded in seven places,
and tender hands and feet are found.
The soothsayers expert in signs declared:
‘He’ll get tasty foods of all sorts
> Pali: Satta cussade idhādhigacchati,
Hatthapādamudutañca vindati;
Āhu byañjananimittakovidā,
Khajjabhojjarasalābhitāya naṁ.
[¶72] as a householder, that’s what that means.
But even if he goes forth he’ll get the same,
supreme in gaining tasty foods of all sorts,
cutting all bonds of the lay life.’”
> Pali: Yaṁ gihissapi tadatthajotakaṁ,
Pabbajjampi ca tadādhigacchati;
Khajjabhojjarasalābhiruttamaṁ,
Āhu sabbagihibandhanacchidan”ti.
[¶73] 7–8. Tender and Serried Hands
> Pali: 7–8. Karacaraṇamudujālatālakkhaṇāni
[¶74] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He brought people together using the four ways of being inclusive: giving, kindly words, taking care, and equality. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: his hands and feet are soft and tender, and they are serried.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṁ saṅgāhako ahosi— dānena peyyavajjena atthacariyāya samānattatāya. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Mudutalunahatthapādo ca hoti jālahatthapādo ca.
[¶75] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? His retinue is inclusive, cohesive, and well-managed. This includes brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? His retinue is inclusive and well-managed. This includes monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Susaṅgahitaparijano hoti, susaṅgahitāssa honti brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati … buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Susaṅgahitaparijano hoti, susaṅgahitāssa honti bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶76] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶77] “By giving and helping others,
kindly speech, and equal treatment,
such action and conduct as brought people together,
he went to heaven due to his esteemed virtue.
> Pali: “Dānampi catthacariyatañca,
Piyavāditañca samānattatañca;
Kariyacariyasusaṅgahaṁ bahūnaṁ,
Anavamatena guṇena yāti saggaṁ.
[¶78] Passing away, on his return to here,
the young baby prince obtained
hands and feet so tender and serried,
lovely, graceful, and good-looking.
> Pali: Caviya punaridhāgato samāno,
Karacaraṇamudutañca jālino ca;
Atirucirasuvaggudassaneyyaṁ,
Paṭilabhati daharo susu kumāro.
[¶79] His retinue is loyal and manageable,
staying agreeably all over this broad land.
Speaking kindly, seeking happiness,
he implements agreeable qualities.
> Pali: Bhavati parijanassavo vidheyyo,
Mahimaṁ āvasito susaṅgahito;
Piyavadū hitasukhataṁ jigīsamāno,
Abhirucitāni guṇāni ācarati.
[¶80] But if he gives up all sensual enjoyments,
as victor he speaks Dhamma to the people.
Devoted, they respond to his words;
after listening, they practice in line with the teaching.”
> Pali: Yadi ca jahati sabbakāmabhogaṁ,
Kathayati dhammakathaṁ jino janassa;
Vacanapaṭikarassābhippasannā,
Sutvāna dhammānudhammamācarantī”ti.
[¶81] 9–10. Arched Feet and Upright Hair
> Pali: 9–10. Ussaṅkhapāda-uddhaggalomatālakkhaṇāni
[¶82] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. His speech was meaningful and principled. He educated many people, bringing welfare and happiness, offering the teaching. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: the tops of his feet are arched and his hairs stand up.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno atthūpasaṁhitaṁ dhammūpasaṁhitaṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosi, bahujanaṁ nidaṁsesi, pāṇīnaṁ hitasukhāvaho dhammayāgī. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Ussaṅkhapādo ca hoti, uddhaggalomo ca.
[¶83] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He is the foremost, best, chief, highest, and finest of those who enjoy sensual pleasures. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He is the foremost, best, chief, highest, and finest of all sentient beings. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato, sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Aggo ca hoti seṭṭho ca pāmokkho ca uttamo ca pavaro ca kāmabhogīnaṁ. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Aggo ca hoti seṭṭho ca pāmokkho ca uttamo ca pavaro ca sabbasattānaṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶84] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶85] “His word was meaningful and principled,
moving the people with his explanations.
He brought welfare and happiness to creatures,
unstintingly offering up teaching.
> Pali: “Atthadhammasahitaṁ pure giraṁ,
Erayaṁ bahujanaṁ nidaṁsayi;
Pāṇinaṁ hitasukhāvaho ahu,
Dhammayāgamayajī amaccharī.
[¶86] Because of that good deed,
he advanced to heaven and there rejoiced.
On return to here two marks are found,
of excellence and supremacy.
> Pali: Tena so sucaritena kammunā,
Suggatiṁ vajati tattha modati;
Lakkhaṇāni ca duve idhāgato,
Uttamappamukhatāya vindati.
[¶87] His hairs stand upright,
and his ankles well-shaped.
Swollen with flesh and blood, encased in skin,
gracing above the feet.
> Pali: Ubbhamuppatitalomavā saso,
Pādagaṇṭhirahu sādhusaṇṭhitā;
Maṁsalohitācitā tacotthatā,
Uparicaraṇasobhanā ahu.
[¶88] If that sort lives in the home, he becomes
the best of those who enjoy sensual pleasures.
There’ll be none better than him;
he’ll proceed having mastered all the Black Plum Tree Land.
> Pali: Gehamāvasati ce tathāvidho,
Aggataṁ vajati kāmabhoginaṁ;
Tena uttaritaro na vijjati,
Jambudīpamabhibhuyya iriyati.
[¶89] But going forth the peerless renunciate
turns into the best of all creatures.
There’ll be none better than him,
he’ll live having mastered the whole world.”
> Pali: Pabbajampi ca anomanikkamo,
Aggataṁ vajati sabbapāṇinaṁ;
Tena uttaritaro na vijjati,
Sabbalokamabhibhuyya viharatī”ti.
[¶90] 11. Antelope Calves
> Pali: 11. Eṇijaṅghalakkhaṇaṁ
[¶91] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He was a thorough teacher of a profession, a branch of knowledge, conduct, or action, thinking: ‘How might they quickly learn and practice, without getting exhausted?’ Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: his calves are like those of an antelope.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno sakkaccaṁ vācetā ahosi sippaṁ vā vijjaṁ vā caraṇaṁ vā kammaṁ vā: ‘kintime khippaṁ vijāneyyuṁ, khippaṁ paṭipajjeyyuṁ, na ciraṁ kilisseyyun’”ti. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati. Eṇijaṅgho hoti.
[¶92] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He quickly obtains the things worthy of a king, the factors, supports, and things befitting a king. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He quickly obtains the things worthy of an ascetic, the factors, supports, and things befitting an ascetic. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Yāni tāni rājārahāni rājaṅgāni rājūpabhogāni rājānucchavikāni tāni khippaṁ paṭilabhati. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Yāni tāni samaṇārahāni samaṇaṅgāni samaṇūpabhogāni samaṇānucchavikāni, tāni khippaṁ paṭilabhati. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶93] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶94] “In professions, knowledge, conduct, and deeds,
he thought of how they might easily learn.
Quickly, without tiresome delays,
he taught them things that harm no one at all.
> Pali: “Sippesu vijjācaraṇesu kammesu,
Kathaṁ vijāneyyuṁ lahunti icchati;
Yadūpaghātāya na hoti kassaci,
Vāceti khippaṁ na ciraṁ kilissati.
[¶95] Having done that skillful deed whose outcome is happiness,
he gains prominent and elegant calves.
Well-formed in graceful spirals,
he’s covered in delicate rising hairs.
> Pali: Taṁ kammaṁ katvā kusalaṁ sukhudrayaṁ,
Jaṅghā manuññā labhate susaṇṭhitā;
Vaṭṭā sujātā anupubbamuggatā,
Uddhaggalomā sukhumattacotthatā.
[¶96] They say that individual has antelope calves,
and that this is the mark of swift success.
If he desires the things fitting the household life,
not going forth, they’ll quickly be his.
> Pali: Eṇeyyajaṅghoti tamāhu puggalaṁ,
Sampattiyā khippamidhāhu lakkhaṇaṁ;
Gehānulomāni yadābhikaṅkhati,
Apabbajaṁ khippamidhādhigacchati.
[¶97] But if one such chooses the life gone forth,
seeing clearly, loving renunciation,
the peerless renunciate will quickly find
what is fitting and suitable.”
> Pali: Sace ca pabbajjamupeti tādiso,
Nekkhammachandābhirato vicakkhaṇo;
Anucchavikassa yadānulomikaṁ,
Taṁ vindati khippamanomavikkamo”ti.
[¶98] 12. Delicate Skin
> Pali: 12. Sukhumacchavilakkhaṇaṁ
[¶99] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He approached an ascetic or brahmin and asked: ‘Sirs, what is skillful? What is unskillful? What is blameworthy? What is blameless? What should be cultivated? What should not be cultivated? Doing what leads to my lasting harm and suffering? Doing what leads to my lasting welfare and happiness?’ Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: he has delicate skin, so delicate that dust and dirt don’t stick to his body.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno samaṇaṁ vā brāhmaṇaṁ vā upasaṅkamitvā paripucchitā ahosi: ‘kiṁ, bhante, kusalaṁ, kiṁ akusalaṁ, kiṁ sāvajjaṁ, kiṁ anavajjaṁ, kiṁ sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ na sevitabbaṁ, kiṁ me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāya assa, kiṁ vā pana me karīyamānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāya assā’ti. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati. Sukhumacchavi hoti, sukhumattā chaviyā rajojallaṁ kāye na upalimpati.
[¶100] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He has great wisdom. Of those who enjoy sensual pleasures, none is his equal or better in wisdom. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He has great wisdom, widespread wisdom, laughing wisdom, swift wisdom, sharp wisdom, and penetrating wisdom. No sentient being is his equal or better in wisdom. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāpañño hoti, nāssa hoti koci paññāya sadiso vā seṭṭho vā kāmabhogīnaṁ. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāpañño hoti puthupañño hāsapañño javanapañño tikkhapañño nibbedhikapañño, nāssa hoti koci paññāya sadiso vā seṭṭho vā sabbasattānaṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶101] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶102] “In olden days, in past lives,
eager to understand, he asked questions.
Keen to learn, he waited on renunciates,
heeding their explanation with pure intent.
> Pali: “Pure puratthā purimāsu jātisu,
Aññātukāmo paripucchitā ahu;
Sussūsitā pabbajitaṁ upāsitā,
Atthantaro atthakathaṁ nisāmayi.
[¶103] Due to that deed of acquiring wisdom,
as a human being his skin is delicate.
At his birth the soothsayers expert in signs prophesied:
‘He’ll discern delicate matters.’
> Pali: Paññāpaṭilābhagatena kammunā,
Manussabhūto sukhumacchavī ahu;
Byākaṁsu uppādanimittakovidā,
Sukhumāni atthāni avecca dakkhiti.
[¶104] If one such doesn’t choose the life gone forth,
he’ll roll the wheel and rule the land.
Among those with material things who have been educated,
none equal or better than him is found.
> Pali: Sace na pabbajjamupeti tādiso,
Vatteti cakkaṁ pathaviṁ pasāsati;
Atthānusiṭṭhīsu pariggahesu ca,
Na tena seyyo sadiso ca vijjati.
[¶105] But if one such chooses the life gone forth,
seeing clearly, loving renunciation,
gaining wisdom that’s supreme and distinguished,
the one of superb, vast intelligence attains awakening.”
> Pali: Sace ca pabbajjamupeti tādiso,
Nekkhammachandābhirato vicakkhaṇo;
Paññāvisiṭṭhaṁ labhate anuttaraṁ,
Pappoti bodhiṁ varabhūrimedhaso”ti.
[¶106] 13. Golden Skin
> Pali: 13. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇalakkhaṇaṁ
[¶107] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He wasn’t irritable or bad-tempered. Even when heavily criticized he didn’t lose his temper, become annoyed, hostile, and hard-hearted, or display annoyance, hate, and bitterness. He donated soft and delicate mats and blankets, and cloaks of delicate linen, cotton, silk, and wool. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: he is golden colored; his skin shines like lustrous gold.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno akkodhano ahosi anupāyāsabahulo, bahumpi vutto samāno nābhisajji na kuppi na byāpajji na patitthīyi, na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsi. Dātā ca ahosi sukhumānaṁ mudukānaṁ attharaṇānaṁ pāvuraṇānaṁ khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇo hoti kañcanasannibhattaco.
[¶108] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He obtains soft and delicate mats and blankets, and delicate cloaks of linen, cotton, silk, and wool. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He obtains soft and delicate mats and blankets, and cloaks of delicate linen, cotton, silk, and wool. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Lābhī hoti sukhumānaṁ mudukānaṁ attharaṇānaṁ pāvuraṇānaṁ khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Lābhī hoti sukhumānaṁ mudukānaṁ attharaṇānaṁ pāvuraṇānaṁ khomasukhumānaṁ kappāsikasukhumānaṁ koseyyasukhumānaṁ kambalasukhumānaṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶109] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶110] “Fixated on good will, he gave gifts.
In an earlier life he poured forth cloth
fine and soft to touch,
like a god pouring rain on this broad earth.
> Pali: “Akkodhañca adhiṭṭhahi adāsi,
Dānañca vatthāni sukhumāni succhavīni;
Purimatarabhave ṭhito abhivissaji,
Mahimiva suro abhivassaṁ.
[¶111] So doing he passed from here to heaven,
where he enjoyed the fruits of deeds well done.
Here he wins a figure shining like honey-yellow gold,
like Indra, the finest of gods.
> Pali: Taṁ katvāna ito cuto dibbaṁ,
Upapajji sukataphalavipākamanubhutvā;
Kanakatanusannibho idhābhibhavati,
Suravarataroriva indo.
[¶112] If that man stays in the house, not wishing to go forth,
he conquers and rules this vast, broad earth,
together with the seven treasures here.
He gets immaculate, delicate, pure skin,
> Pali: Gehañcāvasati naro apabbajjam’,
icchaṁ mahatimahiṁ anusāsati;
Pasayha sahidha sattaratanaṁ,
Paṭilabhati vimalasukhumacchaviṁ suciñca.
[¶113] receiving clothing, cloth, and the finest cloaks
if he chooses the life gone forth.
For he still partakes of past deed’s fruit;
what’s been done is never lost.”
> Pali: Lābhī acchādanavatthamokkhapāvuraṇānaṁ,
Bhavati yadi anāgāriyataṁ upeti;
Sahito purimakataphalaṁ anubhavati,
Na bhavati katassa panāso”ti.
## 61. DN 30 · The Marks of a Great Man · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/61/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/61/#p-N
[¶0] 14. Privates in Foreskin
> Pali: 14. Kosohitavatthaguyhalakkhaṇaṁ
[¶1] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He reunited long-lost and long-separated relatives, friends, loved ones, and comrades. He reunited mother with child and child with mother; father with child and child with father; brother with brother, brother with sister, sister with brother, and sister with sister, bringing them together with rejoicing. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: his private parts are sheathed in a foreskin.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno cirappanaṭṭhe sucirappavāsino ñātimitte suhajje sakhino samānetā ahosi. Mātarampi puttena samānetā ahosi, puttampi mātarā samānetā ahosi, pitarampi puttena samānetā ahosi, puttampi pitarā samānetā ahosi, bhātarampi bhātarā samānetā ahosi, bhātarampi bhaginiyā samānetā ahosi, bhaginimpi bhātarā samānetā ahosi, bhaginimpi bhaginiyā samānetā ahosi, samaṅgīkatvā ca abbhanumoditā ahosi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati— kosohitavatthaguyho hoti.
[¶2] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He has many sons, over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He has many sons, many thousands of sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Pahūtaputto hoti, parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Pahūtaputto hoti, anekasahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶3] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶4] “In olden days, in past lives,
he reunited long-lost
and long-separated comrades and family,
bringing them together with joy.
> Pali: “Pure puratthā purimāsu jātisu,
Cirappanaṭṭhe sucirappavāsino;
Ñātī suhajje sakhino samānayi,
Samaṅgikatvā anumoditā ahu.
[¶5] By means of these deeds he went to heaven,
where he enjoyed happiness and merriment.
After passing away from there to here,
his private parts are sheathed in a foreskin.
> Pali: So tena kammena divaṁ samakkami,
Sukhañca khiḍḍāratiyo ca anvabhi;
Tato cavitvā punarāgato idha,
Kosohitaṁ vindati vatthachādiyaṁ.
[¶6] That sort has many sons,
over a thousand descendants,
valiant and heroic, devastating foes,
a layman’s joy, speaking kindly.
> Pali: Pahūtaputto bhavatī tathāvidho,
Parosahassañca bhavanti atrajā;
Sūrā ca vīrā ca amittatāpanā,
Gihissa pītiṁ jananā piyaṁvadā.
[¶7] But if he lives the renunciate life
he has even more sons following his word.
As householder or renunciate,
that’s the meaning shown by this mark.”
> Pali: Bahūtarā pabbajitassa iriyato,
Bhavanti puttā vacanānusārino;
Gihissa vā pabbajitassa vā puna,
Taṁ lakkhaṇaṁ jāyati tadatthajotakan”ti.
[¶8] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶9] 15–16. Equal Proportions and Touching the Knees
> Pali: 15–16. Parimaṇḍalaanonamajaṇṇuparimasanalakkhaṇāni
[¶10] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. Examining the gathered population, he knew what they had in common and what was their own; he knew each person, and he knew the distinctions between people. In each case, he made appropriate distinctions between people: ‘This one deserves that; that one deserves this.’ Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: he has the proportional circumference of a banyan tree; and when standing upright and not bending over, the palms of both hands touch the knees.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno mahājanasaṅgahaṁ samekkhamāno samaṁ jānāti sāmaṁ jānāti, purisaṁ jānāti purisavisesaṁ jānāti: ‘ayamidamarahati ayamidamarahatī’ti tattha tattha purisavisesakaro ahosi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo ca hoti, ṭhitakoyeva ca anonamanto ubhohi pāṇitalehi jaṇṇukāni parimasati parimajjati.
[¶11] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He is rich, affluent, and wealthy, with lots of gold and silver, lots of property and assets, lots of money and grain, and a full treasury and storehouses. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He is rich, affluent, and wealthy. He has these kinds of wealth: the wealth of faith, ethics, conscience, prudence, learning, generosity, and wisdom. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Aḍḍho hoti mahaddhano mahābhogo pahūtajātarūparajato pahūtavittūpakaraṇo pahūtadhanadhañño paripuṇṇakosakoṭṭhāgāro. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Aḍḍho hoti mahaddhano mahābhogo. Tassimāni dhanāni honti, seyyathidaṁ— saddhādhanaṁ sīladhanaṁ hiridhanaṁ ottappadhanaṁ sutadhanaṁ cāgadhanaṁ paññādhanaṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶12] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶13] “Examining the many people in a community,
he weighed, evaluated, and judged each case:
‘This one deserves that.’
That’s how he used to draw distinctions between people.
> Pali: “Tuliya paṭivicaya cintayitvā,
Mahājanasaṅgahanaṁ samekkhamāno;
Ayamidamarahati tattha tattha,
Purisavisesakaro pure ahosi.
[¶14] Now standing without bending
he can touch his knees with both hands.
With the remaining ripening of the fruit of good deeds,
his circumference was that of a great tree.
> Pali: Mahiñca pana ṭhito anonamanto,
Phusati karehi ubhohi jaṇṇukāni;
Mahiruhaparimaṇḍalo ahosi,
Sucaritakammavipākasesakena.
[¶15] Learned experts in the many different
signs and marks prophesied:
‘The young prince will obtain
many different things that householders deserve.
> Pali: Bahuvividhanimittalakkhaṇaññū,
Atinipuṇā manujā byākariṁsu;
Bahuvividhā gihīnaṁ arahāni,
Paṭilabhati daharo susu kumāro.
[¶16] Here there are many suitable pleasures
for the ruler of the land to enjoy as householder.
But if he gives up all sensual enjoyments,
he will gain the supreme, highest peak of wealth.’”
> Pali: Idha ca mahīpatissa kāmabhogī,
Gihipatirūpakā bahū bhavanti;
Yadi ca jahati sabbakāmabhogaṁ,
Labhati anuttaraṁ uttamadhanaggan”ti.
[¶17] 17–19. A Lion’s Chest, Etc.
> Pali: 17–19. Sīhapubbaddhakāyāditilakkhaṇaṁ
[¶18] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He wanted what’s best, the welfare, the comfort, and sanctuary of the people, thinking: ‘How might they flourish in faith, ethics, learning, generosity, teachings, and wisdom; in wealth and grain, fields and land, birds and beasts, children and partners; in bondservants, workers, and staff; in family, friends, and kin?’ Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these three marks: his chest is like that of a lion; he is filled out between the shoulders.; and his torso is cylindrical.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno bahujanassa atthakāmo ahosi hitakāmo phāsukāmo yogakkhemakāmo: ‘kintime saddhāya vaḍḍheyyuṁ, sīlena vaḍḍheyyuṁ, sutena vaḍḍheyyuṁ, cāgena vaḍḍheyyuṁ, dhammena vaḍḍheyyuṁ, paññāya vaḍḍheyyuṁ, dhanadhaññena vaḍḍheyyuṁ, khettavatthunā vaḍḍheyyuṁ, dvipadacatuppadehi vaḍḍheyyuṁ, puttadārehi vaḍḍheyyuṁ, dāsakammakaraporisehi vaḍḍheyyuṁ, ñātīhi vaḍḍheyyuṁ, mittehi vaḍḍheyyuṁ, bandhavehi vaḍḍheyyun’ti. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni tīṇi mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Sīhapubbaddhakāyo ca hoti citantaraṁso ca samavaṭṭakkhandho ca.
[¶19] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He’s not liable to decline. He doesn’t decline in wealth and grain, fields and land, birds and beasts, children and partners; in bondservants, workers, and staff; in family, friends, and kin. He doesn’t decline in any of his accomplishments. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He’s not liable to decline. He doesn’t decline in faith, ethics, learning, generosity, and wisdom. He doesn’t decline in any of his accomplishments. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Aparihānadhammo hoti, na parihāyati dhanadhaññena khettavatthunā dvipadacatuppadehi puttadārehi dāsakammakaraporisehi ñātīhi mittehi bandhavehi, na parihāyati sabbasampattiyā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Aparihānadhammo hoti, na parihāyati saddhāya sīlena sutena cāgena paññāya, na parihāyati sabbasampattiyā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶20] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶21] “His wish was this: ‘How may others not decline
in faith, ethics, learning, and intelligence,
in generosity, teachings, and much good else,
in coin and grain, fields and lands,
> Pali: “Saddhāya sīlena sutena buddhiyā,
Cāgena dhammena bahūhi sādhuhi;
Dhanena dhaññena ca khettavatthunā,
Puttehi dārehi catuppadehi ca.
[¶22] in children, partners, and livestock,
in family, friends, and kin,
in strength, and both beauty and happiness?’
And so he ever desired their success.
> Pali: Ñātīhi mittehi ca bandhavehi ca,
Balena vaṇṇena sukhena cūbhayaṁ;
Kathaṁ na hāyeyyuṁ pareti icchati,
Atthassa middhī ca panābhikaṅkhati.
[¶23] His chest was shaped like that of a lion,
filled out between the shoulders, and torso cylindrical.
Due to the well-done deeds of the past,
he had that portent of non-decline.
> Pali: Sa sīhapubbaddhasusaṇṭhito ahu,
Samavaṭṭakhandho ca citantaraṁso;
Pubbe suciṇṇena katena kammunā,
Ahāniyaṁ pubbanimittamassa taṁ.
[¶24] Even as layman he grows in coin and grain,
in wives, children, and livestock.
But once gone forth, owning nothing, he attains
the supreme awakening which may never decline.”
> Pali: Gihīpi dhaññena dhanena vaḍḍhati,
Puttehi dārehi catuppadehi ca;
Akiñcano pabbajito anuttaraṁ,
Pappoti bodhiṁ asahānadhammatan”ti.
[¶25] 20. Ridged Taste Buds
> Pali: 20. Rasaggasaggitālakkhaṇaṁ
[¶26] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He would never hurt any sentient being with fists, stones, rods, or swords. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: he has ridged taste buds. His raised taste receptors, originating in the throat, disperse evenly.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno sattānaṁ aviheṭhakajātiko ahosi pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati, rasaggasaggī hoti, uddhaggāssa rasaharaṇīyo gīvāya jātā honti samābhivāhiniyo.
[¶27] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He is rarely ill or unwell. His stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He is rarely ill or unwell. His stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, but just right, and fit for meditation. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Appābādho hoti appātaṅko, samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Appābādho hoti appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya majjhimāya padhānakkhamāya. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶28] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶29] “Not with fist or rod or stone,
or sword or beating to death,
or by bondage or threats
did he ever harm anyone.
> Pali: “Na pāṇidaṇḍehi panātha leḍḍunā,
Satthena vā maraṇavadhena vā pana;
Ubbādhanāya paritajjanāya vā,
Na heṭhayī janatamaheṭhako ahu.
[¶30] For that very reason he rejoiced in heaven after passing away,
finding happiness as a fruit of happy deeds.
With taste receptors prominent and evenly spreading nutrition,
on his return here he has ridged taste buds.
> Pali: Teneva so sugatimupecca modati,
Sukhapphalaṁ kariya sukhāni vindati;
Samojasā rasaharaṇī susaṇṭhitā,
Idhāgato labhati rasaggasaggitaṁ.
[¶31] That’s why the clever prophets said:
‘This man will have much happiness
as householder or renunciate.
That’s the meaning shown by this mark.’”
> Pali: Tenāhu naṁ atinipuṇā vicakkhaṇā,
Ayaṁ naro sukhabahulo bhavissati;
Gihissa vā pabbajitassa vā puna,
Taṁ lakkhaṇaṁ bhavati tadatthajotakan”ti.
[¶32] 21–22. Indigo Eyes
> Pali: 21–22. Abhinīlanettagopakhumalakkhaṇāni
[¶33] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. When looking at others he didn’t glare, look askance, or avert his eyes. Being straightforward, he reached out to others with straightforward intentions, looking at people with kindly eyes. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: his eyes are indigo, and he has eyelashes like a cow’s.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno na ca visaṭaṁ, na ca visāci, na ca pana viceyya pekkhitā, ujuṁ tathā pasaṭamujumano, piyacakkhunā bahujanaṁ udikkhitā ahosi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Abhinīlanetto ca hoti gopakhumo ca.
[¶34] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? The people look on him with kindly eyes. He is dear and beloved to the brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? The people look on him with kindly eyes. He is dear and beloved to the monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato, sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Piyadassano hoti bahuno janassa, piyo hoti manāpo brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṁ negamajānapadānaṁ gaṇakamahāmattānaṁ anīkaṭṭhānaṁ dovārikānaṁ amaccānaṁ pārisajjānaṁ rājūnaṁ bhogiyānaṁ kumārānaṁ. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Piyadassano hoti bahuno janassa, piyo hoti manāpo bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ devānaṁ manussānaṁ asurānaṁ nāgānaṁ gandhabbānaṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶35] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶36] “With not a glare or glance askance,
nor averting of the eyes;
straightforward, he reached out straightforwardly,
looking at people with kindly eyes.
> Pali: “Na ca visaṭaṁ na ca visāci,
Na ca pana viceyyapekkhitā;
Ujuṁ tathā pasaṭamujumano,
Piyacakkhunā bahujanaṁ udikkhitā.
[¶37] In good rebirths he enjoyed the fruit
and result, rejoicing there.
But here he has a cow’s eyelashes,
and indigo eyes so fair to see.
> Pali: Sugatīsu so phalavipākaṁ,
Anubhavati tattha modati;
Idha ca pana bhavati gopakhumo,
Abhinīlanettanayano sudassano.
[¶38] Many soothsayers, men clever
and learned in prognostic texts,
expert in cow-like lashes, indicated
he’d be looked upon with kindly eyes.
> Pali: Abhiyogino ca nipuṇā,
Bahū pana nimittakovidā;
Sukhumanayanakusalā manujā,
Piyadassanoti abhiniddisanti naṁ.
[¶39] Even as a householder he’d be regarded kindly,
beloved of the people.
But if he becomes an ascetic, not lay,
as destroyer of sorrow he’ll be loved by many.”
> Pali: Piyadassano gihīpi santo ca,
Bhavati bahujanapiyāyito;
Yadi ca na bhavati gihī samaṇo hoti,
Piyo bahūnaṁ sokanāsano”ti.
[¶40] 23. Crown Like a Turban
> Pali: 23. Uṇhīsasīsalakkhaṇaṁ
[¶41] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He was the leader and forerunner of people in skillful behaviors such as good conduct by way of body, speech, and mind, giving and sharing, taking precepts, observing the sabbath, paying due respect to mother and father, ascetics and brahmins, honoring the elders in the family, and various other things pertaining to skillful behaviors. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: the crown of his head is like a turban.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno bahujanapubbaṅgamo ahosi kusalesu dhammesu bahujanapāmokkho kāyasucarite vacīsucarite manosucarite dānasaṁvibhāge sīlasamādāne uposathupavāse matteyyatāya petteyyatāya sāmaññatāya brahmaññatāya kule jeṭṭhāpacāyitāya aññataraññataresu ca adhikusalesu dhammesu. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati— uṇhīsasīso hoti.
[¶42] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He has a large following of brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He has a large following of monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāssa jano anvāyiko hoti, brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāssa jano anvāyiko hoti, bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶43] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶44] “Among people of good conduct, he was the leader,
devoted to a life of principle among the principled.
The people followed him,
and he experienced the fruit of good deeds in heaven.
> Pali: “Pubbaṅgamo sucaritesu ahu,
Dhammesu dhammacariyābhirato;
Anvāyiko bahujanassa ahu,
Saggesu vedayittha puññaphalaṁ.
[¶45] Having experienced that fruit,
he gains a head crowned like a turban.
The experts in omens and signs prophesied:
‘He will be leader of the people.
> Pali: Veditvā so sucaritassa phalaṁ,
Uṇhīsasīsattamidhajjhagamā;
Byākaṁsu byañjananimittadharā,
Pubbaṅgamo bahujanaṁ hessati.
[¶46] Assistants serve him here among men,
as they did for him then in the past.
If he becomes an aristocrat, ruler of the land,
he’ll gain the service of the people.
> Pali: Paṭibhogiyā manujesu idha,
Pubbeva tassa abhiharanti tadā;
Yadi khattiyo bhavati bhūmipati,
Paṭihārakaṁ bahujane labhati.
[¶47] But if that man goes forth,
he’ll be sophisticated, proficient in the teachings.
Devoted to the virtues of his instruction,
the people will become his followers.’”
> Pali: Atha cepi pabbajati so manujo,
Dhammesu hoti paguṇo visavī;
Tassānusāsaniguṇābhirato,
Anvāyiko bahujano bhavatī”ti.
[¶48] 24–25. One Hair Per Pore, and a Tuft
> Pali: 24–25. Ekekalomatāuṇṇālakkhaṇāni
[¶49] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He refrained from lying. He spoke the truth and stuck to the truth. He was honest and dependable, and didn’t trick the world with his words. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: his hairs grow one per pore, and between his eyebrows there grows a tuft, soft and white like cotton-wool.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno musāvādaṁ pahāya musāvādā paṭivirato ahosi, saccavādī saccasandho theto paccayiko avisaṁvādako lokassa. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Ekekalomo ca hoti, uṇṇā ca bhamukantare jātā hoti odātā mudutūlasannibhā.
[¶50] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He has many close adherents among the brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He has many close adherents among the monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato, sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāssa jano upavattati, brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Mahāssa jano upavattati, bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶51] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶52] “In past lives he was true to his promise,
with no forked tongue, he shunned lies.
He never broke his word to anyone,
but spoke what was true, real, and factual.
> Pali: “Saccappaṭiñño purimāsu jātisu,
Advejjhavāco alikaṁ vivajjayi;
Na so visaṁvādayitāpi kassaci,
Bhūtena tacchena tathena bhāsayi.
[¶53] A tuft so very white like cotton-wool
grew prettily between his eyebrows.
And never two, but only one,
hair grew in each of his pores.
> Pali: Setā susukkā mudutūlasannibhā,
Uṇṇā sujātā bhamukantare ahu;
Na lomakūpesu duve ajāyisuṁ,
Ekekalomūpacitaṅgavā ahu.
[¶54] Many soothsayers learned in marks
and expert in signs gathered and prophesied:
‘One like this, with tuft and hair so prominent,
will have many as his close adherents.
> Pali: Taṁ lakkhaṇaññū bahavo samāgatā,
Byākaṁsu uppādanimittakovidā;
Uṇṇā ca lomā ca yathā susaṇṭhitā,
Upavattatī īdisakaṁ bahujjano.
[¶55] Even as householder many people will follow him,
due to the power of deeds in the past.
But once gone forth, owning nothing,
as Buddha the people will follow him.’”
> Pali: Gihimpi santaṁ upavattatī jano,
Bahu puratthāpakatena kammunā;
Akiñcanaṁ pabbajitaṁ anuttaraṁ,
Buddhampi santaṁ upavattati jano”ti.
[¶56] 26–27. Forty Gapless Teeth
> Pali: 26–27. Cattālīsaaviraḷadantalakkhaṇāni
[¶57] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He refrained from backbiting. He didn’t repeat in one place what he heard in another so as to divide people against each other. Instead, he reconciled those who were divided and support those who are united, delighting in harmony, loving harmony, speaking words that promote harmony. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: he has forty teeth, and his teeth have no gaps.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno pisuṇaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato ahosi. Ito sutvā na amutra akkhātā imesaṁ bhedāya, amutra vā sutvā na imesaṁ akkhātā amūsaṁ bhedāya, iti bhinnānaṁ vā sandhātā, sahitānaṁ vā anuppadātā, samaggārāmo samaggarato samagganandī samaggakaraṇiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Cattālīsadanto ca hoti aviraḷadanto ca.
[¶58] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? His retinue cannot be divided. This includes brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? His retinue cannot be divided. This includes monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Abhejjapariso hoti, abhejjāssa honti parisā, brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati … buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Abhejjapariso hoti, abhejjāssa honti parisā, bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶59] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶60] “He spoke no divisive words splitting the united,
creating disputes that foster division,
acting improperly by fostering quarrels,
sowing division in those who are united.
> Pali: “Vebhūtiyaṁ sahitabhedakāriṁ,
Bhedappavaḍḍhanavivādakāriṁ;
Kalahappavaḍḍhanaākiccakāriṁ,
Sahitānaṁ bhedajananiṁ na bhaṇi.
[¶61] He spoke kind words to foster harmony,
uniting those who are divided.
He cast aside quarrels among the people,
rejoicing together with the united.
> Pali: Avivādavaḍḍhanakariṁ sugiraṁ,
Bhinnānusandhijananiṁ abhaṇi;
Kalahaṁ janassa panudī samaṅgī,
Sahitehi nandati pamodati ca.
[¶62] In good rebirths he enjoyed the fruit
and result, rejoicing there.
Here his teeth are gapless, close-set,
forty standing prominent in his mouth.
> Pali: Sugatīsu so phalavipākaṁ,
Anubhavati tattha modati;
Dantā idha honti aviraḷā sahitā,
Caturo dasassa mukhajā susaṇṭhitā.
[¶63] If he becomes an aristocrat, ruler of the land,
his assembly will be indivisible.
And as an ascetic, stainless, immaculate,
his assembly will follow him, unshakable.”
> Pali: Yadi khattiyo bhavati bhūmipati,
Avibhediyāssa parisā bhavati;
Samaṇo ca hoti virajo vimalo,
Parisāssa hoti anugatā acalā”ti.
[¶64] 28–29. A Large Tongue and the Voice of the Divinity
> Pali: 28–29. Pahūtajivhābrahmassaralakkhaṇāni
[¶65] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He refrained from harsh speech. He spoke in a way that’s mellow, pleasing to the ear, endearing, going to the heart, polite, and likable and agreeable to the people. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: he has a large tongue, and the voice of the Divinity, like a cuckoo’s call.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno pharusaṁ vācaṁ pahāya pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato ahosi. Yā sā vācā nelā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā, tathārūpiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati. Pahūtajivho ca hoti brahmassaro ca karavīkabhāṇī.
[¶66] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He has a compelling voice. His words are compelling to brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He has a compelling voice. His words are compelling to monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Ādeyyavāco hoti, ādiyantissa vacanaṁ brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Ādeyyavāco hoti, ādiyantissa vacanaṁ bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶67] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶68] “He never spoke a loud harsh word,
insulting, quarrelsome,
causing harm, rude, crushing the people.
His speech was sweet, helpful, and courteous.
> Pali: “Akkosabhaṇḍanavihesakāriṁ,
Ubbādhikaṁ bahujanappamaddanaṁ;
Abāḷhaṁ giraṁ so na bhaṇi pharusaṁ,
Madhuraṁ bhaṇi susaṁhitaṁ sakhilaṁ.
[¶69] He uttered words dear to the mind,
going to the heart, pleasing to the ear.
He enjoyed the fruit of his good verbal conduct,
experiencing the fruit of good deeds in heaven.
> Pali: Manaso piyā hadayagāminiyo,
Vācā so erayati kaṇṇasukhā;
Vācāsuciṇṇaphalamanubhavi,
Saggesu vedayatha puññaphalaṁ.
[¶70] Having experienced that fruit,
on his return to here he acquired the voice of the Divinity.
His tongue was long and wide,
and his speech was compelling.
> Pali: Veditvā so sucaritassa phalaṁ,
Brahmassarattamidhamajjhagamā;
Jivhāssa hoti vipulā puthulā,
Ādeyyavākyavacano bhavati.
[¶71] Even as householder his speech brings prosperity.
But if that man goes forth,
speaking often to the people,
they’ll be compelled by his fair words.”
> Pali: Gihinopi ijjhati yathā bhaṇato,
Atha ce pabbajati so manujo;
Ādiyantissa vacanaṁ janatā,
Bahuno bahuṁ subhaṇitaṁ bhaṇato”ti.
[¶72] 30. A Lion-Like Jaw
> Pali: 30. Sīhahanulakkhaṇaṁ
[¶73] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He refrained from talking nonsense. His words were timely, true, and meaningful, in line with the teaching and training. He said things at the right time which were valuable, reasonable, succinct, and beneficial. Due to performing those deeds he was reborn in a heavenly realm. When he came back to this place he obtained this mark: his jaw is like that of a lion.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno samphappalāpaṁ pahāya samphappalāpā paṭivirato ahosi kālavādī bhūtavādī atthavādī dhammavādī vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṁ vācaṁ bhāsitā ahosi kālena sāpadesaṁ pariyantavatiṁ atthasaṁhitaṁ. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā …pe… so tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imaṁ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ paṭilabhati, sīhahanu hoti.
[¶74] Possessing this mark, if he stays at home he becomes a wheel-turning monarch. And what does he obtain as king? He can’t be destroyed by any human foe or enemy. That’s what he obtains as king. And what does he obtain as Buddha? He can’t be destroyed by any foe or enemy whether internal or external; nor by greed, hate, or delusion; nor by any ascetic or brahmin or god or Māra or divinity or by anyone in the world. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: So tena lakkhaṇena samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī …pe… rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Appadhaṁsiyo hoti kenaci manussabhūtena paccatthikena paccāmittena. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati …pe… buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Appadhaṁsiyo hoti abbhantarehi vā bāhirehi vā paccatthikehi paccāmittehi, rāgena vā dosena vā mohena vā samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṁ. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶75] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶76] “Neither nonsensical nor silly,
his way of speaking was never loose.
He cast aside what was unbeneficial,
and spoke for the welfare and happiness of the people.
> Pali: “Na samphappalāpaṁ na muddhataṁ,
Avikiṇṇavacanabyappatho ahosi;
Ahitamapi ca apanudi,
Hitamapi ca bahujanasukhañca abhaṇi.
[¶77] So doing he passed from here to be reborn in heaven,
where he enjoyed the fruit of deeds well done.
Passing away, on his return to here,
he gained a jaw like the finest of beasts.
> Pali: Taṁ katvā ito cuto divamupapajji,
Sukataphalavipākamanubhosi;
Caviya punaridhāgato samāno,
Dvidugamavaratarahanuttamalattha.
[¶78] He became a king so very hard to defeat,
a mighty lord and ruler of mankind.
He was equal to the best in the city of the Third Heaven,
like Indra, the finest of gods.
> Pali: Rājā hoti suduppadhaṁsiyo,
Manujindo manujādhipati mahānubhāvo;
Tidivapuravarasamo bhavati,
Suravarataroriva indo.
[¶79] One such as that is not easily beaten by centaurs,
titans, spirits, monsters, or gods.
If he becomes of that sort,
he illuminates the quarters and in-between.”
> Pali: Gandhabbāsurayakkharakkhasebhi,
Surehi na hi bhavati suppadhaṁsiyo;
Tathatto yadi bhavati tathāvidho,
Idha disā ca paṭidisā ca vidisā cā”ti.
[¶80] 31–32. Even and White Teeth
> Pali: 31–32. Samadantasusukkadāṭhālakkhaṇāni
[¶81] “Mendicants, in some past lives the Realized One was reborn as a human being. He gave up wrong livelihood and earned a living by right livelihood. He refrained from falsifying weights, metals, or measures; bribery, fraud, cheating, and duplicity; mutilation, murder, abduction, banditry, plunder, and violence. Due to performing, accumulating, heaping up, and amassing those deeds, when his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. There he surpassed the other gods in ten respects: heavenly lifespan, beauty, happiness, glory, sovereignty, sights, sounds, smells, tastes, and touches. When he came back to this place he obtained these two marks: his teeth are even and perfectly white.
> Pali: “Yampi, bhikkhave, tathāgato purimaṁ jātiṁ purimaṁ bhavaṁ purimaṁ niketaṁ pubbe manussabhūto samāno micchājīvaṁ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvikaṁ kappesi, tulākūṭakaṁsakūṭamānakūṭaukkoṭanavañcananikatisāciyogachedanavadhabandhanaviparāmosaālopasahasākārā paṭivirato ahosi. So tassa kammassa kaṭattā upacitattā ussannattā vipulattā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati. So tattha aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhāti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena dibbena sukhena dibbena yasena dibbena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi dibbehi saddehi dibbehi gandhehi dibbehi rasehi dibbehi phoṭṭhabbehi. So tato cuto itthattaṁ āgato samāno imāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni paṭilabhati, samadanto ca hoti susukkadāṭho ca.
[¶82] Possessing these marks, if he stays at home he becomes a king, a wheel-turning monarch, a just and principled king. His dominion extends to all four sides, he achieves stability in the country, and he possesses the seven treasures. He has the following seven treasures: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the jewel, the woman, the householder, and the commander as the seventh treasure. He has over a thousand sons who are valiant and heroic, crushing the armies of his enemies. After conquering this land girt by sea—free of harassment by bandits, successful and prosperous, safe, blessed, free of pests—he reigns by principle, without rod or sword. And what does he obtain as king? His retinue is pure. This includes brahmins and householders, people of town and country, treasurers and chief ministers, military officers, guardsmen, ministers, councillors, rulers, tax beneficiaries, and princes. That’s what he obtains as king.
> Pali: So tehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato sace agāraṁ ajjhāvasati, rājā hoti cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariyappatto sattaratanasamannāgato. Tassimāni satta ratanāni bhavanti, seyyathidaṁ— cakkaratanaṁ hatthiratanaṁ assaratanaṁ maṇiratanaṁ itthiratanaṁ gahapatiratanaṁ pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamaṁ. Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā. So imaṁ pathaviṁ sāgarapariyantaṁ akhilamanimittamakaṇṭakaṁ iddhaṁ phītaṁ khemaṁ sivaṁ nirabbudaṁ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati. Rājā samāno kiṁ labhati? Suciparivāro hoti sucissa honti parivārā brāhmaṇagahapatikā negamajānapadā gaṇakamahāmattā anīkaṭṭhā dovārikā amaccā pārisajjā rājāno bhogiyā kumārā. Rājā samāno idaṁ labhati.
[¶83] But if he goes forth from the lay life to homelessness, he becomes a perfected one, a fully awakened Buddha, who has cast off the world’s veil. And what does he obtain as Buddha? His retinue is pure. This includes monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, gods, humans, titans, dragons, and centaurs. That’s what he obtains as Buddha.” The Buddha spoke this matter.
> Pali: Sace kho pana agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajati, arahaṁ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchado. Buddho samāno kiṁ labhati? Suciparivāro hoti, sucissa honti parivārā, bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā asurā nāgā gandhabbā. Buddho samāno idaṁ labhati”. Etamatthaṁ bhagavā avoca.
[¶84] On this it is said:
> Pali: Tatthetaṁ vuccati:
[¶85] “He abandoned wrong livelihood, and created
a way of life that’s fair, pure, and just.
He cast aside what was unbeneficial,
and lived for the welfare and happiness of the people.
> Pali: “Micchājīvañca avassaji samena vuttiṁ,
Sucinā so janayittha dhammikena;
Ahitamapi ca apanudi,
Hitamapi ca bahujanasukhañca acari.
[¶86] Having done what’s praised by the clever, the wise, and the good,
that man experienced the fruit in heaven.
Equal to the best in the Third Heaven,
he enjoyed himself with pleasure and play.
> Pali: Sagge vedayati naro sukhapphalāni,
Karitvā nipuṇebhi vidūhi sabbhi;
Vaṇṇitāni tidivapuravarasamo,
Abhiramati ratikhiḍḍāsamaṅgī.
[¶87] From there he passed back to a human life.
With the remaining ripening of the fruit of good deeds,
he obtained teeth that are even,
gleaming, bright, and white.
> Pali: Laddhāna mānusakaṁ bhavaṁ tato,
Cavitvāna sukataphalavipākaṁ;
Sesakena paṭilabhati lapanajaṁ,
Samamapi sucisusukkaṁ.
[¶88] Many soothsayers regarded as wise men
gathered and predicted of him:
‘With twice-born teeth so even, so white, so clean and bright
his retinue will be so pure.
> Pali: Taṁ veyyañjanikā samāgatā bahavo,
Byākaṁsu nipuṇasammatā manujā;
Sucijanaparivāragaṇo bhavati,
Dijasamasukkasucisobhanadanto.
[¶89] As king, his people will also be pure,
when he rules having conquered this earth so broad.
They won’t harm the country,
but will live for the welfare and happiness of the people.
> Pali: Rañño hoti bahujano,
Suciparivāro mahatiṁ mahiṁ anusāsato;
Pasayha na ca janapadatudanaṁ,
Hitamapi ca bahujanasukhañca caranti.
[¶90] But if he goes forth he’ll be an ascetic free of ill,
his passions quelled, the veil cast off.
Rid of stress and weariness,
he sees this world and the next.
> Pali: Atha ce pabbajati bhavati vipāpo,
Samaṇo samitarajo vivaṭṭacchado;
Vigatadarathakilamatho,
Imamapi ca paramapi ca passati lokaṁ.
[¶91] Those who do his bidding, both lay and renunciate,
shake off wickedness, impure and blameworthy.
He’s surrounded by pure people, who cast aside
stains, callousness, sin, and corruptions.’”
> Pali: Tassovādakarā bahugihī ca pabbajitā ca,
Asuciṁ garahitaṁ dhunanti pāpaṁ;
Sa hi sucibhi parivuto bhavati,
Malakhilakalikilese panudehī”ti.
[¶92] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶93] > Pali: Lakkhaṇasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ sattamaṁ.
## 62. DN 31 · Advice to Sigālaka
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/62/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/62/#p-N
[¶0] DN 31 · Advice to Sigālaka
> Pali: DN 31 · Siṅgālasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrels’ feeding ground. Now at that time the householder’s son Sigālaka rose early and left Rājagaha. With his clothes and hair all wet, he raised his cupped palms to revere the various quarters— east, south, west, north, below, and above.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena kho pana samayena siṅgālako gahapatiputto kālasseva uṭṭhāya rājagahā nikkhamitvā allavattho allakeso pañjaliko puthudisā namassati— puratthimaṁ disaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pacchimaṁ disaṁ uttaraṁ disaṁ heṭṭhimaṁ disaṁ uparimaṁ disaṁ.
[¶2] Then the Buddha robed up in the morning and, taking his bowl and robe, entered Rājagaha for alms. He saw Sigālaka revering the various quarters and said to him, “Householder’s son, why are you revering the various quarters in this way?”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Addasā kho bhagavā siṅgālakaṁ gahapatiputtaṁ kālasseva vuṭṭhāya rājagahā nikkhamitvā allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ pañjalikaṁ puthudisā namassantaṁ— puratthimaṁ disaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pacchimaṁ disaṁ uttaraṁ disaṁ heṭṭhimaṁ disaṁ uparimaṁ disaṁ. Disvā siṅgālakaṁ gahapatiputtaṁ etadavoca: “kiṁ nu kho tvaṁ, gahapatiputta, kālasseva vuṭṭhāya rājagahā nikkhamitvā allavattho allakeso pañjaliko puthudisā namassasi— puratthimaṁ disaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pacchimaṁ disaṁ uttaraṁ disaṁ heṭṭhimaṁ disaṁ uparimaṁ disan”ti?
[¶3] “Sir, on his deathbed my father said to me: ‘My dear, please revere the quarters.’ Honoring, respecting, and venerating my father’s words, I rose early and left Rājagaha and, with my clothes and hair all wet, raised my cupped palms to revere the various quarters— east, south, west, north, below, and above.”
> Pali: “Pitā maṁ, bhante, kālaṁ karonto evaṁ avaca: ‘disā, tāta, namasseyyāsī’ti. So kho ahaṁ, bhante, pituvacanaṁ sakkaronto garuṁ karonto mānento pūjento kālasseva uṭṭhāya rājagahā nikkhamitvā allavattho allakeso pañjaliko puthudisā namassāmi— puratthimaṁ disaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ disaṁ pacchimaṁ disaṁ uttaraṁ disaṁ heṭṭhimaṁ disaṁ uparimaṁ disan”ti.
[¶4] 1. The Six Directions
> Pali: 1. Cha disā
[¶5] “Householder’s son, that’s not how the six directions should be revered in the training of the Noble One.”
> Pali: “Na kho, gahapatiputta, ariyassa vinaye evaṁ cha disā namassitabbā”ti.
[¶6] “But sir, how should the six directions be revered in the training of the Noble One? Sir, please teach me this.”
> Pali: “Yathā kathaṁ pana, bhante, ariyassa vinaye cha disā namassitabbā? Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā tathā dhammaṁ desetu, yathā ariyassa vinaye cha disā namassitabbā”ti.
[¶7] “Well then, householder’s son, listen and apply your mind well, I will speak.”
> Pali: “Tena hi, gahapatiputta, suṇohi sādhukaṁ manasikarohi bhāsissāmī”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, sir,” replied Sigālaka. The Buddha said this:
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho siṅgālako gahapatiputto bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca:
[¶9] “Householder’s son, a noble disciple gives up four corrupt deeds, doesn’t do bad deeds on four grounds, and avoids six drains on wealth. When they’ve left these fourteen bad things behind they have the six directions covered. They’re practicing to win in both worlds, and they succeed in this world and the next. When their body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: “Yato kho, gahapatiputta, ariyasāvakassa cattāro kammakilesā pahīnā honti, catūhi ca ṭhānehi pāpakammaṁ na karoti, cha ca bhogānaṁ apāyamukhāni na sevati, so evaṁ cuddasa pāpakāpagato chaddisāpaṭicchādī ubholokavijayāya paṭipanno hoti. Tassa ayañceva loko āraddho hoti paro ca loko. So kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati.
[¶10] 2. Four Corrupt Deeds
> Pali: 2. Cattāro kammakilesā
[¶11] What four corrupt deeds have they given up? Killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, and lying: these are corrupt deeds. These are the four corrupt deeds they’ve given up.”
> Pali: Katamassa cattāro kammakilesā pahīnā honti? Pāṇātipāto kho, gahapatiputta, kammakileso, adinnādānaṁ kammakileso, kāmesumicchācāro kammakileso, musāvādo kammakileso. Imassa cattāro kammakilesā pahīnā hontī”ti.
[¶12] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶13] “Killing, stealing,
telling lies,
and committing adultery:
astute people don’t praise these things.”
> Pali: “Pāṇātipāto adinnādānaṁ,
Musāvādo ca vuccati;
Paradāragamanañceva,
Nappasaṁsanti paṇḍitā”ti.
[¶14] 3. Four Grounds
> Pali: 3. Catuṭhānaṁ
[¶15] “On what four grounds do they not do bad deeds? One does bad deeds prejudiced by favoritism, hostility, stupidity, and cowardice. When a noble disciple is not prejudiced by favoritism, hostility, stupidity, and cowardice, they don’t do bad deeds on these four grounds.”
> Pali: “Katamehi catūhi ṭhānehi pāpakammaṁ na karoti? Chandāgatiṁ gacchanto pāpakammaṁ karoti, dosāgatiṁ gacchanto pāpakammaṁ karoti, mohāgatiṁ gacchanto pāpakammaṁ karoti, bhayāgatiṁ gacchanto pāpakammaṁ karoti. Yato kho, gahapatiputta, ariyasāvako neva chandāgatiṁ gacchati, na dosāgatiṁ gacchati, na mohāgatiṁ gacchati, na bhayāgatiṁ gacchati; imehi catūhi ṭhānehi pāpakammaṁ na karotī”ti.
[¶16] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶17] “If you act against the teaching
out of favoritism, hostility, cowardice, or stupidity,
your fame shrinks,
like the moon in the waning fortnight.
> Pali: “Chandā dosā bhayā mohā,
yo dhammaṁ ativattati;
Nihīyati yaso tassa,
kāḷapakkheva candimā.
[¶18] If you don’t act against the teaching
out of favoritism, hostility, cowardice, and stupidity,
your fame swells,
like the moon in the waxing fortnight.”
> Pali: Chandā dosā bhayā mohā,
yo dhammaṁ nātivattati;
Āpūrati yaso tassa,
sukkapakkheva candimā”ti.
[¶19] 4. Six Drains on Wealth
> Pali: 4. Cha apāyamukhāni
[¶20] “What six drains on wealth do they avoid? Habitually engaging in the following things is a drain on wealth: beer, wine, and liquor intoxicants; roaming the street markets at night; frequenting festivals; gambling; bad friends; laziness.
> Pali: “Katamāni cha bhogānaṁ apāyamukhāni na sevati? Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānānuyogo kho, gahapatiputta, bhogānaṁ apāyamukhaṁ, vikālavisikhācariyānuyogo bhogānaṁ apāyamukhaṁ, samajjābhicaraṇaṁ bhogānaṁ apāyamukhaṁ, jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyogo bhogānaṁ apāyamukhaṁ, pāpamittānuyogo bhogānaṁ apāyamukhaṁ, ālasyānuyogo bhogānaṁ apāyamukhaṁ.
[¶21] 5. Six Drawbacks of Drinking
> Pali: 5. Surāmerayassa cha ādīnavā
[¶22] There are these six drawbacks of habitually consuming intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor. Immediate loss of wealth, promotion of quarrels, susceptibility to illness, disrepute, indecent exposure; and weakened wisdom is the sixth thing. These are the six drawbacks of habitually consuming intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor.
> Pali: Cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānānuyoge. Sandiṭṭhikā dhanajāni, kalahappavaḍḍhanī, rogānaṁ āyatanaṁ, akittisañjananī, kopīnanidaṁsanī, paññāya dubbalikaraṇītveva chaṭṭhaṁ padaṁ bhavati. Ime kho, gahapatiputta, cha ādīnavā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānānuyoge.
[¶23] 6. Six Drawbacks of Roaming the Street Markets at Night
> Pali: 6. Vikālacariyāya cha ādīnavā
[¶24] There are these six drawbacks of roaming the street markets at night. Yourself, your partners and children, and your property are all left unguarded. You’re suspected of bad deeds. Untrue rumors spread about you. You’re at the forefront of many things that entail suffering. These are the six drawbacks of roaming the street markets at night.
> Pali: Cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā vikālavisikhācariyānuyoge. Attāpissa agutto arakkhito hoti, puttadāropissa agutto arakkhito hoti, sāpateyyampissa aguttaṁ arakkhitaṁ hoti, saṅkiyo ca hoti pāpakesu ṭhānesu, abhūtavacanañca tasmiṁ rūhati, bahūnañca dukkhadhammānaṁ purakkhato hoti. Ime kho, gahapatiputta, cha ādīnavā vikālavisikhācariyānuyoge.
[¶25] 7. Six Drawbacks of Festivals
> Pali: 7. Samajjābhicaraṇassa cha ādīnavā
[¶26] There are these six drawbacks of frequenting festivals. You’re always thinking: ‘Where’s the dancing? Where’s the singing? Where’s the music? Where are the stories? Where’s the applause? Where are the kettledrums?’ These are the six drawbacks of frequenting festivals.
> Pali: Cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā samajjābhicaraṇe. Kva naccaṁ, kva gītaṁ, kva vāditaṁ, kva akkhānaṁ, kva pāṇissaraṁ, kva kumbhathunanti. Ime kho, gahapatiputta, cha ādīnavā samajjābhicaraṇe.
[¶27] 8. Six Drawbacks of Gambling
> Pali: 8. Jūtappamādassa cha ādīnavā
[¶28] There are these six drawbacks of habitually gambling. Victory breeds enmity. The loser mourns their money. There is immediate loss of wealth. A gambler’s word carries no weight in public assembly. Friends and colleagues treat them with contempt. And no one wants to marry a gambler, for they think: ‘This individual is a gambler—they’re not able to support a partner.’ These are the six drawbacks of habitually gambling.
> Pali: Cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyoge. Jayaṁ veraṁ pasavati, jino vittamanusocati, sandiṭṭhikā dhanajāni, sabhāgatassa vacanaṁ na rūhati, mittāmaccānaṁ paribhūto hoti, āvāhavivāhakānaṁ apatthito hoti: ‘akkhadhutto ayaṁ purisapuggalo nālaṁ dārabharaṇāyā’ti. Ime kho, gahapatiputta, cha ādīnavā jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyoge.
[¶29] 9. Six Drawbacks of Bad Friends
> Pali: 9. Pāpamittatāya cha ādīnavā
[¶30] There are these six drawbacks of bad friends. You become friends and companions with those who are addicts, carousers, drunkards, frauds, swindlers, and thugs. These are the six drawbacks of bad friends.
> Pali: Cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā pāpamittānuyoge. Ye dhuttā, ye soṇḍā, ye pipāsā, ye nekatikā, ye vañcanikā, ye sāhasikā. Tyāssa mittā honti te sahāyā. Ime kho, gahapatiputta, cha ādīnavā pāpamittānuyoge.
[¶31] 10. Six Drawbacks of Laziness
> Pali: 10. Ālasyassa cha ādīnavā
[¶32] There are these six drawbacks of habitual laziness. You don’t get your work done because you think: ‘It’s too cold! It’s too hot. It’s too late! It’s too early! I’m too hungry! I’m too full!’ By dwelling on so many excuses for not working, you don’t make any more money, and the money you already have runs out. These are the six drawbacks of habitual laziness.”
> Pali: Cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā ālasyānuyoge. Atisītanti kammaṁ na karoti, atiuṇhanti kammaṁ na karoti, atisāyanti kammaṁ na karoti, atipātoti kammaṁ na karoti, atichātosmīti kammaṁ na karoti, atidhātosmīti kammaṁ na karoti. Tassa evaṁ kiccāpadesabahulassa viharato anuppannā ceva bhogā nuppajjanti, uppannā ca bhogā parikkhayaṁ gacchanti. Ime kho, gahapatiputta, cha ādīnavā ālasyānuyoge”ti.
[¶33] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶34] “Some are just drinking buddies,
some call you their dear, dear friend;
but a friend in times of need
is a comrade indeed.
> Pali: “Hoti pānasakhā nāma,
hoti sammiyasammiyo;
Yo ca atthesu jātesu,
sahāyo hoti so sakhā.
[¶35] Sleeping late, adultery,
making enemies, harmfulness,
bad friends, and avarice:
these six grounds ruin a person.
> Pali: Ussūraseyyā paradārasevanā,
Verappasavo ca anatthatā ca;
Pāpā ca mittā sukadariyatā ca,
Ete cha ṭhānā purisaṁ dhaṁsayanti.
[¶36] With bad friends, bad comrades,
bad behavior and alms-resort,
a man falls to ruin
in both this world and the next.
> Pali: Pāpamitto pāpasakho,
pāpaācāragocaro;
Asmā lokā paramhā ca,
ubhayā dhaṁsate naro.
[¶37] Dice, women, toddy, song and dance;
sleeping by day and roaming at night;
bad friends, and avarice:
these six grounds ruin a person.
> Pali: Akkhitthiyo vāruṇī naccagītaṁ,
Divā soppaṁ pāricariyā akāle;
Pāpā ca mittā sukadariyatā ca,
Ete cha ṭhānā purisaṁ dhaṁsayanti.
[¶38] They play dice and drink beer,
and consort with women loved by others.
Associating with the worse, not the better,
they diminish like the waning moon.
> Pali: Akkhehi dibbanti suraṁ pivanti,
Yantitthiyo pāṇasamā paresaṁ;
Nihīnasevī na ca vuddhasevī,
Nihīyate kāḷapakkheva cando.
[¶39] One who is broke and destitute due to toddy,
thirsty, drinking in the bar,
drowning in debt,
will quickly lose their way.
> Pali: Yo vāruṇī addhano akiñcano,
Pipāso pivaṁ papāgato;
Udakamiva iṇaṁ vigāhati,
Akulaṁ kāhiti khippamattano.
[¶40] When you’re in the habit of sleeping late,
seeing night as time to rise,
and always getting drunk,
you can’t keep up the household life.
> Pali: Na divā soppasīlena,
rattimuṭṭhānadessinā;
Niccaṁ mattena soṇḍena,
sakkā āvasituṁ gharaṁ.
[¶41] ‘Too cold, too hot,
too late,’ they say.
When the young neglect their work like this,
riches pass them by.
> Pali: Atisītaṁ atiuṇhaṁ,
atisāyamidaṁ ahu;
Iti vissaṭṭhakammante,
atthā accenti māṇave.
[¶42] But one who considers heat and cold
as no more than blades of grass—
he does his duties as a man,
and happiness never fails.”
> Pali: Yodha sītañca uṇhañca,
tiṇā bhiyyo na maññati;
Karaṁ purisakiccāni,
so sukhaṁ na vihāyatī”ti.
[¶43] 11. Fake Friends
> Pali: 11. Mittapatirūpaka
[¶44] “Householder’s son, you should recognize these four enemies disguised as friends: the taker, the talker, the flatterer, the spender.
> Pali: “Cattārome, gahapatiputta, amittā mittapatirūpakā veditabbā. Aññadatthuharo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo, vacīparamo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo, anuppiyabhāṇī amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo, apāyasahāyo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo.
[¶45] You can recognize a fake friend who’s all take on four grounds.
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi aññadatthuharo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo.
[¶46] Your possessions end up theirs.
Giving little, they expect a lot.
They do their duty out of fear.
They associate for their own advantage.
> Pali: Aññadatthuharo hoti,
appena bahumicchati;
Bhayassa kiccaṁ karoti,
sevati atthakāraṇā.
[¶47] You can recognize a fake friend who’s all take on these four grounds.
> Pali: Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi aññadatthuharo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo.
[¶48] You can recognize a fake friend who’s all talk on four grounds. They’re hospitable in the past. They’re hospitable in the future. They’re full of meaningless pleasantries. When something needs doing in the present they point to their own misfortune. You can recognize a fake friend who’s all talk on these four grounds.
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi vacīparamo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo. Atītena paṭisantharati, anāgatena paṭisantharati, niratthakena saṅgaṇhāti, paccuppannesu kiccesu byasanaṁ dasseti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi vacīparamo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo.
[¶49] You can recognize a fake friend who’s a flatterer on four grounds. They support you equally in doing bad and doing good. They praise you to your face, and put you down behind your back. You can recognize a fake friend who’s a flatterer on these four grounds.
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi anuppiyabhāṇī amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo. Pāpakampissa anujānāti, kalyāṇampissa anujānāti, sammukhāssa vaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, parammukhāssa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi anuppiyabhāṇī amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo.
[¶50] You can recognize a fake friend who’s a spender on four grounds. They accompany you when drinking, roaming the street markets at night, frequenting festivals, and gambling. You can recognize a fake friend who’s a spender on these four grounds.”
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi apāyasahāyo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo. Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānānuyoge sahāyo hoti, vikālavisikhācariyānuyoge sahāyo hoti, samajjābhicaraṇe sahāyo hoti, jūtappamādaṭṭhānānuyoge sahāyo hoti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi apāyasahāyo amitto mittapatirūpako veditabbo”ti.
[¶51] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶52] “One friend is all take,
another all talk;
one’s just a flatterer,
and one’s a comrade who spends.
> Pali: “Aññadatthuharo mitto,
yo ca mitto vacīparo;
Anuppiyañca yo āha,
apāyesu ca yo sakhā.
[¶53] An astute person understands
these four enemies for what they are
and keeps them at a distance,
as they’d shun a risky road.”
> Pali: Ete amitte cattāro,
iti viññāya paṇḍito;
Ārakā parivajjeyya,
maggaṁ paṭibhayaṁ yathā”ti.
[¶54] 12. Good-Hearted Friends
> Pali: 12. Suhadamitta
[¶55] “Householder’s son, you should recognize these four good-hearted friends: the helper, the friend in good times and bad, the counselor, and the one who’s sympathetic.
> Pali: “Cattārome, gahapatiputta, mittā suhadā veditabbā. Upakāro mitto suhado veditabbo, samānasukhadukkho mitto suhado veditabbo, atthakkhāyī mitto suhado veditabbo, anukampako mitto suhado veditabbo.
[¶56] You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s a helper on four grounds. They guard you when you’re negligent. They guard your property when you’re negligent. They keep you safe in times of danger. When something needs doing, they provide you with twice the money you need. You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s a helper on these four grounds.
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi upakāro mitto suhado veditabbo. Pamattaṁ rakkhati, pamattassa sāpateyyaṁ rakkhati, bhītassa saraṇaṁ hoti, uppannesu kiccakaraṇīyesu taddiguṇaṁ bhogaṁ anuppadeti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi upakāro mitto suhado veditabbo.
[¶57] You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s the same in good times and bad on four grounds. They tell you secrets. They keep your secrets. They don’t abandon you in times of trouble. They’d even give their life for your welfare. You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s the same in good times and bad on these four grounds.
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi samānasukhadukkho mitto suhado veditabbo. Guyhamassa ācikkhati, guyhamassa parigūhati, āpadāsu na vijahati, jīvitaṁpissa atthāya pariccattaṁ hoti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi samānasukhadukkho mitto suhado veditabbo.
[¶58] You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s a counselor on four grounds. They keep you from doing bad. They support you in doing good. They teach you what you do not know. They explain the path to heaven. You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s a counselor on these four grounds.
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi atthakkhāyī mitto suhado veditabbo. Pāpā nivāreti, kalyāṇe niveseti, assutaṁ sāveti, saggassa maggaṁ ācikkhati. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi atthakkhāyī mitto suhado veditabbo.
[¶59] You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s sympathetic on four grounds. They don’t delight in your misfortune. They delight in your good fortune. They keep others from criticizing you. They encourage praise of you. You can recognize a good-hearted friend who’s sympathetic on these four grounds.”
> Pali: Catūhi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi anukampako mitto suhado veditabbo. Abhavenassa na nandati, bhavenassa nandati, avaṇṇaṁ bhaṇamānaṁ nivāreti, vaṇṇaṁ bhaṇamānaṁ pasaṁsati. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, catūhi ṭhānehi anukampako mitto suhado veditabbo”ti.
[¶60] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶61] “A friend who’s a helper,
one the same in both pleasure and pain,
a friend of good counsel,
and one of sympathy;
> Pali: “Upakāro ca yo mitto,
sukhe dukkhe ca yo sakhā;
Atthakkhāyī ca yo mitto,
yo ca mittānukampako.
[¶62] an astute person understands
these four friends for what they are
and carefully looks after them,
like a mother the child at her breast.
The astute and virtuous
shine like a burning flame.
> Pali: Etepi mitte cattāro,
iti viññāya paṇḍito;
Sakkaccaṁ payirupāseyya,
mātā puttaṁva orasaṁ;
Paṇḍito sīlasampanno,
jalaṁ aggīva bhāsati.
[¶63] They pick up riches as bees
roaming round pick up pollen.
And their riches proceed to grow,
like a termite mound piling up.
> Pali: Bhoge saṁharamānassa,
bhamarasseva irīyato;
Bhogā sannicayaṁ yanti,
vammikovupacīyati.
[¶64] In gathering wealth like this,
a householder does enough for their family.
And they’d hold on to friends
by dividing their wealth in four.
> Pali: Evaṁ bhoge samāhatvā,
alamatto kule gihī;
Catudhā vibhaje bhoge,
sa ve mittāni ganthati.
[¶65] One portion is to enjoy.
Two parts invest in work.
And the fourth should be kept
for times of trouble.”
> Pali: Ekena bhoge bhuñjeyya,
dvīhi kammaṁ payojaye;
Catutthañca nidhāpeyya,
āpadāsu bhavissatī”ti.
[¶66] 13. Covering the Six Directions
> Pali: 13. Chaddisāpaṭicchādanakaṇḍa
[¶67] “And how, householder’s son, does a noble disciple cover the six directions? These six directions should be recognized: parents as the east, tutors as the south, partner and children as the west, friends and colleagues as the north, bondservants and workers as beneath, and ascetics and brahmins as above.
> Pali: “Kathañca, gahapatiputta, ariyasāvako chaddisāpaṭicchādī hoti? Cha imā, gahapatiputta, disā veditabbā. Puratthimā disā mātāpitaro veditabbā, dakkhiṇā disā ācariyā veditabbā, pacchimā disā puttadārā veditabbā, uttarā disā mittāmaccā veditabbā, heṭṭhimā disā dāsakammakarā veditabbā, uparimā disā samaṇabrāhmaṇā veditabbā.
[¶68] A child should serve their parents as the eastern quarter in five ways, thinking: ‘I will support those who supported me. I’ll do my duty for them. I’ll maintain the family lineage. I’ll take care of the inheritance. When they have passed away, I’ll make an offering on their behalf.’ Parents served by the children in these five ways show sympathy to them in five ways. They keep them from doing bad. They support them in doing good. They train them in a profession. They connect them with a suitable partner. They transfer the inheritance in due time. Parents served by their children in these five ways show sympathy to them in these five ways. And that’s how the eastern quarter is covered, kept safe and free of peril.
> Pali: Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi puttena puratthimā disā mātāpitaro paccupaṭṭhātabbā— bhato ne bharissāmi, kiccaṁ nesaṁ karissāmi, kulavaṁsaṁ ṭhapessāmi, dāyajjaṁ paṭipajjāmi, atha vā pana petānaṁ kālaṅkatānaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ anuppadassāmīti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi puttena puratthimā disā mātāpitaro paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi puttaṁ anukampanti. Pāpā nivārenti, kalyāṇe nivesenti, sippaṁ sikkhāpenti, patirūpena dārena saṁyojenti, samaye dāyajjaṁ niyyādenti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi puttena puratthimā disā mātāpitaro paccupaṭṭhitā imehi pañcahi ṭhānehi puttaṁ anukampanti. Evamassa esā puratthimā disā paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā.
[¶69] A pupil should serve their tutor as the southern quarter in five ways: by rising for them, by serving them, by listening well, by looking after them, and by carefully learning their profession. Tutors served by their pupils in these five ways show sympathy to them in five ways. They make sure they’re well educated and well drilled in memorization. They clearly explain all the knowledge of the profession. They introduce them to their friends and colleagues. They provide protection in every region. Tutors served by their pupils in these five ways show sympathy to them in these five ways. And that’s how the southern quarter is covered, kept safe and free of peril.
> Pali: Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi antevāsinā dakkhiṇā disā ācariyā paccupaṭṭhātabbā— uṭṭhānena upaṭṭhānena sussusāya pāricariyāya sakkaccaṁ sippapaṭiggahaṇena. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi antevāsinā dakkhiṇā disā ācariyā paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi antevāsiṁ anukampanti— suvinītaṁ vinenti, suggahitaṁ gāhāpenti, sabbasippassutaṁ samakkhāyino bhavanti, mittāmaccesu paṭiyādenti, disāsu parittāṇaṁ karonti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi antevāsinā dakkhiṇā disā ācariyā paccupaṭṭhitā imehi pañcahi ṭhānehi antevāsiṁ anukampanti. Evamassa esā dakkhiṇā disā paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā.
[¶70] A husband should serve his wife as the western quarter in five ways: by treating her with honor, by not looking down on her, by not being unfaithful, by relinquishing authority to her, and by presenting her with adornments. A wife served by her husband in these five ways shows sympathy to him in five ways. She’s well-organized in her work. She manages the domestic help. She’s not unfaithful. She preserves his earnings. She’s deft and tireless in all her duties. A wife served by her husband in these five ways shows sympathy to him in these five ways. And that’s how the western quarter is covered, kept safe and free of peril.
> Pali: Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi sāmikena pacchimā disā bhariyā paccupaṭṭhātabbā— sammānanāya anavamānanāya anaticariyāya issariyavossaggena alaṅkārānuppadānena. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi sāmikena pacchimā disā bhariyā paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi sāmikaṁ anukampati— susaṁvihitakammantā ca hoti, saṅgahitaparijanā ca, anaticārinī ca, sambhatañca anurakkhati, dakkhā ca hoti analasā sabbakiccesu. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi sāmikena pacchimā disā bhariyā paccupaṭṭhitā imehi pañcahi ṭhānehi sāmikaṁ anukampati. Evamassa esā pacchimā disā paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā.
[¶71] A gentleman should serve his friends and colleagues as the northern quarter in five ways: giving, kindly words, taking care, equality, and not using tricky words. Friends and colleagues served by a gentleman in these five ways show sympathy to him in five ways. They guard him when they’re negligent. They guard his property when they’re negligent. They keep him safe in times of danger. They don’t abandon him in times of trouble. They honor his descendants. Friends and colleagues served by a gentleman in these five ways show sympathy to him in these five ways. And that’s how the northern quarter is covered, kept safe and free of peril.
> Pali: Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi kulaputtena uttarā disā mittāmaccā paccupaṭṭhātabbā— dānena peyyavajjena atthacariyāya samānattatāya avisaṁvādanatāya. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi kulaputtena uttarā disā mittāmaccā paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi kulaputtaṁ anukampanti— pamattaṁ rakkhanti, pamattassa sāpateyyaṁ rakkhanti, bhītassa saraṇaṁ honti, āpadāsu na vijahanti, aparapajā cassa paṭipūjenti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi kulaputtena uttarā disā mittāmaccā paccupaṭṭhitā imehi pañcahi ṭhānehi kulaputtaṁ anukampanti. Evamassa esā uttarā disā paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā.
[¶72] A master should serve their bondservants and workers as the lower quarter in five ways: by organizing work according to ability, by paying food and wages, by nursing them when sick, by sharing special treats, and by giving time off work. Bondservants and workers served by a master in these five ways show sympathy to him in five ways. They get up first, and go to bed last. They don’t steal. They do their work well. And they promote a good reputation. Bondservants and workers served by a master in these five ways show sympathy to him in these five ways. And that’s how the lower quarter is covered, kept safe and free of peril.
> Pali: Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi ayyirakena heṭṭhimā disā dāsakammakarā paccupaṭṭhātabbā— yathābalaṁ kammantasaṁvidhānena bhattavetanānuppadānena gilānupaṭṭhānena acchariyānaṁ rasānaṁ saṁvibhāgena samaye vossaggena. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi ayyirakena heṭṭhimā disā dāsakammakarā paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi ayyirakaṁ anukampanti— pubbuṭṭhāyino ca honti, pacchā nipātino ca, dinnādāyino ca, sukatakammakarā ca, kittivaṇṇaharā ca. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi ayyirakena heṭṭhimā disā dāsakammakarā paccupaṭṭhitā imehi pañcahi ṭhānehi ayyirakaṁ anukampanti. Evamassa esā heṭṭhimā disā paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā.
[¶73] A gentleman should serve ascetics and brahmins as the upper quarter in five ways: by loving deeds of body, speech, and mind, by not turning them away at the gate, and by providing them with material needs. Ascetics and brahmins served by a gentleman in these five ways show sympathy to him in six ways. They keep him from doing bad. They support him in doing good. They think of him with kindly thoughts. They teach him what he does not know. They clarify what he’s already learned. They explain the path to heaven. Ascetics and brahmins served by a gentleman in these five ways show sympathy to him in these six ways. And that’s how the upper quarter is covered, kept safe and free of peril.”
> Pali: Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi kulaputtena uparimā disā samaṇabrāhmaṇā paccupaṭṭhātabbā— mettena kāyakammena mettena vacīkammena mettena manokammena anāvaṭadvāratāya āmisānuppadānena. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi kulaputtena uparimā disā samaṇabrāhmaṇā paccupaṭṭhitā chahi ṭhānehi kulaputtaṁ anukampanti— pāpā nivārenti, kalyāṇe nivesenti, kalyāṇena manasā anukampanti, assutaṁ sāventi, sutaṁ pariyodāpenti, saggassa maggaṁ ācikkhanti. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi kulaputtena uparimā disā samaṇabrāhmaṇā paccupaṭṭhitā imehi chahi ṭhānehi kulaputtaṁ anukampanti. Evamassa esā uparimā disā paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā”ti.
[¶74] That is what the Buddha said. Then the Holy One, the Teacher, went on to say:
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṁ vatvāna sugato athāparaṁ etadavoca satthā:
[¶75] “Parents are the east,
tutors the south,
wives and child the west,
friends and colleagues the north,
> Pali: “Mātāpitā disā pubbā,
ācariyā dakkhiṇā disā;
Puttadārā disā pacchā,
mittāmaccā ca uttarā.
[¶76] servants and workers below,
and ascetics and brahmins above.
By honoring these quarters
a householder does enough for their family.
> Pali: Dāsakammakarā heṭṭhā,
uddhaṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇā;
Etā disā namasseyya,
alamatto kule gihī.
[¶77] The astute and the virtuous,
the gentle and the articulate,
the placid in manner and the amenable:
they’re the kind who win glory.
> Pali: Paṇḍito sīlasampanno,
saṇho ca paṭibhānavā;
Nivātavutti atthaddho,
tādiso labhate yasaṁ.
[¶78] The diligent, not lazy,
those not disturbed by troubles,
those consistent in conduct, the intelligent:
they’re the kind who win glory.
> Pali: Uṭṭhānako analaso,
āpadāsu na vedhati;
Acchinnavutti medhāvī,
tādiso labhate yasaṁ.
[¶79] The inclusive, the makers of friends,
the bountiful, those rid of stinginess,
those who lead, train, and persuade:
they’re the kind who win glory.
> Pali: Saṅgāhako mittakaro,
vadaññū vītamaccharo;
Netā vinetā anunetā,
tādiso labhate yasaṁ.
[¶80] Giving and kindly words,
taking care here,
and treating equally in worldly conditions,
as they deserve in each case;
these ways of being inclusive in the world
are like a moving chariot’s linchpin.
> Pali: Dānañca peyyavajjañca,
atthacariyā ca yā idha;
Samānattatā ca dhammesu,
tattha tattha yathārahaṁ;
Ete kho saṅgahā loke,
rathassāṇīva yāyato.
[¶81] If there were no such ways of being inclusive,
neither mother nor father
would be respected and honored
for what they’ve done for their children.
> Pali: Ete ca saṅgahā nāssu,
na mātā puttakāraṇā;
Labhetha mānaṁ pūjaṁ vā,
pitā vā puttakāraṇā.
[¶82] But since these ways of being inclusive do exist,
the astute do regard them well,
so they achieve greatness
and are praised.”
> Pali: Yasmā ca saṅgahā ete,
sammapekkhanti paṇḍitā;
Tasmā mahattaṁ papponti,
pāsaṁsā ca bhavanti te”ti.
[¶83] When this was said, Sigālaka the householder’s son said to the Buddha, “Excellent, sir! Excellent! As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the Buddha has made the teaching clear in many ways. I go for refuge to the Buddha, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha. From this day forth, may the Buddha remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.”
> Pali: Evaṁ vutte, siṅgālako gahapatiputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “abhikkantaṁ, bhante, abhikkantaṁ, bhante. Seyyathāpi, bhante, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhagavatā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhagavā dhāretu, ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gatan”ti.
[¶84] > Pali: Siṅgālasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ.
## 63. DN 32 · The Āṭānāṭiya Protection
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/63/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/63/#p-N
[¶0] DN 32 · The Āṭānāṭiya Protection
> Pali: DN 32 · Āṭānāṭiyasutta
[¶1] 1. The First Recitation Section
> Pali: 1. Paṭhamabhāṇavāra
[¶2] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Rājagaha, on the Vulture’s Peak Mountain. Then, late at night, the four great kings—with large armies of spirits, centaurs, gnomes, and dragons—set guards, troops, and wards at the four quarters and then, lighting up the entire Vulture’s Peak with their beauty, went up to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down to one side. Before sitting down to one side, some spirits bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā rājagahe viharati gijjhakūṭe pabbate. Atha kho cattāro mahārājā mahatiyā ca yakkhasenāya mahatiyā ca gandhabbasenāya mahatiyā ca kumbhaṇḍasenāya mahatiyā ca nāgasenāya catuddisaṁ rakkhaṁ ṭhapetvā catuddisaṁ gumbaṁ ṭhapetvā catuddisaṁ ovaraṇaṁ ṭhapetvā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṁ gijjhakūṭaṁ pabbataṁ obhāsetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Tepi kho yakkhā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu, appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶3] Seated to one side, the Great King Vessavaṇa said to the Buddha, “Sir, some high spirits have confidence in the Buddha, some do not. Some middling spirits have confidence in the Buddha, some do not. Some low spirits have confidence in the Buddha, some do not. But mostly the spirits don’t have confidence in the Buddha. Why is that? Because the Buddha teaches them to refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, lying, sexual misconduct, and consuming intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor. But mostly they don’t refrain from such things. They don’t like that or approve of it.
> Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho vessavaṇo mahārājā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca: “santi hi, bhante, uḷārā yakkhā bhagavato appasannā. Santi hi, bhante, uḷārā yakkhā bhagavato pasannā. Santi hi, bhante, majjhimā yakkhā bhagavato appasannā. Santi hi, bhante, majjhimā yakkhā bhagavato pasannā. Santi hi, bhante, nīcā yakkhā bhagavato appasannā. Santi hi, bhante, nīcā yakkhā bhagavato pasannā. Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, yakkhā appasannāyeva bhagavato. Taṁ kissa hetu? Bhagavā hi, bhante, pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti, adinnādānā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti, musāvādā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti, surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti. Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, yakkhā appaṭiviratāyeva pāṇātipātā, appaṭiviratā adinnādānā, appaṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā, appaṭiviratā musāvādā, appaṭiviratā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā. Tesaṁ taṁ hoti appiyaṁ amanāpaṁ.
[¶4] Sir, there are disciples of the Buddha who frequent remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest that are quiet and still, far from the madding crowd, remote from human settlements, and fit for retreat. There dwell high spirits who have no confidence in the Buddha’s dispensation. To give them confidence, may the Buddha please learn the Āṭānāṭiya protection for the guarding, protection, safety, and comfort of the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen.” The Buddha consented with silence.
> Pali: Santi hi, bhante, bhagavato sāvakā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni. Tattha santi uḷārā yakkhā nivāsino, ye imasmiṁ bhagavato pāvacane appasannā. Tesaṁ pasādāya uggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāyā”ti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶5] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, on that occasion Great King Vessavaṇa recited the Āṭānāṭiya protection.
> Pali: Atha kho vessavaṇo mahārājā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ abhāsi:
[¶6] “Hail Vipassī,
the glorious Clear-eyed One!
Hail Sikhī,
sympathetic for all beings!
> Pali: “Vipassissa ca namatthu,
cakkhumantassa sirīmato;
Sikhissapi ca namatthu,
sabbabhūtānukampino.
[¶7] Hail Vessabhū,
cleansed and fervent!
Hail Kakusandha,
crusher of Māra’s army!
> Pali: Vessabhussa ca namatthu,
nhātakassa tapassino;
Namatthu kakusandhassa,
mārasenāpamaddino.
[¶8] Hail Koṇāgamana,
the brahmin who has lived the life!
Hail Kassapa,
everywhere free!
> Pali: Koṇāgamanassa namatthu,
brāhmaṇassa vusīmato;
Kassapassa ca namatthu,
vippamuttassa sabbadhi.
[¶9] Hail Aṅgīrasa,
the glorious Sakyan!
He taught this Dhamma
that casts aside all suffering.
> Pali: Aṅgīrasassa namatthu,
sakyaputtassa sirīmato;
Yo imaṁ dhammaṁ desesi,
sabbadukkhāpanūdanaṁ.
[¶10] Those in the world who are quenched,
truly discerning,
not backbiters; such people
being great of heart and intrepid,
> Pali: Ye cāpi nibbutā loke,
yathābhūtaṁ vipassisuṁ;
Te janā apisuṇātha,
mahantā vītasāradā.
[¶11] revere that Gotama;
he who is helpful to gods and humans,
accomplished in knowledge and conduct,
great of heart and intrepid.
> Pali: Hitaṁ devamanussānaṁ,
yaṁ namassanti gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶12] Where rises the sun—
Aditi’s child, the great orb—
with whose rising
night’s umbra also ends,
and of whom, when sun has risen,
it is said to be the day—
> Pali: Yato uggacchati sūriyo,
ādicco maṇḍalī mahā;
Yassa cuggacchamānassa,
saṁvarīpi nirujjhati;
Yassa cuggate sūriye,
‘divaso’ti pavuccati.
[¶13] there is a deep lake,
an ocean of flowing waters.
That’s how they understand that lake there,
as an ocean of flowing waters.
> Pali: Rahadopi tattha gambhīro,
samuddo saritodako;
Evaṁ taṁ tattha jānanti,
‘samuddo saritodako’.
[¶14] From here that is the eastern quarter,
so the people say.
That quarter is warded
by a great king, glorious,
> Pali: Ito ‘sā purimā disā’,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶15] the lord of the centaurs;
his name is Dhataraṭṭha.
He delights in song and dance,
honored by the centaurs.
> Pali: Gandhabbānaṁ adhipati,
‘dhataraṭṭho’ti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
gandhabbehi purakkhato.
[¶16] And he has many mighty sons
all of one name, so I’ve heard.
Eighty, and ten, and one—
all of them named Indra.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶17] After seeing the Awakened One,
the Buddha, Kinsman of the Sun,
they revere him from afar,
the one great of heart and intrepid.
> Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶18] Homage to you, O thoroughbred!
Homage to you, supreme among men!
You examine us skillfully;
the non-humans bow to you.
We’ve been asked many a time,
‘Do you bow to Gotama the victor?’
> Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶19] And so we ought to declare:
‘We bow to Gotama the victor,
accomplished in knowledge and conduct!
We bow to Gotama the awakened!’
> Pali: ‘Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ’,
‘jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ’.
[¶20] It’s where the departed go, they say,
who are backbiters and calumniators,
killers and hunters,
bandits and cheats.
> Pali: Yena petā pavuccanti,
pisuṇā piṭṭhimaṁsikā;
Pāṇātipātino luddā,
corā nekatikā janā.
[¶21] From here that is the southern quarter,
so the people say.
That quarter is warded
by a great king, glorious,
> Pali: Ito ‘sā dakkhiṇā disā’,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶22] the lord of the gnomes;
his name is Virūḷha.
He delights in song and dance,
honored by the gnomes.
> Pali: Kumbhaṇḍānaṁ adhipati,
‘virūḷho’ iti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
kumbhaṇḍehi purakkhato.
[¶23] And he has many mighty sons
all of one name, so I’ve heard.
Eighty, and ten, and one—
all of them named Indra.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶24] After seeing the Awakened One,
the Buddha, Kinsman of the Sun,
they revere him from afar,
the one great of heart and intrepid.
> Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶25] Homage to you, O thoroughbred!
Homage to you, supreme among men!
You examine us skillfully;
the non-humans bow to you.
We’ve been asked many a time,
‘Do you bow to Gotama the victor?’
> Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶26] And so we ought to declare:
‘We bow to Gotama the victor,
accomplished in knowledge and conduct!
We bow to Gotama the awakened!’
> Pali: ‘Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ’,
‘jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ’.
[¶27] Where sets the sun—
Aditi’s child, the great orb—
with whose setting
the day also ends;
and of whom, when sun has set,
it is said to be night’s umbra—
> Pali: Yattha coggacchati sūriyo,
ādicco maṇḍalī mahā;
Yassa coggacchamānassa,
divasopi nirujjhati;
Yassa coggate sūriye,
‘saṁvarī’ti pavuccati.
[¶28] there is a deep lake in that place,
an ocean of flowing waters.
That’s how they understand that lake there,
as an ocean of flowing waters.
> Pali: Rahadopi tattha gambhīro,
samuddo saritodako;
Evaṁ taṁ tattha jānanti,
‘samuddo saritodako’.
[¶29] From here that is the western quarter,
so the people say.
That quarter is warded
by a great king, glorious,
> Pali: Ito ‘sā pacchimā disā’,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶30] the lord of the dragons;
his name is Virūpakkha.
He delights in song and dance,
honored by the dragons.
> Pali: Nāgānañca adhipati,
‘virūpakkho’ti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
nāgeheva purakkhato.
[¶31] And he has many mighty sons
all of one name, so I’ve heard.
Eighty, and ten, and one—
all of them named Indra.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶32] After seeing the Awakened One,
the Buddha, Kinsman of the Sun,
they revere him from afar,
the one great of heart and intrepid.
> Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶33] Homage to you, O thoroughbred!
Homage to you, supreme among men!
You examine us skillfully;
the non-humans bow to you.
We’ve been asked many a time,
‘Do you bow to Gotama the victor?’
> Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶34] And so we ought to declare:
‘We bow to Gotama the victor,
accomplished in knowledge and conduct!
We bow to Gotama the awakened!’
> Pali: ‘Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ’,
‘jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ’.
[¶35] Where the lovely land north of Kuru is,
and the beautiful Mount Meru,
humans born there
are unselfish, without possessions.
> Pali: Yena uttarakuruvho,
mahāneru sudassano;
Manussā tattha jāyanti,
amamā apariggahā.
[¶36] They do not sow the seed,
nor do they draw the plough.
The rice eaten by people
ripens in untilled soil,
> Pali: Na te bījaṁ pavapanti,
napi nīyanti naṅgalā;
Akaṭṭhapākimaṁ sāliṁ,
paribhuñjanti mānusā.
[¶37] free of powder or husk, pure,
fragrant, with only the rice-grain.
After cooking in a tandoor oven,
they enjoy eating that food.
> Pali: Akaṇaṁ athusaṁ suddhaṁ,
sugandhaṁ taṇḍulapphalaṁ;
Tuṇḍikīre pacitvāna,
tato bhuñjanti bhojanaṁ.
[¶38] Having prepared a cow with hooves uncloven,
they’re drawn about from place to place.
Having prepared a beast with hooves uncloven,
they’re drawn about from place to place.
> Pali: Gāviṁ ekakhuraṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ;
Pasuṁ ekakhuraṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ.
[¶39] Having prepared a woman-drawn carriage,
they’re drawn about from place to place.
Having prepared a man-drawn carriage,
they’re drawn about from place to place.
> Pali: Itthiṁ vā vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ;
Purisaṁ vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ.
[¶40] Having prepared a girl-drawn carriage,
they’re drawn about from place to place.
Having prepared a boy-drawn carriage,
they’re drawn about from place to place.
> Pali: Kumāriṁ vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ;
Kumāraṁ vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ.
[¶41] Having ascended their vehicle,
that king’s servants
tour about in every quarter,
> Pali: Te yāne abhiruhitvā,
Sabbā disā anupariyāyanti;
Pacārā tassa rājino.
[¶42] provided with heavenly vehicles
of elephant and of horse.
And there are palaces and palanquins
for that great and glorious king.
> Pali: Hatthiyānaṁ assayānaṁ,
dibbaṁ yānaṁ upaṭṭhitaṁ;
Pāsādā sivikā ceva,
mahārājassa yasassino.
[¶43] And he has cities, too,
well-built in the sky:
Āṭānāṭā, Kusināṭā, Parakusināṭā,
Nāṭapuriyā, and Parakusiṭanāṭā.
> Pali: Tassa ca nagarā ahu,
Antalikkhe sumāpitā;
Āṭānāṭā kusināṭā parakusināṭā,
Nāṭasuriyā parakusiṭanāṭā.
[¶44] To the north is Kapīvanta,
and Janogha lies beyond.
And there’s Navanavutiya, Ambara-ambaravatiya,
and the royal capital named Āḷakamandā.
> Pali: Uttarena kasivanto,
Janoghamaparena ca;
Navanavutiyo ambaraambaravatiyo,
Āḷakamandā nāma rājadhānī.
[¶45] The Great King Kuvera, dear sir,
has a capital named Visāṇā,
which is why the great king
is called ‘Vessavaṇa’.
> Pali: Kuverassa kho pana mārisa,
Mahārājassa visāṇā nāma rājadhānī;
Tasmā kuvero mahārājā,
‘Vessavaṇo’ti pavuccati.
[¶46] Searching, they shine:
Tatolā, Tattalā, Tatotalā,
Ojasi, Tejasi, Tatojasi,
Sūra, Rājā, Ariṭṭha, and Nemi.
> Pali: Paccesanto pakāsenti,
Tatolā tattalā tatotalā;
Ojasi tejasi tatojasī,
Sūro rājā ariṭṭho nemi.
[¶47] There is a lake there too named Dharaṇī,
whence the clouds rain forth,
and the rains disperse.
There is a hall there too named Sālavatī,
> Pali: Rahadopi tattha dharaṇī nāma,
Yato meghā pavassanti;
Vassā yato patāyanti,
Sabhāpi tattha sālavatī nāma.
[¶48] where the spirits frequent.
There the trees are ever in fruit,
with many different flocks of birds.
Peacocks and herons call out there,
and the sweet cuckoos too.
> Pali: Yattha yakkhā payirupāsanti,
Tattha niccaphalā rukkhā;
Nānā dijagaṇā yutā,
Mayūrakoñcābhirudā;
Kokilādīhi vagguhi.
[¶49] One bird cries out ‘Live, live!’,
another ‘Lift up your heart!’
There are cocks and kookaburras,
and in the wood the woodpeckers.
> Pali: Jīvañjīvakasaddettha,
atho oṭṭhavacittakā;
Kukkuṭakā kuḷīrakā,
vane pokkharasātakā.
[¶50] The parrots and mynah cry out there,
and the ‘little stick-boy’ birds.
Kuvera’s pond of rushes
is lovely all the time.
> Pali: Sukasāḷikasaddettha,
daṇḍamāṇavakāni ca;
Sobhati sabbakālaṁ sā,
kuveranaḷinī sadā.
[¶51] From here that is the northern quarter,
so the people say.
That quarter is warded
by a great king, glorious,
> Pali: Ito ‘sā uttarā disā’,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶52] the lord of spirits;
his name is Kuvera.
He delights in song and dance,
honored by the spirits.
> Pali: Yakkhānañca adhipati,
‘kuvero’ iti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
yakkheheva purakkhato.
[¶53] And he has many mighty sons
all of one name, so I’ve heard.
Eighty, and ten, and one—
all of them named Indra.
> Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶54] After seeing the Awakened One,
the Buddha, Kinsman of the Sun,
they revere him from afar,
the one great of heart and intrepid.
> Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶55] Homage to you, O thoroughbred!
Homage to you, supreme among men!
You examine us skillfully;
the non-humans bow to you.
We’ve been asked many a time,
‘Do you bow to Gotama the victor?’
> Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶56] And so we ought to declare:
‘We bow to Gotama the victor,
accomplished in knowledge and conduct!
We bow to Gotama the awakened!’
> Pali: ‘Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ’,
‘jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotaman’ti.
[¶57] This, good fellow, is the Āṭānāṭiya protection for the guarding, protection, safety, and comfort of the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho sā, mārisa, āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāya.
[¶58] The monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen should learn this Āṭānāṭiya protection well and completely memorize it. If anyone who does so is approached while walking, standing, sitting, or lying down by any non-human being with malicious intent—including males, females, boys, girls, chief ministers, councillors, and servants among the spirits, centaurs, gnomes, and dragons— that non-human will receive no homage or respect in any village or town. And they will receive no ground or dwelling in my capital of Ālakamandā. Nor will they get to go to the conference of the spirits. In addition, the non-humans would not give or take them in marriage. They’d heap personal abuse on them, drop an empty bowl on their head, and even split their head into seven pieces!
> Pali: Yassa kassaci, mārisa, bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā ayaṁ āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā suggahitā bhavissati samattā pariyāputā. Tañce amanusso yakkho vā yakkhinī vā yakkhapotako vā yakkhapotikā vā yakkhamahāmatto vā yakkhapārisajjo vā yakkhapacāro vā, gandhabbo vā gandhabbī vā gandhabbapotako vā gandhabbapotikā vā gandhabbamahāmatto vā gandhabbapārisajjo vā gandhabbapacāro vā, kumbhaṇḍo vā kumbhaṇḍī vā kumbhaṇḍapotako vā kumbhaṇḍapotikā vā kumbhaṇḍamahāmatto vā kumbhaṇḍapārisajjo vā kumbhaṇḍapacāro vā, nāgo vā nāgī vā nāgapotako vā nāgapotikā vā nāgamahāmatto vā nāgapārisajjo vā nāgapacāro vā, paduṭṭhacitto bhikkhuṁ vā bhikkhuniṁ vā upāsakaṁ vā upāsikaṁ vā gacchantaṁ vā anugaccheyya, ṭhitaṁ vā upatiṭṭheyya, nisinnaṁ vā upanisīdeyya, nipannaṁ vā upanipajjeyya. Na me so, mārisa, amanusso labheyya gāmesu vā nigamesu vā sakkāraṁ vā garukāraṁ vā. Na me so, mārisa, amanusso labheyya āḷakamandāya nāma rājadhāniyā vatthuṁ vā vāsaṁ vā. Na me so, mārisa, amanusso labheyya yakkhānaṁ samitiṁ gantuṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā anāvayhampi naṁ kareyyuṁ avivayhaṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā attāhipi paripuṇṇāhi paribhāsāhi paribhāseyyuṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā rittampissa pattaṁ sīse nikkujjeyyuṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā sattadhāpissa muddhaṁ phāleyyuṁ.
[¶59] For there are, good fellow, non-humans who are fierce, cruel, and violent. They don’t obey the Great Kings or their men or their men’s men. They’re said to be rebelling against the Great Kings. They’re just like the bandits in the king of Magadha’s realm who don’t obey the king, his men, or his men’s men, and are said to be rebelling against the king.
> Pali: Santi hi, mārisa, amanussā caṇḍā ruddhā rabhasā, te neva mahārājānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti. Te kho te, mārisa, amanussā mahārājānaṁ avaruddhā nāma vuccanti. Seyyathāpi, mārisa, rañño māgadhassa vijite mahācorā. Te neva rañño māgadhassa ādiyanti, na rañño māgadhassa purisakānaṁ ādiyanti, na rañño māgadhassa purisakānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti. Te kho te, mārisa, mahācorā rañño māgadhassa avaruddhā nāma vuccanti.
[¶60] If any non-human being with malicious intent—including males, females, boys, girls, ministers, councillors, and servants among the spirits, centaurs, gnomes, and dragons—approaches a monk, nun, layman, or laywoman while walking, standing, sitting, or lying down, one ought to yell, cry, and scream to the spirits, great spirits, generals, great generals: ‘This spirit’s got me! This spirit’s entered me! This spirit’s annoying me! This spirit’s harassing me! This spirit’s hurting me! This spirit’s harming me! This spirit won’t let me go!’
> Pali: Evameva kho, mārisa, santi amanussā caṇḍā ruddhā rabhasā, te neva mahārājānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti. Te kho te, mārisa, amanussā mahārājānaṁ avaruddhā nāma vuccanti. Yo hi koci, mārisa, amanusso yakkho vā yakkhinī vā …pe… gandhabbo vā gandhabbī vā …pe… kumbhaṇḍo vā kumbhaṇḍī vā …pe… nāgo vā nāgī vā nāgapotako vā nāgapotikā vā nāgamahāmatto vā nāgapārisajjo vā nāgapacāro vā paduṭṭhacitto bhikkhuṁ vā bhikkhuniṁ vā upāsakaṁ vā upāsikaṁ vā gacchantaṁ vā anugaccheyya, ṭhitaṁ vā upatiṭṭheyya, nisinnaṁ vā upanisīdeyya, nipannaṁ vā upanipajjeyya. Imesaṁ yakkhānaṁ mahāyakkhānaṁ senāpatīnaṁ mahāsenāpatīnaṁ ujjhāpetabbaṁ vikkanditabbaṁ viravitabbaṁ: ‘ayaṁ yakkho gaṇhāti, ayaṁ yakkho āvisati, ayaṁ yakkho heṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho viheṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho hiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho vihiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho na muñcatī’ti.
[¶61] To what spirits, great spirits, generals, great generals?
> Pali: Katamesaṁ yakkhānaṁ mahāyakkhānaṁ senāpatīnaṁ mahāsenāpatīnaṁ?
[¶62] ‘Indra, Soma, and Varuṇa,
Bhāradvāja, the Progenitor,
Candana and Kāmaseṭṭha,
Kinnughaṇḍu and Nighaṇḍu,
> Pali: Indo somo varuṇo ca,
bhāradvājo pajāpati;
Candano kāmaseṭṭho ca,
kinnughaṇḍu nighaṇḍu ca.
[¶63] Panāda and Opamañña,
and Mātali, the god’s equerry.
Cittasena the centaur,
and the kings Nala and Janesabha,
> Pali: Panādo opamañño ca,
devasūto ca mātali;
Cittaseno ca gandhabbo,
naḷo rājā janesabho.
[¶64] Sātāgira, Hemavata,
Puṇṇaka, Karatiya, and Guḷa;
Sivaka and Mucalinda,
Vessāmitta, Yugandhara,
> Pali: Sātāgiro hemavato,
puṇṇako karatiyo guḷo;
Sivako mucalindo ca,
vessāmitto yugandharo.
[¶65] Gopāla, Suppagedha,
Hiri, Netti, and Mandiya;
Pañcālacaṇḍa, Āḷavaka,
Pajjunna, Sumana, Sumukha,
Dadhimukha, Maṇi, Māṇivara, Dīgha,
together with Serīsaka.’
> Pali: Gopālo supparodho ca,
Hiri netti ca mandiyo;
Pañcālacaṇḍo āḷavako,
Pajjunno sumano sumukho;
Dadhimukho maṇi māṇivaro dīgho,
Atho serīsako saha.
[¶66] > Pali: Imesaṁ yakkhānaṁ mahāyakkhānaṁ senāpatīnaṁ mahāsenāpatīnaṁ ujjhāpetabbaṁ vikkanditabbaṁ viravitabbaṁ: ‘ayaṁ yakkho gaṇhāti, ayaṁ yakkho āvisati, ayaṁ yakkho heṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho viheṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho hiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho vihiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho na muñcatī’ti.
[¶67] This, good fellow, is the Āṭānāṭiya protection for the guarding, protection, safety, and comfort of the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen. Well, now, good fellow, I must go. I have many duties, and much to do.”
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho sā, mārisa, āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāya. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, mārisa, gacchāma bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā”ti.
[¶68] “Please, Great Kings, go at your convenience.”
> Pali: “Yassadāni tumhe, mahārājāno, kālaṁ maññathā”ti.
[¶69] Then the four great kings got up from their seats, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right side, before vanishing right there. And before the other spirits present vanished, some bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right side, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward the Buddha, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.
> Pali: Atha kho cattāro mahārājā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Tepi kho yakkhā uṭṭhāyāsanā appekacce bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce bhagavatā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsūti.
[¶70] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶71] 2. The Second Recitation Section
> Pali: 2. Dutiyabhāṇavāra
[¶72] Then, when the night had passed, the Buddha told the mendicants all that had happened, repeating all the verses spoken. Then he added:
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā tassā rattiyā accayena bhikkhū āmantesi: “imaṁ, bhikkhave, rattiṁ cattāro mahārājā mahatiyā ca yakkhasenāya mahatiyā ca gandhabbasenāya mahatiyā ca kumbhaṇḍasenāya mahatiyā ca nāgasenāya catuddisaṁ rakkhaṁ ṭhapetvā catuddisaṁ gumbaṁ ṭhapetvā catuddisaṁ ovaraṇaṁ ṭhapetvā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṁ gijjhakūṭaṁ pabbataṁ obhāsetvā yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Tepi kho, bhikkhave, yakkhā appekacce maṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce mayā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce yenāhaṁ tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.
[¶73] > Pali: Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho, bhikkhave, vessavaṇo mahārājā maṁ etadavoca: ‘santi hi, bhante, uḷārā yakkhā bhagavato appasannā …pe… santi hi, bhante, nīcā yakkhā bhagavato pasannā. Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, yakkhā appasannāyeva bhagavato. Taṁ kissa hetu? Bhagavā hi, bhante, pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti … surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiyā dhammaṁ deseti. Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, yakkhā appaṭiviratāyeva pāṇātipātā … appaṭiviratā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā. Tesaṁ taṁ hoti appiyaṁ amanāpaṁ. Santi hi, bhante, bhagavato sāvakā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppāni. Tattha santi uḷārā yakkhā nivāsino, ye imasmiṁ bhagavato pāvacane appasannā, tesaṁ pasādāya uggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāyā’ti. Adhivāsesiṁ kho ahaṁ, bhikkhave, tuṇhībhāvena. Atha kho, bhikkhave, vessavaṇo mahārājā me adhivāsanaṁ viditvā tāyaṁ velāyaṁ imaṁ āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ abhāsi:
[¶74] > Pali: ‘Vipassissa ca namatthu,
cakkhumantassa sirīmato;
Sikhissapi ca namatthu,
sabbabhūtānukampino.
[¶75] > Pali: Vessabhussa ca namatthu,
nhātakassa tapassino;
Namatthu kakusandhassa,
mārasenāpamaddino.
[¶76] > Pali: Koṇāgamanassa namatthu,
brāhmaṇassa vusīmato;
Kassapassa ca namatthu,
vippamuttassa sabbadhi.
[¶77] > Pali: Aṅgīrasassa namatthu,
sakyaputtassa sirīmato;
Yo imaṁ dhammaṁ desesi,
sabbadukkhāpanūdanaṁ.
[¶78] > Pali: Ye cāpi nibbutā loke,
yathābhūtaṁ vipassisuṁ;
Te janā apisuṇātha,
mahantā vītasāradā.
[¶79] > Pali: Hitaṁ devamanussānaṁ,
yaṁ namassanti gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶80] > Pali: Yato uggacchati sūriyo,
ādicco maṇḍalī mahā;
Yassa cuggacchamānassa,
saṁvarīpi nirujjhati;
Yassa cuggate sūriye,
“divaso”ti pavuccati.
[¶81] > Pali: Rahadopi tattha gambhīro,
samuddo saritodako;
Evaṁ taṁ tattha jānanti,
“samuddo saritodako”.
[¶82] > Pali: Ito “sā purimā disā”,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶83] > Pali: Gandhabbānaṁ adhipati,
“dhataraṭṭho”ti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
gandhabbehi purakkhato.
[¶84] > Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶85] > Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶86] > Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶87] > Pali: “Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ,
jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ”.
[¶88] > Pali: Yena petā pavuccanti,
pisuṇā piṭṭhimaṁsikā;
Pāṇātipātino luddā,
corā nekatikā janā.
[¶89] > Pali: Ito “sā dakkhiṇā disā”,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶90] > Pali: Kumbhaṇḍānaṁ adhipati,
“virūḷho” iti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
kumbhaṇḍehi purakkhato.
[¶91] > Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶92] > Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶93] > Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶94] > Pali: “Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ,
jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ”.
[¶95] > Pali: Yattha coggacchati sūriyo,
ādicco maṇḍalī mahā;
Yassa coggacchamānassa,
divasopi nirujjhati;
Yassa coggate sūriye,
“saṁvarī”ti pavuccati.
[¶96] > Pali: Rahadopi tattha gambhīro,
samuddo saritodako;
Evaṁ taṁ tattha jānanti,
samuddo saritodako.
[¶97] > Pali: Ito “sā pacchimā disā”,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶98] > Pali: Nāgānañca adhipati,
“virūpakkho”ti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
nāgeheva purakkhato.
[¶99] > Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶100] > Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶101] > Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶102] > Pali: “Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ,
jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ”.
[¶103] > Pali: Yena uttarakuruvho,
mahāneru sudassano;
Manussā tattha jāyanti,
amamā apariggahā.
[¶104] > Pali: Na te bījaṁ pavapanti,
nāpi nīyanti naṅgalā;
Akaṭṭhapākimaṁ sāliṁ,
paribhuñjanti mānusā.
[¶105] > Pali: Akaṇaṁ athusaṁ suddhaṁ,
sugandhaṁ taṇḍulapphalaṁ;
Tuṇḍikīre pacitvāna,
tato bhuñjanti bhojanaṁ.
[¶106] > Pali: Gāviṁ ekakhuraṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ;
Pasuṁ ekakhuraṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ.
[¶107] > Pali: Itthiṁ vā vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ;
Purisaṁ vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ.
[¶108] > Pali: Kumāriṁ vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ;
Kumāraṁ vāhanaṁ katvā,
anuyanti disodisaṁ.
[¶109] > Pali: Te yāne abhiruhitvā,
Sabbā disā anupariyāyanti;
Pacārā tassa rājino.
[¶110] > Pali: Hatthiyānaṁ assayānaṁ,
dibbaṁ yānaṁ upaṭṭhitaṁ;
Pāsādā sivikā ceva,
mahārājassa yasassino.
[¶111] > Pali: Tassa ca nagarā ahu,
Antalikkhe sumāpitā;
Āṭānāṭā kusināṭā parakusināṭā,
Nāṭasuriyā parakusiṭanāṭā.
[¶112] > Pali: Uttarena kasivanto,
Janoghamaparena ca;
Navanavutiyo ambaraambaravatiyo,
Āḷakamandā nāma rājadhānī.
[¶113] > Pali: Kuverassa kho pana mārisa,
Mahārājassa visāṇā nāma rājadhānī;
Tasmā kuvero mahārājā,
“Vessavaṇo”ti pavuccati.
[¶114] > Pali: Paccesanto pakāsenti,
Tatolā tattalā tatotalā;
Ojasi tejasi tatojasī,
Sūro rājā ariṭṭho nemi.
[¶115] > Pali: Rahadopi tattha dharaṇī nāma,
Yato meghā pavassanti;
Vassā yato patāyanti,
Sabhāpi tattha sālavatī nāma.
[¶116] > Pali: Yattha yakkhā payirupāsanti,
Tattha niccaphalā rukkhā;
Nānā dijagaṇā yutā,
Mayūrakoñcābhirudā;
Kokilādīhi vagguhi.
[¶117] > Pali: Jīvañjīvakasaddettha,
atho oṭṭhavacittakā;
Kukkuṭakā kuḷīrakā,
vane pokkharasātakā.
[¶118] > Pali: Sukasāḷika saddettha,
daṇḍamāṇavakāni ca;
Sobhati sabbakālaṁ sā,
kuveranaḷinī sadā.
[¶119] > Pali: Ito “sā uttarā disā”,
iti naṁ ācikkhatī jano;
Yaṁ disaṁ abhipāleti,
mahārājā yasassi so.
[¶120] > Pali: Yakkhānañca adhipati,
“kuvero” iti nāmaso;
Ramatī naccagītehi,
yakkheheva purakkhato.
[¶121] > Pali: Puttāpi tassa bahavo,
ekanāmāti me sutaṁ;
Asīti dasa eko ca,
indanāmā mahabbalā.
[¶122] > Pali: Te cāpi buddhaṁ disvāna,
buddhaṁ ādiccabandhunaṁ;
Dūratova namassanti,
mahantaṁ vītasāradaṁ.
[¶123] > Pali: Namo te purisājañña,
namo te purisuttama;
Kusalena samekkhasi,
amanussāpi taṁ vandanti;
Sutaṁ netaṁ abhiṇhaso,
tasmā evaṁ vademase.
[¶124] > Pali: “Jinaṁ vandatha gotamaṁ,
jinaṁ vandāma gotamaṁ;
Vijjācaraṇasampannaṁ,
buddhaṁ vandāma gotaman”ti.
[¶125] > Pali: Ayaṁ kho sā, mārisa, āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāya. Yassa kassaci, mārisa, bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā ayaṁ āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā suggahitā bhavissati samattā pariyāputā tañce amanusso yakkho vā yakkhinī vā …pe… gandhabbo vā gandhabbī vā …pe… kumbhaṇḍo vā kumbhaṇḍī vā …pe… nāgo vā nāgī vā nāgapotako vā nāgapotikā vā nāgamahāmatto vā nāgapārisajjo vā nāgapacāro vā, paduṭṭhacitto bhikkhuṁ vā bhikkhuniṁ vā upāsakaṁ vā upāsikaṁ vā gacchantaṁ vā anugaccheyya, ṭhitaṁ vā upatiṭṭheyya, nisinnaṁ vā upanisīdeyya, nipannaṁ vā upanipajjeyya. Na me so, mārisa, amanusso labheyya gāmesu vā nigamesu vā sakkāraṁ vā garukāraṁ vā. Na me so, mārisa, amanusso labheyya āḷakamandāya nāma rājadhāniyā vatthuṁ vā vāsaṁ vā. Na me so, mārisa, amanusso labheyya yakkhānaṁ samitiṁ gantuṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā anāvayhampi naṁ kareyyuṁ avivayhaṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā attāhi paripuṇṇāhi paribhāsāhi paribhāseyyuṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā rittampissa pattaṁ sīse nikkujjeyyuṁ. Apissu naṁ, mārisa, amanussā sattadhāpissa muddhaṁ phāleyyuṁ.
[¶126] > Pali: Santi hi, mārisa, amanussā caṇḍā ruddhā rabhasā, te neva mahārājānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti. Te kho te, mārisa, amanussā mahārājānaṁ avaruddhā nāma vuccanti. Seyyathāpi, mārisa, rañño māgadhassa vijite mahācorā. Te neva rañño māgadhassa ādiyanti, na rañño māgadhassa purisakānaṁ ādiyanti, na rañño māgadhassa purisakānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti. Te kho te, mārisa, mahācorā rañño māgadhassa avaruddhā nāma vuccanti.
[¶127] > Pali: Evameva kho, mārisa, santi amanussā caṇḍā ruddhā rabhasā, te neva mahārājānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti, na mahārājānaṁ purisakānaṁ purisakānaṁ ādiyanti. Te kho te, mārisa, amanussā mahārājānaṁ avaruddhā nāma vuccanti. Yo hi koci, mārisa, amanusso yakkho vā yakkhinī vā …pe… gandhabbo vā gandhabbī vā …pe… kumbhaṇḍo vā kumbhaṇḍī vā …pe… nāgo vā nāgī vā …pe… paduṭṭhacitto bhikkhuṁ vā bhikkhuniṁ vā upāsakaṁ vā upāsikaṁ vā gacchantaṁ vā upagaccheyya, ṭhitaṁ vā upatiṭṭheyya, nisinnaṁ vā upanisīdeyya, nipannaṁ vā upanipajjeyya. Imesaṁ yakkhānaṁ mahāyakkhānaṁ senāpatīnaṁ mahāsenāpatīnaṁ ujjhāpetabbaṁ vikkanditabbaṁ viravitabbaṁ: “ayaṁ yakkho gaṇhāti, ayaṁ yakkho āvisati, ayaṁ yakkho heṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho viheṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho hiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho vihiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho na muñcatī”ti.
[¶128] > Pali: Katamesaṁ yakkhānaṁ mahāyakkhānaṁ senāpatīnaṁ mahāsenāpatīnaṁ?
[¶129] > Pali: Indo somo varuṇo ca,
bhāradvājo pajāpati;
Candano kāmaseṭṭho ca,
kinnughaṇḍu nighaṇḍu ca.
[¶130] > Pali: Panādo opamañño ca,
devasūto ca mātali;
Cittaseno ca gandhabbo,
naḷo rājā janesabho.
[¶131] > Pali: Sātāgiro hemavato,
puṇṇako karatiyo guḷo;
Sivako mucalindo ca,
vessāmitto yugandharo.
[¶132] > Pali: Gopālo supparodho ca,
Hiri netti ca mandiyo;
Pañcālacaṇḍo āḷavako,
Pajjunno sumano sumukho;
Dadhimukho maṇi māṇivaro dīgho,
Atho serīsako saha.
[¶133] > Pali: Imesaṁ yakkhānaṁ mahāyakkhānaṁ senāpatīnaṁ mahāsenāpatīnaṁ ujjhāpetabbaṁ vikkanditabbaṁ viravitabbaṁ: “ayaṁ yakkho gaṇhāti, ayaṁ yakkho āvisati, ayaṁ yakkho heṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho viheṭheti, ayaṁ yakkho hiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho vihiṁsati, ayaṁ yakkho na muñcatī”ti.
[¶134] > Pali: Ayaṁ kho, mārisa, āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāya. Handa ca dāni mayaṁ, mārisa, gacchāma, bahukiccā mayaṁ bahukaraṇīyā’ti. ‘Yassadāni tumhe, mahārājāno, kālaṁ maññathā’ti.
[¶135] > Pali: Atha kho, bhikkhave, cattāro mahārājā uṭṭhāyāsanā maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Tepi kho, bhikkhave, yakkhā uṭṭhāyāsanā appekacce maṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce mayā saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce yenāhaṁ tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu. Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā tatthevantaradhāyiṁsu.
[¶136] “Mendicants, learn the Āṭānāṭiya protection! Memorize the Āṭānāṭiya protection! Remember the Āṭānāṭiya protection! The Āṭānāṭiya protection is beneficial, and is for the guarding, protection, safety, and comfort of the monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen.”
> Pali: Uggaṇhātha, bhikkhave, āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ. Pariyāpuṇātha, bhikkhave, āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ. Dhāretha, bhikkhave, āṭānāṭiyaṁ rakkhaṁ. Atthasaṁhitā, bhikkhave, āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ guttiyā rakkhāya avihiṁsāya phāsuvihārāyā”ti.
[¶137] That is what the Buddha said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what the Buddha said.
> Pali: Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶138] > Pali: Āṭānāṭiyasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ navamaṁ.
## 64. DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/64/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/64/#p-N
[¶0] DN 33 · Reciting in Concert
> Pali: DN 33 · Saṅgītisutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was wandering in the land of the Mallas together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a Mallian town named Pāvā. There he stayed in Cunda the smith’s mango grove.
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā mallesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena pāvā nāma mallānaṁ nagaraṁ tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā pāvāyaṁ viharati cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane.
[¶2] Now at that time a new town hall named Ubbhaṭaka had recently been constructed for the Mallas of Pāvā. It had not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all. The Mallas of Pāvā also heard that the Buddha had arrived and was staying in Cunda’s mango grove. Then they went up to the Buddha, bowed, sat down to one side, and said to him, “Sir, a new town hall named Ubbhaṭaka has recently been constructed for the Mallas of Pāvā. It has not yet been occupied by an ascetic or brahmin or any human at all. May the Buddha be the first to use it, and only then will the Mallas of Pāvā use it. That would be for the lasting welfare and happiness of the Mallas of Pāvā.” The Buddha consented in silence.
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena pāveyyakānaṁ mallānaṁ ubbhatakaṁ nāma navaṁ sandhāgāraṁ acirakāritaṁ hoti anajjhāvuṭṭhaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena. Assosuṁ kho pāveyyakā mallā: “bhagavā kira mallesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi pāvaṁ anuppatto pāvāyaṁ viharati cundassa kammāraputtassa ambavane”ti. Atha kho pāveyyakā mallā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu. Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho pāveyyakā mallā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “idha, bhante, pāveyyakānaṁ mallānaṁ ubbhatakaṁ nāma navaṁ sandhāgāraṁ acirakāritaṁ hoti anajjhāvuṭṭhaṁ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtena. Tañca kho, bhante, bhagavā paṭhamaṁ paribhuñjatu, bhagavatā paṭhamaṁ paribhuttaṁ pacchā pāveyyakā mallā paribhuñjissanti. Tadassa pāveyyakānaṁ mallānaṁ dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti. Adhivāsesi kho bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
[¶3] Then, knowing that the Buddha had consented, the Mallas got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right. Then they went to the new town hall, where they spread carpets all over, prepared seats, set up a water jar, and placed an oil lamp. Then they went back to the Buddha, bowed, stood to one side, and told him of their preparations, saying, “Please, sir, come at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho pāveyyakā mallā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā yena sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā sabbasanthariṁ sandhāgāraṁ santharitvā bhagavato āsanāni paññāpetvā udakamaṇikaṁ patiṭṭhapetvā telapadīpaṁ āropetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhaṁsu. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho te pāveyyakā mallā bhagavantaṁ etadavocuṁ: “sabbasantharisanthataṁ, bhante, sandhāgāraṁ, bhagavato āsanāni paññattāni, udakamaṇiko patiṭṭhāpito, telapadīpo āropito. Yassadāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṁ maññatī”ti.
[¶4] Then the Buddha robed up and, taking his bowl and robe, went to the new town hall together with the Saṅgha of mendicants. Having washed his feet, he entered the town hall and sat against the central column facing east. The Saṅgha of mendicants also washed their feet, entered the town hall, and sat against the west wall facing east, with the Buddha right in front of them. The Mallas of Pāvā also washed their feet, entered the town hall, and sat against the east wall facing west, with the Buddha right in front of them.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena yena sandhāgāraṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā pāde pakkhāletvā sandhāgāraṁ pavisitvā majjhimaṁ thambhaṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi. Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho pāde pakkhāletvā sandhāgāraṁ pavisitvā pacchimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya puratthābhimukho nisīdi bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā. Pāveyyakāpi kho mallā pāde pakkhāletvā sandhāgāraṁ pavisitvā puratthimaṁ bhittiṁ nissāya pacchimābhimukhā nisīdiṁsu bhagavantaṁyeva purakkhatvā.
[¶5] The Buddha spent much of the night educating, encouraging, firing up, and inspiring the Mallas with a Dhamma talk. Then he sent them off, “The night is getting late, Vāseṭṭhas. Please go at your convenience.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā pāveyyake malle bahudeva rattiṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā samādapetvā samuttejetvā sampahaṁsetvā uyyojesi: “abhikkantā kho, vāseṭṭhā, ratti. Yassadāni tumhe kālaṁ maññathā”ti.
[¶6] “Yes, sir,” replied the Mallas. They got up from their seat, bowed and respectfully circled the Buddha, keeping him on their right, before leaving.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho pāveyyakā mallā bhagavato paṭissutvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkamiṁsu.
[¶7] Soon after they left, the Buddha looked around the Saṅgha of mendicants, who were so very silent. He addressed Venerable Sāriputta, “Sāriputta, the Saṅgha of mendicants is rid of dullness and drowsiness. Give them some Dhamma talk as you feel inspired. My back is sore, I’ll stretch it.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā acirapakkantesu pāveyyakesu mallesu tuṇhībhūtaṁ tuṇhībhūtaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ anuviloketvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ āmantesi: “vigatathinamiddho kho, sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho. Paṭibhātu taṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṁ dhammīkathā. Piṭṭhi me āgilāyati. Tamahaṁ āyamissāmī”ti.
[¶8] “Yes, sir,” Sāriputta replied.
> Pali: “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavato paccassosi.
[¶9] And then the Buddha spread out his outer robe folded in four and laid down in the lion’s posture—on the right side, placing one foot on top of the other—mindful and aware, and focused on the time of getting up.
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ paññāpetvā dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṁ kappesi pāde pādaṁ accādhāya, sato sampajāno uṭṭhānasaññaṁ manasi karitvā.
[¶10] Now at that time the Jain ascetic of the Ñātika clan had recently passed away at Pāvā. With his passing the Jain ascetics split, dividing into two factions, fighting, quarreling, and disputing, continually wounding each other with barbed words: “You don’t understand this teaching and training. I understand this teaching and training. What, you understand this teaching and training? You’re practicing wrong. I’m practicing right. I stay on topic, you don’t. You said last what you should have said first. You said first what you should have said last. What you’ve thought so much about has been disproved. Your doctrine is refuted. Go on, save your doctrine! You’re trapped; get yourself out of this—if you can!”
> Pali: Tena kho pana samayena nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato hoti. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti: “na tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāsi, ahaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānāmi, kiṁ tvaṁ imaṁ dhammavinayaṁ ājānissasi. Micchāpaṭipanno tvamasi, ahamasmi sammāpaṭipanno. Sahitaṁ me, asahitaṁ te. Purevacanīyaṁ pacchā avaca, pacchāvacanīyaṁ pure avaca. Adhiciṇṇaṁ te viparāvattaṁ, āropito te vādo, niggahito tvamasi, cara vādappamokkhāya, nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosī”ti.
[¶11] You’d think there was nothing but slaughter going on among the Jain ascetics. And the Jain Ñātika’s white-clothed lay disciples were disillusioned, dismayed, and disappointed in the Jain ascetics. They were equally disappointed with a teaching and training so poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha, with broken monument and without a refuge.
> Pali: Vadhoyeva kho maññe nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu vattati. Yepi nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa sāvakā gihī odātavasanā, tepi nigaṇṭhesu nāṭaputtiyesu nibbinnarūpā virattarūpā paṭivānarūpā, yathā taṁ durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe.
[¶12] Then Sāriputta told the mendicants about these things. He went on to say, “That’s what happens, reverends, when a teaching and training is poorly explained and poorly propounded, not emancipating, not leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is not a fully awakened Buddha. But this teaching is well explained and well propounded to us by the Blessed One, emancipating, leading to peace, proclaimed by someone who is a fully awakened Buddha. You should all recite this in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.
> Pali: Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi: “nigaṇṭho, āvuso, nāṭaputto pāvāyaṁ adhunākālaṅkato, tassa kālaṅkiriyāya bhinnā nigaṇṭhā dvedhikajātā …pe… bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇe. Evañhetaṁ, āvuso, hoti durakkhāte dhammavinaye duppavedite aniyyānike anupasamasaṁvattanike asammāsambuddhappavedite. Ayaṁ kho panāvuso, amhākaṁ bhagavatā dhammo svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶13] And what is that teaching?
> Pali: Katamo cāvuso, amhākaṁ bhagavatā dhammo svākkhāto suppavedito niyyāniko upasamasaṁvattaniko sammāsambuddhappavedito; yattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ?
[¶14] 1. Ones
> Pali: 1. Ekaka
[¶15] There are teachings grouped by one that have been rightly explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. You should all recite these in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans. What are the teachings grouped by one?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena eko dhammo sammadakkhāto. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katamo eko dhammo?
[¶16] All sentient beings are sustained by food.
> Pali: Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā.
[¶17] All sentient beings are sustained by conditions.
> Pali: Sabbe sattā saṅkhāraṭṭhitikā.
[¶18] These are the teachings grouped by one that have been rightly explained by the Blessed One, who knows and sees, the perfected one, the fully awakened Buddha. You should all recite these in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.
> Pali: Ayaṁ kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena eko dhammo sammadakkhāto. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶19] 2. Twos
> Pali: 2. Duka
[¶20] There are teachings grouped by two that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by two?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dve dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame dve?
[¶21] Name and form.
> Pali: Nāmañca rūpañca.
[¶22] Ignorance and craving for continued existence.
> Pali: Avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca.
[¶23] Views favoring existence and views favoring nonexistence.
> Pali: Bhavadiṭṭhi ca vibhavadiṭṭhi ca.
[¶24] Lack of conscience and prudence.
> Pali: Ahirikañca anottappañca.
[¶25] Conscience and prudence.
> Pali: Hirī ca ottappañca.
[¶26] Being hard to admonish and having bad friends.
> Pali: Dovacassatā ca pāpamittatā ca.
[¶27] Being easy to admonish and having good friends.
> Pali: Sovacassatā ca kalyāṇamittatā ca.
[¶28] Skill in offenses and skill in resolving offenses.
> Pali: Āpattikusalatā ca āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā ca.
[¶29] Skill in meditative attainments and skill in emerging from those attainments.
> Pali: Samāpattikusalatā ca samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā ca.
[¶30] Skill in the elements and skill in application of mind.
> Pali: Dhātukusalatā ca manasikārakusalatā ca.
[¶31] Skill in the sense fields and skill in dependent origination.
> Pali: Āyatanakusalatā ca paṭiccasamuppādakusalatā ca.
[¶32] Skill in what is possible and skill in what is impossible.
> Pali: Ṭhānakusalatā ca aṭṭhānakusalatā ca.
[¶33] Integrity and scrupulousness.
> Pali: Ajjavañca lajjavañca.
[¶34] Patience and gentleness.
> Pali: Khanti ca soraccañca.
[¶35] Camaraderie and hospitality.
> Pali: Sākhalyañca paṭisanthāro ca.
[¶36] Harmlessness and purity.
> Pali: Avihiṁsā ca soceyyañca.
[¶37] Lack of mindfulness and lack of situational awareness.
> Pali: Muṭṭhassaccañca asampajaññañca.
[¶38] Mindfulness and situational awareness.
> Pali: Sati ca sampajaññañca.
[¶39] Not guarding the sense doors and eating too much.
> Pali: Indriyesu aguttadvāratā ca bhojane amattaññutā ca.
[¶40] Guarding the sense doors and moderation in eating.
> Pali: Indriyesu guttadvāratā ca bhojane mattaññutā ca.
[¶41] The power of reflection and the power of development.
> Pali: Paṭisaṅkhānabalañca bhāvanābalañca.
[¶42] The power of mindfulness and the power of immersion.
> Pali: Satibalañca samādhibalañca.
[¶43] Serenity and discernment.
> Pali: Samatho ca vipassanā ca.
[¶44] The basis of serenity and the basis of exertion.
> Pali: Samathanimittañca paggahanimittañca.
[¶45] Exertion, and not being scattered.
> Pali: Paggaho ca avikkhepo ca.
[¶46] Failure in ethics and failure in view.
> Pali: Sīlavipatti ca diṭṭhivipatti ca.
[¶47] Accomplishment in ethics and accomplishment in view.
> Pali: Sīlasampadā ca diṭṭhisampadā ca.
[¶48] Purification of ethics and purification of view.
> Pali: Sīlavisuddhi ca diṭṭhivisuddhi ca.
[¶49] Purification of view and making an effort in line with that view.
> Pali: Diṭṭhivisuddhi kho pana yathā diṭṭhissa ca padhānaṁ.
[¶50] Inspiration, and making a suitable effort when inspired by inspiring places.
> Pali: Saṁvego ca saṁvejanīyesu ṭhānesu saṁviggassa ca yoniso padhānaṁ.
[¶51] To never be content with skillful qualities, and to never stop trying.
> Pali: Asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivānitā ca padhānasmiṁ.
[¶52] Knowledge and freedom.
> Pali: Vijjā ca vimutti ca.
[¶53] Knowledge of ending and knowledge of non-arising.
> Pali: Khayeñāṇaṁ anuppādeñāṇaṁ.
[¶54] These are the teachings grouped by two that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dve dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶55] 3. Threes
> Pali: 3. Tika
[¶56] There are teachings grouped by three that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by three?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tayo dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame tayo?
[¶57] Three unskillful roots: greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Tīṇi akusalamūlāni— lobho akusalamūlaṁ, doso akusalamūlaṁ, moho akusalamūlaṁ.
[¶58] Three skillful roots: contentment, love, and understanding.
> Pali: Tīṇi kusalamūlāni— alobho kusalamūlaṁ, adoso kusalamūlaṁ, amoho kusalamūlaṁ.
[¶59] Three ways of performing bad conduct: by body, speech, and mind.
> Pali: Tīṇi duccaritāni— kāyaduccaritaṁ, vacīduccaritaṁ, manoduccaritaṁ.
[¶60] Three ways of performing good conduct: by body, speech, and mind.
> Pali: Tīṇi sucaritāni— kāyasucaritaṁ, vacīsucaritaṁ, manosucaritaṁ.
[¶61] Three unskillful thoughts: sensuality, malice, and cruelty.
> Pali: Tayo akusalavitakkā— kāmavitakko, byāpādavitakko, vihiṁsāvitakko.
[¶62] Three skillful thoughts: renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.
> Pali: Tayo kusalavitakkā— nekkhammavitakko, abyāpādavitakko, avihiṁsāvitakko.
[¶63] Three unskillful intentions: sensuality, malice, and cruelty.
> Pali: Tayo akusalasaṅkappā— kāmasaṅkappo, byāpādasaṅkappo, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo.
[¶64] Three skillful intentions: renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.
> Pali: Tayo kusalasaṅkappā— nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṁsāsaṅkappo.
[¶65] Three unskillful perceptions: sensuality, malice, and cruelty.
> Pali: Tisso akusalasaññā— kāmasaññā, byāpādasaññā, vihiṁsāsaññā.
[¶66] Three skillful perceptions: renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.
> Pali: Tisso kusalasaññā— nekkhammasaññā, abyāpādasaññā, avihiṁsāsaññā.
[¶67] Three unskillful elements: sensuality, malice, and cruelty.
> Pali: Tisso akusaladhātuyo— kāmadhātu, byāpādadhātu, vihiṁsādhātu.
[¶68] Three skillful elements: renunciation, good will, and harmlessness.
> Pali: Tisso kusaladhātuyo— nekkhammadhātu, abyāpādadhātu, avihiṁsādhātu.
[¶69] Another three elements: the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm.
> Pali: Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo— kāmadhātu, rūpadhātu, arūpadhātu.
[¶70] Another three elements: the realm of luminous form, the formless realm, and cessation.
> Pali: Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo— rūpadhātu, arūpadhātu, nirodhadhātu.
[¶71] Another three elements: lower, middle, and higher.
> Pali: Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo— hīnadhātu, majjhimadhātu, paṇītadhātu.
[¶72] Three cravings: for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for nonexistence.
> Pali: Tisso taṇhā— kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā.
[¶73] Another three cravings: for the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm.
> Pali: Aparāpi tisso taṇhā— kāmataṇhā, rūpataṇhā, arūpataṇhā.
[¶74] Another three cravings: for the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm, and cessation.
> Pali: Aparāpi tisso taṇhā— rūpataṇhā, arūpataṇhā, nirodhataṇhā.
[¶75] Three fetters: substantialist view, doubt, and misapprehension of precepts and observances.
> Pali: Tīṇi saṁyojanāni— sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāso.
[¶76] Three defilements: sensuality, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.
> Pali: Tayo āsavā— kāmāsavo, bhavāsavo, avijjāsavo.
[¶77] Three realms of existence: sensual, luminous form, and formless.
> Pali: Tayo bhavā— kāmabhavo, rūpabhavo, arūpabhavo.
[¶78] Three searches: for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for a spiritual path.
> Pali: Tisso esanā— kāmesanā, bhavesanā, brahmacariyesanā.
[¶79] Three kinds of discrimination: ‘I’m better’, ‘I’m equal’, and ‘I’m worse’.
> Pali: Tisso vidhā— seyyohamasmīti vidhā, sadisohamasmīti vidhā, hīnohamasmīti vidhā.
[¶80] Three periods: past, future, and present.
> Pali: Tayo addhā— atīto addhā, anāgato addhā, paccuppanno addhā.
[¶81] Three extremes: substantial reality, the origin of substantial reality, and the cessation of substantial reality.
> Pali: Tayo antā— sakkāyo anto, sakkāyasamudayo anto, sakkāyanirodho anto.
[¶82] Three feelings: pleasure, pain, and neutral.
> Pali: Tisso vedanā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā.
[¶83] Three forms of suffering: the suffering inherent in painful feeling, the suffering inherent in conditions, and the suffering inherent in perishing.
> Pali: Tisso dukkhatā— dukkhadukkhatā, saṅkhāradukkhatā, vipariṇāmadukkhatā.
[¶84] Three heaps: the heap of surety in the wrong way, the heap of surety in the right way, and the heap of lack of surety.
> Pali: Tayo rāsī— micchattaniyato rāsi, sammattaniyato rāsi, aniyato rāsi.
[¶85] Three darknesses: one is doubtful, uncertain, undecided, and lacking confidence about the past, future, and present.
> Pali: Tayo tamā— atītaṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, anāgataṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, etarahi vā paccuppannaṁ addhānaṁ ārabbha kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati.
[¶86] Three things a Realized One need not hide: The Realized One’s behavior by way of body, speech, and mind is pure. He has no misconduct in these three ways that need be hidden, thinking: ‘Don’t let others find this out about me!’
> Pali: Tīṇi tathāgatassa arakkheyyāni— parisuddhakāyasamācāro āvuso tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṁ, yaṁ tathāgato rakkheyya: ‘mā me idaṁ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhavacīsamācāro āvuso, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa vacīduccaritaṁ, yaṁ tathāgato rakkheyya: ‘mā me idaṁ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhamanosamācāro, āvuso, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa manoduccaritaṁ yaṁ tathāgato rakkheyya: ‘mā me idaṁ paro aññāsī’ti.
[¶87] Three possessions: greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Tayo kiñcanā— rāgo kiñcanaṁ, doso kiñcanaṁ, moho kiñcanaṁ.
[¶88] Three fires: greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Tayo aggī— rāgaggi, dosaggi, mohaggi.
[¶89] Another three fires: a fire for those worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, a fire for householders, and a fire for those worthy of a religious donation.
> Pali: Aparepi tayo aggī— āhuneyyaggi, gahapataggi, dakkhiṇeyyaggi.
[¶90] Threefold classification of the physical: visible and resistant, invisible and resistant, and invisible and non-resistant.
> Pali: Tividhena rūpasaṅgaho— sanidassanasappaṭighaṁ rūpaṁ, anidassanasappaṭighaṁ rūpaṁ, anidassanaappaṭighaṁ rūpaṁ.
[¶91] Three choices: good choices, bad choices, and imperturbable choices.
> Pali: Tayo saṅkhārā— puññābhisaṅkhāro, apuññābhisaṅkhāro, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro.
[¶92] Three individuals: a trainee, an adept, and one who is neither a trainee nor an adept.
> Pali: Tayo puggalā— sekkho puggalo, asekkho puggalo, nevasekkho nāsekkho puggalo.
[¶93] Three seniors: a senior by birth, a senior in the teaching, and a senior by convention.
> Pali: Tayo therā— jātithero, dhammathero, sammutithero.
[¶94] Three grounds for making merit: giving, ethical conduct, and meditation.
> Pali: Tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni— dānamayaṁ puññakiriyavatthu, sīlamayaṁ puññakiriyavatthu, bhāvanāmayaṁ puññakiriyavatthu.
[¶95] Three grounds for accusations: what is seen, heard, and suspected.
> Pali: Tīṇi codanāvatthūni— diṭṭhena, sutena, parisaṅkāya.
[¶96] Three kinds of sensual rebirth: There are sentient beings who desire what is present. They fall under the sway of presently arisen sensual pleasures. Namely, humans, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is the first kind of sensual rebirth. There are sentient beings who desire to create. Having repeatedly created, they fall under the sway of sensual pleasures. Namely, the gods who love to create. This is the second kind of sensual rebirth. There are sentient beings who desire what is created by others. They fall under the sway of sensual pleasures created by others. Namely, the gods who control what is created by others. This is the third kind of sensual rebirth.
> Pali: Tisso kāmūpapattiyo— santāvuso sattā paccupaṭṭhitakāmā, te paccupaṭṭhitesu kāmesu vasaṁ vattenti, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamā kāmūpapatti. Santāvuso, sattā nimmitakāmā, te nimminitvā nimminitvā kāmesu vasaṁ vattenti, seyyathāpi devā nimmānaratī. Ayaṁ dutiyā kāmūpapatti. Santāvuso sattā paranimmitakāmā, te paranimmitesu kāmesu vasaṁ vattenti, seyyathāpi devā paranimmitavasavattī. Ayaṁ tatiyā kāmūpapatti.
[¶97] Three kinds of pleasant rebirth: There are sentient beings who, having repeatedly given rise to it, dwell in pleasure. Namely, the gods of the Divinity’s host. This is the first pleasant rebirth. There are sentient beings who are drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with pleasure. Every so often they feel inspired to exclaim: ‘Oh, what bliss! Oh, what bliss!’ Namely, the gods of sublime luminosity. This is the second pleasant rebirth. There are sentient beings who are drenched, steeped, filled, and soaked with pleasure. Since they’re truly content, they experience pleasure. Namely, the gods of universal beauty. This is the third pleasant rebirth.
> Pali: Tisso sukhūpapattiyo— santāvuso sattā uppādetvā uppādetvā sukhaṁ viharanti, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamā sukhūpapatti. Santāvuso, sattā sukhena abhisannā parisannā paripūrā paripphuṭā. Te kadāci karahaci udānaṁ udānenti: ‘aho sukhaṁ, aho sukhan’ti, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṁ dutiyā sukhūpapatti. Santāvuso, sattā sukhena abhisannā parisannā paripūrā paripphuṭā. Te santaṁyeva tusitā sukhaṁ paṭisaṁvedenti, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṁ tatiyā sukhūpapatti.
[¶98] Three kinds of wisdom: the wisdom of a trainee, the wisdom of an adept, and the wisdom of one who is neither a trainee nor an adept.
> Pali: Tisso paññā— sekkhā paññā, asekkhā paññā, nevasekkhānāsekkhā paññā.
[¶99] Another three kinds of wisdom: wisdom produced by thought, learning, and meditation.
> Pali: Aparāpi tisso paññā— cintāmayā paññā, sutamayā paññā, bhāvanāmayā paññā.
[¶100] Three weapons: learning, seclusion, and wisdom.
> Pali: Tīṇāvudhāni— sutāvudhaṁ, pavivekāvudhaṁ, paññāvudhaṁ.
[¶101] Three faculties: the faculty of understanding that enlightenment is imminent, the faculty of enlightenment, and the faculty of one who is enlightened.
> Pali: Tīṇindriyāni— anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṁ, aññindriyaṁ, aññātāvindriyaṁ.
[¶102] Three eyes: the eye of the flesh, the eye of clairvoyance, and the eye of wisdom.
> Pali: Tīṇi cakkhūni— maṁsacakkhu, dibbacakkhu, paññācakkhu.
[¶103] Three trainings: in higher ethics, higher mind, and higher wisdom.
> Pali: Tisso sikkhā— adhisīlasikkhā, adhicittasikkhā, adhipaññāsikkhā.
[¶104] Three kinds of development: the development of physical endurance, the development of the mind, and the development of wisdom.
> Pali: Tisso bhāvanā— kāyabhāvanā, cittabhāvanā, paññābhāvanā.
[¶105] Three unsurpassable qualities: unsurpassable seeing, practice, and freedom.
> Pali: Tīṇi anuttariyāni— dassanānuttariyaṁ, paṭipadānuttariyaṁ, vimuttānuttariyaṁ.
[¶106] Three kinds of immersion: Immersion with placing the mind and keeping it connected. Immersion without placing the mind, merely keeping it connected. Immersion without placing the mind or keeping it connected.
> Pali: Tayo samādhī— savitakkasavicāro samādhi, avitakkavicāramatto samādhi, avitakkaavicāro samādhi.
[¶107] Another three kinds of immersion: emptiness, signless, and undirected.
> Pali: Aparepi tayo samādhī— suññato samādhi, animitto samādhi, appaṇihito samādhi.
[¶108] Three purities: purity of body, speech, and mind.
> Pali: Tīṇi soceyyāni— kāyasoceyyaṁ, vacīsoceyyaṁ, manosoceyyaṁ.
[¶109] Three kinds of sagacity: sagacity of body, speech, and mind.
> Pali: Tīṇi moneyyāni— kāyamoneyyaṁ, vacīmoneyyaṁ, manomoneyyaṁ.
[¶110] Three skills: skill in progress, skill in regress, and skill in means.
> Pali: Tīṇi kosallāni— āyakosallaṁ, apāyakosallaṁ, upāyakosallaṁ.
[¶111] Three vanities: the vanity of health, the vanity of youth, and the vanity of life.
> Pali: Tayo madā— ārogyamado, yobbanamado, jīvitamado.
[¶112] Three ways of putting something in charge: putting oneself, the world, or the teaching in charge.
> Pali: Tīṇi ādhipateyyāni— attādhipateyyaṁ, lokādhipateyyaṁ, dhammādhipateyyaṁ.
[¶113] Three topics of discussion: You might discuss the past: ‘That is how it was in the past.’ You might discuss the future: ‘That is how it will be in the future.’ Or you might discuss the present: ‘This is how it is at present.’
> Pali: Tīṇi kathāvatthūni— atītaṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kathaṁ katheyya: ‘evaṁ ahosi atītamaddhānan’ti; anāgataṁ vā addhānaṁ ārabbha kathaṁ katheyya: ‘evaṁ bhavissati anāgatamaddhānan’ti; etarahi vā paccuppannaṁ addhānaṁ ārabbha kathaṁ katheyya: ‘evaṁ hoti etarahi paccuppannaṁ addhānan’ti.
[¶114] Three knowledges: recollection of past lives, knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings, and knowledge of the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Tisso vijjā— pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṁ vijjā, sattānaṁ cutūpapāteñāṇaṁ vijjā, āsavānaṁ khayeñāṇaṁ vijjā.
[¶115] Three meditative abidings: the heavenly meditation, the divine meditation, and the noble meditation.
> Pali: Tayo vihārā— dibbo vihāro, brahmā vihāro, ariyo vihāro.
[¶116] Three demonstrations: The demonstration of psychic power, the demonstration of revealing, and the demonstration of instruction.
> Pali: Tīṇi pāṭihāriyāni— iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ, ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṁ, anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṁ.
[¶117] These are the teachings grouped by three that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena tayo dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶118] 4. Fours
> Pali: 4. Catukka
[¶119] There are teachings grouped by four that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by four?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ, na vivaditabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame cattāro?
[¶120] Four kinds of mindfulness meditation: It’s when a mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī …pe… citte cittānupassī …pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ.
[¶121] Four right efforts: A mendicant generates enthusiasm, tries, makes an effort, exerts the mind, and strives so that bad, unskillful qualities don’t arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen are given up. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities arise. They generate enthusiasm, try, make an effort, exert the mind, and strive so that skillful qualities that have arisen remain, are not lost, but increase, mature, and are fully developed.
> Pali: Cattāro sammappadhānā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu anuppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ anuppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Uppannānaṁ pāpakānaṁ akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Anuppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ uppādāya chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati. Uppannānaṁ kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṁ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṁ ārabhati cittaṁ paggaṇhāti padahati.
[¶122] Four bases of psychic power: A mendicant develops the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to enthusiasm, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to mental development, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to energy, and active effort. They develop the basis of psychic power that has immersion due to inquiry, and active effort.
> Pali: Cattāro iddhipādā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Cittasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Vīriyasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti. Vīmaṁsāsamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṁ iddhipādaṁ bhāveti.
[¶123] Four absorptions: A mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness.
> Pali: Cattāri jhānāni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā ajjhattaṁ sampasādanaṁ cetaso ekodibhāvaṁ avitakkaṁ avicāraṁ samādhijaṁ pītisukhaṁ dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṁvedeti, yaṁ taṁ ariyā ācikkhanti: ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā, pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā, adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶124] Four ways of developing immersion further: There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to blissful meditation in this life. There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to gaining knowledge and vision. There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to mindfulness and awareness. There is a way of developing immersion further that leads to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Catasso samādhibhāvanā. Atthāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṁvattati. Atthāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṁvattati. Atthāvuso samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satisampajaññāya saṁvattati. Atthāvuso samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā āsavānaṁ khayāya saṁvattati.
[¶125] And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to blissful meditation in this life? It’s when a mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption … second absorption … fourth absorption. This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to blissful meditation in this life.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṁvattati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ … pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṁvattati.
[¶126] And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to gaining knowledge and vision? A mendicant applies their mind to the perception of light, focusing on the perception of day regardless of whether it’s night or day. And so, with an open and unenveloped heart, they develop a mind that’s full of radiance. This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to gaining knowledge and vision.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṁvattati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ālokasaññaṁ manasi karoti, divāsaññaṁ adhiṭṭhāti yathā divā tathā rattiṁ, yathā rattiṁ tathā divā. Iti vivaṭena cetasā apariyonaddhena sappabhāsaṁ cittaṁ bhāveti. Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāya saṁvattati.
[¶127] And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to mindfulness and awareness? A mendicant knows feelings as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. They know perceptions as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. They know thoughts as they arise, as they remain, and as they go away. This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to mindfulness and awareness.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satisampajaññāya saṁvattati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno viditā vedanā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Viditā saññā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Viditā vitakkā uppajjanti, viditā upaṭṭhahanti, viditā abbhatthaṁ gacchanti. Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satisampajaññāya saṁvattati.
[¶128] And what is the way of developing immersion further that leads to the ending of defilements? A mendicant meditates observing rise and fall in the five grasping aggregates. ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such are feelings … perceptions … choices … consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’ This is the way of developing immersion further that leads to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Katamā cāvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā āsavānaṁ khayāya saṁvattati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu udayabbayānupassī viharati. Iti rūpaṁ, iti rūpassa samudayo, iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo. Iti vedanā …pe… iti saññā … iti saṅkhārā … iti viññāṇaṁ, iti viññāṇassa samudayo, iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo. Ayaṁ, āvuso, samādhibhāvanā bhāvitā bahulīkatā āsavānaṁ khayāya saṁvattati.
[¶129] Four limitless states: A mendicant meditates spreading a heart full of love to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of love to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will. They meditate spreading a heart full of compassion … rejoicing … equanimity to one direction, and to the second, and to the third, and to the fourth. In the same way above, below, across, everywhere, all around, they spread a heart full of equanimity to the whole world—abundant, expansive, limitless, free of enmity and ill will.
> Pali: Catasso appamaññā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ mettāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati. Karuṇāsahagatena cetasā …pe… muditāsahagatena cetasā …pe… upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṁ disaṁ pharitvā viharati. Tathā dutiyaṁ. Tathā tatiyaṁ. Tathā catutthaṁ. Iti uddhamadho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi sabbattatāya sabbāvantaṁ lokaṁ upekkhāsahagatena cetasā vipulena mahaggatena appamāṇena averena abyāpajjena pharitvā viharati.
[¶130] Four formless states: A mendicant, going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, enters and remains in the dimension of infinite space. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception.
> Pali: Cattāro āruppā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶131] Four supports: After appraisal, a mendicant uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things.
> Pali: Cattāri apassenāni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodeti.
[¶132] Four noble customs: A mendicant is content with any kind of robe, and praises such contentment. They don’t employ improper solicitation for the sake of a robe. They don’t worry if they don’t get a robe. And if they do get a robe, they use it untied, uninfatuated, unattached, seeing the drawback, and understanding the escape. And on account of that they don’t glorify themselves or put others down. A mendicant who is deft, tireless, aware, and mindful in this is said to stand in the ancient, primordial noble custom.
> Pali: Cattāro ariyavaṁsā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena cīvarena, itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, na ca cīvarahetu anesanaṁ appatirūpaṁ āpajjati; aladdhā ca cīvaraṁ na paritassati, laddhā ca cīvaraṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati; tāya ca pana itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti. Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.
[¶133] Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of almsfood …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena piṇḍapātena, itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, na ca piṇḍapātahetu anesanaṁ appatirūpaṁ āpajjati; aladdhā ca piṇḍapātaṁ na paritassati, laddhā ca piṇḍapātaṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati; tāya ca pana itarītarapiṇḍapātasantuṭṭhiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti. Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.
[¶134] Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of lodgings …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena senāsanena, itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī, na ca senāsanahetu anesanaṁ appatirūpaṁ āpajjati; aladdhā ca senāsanaṁ na paritassati, laddhā ca senāsanaṁ agadhito amucchito anajjhāpanno ādīnavadassāvī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati; tāya ca pana itarītarasenāsanasantuṭṭhiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti. Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato, ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.
[¶135] Furthermore, a mendicant enjoys giving up and loves to give up. They enjoy meditation and love to meditate. But they don’t glorify themselves or put down others on account of their love for giving up and meditation. A mendicant who is deft, tireless, aware, and mindful in this is said to stand in the ancient, primordial noble custom.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu pahānārāmo hoti pahānarato, bhāvanārāmo hoti bhāvanārato; tāya ca pana pahānārāmatāya pahānaratiyā bhāvanārāmatāya bhāvanāratiyā nevattānukkaṁseti na paraṁ vambheti. Yo hi tattha dakkho analaso sampajāno paṭissato ayaṁ vuccatāvuso: ‘bhikkhu porāṇe aggaññe ariyavaṁse ṭhito’.
## 65. DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/65/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/65/#p-N
[¶0] Four efforts: The efforts to restrain, to give up, to develop, and to preserve. And what is the effort to restrain? When a mendicant sees a sight with their eyes, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of sight were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of sight, and achieving its restraint. When they hear a sound with their ears … When they smell an odor with their nose … When they taste a flavor with their tongue … When they feel a touch with their body … When they know an idea with their mind, they don’t get caught up in the features and details. If the faculty of mind were left unrestrained, bad unskillful qualities of covetousness and displeasure would become overwhelming. For this reason, they practice restraint, protecting the faculty of mind, and achieving its restraint. This is called the effort to restrain.
> Pali: Cattāri padhānāni. Saṁvarapadhānaṁ pahānapadhānaṁ bhāvanāpadhānaṁ anurakkhaṇāpadhānaṁ. Katamañcāvuso, saṁvarapadhānaṁ? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ, cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā … ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā … kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī. Yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ manindriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati manindriyaṁ, manindriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, saṁvarapadhānaṁ.
[¶1] And what is the effort to give up? It’s when a mendicant doesn’t tolerate a sensual, malicious, or cruel thought that’s arisen, but gives it up, dispels it, eliminates it, and obliterates it. They don’t tolerate any bad, unskillful qualities that have arisen, but give them up, dispel them, eliminate them, and obliterate them. This is called the effort to give up.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, pahānapadhānaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu uppannaṁ kāmavitakkaṁ nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṁ karoti anabhāvaṁ gameti; uppannaṁ byāpādavitakkaṁ …pe… uppannaṁ vihiṁsāvitakkaṁ …pe… uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantiṁ karoti anabhāvaṁ gameti. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, pahānapadhānaṁ.
[¶2] And what is the effort to develop? It’s when a mendicant develops the awakening factors of mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity, which rely on seclusion, fading away, and cessation, and ripen as letting go. This is called the effort to develop.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, bhāvanāpadhānaṁ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … pītisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … samādhisambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti … upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṁ bhāveti vivekanissitaṁ virāganissitaṁ nirodhanissitaṁ vossaggapariṇāmiṁ. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, bhāvanāpadhānaṁ.
[¶3] And what is the effort to preserve? It’s when a mendicant preserves a meditation subject that’s a fine basis of immersion: the perception of a skeleton, a worm-infested corpse, a livid corpse, a split open corpse, or a bloated corpse. This is called the effort to preserve.
> Pali: Katamañcāvuso, anurakkhaṇāpadhānaṁ? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu uppannaṁ bhadrakaṁ samādhinimittaṁ anurakkhati—aṭṭhikasaññaṁ, puḷuvakasaññaṁ, vinīlakasaññaṁ, vicchiddakasaññaṁ, uddhumātakasaññaṁ. Idaṁ vuccatāvuso, anurakkhaṇāpadhānaṁ.
[¶4] Four knowledges: knowledge of the teaching, inferential knowledge, knowledge of encompassing, and conventional knowledge.
> Pali: Cattāri ñāṇāni— dhamme ñāṇaṁ, anvaye ñāṇaṁ, pariye ñāṇaṁ, sammutiyā ñāṇaṁ.
[¶5] Another four knowledges: knowing about suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Aparānipi cattāri ñāṇāni— dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇaṁ.
[¶6] Four factors for stream-entry: associating with true persons, listening to the true teaching, rational application of mind, and practicing in line with the teaching.
> Pali: Cattāri sotāpattiyaṅgāni— sappurisasaṁsevo, saddhammassavanaṁ, yonisomanasikāro, dhammānudhammappaṭipatti.
[¶7] Four factors of a stream-enterer: A noble disciple has experiential confidence in the Buddha: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They have experiential confidence in the teaching: ‘The teaching is well explained by the Buddha—apparent in the present life, immediately effective, inviting inspection, relevant, so that sensible people can know it for themselves.’ They have experiential confidence in the Saṅgha: ‘The Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples is practicing the way that’s good, direct, systematic, and proper. It consists of the four pairs, the eight individual persons. This is the Saṅgha of the Buddha’s disciples that is worthy of offerings dedicated to the gods, worthy of hospitality, worthy of a religious donation, worthy of greeting with cupped palms, and is the supreme field of merit for the world.’ And a noble disciple’s ethical conduct is loved by the noble ones, unbroken, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion.
> Pali: Cattāri sotāpannassa aṅgāni. Idhāvuso, ariyasāvako buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho, bhagavā’ti. Dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhī’ti. Saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti: ‘suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho ujuppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho ñāyappaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho sāmīcippaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho yadidaṁ cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho āhuneyyo pāhuneyyo dakkhiṇeyyo añjalikaraṇīyo anuttaraṁ puññakkhettaṁ lokassā’ti. Ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti akhaṇḍehi acchiddehi asabalehi akammāsehi bhujissehi viññuppasatthehi aparāmaṭṭhehi samādhisaṁvattanikehi.
[¶8] Four fruits of the ascetic life: stream-entry, once-return, non-return, and perfection.
> Pali: Cattāri sāmaññaphalāni— sotāpattiphalaṁ, sakadāgāmiphalaṁ, anāgāmiphalaṁ, arahattaphalaṁ.
[¶9] Four elements: earth, water, fire, and air.
> Pali: Catasso dhātuyo— pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu.
[¶10] Four foods: edible food, whether solid or subtle; contact is the second, mental intention the third, and consciousness the fourth.
> Pali: Cattāro āhārā— kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṁ catutthaṁ.
[¶11] Four establishings of consciousness: As long as consciousness continues, it gets involved with form, supported by form, established on form. And with a sprinkle of relishing, it grows, increases, and matures. Or consciousness gets involved with feeling … Or consciousness gets involved with perception … Or as long as consciousness continues, it gets involved with choices, supported by choices, established on choices. And with a sprinkle of relishing, it grows, increases, and matures.
> Pali: Catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Rūpūpāyaṁ vā, āvuso, viññāṇaṁ tiṭṭhamānaṁ tiṭṭhati rūpārammaṇaṁ rūpappatiṭṭhaṁ nandūpasecanaṁ vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjati; vedanūpāyaṁ vā āvuso … saññūpāyaṁ vā, āvuso …pe… saṅkhārūpāyaṁ vā, āvuso, viññāṇaṁ tiṭṭhamānaṁ tiṭṭhati saṅkhārārammaṇaṁ saṅkhārappatiṭṭhaṁ nandūpasecanaṁ vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjati.
[¶12] Four prejudices: making decisions prejudiced by favoritism, hostility, stupidity, and cowardice.
> Pali: Cattāri agatigamanāni— chandāgatiṁ gacchati, dosāgatiṁ gacchati, mohāgatiṁ gacchati, bhayāgatiṁ gacchati.
[¶13] Four things that give rise to craving: Craving arises in a mendicant for the sake of robes, almsfood, lodgings, or rebirth in this or that state.
> Pali: Cattāro taṇhuppādā— cīvarahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati; piṇḍapātahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati; senāsanahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati; itibhavābhavahetu vā, āvuso, bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati.
[¶14] Four ways of practice: painful practice with slow insight, painful practice with swift insight, pleasant practice with slow insight, and pleasant practice with swift insight.
> Pali: Catasso paṭipadā— dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, dukkhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā, sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā.
[¶15] Another four ways of practice: impatient practice, patient practice, taming practice, and calming practice.
> Pali: Aparāpi catasso paṭipadā— akkhamā paṭipadā, khamā paṭipadā, damā paṭipadā, samā paṭipadā.
[¶16] Four footprints of the Dhamma: contentment, good will, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Cattāri dhammapadāni— anabhijjhā dhammapadaṁ, abyāpādo dhammapadaṁ, sammāsati dhammapadaṁ, sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṁ.
[¶17] Four ways of taking up practices: There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now and results in future pain. There is a way of taking up practices that is painful now but results in future pleasure. There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now but results in future pain. There is a way of taking up practices that is pleasant now and results in future pleasure.
> Pali: Cattāri dhammasamādānāni— atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhañceva āyatiñca dukkhavipākaṁ. Atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannadukkhaṁ āyatiṁ sukhavipākaṁ. Atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhaṁ āyatiṁ dukkhavipākaṁ. Atthāvuso, dhammasamādānaṁ paccuppannasukhañceva āyatiñca sukhavipākaṁ.
[¶18] Four spectrums of the teaching: ethics, immersion, wisdom, and freedom.
> Pali: Cattāro dhammakkhandhā— sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho, vimuttikkhandho.
[¶19] Four powers: energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.
> Pali: Cattāri balāni— vīriyabalaṁ, satibalaṁ, samādhibalaṁ, paññābalaṁ.
[¶20] Four foundations: the foundations of wisdom, truth, generosity, and peace.
> Pali: Cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni— paññādhiṭṭhānaṁ, saccādhiṭṭhānaṁ, cāgādhiṭṭhānaṁ, upasamādhiṭṭhānaṁ.
[¶21] Four ways of answering questions: There is a question that should be answered categorically. There is a question that should be answered analytically. There is a question that should be answered with a counter-question. There is a question that should be set aside.
> Pali: Cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni— ekaṁsabyākaraṇīyo pañho, paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho, vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo pañho, ṭhapanīyo pañho.
[¶22] Four deeds: There are deeds that are dark with dark result. There are deeds that are bright with bright result. There are deeds that are dark and bright with dark and bright result. There are neither dark nor bright deeds with neither dark nor bright results, which lead to the ending of deeds.
> Pali: Cattāri kammāni— atthāvuso, kammaṁ kaṇhaṁ kaṇhavipākaṁ. Atthāvuso, kammaṁ sukkaṁ sukkavipākaṁ. Atthāvuso, kammaṁ kaṇhasukkaṁ kaṇhasukkavipākaṁ. Atthāvuso, kammaṁ akaṇhaasukkaṁ akaṇhaasukkavipākaṁ kammakkhayāya saṁvattati.
[¶23] Four things to be realized: Past lives are to be realized with recollection. The passing away and rebirth of sentient beings is to be realized with vision. The eight liberations are to be realized with direct meditative experience. The ending of defilements is to be realized with wisdom.
> Pali: Cattāro sacchikaraṇīyā dhammā— pubbenivāso satiyā sacchikaraṇīyo; sattānaṁ cutūpapāto cakkhunā sacchikaraṇīyo; aṭṭha vimokkhā kāyena sacchikaraṇīyā; āsavānaṁ khayo paññāya sacchikaraṇīyo.
[¶24] Four floods: the floods of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.
> Pali: Cattāro oghā— kāmogho, bhavogho, diṭṭhogho, avijjogho.
[¶25] Four yokes: the yokes of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.
> Pali: Cattāro yogā— kāmayogo, bhavayogo, diṭṭhiyogo, avijjāyogo.
[¶26] Four unyokings: unyoking from the yokes of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.
> Pali: Cattāro visaññogā— kāmayogavisaññogo, bhavayogavisaññogo, diṭṭhiyogavisaññogo, avijjāyogavisaññogo.
[¶27] Four ties: the personal ties to covetousness, ill will, misapprehension of precepts and observances, and the insistence that this is the only truth.
> Pali: Cattāro ganthā— abhijjhā kāyagantho, byāpādo kāyagantho, sīlabbataparāmāso kāyagantho, idaṁsaccābhiniveso kāyagantho.
[¶28] Four kinds of grasping: grasping at sensual pleasures, views, precepts and observances, and theories of a self.
> Pali: Cattāri upādānāni— kāmupādānaṁ, diṭṭhupādānaṁ, sīlabbatupādānaṁ, attavādupādānaṁ.
[¶29] Four kinds of reproduction: reproduction for creatures born from an egg, from a womb, from moisture, or spontaneously.
> Pali: Catasso yoniyo— aṇḍajayoni, jalābujayoni, saṁsedajayoni, opapātikayoni.
[¶30] Four kinds of conception: Someone is unaware when conceived in their mother’s womb, unaware as they remain there, and unaware as they emerge. This is the first kind of conception. Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, but unaware as they remain there, and unaware as they emerge. This is the second kind of conception. Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, aware as they remain there, but unaware as they emerge. This is the third kind of conception. Furthermore, someone is aware when conceived in their mother’s womb, aware as they remain there, and aware as they emerge. This is the fourth kind of conception.
> Pali: Catasso gabbhāvakkantiyo. Idhāvuso, ekacco asampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ dutiyā gabbhāvakkanti. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ tatiyā gabbhāvakkanti. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṁ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṁ ṭhāti, sampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṁ catutthā gabbhāvakkanti.
[¶31] Four kinds of incarnation: There is an incarnation where only one’s own intention is effective, not that of others. There is an incarnation where only the intention of others is effective, not one’s own. There is an incarnation where both one’s own and others’ intentions are effective. There is an incarnation where neither one’s own nor others’ intentions are effective.
> Pali: Cattāro attabhāvapaṭilābhā. Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe attasañcetanāyeva kamati, no parasañcetanā. Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe parasañcetanāyeva kamati, no attasañcetanā. Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe attasañcetanā ceva kamati parasañcetanā ca. Atthāvuso, attabhāvapaṭilābho, yasmiṁ attabhāvapaṭilābhe neva attasañcetanā kamati, no parasañcetanā.
[¶32] Four ways of purifying a religious donation: There’s a religious donation that’s purified by the giver, not the recipient. There’s a religious donation that’s purified by the recipient, not the giver. There’s a religious donation that’s purified by neither the giver nor the recipient. There’s a religious donation that’s purified by both the giver and the recipient.
> Pali: Catasso dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyo. Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato. Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato. Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato. Atthāvuso, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca.
[¶33] Four ways of being inclusive: giving, kindly words, taking care, and equality.
> Pali: Cattāri saṅgahavatthūni— dānaṁ, peyyavajjaṁ, atthacariyā, samānattatā.
[¶34] Four ignoble expressions: speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical.
> Pali: Cattāro anariyavohārā— musāvādo, pisuṇāvācā, pharusāvācā, samphappalāpo.
[¶35] Four noble expressions: refraining from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical.
> Pali: Cattāro ariyavohārā— musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī.
[¶36] Another four ignoble expressions: saying you’ve seen, heard, thought, or known something, but you haven’t.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro anariyavohārā— adiṭṭhe diṭṭhavāditā, assute sutavāditā, amute mutavāditā, aviññāte viññātavāditā.
[¶37] Another four noble expressions: saying you haven’t seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you haven’t.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro ariyavohārā— adiṭṭhe adiṭṭhavāditā, assute assutavāditā, amute amutavāditā, aviññāte aviññātavāditā.
[¶38] Another four ignoble expressions: saying you haven’t seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you have.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro anariyavohārā— diṭṭhe adiṭṭhavāditā, sute assutavāditā, mute amutavāditā, viññāte aviññātavāditā.
[¶39] Another four noble expressions: saying you’ve seen, heard, thought, or known something, and you have.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro ariyavohārā— diṭṭhe diṭṭhavāditā, sute sutavāditā, mute mutavāditā, viññāte viññātavāditā.
[¶40] Four individuals: One individual mortifies themselves, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves. One individual mortifies others, committed to the practice of mortifying others. One individual mortifies themselves and others, committed to the practice of mortifying themselves and others. One individual doesn’t mortify either themselves or others, committed to the practice of not mortifying themselves or others. They live without wishes in this very life, quenched, cooled, experiencing bliss, with self become divine.
> Pali: Cattāro puggalā. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attantapo hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo parantapo hoti paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attantapo ca hoti attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto, parantapo ca paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo neva attantapo hoti na attaparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto na parantapo na paraparitāpanānuyogamanuyutto. So anattantapo aparantapo diṭṭheva dhamme nicchāto nibbuto sītībhūto sukhappaṭisaṁvedī brahmabhūtena attanā viharati.
[¶41] Another four individuals: One individual practices to benefit themselves, but not others. One individual practices to benefit others, but not themselves. One individual practices to benefit neither themselves nor others. One individual practices to benefit both themselves and others.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro puggalā. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attahitāya paṭipanno hoti no parahitāya. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo parahitāya paṭipanno hoti no attahitāya. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo neva attahitāya paṭipanno hoti no parahitāya. Idhāvuso, ekacco puggalo attahitāya ceva paṭipanno hoti parahitāya ca.
[¶42] Another four individuals: the dark bound for darkness, the dark bound for light, the light bound for darkness, and the light bound for light.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro puggalā— tamo tamaparāyano, tamo jotiparāyano, joti tamaparāyano, joti jotiparāyano.
[¶43] Another four individuals: the confirmed ascetic, the white lotus ascetic, the pink lotus ascetic, and the delicate ascetic of ascetics.
> Pali: Aparepi cattāro puggalā— samaṇamacalo, samaṇapadumo, samaṇapuṇḍarīko, samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo.
[¶44] These are the teachings grouped by four that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶45] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶46] 5. Fives
> Pali: 5. Pañcaka
[¶47] There are teachings grouped by five that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by five?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena pañca dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame pañca?
[¶48] Five aggregates: form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.
> Pali: Pañcakkhandhā. Rūpakkhandho vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho viññāṇakkhandho.
[¶49] Five grasping aggregates: form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.
> Pali: Pañcupādānakkhandhā. Rūpupādānakkhandho vedanupādānakkhandho saññupādānakkhandho saṅkhārupādānakkhandho viññāṇupādānakkhandho.
[¶50] Five kinds of sensual stimulation: Sights known by the eye, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing. Sounds known by the ear … Smells known by the nose … Tastes known by the tongue … Touches known by the body, which are likable, desirable, agreeable, pleasant, sensual, and arousing.
> Pali: Pañca kāmaguṇā. Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasañhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā … ghānaviññeyyā gandhā … jivhāviññeyyā rasā … kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasañhitā rajanīyā.
[¶51] Five destinations: hell, the animal realm, the ghost realm, humanity, and the gods.
> Pali: Pañca gatiyo— nirayo, tiracchānayoni, pettivisayo, manussā, devā.
[¶52] Five kinds of stinginess: stinginess with dwellings, families, material things, praise, and the teachings.
> Pali: Pañca macchariyāni— āvāsamacchariyaṁ, kulamacchariyaṁ, lābhamacchariyaṁ, vaṇṇamacchariyaṁ, dhammamacchariyaṁ.
[¶53] Five hindrances: sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt.
> Pali: Pañca nīvaraṇāni— kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ, byāpādanīvaraṇaṁ, thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṁ, uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṁ, vicikicchānīvaraṇaṁ.
[¶54] Five lower fetters: substantialist view, doubt, misapprehension of precepts and observances, sensual desire, and ill will.
> Pali: Pañca orambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni— sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbataparāmāso, kāmacchando, byāpādo.
[¶55] Five higher fetters: desire for rebirth in the realm of luminous form, desire for rebirth in the formless realm, conceit, restlessness, and ignorance.
> Pali: Pañca uddhambhāgiyāni saṁyojanāni— rūparāgo, arūparāgo, māno, uddhaccaṁ, avijjā.
[¶56] Five precepts: refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, and intoxicants of beer, wine, and liquor.
> Pali: Pañca sikkhāpadāni— pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, musāvādā veramaṇī, surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇī.
[¶57] Five things that can’t be done: A mendicant with defilements ended can’t deliberately take the life of a living creature, take something with the intention to steal, have sex, tell a deliberate lie, or store up goods for their own enjoyment like they used to as a layperson.
> Pali: Pañca abhabbaṭṭhānāni. Abhabbo, āvuso, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇaṁ jīvitā voropetuṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu adinnaṁ theyyasaṅkhātaṁ ādiyituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sampajānamusā bhāsituṁ. Abhabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sannidhikārakaṁ kāme paribhuñjituṁ, seyyathāpi pubbe āgārikabhūto.
[¶58] Five losses: loss of relatives, wealth, health, ethics, and view. It is not because of loss of relatives, wealth, or health that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. It is because of loss of ethics or view that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.
> Pali: Pañca byasanāni— ñātibyasanaṁ, bhogabyasanaṁ, rogabyasanaṁ, sīlabyasanaṁ, diṭṭhibyasanaṁ. Nāvuso, sattā ñātibyasanahetu vā bhogabyasanahetu vā rogabyasanahetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti. Sīlabyasanahetu vā, āvuso, sattā diṭṭhibyasanahetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjanti.
[¶59] Five endowments: endowment with relatives, wealth, health, ethics, and view. It is not because of endowment with family, wealth, or health that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. It is because of endowment with ethics or view that sentient beings, when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.
> Pali: Pañca sampadā— ñātisampadā, bhogasampadā, ārogyasampadā, sīlasampadā, diṭṭhisampadā. Nāvuso, sattā ñātisampadāhetu vā bhogasampadāhetu vā ārogyasampadāhetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti. Sīlasampadāhetu vā, āvuso, sattā diṭṭhisampadāhetu vā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti.
[¶60] Five drawbacks for an unethical person because of their failure in ethics: Firstly, an unethical person loses great wealth on account of negligence. This is the first drawback. Furthermore, an unethical person gets a bad reputation. This is the second drawback. Furthermore, an unethical person enters any kind of assembly unconfident and embarrassed, whether it’s an assembly of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics. This is the third drawback. Furthermore, an unethical person feels lost when they die. This is the fourth drawback. Furthermore, an unethical person, when their body breaks up, after death, is reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell. This is the fifth drawback.
> Pali: Pañca ādīnavā dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. Idhāvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno pamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahatiṁ bhogajāniṁ nigacchati, ayaṁ paṭhamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlassa sīlavipannassa pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, ayaṁ dutiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ, avisārado upasaṅkamati maṅkubhūto, ayaṁ tatiyo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno sammūḷho kālaṁ karoti, ayaṁ catuttho ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, dussīlo sīlavipanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati, ayaṁ pañcamo ādīnavo dussīlassa sīlavipattiyā.
[¶61] Five benefits for an ethical person because of their accomplishment in ethics: Firstly, an ethical person gains great wealth on account of diligence. This is the first benefit. Furthermore, an ethical person gets a good reputation. This is the second benefit. Furthermore, an ethical person enters any kind of assembly bold and self-assured, whether it’s an assembly of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, or ascetics. This is the third benefit. Furthermore, an ethical person dies not feeling lost. This is the fourth benefit. Furthermore, when an ethical person’s body breaks up, after death, they’re reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm. This is the fifth benefit.
> Pali: Pañca ānisaṁsā sīlavato sīlasampadāya. Idhāvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno appamādādhikaraṇaṁ mahantaṁ bhogakkhandhaṁ adhigacchati, ayaṁ paṭhamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, ayaṁ dutiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno yaññadeva parisaṁ upasaṅkamati yadi khattiyaparisaṁ yadi brāhmaṇaparisaṁ yadi gahapatiparisaṁ yadi samaṇaparisaṁ, visārado upasaṅkamati amaṅkubhūto, ayaṁ tatiyo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno asammūḷho kālaṁ karoti, ayaṁ catuttho ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, sīlavā sīlasampanno kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjati, ayaṁ pañcamo ānisaṁso sīlavato sīlasampadāya.
[¶62] A mendicant who wants to accuse another should first establish five things in themselves: I will speak at the right time, not at the wrong time. I will speak truthfully, not falsely. I will speak gently, not harshly. I will speak beneficially, not harmfully. I will speak lovingly, not from secret hate. A mendicant who wants to accuse another should first establish these five things in themselves.
> Pali: Codakena, āvuso, bhikkhunā paraṁ codetukāmena pañca dhamme ajjhattaṁ upaṭṭhapetvā paro codetabbo. Kālena vakkhāmi no akālena, bhūtena vakkhāmi no abhūtena, saṇhena vakkhāmi no pharusena, atthasaṁhitena vakkhāmi no anatthasaṁhitena, mettacittena vakkhāmi no dosantarenāti. Codakena, āvuso, bhikkhunā paraṁ codetukāmena ime pañca dhamme ajjhattaṁ upaṭṭhapetvā paro codetabbo.
[¶63] Five factors that support meditation: A mendicant has faith in the Realized One’s awakening: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They are rarely ill or unwell. Their stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, but just right, and fit for meditation. They’re not devious or deceitful. They reveal themselves honestly to the Teacher or sensible spiritual companions. They live with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They’re strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities. They’re wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering.
> Pali: Pañca padhāniyaṅgāni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saddho hoti, saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṁ: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato, lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Appābādho hoti appātaṅko, samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya majjhimāya padhānakkhamāya. Asaṭho hoti amāyāvī, yathābhūtaṁ attānaṁ āvikattā satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu. Āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu. Paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā.
[¶64] Five pure abodes: Aviha, Atappa, the gods fair to see, the fair seeing gods, and Akaniṭṭha.
> Pali: Pañca suddhāvāsā— avihā, atappā, sudassā, sudassī, akaniṭṭhā.
[¶65] Five non-returners: one who is extinguished between one life and the next, one who is extinguished upon landing, one who is extinguished without extra effort, one who is extinguished with extra effort, and one who heads upstream, going to the Akaniṭṭha realm.
> Pali: Pañca anāgāmino— antarāparinibbāyī, upahaccaparinibbāyī, asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, uddhaṁsotoakaniṭṭhagāmī.
[¶66] Five kinds of hard-heartedness: Firstly, a mendicant has doubts about the Teacher. They’re uncertain, undecided, and lacking confidence. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first kind of hard-heartedness. Furthermore, a mendicant has doubts about the teaching … the Saṅgha … the training … A mendicant is angry and upset with their spiritual companions, resentful and closed off. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth kind of hard-heartedness.
> Pali: Pañca cetokhilā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, ayaṁ paṭhamo cetokhilo. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu dhamme kaṅkhati vicikicchati …pe… saṅghe kaṅkhati vicikicchati … sikkhāya kaṅkhati vicikicchati … sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya, ayaṁ pañcamo cetokhilo.
[¶67] Five shackles of the heart: Firstly, a mendicant isn’t free of greed, desire, fondness, thirst, passion, and craving for sensual pleasures. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first shackle of the heart. Furthermore, a mendicant isn’t free of greed for the body … They’re not free of greed for form … They eat as much as they like until their bellies are full, then indulge in the pleasures of sleeping, lying down, and drowsing … They lead the spiritual life hoping to be reborn in one of the orders of gods, thinking: ‘By this precept or observance or fervent austerity or spiritual practice, may I become one of the gods!’ This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth shackle of the heart.
> Pali: Pañca cetasovinibandhā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāmesu avītarāgo hoti avigatacchando avigatapemo avigatapipāso avigatapariḷāho avigatataṇho. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu kāmesu avītarāgo hoti avigatacchando avigatapemo avigatapipāso avigatapariḷāho avigatataṇho, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Ayaṁ paṭhamo cetaso vinibandho. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu kāye avītarāgo hoti …pe… rūpe avītarāgo hoti …pe… puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāvadatthaṁ udarāvadehakaṁ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṁ passasukhaṁ middhasukhaṁ anuyutto viharati …pe… puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu aññataraṁ devanikāyaṁ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṁ carati: ‘imināhaṁ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’ti, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Ayaṁ pañcamo cetaso vinibandho.
[¶68] Five faculties: eye, ear, nose, tongue, and body.
> Pali: Pañcindriyāni— cakkhundriyaṁ, sotindriyaṁ, ghānindriyaṁ, jivhindriyaṁ, kāyindriyaṁ.
[¶69] Another five faculties: pleasure, pain, happiness, sadness, and equanimity.
> Pali: Aparānipi pañcindriyāni— sukhindriyaṁ, dukkhindriyaṁ, somanassindriyaṁ, domanassindriyaṁ, upekkhindriyaṁ.
[¶70] Another five faculties: faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.
> Pali: Aparānipi pañcindriyāni— saddhindriyaṁ, vīriyindriyaṁ, satindriyaṁ, samādhindriyaṁ, paññindriyaṁ.
[¶71] Five elements of escape: Take a case where a mendicant focuses on sensual pleasures, but on that their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided. But when they focus on renunciation, on that their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided. Their mind is in a good state, well developed, well risen, well freed, and well detached from sensual pleasures. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of sensual pleasures, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from sensual pleasures is explained.
> Pali: Pañca nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo. Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāme manasikaroto kāmesu cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Nekkhammaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto nekkhamme cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ kāmehi. Ye ca kāmapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶72] Take another case where a mendicant focuses on ill will, but their mind does not leap forth … But when they focus on good will, their mind leaps forth … Their mind is in a good state … well detached from ill will. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of ill will, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from ill will is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno byāpādaṁ manasikaroto byāpāde cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Abyāpādaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto abyāpāde cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ byāpādena. Ye ca byāpādapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ byāpādassa nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶73] Take another case where a mendicant focuses on harming, but their mind does not leap forth … But when they focus on compassion, their mind leaps forth … Their mind is in a good state … well detached from harming. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of harming, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from harming is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno vihesaṁ manasikaroto vihesāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Avihesaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto avihesāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ vihesāya. Ye ca vihesāpaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ vihesāya nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶74] Take another case where a mendicant focuses on form, but their mind does not leap forth … But when they focus on the formless, their mind leaps forth … Their mind is in a good state … well detached from forms. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of form, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from forms is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno rūpe manasikaroto rūpesu cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Arūpaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto arūpe cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ rūpehi. Ye ca rūpapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ rūpānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶75] Take a case where a mendicant focuses on substantial reality, but their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided. But when they focus on the cessation of substantial reality, their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided. Their mind is in a good state, well developed, well risen, well freed, and well detached from substantial reality. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of substantial reality, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from substantial reality is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno sakkāyaṁ manasikaroto sakkāye cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Sakkāyanirodhaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto sakkāyanirodhe cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ sakkāyena. Ye ca sakkāyapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi, na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ sakkāyassa nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶76] Five opportunities for freedom: Firstly, the Teacher or a respected spiritual companion teaches Dhamma to a mendicant. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how the Teacher or a respected spiritual companion teaches it. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the first opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Pañca vimuttāyatanāni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī. Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthapaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthapaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.
[¶77] Furthermore, it may be that neither the Teacher nor a respected spiritual companion teaches Dhamma to a mendicant. But the mendicant teaches Dhamma in detail to others as they learned and memorized it. … Or the mendicant rehearses the teaching in detail as they learned and memorized it. … Or the mendicant thinks about and considers the teaching in their heart, examining it with the mind as they learned and memorized it. … Or a meditation subject as a basis of immersion is properly grasped, focused on, borne in mind, and penetrated with wisdom. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how a meditation subject as a basis of immersion is properly grasped, focused on, borne in mind, and penetrated with wisdom. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the fifth opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti …pe… api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karoti …pe… api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati …pe… api ca khvassa aññataraṁ samādhinimittaṁ suggahitaṁ hoti sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ suppaṭividdhaṁ paññāya. Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhuno aññataraṁ samādhinimittaṁ suggahitaṁ hoti sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ suppaṭividdhaṁ paññāya tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthapaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthapaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.
## 66. DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/66/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/66/#p-N
[¶0] Five perceptions that ripen in freedom: the perception of impermanence, the perception of suffering in impermanence, the perception of not-self in suffering, the perception of giving up, and the perception of fading away.
> Pali: Pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā— aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā.
[¶1] These are the teachings grouped by five that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena pañca dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶2] 6. Sixes
> Pali: 6. Chakka
[¶3] There are teachings grouped by six that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by six?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cha dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame cha?
[¶4] Six interior sense fields: eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.
> Pali: Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni— cakkhāyatanaṁ, sotāyatanaṁ, ghānāyatanaṁ, jivhāyatanaṁ, kāyāyatanaṁ, manāyatanaṁ.
[¶5] Six exterior sense fields: sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.
> Pali: Cha bāhirāni āyatanāni— rūpāyatanaṁ, saddāyatanaṁ, gandhāyatanaṁ, rasāyatanaṁ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṁ, dhammāyatanaṁ.
[¶6] Six classes of consciousness: eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind consciousness.
> Pali: Cha viññāṇakāyā— cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, sotaviññāṇaṁ, ghānaviññāṇaṁ, jivhāviññāṇaṁ, kāyaviññāṇaṁ, manoviññāṇaṁ.
[¶7] Six classes of contact: contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.
> Pali: Cha phassakāyā— cakkhusamphasso, sotasamphasso, ghānasamphasso, jivhāsamphasso, kāyasamphasso, manosamphasso.
[¶8] Six classes of feeling: feeling born of contact through the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.
> Pali: Cha vedanākāyā— cakkhusamphassajā vedanā, sotasamphassajā vedanā, ghānasamphassajā vedanā, jivhāsamphassajā vedanā, kāyasamphassajā vedanā, manosamphassajā vedanā.
[¶9] Six classes of perception: perceptions of sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.
> Pali: Cha saññākāyā— rūpasaññā, saddasaññā, gandhasaññā, rasasaññā, phoṭṭhabbasaññā, dhammasaññā.
[¶10] Six bodies of intention: intention regarding sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.
> Pali: Cha sañcetanākāyā— rūpasañcetanā, saddasañcetanā, gandhasañcetanā, rasasañcetanā, phoṭṭhabbasañcetanā, dhammasañcetanā.
[¶11] Six classes of craving: craving for sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.
> Pali: Cha taṇhākāyā— rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā.
[¶12] Six kinds of disrespect: A mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, the training, diligence, and hospitality.
> Pali: Cha agāravā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso; dhamme agāravo viharati appatisso; saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso; sikkhāya agāravo viharati appatisso; appamāde agāravo viharati appatisso; paṭisanthāre agāravo viharati appatisso.
[¶13] Six kinds of respect: A mendicant has respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, the training, diligence, and hospitality.
> Pali: Cha gāravā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari sagāravo viharati sappatisso; dhamme sagāravo viharati sappatisso; saṅghe sagāravo viharati sappatisso; sikkhāya sagāravo viharati sappatisso; appamāde sagāravo viharati sappatisso; paṭisanthāre sagāravo viharati sappatisso.
[¶14] Six preoccupations with happiness: Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for happiness. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: Cha somanassūpavicārā. Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati; sotena saddaṁ sutvā … ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …
[¶15] Encountering a touch with their body … Knowing an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for happiness.
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā. Manasā dhammaṁ viññāya somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati.
[¶16] Six preoccupations with sadness: Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for sadness. … Knowing an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for sadness.
> Pali: Cha domanassūpavicārā. Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā domanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya domanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati.
[¶17] Six preoccupations with equanimity: Seeing a sight with their eyes, one is preoccupied with a sight that’s a basis for equanimity. … Knowing an idea with their mind, one is preoccupied with an idea that’s a basis for equanimity.
> Pali: Cha upekkhūpavicārā. Cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicarati …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya upekkhāṭṭhāniyaṁ dhammaṁ upavicarati.
[¶18] Six warm-hearted qualities: Firstly, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with bodily kindness, both in public and in private. This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: Cha sāraṇīyā dhammā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶19] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with verbal kindness, both in public and in private. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶20] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with mental kindness, both in public and in private. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ manokammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶21] Furthermore, a mendicant shares without reservation any material things they have gained by legitimate means, even the food placed in the alms-bowl, using them in common with their ethical spiritual companions. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi, tathārūpehi lābhehi appaṭivibhattabhogī hoti sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶22] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the precepts shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. Those precepts are intact, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion. This too is a warm-hearted quality.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶23] They live according to the view shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. That view is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. This warm-hearted quality too makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca. Ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶24] Six roots of dispute: Firstly, a mendicant is irritable and acrimonious. Such a mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, and they don’t fulfill the training. They create a dispute in the Saṅgha, which is for the detriment and unhappiness of the people, for the harm, detriment, and suffering of gods and humans. If you see such a root of dispute in yourselves or others, you should try to give up this bad thing. If you don’t see it, you should practice so that it doesn’t come up in the future. That’s how to give up this bad root of dispute, so it doesn’t come up in the future.
> Pali: Cha vivādamūlāni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhamme agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāya na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti. Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ. Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha. Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.
[¶25] Furthermore, a mendicant is offensive and contemptuous … They’re jealous and stingy … They’re devious and deceitful … They have corrupt wishes and wrong view … They’re attached to their own views, holding them tight, and refusing to let go. If you see such a root of dispute in yourselves or others, you should try to give up this bad thing. If you don’t see it, you should practice so that it doesn’t come up in the future. That’s how to give up this bad root of dispute, so it doesn’t come up in the future.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī …pe… issukī hoti maccharī …pe… saṭho hoti māyāvī … pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhī … sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī …pe… yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso, dhamme agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghe agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāya na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti. Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ. Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha. Evarūpañce tumhe, āvuso, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha. Tatra tumhe, āvuso, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti. Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.
[¶26] Six elements: earth, water, fire, air, space, and consciousness.
> Pali: Cha dhātuyo— pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu.
[¶27] Six elements of escape: Take a mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by love. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow ill will still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! Don’t say that. Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that. It’s impossible, reverend, it cannot happen that the heart’s release by love has been developed and properly implemented, yet somehow ill will still occupies the mind. For it is the heart’s release by love that is the escape from ill will.’
> Pali: Cha nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘mettā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, atha ca pana me byāpādo cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo, ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ mettāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya. Atha ca panassa byāpādo cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, byāpādassa, yadidaṁ mettā cetovimuttī’ti.
[¶28] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by compassion. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow the thought of harming still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the heart’s release by compassion that is the escape from thoughts of harming.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘karuṇā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā. Atha ca pana me vihesā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti, so ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ karuṇāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya, atha ca panassa vihesā cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, vihesāya, yadidaṁ karuṇā cetovimuttī’ti.
[¶29] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by rejoicing. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow discontent still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the heart’s release by rejoicing that is the escape from discontent.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘muditā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā. Atha ca pana me arati cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti, so ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ muditāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya, atha ca panassa arati cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, aratiyā, yadidaṁ muditā cetovimuttī’ti.
[¶30] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by equanimity. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow desire still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the heart’s release by equanimity that is the escape from desire.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘upekkhā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā. Atha ca pana me rāgo cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ upekkhāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya, atha ca panassa rāgo cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, rāgassa, yadidaṁ upekkhā cetovimuttī’ti.
[¶31] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the signless release of the heart. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow my consciousness still follows after signs.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the signless release of the heart that is the escape from all signs.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘animittā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā. Atha ca pana me nimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hotī’ti. So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ animittāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya, atha ca panassa nimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ bhavissati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, sabbanimittānaṁ, yadidaṁ animittā cetovimuttī’ti.
[¶32] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’m rid of the conceit “I am”. And I don’t regard anything as “I am this”. Yet somehow the dart of doubt and indecision still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! Don’t say that. Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that. It’s impossible, reverend, it cannot happen that the conceit “I am” has been done away with, and nothing is regarded as “I am this”, yet somehow the dart of doubt and indecision still occupy the mind. For it is the uprooting of the conceit “I am” that is the escape from the dart of doubt and indecision.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘asmīti kho me vigataṁ, ayamahamasmīti na samanupassāmi, atha ca pana me vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso, yaṁ asmīti vigate ayamahamasmīti asamanupassato, atha ca panassa vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallassa, yadidaṁ asmimānasamugghāto’ti.
[¶33] Six unsurpassable things: the unsurpassable seeing, listening, acquisition, training, service, and recollection.
> Pali: Cha anuttariyāni— dassanānuttariyaṁ, savanānuttariyaṁ, lābhānuttariyaṁ, sikkhānuttariyaṁ, pāricariyānuttariyaṁ, anussatānuttariyaṁ.
[¶34] Six topics for recollection: the recollection of the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, ethics, generosity, and the deities.
> Pali: Cha anussatiṭṭhānāni— buddhānussati, dhammānussati, saṅghānussati, sīlānussati, cāgānussati, devatānussati.
[¶35] Six consistent responses: A mendicant, seeing a sight with their eyes, is neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue … Encountering a touch with their body … Knowing an idea with their mind, they’re neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware.
> Pali: Cha satatavihārā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno.
[¶36] Six classes of rebirth: Someone born into a dark class gives rise to a dark result. Someone born into a dark class gives rise to a bright result. Someone born into a dark class gives rise to extinguishment, which is neither dark nor bright. Someone born into a bright class gives rise to a bright result. Someone born into a bright class gives rise to a dark result. Someone born into a bright class gives rise to extinguishment, which is neither dark nor bright.
> Pali: Chaḷābhijātiyo. Idhāvuso, ekacco kaṇhābhijātiko samāno kaṇhaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati. Idha panāvuso, ekacco kaṇhābhijātiko samāno sukkaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati. Idha panāvuso, ekacco kaṇhābhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ nibbānaṁ abhijāyati. Idha panāvuso, ekacco sukkābhijātiko samāno sukkaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati. Idha panāvuso, ekacco sukkābhijātiko samāno kaṇhaṁ dhammaṁ abhijāyati. Idha panāvuso, ekacco sukkābhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṁ asukkaṁ nibbānaṁ abhijāyati.
[¶37] Six perceptions that help penetration: the perception of impermanence, the perception of suffering in impermanence, the perception of not-self in suffering, the perception of giving up, the perception of fading away, and the perception of cessation.
> Pali: Cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā— aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā.
[¶38] These are the teachings grouped by six that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cha dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶39] 7. Sevens
> Pali: 7. Sattaka
[¶40] There are teachings grouped by seven that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by seven?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena satta dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame satta?
[¶41] Seven riches of the noble ones: the riches of faith, ethics, conscience, prudence, learning, generosity, and wisdom.
> Pali: Satta ariyadhanāni— saddhādhanaṁ, sīladhanaṁ, hiridhanaṁ, ottappadhanaṁ, sutadhanaṁ, cāgadhanaṁ, paññādhanaṁ.
[¶42] Seven awakening factors: mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity.
> Pali: Satta bojjhaṅgā— satisambojjhaṅgo, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo, pītisambojjhaṅgo, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, samādhisambojjhaṅgo, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo.
[¶43] Seven prerequisites for immersion: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, and right mindfulness.
> Pali: Satta samādhiparikkhārā— sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati.
[¶44] Seven bad qualities: a mendicant is faithless, shameless, imprudent, unlearned, lazy, unmindful, and witless.
> Pali: Satta asaddhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu assaddho hoti, ahiriko hoti, anottappī hoti, appassuto hoti, kusīto hoti, muṭṭhassati hoti, duppañño hoti.
[¶45] Seven good qualities: a mendicant is faithful, conscientious, prudent, learned, energetic, mindful, and wise.
> Pali: Satta saddhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu saddho hoti, hirimā hoti, ottappī hoti, bahussuto hoti, āraddhavīriyo hoti, upaṭṭhitassati hoti, paññavā hoti.
[¶46] Seven aspects of the teachings of the true persons: a mendicant knows the teachings, knows the meaning, knows themselves, knows moderation, knows the right time, knows assemblies, and knows individuals.
> Pali: Satta sappurisadhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu dhammaññū ca hoti atthaññū ca attaññū ca mattaññū ca kālaññū ca parisaññū ca puggalaññū ca.
[¶47] Seven qualifications for graduation: A mendicant has a keen enthusiasm to undertake the training … to examine the teachings … to get rid of desires … for retreat … to rouse up energy … for mindfulness and alertness … to penetrate theoretically. And they don’t lose these desires in the future.
> Pali: Satta niddasavatthūni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo. Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca dhammanisantiyā avigatapemo. Icchāvinaye tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca icchāvinaye avigatapemo. Paṭisallāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca paṭisallāne avigatapemo. Vīriyārambhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca vīriyārambhe avigatapemo. Satinepakke tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca satinepakke avigatapemo. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca diṭṭhipaṭivedhe avigatapemo.
[¶48] Seven perceptions: the perception of impermanence, the perception of not-self, the perception of ugliness, the perception of drawbacks, the perception of giving up, the perception of fading away, and the perception of cessation.
> Pali: Satta saññā— aniccasaññā, anattasaññā, asubhasaññā, ādīnavasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā.
[¶49] Seven powers: faith, energy, conscience, prudence, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.
> Pali: Satta balāni— saddhābalaṁ, vīriyabalaṁ, hiribalaṁ, ottappabalaṁ, satibalaṁ, samādhibalaṁ, paññābalaṁ.
[¶50] Seven planes of consciousness: There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is the first plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶51] There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption. This is the second plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṁ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶52] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity. This is the third plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṁ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶53] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty. This is the fourth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṁ catutthī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶54] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fifth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶55] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the sixth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ chaṭṭhī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶56] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is the seventh plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶57] Seven individuals worthy of a religious donation: one freed both ways, one freed by wisdom, a direct witness, one attained to view, one freed by faith, a follower of teachings, and a follower by faith.
> Pali: Satta puggalā dakkhiṇeyyā— ubhatobhāgavimutto, paññāvimutto, kāyasakkhi, diṭṭhippatto, saddhāvimutto, dhammānusārī, saddhānusārī.
[¶58] Seven underlying tendencies: sensual desire, aversion, views, doubt, conceit, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.
> Pali: Satta anusayā— kāmarāgānusayo, paṭighānusayo, diṭṭhānusayo, vicikicchānusayo, mānānusayo, bhavarāgānusayo, avijjānusayo.
[¶59] Seven fetters: attraction, aversion, views, doubt, conceit, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.
> Pali: Satta saṁyojanāni— anunayasaṁyojanaṁ, paṭighasaṁyojanaṁ, diṭṭhisaṁyojanaṁ, vicikicchāsaṁyojanaṁ, mānasaṁyojanaṁ, bhavarāgasaṁyojanaṁ, avijjāsaṁyojanaṁ.
[¶60] Seven means of settling any disciplinary issues that might arise: Resolution face-to-face to be applied. Resolution through recollection to be granted. Resolution because of past insanity to be granted. Acting according to what has been admitted. Majority decision. Further penalty. Covering over as if with grass.
> Pali: Satta adhikaraṇasamathā uppannuppannānaṁ adhikaraṇānaṁ samathāya vūpasamāya— sammukhāvinayo dātabbo, sativinayo dātabbo, amūḷhavinayo dātabbo, paṭiññāya kāretabbaṁ, yebhuyyasikā, tassapāpiyasikā, tiṇavatthārako.
[¶61] These are the teachings grouped by seven that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena satta dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶62] The second recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Dutiyabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶63] 8. Eights
> Pali: 8. Aṭṭhaka
[¶64] There are teachings grouped by eight that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by eight?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena aṭṭha dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame aṭṭha?
[¶65] Eight wrong ways: wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion.
> Pali: Aṭṭha micchattā— micchādiṭṭhi, micchāsaṅkappo, micchāvācā, micchākammanto, micchāājīvo, micchāvāyāmo micchāsati, micchāsamādhi.
[¶66] Eight right ways: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Aṭṭha sammattā— sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi.
[¶67] Eight individuals worthy of a religious donation: The stream-enterer and the one practicing to realize the fruit of stream-entry. The once-returner and the one practicing to realize the fruit of once-return. The non-returner and the one practicing to realize the fruit of non-return. The perfected one, and the one practicing for perfection.
> Pali: Aṭṭha puggalā dakkhiṇeyyā— sotāpanno, sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno; sakadāgāmī, sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno; anāgāmī, anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno; arahā, arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno.
[¶68] Eight grounds for laziness: Firstly, a mendicant has some work to do. They think: ‘I have some work to do. But while doing it my body will get tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the first ground for laziness.
> Pali: Aṭṭha kusītavatthūni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kātabbaṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘kammaṁ kho me kātabbaṁ bhavissati, kammaṁ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶69] Furthermore, a mendicant has done some work. They think: ‘I’ve done some work. But while working my body got tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the second ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kataṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho kammaṁ akāsiṁ, kammaṁ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …pe… idaṁ dutiyaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶70] Furthermore, a mendicant has to go on a journey. They think: ‘I have to go on a journey. But while walking my body will get tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the third ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gantabbo hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ tatiyaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶71] Furthermore, a mendicant has gone on a journey. They think: ‘I’ve gone on a journey. But while walking my body got tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the fourth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho maggaṁ agamāsiṁ, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ catutthaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶72] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, but they didn’t get to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, but I didn’t get to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is tired and unfit for work. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the fifth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo kilanto akammañño, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ pañcamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶73] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, and they got to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, and I got to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is heavy and unfit for work, like I’ve just eaten a load of beans. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the sixth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo garuko akammañño, māsācitaṁ maññe, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶74] Furthermore, a mendicant feels a little sick. They think: ‘I feel a little sick. Lying down would be good for me. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the seventh ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno uppanno hoti appamattako ābādho. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ appamattako ābādho; atthi kappo nipajjituṁ, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ sattamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶75] Furthermore, a mendicant has recently recovered from illness. They think: ‘I’ve recently recovered from illness. My body is weak and unfit for work. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the eighth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gilānā vuṭṭhito hoti aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, tassa me kāyo dubbalo akammañño, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati na vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶76] Eight grounds for arousing energy: Firstly, a mendicant has some work to do. They think: ‘I have some work to do. While working it’s not easy to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.’ They rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the first ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kātabbaṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘kammaṁ kho me kātabbaṁ bhavissati, kammaṁ kho pana me karontena na sukaraṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya, asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti. So vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā, anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶77] Furthermore, a mendicant has done some work. They think: ‘I’ve done some work. While I was working I wasn’t able to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’ They rouse up energy … This is the second ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kataṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho kammaṁ akāsiṁ, kammaṁ kho panāhaṁ karonto nāsakkhiṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… so vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ dutiyaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶78] Furthermore, a mendicant has to go on a journey. They think: ‘I have to go on a journey. While walking it’s not easy to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’ They rouse up energy … This is the third ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gantabbo hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantena na sukaraṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ. Handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… so vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ tatiyaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶79] Furthermore, a mendicant has gone on a journey. They think: ‘I’ve gone on a journey. While I was walking I wasn’t able to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’ They rouse up energy … This is the fourth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho maggaṁ agamāsiṁ, maggaṁ kho panāhaṁ gacchanto nāsakkhiṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasi kātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… so vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ catutthaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶80] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, but they didn’t get to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, but I didn’t get to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is light and fit for work. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’ They rouse up energy … This is the fifth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo lahuko kammañño, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… so vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ pañcamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶81] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, and they got to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, and I got to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is strong and fit for work. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’ They rouse up energy … This is the sixth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo balavā kammañño, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… so vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶82] Furthermore, a mendicant feels a little sick. They think: ‘I feel a little sick. It’s possible this illness will worsen. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’ They rouse up energy … This is the seventh ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno uppanno hoti appamattako ābādho. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ appamattako ābādho, ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati yaṁ me ābādho pavaḍḍheyya, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… so vīriyaṁ ārabhati … idaṁ sattamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
## 67. DN 33 · Reciting in Concert · part 4
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/67/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/67/#p-N
[¶0] Furthermore, a mendicant has recently recovered from illness. They think: ‘I’ve recently recovered from illness. It’s possible the illness will come back. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.’ They rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the eighth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gilānā vuṭṭhito hoti aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati yaṁ me ābādho paccudāvatteyya, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti. So vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶1] Eight reasons to give: Someone might give a gift after insulting the recipient. Or they give out of fear. Or they give thinking, ‘They gave to me.’ Or they give thinking, ‘They’ll give to me.’ Or they give thinking, ‘It’s good to give.’ Or they give thinking, ‘I cook, they don’t. It wouldn’t be right for me to not give to them.’ Or they give thinking, ‘By giving this gift I’ll get a good reputation.’ Or they give thinking, ‘This is an adornment and requisite for the mind.’
> Pali: Aṭṭha dānavatthūni. Āsajja dānaṁ deti, bhayā dānaṁ deti, ‘adāsi me’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘dassati me’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘sāhu dānan’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘ahaṁ pacāmi, ime na pacanti, nārahāmi pacanto apacantānaṁ dānaṁ na dātun’ti dānaṁ deti, ‘idaṁ me dānaṁ dadato kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’ti dānaṁ deti. Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāratthaṁ dānaṁ deti.
[¶2] Eight rebirths by giving: First, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins such things as food, drink, clothing, vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; and bed, house, and lighting. Whatever they give they expect back. They see an affluent aristocrat or brahmin or householder amusing themselves, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation. They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of well-to-do aristocrats or brahmins or householders!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there. But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical. The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their purity.
> Pali: Aṭṭha dānūpapattiyo. Idhāvuso, ekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ. So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati. So passati khattiyamahāsālaṁ vā brāhmaṇamahāsālaṁ vā gahapatimahāsālaṁ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṁ samaṅgībhūtaṁ paricārayamānaṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā khattiyamahāsālānaṁ vā brāhmaṇamahāsālānaṁ vā gahapatimahāsālānaṁ vā sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati. Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa. Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā.
[¶3] Next, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins. Whatever they give they expect back. And they’ve heard: ‘The gods of the four great kings are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods of the four great kings!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there. But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical. The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their purity.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ …pe… seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ. So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘cātumahārājikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati. Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa. Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā.
[¶4] Next, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins. Whatever they give they expect back. And they’ve heard: ‘The gods of the thirty-three … the gods of Yama … the joyful gods … the gods who love to create … the gods who control what is created by others are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods who control what is created by others!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there. But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical. The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their purity.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ …pe… seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ. So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘tāvatiṁsā devā …pe… yāmā devā …pe… tusitā devā …pe… nimmānaratī devā …pe… paranimmitavasavattī devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā paranimmitavasavattīnaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati. Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa. Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā.
[¶5] Next, someone gives to ascetics or brahmins such things as food, drink, clothing, vehicles; garlands, fragrance, and makeup; and bed, house, and lighting. Whatever they give they expect back. And they’ve heard: ‘The gods of the Divinity’s host are long-lived, beautiful, and very happy.’ They think: ‘If only, when my body breaks up, after death, I would be reborn in the company of the gods of the Divinity’s host!’ They settle on that thought, stabilize it, and develop it. As they’ve settled for less and not developed further, their thought leads to rebirth there. But I say that this is only for those of ethical conduct, not for the unethical. And for those free of desire, not those with desire. The heart’s wish of an ethical person succeeds because of their freedom from desire.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, idhekacco dānaṁ deti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṁ pānaṁ vatthaṁ yānaṁ mālāgandhavilepanaṁ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṁ. So yaṁ deti taṁ paccāsīsati. Tassa sutaṁ hoti: ‘brahmakāyikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘aho vatāhaṁ kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā brahmakāyikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajjeyyan’ti. So taṁ cittaṁ dahati, taṁ cittaṁ adhiṭṭhāti, taṁ cittaṁ bhāveti, tassa taṁ cittaṁ hīne vimuttaṁ uttari abhāvitaṁ tatrūpapattiyā saṁvattati. Tañca kho sīlavato vadāmi no dussīlassa; vītarāgassa no sarāgassa. Ijjhatāvuso, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi vītarāgattā.
[¶6] Eight assemblies: the assemblies of aristocrats, brahmins, householders, and ascetics. An assembly of the gods of the four great kings. An assembly of the gods of the thirty-three. An assembly of Māras. An assembly of divinities.
> Pali: Aṭṭha parisā— khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇaparisā, gahapatiparisā, samaṇaparisā, cātumahārājikaparisā, tāvatiṁsaparisā, māraparisā, brahmaparisā.
[¶7] Eight worldly conditions: gain and loss, fame and disgrace, blame and praise, pleasure and pain.
> Pali: Aṭṭha lokadhammā— lābho ca, alābho ca, yaso ca, ayaso ca, nindā ca, pasaṁsā ca, sukhañca, dukkhañca.
[¶8] Eight dimensions of mastery: Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the first dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni. Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶9] Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the second dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti— evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶10] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the third dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶11] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fourth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ catutthaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶12] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are blue, with blue color and blue appearance. They’re like a flax flower that’s blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fifth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶13] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. They’re like a champak flower that’s yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the sixth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶14] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance. They’re like a scarlet mallow flower that’s red, with red color and red appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, red, with red color and red appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the seventh dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ sattamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶15] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance. They’re like the morning star that’s white, with white color and white appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, white, with white color and white appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the eighth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ odātaṁ odātavaṇṇaṁ odātanidassanaṁ odātanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶16] Eight liberations: Having physical form, they see forms. This is the first liberation.
> Pali: Aṭṭha vimokkhā. Rūpī rūpāni passati. Ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶17] Not perceiving physical form internally, they see forms externally. This is the second liberation.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati. Ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho.
[¶18] They’re focused only on beauty. This is the third liberation.
> Pali: Subhanteva adhimutto hoti. Ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho.
[¶19] Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fourth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho.
[¶20] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the fifth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho.
[¶21] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. This is the sixth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho.
[¶22] Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the seventh liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho.
[¶23] Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the eighth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶24] These are the teachings grouped by eight that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena aṭṭha dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶25] 9. Nines
> Pali: 9. Navaka
[¶26] There are teachings grouped by nine that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by nine?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena nava dhammā sammadakkhātā; tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame nava?
[¶27] Nine grounds for resentment: Thinking: ‘They did wrong to me,’ you harbor resentment. Thinking: ‘They are doing wrong to me’ … ‘They will do wrong to me’ … ‘They did wrong by someone I love’ … ‘They are doing wrong by someone I love’ … ‘They will do wrong by someone I love’ … ‘They helped someone I dislike’ … ‘They are helping someone I dislike’ … Thinking: ‘They will help someone I dislike,’ you harbor resentment.
> Pali: Nava āghātavatthūni. ‘Anatthaṁ me acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati; ‘anatthaṁ me caratī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati; ‘anatthaṁ me carissatī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati; ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṁ acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… anatthaṁ caratīti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… anatthaṁ carissatīti āghātaṁ bandhati; ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṁ acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… atthaṁ caratīti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… atthaṁ carissatīti āghātaṁ bandhati.
[¶28] Nine ways to get rid of resentment: Thinking: ‘They did wrong to me, but what can I possibly do?’ you get rid of resentment. Thinking: ‘They are doing wrong to me …’ … ‘They will do wrong to me …’ … ‘They did wrong by someone I love …’ … ‘They are doing wrong by someone I love …’ … ‘They will do wrong by someone I love …’ … ‘They helped someone I dislike …’ … ‘They are helping someone I dislike …’ … Thinking: ‘They will help someone I dislike, but what can I possibly do?’ you get rid of resentment.
> Pali: Nava āghātapaṭivinayā. ‘Anatthaṁ me acari, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘anatthaṁ me carati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘anatthaṁ me carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṁ acari …pe… anatthaṁ carati …pe… anatthaṁ carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṁ acari …pe… atthaṁ carati …pe… atthaṁ carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti.
[¶29] Nine abodes of sentient beings: There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is the first abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Nava sattāvāsā. Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamo sattāvāso.
[¶30] There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption. This is the second abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṁ dutiyo sattāvāso.
[¶31] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity. This is the third abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṁ tatiyo sattāvāso.
[¶32] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty. This is the fourth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṁ catuttho sattāvāso.
[¶33] There are sentient beings that are non-percipient and do not experience anything, such as the gods who are non-percipient beings. This is the fifth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā asaññino appaṭisaṁvedino, seyyathāpi devā asaññasattā. Ayaṁ pañcamo sattāvāso.
[¶34] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space. This is the sixth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho sattāvāso.
[¶35] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the seventh abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ sattamo sattāvāso.
[¶36] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is the eighth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo sattāvāso.
[¶37] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of nothingness. They have been reborn in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the ninth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ navamo sattāvāso.
[¶38] Nine lost opportunities for spiritual practice: Firstly, a Realized One has arisen in the world. He teaches the Dhamma leading to peace, extinguishment, awakening, as proclaimed by the Holy One. But that individual has been reborn in hell. This is the first lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Nava akkhaṇā asamayā brahmacariyavāsāya. Idhāvuso, tathāgato ca loke uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito. Ayañca puggalo nirayaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ paṭhamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶39] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in the animal realm. This is the second lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, tathāgato ca loke uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito. Ayañca puggalo tiracchānayoniṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ dutiyo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶40] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But an individual has been reborn in the ghost realm. This is the third lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… pettivisayaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ tatiyo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶41] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn among the titans. This is the fourth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… asurakāyaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ catuttho akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶42] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in one of the long-lived orders of gods. This is the fifth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… aññataraṁ dīghāyukaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ pañcamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶43] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in the borderlands, among uneducated foreigners, where monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen do not go. This is the sixth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… paccantimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti milakkhesu aviññātāresu, yattha natthi gati bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶44] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … And an individual is reborn in a central country. But they have wrong view and distorted perspective: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ This is the seventh lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti. So ca hoti micchādiṭṭhiko viparītadassano: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti. Ayaṁ sattamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶45] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … And an individual is reborn in a central country. But they’re witless, dull, idiotic, and unable to distinguish what is well said from what is poorly said. This is the eighth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti. So ca hoti duppañño jaḷo eḷamūgo, nappaṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitānamatthamaññātuṁ. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶46] Furthermore, no Realized One has arisen in the world, so there is no teaching of the Dhamma leading to peace, extinguishment, awakening, as proclaimed by the Holy One. But an individual is reborn in a central country. And they’re wise, bright, clever, and able to distinguish what is well said from what is poorly said. This is the ninth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, tathāgato ca loke na uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca na desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito. Ayañca puggalo majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti, so ca hoti paññavā ajaḷo aneḷamūgo, paṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitānamatthamaññātuṁ. Ayaṁ navamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶47] Nine progressive meditations: A mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of seclusion, while placing the mind and keeping it connected. As the placing of the mind and keeping it connected are stilled, they enter and remain in the second absorption, which has the rapture and bliss born of immersion, with internal clarity and mind at one, without placing the mind and keeping it connected. And with the fading away of rapture, they enter and remain in the third absorption, where they meditate with equanimity, mindful and aware, experiencing for themselves the bliss of which the noble ones declare, ‘Equanimous and mindful, one meditates in bliss.’ With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling.
> Pali: Nava anupubbavihārā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā …pe… ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati.
[¶48] Nine progressive cessations: For someone who has attained the first absorption, sensual perceptions have ceased. For someone who has attained the second absorption, the placing of the mind and keeping it connected have ceased. For someone who has attained the third absorption, rapture has ceased. For someone who has attained the fourth absorption, breathing has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of infinite space, the perception of form has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of infinite consciousness, the perception of the dimension of infinite space has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of nothingness, the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, the perception of the dimension of nothingness has ceased. For someone who has attained the cessation of perception and feeling, perception and feeling have ceased.
> Pali: Nava anupubbanirodhā. Paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa kāmasaññā niruddhā hoti. Dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā niruddhā honti. Tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa pīti niruddhā hoti. Catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa assāsapassāssā niruddhā honti. Ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpannassa rūpasaññā niruddhā hoti. Viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpannassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti. Ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpannassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpannassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti. Saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpannassa saññā ca vedanā ca niruddhā honti.
[¶49] These are the teachings grouped by nine that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert.
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena nava dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.
[¶50] 10. Tens
> Pali: 10. Dasaka
[¶51] There are teachings grouped by ten that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert. What are the teachings grouped by ten?
> Pali: Atthi kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dasa dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ …pe… atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ. Katame dasa?
[¶52] Ten qualities that serve as protector: Firstly, a mendicant is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. This is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti. Pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati, ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶53] Furthermore, a mendicant is very learned, remembering and keeping what they’ve learned. These teachings are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased, describing a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. They are very learned in such teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthā sabyañjanā kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti …pe… diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶54] Furthermore, a mendicant has good friends, companions, and associates. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti kalyāṇasahāyo kalyāṇasampavaṅko. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti kalyāṇasahāyo kalyāṇasampavaṅko. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶55] Furthermore, a mendicant is easy to admonish, having qualities that make them easy to admonish. They’re patient, and take instruction respectfully. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu suvaco hoti sovacassakaraṇehi dhammehi samannāgato khamo padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaniṁ. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu suvaco hoti …pe… padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaniṁ. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶56] Furthermore, a mendicant is deft and tireless in a diverse spectrum of duties for their spiritual companions, understanding how to go about things in order to complete and organize the work. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ uccāvacāni kiṅkaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hoti analaso tatrupāyāya vīmaṁsāya samannāgato, alaṁ kātuṁ alaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ …pe… alaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶57] Furthermore, a mendicant loves the teachings and is a delight to converse with, being full of joy in the teaching and training. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu dhammakāmo hoti piyasamudāhāro, abhidhamme abhivinaye uḷārapāmojjo. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu dhammakāmo hoti …pe… uḷārapāmojjo. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶58] Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarehi cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti …pe… parikkhārehi. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶59] Furthermore, a mendicant lives with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They are strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu āraddhavīriyo viharati …pe… anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶60] Furthermore, a mendicant is mindful. They have utmost mindfulness and alertness, and can remember and recall what was said and done long ago. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu satimā hoti paramena satinepakkena samannāgato cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu satimā hoti …pe… saritā anussaritā. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶61] Furthermore, a mendicant is wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu paññavā hoti, udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu paññavā hoti …pe… sammādukkhakkhayagāminiyā. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶62] Ten universal dimensions of meditation: Someone perceives the meditation on universal earth above, below, across, undivided and limitless. They perceive the meditation on universal water … the meditation on universal fire … the meditation on universal air … the meditation on universal blue … the meditation on universal yellow … the meditation on universal red … the meditation on universal white … the meditation on universal space … They perceive the meditation on universal consciousness above, below, across, undivided and limitless.
> Pali: Dasa kasiṇāyatanāni. Pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti, uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ. Āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti …pe… tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti … vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti … nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti … pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti … lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti … odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti … ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti … viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti, uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ.
[¶63] Ten ways of doing unskillful deeds: killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; covetousness, ill will, and wrong view.
> Pali: Dasa akusalakammapathā— pāṇātipāto, adinnādānaṁ, kāmesumicchācāro, musāvādo, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpo, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhi.
[¶64] Ten ways of doing skillful deeds: refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; refraining from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; contentment, good will, and right view.
> Pali: Dasa kusalakammapathā— pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī, anabhijjhā, abyāpādo, sammādiṭṭhi.
[¶65] Ten abodes of the noble ones: A mendicant has given up five factors, possesses six factors, has a single guard, has four supports, has cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth, has totally given up searching, has unsullied intentions, has stilled the physical process, and is well freed in mind and well freed by wisdom.
> Pali: Dasa ariyavāsā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti, chaḷaṅgasamannāgato, ekārakkho, caturāpasseno, paṇunnapaccekasacco, samavayasaṭṭhesano, anāvilasaṅkappo, passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro, suvimuttacitto, suvimuttapañño.
[¶66] And how has a mendicant given up five factors? It’s when a mendicant has given up sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt. That’s how a mendicant has given up five factors.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti.
[¶67] And how does a mendicant possess six factors? A mendicant, seeing a sight with their eyes, is neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue … Encountering a touch with their body … Knowing an idea with their mind, they’re neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware. That’s how a mendicant possesses six factors.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… manasā dhammaṁ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti.
[¶68] And how does a mendicant have a single guard? It’s when a mendicant’s heart is guarded by mindfulness. That’s how a mendicant has a single guard.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti.
[¶69] And how does a mendicant have four supports? After appraisal, a mendicant uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things. That’s how a mendicant has four supports.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodeti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti.
[¶70] And how has a mendicant cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth? Different ascetics and brahmins have different idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth. A mendicant has cast out, cast aside, thrown out, discarded, let go of, given up, and relinquished all these. That’s how a mendicant has cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu paṇunnapaccekasacco hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ puthupaccekasaccāni, sabbāni tāni nunnāni honti paṇunnāni cattāni vantāni muttāni pahīnāni paṭinissaṭṭhāni. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu paṇunnapaccekasacco hoti.
[¶71] And how has a mendicant totally given up searching? It’s when they’ve given up searching for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for a spiritual path. That’s how a mendicant has totally given up searching.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmesanā pahīnā hoti, bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti.
[¶72] And how does a mendicant have unsullied intentions? It’s when they’ve given up sensual, malicious, and cruel intentions. That’s how a mendicant has unsullied intentions.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, byāpādasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti.
[¶73] And how has a mendicant stilled the physical process? It’s when, with the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. That’s how a mendicant has stilled the physical process.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti.
[¶74] And how is a mendicant well freed in mind? It’s when a mendicant’s mind is freed from greed, hate, and delusion. That’s how a mendicant is well freed in mind.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno rāgā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti, dosā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti, mohā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti.
[¶75] And how is a mendicant well freed by wisdom? It’s when a mendicant understands: ‘I’ve given up greed, hate, and delusion, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them, so they’re unable to arise in the future.’ That’s how a mendicant’s mind is well freed by wisdom.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ‘rāgo me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. ‘Doso me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. ‘Moho me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti.
[¶76] Ten qualities of an adept: an adept’s right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right immersion, right knowledge, and right freedom.
> Pali: Dasa asekkhā dhammā— asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṁ sammāñāṇaṁ, asekkhā sammāvimutti.
[¶77] Reverends, these are the teachings grouped by ten that have been rightly explained by the Buddha. You should all recite these in concert, without disputing, so that this spiritual path may last for a long time. That would be for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.”
> Pali: Ime kho, āvuso, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena dasa dhammā sammadakkhātā. Tattha sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṁ na vivaditabbaṁ, yathayidaṁ brahmacariyaṁ addhaniyaṁ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṁ, tadassa bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānan”ti.
[¶78] Then the Buddha got up and said to Venerable Sāriputta, “Good, good, Sāriputta! It’s good that you’ve taught this exposition of the reciting in concert.”
> Pali: Atha kho bhagavā uṭṭhahitvā āyasmantaṁ sāriputtaṁ āmantesi: “sādhu sādhu, sāriputta, sādhu kho tvaṁ, sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṁ saṅgītipariyāyaṁ abhāsī”ti.
[¶79] That is what Venerable Sāriputta said, and the Teacher concurred. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Idamavocāyasmā sāriputto, samanuñño satthā ahosi. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶80] > Pali: Saṅgītisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.
## 68. DN 34 · Up to Ten · part 1
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/68/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/68/#p-N
[¶0] DN 34 · Up to Ten
> Pali: DN 34 · Dasuttarasutta
[¶1] So I have heard. At one time the Buddha was staying near Campā on the banks of the Gaggarā Lotus Pond together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants. There Sāriputta addressed the mendicants: “Reverends, mendicants!”
> Pali: Evaṁ me sutaṁ— ekaṁ samayaṁ bhagavā campāyaṁ viharati gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto bhikkhū āmantesi: “āvuso bhikkhave”ti.
[¶2] “Reverend,” they replied. Sāriputta said this:
> Pali: “Āvuso”ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṁ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca:
[¶3] “I will relate the teachings
up to ten for attaining extinguishment,
for making an end of suffering,
the release from all ties.
> Pali: “Dasuttaraṁ pavakkhāmi,
dhammaṁ nibbānapattiyā;
Dukkhassantakiriyāya,
sabbaganthappamocanaṁ.
[¶4] 1. Groups of One
> Pali: 1. Eko dhammo
[¶5] Reverends, one thing is helpful, one thing should be developed, one thing should be completely understood, one thing should be given up, one thing makes things worse, one thing leads to distinction, one thing is hard to comprehend, one thing should be produced, one thing should be directly known, one thing should be realized.
> Pali: Eko, āvuso, dhammo bahukāro, eko dhammo bhāvetabbo, eko dhammo pariññeyyo, eko dhammo pahātabbo, eko dhammo hānabhāgiyo, eko dhammo visesabhāgiyo, eko dhammo duppaṭivijjho, eko dhammo uppādetabbo, eko dhammo abhiññeyyo, eko dhammo sacchikātabbo.
[¶6] What one thing is helpful? Diligence in skillful qualities.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo bahukāro? Appamādo kusalesu dhammesu. Ayaṁ eko dhammo bahukāro.
[¶7] What one thing should be developed? Mindfulness of the body that is full of pleasure.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo bhāvetabbo? Kāyagatāsati sātasahagatā. Ayaṁ eko dhammo bhāvetabbo.
[¶8] What one thing should be completely understood? Contact, which is accompanied by defilements and fuels grasping.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo pariññeyyo? Phasso sāsavo upādāniyo. Ayaṁ eko dhammo pariññeyyo.
[¶9] What one thing should be given up? The conceit ‘I am’.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo pahātabbo? Asmimāno. Ayaṁ eko dhammo pahātabbo.
[¶10] What one thing makes things worse? Irrational application of mind.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo hānabhāgiyo? Ayoniso manasikāro. Ayaṁ eko dhammo hānabhāgiyo.
[¶11] What one thing leads to distinction? Rational application of mind.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo visesabhāgiyo? Yoniso manasikāro. Ayaṁ eko dhammo visesabhāgiyo.
[¶12] What one thing is hard to comprehend? The heart’s immersion of immediate result.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo duppaṭivijjho? Ānantariko cetosamādhi. Ayaṁ eko dhammo duppaṭivijjho.
[¶13] What one thing should be produced? Unshakable knowledge.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo uppādetabbo? Akuppaṁ ñāṇaṁ. Ayaṁ eko dhammo uppādetabbo.
[¶14] What one thing should be directly known? All sentient beings are sustained by food.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo abhiññeyyo? Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Ayaṁ eko dhammo abhiññeyyo.
[¶15] What one thing should be realized? The unshakable release of the heart.
> Pali: Katamo eko dhammo sacchikātabbo? Akuppā cetovimutti. Ayaṁ eko dhammo sacchikātabbo.
[¶16] So these ten things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime dasa dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶17] 2. Groups of Two
> Pali: 2. Dve dhammā
[¶18] Two things are helpful, two things should be developed, two things should be completely understood, two things should be given up, two things make things worse, two things lead to distinction, two things are hard to comprehend, two things should be produced, two things should be directly known, two things should be realized.
> Pali: Dve dhammā bahukārā, dve dhammā bhāvetabbā, dve dhammā pariññeyyā, dve dhammā pahātabbā, dve dhammā hānabhāgiyā, dve dhammā visesabhāgiyā, dve dhammā duppaṭivijjhā, dve dhammā uppādetabbā, dve dhammā abhiññeyyā, dve dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶19] What two things are helpful? Mindfulness and situational awareness.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā bahukārā? Sati ca sampajaññañca. Ime dve dhammā bahukārā.
[¶20] What two things should be developed? Serenity and discernment.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā bhāvetabbā? Samatho ca vipassanā ca. Ime dve dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶21] What two things should be completely understood? Name and form.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā pariññeyyā? Nāmañca rūpañca. Ime dve dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶22] What two things should be given up? Ignorance and craving for continued existence.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā pahātabbā? Avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca. Ime dve dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶23] What two things make things worse? Being hard to admonish and having bad friends.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Dovacassatā ca pāpamittatā ca. Ime dve dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶24] What two things lead to distinction? Being easy to admonish and having good friends.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Sovacassatā ca kalyāṇamittatā ca. Ime dve dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶25] What two things are hard to comprehend? The causes and reasons for the corruption of sentient beings, and the causes and reasons for the purification of sentient beings.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Yo ca hetu yo ca paccayo sattānaṁ saṅkilesāya, yo ca hetu yo ca paccayo sattānaṁ visuddhiyā. Ime dve dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶26] What two things should be produced? Two knowledges: knowledge of ending, and knowledge of non-arising.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā uppādetabbā? Dve ñāṇāni— khaye ñāṇaṁ, anuppāde ñāṇaṁ. Ime dve dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶27] What two things should be directly known? Two elements: the conditioned element and the unconditioned element.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā abhiññeyyā? Dve dhātuyo— saṅkhatā ca dhātu asaṅkhatā ca dhātu. Ime dve dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶28] What two things should be realized? Knowledge and freedom.
> Pali: Katame dve dhammā sacchikātabbā? Vijjā ca vimutti ca. Ime dve dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶29] So these twenty things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime vīsati dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶30] 3. Groups of Three
> Pali: 3. Tayo dhammā
[¶31] Three things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Tayo dhammā bahukārā, tayo dhammā bhāvetabbā …pe… tayo dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶32] What three things are helpful? Associating with true persons, listening to the true teaching, and practicing in line with the teaching.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā bahukārā? Sappurisasaṁsevo, saddhammassavanaṁ, dhammānudhammappaṭipatti. Ime tayo dhammā bahukārā.
[¶33] What three things should be developed? Three kinds of immersion. Immersion with placing the mind and keeping it connected. Immersion without placing the mind, merely keeping it connected. Immersion without placing the mind or keeping it connected.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā bhāvetabbā? Tayo samādhī— savitakko savicāro samādhi, avitakko vicāramatto samādhi, avitakko avicāro samādhi. Ime tayo dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶34] What three things should be completely understood? Three feelings: pleasant, painful, and neutral.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā pariññeyyā? Tisso vedanā— sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Ime tayo dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶35] What three things should be given up? Three cravings: craving for sensual pleasures, craving for continued existence, and craving for nonexistence.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā pahātabbā? Tisso taṇhā— kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā. Ime tayo dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶36] What three things make things worse? Three unskillful roots: greed, hate, and delusion.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni— lobho akusalamūlaṁ, doso akusalamūlaṁ, moho akusalamūlaṁ. Ime tayo dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶37] What three things lead to distinction? Three skillful roots: contentment, love, and understanding.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Tīṇi kusalamūlāni— alobho kusalamūlaṁ, adoso kusalamūlaṁ, amoho kusalamūlaṁ. Ime tayo dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶38] What three things are hard to comprehend? Three elements of escape. Renunciation is the escape from sensual pleasures. The formless is the escape from form. Cessation is the escape from whatever is created, conditioned, and dependently originated.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Tisso nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo— kāmānametaṁ nissaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ nekkhammaṁ, rūpānametaṁ nissaraṇaṁ yadidaṁ arūpaṁ, yaṁ kho pana kiñci bhūtaṁ saṅkhataṁ paṭiccasamuppannaṁ, nirodho tassa nissaraṇaṁ. Ime tayo dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶39] What three things should be produced? Three knowledges: knowledge regarding the past portion, the future portion, and the present portion.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā uppādetabbā? Tīṇi ñāṇāni— atītaṁse ñāṇaṁ, anāgataṁse ñāṇaṁ, paccuppannaṁse ñāṇaṁ. Ime tayo dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶40] What three things should be directly known? Three elements: the sensual realm, the realm of luminous form, and the formless realm.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā abhiññeyyā? Tisso dhātuyo— kāmadhātu, rūpadhātu, arūpadhātu. Ime tayo dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶41] What three things should be realized? Three knowledges: recollection of past lives, knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings, and knowledge of the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Katame tayo dhammā sacchikātabbā? Tisso vijjā— pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṁ vijjā, sattānaṁ cutūpapāte ñāṇaṁ vijjā, āsavānaṁ khaye ñāṇaṁ vijjā. Ime tayo dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶42] So these thirty things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime tiṁsa dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶43] 4. Groups of Four
> Pali: 4. Cattāro dhammā
[¶44] Four things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Cattāro dhammā bahukārā, cattāro dhammā bhāvetabbā …pe… cattāro dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶45] What four things are helpful? Four situations: living in a suitable region, relying on true persons, being rightly resolved in oneself, and past merit.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā bahukārā? Cattāri cakkāni— patirūpadesavāso, sappurisūpanissayo, attasammāpaṇidhi, pubbe ca katapuññatā. Ime cattāro dhammā bahukārā.
[¶46] What four things should be developed? The four kinds of mindfulness meditation. A mendicant meditates by observing an aspect of the body—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world. They meditate observing an aspect of feelings … mind … principles—keen, aware, and mindful, rid of covetousness and displeasure for the world.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā bhāvetabbā? Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Vedanāsu …pe… citte … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṁ. Ime cattāro dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶47] What four things should be completely understood? Four foods: edible food, whether solid or subtle; contact is the second, mental intention the third, and consciousness the fourth.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā pariññeyyā? Cattāro āhārā— kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṁ catutthaṁ. Ime cattāro dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶48] What four things should be given up? Four floods: sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā pahātabbā? Cattāro oghā— kāmogho, bhavogho, diṭṭhogho, avijjogho. Ime cattāro dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶49] What four things make things worse? Four yokes: the yokes of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Cattāro yogā— kāmayogo, bhavayogo, diṭṭhiyogo, avijjāyogo. Ime cattāro dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶50] What four things lead to distinction? Four kinds of unyoking: unyoking from the yokes of sensuality, desire for rebirth, views, and ignorance.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Cattāro visaṁyogā— kāmayogavisaṁyogo, bhavayogavisaṁyogo, diṭṭhiyogavisaṁyogo, avijjāyogavisaṁyogo. Ime cattāro dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶51] What four things are hard to comprehend? Four kinds of immersion: immersion liable to decline, stable immersion, immersion that leads to distinction, and immersion that leads to penetration.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Cattāro samādhī— hānabhāgiyo samādhi, ṭhitibhāgiyo samādhi, visesabhāgiyo samādhi, nibbedhabhāgiyo samādhi. Ime cattāro dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶52] What four things should be produced? Four knowledges: knowledge of the teaching, inferential knowledge, knowledge of encompassing, and conventional knowledge.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā uppādetabbā? Cattāri ñāṇāni— dhamme ñāṇaṁ, anvaye ñāṇaṁ, pariye ñāṇaṁ, sammutiyā ñāṇaṁ. Ime cattāro dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶53] What four things should be directly known? The four noble truths: suffering, the origin of suffering, the cessation of suffering, and the practice that leads to the cessation of suffering.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā abhiññeyyā? Cattāri ariyasaccāni— dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ, dukkhasamudayaṁ ariyasaccaṁ, dukkhanirodhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṁ. Ime cattāro dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶54] What four things should be realized? Four fruits of the ascetic life: stream-entry, once-return, non-return, and perfection.
> Pali: Katame cattāro dhammā sacchikātabbā? Cattāri sāmaññaphalāni— sotāpattiphalaṁ, sakadāgāmiphalaṁ, anāgāmiphalaṁ, arahattaphalaṁ. Ime cattāro dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶55] So these forty things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime cattārīsadhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶56] 5. Groups of Five
> Pali: 5. Pañca dhammā
[¶57] Five things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Pañca dhammā bahukārā …pe… pañca dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶58] What five things are helpful? Five factors that support meditation. A mendicant has faith in the Realized One’s awakening: ‘That Blessed One is perfected, a fully awakened Buddha, accomplished in knowledge and conduct, holy, knower of the world, supreme guide for those fit for training, teacher of gods and humans, awakened, blessed.’ They are rarely ill or unwell. Their stomach digests well, being neither too hot nor too cold, but just right, and fit for meditation. They’re not devious or deceitful. They reveal themselves honestly to the Teacher or sensible spiritual companions. They live with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They’re strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities. They’re wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā bahukārā? Pañca padhāniyaṅgāni— idhāvuso, bhikkhu saddho hoti, saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṁ: ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṁ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṁ buddho bhagavā’ti. Appābādho hoti appātaṅko samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgato nātisītāya nāccuṇhāya majjhimāya padhānakkhamāya. Asaṭho hoti amāyāvī yathābhūtamattānaṁ āvīkattā satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu. Āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu. Paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā. Ime pañca dhammā bahukārā.
[¶59] What five things should be developed? Right immersion with five factors: pervasion with rapture, pervasion with pleasure, pervasion with mind, pervasion with light, and the basis for reviewing.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā bhāvetabbā? Pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi— pītipharaṇatā, sukhapharaṇatā, cetopharaṇatā, ālokapharaṇatā, paccavekkhaṇanimittaṁ. Ime pañca dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶60] What five things should be completely understood? Five grasping aggregates: form, feeling, perception, choices, and consciousness.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā pariññeyyā? Pañcupādānakkhandhā— rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime pañca dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶61] What five things should be given up? Five hindrances: sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā pahātabbā? Pañca nīvaraṇāni— kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ, byāpādanīvaraṇaṁ, thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṁ, uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṁ, vicikicchānīvaraṇaṁ. Ime pañca dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶62] What five things make things worse? Five kinds of hard-heartedness. Firstly, a mendicant has doubts about the Teacher. They’re uncertain, undecided, and lacking confidence. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the first kind of hard-heartedness. Furthermore, a mendicant has doubts about the teaching … the Saṅgha … the training … A mendicant is angry and upset with their spiritual companions, resentful and closed off. This being so, their mind doesn’t incline toward keenness, commitment, persistence, and striving. This is the fifth kind of hard-heartedness.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Pañca cetokhilā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati. Yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati nādhimuccati na sampasīdati, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Ayaṁ paṭhamo cetokhilo. Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu dhamme kaṅkhati vicikicchati …pe… saṅghe kaṅkhati vicikicchati …pe… sikkhāya kaṅkhati vicikicchati …pe… sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto, yo so, āvuso, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto, tassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Yassa cittaṁ na namati ātappāya anuyogāya sātaccāya padhānāya. Ayaṁ pañcamo cetokhilo. Ime pañca dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶63] What five things lead to distinction? Five faculties: faith, energy, mindfulness, immersion, and wisdom.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Pañcindriyāni— saddhindriyaṁ, vīriyindriyaṁ, satindriyaṁ, samādhindriyaṁ, paññindriyaṁ. Ime pañca dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶64] What five things are hard to comprehend? Five elements of escape. A mendicant focuses on sensual pleasures, but on that their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided. But when they focus on renunciation, on that their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided. Their mind is in a good state, well developed, well risen, well freed, and well detached from sensual pleasures. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of sensual pleasures, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from sensual pleasures is explained.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Pañca nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo— idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāme manasikaroto kāmesu cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Nekkhammaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto nekkhamme cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ kāmehi. Ye ca kāmapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi. Na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ kāmānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶65] Take another case where a mendicant focuses on ill will, but their mind does not leap forth … But when they focus on good will, their mind leaps forth … Their mind is in a good state … well detached from ill will. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of ill will, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from ill will is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno byāpādaṁ manasikaroto byāpāde cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Abyāpādaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto abyāpāde cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ byāpādena. Ye ca byāpādapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi. Na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ byāpādassa nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶66] Take another case where a mendicant focuses on harming, but their mind does not leap forth … But when they focus on compassion, their mind leaps forth … Their mind is in a good state … well detached from harming. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of harming, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from harming is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno vihesaṁ manasikaroto vihesāya cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Avihesaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto avihesāya cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ vihesāya. Ye ca vihesāpaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi. Na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ vihesāya nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶67] Take another case where a mendicant focuses on form, but their mind does not leap forth … But when they focus on the formless, their mind leaps forth … Their mind is in a good state … well detached from forms. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of form, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from forms is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno rūpe manasikaroto rūpesu cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Arūpaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto arūpe cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ rūpehi. Ye ca rūpapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi. Na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ rūpānaṁ nissaraṇaṁ.
[¶68] Take a case where a mendicant focuses on substantial reality, but their mind does not leap forth, gain confidence, settle down, and become decided. But when they focus on the cessation of substantial reality, their mind leaps forth, gains confidence, settles down, and becomes decided. Their mind is in a good state, well developed, well risen, well freed, and well detached from substantial reality. They’re freed from the distressing and feverish defilements that arise because of substantial reality, so they don’t experience that kind of feeling. This is how the escape from substantial reality is explained.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno sakkāyaṁ manasikaroto sakkāye cittaṁ na pakkhandati na pasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati. Sakkāyanirodhaṁ kho panassa manasikaroto sakkāyanirodhe cittaṁ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati vimuccati. Tassa taṁ cittaṁ sugataṁ subhāvitaṁ suvuṭṭhitaṁ suvimuttaṁ visaṁyuttaṁ sakkāyena. Ye ca sakkāyapaccayā uppajjanti āsavā vighātā pariḷāhā, mutto so tehi. Na so taṁ vedanaṁ vedeti. Idamakkhātaṁ sakkāyassa nissaraṇaṁ. Ime pañca dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶69] What five things should be produced? Right immersion with five knowledges. The following knowledges arise for you personally: ‘This immersion is blissful now, and results in bliss in the future.’ ‘This immersion is noble and not of the flesh.’ ‘This immersion is not cultivated by reprobates.’ ‘This immersion is peaceful and sublime and tranquil and unified, not held in place by forceful suppression.’ ‘I mindfully enter into and emerge from this immersion.’
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā uppādetabbā? Pañca ñāṇiko sammāsamādhi: ‘ayaṁ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’ti paccattaṁyeva ñāṇaṁ uppajjati. ‘Ayaṁ samādhi ariyo nirāmiso’ti paccattaññeva ñāṇaṁ uppajjati. ‘Ayaṁ samādhi akāpurisasevito’ti paccattaṁyeva ñāṇaṁ uppajjati. ‘Ayaṁ samādhi santo paṇīto paṭippassaddhaladdho ekodibhāvādhigato, na sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato’ti paccattaṁyeva ñāṇaṁ uppajjati. ‘So kho panāhaṁ imaṁ samādhiṁ satova samāpajjāmi sato vuṭṭhahāmī’ti paccattaṁyeva ñāṇaṁ uppajjati. Ime pañca dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶70] What five things should be directly known? Five opportunities for freedom. Firstly, the Teacher or a respected spiritual companion teaches Dhamma to a mendicant. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how the Teacher or a respected spiritual companion teaches it. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the first opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā abhiññeyyā? Pañca vimuttāyatanāni— idhāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī. Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṁ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthappaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthappaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.
[¶71] Furthermore, it may be that neither the Teacher nor a respected spiritual companion teaches Dhamma to a mendicant. But the mendicant teaches Dhamma in detail to others as they learned and memorized it. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how they teach it in detail to others as they learned and memorized it. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the second opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṁ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhu yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthappaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthappaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.
[¶72] Furthermore, it may be that neither the Teacher nor … the mendicant teaches Dhamma. But the mendicant rehearses the teaching in detail as they learned and memorized it. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how they rehearse it in detail as they learned and memorized it. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the third opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṁ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti. Api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karoti. Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhu yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karoti tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthappaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthappaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.
[¶73] Furthermore, it may be that neither the Teacher nor … the mendicant teaches Dhamma … nor does the mendicant rehearse the teaching. But the mendicant thinks about and considers the teaching in their heart, examining it with the mind as they learned and memorized it. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how they think about and consider it in their heart, examining it with the mind as they learned and memorized it. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the fourth opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṁ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karoti. Api ca kho yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati. Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhu yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthappaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthappaṭisaṁvedino dhammapaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ catutthaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ.
[¶74] Furthermore, it may be that neither the Teacher nor … the mendicant teaches Dhamma … nor does the mendicant rehearse the teaching … or think about it. But a meditation subject as a basis of immersion is properly grasped, focused on, borne in mind, and penetrated with wisdom. That mendicant feels inspired by the meaning and the teaching in that Dhamma, no matter how a meditation subject as a basis of immersion is properly grasped, focused on, borne in mind, and penetrated with wisdom. Feeling inspired, joy springs up. Being joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, one feels bliss. And when blissful, the mind becomes immersed. This is the fifth opportunity for freedom.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṁ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena paresaṁ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ vitthārena sajjhāyaṁ karoti, nāpi yathāsutaṁ yathāpariyattaṁ dhammaṁ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati; api ca khvassa aññataraṁ samādhinimittaṁ suggahitaṁ hoti sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ suppaṭividdhaṁ paññāya. Yathā yathā, āvuso, bhikkhuno aññataraṁ samādhinimittaṁ suggahitaṁ hoti sumanasikataṁ sūpadhāritaṁ suppaṭividdhaṁ paññāya tathā tathā so tasmiṁ dhamme atthappaṭisaṁvedī ca hoti dhammappaṭisaṁvedī ca. Tassa atthappaṭisaṁvedino dhammappaṭisaṁvedino pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ vimuttāyatanaṁ. Ime pañca dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶75] What five things should be realized? Five spectrums of the teaching: ethics, immersion, wisdom, freedom, and knowledge and vision of freedom.
> Pali: Katame pañca dhammā sacchikātabbā? Pañca dhammakkhandhā— sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho, vimuttikkhandho, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. Ime pañca dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶76] So these fifty things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime paññāsa dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶77] 6. Groups of Six
> Pali: 6. Cha dhammā
[¶78] Six things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Cha dhammā bahukārā …pe… cha dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶79] What six things are helpful? Six warm-hearted qualities. Firstly, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with bodily kindness, both in public and in private. This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā bahukārā? Cha sāraṇīyā dhammā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ kāyakammaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti sabrahmacārīsu āvi ceva raho ca, ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶80] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with verbal kindness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ vacīkammaṁ …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶81] Furthermore, a mendicant consistently treats their spiritual companions with mental kindness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno mettaṁ manokammaṁ …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶82] Furthermore, a mendicant shares without reservation any material things they have gained by legitimate means, even the food placed in the alms-bowl, using them in common with their ethical spiritual companions.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu ye te lābhā dhammikā dhammaladdhā antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampi, tathārūpehi lābhehi appaṭivibhattabhogī hoti sīlavantehi sabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogī, ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶83] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the precepts shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. Those precepts are intact, impeccable, spotless, and unmarred, liberating, praised by sensible people, not mistaken, and leading to immersion.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu, yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṁvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca, ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo …pe… ekībhāvāya saṁvattati.
[¶84] Furthermore, a mendicant lives according to the view shared with their spiritual companions, both in public and in private. That view is noble and emancipating, and delivers one who applies it to the complete ending of suffering. This warm-hearted quality makes for fondness and respect, conducing to inclusion, harmony, and unity, without quarreling.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāyaṁ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhi sāmaññagato viharati sabrahmacārīhi āvi ceva raho ca, ayampi dhammo sāraṇīyo piyakaraṇo garukaraṇo, saṅgahāya avivādāya sāmaggiyā ekībhāvāya saṁvattati. Ime cha dhammā bahukārā.
[¶85] What six things should be developed? Six topics for recollection: the recollection of the Buddha, the teaching, the Saṅgha, ethics, generosity, and the deities.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā bhāvetabbā? Cha anussatiṭṭhānāni— buddhānussati, dhammānussati, saṅghānussati, sīlānussati, cāgānussati, devatānussati. Ime cha dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶86] What six things should be completely understood? Six interior sense fields: eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā pariññeyyā? Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni— cakkhāyatanaṁ, sotāyatanaṁ, ghānāyatanaṁ, jivhāyatanaṁ, kāyāyatanaṁ, manāyatanaṁ. Ime cha dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶87] What six things should be given up? Six classes of craving: craving for sights, sounds, smells, tastes, touches, and ideas.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā pahātabbā? Cha taṇhākāyā— rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā. Ime cha dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶88] What six things make things worse? Six kinds of disrespect. A mendicant lacks respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, the training, diligence, and hospitality.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Cha agāravā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari agāravo viharati appatisso. Dhamme …pe… saṅghe … sikkhāya … appamāde … paṭisanthāre agāravo viharati appatisso. Ime cha dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶89] What six things lead to distinction? Six kinds of respect. A mendicant has respect and reverence for the Teacher, the teaching, and the Saṅgha, the training, diligence, and hospitality.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Cha gāravā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthari sagāravo viharati sappatisso. Dhamme …pe… saṅghe … sikkhāya … appamāde … paṭisanthāre sagāravo viharati sappatisso. Ime cha dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶90] What six things are hard to comprehend? Six elements of escape. Take a mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by love. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow ill will still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! Don’t say that. Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that. It’s impossible, reverend, it cannot happen that the heart’s release by love has been developed and properly implemented, yet somehow ill will still occupies the mind. For it is the heart’s release by love that is the escape from ill will.’
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Cha nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo— idhāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘mettā hi kho me, cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, atha ca pana me byāpādo cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi. Na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ āvuso anavakāso yaṁ mettāya cetovimuttiyā bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya yānīkatāya vatthukatāya anuṭṭhitāya paricitāya susamāraddhāya. Atha ca panassa byāpādo cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, byāpādassa, yadidaṁ mettācetovimuttī’ti.
[¶91] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by compassion. I’ve cultivated it, made it my vehicle and my basis, kept it up, consolidated it, and properly implemented it. Yet somehow the thought of harming still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the heart’s release by compassion that is the escape from thoughts of harming.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘karuṇā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā. Atha ca pana me vihesā cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So: ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo, ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi …pe… nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, vihesāya, yadidaṁ karuṇācetovimuttī’ti.
## 69. DN 34 · Up to Ten · part 2
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/69/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/69/#p-N
[¶0] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by rejoicing. … Yet somehow discontent still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the heart’s release by rejoicing that is the escape from discontent.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘muditā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā …pe… atha ca pana me arati cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So: ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca …pe… nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, aratiyā, yadidaṁ muditācetovimuttī’ti.
[¶1] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the heart’s release by equanimity. … Yet somehow desire still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the heart’s release by equanimity that is the escape from desire.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘upekkhā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā …pe… atha ca pana me rāgo cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So: ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca …pe… nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, rāgassa yadidaṁ upekkhācetovimuttī’ti.
[¶2] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’ve developed the signless release of the heart. … Yet somehow my consciousness still follows after signs.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! … For it is the signless release of the heart that is the escape from all signs.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘animittā hi kho me cetovimutti bhāvitā …pe… atha ca pana me nimittānusāri viññāṇaṁ hotī’ti. So: ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca …pe… nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, sabbanimittānaṁ yadidaṁ animittā cetovimuttī’ti.
[¶3] Take another mendicant who says: ‘I’m rid of the conceit “I am”. And I don’t regard anything as “I am this”. Yet somehow the dart of doubt and indecision still occupies my mind.’ They should be told, ‘Not so, venerable! Don’t say that. Don’t misrepresent the Buddha, for misrepresentation of the Buddha is not good. And the Buddha would not say that. It’s impossible, reverend, it cannot happen that the conceit “I am” has been done away with, and nothing is regarded as “I am this”, yet somehow the dart of doubt and indecision still occupy the mind. For it is the uprooting of the conceit “I am” that is the escape from the dart of doubt and indecision.’
> Pali: Idha panāvuso, bhikkhu evaṁ vadeyya: ‘asmīti kho me vigataṁ, ayamahamasmīti na samanupassāmi, atha ca pana me vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ cittaṁ pariyādāya tiṭṭhatī’ti. So: ‘mā hevan’tissa vacanīyo ‘māyasmā evaṁ avaca, mā bhagavantaṁ abbhācikkhi, na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṁ, na hi bhagavā evaṁ vadeyya. Aṭṭhānametaṁ, āvuso, anavakāso yaṁ asmīti vigate ayamahamasmīti asamanupassato. Atha ca panassa vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallaṁ cittaṁ pariyādāya ṭhassati, netaṁ ṭhānaṁ vijjati. Nissaraṇaṁ hetaṁ, āvuso, vicikicchākathaṅkathāsallassa, yadidaṁ asmimānasamugghāto’ti. Ime cha dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶4] What six things should be produced? Six consistent responses. A mendicant, seeing a sight with their eyes, is neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā uppādetabbā? Cha satatavihārā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …
[¶5] Encountering a touch with their body … Knowing an idea with their mind, they’re neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware.
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Ime cha dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶6] What six things should be directly known? Six unsurpassable things: the unsurpassable seeing, listening, acquisition, training, service, and recollection.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā abhiññeyyā? Cha anuttariyāni— dassanānuttariyaṁ, savanānuttariyaṁ, lābhānuttariyaṁ, sikkhānuttariyaṁ, pāricariyānuttariyaṁ, anussatānuttariyaṁ. Ime cha dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶7] What six things should be realized? Six direct knowledges. A mendicant wields the many kinds of psychic power: multiplying themselves and becoming one again; materializing and dematerializing; going unobstructed through a wall, a rampart, or a mountain as if through space; diving in and out of the earth as if it were water; walking on water as if it were earth; flying cross-legged through the sky like a bird; touching and stroking with the hand the sun and moon, so mighty and powerful; controlling the body as far as the realm of divinity.
> Pali: Katame cha dhammā sacchikātabbā? Cha abhiññā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu anekavihitaṁ iddhividhaṁ paccanubhoti—ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti; āvibhāvaṁ tirobhāvaṁ; tirokuṭṭaṁ tiropākāraṁ tiropabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati seyyathāpi ākāse; pathaviyāpi ummujjanimujjaṁ karoti seyyathāpi udake; udakepi abhijjamāne gacchati seyyathāpi pathaviyaṁ; ākāsepi pallaṅkena kamati seyyathāpi pakkhī sakuṇo; imepi candimasūriye evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve pāṇinā parāmasati parimajjati; yāva brahmalokāpi kāyena vasaṁ vatteti.
[¶8] With clairaudience that is purified and superhuman, they hear both kinds of sounds, human and heavenly, whether near or far.
> Pali: Dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya ubho sadde suṇāti dibbe ca mānuse ca, ye dūre santike ca.
[¶9] They understand the minds of other beings and individuals, having encompassed them with their own mind.
> Pali: Parasattānaṁ parapuggalānaṁ cetasā ceto paricca pajānāti, sarāgaṁ vā cittaṁ sarāgaṁ cittanti pajānāti …pe… avimuttaṁ vā cittaṁ avimuttaṁ cittanti pajānāti.
[¶10] They recollect many kinds of past lives, with features and details.
> Pali: So anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati, seyyathidaṁ—ekampi jātiṁ …pe… iti sākāraṁ sauddesaṁ anekavihitaṁ pubbenivāsaṁ anussarati.
[¶11] With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see sentient beings passing away and being reborn—inferior and superior, beautiful and ugly, in a good place or a bad place. They understand how sentient beings pass on according to their deeds.
> Pali: Dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate yathākammūpage satte pajānāti …pe…
[¶12] They realize the undefiled freedom of heart and freedom by wisdom. And they live having realized it with their own insight in this very life due to the ending of defilements.
> Pali: Āsavānaṁ khayā anāsavaṁ cetovimuttiṁ paññāvimuttiṁ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ime cha dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶13] So these sixty things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime saṭṭhi dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶14] 7. Groups of Seven
> Pali: 7. Satta dhammā
[¶15] Seven things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Satta dhammā bahukārā …pe… satta dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶16] What seven things are helpful? Seven riches of the noble ones: the riches of faith, ethics, conscience, prudence, learning, generosity, and wisdom.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā bahukārā? Satta ariyadhanāni— saddhādhanaṁ, sīladhanaṁ, hiridhanaṁ, ottappadhanaṁ, sutadhanaṁ, cāgadhanaṁ, paññādhanaṁ. Ime satta dhammā bahukārā.
[¶17] What seven things should be developed? Seven awakening factors: mindfulness, investigation of principles, energy, rapture, tranquility, immersion, and equanimity.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā bhāvetabbā? Satta sambojjhaṅgā— satisambojjhaṅgo, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo, vīriyasambojjhaṅgo, pītisambojjhaṅgo, passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, samādhisambojjhaṅgo, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo. Ime satta dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶18] What seven things should be completely understood? Seven planes of consciousness. There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is the first plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā pariññeyyā? Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo— santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶19] There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption. This is the second plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṁ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶20] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity. This is the third plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṁ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶21] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty. This is the fourth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṁ catutthī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶22] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fifth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā …pe… ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶23] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the sixth plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ chaṭṭhī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
[¶24] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is the seventh plane of consciousness.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti. Ime satta dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶25] What seven things should be given up? Seven underlying tendencies: sensual desire, aversion, views, doubt, conceit, desire for continued existence, and ignorance.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā pahātabbā? Sattānusayā— kāmarāgānusayo, paṭighānusayo, diṭṭhānusayo, vicikicchānusayo, mānānusayo, bhavarāgānusayo, avijjānusayo. Ime satta dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶26] What seven things make things worse? Seven bad qualities: a mendicant is faithless, shameless, imprudent, unlearned, lazy, unmindful, and witless.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Satta asaddhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu assaddho hoti, ahiriko hoti, anottappī hoti, appassuto hoti, kusīto hoti, muṭṭhassati hoti, duppañño hoti. Ime satta dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶27] What seven things lead to distinction? Seven good qualities: a mendicant is faithful, conscientious, prudent, learned, energetic, mindful, and wise.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Satta saddhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu saddho hoti, hirimā hoti, ottappī hoti, bahussuto hoti, āraddhavīriyo hoti, upaṭṭhitassati hoti, paññavā hoti. Ime satta dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶28] What seven things are hard to comprehend? Seven aspects of the teachings of the true persons: a mendicant knows the teachings, knows the meaning, knows themselves, knows moderation, knows the right time, knows assemblies, and knows individuals.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Satta sappurisadhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu dhammaññū ca hoti atthaññū ca attaññū ca mattaññū ca kālaññū ca parisaññū ca puggalaññū ca. Ime satta dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶29] What seven things should be produced? Seven perceptions: the perception of impermanence, the perception of not-self, the perception of ugliness, the perception of drawbacks, the perception of giving up, the perception of fading away, and the perception of cessation.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā uppādetabbā? Satta saññā— aniccasaññā, anattasaññā, asubhasaññā, ādīnavasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā. Ime satta dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶30] What seven things should be directly known? Seven qualifications for graduation. A mendicant has a keen enthusiasm to undertake the training … to examine the teachings … to get rid of desires … for retreat … to rouse up energy … for mindfulness and alertness … to penetrate theoretically. And they don’t lose these desires in the future.
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā abhiññeyyā? Satta niddasavatthūni— idhāvuso, bhikkhu sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo. Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca dhammanisantiyā avigatapemo. Icchāvinaye tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca icchāvinaye avigatapemo. Paṭisallāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca paṭisallāne avigatapemo. Vīriyārambhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca vīriyārambhe avigatapemo. Satinepakke tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca satinepakke avigatapemo. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca diṭṭhipaṭivedhe avigatapemo. Ime satta dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶31] What seven things should be realized? Seven powers of one who has ended the defilements. Firstly, a mendicant with defilements ended has clearly seen with right wisdom all conditions as truly impermanent. This is a power that a mendicant who has ended the defilements relies on to claim: ‘My defilements have ended.’
> Pali: Katame satta dhammā sacchikātabbā? Satta khīṇāsavabalāni— idhāvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yaṁpāvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti, idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṁ hoti, yaṁ balaṁ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayaṁ paṭijānāti: ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
[¶32] Furthermore, a mendicant with defilements ended has clearly seen with right wisdom that sensual pleasures are truly like a pit of glowing coals. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmā yathābhūtaṁ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yaṁpāvuso …pe… ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
[¶33] Furthermore, the mind of a mendicant with defilements ended slants, slopes, and inclines to seclusion. They’re withdrawn, loving renunciation, and have totally eliminated defiling influences. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṁ cittaṁ hoti vivekapoṇaṁ vivekapabbhāraṁ vivekaṭṭhaṁ nekkhammābhirataṁ byantībhūtaṁ sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi. Yaṁpāvuso …pe… ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
[¶34] Furthermore, a mendicant with defilements ended has well developed the four kinds of mindfulness meditation. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Yaṁpāvuso …pe… ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
[¶35] Furthermore, a mendicant with defilements ended has well developed the five faculties. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pañcindriyāni bhāvitāni honti subhāvitāni. Yaṁpāvuso …pe… ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
[¶36] Furthermore, a mendicant with defilements ended has well developed the seven awakening factors. …
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Yaṁpāvuso …pe… ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
[¶37] Furthermore, a mendicant with defilements ended has well developed the noble eightfold path. … This is a power that a mendicant who has ended the defilements relies on to claim: ‘My defilements have ended.’
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito. Yaṁpāvuso, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito, idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṁ hoti, yaṁ balaṁ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṁ khayaṁ paṭijānāti: ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti. Ime satta dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶38] So these seventy things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Itime sattati dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶39] The first recitation section is complete.
> Pali: Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.
[¶40] 8. Groups of Eight
> Pali: 8. Aṭṭha dhammā
[¶41] Eight things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Aṭṭha dhammā bahukārā …pe… aṭṭha dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶42] What eight things are helpful? There are eight causes and reasons that lead to acquiring the wisdom fundamental to the spiritual life, and to its increase, growth, development, and fulfillment once it has been acquired. What eight? It’s when a mendicant lives relying on the Teacher or a spiritual companion in a teacher’s role. And they set up a keen sense of conscience and prudence for them, with warmth and respect. This is the first cause.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā bahukārā? Aṭṭha hetū aṭṭha paccayā ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattanti. Katame aṭṭha? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satthāraṁ upanissāya viharati aññataraṁ vā garuṭṭhāniyaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ, yatthassa tibbaṁ hirottappaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti pemañca gāravo ca. Ayaṁ paṭhamo hetu paṭhamo paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶43] When a mendicant lives relying on the Teacher or a spiritual companion in a teacher’s role—with a keen sense of conscience and prudence for them, with warmth and respect—from time to time they go and ask them questions: ‘Why, sir, does it say this? What does that mean?’ Those venerables clarify what is unclear, reveal what is obscure, and dispel doubt regarding the many doubtful matters. This is the second cause.
> Pali: Taṁ kho pana satthāraṁ upanissāya viharati aññataraṁ vā garuṭṭhāniyaṁ sabrahmacāriṁ, yatthassa tibbaṁ hirottappaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti pemañca gāravo ca. Te kālena kālaṁ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhati: ‘idaṁ, bhante, kathaṁ? Imassa ko attho’ti? Tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttānīkaronti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭṭhāniyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṁ paṭivinodenti. Ayaṁ dutiyo hetu dutiyo paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶44] After hearing that teaching they perfect withdrawal of both body and mind. This is the third cause.
> Pali: Taṁ kho pana dhammaṁ sutvā dvayena vūpakāsena sampādeti—kāyavūpakāsena ca cittavūpakāsena ca. Ayaṁ tatiyo hetu tatiyo paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶45] Furthermore, a mendicant is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. This is the fourth cause.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Ayaṁ catuttho hetu catuttho paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶46] Furthermore, a mendicant is very learned, remembering and keeping what they’ve learned. These teachings are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, meaningful and well-phrased, describing a spiritual practice that’s entirely full and pure. They are very learned in such teachings, remembering them, rehearsing them, mentally scrutinizing them, and penetrating them theoretically. This is the fifth cause.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo. Ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthā sabyañjanā kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā honti dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. Ayaṁ pañcamo hetu pañcamo paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶47] Furthermore, a mendicant lives with energy roused up for giving up unskillful qualities and embracing skillful qualities. They are strong, staunchly vigorous, not slacking off when it comes to developing skillful qualities. This is the sixth cause.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu āraddhavīriyo viharati akusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ pahānāya, kusalānaṁ dhammānaṁ upasampadāya, thāmavā daḷhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho hetu chaṭṭho paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶48] Furthermore, a mendicant is mindful. They have utmost mindfulness and alertness, and can remember and recall what was said and done long ago. This is the seventh cause.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu satimā hoti paramena satinepakkena samannāgato. Cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā. Ayaṁ sattamo hetu sattamo paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati.
[¶49] Furthermore, a mendicant meditates observing rise and fall in the five grasping aggregates. ‘Such is form, such is the origin of form, such is the disappearance of form. Such is feeling, such is the origin of feeling, such is the disappearance of feeling. Such is perception, such is the origin of perception, such is the disappearance of perception. Such are choices, such is the origin of choices, such is the disappearance of choices. Such is consciousness, such is the origin of consciousness, such is the disappearance of consciousness.’ This is the eighth cause.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu, udayabbayānupassī viharati: ‘iti rūpaṁ iti rūpassa samudayo iti rūpassa atthaṅgamo; iti vedanā iti vedanāya samudayo iti vedanāya atthaṅgamo; iti saññā iti saññāya samudayo iti saññāya atthaṅgamo; iti saṅkhārā iti saṅkhārānaṁ samudayo iti saṅkhārānaṁ atthaṅgamo; iti viññāṇaṁ iti viññāṇassa samudayo iti viññāṇassa atthaṅgamo’ti. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo hetu aṭṭhamo paccayo ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāya appaṭiladdhāya paṭilābhāya, paṭiladdhāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṁvattati. Ime aṭṭha dhammā bahukārā.
[¶50] What eight things should be developed? The noble eightfold path, that is: right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā bhāvetabbā? Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo seyyathidaṁ— sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi. Ime aṭṭha dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶51] What eight things should be completely understood? Eight worldly conditions: gain and loss, fame and disgrace, blame and praise, pleasure and pain.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā pariññeyyā? Aṭṭha lokadhammā— lābho ca, alābho ca, yaso ca, ayaso ca, nindā ca, pasaṁsā ca, sukhañca, dukkhañca. Ime aṭṭha dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶52] What eight things should be given up? Eight wrong ways: wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā pahātabbā? Aṭṭha micchattā— micchādiṭṭhi, micchāsaṅkappo, micchāvācā, micchākammanto, micchāājīvo, micchāvāyāmo, micchāsati, micchāsamādhi. Ime aṭṭha dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶53] What eight things make things worse? Eight grounds for laziness. Firstly, a mendicant has some work to do. They think: ‘I have some work to do. But while doing it my body will get tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the first ground for laziness.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Aṭṭha kusītavatthūni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kātabbaṁ hoti, tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘kammaṁ kho me kātabbaṁ bhavissati, kammaṁ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati, na vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶54] Furthermore, a mendicant has done some work. They think: ‘I’ve done some work. But while working my body got tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the second ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kataṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho kammaṁ akāsiṁ, kammaṁ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati, na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …pe… idaṁ dutiyaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶55] Furthermore, a mendicant has to go on a journey. They think: ‘I have to go on a journey. But while walking my body will get tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the third ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gantabbo hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati, na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …pe… idaṁ tatiyaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶56] Furthermore, a mendicant has gone on a journey. They think: ‘I’ve gone on a journey. But while walking my body got tired. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the fourth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho maggaṁ agamāsiṁ, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati, na vīriyaṁ ārabhati …pe… idaṁ catutthaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶57] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, but they didn’t get to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, but I didn’t get to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is tired and unfit for work. I’d better have a lie down.’… This is the fifth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo kilanto akammañño, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti …pe… idaṁ pañcamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶58] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, and they got to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, and I got to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is heavy, unfit for work, like I’ve just eaten a load of beans. I’d better have a lie down.’… They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the sixth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo garuko akammañño, māsācitaṁ maññe, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati …pe… idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶59] Furthermore, a mendicant feels a little sick. They think: ‘I feel a little sick. Lying down would be good for me. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the seventh ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno uppanno hoti appamattako ābādho, tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ appamattako ābādho atthi kappo nipajjituṁ, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati …pe… idaṁ sattamaṁ kusītavatthu.
[¶60] Furthermore, a mendicant has recently recovered from illness. They think: ‘I’ve recently recovered from illness. My body is weak and unfit for work. I’d better have a lie down.’ They lie down, and don’t rouse energy … This is the eighth ground for laziness.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gilānāvuṭṭhito hoti aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gilānāvuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā. Tassa me kāyo dubbalo akammañño, handāhaṁ nipajjāmī’ti. So nipajjati …pe… idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ kusītavatthu. Ime aṭṭha dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶61] What eight things lead to distinction? Eight grounds for arousing energy. Firstly, a mendicant has some work to do. They think: ‘I have some work to do. While working it’s not easy to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.’ They rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the first ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni. Idhāvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kātabbaṁ hoti, tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘kammaṁ kho me kātabbaṁ bhavissati, kammaṁ kho pana me karontena na sukaraṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasikātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti. So vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶62] Furthermore, a mendicant has done some work. They think: ‘I’ve done some work. While I was working I wasn’t able to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’… This is the second ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā kammaṁ kataṁ hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho kammaṁ akāsiṁ, kammaṁ kho panāhaṁ karonto nāsakkhiṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasikātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… idaṁ dutiyaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶63] Furthermore, a mendicant has to go on a journey. They think: ‘I have to go on a journey. While walking it’s not easy to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’… This is the third ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gantabbo hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṁ kho pana me gacchantena na sukaraṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasikātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… idaṁ tatiyaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶64] Furthermore, a mendicant has gone on a journey. They think: ‘I’ve gone on a journey. While I was walking I wasn’t able to focus on the instructions of the Buddhas. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’… This is the fourth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhunā maggo gato hoti. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho maggaṁ agamāsiṁ, maggaṁ kho panāhaṁ gacchanto nāsakkhiṁ buddhānaṁ sāsanaṁ manasikātuṁ, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… idaṁ catutthaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶65] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, but they didn’t get to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, but I didn’t get to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is light and fit for work. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’… This is the fifth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ, tassa me kāyo lahuko kammañño, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… idaṁ pañcamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶66] Furthermore, a mendicant has wandered for alms, and they got to fill up on as much food as they like, coarse or fine. They think: ‘I’ve wandered for alms, and I got to fill up on as much food as I like, coarse or fine. My body is strong and fit for work. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’… This is the sixth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gāmaṁ vā nigamaṁ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṁ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṁ pāripūriṁ. Tassa me kāyo balavā kammañño, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶67] Furthermore, a mendicant feels a little sick. They think: ‘I feel a little sick. It’s possible this illness will worsen. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy.’… This is the seventh ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhuno uppanno hoti appamattako ābādho. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘uppanno kho me ayaṁ appamattako ābādho ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ me ābādho pavaḍḍheyya, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi …pe… idaṁ sattamaṁ ārambhavatthu.
[¶68] Furthermore, a mendicant has recently recovered from illness. They think: ‘I’ve recently recovered from illness. It’s possible the illness will come back. I’d better preemptively rouse up energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized.’ They rouse energy for attaining the unattained, achieving the unachieved, and realizing the unrealized. This is the eighth ground for arousing energy.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu gilānā vuṭṭhito hoti aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā. Tassa evaṁ hoti: ‘ahaṁ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, ṭhānaṁ kho panetaṁ vijjati, yaṁ me ābādho paccudāvatteyya, handāhaṁ vīriyaṁ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’ti. So vīriyaṁ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ ārambhavatthu. Ime aṭṭha dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶69] What eight things are hard to comprehend? Eight lost opportunities for spiritual practice. Firstly, a Realized One has arisen in the world. He teaches the Dhamma leading to peace, extinguishment, awakening, as proclaimed by the Holy One. But that individual has been reborn in hell. This is the first lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Aṭṭha akkhaṇā asamayā brahmacariyavāsāya. Idhāvuso, tathāgato ca loke uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito. Ayañca puggalo nirayaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ paṭhamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶70] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in the animal realm. This is the second lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, tathāgato ca loke uppanno hoti arahaṁ sammāsambuddho, dhammo ca desiyati opasamiko parinibbāniko sambodhagāmī sugatappavedito. Ayañca puggalo tiracchānayoniṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ dutiyo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶71] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in the ghost realm. This is the third lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… pettivisayaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ tatiyo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶72] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in one of the long-lived orders of gods. This is the fourth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… aññataraṁ dīghāyukaṁ devanikāyaṁ upapanno hoti. Ayaṁ catuttho akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶73] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … But that individual has been reborn in the borderlands, among uneducated foreigners, where monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen do not go. This is the fifth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… paccantimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti milakkhesu aviññātāresu, yattha natthi gati bhikkhūnaṁ bhikkhunīnaṁ upāsakānaṁ upāsikānaṁ. Ayaṁ pañcamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶74] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … And an individual is reborn in a central country. But they have wrong view and distorted perspective: ‘There’s no meaning in giving, sacrifice, or offerings. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds. There’s no afterlife. There’s no such thing as mother and father, or beings that are reborn spontaneously. And there’s no ascetic or brahmin who is rightly comported and rightly practiced, and who describes the afterlife after realizing it with their own insight.’ This is the sixth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… ayañca puggalo majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti, so ca hoti micchādiṭṭhiko viparītadassano: ‘natthi dinnaṁ, natthi yiṭṭhaṁ, natthi hutaṁ, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko, natthi ayaṁ loko, natthi paro loko, natthi mātā, natthi pitā, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā ye imañca lokaṁ parañca lokaṁ sayaṁ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
## 70. DN 34 · Up to Ten · part 3
Source: https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/70/ · cite a paragraph as https://scriptura.si/works/pali-digha-nikaya/70/#p-N
[¶0] Furthermore, a Realized One has arisen in the world … And an individual is reborn in a central country. But they’re witless, dull, idiotic, and unable to distinguish what is well said from what is poorly said. This is the seventh lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… ayañca puggalo majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti, so ca hoti duppañño jaḷo eḷamūgo, nappaṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitānamatthamaññātuṁ. Ayaṁ sattamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya.
[¶1] Furthermore, a Realized One has not arisen in the world … so there is no teaching of the Dhamma leading to peace, extinguishment, awakening, as proclaimed by the Holy One. But an individual is reborn in a central country. And they’re wise, bright, clever, and able to distinguish what is well said from what is poorly said. This is the eighth lost opportunity for spiritual practice.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ …pe… ayañca puggalo majjhimesu janapadesu paccājāto hoti, so ca hoti paññavā ajaḷo aneḷamūgo, paṭibalo subhāsitadubbhāsitānamatthamaññātuṁ. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo akkhaṇo asamayo brahmacariyavāsāya. Ime aṭṭha dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶2] What eight things should be produced? Eight thoughts of a great man. ‘This teaching is for those of few wishes, not those of many wishes. It’s for the contented, not those who lack contentment. It’s for the secluded, not those who enjoy company. It’s for the energetic, not the lazy. It’s for the mindful, not the unmindful. It’s for those with immersion, not those without immersion. It’s for the wise, not the witless. This teaching is for those who don’t enjoy proliferating, not for those who enjoy proliferating.’
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā uppādetabbā? Aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā— appicchassāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo mahicchassa. Santuṭṭhassāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo asantuṭṭhassa. Pavivittassāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo saṅgaṇikārāmassa. Āraddhavīriyassāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo kusītassa. Upaṭṭhitasatissāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo muṭṭhassatissa. Samāhitassāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo asamāhitassa. Paññavato ayaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo duppaññassa. Nippapañcassāyaṁ dhammo, nāyaṁ dhammo papañcārāmassāti ime aṭṭha dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶3] What eight things should be directly known? Eight dimensions of mastery. Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the first dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā abhiññeyyā? Aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni— ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti— evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ paṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶4] Perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the second dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti— evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ dutiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶5] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limited, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the third dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti— evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ tatiyaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶6] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally, limitless, both pretty and ugly. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fourth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti— evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ catutthaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶7] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are blue, with blue color and blue appearance. They’re like a flax flower that’s blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, blue, with blue color and blue appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the fifth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ nīlaṁ nīlavaṇṇaṁ nīlanidassanaṁ nīlanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ pañcamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶8] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. They’re like a champak flower that’s yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, yellow, with yellow color and yellow appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the sixth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ pītaṁ pītavaṇṇaṁ pītanidassanaṁ pītanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ chaṭṭhaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶9] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are red, with red color and red appearance. They’re like a scarlet mallow flower that’s red, with red color and red appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, red, with red color and red appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the seventh dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ lohitakaṁ lohitakavaṇṇaṁ lohitakanidassanaṁ lohitakanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ sattamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ.
[¶10] Not perceiving form internally, someone sees forms externally that are white, with white color and white appearance. They’re like the morning star that’s white, with white color and white appearance. Or a cloth from Varanasi that’s smoothed on both sides, white, with white color and white appearance. Mastering them, they perceive: ‘I know and see.’ This is the eighth dimension of mastery.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathā vā pana taṁ vatthaṁ bārāṇaseyyakaṁ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṁ odātaṁ odātavaṇṇaṁ odātanidassanaṁ odātanibhāsaṁ; evameva ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṁsaññī hoti. Idaṁ aṭṭhamaṁ abhibhāyatanaṁ. Ime aṭṭha dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶11] What eight things should be realized? Eight liberations. Having physical form, they see forms. This is the first liberation.
> Pali: Katame aṭṭha dhammā sacchikātabbā? Aṭṭha vimokkhā— rūpī rūpāni passati. Ayaṁ paṭhamo vimokkho.
[¶12] Not perceiving physical form internally, someone see forms externally. This is the second liberation.
> Pali: Ajjhattaṁ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati. Ayaṁ dutiyo vimokkho.
[¶13] They’re focused only on beauty. This is the third liberation.
> Pali: Subhanteva adhimutto hoti. Ayaṁ tatiyo vimokkho.
[¶14] Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. This is the fourth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ catuttho vimokkho.
[¶15] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the fifth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ pañcamo vimokkho.
[¶16] Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. This is the sixth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho vimokkho.
[¶17] Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the seventh liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ sattamo vimokkho.
[¶18] Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the eighth liberation.
> Pali: Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo vimokkho. Ime aṭṭha dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶19] So these eighty things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime asīti dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶20] 9. Groups of Nine
> Pali: 9. Nava dhammā
[¶21] Nine things are helpful, etc.
> Pali: Nava dhammā bahukārā …pe… nava dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶22] What nine things are helpful? Nine things rooted in rational application of mind. When you apply the mind rationally, joy springs up. When you’re joyful, rapture springs up. When the mind is full of rapture, the body becomes tranquil. When the body is tranquil, you feel bliss. And when you’re blissful, the mind becomes immersed. When your mind is immersed, you truly know and see. When you truly know and see, you grow disillusioned. Being disillusioned, desire fades away. When desire fades away you’re freed.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā bahukārā? Nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, yonisomanasikaroto pāmojjaṁ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati, samāhite citte yathābhūtaṁ jānāti passati, yathābhūtaṁ jānaṁ passaṁ nibbindati, nibbindaṁ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati. Ime nava dhammā bahukārā.
[¶23] What nine things should be developed? Nine factors of trying to be pure. The factors of trying to be pure in ethics, mind, view, overcoming doubt, knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path, knowledge and vision of the practice, knowledge and vision, wisdom, and freedom.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā bhāvetabbā? Nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni— sīlavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, cittavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, diṭṭhivisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, paññāvisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ, vimuttivisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṁ. Ime nava dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶24] What nine things should be completely understood? Nine abodes of sentient beings. There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and diverse in perception, such as human beings, some gods, and some beings in the underworld. This is the first abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā pariññeyyā? Nava sattāvāsā— santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṁ paṭhamo sattāvāso.
[¶25] There are sentient beings that are diverse in body and unified in perception, such as the gods reborn in the Divinity’s host through the first absorption. This is the second abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṁ dutiyo sattāvāso.
[¶26] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and diverse in perception, such as the gods of sublime luminosity. This is the third abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṁ tatiyo sattāvāso.
[¶27] There are sentient beings that are unified in body and unified in perception, such as the gods of universal beauty. This is the fourth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṁ catuttho sattāvāso.
[¶28] There are sentient beings that are non-percipient and do not experience anything, such as the gods who are non-percipient beings. This is the fifth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā asaññino appaṭisaṁvedino, seyyathāpi devā asaññasattā. Ayaṁ pañcamo sattāvāso.
[¶29] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond perceptions of form. With the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite space. This is the sixth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṁ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṁ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ chaṭṭho sattāvāso.
[¶30] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite space. Aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they have been reborn in the dimension of infinite consciousness. This is the seventh abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ sattamo sattāvāso.
[¶31] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness. Aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they have been reborn in the dimension of nothingness. This is the eighth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ aṭṭhamo sattāvāso.
[¶32] There are sentient beings that have gone totally beyond the dimension of nothingness. They have been reborn in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. This is the ninth abode of sentient beings.
> Pali: Santāvuso, sattā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṁ navamo sattāvāso.
[¶33] > Pali: Ime nava dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶34] What nine things should be given up? Nine things rooted in craving. Craving gives rise to searching. Searching gives rise to gaining material things. Gaining material things gives rise to evaluation. Evaluation gives rise to desire and lust. Desire and lust gives rise to attachment. Attachment gives rise to ownership. Ownership gives rise to stinginess. Stinginess gives rise to safeguarding. Owing to safeguarding, many bad, unskillful things come to be: taking up the rod and the sword, quarrels, arguments, disputes, accusations, backbiting, and lies.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā pahātabbā? Nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā— taṇhaṁ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṁ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṁ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṁ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṁ paṭicca ajjhosānaṁ, ajjhosānaṁ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṁ paṭicca macchariyaṁ, macchariyaṁ paṭicca ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṁ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṁtuvaṁpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti. Ime nava dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶35] What nine things make things worse? Nine grounds for resentment. Thinking: ‘They did wrong to me,’ you harbor resentment. Thinking: ‘They are doing wrong to me’ … ‘They will do wrong to me’ … ‘They did wrong by someone I love’ … ‘They are doing wrong by someone I love’ … ‘They will do wrong by someone I love’ … ‘They helped someone I dislike’ … ‘They are helping someone I dislike’ … Thinking: ‘They will help someone I dislike,’ you harbor resentment.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Nava āghātavatthūni: ‘anatthaṁ me acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati, ‘anatthaṁ me caratī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati, ‘anatthaṁ me carissatī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati; ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṁ acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… ‘anatthaṁ caratī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… ‘anatthaṁ carissatī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati; ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṁ acarī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… ‘atthaṁ caratī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati …pe… ‘atthaṁ carissatī’ti āghātaṁ bandhati. Ime nava dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶36] What nine things lead to distinction? Nine ways to get rid of resentment. Thinking: ‘They did wrong to me, but what can I possibly do?’ you get rid of resentment. Thinking: ‘They are doing wrong to me …’ … ‘They will do wrong to me …’ … ‘They did wrong by someone I love …’ … ‘They are doing wrong by someone I love …’ … ‘They will do wrong by someone I love …’ … ‘They helped someone I dislike …’ … ‘They are helping someone I dislike …’ … Thinking: ‘They will help someone I dislike, but what can I possibly do?’ you get rid of resentment.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Nava āghātapaṭivinayā: ‘anatthaṁ me acari, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘anatthaṁ me carati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘anatthaṁ me carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘piyassa me manāpassa anatthaṁ acari …pe… anatthaṁ carati …pe… anatthaṁ carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti; ‘appiyassa me amanāpassa atthaṁ acari …pe… atthaṁ carati …pe… atthaṁ carissati, taṁ kutettha labbhā’ti āghātaṁ paṭivineti. Ime nava dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶37] What nine things are hard to comprehend? Nine kinds of diversity. Diversity of elements gives rise to diversity of contacts. Diversity of contacts gives rise to diversity of feelings. Diversity of feelings gives rise to diversity of perceptions. Diversity of perceptions gives rise to diversity of thoughts. Diversity of thoughts gives rise to diversity of desires. Diversity of desires gives rise to diversity of passions. Diversity of passions gives rise to diversity of searches. Diversity of searches gives rise to diversity of gains.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Nava nānattā— dhātunānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati phassanānattaṁ, phassanānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati vedanānānattaṁ, vedanānānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saññānānattaṁ, saññānānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati saṅkappanānattaṁ, saṅkappanānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati chandanānattaṁ, chandanānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati pariḷāhanānattaṁ, pariḷāhanānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati pariyesanānānattaṁ, pariyesanānānattaṁ paṭicca uppajjati lābhanānattaṁ (…). Ime nava dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶38] What nine things should be produced? Nine perceptions: the perceptions of ugliness, death, repulsiveness in food, dissatisfaction with the whole world, impermanence, suffering in impermanence, not-self in suffering, giving up, and fading away.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā uppādetabbā? Nava saññā— asubhasaññā, maraṇasaññā, āhāre paṭikūlasaññā, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññā, aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā. Ime nava dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶39] What nine things should be directly known? Nine progressive meditations. A mendicant, quite secluded from sensual pleasures, secluded from unskillful qualities, enters and remains in the first absorption … second absorption … third absorption … fourth absorption. Going totally beyond perceptions of form, with the disappearance of perceptions of impingement, not focusing on perceptions of diversity, aware that ‘space is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite space. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite space, aware that ‘consciousness is infinite’, they enter and remain in the dimension of infinite consciousness. Going totally beyond the dimension of infinite consciousness, aware that ‘there is nothing at all’, they enter and remain in the dimension of nothingness. Going totally beyond the dimension of nothingness, they enter and remain in the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception. Going totally beyond the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, they enter and remain in the cessation of perception and feeling.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā abhiññeyyā? Nava anupubbavihārā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṁ savicāraṁ vivekajaṁ pītisukhaṁ paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṁ vūpasamā …pe… dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā …pe… tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā …pe… catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṁ samatikkamā …pe… ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘anantaṁ viññāṇan’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ upasampajja viharati. Ime nava dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶40] What nine things should be realized? Nine progressive cessations. For someone who has attained the first absorption, sensual perceptions have ceased. For someone who has attained the second absorption, the placing of the mind and keeping it connected have ceased. For someone who has attained the third absorption, rapture has ceased. For someone who has attained the fourth absorption, breathing has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of infinite space, the perception of form has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of infinite consciousness, the perception of the dimension of infinite space has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of nothingness, the perception of the dimension of infinite consciousness has ceased. For someone who has attained the dimension of neither perception nor non-perception, the perception of the dimension of nothingness has ceased. For someone who has attained the cessation of perception and feeling, perception and feeling have ceased.
> Pali: Katame nava dhammā sacchikātabbā? Nava anupubbanirodhā— paṭhamaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa kāmasaññā niruddhā hoti, dutiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā niruddhā honti, tatiyaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa pīti niruddhā hoti, catutthaṁ jhānaṁ samāpannassa assāsapassāssā niruddhā honti, ākāsānañcāyatanaṁ samāpannassa rūpasaññā niruddhā hoti, viññāṇañcāyatanaṁ samāpannassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, ākiñcaññāyatanaṁ samāpannassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṁ samāpannassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, saññāvedayitanirodhaṁ samāpannassa saññā ca vedanā ca niruddhā honti. Ime nava dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶41] So these ninety things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.
> Pali: Iti ime navuti dhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā.
[¶42] 10. Groups of Ten
> Pali: 10. Dasa dhammā
[¶43] Ten things are helpful, ten things should be developed, ten things should be completely understood, ten things should be given up, ten things make things worse, ten things lead to distinction, ten things are hard to comprehend, ten things should be produced, ten things should be directly known, ten things should be realized.
> Pali: Dasa dhammā bahukārā …pe… dasa dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶44] What ten things are helpful? Ten qualities that serve as protector. First, a mendicant is ethical, restrained in the monastic code, conducting themselves well and resorting for alms in suitable places. Seeing danger in the slightest fault, they keep the rules they’ve undertaken. This is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā bahukārā? Dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu sīlavā hoti …pe… sikkhati sikkhāpadesu. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶45] Furthermore, a mendicant is learned. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto …pe… diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu bahussuto …pe… ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶46] Furthermore, a mendicant has good friends, companions, and associates. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hoti kalyāṇasahāyo kalyāṇasampavaṅko. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… kalyāṇasampavaṅko. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶47] Furthermore, a mendicant is easy to admonish, having qualities that make them easy to admonish. They’re patient, and take instruction respectfully. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu suvaco hoti sovacassakaraṇehi dhammehi samannāgato, khamo padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaniṁ. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… anusāsaniṁ. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶48] Furthermore, a mendicant is deft and tireless in a diverse spectrum of duties for their spiritual companions, understanding how to go about things in order to complete and organize the work. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṁ uccāvacāni kiṅkaraṇīyāni tattha dakkho hoti analaso tatrupāyāya vīmaṁsāya samannāgato, alaṁ kātuṁ, alaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… alaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶49] Furthermore, a mendicant loves the teachings and is a delight to converse with, being full of joy in the teaching and training. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu dhammakāmo hoti piyasamudāhāro abhidhamme abhivinaye uḷārapāmojjo. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… uḷārapāmojjo. Ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶50] Furthermore, a mendicant is content with any kind of robes, almsfood, lodgings, and medicines and supplies for the sick. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu santuṭṭho hoti itarītarehi cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārehi. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶51] Furthermore, a mendicant is energetic. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu āraddhavīriyo viharati …pe… kusalesu dhammesu. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶52] Furthermore, a mendicant is mindful. They have utmost mindfulness and alertness, and can remember and recall what was said and done long ago. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu satimā hoti, paramena satinepakkena samannāgato, cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi saritā anussaritā. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo.
[¶53] Furthermore, a mendicant is wise. They have the wisdom of arising and passing away which is noble, penetrative, and leads to the complete ending of suffering. This too is a quality that serves as protector.
> Pali: Puna caparaṁ, āvuso, bhikkhu paññavā hoti udayatthagāminiyā paññāya samannāgato, ariyāya nibbedhikāya sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā. Yaṁpāvuso, bhikkhu …pe… ayampi dhammo nāthakaraṇo. Ime dasa dhammā bahukārā.
[¶54] What ten things should be developed? Ten universal dimensions of meditation. Someone perceives the meditation on universal earth above, below, across, undivided and limitless. They perceive the meditation on universal water … the meditation on universal fire … the meditation on universal air … the meditation on universal blue … the meditation on universal yellow … the meditation on universal red … the meditation on universal white … the meditation on universal space … They perceive the meditation on universal consciousness above, below, across, undivided and limitless.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā bhāvetabbā? Dasa kasiṇāyatanāni— pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ. Āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti …pe… tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti … vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti … nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti … pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti … lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti … odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti … ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti … viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ advayaṁ appamāṇaṁ. Ime dasa dhammā bhāvetabbā.
[¶55] What ten things should be completely understood? Ten sense fields: eye and sights, ear and sounds, nose and smells, tongue and tastes, body and touches.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā pariññeyyā? Dasāyatanāni— cakkhāyatanaṁ, rūpāyatanaṁ, sotāyatanaṁ, saddāyatanaṁ, ghānāyatanaṁ, gandhāyatanaṁ, jivhāyatanaṁ, rasāyatanaṁ, kāyāyatanaṁ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṁ. Ime dasa dhammā pariññeyyā.
[¶56] What ten things should be given up? Ten wrong ways: wrong view, wrong purpose, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, wrong immersion, wrong knowledge, and wrong freedom.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā pahātabbā? Dasa micchattā— micchādiṭṭhi, micchāsaṅkappo, micchāvācā, micchākammanto, micchāājīvo, micchāvāyāmo, micchāsati, micchāsamādhi, micchāñāṇaṁ, micchāvimutti. Ime dasa dhammā pahātabbā.
[¶57] What ten things make things worse? Ten ways of doing unskillful deeds: killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; covetousness, ill will, and wrong view.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā hānabhāgiyā? Dasa akusalakammapathā— pāṇātipāto, adinnādānaṁ, kāmesumicchācāro, musāvādo, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpo, abhijjhā, byāpādo, micchādiṭṭhi. Ime dasa dhammā hānabhāgiyā.
[¶58] What ten things lead to distinction? Ten ways of doing skillful deeds: refraining from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; refraining from speech that’s false, divisive, harsh, or nonsensical; contentment, good will, and right view.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā visesabhāgiyā? Dasa kusalakammapathā— pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī, anabhijjhā, abyāpādo, sammādiṭṭhi. Ime dasa dhammā visesabhāgiyā.
[¶59] What ten things are hard to comprehend? Ten abodes of the noble ones. A mendicant has given up five factors, possesses six factors, has a single guard, has four supports, has cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth, has totally given up searching, has unsullied intentions, has stilled the physical process, and is well freed in mind and well freed by wisdom.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā duppaṭivijjhā? Dasa ariyavāsā— idhāvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti, chaḷaṅgasamannāgato, ekārakkho, caturāpasseno, paṇunnapaccekasacco, samavayasaṭṭhesano, anāvilasaṅkappo, passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro, suvimuttacitto, suvimuttapañño.
[¶60] And how has a mendicant given up five factors? It’s when a mendicant has given up sensual desire, ill will, dullness and drowsiness, restlessness and remorse, and doubt. That’s how a mendicant has given up five factors.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṁ pahīnaṁ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti.
[¶61] And how does a mendicant possess six factors? A mendicant, seeing a sight with their eyes, is neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware. Hearing a sound with their ears … Smelling an odor with their nose … Tasting a flavor with their tongue …
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṁ sutvā …pe… ghānena gandhaṁ ghāyitvā … jivhāya rasaṁ sāyitvā …
[¶62] Encountering a touch with their body … Knowing an idea with their mind, they’re neither happy nor sad. They remain equanimous, mindful and aware. That’s how a mendicant possesses six factors.
> Pali: kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā … manasā dhammaṁ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti.
[¶63] And how does a mendicant have a single guard? It’s when a mendicant’s heart is guarded by mindfulness. That’s how a mendicant has a single guard.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti.
[¶64] And how does a mendicant have four supports? After appraisal, a mendicant uses some things, endures some things, avoids some things, and dispels some things. That’s how a mendicant has four supports.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṁ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṁ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṁ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṁ vinodeti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti.
[¶65] And how has a mendicant cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth? Different ascetics and brahmins have different idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth. A mendicant has cast out, cast aside, thrown out, discarded, let go of, given up, and relinquished all these. That’s how a mendicant has cast aside idiosyncratic interpretations of the truth.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu paṇunnapaccekasacco hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ puthupaccekasaccāni, sabbāni tāni nunnāni honti paṇunnāni cattāni vantāni muttāni pahīnāni paṭinissaṭṭhāni. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu paṇunnapaccekasacco hoti.
[¶66] And how has a mendicant totally given up searching? It’s when they’ve given up searching for sensual pleasures, for continued existence, and for a spiritual path. That’s how a mendicant has totally given up searching.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmesanā pahīnā hoti, bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti.
[¶67] And how does a mendicant have unsullied intentions? It’s when they’ve given up sensual, malicious, and cruel intentions. That’s how a mendicant has unsullied intentions.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappā hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno kāmasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, byāpādasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, vihiṁsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti.
[¶68] And how has a mendicant stilled the physical process? With the giving up of pleasure and pain and the disappearance of former happiness and sadness, they enter and remain in the fourth absorption, without pleasure or pain, with pure equanimity and mindfulness. That’s how a mendicant has stilled the physical process.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṁ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṁ catutthaṁ jhānaṁ upasampajja viharati. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti.
[¶69] And how is a mendicant well freed in mind? It’s when a mendicant’s mind is freed from greed, hate, and delusion. That’s how a mendicant is well freed in mind.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno rāgā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti, dosā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti, mohā cittaṁ vimuttaṁ hoti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti.
[¶70] And how is a mendicant well freed by wisdom? It’s when a mendicant understands: ‘I’ve given up greed, hate, and delusion, cut them off at the root, made them like a palm stump, obliterated them, so they’re unable to arise in the future.’ That’s how a mendicant’s mind is well freed by wisdom.
> Pali: Kathañcāvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ‘rāgo me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṅkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. ‘Doso me pahīno …pe… āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. ‘Moho me pahīno …pe… āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. Evaṁ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti. Ime dasa dhammā duppaṭivijjhā.
[¶71] What ten things should be produced? Ten perceptions: the perceptions of ugliness, death, repulsiveness in food, dissatisfaction with the whole world, impermanence, suffering in impermanence, not-self in suffering, giving up, fading away, and cessation.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā uppādetabbā? Dasa saññā— asubhasaññā, maraṇasaññā, āhāre paṭikūlasaññā, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññā, aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā. Ime dasa dhammā uppādetabbā.
[¶72] What ten things should be directly known? Ten grounds for wearing away. For one of right view, wrong view is worn away. And the many bad, unskillful qualities that arise because of wrong view are worn away. For one of right intention, wrong intention is worn away. … For one of right speech, wrong speech is worn away. … For one of right action, wrong action is worn away. … For one of right livelihood, wrong livelihood is worn away. … For one of right effort, wrong effort is worn away. … For one of right mindfulness, wrong mindfulness is worn away. … For one of right immersion, wrong immersion is worn away. … For one of right knowledge, wrong knowledge is worn away. … For one of right freedom, wrong freedom is worn away. And the many bad, unskillful qualities that arise because of wrong freedom are worn away.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā abhiññeyyā? Dasa nijjaravatthūni— sammādiṭṭhissa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti. Sammāsaṅkappassa micchāsaṅkappo …pe… sammāvācassa micchāvācā … sammākammantassa micchākammanto … sammāājīvassa micchāājīvo … sammāvāyāmassa micchāvāyāmo … sammāsatissa micchāsati … sammāsamādhissa micchāsamādhi … sammāñāṇassa micchāñāṇaṁ nijjiṇṇaṁ hoti. Sammāvimuttissa micchāvimutti nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvimuttipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti. Ime dasa dhammā abhiññeyyā.
[¶73] What ten things should be realized? Ten qualities of an adept: an adept’s right view, right purpose, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right immersion, right knowledge, and right freedom.
> Pali: Katame dasa dhammā sacchikātabbā? Dasa asekkhā dhammā— asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṁ sammāñāṇaṁ, asekkhā sammāvimutti. Ime dasa dhammā sacchikātabbā.
[¶74] So these hundred things that are true, real, and accurate, not unreal, not otherwise were rightly understood by the Realized One.” That is what Venerable Sāriputta said. Satisfied, the mendicants approved what Sāriputta said.
> Pali: Iti ime satadhammā bhūtā tacchā tathā avitathā anaññathā sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā”ti. Idamavocāyasmā sāriputto. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṁ abhinandunti.
[¶75] > Pali: Dasuttarasuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ ekādasamaṁ.
[¶76] > Pali: Pāthikavaggo niṭṭhito.
[¶77] > Pali: Tassuddānaṁ
[¶78] > Pali: Pāthiko ca udumbaraṁ,
cakkavatti aggaññakaṁ;
Sampasādanapāsādaṁ,
mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṁ.
[¶79] > Pali: Siṅgālāṭānāṭiyakaṁ,
saṅgīti ca dasuttaraṁ;
Ekādasahi suttehi,
pāthikavaggoti vuccati.
[¶80] > Pali: Pāthikavaggapāḷi niṭṭhitā.
[¶81] > Pali: Tīhi vaggehi paṭimaṇḍito sakalo
[¶82] The Long Discourses are complete.
> Pali: dīghanikāyo samatto.